Aficio CL7100 Aficio CL7100

 

 

 CD ROM Annuaire d'Entreprises France prospect (avec ou sans emails) : REMISE DE 10 % Avec le code réduction AUDEN872

10% de réduction sur vos envois d'emailing --> CLIQUEZ ICI

Retour à l'accueil, cliquez ici

 

  • Model: Aficio CL7100
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Bring Color High Volume Printing Into Your Office.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL7100

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/

 

 

 

Manuals for This Printer : Paper Guide : Paper : CD-ROM : Manuals for Administrators : Manuals for Client Users 1 Manuals Provided Printed Manuals Manuals for This Printer Setup Guide Maintenance Guide CD-ROM Manuals Manuals for This Printer Administrator Reference Printer Client Reference PostScript 3 Supplement Note If the manuals do not open automatically, double-click the following file on the CD-ROM. Windows MANUAL.EXE Macintosh manual Printed manuals are also included as PDF files on the CD-ROM. Windows / Macintosh [Language] setup mainte G106-7516Manuals for This Printer Preparing the Printer Printer and Option Installation Setup Guide Provides information about setting up and its options. ? Guide to Printer Parts ? Setting Up ? Installing Options Network Printer Configuration Setup Guide Provides basic information about setting up and using the printer in a network environment. ? Connecting the Printer ? Configuring the Printer for the Network Using the Control Panel ? Installing the Printer Driver 2 Administrator Reference Provides information about setting up the printer as a print server and making printer settings using the control panel. ? Setting Up as a Print Server on Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 and Windows NT 4.0 ? Setting Up as a Print Server on NetWare ? Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and a Web Image Monitor ? Making Printer Settings Using the Control PanelManuals for This Printer Preparing the Client Computer Printing from Windows, Macintosh, or NetWare Printer Client Reference Provides information about setting up and using the printer in a Windows, Macintosh, or NetWare environment, and also about software and utilities included on the CD-ROM. ? Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0 ? Using the Printer in a Macintosh or NetWare Environment ? Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM ? Setting up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job PostScript 3 Supplement Provides information about terminology and features of the PostScript 3 Printer Driver. ? Setting up Options ? Using Printer Utility for Mac Maintenance Maintenance and Troubleshooting Maintenance Guide Provides information about paper, dealing with error messages, replacing consumables, cleaning, and adjusting. ? Replacing Consumables and Maintenace Kit ? Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer ? Paper and Other Media ? Troubleshooting 3Icons Click to go to the top page where you can select other manuals. Click to go to the next page. Click to go to the viewed manual's table of contents. Note To open multiple manuals at the same time, follow the procedure below: On the [File] menu, point to [Preferences] , and then click [General...]. Clear the [Open Cross-Doc Links in Same Window] check box in the [General Preference] dialog box that appears. G106-7516 Copyright © 2004 EN USA GB GB AE AE Manuals for This Printer 4Setup Guide Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, please be sure to read the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine. Guide to Printer Parts Setting Up Preparing to Print Installing OptionsIntroduction This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine. To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Do not make copies of any item for which copying is prohibited by law. Copying the following items is normally prohibited by local law: Bank bills, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses. Power Source 120V, 60Hz, 12A or more Please be sure to connect the power cable to a power source as above. Laser Safety: This machine is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The machine contains 7 milliwatt, 645 - 660 nanometer wavelength, AlGaInp Laser Diode. Direct (or indirect reflected) eye contact with the laser beam might cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator. Caution: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than that mentioned in this manual. This machine contains a laser beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause permanent eye damage. Important Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine. Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version. For good copy quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner from the supplier. The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products. i Trademarks Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. IPS-PRINT Printer Language Emulation Copyright© 1999-2000 Oak Technology, Inc., All rights reserved. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. Bluetooth is a Trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. (Special Interest Group) and licensed to RICOH Company Limited. The Bluetooth Trademarks are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. USA Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks. The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows: • The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95. • The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98. • The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me). • The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional • The product names of Windows® XP are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition • The product names of Windows Server TM 2003 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Web Edition • The product names of Windows NT ® 4.0 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0 Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0 Notes: Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine. Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.ii Safety Information When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be followed. Safety During Operation In this manual, the following important symbols are used: R WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in death or serious injury. R CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.iii R WARNING: • Only connected the machine to the power source described on the inside front cover of this manual. • Avoid multi-wiring. • Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend it more than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire. • Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet. Otherwise, an electric shock might occur. • Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily. • Do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual. Some parts of the machine are at a high voltage and could give you an electric shock. Also, if the machine has laser systems, direct (or indirect) reflected eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage. When the machine needs to be checked, adjusted, or repaired, contact your service representative. • Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine. There is a risk of fire, electric shock, explosion or loss of sight. If the machine has laser system, there is a risk of serious eye damage. • If the machine looks damaged or breaks down, smoke is coming out, there is a strange smell or anything looks unusual, immediately turn off the operation and main power switches then unplug the power cord from the wall. Do not continue using the machine in this condition. Contact your service representative. • If metal, liquid or foreign matter falls into the machine, turn off the operation and main power switches, and unplug the main power cord. Contact your service representative. Do not keep using the machine with a fault or defect. • Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water (e.g. vases, flowerpots, glasses) on the machine. If the contents fall inside the machine, a fire or electric shock could occur. • Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of the used toner containers according to local regulations for plastics. • Confirm that the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible, so that in event of an emergency, it can be unplugged easily. • To avoid hazardous electric shock or laser radiation exposure, do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual.iv R CAUTION: • Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. A fire or an electric shock might occur. • Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, it could cause injury. • After you move the machine, fix it with the caster fixture. Otherwise, the machine might move or come down to cause a personal injury. • When you move the machine, unplug the power code from the wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock. • When machine will not be used for a long time, unplug the power code. • When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock. • If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a continuous air turnover. • Do not reuse stapled paper. Do not use aluminum foil, carbon-containing paper or other conductive paper. Otherwise, a fire might occur. • When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot. • This machine has been tested for safety using this suppliers parts and consumables. We recommend you only use these specified supplies. • Touch only the handles, no other parts. The fuser oil unit gets very hot and will burn your hands if you touch it. • Do not eat or swallow toner. • Keep toner (used or unused) and toner containers out of reach of children. • Deliver to collection point for waste products. Do not be disposed of via domestic refuse collection. • The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts with a label indicating a “hot surface”. Touching a “hot surface” could result in a burn (v: means “hot surface”). • The User Account Enhance Unit installed on the controller has a IC19 lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the User Account Enhance Unit only with the indicated one. • Do not place the user account enhance unit near or into fire, as the lithium battery inside this machine will explode and cause a burn. • Keep the fuser oil unit away from flames. There is a risk of fire or burns. • Keep the waste oil bottle away from flames. There is a risk of fire or burns.v Note ? Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer or an appropriate collection site. ? An lithium battery is contained inside the user account enhance unit. If you are disposing of the machine personally, do it according to local regulations. ? When you use this machine for a long time in a confined space without good ventilation, you may detect an odd smell. To keep the workplace comfortable, we recommend that you keep it well ventilated. Important ? Rating voltage of the connector for options: Max. DC 24 V.vi Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels This machine has labels for RWARNING and RCAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated. ABT065S1vii ENERGY STAR Program Low-power Mode (Energy Saver mode) This printer automatically lowers its power consumption 60 minutes after the last operation has been completed. To exit Low-power (Energy Saver) mode, press any key on the control panel. For details about how to configure Energy Saver mode, see “Making Printer Settings using the Control Panel”, Administrator Reference as a PDF file on the CD-ROM. Specifications As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency. The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming. When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model. This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode. Energy Saver mode Power Consumption 15 W or less Default Time 60 minutes Recovery Time 99 seconds or lessviii How to Read This Manual Symbols The following set of symbols is used in this manual. R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section. R CAUTION: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in minor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section. * The statements above are notes for your safety. Important If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicates information or preparations required prior to operating. Note This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after abnormal operation. Limitation This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together, or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used. Reference This symbol indicates a reference. [ ] Keys that appear on the machine's display panel. [ ] Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display. { } Keys built into the machine's control panel. { } Keys on the computer's keyboard.ix TABLE OF CONTENTS Trademarks..............................................................................................................i Safety Information .................................................................................................ii Safety During Operation............................................................................................. ii Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels .............................................vi ENERGY STAR Program .....................................................................................vii How to Read This Manual ..................................................................................viii 1. Guide to Printer Parts Exterior: Front View...............................................................................................1 Exterior: Rear View................................................................................................3 Interior.....................................................................................................................4 Control Panel..........................................................................................................5 2. Setting Up Where to Put the Printer........................................................................................7 Checking the Contents of the Box .....................................................................10 Unpacking.............................................................................................................12 Installing the Fuser Oil Unit ................................................................................14 Installing the Toner Cartridge.............................................................................16 Loading Paper ......................................................................................................18 Loading Paper in Tray 1...........................................................................................18 Loading Paper in Tray 2 and the Optional Paper Feed Unit ....................................18 2000-sheet Large Capacity Tray..............................................................................20 Turning the Power On .........................................................................................21 Selecting the Display Language.........................................................................22 Test Printing.........................................................................................................23 3. Preparing to Print Connecting the Printer ........................................................................................25 Connecting to a Network..........................................................................................25 Connecting the Cable to the USB 2.0 Interface Port................................................26 Configuring the Printer for the Network using the Control Panel ..................27 Installing the Printer Driver.................................................................................30 4. Installing Options Installing Options.................................................................................................33 Using the Screwdriver .........................................................................................37 Paper Feed Unit....................................................................................................38 Installing the Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 × 1) ................................................38 Installing the Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 × 2) ................................................41 Installing the Paper Bank Type 7100 (2000-sheet Large Capacity Tray) ................43 Memory Unit (SDRAM Module) ...........................................................................46x IEEE 1394 Interface Board ..................................................................................48 Connecting the Cable to the IEEE 1394 Interface board .........................................49 IEEE 1394 Configuration..........................................................................................50 IEEE 1284 Interface Board ..................................................................................53 Parallel Connection ..................................................................................................54 IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit.................................................................................55 IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) Configuration ............................................................57 Bluetooth Interface Unit ......................................................................................61 User Account Enhance Unit................................................................................63 Printer Hard Disk..................................................................................................66 Formatting the Printer Hard Disk Drive ....................................................................68 Duplex Unit Type 7100.........................................................................................69 Installing the Duplex Reversal Unit Stand................................................................69 Installing the Duplex Reversal Unit ..........................................................................72 Installing the Duplex Feed Unit ................................................................................74 INDEX......................................................................................................... 761 1. Guide to Printer Parts Exterior: Front View 1. Control panel Contains keys for printer operation and a display to show printer status. See p.5 “Control Panel”. 2. Front cover Open this when replacing the waste toner bottle, development unit or photoconductor unit. A screwdriver is attached to this cover. 3. Power switch Use this to switch between power on and off. 4. Tray 1 Loads up to 500 sheets of plain paper tray for printing. Only for 11×8 1 /2 K paper. 5. Tray 2 Loads up to 500 sheets of plain paper tray for printing. 6. Standard tray Output is stacked here with the print side down. Note ? If printed A3 short-edge feed or 11×17 short-edge feed sheets fall off the standard t ray, raise the fenc e to secur e them. 7. Upper right cover Open this to replace the toner cartridge. 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 10 9 15 16 ACE016S1Guide to Printer Parts 2 1 8. Vent T h i s h e l p s k e e p in t e r na l c om po n e nt s from overheating. Do not block or obstruct the vent. Malfunctions may occur due to overheating. 9. Controller board Slide this out to install options such as the memory unit, IEEE 1284 interface board, IEEE 802.11b interface unit, user account enhance unit or printer hard disk. Plug cables such as the parallel interface cable and Ethernet cable into their connectors. 10. Ethernet port Use a network interface cable to connect the printer to a network. 11. USB port Use a USB cable to connect the printer to the host computer. 12. Optional interface board slot Ins e rt an op tional IEEE 1394 int er face board, IEEE 802.11b interface unit, wireless interface board, or IEEE 1284 interface board in this slot. Only one board can be inserted at a time. 13. Bypass tray extension Pull this out to load paper in the bypass tray when its length is longer than A4 L. 14. Bypass tray Use to print on thick paper, OHP transparencies, custom size paper, and plain paper. Up to 100 sheets of plain paper can be loaded. 15. Vent T hi s h e lp s k e ep i n t e rn a l comp o ne n t s from overheating. Do not block or obstruct the vent. Malfunctions may occur due to overheating. 16. Right cover Open this to remove misfed paper.Exterior: Rear View 3 1 Exterior: Rear View 1. Vent and dustproof filter T h i s h e l p s k e e p in t e r na l c om po n e nt s from overheating. Do not block or obstruct the vent. Malfunctions may occur due to overheating. Remove the vent to replace the internal dustproof filter. 2. Connector board Connect the main power cable, cables from options, etc. to the appropriate port. 3. Duplex unit port Connect the cable for the duplex reversal unit to this port. 4. 2 tray finisher/Booklet finisher port Connect the cable for the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher to this port. 5. Power port Connect the power cable to this port and the other end to the wall outlet. 6. Upper left cover Ope n thi s to r emove m i sf ed pape r o r when replacing the fusing unit. 7. External tray Printed output is stacked here with the print side up. 8. Vents These help keep components inside the printer from overheating. Do not block or obstruct the vents. Malfunctions may occur due to overheating. 9. Earth leakage breaker Prevents electric shock. ACE061S 3 4 5 1 2 6 7 8 9Guide to Printer Parts 4 1 Interior 1. Fusing unit Fuses the image onto the paper. 2. Fuser oil unit Attaches to the fusing unit. 3. Waste toner bottle C o l l e c t s t o n e r t h a t i s w a s t e d d u r i n g printing. 4. Inner cover Open this when replacing the photoconductor unit or development unit. 5. Photoconductor unit The printer comes with one black and three color (yellow, cyan, and magenta) photoconductor units. 6. Development unit The printer comes with one black development unit and three color (yellow, cyan, magenta) development units. 7. Toner cartridge Loads from the printer rear, in the order of magenta (M), cyan (C), yellow (Y), and black (K). 8. Waste oil bottle Collects oil discharged during printing. ZHXH840J 1 2 8 4 7 3 5 6Control Panel 5 1 Control Panel 1. Display Displays current printer status and error messages. 2. Job Reset key When the printer is online, press this key to cancel an ongoing print job. 3. On Line key Indicates whether the printer is online or offline. Press this to switch between online and offline. When the lamp is lit, the printer is online, enabling data reception from the host computer. When the lamp is unlit, the printer is offline, disabling data reception from the host computer. Press to return to the ready condition. 4. Form Feed key When the printer is offline, press this to print all data left in the printer's input buffer. You can use this to force the printer to print data received in the online status when the pape r s i ze or type do e s not match the actually set size or type. 5. Menu key P r e s s th i s to mak e and c h e c k c u r r e n t printer settings. 6. Power indicator This indicator remains lit while the power is on. It is unlit when the power is off or while the printer is in Energy Saver mode. 7. Error indicator Lights up whenever a printer error occurs. However, it is unlit in Energy Saver mode. 8. Data In indicator Blinks when the printer is receiving data from a computer. The Data In indicator is lit if there is data to be printed. 9. Escape key Press this to return to the previous display screen. 10. # Enter key Press this to execute menu items selected on the display. 11. {UU}, {TT} Keys Use these to increase or decrease values on the display when making settings. Keep the key pressed to quicken scrolling, and increase or decrease values on the display in units of 10. ACE085S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 10 1Guide to Printer Parts 6 17 2. Setting Up Where to Put the Printer The printer's location should be carefully chosen because environmental conditions greatly affect its performance. R WARNING: R CAUTION: • Confirm the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible, so that in the event of emergency, it can be easily unplugged. • Only connect the machine to the power source described on this sheet. • Avoid multi-wiring. • Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cable. Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend it more than necessary. These actions could damage the cable. A frayed or damaged cable might cause an electrical fire hazard. • Do not handle the plug with wet hands. Doing so might cause an electrical shock. • Keep the machine in an area that is within optimum environmental conditions. Operating the machine in an environment that is outside the recommended ranges of humidity and temperature can cause an electrical fire hazard. Keep the area around the socket free of dust. Accumulated dust can become an electrical fire hazard. • Place the machine on a strong and level surface. Otherwise, it might fall and injure someone. • If you use the machine in a confined space, ensure there is continuous air circulation.Setting Up 8 2 Space Required for Installation Leave enough space around the printer. This space is necessary to operate the printer. The recommended (or minimum) space requirements are as follows: A: 46 cm (19 inch) or more B: 10 cm (4 inch) or more C: 55 cm (22 inch) or more D: 70 cm (28 inch) or more Optimum Environmental Conditions Permissible and recommended temperature and humidity ranges are as follows: • White area: Permissible Range • Gray area: Recommended Range ZDJX005J B A C D 50°F 80% 80.6°F 80% 77°F 70% 77°F 30% 89.6°F 54% 50°F 15% 89.6°F 15% 59°F 30% 59°F 70% 80 60 40 20 50 80 90 60 70 %RH °FWhere to Put the Printer 9 2 Note ? The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2” from both front to rear and left to right. ? When you use this machine for a long time in a confined space without good ventilation, you may detect an odd smell. To keep the workplace comfortable, we recommend you keep it well ventilated. Environments to Avoid Important ? Areas exposed to direct sunlight or strong light ? Dusty areas ? Areas with corrosive gases ? Areas that are excessively cold, hot, or humid ? Locations near air conditioners or humidifiers ? Locations near other electronic equipment ? Locations subject to frequent strong vibration Power Source Connect the power cable to a power source of the following specification: • 120V, 60 Hz, 12A or moreSetting Up 10 2 Checking the Contents of the Box Check the box contains the following items. If there are missing items, contact your sales or service representative. Manuals and CD-ROMs Manuals for This Printer Setup Guide (This manual) Maintenance Guide CD-ROM “Printer Drivers and Utilities” CD-ROM “Operating Instructions” CD-ROM “Document Management Utility” Parts External Tray Power Cable Ferrite Core Fuser Oil UnitChecking the Contents of the Box 11 2 Black Toner Cartridge (K) Magenta (M), Cyan (C), Yellow (Y) Toner Cartridges Paper Feed Unit Labels Additional Documentation Color Calibration Sample Sheet Note ? This package does not include an interface cable. Please purchase one to use with your host computer. See “Appendix”, Administrator Reference.Setting Up 12 2 Unpacking Remove the adhesive tape from t h e p r i n t e r b o d y . R em o v e t h e cardboard taped to the standard tray. Open tray 1. Remove the adhesive tape and sheet of paper. Close tray 1 slowly. Open tray 2. Remove the adhesive tape and sheet of paper. Close tray 2 slowly. Open the front cover slowly by pulling down using the upper left and right sides. Important ? Do not place objects on the opened front cover. ACE062S ZDJH003J ZDJH004J ZDJH005J ZDJH006J ZDJH007JUnpacking 13 2 Remove the adhesive tape. Turn the green lever clockwise. Hold down the printer’s inner cove r , g rasp the pie c es o f tape protruding from the development unit, and then slowly pull them out horizontally. Important ? Be sure to pull out all four pieces of tape to avoid printer malfunction during operation. ? The removed tape is dirty. Be careful not to let it touch your hands or clothes. Remove the securing pin, as s h own , f r om th e t r a n s f e r u n i t . Pinch it, and then pull it out. Close the front cover slowly by pushing the two areas on the left and right. Put labels “1” and “2” on the front of the paper trays. ABT016S1 ZHXH420J ZHXH130J ZHXH131J ZDJH041J ZDJP129JSetting Up 14 2 Installing the Fuser Oil Unit R CAUTION: Install the fuser oil unit in the fusing unit. Slowly pull out the left cover. Open the upper left cover. Take the fuser oil unit out of the bag. Hold the green upper part of seal ( ), and then slowly peel it off. Position the fuser oil unit as shown, and then s low ly pu l l i t ( ) out. Finally, hold the upper part of seal ( ), and then slowly peel it off. Note ? Be sure to remove seal (A), and then pull it out horizontally. • Keep the fuser oil unit away from flames. There is a risk of fire or burns. ZHXH010J ZHXH020J 1 1 ZHXHK041J 2Installing the Fuser Oil Unit 15 2 Important ? Be sure to remove the seals to avoid printer malfunction. ? Be sure to remove seal (A) first, a nd th en r emov e s ea l (B) to avoid oil leakage. ? After removing the seals, be careful not to let oil from oils u p p l y i n g p a r t s o r t h e s e a l s c o me i n t o c o n t a c t w i t h y o u r body or clothes. As shown, hold the fuser oil unit us ing one hand, and the green handle with the other, and then slowly insert the unit horizontally, in the direction of the arrow. Important ? Be careful not to get oil on the top metal part of the fuser oil unit. ? Insert the fuser oil unit firmly until it stops. Slowly turn the fuser unit handle in the direction of the arrow, until it clicks. Close the upper left cover ( ), and then push the par t labe led PUSH next to the handle at the bottom rear, until it clicks ( ). Attach the external tray to the printer. Insert the hooks of the external tray into the printer slits, and then lower it toward you. ZHXH060J ZHXH070J ZHXH082J 1 2 ZDJH010JSetting Up 16 2 Installing the Toner Cartridge R WARNING: R CAUTION: Note ? The toner cartridge allows you to print up to about 20,000 pages in black, and about 10,000 pages in c o l o r . T h e s e n umb e r s we r e o b - t a i n e d f r o m p r i n t i n g A 4K 5% charts, but the actual number of pages will differ depending on the paper type, size, contents and settings. Open the upper right cover. Take out the toner cartridges from the box. Note ? The black (K) toner cartridge cont ains mo r e t one r than the others. Shake the toner cartridge back and forth five or six times. • Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust is flammable and will ignite when exposed to an open flame. • Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer or an appropriate collection site. If you dispose of the used toner cartridges yourself, dispose of them according to local regulations. • Keep toner (used or unused) and the toner cartridge out of reach of children. ZDJT006J ZDJT202J ZDJT203JInstalling the Toner Cartridge 17 2 Holding the toner cartridge with the metal contact area in front, insert in the direction of the arrow. Insert each cartridge into the same color slot. Important ? Be careful not to touch the metal contact point with your fingers. Insert the toner cartridge slowly, until the green hook snaps on the metal contact area. Important ? Do not insert and remove toner cartridges repeatedly, as this could result in toner leakage. Use the same procedure to insert t h e r ema i n i n g t h r e e t o n e r c a r - tridges. Close the upper right cover. Important ? Do not turn off the power switch whi l e “Loading Tone r . . .” appears on the display to avoid malfunction. ABT017S1 ABT018S1 ABT019S1Setting Up 18 2 Loading Paper This section describes how to load paper in the paper tray. If you do not load paper, the setup procedure will not be properly complete. The side guide and end guide of each paper tray is set to the following values at factory default. The loading procedure is different if you choose to load paper that is a different size from that of factory default. See p.18 “Loading Paper in Tray 1”. Default of the paper tray • Tray 1 (standard): 11×8 1 /2K only • 2000-sheet large capacity tray (optional): 11×8 1 /2K only For details about size and feed orientation of paper that can be loaded in the tray, see “Paper and Other Media”, Maintenance Guide. For details about loading paper in the bypass tray, see “Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray”, Maintenance Guide. Loading Paper in Tray 1 Important ? Tray 1 is 11×8 1 /2K paper only. Load only 11×8 1 /2 size paper. Slowly slide the paper tray out, until it stops. Align all four sides of the paper stack, and then load it in the tray. Important ? Make sure the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. ? Be sure to adjust the side guides according to the paper size, or paper misfeeds might occur. Slowly slide the paper tray back, until it stops. Loading Paper in Tray 2 and the Optional Paper Feed Unit Paper of different sizes can be loaded in tray 2 (standard) and the 500- and 1000-sheet paper feed units (optional) by adjusting the positions of the side and end guides. Note ? If the side and end guides are in the right positions for the paper to be loaded, the guides do not have to be adjusted. • Tray 2 (standard): B5L • 500-sheet paper feed unit: A3L • 1000-sheet paper feed unit: A3L ZDJH003J ZDJY001JLoading Paper 19 2 Slowly slide the paper tray out, until it stops. Adjust the side guide according to the size and orientation of the paper, as follows: A Release the side guide lock. B Press the green lever of the side guide ( ), and then adjust the po s i t ion o f the guide by moving it in the direction of the arrow ( ). Adjust the end guide according to the size and orientation of the paper by gripping both edges of the guide ( ), and then moving it in the direction of the arrow ( ). Align all four sides of the paper stack, and then load it in the tray. Important ? Make sure the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. Make sure the paper is fixed in p l a c e , a n d t h e n l o c k t h e s i d e guide. ZDJH005J ZDJY950J ZDJY802J ZHXH760J ZDJY901J ZDJY007JSetting Up 20 2 Slowly slide the paper tray back, until it stops. Important ? Do not slide the paper tray in with force. If you do, the front and side guides might move. ? Be sure to adjust the side guides according to the paper size, or misfeeds might occur. 2000-sheet Large Capacity Tray Important ? The 2000-sheet large capacity tray is set to 11×8 1 /2K as default. ? If you want to load A4K paper in the 2000-sheet large capacity tray (optional), contact your sales or service representative. Slowly slide the paper tray out, until it stops. Align all four sides of the paper stack, and then load two stacks next to each other. Important ? Be sure to align the paper and load them against the left and right walls, or a paper misfeed could occur. ? Make sure the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. Slowly slide the paper tray back, until it stops. Important ? Do not slide in the paper tray forcefully. This may skew the paper stack and cause misfeeds. ACE025S ZDJY009JTurning the Power On 21 2 Turning the Power On R WARNING: Make sure the power switch is set to “ ” Off. Connect the power cable to the c o n n e c t o r o n t h e b a c k o f t h e printer. Plug in the power cable. Important ? Make sure the power cable is plugged securely into the wall outlet. ? Turn the power switch off when plugging and unplugging the power plug. Turn the power switch to “ ” On. • Plug and unplug the power cable with dry hands, or an electric shock could occur. ZDJH029J ZDJH030J ZDJH031JSetting Up 22 2 Selecting the Display Language Select a language using the procedure described here. T h e m e s sa g e f o r t h e s e l e c t e d l an - guage will appear on the display. Note ? The default setting is English. ? If you want to use the display in English, the following procedures are unnecessary. Press the Menu key. The menu appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Language”. Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key until the language you want to select appears. Press the # Enter key. Wait for two seconds. The menu appears on the display. Press the On Line key. “Ready” message appears on the display. Menu: Language ACE082S ACE083S Language: *English Ready ACE084STest Printing 23 2 Test Printing Test print in order to check that the p r i n t e r i s wo rk i n g n o rm a l l y . T e s t printing checks printer performance; it does not test the connection to the computer. Here, you can print the configuration page to check the options. The mach ine may make a rust l ing sound while printing. However, this does not indicate a malfunction and will disappear after about 1000 sheets have been printed. Press the Menu key. The menu appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “List/Test Print”, and then press the # Enter key. The menu for selecting the contents to be test printed appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the “Config. Page”, and then press the # Enter key. The fo llowing m es sage app e ars a n d t h e c o n f i g u r a t i o n p a g e i s printed. Note ? If printing is not normal, check to see if an error message appears on the display. If there is an error message, see “Troubleshooting”, Maintenance Guide. Check the options. Note ? For details about the configuration page, see “Interpreting the Configuration Page”, Administrator Reference. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Menu Paper Input Menu List/Test Print ACE082S List/Test Print Config. Page Printing... Setting Up 24 225 3. Preparing to Print Connecting the Printer Connecting to a Network Turn off the power. Loop the network interface cable and attach the ferrite core. Note ? The network interface cable loop should be about 15 cm (6”) (A) from the end of the cable (the end closest to the printer). Connect the network interface cable to the port on the right side of the printer. Connect the other end of the cable to the network, such as a hub connection. For details about network environment settings, see Admi ni s tr a t o r Reference. Reading the LED lamps 1. Yellow: lights up when 100BASETX is being used. Turns off when 10BASE-T is being used. 2. Green: lights up when the printer i s c o n n e c te d p r o p e r ly to t h e n e t - work. ABT045S1 ACE059SPreparing to Print 26 3 Connecting the Cable to the USB 2.0 Interface Port Connect the square-shaped conn e c t o r o f th e US B c ab l e t o t h e USB 2.0 interface port. Connect the opposite end's flat connector to devices such as the USB interface of the computer, or USB hub. ABT046S1Configuring the Printer for the Network using the Control Panel 27 3 Configuring the Printer for the Network using the Control Panel You must make printer settings using the control panel to use it in a network environment. The following list shows the items you can set and their default values. Reference For information about the “Host Interface” menu, see “Host Interface Menu”, Administrator Refere n c e ( PD F f i l e o n t h e C D - RO M labeled “Operating Instructions”). *1 If DHCP is in use, IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address are automatically set. *2 ? means the protocol is active. Press the Menu key. The menu appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Hos t In t er face” and then press the # Enter key. T h e i n t e r f a c e s e t t i n g m e n u a p - pears. The procedure below describes how to set TCP/IP. Make settings for other items by following the same procedure. Note ? The default settings for all protocols are “Active”. ? You are recommended to set unused protocols “Not Active”. A Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “N e tw o r k S e t u p”, a n d then press the # Enter key. Setting Name Default DHCP On IP Address *1 011.022.033.044 Subnet Mask *1 000.000.000.000 Gateway Address *1 000.000.000.000 Frame Type (NW) (frame type NetWare) Auto Active Protocol TCP/IP ? *2 NetWare ? *2 SMB ? *2 AppleTalk ? *2 Ethernet Speed Auto Menu: Host Interface Host Interface: Network Setup ACE082SPreparing to Print 28 3 B Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “A c t i v e P r o t o c o l”, a n d then press the # Enter key. C Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “TCP/IP”, and then press the # Enter key. D Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Active”, and then press the # Enter key. Note ? * shows the current setting. A ft er abou t two s ec ond s , the display returns to the “Active Protocol” setting screen. E Set the rest of the protocols for use. F When all settings for protocols are done, press the Escape key. T he “Network Setup” setting screen appears. When you use this machine in DHCP environment, proceed to s tep . When you use this machine with a fixed IP address, you must make the setting for the required item after setting DHCP to Off. Proceed to step . Important ? When DHCP is On, you cannot make settings for the following items: • IP Address • Subnet Mask • Gateway Address Note ? Consult your network administ r a t o r f o r i n f o rm a t i o n a b o u t making network settings. A Set DHCP to Off. B Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “DHCP”, and then press the # Enter key. C Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Off”, and then press the # Enter key. The current IP address appears on the display. Note ? * shows the current setting. Af t e r abou t two s e conds , th e display returns to the “Network Setup” setting screen. D Set the printer IP address. Note ? Confirm the IP address with the network administrator. E Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “IP Addre s s”, and then press the # Enter key. The cur r ent ly s el e c t ed IP ad - dress appears. Network Setup: Active Protocol Active Protocol: TCP/IP TCP/IP: *Active Network Setup: DHCP DHCP: *Off Network Setup: IP AddressConfiguring the Printer for the Network using the Control Panel 29 3 Note ? When the # Enter key is pressed, the cursor moves to the next field. ? When the {UU} or {TT} key is kept pressed for a few seconds, the value changes in increments of 10. F Press the {UU} or {TT} key to set the value for the field. G Press the # Enter key. The cursor moves to the next field. H Repeat and to set values for the rest of the fields. Set “Subnet Mask” and “Gateway Address” using the same procedure for setting the IP address. Important ? The subnet mask is the part of the IP address used as a network address. Confirm the value with the network administrator. ? The gateway address is the address of the host or router that acts as a gateway when interacting with work stations on ano t h e r n e t w o r k . C o n f i r m t h e value with the network administrator. Note ? If you are not sure about address settings, leave them as default. When all settings are made, press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Print the configuration page to confirm the settings made. See p.23 “Test Printing” for details about printing the configuration IP Address: page. 199.022.033.044 Ready Preparing to Print 30 3 Installing the Printer Driver You can install the printer drivers and other software easily using the CDROM label ed “Printer Drivers and Utilities”. Click [Quick Install] in the window of the CD-ROM to install PCL 5c and RPCS TM printer drivers. To install the PostScript 3 printer driver, click the PostScript 3 printer driver button. For details about the PostScript 3 printer driver, see the Administrator Reference or the Printer Client Reference on the CD-ROM labeled “Operating Instruct ions” (d ep end ing on the envi ronment you use). When TCP/IP is used, Smart Device Moni tor fo r Cl i ent wi l l al so be in - stalled. S u p p o r t e d o p e r a t i n g s y s t em s a r e Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. When using TCP/IP, confirm the following: • The printer is connected to a network with Ethernet cable. • TCP/IP is set. • IP addresses are set for the printer and the computer. I n s e r t t h e C D - R O M l a b e l e d “P r i n ter D r iver s and U t i l i t ies” into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Poli s h ) , P o r t u g u e s ( P o r t u g u e s e ) , Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) The default interface language is English. Click [Quick Install]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. This is an example screen that appears when English is selected in step B.Installing the Printer Driver 31 3 After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement] to a g r e e w i t h t h e L i c e n s e A g r e e - ment, and then click [Next]. Select the printer model you want to install in the [Select Printer] dialog box. Note ? For a network connection with T C P / I P , s e l e c t t h e p r i n t e r whose IP address is displayed in [Connect To]. ? For parallel connection, select the printer whose printer port is displayed in [Connect To]. Click [Install]. T h e f o l l o wi n g d i s p l a y a p p e a r s when installing the printer driver. When finished, the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears. Click [Finish]. Note ? A message directing you to restart the computer may appear. I f t h i s h a p p e n s , r e s t a r t y o u r compu t er to comp l et e the in - stallation. If no such message appears, proceed to step H. Click [Exit]. Installation is now complete.Preparing to Print 32 333 4. Installing Options Installing Options R CAUTION: By installing options, you can improve printer performance and have a greater variety of features to use. For details about each option, see Administrator Reference. When installing multiple options on the printer, we recommend installation in the following order. • Before installing options, the machine should be turned off, and then unplugged for at least an hour. Components inside the machine become very hot, and can cause a burn if touched. • Before moving the machine, unplug the power cable from the outlet. If the cable is unplugged with sudden force, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or cables can cause an electrical fire hazard. • When lifting the machine, use the grips on both sides. The machine could break or cause injury if dropped.Installing Options 34 4 Flow of Option Installation *1 The bypass tray is included. A Attach the 500, 1000-sheet paper feed unit, or 2000-sheet large capacity tray. (Paper Feed Unit Type 7100, Paper Bank Type 7100) Attach the paper feed unit to the bottom of the printer. You can install the Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 × 1), Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 × 2) or Paper Bank Type 7100. If you install the Paper Bank Type 7100, you can load up to 3,100 sheets of paper at once. *1 T B Install the memory unit (SDRAM Module). Install the module in the controller board's SDRAM module slot. There are three types of memory unit: 64 MB, 128 MB, and 256 MB. T C Installing the IEEE 1394 interface board, IEEE 1284 interface board, IEEE 802.11b interface unit or Bluetooth interface unit. Install the IEEE 1394 interface board, IEEE 1284 interface board, IEEE 802.11b interface unit or Bluetooth interface unit on the controller board. The IEEE 1394 interface board and the standard Ethernet interface cannot be used at the same time. Only one of the following can be installed: • IEEE 1394 interface board • IEEE 1284 interface board • IEEE 802.11b interface unit • Bluetooth interface unit T D Install the user account enhance unit Install the module to the user account enhance unit slot of the controller board. T E Install the printer hard disk. Install the printer hard disk to the controller board. T F Attach the duplex unit. (Duplex Unit Type 7100) Attach the duplex reversal unit to the left side of the printer, and the duplex feed unit inside the printer. T G Attach the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher. (SR770) (SR910) Attach the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher to the left side of the printer. You cannot install the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher unless both the paper feed unit and duplex unit options are installed. The 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher requires the optional printer hard disk or the optional memory unit with at least 64 MB (total memory size 192 MB or more).Installing Options 35 4 Install options in the positions as shown. Exterior 1. Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 1) Loads up to 500 sheets (500 sheets × 1 column) of paper. See p.38 “Installing the Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 × 1)”. 2. Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 2) Loads up to 1,000 sheets (500 sheets × 2 columns) of paper. See p.41 “Installing the Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 × 2)”. 3. Paper Bank Type 7100 (2000-sheet Large Capacity Tray) Loads up to 2,000 sheets (2,000 sheets × 1 column) of paper. See p.43 “Installing the Paper Bank Type 7100 (2000-sheet Large Capacity Tray)”. 4. SR770(2 Tray Finisher)/SR910(Booklet Finisher) To install a finisher, contact your service representative. 5. Duplex Reversal Unit Flips over the paper during duplex printing. Install the unit on the left side of the printer. See p.72 “Installing the Duplex Reversal Unit”. 6. Duplex Feed Unit T r a n s p o r t s p a p e r d u r i n g d u p l e x pr int ing. Inst al l the uni t insi de the printer. See p.72 “Installing the Duplex Reversal Unit”. Important ? You cannot install the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher unless both the paper feed unit and duplex unit options are attached. ? The 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher requires the optional printer hard disk or the optional memory unit with at least 64 MB (total memory size 192 MB or more). ACE057SInstalling Options 36 4 Interior 1. Memory Unit (SDRAM Module) I n s t a l l 6 4 MB , 1 2 8 MB , o r 2 5 6 M B RAM into the controller board slot. S e e p . 4 6 “M e m o r y U n i t ( S D R A M Module)”. 2. IEEE 1394 interface board/IEEE 1284 interface board/IEEE 802.11b interface unit/Bluetooth interface unit. See p.48 “IEEE 1394 Interface Board”. S e e p . 5 5 “I E E E 8 0 2 . 1 1 b I n t e r f a c e Unit”. See p.61 “Bluetooth Interface Unit”. See p.53 “IEEE 1284 Interface Board”. 3. User Account Enhance Unit S e e p . 6 3 “U s e r A c c o u n t E n h a n c e Unit”. 4. Printer Hard Disk Install the printer hard disk to the controller board. See p.66 “Printer Hard Disk”. ACE017S 1 2 3 4Using the Screwdriver 37 4 Using the Screwdriver The special screwdriver used for attaching options is attached to the inside of the front cover. Open the printer’s front cover, a n d t h e n r em o v e t h e p r o v id e d screwdriver. Insert the screw into the screwdriver. B y p u s h i n g t h e s c r e w i n t o t h e screwdriver, you can work without having to worry about dropping the screw. Note ? After using the screwdriver, return it to its original position on the inside of the front cover. ABT020S1 ABT021S1Installing Options 38 4 Paper Feed Unit Preparation If you have already installed the optional duplex unit, 2 tray finisher, or booklet finisher, remove all these options before installing the optional paper feed unit. Important ? Before installation, check the orientation of the paper feed unit or 2000-sheet large capacity tray you want to place. ? When installing multiple options, install the paper feed unit first. ? Four people are needed to install the paper feed unit. Start installat i o n w h e n a l l f o u r p e o p l e a r e ready. R CAUTION: Note ? The printer weighs approximately 85 kg (187 lbs). Installing the Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 1) R CAUTION: Note ? The 500-sheet paper feed unit weighs approximately 18 kg (39.7 lbs). Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Remove the adhesive tape. Adjust the four corners of the printer to those of the 500-sheet paper feed unit, and then lower the printer slowly into place. • When moving the machine, each person should hold a handle, located on two sides of the printer, and then lift slowly. Lifting carelessly or dropping it may cause injury. • When moving the paper feed unit, hold the bottom of both sides, and then lift slowly. Lifting carelessly or dropping it may cause injury. ACE086S AAA302S1Paper Feed Unit 39 4 Important ? Four people should hold the handles, located on two sides of the printer, to move it. Open the tray of the 500-sheet paper feed unit. A Remove the adhesive tape and sheet of paper. B Remove the adhesive tape and the corrugated paper inside the tray, as shown. Take out the packaged items, maki n g s u r e t h e r e a r e t w o t h u m b screws and one mounting bracket. Close the tray of the 500-sheet paper feed unit firmly. Slowly pull out tray 2 while lifting up a little. Fasten one thumb screw. A coin can be used to fasten the screws. Slowly slide tray 2 back into the printer, until it stops. ZDJP007J ZDJX801J ZDJP005J ACE023S AAA303S1Installing Options 40 4 Open the right cover of the 500- sheet paper feed unit. Hook the mounting bracket to the hole, as shown. Fasten the bracket with the other thumb screw. A coin can be used to fasten the screws. Close the right cover of the 500- sheet paper feed unit. Stick label “3” above the handle on the front of the 500-sheet paper feed unit. Note ? After finishing the installation, you can check the 500-sheet paper feed unit is installed properly: Print the configuration page f r o m t h e “L i s t / T e s t P r i n t” menu. If it is installed properly, you will see “Paper Feed Unit (Tray 3)” appear under the “Options” list. ? If the paper feed unit is not installed properly, repeat the proc e d u r e f r o m s t e p A. I f y o u cannot install it properly even after reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative. Reference p.23 “Test Printing” AAA304S1 AAA305S1 ZDJP012J ZDJP126JPaper Feed Unit 41 4 Installing the Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 2) R CAUTION: Note ? T h e 1 00 0 - s h e e t p a p e r f e e d u n i t weighs approximately 25 kg (55.2 lbs). Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Remove the adhesive tape. Adjust the four corners of the printer to those of the 1000-sheet paper feed unit, and then slowly lower the printer into place. Important ? Four people should hold the handles, located on two sides of the printer, to move it. Open the tray of the 1000-sheet paper feed unit. A Remove the adhesive tape and sheet of paper. B Remove the adhesive tape and the corrugated paper inside the tray, as shown. • When moving the paper feed unit, hold the bottom of both sides, and then lift slowly. Lifting carelessly or dropping it may cause injury. ACE087S AAA402S1 ZDJP007J ZDJX801JInstalling Options 42 4 Take out the packaged items, making sure there are two thumb screws and one mounting bracket. Close the tray of the 1000-sheet paper feed unit firmly. Slowly pull out tray 2 while lifting up a little. Fasten one thumb screw. A coin can be used to fasten the screws. Slowly slide tray 2 back into the printer, until it stops. Open the right cover of the 1000- sheet paper feed unit. Hook the mounting bracket to the hole, as shown. Fasten the bracket with the other thumb screw. A coin can be used to fasten the screws. Close the right cover of the 1000- sheet paper feed unit. ZDJP005J ACE024S AAA403S1 AAA404S1 AAA405S1 ZDJP018JPaper Feed Unit 43 4 Stick labels “3” and “4” above the handles on the front of the 1000- sheet paper feed unit. Note ? After finishing the installation, you can ch ec k the 1000- she e t p a p e r f e e d u n i t i s i n s t a l l e d properly: Print the configuration page from the “List/Test Pr int” menu . I f i t is in st al l ed properly, you will see “Paper Feed Unit (Tray 3 & Tray 4)” appear under the “Options” list. ? If the paper feed unit is not installed properly, repeat the proc e d u r e f r o m s t e p A. I f y o u cannot install it properly even after reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative. Reference p.23 “Test Printing” Installing the Paper Bank Type 7100 (2000-sheet Large Capacity Tray) R CAUTION: Note ? The 2000-sheet large capacity tray weighs approximately 25 kg (55.2 lbs). Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Remove the adhesive tape. Adjust the four corners of the printer to those of the 2000-sheet large capacity tray, and then slowly lower the printer into place. ZDJP127J • When moving the paper feed unit, hold the bottom of both sides, and then lift slowly. Lifting carelessly or dropping it may cause injury. ACE088S AAA502S1Installing Options 44 4 Important ? Four people should hold the handles, located on two sides of the printer, to move it. Take out the packaged items, maki n g s u r e t h e r e a r e t w o t h u m b screws and one mounting bracket. Close the t ray of the 2000- sheet large capacity tray firmly. Slowly pull out tray 2 while lifting up a little. Fasten one thumb screw. A coin can be used to fasten the screws. Slowly slide tray 2 back into the printer, until it stops. Open the right cover of the 2000- sheet large capacity tray. Hook the mounting bracket to the hole, as shown. ZDJP007J ZDJP005J ACE022S AAA503S1 AAA504S1 AAA505S1Paper Feed Unit 45 4 Fasten the bracket with the other thumb screw. A coin can be used to fasten the screws. Close the right cover of the 2000- sheet large capacity tray. Stick label “3” above the handle o n t h e f r o n t o f t h e 2 0 0 0 - s h e e t large capacity tray. Note ? After finishing the installation, you can ch ec k the 2000- she e t large capacity tray is installed properly: Print the configuration page from the “List/Test Pr int” menu . I f i t is in st al l ed p r o p e r l y , y o u w i l l s e e “L C T Tandem Bank” appear under the “Options” list. ? If the paper feed unit is not installed properly, repeat the proc e d u r e f r o m s t e p A. I f y o u cannot install it properly even after reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative. Reference p.23 “Test Printing” ZDJP024J ZDJP128JInstalling Options 46 4 Memory Unit (SDRAM Module) Important ? Before handling the memory unit, g r o u n d y o u r s e l f b y t o u c h i n g something metal to discharge any static electricity. Static electricity can damage the memory unit. ? Do not subject the SDRAM Module to physical shocks. Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Slowly open the front cover of the printer, remove the green screwdriver, and then close the cover. Reference p.37 “Using the Screwdriver” Remove the four screws fastening the controller board to the back of the p r i n ter u s ing the pr ov ided screwdriver. The removed screws will be used later to fasten the controller board. Holding the handle, slowly pull out the controller board. Put the controller board down on a flat surface. Align the notches in the SDRAM module terminal board with the slots, and then insert the SDRAM module at an angle. Push the SDRAM module down until it snaps into place. ABT022S1 ABT023S1 ABT024S1 ABT025S1Memory Unit (SDRAM Module) 47 4 Align the controller board with the top and bottom rails, and then push it in using the part marked "PUSH" until it stops. Tighten the four screws to fasten the controller board back into its original position using the provided s c rewdr ive r. T ighten the screws in the order of the numb e r s ( 1 t o 4 ) n e x t t o t h e s c r ew holes. Note ? Be sure to return the provided screwdriver to its original position on the inside of the front cover. ? After finishing the installation, you can check the memory unit is installed properly: Print the c o n f i g u r a t i o n p a g e f r om t h e “List/Test Print” menu. If it is installed properly, you will see the memory capacity for “Total Memory”. ? If the memory unit is not installed properly, repeat the proc e d u r e f r o m s t e p A. I f y o u cannot install it properly even after reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative. Reference p.23 “Test Printing” ABT026S1 ABT027S1Installing Options 48 4 IEEE 1394 Interface Board Important ? The connection methods available with the IEEE 1394 interface board are IP over 1394 and SCSI print. The Windows versions that can be used and the connection methods that can be used with them are as follows. IEEE 1394 cannot be used w i t h W indow s 95/98 and W in - dows NT 4.0. • Windows Me IP over 1394 is available. • Windows 2000 SCSI print is available. • Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 B o t h I P o v e r 1 3 9 4 a n d S C S I print are available. ? Printing is not possible with Windows 95, 98. If the “plug and play” function starts, click [Cancel]. ? Under Windows 2000, the IEEE 1394 interface board can only be used with Service Pack 1 or later. If the Service Pack is not installed, on ly on e SCS I p r int d e vi c e in a 1394 bus is connectable. The client cannot install the printer driver without an account that has Administrators permission. ? Before handling the IEEE 1394 interface board, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static electricity. Static e le c tr ic i ty can damage th e IEEE 1394 interface board. ? Unplug all interface cables from the printer before installation. If you take out the controller board with cables still plugged in, the IEEE 1394 interface board might be damaged. ? Do not plug or unplug the IEEE 1394 interface cable while installing the printer driver ? Use the IEEE 1394 Interface cable supplied with the IEEE 1394 interface board. ? Do not subject the IEEE 1394 interface board to physical shocks. Check the contents of the box. IEEE 1394 Interface Board Interface Cable (6 pin 6 pin) Interface Cable (6 pin 4 pin) Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable, and then interface cable. ABT009S1IEEE 1394 Interface Board 49 4 Slowly open the front cover of the printer, remove the green screwdriver, and then close the cover. Reference p.37 “Using the Screwdriver” Remove the screws by turning them counterclockwise with the provided screwdriver, and then remove the cover of the IEEE 1394 interface board slot. Th e r e mov ed s c r ews and cove r will not be needed now but save them in case the cover needs to be reattached. In ser t the IEEE 1394 inter face board until it stops, and then sec u r e i t b y t i g h t e n i n g i t s t w o screws. C h e c k t h e I E E E 1 3 9 4 i n t e r f a c e board is connected firmly to the controller board. Note ? Be sure to return the provided screwdriver to its original position on the inside of the front cover. ? After finishing the installation, you can check the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed prope r l y : P r i n t t h e c o n f i g u r a t i o n page from the “List/Test Print” menu, and then check the items in “System Reference”. If it is installed properly, you will see “I E E E 1 3 9 4” a p p e a r u n d e r “Controller Option”. ? If the IEEE 1394 interface board is not installed properly, repeat the procedure from step A. If you cannot install it properly even after reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative. Reference p.23 “Test Printing” Connecting the Cable to the IEEE 1394 Interface board Connect the interface cable to the IEEE 1394 interface port. ABT034S1 ABT038S1 ZDJP500JInstalling Options 50 4 Note ? Either of the two connectors for the IEEE 1394 interface board can be used. ? If you have an interface cable with a ferrite core, connect the end nearest to the ferrite core to the printer. Connect the other end to the host computer. IEEE 1394 Configuration Use this procedure to configure the printer for use in an IEEE 1394 environment. The following table shows the control panel settings and their default values. These items are included in the “Host Interface” menu. *1 If DHCP is in use, IP address and Subnet mask are automatically set. Procedures vary depending on the protocol you use. See the following table. Press the Menu key. The menu appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the “Host Interface” menu. Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “IEEE 1394 Setup”. Setting Name Value DHCP On IP Address1394 *1 000.000.000.000 Subnet Mask1394 *1 000.000.000.000 IP over 1394 Active SCSI print Active Bidi-SCSI print Active IP over 1394 Steps A-H, and then proceed to steps M to N SCSI print Steps A-D, and then proceed to steps I to N Menu: Host Interface Host Interface: I/O Buffer Host Interface: IEEE 1394 Setup ACE082S ACE083SIEEE 1394 Interface Board 51 4 Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “IP over 1394”. A Press the # Enter key. B Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select either “Active” or “Not Active”. C Press the # Enter key. After a few seconds, the display returns to the previous menu. Assign the IP address to the printer. Do not overlap the IP address in the same subnet or the same IP address in the network setting. Note ? To get the IP address for the printer, contact your network administrator. A Press the {UU} or {TT} key until t h e f o l l o w i n g m e s s a g e a p - pears: B Press the # Enter key. The current IP address appears on the display. C Press the {UU} or {TT} key to enter the leftmost entry field of the IP address. D Press the # Enter key. The cursor (k) moves to the next entry field automatically. Note ? The value changes in increments of 10 if the {UU} or {TT} key is kept pressed. ? You can return the cursor (k) to the previous (l eft ) ent ry f i e l d b y p r e s s i n g t h e E s - cape key. ? If you press the Escape key when the cursor (k) is in the leftmost position, the selected IP address is reset. E Repeat steps and to enter the IP address. Check the cursor (k) is in the r ig h tmo s t p o s i t io n , a n d th en press the # Enter key to register the IP address you selected. Set “Subnet Mask1394” in the same way. IEEE 1394 Setup: IP Address1394 IEEE 1394 Setup: IP over 1394 IEEE 1394 Setup: IP Address1394 IP Address1394: 000.000.000.000 IP Address1394: 192.000.000.000 IP Address1394: 192.02k.000.000 IP Address1394: 192.168.000.011 IEEE 1394 Setup: IP Address1394Installing Options 52 4 Set “SCSI print” and “Bidi-SCSI print” if necessary. Note ? Default is “Active”. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “SCSI print”. Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select either “Active” or “Not Active”, and then press the # Enter key. Set “Bidi-SCSI print” in the same way. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Print a configuration page to confirm the settings made. See p.23 “Test Printing”. IEEE 1394 Setup: SCSI print SCSI print: *Active Ready IEEE 1284 Interface Board 53 4 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Important ? Before handling the IEEE 1284 interface board, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static electricity. Static e le c tr ic i ty can damage th e IEEE 1284 interface board. ? Do not subject the IEEE 1284 interface board to physical shocks. Check the contents of the box. IEEE 1284 Interface Board Adaptor Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable, and then interface cable. Slowly open the front cover of the printer, remove the green screwdriver, and then close the cover. Reference p.37 “Using the Screwdriver” Remove the screws by turning them counterclockwise with the provided screwdriver, and then remove the cover of the IEEE 1284 interface board port. The r emov ed s c r e ws and cove r will not be needed now but save them in case the cover needs to be reattached. I n s e r t t h e I E E E 12 8 4 i n t e r f a c e board until it stops, and then sec u r e i t b y t i g h t e n i n g i t s t w o screws. ABT041S1 ACE091S ABT034S1 ABT042S1Installing Options 54 4 Note ? After finishing the installation, you can check the IEEE 1284 interface board is installed prope r l y : P r i n t t h e c o n f i g u r a t i o n page from the “List/Test Print” menu, and then check the items in “System Reference”. If it is installed properly, you will see “Parallel Interface” appear under “Controller Option”. ? If the IEEE 1284 interface board is not installed properly, repeat the procedure from step A. If you cannot install it properly even after reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative. Reference p.23 “Test Printing” Parallel Connection Use an interface cable to connect the printer to the computer with a parallel connection. The parallel interface cable is not provided with the printer. Note ? The printer's parallel connection is a standard bidirectional interface. It requires a standard 36-pin parallel cable compliant with IEEE 1284, a n d a p a r a l l e l p o r t o n t h e h o s t computer. ? Use shielded interface cables. Using unshielded cables could result in radio interference noise. Turn off the printer and computer. Connect the cable to the adaptor, and then attach the adaptor to the interface connector of the IEEE 1284 interface board. Important ? Voltage rating of the parallel port for the computer: max. DC 5V. Attach the other end of the parallel cable to the port of the computer. Secure the cable. For details about settings for parallel connection printing, see Printer Client Reference. ABT048S1IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit 55 4 IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Important ? Before handling the IEEE 802.11b interface unit, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static electricity. Static e le c tr ic i ty can damage th e IEEE 802.11b interface unit. ? Do not subject the IEEE 802.11b interface unit to physical shocks. Limitation ? The IEEE 802.11b interface unit and Ethernet interface cannot be used at the same time. ? If problems occur with printing d u e t o o f p o o r ra d i o r e c e p t i o n , connect an external antenna. Check the contents of the box. Note ? The external antenna (not shown) is supplied, but it cannot be used with the printer. IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit • Interface Unit • Card • Antenna • Antenna Cap Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable and interface cable. Slowly open the front cover of the printer, remove the green screwdriver, and then close the cover. Reference p.37 “Using the Screwdriver” ABT005S1 ABT006S1 ABT007S1 ACE092SInstalling Options 56 4 Remove the screws by turning them counterclockwise with the provided screwdriver, and then r e m o v e t h e c o v e r o f t h e I E E E 802.11b interface unit slot. Insert the interface unit until it stops, and then secure it by tightening its two screws. With the labeled side of the card facing down and the ridged side of the antenna facing up, attach the antenna to the card. Hold the card so the ridged side of the antenna is on the right, and then slowly insert the card into the interface unit until it stops. Hold the antenna cap with the cuts on both corners towards you and attach it to the card. Note ? Be sure to return the provided screwdriver to its original position on the inside of the front cover. ? If the wireless signal is weak and printing is affected by it, attach an external antenna. ? After finishing the installation, you can check the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed prope r l y : P r i n t t h e c o n f i g u r a t i o n page from the “List/Test Print” menu, and check the items in “System Reference”. If it is installed properly, you will see “IEEE 802.11b” appear under “Controller Option”. ? If the IEEE 802.11b interface unit is not installed properly, repeat the procedure from step A. If you cannot install it properly even after repeat the procedure, c o n t a c t y o u r s a l e s o r s e r v i c e representative. Reference p.23 “Test Printing” ABT034S1 ABT035S1 ABT036S1 ABT037S1IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit 57 4 IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) Configuration Configure the printer to use the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN). The following table shows the control panel settings and their default values. These items are included in the “Host Interface” menu. To us e th e IEEE 802 .11b (w i r e l e s s L A N ) , s e l e c t “I E E E 8 0 2 . 1 1 b” f o r “LAN Type” in “Network Setup” of the “Host Interface” menu, and then s e t “I P Ad d r e s s”, “S u bn e t Ma s k”, “G a t e w a y A d d r e s s”, “D H C P”, “Frame Type (NW)” and “Active Protocol” in the “Network Setup”. For details about setting the items in the “Network Setup”, see p.27 “Configuring the Printer for the Network using the Control Panel”. Limitation ? The IEEE 802.11b interface unit c an n o t b e u s e d s im u l t an e o u s l y with a standard Ethernet interface. Press the Menu key. The menu appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Host Interface” menu. Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “IEEE 802.11b”. Setting Name Default Value Comm. Mode 802.11 Ad hoc Channel • Inch version (1-11) 11 • Metric version (1-13) 11 Trans. Speed Auto SSID View WEP Setting Not Active Menu: Host Interface Host Interface: I/O Buffer Host Interface: IEEE 802.11b ACE082S ACE083SInstalling Options 58 4 Press the # Enter key. Ch e c k t ha t “Co mm . Mo d e” a p - pears on the display. Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select the transmission mode. Note ? Default is “802.11 Ad hoc”. ? To use an IEEE 802.11b card for w h i c h t h e S S I D ( N e t w o r k Name) setting is not necessary, select “Ad hoc”. Press the # Enter key. After a few seconds, the display returns to the previous menu. If “802.11 Ad hoc” or “Ad hoc” is selected for “Comm. Mode”, set the channel for transmission. Note ? Check with the network admini s t r a t o r a bo u t t h e c h an n e l t o use. A Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Channel”. B Press the # Enter key. The channel currently in use appears on the display. C Press the {UU} or {TT} key to enter the channel. D Press the # Enter key. Set “Trans. Speed” in the same way. Note ? Default is “Auto”. If you need to change the transmitting speed depending on the environment you are using, select the appropriate speed. If "Infrastructure" or "802.11 Ad h o c " i s s e l e c t e d f o r " C o m m . Mode", set SSID to use for transmission. Note ? Confirm the network administrator for SSID to use. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “SSID”, and then press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Note ? Default is “ASSID”. ? If an SSID has been set, you can check it. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “View”, and then press the # Enter key. IEEE 802.11b: Comm. Mode Comm. Mode: *802.11 Ad hoc IEEE 802.11b: Channel Channel: (1-11) 11 IEEE 802.11b: SSID SSID: Enter IDIEEE 802.11b Interface Unit 59 4 A Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Note ? The value in brackets at the u p p e r r i g h t i n d i c a t e s t h e n u m b e r o f c h a r a c t e r s e n - tered. B Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select characters, and then press the # Enter key. The cursor (k) moves to the next character position. C Continue entering. Note ? Usable characters are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes). ? If you press the Escape key, the cursor (k) moves to the previous character position. D After entering, press the # Enter key twice. The screen returns to step L. In the case of using a WEP key on a network, activate the WEP setting to be used for communication along with WEP. Note ? Confirm the network administrator for the WEP Key to use. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “WEP Setting”. A Press the # Enter key. B Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Active”, and then press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Note ? When setting WEP to “Active”, you need to enter the WEP key. If you have not entered the key, be sure to enter it. ? If you have entered the WEP key, and then change the setting, press the {UU } or {TT } k e y t o d i s p l a y “N o”, a n d then press the # Enter key. C Press the # Enter key. SSID: [ 0] k SSID: [ 1] A SSID: [ 1] Ak SSID: [32] AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA IEEE 802.11b: WEP Setting WEP Setting: *Not Active WEP Setting: Active Change WEP Key: Yes (HEX)Installing Options 60 4 D Pressing the {UU} or {TT} key causes the [Yes (HEX)] to be displayed when performing hexadecimal input using the WEB key and [Yes (ASCII)] when performing input using a ASCII string. Next, press the # Enter key. Note ? The value in brackets at the u p p e r r i g h t i n d i c a t e s t h e n u m b e r o f c h a r a c t e r s e n - tered. E Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select characters, and then press the # Enter key. The cursor (k) moves to the next character position. F Continue entering. Note ? When using 64 bit WEP, up to 10 characters can be used for hexadecimal input and u p t o f i v e c h a r a c t e r s f o r ASCII strings. When using 128 bit WEP, up to 26 characters can be used for hexadeci m a l i n p u t a n d u p t o 1 3 characters for ASCII strings. ? The numbe r of charac t er s that can be entered is limited to 10 or 26 for hexadecimal input and 5 or 13 for ASCII strings. When trying to complete the entering procedure with a different number of c h a r a c t e r s , t h e f o l l o w i n g message will be displayed in the panel. • In the case of hexadecimal input • In the case of an ASCII character string ? If you press the Escape key, the cursor (k) moves to the previous character position. G After entering, press the # Enter key. The screen returns to step N. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Print a configuration page to confirm the settings made. See p.23 “Test Printing”. WEP Key: [ 0] k WEP Key: [ 1] 0 WEP Key: [ 1] 0k Error: Enter 10 or 26 characters Error: Enter 5 or 13 characters WEP Key: [26] 0000000000000000 Ready Bluetooth Interface Unit 61 4 Bluetooth Interface Unit Important ? Only Bluetooth-equipped computers support printing with the Bluetooth interface unit. ? Before handling the Bluetooth interface unit, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge static electricity. Static electricity can damage the Bluetooth interface unit. ? Do not subject the Bluetooth interface unit to physical shocks. Reference T h e ma nu a l p r o v i d e d wi t h t h e Bluetooth interface unit. Check the contents of the box. Bluetooth • Interface Unit • Card • Antenna Cap Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable and interface cable. Slowly open the front cover of the printer, remove the green screwdriver, and then close the cover. Reference p.37 “Using the Screwdriver” Remove the screws by turning them counterclockwise with the provided screwdriver, and then remove the cover of the Bluetooth interface unit slot. ABT005S1 ZHBP510E ZHBPA921E ABT034S1Installing Options 62 4 Insert the interface unit until it stops, and then secure it by tightening its two screws. Chec k the B l ue tooth inte r fa ce un i t i s connec ted f i rmly to the controller board. With the side labeled INSERT on the right, slowly insert the card into the Bluetooth interface unit, until it stops. Press the antenna to extend it. Attach the antenna cap to the card. Note ? Be sure to return the provided screwdriver to its original position on the inside of the front cover. ? After finishing the installation, you can check the Bluetooth interface unit is installed properly: Print the configuration page f r o m t h e “L i s t / T e s t P r i n t” menu. If it is installed properly, you will see “Bluetooth” appear under “Controller Option”. ? If the Bluetooth interface unit is not installed properly, repeat the procedure from step A. If you cannot install it properly even after reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative. Reference p.23 “Test Printing” ABT035S1 ABT039S1 ABT040S1User Account Enhance Unit 63 4 User Account Enhance Unit R CAUTION: Note ? Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer or an appropriate collection site. An IC19 lithium battery is contained inside the user account enhance unit. ? If you are disposing of the unit, separate the IC19 lithium battery f r o m t h e b o a r d a n d d i s p o s e o f t h em ac co rd ing to lo ca l r egu lations. Important ? Before handling the user account enhance unit, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static electricity. Static electricity can damage the user account enhance unit. ? Do not subject the user account enhance unit to physical shocks. Check the contents of the box. User Account Enhance Unit Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Slowly open the front cover of the printer, remove the green screwdriver, and then close the cover. Reference p.37 “Using the Screwdriver” Remove the four screws fastening the controller board to the back of the printer, using the provided screwdriver. The removed screws will be used later to fasten the controller board. • Do not place the user account enhance unit near or into fire, as the lithium battery inside this machine will explode and cause a burn. • The user account enhance unit installed on the controller has a IC19 lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the user account enhance unit only with the indicated one. ABT012S1 ABT022S1Installing Options 64 4 Holding the handle, slowly pull out the controller board. Put the controller board down on a flat surface. You must install the user account e nh a n c e un i t i n t h e p o s i t io n a s shown. Make sure the arrow on the user account enhance unit and the arrow on the controller board face each other , and then in ser t the user account enhance unit. Important ? Do not insert the unit the other way as it may be damaged. Check the user account enhance unit is connected firmly to the controller board. Align the controller board with the top and bottom rails, and then push it in using the part marked "PUSH" until it stops. Tighten the four screws fastening the controller board back into its original position, using the provided screwdriver. ABT023S1 ABT032S1 ABT033S1 ACE060S ABT026S1 ABT027S1User Account Enhance Unit 65 4 Note ? Be sure to return the provided screwdriver to its original position on the inside of the front cover. ? After finishing the installation, you can check the user account enhance unit is installed properly: Print the configuration page f r o m t h e “L i s t / T e s t P r i n t” menu. If it is installed properly, you will see “Accounting Module” appear under “Controller Option”. ? If the user account enhance unit is not installed properly, repeat the procedure from step A. If you cannot install it properly even after reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative. Reference p.23 “Test Printing”Installing Options 66 4 Printer Hard Disk Important ? Before handling the printer hard disk, ground yourself by touching something metal to discharge any static electricity. Static electricity can damage the printer hard disk. ? Do not subject the printer hard disk to physical shocks. Check the contents of the box. Printer Hard Disk Flat Cable Power Cable Three Screws Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Slowly open the front cover of the p r i n t e r , a n d r emo v e t h e g r e e n screwdriver, and then close the cover. Reference p.37 “Using the Screwdriver” Remove the four screws fastening the controller board to the back of the printer, using the provided screwdriver. The removed screws will be used later to fasten the controller board. Holding the handle, slowly pull out the controller board. ACE093S ACE094S ACE095S ABT051S1 ABT022S1 ABT023S1Printer Hard Disk 67 4 Tighten the three screws fastening the printer hard disk to the controller board, using the provided screwdriver. Connect the power cable and flat cable to the printer hard disk. Connect the power cable and flat cable to the controller board. Align the controller board with the top and bottom rails, and then push it in using the port marked "PUSH" until it stops. Tighten the four screws fastening the controller board back into its original position, using the provided screwdriver. The printer hard disk automaticall y b e g i n s f o rm a t t i n g w h e n t h e printer is switched on. Note ? Be sure to return the provided screwdriver to its original position on the inside of the front cover. ABT029S1 ABT030S1 ABT031S1 ABT026S1 ABT027S1Installing Options 68 4 ? After finishing the installation, you can check the printer hard disk is installed properly: Print the configuration page from the “L i s t / T e s t P r i n t” m e n u a n d check the items in “System Reference”. If it is installed properly, you will see “Printer Hard D i s k D r i v e” a p p e a r u n d e r “Controller Option”. ? If the printer hard disk is not installed properly, repeat the proc e d u r e f r o m s t e p A. I f y o u cannot install it properly even after reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative. Formatting the Printer Hard Disk Drive If it becomes necessary to format the printer hard disk after initial setup, execute “HD Format” in the “Maintenance” menu. Important ? Formatting the printer hard disk will delete all data. Press the Menu key. The menu appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “ Ma intenance”, and then press the # Enter key. The menu for selecting “Maintenance” items appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “HD Format”, and then press the # Enter key. A check message appears. Note ? If “HD Format” is not displayed on the display, the printer hard disk is not installed properly. Repeat the procedure from step A. See p.66 “Printer Hard Disk”. If you still cannot install it properly, contact your sales or service representative. Important ? To avoid malfunction do not turn of f the powe r wh il e for - matting the printer hard disk. Press the # Enter key. The printer hard disk is formatted, and a restart message appears. Turn off the power once, and then turn the power back on. The p r int e r hard d i sk format i s completed, and now ready for use. ACE082S Menu: Maintenance Maintenance: HD FormatDuplex Unit Type 7100 69 4 Duplex Unit Type 7100 Preparation To use the optional paper feed unit at the same time, install the optional paper feed unit first, and then install the duplex unit. R CAUTION: R CAUTION: Installing the Duplex Reversal Unit Stand Check the contents of the box. Stand Paper Guide One Short Screw, Four Long Screws Duplex Reversal Unit Duplex Feed Unit Remove the adhesive tape and packing materials. Important ? Do not remove the adhesive tape holding the auxiliary bar yet. Remove it in step C on p.72 “Installing the Duplex Reversal Unit”. • The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts labelled “hot surface”. Touching a “hot surface” could result in a burn. • Do not let go of the duplex reversal unit until it is fastened in place. It could fall and cause injury.Installing Options 70 4 ? Do not remove the adhesive tape holding the cable of the duplex reversal unit yet. Remove it in step G on p.72 “Installing the Duplex Reversal Unit”. Turn off the power, and then unp lu g t he po we r c a b le f rom th e wall outlet. Slowly open the front cover of the printer, remove the green screwdriver, and then close the cover. Reference p.37 “Using the Screwdriver” Lift the external tray in the direction of the arrow ( ), and then remove ( ). Remove the two small covers on the upper left cover of the printer. A Open the upper left cover. B Remove the two small covers by pinching and pulling them in the direction of the arrow. C Close the upper left cover. Note ? You cannot use the two removed covers. ZDJP711J ZHXH221J ZDJP038J ZHXH230J ZHXH241JDuplex Unit Type 7100 71 4 Remove the protective cover on the left side of the printer. Hold the protective cover by both sides, and while pushing the left side of the cover ( ), open it in the direction of the arrow ( ), and then remove ( ). Note ? You cannot use the removed protective cover. Attach the paper guide to the stand. Hold it so that the right side bends down as shown, and then while gripping lightly ( ), insert it into the holes of the stand ( ). Remove the protective covers over the holes on the left side of the pr in ter . In ser t the c laws o f the stand into the holes ( ), and then push down ( ). Tighten the four long screws fastening the duplex reversal unit stand, using provided screwdrive r . F a s t e n i n t h e o r d e r o f , as shown. This completes installation of the stand. Next, install the duplex reversal unit. ZDJP041J ZDJP042J ZDJP043J ZDJP044JInstalling Options 72 4 Installing the Duplex Reversal Unit Using both hands, hold the duplex reversal unit level, and then insert the hooks into the groove of t h e s ta n d . Al i g n th e h o o k t ip s w i t h t h e l i n e o n t h e s t a n d , a s shown, and then inser t s lowly. Do not let go of the duplex reversal unit even after insertion. The hooks of the duplex reversal unit clip around the bar inside the groove of the stand. While supporting the duplex reversal unit, remove the stopper the printer's mounting bracket. This stopper will be used in a later step E, so take care not to lose it. While supporting the duplex reversal unit, remove the adhesive tape, and then hold the auxiliary bar in front of the hook on the left side, and then stand it up. Hook the hole of the auxiliary bar o n t o t h e p r i n t e r ' s m o u n t i n g bracket. In step E, move the auxiliary bar to the position with the perforated line, as shown. ZHXH250J ZDJP046J ZDJP047J ZDJP048JDuplex Unit Type 7100 73 4 Hang the auxiliary bar on the far left end, as shown, and then install the stopper removed in step . Make sure the auxiliary bar and stopper are installed in the positions, as shown. Slowly raise the duplex reversal unit, and then fold it up to the printer. Remove the adhesive tape holdings the cable, and then connect the cable from the duplex reversal unit to the upper connector on the back of the printer. This completes installation of the duplex reversal unit. Install the duplex feed unit after the external tray. Install the external tray. A Stand the external tray, and then insert it from the left side using both hands. B Pushing the right edge of the external tray lightly with your finger ( ), insert it ( ). C Lower the external tray toward you. ZDJP049J ZDJP050J ZHXH260J ZHXH270J ZDJP053J ZHXH280JInstalling Options 74 4 Installing the Duplex Feed Unit Slowly open the front cover by pulling on the two areas on the left and right. Carefully pivot the waste oil bottle outward, in the direction of the arrow. R CAUTION: Holding the duplex feed unit using both hands , plac e it on the v e r t i c a l r a i l , a n d t h e n s l i d e i t slowly in until it stops. The vertical rail is in the position, as shown. Fasten the duplex feed unit using a short screw and the provided screwdriver. • Keep the waste oil bottle away from flames. There is a risk of fire or burns. ZDJH007J ZHXH150J ZHXH290J ZHXH300J ZHXH310JDuplex Unit Type 7100 75 4 Note ? Be sure to return the provided screwdriver to its original position on the inside of the front cover. This completes installation of the duplex feed unit. Carefully push back the waste oil bottle in the direction of the arrow. Slowly close the front cover slowly by pressing the two areas on the left and right. Note ? After finishing the installation, you can check the duplex unit is i n s t a l l e d p r o p e r l y : P r i n t t h e c o n f i g u r a t i o n p a g e f r om t h e “List/Test Print” menu. If it is installed properly, you will see “Dup l e x Un i t” appe ar in the “Options” list. ? If the duplex unit is not installed properly, repeat the procedure from step A. If you cannot install it properly even after reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative. Reference p.23 “Test Printing” Check for leftover parts. You will not need these. ZHXH160J ZDJH041J ZHXH011N76 INDEX 1394 Interface Board, 48 A Access Control Address, 27 Access Control Mask, 27 B Bluetooth Interface Unit, 61 Booklet Finisher/2 Tray Finisher Port, 3 Bypass Tray, 1 Bypass Tray Extension, 1 C Checking the Contents of the Box, 10 Configuration Page, 23 Connecting the Printer, 25 Connecting to a Network, 25 Connector, 3 Controller Board, 1 Control Panel, 1, 5 D Development Unit, 4 Display Language, 22 Duplex Unit Duplex Feed Unit, 35 Duplex Reversal Unit, 35 Duplex Unit Port, 3 Duplex Unit Type 7100, 69 Dustproof Filter, 3 E Energy Star, vii Ethernet, 27 Ethernet Port, 1 External Tray, 3 F Frame type NetWare, 27 Front Cover, 1 Fuser Oil Unit, 4, 14 Fusing Unit, 4 G Gateway Address, 27 Guide to the Printer Control Panel, 5 Exterior -Front View, 1 Exterior -Rear View, 3 Interior, 4 I IEEE 1284 Interface Board, 53 IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit, 55 Inner Cover, 4 Installing Options, 33 Installing the Duplex Unit Duplex Feed Unit, 74 Duplex Reversal Unit, 72 Stand, 69 Installing the Paper Feed Unit, 38 IP address, 27 L Loading Paper, 18 M Memory Unit (SDRAM Module), 36, 46 N Network, 27 P Paper Bank PS470 (2000-sheet Large Capacity Tray), 20 Paper Bank Type 7100 (2000-sheet Large Capacity Tray), 35 Paper Bank Type7100 (2000-sheet Large Capacity Tray), 43 Paper Feed Unit Type 3800C (500 × 1), 18 Paper Feed Unit Type 3800C (500 × 2), 18 Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 × 1), 35, 38 Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 × 2), 35, 41 Parallel Connection, 54 Photoconductor Unit, 4 Power Port, 3 Power Switch, 1 Printer Hard Disk, 36, 6677 R Reading the LED Lamps, 25 Right Cover, 1 S Safety Information, ii Screwdriver, 37 Setting Up, 7 SR770(2 Tray Finisher)/ SR910(Booklet Finisher), 35 Standard Tray, 1 Subnet Mask, 27 T Test Printing, 23 Toner Cartridge, 4, 16 Tray 1, 1, 18 Tray 2, 1, 18 Turning the Power On, 21 U Unpacking, 12 Upper Cover, 1 Upper Left Cover, 3 Upper Right Cover, 1 User Account Enhance Unit, 36, 63 V Vent, 1 Vents, 3 W Waste Oil Bottle, 4 Waste Toner Bottle, 4 Where to Put the Printer, 778 EN USA G106-7525Note to users in the United States of America Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help. Caution: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Declaration of Conformity Product Name: Laser Printer Model Number: Aficio CL7100/CLP35/C7435n/LP235c Responsible party: Ricoh Corporation Address: 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006 Telephone number: 973-882-2000 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to a host computer (and/or peripheral) in order to meet FCC emission limits. 2. An AC adapter with a ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression. Note to users in Canada Note: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada Avertissement: Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch: means POWER ON. means POWER OFF. means STAND-BY Notice to Wireless LAN Interface (option) Users: 802.11b Interface Unit Type C Notes to users It is strictly forbidden to use antenna(s) except designated. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm (8 inches) from all persons and must not be located near other antennas or transmitters. Notes to users in the United States of America This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Warning Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Note to users in Canada This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. The term " IC: " before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada Ce dispositif est conforme à la norme CNR-210 d'Industrie Canada. L'expression << IC: >> avant le numéro d'homologation/enregistrement signifie seulement que les spécifications techniques d'Industrie Canada ont été respectées. Pour empêcher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit être utilisé à l'intérieur et devrait être placé loin des fenêtres afin de fournir un écran de blindage maximal. Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. L'utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes: (1)il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l'utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. Copyright © 2004EN USA G106-75251 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference Introduction ..........................................................................................................................................7 How to Read This Manual...................................................................................................................9 Checking the Network Environment ................................................................................................11 Windows Configuration................................................................................................................................... 13 Macintosh Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 21 UNIX Configuration ........................................................................................................................................ 21 1. Windows 95/98/Me Configuration Printing Using a Print Server............................................................................................................22 Printing Using a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server.................... 22 Printing without a Print Server.........................................................................................................28 Configuring Protocols...................................................................................................................................... 28 Installing Software........................................................................................................................................... 31 Printing via Parallel Connection.......................................................................................................43 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................................................. 43 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver............................................................................................................ 45 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ..........................................................................................47 Windows 98 SE/Me - Installing the Printer Driver Using USB...................................................................... 47 Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 ...............................................................................49 Printing via IP over 1394 ................................................................................................................................. 49 Setting Up Options .............................................................................................................................51Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 2 2. Windows 2000 Configuration Printing Using a Print Server............................................................................................................54 Printing Using a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server.................... 54 Printing without a Print Server.........................................................................................................60 Configuring Protocols...................................................................................................................................... 60 Installing Software........................................................................................................................................... 63 Printing via Parallel Connection.......................................................................................................75 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................................................. 75 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver............................................................................................................ 77 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ..........................................................................................79 Windows 2000 - Installing the Printer Driver Using USB .............................................................................. 79 Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 ...............................................................................80 Printing via SCSI print..................................................................................................................................... 80 Setting Up Options .............................................................................................................................84 3. Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Configuration Printing Using a Print Server............................................................................................................87 Printing Using a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server.................... 87 Printing without a Print Server.........................................................................................................93 Configuring Protocols...................................................................................................................................... 93 Installing Software........................................................................................................................................... 95 Printing via Parallel Connection.....................................................................................................106 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver............................................................................................... 106 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver.......................................................................................................... 108 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ........................................................................................110 Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Installing the Printer Driver Using USB ......................................... 110Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 3 Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 .............................................................................111 Printing via SCSI print................................................................................................................................... 111 Printing via IP over 1394 ............................................................................................................................... 114 Setting Up Options ...........................................................................................................................115 4. Windows NT 4.0 Configuration Printing Using a Print Server..........................................................................................................118 Printing Using a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server.................. 118 Printing without a Print Server.......................................................................................................124 Configuring Protocols.................................................................................................................................... 124 Installing Software......................................................................................................................................... 127 Printing via Parallel Connection.....................................................................................................139 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver............................................................................................... 139 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver.......................................................................................................... 141 Setting Up Options ...........................................................................................................................143 5. Macintosh Configuration Mac OS ..............................................................................................................................................145 Installing the Printer Driver and Software..................................................................................................... 146 Using USB Interface...................................................................................................................................... 153 Mac OS X ..........................................................................................................................................155 Installing the PPD File................................................................................................................................... 155 Setting Up the PPD File................................................................................................................................. 156 Setting Up Options ........................................................................................................................................ 156 Using USB Interface...................................................................................................................................... 156 Using Rendezvous ......................................................................................................................................... 157Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 4 Configuring Macintosh ....................................................................................................................158 Changing to EtherTalk................................................................................................................................... 158 Configuring the Printer .................................................................................................................................. 159 Changing the Printer Name ........................................................................................................................... 159 Changing the Zone......................................................................................................................................... 160 6. NetWare Configuration Windows 95/98/Me ...........................................................................................................................161 Windows 2000 ...................................................................................................................................164 Windows XP......................................................................................................................................167 Windows NT 4.0................................................................................................................................170 7. Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM .........................................................................173 Printer Drivers for This Printer......................................................................................................175 SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin .....................................................................................................178 SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ......................................................................................................181 8. Setting up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job PCL 5c - Accessing Printer Properties ...........................................................................................184 Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing Printer Properties....................................................................................... 184 Windows 2000 - Accessing Printer Properties .............................................................................................. 186 Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Printer properties ........................................................... 190 Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing Printer Properties........................................................................................... 193Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 5 RPCS - Accessing Printer Properties .............................................................................................196 Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing Printer Properties....................................................................................... 196 Windows 2000 - Accessing Printer Properties .............................................................................................. 199 Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Printer Properties ........................................................... 202 Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing Printer Properties........................................................................................... 205 PostScript 3 - Setting up for Printing .............................................................................................208 Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing Printer Properties....................................................................................... 208 Windows 2000 - Accessing Printer Properties .............................................................................................. 210 Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Printer Properties ........................................................... 214 Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing Printer Properties........................................................................................... 217 Macintosh - Setting up for Printing ............................................................................................................... 220 Canceling a Print Job.......................................................................................................................222 Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0 - Canceling a Print Job ............... 222 Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job................................................................................................................. 224 9. Sample Print/Locked Print Sample Print......................................................................................................................................226 Printing Remaining Sets ................................................................................................................................ 228 Deleting a Sample Print File.......................................................................................................................... 230 Checking the Error Log ................................................................................................................................. 232 Locked Print......................................................................................................................................234 Printing a Locked Print File........................................................................................................................... 236 Deleting a Locked Print File.......................................................................................................................... 238 Checking the Error log................................................................................................................................... 240Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 6 10.Checking Printer Status SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ......................................................................................................242 Web Image Monitor .........................................................................................................................243 11.Appendix Color Guide.......................................................................................................................................244 Color Printing Basics ..................................................................................................................................... 244 Printing a PDF File Directly ............................................................................................................247 Printing Method ............................................................................................................................................. 247 Printing with Bluetooth Connection ...............................................................................................249 Printing with Bluetooth Connection .............................................................................................................. 249 Staple and Punch Position ...............................................................................................................254 Stapling .......................................................................................................................................................... 254 Punching ........................................................................................................................................................ 257 Collate and Job Separation..............................................................................................................261 Precautions When Using Windows Server 2003............................................................................263 Precautions When Using the Terminal Server Mode .................................................................................... 263 Installing the Font Manager 2000 ...................................................................................................264 Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0 ..........................................................................265 INDEX .................................................................................................................................2667 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference Introduction This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine. To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS. Trademarks AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Novell, NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated. PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. 3Com is a trade mark of 3Com corporation. Bluetooth is a Trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. (Special Interest Group) and licensed to RICOH Company Limited. The Bluetooth Trademarks are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. USA Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks. The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows: • The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows 95. • The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98. • The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me). • The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server Microsoft® Windows® 2000 ProfessionalOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 8 • The product names of Windows® XP are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition • The product names of Windows Server TM 2003 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Web Edition • The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0 • Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0 Notes: Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine. Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer. Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.9 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference How to Read This Manual Symbols The following set of symbols is used in this manual. R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section. R CAUTION: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in minor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section. * The statements above are notes for your safety. Important If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicates information or preparations required prior to operating. Note This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after abnormal operation. Limitation This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together, or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 10 Reference This symbol indicates a reference. [ ] Keys that appear on the machine's display panel. [ ] Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display. { } Keys built into the machine's control panel. { } Keys on the computer's keyboard.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 11 Checking the Network Environment NetWare (Server) Windows 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 (Server) Macintosh NetWare (Client) UNIX Windows 95/98/ Me/2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 ACE018SOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 12 Connecting Printer and Computer • Network connection (Ethernet cable, IEEE 1394 cable (IP over 1394), IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)) • Parallel connection (parallel cable) • USB connection (USB cable) • IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) connection (IEEE 1394 cable) • Bluetooth TM connectionOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 13 Windows Configuration Connecting a Print Server • See p.22 “Printing Using a Print Server” in “Windows 95/98/Me Configuration”. • See p.54 “Printing Using a Print Server” in “Windows 2000 Configuration”. • See p.87 “Printing Using a Print Server” in “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Configuration”. • See p.118 “Printing Using a Print Server” in “Windows NT 4.0 Configuration”. Windows 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 Print Server Print Server Windows 95/98/Me/ 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 ACE019SOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 14 Network Connection(Ethernet) ACE063S Windows 95/98/Me/ Windows Server 2003 2000/XP Windows NT 4.0 MacintoshOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 15 Network Connection (IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)) Windows Me/XP Windows Server 2003 ACE064SOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 16 • IEEE 802.11b ?ad hoc mode access point ?infrastructure modeOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 17 Interface supported protocols ? the protocol is supported. × the protocol is not supported. *1 If the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed, you cannot use ad hoc mode. • See p.28 “Printing without a Print Server” in “Windows 95/98/Me Configuration”. • See p.60 “Printing without a Print Server” in “Windows 2000 Configuration”. • See p.93 “Printing without a Print Server” in “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Configuration”. • See p.124 “Printing without a Print Server” in “Windows NT 4.0 Configuration”. Interface Ethernet IEEE 802.11b IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) Protocol TCP/IP ? ? ? NetBEUI ? ? × NetWare ? ? *1 × AppleTalk ? ? ×Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 18 Parallel Connection • See p.43 “Printing via Parallel Connection” in “Windows 95/ 98/ Me Configuration”. • See p.75 “Printing via Parallel Connection” in “Windows 2000 Configuration”. • See p.106 “Printing via Parallel Connection” in “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Configuration”. • See p.139 “Printing via Parallel Connection” in “Windows NT 4.0 Configuration”. Windows 95/98/Me/ 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 ACE066SOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 19 USB Connection • See p.47 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB” in “Windows 95/ 98/ Me Configuration”. • See p.79 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB” in “Windows 2000 Configuration”. • See p.110 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB” in “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Configuration”. Windows 98 SE/Me/ 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 ACE067SOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 20 IEEE 1394 Connection • See p.49 “Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394” in “Windows 95/ 98/ Me Configuration”. • See p.80 “Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394” in “Windows 2000 Configuration”. • See p.111 “Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394” in “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Configuration”. Connecting a NetWare Server See p.161 “NetWare Configuration”. SCSI printOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 21 Macintosh Configuration See p.145 “Macintosh Configuration”. UNIX Configuration For UNIX printing information, please visit our Web site or consult your authorized retailer.22 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 1. Windows 95/98/Me Configuration Printing Using a Print Server Printing Using a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server This section describes procedures for setting up a client on a network using Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 as a print server. To print from Windows 95/98/Me, you must install the printer driver and change the printer port connection to the print server. Windows 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 Print Server ACE069SOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 23 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Preparation To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting “Network printer server”, and then select the Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 shared printer. For more information about how to install and settings, see Administrator Reference. This section assumes the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 print server. Do not begin the following procedure until the client is set up and configured correctly. Limitation ? When using a print server connected to the printer via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing. ? When using Windows XP as a print server, the client computer cannot receive notification of print job completion. Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 24 Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box for the model(s) of printer you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Click [Port], and then click [Add]. Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK]. Double-click the computer name you want to use as the print server in the [Browse for Printer] window.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 25 Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Make sure the location for the selected printer is displayed after [Port]. Configure the user code and default printer as necessary. User Code The procedure to specify the user code may differ depending on the printer language. • RPCS You can specify the user code when installing the printer driver. You cannot register or edit the user code from the printer driver dialog box. To change the user code, you must uninstall the printer driver, and then register the new user code during the re-install process. • PCL 5c You can specify the user code with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See the printer driver's Help. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.52 “Bidirectional transmission”.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 26 Reference For more information about option settings, see p.51 “Setting Up Options”. Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, SuomiOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 27 Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. Click [Next>]. Click [Network Printer], and then click [Next>]. Click [Browse]. Double-click the computer name you want to use as the print server in the [Browse for Printer] window. Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. After confirming the location for the selected printer shown, click [Next>]. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next>]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Click [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer. Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish]. The installation is complete. Note ? You can specify the user code with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See the printer driver's Help. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.51 “Setting Up Options”. Restart the computer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 28 Printing without a Print Server Preparation To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface or IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface, select “SmartDeviceMonitor” when installing the printer driver. Configuring Protocols Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing Follow these instructions to configure the printer and Windows 95/98/Me to use TCP/IP and IPP. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use TCP/IP. • Check TCP/IP is set to active. (The default is active.) • Assign an IP address and make other settings required for TCP/IP. Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide. If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see Appendix, “When Using DHCP”, Administrator Reference. Under Windows Me, when you want to use IP over 1394, see Setup Guide.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 29 Note ? After setting the IP address, use the ping command to check it is set correctly. A Windows 95/98 Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [MS-DOS Prompt]. B Windows Me Click [Start], point to [Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click [MS-DOS Prompt]. C Enter the following: (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) C:> ping 192.168.15.16 If the address is configured correctly, the following message appears: Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32 If the address is configured incorrectly, the following message appears: Request timed out. Configuring a Windows 95/98/Me computer Follow the procedure below to configure a Windows 95/98/Me computer to use TCP/IP: A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Check “TCP/IP” is listed in the [The following network components are installed:] box under the [Configuration] tab. Note ? If TCP/IP is not installed, click [Add] under the [Configuration] tab and install it. For more information about installing TCP/IP, see Windows 95/98/Me Help. ? Under Windows Me, if you want to use IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394), make sure TCP/IP is bound to the IEEE 1394 adaptor being used. The following message appears: TCP/IP -> (IEEE 1394 adaptor in use) B Configure TCP/IP with the appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings. Check the settings are correct with the network administrator.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 30 Configuring NetBEUI for Printing Follow these instructions to configure the printer and Windows 95/98/Me to use NetBEUI. Limitation ? To use NetBEUI, use the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port. Configuring the printer Enable the SMB of the printer in order to enable printing using NetBEUI. (The default is active.) • Check NetBEUI is set to active. (The default is active.) Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide. Configuring a Windows 95/98/Me computer Install NetBEUI on a Windows 95/98/Me computer and set it as the default protocol. A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Check “NetBEUI” is listed in the [The following network components are installed:] box under the [Configuration] tab. Note ? If NetBEUI is not installed, click [Add] under the [Configuration] tab and install it. For more information about installing NetBEUI, see Windows 95/98/Me Help. ? If “NetBEUI ->Dial-Up Adaptor” is listed in the [The following network components are installed:] box, select it, and then click [Remove] to remove the binding. B Set NetBEUI as the default protocol. Click the [Configuration] tab, select “NetBEUI” in the [The following network components are installed:] box, and then click [Properties]. C Click the [Advanced] tab, select the [Set this protocol to be the default protocol] check box, and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 31 D Click [OK] to close the [Network] dialog box. E When the restart message appears, click [Yes]. Installing Software Preparation If you are not using a print server, install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then install the printer driver by selecting “SmartDeviceMonitor for Client”. This enables peer-to-peer network printing via TCP/IP, NetBEUI, or IPP. Note ? Under Windows Me, you can print using TCP/IP and the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface. Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 32 Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. Select the [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client] check box, and then click [Next >]. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note ? If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, restart and continue configuration. Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 33 Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box for the model(s) of printer you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 34 Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Select SmartDeviceMonitor. SmartDeviceMonitor A Click [Port], and then click [Add]. B Select [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK]. C Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. ? Part of the printer’s IP address is used for the port name. ? Avoid using an address that is partially similar to one already in use. For example, if “192. 168. 0.2” is already used, “192. 168. 0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, if “192. 168. 0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 35 NetBEUI A Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search]. A list of printers that can be used with NetBEUI appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. Check the NetBEUI network address is on the configuration page. For more information about printing the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page”, Administrator Reference. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path name in the form of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not enter “\\” as head characters but “%%”. ? You cannot print to printers beyond routers. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B To specify the IP address of the printer, type “http://printer's-ip-address/printer” in the [Printer URL] box. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16) https://192.168.15.16/printerOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 36 C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in the [IPP Port Name] box. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure the necessary settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK]. Make sure the location for the selected printer is displayed after [Port]. Configure the user code and default printer as necessary. User Code The procedure to specify the user code may differ depending on the printer language. • RPCS You can specify the user code when installing the printer driver. You cannot register or edit the user code from the printer driver dialog box. To change the user code, you must uninstall the printer driver, and then register the new user code during the re-install process. • PCL 5c You can specify the user code with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See the printer driver's Help. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 37 When the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.52 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.51 “Setting Up Options”. Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 38 Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. Click [Next>]. Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next>]. A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears. Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next>]. In the [Available ports:] box, click [LPT1:], and then click [Next>]. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next>]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Click [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer. Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish]. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 39 Click [Details], and then click [Add Port…]. Select [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK]. Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. ? Part of the printer’s IP address is used for the port name. ? Avoid using an address that is partially similar to one already in use. For example, if “192. 168. 0.2” is already used, “192. 168. 0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly, if “192. 168. 0.20” is already used, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used. NetBEUI A Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search]. A list of printers that can be used with NetBEUI appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 40 Note ? Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. Confirm the NetBEUI network address is on the configuration page. For more information about printing the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page”, Administrator Reference. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path name in the form of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not enter “\\” as head characters but “%%”. ? You cannot print to printers beyond routers. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's IP address)/printer” as the printer's IP address. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in the [IPP Port Name] box. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure the necessary settings.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 41 Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK]. Click [OK]. Confirm that the selected port is highlighted in [Printer to the following port], and then click [OK]. Note ? You can specify the user code with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See the printer driver's Help. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.51 “Setting Up Options”. Restart the computer. Changing Port Settings Follow the procedure below to change SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as proxy server settings or IPP URL. Note ? There are no settings for NetBEUI. In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 42 Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Port Settings...]. The [Port Settings] dialog box appears. • For TCP/IP, you can configure Timeout Settings. Note ? If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below: A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box. B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar. C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port] check box. D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box. • For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 43 Printing via Parallel Connection To use a printer connected to the parallel interface, select “LPT1:” when installing the printer driver. Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 44 In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box for the model(s) of printer you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Confirm that [LPT1:] is shown for [Port]. Configure the user code and default printer as necessary. User Code The procedure to specify the user code may differ depending on the printer language. • RPCS You can specify the user code when installing the printer driver. You cannot register or edit the user code from the printer driver dialog box. To change the user code, you must uninstall the printer driver, and then register the new user code during the re-install process. • PCL 5c/PostScript 3 You can specify the user code with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See the printer driver's Help. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 45 When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.52 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.51 “Setting Up Options”. Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 46 Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. Click [Next>]. Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next>]. A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears. Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next>]. In the [Available ports:] box, click [LPT1:], and then click [Next>]. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next>]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Click [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer. Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish]. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.51 “Setting Up Options”. Restart the computer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 47 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB This section gives basic instructions for installing the printer drivers using USB. The printer drivers can be installed from the provided CD-ROM. Preparation Installation is not possible under Windows 95/98. Upgrade to Windows 98 SE/Me. Important ? Make sure all other applications are closed and the computer is not currently printing prior to installation. Windows 98 SE/Me - Installing the Printer Driver Using USB The procedure below uses Windows 98 as an example. The procedure for Windows Me may be slightly different. When the USB cable is used for the first time, the “plug and play” function starts and the [New Hardware Found], [Device Driver Wizard] or [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears depending on the system used. If the printer driver is already installed, the “plug and play” window appears, and the printer with its port directed to the USB cable is added to the [Printers] folder. Click [Next>]. Click [Search for the best driver for your device. (Recommended).], and then click [Next>]. Select the [Specify a location:] check box, and then click [Browse...]. The [Browse for Folder] dialog box appears.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 48 Insert the CD-ROM provided into the CD-ROM drive. Note ? When Auto Run starts, click [Exit]. ? If you want to inactivate Auto Run, press the Shift key when inserting the CD-ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer completes transmission to the drive. Select the drive where the printer driver is located according to the operating system used, and then click [OK]. If the CD-ROM drive is D, the folder will be “D:\Drivers\USBPRINT\WIN98ME”. Confirm the printer driver location, and then click [Next>]. “USB Printing Support” will be installed. Click [Finish]. Follow the “plug and play” on the screen to install the printer drivers. When installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to “USB00n” appears on the [Printers] folder. (“n” is the number of printers connected.)Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 49 Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 This section gives basic instructions for installing the printer drivers using the IEEE 1394 interface. The printer drivers can be installed from the provided CD-ROM. Preparation To use a printer connected to the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface, select “SmartDeviceMonitor” when installing the printer driver. See p.28 “Configuring Protocols” and p.31 “Installing Software” Important ? Make sure all other applications are closed and the computer is not currently printing prior to installation. Printing via IP over 1394 You can print by setting the IP address for the printer and the computer on which Windows Me is installed. Limitation ? When using the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface in a network, the Ethernet interface cannot be used on the same network. Note ? The maximum number of simultaneous print requests when connecting with IP over 1394 includes requests via Ethernet interface. For more information, see Administrator Reference.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 50 Installing the Printer Driver To print using SmartDeviceMonitor, see p.28 “Printing without a Print Server”. Note ? If [Add New Hardware Wizard] starts every time you restart the computer with an operating system that does not support SCSI print or plug in or out the cable, inactivate the device by following procedures. A In the [Add New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, confirm that [Windows has found the following new Hardware: IEEE SBP-2 Device] is displayed, and click [Recommended search for a better driver [Recommended]], and then click [Next>]. B When the [Windows was unable to locate the software for this device.] message appears, click [Finish].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 51 Setting Up Options You must set up options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. Note ? The description uses the PCL 5c printer driver. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Click the [Accessories] tab. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click [Printer Configuration...] under the [Print Settings] tab. In the [Options] box, select the options you have installed. Make any necessary settings. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, select the options from [Select printer options:]. Click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 52 Bidirectional transmission When bidirectional transmission is enabled, information about paper size and feed direction settings is automatically sent to the printer by the computer. You can also check printer status from your computer. • Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. • If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, under Windows 95/98/Me, unavailable functions are shaded in the [Change Accessories] dialog box of the printer properties. The [Change Accessories] dialog box is displayed by clicking the [Change Accessories...] button under the [Printer Configuration] tab. Note ? The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically. ? The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission; you can update the printer status manually. ? The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission. Bidirectional transmission requires the following conditions: When connecting via parallel cable • The computer must support bidirectional transmission. • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • The Interface cable must support bidirectional transmission. • The printer must be connected to the computer using standard parallel cable and parallel connector. • Under Windows 95/98/Me, [Enable bidirectional support for this printer] must be selected in [Spool Settings…] on the [Details] tab with RPCS printer driver.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 53 When connecting with the network • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • SmartDeviceMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and TCP/IP must be used. • Under Windows 95/98/Me, [Enable bidirectional support for this printer] must be selected in [Spool Settings…] on the [Details] tab with RPCS printer driver. When connecting with IEEE 1394 • The printer must be connected to the IEEE 1394 connector of a computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable. When connecting with USB The printer must be connected to the computer's USB connector using the USB interface cable.54 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 2. Windows 2000 Configuration Printing Using a Print Server Printing Using a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server This section describes procedures for setting up a client in a network using Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 as a print server. To print from Windows 2000, you must install the printer driver and change the printer port connection to the print server. Windows 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 Print Server ACE070SOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 55 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Preparation To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting “Network printer server”, and then select the Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 shared printer. For more information about how to install and settings, see Administrator Reference. This section assumes the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 print server. Do not begin the following procedure until the client is set up and configured correctly. Limitation ? When using a print server connected to the printer via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing. Note ? When using Windows NT 4.0 as a Print Server, make sure to install the Windows NT 4.0 printer driver before connecting the print server. There is a Windows NT 4.0 printer driver on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”. Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 56 Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box for the model(s) of printer you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Click [Port], and then click [Add]. Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK]. Double-click the computer name you want to use as the print server in the [Browse for Printer] window.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 57 Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Make sure the location for the selected printer is displayed after [Port]. Configure the user code and default printer as necessary. User Code When using RPCS, you can specify the user code with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See the printer driver's Help. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.85 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.84 “Setting Up Options”.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 58 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. Click [Next>].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 59 Click [Network Printer], and then click [Next>]. Click [Next>]. Double-click the computer name you want to use as the print server in the [Shared printers:] window. Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next>]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Click [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer. Start printer driver installation. Click [Next>]. Click [Finish]. The installation is complete. Note ? You can specify the user code with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See the printer driver's Help. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.84 “Setting Up Options”. Restart the computer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 60 Printing without a Print Server Preparation To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface or IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface, select “SmartDeviceMonitor”, “Standard TCP/IP Port”, or “LPR Port” when installing the printer driver. • For SmartDeviceMonitor, see p.60 “Configuring Protocols”, p.63 “Installing Software”, p.64 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”, and p.69 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”. • For Standard TCP/IP Port, LPR Port, see p.60 “Configuring Protocols”, p.64 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”, and p.69 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”. Note ? If you want to use “LPR Port”, “Print Services for UNIX” must be installed. For details, see Windows 2000 Help. Configuring Protocols Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing Follow these instructions to configure the printer and Windows 2000 to use TCP/IP and IPP. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use TCP/IP. • Check TCP/IP is set to active. (The default is active.) • Assign an IP address and make other settings required for TCP/IP.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 61 Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide. If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see Appendix, “When Using DHCP”, Administrator Reference. Note ? After setting the IP address, use the ping command to check it is set correctly. A Click [Start], point to [Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click [Command Prompt]. B Enter the following: (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) C:> ping 192.168.15.16 If the address is configured correctly, the following message appears: Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32 If the address is configured incorrectly, the following message appears: Request timed out. Configuring a Windows 2000 computer Follow the procedure below to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use TCP/IP: A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and Dial-up Connections]. B Click [Local Area Connection]. C On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. D Confirm that “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” is selected in the [Components checked are used by this connection:] box on the [General] tab. Note ? If the check box for TCP/IP is not selected, select it. ? If TCP/IP is not installed, click [Install...] on the [General] tab and install it. For more information about installing TCP/IP, see Windows 2000 Help.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 62 E Configure TCP/IP with the appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings. Check the settings are correct with the network administrator. Configuring NetBEUI for Printing Follow these instructions to configure the network interface board and Windows 2000 to use NetBEUI: Preparation To use NetBEUI, use the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port. Configuring the printer Enable the SMB of the printer in order to enable printing using NetBEUI. (The default is active.) • Check NetBEUI is set to active. (The default is active.) Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide. Configuring a Windows 2000 computer Follow the procedure below to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use NetBEUI: A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and Dial-up Connections]. B Click [Local Area Connection]. C On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. D Check “NetBEUI Protocol” is selected in the [Components checked are used by this connection:] box on the [General] tab. Note ? If the check box for NetBEUI is not selected, select it. ? If NetBEUI is not installed, click [Install...] on the [General] tab to install it. For more information about installing NetBEUI, see Windows 2000 Help.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 63 Installing Software Preparation If you are not using a print server, install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then install the printer driver by selecting “SmartDeviceMonitor for Client”. This enables peer-to-peer network printing via TCP/IP, NetBEUI, or IPP. Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 64 Select the [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client] check box, and then click [Next >]. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note ? If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, restart and continue configuration. Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 65 The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model(s) you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Click [Port], and then click [Add] in the [Change settings for 'Port'] box. The next part of the procedure depends on the port in use. Follow the section that corresponds to the port you want to use. • SmartDeviceMonitor • Standard TCP/IP Port • LPR Port SmartDeviceMonitor A Select [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK]. B Select the printer you want to use.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 66 TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. NetBEUI A Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search]. A list of printers that can be used with NetBEUI appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. Confirm the NetBEUI network address is on the configuration page. For more information about printing the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page”, Administrator Reference. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path name in the form of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not enter “\\” as head characters but “%%”. ? You cannot print to printers beyond routers. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B To specify the IP address of the printer, type “http://printer's-ip-address/printer” in the [Printer URL] box.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 67 Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16) https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in the [IPP Port Name] box. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure the necessary settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK]. Standard TCP/IP Port A Select [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [OK]. B In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Next>]. C In the [Printer Name or IP Address:] box, enter the printer name or IP address, and then click [Next>]. D In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Finish].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 68 LPR Port A Select [LPR Port], and then click [OK]. B In the [Name or address of server providing lpd:] box, enter the printer's IP address. C In the [Name of printer or print queue on that server:] box, enter “lp”. Make sure the location for the selected printer is displayed after [Port]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.85 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.84 “Setting Up Options”.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 69 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. Click [Next >].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 70 Click [Local printer], and then click [Next>]. Click [Create a new port:]. The next part of the procedure depends on the port in use. Follow the section that corresponds to the port you want to use. • SmartDeviceMonitor • Standard TCP/IP Port • LPR Port SmartDeviceMonitor A Select [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next>]. B Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. NetBEUI A Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search]. A list of printers that can be used with NetBEUI appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 71 Note ? Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. Confirm the NetBEUI network address is on the configuration page. For more information about printing the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page”, Administrator Reference. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path name in the form of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not enter “\\” as head characters but “%%”. ? You cannot print to printers beyond routers. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B To specify the IP address of the printer, type “http://printer's-ip-address/printer” in the [Printer URL] box. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16) https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in the [IPP Port Name] box. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure the necessary settings.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 72 Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK]. Standard TCP/IP Port A Select [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [Next>]. B In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Next>]. C In the [Printer Name or IP Address:] box, enter the printer name or IP address, and then click [Next>]. D In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Finish]. LPR Port A Select [LPR Port], and then click [Next>]. B In the [Name or address of server providing lpd:] box, enter the printer's IP address. C In the [Name of printer or print queue on that server:] box, enter “lp”. Confirm to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next >]. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Click [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Next >]. Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Next>].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 73 Click [Finish]. Printer driver installation starts. Set up the options. Note ? You can specify the user code with the printer properties dialog box after installing the printer driver. See the printer driver's Help. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.84 “Setting Up Options”. Changing Port Settings Follow the procedure below to change SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as proxy server settings or IPP URL. Note ? There are no settings for NetBEUI. In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port...]. The [Port Configuration:] dialog box appears. • For TCP/IP, you can configure Timeout Settings. Note ? If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below: A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 74 B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar. C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port] check box. D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box. • For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 75 Printing via Parallel Connection Preparation To use a printer connected to the parallel interface, select “LPT1:” when installing the printer driver. Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 76 The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box for the model(s) of printer you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Confirm that [LPT1:] is shown for [Port]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 77 Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. ? For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.85 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.84 “Setting Up Options”. Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish)Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 78 Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. Click [Next>]. Click [Local printer], and then click [Next>]. A dialog box for selecting the printer port appears. Select the printer port, and then click [Next>]. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next>]. Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Next>]. Printer driver installation starts. Click [Finish]. Set up the options. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.84 “Setting Up Options”. Restart the computer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 79 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB This section gives basic instructions for installing the printer drivers using USB. The printer drivers can be installed from the provided CD-ROM. Important ? Make sure all other applications are closed and the computer is not currently printing prior to installation. Windows 2000 - Installing the Printer Driver Using USB Limitation ? Installing a printer driver requires Administrator permission. When you install a printer driver, log on using an account that has Administrator permission. When the USB cable is used for the first time, the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, and Windows 2000's [USB Printing Support] will automatically install. If the printer driver is already installed, the “plug and play” window appears, and the printer with its port directed to the USB cable is added to the [Printers] folder. Install the printer driver by referring to the instructions for installing the printer driver with Parallel/Ethernet connection. When installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to “USB00n” appears on the [Printers] folder. (“n” is the number of printers connected.)Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 80 Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 This section gives basic instructions for installing the printer drivers using the IEEE 1394 interface. The printer drivers can be installed from the provided CD-ROM. Important ? Make sure all other applications are closed and the computer is not currently printing prior to installation. Printing via SCSI print Printing using a SCSI print device with the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is possible under Windows 2000. Important ? The optional IEEE 1394 interface board can only be used with Service Pack 1 (SP1) or later. If the Service Pack is not installed, only one 1394 bus SCSI print device is connectable. The client cannot install the printer driver without using an account that has Administrator permission. ? Do not connect new IEEE 1394 or USB devices to the computer or turn on another printer while installing the printer driver. ? Before uninstalling the printer driver, be sure to disconnect the IEEE 1394 interface cable from the computer. ? “SCSI print” must be set to active from the control panel. For more information, see “IEEE 1394 Configuration”, Setup Guide. Note ? The printer cannot receive print data from more than one computer at the same time. If you send data from your computer when data is being received from another, an error message may appear on the computer display.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 81 Installing the Printer Driver Note ? If [Found New Hardware Wizard] appears every time the computer is started or the cable is connected with Windows 2000, inactivate the device. If you want to install another printer driver after setting the “1394_00n” port, select the “1394_00n” port by following the procedure for installing a printer driver. ? When the printer connected via the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed properly, the icon in the printer folder changes depending on whether the cable is attached or not. Connect the printer and computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable. In the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, click [Next>]. When the [This wizard will complete the installation for this Device: (Unknown)] message appears, click [Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)], and then click [Next>]. When the [Locate Driver Files] message appears, click [Specify a location], and then click [Next>]. Hold down the left SHIFT key, and then insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Keep the left SHIFT key held down until the computer has finished accessing the CD-ROM. If the Auto Run program starts, click [Cancel], and then click [Exit]. Click [Browse].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 82 Select the printer driver you want to use. The following are locations on the CD-ROM where printer drivers are stored: • RPCS \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 • PCL 5c \DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 • PostScript 3 \DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 Click [Open]. Click [OK]. The [Driver Files Search Results] dialog box appears. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note ? If the printer driver is already installed, the printer icon is automatically added to the [Printer] folder. In this case, installation is not necessary. ? When installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to “1394_00n” appears on the [Printers] folder. (“n” is the number of printers connected.) ? If printing does not work properly after installation, you need to delete the port and reinstall the printer driver. For more information, see “Printer Does Not Print”, Maintenance Guide. ? If you do not want to install the printer driver when [Found New Hardware Wizard] starts when using an operating system that supports SCSI print, inactivate the device by following this procedure: A In the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, click [Next>]. B When the [This wizard will complete the installation for this Device: (Unknown)] message appears, click [Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]], and then click [Next>].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 83 C When the [Locate Driver Files] message appears, remove all checks from [Optional search locations.], and then click [Next>]. D When the [Driver Files Search Results] message appears, select the [Disable the device. The Add/Remove Hardware Wizard in the control Panel can be able to complete the driver installations.] check box, and then click [Finish]. ? If [Found New Hardware Wizard] appears every time you restart the computer when using an operating system that does not support IP over 1394, plug in or take out the cable, or inactivate the device by the following procedure: A In the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, click [Next>]. B When the [This wizard will complete the installation for this Device:] message appears and “IP over 1394” appears click [Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]], and then click [Next>]. C When the [Locate Driver Files] message appears, remove all checks from [Optional search locations.], and then click [Next>]. D When the [Driver Files Search Results] message appears, select the [Disable the device.] check box, and then click [Finish].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 84 Setting Up Options You must set up options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. Note ? The description uses the PCL 5c printer driver. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Click the [Accessories] tab. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [Change Accessories] tab. ? If you are using the PostScript printer driver, click the [Device Settings] tab. In the [Options] box, select the options you have installed. Make any necessary settings. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, select the options from [Select printer options:]. ? If you are using the PostScript 3 printer driver, select the options from [Installable Options]. Click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 85 Bidirectional transmission When bidirectional transmission is enabled, information about paper size and feed direction settings is automatically sent to the printer by the computer. You can also check printer status from your computer. • Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. • If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, under Windows 2000, the [Change Accessories] tab is shaded, and cannot be used. Note ? The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically. ? The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission; you can update the printer status manually. However, it does not support bidirectional transmission over a parallel connection. ? The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission. Bidirectional transmission requires the following conditions: When connecting via parallel cable • The computer must support bidirectional transmission. • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • The Interface cable must support bidirectional transmission. • The printer must be connected to the computer using standard parallel cable and parallel connector. • Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with RPCS printer driver.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 86 When connecting with the network • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • SmartDeviceMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and TCP/IP must be used. • Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with RPCS printer driver. When connecting with IEEE 1394 • The printer must be connected to the IEEE 1394 connector of a computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable. • On the printer's control panel, [Active] is selected in the SCSI print of IEEE 1394 and [On] is selected in the Bidi-SCSI print. • Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with RPCS printer driver. When connecting with USB The printer must be connected to the computer's USB connector using the USB interface cable.87 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 3. Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Configuration Printing Using a Print Server Printing Using a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server This section describes procedures for setting up a client in a network using Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 as a print server. To print from Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, you must install the printer driver and change the printer port connection to the print server. Windows 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 Print Server Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 ACE071SOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 88 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Preparation To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting “Network printer server”, and then select the Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 shared printer. For more information about how to install and settings, see Administrator Reference. This section assumes the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 print server. Do not begin the following procedure until the client is set up and configured correctly. Limitation ? When using a print server connected to the printer via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing. Note ? When using Windows NT 4.0 as a Print Server, make sure to install the Windows NT 4.0 printer driver before connecting the print server. There is a Windows NT 4.0 printer driver on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”. Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 89 Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box for the model(s) of printer you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Click [Port], and then click [Add]. Click [A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer], and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 90 Double-click the computer name you want to use as the print server in the [Browse for Printer] window. Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Make sure the location for the selected printer is displayed after [Port]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. Note ? During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. If this happens, click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.116 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.115 “Setting Up Options”.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 91 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. Click [Next>].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 92 Click [A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer], and then click [Next>]. Click [Next>]. Double-click the computer name you want to use as the print server in the [Browse for Printer] window, and then click [Next]. Double-click the computer name you want to use as the print server in the [Shared printers:] window. Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next>]. Start printer driver installation. Note ? During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. If this happens, click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installation. Click [Next>]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Click [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Finish]. The installation is complete. Note ? You can specify the user code with the Printer Driver Properties after installing the printer driver. See the printer driver's Help. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.115 “Setting Up Options”. Restart the computer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 93 Printing without a Print Server Preparation To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface, IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) interface or IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface, select “SmartDeviceMonitor”, “Standard TCP/IP Port”, or “LPR Port” when installing the printer driver. • For SmartDeviceMonitor, see p.93 “Configuring Protocols”, p.95 “Installing Software”, p.96 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”, and p.101 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”. • For Standard TCP/IP Port, LPR Port, see p.93 “Configuring Protocols”, p.96 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”, and p.101 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”. Note ? If you want to use “LPR Port”, “Print Services for UNIX” must be installed. For details, see Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 Help. Configuring Protocols Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing Follow these instructions to configure the printer and Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 to use TCP/IP and IPP. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use TCP/IP. • Check TCP/IP is set to active. (The default is active.) • Assign an IP address and make other settings required for TCP/IP.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 94 Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide. If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see Appendix, “When Using DHCP”, Administrator Reference. To use IP over 1394, see Setup Guide. Note ? After setting the IP address, use the ping command to check it is set correctly. A Click [Start], point to [All Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click [Command Prompt]. B Enter the following: (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) C:> ping 192.168.15.16 If the address is configured correctly, the following message appears: Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32 If the address is configured incorrectly, the following message appears: Request timed out. Configuring a Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 computer Follow the procedure below to configure a Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 computer to use TCP/IP: A On the [Start] menu, point to [Control Panel], and then click [Network Connections]. B Click [Local Area Connection]. C On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Note ? When using IP over 1394, click [1394 Connection].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 95 D Check “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” is selected in the [This connection uses the following items:] box on the [General] tab. Note ? If the check box for TCP/IP is not selected, select it. ? If TCP/IP is not installed, click [Install...] on the [General] tab and install it. For more information about installing TCP/IP, see Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 Help. E Configure TCP/IP with the appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings. Check the settings are correct with the network administrator. Installing Software Preparation If you are not using a print server, install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then install the printer driver by selecting “SmartDeviceMonitor for Client”. This enables peer-to-peer network printing via TCP/IP, NetBEUI, or IPP. Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 96 Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. Select the [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client] check box, and then click [Next >]. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note ? If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, restart and continue configuration. Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 97 Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model(s) you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 98 Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Click [Port], and then click [Add] in the [Change settings for 'Port'] box. The next part of the procedure depends on the port in use. Follow the section that corresponds to the port you want to use. • SmartDeviceMonitor • Standard TCP/IP Port • LPR Port SmartDeviceMonitor A Select [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK]. B Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. ? You can set a port using TCP/IP and the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 99 IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B To specify the IP address of the printer, type “http://printer's-ip-address/printer” in the [Printer URL] box. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16) https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in the [IPP Port Name] box. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure the necessary settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK]. Standard TCP/IP Port A Select [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [OK]. B In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Next>]. C In the [Printer Name or IP Address] box, enter the printer name or IP address, and then click [Next>].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 100 D In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Finish]. LPR Port A Select [LPR Port], and then click [OK]. B In the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box, enter the printer's IP address. C In the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, enter “lp”. Make sure the location for the selected printer is displayed after [Port]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. Note ? During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. If this happens, click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.116 “Bidirectional transmission”.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 101 Reference For more information about option settings, see p.115 “Setting Up Options”. Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, SuomiOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 102 Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. Click [Next >]. Click [Local printer attached to this computer], and then click [Next>]. Click [Create a new port:]. The next part of the procedure depends on the port in use. Follow the section that corresponds to the port you want to use. • SmartDeviceMonitor • Standard TCP/IP Port • LPR Port SmartDeviceMonitor A Select [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next>]. B Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 103 Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. ? You can set a port using TCP/IP and the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B To specify the printer's IP address, enter “http://(printer's-ip-address)/printer” in the [Printer URL] box. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in the [IPP Port Name] box. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure the necessary settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 104 Standard TCP/IP Port A Select [Standard TCP/IP], then click [Next>]. B In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Next>]. C In the [Printer Name or IP Address] box, enter the printer name or IP address, and then click [Next>]. D In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Finish]. LPR Port A Select [LPR Port], and then click [Next>]. B In the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box, enter the printer's IP address. C In the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, enter “lp”. Confirm to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next >]. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Click [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Next >]. Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Next>]. Click [Finish]. Printer driver installation starts. Note ? During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. If this happens, click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installation.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 105 Set up the options. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.115 “Setting Up Options”. Changing Port Settings Follow the procedure below to change SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as proxy server settings or IPP URL. In the [Printers and Faxes] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port...]. The [Port Configuration:] dialog box appears. • For TCP/IP, you can configure Timeout Settings. Note ? If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below: A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box. B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar. C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port] check box. D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box. • For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 106 Printing via Parallel Connection Preparation To use a printer connected to the parallel interface, select “LPT1:” when installing the printer driver. Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 107 The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box for the model(s) of printer you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Confirm that [LPT1:] is shown for [Port]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 108 Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. ? For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.116 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.115 “Setting Up Options”. Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish)Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 109 Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. Click [Next>]. Click [Local printer attached to this computer], and then click [Next>]. Click the port you want to use, and then click [Next>]. A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears. Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next>]. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next>]. Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish]. Printer driver installation starts. Note ? During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. If this happens, click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installation. Set up the options. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.115 “Setting Up Options”. Restart the computer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 110 Installing the Printer Driver Using USB This section gives basic instructions for installing the printer drivers using USB. The printer drivers can be installed from the provided CD-ROM. Important ? Make sure all other applications are closed and the computer is not currently printing prior to installation. Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Installing the Printer Driver Using USB Limitation ? Installing a printer driver requires Administrator permission. When you install a printer driver, log on using an account that has Administrator permission. When the USB cable is used for the first time, the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, and Windows XP or Windows Server 2003's [USB Printing Support] will automatically install. If the printer driver is already installed, the “plug and play” window appears, and the printer with its port directed to the USB cable is added to the [Printers and Faxes] folder. With Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, even if the printer driver has already been installed, [Found New Hardware Wizard] may start when connecting the printer and the computer with the USB cable for the first time. In this case, install the printer driver by following the procedure below. Install the printer driver by referring to the instructions for installing the printer driver with Parallel/Ethernet connection. When installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to “USB00n” appears on the [Printers and Faxes] folder. (“n” is the number of printers connected.)Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 111 Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 This section gives basic instructions for installing the printer drivers using the IEEE 1394 interface. The printer drivers can be installed from the provided CD-ROM. Important ? Make sure all other applications are closed and the computer is not currently printing prior to installation. Printing via SCSI print Printing using a SCSI print device with the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is possible under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003. Important ? Do not connect new IEEE 1394 or USB devices to the computer or turn on another printer while installing the printer driver. ? Before uninstalling the printer driver, be sure to disconnect the IEEE 1394 interface cable from the computer. ? “SCSI print” must be set to active from the control panel. For more information, see “IEEE 1394 Configuration”, Setup Guide. Note ? The printer cannot receive print data from more than one computer at the same time. If you send data from your computer when data is being received from another, an error message may appear on the computer display.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 112 Installing the Printer Driver Note ? If you want to install another printer driver after setting the “1394_00n” port, select the “1394_00n” port by following the procedure for installing a printer driver. ? When the printer connected via the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed properly, the icon in the printer folder changes depending on whether the cable is attached or not. Connect the printer and computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable. In the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, confirm that [This wizard helps you install software for: (Unknown)] is displayed, and click [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)], and then click [Next>]. When [Please choose your search and installation options.] appears, select the [Search for the best driver in these locations.] check box, then select the [Include this location in the search:] check box. Hold down the left SHIFT key, and then insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Note ? Keep the left SHIFT key held down until the computer has finished accessing the CD-ROM. ? If the Auto Run program starts, click [Cancel], and then click [Exit]. Click [Browse]. Select the printer driver you want to use. The following are locations on the CD-ROM where printer drivers are stored: • RPCS \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 • PCL 5c \DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 113 • PostScript 3 \DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 Click [OK]. A printer model selection dialog box appears. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note ? When installation is complete, the printer with its port directed to “1394_00n” appears on the [Printers and Faxes] folder. (“n” is the number of printers connected.) ? If the printer driver is already installed, the printer icon is automatically added to the [Printers and Faxes] folder. In this case, installation is not necessary. ? Even if the printer driver has already been installed, [Found New Hardware Wizard] may start when connecting the printer and the computer with the IEEE 1394 interface cable for the first time. In this case, install the printer driver by following the procedure. ? If printing does not work properly after installation, you need to delete the port and reinstall the printer driver. For more information, see “Printer Does Not Print”, Maintenance Guide. ? If you do not want to install the printer driver when [Found New Hardware Wizard] starts when using an operating system that supports SCSI print, inactivate the device by following this procedure: A In the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box, check [This wizard helps you install software for: (Unknown)] is displayed, click [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)], and then click [Next>]. B When [Please choose your search and installation options.] appears, remove all selections from [Search for the best driver in these locations.], and then click [Next>]. C If [The wizard could not find the software on your computer for...] appears, click [OK]. D If the [Cannot Install this Hardware] message appears, select the [Don't prompt again to install the software] check box, and then click [Finish].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 114 Printing via IP over 1394 You can print by setting the IP address for the printer and the computer on which Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is installed. Preparation “IP over 1394” must be set on the control panel and an IP address for the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface must be specified. For more information about how to make printer settings, see “IEEE 1394 Configuration”, Setup Guide. Limitation ? When using the IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) interface in a network, the Ethernet interface cannot be used on the same network. Note ? The maximum number of simultaneous print requests when connecting with IP over 1394 includes requests via Ethernet interface. For more information, see Administrator Reference. Installing the Printer Driver To print using SmartDeviceMonitor, see p.93 “Printing without a Print Server”.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 115 Setting Up Options You must set up options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. Note ? The description uses the PCL 5c printer driver. On the [Start] menu, and then click [Printers and Faxes]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Click the [Accessories] tab. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [Change Accessories] tab. ? If you are using the PostScript printer driver, click the [Device Settings] tab. In the [Options] box, select the options you have installed. Make any necessary settings. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, select the options from [Select printer options:]. ? If you are using the PostScript 3 printer driver, select the options from [Installable Options]. Click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 116 Bidirectional transmission When bidirectional transmission is enabled, information about paper size and feed direction settings is automatically sent to the printer by the computer. You can also check printer status from your computer. • Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. • If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, the [Change Accessories] tab is shaded, and cannot be used. Note ? The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically. ? The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission; you can update the printer status manually. ? The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission. Bidirectional transmission requires the following conditions: When connecting via parallel cable • The computer must support bidirectional transmission. • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • The Interface cable must support bidirectional transmission. • The printer must be connected to the computer using standard parallel cable and parallel connector. • Under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with RPCS printer driver.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 117 When connecting with the network • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • SmartDeviceMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and TCP/IP must be used. • Under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with RPCS printer driver. When connecting with IEEE 1394 • The printer must be connected to the IEEE 1394 connector of a computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable. • On the printer's control panel, [Active] is selected in the SCSI print of IEEE 1394 and [On] is selected in the Bidi-SCSI print. • Under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Ports] tab with RPCS printer driver. When connecting with USB The printer must be connected to the computer's USB connector using the USB interface cable.118 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 4. Windows NT 4.0 Configuration Printing Using a Print Server Printing Using a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server This section describes procedures for setting up a client in a network using Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 as a print server. Printing from Windows NT 4.0, you must install the printer driver and change the printer port connection to the print server. Windows 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 Print Server Windows NT 4.0 ACE072SOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 119 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Preparation To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting “Network printer server”, and then select the Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 shared printer. For more information about how to install and settings, see Administrator Reference. This section assumes the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 print server. Do not begin the following procedure until the client is set up and configured correctly. Limitation ? When using a print server connected to the printer via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing. Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 120 Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box for the model(s) of printer you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Click [Port], and then click [Add]. Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK]. Double-click the computer name you want to use as the print server in the [Browse for Printer] window.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 121 Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Make sure the location for the selected printer is displayed after [Port]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.143 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.143 “Setting Up Options”. Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 122 Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. Click [Next>]. Click [Network printer server], and then click [Next>]. Double-click the computer name you want to use as the print server in the [Shared printers:] box. Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 123 Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next>]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Click [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next>]. Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish]. The installation is complete. Restart the computer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 124 Printing without a Print Server Preparation To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface, select “SmartDeviceMonitor” or “LPR Port” when installing the printer driver. • For SmartDeviceMonitor, see p.124 “Configuring Protocols”, p.127 “Installing Software”, p.129 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”, and p.133 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”. • For LPR Port, see p.124 “Configuring Protocols”, p.129 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”, and p.133 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”. Note ? If you want to use “LPR Port”, “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” must be installed. For details, see Windows NT Help. Configuring Protocols Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing Follow these instructions to configure the printer and Windows NT 4.0 to use TCP/IP and IPP. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use TCP/IP. • Check TCP/IP is set to active. (The default is active.) • Assign an IP address and make other settings required for using TCP/IP.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 125 Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide. If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see Appendix, “When Using DHCP”, Administrator Reference. Note ? After setting the IP address, use the ping command to check it is set correctly. A Click [Start], point to [Programs], and then click [Command Prompt]. B Enter the following: (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) C:> ping 192.168.15.16 If the address is configured correctly, the following message appears: Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32 If the address is configured incorrectly, the following message appears: Request timed out. Configuring a Windows NT 4.0 computer Follow the procedure below to configure a Windows NT 4.0 computer to use TCP/IP: A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the [Network] icon. Confirm that “TCP/IP Protocol” is listed in the [Network protocols] box under the [Protocols] tab. Note ? If TCP/IP is not installed, click [Add...] under the [Protocols] tab, and then install it. For more information about installing TCP/IP, see Windows NT 4.0 Help. B Configure TCP/IP with the appropriate IP address, subnet mask and other settings. Check the settings are correct with the network administrator.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 126 C Click the [Services] tab, and check “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” is installed. If “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” is not installed, click [Add...] under the [Services] tab, and install it. For more information about installing and configuring network services, see Windows NT 4.0 Help. Configuring NetBEUI for Printing Follow these instructions to configure the printer and Windows NT 4.0 to use NetBEUI. Preparation To use NetBEUI, use the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use NetBEUI. • Check NetBEUI is set to active. (The default is active.) Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide. Configuring a Windows NT 4.0 computer Install NetBEUI on the Windows NT 4.0 computer, and change the LAN adapter number (Lana Number). A Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Check “NetBEUI Protocol” is listed in the [Network Protocols] box under the [Protocols] tab. Note ? If NetBEUI is not installed, click [Add...] under the [Protocols] tab, and install it. For more information about installing NetBEUI, see Windows NT 4.0 Help.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 127 B Change the Lana Number. Click the [Services] tab, click “NetBIOS Interface” in the [Network Services:] box, and then click [Properties...]. C Click the Lana Number corresponding to the Nbf protocol of the [Network Route] column, and then click [Edit]. D Enter “0” as the Lana Number. Note ? If another protocol’s Lana Number is configured as “0”, change it to another number. E Click [OK]. F Click [Close], and then close the [Network] dialog box. G After confirming the restart message, click [Yes]. Note ? After you change the Lana Number, you must restart the computer. Installing Software Preparation If you are not using a print server, install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then install the printer driver by selecting “SmartDeviceMonitor for Client”. This enables peer-to-peer network printing via TCP/IP, NetBEUI, or IPP. Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 128 Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. Select the [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client] check box, and then click [Next >]. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note ? If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, restart and continue configuration.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 129 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 130 In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model(s) you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Click [Port], and then click [Add] in the [Change settings for 'Port'] box. The next part of the procedure depends on the port in use. Follow the section that corresponds to the port you want to use. • SmartDeviceMonitor • LPR Port SmartDeviceMonitor A Select [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK]. B Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 131 Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. NetBEUI A Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search]. A list of printers that can be used with NetBEUI appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. Confirm the NetBEUI network address is on the configuration page. For more information about printing the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page”, Administrator Reference. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path name in the form of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not enter “\\” as head characters but “%%”. ? You cannot print to printers beyond routers. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP settings dialog box appears. B To specify the IP address of the printer, type “http://printer's-ip-address/printer” in the [Printer URL] box. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 132 (Example IP address is 192.168.15.16) https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in the [IPP Port Name] box. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings], and then configure the necessary settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client online Help. E Click [OK]. LPR Port A Select [LPR Port], and then click [OK]. B In the [Name or address of server providing lpd:] box, enter the printer's IP address. C In the [Name of printer or print queue on that server:] box, enter “lp”. Make sure the location for the selected printer is displayed after [Port]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 133 When the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.143 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.143 “Setting Up Options”. Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 134 Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. Click [Next>]. Click [Add Port...]. The next part of the procedure depends on the port in use. Follow the section that corresponds to the port you want to use. • SmartDeviceMonitor • LPR Port SmartDeviceMonitor A Select [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then [New Port...]. B Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 135 B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. NetBEUI A Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search]. A list of printers that can be used with NetBEUI appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. Confirm the NetBEUI network address is on the configuration page. For more information about printing the configuration page, see “Printing a Configuration Page”, Administrator Reference. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path name in the form of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not enter “\\” as head characters but “%%”. ? You cannot print to printers beyond routers. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B To specify the printer's IP address, enter “http://(printer's-ip-address)/printer” in the [Printer URL] box.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 136 Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in the [IPP Port Name] box. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the necessary settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK]. LPR Port A Select [LPR Port], and then click [New Port...]. B In the [Name or address of server providing lpd:] box, enter the printer's IP address. C In the [Name of printer or print queue on that server:] box, enter “lp”. Confirm to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next >]. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Click [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 137 Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish]. Printer driver installation starts. Set up the options. Note ? You can specify the user code with the printer properties dialog box after installing the printer driver. See the printer driver's Help. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.143 “Setting Up Options”. Restart the computer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 138 Changing Port Settings Follow the procedure below to change SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as proxy server settings or IPP URL. Note ? There are no settings for NetBEUI. In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port...]. The [Port Configuration:] dialog box appears. • For TCP/IP, you can configure Timeout Settings. Note ? If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below: A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box. B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar. C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port] check box. D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box. • For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings and Timeout Settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 139 Printing via Parallel Connection Preparation To use a printer connected to the parallel interface, select “LPT1:” when installing the printer driver. Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Preparation The target printer must be turned on before starting the installation process. Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish)Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 140 Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box for the model(s) of printer you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment], [Driver], and [Port] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Confirm that [LPT1:] is shown for [Port]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion.] dialog box appears, click [Finish].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 141 Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.143 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.143 “Setting Up Options”. Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish)Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 142 Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. Click [Next>]. Click the port you want to use, and then click [Next>]. A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears. Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next>]. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next>]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Click [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Next>]. Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish]. Set up the options with the printer driver. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.143 “Setting Up Options”. Restart the computer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 143 Setting Up Options You must set up options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. The description uses the PCL 5c printer driver. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Click the [Accessories] tab. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [Change Accessories] tab. ? If you are using the PostScript printer driver, click the [Device Settings] tab. In the [Options] box, select the options you have installed. Make any necessary settings. Click [OK]. Bidirectional transmission When bidirectional transmission is enabled, information about paper size and feed direction settings is automatically sent to the printer by the computer. You can also check printer status from your computer. • Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. • If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, under Windows 95/98/Me, unavailable functions are shaded.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 144 Note ? The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically. ? The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission; you can update the printer status manually. ? The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission. Bidirectional transmission requires the following conditions: When connecting via parallel cable • The computer must support bidirectional transmission. • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • The Interface cable must support bidirectional transmission. • The printer must be connected to the computer using standard parallel cable and parallel connector. • Under Windows NT 4.0, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver. When connecting with the network • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • SmartDeviceMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and TCP/IP must be used. • Under Windows NT 4.0, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver. • Under Windows NT 4.0, the IP address specified in the Microsoft TCP/IP print is used.145 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 5. Macintosh Configuration This section describes how to configure Mac OS. • If you are using Mac OS, see p.145 “Mac OS”. • If you are using Mac OS X, see p.155 “Mac OS X”. Mac OS This section describes how to configure Mac OS to use EtherTalk and USB. The following procedure describes how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you are not using Mac OS 9.1, see the manual that comes with your version of the Mac OS for more information. Limitation ? For use with Mac OS 8.6 or later. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.) ? For use with a Macintosh, Power PC is required. Note ? The PostScript 3 printer driver is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM: Mac OS 8 and 9:PS Driver:(language):Disk1Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 146 Installing the Printer Driver and Software Preparation If the AdobePS installation starts under Mac OS X, the desktop automatically changes to the Classic environment. If you want to set a printer with Mac OS X, see p.155 “Mac OS X”. Installing the PostScript Printer Driver and PPD File It is necessary to install a printer driver and a PPD file to print from a Macintosh. Follow the procedure below to install a printer driver and a PPD file into a Macintosh using Mac OS 8.6 or later: PostScript Printer Driver Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Double-click the CD-ROM icon. Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder. Double-click the [PS Driver] folder. Double-click the folder of the language you are using. Open [DISK1], and then double-click the installer icon. Follow the instructions on the screen.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 147 PPD File Double-click the CD-ROM icon. Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder. Double-click the [Printer Descriptions] folder. Double-click the folder of the language you are using. Open [Disk1]. Drag the PPD file and the Plugin file into [Printer Descriptions] in [Extensions] which is in [System Folder]. Restart the Macintosh. Setting Up the PPD File Preparation Check the printer is connected to an AppleTalk network before performing the following procedure. On the [Apple] menu, click [Chooser]. Click the [Adobe PS] icon. In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the printer you want to use. Click [Create].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 148 Click the printer you want to use, and then click [Select]. The PPD file is set up, and the [Adobe PS] icon appears on the left of the printer name in the list. Next, follow the procedure on p.149 “Setting Up Options” to make option settings, or close the [Chooser] dialog box. Creating a Desktop Printer icon Preparation Check the printer is connected to the USB before performing the following procedure. To use a printer connected via USB, create a Desktop Printer icon. Double-click [Desktop Printer Utility] in the [AdobePS Components] folder. Click [AdobePS] in [With:] and [Printer (USB)] in [Create Desktop], and then click [OK]. Click [Change] in [USB Printer Selection]. Select the model you are using in [Select a USB Printer:], and then click [OK]. Click [Auto Setup] in [PostScript TM Printer Description (PPD) File]. Click [Create]. Enter the printer name, and then click [Save]. The printer icon appears on the desktop. Exit the Desktop Printer Utility.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 149 Setting Up Options On the [Apple] menu, click [Chooser]. Click the [Adobe PS] icon. In the [Select the PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the printer you want to use, and then click [Setup]. Click [Configure]. A list of options appears. Select the option you want to set up, and then select the appropriate setting for it. Note ? If the option you want to set up is not displayed, the PPD file might not be set up correctly. Check the name of the PPD file shown in the dialog box. Click [OK]. The list of options closes. Click [OK]. The [Chooser] dialog box appears. Close the [Chooser] dialog box.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 150 Installing the ColorSync profile ColorSync profile makes it possible for the printer to print colors of similar intensity to those that appear on your computer display. You must install the ColorSync profile to use this feature. Note ? The ColorSync profile complies with color characteristics as defined by the International Color Consortium (ICC). ? Some computer displays may require particular settings to be controlled by ColorSync. See the documentation that comes with your display for details. The following procedure shows how to install the ColorSync profile. Start the Macintosh. Double-click the hard disk icon, and then open the appropriate folder in which to install the ColorSync profile. Note ? The location of the appropriate folder may differ depending on operating system versions. The following are examples: • System: Preferences: ColorSync profiles • System: ColorSync profiles Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM icon appears. Double-click the CD-ROM icon. The contents of the CD-ROM appear. Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 151 Double-click the [ColorSync TM Profiles] folder in the CD-ROM. Drag the file to the [ColorSync TM Profiles] folder on the hard disk. The ColorSync profile is installed. Installing the Adobe Type Manager Note ? Close all applications that are running before the installation. Install ATM after restarting the computer. Start the Macintosh. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Double-click the CD-ROM icon. Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder. Double-click the [ATM] folder. Double-click the [ATM 4.6.2 installer] icon. Follow the instructions on the screen. When the procedure is complete, restart the computer. ATM will be completely installed only after restarting. On the [Apple] menu, click [Control Panel], and then click [~ATM]. Open the ATM control panel.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 152 Note ? For more information about installation, see the user's guide in the ATM folder. Installing screen fonts The screen fonts described below can be found on the CD-ROM, in the folder named [Fonts]. Start the Macintosh. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM icon appears. Double-click the CD-ROM icon. The contents of the CD-ROM appear. Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder. Double-click the [Fonts] folder. Double-click the [Screen font] folder. Double- click the [TrueType] or [Type1] folder. Select the font enter you want to use. Copy the fonts you want to install into [Fonts] in the [System Folder]. A Confirmation dialog box appears. Click [OK]. The fonts are installed. Restart the Macintosh.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 153 Using USB Interface This section explains the setup procedure when using the printer with a USB connection. Preparation Install the required files by referring to p.146 “Installing the Printer Driver and Software”. Connect your Macintosh and the printer using a USB cable. Limitation ? Mac OS is compatible with the standard USB port only. Open the [AdobePS Component] folder on the hard disk. Double-click [Desktop Printer Utility]. Click [AdobePS] in [With:] and [Printer (USB)] in [Create Desktop], and then click [OK]. Click [Change] under [PostScript(TM) Printer Description (PPD) File]. Select the connected printer's PPD file, and then click [Select]. Click [Change] in [USB Printer Selection]. Select the model you are using in [Select a USB Printer:], and then click [OK]. Click [Create]. A message appears. Enter the printer name, and then click [Save].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 154 Specify the location where the file is to be saved and the name, and then click [Save]. The printer icon appears on the desktop. Quit Desktop Printer Utility.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 155 Mac OS X This section describes how to configure a Mac OS X to use Ether Talk. The following procedure describes how to configure Mac OS X 10.1. If you are not using Mac OS X 10.1, see the manual that comes with your version of the Mac OS X for more information. Limitation ? For use with Mac OS X 10.1 or later. ? For use with a Macintosh, Power PC is required. Note ? The PPD file is stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM: Mac OS X:PPD Installer Installing the PPD File It is necessary to install a PPD file to print from a Macintosh. Preparation You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For more information, consult your administrator. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Double-click the CD-ROM icon. Double-click the [Mac OS X] folder. Double-click the installer icon. Follow the instructions on the screen.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 156 Setting Up the PPD File Start Print Center. Click [Add Printer]. Click [AppleTalk] in the first pop-up menu. If the zone has been set, select the zone in the second pop-up menu. Select the PPD file of the model you are using on the “Printer Model:” pop-up menu, and then click [Add]. Setting Up Options Limitation ? You can make all the settings of printer features, even if the necessary option is not installed, due to the limitation of Mac OS X native mode. Confirm which option is installed to the printer before you print. Using USB Interface Start Print Center. Click [Add]. Click [USB] on the pop-up menu. The connected printer is displayed.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 157 Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer on the [Printer Model:] pop-up menu. A list of printer types appears. Note ? For Mac OS X 10.1.x, a list of model names appears on the [Printer Model:] pop-up menu. Select the printer's model name, and then proceed to step F. Select the connected printer's name in the list of printer types, and then click [Add]. Close the [Printer List] dialog box, and then quit Print Center. Using Rendezvous When using Mac OS X 10.2.3 or later, you can print using Rendezvous. Ethernet and Wireless LAN connections can be used. Start Print Center. Click [Add]. Click [Rendezvous] on the pop-up menu. The connected printer appears. Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer on the [Printer Model:] pop-up menu. A list of printer types appears. Select the name of the connected printer from the list of printer types, and then click [Add]. Close the [Printer List] dialog box, and then quit Print Center.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 158 Configuring Macintosh Changing to EtherTalk Follow this procedure to configure a Macintosh to use EtherTalk. Reference For more information about installing the software required for EtherTalk, see the Macintosh manuals. Mac OS Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the [AppleTalk] icon. On the [Connect via:] pop-up menu, select “Ethernet”. If you change zones, select a name on the [Current zone:] pop-up menu. Close the [AppleTalk] dialog box. Restart the computer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 159 Mac OS X Preparation You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For more information, consult your administrator. Open [System Preference], and then click the [Network] icon. Click the [AppleTalk] tab. If you change zone, select a name on the [AppleTalk Zone:] pop-up menu. When the setting is complete, click [Apple Now]. Configuring the Printer Use the control panel to activate AppleTalk. (The default is active.) Reference For more information about the configuration, see “Configuring the Printer for the Network with the Control Panel”, Setup Guide. Changing the Printer Name If the network has several same model printers, their names will be the same. Printers of the same name will have their names changed slightly in the [Chooser] dialog box. For example, three printers named “printer” will appear in the [Chooser] dialog box as “printer0”, “printer1” and “printer2”. For details about changing the printer name, see PostScript 3 Supplement.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 160 Changing the Zone It may be necessary to change the zone configuration. For details about changing the printer name, see PostScript 3 Supplement.161 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 6. NetWare Configuration This chapter describes how to set up a client computer when using a NetWare print server. Note ? Use the latest version of Novell Client or the one provided with your operating system. ? This section assumes the client has NetWare client applications installed and is correctly configured to communicate with a NetWare print server. If not, install the necessary applications before starting the setting up procedure. Windows 95/98/Me Follow this procedure to set up a Windows 95/98/Me client. After installing the printer driver, change the print port to NetWare queue. Preparation Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure. Install the printer driver you want to use as “Local Printer”. Reference For more information about installing the printer driver, see p.43 “Printing via Parallel Connection”. Note ? Any port can be selected during installation, however, LPT1 is recommended. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 162 In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Add Port]. Click [Network], and then click [Browse]. On the network tree, double-click the name of the file server. The queues are displayed. Click the queue you want to print, and then click [OK]. Click [OK]. In the [Print to the following port] box, a network path to the printer appears. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box, and open it again. Click the [Printer Settings] tab. Clear the [Form Feed] and [Enable Banner] check boxes. Note ? It is better not to check these boxes because they should be specified using the printer driver. If they are selected, the printer might not print correctly. When using the PostScript 3 printer driver Follow the procedure below to set up for PostScript 3 printer driver: A Click the [PostScript] tab. B Click [Advanced]. C Clear the [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job] check boxes.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 163 Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box. If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • PCL 5c DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1 • RPCS DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1 • PostScript 3 DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 164 Windows 2000 Follow this procedure to set up a Windows 2000 client. Preparation Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure. Double-click the [My Network Places] icon on the desktop and navigate to the queue you want to use, and then double-click it. The printers dialog box appears. Click [No]. Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Using the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver A Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 165 B The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. C In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. D Select the [Printer Name] check box for the model(s) of printer you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. E Double-click the printer name to display its settings, and then click [Port] F In the [Change settings for 'Port'] box, select the queue you selected in step A. G Click [Continue]. Proceed to step F. Using the PostScript Printer Driver A Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. B Click [Next>]. C Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next>]. D In the [Use the following port:] list, select the queue you selected in step A. E Click [Next>]. Proceed to step F. Follow the instructions on the screen.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 166 If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • PCL 5c DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 • RPCS DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 • PostScript 3 DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 167 Windows XP Follow this procedure to set up a Windows XP client. Preparation Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure. On the [Start] menu, click [My Network Places], navigate to the queue you want to use, and then double-click it. The printers dialog box appears. Click [Cancel]. Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Using the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver A Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 168 B The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. C In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. D Select the [Printer Name] check box for the model(s) of printer you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. E Double-click the printer name to display its settings, and then click [Port] F In the [Change settings for 'Port'] box, select the queue you selected in step A. G Click [Continue]. Proceed to step F. Using the PostScript Printer Driver A Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. B Click [Next>]. C Click [Local printer attached to this printer], and then click [Next>]. D In the [Use the following port:] list, select the queue you selected in step A. E Click [Next>]. Proceed to step F. Follow the instructions on the screen.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 169 If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], and then click [Printers and Faxes]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • PCL 5c DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 • RPCS DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 • PostScript 3 DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 170 Windows NT 4.0 Follow this procedure to set up a Windows NT 4.0 client. Preparation Log on to the NetWare file server before starting the following procedure. Double-click the [Network Neighborhood] icon on the desktop and navigate to the queue you want to use, and then double-click it. The printers dialog box appears. Click [No]. Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Using the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver A Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 171 B The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. C In the [Select Program] dialog box, select the printer drivers you want to use, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. D Select the [Printer Name] check box for the model(s) of printer you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. E Double-click the printer name to display its settings, and then click [Port] F From the [Change settings for 'Port'] drop-down list box, select the queue you selected in step A. G Click [Continue]. Proceed to step F. Using the PostScript Printer Driver A Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. “Add Printer Wizard” starts. B Click [My Computer], and then click [Next>]. C In the [Use the following port:] list, select the queue you selected in step A. D Click [Next>]. Proceed to step F. Follow the instructions on the screen.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 172 If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • PCL 5c DRIVERS\PCL5C\NT4\(Language)\DISK1 • RPCS DRIVERS\RPCS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1 • PostScript 3 DRIVERS\PS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1173 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 7. Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM There are three CD-ROMs provided with this printer. These are labeled “Operating Instructions”, “Printer Drivers and Utilities” and “Document Management Utility”. The following items are included on the three separate CD-ROMs: Font Manager 2000 Helps you to install new screen fonts, and organize and manage fonts already installed. For more information about Font Manager, see the manual on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”. SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin A utility for the system administrator to manage network printers. Reference For more information about SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help. SmartDeviceMonitor for Client A utility for users to manage their own print status on the network. Reference For more information about SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. 1394 Utility This utility is for the optional IEEE 1394 interface board. For more information, see the Readme file or the manual that comes with the optional IEEE 1394 interface board. USB Printing Support This utility must be installed to use the USB connection under Windows 98 SE/Me.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 174 Viewing the Contents of the CD-ROM Follow the procedure below to view the contents of the CD-ROM. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Click [Browse This CD-ROM]. Explorer starts and displays the contents of the CD-ROM.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 175 Printer Drivers for This Printer Printing requires installation of a printer driver for your operating system. The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM that comes with this printer: *1 Microsoft Windows 95 operating system *2 Microsoft Windows 98 operating system *3 Microsoft Windows Me operating system *4 Microsoft Windows 2000 professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server *5 Microsoft Windows XP Professional Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Printer Language PCL 5c RPCS PostScript 3 Operating system Windows 95 *1 v v v *10 Windows 98 *2 v v v *10 Windows Me *3 v v v *10 Windows 2000 *4 v v v Windows XP *5 v v v Windows Server 2003 *6 v v v Windows NT 4.0 *7 v v v *9 *10 Mac OS *8 v *10 Mac OS X v *11 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 176 *6 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Web Edition *7 Microsoft Windows NT Server operating system version 4.0, Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system version 4.0 in a computer using x86 processors. *8 Required version is 8.6 or later. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.) *9 Requires Service Pack 6 or later. *10 The Adobe PostScript printer drivers and PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”. *11 The PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”. PCL 5c printer driver This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer via a printer language. See p.184 “Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing Printer Properties”. See p.186 “Windows 2000 - Accessing Printer Properties”. See p.190 “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Printer properties”. See p.193 “Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing Printer Properties”. RPCS printer driver This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer via a printer language. The preset type user interface is provided in addition to the conventional one. See p.196 “Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing Printer Properties”. See p.199 “Windows 2000 - Accessing Printer Properties”. See p.202 “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Printer Properties”. See p.205 “Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing Printer Properties”.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 177 Adobe PostScript Printer Drivers and PPD files The Adobe PostScript printer drivers and PPD files are included on the CD-ROM that comes with this printer. Adobe PostScript printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer via a printer language. The PPD files allow the printer driver to enable printer specific functions. See p.208 “Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing Printer Properties”. See p.210 “Windows 2000 - Accessing Printer Properties”. See p.214 “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Printer Properties”. See p.217 “Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing Printer Properties”. See p.220 “Macintosh - Setting up for Printing”.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 178 SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is software that uses TCP/IP and IPX/SPX to monitor the printers in a network. It can monitor multiple network printers with IP addresses. We recommend network administrators to use this software. File Path SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is stored in the following folders on the CD-ROM: NETWORK\DEVMON\ADMIN\DISK1 Operating system Protocol stack Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me NetWare network client provided with Windows 95/98 Novell Client for Windows 95/98 Microsoft Windows 2000 TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000 IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000 NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000 Novell Client for Windows NT/2000 Microsoft Windows XP TCP/IP provided with Windows XP IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP NetWare Client provided with Windows XP Novell Client for Windows XP Microsoft Windows Server 2003 TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003 IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 179 What can it do? SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin has the following functions: • Device Information function • Checks the printer's network settings and detailed device information. • Checks the number of pages printed for each computer, using the user codes. • Checks the results of print jobs executed from the computer. • Enables you to change the printer's network settings. • Device Settings function • Limits the settings done from the control panel, and disables changes made to some items. • Enables the selection of paper types loaded in the printer. • Energy Saver function • Switches to Energy Saver mode, and wakes up from Energy Saver mode. • System Status function • Checks printing information, paper levels, and such, from the computer. • Groups function • Monitors multiple printers at the same time. When there are many printers, you can create groups and classify them in order to facilitate management. Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 TCP/IP provided with Windows NT IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows NT Novell Client for Windows NT/2000 Operating system Protocol stackOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 180 Reference For system administrator operations, see “Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”, Administrator Reference. For more information about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 181 SmartDeviceMonitor for Client The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client software has the following functions:(We recommend all users of this printer to install this software.) • Provides functions for Peer-to-Peer network printing, using TCP/IP, NetBEUI, and IPP from Windows95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. • Uses TCP/IP and IPX/SPX to constantly monitor the status of network devices. File Path SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is stored in the following folders on the CD-ROM: NETWORK\DEVMON\CLIENT\DISK1 Operating system Protocol stack Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me NetBEUI provided with Windows 95/98/Me NetWare network client provided with Windows 95/98/Me Novell Client for Windows 95/98/Me Microsoft Windows 2000 TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000 IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000 NetBEUI provided with Windows 2000 NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000 Novell Client for Windows NT/2000 Microsoft Windows XP TCP/IP provided with Windows XP IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP NetWare Client provided with Windows XP Novell Client for Windows XPOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 182 What can it do? SmartDeviceMonitor for Client has the following functions: • Checks printing information, paper levels, and such, from the computer. • Checks results of print jobs executed from the computer. Note ? Using these functions requires the user account enhance unit. Limitation ? Make similar settings for the option configuration of the printer for Recovery/Parallel Printing and the printer for giving print commands. If the required options necessary for printing, such as the paper feed unit, are not installed on the substitute printer, that function is disabled. ? Load paper of the same size on both the printer for Recovery/Parallel Printing and the printer for giving print commands. When specifying a particular paper tray for printing, load paper of the same size into that tray. ? If the type and devices of the printer for Recovery/Parallel Printing and the printer for giving commands are different, the print results might not turn out identical. ? If you select Sample Print or Locked Print, you cannot execute Recovery/Parallel Printing. Microsoft Windows Server 2003 TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003 IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003 NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 TCP/IP provided with Windows NT IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT NetBEUI provided with Windows NT Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows NT Novell Client for Windows NT/2000 Operating system Protocol stackOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 183 Reference For more information about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.184 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 8. Setting up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job PCL 5c - Accessing Printer Properties Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing Printer Properties There are two methods you can use to open the printer properties dialog box. Making default printer settings To make the default printer settings, first open the printer properties dialog box from the [Printers] window. Note ? With some applications, the printer driver's settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, a confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 185 If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • PCL 5c DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1 Making printer settings from an application To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95/98/Me. Note ? The procedure you should follow to open the printer properties dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. ? With some applications, the printer driver's settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied. ? Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 186 On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the[Name] list, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Click [OK] to start printing. Windows 2000 - Accessing Printer Properties Making default printer settings - Printer properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The [Properties] dialog box appears.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 187 Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, a confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • PCL 5c DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 188 Making default printer settings - Printing preferences properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...]. The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 189 Making printer settings from an application To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 2000. Note ? The procedure you should follow to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. ? Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. On the [File] menu, click [Print...]. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the [Select Printer] box, select the printer you want to use. Make the necessary settings, and then click [Print] to start printing.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 190 Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Printer properties Making default printer settings - Printer properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar. The [Printers and Faxes] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The [Properties] dialog box appears Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, a confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, click [Apply], and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 191 If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar. B Select the [Add Printer] from the file menu. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • PCL 5c DRIVERS\PCL5C\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 Making default printer settings - Printing preferences properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar. The [Printers and Faxes] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 192 On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...]. The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, click [Apply], and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer settings from an application To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows XP. Note ? The procedure you should follow to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. ? Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. On the [File] menu, click [Print...]. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the [Select Printer] box, select the printer you want to use. Make the necessary settings, click [Apply], and then click [Print] to start printing.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 193 Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing Printer Properties Making default printer settings - Printer properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Full Control permission. Members of Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, a confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 194 If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • PCL 5c DRIVERS\PCL5C\NT4\(Language)\DISK1 Making default printer settings - Default document properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 195 On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults...]. The [Default] dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer settings from an application To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows NT 4.0. Note ? The procedure you should follow to open the printer properties dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. ? With some applications, printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied. ? Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the[Name] list, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Click [OK] to start printing.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 196 RPCS - Accessing Printer Properties Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing Printer Properties There are two windows types you can use to open the printer properties dialog box. “Multi-tab” is used as an example in this manual. See Help for information about changing the windows types. Multi-tab This is the window type for users who often change print settings in order to make various kinds of prints. Custom Setting This is the window type for users who rarely change print settings when making prints. The Custom Setting display may vary depending on the installed options. Making default printer settings To make default printer settings, first open the printer properties dialog box from the [Printers] window. Note ? With some applications, printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 197 Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, a confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • RPCS DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 198 Making printer settings from an application To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95/98/Me. Note ? The procedure you should follow to open the printer properties dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. ? With some applications, printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied. ? Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the[Name] list, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Click [OK] to start printing.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 199 Windows 2000 - Accessing Printer Properties Making default printer settings - Printer properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, a confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 200 If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • RPCS DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 Making default printer settings - Printing preferences properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 201 On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...]. The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer settings from an application To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 2000. Note ? The procedure you should follow to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. ? Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. On the [File] menu, click [Print...]. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the [Select Printer] box, select the printer you want to use. Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start printing.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 202 Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Printer Properties Making default printer settings - Printer properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar. The [Printers and Faxes] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, a confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 203 If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • RPCS DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 Making default printer settings - Printing preferences properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar. The [Printers and Faxes] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 204 On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...]. The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer settings from an application To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows XP. Note ? The procedure you should follow to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. ? Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. On the [File] menu, click [Print...]. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the [Select Printer] box, select the printer you want to use. Make the necessary settings, click [Apply], and then click [Print] to start printing.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 205 Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing Printer Properties Making default printer settings - Printer properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Full Control permission. Members of Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, a confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 206 If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • RPCS DRIVERS\RPCS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1 Making default printer settings - Default document properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 207 On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults...]. The [Default] dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer settings from an application To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows NT 4.0. Note ? The procedure you should follow to open the printer properties dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. ? With some applications, printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied. ? Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. On the [File] menu, click [Print...]. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the[Name] list, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Click [OK] to start printing.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 208 PostScript 3 - Setting up for Printing Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing Printer Properties There are two methods you can use to open the printer properties dialog box. Making default printer settings To make default printer settings, first open the printer properties dialog box from the [Printers] window. Note ? With some applications, printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, a confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 209 If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • PostScript 3 DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1 Making printer settings from an application To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 95/98/Me. Note ? The procedure you should follow to open the printer properties dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. ? With some applications, printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied. ? Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 210 On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the[Name] list, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Click [OK] to start printing. Windows 2000 - Accessing Printer Properties Making default printer settings - Printer properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 211 Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, a confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • PostScript 3 DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP(Language)\DISK1Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 212 Making default printer settings - Printing preferences properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...]. The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 213 Making printer settings from an application To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows 2000. Note ? The procedure you should follow to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. ? Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. On the [File] menu, click [Print...]. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the [Select Printer] box, select the printer you want to use. Make the necessary settings, and then click [Print] to start printing.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 214 Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Printer Properties Making default printer settings - Printer properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar. The [Printers and Faxes] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, a confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 215 If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar. B Select [Add Print] from the file menu. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • PostScript 3 DRIVERS\PS\WIN2K_XP\(Language)\DISK1 Making default printer settings - Printing preferences properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar. The [Printers and Faxes] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 216 On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...]. The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer settings from an application To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows XP. Note ? The procedure you should follow to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. ? Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. On the [File] menu, click [Print...]. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the [Select Printer] box, select the printer you want to use. Make the necessary settings, click [Apply], and then click [Print] to start printing.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 217 Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing Printer Properties Making default printer settings - Printer properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Full Control permission. Members of Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, a confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 218 If a message is displayed during printer driver installation When there is a driver in the computer that is newer than the one currently being installed, a message dialog box appears. If this happens, you cannot install using the Auto Run program. Use the driver displayed in the message, and reinstall using [Add Printer]. A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Double-click the [Add Printer] icon. C Follow the wizard to install the driver. If the printer driver is stored on a CD-ROM, the source for installation is as follows: (If the installer starts up, click [Cancel] to quit it.) • PostScript 3 DRIVERS\PS\NT4\(Language)\DISK1 Making default printer settings - Default document properties Limitation ? Changing printer settings requires Full Control access permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups have Full Control permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 219 On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults...]. The [Default] dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Note ? Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications. Making printer settings from an application To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with Windows NT 4.0. Note ? The procedure you should follow to open the printer properties dialog box may differ depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation that comes with the application you are using. ? With some applications, printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied. ? Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only. On the [File] menu, click [Print...]. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the[Name] list, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears. Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK]. Click [OK] to start printing.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 220 Macintosh - Setting up for Printing Making paper settings from an application Open the file you want to print. On the [File] menu, click [Page Setup]. Check the printer you want to use is shown in [Format for:], and then use [Paper] *1 to select the paper size you want to use. *1 Under Mac OS X, this is called [Paper Size]. Note ? If the printer now appears in the [Format for:] box, use the pop-up menu to display a list of available printers. Reference The actual appearance of the [Page Setup] dialog box depends on the application you are using. See the documentation that comes with the Macintosh for more information. After configuring the settings, click [OK].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 221 Setting up for printing from an application Open the file you want to print. On the [File] menu, click [Print]. Check the printer is selected in the [Printer] box, and then make the printer settings. After configuring the settings, click [Print].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 222 Canceling a Print Job Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0 - Canceling a Print Job Double-click the printer icon on the Windows taskbar. A window appears, showing all print jobs currently queued for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel. Select the name of the job you want to cancel. On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel] or [Cancel Printing]. Note ? You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the printer icon in the [Printer] window. Press the Job Reset key on the control panel. “Job Reset?” appears on the panel display. Select between canceling the job currently printing and canceling all jobs (including the job currently printing) using the {UU} and {TT} keys. • When canceling only the current job Job Reset? Current JobOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 223 • When canceling all jobs including the current job Note ? It is also possible to resume printing by selecting [Resume Print], and then pressing the # Enter key. Press the # Enter key. A confirmation message appears. Note ? Printing resumes if you press the Escape key at this point. Press the # Enter key. The job is canceled. When the cancellation procedure is complete, a message appears. Important ? If the printer is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel someone else's print job. Note ? This procedure cancels print jobs being processed by the printer. In some cases, the printer may already be processing data for the next series of print jobs following the one currently being output. If this is the case, subsequent print jobs are also canceled when you press the Job Reset key. ? Print jobs containing a large volume of data may take considerable time to stop. Job Reset? All JobsOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 224 Macintosh - Canceling a Print Job Double-click the printer's icon on the desktop. A window appears, showing all print jobs currently queued for printing. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel. Note ? Under Mac OS X, start Print Center. Select the name of the job you want to cancel. Click the pause icon, and then click the trash icon. Press the Job Reset key on the control panel. “Job Reset?” appears on the panel display. Select between canceling the job currently printing and canceling all jobs (including the job currently printing) using the {UU} and {TT} keys. • When canceling only the current job • When canceling all jobs including the current job Job Reset? Current Job Job Reset? All JobsOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 225 Note ? It is also possible to resume printing by selecting [Resume Print], and then pressing the # Enter key. Press the # Enter key. A confirmation message appears. Note ? Printing resumes if you press the Escape key at this point. Press the # Enter key. The job is canceled. When the cancellation procedure is complete, a message appears. Important ? If the printer is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel someone else's print job. Note ? This procedure cancels print jobs being processed by the printer. In some cases, the printer may already be processing data for the next series of print jobs following the one currently being output. If this is the case, subsequent print jobs are also canceled when you press the Job Reset key. ? Print jobs containing a large volume of data may take considerable time to stop.226 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 9. Sample Print/Locked Print Sample Print Use this function to print only the first set of a multiple-set print jobs. Remaining sets are saved on the printer's optional hard disk drive. Saved jobs can be printed or canceled from the printer's control panel. Important ? If you turn off the power switch, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted. Limitation ? To use this function, the optional hard disk drive must be installed on the printer. Reference For more information about settings for printer driver, see the printer driver Help. Note ? You can identify the file you want to print by User ID and time it was stored. ? The actual number of pages the printer can save depends on the contents of the print images. For example, the printer can save up to 30 jobs or 1,000 pages for Sample Print and Locked Print. Page storage depends on data volume. ? If the first set of the Sample Print file is not as you expected and you do not want to print remaining sets, delete the Sample Print file using the control panel. ? If you print the remaining sets of the Sample Print file, the job in the printer is deleted automatically. ? The following procedures describe how to use this function with the PCL 5c or RPCS printer driver under Windows. If you want to use this function with the PostScript 3 printer driver or on a Macintosh, see PostScript 3 Supplement. From an application, select the menu command to print. The [Print] dialog box appears. In the[Name] list, select the printer you want to use, and then click [Properties]. The Printer Properties dialog box appears.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 227 In the [Job Type:] box, click [Sample Print]. In the [User ID:] box, enter a User ID of up to eight alphanumeric characters. Note ? This is used to identify the user associated with a job. ? The User ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Click [OK]. After making the necessary settings, click [OK]. Check the print job, and then select from the control panel whether to print or delete remaining sets. Reference See p.228 “Printing Remaining Sets”. See p.230 “Deleting a Sample Print File”.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 228 Printing Remaining Sets Press the Menu key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Sample Print”, and then press the # Enter key. User ID and time the job was stored appear. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the file you want to print, and then press the # Enter key. ACE082S Menu: Sample Print Sample Print 08:56 ABCD1234Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 229 Check “Print File” is displayed, and then press the # Enter key. Remaining sets are displayed. Note ? To cancel printing, press the Escape key. Press the # Enter key. To change the number of sets you want to print, press the {UU} or {TT} key to select the number of sets, and then press the # Enter key. The job is printed, and the job saved on the hard disk is deleted. Select Action: Print File Qty: 6(1-999) Press # to PrintOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 230 Deleting a Sample Print File Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the “Sample Print” menu, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the file you want to delete, and then press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: ACE082S Menu: Sample Print Sample Print: 08:56 ABCD1234Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 231 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Delete File”, and then press the # Enter key. Note ? If you want to cancel deletion of a Sample Print file, press the Escape key. Press the # Enter key to delete the file. The following message appears on the display: Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Select Action: Delete File 08:56 ABCD1234 Press# to Delete ReadyOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 232 Checking the Error Log When a print job is not saved on the hard disk, it remains in the error log and can be checked using the control panel. Limitation ? The error log displays up to 20 of the newest jobs. If you turn off the power switch, they will be deleted. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Sample Print”, and then press the # Enter key. User ID and time the job was stored appear. ACE082S Menu: Sample PrintOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 233 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Error File(s)”, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to check the log. After you finish checking the error log, press the Escape key. The display returns to the Sample Print job selection menu. Note ? To print a document with an error, either print by form feed or delete the job saved on the hard disk, and then resend the job from the computer. When you finish checking the error log, press the Escape key. The display returns to the Sample Print job selection menu. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Sample Print: Error File(s) Error File(s): 06:52 AB5D1234 ReadyOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 234 Locked Print Use this function to maintain privacy when printing confidential documents. Documents will not be printed out automatically, unless a password is entered using the control panel after sending the print job. Important ? If you turn off the power switch, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted. Limitation ? To use this function, the optional hard disk drive must be installed on the printer. Reference For more information about printer driver settings, see the printer driver Help. Note ? You can identify the file you want to print by User ID and time it was stored. ? The actual number of pages the printer can save depends on the contents of the print images. For example, the printer can save up to 30 jobs or 1,000 pages for Sample Print and Locked Print. Page storage depends on data volume. ? The following procedures describe how to use this function with the PCL 5c or RPCS printer driver under Windows. If you want to use this function with the PostScript 3 printer driver or on a Macintosh, see PostScript 3 Supplement. After the Locked Print file is printed, the job in the printer is deleted automatically. From an application, select the menu command to print. The [Print] dialog box appears. Open the printer properties dialog box. In the [Job Type:] box, click [Locked Print].Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 235 In the [User ID:] box, enter a User ID of up to eight alphanumeric characters. Note ? This is used to identify the user associated with a job. ? The User ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. In the [Password:] box, enter a password of four digits. Note ? The password must be four digits (0-9). Command to print. The job is saved on the Hard Disk Drive. Enter the password using the control panel, and then specify whether to print or delete. Reference See p.236 “Printing a Locked Print File”. See p.238 “Deleting a Locked Print File”. Limitation ? Print jobs are not saved on the hard disk in the following cases:(You can check the error log for jobs that were not saved.) • When there are 30 Sample Print and Locked Print jobs saved on the hard disk drive, and a 31st job is transmitted. • The total number of pages saved on the hard disk exceeds 1,000.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 236 Printing a Locked Print File Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Locked Print”, and then press the # Enter key. User ID and time the job was stored appear. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display a file you want to print, and then press the # Enter key. ACE082S Menu: Locked Print Locked Print 08:56 ABCD1234Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 237 Enter the password. A Press the {UU} or {TT} key to enter the leftmost digit of the password, and then press the # Enter key. B The next digit appears. C Enter the remaining digit of the password, and then press the # Enter key. Check “Print File” is displayed, and then press the # Enter key. Note ? If you want to cancel printing, press the Escape key. Press the # Enter key. The job is printed, and the job saved on the hard disk is deleted. Password: [0---] Password: [*0--] Select Action: Print File 08:56 ABCD1234 Press # to PrintOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 238 Deleting a Locked Print File Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the “Locked Print” menu, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the file you want to delete. ACE082S Menu: Locked Print Locked Print 08:56 ABCD1234Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 239 Enter the password of the Locked Print file. A Press the {UU} or {TT} key to enter the leftmost digit of the password, and then press the # Enter key. B The next digit appears. C Repeat steps and to enter the remaining password digits, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Delete File”, and then press the # Enter key. Note ? If you want change the Locked Print file, press the Escape key. Press the # Enter key. “Deleted” appears on the display, and then the printer returns to the previous menu. Password: [0---] Password: [*0--] Select Action: Delete FileOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 240 Checking the Error log When a print job is not saved on the hard disk, it remains in the error log and can be checked using the control panel. Limitation ? The error log displays up to 20 of the newest jobs. If you turn off the printer power, they will be deleted. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Locked Print”, and then press the # Enter key. User ID and time the job was stored appear. ACE082S Menu: Locked PrintOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 241 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Error File(s)”, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to check the log. After you finish checking the error log, press the Escape key. The display returns to the Locked Print job selection menu. Note ? To print a document with an error, either print or delete the job saved on the hard disk, and then printing command the host computer to print again. When you finish checking the error log, press the Escape key. The display returns to the Sample Print job selection menu. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Locked Print: Error File(s) Error File(s): 06:52 AB5D1234 Ready242 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 10. Checking Printer Status SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Start up SmartDeviceMonitor for Client. Right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the task bar, and then point and leftclick [Options] on the displayed menu. The [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client-Options] window is displayed. Select the printer you want to use, check [To be Monitored], and then click [OK]. Right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the task bar, and then point and leftclick the printer you want to monitor. The [Status] window of the target printer to be monitored is opened. Click the [Configuration] or [Device Properties] tab to find the amount of paper in the paper tray, etc.. Note ? For more information about how to use each item, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 243 Web Image Monitor Start up Web Image Monitor. In the [Address] box, enter “http://(the IP address of the printer you want the status to be displayed)”. The status of the selected printer appears on Web Image Monitor. If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or Netscape 7.0 or later must be installed on the computer. Click [Status] to find the amount of paper in the paper tray, etc.. Note ? For more information about how to use each item, see Web Image Monitor Help.244 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 11. Appendix Color Guide Color Printing Basics Additive (Emitted) and Subtractive (Reflected) Color Models All light is a mixture of red, green, and blue, which can be illustrated by what is normally called the RGB color model. When red, green, and blue are of equal intensities, the RGB color model produces white. Note ? RGB is also called additive or emitted color. The colors on your computer screen are produced by varying the intensities of RGB.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 245 Printed color is a mixture of cyan, magenta, and yellow, which can be illustrated by what is normally called the CMY color model. When mixed in equal proportions the CMY color model produces black. Note ? CMY is also called subtractive or reflective color. The printer uses CMY toner plus K (black) toner (CMYK color model) to provide full color printing. The colors of the RGB color model can be mixed to produce the cyan, magenta, and yellow of the CMY color model and vice versa. Two colors of one model are mixed to produce the color of the other model (mixing blue and green produces cyan, for example). The remaining color is the complement of the color produced (red in this example). Complementary colors are: red and cyan, green and magenta, blue and yellow.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 246 Printed Color This printer produces full-color output using four toner colors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. These four colors make up the CMYK color model. Note ? Mixing CMY in equal proportions should hypothetically produce pure black, but imperfections in ink cause equal measure of these colors to produce a muddy or dark brown. Black toner is added to the color model, making it possible to produce pure black. For example, if the image is created with cyan only, there is no problem printing it using only cyan toner. However, full-color images are comprised of 10,000s of fine colors. These fine colors can be expressed by changing the density of CMYK toner particles to be printed per unit of surface. There are also dark and light shadings to each color. This shading can be expressed by changing the density of toner particles printed per unit of surface.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 247 Printing a PDF File Directly You can send PDF files directly to the printer to print without opening a PDF application. Limitation ? This is possible for genuine Adobe PDF files only. ? Version 1.3, 1.4, and 1.5 PDF files are compatible. ? Transparency and JBIG2 (functions of PDF version 1.4) are not compatible. ? PDF version 1.5 only functions are not compatible. ? When you make the [Duplex] and [Layout] settings using the printer driver, be sure to select [Portrait] or [Landscape] according to the actual orientation of the PDF print job. ? The stapling and punching positions displayed in the printer driver dialog box apply to sheets in portrait orientation. If you staple or punch sheets in landscape orientation, the result may not be what you intended. Printing Method Using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite PDF files registered with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite can be sent directly to the printer for printing. Note ? The RPCS printer driver must be installed. ? Use DeskTopBinder V2 Lite on the provided CD-ROM. PDF file direct printing is supported only by DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Version 3.1.1.0 or later. ? PDF Direct Print settings can be made from PDF Direct Print properties. ? To print password-protected PDF files, you must do the following: • Enter the PDF password using PDF Direct Print properties. • On the control panel, select [PDF: Change PW] on the “PDF Menu” to set the PDF password.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 248 ? When a group password is set with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, set a group password using [PDF: Group PW] on the “PDF Menu” on the control panel. Reference For details, see DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Help. To check which version of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite you have, see Desk TopBinder V2 Lite Help or the DeskTopBinder V2 Lite ReadMe file on the provided CD-ROM. Using commands From Windows and UNIX, you can print PDF files directly, using commands such as “ftp” and “lpr”. Reference • For more information about printing using commands under Windows, see “Printing Files Directly from Windows”, Administrator Reference. • For more information about printing using commands under UNIX, see UNIX Supplement.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 249 Printing with Bluetooth Connection Preparation The printer supports the following profiles: • SPP • HCRP • BIP (Some printers do not support BIP. For details, see the manual that comes with the printer.) Reference For more information about printing with SPP, see p.249 “Printing with Bluetooth Connection”. For more information about printing with HCRP or BIP, see the manual for each product. For more information about the supported profiles, see the manual that comes with the Bluetooth adaptor. Printing with Bluetooth Connection Preparation Make sure you install the printer driver using the same procedure as for the parallel interface installation. For more information about how to install the printer driver, see p.75 “Printing via Parallel Connection”. Confirm the following: • The power switch is on. • The Bluetooth card has been inserted into the printer and its light is blinking. The printer is confirmed to work with a computer which has one of the following Bluetooth adaptors. • 3Com PCMCIA Bluetooth adaptor Parts# 3CRWB6096 • 3Com USB Bluetooth adaptor Parts# 3CRWB96Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 250 Note ? The system requirements depend on the Bluetooth product used. See the manual for each product for more details. ? For more information about how to set up Bluetooth under other operating systems or for use with different utilities, see the manuals for those operating systems or utilities. Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager. Make sure the printer you want to use appears in 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager. On the [Tool] menu, click [COM port]. Make sure that “Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx)” appears under Client Ports. (x indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth). Click [Close]. Click [Start] on the taskbar, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Click the [Ports] tab. Under [Port], select [COMx:]. x represents the same number as in step D. Click [OK]. The [Printers] window closes.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 251 If a dialog box appears while transmitting a print job, reestablish the connection as follows: A Select the printer you want to use in the [Softkey] list. B Click [Connect]. Note ? If you always use the same printer, select the [Always use for this connection] check box. Reference For more information, see the manual that comes with the Bluetooth adaptor. Security Mode Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager. On the [Tools] menu, click [Security Mode]. The [Security Mode] dialog box appears. Select a security mode in the [Security Mode:] list. If you select [High], or if you select [Custom] and then select [Link] in the [Custom Settings] dialog box, you will be asked to enter the Bluetooth password. (See p.252 “Printing” for details about how to find out what the password is.) For all other Security Modes and Custom Settings, no password will be asked. Note ? For more information about each mode, see the user's manual for the utility. Click [OK]. The [Security Mode] dialog box closes.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 252 Printing A Transmit the print job to the printer being used. Depending on how your computer is set up, the [Connect] dialog box may appear. If it does, use it to establish a connection with the printer. B The [Authentication] dialog box appears. C Enter the Bluetooth password, and then click [OK]. The Bluetooth password consists of the last four digits of the printer's serial number. You can find the serial number on the label on the back of the printer. For example, if the serial number is 00A0-001234, the Bluetooth password is 1234. D The print job is transmitted. Note ? The Bluetooth password differs for each printer and cannot be changed. SPP and HCRP • The maximum number of Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers that can be connected at the same time by the Bluetooth interface is two, including one by SPP connection and one by HCRP connection. • When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer at the same time, the first device which establishes the connection is selected. When selecting the connection between the other devices, you need to cancel the first established connection. • Conditions for Bidirectional Communication • SPP connection does not support bidirectional communication. • HCRP connection supports bidirectional communication.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 253 BIP • Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be connected using BIP. • The format that can be printed using BIP connection is JPEG. • User code is disabled for BIP connection. • If settings are made to limit the use of the print function using user codes, you cannot print. • Some printers do not support BIP. For details, see the manual that comes with the printer.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 254 Staple and Punch Position Stapling By installing the 2 tray finisher or booklet finisher, you can staple one set at a time when printing multiple copies. See the Help files of the printer driver for details about print methods. Limitation ? The printer cannot staple paper fed from the bypass tray. Note ? If you cannot make settings for stapling even when the 2 tray finisher or booklet finisher is connected, it is possible optional devices have not been attached properly. Make proper settings for any optional devices in the printer driver's dialog box. • See p.51 “Setting Up Options” in “Windows 95/98/Me Configuration”. • See p.84 “Setting Up Options” in “Windows 2000 Configuration”. • See p.115 “Setting Up Options” in “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Configuration”. • See p.143 “Setting Up Options” in “Windows NT 4.0 Configuration”. ? Staple output depends on print and feed direction. The following table shows possible staple positions:Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 255 Staple Position 2 tray finisherOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 256 Booklet finisher ? When two-sided printing is selected, adjust the staple position to the binding direction. ? If you are punching at the same time, specify the same side. ? The paper sizes and number of pages that can be stapled are displayed below. ACE073SOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 257 2 tray finisher Booklet finisher Punching Used to punch holes in pages. Limitation ? The printer cannot punch paper fed from the bypass tray. ? To use this function, the 2 tray finisher or booklet finisher must be installed on the printer. Note ? Punch positions depend on print and feed direction. The following table shows possible punch positions: Paper Size Staple Capacity A3, 11 × 17, B4, Legal 30 A4, B5, Letter 50 Paper Size Staple Capacity A3, B4, 11 × 17, Legal 25 A4, B5, Letter 50Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 258 Punch Position ? If you cannot make settings for punching even when the 2 tray finisher or booklet finisher is connected, it is possible optional devices have not been attached properly. Make proper settings for any optional devices in the printer driver's dialog box. • See p.51 “Setting Up Options” in “Windows 95/98/Me Configuration”. • See p.84 “Setting Up Options” in “Windows 2000 Configuration”. • See p.115 “Setting Up Options” in “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Configuration”. • See p.143 “Setting Up Options” in “Windows NT 4.0 Configuration”. ? When duplex print is selected, adjust the punch position to the binding direction. ? Paper sizes that can be punched are displayed below.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 259 2 tray finisher Type Feed Direction Paper Size 2 holes K ? A4, 16K, Letter L ? A3, 8K, 11×17 NA 3 holes K ? A4, B5, 16K, Letter L ? A3, B4, 8K, 11×17 EU 4 holes K ? A4, B5, 16K, Letter L ? A3, B4, 8K, 11×17 Northern EU 4 holes K ? A4, B5, 16K, Letter L ? A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 8K, 16K, 11×17, Legal, 8 1/2”×13”, 8 1/4”×13”, 8”×13”, LetterOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 260 Booklet finisher Type Feed Direction Paper Size NA 2 holes K ? A4, Letter L ? A3, A4, B5, 11 × 17, Legal, Letter NA 3 holes K ? A4, Letter L ? A3, 11 × 17 EU 2 holes K ? A4, B5, Letter L ? A3, B4, A4, B5, 11 × 17, Legal, Letter EU 4 holes K ? A4 L ? A3 Northern EU 4 holes K ? A4, B5, Letter L ? A3, B4, A4, B5, 11 × 17, Legal, LetterOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 261 Collate and Job Separation Reference For more information about collate and job separation, see the printer driver Help. Collate Output can be assembled as sequentially ordered sets. Job Separation The shift tray moves backward or forward each time the copies of a set or separate job are delivered, causing the next set to shift when delivered so you can differentiate between them. 2 1 3 321 321 3 21Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 262 Limitation ? The printer cannot collate or perform job separation when printing onto paper loaded on the bypass tray. ? The printer cannot collate or perform job separation when printing on “Thick”, and “OHP” paper types in the paper tray. ? To use these functions, a memory unit of total 192 MB or the hard disk must be installed on the printer. ? Job separation requires the optional 2 tray finisher or booklet finisher to be installed on the printer. Note ? If you cannot make settings for stapling even when the 2 tray finisher or booklet finisher is connected, it is possible optional devices have not been attached properly. Make proper settings for any optional devices in the printer driver's dialog box. • See p.51 “Setting Up Options” in “Windows 95/98/Me Configuration”. • See p.84 “Setting Up Options” in “Windows 2000 Configuration”. • See p.115 “Setting Up Options” in “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Configuration”. • See p.143 “Setting Up Options” in “Windows NT 4.0 Configuration”. ? If the output location is one of the finisher trays, job separation is performed. ? If you set “job separation” using the printer driver, the output location becomes one of the finisher trays automatically. ? The RPCS printer driver automatically sets “job separation” if you select one of the finisher trays as the output tray.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 263 Precautions When Using Windows Server 2003 Precautions When Using the Terminal Server Mode The following printer driver functions are either disabled or have limitations. Disabled functions are dimmed. • Disabled functions Locked Print, Sample Print, Overlay • Functions that require administrator permission Custom setting, Custom size, Watermark, [User settings] on the [Print Quality] tabOperating Instructions Printer Client Reference 264 Installing the Font Manager 2000 Limitation ? If your system is Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, installing software using Auto Run requires Administrators permission. When you install a printer driver using Auto Run, log on using an account that has Administrators permission. Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Click [Font Manager 2000]. Follow the instructions on the screen.Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 265 Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0 If you use this printer under Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 with Adobe PageMaker, you need to copy the PPD file to the PageMaker folder. The PPD file is the file with extension “.ppd” in the folder “DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME\(Language)\DISK1\” on the CD-ROM. The “WIN9X_ME” folder, inside the “PS” folder is for Windows 95/98/Me. Use the folder at a level appropriate for your operating system. The third folder, “(Language)” may be substituted for an appropriate language name. Copy the file with the extension “.ppd” to the PageMaker folder. • For PageMaker 6.0 default installation The directory is “C:\PM6\RSRC\PPD4”. • For PageMaker 6.5 default installation The directory is “C:\PM65\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”. The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection. • For PageMaker 7.0 default installation The directory is “C:\PM7\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”. The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection. Note ? If the driver is not set correctly after copying the “.ppd” file, printing may not be performed properly. ? When using PageMaker, the optional features that can be selected by the printer driver will not be active. The following procedure describes how to activate the optional printer features. A On the [File] menu, click [Print]. The [Print Document] dialog box appears. B Make the necessary settings in the [Features] box.266 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference INDEX 1394 Utility, 173 A Additive (Emitted) Color Models, 244 B Bidirectional transmission, 52, 85, 116, 143 C Changing the Zone (Macintosh), 160 Changing to EtherTalk, 158 Checking Printer Status, 242 Checking the Error Log, 232 Checking the Error log, 240 CMY, 245 CMY color model, 245 Collate, 261 Color Guide, 244 color models, 244 Color Printing Basics, 244 configuration Macintosh, 145 NetWare, 161 Windows 2000, 54 Windows NT 4.0, 118 Windows Server 2003, 87 Windows XP, 87 Configuring NetBEUI for Printing Windows 2000, 62 Windows 95/98/Me, 30 Windows NT 4.0, 126 Configuring Protocols Windows 2000, 60 Windows 95/98/Me, 28 Windows NT 4.0, 124 Windows Server 2003, 93 Windows XP, 93 Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing Windows 2000, 60 Windows 95/98/Me, 28 Windows NT 4.0, 124 Windows Server 2003, 93 Windows XP, 93 D Deleting a Locked Print File, 238 Deleting a Sample Print File, 230 E EtherTalk, 158 F Font Manager 2000, 173, 264Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 267 I Installing Software Windows 2000, 63 Windows 95/98/Me, 31 Windows NT 4.0, 127 Windows Server 2003, 95 Windows XP, 95 J Job Separation, 261 L LAN adapter number (Lana Number), 126 M Macintosh, 145 ColorSync, installing, 150 N NetWare, 161 NetWare Configuration Windows 2000, 164 Windows 95/98/Me, 161 Windows NT 4.0, 170 WindowsXP, 167 P PageMaker, 265 PCL 5c, 176 PDF Direct Print, 247 PostScript, 177 Precautions When Using the Terminal Server Mode Windows Server 2003, 263 Precautions When Using Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003, 263 printer driver, 175 printer name, 159 Printing a Locked Print File, 234, 236 Printing a PDF File Directly PDF Direct Print, 247 Printing Method PDF Direct Print, 247 Printing Remaining Sets, 228 Printing Using a Print Server Windows 2000, 54 Windows 95/98/Me, 22 Windows NT 4.0, 118 Windows Server 2003, 87 Windows XP, 87 Printing via Parallel Connection Windows 2000, 75 Windows 95/98/Me, 43 Windows NT 4.0, 139 Windows Server 2003, 106 Windows XP, 106 Printing with Bluetooth Connection Windows, 249Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference 268 Printing without a Print Server Windows 2000, 60 Windows 95/98/Me, 28 Windows NT 4.0, 124 Windows Server 2003, 93 Windows XP, 93 Punching, 257 R RGB, 244 RGB color model, 244 S Sample Print, 226 Setting Up Options Windows 2000, 84 Windows 95/98/Me, 51 Windows NT 4.0, 143 Windows Server 2003, 115 Windows XP, 115 Setting up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job, 184 SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 178 SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, 181 Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM, 173 Sorting copies into sets, 261 Stapling, 254 Subtractive (Reflected) Color Models, 244 U USB Printing Support, 173 Using Rendezvous Mac OS X, 157 Using USB Interface Mac OS, 153 Mac OS X, 156 W Windows 2000, 54 printer properties, PostScript 3, 210 printer properties, RPCS, 186, 199 Windows 95/98/Me printer properties, PostScript 3, 208 printer properties, RPCS, 184, 196 Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0 canceling a job, 222 Windows 95/98/Me Configuration, 22 Windows NT 4.0, 118 document defaults, PostScript 3, 218 document defaults, RPCS, 194, 206 printer properties, PostScript 3, 217 printer properties, RPCS, 193, 205 Windows Server 2003, 87 printer properties, PostScript 3, 214 printer properties, RPCS, 190 Windows Setup Netware Configuration, 161 Windows XP, 87 printer properties, PostScript 3, 214 printer properties, RPCS, 190, 202269 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference Copyright © 2004270 Operating Instructions Printer Client Reference EN USA G106-75171 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference Introduction ..........................................................................................................................................7 How to Read This Manual...................................................................................................................9 Checking the Network Environment ................................................................................................11 Print Server Configuration............................................................................................................................... 12 NetWare Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 13 1. Windows 2000 Print Server Configuration Configuring Protocols ........................................................................................................................16 Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing........................................................................................................ 16 Configuring NetBEUI for Printing .................................................................................................................. 18 Installing Software..............................................................................................................................19 Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client....................................................................................................... 19 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................................................. 20 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver............................................................................................................ 25 Changing Port Settings .................................................................................................................................... 29 Setting Up Options .............................................................................................................................31 Settings for Printer Share ..................................................................................................................34 2. Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Print Server Configuration Configuring Protocols ........................................................................................................................36 Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing........................................................................................................ 36 Installing Software..............................................................................................................................38 Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client....................................................................................................... 38 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................................................. 39 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver............................................................................................................ 44 Changing Port Settings .................................................................................................................................... 48Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 2 Setting Up Options .............................................................................................................................49 Settings for Printer Share ..................................................................................................................52 3. Windows NT 4.0 Print Server Configuration Configuring Protocols ........................................................................................................................54 Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing........................................................................................................ 54 Configuring NetBEUI for Printing .................................................................................................................. 56 Installing Software..............................................................................................................................58 Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client....................................................................................................... 58 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................................................. 59 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver............................................................................................................ 64 Changing Port Settings .................................................................................................................................... 68 Setting Up Options .............................................................................................................................69 Settings for Printer Share ..................................................................................................................72 4. NetWare Configuration Configuring NetWare Using the Control Panel...............................................................................73 NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings......................................................................................................78 Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ..................................................................................................... 79 Setting Up as a Print Server............................................................................................................................. 79 Setting Up as a Remote Printer........................................................................................................................ 81 NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5 - Advanced Settings .................................................................................85 Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ..................................................................................................... 86 Setting Up as a Print Server............................................................................................................................. 86 Setting Up as a Remote Printer........................................................................................................................ 90Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 3 5. Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin......................................................................................96 Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration..................................................................97 Changing Names and Comments ......................................................................................................99 Displaying Printer Status.................................................................................................................102 Locking Menus on the Printer's Control Panel.............................................................................103 Changing the Paper Type ................................................................................................................104 Managing the Number of Copies to be Printed .............................................................................105 Configuring Energy Save Mode ......................................................................................................106 Setting a Password............................................................................................................................107 6. Using a Web Image Monitor Going to the Top Page......................................................................................................................110 Access in Administrator Mode ........................................................................................................112 Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings ....................................................................................... 112 Using Help on Web Image Monitor ................................................................................................114 Downloading Help......................................................................................................................................... 114 Linking the Address (URL) to the [Help] Button .......................................................................................... 115 Changing Names and Comments ....................................................................................................116 Displaying Printer Status.................................................................................................................118 Machine Status Notification by E-mail...........................................................................................119Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 4 7. Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel Menu Chart .......................................................................................................................................121 Accessing the Main Menu ................................................................................................................126 Paper Input Menu ............................................................................................................................129 Paper Input Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 129 Changing the Paper Input Menu .................................................................................................................... 132 List/Test Print Menu ........................................................................................................................136 List/Test Print Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 137 Printing a Configuration Page ....................................................................................................................... 138 Interpreting the Configuration Page .............................................................................................................. 140 Maintenance Menu...........................................................................................................................144 Maintenance Menu Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 144 Changing the Maintenance Menu .................................................................................................................. 147 System Menu.....................................................................................................................................154 System Parameters......................................................................................................................................... 155 Changing the System Menu........................................................................................................................... 164 Host Interface Menu.........................................................................................................................167 Host Interface Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 167 Changing the Host Interface Menu................................................................................................................ 177 PCL Menu .........................................................................................................................................180 PCL Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 180 Changing the PCL Menu ............................................................................................................................... 184 PS Menu ............................................................................................................................................187 PS Parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 188 Changing the PS Menu .................................................................................................................................. 190 PDF Menu .........................................................................................................................................193 PDF Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 193 Changing the PDF Menu ............................................................................................................................... 195Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 5 Language Menu ................................................................................................................................198 Changing the Language Menu....................................................................................................................... 198 8. Appendix Printing Files Directly from Windows............................................................................................201 Setup .............................................................................................................................................................. 201 Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address................................................................................................ 202 Printing Method ............................................................................................................................................. 204 SNMP.................................................................................................................................................208 Spool Printing ...................................................................................................................................209 Setting Spool Printing.................................................................................................................................... 210 Confirm or Delete the Spooled Job from Web Image Monitor ..................................................................... 210 Remote Maintenance by telnet ........................................................................................................212 Using telnet.................................................................................................................................................... 212 Commands List.............................................................................................................................................. 213 Getting Printer Information over the Network .............................................................................251 Printer current status ...................................................................................................................................... 251 Printer configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 256 Understanding the Displayed Information ....................................................................................260 Print Job Information ..................................................................................................................................... 260 Print Log Information .................................................................................................................................... 261 Configuring the Network Interface Board ..................................................................................................... 262 Message List ......................................................................................................................................270 System Log Information ................................................................................................................................ 270 When Using Windows Terminal Service/MetaFrame ..................................................................281 Operating Environment ................................................................................................................................. 281 Supported Printer Drivers .............................................................................................................................. 282 Limitation ...................................................................................................................................................... 282 Cautions When Using the Bluetooth Interface Unit......................................................................284Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 6 Precautions ........................................................................................................................................285 Connecting a Dial Up Router to a Network................................................................................................... 285 PostScript Printing from Windows ................................................................................................................ 287 NetWare Printing ........................................................................................................................................... 287 Using DHCP .................................................................................................................................................. 289 Configuring a WINS Server .......................................................................................................................... 291 Memory Capacity and Paper Size...................................................................................................294 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................297 Main Unit....................................................................................................................................................... 297 Options........................................................................................................................................................... 302 Information about Installed Software ............................................................................................311 expat............................................................................................................................................................... 311 JPEG LIBRARY............................................................................................................................................ 312 NetBSD.......................................................................................................................................................... 312 RSA® BSAFE™............................................................................................................................................ 315 INDEX .................................................................................................................................3167 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference Introduction This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine. To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS. Important Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine. Software Version Conventions Used in This Manual • NetWare 3.x means NetWare 3.12 and 3.2. • NetWare 4.x means NetWare 4.1, 4.11 and IntranetWare. Trademarks Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Netscape, Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation. Novell, NetWare, NDS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated. PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. Solaris is a trademark or registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 8 Bluetooth is a Trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. (Special Interest Group) and licensed to RICOH Company Limited. The Bluetooth Trademarks are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. USA Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks. The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows: • The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows 95. • The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98. • The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me). • The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional • The product names of Windows® XP are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition • The product names of Windows Server TM 2003 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Web Edition • The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0 • Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0 Notes: Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine. Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer. Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.9 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference How to Read This Manual Symbols The following set of symbols is used in this manual. R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section. R CAUTION: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in minor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section. * The statements above are notes for your safety. Important If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicates information or preparations required prior to operating. Note This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after abnormal operation. Limitation This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together, or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 10 Reference This symbol indicates a reference. [ ] Keys that appear on the machine's display panel. [ ] Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display. { } Keys built into the machine's control panel. { } Keys on the computer's keyboard.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 11 Checking the Network Environment Connecting Printer and Computer • Network connection (Ethernet cable, IEEE 1394 cable (IP over 1394), IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN)) • Parallel connection (parallel cable) NetWare (Server) Windows 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 (Server) Macintosh NetWare (Client) UNIX Windows 95/98/Me/ 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 ACE018SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 12 • USB connection (USB cable) • IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) connection (IEEE 1394 cable) • Bluetooth TM connection Print Server Configuration You can use Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server2003, or Windows NT 4.0 as a Print Server. See p.15 “Windows 2000 Print Server Configuration”. See p.35 “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Print Server Configuration”. See p.53 “Windows NT 4.0 Print Server Configuration”. Windows 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 Print Server Print Server Windows 95/98/Me/ 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 ACE019SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 13 NetWare Configuration To set the machine up as a network printer in a NetWare environment. The network interface board allows you to use the machine as a print server or remote printer. NetWare File Server Print Server Windows 95/98/Me/ 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 ACE020SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 14 See p.73 “NetWare Configuration”. NetWare Print Server NetWare File Server Remote Printer Windows 95/98/Me/ 2000/XP Windows Server 2003 Windows NT 4.0 ACE021S15 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 1. Windows 2000 Print Server Configuration To use a network printer, click [SmartDeviceMonitor], [Standard TCP/IP Port], or [LPR Port] when installing the printer driver. • SmartDeviceMonitor See p.16 “Configuring Protocols”, p.19 “Installing Software”, p.20 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”, and p.25 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”. • Standard TCP/IP Port, LPR Port See p.16 “Configuring Protocols”, p.20 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”, and p.25 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”. Note ? If you want to use LPR Port, Print Services for UNIX must be installed. For details, see Windows 2000 Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 16 Configuring Protocols Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing This describes how to configure the network interface board and Windows 2000 to use TCP/IP and IPP. Preparation To use NetBEUI, use the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use TCP/IP. • Check TCP/IP is set to active. (The factory default is active.) • Assign an IP address and make other settings required for TCP/IP. Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Windows 2000 Configuration”, Printer Client Reference. If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see p.289 “Using DHCP”. Note ? After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly. A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories], and then click [Command Prompt]. B Enter the following: (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) C:> ping 192.168.15.16 If the address is configured correctly, the following message appears: Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32 If the address is configured incorrectly, the following message appears: Request timed out.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 17 Configuring a Windows 2000 computer Follow the procedure below to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use TCP/IP. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and Dial-up Connections]. Click [Local Area Connection]. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Check [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is selected in the [Components checked are used by this connection:] box on the [General] tab. Note ? If the check box for TCP/IP is not selected, select it. ? If TCP/IP is not installed, click [Install] on the [General] tab and install it. For more information about installing TCP/IP, see Windows 2000 Help. Configure TCP/IP with an appropriate IP address, subnet mask, and other settings. Check with the network administrator that the settings are correct.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 18 Configuring NetBEUI for Printing This describes how to configure the network interface board and Windows 2000 to use NetBEUI. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use NetBEUI. • Check NetBEUI is set to active. (The factory default is active.) Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Windows 2000 Configuration”, Printer Client Reference. Configuring a Windows 2000 computer Follow the procedure below to configure a Windows 2000 computer to use NetBEUI. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Network and Dial-up Connections]. Click [Local Area Connection]. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Check [NetBEUI Protocol] is selected in the [Components checked are used by this connection:] box on the [General] tab. Note ? If the check box for NetBEUI is not selected, select it. ? If NetBEUI is not installed, click [Install] on the [General] tab and install it. For more information about installing NetBEUI, see Windows 2000 Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 19 Installing Software Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note ? If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, restart and continue configuration.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 20 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 21 Select the printer drivers you want to use when the [Select Program] dialog box appears, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model(s) you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Click [Port:], and then click [Add] in the [Change settings for 'Port'] box. The [Add Port] dialog box appears. The next part of the procedure depends on the port in use. Follow the section that corresponds to the port you want to use. SmartDeviceMonitor A Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK]. B Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 22 Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. NetBEUI A Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search]. A list of printers that can be used with NetBEUI appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. Check the NetBEUI network address is on the configuration page. For more information about printing the configuration page, see p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page”. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path name in the form of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not enter “\\” as head characters but “%%”. ? You cannot print to printers beyond routers. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B To specify the printer's IP address, enter “http://(printer's-ip-address)/printer” in the [Printer URL] field. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 23 (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the necessary settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK]. Standard TCP/IP Port A Click [Standard TCP/IP Port], and then click [OK]. B In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Next>]. C In the [Printer Name or IP Address] box, enter the printer name or IP address, and then click [Next>]. D In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Finish]. LPR Port A Click [LPR Port], and then click [OK]. B In the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box, enter the printer's IP address. C In the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, enter “lp”, and then click [OK]. Make sure the location for the selected printer is displayed after [Port:].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 24 Double-click [Shared] to display share settings. To share the printer, select the [Shared] check box. Check the boxes under [Share name] to install the alternative driver for the necessary system. Note ? Select the [Shared] check box to start installation of an alternative driver ([Windows NT 4.0/2000] and [Windows 95/98/Me] are already selected). ? You can add an alternative driver after installation. See p.34 “Settings for Printer Share”. Configure the default printer as necessary. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.32 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.31 “Setting Up Options”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 25 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. Add Printer Wizard starts. Click [Next>].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 26 Click [Local printer], and then click [Next>]. Click [Create a new port:]. The next part of the procedure depends on the port in use. Follow the section that corresponds to the port you want to use. • SmartDeviceMonitor • Standard TCP/IP Port • LPR Port SmartDeviceMonitor A Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next>]. B Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. NetBEUI A Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search]. A list of printers that can be used with NetBEUI appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 27 Note ? Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. Check the NetBEUI network address is on the configuration page. For more information about printing the configuration page, see p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page”. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path name in the form of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not enter “\\” as head characters but “%%”. ? You cannot print to printers beyond routers. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B To specify the printer's IP address, enter “http://(printer's-ip-address)/printer” in the [Printer URL] field. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the necessary settings.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 28 Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK]. Standard TCP/IP Port A Click [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [Next>]. B In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Next>]. C In the [Printer Name or IP Address] box, enter the printer name or IP address, and then click [Next>]. D In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Finish]. LPR Port A Click [LPR Port], and then click [Next>]. B In the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box, enter the printer's IP address. C In the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, enter “lp”, and then click [OK]. Confirm to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next>]. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next>]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Select the [Yes] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Select the [Share as:] check box, and then click [Next>]. To change the printer name, use the [Share as:] box.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 29 Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Next>]. Click [Finish]. Printer driver installation starts. Set up the options. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.31 “Setting Up Options”. Changing Port Settings This describes how to change SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as proxy server settings or IPP URL. Note ? There are no settings for NetBEUI. In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port]. The [Port Configuration:] dialog box appears. Note ? If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below. A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box. B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 30 C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port] check box. D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box. • For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings, and Timeout Settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 31 Setting Up Options You must set up installed options, paper size, and feed direction with the printer driver when bidirectional transmission is disabled. Limitation ? Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Note ? The description uses the PCL 5c printer driver. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Click the [Accessories] tab. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [Change Accessories] tab. ? If you are using the PostScript 3 printer driver, click the [Device Settings] tab.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 32 Select options you have installed from the [Options] group, and then make any necessary settings. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, select the options from [Select printer options:]. ? If you are using the PostScript 3 printer driver, select the options from [Installable Options]. Click [OK]. Bidirectional transmission When bidirectional transmission is enabled, information about paper size and feed direction settings is automatically sent to the printer by a computer. You can also check the printer status from your computer. • Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. • If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, the [Change Accessories] tab is shaded, and cannot be modified Note ? The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically. ? The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission; you can update the printer status manually. However, it does not support bidirectional transmission over a parallel connection. ? The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission. Bidirectional transmission requires the following conditions:Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 33 When connecting via parallel cable • The computer must support bidirectional transmission. • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • The interface cable must support bidirectional transmission. • The machine must be connected to the computer using standard parallel cable and parallel connector. • Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver. When connecting with the network • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • SmartDeviceMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and TCP/IP must be used. • Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 34 Settings for Printer Share Limitation ? Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Select the [Shared as:] check box on the [Sharing] tab. To share a printer with users running different versions of Windows, click [Additional Drivers...], and then follow the instruction on the screen. Note ? If you have installed an alternative driver by selecting the [Shared] check box, you do not have to follow this step. Click [OK].35 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 2. Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Print Server Configuration To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface, click [SmartDeviceMonitor], [Standard TCP/IP Port], or [LPR Port] when installing the printer driver. • SmartDeviceMonitor See p.36 “Configuring Protocols”, p.38 “Installing Software”, p.39 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”, and p.44 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”. • Standard TCP/IP Port, LPR Port See p.36 “Configuring Protocols”, p.39 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”, and p.44 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”. Note ? If you want to use “LPR Port”, “Print Services for UNIX” must be installed. For details, see Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 36 Configuring Protocols Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing This describes how to configure the network interface board and Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 to use TCP/IP and IPP. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use TCP/IP. • Check TCP/IP is set to active. (The factory default is active.) • Assign an IP address and make other settings required for TCP/IP. Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 Configuration”, Printer Client Reference. If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see p.289 “Using DHCP”. Note ? After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly. A On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], point to [Accessories], and then click [Command Prompt]. B Enter the following: (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) C:> ping 192.168.15.16 If the address is configured correctly, the following message appears: Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32 If the address is configured incorrectly, the following message appears: Request timed out.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 37 Configuring a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 computer Follow the procedure below to configure a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 computer to use TCP/IP. On the [Start] menu, point to [Control Panel], and then click [Network Connections]. Click [Local Area Connection]. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Check [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] is selected in the [This connection uses the following items:] box on the [General] tab. Note ? If the check box for TCP/IP is not selected, select it. ? If TCP/IP is not installed, click [Install] on the [General] tab and install it. For more information about installing TCP/IP, see Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 Help. Configure TCP/IP with an appropriate IP address, subnet mask, and other settings. Check with the network administrator that the settings are correct.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 38 Installing Software Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note ? If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, restart and continue configuration.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 39 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 40 Select the printer drivers you want to use when the [Select Program] dialog appears, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model(s) you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Click [Port:], and then click [Add] in the [Change settings for 'Port'] box. The next part of the procedure depends on the port in use. Follow the section that corresponds to the port you want to use. • SmartDeviceMonitor • Standard TCP/IP Port • LPR Port SmartDeviceMonitor A Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK]. B Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 41 B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B To specify the printer's IP address, enter “http://(printer's-ip-address)/printer” in the [Printer URL] field. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the necessary settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 42 Standard TCP/IP Port A Click [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [OK]. B In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Next>]. C In the [Printer Name or IP Address] box, enter the printer name or IP address, and then click [Next>]. D In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Finish]. LPR Port A Click [LPR Port], and then click [OK]. B In the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box, enter the printer's IP address. C In the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, enter “lp”, and then click [OK]. Make sure the location for the selected printer is displayed after [Port:]. Double-click [Shared] to display share settings. To share the printer, select the [Shared] check box. Check the boxes under [Share name] to install the alternative driver for the necessary system. Note ? Select the [Shared] check box to start installation of an alternative driver ([Windows NT 4.0/2000] and [Windows 95/98/Me] are already selected). ? You can add an alternative driver after installation. See p.52 “Settings for Printer Share”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 43 Configure the default printer as necessary. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. Note ? During installation, the [Software Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.50 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.49 “Setting Up Options”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 44 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. Add Printer Wizard starts. Click [Next>].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 45 Click [Local printer attached to this computer], and then click [Next>]. Click [Create a new port:]. The next part of the procedure depends on the port in use. Follow the section that corresponds to the port you want to use. • SmartDeviceMonitor • Standard TCP/IP Port • LPR Port SmartDeviceMonitor A Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next>]. B Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 46 B To specify the printer's IP address, enter “http://(printer's-ip-address)/printer” in the [Printer URL] field. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the necessary settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK]. Standard TCP/IP Port A Click [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [Next>]. B In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Next>]. C In the [Printer Name or IP Address] box, enter the printer name or IP address, and then click [Next>]. D In the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] window, click [Finish].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 47 LPR Port A In [Create a new Port:], click [LPR Port], and then click [Next>]. B In the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box, enter the printer's IP address. C In the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, enter “lp”, and then click [OK]. Confirm to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next>]. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next>]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Select the [Yes] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Select the [Share name:] check box, and then click [Next>]. To change the printer name, use the [Share name: ] box. Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Next>]. Click [Finish]. Printer driver installation starts. Note ? During installation, the [Hardware Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installation. Set up the options. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.49 “Setting Up Options”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 48 Changing Port Settings Follow the procedure below to change SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as proxy server settings or IPP URL. In the [Printers and Faxes] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port]. The [Port Configuration:] dialog box appears. Note ? If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below. A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box. B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar. C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port] check box. D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box. • For IPP, you can configure IPP User Settings, Proxy Settings, and Timeout Settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 49 Setting Up Options You must set up installed options, paper size and feed direction with the printer driver when bidirectional transmission is disabled. Limitation ? Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Note ? The description uses the PCL 5c printer driver. Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar. The [Printers and Faxes] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Click the [Accessories] tab. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [Change Accessories] tab. ? If you are using the PostScript 3 printer driver, click the [Device Settings] tab.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 50 Select options you have installed from the [Options] group, and then make any necessary settings. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, select the options from [Select printer options:]. ? If you are using the PostScript 3 printer driver, select the options from [Installable Options]. Click [OK]. Bidirectional transmission When bidirectional transmission is enabled, information about paper size and feed direction settings is automatically sent to the printer by a computer. You can also check printer status from your computer. • Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. • If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, the [Change Accessories] tab is shaded, and cannot be used. Note ? The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically. ? The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission; you can update the printer status manually. ? The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission. Bidirectional transmission requires the following conditions:Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 51 When connecting via parallel cable • The computer must support bidirectional transmission. • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • The interface cable must support bidirectional transmission. • The machine must be connected to the computer using standard parallel cable and parallel connector. • Under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver. When connecting with the network • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • SmartDeviceMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and TCP/IP must be used. • Under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 52 Settings for Printer Share Limitation ? Changing the printer settings requires Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar. The [Printers and Faxes] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Select the [Share this printer:] check box on the [Sharing] tab. To share a printer with users running different versions of Windows, click [Additional Drivers...], and then follow the instruction on the screen. Note ? If you have installed an alternative driver by selecting the [Shared] check box, you do not have to follow this step. Click [OK].53 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 3. Windows NT 4.0 Print Server Configuration To use a printer connected to the Ethernet interface, click [SmartDeviceMonitor] or [LPR Port] when installing the printer driver. • SmartDeviceMonitor See p.54 “Configuring Protocols”, p.58 “Installing Software”, p.59 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”, and p.64 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”. • LPR Port See p.54 “Configuring Protocols”, p.59 “Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver”, and p.64 “Installing the PostScript Printer Driver”. Note ? If you want to use “LPR Port”, “Microsoft TCP/ IP Printing” must be installed. For details, see Windows NT 4.0 Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 54 Configuring Protocols Configuring TCP/IP and IPP for Printing This describes how to configure the network interface board and Windows NT 4.0 to use TCP/IP and IPP. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use TCP/IP. • Check TCP/IP is set to active. (The factory default is active.) • Assign an IP address and make other settings required for TCP/IP. Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Windows NT 4.0 Configuration”, Printer Client Reference. If DHCP is used to assign IP addresses, see p.70 “Bidirectional transmission”. Note ? After setting the IP address, use the ping command to confirm that it has been set correctly. A On the [Start] menu, point to [Programs], and then click [Command Prompt]. B Enter the following: (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) C:> ping 192.168.15.16 If the address is configured correctly, the following message appears: Reply from 192.168.15.16 : bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=32 If the address is configured incorrectly, the following message appears: Request timed out.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 55 Configuring a Windows NT 4.0 computer Follow the procedure below to configure a Windows NT 4.0 computer to use TCP/IP. Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Check “TCP/IP Protocol” is listed in the [Network protocols] box on the [Protocols] tab. Note ? If TCP/IP is not installed, click [Add] on the [Protocols] tab and install it. For more information about installing TCP/IP, see Windows NT 4.0 Help. Check TCP/IP with an appropriate IP address, subnet mask, and other settings. Check the settings are correct with the network administrator. Click the [Services] tab, and confirm that “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” is installed. If “Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” is not installed, click [Add] on the [Services] tab, and install it. For more information about installing and configuring network services, see Windows NT 4.0 Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 56 Configuring NetBEUI for Printing This describes how to configure the network interface board and Windows NT 4.0 to use NetBEUI. Preparation To use NetBEUI, use the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port. Configuring the printer Configure the printer to use NetBEUI. • Check NetBEUI is set to active. (The factory default is active.) Reference For more information about how to make the above settings, see “Windows NT 4.0 Configuration”, Printer Client Reference. Configuring a Windows NT 4.0 computer Install NetBEUI on the Windows NT 4.0 computer, and then change the LAN adapter number (Lana Number). Open [Control Panel] and double-click the [Network] icon. Check [NetBEUI Protocol] is listed in the [Network Protocols] box on the [Protocols] tab. Note ? If NetBEUI is not installed, click [Add...] on the [Protocols] tab, and install it. For more information about installing NetBEUI, see Windows NT 4.0 Help. Change the Lana Number. Click the [Services] tab, click [NetBEUI Interface] in the [Network Services:] box, and then click [Properties:].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 57 Click the Lana Number corresponding to the Nbf protocol of the [Network Route] headline, and then click [Edit]. Enter “0” as the Lana Number. Note ? If another protocol's Lana Number is configured to “0”, change it to another number. Click [OK]. Click [Close]. After confirming the message to restart, click [Yes]. Note ? After you change the Lana Number, you must restart the computer.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 58 Installing Software Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note ? If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, restart and continue configuration.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 59 Installing the PCL 5c or RPCS Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 60 Select the printer drivers you want to use when the [Select Program] dialog appears, and then click [Next>]. You can select more than one printer driver. Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer model(s) you want to use. To change the printer name, use the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box. Double-click the printer name to display its settings. Note ? The details shown for [Comment:], [Driver], and [Port:] vary depending on the operating system being used, model of printer selected, and port being used. Click [Port:], and then click [Add] in the [Change settings for 'Port'] box. The next part of the procedure depends on the port in use. Follow the section that corresponds to the port you want to use. • SmartDeviceMonitor • LPR Port SmartDeviceMonitor A Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [OK]. B Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 61 Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. NetBEUI A Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search]. A list of printers that can be used with NetBEUI appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to an broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. Check the NetBEUI network address is on the configuration page. For more information about the printing of configuration page, see p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page”. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on a configuration page. Enter the printer's network path name in form of “%%Computer name \Share name”. Do not enter “\\” as head characters but “%%”. ? You cannot print to printers beyond routers. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP settings dialog box appears. B To specify the printer's IP address, enter “http://(printer's-ip-address)/printer” in the [Printer URL] field. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 62 (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the necessary settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK]. LPR Port A Click [LPR Port], and then click [OK]. B In the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box, enter the printer's IP address. C In the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, enter “lp”, and then click [OK]. Make sure the location for the selected printer is displayed after [Port:]. Double-click [Shared] to display share settings. To share the printer, select the [Shared] check box. Check the boxes under [Share name] to install the alternative driver for the necessary system.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 63 Note ? Select the [Shared] check box to start installation of an alternative driver ([Windows NT 4.0/2000] and [Windows 95/98/Me] are already selected). ? You can add an alternative driver after installation. See p.72 “Settings for Printer Share”. Configure the default printer as necessary. Default Printer Select the [Default Printer] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Click [Continue] to start printer driver installation. When the [Select Program] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. When the [Installation completion] dialog box appears, click [Finish]. Set up the options. Note ? You must set up the options when bidirectional transmission is disabled. For more information about bidirectional transmission status, see p.70 “Bidirectional transmission”. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.69 “Setting Up Options”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 64 Installing the PostScript Printer Driver Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Important ? Never have two versions of the same printer driver installed on your system at the same time. When upgrading to a new version of the printer driver, delete the old version, and then install the new one. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Note ? The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The printer driver will be installed in English if you select the following languages: Cestina, Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver]. Add Printer Wizard starts. Click [Next>].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 65 Click [Local printer], and then click [Next>]. Click [Add Port...]. The next part of the procedure depends on the port in use. Follow the section that corresponds to the port you want to use. • SmartDeviceMonitor • LPR Port SmartDeviceMonitor A Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...]. B Select the printer you want to use. TCP/IP A Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search]. Available printers will be listed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK]. Note ? Printers that respond to an IP broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the printer's IP address or host name. NetBEUI A Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search]. A list of printers that can be used with NetBEUI appears. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 66 Note ? Printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer will be displayed. To print to a printer not listed here, click [Specify Address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. Check the NetBEUI network address is on the configuration page. For more information about printing the configuration page, see p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page”. NetBEUI address appears as “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path name in the form of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Do not enter “\\” as head characters but “%%”. ? You cannot print to printers beyond routers. IPP A Click [IPP]. The IPP setting dialog box appears. B To specify the printer's IP address, enter “http://(printer's-ip-address)/printer” in the [Printer URL] field. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. (Example: IP address is 192.168.15.16) http://192.168.15.16/printer https://192.168.15.16/printer C If necessary, enter the names to distinguish the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Enter a different name from those of existing port names. If you do not do this, the address entered in [Printer URL] will be set as the IPP port name. D If a proxy server and IPP user name are used, click [Detailed Settings] and configure the necessary settings.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 67 Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help. E Click [OK]. LPR Port A Click [LPR Port], and then click [New Port...]. B In the [Name or address of server providing lpd] box, enter the printer's IP address. C In the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, enter “lp”, and then click [OK]. D Click [Close] in the [Printer Ports] dialog box, and then click [Next>]. Confirm to select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then click [Next>]. Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next>]. Configure the default printer as necessary. Select the [Yes] check box to set the printer as the default printer. Select the [Shared] check box, select the operating system as necessary, and then click [Next>]. To change the printer name, use the [Share Name:] box. Select whether or not you want to print a test page, and then click [Finish]. Printer driver installation starts. Set up the options. Reference For more information about option settings, see p.69 “Setting Up Options”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 68 Changing Port Settings This describes how to change SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as proxy server settings or IPP URL. Note ? There are no settings for NetBEUI. In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Click the [Ports] tab, and then click [Configure Port]. The [Port Configuration:] dialog box appears. Note ? If you cannot set items on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab, follow the procedure below. A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box. B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar. C Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port] check box. D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box. • For IPP, you can configure User Settings, Proxy Settings, and Timeout Settings. Note ? For more information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 69 Setting Up Options You must set up installed options, paper size, and feed direction with the printer driver when bidirectional transmission is disabled. Limitation ? Changing the printer settings requires Full Control Access permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Full Control Access permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control Access permission. Note ? The description uses the PCL 5c printer driver. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Note ? When you open the printer properties dialog box for the first time after installing the RPCS printer driver, the confirmation window appears. After that, the initial display of the printer properties dialog box appears. Click the [Accessories] tab. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [Change Accessories] tab. ? If you are using the PostScript 3 printer driver, click the [Device Settings] tab.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 70 Select options you have installed from the [Options] group, and then make any necessary settings. Note ? If you are using the RPCS printer driver, select the options from [Select printer options:]. ? If you are using the PostScript 3 printer driver, select the options from [Installable Options]. Click [OK]. Bidirectional transmission When bidirectional transmission is enabled, information about paper size and feed direction settings is automatically sent to the printer by a computer. You can also check printer status from your computer. • Bidirectional transmission is supported by Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. • If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional transmission is enabled, on Windows 95/98/Me, the unavailable functions are shaded, and cannot be used. Note ? The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional transmission and updates the printer status automatically. ? The PCL 5c printer driver supports bidirectional transmission; you can update the printer status manually. ? The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional transmission. Bidirectional transmission requires the following conditions:Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 71 When connecting via parallel cable • The computer must support bidirectional transmission. • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • The interface cable must support bidirectional transmission. • The machine must be connected to the computer using standard parallel cable and parallel connector. • Under Windows NT 4.0 [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver. When connecting with the network • The printer must be set to bidirectional transmission. • SmartDeviceMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed, and TCP/IP must be used. • Under Windows NT 4.0 [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [port] tab with RPCS printer driver.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 72 Settings for Printer Share Limitation ? Changing the printer settings requires Full Control Access permission. Members of the Administrators and Power Users groups have Full Control Access permission by default. When you set up options, log on using an account that has Full Control Access permission. Use the [Printers] window to set up the printer. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. The [Printers] window appears. Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Properties]. Select the [Shared] check box on the [Sharing] tab. Note ? If you use alternate drivers for Windows 95/98/Me client, Service Pack 4 or later is required. Install the appropriate printer driver for each client. To share a printer with users running different versions of Windows, select the operating system in the [Alternate Drivers:] box, and then follow the instruction on the screen. Note ? If you have installed an alternate driver by selecting the [Shared] check box, you do not have to follow this step. Click [OK]. The printers attached to the network are displayed.73 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 4. NetWare Configuration This describes how to configure the printer for use as a print server or remote printer in a NetWare environment. Configuring NetWare Using the Control Panel Note ? IPX/SPX must be installed on your computer. If it is not, see Windows Help for instructions. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Host Interface”. ACE082S Menu: Host InterfaceOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 74 Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Network Setup”. Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Select NetWare. Note ? All protocols are active by default. ? Do not select protocols not used on your network. ? If you use Pure IP on NetWare 5/5.1, 6/6.5, configure the printer to active TCP/IP. A Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Active Protocol”, and then press the # Enter key. Host Interface: I/O Buffer Host Interface: Network Setup Network Setup: DHCP Active Protocol: TCP/IPOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 75 B Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “NetWare”. C Press the # Enter key. The current setting appears on the display. D Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “NetWare”. E Press the # Enter key. After about two seconds, the display returns to “Active Protocol”. F Press the Escape key. The display returns to “Network Setup”. Select the frame type for NetWare. Select one of the following items if necessary: • Auto (Default) • Ethernet ll • Ethernet 802.3 • Ethernet 802.2 • Ethernet SNAP Note ? In most situations, use the default setting (“Auto ”). When you first select “Auto ”, the frame type first detected by the printer is adopted. If the network can use more than two frame types, the printer may fail to select the correct frame type if “Auto ” is selected. In this case, select the appropriate frame type. NetWare: *ActiveOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 76 A Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Frame Type (NW)”. B Press the # Enter key. The current setting appears on the display. C Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the frame type you want to use. D Press the # Enter key. In about two seconds, the display returns to “Network Setup”. E Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Print the configuration page to check settings you have made. For more information about how to print a configuration page, see p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page”. SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin To use a printer in a NetWare environment, configure the NetWare printing environment using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Network Setup: Frame Type (NW) Frame Type (NW): *Auto Ready Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 77 Note ? If you configure the NetWare printing using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin under the following environments, Novell NetWare Client is required: • NDS mode in Windows 95/98/Me • NDS or Bindary mode in Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0 ? Use the version of Novell Client provided with your operating system, or the latest version. Printers listed by SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin displays a list of printers connected to the network. If you cannot find the printer on the displayed list, refer to the configuration page printed on the printer. For more information about printing a configuration page, see p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 78 NetWare 3.x - Advanced Settings The procedure for configuring the printer differs depending on whether the network interface board is configured as a print server or remote printer. This section describes how to configure it in a NetWare 3.x environment. Note ? This section assumes NetWare is functional and the necessary environment for NetWare Print Service is available.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 79 Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin on your computer. For the installation procedure, see p.96 “Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”. After installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, go to p.79 “Setting Up as a Print Server” to use this computer as a print server, or to p.81 “Setting Up as a Remote Printer” to use it as a remote printer. Setting Up as a Print Server Log on to the file server as a Supervisor or the equivalent of a Supervisor. Run SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. On the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [IPX/SPX]. A list of printers appears. Note ? If you cannot identify which printer to configure from the list of printers, print the configuration page and find it. For more information about printing the configuration page, see p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page”. ? If no printer name appears on the list, match the IPX/SPX frame types between the computer and printer. Use the [Network] dialog box of Windows to change the computer frame type. For more information about changing equipment frame types, see p.73 “Configuring NetWare Using the Control Panel”. Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [NIB Setup Tool] on the [Tools] menu. Click [Wizard], and then click [OK].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 80 Enter the device name in the [Device Name] box, a comment in the [Comment] box if necessary, and then click [Next>]. Select the [NetWare] check box, and then click [Next>]. Click [Bindery Mode], enter the file server name in the [File Server Name:] box, and then click [Next>]. In the [File Server Name:] box, enter the name of the file server in which the print server is to be created. You can also select a file server from the list that appears by clicking [Browse]. Enter the print server name in the [Print Server Name] box, the printer name in the [Printer Name] box, and the print queue name in the [Print Queue Name] box, then click [Next>]. • In the [Print Server Name] box, enter the name of the NetWare print server using up to 47 characters. • In the [Printer Name] box, enter the name of the NetWare printer. • In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter the name of the print queue to be added to NetWare. After confirming the settings, click [Next>]. The settings take effect, and NIB Setup Tool closes. Exit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Turn the printer power off and on. Note ? To check the printer is configured correctly, enter the following after the command prompt: F:> USERLIST ? If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as an attached user.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 81 Setting Up as a Remote Printer Log on to the file server as a Supervisor or the equivalent of a Supervisor. Run the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. On the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [IPX/SPX]. A list of printers appears. Note ? If you cannot identify which printer to configure from the list of printers, print the configuration page and find it. For more information about printing the configuration page, see p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page”. ? If no printer name appears on the list, match the IPX/SPX frame types between the computer and printer. Use the [Network] dialog box of Windows to change the computer frame type. For more information about changing equipment frame types, see p.73 “Configuring NetWare Using the Control Panel”. Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [NIB Setup Tool] on the [Tools] menu. Click [Property Sheet], and then click [OK]. Click the [NetWare] tab, and then make the following settings: A In the [Print Server Name] box, enter the name of the print server. B In the [File Server Name] box, enter the name of the file server in which a print server is to be created. By clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box. C In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Remote Printer].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 82 D In the [Remote Printer No.] box, enter the printer number. Important ? Use the same printer number as that to be created in the printer server. E Click [OK] to close the property sheet. F After a confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK]. On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit NIB Setup Tool. Enter “PCONSOLE” after the command prompt. F:> PCONSOLE Create a print queue as follows: Note ? If you use a currently defined print queue, proceed to step J. A On the [Available Options] menu, click [Print Queue Information], and then press Enter . B Press INSERT , and then enter a print queue name. C Press ESC to return to the [Available Options] menu. Create a printer as follows: A On the [Available Options] menu, click [Print Server Information], and then press Enter . B To create a new print server, press INSERT , and then enter a print server name. If you are using a currently defined print server, select one of the print servers shown in the [Print Server] list. Important ? Use the same name as that specified in NIB Setup Tool. (Step F - A). C On the [Print Server Information] menu, click [Print Server Configuration]. D On the [Print Server Configuration] menu, click [Printer Configuration].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 83 E Select the printer which is indicated as “Not Installed”. Important ? Use the same number as that specified as the Remote Printer No. using NIB Setup Tool. (Step F - D). F If you want to change the name of the printer, enter a new name. The name “Printer x” is assigned to the printer. The “x” stands for the number of the selected printer. G For type, click [Remote Parallel, LPT1]. IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automatically configured. H Press the ESC key, and then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog box. I Press the ESC key to return to [Print Server Configuration Menu]. Assign print queues to the created printer as follows: A From [Print Server Configuration Menu], click [Queues Serviced By Printer]. B Select the printer created in step J. C Press the INSERT key to select a queue serviced by the printer. Note ? You can select more than one queue at a time. D Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings. When you have finished the above steps, check the queues are assigned. Press the ESC key until “Exit?” appears, and then click [Yes] to close PCONSOLE.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 84 Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the NetWare Server: If it is running, restart it after exiting it. To exit CAREE: unload pserver To start CAREE: load pserver print_server_name Note ? If the printer works as configured, “Waiting for job” appears.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 85 NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5 - Advanced Settings The procedure for configuring the printer differ depending on whether the network interface board is configured as a print server or remote printer. This section describes how to configure it in a NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5 environment. To use NetWare 5/5.1, 6/6.5 • Use the printer as a print server. Do not use as a remote printer. • If you use Pure IP, configure the printer to use TCP/IP. For more information about how to make the settings, see p.73 “Configuring NetWare Using the Control Panel”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 86 Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin on your computer. For the installation procedure, see p.96 “Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”. After installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, go to p.86 “Setting Up as a Print Server” to use this computer as a print server, or to p.90 “Setting Up as a Remote Printer” to use it as a remote printer. Setting Up as a Print Server Important ? You must set up the print server using NDS mode in NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5. Log on to the file server as a Supervisor or the equivalent of a Supervisor. Run SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. On the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP]. A list of printers appears. Note ? If you use Pure IP, click [TCP/IP]. ? If you cannot identify which printer to configure from the list of printers, print the configuration page and find it. For more information about printing the configuration page, see p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page”. ? If no printer name appears in the list, match the IPX/SPX frame types between the computer and printer. Use the [Network] dialog box of Windows to change the computer frame type. For more information about changing equipment frame types, see p.73 “Configuring NetWare Using the Control Panel”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 87 Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [NIB Setup Tool] on the [Tools] menu. Reference If you use Pure IP, see p.88 “Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1, 6/6.5 Environment”. Click [Wizard], and then click [OK]. Enter the device name in the [Device Name] box, a comment in the [Comment] box if necessary, and then click [Next>]. Select the [NetWare] check box, and then click [Next>]. Click [NDS Mode], enter the file server name in the [File Server Name:] box, the NDS tree name in the [NDS Tree] box and the context in the [NDS Context:] box, and then click [Next>]. In the [File Server Name:] box, enter the name of the file server in which the print server is to be created. You can also select a file server from the list that appears by clicking [Browse]. By clicking [Browse], you can select a NDS context from those listed in the [Browse] dialog box. For context, object names are entered from a lower object and divided by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under DS, enter “NET.DS”. Enter the print server name in the [Print Server Name] box, the printer name in the [Printer Name] box, the print queue name in the [Print Queue Name] box, and the print queue volume in the [Print Queue Volume], and then click [Next>]. • In the [Print Server Name] box, enter the name of the NetWare print server using up to 47 characters. • In the [Printer Name] box, enter the name of the NetWare printer. • In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter the name of the print queue to be added to NetWare. • In [Print Queue Volume], enter the print queue volume. As a volume, object names are entered from a lower object and divided by a period. You can select a volume by clicking [Browse].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 88 After confirming the settings, click [Next>]. The settings take effect, and NIB Setup Tool closes. Exit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Turn the printer power off and on. Note ? To check the printer is configured correctly, enter the following after the command prompt: F:> NLIST USER /A/B ? If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as an attached user. Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1, 6/6.5 Environment Note ? When not using IPX, it is recommended that you change the print server protocol in Web Image Monitor from [TCP/IP+IPX] to [TCP/IP]. Log on to the file server as an Admin or the equivalent of an Admin. Run SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Click [Property Sheet], and then click [OK]. The [NIB Setup Tool] dialog box appears. Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings: A In the [Print Server Name] box, enter the name of the print server.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 89 B In the [File Server Name:] box, enter the name of the file server in which a print server is to be created. By clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the [Browse File Server] dialog box. C In the [NDS Context:] box, enter the context of the print server. By clicking [Browse], you can select NDS tree and NDS context from those listed in the [Browse Context] dialog box. For context, object names are entered from a lower object and divided by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server into Net under DS, enter “NET.DS”: D In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Print Server]. E Click [OK] to close the property sheet. F After the confirmation dialog box appears, click [OK]. Exit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. After this step, proceed to step H on p.90 “Setting Up as a Remote Printer”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 90 Setting Up as a Remote Printer Log on to the file server as an Admin or the equivalent of an Admin. Run the SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. On the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [IPX/SPX]. A list of printers appears. Note ? If you cannot identify which printer to configure from the list of printers, print the configuration page and find it. For more information about printing the configuration page, see p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page”. ? If no printer name appears on the list, match the IPX/SPX frame types between the computer and printer. Use the [Network] dialog box of Windows to change the computer frame type. For more information about changing equipment frame types, see p.73 “Configuring NetWare Using the Control Panel”. Select the printer you want to configure, and then click [NIB Setup Tool] on the [Tools] menu. Click [Property Sheet], and then click [OK]. Click the [NetWare] tab, and make the following settings: A In the [Print Server Name] box, enter the name of the print server. B In the [File Server Name] box, enter the name of the file server in which a print server is to be created. By clicking [Browse], you can select a file server among those listed in the [Browse] dialog box.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 91 C In the [NDS Context] box, enter the context in which the print server is to be created. By clicking [Browse], you can select a context from those listed in the [Browse] dialog box. For context, object names are entered from a lower level object and divided by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server into NET under DS, enter “NET.DS”: D In the [Print Server Operation Mode] group, click [As Remote Printer]. E In the [Remote Printer No.] box, enter the number of the printer. Important ? Use the same number as that of the printer to be created in the print server. F Click [OK] to close the property sheet. On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit] to exit NIB Setup Tool. From Windows, run NWadmin. Reference For more information about NWadmin, see the documentation provided with NetWare. Create a print queue as follows: A Select the container object the print queue is located in among those in the directory tree, and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu. B In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Queue], and then click [OK]. C In the [Print Queue name] box, enter the name of the print queue.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 92 D In the [Print Queue Volume] box, click [Browse]. E In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is created, and then click [OK]. F After confirming the settings, click [Create]. Create a printer as follows: A Select the container object the printer is located in, and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu. B In the [Class of new object] box, click [Printer], and then click [OK]. When you are using NetWare 5/5.1, 6, click [Printer (Non NPDS)]. C In the [Printer name] box, enter the name of the printer. D Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create]. Assign print queues to the created printer as follows: A Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] group. B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in step I, and then click [OK]. C Click [Configuration], and in the [Printer type] list, click [Parallel], and then click [Communication]. D Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] group, and then click [OK]. E After confirming the settings, click [OK]. Create a print server as follows: A Select the context specified using NIB Setup Tool (Step I - ), and on the [Object] menu, click [Create]. B In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Server], and then click [OK]. When you are using NetWare 5/5.1, 6/6.5, click [Print Server (Non NPDS)].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 93 C In the [Print Server name] box, enter the name of the print server. Important ? Use the same name as that specified using NIB Setup Tool. (Step F - A). D Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create]. Assign the printer to the created print server as follows: A Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] group. B In the [Available objects] box, click the queue created in step K, and then click [OK]. C In the [Printers] group, click the printer assigned in step , and then click [Printer Number]. D Enter the printer number, and then click [OK]. Important ? Use the same number as that specified as Remote Printer No. using NIB Setup Tool. (Step F - E). E After confirming the settings, click [OK]. Start the print server by typing the following from the console of the NetWare Server. If it is running, restart it after closing. To exit CAREE: unload pserver To start CAREE: load pserver print_server_name94 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 5. Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you cannot only monitor the status of network printers, but also change configuration of the network interface board using TCP/IP or IPX/SPX. SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is equipped with the following functions; • Device Information function • Checks the printer's network settings and device details. • Checks the number of pages printed for each computer, using the user codes. • Checks results of print jobs executed from the computer. • Enables you to change the printer's network settings. • Device Settings function • Limits settings done from the control panel, and disables changes made to certain items. • Enables selection of paper type loaded in the printer. • Energy Saver function • Switches to, and wakes up from Energy Saver mode. • System Status function • Checks information about printing, paper quantity, and such, on the computer. • Groups function • Monitors multiple printers at the same time. When there are many printers, you can create groups and classify printers to facilitate management.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 95 Note ? Select the appropriate protocol stack for your operating system. Operating system Protocol stack Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me NetWare network client provided with Windows 95/98 Novell Client for Windows 95/98 Microsoft Windows 2000 TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000 IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000 NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000 Novell Client for Windows NT/2000 Microsoft Windows XP TCP/IP provided with Windows XP IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP NetWare Client provided with Windows XP Novell Client for Windows XP Microsoft Windows Server 2003 TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003 IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 TCP/IP provided with Windows NT IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows NT Novell Client for Windows NT/2000Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 96 Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Quit all applications that are running. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. Auto Run will start the installer. Note ? Auto Run might not work automatically due to certain operating system settings. If this is the case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK]. The following languages are available: Cestina (Czech), Dansk (Danish), Deutsch (German), English (English), Espanol (Spanish), Francais (French), Italiano (Italian), Magyar (Hungarian), Nederlands (Dutch), Norsk (Norwegian), Polski (Polish), Portugues (Portuguese), Suomi (Finnish), Svenska (Swedish) Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin]. The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box. After reading through the content, click [I accept the agreement.] to agree with the license agreement, and then click [Next>]. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note ? If you are required to restart the computer after the installation of SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, restart and continue configuration.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 97 Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration Run SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX]. A list of printers appears. Note ? Select the protocol of the printer for which you want to change configuration. In the list, select the printer for which you want to change configuration. On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Setup Tool]. NIB Setup Tool starts. Click [Wizard] or [Property Sheet], and then click [OK]. • When configuring the network interface board for the first time, click [Wizard]. • When changing configuration of the network interface board or configuring details, click [Property Sheet]. Selecting [Wizard] A Enter the necessary items, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Selecting [Property Sheet] A A configuration list appears in the dialog box. For more information about each item in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 98 Selecting [Web Image Monitor] A For Web Image Monitor setting, see p.112 “Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 99 Changing Names and Comments You can change printer names and attach comments to help identify printers listed on SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin allows you to change names and comments when TCP/IP or IPX/SPX is available. You can install SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin from the CD-ROM provided. For more information about installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see p.86 “Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”. The following utilities are used to change printer names and comments: Note ? Each of the names, in TCP/IP form (printer name) and NetBEUI form, is changed individually. Comments are, however, common to both protocols. ? The factory default name consists of “RNP” and the last 3 bytes of the MAC address on the network interface board. For example, if the MAC address is 00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is “RNP627DD5”. Comments are not configured. Run SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and click [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX]. A list of printers appears. Note ? Select the protocol of the printer for which you want to change configuration. In the list, select the printer for the network interface board you want to change configuration. On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Setup Tool]. NIB Setup Tool starts.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 100 Click [Property Sheet], and then click [OK]. TCP/IP A Click the [General] tab, and then enter the device name in the [Device Name] box and comment in the [Comment] box. • In the [Device Name] box, enter the name of the printer using up to 13 characters. The factory default name consists of “RNP” and the last 3 bytes of the MAC address on the network interface board. For example, if the MAC address is 00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is “RNP627DD5”. Nine character names are not permitted if the prefix is “RNP”. Also, if DHCP is selected as an IP address setting, the number of characters is limited to 13. • In the [Comment] box, enter a printer comment using up to 31 characters. NetBEUI A Click the [General] tab, and then enter the comment in the [Comment] box. In the [Comment] box, enter a printer comment using up to 31 characters. B Click the [NetBEUI] tab. C Enter the computer name in the [Computer Name] box. • In the [Computer Name] box, enter a name to help identify the printers using NetBEUI. The factory default name consists of “RNP” and the last 3 bytes of the MAC address on the network interface board. For example, if the MAC address is 00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is “RNP627DD5”. A maximum of 13 characters consisting of uppercase alphabetical letters, numbers, or symbols (except “*+,/:;<=>?[\]|. and space) can be used. No name is permitted if the prefix is “RNP”. You must avoid using same names on a network.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 101 Click [OK]. NIB Setup Tool closes, and the setting is transmitted to the printer. Exit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 102 Displaying Printer Status You can view the status of printers using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, or Web Image Monitor. Run SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX]. Printer status is indicated by an icon in the list. Note ? For more information about status icons, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help. To see detailed status information, click the desired printer in the list, and then click [Open] on the [Device] menu. Printer status is displayed in the dialog box. Note ? For more information about dialog box items, see Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 103 Locking Menus on the Printer's Control Panel Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX]. A list of printers appears. Note ? Select the protocol of the printer for which you want to change configuration. Select a desired printer. On the [Tools] menu, point to [Device Settings], and then click [Lock Operation Panel Menu]. Web Image Monitor starts, and a screen prompting you to enter the user name and password appears. Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK]. To use the factory default account, enter no user name and enter “password” for the password. The general configuration window appears. In the [Lock Operation Panel Menu] list, click [Enable]. Note ? The Panel Lock function that can be set here is the same as that on the control panel of this machine. Click [Apply]. Exit Web Image Monitor.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 104 Changing the Paper Type Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX]. A list of printer appears. Note ? Select the protocol of the printer for which you want to change configuration. In the list, select the printer whose paper type you want to change. On the [Tools] menu, point to [Device Settings], and then click [Select Paper Type]. Web Image Monitor starts, and a screen prompting you to enter the user name and a password appears. Enter the user name and the password, and then click [OK]. To use the factory default account, enter no user name and enter “password” for the password. The paper type configuration window appears. Select the paper type, and then click [Apply]. Exit Web Image Monitor.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 105 Managing the Number of Copies to be Printed Preparation Optional user account enhance unit must be installed to manage the number of copies to be printed. For more information about installing user account enhance unit, see “User Account Enhance Unit”, Setup Guide. Run SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX]. A list of printers appears. Note ? Select the protocol of the printer for which you want to change configuration. In the list, select the printer whose statistics you want to manage. On the [Tools] menu, click [User Management Tool]. A screen prompting you to enter a password appears. Enter the password, and then click [OK]. Note ? The factory default password is “password”. The User Management Tool starts. For more information about using User Management Tool, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 106 Configuring Energy Save Mode Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX]. A list of printers appears. Note ? Select the protocol of the printer for which you want to change configuration. Select the device you want to make a setting for. You do not need to select anything if you want to make a setting for all devices in the group. Click [Group] and point to [Energy Save Mode]. To make a setting only for the device you have selected, click [Set Individually]. To make a setting for all the devices in the group, click [Set By Group]. Then, select an energy saver mode from the menu that appears.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 107 Setting a Password Run SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. Click the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [TCP/IP] or [IPX/SPX]. A list of printer appears. Note ? Select the protocol of the printer for which you want to change configuration. In the list, select the printer for which you want to change configuration. On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Setup Tool]. NIB Setup Tool starts. Note ? To prevent the network interface board configuration from being changed accidentally by someone other than the network administrator, you can set a password in [NIB Setup Tool] that is different from the network password. Click [Option] to set a password in [NIB Setup Tool]. Click [Property Sheet], and then click [OK]. Click the [Password] tab. Select the [Change Password] check box, enter a password, and then click [OK].108 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 6. Using a Web Image Monitor You can check the status of a machine and change its network settings using Web Image Monitor. What can it do? You can remotely check the status of a machine or specify its settings over the network using a computer's Web Image Monitor. The following functions are available with Web Image Monitor: • Displaying machine status/settings • Checking print job status/history • Interrupting a job that is being printed • Resetting this machine • Managing the Address Book • Making machine settings • Setting the e-mail notification function • Making the network protocol settings • Making the security settings Configuring the printer This requires TCP/IP to be installed. After the printer has been configured to use TCP/IP, it will be possible to adjust the settings using a Web Image Monitor. Reference For more information about configuring the printer to use TCP/IP, see “Configuring the Printer for the Network”, Setup GuideOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 109 Browser requirements • Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later • Netscape 6.2 or later • Safari 1.0 or later (Mac OS X 10.1) Operating systems the browser is guaranteed to run on are all supported. Limitation ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption, Netscape 7.0 or later is required. ? If Web Image Monitor in use is older than the recommended version or [Java Script] and [Cookie] are not available, display and operation problems may occur. ? If you are using a proxy server, change Web Image Monitor settings. Consult your network administrator about the settings. ? Sometimes after clicking [Back], the previous page may not appear. If this happens, click [Refresh] or [Reload]. ? The text on screen may disappear or be aligned incorrectly if browser font size settings are too large. It is recommended that you use a font size equal to or smaller than “10 points” with Netscape, and “Medium” or smaller with Internet Explorer.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 110 Going to the Top Page After launching Web Image Monitor, enter the printer's IP address. See the example below. (This example is for the English version.) http://192.168.15.16/ https://192.168.15.16/ (In this example, the IP address of the network interface board is 192.168.15.16.) If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. Note ? If a DNS server is used on the network, you can enter the host name as a URL. For example, http://webmonitor.netprinter.com/. In order to do this, you must register the IP address and host name of the network interface board with the DNS server. Consult the network administrator for information about how to do this. ? To use the proxy server, you must set up the proxy server address for Web Image Monitor you are using. Consult the network administrator about how to set the proxy server.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 111 1. Header buttons You can register favorite URLs with [URL]. To view the Help section, click [Help]. Important ? Using the browser to access websites will entail normal connection changes. Note ? When you click [Administrator Mode], a dialog box appears requesting the user name and password. Enter only the password in this dialog box. The factory default password is “password”. 2. Menu buttons Use to configure the network interface board and confirm printer status. 3. Status Di spl ay s p r in t e r s t a tus , and ne two r k int e rf a ce board, name and comments. 1 2 3 ACE058SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 112 Access in Administrator Mode On Web Image Monitor Top Page, click [Administrator Mode]. The password and user name dialog box appears. Enter your user name and password, and then click [OK]. To use the default account, enter no user name and “password” for the password. Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings Start Web Image Monitor. Point your browser at the URL or IP address of the printer (e.g. http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where the Xs are the number of the IP address). The status of the chosen printer appears on Web Image Monitor. If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer”. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on the computer. Click [Administrator Mode]. The dialog box for entering the password and user name appears. Enter your user name and password, and then click [OK]. To use the factory default account, enter no user name and enter “password” for the password. Click [Configuration]. Click the item you want to configure, and then make all the settings.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 113 Verifying the Network Interface Board Settings Start Web Image Monitor. Point your browser at the URL or printer's IP address (e.g. http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX where the Xs are the number of the IP address). The status of the chosen printer appears on Web Image Monitor. Click [Configuration]. Click the item you want to check.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 114 Using Help on Web Image Monitor When using Help for the first time, clicking either [Help] in the header area or the icon marked “?” in the work area makes the Help screen appear. From that screen you can check Help in two different ways, as explained below: Checking Help Using the Internet You can check the latest Help updates. Downloading and Checking Help You can download Help to your computer’s hard disk and view it. As the Help URL, you can specify the path to the local file to view Help without connecting to the Internet. Note ? By clicking [Help] in the header area, Help contents normally appear. ? By clicking “?”, the Help icon in the work area, Help for the items shown in the work area normally appears. Downloading Help In the [OS] list, select the operating system. In the [Language] list, select the language. Click [Download]. Download Help by following the messages on the screen. Save the downloaded compressed file, and then decompress it.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 115 Note ? To check the downloaded Help, specify the path where the file is decompressed. Linking the Address (URL) to the [Help] Button You can link the address (URL) of the [Help] button to the Help files on the computer or Web server. Access Web Image Monitor in administrator mode. Reference p.112 “Access in Administrator Mode” In the left area, click [Configuration]. Click [Webpage]. In the [Help URL] box, enter the path to the Help files. If you copied the Help files to “C:\HELP\EN”, enter “file ://C:/HELP/”. For example, if you copied the files to a Web server and the index URL is “http:// a.b.c.d/HELP/EN/index.html”, enter “http://a.b.c.d/HELP/”. Click [Apply].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 116 Changing Names and Comments You can change printer names and attach comments to help identify printers listed on SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin allows you to change names and comments when TCP/IP is available. The following utilities are used to change printer names and comments: Note ? Each of the names, in TCP/IP form (printer name) and NetBEUI form, is changed individually. Comments are, however, common to both protocols. ? The factory default name consists of “RNP” and the last 3 bytes of the MAC address on the network interface board. For example, if the MAC address is 00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is “RNP627DD5”. Comments are not configured. Start Web Image Monitor. Enter the address “http://(IP address of the printer for which you want to change settings)”. The status of the selected printer is displayed on Web Image Monitor. Click [Administrator Mode]. The dialog box for entering the password and user name is appears. Enter the user name and the password, and then click [OK]. Enter only the password in this dialog box. The factory default password is “password”. Click [Configuration], and then click [Network]. Click [Protocol].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 117 Change names and comments. TCP/IP A Click the [TCP/IP]. B If a name is used by Ethernet or wireless LAN, enter it in [Host Name] the [Ethernet] column. If a name is used by IP over 1394, it in [Host Name] in the [IP over 1394] column. In the [Host Name] box, type the name of the printer within 15 characters. The factory default name consists of “RNP” and the last 3 bytes of the MAC address on the network interface board. For example, when the MAC address is 00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is “RNP627DD5”. No name of 9 characters is permitted if the prefix is “RNP”. Also, when DHCP is selected as an IP address setting, the number of characters is limited to within 13 characters. SMB A Click [SMB]. B Enter the name in the [Computer Name] box and comment in the [Comment] box. In the [Computer Name] box, enter a name to help identify the printers using the SMB protocol. The factory default name consists of “RNP” and the last 3 bytes of the MAC address on the network interface board. For example, if the MAC address is 00:00:74:62:7D:D5, the factory default name is “RNP627DD5”. A maximum of 13 characters consisting of uppercase alphabetical letters, numbers, or symbols (except "*+,/:;<=>?[\]|. and space) can be used. No name is permitted if the prefix is “RNP”. You must avoid using same names on a network. Click [Apply]. The setting is transmitted to the printer. Exit Web Image Monitor.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 118 Displaying Printer Status You can view the status of printers using Web Image Monitor. Start Web Image Monitor. Enter the address “http://(IP address of the printer whose status you want to view)”. The status of the selected printer is displayed on Web Image Monitor. Click [Status] to check the status of the printer. Note ? For more information about each item, see Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 119 Machine Status Notification by E-mail When alerts occur such as when a paper tray is empty or a paper jam occurs, machine status notification can be generated using the notify by e-mail function. A status notification e-mail is sent to a previously set e-mail address. Details such as notification timing and content can also be set. Set [Notify by Email] on the [System] menu to [On] using the control panel (the default is [On]). Reference For more information, see p.154 “System Menu”. Start Web Image Monitor, and then access this machine by entering “http: //(IP address of this machine)/” in the [Address] box of Web Image Monitor. Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears. On Top Page of Web Image Monitor, click [Administrator Mode]. The dialog box for entering the password and user name appears. Enter your user name and password, and then click [OK]. To use the default account, enter no user name and enter “password” for the password. In the left area, click [Configuration]. Click [E-mail].Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 120 Make settings for the following: The dialog box for making e-mail notification settings appears. • Key Operator's E-mail Address • Items in the SMTP column • Items in the POP before SMTP column Click [Apply]. In the left area, click [Notification]. The dialog box for making notification settings appears. Make settings for the following: • Device E-mail Address • Notification Message • Items in the Groups to Notify column • Items in the Select Groups/Items to Notify column To make detailed settings for items, click [Edit] next to [Detailed Settings of Each Item], make settings in the dialog box that appears, and then click [OK]. Click [Apply]. Quit Web Image Monitor.121 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 7. Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel Menu Chart This section describes changing the printer's default settings and provides information about the parameters included in each menu. Category Function menu Sample Print *1 Select Action / Error File(s) Locked Print *1 Select Action / Error File(s) Paper Input, see p.129 “Paper Input Menu” Bypass Size Tray Paper Size Paper Type Tray Locking Tray Priority List/Test Print, see p.136 “List/Test Print Menu” Config.P/Er.Log Config. Page Error Log Menu List Color Demo Page PCL Config.Page PS Config. Page PDF Config.Page Hex Dump Operations TestOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 122 Maintenance, see p.144 “Maintenance Menu” Color Regist. Color Calibrate Image Density Registration HD Format *2 WL.LAN Signal *3 WL.LAN Defaults *3 4C.Graphic Mode Key Repeat Menu Protect *4 Category Function menuOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 123 System, see p.154 “System Menu” Prt. Err Report Auto Continue Memory Overflow Copies Printer Lang. Sub Paper Size Page Size Def.Print Lang. Duplex *5 Output Tray Job Separation Energy Saver 1 Energy Saver 2 Unit of Measure B&W Page Detect Spool Printing *2 Letterhead Mode RAM Disk Notify by Email Email Date *4 Category Function menuOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 124 Host Interface, see p.167 “Host Interface Menu” I/O Buffer I/O Timeout Network Setup IEEE 1394 Setup *6 IEEE 802.11b *7 USB Setting *4 Bluetooth *4 PCL Menu, see p.180 “PCL Menu” Orientation Form Lines Font Source Font Number Point Size Font Pitch Symbol Set Courier Font Ext. A4 Width Append CR to LF Resolution Category Function menuOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 125 *1 The Sample Print menu and Locked Print menu appear only when the optional printer hard disk is installed. *2 The HD Format and Spool Printing menu appears only when the optional printer hard disk is installed. *3 The WL.LAN Signal menu and the WL.LAN Defaults menu appears only when IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed. *4 While the printer is On Line, press the # Enter key, and then press the Escape key, finally press the Menu key. *5 The Duplex menu appears only when the optional duplex unit is installed. *6 The IEEE 1394 Setup menu appears only when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed. *7 The IEEE 802.11b menu appears only when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed. PS Menu, see p.187 “PS Menu” Data Format Resolution Color Setting Color Profile PDF Menu, see p.193 “PDF Menu” PDF: Change PW PDF Group PW Resolution Color Setting Color Profile Language, see p.198 “Language Menu” Category Function menuOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 126 Accessing the Main Menu Press the Menu key, and “Menu” appears on the display. • Sample Print • Locked Print • Paper Input • List/Test Print • Maintenance • System • Host Interface • PCL Menu • PS Menu • PDF Menu • Language ACE082SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 127 Note ? If the optional printer hard disk is not installed, the Sample Print menu and Locked Print menu cannot be displayed on the control panel. ? {TT}: Press to go to the next page. ? {UU}: Press to go back to the previous page. ? After making printer settings, be sure to return to the previous menu by pressing the Escape key. ACE089SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 128 ? After making the printer settings, press the On Line key to return to the “Ready” condition. ? The revised settings are not canceled, even when the power switch is turned off. ACE084SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 129 Paper Input Menu You can make the following settings from the Paper Input menu: • Bypass Size • Tray Paper Size • Paper Type • Tray Locking • Tray Priority Reference For more information about loading paper in the tray, see Setup Guide. Paper Input Parameters Menu Description Bypass Size The paper size for the bypass tray. For more information about paper sizes that can be set in the bypass tray, see “Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer”, Maintenance Guide. 12×18,11×17, 8 1/2×14, 8 1/ 2×11, 11×8 1/ 2, 5 1/2×8 1/2, 7 1/4×10 1/2,10 1/2×7 1/4, 8×13, 8 1/2×13, 8 1/4×13, A3 (297×420), B4 JIS (257×364), A4 (210×297), A4 (297×210), B5 JIS (182×257), B5 JIS (257×182), A5 (148×210), A5 (210×148), A6 (105×148), 8K (267×390), 16K (195×267), 16K (267×195), 4 1/8×9 1/2, 3 7/8×7 1/2, C5 Env (229×162), C6 Env (162×114), DL Env (220×110), Custom Size Note ? Default: A4 (297×210) (Metric version) 11×8 1/2 (Inch version)Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 130 Tray Paper Size The paper size for Tray 2, optional Tray 3 and Tray 4. For more information about paper sizes that can be set in each tray, see Maintenance Guide. Auto, 8 1/2×14, 8 1/2×11, 7 1/4×10 1/2, 8×13, 8 1/2×13, 8 1/4×13, B4JIS (257×364), A4, B5JIS (182×257), 8K (267×390), 16K (195×267), 16K (267×195) Note ? Only installed trays appear on the display. Paper Type If you are using different kinds of paper, set the paper type for Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3 or Bypass Tray. For more information about paper sizes that can be set in each tray, see Maintenance Guide. Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4 Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Bypass Tray Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted, Transparency, Thick Paper, Plain: Dup. Back, Thick:Dup.Back Note ? Default : Plain Paper ? Only installed trays appear on the display. Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 131 Tray Locking If you are using different kinds of paper, you can lock a tray to prevent printing on wrong paper such as letterhead or colored paper. When “Auto Select” is selected in the Paper Source selections from the printer driver, the locked tray will not be used. You can set each tray to on or off. Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4 Note ? Default : Off ? Only installed trays appear on the display. ? You can lock multiple trays. ? If you want to use a locked tray, you must select it from the printer driver and control panel. ? If a locked tray is selected from the printer driver, the printer does not search for another. Tray Priority You can set which tray should be checked first when “Auto Tray Select” is selected in the Paper Source selections from the printer driver. When printing from DOS, the tray selected here is used when no tray is specified for a print job. Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4 Note ? Default : Tray 1 ? Only installed trays appear on the display. ? It is recommended that you load paper of the size and orientation you most frequently use in the tray selected with “Tray Priority”. Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 132 Changing the Paper Input Menu Tray Locking Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Paper Input”, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Tray Locking”, and then press the # Enter key. ACE082S Menu: Paper Input Paper Input: Tray LockingOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 133 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the tray to change tray locking to off, and then press the # Enter key. Note ? The bypass tray cannot be locked. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Off”, and then press the # Enter key. Wait for two seconds. “Paper Input” appears on the display. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Tray Locking: Tray 1 Tray 1: *OffOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 134 Tray Priority Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Paper Input”, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Tray Priority”, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select the tray type you want to use. ACE082S Menu: Paper Input Paper Input: Tray PriorityOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 135 Press the # Enter key. Wait for two seconds. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. ACE084S Ready Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 136 List/Test Print Menu You can make the following settings from the List/Test Print menu: • Config.P./Er.Log • Config. Page • Error Log • Menu List • Color Demo Page • PCL Config.Page • PS Config. Page • PDF Config.Page • Hex Dump • Operations TestOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 137 List/Test Print Parameters *1 If the hard disk is not installed, the machine identifies the RAM area as the hard disk area and displays the messages “Font HDD Area:3MB” and “Free HDD Area:3MB” on the PS Config. Page. (Depending on the RAM Disk settings, the indicated capacity may be a value other than 3 MB.) Menu Description Config.P./Er.Log You can print the configuration page and error log Config. Page You can print the printer’s current configuration. See p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page”. Error Log You can print an error report. Menu List You can print the Menu List which shows the function menus of this printer. Color Demo Page You can print the Color Demo Page. PCL Config.Page You can print the PCL’s current configuration. PS Config. Page You can print a list of installed PS Fonts. *1 PDF Config.Page You can print the Adobe® PDF Reference, Memory/HDD status, Printing Configuration, and Resident Fonts. Hex Dump You can print the Hex Dump. Operations Test Test printing checks paper feeding and printing with the optional devices, and punching and stapling with the 2-tray finisher. Only settings for installed optional devices appear. If the selected function cannot be performed, a message appears and the machine stops printing. If the machine is working properly, a black ruled frame is printed.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 138 Printing a Configuration Page Reference For more information, see p.140 “Interpreting the Configuration Page”. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {TT} or {UU} key to display the List/Test Print menu. ACE082S Menu: List/Test PrintOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 139 Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: After a short time, the configuration page will start printing. Important ? If you cannot print the configuration page, check for an error message appearing on the display. For more information about error messages, see “Troubleshooting”, Maintenance Guide. ACE083S List/Test Print: Config. Page Printing... Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 140 Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Interpreting the Configuration Page System Reference Printer ID Displays the serial number assigned to the board by its manufacturer. Total Memory Displays the total amount of memory (SDRAM) installed on the printer. ACE084S Ready Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 141 Firmware Version • Firmware Displays the printer controller firmware version number. • Engine Displays the printer engine firmware version number. • NCS Displays the network interface firmware version number. Controller Option The item(s) appears when the controller option(s) is installed. Printer Language Displays the printer language version number. Options Displays the options installed. Consumption Status Displays how much of each toner is left. Paper Input Displays the settings made under the Paper Input menu. Reference For more information, see p.129 “Paper Input Menu”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 142 Maintenance Displays the settings made under the Maintenance menu. Reference For more information, see p.144 “Maintenance Menu”. System Displays the settings made under the System menu. Reference For more information, see p.154 “System Menu”. PCL Menu Displays the settings made under the PCL Menu. Reference For more information, see p.180 “PCL Menu”. PS Menu Displays the settings made under the PS Menu. Reference For more information, see p.187 “PS Menu”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 143 Host Interface Displays the settings made under the Host Interface menu. When DHCP is active on the network, the actual IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address appear in parentheses on the configuration page. Reference For more information about the Host Interface menu, see p.167 “Host Interface Menu”. Interface Information Displays the interface information. Error Log Displays the printer error log.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 144 Maintenance Menu You can make the following settings from the Maintenance menu: • Color Regist. • Color Calibrate • Image Density • Registration • HD Format • WL.LAN Signal • WL.LAN Defaults • 4C.Graphic Mode • Key Repeat • Menu Protect Maintenance Menu Parameters Menu Description Color Regist. You can adjust color alignment for each color (black, cyan, magenta, yellow). Reference For more information about registration, see “Adjusting the Color Registration”, Maintenance Guide. Color Calibrate In color printing, the color tone can change subtly because of various factors. For example, continuous printing or changing the toner might affect the color tone. If this happens, you can adjust the color tone by calibrating it (Color Calibrate). Normally, however, you do not need to do this.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 145 Image Density Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow You can specify image density for each color in the range of -3 to +3. Registration Prt. Test Sheet You can print the registration test sheet. Tray 3, Tray 4, Duplex.BackSide Adjustment You can select the start position for printing on the page. Vert.: Tray 3, Vert.: Tray 4, Vert.:Dup.Back -5 to +5 (Every 0.1 mm) Note ? Registration values are not default. ? Only installed trays appear on the display. HD Format You can format the printer hard disk. Available when the optional printer hard disk is installed. Reference For more information about formatting the printer hard disk, see “Printer Hard Disk”, Setup Guide. WL.LAN Signal You can check signal quality when using wireless LAN. Reference For more information about displaying signal quality, see p.150 “Displaying the Signal Quality”. WL.LAN Defaults You can reset wireless LAN settings to the default. Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 146 *1 While the printer is On Line, press the # Enter key, and then press the Escape key. Finally, press the Menu key. You can access the Menu Protect, and Series Prnt.Job menu on the display. 4C.Graphic Mode This setting adjusts how much each toner color overlaps when printing. If characters or lines are blurred, selecting [Text Priority] may make them clearer. Select [Photo Priority] for normal use. Note ? Default:Photo Priority Key Repeat The default setting [On] enables the user to scroll through menu items and settings by holding the key down; the [Off] setting requires the user to press the key for each Cursor/Scroll movement. Menu Protect *1 This procedure lets you protect menu settings against accidental changes. It makes it impossible to change menu settings made by normal procedure unless you perform the required key operation. In a network environment, protecting settings makes changing menu settings a network administrator task. • Level 1 • Level 2 • Off Note ? Default: Off ? While the printer is On Line, press the # Enter key, and then press the Escape key, finally press the Menu key. You can access the Menu Protect menu on the display. ? You can protect the Maintenance, System , Host Interface and Language menu on Level 1. ? You can protect the Paper Input, Maintenance, System , Host Interface and Language menu on Level 2. Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 147 Changing the Maintenance Menu Protecting the menus Check the On Line indicator is on. If not, press the On Line key to enter the “Ready” condition. Press the # Enter key, then the Escape key, and then the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the Maintenance menu, and then press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: ACE090S Maintenance: Color Regist.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 148 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Menu Protect”. Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select the levels desired, and then press the # Enter key. Wait for two seconds. “Maintenance” appears on the display. Press the On Line key. Maintenance: Menu Protect Menu Protect: *Off ACE084SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 149 “Ready” appears on the display. Removing Protect Check the On Line indicator is on. If not, press the On Line key to enter the “Ready” condition. Press the # Enter key, then the Escape key, and then the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the Maintenance menu, and then press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Menu Protect”, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Off”, and then press the # Enter key. Wait for two seconds. “Maintenance” appears on the display. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Ready Maintenance: Color Regist.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 150 Displaying the Signal Quality If you need to check the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) signal, select “WL.LAN Signal” in the Maintenance menu. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {TT} or {UU} key to display the Maintenance menu. Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {TT} or {UU} key to display “WL.LAN Signal”. Menu: Maintenance Maintenance: Color Regist. Maintenance: WL.LAN SignalOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 151 Press the # Enter key. One of the following messages appears on the display: Note ? If “WL.LAN Signal” is not displayed, “IEEE 802.11b” has not been selected for “LAN Type” in “Network Setup” of the Host Interface menu. Select “IEEE 802.11b” for “LAN Type”, and then check the “WL.LAN Signal” in the Maintenance menu again. ? If “802.11 Ad hoc” or “Ad hoc” in “Comm. Mode” of “IEEE 802.11b” in the Host Interface menu is selected, you cannot check the signal. Select “Infrastructure”, and then check it again. ? Every time you press the # Enter key, the signal is refreshed. ? The signal is indicated as “Good” if the signal strength is 76-100%, “Fair” is 41-75%, “Poor” is 21-40%, and “Unavailable” if strength is 0-20%. If signal is unstable or unavailable, remove obstacles or move the printer to a place where the signal can be received. ? Using wireless devices or microwave sources near the printer might affect the signal. WL.LAN Signal Good 100% WL.LAN Signal Fair 50% WL.LAN Signal Poor 30% WL.LAN Signal Unavailable 18%Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 152 Press the Escape key. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Resetting the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) Settings If you need to reset the wireless LAN setting, select “WL.LAN Defaults” in the Maintenance menu. Note ? The five items that can be reset in “IEEE 802.11b” of the Host Interface menu are “Comm. Mode”, “Channel”, “Trans. Speed”, “ WEP Setting “, and “SSID”. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {TT} or {UU} key to display the Maintenance menu. Ready Menu: MaintenanceOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 153 Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {TT} or {UU} key to display “WL.LAN Defaults”. Press the # Enter key. Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: The wireless LAN setting value is reset. “Ready” appears on the display. Maintenance: Color Regist. Maintenance: WL.LAN Defaults WL.LAN Defaults Reset?Defaults? Defaults reset Ready Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 154 System Menu You can make the following settings from the System menu: • Prt. Err Report • Auto Continue • Memory Overflow • Copies • Printer Lang. • Sub Paper Size • Page Size • Def.Print Lang • Duplex • Output Tray • Job Separation • Energy Saver 1 • Energy Saver 2 • Unit of Measure • B&W Page Detect • Spool Printing • Letterhead Mode • RAM Disk • Notify by Email • Email DateOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 155 System Parameters Menu Description Prt. Err Report You can have an error report printed when a printer error or memory error occurs. • On • Off Note ? Default: Off Auto Continue You can have Auto Continue enabled. When it is on, printing continues after a system error occurs. • Off • Immediate • 1 minute • 5 minutes • 10 minutes • 15 minutes Note ? Default: Off ? When it is on, and certain types of error occur, the current job might be canceled, and the machine automatically resumes the next job. Memory Overflow You can have memory overflow error reports printed. • Do not Print • Error Info. Note ? Default: Do not PrintOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 156 Copies You can specify how many pages to print. This setting is disabled if the number of pages to print is already specified with the printer driver or a command. • 1-999 Printer Lang. You can specify the printer language. • Auto Detect • PCL • PS • PDF Note ? Default: Auto Detect Sub Paper Size You can enable the Sub Paper Size feature. When you select “Auto ”, the printer substitutes paper of a certain size as an alternative if the currently specified paper is not loaded. If you select “Off”, the printer uses the paper in the current specified paper input tray regardless of its size. • Auto • Off Note ? Default: Off Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 157 Page Size You can specify the default paper size. 12×18, 11×17, 8 1/2×14, 8 1/2×11, 5 1/2×8 1/2, 7 1/4×10 1/2, 8×13, 8 1/2×13, 8 1/4×13, A3 (297×420), B4JIS, A4, B5JIS, A5, A6, 8K, 16K, 4 1/8×9 1/2, 3 7/8×7 1/2, C5 Env(162×229), C6 Env(114×162), DL Env(110×220), XPDL_0, XPDL_0..., Custom Size Note ? Default: A4 (297×210) (Metric version) 8 1/2×11 (Inch version) Def.Print Lang You can specify the default printer Language. • PCL • PS • PDF • XPDL_0 • XPDL_1 Note ? Default: PCL Duplex You can select to print on both sides of each page. • Off • Short Edge Bind • Long Edge Bind Note ? Default: Off ? This menu appears only if the optional duplex unit is installed. Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 158 Output Tray You can select the default output tray. Standard Tray, External Tray, Finisher Tray 1, Finisher Tray 2 Note ? Default: Standard Tray ? Only installed trays appear on the display. Job Separation You can enable Job Separation. • Off • On Note ? Default: Off ? This menu appears only when the optional 2 tray finisher is installed. Energy Saver 1 You can set On/Off for the Energy Saver 1. This is Preheat mode. • On • Off Note ? Default: Off Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 159 Energy Saver 2 E.Saver2 OnOff You can set On/Off for the Energy Saver 2. • On • Off Note ? Default: On ? When the printer switches to Energy Saver mode, the Power indicator turns off, while the On Line indicator stays on. E. Saver2 Timer You can set how many minutes the printer waits before switching to Energy Saver mode. Energy Saver mode reduces electric power consumption. 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 60 minutes. Note ? Default: 60 minutes ? When the printer switches to Energy Saver mode, the Power indicator turns off, while the On Line indicator stays on and “Energy Save Mode” appears on the display. Unit of Measure You can select “mm” or “inch” for the custom paper size. Note ? Default: • Metric version: mm • Inch version: inch Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 160 B&W Page Detect You can have the Black & White Page Detect feature enabled. • On • Off Note ? Default: On Spool Printing You can select to enable spool printing. Spool Printing allows print jobs sent from a computer to be temporarily stored and printed after they have been sent. • On • Off Note ? Default: Off ? This setting appears only when the optional hard disk drive is installed. ? If you select [On], it takes a while before the first print job starts printing. ? If you turn the printer off before printing finishes, the print job is stored on the hard disk. For details, see p.209 “Spool Printing”. Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 161 Letterhead Mode You can select whether or not to do letterhead printing. If you select letterhead printing and duplex printing, the last sheet of a print job with an odd number of pages is printed on both sides. • Off • Auto Detect • On (Always) Note ? Default: Off ? Duplex printing is canceled if the paper size does not allow it. ? If printing changes from single-sided to duplex during printing, the second and later copies with collate will all be duplex. If you want the second and later copies to be single-sided, select a paper size that does not allow duplex printing. ? When using letterheads, be careful how you orient the paper. Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 162 RAM Disk If the optional hard disk drive is not installed, when executing PDF Direct Print set a value of 2 MB or higher. This menu appears only when the optional hard disk drive is not installed. • 0 MB • 2 MB • 4 MB • 8 MB • 16 MB Note ? Default: 4 MB Limitation ? The amount of acquired RAM disk space is 4 MB, even if the value is set to 8 MB or more when the optional SDRAM module is not installed. ? Install the optional SDRAM module if you require 8 MB or more of RAM disk space. Reference For more information about the optional SDRAM module, see Setup Guide. Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 163 Notify of Emil You can have error details sent to a preset e-mail address when an error occurs in the printer. • Off • On Important ? After changing the setting, turn off the power of the main unit briefly, and then back on again. Note ? Default: On Email Date If there is no timeserver, set to “On” if mail without date information causes problems for the mail server. Through its software, email sent by this device includes a date and time (based on a provisional date and time using January 1st of the year of manufacture as the initial date). • Off • On Note ? Default: Off Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 164 Changing the System Menu The following example describes how to change the settings for “E. Saver2 Timer”. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “System”. ACE082S Menu: System Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 165 Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Energy Saver 2”, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select how many minutes the printer waits before switching to Energy Saver mode. The following message appears on the display: ACE083S System : Prt. Err Report System: Energy Saver 2 Energy Saver 2: E. Saver2 TimerOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 166 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select how many minutes the printer waits before switching to Energy Saver mode. The following message appears on the display: Press the # Enter key. Wait for two seconds. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. E. Saver2 Timer *60 minutes ACE084S Ready Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 167 Host Interface Menu You can make the following settings from the Host Interface menu: • I/O Buffer • I/O Timeout • Network Setup • IEEE 1394 Setup • IEEE 802.11b • USB Setting • Bluetooth Reference For more information about “Network Setup”, see “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide Host Interface Parameters Menu Description I/O Buffer You can set the size of the I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change this setting. 128 KB, 256 KB, 512 KB Note ? Default: 128 KBOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 168 I/O Timeout You can set how many seconds the printer waits before ending a print job. If data from another port often arrives during print jobs, you should increase the timeout period. 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 25 seconds, 60 seconds Note ? Default: 15 seconds Network Setup DHCP You can set how the network interface board acquires TCP/IP settings. Note ? Default: On Reference “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide IP Address You can set the IP address. Limitation ? When DHCP is On, its setting cannot be changed. If you want to change the setting, make the setting for DHCP Off. Consult the network administrator for information about how to make the setting for the network. Note ? Default: 011.022.033.044 Reference “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 169 Network Setup Subnet Mask You can set the subnet mask. Limitation ? When DHCP is On, its setting cannot be changed. If you want to change the setting, make the setting for DHCP Off. Consult the network administrator for information about how to make the setting for the network. Note ? Default: 000.000.000.000 Reference “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide Gateway Address You can set the gateway address. Limitation ? When DHCP is On, its setting cannot be changed. If you want to change the setting, make the setting for DHCP Off. Consult the network administrator for information about how to make the setting for the network. Note ? Default: 000.000.000.000 Reference “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 170 Network Setup Frame Type (NW) You can set the Frame type for NetWare. Auto, Ethernet II, Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet SNAP Note ? Default: Auto Active Protocol You can set the active protocol. TCP/IP, NetWare, SMB, AppleTalk Note ? Default: All Active Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 171 Network Setup Ethernet Speed You can select the speed of the network that the printer is connected to. Auto , 10Mbps Full D., 100Mbps Full D., 10Mbps Half D., 100Mbps Half D. Note ? Default: Auto Reference “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide LAN Type You can select Ethernet or IEEE 802.11b as the LAN Type. Note ? Default: Ethernet ? Appears only when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed. Reference For more information about Network Setup, “Configuring the printer for the Network”, Setup Guide Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 172 IEEE 1394 Setup *1 You can make settings for using IEEE 1394. This menu appears only when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed. DHCP You can set the method the IEEE 1394 interface board uses to acquire TCP/IP settings. • On • Off Note ? Default: On IP Address1394 You can set the IP address for IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394). Note ? Default: 000.000.000.000 Subnet Mask1394 You can set the subnet mask for IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394). Note ? Default: 000.000.000.000 IP over 1394 You can activate IP over 1394. Note ? Default: Active Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 173 IEEE 1394 Setup SCSI print You can activate SCSI print. Note ? Default: Active Bidi-SCSI print You can activate bidirectional transmission for SCSI print. Note ? Default: On Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 174 IEEE 802.11b *2 You can make settings for using the wireless LAN. This menu appears only when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed. Comm. Mode You can set the transmission mode for IEEE 802.11b. Note ? Default: 802.11 Ad hoc Channel The selectable channels are 1-11 (Inch version) and 1-13 (Metric version). Note ? Default: 11 Trans. Speed You can set the transmission speed for IEEE 802.11b. Note ? Default: Auto Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 175 IEEE 802.11b SSID You can make settings for SSID in Infrastructure mode and 802.11 Ad hoc mode. Limitation ? Select “¥” if you want to enter “/” in the SSID. Also, “¥” appears when printing the configuration page, read it as “/”. Note ? Up to 32 ASCII characters in the range 0x20-0x7e can be used. The SSID setting is case-sensitive. ? An SSID value is automatically set to the nearest access point if the setting has not been made. ? If the setting has not been made for 802.11 Ad hoc mode, the same value for Infrastructure mode or an “ASSID” value is automatically set. WEP Setting You can set the WEP encryption key for IEEE 802.11b. Note ? Default: Not Active ? With 64-bit WEP, you can use a 10-digit hexadecimal key. With 128-bit WEP, you can use a 26-digit hexadecimal key. ? IEEE 802.11b communication is only possible when a WEP key has been specified. Set WEP to [Active]. Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 176 *1 Appears only when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed. *2 Appears only when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed. *3 Appears only when the optional bluetooth interface unit is installed. USB Setting You can set the transmission speed for USB. Auto, Full Speed Note ? Default: Auto Bluetooth *3 You can set Bluetooth operation mode to either private or public. Note ? Default: Public Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 177 Changing the Host Interface Menu The following example describes how to change the setting for “I/O Timeout”: Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the Host Interface menu. ACE082S Menu: Host InterfaceOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 178 Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “I/O Timeout”. Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: ACE083S Host Interface: I/O Buffer Host Interface: I/O Timeout I/O Timeout: *15 secondsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 179 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select how many minutes the printer waits before finishing a print job. Press the # Enter key. Wait for two seconds. “Host Interface” appears on the display. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. ACE084S Ready Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 180 PCL Menu You can make the following settings from the “PCL Menu”: • Orientation • Form Lines • Font Source • Font Number • Point Size • Font Pitch • Symbol Set • Courier Font • Ext. A4 Width • Append CR to LF • Resolution PCL Parameters Menu Description Orientation You can set the page orientation. • Portrait • Landscape Note ? Default: PortraitOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 181 Form Lines You can set the number of lines per page. 5-128 Note ? Default: 64 (Metric version), 60 (Inch version) Font Source You can set the location of the default font. • Resident • RAM • HDD • SD Note ? Default: Resident ? When you select “RAM”, you can select only fonts downloaded to the printer RAM. ? 1 to n (for Download source) Font Number You can set the ID of the default font you want to use. • 0 to 50: (for Internal) • 1 to 50: (for Download) Note ? Default: 0 Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 182 Point Size You can set the point size you want to use for the default font. 4 to 999.75 by 0.25 Note ? Default: 12.00 points ? This setting is effective only for variable-space fonts. Font Pitch You can set the number of characters per inch for the default font. 0.44 to 99.99 by 0.01 Note ? Default: 10.00 pitch ? This setting is effective only for fixed-space fonts. Symbol Set You can specify the set of print characters for the default font. Available options are as follows: Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852, PC8-TK, Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ, Math- 8, PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO 21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0 Note ? Default: Roman-8 Courier Font You can select a courier font type. • Regular • Dark Note ? Default: Regular Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 183 Ext. A4 Width You can extend the width of the printable area for an A4 sheet, leaving a narrow margin on the sides. • On • Off Note ? Default: Off Append CR to LF By adding a CR code to each LF code, you can print text data clearly. • On • Off Note ? Default: Off Resolution You can set the print resolution in dots per inch. • 300 dpi • 600 dpi Fast • 600 dpi Std. Note ? Default: 600 dpi Fast Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 184 Changing the PCL Menu The following example describes how to change the setting for “Orientation”: Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. ACE082SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 185 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “PCL Menu”, and then press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select the orientation desired, and then press the # Enter key. Wait for two seconds. “PCL Menu” appears on the display. ACE083S PCL Menu: Orientation Orientation: *PortraitOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 186 Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. ACE084S Ready Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 187 PS Menu You can make the following settings from the “PS Menu”: • Data Format • Resolution • Color Setting • Color ProfileOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 188 PS Parameters Menu Description Data Format You can select the data format. • Binary Data • TBCP Limitation ? This setting is effective when operating the machine with a parallel, USB or EtherTalk connection. ? When operating the machine with a parallel or USB connection, if binary data is sent from the printer driver, the print job is canceled. ? When operating the machine with an Ethernet connection, the print job is canceled under the following conditions; • The printer driver data format is TBCP and the data format selected on the control panel is Binary Data. • The printer driver data format is binary and the data format selected on the control panel is TBCP. Note ? Default: Binary Data Resolution You can select the resolution. • 600 dpi Fast • 600 dpi Std. • 1200 dpi Note ? Default: 600 dpi FastOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 189 Color Setting You can select the RGB Color adjustment quality. • None • Fine • Super Fine Note ? Default: Super Fine Color Profile You can select the color profile. • Auto • Presentation • Solid Color • Photographic • User Setting Note ? Default: Auto Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 190 Changing the PS Menu The following example describes how to change the setting for “TBCP”: Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. ACE082SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 191 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “PS Menu”, and then press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select the TBCP desired, and then press the # Enter key. Wait for two seconds. “PS Menu” appears on the display. ACE083S PS Menu: Data Format Data Format: *Binary DataOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 192 Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. ACE084S Ready Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 193 PDF Menu There are five menu items in the “PDF Menu” . • PDF: Change PW • PDF Group PW • Resolution • Color Setting • Color Profile PDF Parameters Menu Description PDF: Change PW Set [Password to Open the Text File] for the PDF file to be printed using PDF Direct Print. • Current PW • PDF: New PW Important ? A password can be set using Web Image Monitor, but in this case the password information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set the password using this menu from the control panel. Note ? Default: no password setOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 194 PDF Group PW Set the group password already specified with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. • Current PW • New PW Important ? A password can be set using Web Image Monitor, but in this case the password information is sent through the network. If security is a priority, set the password using this menu from the control panel. Note ? Default: no password set Resolution You can select the resolution for the PDF file to be printed using PDF Direct Print. • 600 dpi Fast • 600 dpi Std. • 1200 dpi Note ? Default: 600 dpi Fast Color Setting You can make an RGB setting for the PDF file to be printed using PDF Direct Print. • None • Fine • Super Fine Note ? Default: Super Fine Menu DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 195 Changing the PDF Menu Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Color Profile You can set the color profile for the PDF file to be printed using PDF Direct Print. • Auto • Solid Color • Presentation • Photographic • User Setting Note ? Default: Auto Menu Description ACE082SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 196 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “PDF Menu”, and then press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Resolution”, and then press the # Enter key. ACE083S PDF Menu: PDF: Change PW ACE083SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 197 The following message appears on the display. Press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select the resolution desired, and then press the # Enter key. The screen returns to the screen in step C in a few seconds. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. PDF Menu: Resolution Resolution: *600 dpi ACE084S Ready Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 198 Language Menu You can select a languages to use. Available languages are: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Finnish, Portuguese, Czech, Polish and Hungarian. Note ? Default: English Changing the Language Menu You can change the language by the following procedures: Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. ACE082SOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 199 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Language”. Press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key until the language you want to select appears on the display. Press the # Enter key. Wait for two seconds. “Menu” appears on the display. Menu: Language ACE083S Language: *EnglishOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 200 Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. ACE084S Ready 201 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 8. Appendix Printing Files Directly from Windows You can print files directly using Windows commands. For example, you can print postscript files for PostScript 3. Commands that can be used are as follows. The following explains setup and printing. Setup Make settings for the printer's network environment. • Enable the TCP/IP protocol (the default is enabled). • Set TCP/IP-related items, including the IP address. Reference “Configuring the Printer for the Network”, Setup Guide. p.289 “Using DHCP”, when setting the IP address of the printer using DHCP. Install the TCP/IP protocol in Windows to set the network environment. Note ? Make sure network settings are checked by a network administrator. Operating System lpr rcp ftp Windows 95/98/Me  Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003    Windows NT 4.0   Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 202 When printing with Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, install “Printing service for UNIX” as the network software. When printing with Windows NT 4.0, install “Microsoft TCP/IP printing” as the network software. Note ? When using Windows 95/98/Me, lpr cannot be used to print. ? This completes the setup for specifying a printer using an IP address when printing. When using a host name to specify a printer, proceed to p.202 “Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address” and continue the setup. Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address When the host name is defined, you can specify a printer by the host name instead of the IP address. The host name used differs depending on the network environment. When using DNS Use the host name set for the data file on the DNS server. When setting the IP address of a printer using DHCP Use the “Printer name” on the Configuration Page as the host name. See p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page” for details about printing the Configuration Page. In other cases Add the IP address and host name of the network printer to the hosts file on the computer used for printing. Methods of addition vary according to the operating system.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 203 Windows 95/98/Me Copy to the same \WINDOWS\HOSTS.SAM directory and name it “HOSTS” (no extension required). Open the \WINDOWS\HOSTS file you created using Memo Pad or other applications. Add an IP address and a host name to the hosts file in the following format: 192.168.15.16 host # NP “192.168.15.16” is the IP address, “host” is the printer's host name, and “#” to the end are comments. Separate each item with a space or tab, and use only one line. Save the file. Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0 Open the hosts file using Memo Pad or other applications. The hosts file is in the following folder: \WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETC\HOSTS \WINNT is the directory of the installation destination for Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. Add an IP address and a host name to the hosts file in the following format: 192.168.15.16 host # NP “192.168.15.16” is the IP address, “host” is the printer's host name, and “#” to the end are comments. Separate each item with a space or tab, and use only one line. Save the file.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 204 Printing Method The following explains printing using the “lpr”, “rcp”, and “ftp” commands. Preparation Enter commands using the commands prompt window. The location of the commands prompt in each operating system is as follows: • Windows 95/98 [Start]-[Programs]-[MS-DOS Prompt] • Windows Me [Start]-[Programs]-[Accessories]-[MS-DOS Prompt] • Windows 2000 [Start]-[Programs]-[Accessories]-[Command Prompt] • Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 [Start]-[All Programs]-[Accessories]-[Command Prompt] • Windows NT 4.0 [Start]-[Programs]-[Command Prompt] Note ? If the “print requests full” message appears, no more print requests can be accepted. Try printing again when the number of sessions has dropped below the value shown in the following table below. ? Enter the file name in a format including the path from the directory executing the commands. Reference The “option” specified in the command is an intrinsic printer option and its syntax is similar to printing from UNIX. For details, see UNIX Supplement. rcp, rsh 5 ftp 3Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 205 lpr When specifying a printer by IP address c:> lpr -Sprinter's IP address [-Poption] [ol] \pass name\file name When using a host name instead of an IP address c:> lpr -Sprinter's host name [-Poption] [ol] \pass name\file name Note ? When printing a binary file, add the “-ol” option (lowercase o, and lowercase l). When using a printer with the host name “host”, to print a PostScript file named “file1” located in the C:\PRINT directory, the command line is as follows: c:> lpr -Shost -Pfiletype=RPS -ol C:\PRINT\file1 rcp Register the printer's host name in the hosts file beforehand. See p.202 “Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address”. c:> rcp [-b] \pass name\file name [pass name\file name...] printer's host name:[option] Note ? In the file names, “*” and “?” can be used as wild cards. ? When printing a binary file, add the “-b” option. When using a printer with the host name “host”, to print a PostScript file named “file1” or “file2” located in the C:\PRINT directory, the command line is as follows. c:> rcp -b C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2 host:filetype=RPSOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 206 ftp Use the “put” or “mput” command according to the number of files to be printed. When the number of files to be printed is one ftp> put \pass name\file name [option] When the number of files to be printed is two or more ftp> put \pass name\file name [\pass name\file name...] [option] Note ? For the mput command, “*” and “?” can be used as wild cards in the file name. ? If these symbols are used, the file name will be read as an option string. The procedure from starting ftp to printing is as follows. Formulate the printer's IP address (or host name of the hosts file printer) as an argument and use the “ftp” command. % ftp printer's IP address Enter user names and passwords as needed, and then press the # Enter key. There is no default user name when the default password is “password”. User: Password: When printing a binary file, set binary as the file mode. ftp> binOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 207 Note ? When a binary file is printed in ASCII mode, print data may change and may not print out correctly. Specify the file to be printed. The following are examples of printing a PostScript file named “file1”in the C:\PRINT directory, and printing file1 and file2. ftp> put C:\PRINT\file1 filetype=RPS ftp> mput C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2 Quit ftp. ftp> byeOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 208 SNMP The network interface board functions as SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) agent using UDP and IPX protocols. Using the SNMP manager, you can get information about the printer. The factory default community names are “public” and “admin”. You can get MIB information using these community names. Reference You can configure SNMP from the command line using telnet. See p.224 “SNMP”. You can configure SNMP from SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin using NIB Setup Tool. See Help for SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. You can configure SNMP from your Web Image Monitor. See Help on the CD-ROM. Limitation ? The optional IEEE 1394 interface board supports TCP/IP only. ? The kinds of supported MIB differ depending on the printer. Supported MIBs • MIB-II • PrinterMIB • HostResourceMIB • RicohPrivateMIBOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 209 Spool Printing With Spool Printing, the entire print job data is saved on the printer hard disk before printing. To use this function, set it from the menu. See p.154 “System Menu”. Important ? Do not turn off the printer or computer when a print job is being spooled and the Data In indicator is blinking. If you do, the print job will remain on the printer hard disk and be printed when the printer is turned on. Limitation ? Spool Printing does not appear unless the optional printer hard disk is installed. ? Data that has been received in the protocol other than SMB, LPD or IPP cannot be spooled. ? Up to 150 jobs (approximately 1000 MB) can be spooled at a time. ? When Spool Printing is on, the size of a single print job cannot exceed 500 MB. ? When sending spooled print jobs from more than one computer at a time, up to five LPR jobs, one SMB job and one IPP job can be spooled. Jobs exceeding the maximum number cannot be spooled. Wait until the number of spooled print jobs falls below maximum. Note ? When “On” is selected, the first print will take time. ? Spool jobs stored in the machine can be viewed or deleted using Web Image Monitor. Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 210 Setting Spool Printing Spool Printing can be set using telnet or Web Image Monitor. • Using Web Image Monitor In [System] on the [Configuration] menu, set [Spool Printing] to [Enable]. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help. • Using telnet Enter “spoolsw spool on” to set Spool Printing. For more information, see p.235 “Job Spool”. Confirm or Delete the Spooled Job from Web Image Monitor The spooled job can be viewed or deleted from Web Image Monitor. Start Web Image Monitor. Enter “http: //(IP address of printer whose settings you want to change)/” in the [Address] box to access the printer whose settings you want to change. Web Image Monitor Top Page appears. Click [Administrator Mode]. The dialog box for entering the password and user name appears. Enter your user name and password, and then click [OK]. To use the default account, enter no user name and enter “password” for the password. Click [Job] on the menu displayed in the left area. A submenu will then appear.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 211 Click [Spool Printing] on the [Printer] menu. A list of spooled jobs appears. To delete a job, select the check box of the job you want to delete, and then click [Delete]. The selected job is deleted. Quit Web Image Monitor. Reference For more information, see Web Image Monitor Help.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 212 Remote Maintenance by telnet You can view the printer status and configure the network interface board using telnet. Note ? You should specify a password so that only the network administrator or a user having network administrator privileges can use remote maintenance. ? The password is the same as that used for Web Image Monitor settings. When the password is changed on “mshell”, the other passwords change also. Using telnet The following is a sample procedure using telnet. Limitation ? Only one user at a time can be logged on to do remote maintenance. Enter the IP address or the host name of the printer to start telnet. % telnet IP_address Enter the password. Note ? The default is “password”. Enter a command. Reference For more information about telnet commands, see p.213 “Commands List”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 213 Quit telnet. msh> logout When the configuration is changed, a confirmation message requests whether or not the changes should be saved. Enter “yes” to save the changes, and then press the # Enter key. If you do not want to save the changes, enter “no”, and then press the # Enter key. If you want to make additional changes, enter “return” at the command line, and then press the # Enter key. Note ? If the “Can not write NVRAM information” message appears, the changes are not saved. Repeat the steps above. ? The network interface board is reset automatically when the settings are changed. ? When the network interface board is reset, the active print job which has already been sent to the printer will finish printing. However, jobs that have not been sent yet will be canceled. Commands List This is a list of commands that can be used via remote maintenance. Note ? Enter “help” to see a list of commands that can be used. msh> help ? Enter “help command_name” to display information about the syntax of that command. msh> help command_nameOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 214 TCP/IP address Use the “ifconfig” command to configure TCP/IP (IP address, subnet mask, broadcast address, and default gateway address) for the machine. Reference msh> ifconfig Configuration msh> ifconfig interface_name parameter address *1 If you did not enter the interface name, it will be automatically set to the Ethernet interface. *2 Available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed. *3 You can specify an interface when installing the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit. Interface name Interface to be configured ether Ethernet Interface *1 ip1394 *2 IEEE 1394 Interface wlan *3 IEEE 802.11b Interface Parameter Meaning (no parameter) IP address netmask subnet mask broadcast broadcast addressOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 215 Changing the Interface You can specify either the Ethernet interface or IEEE 802.11b interface when using the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit. msh> ifconfig interface up Note ? You cannot specify the IEEE 1394 interface. The following is an example for configuring an IP address of 192.168.15.16 on Ethernet interface. msh> ifconfig ether 192.168.15.16 The following is an example for configuring a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 on Ethernet interface. msh> ifconfig ether netmask 255.255.255.0 Note ? This affects the configuration of the network interface board of the IP address that is used. ? The TCP/IP setting is the same as that for the Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface. ? To enter an address using hexadecimal, prefix it by “0x”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 216 Address Subnet Mask A number used to mathematically mask or hide the IP address on the network by eliminating those parts of the address that are alike for all the machines on the network. Note ? To get the above addresses, contact your network administrator. ? The subnet mask is the same as that for the Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface. ? When installing the optional IEEE 1394 interface board, set the IP address and subnet so they do not overlap with the Ethernet interface or IEEE 1394 interface. Access Control Use the “access” command to view and configure access control. You can also specify two or more access ranges. Reference msh> access Configuration msh> access ? range start-address end-address • ? represents a target number between 1 and 5. (Up to five access ranges can be registered and selected.) Example: To specify accessible IP addresses between 192.168.0.10 and 192.168.0.20: msh> access 1 range 192.168.0.10 192.168.0.20Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 217 Note ? The access range restricts the workstations from which printing is possible by means of an address. If you do not need to restrict printing, make the setting “0.0.0.0”. ? The entry is invalid if the start address is greater than the end address. ? Up to five access ranges can be specified. The entry is invalid if the target number is omitted. ? You cannot access Web Image Monitor and telnet from a restricted IP address. Access Control Initialization msh> access flush Note ? This restores the settings to their defaults so that all access ranges become “0.0.0.0”. DHCP Use the “dhcp” command to configure the DHCP settings. Reference For more information about DHCP, see p.289 “Using DHCP”. Reference The following command displays the current DHCP settings. msh> dhcp Configuration You can configure the DHCP settings. msh> dhcp interface_name {on|off}Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 218 Note ? Specify “on” to enable DHCP. Specify “off” to disable DHCP. ? When the DNS server address and domain name are acquired from DHCP, be sure to Specify “on”. Interface Priority Configuration You can assign priorities governing which interface obtains DHCP parameters. msh> dhcp priority interface_name Note ? Priority assignment is useful when connecting more than one interface to the machine. ? If an interface is not selected, it appears according to the currently set priority regardless of multiple interface connections. *1 Available when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed. *2 Available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed. DNS Server Address Selection You can specify whether to acquire the DNS server address from the DHCP server or to set it manually. msh> dhcp dnsaddr [dhcp/static] Note ? Specify “dhcp” when acquiring the DNS server address from the DHCP server, or specify “static” when using it as a user setting. Interface name Interface to be configured ether Ethernet interface wlan *1 IEEE 802.11b interface ip1394 *2 IEEE 1394 interfaceOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 219 Reference For more information about setting the DNS server address, see p.243 “DNS”. Domain Name Selection You can specify whether to acquire the domain name from the DHCP server or to set it as a user setting. msh> dhcp domainname [dhcp/static] Note ? Specify “dhcp” when acquiring the domain name from the DHCP server, or specify “static” when using it as a user setting. Reference For more information about setting the domain name, see p.246 “Domain name”. Protocol Use the “set” command to set the protocol information display to active or inactive.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 220 Reference Protocol information (active/inactive) appears. msh> set protocol *1 Available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed. *2 Information about tcpip, appletalk, netware, and smb appears. Protocol tcpip appletalk netware smb scsiprint *1 ip1394 *1 protocol *2 lpr ftp rsh diprint web snmp ssl ipp http rendezvousOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 221 Configuration You can set the protocol to active or inactive. msh> set protocol {up | down} *1 Available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed. Note ? If you prohibit remote access using TCP/IP and then log out, you cannot use remote access. If this was a mistake, you can use the control panel to allow access by TCP/IP. ? When you prevent access via TCP/IP, you are also prevented from using ip1394, lpr, ftp, rsh, diprint, web, snmp, ssl, ipp, http, and rendezvous. Protocol tcpip appletalk netware smb scsiprint *1 ip1394 *1 lpr ftp rsh diprint web snmp ssl ipp http rendezvous “up” means active and “down” means inactive.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 222 Printer status The following commands can be used to get information about the current status of the printer. msh> command Note ? More information about any print job is displayed when the ID number is added after the prnlog command. Reference For more information about the meaning of the data returned with these commands, see p.260 “Understanding the Displayed Information”. Command Information that is displayed status Status of printer Information about the print jobs info Information about the paper tray, output tray, and printer language prnlog [ID] Lists the last 16 print jobsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 223 Network interface board settings information Use the “show” command to display the network interface board settings. msh> show [-p] Note ? Add “-p” to the show command to have information displayed on screen at one time. Reference For more information about the meaning of the data returned with this command, see p.262 “Configuring the Network Interface Board”. System log information Use the “syslog” command to display information stored in the printer's system log. msh> syslog Reference For more information about the displayed information, see p.270 “System Log Information”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 224 SNMP Use the “snmp” command to display and edit SNMP configuration settings such as the community name. Note ? You can configure up to ten SNMP access settings numbered 1–10. ? The printer cannot be accessed from SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or SmartDeviceMonitor for Client if “public” is not registered in numbers 1-10. When changing the community name, use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and the installed “SNMP Setup Tool” to change a computer's community name to correspond with printer settings. ? Default access settings 1 and 2 are as follows: Display You can display the SNMP information and available protocols. msh> snmp ? msh> snmp [-p] [registered_number] Note ? If the -p option is added, you can view the settings one by one. ? Omitting the number displays all access settings. Number 1 2 Community name public admin IP address 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Access type read-only trap off read-write trap offOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 225 Community name configuration You can set the community name of the network interface board. msh> snmp number name community_name Note ? The community name can be entered up to 15 characters. Access type configuration You can select the access type from those listed below. msh> snmp number type access_type Protocol configuration You should use the following command to set the protocols to active or inactive. If you set a protocol to inactive, all access settings set to use that protocol are disabled. msh> snmp {ip | ipx} {on | off} • Specify “ip” for TCP/IP, or specify “ipx” for IPX/SPX. • “on” means active and “off” means inactive. To change the protocol of access settings, use the following command. However, if you disabled a protocol with the above command, making it active here will have no effect. msh> snmp number active {ip | ipx} {on | off} Access type Type of access which is permitted no All access is denied. read Read only write Read and write trap User is notified of trap messages.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 226 Access configuration You can configure an address of a host depending on the protocols used. The network interface board accepts requests only from hosts having addresses with access types of “read-only” or “read-write”. Enter “0” to have the network interface board accept requests from any host without requiring a specific type of access. • Specifying a TCP/IP address msh> snmp number ip/addr address • Specifying an IPX/SPX address msh> snmp number ipx address Note ? To specify the TCP/IP protocol, enter “ip” followed by a space, and then the IP address. ? To specify the IPX/SPX protocol, enter “ipx” followed by a space and then the IPX address followed by a decimal and then the MAC address of the network interface board. The following is an example of how to configure registration number 3 with the IP address 192.168.15.16. msh> snmp 3 ip 192.168.15.16 The following is an example of how to configure registration number 3 with the IPX address 7390A448, and the MAC address 00:00:74:62:5C:65. msh> snmp 3 ipx 7390A448:000074625C65Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 227 IPP Use the “ipp” command to configure the IPP settings. Viewing setting You can display the current IPP settings. msh> ipp Example output: timeout=900(sec) auth basic • The “timeout” setting specifies how many seconds the computer keeps trying to access the network printer to send print jobs when no connection could be made. • The “auth” setting indicates the user authorization mode. IPP timeout configuration You can specify how many seconds to wait before canceling a print job if it has been interrupted for some reason. The time can be changed to between 30 and 65535 seconds. msh> ipp timeout {30 -65535} IPP user authorization configuration Use the IPP user authorization to restrict users to print with IPP. The default is “off” . msh> ipp auth {basic|digest|off} • The settings for user authorization are “basic” and “digest”. • Use “off” to remove a user's authorization. Note ? If you specify “basic” or “digest”, see the next section, “Configuring IPP user authorization”, for more information about how to configure the user name.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 228 Configuring IPP user authorization Use the following command: msh> ipp user The following message appears. msh> Input user number (1 to 10): Enter the number, user name, and password. msh> IPP user name:user1 msh> IPP password:******* After configuring the settings, the following message appears. User configuration changed. Direct printing port The direct printing port allows printing directly from a computer connected to the network to the printer. Use the “diprint” command to change the direct printing port settings. View settings You can display the current direct printing port settings. msh> diprint Example output: port 9100 timeout=300(sec) bidirect off • The “port” specifies the port number of the direct printing port. • The “bidirect” setting indicates whether the direct printing port is bidirectional.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 229 Setting timeout You can specify the timeout interval to use when receiving data from the network. msh> diprint timeout [30~65535] Note ? The default is 300 seconds. Bidirectional configuration for the direct printing port Use this setting to configure whether the direct printing port is bidirectional. The default is “off”. msh> diprint bidirect {on|off} SMB Use the “smb” command to configure or delete the computer name or workgroup name for NetBEUI. Settings of NetBEUI related items msh >smb parameter Parameter Settings comp Your computer name consisting of up to 15 characters group Workgroup name consisting of up to 15 characters comment Comment consisting of up to 31 characters notif {on | off} To notify print job completion, specify “on”. Otherwise, specify “off”. clear comp Clears complete name. clear group Clears Workgroup name. clear comment Clears comment.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 230 Protocol settings Enable/disable NetBEUI and TCP/IP. Specify “up” to enable, and “down” to disable. msh> smb protocol [netbeui {up | down} | tcpip {up | down}] ROUTE Use the “route” command to control the routing table. This command allows you to configure and display routing information. You can change the network configuration from a remote computer using this command. Note ? The maximum number of routing tables is 16. *1 IP address Parameter Settings route add [host|net] destination *1 gateway *1 Adds a host/network route to “destination” and a gateway address to “gateway” in the table. Host becomes the default setting. route delete [host|net] destination *1 Deletes a host/network route from the table. Host becomes the default setting. route get [destination *1 Displays only route information corresponding to a specified destination. When the destination is unspecified, all routing information is displayed. route active {host | net} destination *1 on/off You can turn the specified destination on or off. Host becomes the default setting. route add default gateway *1 You can set the default gateway address. route flush Deletes all routing information.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 231 Note ? Set the gateway address when communicating with devices on a different network beyond the router. ? The same gateway address is shared by all interfaces. SLP Use the “slp” command to configure SLP settings. You can search the NetWare server using SLP in the PureIP environment of NetWare 5/5.1 and NetWare 6/6.5. Using the “slp” command, you can configure the value of TTL which can be used by SLP multi-cast-packet. Note ? The default of TTL is “1”. A search is performed only within a local segment. If the router does not support multi-cast, the settings are not available even if the TTL value is increased. ? The range for acceptable TTL values is 1 - 255. msh> slp ttl {1 -255} SPRINT Use the “sprint” command to make setting for IEEE 1394 (SCSI print). Note ? You can make settings when the IEEE 1394 interface board is installed. View settings The IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) settings are displayed. msh> sprintOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 232 Bidirectional configuration for IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) Use this setting to configure whether IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) is bidirectional. The default is “on”. msh> sprint bidi [on/off] Setting IEEE 802.11b Use the “wiconfig” command to make setting for IEEE 802.11b. Note ? You can make settings when installing the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit. View settings You can display the current IEEE 802.11b settings. msh> wiconfig The IEEE 802.11b information is displayed. msh> wiconfig cardinfo Note ? If the IEEE 802.11b is not working correctly, the IEEE 802.11b information is not displayed.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 233 Configuration msh> wiconfig parameter Parameter Value to be configured mode [ap|adhoc|802.11adhoc] You can set infrastructure mode (ap) , 802.11 ad hoc mode (802.11adhoc), or ad hoc mode (adhoc). The default is ad hoc mode. ssid ID value You can set SSID in infrastructure mode. The characters that can be used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes). An SSID value is set automatically to the nearest access point if the setting has not been made. If the setting has not been made for ad hoc mode, the same value as for infrastructure mode or an “ASSID” value is set automatically if the setting has not been made. channel frequency channel no. You can set the channel. You can specify from the following channels. • Metric Version: 1-13 • Inch Version: 1-11 Set the same channel for all the machines you are using. enc [on|off] You can enable or disable the WEP function. To enable the WEP function, specify “on”; to disable it, specify “off”. To start the WEP function, enter the correct WEP key.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 234 key [key value] val [1|2|3|4] You can specify the WEP key when entering in hexadecimal. With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10-digit hexadecimal. With a 128-bit WEP, you can use 26-digit hexadecimal. Up to four WEP keys can be registered. Specify the number to be registered with “val”. When a WEP is specified with the key, the WEP specified with the keyphrase is overwritten. To use this function, set the same key number and WEP key for all ports that transmit to each other. You can omit the numbers with “val”. The key number is set to 1 when making these omissions. keyphrase [phrase] val [1|2|3|4] You can specify the WEP key when entering in ASCII. With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10-digit hexadecimal. With a 128-bit WEP, you can use 26-digit hexadecimal. Up to four WEP can be registered. Specify the number to be registered with “val”. When a WEP is specified with the keyphrase, the WEP specified with the key is overwritten. To use this function, set the same key number and WEP key for all ports that transmit to each other. You can omit the numbers with “val”. The key number is set to 1 when making these omissions. encval [1|2|3|4] You can specify which of the four WEP keys is used for packet encoding. “1” is set if a number is not specified. Parameter Value to be configuredOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 235 Job Spool Use the “spoolsw” command to configure Job Spool settings. Limitation ? You can only specify diprint, LPR, IPP, and SMB protocol. Reference The Job Spool setting appears. msh> spoolsw auth [open|shared] You can set the authorized mode when using WEP. The specified value and the authorized mode are as follows: open: Open system authorized (default) shared: Shared key authorized rate [auto|11m|5.5m|2m|1m] You can set the IEEE 802.11b transmitting speed. The transmitting speed you specify here is the speed at which data is sent. You can receive data at any speed. auto: automatically set (default) 11m: 11 Mbps fixed 5.5m: 5.5 Mbps fixed 2m: 2 Mbps fixed 1m: 1 Mbps fixed Parameter Value to be configuredOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 236 Job Spool setting msh> spoolsw spool {on | off} Note ? Specify “on” to enable Job Spool or “off” to disable it. Protocol configuration To change protocol settings, use the following command. You can specify the setting for diprint, LPR, IPP, and SMB protocol. • diprint msh> spoolsw diprint {on | off} • lpr msh> spoolsw lpr {on | off} • ipp msh> spoolsw ipp {on | off} • SMB msh> spoolsw smb {on | off}Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 237 Changing the host name Use the “hostname” command to change the printer name. Configuration msh> hostname [interface_name ] printer_name *1 If you did not enter the interface name, it will be automatically set to the Ethernet interface. *2 If you install the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit, you can set the command. *3 If you install the optional IEEE 1394 interface board, you can set the command. Note ? Enter the printer name using up to 15 characters. ? You cannot use a printer name starting with RNP or rnp. ? The Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface will have the same printer name. Interface name Interface to be configured ether Ethernet interface *1 wlan *2 IEEE 802.11b interface ip1394 *3 IEEE 1394 interfaceOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 238 WINS Use the “wins” command to configure the WINS server settings. Reference For more information about WINS server settings, see p.291 “Configuring a WINS Server”. The specified values of the interfaces used in each of the following settings are shown below. *1 If you install the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit, you can set the command. *2 If you install the optional IEEE 1394 interface board, you can set the command. Viewing setting You can display the WINS server IP address. msh> wins Example output: wins: primary server 0.0.0.0 secondary server 0.0.0.0 Note ? If DHCP is used to start from the network, the current WINS server address is displayed. This address, however, is not displayed if DHCP is not used. ? If the IP address obtained from DHCP differs from the WINS IP address, the DHCP address is the valid address. Interface name Interface to be configured ether Ethernet interface wlan *1 IEEE 802.11b interface ip1394 *2 IEEE 1394 interfaceOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 239 Configuration Use the “set” command to make WINS active or inactive. msh> wins interface_name {on | off} • “on” means active and “off” means inactive. Address configuration Use this command to configure a WINS server IP address. msh> wins ifname {primary|secondary} IP address • Use “primary” to configure a primary WINS server IP address. • Use “secondary” to configure a secondary WINS server IP address. • You cannot use “255.255.255.255” as the IP address. NBT (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) Scope ID Selection You can specify the NBT scope ID. msh> wins interface_name scope scope ID • The scope ID is specified using up to 31 alphanumeric characters. AutoNet Use the “autonet” command to configure AutoNet settings. Reference For more information about AutoNet, see p.291 “Using AutoNet”. Display You can display the current AutoNet settings. msh> autonetOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 240 Configuration You can configure the AutoNet settings. msh> autonet [on|off] • “on” means active and “off” means inactive. Interface Priority Configuration You can assign priorities governing which interface obtains AutoNet parameters. msh> autonet priority interface_name Note ? Priority assignment is useful when connecting more than one interface to the machine. ? If an interface is not selected, the interface appears according to the currently set priority, regardless of multiple interface connections. *1 Available when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed. *2 Available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed. Interface name Interface to be configured ether Ethernet interface wlan *1 IEEE 802.11b interface ip1394 *2 IEEE 1394 interfaceOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 241 SNTP The printer clock can be synchronized with a NTP server clock using the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). To change the SNTP settings, use the “sntp” command. Note ? SNTP supports the NTP servers running xntpd V3 and V4. Reference msh> sntp NTP Server Address Configuration You can specify the IP address of the NTP server. msh> sntp server IP_address Interval Configuration You can specify the interval at which the printer synchronizes with the operator-specified NTP server. msh> sntp interval polling_time Note ? The default is 3600 seconds. ? You can set the interval from 16 to 16384 seconds. ? If you set 0, the printer synchronizes with the NTP server only when you turn the printer on. After that, the printer does not synchronize with the NTP server.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 242 Time-zone Configuration You can specify the time difference between the printer clock and the NTP server clock. msh> sntp timezone +/-hour_time Example: To set the time-zone difference to +8 hours: msh> sntp timezone +08:00 Note ? The time is in 24-hour notation. Changing the password Use the “passwd” command to change the remote maintenance password. Important ? Be sure not to forget or lose the password. Note ? The default is “password”. Enter “passwd”. msh> passwd Enter the current password. Old password: Enter the new password. New password:Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 243 Note ? The password must consist of three to eight alphanumeric characters and symbols. Upper and lower case characters are considered unique. For example, R is different from r. ? The password is the same as that used for Web Image Monitor settings. When the password is changed on “mshell”, the other passwords change also. If you change a password from telnet, change other passwords too. Enter the new password once again. Retype new password: DNS Use the “dns” command to configure or display DNS (Domain Name System) settings. View setting You can display current DNS settings. msh> dns DNS server configuration You can enable/disable use of the DNS server address. msh> dns number server / server address The following is a sample configuration using an IP address of 192.168.15.16 on DNS 1 server: msh> dns 1 server 192.168.15.16 • You can register up to three DNS server numbers. • You cannot use “255.255.255.255” as the DNS server address.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 244 Dynamic DNS Function Setting You can set the dynamic DNS function to active or inactive. msh> dns ifname ddns {on|off} • “on” means active and “off” means inactive. *1 Available when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed. *2 Available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed. Specifying the record overlap operation You can specify the operation performed when records overlap. msh> dns overlap {update|add} • update To delete the old record and register a new record • add To add a new record while allowing the old record to remain Note ? When CNAME overlaps, it is always changed, irrespective of the setting. CNAME Registration You can specify whether to register CNAME. msh> dns cname [on|off] • “on” means active and “off” means inactive. Interface name Interface to be configured ether Ethernet interface wlan *1 IEEE 802.11b interface ip1394 *2 IEEE 1394 interfaceOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 245 Note ? The CNAME registered is the default name beginning from RNP. CNAME cannot be changed. A Records Registration You can specify the method of registering an A record when the dynamic DNS function is active and DHCP is used. msh> dns arecord [dhcp|own] • dhcp To register an A record while using the DHCP server as the DNS client instead of the printer. • own To register an A record using the printer as the DNS client. Note ? The DNS server address and domain name already designated on p.217 “DHCP” are used for the registration. Record Updating Interval Setting You can specify the interval at which records are updated when using the dynamic DNS function. msh> dns interval time • The updating interval is specified in units of one hour. It can be specified over a range of 1 to 255 hours. • The default is 24.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 246 Domain name Use the “domainname” command to display or configure domain name settings. You can configure the Ethernet interface, IEEE 1394 interface, or IEEE 802.11b interface. View setting You can display the current domain name. msh> domainname Interface domain configuration You can display or set the Ethernet interface domain name, IEEE 1394 interface, or IEEE 802.11b interface. • Setting the domain name msh> domainname interface_name domain name • A domain name can be entered up to 63 alphanumeric characters. • The Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface will have the same domain name. • Deleting the domain name msh> domainname interface_name clear *1 Available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed. *2 Available when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed. Interface Interface that can be set ether Ethernet interface ip1394 *1 IEEE 1394 interface wlan *2 IEEE 802.11b interfaceOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 247 NetWare Use the “netware” command to configure the NetWare settings such as the print server name or file server name. msh> netware parameter Parameter Settings pname Enter the NetWare print server name using up to 47 characters. fname Enter the NetWare file server name using up to 47 characters. encap [802.3/802.2/snap/ ethernet2/ auto] Select the encap type. rnum Specify the remote printer number. timeout Set the timeout. mode pserver mode ps Select the print server mode. mode rprinter mode rp Select the remote printer mode. context Specify the NDS context name. sap_interval Specify the SAP intervals. Each interval can be set to between 0 and 3600 seconds in one-second increments. login server Specify “login with a selected file server” as the login mode. login tree Specify “login with a selected NDS tree” as the login mode. tree Specify the NDS tree name.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 248 web Use the “web” command to display and configure the parameters on Web Image Monitor. View Settings msh> web URL Configuration The link address reached by clicking [URL] on Web Image Monitor can be set. msh> web url http://The URL or IP address you want to register/ Link Name Configuration You can enter the name for [URL] that appears on Web Image Monitor. msh> web name Name you want to display Help URL Configuration The link address reached by clicking [Help] or “?” on Web Image Monitor can be set. msh> web help http://Help URL or IP address/help/ Rendezvous Use the “rendezvous” commands to display or configure rendezvous-related settings. View settings You can display a list of rendezvous settings. msh> rendezvousOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 249 Rendezvous Computer Name Setting You can display the rendezvous computer name. msh> rendezvous cname “computer name” • The computer name is specified using up to 63 alphanumeric characters. • The current computer name appears if a computer name is not specified. Rendezvous Installation Location Information Setting You can enter information related to the location where the printer is installed. msh> rendezvous location “location” • Information related to the installation location can be entered using up to 32 alphanumeric characters. • The current installation location information appears if installation location information is not entered. Setting Order of Priority for Each Protocol You can specify the order of priority for “diprint”, “1pr”, and “ipp”. Smaller numbers indicate higher priority. • diprint msh> rendezvous diprint [0–99] • lpr msh> rendezvous lpr [0–99] • ipp msh> rendezvous ipp [0–99] IP TTL setting You can specify the IP TTL (the number of routers a packet can pass through). msh> rendezvous ipttl {1-255}Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 250 Note ? The default is 255. Resetting the computer name and location information You can reset the computer name and location information. msh> rendezvous clear {cname | location} • cname Reset the computer name. The default for the computer name will be displayed when the computer is restarted. • location Reset the location information. The location information will be deleted. Bluetooth Use the “btconfig” command to make setting for Bluetooth™. View settings You can display the Bluetooth settings msh> btconfig Mode settings You can set the Bluetooth operation mode to either “private” or “public”. msh> btconfig [private|public] Note ? The default is “public”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 251 Getting Printer Information over the Network Printer current status You can check the printer's status using the “telnet” command. telnet Use the “status” command. Message Description Adjusting... The machine is adjusting the color. Call Service Center There is a malfunction in the printer. Cover Open: Duplex Unit The optional duplex unit cover is open. Cover Open: Finisher Front The front cover of the optional Finisher is open. Cover Open: Finisher Upper The upper cover of the optional Finisher is open. Cover Open: Finisher Upper-R The lower cover of the optional Finisher is open. Cover Open: Front The front cover is open. Cover Open: Lower Right The lower right cover is open. Cover Open: Right The right cover is open. Cover Open: Upper Left The upper left cover is open. Cover Open: Upper Right The upper right cover is open. Empty: Black Toner The toner cartridge is almost empty. Empty: Cyan Toner The toner cartridge is almost empty. Empty: Magenta Toner The toner cartridge is almost empty.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 252 Empty: Yellow Toner The toner cartridge is almost empty. Energy Save Mode The printer is in Energy Saver Mode. Error: Ethernet Board An error has occurred in the Ethernet interface board. Error: HDD Board An error has occurred in the optional Printer Hard Disk.. Error: IEEE1394 Board An error has occurred in the IEEE 1394 interface board. Error: Memory Switch An error has occurred in the memory switch. Error: Optional Font An error has occurred in the optional font. Error: Optional RAM An error has occurred in the optional memory unit. Error: Parallel I/F Board An error has occurred in the parallel interface board. Error: USB I/F An error has occurred in the USB interface board. Error: Wireless Card An error has occurred in the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) card. Error: Wireless Card or Board An error has occurred in the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) interface. Full: Finisher Tray of the Finisher is full. Full: Hole Punch Receptacle The chad receptacle of the optional finisher is full. Full: Output Tray(s) All output trays are full. Full: Standard Tray The standard tray is full. Full: Waste Oil Bottle The waste oil bottle is full. Full: Waste Toner Bottle The waste toner bottle is full. Loading Toner… Toner is being supplied. Low: Black Toner The toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out. Low: Cyan Toner The toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out. Message DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 253 Low: Magenta Toner The toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out. Low: Yellow Toner The toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out. Malfunction: Finisher There is a problem with the finisher. Malfunction: Stapler There is a problem with the stapler. Malfunction: Tray 1 There is a problem with tray 1. Malfunction: Tray 2 There is a problem with tray 2. Malfunction: Tray 3 There is a problem with tray 3 Malfunction: Tray 3 (LCT) There is a problem with Large Capacity Tray. Malfunction: Tray 4 There is a problem with tray 4. Mismatch: Paper Size The paper size setting of the tray differs from that of the actual size in the tray. Mismatch: Paper Size and Type The paper type setting of the tray differs from that of the actual type in the tray. Mismatch: Paper Type The paper type setting of the tray differs from that of the actual type in the tray. Near Replacing: Fuser Oil Unit The fuser oil unit will soon need to be replaced. Nearly Full: Waste Oil Bottle The waste oil is almost full. Nearly Full: Waste Toner Bottle The waste toner bottle is almost full. Need more Staples The staples have run out. No Paper: Selected Tray The selected tray has run out of paper. Not Detected: Black Toner The toner cartridge is not set correctly. Not Detected: Cyan Toner The toner cartridge is not set correctly. Message DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 254 Not Detected: Develop. Unit (C) The indicated development unit(s) is/are not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: Develop. Unit (K) The indicated development unit(s) is/are not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: Develop. Unit (M) The indicated development unit(s) is/are not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: Develop. Unit (Y) The indicated development unit(s) is/are not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: Duplex Feed Unit The duplex feed unit is not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: Finisher The Finisher is not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: Fuser Oil Unit The fuser oil unit is not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: Fusing Unit The fusing unit is not set correctly, or is not set, or your fusing unit is improper. Not Detected: Input Tray The selected tray is not attached correctly. Not Detected: Magenta Toner The toner cartridge is not set correctly. Not Detected: PCU (C) The indicated PCU(s) is/are not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: PCU (K) The indicated PCU(s) is/are not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: PCU (M) The indicated PCU(s) is/are not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: PCU (Y) The indicated PCU(s) is/are not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: Waste Oil Bottle The waste oil bottle is not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: Waste Toner Bottle The waste toner is not set correctly, or is not set. Not Detected: Yellow Toner The toner cartridge is not set correctly. Offline The machine is offline. Paper in Finisher There is paper left in the finisher Paper Misfeed: Duplex Feed Unit Paper is jammed in the duplex Feed Unit. Message DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 255 Paper Misfeed: Duplex Unit There is misfeed in the Duplex Unit. Paper Misfeed: Finisher There is paper in the optional Finisher Paper Misfeed: Fusing Unit Paper is jammed in the fusing unit. Paper Misfeed: Input Tray feed unit. Printing… The machine is printing. RC Gate Connection Error The RC gate connection failed. Ready The printer is ready to use. Replace Develop. Unit (Black) It is time to replace the black development unit. Replace Develop. Unit (Color) It is time to replace the color development unit. Replace Feed Roller It is time to replace the feed roller. Replace Fuser Oil Unit It is time to replace the fuser oil unit. Replace Fusing Unit It is time to replace the fusing unit. Replace PCU (Black) It is time to replace the black PCU. Replace PCU (Color) It is time to replace the color PCU Replace Transfer Belt It is time to replace the transfer belt. Replace Transfer Cleaning Unit It is time to replaxe the transfer cleaning unit. SD Card Authentication failed SD card authentication failed. Supplies Order Call failed The supplies order call failed. Warming Up… The printer is warming up. Message DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 256 Printer configuration You can check the printer configuration using telnet. telnet Use the “info” command. Note ? “*” (asterisk) is displayed with the current setting. ? Regarding *1 - *5, see the following table. Item Description Input Tray No. Name PaperSize Status ID number of the paper tray Name of the paper tray *1 Paper size loaded in the paper tray *2 Current status of the paper tray *3 Output Tray No. Name Status ID number of the output tray Name of the output tray *4 Current status of the output tray *5 Printer Language No. Name Version ID number of the printer language used by the printer Name of the printer language used by the printer Version of the printer languageOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 257 *1 Input Tray: Name *2 Input Tray: PaperSize Name Description Tray X Name of installed paper tray (X is the number of tray.) Tray3 (LCT) Tray 3 (LCT) Bypass Tray Bypass Tray Paper size Description A3 (297 × 420 mm) A3 (297 × 420) L 12 × 18 A3 wide (12 × 18) L B4JIS (257 × 364 mm) B4 (257 × 364) L A4 (297 × 210 mm) A4 (297 × 210) K A4 (210 × 297 mm) A4 (210 × 297) L B5JIS (257 × 182 mm) B5 (257 × 182) K B5JIS (182 × 257 mm) B5 (182 × 257) L A5 (210 × 148 mm) A5 (210 × 148) K A5 (148 × 210 mm) A5 (148 × 210) L A6 (105 × 148 mm) A6 (105 × 148) L 11 × 17 DL (11 × 17) L 8 1/2 × 14 LG (8 1 /2 × 14) L 11 × 8 1/2 LT (11 × 8 1 /2) K 8 1/2 × 11 LT (8 1 /2 × 11) LOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 258 5 1/2 × 8 1/2 HL (5 1 /2 × 8 1 /2) L Custom (XXX × YYY mm) Custom Size 10 1/2 × 7 1/4 10 1 /2 × 7 1/4 K 7 1/4 × 10 1/2 7 1 /4 × 10 1 /2 L 8 1/4 × 13 8 1 /4 × 13 L 8 1/2 × 13 8 1 /2 × 13 L 4 1/8 × 9 1/2 4 1 /8 × 9 1 /2 L 3 7/8 × 7 1/2 3 7 /8 × 7 1 /2 L DL (220 × 110 mm) DL (220 × 110) K C5 Env (229 × 162 mm) C5 Env (229 × 162) K 8 × 13 8 × 13 L C6 Env (162 × 114 mm) C6 Env (162 × 114)K 8K (267 × 390 mm) 8K (267 × 390) L 16K (267 × 195 mm) 16K (267 × 195) K 16K (195 × 267 mm) 16K (195 × 267) L Unknown There is no tray. ** The paper size is not selected. Paper size DescriptionOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 259 *3 Input Tray: Status *4 Output Tray: Name *5 Output Tray: Status Status Description Normal ? NoInputTray There is no paper tray. PaperEnd There is no paper in the paper tray. Name Description Standard Tray Output Tray External Tray External Tray Finisher Tray 1 Finisher Tray 1 Finisher Tray 2 Finisher Tray 2 Finisher Shift Tray Finisher Shift Tray Finisher Booklet Tray Finisher Booklet Tray Status Description Normal ---- PaperExist There is paper in the output tray. OverFlow Output tray is full of paper. Error Other errorsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 260 Understanding the Displayed Information This section describes how to read the status information returned by the network interface board. Print Job Information Print job status can be viewed using the following commands: • telnet : Use the “status” command. See p.222 “Printer status”. Item name Meaning Rank Print job status • Active Printing or preparing to print • Waiting Waiting to be transferred to the printer Owner Print request user name Job Print request number Files The name of the document Total Size The size of the data (spooled) The default is “0 bytes”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 261 Print Log Information This is a record of the most recent 20 jobs that have been printed. This log can be displayed using the following commands: • telnet: Use the “prnlog” command. See p.222 “Printer status”. *1 Displays user ID and JobName information when entering the “info” command with the ID. Name Meaning ID Print request ID User Print request user name Page The number of pages printed Result The result of the print request Time The time when the print request was received User ID *1 User ID to be configured in the printer driver JobName *1 The name of the document for printingOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 262 Configuring the Network Interface Board The network interface board settings can be displayed by using the commands below. • telnet: Use the “show” command. See p.223 “Network interface board settings information”. Item name Meaning Common Mode Protocol Up/Down Up means active, Down means inactive. AppleTalk TCP/IP NetWare SMB IP over 1394 *1 *5 SCSI print *5 Ethernet interface Internal version number Syslog priority NVRAM version Internal version number Device name Printer name. Comment Comment. Location Location of the printer in the SNMP and Rendezvous information Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 263 Contact Person who maintains the printer and contact information in the SNMP information Soft switch AppleTalk Mode AppleTalk protocol in selection. Net Network number. Object Macintosh printer name. Type The type of printer. Zone Name of the zone that the printer belongs to. TCP/IP Mode Up means active, Down means inactive. ftp lpr rsh telnet diprint web http ftpc snmp ipp Item name MeaningOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 264 autonet rendezvous ssl EncapType Frame type. DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (on/off) Address IP address. Netmask Subnet mask. Broadcast Broadcast address. DNS Domain DNS domain type Gateway Default gateway address. Access Range[?] *2 Access Control Range. Time server NTP server address Time Zone NTP server time difference Time server polling time Synchronizes interval SYSLOG server Home page URL URL of homepage. Home page link name URL name of homepage. Help page URL URL of help page. SNMP protocol Protocol used with SNMP. Item name MeaningOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 265 NetWare EncapType Frame type. RPRINTER number Remote printer number. Print server name Print server name. File server name Name of the connect file server. Context name Context of print server. Switch Mode Active mode. NDS/Bindery (this value is fixed) Packet negotiation Login Mode Login mode. Print job timeout Time of the job timeout. Protocol Protocol used. SAP interval time NDS Tree Name NDS tree name. Item name MeaningOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 266 SMB Switch Mode (this value is fixed) Direct print (this value is fixed) Notification Notification of print job completion. Workgroup name Name of the workgroup. Computer name Name of the computer. Comment Comment. Share name[1] Share name (name of the printer type). Protocol IEEE 802.11b *3 Device Name Printer name. DHCP DHCP (on/off) Address IP address. Netmask Subnet mask. Broadcast Broadcast address. DNS Domain DNS domain type SSID SSID being used. Channel range Channels available for use. Channel Channel being used. Communication mode IEEE 802.11b interface transmitting mode. Item name MeaningOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 267 Authentification TX Rate IEEE 802.11b interface speed. WEP encryption Whether WEP is enabled or disabled. Encryption key WEP key. IP over 1394 *1 *5 Device name Printer name. DHCP DHCP (on/off) Address IP address. Netmask Subnet mask. Broadcast Broadcast address. DNS Domain DNS domain type SCSI print *5 Bidi. Bidirectional setting (on/off). Bluetooth *4 Bluetooth mode Bluetooth connection mode DNS Server[X *6 ]: IP address of the DNS server Selected DNS Server Selected DNS server Item name MeaningOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 268 Domain Name ether Domain name on an Ethernet connection ip1394 Domain name on an IP over 1394 connection wlan Domain name on a wireless LAN connection Rendezvous Computer Name Printer name. Rendezvous Name (ether) Printer name displayed with Rendezvous on an Ethernet connection Rendezvous Name (wlan) Printer name displayed with Rendezvous on a wireless LAN connection Location Location of the printer Priority (diprint) diprint priority number Priority (lpr) lpr priority number Priority (ipp) ipp priority number IP TTL IP TTL value DDNS ether Dynamic DNS function on an Ethernet connection (on/off) ip1394 Dynamic DNS function on an IP over 1394 connection (on/off) wlan Dynamic DNS function on a wireless LAN connection (on/off) Item name MeaningOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 269 *1 The optional IEEE 1394 interface board supports TCP/IP only. *2 ? represents a target number between 1 and 3. *3 You can display the item names when installing the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit. *4 You can display the item names when installing the optional Bluetooth interface unit. *5 You can display the item names when installing the optional IEEE 1394 interface board. *6 ? represents a target number between 1 and 3. WINS ether Primary WINS IP address of the primary WINS server on an Ethernet connection Secondary WINS IP address of the secondary WINS server on an Ethernet connection ip1394 Primary WINS IP address of the primary WINS server on an IP over 1394 connection Secondary WINS IP address of the secondary WINS server on an IP over 1394 connection Shell mode Mode of the remote maintenance tool. Item name MeaningOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 270 Message List This is a list of messages written in the printer's system log. The system log can be viewed using the “syslog” command. System Log Information You can use the following methods to view the system log: • telnet: Use the “syslog” command. See p.213 “Commands List”. Message Causes and solutions Access to NetWare server denied. Either there is no account for this print server on the NetWare server or the password was incorrect. (In print server mode) Cannot log on to the file server. Make sure the print server is registered on the file server. If a password is specified for the print server, delete it. add_sess: community already defined. The same community name already exists. Use another one. add_sess: sessionalready defined. The requested community name is not defined. add_sess: bad trap addr:, community: The IP address (0.0.0.0.) is unavailable if the community access type is TRAP. Specify the host IP address for the TRAP destination. add_sess_ipx: bad trap addr: , community: The IPX address (00:00:00:00:00:00) is unavailable if the community access type is TRAP. Specify the host IPX address for the TRAP destination. add_sess_ipx: community already defined. The same community name already exists. Use another one. add_sess_ipx: session_ipx not defined. The requested community name is not defined.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 271 anpd start. (AppleTalk) An anpd (AppleTalk Network Package Daemon) has started. Attach FileServer = Attached to the file server as a nearest server. Attach to print queue (In print server mode) Attached to the print queue name. Cannot create service connection (In remote printer mode) Cannot establish a connection with the file server. The number of file server users may exceed the maximum number the file server can handle. (in print server mode) The printer with the required does not appear in . Check the printer number of the printer registered in the print server. Cannot find rprinter (/) The printer with the number displayed on the print server does not exist. Make sure the number of the printer is registered in the print server. Change IP address from DHCP Server. The IP address changes when DHCP LEASE is renewed. To always assign the same IP address, set a static IP address to the DHCP server. child process exec error! (process name) Failed to start the network service. Turn the printer off and then on. If this does not work, contact your service or sales representatives. Connected DHCP Server(). The IP address was successfully received from the DHCP server. connection from Logged on from the host . Could not attach to FileServer (In remote printer mode) Cannot attach to the file server. For some reason, the file server is refusing the connection. Check the file server configuration. Message Causes and solutionsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 272 Could not attach to PServer (In remote printer mode) Cannot attach to the print server. For some reason, the print server is refusing the connection. Check the print server configuration. Current Interface Speed:xxxMbps The speed of the network (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps) Current IP address The IP address was received from the DHCP server. Current IPX address The current IPX address DHCP lease time expired. DHCP lease time has expired. The printer tries to locate the DHCP server again. The IP address used till now becomes invalid. DHCP server not found. The DHCP server cannot be found. Make sure the DHCP server is running on the network. dhcpcd start. A dhcpcd (DHCP client service) has started. Duplicate IP=(from ). The same IP address is in use. Every IP address must be unique. Check the address of the device indicated in . Established SPX Connection with PServer, (RPSocket=, connID= ) (In remote printer mode) A connection to the print server has been established. exiting lpd service has ended and the system is closing. Exit pserver (In print server mode) Exits the print server because the necessary print server settings have not been made. Frametype = The is configured to be used on NetWare. httpd start. An httpd has started. Message Causes and solutionsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 273 IEEE 802.11b Card Firmware REV.IEEE 802.11b Card Firmware REV. This is the wireless LAN card's firmware version. IEEE 802.11b current channel The current channel is displayed. In Ad hoc mode, the number selected by the user appears. In Infrastructure mode, the channel used in the access point appears. Example: IEEE 802.11b current channel 11 IEEE 802.11b MAC Address = The IEEE 802.11b interface MAC address appears. Example: IEEE 802.11b MAC Address = 00:00:74:XX:XX:XX IEEE 802.11b SSID (AP MAC Address < MAC Address>) The access point SSID used in Infrastructure mode and the MAC address of the access point appear. Example: IEEE 802.11b SSID test-ssid (AP MAC Address xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) IEEE 802.11b mode This is the IEEE 802.11b transmission mode. • IEEE 802.11b [Infrastructure] mode : in infrastructure mode • IEEE 802.11b [802.11 Ad hoc] mode : in 802.11 adhoc mode • IEEE 802.11b [Ad hoc] mode : in adhoc mode IEEE 802.11b Tx Rate The IEEE 802.11b transmitting speed (set speed) is displayed. Example: IEEE 802.11b Tx Rate 11Mbps Transmission speed varies according to signal quality. Actual transmission speed may differ from the displayed value. Message Causes and solutionsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 274 inetd start. An inetd has started. started with IP: has been set for and started. : Subnet overlap. Subnet from Netmask and the IP address you tried to set for overlap the subnet of another interface. Set Subnet so that it does not overlap with another interface. IPP cancel-job: permission denied. The printer could not authenticate the name of the user attempting to cancel a job. ipp disable. Printing with ipp is disabled. ipp enable. Printing with ipp is enabled. IPP job canceled. jobid=%d. The spooled job has been canceled due to an error or user request. job canceled. jobid=%d. The spooled job has been canceled due to an error or user request. LeaseTime=(sec), RenewTime=(sec). The resource lease time received from the DHCP server is in seconds. The renewal time is also in seconds. Login to fileserver (,) (In print server mode) Logged on to the file server with NDS or BINDERY mode. multid start. Data transmission service for multiprotocols has started. Name registration failed. name= The printer could not register the name of NetBIOS. Name registration success in Broadcast name= The NetBIOS name was successfully registered from a broadcast. Message Causes and solutionsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 275 Name registration success. WINS Server= NetBIOS Name= The NetBIOS name was successfully registered to the WINS server. nbstart start. (NetBEUI) The service for NetBEUI stack setting has started. NBT Registration Broadcast() Use a local broadcast to map with the IP address. nbtd start. An nbtd (NetBIOS over TCP/IP Daemon) has started. (Available only in DHCP mode) NetBEUI Computer Name = The NetBEUI Computer Name is defined as . nmsd start. (NetBEUI) An nmsd (Name Server Daemon) has started. npriter start. (NetWare) (In remote printer mode) NetWare service has started. nwstart start. (NetWare) The service for NetWare stack setting has started. Open log file (In print server mode) The specified log file has been opened. papd start. (AppleTalk) AppleTalk print service has started. permission denied. Job cancellation was determined to be unauthorized after checking the user name and host address (except for ROOT authorization). phy release file open failed. The network interface board needs replacing. Contact your sales or service representatives. Print queue cannot be serviced by printer 0, (In print server mode) The print queue name cannot be serviced. Make sure that print queue volume exists on the specified file server. Message Causes and solutionsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 276 Print server has no printer. (In print server mode) The printer object is not assigned to the print server . Using NWadmin, assign the printer object, and then restart the printer device. Print session full Cannot accept the print session. Printer has no queue (In print server mode) The print queue is not assigned to the printer. Using NWadmin, assign the print queue to the printer, and then restart it. pserver start. (NetWare) (In print server mode) NetWare service has started. Required computer name () is duplicated name The same computer name is detected on the network. The start job determines the computer name by adding the computer name to the suffix (0,1....). Configure a new computer name that is unique. Required file server () not found Cannot find the required file server. restarted. LPD has started. sap enable, saptype=, sapname= The SAP function has started. The SAP (SAP type and SAP name) packet is issued to advertise the service on the SAP table on the NetWare server. sessionsession not defined. The requested community name is not defined. session_ipxnot defined. The requested community name is not defined. Set context to A has been set. shutdown signal received. network service rebooting... Rebooting the network service. smbd start. (NetBEUI) An smbd (SMB (Server Message Block) service) has started. Message Causes and solutionsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 277 SMTPC:failed to get smtp server ip-address. Failed to get the SMTP server IP address. This could be because: • The DNS server could not be found. • There is no connection to the network. • The specified DNS server could not be connected to. • Incorrect DNS server is specified. • No specified SMTP server IP address in the DNS server. SMTPC:failed to connect smtp server.timeout. Failed to connect the SMTP server due to timeout. This could be because: • The SMTP server name is incorrect. • There is no connection to the network. • The network configuration is incorrect, so there is no response from the SMTP server. SMTPC:refused connect by smtp server. The connection to the SMTP server is denied. This could be because: • Another server other than the SMTP server has been specified. • The SMTP server port number is incorrect. SMTPC:no smtp server.connection close. No reponse from the SMTP protocol. Cannot connect to the SMTP server. This could be because: • Another server other than the SMTP server has been specified. • The SMTP server port number is incorrect. Message Causes and solutionsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 278 SMTPC:failed to connect smtp server Failed to connect the SMTP server. This could be because: • There is no connection to the network. • The network configuration is incorrect, so there is no response from the SMTP server. • The SMTP server name is incorrect. • The specified SMTP server is incorrect. • There is no specified SMTP server IP address in the DNS server. • Another server other than the SMTP server has been specified. • The SMTP server port number is incorrect. SMTPC:username or password wasn't correct. [response code] (information) Failed to connect the SMTP server. This could be beacuse: • The specified SMTP user name is incorrect. • The specified SMTP password is incorrect. Check the SMTP user name and password. Snmp over ip is ready. Communication over TCP/IP with SNMP is available. Snmp over IP over 1394 is ready. Communication over IP over 1394 with SNMP is available. Snmp over ipx is ready. Communication over IPX with SNMP is available. snmpd start. SNMP service has started. started. Direct print service has started. Started. Rendezvous has started. Terminated. Rendezvous has ended. Message Causes and solutionsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 279 Terminated.(PS not found) Rendezvous has been terminated because PS was not found. The print server received error during attempt to log in to the network. Access to the network was denied. Verify that the print server name and password are correct. Cannot log on to the file server. The print server is not registered or the password is specified. Register the print server without specifying a password. win2kspd protocol-DOWN (APPEXIT). The NVRAM setting ioctl (SPIO CAPPEXIT) of device SBP2TSP was set by protocol-DOWN. SCSI print is not receiving data. win2kspd protocol-UP (APPENTRY). The NVRAM setting ioctl (SPIO CAPPENTRY) of device SBP2TSP was set by protocol-UP. SCSI print is not receiving data. win2kspd started. SCSI print (SBP-2) service has started. WINS name refresh :Server No Response There was no response to the update request from the server. Confirm the WINS server address is correct and working properly. WINS name registration/refresh error code(errornumber) Set unique (not shared) NetBIOS names. Confirm the WINS server address is correct and working properly. WINS name registration:Server No Response to server(WINS server address) There was no response to the registration request from the server. Confirm the WINS server address is correct and working properly. WINS server address0.0.0.0 The WINS server address has not been specified. Specify the WINS server address to match the printer name with WINS. Message Causes and solutionsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 280 WINS Server= NetBIOS Name= The printer name has been successfully registered in . WINS wrong scopeID The scope ID is wrong. Specify the correct scope ID. write error occurred. (diskfull) The hard disk became full while the spool file was being written. Wait until enough HDD space becomes available as printing proceeds. write error occurred. (fatal) A fatal error occurred while the spool file was being written. Turn the printer off and then on. If this does not work, contact your service or sales representative. Message Causes and solutionsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 281 When Using Windows Terminal Service/MetaFrame Operating Environment The following combinations of operating system and MetaFrame are supported: Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server Edition • MetaFrame 1.8 SP3/FR1 SP3/SP4 • MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/SP2/FR1 Windows 2000 Server /Advanced Server • MetaFrame 1.8 SP3/FR1 SP3/SP4 • MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/SP2/SP3/FR1/FR2/FR3 Note ? The PCL5c printer driver does not support MetaFrame 1.8 SP3 under Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 282 Supported Printer Drivers When Windows Terminal Service is operating • PCL5c • PostScript 3 Note ? The RPCS printer driver is not supported. ? Some RPCS printer driver functions do not work if Windows Terminal Service is installed, even if it is not operating. Limitation The following restrictions apply in the Windows Terminal Service environment. These restrictions are due to the way Windows Terminal Service or MetaFrame works. When printing (Windows Terminal Service) When printing a file containing a large number of bitmap images or fonts, some images or font settings may be lost. We strongly recommend testing this function under your network environment before applying it to actual jobs. When using [Auto-creating client printers] (MetaFrame) [Auto-creating client printers] can select a logical printer created by copying the client's local printer data to the MetaFrame server. We strongly recommend testing this function under your network environment before applying it to actual jobs. • The settings for optional equipment, such as the finisher or Large Capacity Tray, will not be stored in the server after the equipment is disconnected. The settings for optional items will return to default values each time the client computer logs on to the server. Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 283 • When printing a large number of bitmap images or using the server in a WAN environment over dial-up lines such as ISDN, depending on the data rate, printing may be disabled or errors may occur. • When using MetaFrame XP 1.0 or later versions, we recommend configuring [Client Printer bandwidth] available from [Citrix Management Console], according to the environment. • If a printing error occurs on the server and the print job or [Auto-creating client printers] cannot be deleted, we recommend doing the following: • MetaFrame 1.8 SP3, MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/FR1 Configure the [Delete unfinished print jobs] settings in the registry. For more information, see the Readme file provided with MetaFrame. • MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR2 Configure the [Delete pending print jobs at logout] settings in [Printer Properties Management] of the Citrix Management Console. When using [Printer driver replication] (MetaFrame) [Printer driver replication] is designed to distribute printer drivers across all servers in a server farm. We strongly recommend testing this function under your network environment before applying it to actual jobs. • If the printer drivers are not properly copied, we recommend installing them directly on each server.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 284 Cautions When Using the Bluetooth Interface Unit This machine's optional Bluetooth interface unit operation mode is set to [Public] as default. If the setting is changed to [Private], only registered computers can use this machine via the Bluetooth interface unit. Confirm operation mode settings using Web Image Monitor or telnet. Reference For details about Web Image Monitor, see p.108 “Using a Web Image Monitor”. For details about making operation mode settings using telnet, see p.250 “Bluetooth”.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 285 Precautions Please pay attention to the following when using the network interface board. When configuration is necessary, follow the appropriate procedures below. Connecting a Dial Up Router to a Network When the NetWare file server and printer are on opposite sides of a router, packets are continuously sent back and forth, possibly causing communication charges to increase. Because the packet transmission is a specification of NetWare, you need to change the router's configuration. If the network you are using does not allow you to configure the router, configure the printer. Configuring the router Filter packets so they do not pass over the dial-up router. Note ? The MAC address of the printer doing the filtering is printed on the printer configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page, see Setup Guide. ? For more information about configuring the printer if the router cannot be configured, see the instructions below. Configuring the printer with NetWare Follow the setup method in this manual, configure the file server. Set the frame type for a NetWare environment.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 286 Reference For more information about selecting a frame type, see p.73 “Configuring NetWare Using the Control Panel”. Configuring the printer without NetWare While not printing, the network interface board sends packets on the network. Set the NetWare to inactive. Reference For more information about selecting a protocol, see p.73 “Configuring NetWare Using the Control Panel”. Configuring SSL Encryption This section describes how to configure SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption. Setting Procedure • Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then create the machine's IPP port. • Log on to Web Image Monitor in the Administrator mode, and then configure the server certificate. • Log on to Web Image Monitor in the Administrator mode, and then enable the [SSL/TLS] setting. Note ? If you have configured SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption and have issued the server certificate, enter “https:///printer” to access the machine with Web Image Monitor. Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or Netscape 7.0 or later must be installed on the computer.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 287 Reference For details about the setting, see Web Image Monitor Help. See p.114 “Using Help on Web Image Monitor”. PostScript Printing from Windows When printing PostScript from Windows, see PostScript 3 Supplement. NetWare Printing Form Feed You should not configure form feed on NetWare. Form feed is controlled by the printer driver on Windows. If NetWare form feed is configured, the printer might not print properly. If you want to change the form feed setting, always configure it on Windows. • Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [Printer Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box. • Under Windows 2000, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box. • Under Windows NT 4.0, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 288 Banner Page You should not configure a banner page on NetWare. If you want to change the banner page setting, always configure it on Windows. • Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [Printer Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box. • Under Windows 2000, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box. • Under Windows NT 4.0, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box. Printing after resetting the printer After resetting the remote printer, it will be cut off from the print server for about 30-40 seconds before reconnecting. Due to the NetWare specification, print jobs may be accepted, but not printed during this interval. When using the printer as a remote printer, wait about two minutes after resetting the printer before attempting to print. Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 289 Using DHCP This machine can be used in DHCP environment. In a WINS server environment, the printer name can simultaneously be registered with a WINS server. When static IP addresses are set for each interface • IP address: When set at the same value, the Ethernet interface is used. • Subnet mask: When a value overlaps, the Ethernet interface is used. • Gateway address: The value set is used. For the gateway address, set the gateway address located in the subnetwork set by the interface. Is a value is outside the subnet range set by the interface, it operates as “0.0.0.0”. When each setting is acquired from the DHCP server • IP address, subnet mask: set for each value leased by the DHCP server operating on a connected interface. When overlapping IP addresses or identical IP addresses in the subnetwork are set at this time, only the highest priority active value is set for the interface. Note ? The default priority interface is Ethernet. • AutoNet: An automatic private address (169.254. xxx.xxx) is set for high priority interfaces. • Gateway address, DNS server address, domain name: Settings are made for the DHCP-acquired values that have the highest interface priority. If the gateway address is outside the subnetwork range set by the interface, it operates as “0.0.0.0”. Note ? The default priority interface is Ethernet.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 290 When the settings of the static IP addresses and the DHCP acquired value overlap • IP address, subnet mask: When the static IP address and DHCP-acquired value (IP address) are the same, or the static subnet mask value and DHCP-acquired subnet mask value overlap, the interface setting the static IP use the value set. The interface set by DHCP is reset to the default. • Gateway address: Uses the manually set value. • When a gateway address is set outside the interface subnetwork range, it operates as “0.0.0.0”. Note ? When the static IP address is not set, or is set as “ 0.0.0.0”, the interface setting the DHCP acquisition value is activated. Note ? Supported DHCP server operating systems are: Windows 2000 Server, Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or later, NetWare, and UNIX standard. ? The IP address acquired from DHCP can be checked on the configuration page. See p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page” printing the configuration page. ? When using WINS server, set the WINS server as shown on p.291 “Configuring a WINS Server”. ? Under WINS server, host names can be used for remote network printer ports. ? If you do not use the WINS server, reserve the printer's IP address in the DHCP server so the same IP address is assigned every time. ? When there are multiple DHCP servers, make the same reservation for all. This machine operates on the information from the DHCP server that answered first. ? DHCP relay-agent is not supported. If you use DHCP relay-agent on an ISDN line network, it will incur expensive line charges. This is because your computer connects to the ISDN line whenever a packet is transferred from the printer.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 291 Using AutoNet If the printer IP address is not assigned by a DHCP server automatically, a temporary IP address starting with 169.254 that is not used on the network can be automatically selected by the printer. Limitation ? You must change the setting to “on” to use AutoNet. See p.239 “AutoNet”. Note ? The IP address assigned by the DHCP server is given priority over that selected by AutoNet. ? You can confirm the current IP address on the configuration page. For more information about the configuration page, see p.138 “Printing a Configuration Page”. ? When AutoNet is running, the NetBIOS name is not registered on the WINS server. Configuring a WINS Server The printer can be configured to register its NetBIOS name with a WINS server when its power is turned on. This enables the NetBIOS name of the printer to be specified from SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin even under a DHCP environment. This section describes how to configure the WINS server. Note ? The WINS Server is supported with Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or later, and Windows 2000 Servers WINS Manager. ? For more information about the WINS Server settings, see Windows Help. ? If there is no reply from the WINS Server, the NetBIOS name will be registered by broadcast. ? The NetBIOS name consists of up to 13 alphanumeric characters.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 292 Using a Web Image Monitor Start Web Image Monitor. Point your browser at the printer's URL or IP address (e.g. http://XXX.XXX.XXX substituting the Xs with the IP address). The status of the chosen printer appears on Web Image Monitor. Click [Administrator Mode]. The dialog box for entering the password and user name appears. Enter your user name and password, and then click [OK]. To use the factory default account, enter no user name and enter “password” as the password. In the left area, click [Configuration], and then click [Network]. Click TCP/IP. Set WINS to “active” and enter the IP address of the WINS server in [Primary WINS Server] and [Secondary WINS Server]. Click [Apply]. Exit Web Image Monitor.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 293 Using telnet Connect to the remote printer using telnet. Use the “set” command to make WINS active. msh> set wins on Specify the IP addresses (primary and secondary) using the following commands: msh> wins primary Ipaddress msh> wins secondary Ipaddress Note ? To confirm the current configuration, use the “show” command. Log out from telnet.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 294 Memory Capacity and Paper Size Print Quality Paper Size Non-Duplex Printing Duplex Printing Can print Guaranteed Can print Guaranteed 600 × 600 dpi *1 A3/DLT 128 MB (Standard) 128 MB (Standard) 128 MB (Standard) 192 MB (Standard+64 MB) B4 LG A4/LT B5 A5 1200 × 600 dpi *2 A3/DLT 128 MB (Standard) 192 MB (Standard+64 MB) 128 MB (Standard) 256 MB (Standard+128 MB) B4 LG A4/LT 128 MB (Standard) 192 MB (Standard+64 MB) B5 A5Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 295 *1 Resolution settings from each printer driver are as follows: • RPCS: [600 x 600 dpi] on [Resolution] • PCL 5c: [600 dpi] on [Resolution] • PostScript 3: [600 dpi] on [Resolution] and [Fast] on [Gradation] Reference For more information about how to set the printer driver, see the printer driver Help. *2 Resolution settings from each printer driver are as follows: • RPCS: [1200 x 600 dpi] on [Resolution] • PostScript 3: [600 dpi] on [Resolution] and [Standard] on [Gradation] 1200 × 1200 dpi *3 A3/DLT 128 MB (Standard) 256 MB (Standard+128 MB) 192 MB (Standard+64 MB) 384 MB (Standard+256 MB) B4 384 MB (Standard+256 MB) LG A4/LT 192 MB (Standard+64 MB) 128 MB (Standard) 256 MB (Standard+128 MB) B5 A5 600 × 600 dpi (2bit) *4 A3/DLT 192 MB (Standard+64 MB) 192 MB (Standard+64 MB) 192 MB (Standard+64 MB) 256 MB (Standard+128 MB) B4 LG A4/LT B5 A5 Print Quality Paper Size Non-Duplex Printing Duplex Printing Can print Guaranteed Can print GuaranteedOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 296 Reference For more information about how to set the printer driver, see the printer driver Help. *3 Resolution settings from each printer driver are as follows: • RPCS: [1200 x 1200 dpi] on [Resolution] • PostScript 3: [1200 dpi] on [Resolution] and [Fast] on [Gradation] Reference For more information about how to set the printer driver, see the printer driver Help. *4 Resolution settings from each printer driver are as follows: • PCL 5c: [600 x 600 dpi] on [Resolution]Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 297 Specifications Main Unit Configuration: Desktop Print Process: Laser beam scanning & Electrophotographic printing Dual component toner development Printing Speed: Monochrome: Maximum 35 pages per minute (A4K), (11 × 8 1 /2K) Color: Maximum 35 pages per minute (A4K), (11 × 8 1 /2K) Interface: • USB (USB1.1, USB2.0) • Ethernet (10/100Base-TX) Optional: • IEEE 1394 (SCSI print, IP over 1394) • IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) • Parallel (Bidirectional IEEE1284) • BluetoothOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 298 Resolution: 1200 × 1200 dpi (RPCS, PostScript 3) 1200 × 600 dpi (RPCS, PostScript 3) 600 × 600 dpi (PCL 5c, RPCS, PostScript 3) 600 × 600 dpi 2bit (PCL 5c) 300 × 300 dpi (PCL 5c *1 ) *1 monochrome only Printer Language: PCL 5c, RPCS, Adobe PostScript Level 3 Fonts: PCL 5c Agfa Font 35 Manager Intellifonts, 10 TrueType fonts, and 1 Bitmap font Agfa Font Manager available, 31 fonts PostScript 3 136 fonts Paper Size: See “Paper and Other Media”, Maintenance Guide. Paper Weight: See “Paper and Other Media”, Maintenance Guide. Media Type: See “Paper and Other Media”, Maintenance Guide. Power Source: 120V, 60HzOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 299 Power Consumption: Noise Emission *1 : Sound Power Level Sound Pressure Level *2 *1 The preceding measurement, made in accordance with ISO7779, are actual values. *2 Measured at the position of a bystander. Dimensions: Printing 1,680 W or less Energy Saver 15 W or less Main unit only During Printing 68 dB (A) Standby 42 dB (A) Energy Saver 40 db (A) Main unit only Standby 24 dB (A) During Printing 55 dB (A) Width Depth Height Printer only (tray not extended) 575 mm (22.7 inches) 678 mm (26.7 inches) 745 mm (29.3 inches) With Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500×2) or Paper Bank Type 7100, and SR770 1,450 mm (57.2 inches) 678 mm (26.7 inches) 1060 mm (41.7 inches)Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 300 Weight: Approximately 85 kg (187 lb) (toner cartridge and power cord included) Warm-up Time: Less than 99 seconds (23°C, 73F) *1 *1 When no error. Paper Input Capacity: *1 Paper weight: 80 g/m2 (20 lb) *2 You can load up to 10 envelopes at the same time. Paper Output Capacity: Face down: 500 sheets (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Face up: 100 sheets (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Standard Paper Tray 500 sheets × 2 *1 Bypass Tray 100 sheets *1 Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 500 sheets × 1, 500 sheets × 2 *1 Paper Bank Type 7100 2,000 sheets *1 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 301 Paper weight and number of sheets to be set: Memory: Standard 128 MB, up to 384 MB (with the optional Memory Unit Type C) Network: Protocol: TCP/IP, NetBEUI*1, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk *1 To use NetBEUI, use the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port. Supported paper weight Maximum number of sheets (plain paper) Tray 1 60-105 g/m2 (16-28 lb) 500 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Tray 2 60-105 g/ m2 (16-28 lb) 500 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Bypass Tray 60-163 g/m2 (16-42 lb) 100 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 × 1) 60-105 g/ m2 (16-28 lb) 500 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 × 2) 60-105 g/ m2 (16-28 lb) 500 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Paper Bank Type 7100 60-105 g/ m2 (16-28 lb) 2000 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb)Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 302 Options Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 1) Dimensions (W D H): 540 × 600 × 172 mm (21.3 × 23.7 × 6.8 in) Paper Weight: 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb) Paper Size: A5 (Long edge feed) - A3, 8 1 /2 × 11 - 11 × 17 (Short edge feed) Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 2) Dimensions (W D H): 540 × 600 × 270 mm (21.3 × 23.7 × 10.7 in) Paper Weight: 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb) Paper Size: A5 (Long edge feed) - A3, 8 1 /2 × 11 - 11 × 17 (Short edge feed)Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 303 Paper Bank Type 7100 (Large Capacity Tray) Dimensions (W D H): 540 × 600 × 270 mm (21.3 × 23.7 × 10.7 in) Paper Weight: 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb) Paper Size: A4 (Long edge feed) or 8 1 /2 × 11 (Short edge feed) SR770 (2 Tray Finisher) Dimensions (W D H): 680 × 620 × 1,030 mm (26.8 × 24.4 × 40.6 in) Paper Size: A5 (Long edge feed) - A3, 8 1 /2 × 11 - 11 × 17 (Short edge feed) Paper Weight: 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb) Stack Capacity: • Upper Tray: 500 sheets (A4/11 × 8 1 /2/B5/A5 (Long edge feed) - 80 g/m2 , 20 lbs.) • Lower Tray 2,000 sheets (A4/11 × 8 1 /2 (Long edge feed) - 80 g/m2 , 20 lbs.) 750 sheets (A3, B4, A4 (Short edge feed), B5, 8 1 /2 × 14, 11 × 17, 8 1 /2 × 11 (Short edge feed)) 500 sheets (A5 (Long edge feed))Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 304 Weight: 53 kg (116.9 lb) SR910 (Booklet Finisher) Dimensions (W D H): 695×603×932 mm (27.3×23.7×36.7 in) Paper Size: A5 (Long edge feed) - A3, 8 1 /2×14 - 11×17, B5 (Short edge feed) Paper Weight: 64 - 128 g/m2 (17 - 34.1 lb) Stack Capacity: • No Staple: • 1000 sheets (A4, A5, Letter) • 500 sheets (A3, B4, 11 × 17, Legal) • Staple: • 1000 sheets (A4, A5, Letter) • 500 sheets (A3, B4, 11 × 17, Legal) Or 30 sets (A3, B4, A4, A5, 11 × 17, Legal, Letter) Staple capacity: • 50 sheets (A4, A5, Letter) • 25 sheets (A3, B4, 11 × 17, Legal)Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 305 Staple paper size: • A3/A4/B4/B5/11 × 17/Legal/Letter (Short edge feed) • A4/B5/Letter (Long edge feed) Staple position: • 1 staple/2 positions • 2 staples/2 positions Power consumption: 60W Duplex Unit Type 7100 Dimensions (W D H): 90×524×430 mm (3.6×20.7×17.0 in) (Including the duplex reversal unit and duplex reversal unit stand) Paper Size: A5 (Long edge feed) - A3, 17×11 - 12×18 (Long edge feed) Weight: 8 kg (3.6 lb)Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 306 Printer Hard Disk Type 7100 Storage Capacity (Formatted): 40 GB • Spool print data to collate • Spool Sample/Locked Print data • Store PostScript fonts • Store log data Note ? You can install PostScript fonts using the optional hard disk drive. With Macintosh, supported fonts are PostScript Type 1 and PostScript Type 2. To download them, use Printer Utility for Mac. Memory Unit Type C 64/128/256MB Module Type: SO-DIMM (Small Outline Dual-in-line Memory Module) Memory Type: SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM) Number of Pins: 144 pinsOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 307 User Account Enhance Unit Type D Capacity: 128 KB • Store User Code (Up to 400 users) IEEE 1394 Interface Board Type B Interface: IEEE Std. 1394-1955 compliant, 1394a-2000 compliant. Interface Connector: IEEE 1394 (6 × 2 pins) Required cable: IEEE 1394 interface cable (6 × 4 pins, 6 × 6 pins) Important ? You cannot plug devices together to create loops. ? Do not use a cable that is more than 4.5 meters long. Connectable number of devices in a bus: Maximum 63 Allowed cable hops in a bus: Maximum 16 Data Transmission: 400 Mbps (Maximum)Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 308 Power supply: No separate power supply Cable Power repeated (IEEE 1394a-2000 compliant) IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A Transmission Spec.: IEEE 1284 Required cable Standard IEEE 1284 compliant Micro Centronics 36 pin cable IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type C Transmission Spec.: Based on IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) Protocol: TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk Note ? SmartDeviceMonitor and Web Image Monitor are supported. Data Transfer Speed: 1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 11 Mbps (auto selected)Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 309 Frequency Range: • Inch version: 2412-2462 Mhz (1-11 channels) • Metric version: 2412-2472 Mhz (1-13 channels) Transmittable Distance: 1 Mbps 400 m *1 2 Mbps 270 m *1 5.5 Mbps 200 m *1 11 Mbps 140 m *1 *1 These figures are a guideline for outdoor use. In general, the transmittable distance indoors is 10-100 m, depending on the environment. Transmission Mode: ad hoc and infrastructure modeOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 310 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 2238 Supported Profiles: • SPP (Serial Port Profile) • HCRP (Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile) • BIP (Basic Imaging Profile) Frequency Range: 2 GHz ISM band Data Transmission Speed: 732 kbps Note ? The transmission speed is adjusted according to factors such as the distance and obstacles between the devices, radio signal condition and Bluetooth adaptor. Maximum Range: 10 mOperating Instructions Administrator Reference 311 Information about Installed Software expat Use of the software installed on this product, including the controller (hereinafter “software”) and the expat Version 1.95.2 application software (hereinafter “expat 1.95.2”), is subject to the following conditions: The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the software of the product including expat 1.95.2 and the product manufacturer allows the initial developer of expat 1.95.2 to be free from these obligations. Copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 312 Note ? Information on expat 1.95.2 is available at: http://expat.sourceforge.net/ JPEG LIBRARY • The software installed on this product is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. NetBSD Copyright Notice of NetBSD For all users to use this product: This product contains NetBSD operating system: For the most part, the software constituting the NetBSD operating system is not in the public domain; its authors retain their copyright. The following text shows the copyright notice used for many of the NetBSD source code. For exact copyright notice applicable for each of the files/binaries, the source code tree must be consulted. A full source code can be found at http://www.netbsd.org/. Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 313 C All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors. D Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Authors Name List All product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners. The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software that we have mentioned in this document: • This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. • This product includes software developed by Jonathan R. Stone for the NetBSD Project. • This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors. • This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer. • This product includes software developed by Charles Hannum.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 314 • This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum. • This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou. • This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH. • This product includes software developed by Terrence R. Lambert. • This product includes software developed by Adam Glass and Charles Hannum. • This product includes software developed by Theo de Raadt. • This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone and Jason R. Thorpe for the NetBSD Project. • This product includes software developed by the University of California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors. • This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas. • This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou for the NetBSD Project. • This product includes software developed by Paul Kranenburg. • This product includes software developed by Adam Glass. • This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone. • This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone for the NetBSD Project. • This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc. • This product includes software developed by Frank van der Linden for the NetBSD Project. • This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank van der Linden • This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jason R. Thorpe. • The software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley. • This product includes software developed by Chris Provenzano, the University of California, Berkeley, and contributors.Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 315 RSA® BSAFE™ • This product includes RSA® BSAFE™ cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security Inc. • RSA is a registered trademark and BSAFE is a registered trademark of RSA Security Inc.in the United States and/or other countries. • RSA Security Inc. All rights reserved.316 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference INDEX 4C.Graphic Mode, 144 A Access Control, 216 Access in Administrator Mode Web Image Monitor, 112 Append CR to LF, 180 Auto Continue, 154 Autonet, 291 telnet, 239 B Bidirectional transmission, 32, 50, 70 Bluetooth, 167 telnet, 250 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 2238, 310 B&W Page Detect, 154 Bypass Size, 129 C cable, 307 Cautions when using Bluetooth Interface Unit, 284 Changing Names and Comments, 99, 116 Color Demo Page, 136 Color Profile, 193 Color Regist., 144 Color Setting, 193 community name, 225 Config. Page, 136, 138 Configuration NetWare, 73 NetWare 3.x, 78 NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6, 85 Windows 2000, 15 Windows NT 4.0, 53 Windows Server 2003, 35 Windows XP, 35 Configuring NetBEUI for Printing Windows 2000, 18 Windows NT 4.0, 56 Configuring Protocols Windows 2000, 16 Windows NT 4.0, 54 Windows Server 2003, 36 Windows XP, 36 Configuring SSL Encryption, 286 Copies, 154 Courier Font, 180 D Def.Print Lang, 154 DHCP, 217, 289 dial up router, 285 Displaying Printer Status, 102, 118 DNS, 243 Domain name, 246 Duplex, 154 Duplex Unit Type 7100, 305Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 317 E Email Date, 154 Energy Saver 1, 154 Energy Saver 2, 154 Escape key, 127 Ext. A4 Width, 180 F Font Number, 180 Font Pitch, 180 fonts, 298 Font Source, 180 Form Lines, 180 G Getting Printer Information over the Network, 251 H HD Format, 144 Hex Dump, 136 Host Interface, 126, 167 Host Name, 237 I IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A, 308 IEEE 1394 Interface Board Type B, 307 IEEE 1394 Setup, 167 IEEE 802.11b, 167, 232 IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit Type C, 308 Image Density, 144 information Network Interface Board configuration, 262 Network interface board configuration, 223 print job, 260 print log, 261 system log, 223, 270 Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 96 SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, 19, 38, 58 Installing Software Windows 2000, 19 Windows NT 4.0, 58 Windows Server 2003, 38 Windows XP, 38 I/O Buffer, 167 I/O Timeout, 167 IP address, 214 IPP, 227 IPP for Printing Windows 2000, 16 Windows NT 4.0, 54 Windows Server 2003, 36 Windows XP, 36Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 318 J Job Separation, 154 Job Spool, 235 K Key Repeat, 144 L LAN adapter number (Lana Number), 56 Language, 126, 198 Letterhead Mode, 154 List/Test Print, 126, 136 List/Test Print Parameters, 137 Locked Print, 126 M Machine Status Notification by E-mail Notify by e-mail function, 119 Maintenance, 126, 144 Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel, 121 memory, 301 Memory Capacity and Paper Size, 294 Memory Overflow, 154 Memory Unit Type C, 306 menu, accessing, 126 menu, changing, 198 Menu Chart, 121 Menu List, 136 Menu Protect, 144 message, 270 MIB, 208 N NetWare, 73 NetWare 3.x, 78 NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6, 85 NetWare Printing, 287 Network Interface Board, 301 Network Setup, 167 NIB, 301 Notify by Email, 154 Notify by e-mail function, 119 O On Line key, 128 Operations Test, 136 options, 302 Orientation, 180 Output Tray, 154 P Page Size, 154 Paper Bank Type 7100 (Large Capacity Tray), 303 Paper Feed Unit Type 7100, 302 Paper Input, 126, 129 Paper Type, 129 Password, 242 PCL, 180Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 319 PCL Config.Page, 136 PCL Menu, 126 PDF Change PW, 193 PDF Group PW, 193 PDF Menu, 193 Point Size, 180 PostScript Printing from Windows, 287 precautions, 285 Printer Hard Disk Type 7100, 306 Printer Lang., 154 printer status, 222 Printing Files Directly from Windows, 201 Printing Method Printing Files Directly from Windows, 204 Prt. Err Report, 154 PS Config. Page, 136 PS Menu, 126 Pure IP, 88 R RAM Disk, 154 Registration, 144 remote printer, setup NetWare 4.x, 5, 90 Rendezvous, 248 Resolution, 180, 193 S Sample Print, 126 SDRAM, 301, 306 Setting Up as a Print Server NetWare3.x, 79 NetWare4.x/NetWare5.1, 86 Setting Up as a Remote Printer NetWare3.x, 81 NetWare4.x/NetWare5.1, 90 Setting Up Options Windows 2000, 31 Windows NT 4.0, 69 Windows Server 2003, 49 Windows XP, 49 Setup Printing Files Directly from Windows, 201 Share Setting Windows 2000, 34 Windows NT 4.0, 72 Windows Server 2003, 52 Windows XP, 52 SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Installing, 96 SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Installing, 19, 38, 58 SMB, 229 SNMP, 208, 224 sntp, 241 specifications, 297Operating Instructions Administrator Reference 320 Spool Printing, 154 SR770 (2 Tray Finisher), 303 SR910 (Booklet Finisher), 304 subnet mask, 216 Sub Paper Size, 154 Symbol Set, 180 System, 126, 154 T TCP/IP for Printing Windows 2000, 16 Windows NT 4.0, 54 Windows Server 2003, 36 Windows XP, 36 telnet, 212 Autonet, 239 WINS, 238 Tray Locking, 129 Tray Paper Size, 129 Tray Priority, 129 U Unit of Measure, 154 USB Setting, 167 User Account Enhance Unit Type D, 307 Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address Printing Files Directly from Windows, 202 Using Help on Web Image Monitor, 114 Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, 94 W Web Image Monitor, 108 Windows 2000, 15 Share Setting, 34 Windows NT 4.0, 53 Share Setting, 72 Windows Server 2003, 35 Share Setting, 52 Windows XP, 35 Share Setting, 52 WINS, 291 telnet, 238 WL.LAN Defaults, 144 WL.LAN Signal, 144321 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference Copyright © 2004322 Operating Instructions Administrator Reference EN USA G106-7520PostScript 3 Supplement 1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................................3 How to Read This Manual...................................................................................................................5 1. Using PostScript 3 Setting up Options ................................................................................................................................7 Job Type............................................................................................................................................................. 8 Collate.............................................................................................................................................................. 16 Duplex Printing................................................................................................................................................ 17 Color Mode...................................................................................................................................................... 19 Staple ............................................................................................................................................................... 20 Punch ............................................................................................................................................................... 21 Paper Selection ................................................................................................................................................ 22 Paper Size ........................................................................................................................................................ 22 Fit to Paper....................................................................................................................................................... 23 Media Type...................................................................................................................................................... 24 Paper Source .................................................................................................................................................... 25 Destination Tray .............................................................................................................................................. 25 Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................ 26 Gradation ......................................................................................................................................................... 27 Color Profile .................................................................................................................................................... 28 Color Setting.................................................................................................................................................... 30 CMYK Simulation Profile............................................................................................................................... 32 Dithering .......................................................................................................................................................... 33 Gray Reproduction........................................................................................................................................... 34 Black Over Print .............................................................................................................................................. 35 Toner Saving.................................................................................................................................................... 36 Color Control................................................................................................................................................... 36 User Code ........................................................................................................................................................ 37 Options............................................................................................................................................................. 382 2. Printer Utility for Mac Installing Printer Utility for Mac......................................................................................................40 Starting Printer Utility for Mac ........................................................................................................42 Mac OS ............................................................................................................................................................ 42 Mac OS X ........................................................................................................................................................ 43 Printer Utility for Mac Functions .....................................................................................................44 Downloading PS Fonts .................................................................................................................................... 45 Displaying the Printer's Fonts .......................................................................................................................... 46 Deleting Fonts.................................................................................................................................................. 47 Initializing the Printer Disk ............................................................................................................................. 48 Page Setup ....................................................................................................................................................... 49 Printing Font Catalog....................................................................................................................................... 49 Printing Font Sample ....................................................................................................................................... 49 Renaming the Printer ....................................................................................................................................... 50 Restarting the Printer ....................................................................................................................................... 51 Downloading PostScript Files ......................................................................................................................... 52 Selecting the Zone ........................................................................................................................................... 52 Displaying Printer Status ................................................................................................................................. 53 Launching the Dialogue Console..................................................................................................................... 54 INDEX ...................................................................................................................................553 Introduction This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine. To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Please read the Safety Information before using this printer. It contains important information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS. Important Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine. Trademarks Microsoft® , Windows® and Windows NT® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe® and PostScript® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Appletalk, Apple, Macintosh, Mac OS, Mac OS X are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Incorporated. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks. The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows: • The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows 95. • The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows 98. • The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me). • The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional4 • The product names of Windows® XP are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition • The product names of Windows Server TM 2003 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Web Edition • The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0 • Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0 Note: Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.How to Read This Manual 5 Symbols The following set of symbols is used in this manual. R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section. R CAUTION: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in minor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section. * The statements above are notes for your safety. Important If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicates information or preparations required prior to operating. Note This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after abnormal operation. Limitation This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together, or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.6 Reference This symbol indicates a reference. [ ] Keys that appear on the machine's display panel. [ ] Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display. { } Keys built into the machine's control panel. { } Keys on the computer's keyboard.1. Using PostScript 3 7 Setting up Options This section describes specific printer functions and menus added by installing the PPD file. For more information about Windows 95/98/Me PostScript 3 printer driver functions and menus, see the printer driver Help. Preparation For Macintosh, Mac OS 8.6 or a later version, or Mac OS X 10.1 or a later version is required. Mac OS X classic is also supported. Limitation ? If you use Mac OS X, the following functions cannot be used: • Sample Print • Locked Print • User Code Note ? “Mac OS X” in the tables below refers to Mac OS X 10.2.3. Depending on the version, [Features x] is displayed as [Set x] (x is a number). Make adjustments according to the version you use.8 Job Type Use this function to select print job type. The following table shows where you can select this function. You can select the following items: Normal Select this function for normal printing. The print job starts immediately after the print command is sent. Note ? Under Windows 95/98/Me, if you want to use a user ID, click [Details...]. Windows 95/98/Me [Job Type:] on the [Setup] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Job Type:] on the [Job Log] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Job Type:] on the [Job Log] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Job Type:] on [Job Log] in the print dialog box Mac OS X This function is not available.9 Sample Print Use this function to print only one set from a multiple-set print job. The other sets are saved in the printer. The saved job can be printed from the printer's control panel. You can also delete the saved job. Limitation ? To use this function, the optional hard disk drive must be installed on the printer. Note ? The user ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. ? Entering the user ID helps you distinguish the print job from others. Reference For more information about how to use Sample Print, see p.10 “How to Use Sample Print”. Locked Print Use this function to save documents in memory using a password, and then edit and print them as required. Limitation ? To use this function, the optional hard disk drive must be installed on the printer. Note ? The user ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. The password must be four digits. Reference For more information about how to use Locked Print, see p.13 “How to Use Locked Print”.10 How to Use Sample Print This describes how to print a document using the Sample Print function. Note ? If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before sending a print job. By default, sample print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed. Windows 95/98/Me In an application, select the menu command to print. The print dialog box appears. Open the printer properties dialog box to set Sample Print. Click the [Setup] tab. In [Job Type:], click [Sample Print]. Click [Details...] button. In [User ID:], enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Note ? Set this to identify the user associated with the job. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box. Start printing from the application's print dialog box. The Sample Print job is sent to the printer and one set is printed.11 Check the sample print to confirm that the settings are correct. If the settings are correct, see “Printing the Remaining Sets”, Printer Client Reference. If not, you can delete the saved job. See “Deleting a Sample Print File”, Printer Client Reference. Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0 In an application, select the menu command to print. The print dialog box appears. Open the printer properties dialog box to set Sample Print. Click the [Job Log] tab. In [Job Type:], click [Sample Print]. In [User ID:], enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Note ? Set this to identify the user associated with the job. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box. Start printing from the application's print dialog box. The Sample Print job is sent to the printer and one set is printed. Check the sample print to confirm that the settings are correct. If the settings are correct, see “Printing the Remaining Sets”, Printer Client Reference. If not, you can delete the saved job. See “Deleting a Sample Print File”, Printer Client Reference.12 Mac OS In an application, select the menu command to print. The print dialog box appears. On the pop-up menu, click [Job Log]. In [Job Type:], click [Sample Print], and then select the appropriate setting. In [User ID:], enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. Note ? Set this to identify the user associated with the job. ? The user ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters. After making the necessary settings you want, click [Print]. The Sample Print job is sent to the printer and one set is printed. Check the sample print to confirm that the settings are correct. If the settings are correct, see “Printing the Remaining Sets”, Printer Client Reference. If not, you can delete the saved job. See “Deleting a Sample Print File”, Printer Client Reference.13 How to Use Locked Print This describes how to print a document using the Locked Print function. Note ? If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before sending a print job. By default, locked print jobs are automatically collated by the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print dialog box, more prints than intended may be printed. Windows 95/98/Me In an application, select the menu command to print. The print dialog box appears. Open the printer properties dialog box to set Locked Print. Click the [Setup] tab. In [Job Type:], click [Locked Print]. Click [Details...]. In [User ID:], enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters, and then enter a 4-digit password in [Password:]. Note ? Set this to identify the user associated with the job. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.14 Start printing from the application's print dialog box. The Locked Print job is sent to the printer. Check the locked print to confirm that the settings are correct. If the settings are correct, see “Entering the Password”, Printer Client Reference. If not, you can delete the saved job. See “Deleting a Sample Print File”, Printer Client Reference. Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0 In an application, select the menu command to print. The print dialog box appears. Open the printer properties dialog box to set Locked Print. Click the [Job Log] tab. In [Job Type:], click [Locked Print]. In [User ID:], enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters, and then enter a 4-digit password in [Password:]. Note ? Set this to identify the user associated with the job. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box. Start printing from the application's print dialog box. The Locked Print job is sent to the printer.15 Check the locked print to confirm that the settings are correct. If the settings are correct, see “Entering the Password”, Printer Client Reference. If not, you can delete the saved job. See “Deleting a Sample Print File”, Printer Client Reference. Mac OS In an application, select the menu command to print. The print dialog box appears. On the pop-up menu, click [Job Log]. In [Job Type:], click [Locked Print], and then select the appropriate setting. In [User ID:], enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters, and then enter a 4-digit password in [Password:]. Note ? Set this to identify the user associated with the job. After making the necessary settings you want, click [Print]. The Locked Print job is sent to the printer. Check the locked print to confirm that the settings are correct. If the settings are correct, see “Entering the Password”, Printer Client Reference. If not, you can delete the saved job. See “Deleting a Locked Print File”, Printer Client Reference. 16 Collate Use this function to enable collation. With this feature, the printer can efficiently print collated sets of multiple-page documents. Limitation ? To use this function, a memory unit of total 192 MB or the hard disk drive must be installed on the printer. ? Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Mac OS, or Mac OS X, make sure the following check boxes have not been selected. • Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 The [Collated] check box on [Paper/Output] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box. • Mac OS The [Collated] check box in the print dialog box. • Mac OS X The [Collated] check box on [Copies & Pages] in the printer dialog box. The following table shows where you can select this function. Windows 95/98/Me [Collate:] on the [Setup] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Collate:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality]tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Collate:] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Collate:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Collate:] on the [Features 1] tab on [Printer Features] in the printer dialog box17 Duplex Printing Use this function to select duplex printing. Limitation ? To use this function, the optional duplex unit must be installed on the printer. ? You cannot perform duplex printing when using the bypass tray. The following table shows where you can select this function. You can select the following items. Availability of these items varies depending on the operating system you are using. Windows 95/98/Me Off Disables duplex printing. Open to Left Prints so you can open it to the left. Windows 95/98/Me [Duplex:] on the [Setup] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Print on Both Sides (Duplex)] on the [Layout] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing)] on the [Page Setup] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Print on Both Sides] on [Layout] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Print on both Sides] check box on [Duplex:] in the print dialog box18 Open to Top Prints so you can open it to the top. Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Mac OS, Mac OS X Note ? If you use a Macintosh, click the button that means [Flip on Long Edge] or [Flip on Short Edge]. None Disables duplex printing. Flip on Long Edge Prints so you can open it to the long edge when bound along the long edge. Flip on Short Edge Prints so you can open it to the short edge when bound along the short edge. Windows NT 4.0 None Disables duplex printing. Short Side Prints so you can open it to the short edge when bound along the short edge. Long Side Prints so you can open it to the long edge when bound along the long edge.19 Color Mode Use this function to select whether the document is printed in color or black and white. The following table shows where you can select this function. Note ? If you are using Windows 95/98/Me, this mode is called “Color/Black and White”. You can select the following items: Color Prints color documents in full color. Note ? Color images are printed using CMYK toner, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black. CMYK represents the three primary subtractive colors. ? If you want to adjust the print color, use the settings in the [Advanced] dialog box accessed from the [Advanced] button on the [Print Quality] tab. Windows 95/98/Me [Color/ Black and White:] on the [Setup] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Color Mode] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Color Mode] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Color Mode:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Color Mode] on the [Features 1] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box20 Black and White Prints everything, including color documents, in black and white. Black and White printing is faster than Color. To stop black and white areas being printed with CMYK toner, select [Black and White] in the printer driver as well as in the application. Staple Use this function to staple output. When you turn staple on, the printed document is collated automatically. You should switch off Collate from the [Print] window of your application to prevent the entire job being stapled together. Limitation ? To use this function, the finisher must be installed on the printer. ? The memory unit of total 192 MB or the optional hard disk drive must be installed on the printer. The following table shows where you can select this function. Windows 95/98/Me [Staple:] on the [Setup] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Staple:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab Mac OS [Staple:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Staple:] on the [Features 3] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box21 Punch Use this function to punch binding holes through sheets. When you turn punch on, the printed document is collated automatically. You should switch off Collate from the [Print] window of your application to prevent the entire job being punched. Limitation ? To use this function, the finisher must be installed on the printer. The following table shows where you can select this function. Windows 95/98/Me [Punch:] on the [Setup] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Punch:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab Mac OS [Punch:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Punch:] on the [Features 3] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box22 Paper Selection All Pages and Destination Tabs Use this function to select the media type, input tray, and output tray. Limitation ? This function is for Windows 95/98/Me only. Reference For more information about the [All Pages and Destination] tabs, see the printer driver Help. Paper Size Use this function to select the paper size. The following table shows where you can select this function. Reference For more information about paper sizes supported by this printer, see “Types of Paper and Other Media”, Maintenance Guide. Windows 95/98/Me [Size:] on the [Paper] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Paper Size:] on [Paper/Output] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preference] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Paper Size:] on the [Page Setup] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Paper:] on the [Page Attributes] tab in the [Page Setup] dialog box Mac OS X [Paper Size:] in the [Page Setup] dialog box23 Fit to Paper When the size of the document and paper size differ, set whether or not to print according to paper size. Prompt User Print is performed with the size of document to be printed unchanged. Nearest Size and Scale If the paper size is smaller than the selected paper size, the printer driver reduces the print size. If the paper size is larger than the size of document to be printed, the printing does not fit the paper size. Nearest Size and Crop When the paper size is smaller than the size of document to be printed, the printing is adjusted to fit the paper size. Windows 95/98/Me [Fit to Print Size:] on the [Paper] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Fit to Paper] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Fit to Paper] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Fit to Paper] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Fit to Paper] on the [Features 2] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box24 Media Type Use this function to select the media type. The following table shows where you can select this function. Reference For more information about media supported by this printer, see “Types of Paper and Other Media”, Maintenance Guide. Windows 95/98/Me [Type:] on [All Pages] on the [Paper] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Media:] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Paper/Output] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Paper Type:] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Paper Type] on the [Features 4] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box25 Paper Source Use this function to select the paper sources. The following table shows where you can select this function. Destination Tray Use this function to select the output tray. The following table shows where you can select this function. Windows 95/98/Me [Input Tray:] on [All Pages] on the [Paper] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Paper Source:] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Page Setup] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Paper Source:] on [General] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Paper Feed] in the print dialog box Windows 95/98/Me [Destination] on the [Paper] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Destination] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Printer Features] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab Mac OS [Destination] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Destination] on the [Features 3] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box26 Resolution Use this to set the resolution to [600 dpi] or [1200 dpi]. Limitation ? If the resolution option is set to [1200 dpi], the gradation option must be set to [Fast]. The following table shows where you can select this function. Windows 95/98/Me [Advanced] on the [Print Quality] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Graphic] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Graphic] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Resolution] on the [Features 1] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box27 Gradation Use this function to select a type of gradation suited to your requirements. The following table shows where you can select this function. You can select the following items: Fast Prints quickly but loses smoothness. Standard Prints with good gradation. Windows 95/98/Me [Print Quality] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Gradation:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Gradation] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Gradation] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Gradation] on the [Features 2] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box28 Color Profile Use this function to select the color profile pattern. The following table shows where you can select this function. You can select the following items: Important ? Under Windows 95/98/Me, you can configure [Color Profile:] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual] from the[Color] setting. Selecting [Automatic] sets the printer to “Auto”. Auto Use this setting to automatically configure the best color profile pattern based on the appearance of the document to be printed. Photographic Use this setting to enhance reproduction of photos and graphics that include midtones. Windows 95/98/Me [Color Profile:] on the [Advanced]window displayed when clicking [Advanced...] after selecting [Manual] on [Color] on the [Print Quality] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Color Profile:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Color Profile:] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Color Profile] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Color Profile] on the [Features 1] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box29 Presentation Use this setting to enhance reproduction of documents containing text and graphics. This CRD is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation materials and so on. If you use this CRD for printing photographs, color and gradation might not reproduce so well. Solid Color Use this setting to print specific single colors, logos and so on. User Setting Use this setting to print images using a CRD downloaded from your application. CLP Simulation Prints the output colors similar to the colors displayed on the computer screen. Note ? Use this function to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The selected CRD is also referred to when [Fine] or [Super Fine] is selected for “Color Setting”. The following items are available: [Auto],[Photographic], [Presentation], and [Solid Color].30 Color Setting Use this function to select the correction method used for color conversion. The following table shows where you can select this function. Important ? Under Windows 95/98/Me, you can configure [Color Setting:] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual] from the [Color] setting. Selecting [Automatic] sets the print resolution to “Super Fine”. Note ? The color rendering dictionary selected in the Color Profile setting is used. You can select the following items: Off No modification to the color setting. Windows 95/98/Me [Color Setting:] on the [Advanced] window displayed when clicking [Advanced...] after selecting [Manual] on [Color] on the [Print Quality] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Color Setting:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Color Setting:] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Color Setting] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Color Setting] on the [Features 2] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box31 Fine Select this setting to perform color matching based on the printer's built-in color rendering dictionaries, and to perform CMYK conversion. This setting performs printing at an output target of Monitor ? = 1.8. Super Fine Select this setting to use a color rendering dictionary similar to the Fine setting but is capable of producing output that is more vivid. Use this setting to emphasize lighter colors. This setting performs printing at an output target of Monitor ? = 2.2. Note ? Use this function to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the document you are printing. The selected CRD is also referred to when [Fine] or [Super Fine] is selected for “Color Setting”. The following items are available: [Auto],[Photographic], [Presentation], and [Solid Color].32 CMYK Simulation Profile You can simulate the color tone of the printing ink. You can select the printing ink standard from SWOP, Euroscale, JapanColor, and PaletteColor. Important ? Under Windows 95/98/Me, you can configure [CMYK Simulation Profile:] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual] from the [Color] setting. Selecting [Automatic] sets the printer to “Off”. Windows 95/98/Me [CMYK Simulation Profile:] in the [Advanced] dialog box displayed when you click [Advanced...], after selecting [Manual] from [Color] on the [Print Quality] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [CMYK Simulation Profile:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [CMYK Simulation Profile:] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [CMYK Simulation Profile] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [CMYK Simulation Profile] on the [Features 3] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box33 Dithering Use this function to set the Image Rendering mode. The following table shows where you can select this function. Important ? Under Windows 95/98/Me, you can configure [Dithering:] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual] from [Color] setting. Selecting [Automatic] sets the printer to “Auto”. You can select the following items: Auto Use this setting to configure the best dithering method automatically, based on the appearance of the document to be printed. Photographic Performs dithering in an appropriate form for photographs. Text Performs dithering in an appropriate form for text. Windows 95/98/Me [Advanced] on the [Print Quality] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Dithering:] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Dithering:] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Dithering] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Dithering] on the [Features 2] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box34 User Setting Use this setting to print images set in your application as half tone. Gray Reproduction Use this function to select Black Color mode for text and line art. The following table shows where you can select this function. Important ? Under Windows 95/98/Me, you can configure [Gray Reproduction (Text/Line Art):] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual] from the [Color] setting. Selecting [Automatic] sets the printer to “Black/Gray by K”. You can select the following items: Black by K Select this setting to use a black toner. Windows 95/98/Me [Gray Reproduction (Text/Line Art):] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual]from the [Color] setting. [Automatic] sets the printer to “Pure Black Text” Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Gray Reproduction (Text/Line Art):] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Gray Reproduction (Text/Line Art):] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Gray Reproduction (Text/Line Art)] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Gray Reproduction (Text/Line Art)] on the [Features 2] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box35 Black/Gray by K Black portions are printed in gray. CMY + K Select this setting to use all toners. Black Over Print Select whether or not to apply print black over the other colors. The following table shows where you can select this function. Windows 95/98/Me [Black Over Print] in [Advanced] by selecting [Manual] from the [Color] setting Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Black Over Print] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Black Over Print] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Black Over Print] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Black Over Print] on the [Features 1] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box36 Toner Saving Use this function to reduce the amount of toner used when printing. The following table shows where you can select this function. Color Control Use this function to select whether or not you want the colors in the documents to be adjusted before printing, so that the printed page matches the colors on the screen closer. The following table shows where you can select this function. Windows 95/98/Me [Toner Saver] on the [Print Quality] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Toner Saving] on [Printer Features] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [Toner Saver] on [Document Options] on the [Advanced] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [Toner Saver] on [Printer Specific Options] in the print dialog box Mac OS X [Toner Saver] on the [Features 1] tab on [Printer Features] in the print dialog box Windows 95/98/Me [Print Quality] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Graphic] on [Advanced...] on the [Paper/Quality] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 This function is not available. Mac OS [Print Color] on the [Color Matching] tab in the print dialog box Mac OS X This function is not available.37 Note ? Under Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003, this function is called “Image Color Management”. ? Under Windows NT 4.0, this function cannot be configured. ? Under Mac OS, this function is called “Color Matching”. Image Color Control Open the [Image Color Matching] dialog box, and then click this button to specify exactly how you want the colors on your screen adjusted before printing. User Code Use this function to set a user code for print logging. Enter a user code using up to eight digits. A user code identifies a group of users and allows you to check the number of sheets printed under each code using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin. The following table shows where you can select this function. Reference For more information about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see Help. Windows 95/98/Me [User Code] on the [Statistics] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [User Code] on the [Job Log] tab in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box Windows NT 4.0 [User Code] on the [Job Log] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS [User Code] on [Job Log] in the print dialog box Mac OS X This function is not available.38 Options See “Setting Up Options”, Printer Client Reference or Administrator Reference for the installation method appropriate to your printing environment. The following table shows where you can select this function. Tray 3 • You can select the tray with the following menu for Paper Feed Unit Type 7100: Paper Source, see p.25 “Paper Source”. Tray 3 and 4 • You can select the other tray with the following menu for an additional Paper Feed Unit Type 7100: Paper Source, see p.25 “Paper Source”. Tray 3 (LCT) • You can select the tray with the following menu for Paper Bank Type 7100: Paper Source, see p.25 “Paper Source”. Windows 95/98/Me [Options] on the [Accessories] tab Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 [Installable Options] on the [Device Setting] tab Windows NT 4.0 [Installable Options] on the [Device Setting] tab in the [Document Defaults] dialog box Mac OS For ethernet, [Chooser] on the Apple Menu. For USB, [Change Setup]from the [Printing] menu to open the Desktop printer Mac OS X This function is not available.39 Duplex Unit • You can use the following function with Duplex Unit Type 7100: Duplex Printing, see p.17 “Duplex Printing”. Hard Disk • You can use the following function with printer hard disk: Collate, see p.8 “Job Type”,p.16 “Collate”, p.20 “Staple”. Note ? This function is for Windows 95/98/Me only. Total Memory • You can use the following function with memory unit (64/128/256): Collate, see p.16 “Collate”, p.20 “Staple”. Note ? The memory unit of total 192 MB must be installed on the printer. Finisher Note ? The optional 2 tray finisher and booklet finisher cannot be installed together. ? The memory unit of total 192 MB or the optional hard disk drive must be installed on the printer. • The following functions are available with SR770 and SR910: Destination, see p.25 “Destination Tray”. Staple, see p.20 “Staple”. Punch, see p.21 “Punch”.2. Printer Utility for Mac 40 Using Printer Utility for Mac, you can download fonts, change the printer's name, and so on. Limitation ? If a Macintosh and printer are connected by USB, you cannot use Printer Utility for Mac. Note ? Printer Utility for Mac is included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”. ? Printer Utility for Mac requires Mac OS 7.6.1-9.x, or Mac OS X 10.1.x or 10.2.1. Mac OS X 10.0.x and 10.2 are not supported. Installing Printer Utility for Mac Follow the procedure below to install Printer Utility for Mac on the printer. Start the Macintosh. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM icon appears. Double-click the hard disk icon to open it. Double-click the CD-ROM icon. The contents of the CD-ROM appear. Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder. Note ? Under Mac OS X, double-click the [Mac OS X] folder. Double-click the [PS Utility] folder on the CD-ROM. Double-click the [Printer Utility for Mac] folder.41 Double-click the folder of the language you use. Move the “Printer Utility for Mac” file to the Macintosh hard disk using a drag-and-drop operation. Drag the CD-ROM icon to the Trash to eject the CD-ROM. Printer Utility for Mac is installed.42 Starting Printer Utility for Mac Mac OS Important ? Before starting Printer Utility for Mac, make sure the printer is selected in [Chooser] on the Apple menu. Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon. The [Printer Utility for Mac] dialog box appears. Click [OK]. Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start. Reference For more information, see p.44 “Printer Utility for Mac Functions”.43 Mac OS X Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon. The [Printer Utility for Mac] dialog box appears. Click [OK]. In the [Available Printers:] box, select the printer you want to use. Note ? If you change zones, select a name from [Available Network Zones:]. ? Click [Choose Printer...] on the Printer Utility for Mac menu if you want to change the printer. Select the printer you want to use. Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start. Click [Choose]. Reference For more information, see p.44 “Printer Utility for Mac Functions”.44 Printer Utility for Mac Functions Printer Utility for Mac functions are described below. File menu • [Download PS Fonts...] Downloads fonts (PostScript Type 1) to the printer. See p.45 “Downloading PS Fonts”. • [Display Printer's Fonts...] Displays and deletes fonts in the printer memory and hard disk. See p.46 “Displaying the Printer's Fonts”. • [Initialize Printer's Disk...] Initializes the printer's hard disk. See p.48 “Initializing the Printer Disk”. • [Page Setup...] Sets up the paper size to print a Printer Font Catalog and Printer Font Sample. See p.49 “Page Setup”. • [Print Font Catalog...] Print the names of available fonts. See p.49 “Printing Font Catalog”. • [Print Font Sample...] Print a sample of fonts. See p.49 “Printing Font Sample”. • [Rename Printer...] Changes the printer name when viewing with Appletalk. See p.50 “Renaming the Printer”. • [Restart Printer] Restarts the printer. See p.51 “Restarting the Printer”.45 Utility menu • [Download PostScript File...] Downloads a PostScript file. See p.52 “Downloading PostScript Files”. • [Select Zone...] Changes the zone the printer belongs to with Appletalk. See p.52 “Selecting the Zone”. • [Display Printer Status...] Displays printer status. See p.53 “Displaying Printer Status”. • [Launch Dialogue Console...] Creates and edits a PostScript file, and then download it to the printer. See p.54 “Launching the Dialogue Console”. Downloading PS Fonts You can download PS fonts to printer memory or hard disk. Important ? The following procedures to download fonts assume that you are a system administrator. If you are not, be sure to consult your system administrator. ? If the printer restarts, all printer settings return to default. ? Confirm that a Macintosh and printer are connected with Appletalk. Note ? Some fonts cannot be downloaded. ? Before downloading, read the documentation about the fonts you want to use. On the [File] menu, click [Download PS Fonts...]. Click [Add to list]. The dialog box to select fonts appears.46 Select the desired font files, and then click [Open]. A list of selectable font names appears. After adding all the fonts you want to download, click [OK]. The dialog box of selected fonts to download appears. Click [Download]. The fonts begin to be downloaded, and download status is displayed. Important ? During download, do not turn off the power switch, operate the panel or open/close the cover. When the completion message appears, click [OK]. Click [Cancel]. Displaying the Printer's Fonts You can display available fonts already downloaded to the printer. Fonts in printer memory and hard disk can be displayed. Note ? The fonts displayed in italics are default fonts. On the [File] menu, click [Display Printer's Fonts...]. A dialog box appears. Click [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk]. Click [OK].47 Deleting Fonts You can delete fonts from printer memory or hard disk. On the [File] menu, click [Display Printer's Fonts...]. A dialog box appears. Click [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk]. Select the fonts you want to delete. Limitation ? You cannot delete the fonts displayed in italics. Click [Delete]. A confirmation message appears. Confirm the fonts you want to delete and the printer name from which you want to delete them. Click [Continue], and then click [OK]. Click [OK].48 Initializing the Printer Disk When initializing the printer's hard disk, all fonts downloaded to the hard disk are deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the fonts on the hard disk. Important ? When initializing the printer's hard disk from the control panel, all data on the hard disk is deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the data on the hard disk. On the [File] menu, click [Initialize Printer's Disk...]. A confirmation message appears. Note ? To cancel initialization, click [Cancel]. Click [Execute]. Initializing starts. Important ? Do not turn off the power switch until initialization is complete, otherwise the hard disk might get damaged. When the completion message appears, click [OK].49 Page Setup You can set the paper size on which to print a Print Fonts Catalogue and Prints Fonts Sample. On the [File] menu, click [Page Setup...]. Select a paper size. Printing Font Catalog You can print the names of fonts available on the printer. Note ? The paper selected under [Page Setup] is used. On the [File] menu, click [Print Fonts Catalogue]. Click [Print]. Printing Font Sample You can print samples of fonts downloaded to the hard disk or printer memory. Note ? The paper selected under [Page Setup] is used. On the [File] menu, click [Print Fonts Sample...]. Click [Print].50 Renaming the Printer You can change the printer name as displayed under Appletalk. If you connect several printers to the network, assign different names so you can identify them. If several printers have the same name, a digit appears next to the printer name in [Chooser]. On the [File] menu, click [Rename Printer...]. In the [New Name:] filed enter a new name. Limitation ? You can enter up to 31 digits and letters. ? Do not use symbols, for example “*”, “:”, “=”, “@”, “~”. Click [Rename]. The printer name is changed. Click [OK]. Mac OS A On the Apple menu, click [Chooser]. B Click the AdobePS icon. C Select the printer whose name you changed in step B, and then close the [Chooser] dialog box. Note ? If there are several Appletalk zones, select the zone the machine belongs to.51 Mac OS X A On the [Printer Utility for Mac] menu, click [Choose Printer...]. B In the [Available Network Zones:] list, select the zone for the Macintosh in use. C In the [Available Printers:] list, select the printer whose name you changed in step B, and then click [Choose]. Restarting the Printer You can restart the printer. On the [File] menu, click [Restart Printer]. Confirm the message that appears on the screen, and then click [Restart]. The printer restarts. Note ? The fonts that you downloaded to printer memory will be deleted. ? If the printer restarts, all settings return to default.52 Downloading PostScript Files You can download a PostScript file to the printer. On the [Utility] menu, click [Download PostScript File...]. Select the file you want to download, and then click [Open]. Enter a log file name, and then click [Save]. The selected file is downloaded. Note ? Errors are recorded in the log file. Selecting the Zone You can change the zone to which the printer belongs under Appletalk. Important ? Confirm that a Macintosh and printer are connected with Appletalk. On the [Utility] menu, click [Select Zone...]. The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear. Select the zone which you want to locate the printer in, and then click [Change]. A confirmation message appears. Click [Continue]. A confirmation message appears.53 Click [OK]. Mac OS A On the Apple menu, click [Chooser]. B Click the AdobePS icon. C In the [Appletalk zone:] list, select the zone changed in step B. D In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, select the printer you want to use. E Close the [Chooser] dialog box. Mac OS X A On the [Printer Utility for Mac] menu, click [Choose Printer...]. B In the [Available Network Zones:] list, select the zone changed in step B. C In the [Available Printers:] list, select the model of printer in use, and then click [Choose]. Displaying Printer Status You can display and confirm current printer status. On the [Utility] menu, click [Display Printer Status...]. Current printer status appears. Confirm current printer status. You can check memory capacity, VM (Virtual Memory) space, hard disk status, and available space on the hard disk. You can also check the zone in which the printer is located. Click [OK].54 Launching the Dialogue Console You can create and edit a PostScript file for printing, and then download it to the printer. Important ? “Launch Dialogue Console” is recommended for users with an understanding of PostScript. ? Do not download any file other than PostScript files to the printer. ? “Launch Dialogue Console” must be used at your own risk. On the [Utility] menu, click [Launch Dialogue Console...]. Open the editing screen. The Dialogue Console menu bar appears. In the editor screen, enter a PostScript command. Note ? To edit a PostScript file, click [Open] on the [File] menu to open it. ? You can search for or replace a character string using the [Search] menu. After editing the PostScript file, click [Download Top Window] on the [Console] menu to start printing. The PostScript file is sent to the printer. Note ? The [Reply from Printer] box opens, depending on the PostScript file sent. On the [Console] menu, click [Return To Main Menu] to close the PostScript file.55 INDEX B Black Over Print, 35 C CMYK Simulation Profile, 32 Collate, 16 Color Control, 36 Color Mode, 19 Color Profile, 28 Color Setting, 30 D Deleting Fonts, 47 Displaying Printer's Fonts, 46 Displaying Printer Status, 53 Dithering, 33 Downloading PostScript Files, 52 Downloading PS Fonts, 45 Duplex Printing, 17 F Fit to Paper, 23 Functions Printer Utility for Mac, 44 G Gradation, 27 Gray Reproduction, 34 I Initializing Printer Disk, 48 Installing, 40 Printer Utility for Mac, 40 J Job Type, 8 L Launching the Dialogue Console, 54 M Media Type, 24 O Options, 38 P Page Setup, 49 Paper Selection, 22 Paper Size, 22 Paper Source, 25 Printer Utility for Mac, 40 Functions, 44 Printing Font Catalog, 49 Printing Font Sample, 4956 R Renaming the Printer, 50 Resolution, 26 Restarting the Printer, 51 S Selecting the Zone, 52 Setting up Options, 7 T Toner Saving, 36 U User Code, 3757 Copyright © 200458 EN USA GB GB AE AE G106-7523Operating Instructions Maintenance Guide Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the "Setup Guide" before using the machine. Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer Paper and Other Media Troubleshooting AppendixIntroduction This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine. To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.i Trademarks Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks. The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows: • The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95. • The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98. • The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me). • The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional • The product names of Windows® XP are as follows: Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition • The product names of Windows Server TM 2003 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Enterprise Edition Microsoft® Windows Server TM 2003 Web Edition • The product names of Windows NT ® 4.0 are as follows: Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0 Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0 Notes: Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine. Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer. Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.ii TABLE OF CONTENTS Trademarks..............................................................................................................i 1. Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit Using the Screwdriver ...........................................................................................1 Detaching and Reattaching the Options..............................................................2 Detaching the SR770 (2 Tray Finisher)......................................................................2 Detaching the SR910(Booklet Finisher) .....................................................................2 Opening and Closing the Duplex Reversal Unit.........................................................3 Replacing the Toner Cartridge .............................................................................4 Replacing the Fuser Oil Unit.................................................................................7 Replacing the Photoconductor Unit...................................................................11 Replacing the Development Unit........................................................................15 Replacing the Fusing Unit...................................................................................19 Replacing the Dustproof Filter ...........................................................................23 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle......................................................................25 2. Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer Cautions to Take When Cleaning.......................................................................27 Cleaning the Registration Roller ........................................................................28 Cleaning the DustProof Glass ............................................................................29 Checking the Earth Leakage Breaker ................................................................30 Adjusting the Color Registration........................................................................32 Auto Adjust...............................................................................................................32 Adjusting the Fuser for Thick Paper .........................................................................33 Test Sheet Samples.................................................................................................35 Correcting the Color Gradation ..........................................................................36 Set the Gradation Correction Value .........................................................................36 Viewing the Color Calibration Sample Sheet and Gradation Correction Sheet .......39 Resetting the gradation correction values to the initial values .................................41 Adjusting Image Density .....................................................................................42 Adjusting Tray Registration................................................................................43 3. Paper and Other Media Paper and Other Supported Media.....................................................................45 Paper Sizes..............................................................................................................45 Paper Recommendations....................................................................................52 Loading Paper..........................................................................................................52 Storing Paper ...........................................................................................................52 Types of Paper and Other Media .............................................................................52 Print Area..............................................................................................................56iii Loading Paper ......................................................................................................57 Loading Paper in Tray 1...........................................................................................57 Loading Paper in Tray 2 and the Optional Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 ..................58 Loading paper in Paper Bank Type 7100 (2000-sheet large capacity tray) .............59 If you load a paper size that is not selected automatically .......................................60 Changing the paper type..........................................................................................61 Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray ...........................................................................62 4. Troubleshooting Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel ................................................67 Printer Does Not Print .........................................................................................78 Other Printing Problems .....................................................................................82 Additional Troubleshooting................................................................................89 Removing Misfed Paper ......................................................................................91 When “Remove Misfeed A:Internal Path” Appears ..................................................91 When “Remove Misfeed B: Fusing Unit” Appears ...................................................91 When “Remove Misfeed R: Finisher” Appears.........................................................93 When “Remove Misfeed R1” Appears .....................................................................95 When “Remove Misfeed R2-4” Appears ..................................................................96 When “Remove Misfeed Y: Paper Tray” Appears....................................................97 When “Remove Misfeed Z1:Duplex Unit” Appears ..................................................97 When “Remove Misfeed Z2:Dup.Feed Unit” Appears..............................................98 Removing Jammed Staples ..............................................................................101 SR770 (2 Tray Finisher) .........................................................................................101 SR910 (Booklet Finisher) .......................................................................................102 Adding Staples...................................................................................................104 SR770 (2 Tray Finisher) .........................................................................................104 SR910 (Booklet Finisher) .......................................................................................105 Removing Punch-hole Chips ............................................................................108 SR770 (2 Tray Finisher) .........................................................................................108 SR910 (Booklet Finisher) .......................................................................................109 5. Appendix When the Front Cover Does Not Close............................................................111 Moving and Transporting the Printer...............................................................112 Moving the Printer ..................................................................................................112 Consumables .....................................................................................................114 INDEX....................................................................................................... 116iv1 1. Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit Using the Screwdriver The screwdriver supplied is used for attaching options and is located inside the front cover. Open the printer’s front cover, a n d t h e n r em o v e t h e p r o v id e d screwdriver. Insert the screw into the screwdriver. B y p u s h i n g t h e s c r e w i n t o t h e screwdriver, you can work without having to worry about dropping the screw. Note ? After using the screwdriver, return it to its original position inside of the front cover. ABT020S1 ABT021S1Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 2 1 Detaching and Reattaching the Options This section describes how to detach o r r ea t t a c h o p t i o n a l f i n i s h e r s a n d how to open and close the duplex reversal unit. Follow the procedure below when replacing various units or removing jammed paper. Detaching the SR770 (2 Tray Finisher) There are times when you may need to detach the 2 tray finisher from the printer to remove misfed paper. This section describes how to detach the 2 tray finisher. Hold the handle at the top of the 2 t r a y f i n i s h e r f i rm l y u s i n g o n e h a n d , p u l l t h e 2 t r a y f i n i s h e r straight out, and let go when it stops. T h e 2 t r a y f i n i sh e r i s d e t a c h e d from the printer. Use both hands to push it straight back in, and let go when it clicks into place. The 2 tray finisher is reattached to the printer. Important ? Be sure to attach the 2 tray finisher to the printer after closing the duplex reversal unit. See p.3 “Opening and Closing the Duplex Reversal Unit”. Detaching the SR910(Booklet Finisher) Hold the release lever, and then pull out the booklet finisher. The booklet finisher is detached from the printer. ACE055S ACE056S ACE030SDetaching and Reattaching the Options 3 1 Attach the booklet finisher. The booklet finisher is reattached to the printer. Opening and Closing the Duplex Reversal Unit There are times when you may need to detach the duplex reversal unit to remove mis fed paper. This s ec t ion describes how to detach the duplex reversal unit. Push up the lock release button and leave it in place. Lower the duplex reversal unit slowly until it stops. Important ? Open the duplex reversal unit after detaching the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher from the printer. p.2 “Detaching the SR770 (2 Tray Finisher)” or p.2 “Detaching the SR910(Booklet Finisher)”. Note ? You do not have to remove the external tray even if the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher is attached. T h e d u p l e x r e v e r s a l u n i t i s opened. Close the duplex reversal unit by r a i s i n g i t s l o w l y u s i n g b o t h h a n d s , a n d p u s h i t i n , u n t i l i t clicks into place. The duplex reversal unit is closed. Important ? Attach the duplex reversal unit after closing the printer's upper left cover. ZHXH770J ZDJP204J ZDJP205JReplacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 4 1 Replacing the Toner Cartridge R WARNING: R CAUTION: Note ? The actual number of printed page s d i f f e r s d e p e n d i n g o n p a p e r type, size, contents, and settings. For details, see p.114 “Toner cartridge”. If “Add Toner” appears on the display, replace the toner cartridge. or Note ? A combination of one to four colors, yellow, magenta, cyan, black, appears in “XXX”. ? If cyan, magenta, or yellow toner runs out, you can print in black and white mode using the black toner. Change the color mode setting to “Black and White” from the printer driver. ? If black toner runs out, printing is not possible until the black toner cartridge is replaced. While pushing the lock button on the upper right cover of the printer ( ), open the upper right cover ( ). From the end, the toner cartridges are installed in the order of magenta (M), cyan (C), yellow (Y), and black (K). Remove the toner cartridge for the color you want to replace. A Unhook the green hook on the toner cartridge with one hand. • Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust is flammable and will ignite when exposed to an open flame. Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer or appropriate collection site. If you dispose of used toner cartridges yourself, dispose according to local regulations. • Keep toner (used or unused) and the toner cartridge out of reach of children. Add Toner XXX Add Toner XXX/XXX ZDJT006J ZDJT999JReplacing the Toner Cartridge 5 1 B Holding the toner cartridge w i t h th e o t h e r h a n d , s lowl y pull it up and out. Important ? Do not shake the removed toner cartridge. Remaining toner might scatter. Note ? Depending on the setting up environment, toner might be left in a toner cartridge. In such cases, reinstall the toner cartridge. Take the new toner cartridge out of the box. Note ? The black toner cartridge contains more than the other toner cartridges. Shake the toner cartridge back and forth five or six times. Holding the toner cartridge with the metal contact area in front, insert in the direction of the arrow. Important ? Do not touch the metal contact area with your fingers. Slowly insert the toner cartridge, until the green hook clips over the metal contact area. ZDJT201J ZDJT202J ZDJT203J ABT017S1 ABT018S1Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 6 1 Important ? Do not install and remove toner c a r t r i d g e s r e p e a t e d l y . T h i s could result in toner leak. Close the upper right cover. Please wait while the toner loads. The following message appears on the display: Important ? To avoid malfunction, do not turn off the power while “Loading Tone r . . . ” app ear s on the display. Loading Toner... ABT019S1Replacing the Fuser Oil Unit 7 1 Replacing the Fuser Oil Unit R CAUTION: If “Replace Fuser Oil Unit (TypeG)” appears on the display, replace the fuser oil unit. Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Important ? Be sure to wait about an hour to avoid burns. If the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher is installed, detach it from the printer. Reference See p.2 “Detaching the SR770 (2 Tray Finisher)” or p.2 “Detaching the SR910(Booklet Finisher)” If the duplex unit is installed, open the duplex reversal unit. Reference p.3 “Opening and Closing the Duplex Reversal Unit” If the external tray is attached to the printer, raise it in the direction of the arrow ( ), and then remove it ( ). Slowly pull out the left cover. Open the upper left cover. • The fusing unit becomes very hot. When installing a new fuser oil unit, turn off the printer and wait about an hour. After that, install the new fuser unit. Not waiting for the unit to cool could result in a burn. • Keep the fuser oil unit away from flames. There is a risk of fire or burns. Replace Fuser Oil Unit (TypeG) ZDJP038J ZHXH090J ZHXH100JReplacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 8 1 Pull the lever down slightly, and then remove the grip securing the fuser oil unit. Important ? Do not touch any area other than the green felt parts. Hold the fusing unit handle using one hand, and then slowly pull the fuser oil unit out horizontally. Put the unit in the bag that comes with the new fuser oil unit, and then seal the bag. Important ? Do not touch the inside of the fusing unit. Take the fuser oil unit out of the bag. Hold the green upper part of seal ( ), and then slowly peel the seal off. Position the fuser oil unit as shown, and then slowly pull seal ( ) out. Finally, hold the upper part of the seal ( ), and then slowly peel it off. Note ? Be sure to remove seal (A), and then pull it out horizontally. Important ? Be sure to remove the seals to avoid malfunction. ? Be sure to remove seal (A) first, and then seal (B) to avoid oil leakage. ? Be sure to put the fuser oil unit in a s tabl e and l eve l plac e to avoid oil leakage. ZHXH033J ZHXH050J 1 1 ZHXHK041J 2Replacing the Fuser Oil Unit 9 1 ? After removing the seals, be careful not to let oil from oils up p ly i ng p a r t s , o r t h e s ea l s c o me i n t o c o n t a c t w i t h y o u r body or clothes. As shown, hold the fuser oil unit using one hand, hold the green handle with the other, and then slowly insert the unit horizontally, in the direction of the arrow. Important ? Be careful not to get oil on the top metal part of the fuser oil unit. ? Insert the fuser oil unit firmly, until it stops. Slowly turn the fuser oil unit handle in the direction of the arrow, until it clicks. Close the upper left cover ( ), and then push the par t labe led “PUSH” next to the handle at the bottom rear, until it clicks ( ). If you removed the external tray in step , reattach it to the printer. Insert the hooks of the external tray into the printer slits, and then lower it toward you. If the duplex unit is installed, close the duplex reversal unit. Reference p.3 “Opening and Closing the Duplex Reversal Unit” If the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher is installed, reattach it to the printer. Reference See p.2 “Detaching the SR770 (2 Tray Finisher)” or p.2 “Detaching the SR910(Booklet Finisher)” ZHXH060J ZHXH070J ZHXH082J 1 2 ZDJH010JReplacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 10 1 Plug in the power cable, and then turn on the power. Note ? If you dispose of used fuser oil u n i t b y y o u r s e l f , d i sp o s e a c - cording to local regulations.Replacing the Photoconductor Unit 11 1 Replacing the Photoconductor Unit If “Replace Black PCU (Type F)” appears on the display, replace the black photoconductor unit. If “Replace Color PCU (Type A)” appears on the display, replace the three color photoconductor units. Note ? The replacement procedure for the th ird photoconduc tor un it from the top left will be described. The procedure is the same for all four photoconductor units. Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Slowly open the front cover of the printer, remove the green screwdriver. Reference p.1 “Using the Screwdriver” Turn the green lever counterclockwise. Loosen the two screws fastening the inner cover, using the provided screwdriver. Y o u c a n n o t r e m o v e t h e s e t w o screws. Lift the inner cover until it clicks into place and holds. The photoconductor units are installed as shown. Starting from the upper left, the units are attached in the order of black (K), yellow (Y), cyan (C), and magenta (M). Replace Black PCU (Type F) Replace Color PCU (Type A) ZHXH410J ZHXH430J ZHXH460J ZHXH470JReplacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 12 1 Remove the photoconductor unit you want to replace. For black, remove the upper left o n e , a n d f o r c o l o r , r em o v e t h e three on the right. A Move the green hook slowly to the right, as shown. The green hook is located on the upper r i g h t o f t h e p h o t o c o n d u c t o r unit. B Hold the hook down, grip the green areas at the top and bott o m o f t h e p h o t o c o n d u c t o r unit, and then slowly pull the unit out until you can see the entire green handle. Important ? Pulling out the photoconductor unit quickly might cause it to fall. C Lift and hold the green handle at the top ( ), and then slowly pull out the unit ( ). Install the new photoconductor unit. For black, install one, and for color, install all three. A Take the unit out of the bag. B Hold the photoconductor unit, and remove the adhesive tape at the tip of the unit. ZDJX701J ZHXH890J ZHXH490J ZDJH221J ZDJH222JReplacing the Photoconductor Unit 13 1 Important ? Do not remove the cover attached to the bottom of the photoconductor unit yet. C Line up the green arrow at the tip of the photoconductor unit with the rail inside the printer. Important ? Make sure the green arrow fits securely to the rail before proceeding to the next step. D Slowly push the front of the photoconductor unit, slide the u n i t o n t h e c o v e r , a n d t h e n push in until it stops. Important ? If you do not attach the green arrow of the photoconductor unit securely to the rail, you might damage the photoconductor unit. ? Do not touch the light-sensitive area of the photoconductor unit. E Remove the cover, and then slowly push in the photoconductor unit, until it stops. Slowly lower the inner cover out. Tighten the two screws using the provided screwdriver. Note ? Be sure to return the provided screwdriver to its original position on the back of the front cover. ZHXH500J ZHXH510J ZHXH520J ZHXH530J ZHXH440JReplacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 14 1 Turn the green lever clockwise. Slowly close the front cover by pushing the two areas on the left and right. Plug in the power cable, and then turn on the power. The printer starts calibration. Wait until it stops. The following message appears on the display: Important ? To avoid malfunction, do not turn off the power during calibration. Calibrating... ZHXH420J ZDJH041JReplacing the Development Unit 15 1 Replacing the Development Unit If “Replace Black Dev. Unit(TypeD)” appears on the display, replace the black development unit. If “Replace Color Dev. Unit(TypeB)” appears on the display, replace all t h r e e c o l o r ( C M Y ) d e v e l o p m e n t units. Note ? A dustproof filter is attached to the black development unit. When rep l a c i n g t h e b l a c k d e v e l o pm e n t unit, also replace the dustproof filter. See p.23 “Replacing the Dustproof Filter”. ? When replacing the black development unit, clean the registration roller. See p.28 “Cleaning the Registration Roller”. ? The replacement procedure for the third development unit from the top left will be described. The procedure is the same for all four development units. Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Slowly open the front cover of the printer, remove the green screwdriver. Reference p.1 “Using the Screwdriver” Turn the green lever counterclockwise. Loosen the two screws fastening the inner cover, using the provided screwdriver. Y o u c a n n o t r e m o v e t h e s e t w o screws. Lift the inner cover until it clicks into place and holds. Replace Black Dev. Unit(TypeD) Replace Color Dev. Unit(TypeB) ZHXH410J ZHXH430J ZHXH460JReplacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 16 1 T h e d e v e l o p m e n t u n i t s a r e i n - stalled as shown. Starting from the upper left, the units are attached in the order of black (K), yellow (Y), cyan (C), and magenta (M). Remove the development unit. The procedure for removing the unit is the same for all four colors. A Hook your finger into the green tab in front of the development un i t you want to re - p l a c e , a n d t h e n p u l l i t o u t halfway. Important ? Pulling out the development unit quickly might cause it to fall. B Hold the right side of the Dev e l o p m e n t u n i t u s i n g y o u r right hand, and pull the unit slowly out. Important ? Be careful not to touch the r i g h t s id e o f d e v e lo pme n t unit. ? Be careful not to let it come into contact with your hands or clothes. Install a new development unit. The procedure for attaching the development unit is the same for all four colors. A Take the unit out of the bag. ZHXH540J ZHXH550J ZHXH560J ZDJH226JReplacing the Development Unit 17 1 B Insert the development unit a l o n g t h e r a i l , a n d p u s h i n slowly, until it stops. C Holding the development unit, slowly pull out the tape horizontally. Important ? To avoid malfunction, be sure to pull out the tape. ? The removed tape is dirty. Be careful not to let it come into contact with your hands or clothes. Slowly lower the inner cover out. Tighten the two screws using the provided screwdriver. Note ? Be sure to return the provided screwdriver to its original position on the back of the front cover. Turn the green lever clockwise. Slowly close the front cover by pushing the two areas on the left and right. ZDJH227E ZHXH620J ZHXH530J ZHXH440J ZHXH420J ZDJH041JReplacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 18 1 Plug in the power cable, and then turn on the power. “Please Wait ” appears on the display, and initial adjustments begin. Wait until these stop. Important ? To avoid malfunction, do not turn off the power during adjustments. Please Wait Replacing the Fusing Unit 19 1 Replacing the Fusing Unit R CAUTION: If “Replace Fusing Unit (Type C)” appears on the display, replace the fusing unit. Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Important ? Be sure to wait about an hour to avoid burns. If the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher is installed, detach it from the printer. Reference See p.2 “Detaching the SR770 (2 Tray Finisher)” or p.2 “Detaching the SR910(Booklet Finisher)” If the duplex unit is installed, open the duplex reversal unit. Reference p.3 “Opening and Closing the Duplex Reversal Unit” If the external tray is attached to the printer, raise it in the direction of the arrow ( ), and then remove it ( ). Slowly pull out the left cover. Open the upper left cover. • The fusing unit becomes very hot. When installing a new fuser oil unit, turn off the printer and wait about an hour. After that, install the new fuser unit. Not waiting for the unit to cool could result in a burn. • Keep the fuser oil unit away from flames. There is a risk of fire or burns. Replace Fusing Unit (Type C) ZDJP038J ZHXH010J ZHXH020JReplacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 20 1 Pull the lever down slightly, and then remove the grip securing the fuser oil unit. R CAUTION: Important ? Do not touch any area other than the green felt parts. Hold the fusing unit handle as s h ow n , s l ow l y p u l l t h e f u s in g unit up, and then put it down on a surface. Important ? Do not touch the inside of the fusing unit. ? When moving the fusing unit, k e ep i t s t eady, o the rwi s e the fuser oil unit may come off or oil may leak. Take the new fusing unit out of the bag and put it down on a level surface. Pull the fuser oil unit (attached to the fusing unit) out horizontally, and then remove it. R CAUTION: Important ? To avoid getting oil on yourself, do no t touch any ar ea s o the r than the green felt parts. Install the fuser oil unit removed in step in the new fusing unit. Hold the fuser oil unit as shown, a n d th e n i n s e r t i t h o r iz on t a l ly in to the par t of the fus ing unit shown below. • Touch only the handles, no other parts. The fuser oil unit gets very hot and will burn your hands if you touch it. ZHXH033J ZHXH810J • Keep the fuser oil unit away from flames. There is a risk of fire or burns. ZHXH790J ZHXH800JReplacing the Fusing Unit 21 1 Important ? Be careful not to get oil on the top metal part of the fuser oil unit. ? Insert the fuser oil unit firmly, until it stops. Put the removed fuser oil unit in the bag that enclosed the new fuser oil unit, and then seal it. Hold the fusing unit handle and slowly lower the unit to align it with the marks on the machine stand. Important ? Install the fusing unit so the blue dial is on the front cover side. Slowly turn the fuser oil unit handle in the direction of the arrow, until it clicks. Close the upper left cover ( ), and then push the par t labe led “PUSH” next to the handle at the bottom rear, until it clicks ( ). If you removed the external tray in step , reattach it to the printer. Insert the hooks of the external tray into the printer slits, and lower it toward you. If the duplex unit is installed, close the duplex reversal unit. Reference p.3 “Opening and Closing the Duplex Reversal Unit” If the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher is installed, reattach it to the printer. Reference See p.2 “Detaching the SR770 (2 Tray Finisher)” or p.2 “Detaching the SR910(Booklet Finisher)” ZHXH820J ZHXH070J ZHXH082J 1 2 ZDJH010JReplacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 22 1 Plug in the power cable, and then turn on the power.Replacing the Dustproof Filter 23 1 Replacing the Dustproof Filter The dustproof filter is attached to the blac k d eve lopment uni t . When re - placing the black development unit, also replace the dustproof filter. The dustproof filter is attached to the left side of the printer, as shown. Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Push in the grips on both sides of the dustproof filter cover to pull it off. Note ? Be sure to put the removed dustproof filter cover down on a stable and level surface. From the box that contained the black development unit, take out t h e n e w d u s t p r o o f f i l t e r a n d glove. Put the glove on either hand. Using your gloved hand, slowly take out the dustproof filters attached to the dustproof filter cover, one by one, and put them into the box that contained the black development unit. ZDJH801J ZHXH570J ZDJH214J ZDJH213J ZDJH215JReplacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 24 1 Important ? Handle the removed dustproof filters with care. If you shake them, dust might scatter. Take off the glove. Important ? Be sure to take off the glove before attaching a new dustproof filter. Attach the new dustproof filters to the dustproof filter cover one by one. A Attach the large filter. B Attach the small filter. Insert the dustproof filter cover i n t o t h e u p p e r l e f t a r e a o f t h e printer. Plug in the power cable, and then turn on the power. ZDJH216J ZDJH217J ZHXH580JReplacing the Waste Toner Bottle 25 1 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle If “Replace Waste Toner (Type E)” appears on the display, replace the waste toner bottle. Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Slowly open the front cover by pulling down from the two areas on the left and right. Carefully pivot the waste oil bottle outward, in the direction of the arrow. R CAUTION: Take the new waste toner bottle out of the bag. Slowly remove the used waste toner bottle from inside the printer. Important ? Be sure to remove the waste toner bottle horizontally. Remove the lid ( ), and then put it in the position shown in the illustration ( ). Replace Waste Toner (Type E) • Keep the waste oil bottle away from flames. There is a risk of fire or burns. ZDJH007J ZHXH150J ZDJH228J ZHXH590J ZDJH229JReplacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit 26 1 Put the used waste toner bottle into the bag that contained the new waste toner bottle, and then seal the bag. Important ? Be sure to handle the bottle carefully so waste toner does not spill. Insert the new waste toner bottle as shown. Push it in until it stops. Important ? Be sure to firmly insert the waste toner bottle to avoid toner leakage inside the printer. Slowly close the waste oil bottle in the direction of the arrow. Slowly close the front cover by pushing the two areas on the left and right. Plug in the power cable, and then turn on the power. ZHXH610J ZHXH600J ZHXH160J ZDJH041J27 2. Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer Cautions to Take When Cleaning R WARNING: R CAUTION: Clean the printer periodically to maintain print clarity. Dry wipe the exterior using a soft cloth. If dry wiping is not enough, wipe using a soft, wet cloth that is well wrung out. If you still cannot remove the stain or grime, use a neutral detergent, then wipe over with a well wrung wet cloth, dry wipe, and let it dry. Important ? To avoid deformation, discoloration, or cracking, do not use volatile chemicals, such as benzine and thinner, or spray insecticide on the printer. ? If there is dust or grime inside the printer, wipe it away using a clean, dry cloth. • Do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this manual. Some parts of the machine are at a high voltage and could give you an electric shock. Also, if the machine has laser systems, direct (or indirect) reflected eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye damage. When the machine needs to be checked, adjusted, or repaired, contact your service representative. • Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine. There is a risk of fire, electric shock, explosion or loss of sight. If the machine has laser systems, there is a risk of serious eye damage. • When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing section because it could be very hot.Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer 28 2 Cleaning the Registration Roller R CAUTION: Clean the roller when replacing the black development unit. Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Open the right cover as shown. T h e r e g i s t r a t io n r o l l e r i s s e t a s shown. Wipe around the registration roller by turning it and applying a soft damp cloth. Important ? Do not use chemical cleaners or organic solvents such as thinners or benzene. Close the right cover by pushing the area labeled “PUSH”. Plug in the power cable, and then turn on the power. • The inside of the printer becomes very hot. To avoid burns, do not touch parts labelled “hot surface”, otherwise it could cause a burn. ZDJH206J ZDJH703J ZDJH704J ZDJP708JCleaning the DustProof Glass 29 2 Cleaning the DustProof Glass T h e d u s t p r o o f g l a s s ma y r e q u i r e c l e a n i n g i f w h i t e l i n e s a p p e a r o n print. Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Open the front cover, and then remove the cleaning brush. There are four holes for cleaning the dustproof glass. Slide the cleaning brush in and out slowly 8 to 10 times to clean all four areas. Important ? Do not insert the brush roughly. Doing so may damage the printer. Return the cleaning brush to its original position. Plug in the power cable, and then turn on the power. ZHXH631J ZHXH640J ZDJP707JCleaning and Adjusting the Printer 30 2 Checking the Earth Leakage Breaker T h i s p r i n t e r h a s a n e a r t h l e a k a g e b r ea k e r t o p r e v e n t e l e c t r i c s ho c k . Normally, the earth leakage breaker will be at the “-“ position. Check the earth leakage breaker at least once a month using the following procedure. R CAUTION: Important ? If the earth leakage breaker fails to t r i p w h e n t e s t e d , c o n t a c t y o u r sales or service representative. Make sure the printer’s ground is properly connected. Turn off the power. If the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher is attached to the printer, detach it before checking the earth leakage breaker. Press the earth leakage breaker's test button with a point of an object such as a ballpoint. Make sure the earth leakage breaker trips. Reset the earth leakage breaker by moving it to the “-“ position. Turn on the power. • If the earth leakage breaker has tripped, contact your sales or service representative. Do not reset the earth leakage breaker yourself as you may get an electric shock, the printer may catch fire, or the building earth leakage breaker may trip. ZDJH029J ABT053S1 ABT054S1 ABT055S1Checking the Earth Leakage Breaker 31 2 Note ? If the printer does not start up w h e n t h e m a i n p o w e r i s switched on, check whether the e a r t h l e a k a g e b r e a k e r h a s tripped. If it has, contact your sales or service representative. Do not reset the earth leakage breaker yourself.Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer 32 2 Adjusting the Color Registration After moving the printer, printing on thick paper, or printing repeatedly for some time, color degradation may occur. By performing color registration adjustment, you can restore optimum print quality. Auto Adjust If documents show color degradation after the printer is moved, perform automatic color adjustment. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l ay “M a in t en a n c e”, a n d t h en press the # Enter key. The maintenance menu appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp la y “Co lo r Regi s t .”, and then press the # Enter key. Confirm “Auto Adjust” appears, and then press the # Enter key. Confirm “Now” appears, and then press the # Enter key. The check message appears. Press the # Enter key. Au tomat i c col o r ad jus tme nt be - gins, and the following message appears. Important ? To avoid malfunction, do not turn off the power while “Adjusting...” appears on the display. Automatic color adjustment takes about 50 seconds. A confirmation message appears when complete. Press the # Enter key to return to the color adjustment menu. Menu: Maintenance Maintenance: Color Regist. ACE082S Color Regist.: Auto Adjust Auto Adjust: Now Press # To Adjust Adjusting... Completed Color Regist.: Auto AdjustAdjusting the Color Registration 33 2 When you have made all settings, press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Adjusting the Fuser for Thick Paper If color registration shifts when using thick paper If color registration shifts when using thick paper, adjust the fuser for thick paper. Note ? Fuser adjustment for thick paper is not possible if the toner has almost run out. Carry out this adjustment after changing the toner cartridge. ? Thick paper is needed to make the adjustment. Use the thick paper you normally use. Load thick paper larger than A4 in the bypass tray. Note ? For details about paper sizes the bypass tray can handle and paper loading procedure, see p.45 “Paper and Other Media”. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “M a i n te n an c e”, an d t h e n press the # Enter key. The maintenance menu appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp la y “Co lo r Reg i s t .”, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “F u s e r A d j u s t”, a n d t h e n press the # Enter key. Make sure “Thick Paper” appears, and then press the # Enter key. Limitation ? If the toner cartridge is almost empty, the following message appears on the display: (After changing the tone r cart r idge , carry out fuser adjustment for thick paper. For details about changing the tone r cart r idge , s e e p.4 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”.) Ready ACE082S Menu: Maintenance Maintenance: Color Regist. Color Regist.: Fuser Adjust Fuser Adjust: Thick Paper Failed. Press # to ExitCleaning and Adjusting the Printer 34 2 Make sure the following message appears, and then press the # Enter key. Press the # Enter key. When automatic color adjustment i s c o m p l e t e , t h e c o n f i r m a t i o n m e s s a g e a b o u t p r i n t i n g a t e s t sheet appears. Wait for the follow ing mes sage to appea r, and then press the # Enter key. The following message appears: Make su r e the paper s ize s et in stepH appears, and then press the # Enter key. The Fuser Adjust Sheet is printed. Fo r t e s t sh e et samp l e s , s ee p.35 “Test Sheet Samples”. Note ? In this example, thick A4 paper is loaded in the bypass tray. Compare the color adjustment s h e e t s am p l e wi t h t h e f r am e d white part of the printed pattern. If sample and printed pattern are almost the same, select “0”. Otherwise, select one of the followi n g v a l u e s a c c o r d i n g t o t h e position of the color in the sample: Color at center: 0 Color shifted to left: -1 Color shifted to right: +1 When you select “0”, the printer returns to the previous menu. If you select “-1” or “+1”, the printer returns to stepI. Keep adjusting until you can select “0”. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Press # To Adjust Adjusting... Press # for Test Print (Bypass) Set Sheet, then# A4(297x210) Select Action: 0: Exit Select Action: -1: Re-adjust Select Action: +1: Re-adjust Ready Adjusting the Color Registration 35 2 Test Sheet Samples The following illustration is an example of a test sheet printed during fuser adjustment for thick paper Fuser Adjust SheetCleaning and Adjusting the Printer 36 2 Correcting the Color Gradation Color gradation during color printing varies slightly depending on a number of factors. If you print the same file repeatedly or toner was recently replaced, changes may occur in color tones. When this happens, to obtain suitable print results, color gradation can be corrected, although it is not usually necessary to make any particular settings. Note ? If suitable results cannot be obtained after a single operation, repeat the correction several times, as needed. ? Corrections to color gradation will be applied to all user jobs. ? Use the same paper when printing a run of gradation corrections. If a different type of paper is used, corrections may not be apparent. ? This requires the use of the supp l i ed Co l o r Ca l ib r a t i on S amp l e Sheet. ? Corrections to color gradation are performed in the following order. Set the Gradation Correction Value During printing, you can correct the gradation in two areas: the bright part (highlighted) and the medium part (middle). The correction value for the highlighted and middle parts are set using “Calibr.1” and “Calibr.2” respectively. Print gradation correction sheet 1 Adjust the highlighted part Print gradation correction sheet 2 Adjust the middle parts Save the correction value See "How to view gradation correction sheets". See "How to view gradation correction sheets". Set the correction value. Set the correction value. Print the gradation correction sheet and check the result of the correction. Print the gradation correction sheet and check the result of the correction. ACE097SCorrecting the Color Gradation 37 2 Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l ay “M a in t en a n c e”, a n d t h en press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Color Calibrate”, and then press the # Enter key. Note ? If you want to perform only calibration 2, proceed to step G. Check “Start Calibr. 1” is displayed, and then press the # Enter key. Check “Yes” is displayed, and then p res s the # En t e r k ey to print gradation correction sheet 1. Set the gradation correction value of the highlighted part using correction 1. Note ? Set the correction value using the supplied Color Calibration S am p l e S h e e t a n d g r a d a t i o n c o r r e c t i o n s h e e t 1 p r i n t e d i n step E. For details about gradation correction sheets, see p.39 “Viewing the Color Calibration S amp l e S h e e t a n d Gr ad a t i o n Correction Sheet”. A Set the K (black) gradation. Compare the K correction value ( 0 - 6 ) o f g r a d a t i o n c o r r e c t i o n sheet 1 with the K color sample of the Color Calibration Sample Sheet, and then set the number of the color that matches the color sample the closest using the {UU} and {TT} key. Note ? In this example a setting value of 3 is used for K, M, C, and Y. ? Each time the {UU} or {TT} key is pressed, the value increases or decreases respectively, in increments of 1. ? The correction value can be set between 0 and 6. B Press the # Enter key. Menu: Maintenance Maintenance: Color Calibrate Color Calibrate: Start Calibr. 1 Print Sheet 1?: Yes ACE082S Calibrate 1: K:3 M:3 C/Y:3/3 Calibrate 1: K:2 M:3 C/Y:3/3Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer 38 2 Note ? In this example, the setting value of K is changed to 2. The cursor k moves to M (magenta). C Set M (magenta), C (cyan), and Y ( y e l l o w ) u s i n g t h e s a m e method as in steps and . D After completing all settings, check the cursor k has moved to the location over the Y (yellow ) se t t ing value, and then press the # Enter key. Note ? In this example, the value of M is changed to 2 and the setting value of C to 2. E Check “Yes” is displayed, and press the # Enter key to print the correction result. F Chec k g r adat i on co r r e c t ion sheet 1. To save the correction values, check “Save and Exit”is displayed and press the # Enter key. If you do not want to save the correction values after this procedure, press the {UU} o r { TT } k e y t o d i s p lay “E x i t don't save”, and then press the # Enter key. Note ? If you complete this procedure without saving the correction values, the changes will not be applied to subsequent print jobs. Proceed to calibration 2. If you do not need to perform calibration 2, proceed to step J. Press the {TT} key to display “Start Calibr. 2”, and then press the # Enter key. Check “Yes” is displayed, and then p res s the # En t er key to print gradation correction sheet 2. Perform the same operations as in step and set the gradation correction value of the middle part using calibration 2. Af ter complet ing al l se t tings , press the Online key. “Ready” appears on the display. Calibrate 1: K:2 M:2 C/Y:2/3 Print Result?: Yes Calibrate 1: Save and Exit Calibrate 1: Exit don't save Color Calibrate: Start Calibr. 2 Print Sheet 2?: Yes ReadyCorrecting the Color Gradation 39 2 Viewing the Color Calibration Sample Sheet and Gradation Correction Sheet The color gradation correction value setting sheet contains two color sample columns: the “Sample 1” column for setting the highlight part and the “Sample 2” column for setting the middle part. Similarly, there are two gradation correction sheets: “Gradation correction sheet 1” for setting the highlight part and “Gradation correction sheet 2” for setting the middle part. Gradation correction sheet 1 is used for calibration 1, while Gradation correction sheet 2 is used for calibration 2. Color sample and correction values The following explains how to use the color sample of the Color Calibration Sample Sheet and the correction values of the gradation correction sheet. This explanation uses K (black) as an example. The setting method for M (magenta) is similar. For C/Y (cyan/yellow), the correction value is determined based on combinations of these two colors, although settings are made for each color. Note ? Compare the K correction value (0-6) of gradation correction sheet 1 with the K color sample of the Color Calibration Sample Sheet. Determine the color that matches the color sample the closest, and then set the correction value of that color using the control panel. The currently set correction value is printed in red. K correction valueCleaning and Adjusting the Printer 40 2 Relationship between the gradation correction sheets and the display The printed gradation correction sheet and display correspond as shown in the following diagram. The gradation correction sheets are used to determine the correction values for the colors K (black), M (magenta), C (cyan), and Y (yellow). These values are set using the control panel. Note ? XXXX represents the printer model name. A K (black) correction values Use to adjust the color printed when only black toner is used. The currently set correction value is printed in red. B M (magenta) correction values Use to adjust the color printed when only magenta toner is used. The currently set correction value is printed in red. xxxx 1 xxxx 2 Gradation correction sheet 1 Gradation correction sheet 2 Display (correction value setting screen) ACE098SCorrecting the Color Gradation 41 2 C C (cyan)/Y (yellow) correction values Use to adjust the color printed when cyan and yellow toner are used. For C/Y (cyan/yellow), the correction values are determined based on a combination of these two colors, although settings are made separately for each color. D K, M, C/Y The numerical values set at time of gradation correction sheet printing are shown. These correspond to the numerical values set using the control panel. Resetting the gradation correction values to the initial values Reset the correction value default. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l ay “M a in t en a n c e”, a n d t h en press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Color Calibrate”, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Reset”, and then press the # Enter key. A confirmation message appears. Press the # Enter key. A message indicating the gradat i o n c o r r e c t i o n v a l u e s h a v e r e - turned to their defaults appears. After about 2 seconds, the display returns to the “Color Calibrate: Reset” menu. Press the Online key. “Ready” appears on the panel display. Menu: Maintenance Maintenance: Color Calibrate ACE082S Color Calibrate: Reset Press # to reset calibration Calibration was reset ReadyCleaning and Adjusting the Printer 42 2 Adjusting Image Density Adjust image density when print becomes hazy gray or the image looks patchy. Important ? Extreme settings may cause output to appear dirty. ? Image density settings should be made from the application or the printer driver, whenever possible. Note ? Changing image density settings might cause deterioration in color balance. We recommend leaving image density at the factory default setting. Press the Menu key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l ay “M a in t en a n c e”, a n d t h en press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Image Density”, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select the color you want to adjust, and then press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to set the ima g e d e n s i t y v a l u e , a n d t h e n press the # Enter key. Note ? You can adjust image density in seven increments, from -3 to +3. I n c r e a s i n g t h e v a l u e m a k e s printout darker; decreasing the value makes printout lighter. T o a d j u s t a no t h e r c o lo r , r ep ea t steps D and E. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Menu: Maintenance Maintenance: Image Density ACE082S Image Density: Black Black: (-3 +3) 0 Ready Adjusting Tray Registration 43 2 Adjusting Tray Registration You can adju s t th e r eg i s t rat ion of each tray. The vertical adjustment is used for all trays. Normally, you need not update the registration. But when the optional paper feed unit or the duplex unit is installed, updating is useful in some cases. The following procedure describes how to adjust tray 3. The same procedure applies to other trays as well. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l ay “M a in t en a n c e”, a n d t h en press the # Enter key. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “R e g i s t r a t i o n”, a n d t h e n press the # Enter key. Print the test sheet to preview the settings. A Confirm “Prt. Test Sheet” appears, and then press the # Enter key. B Press the {UU} or {TT} key to select the tray to adjust, and then press the # Enter key. Confirm the position of the image on the test sheet, and then adjust the registration value. The following are examples for adj u s t i n g t h e m a r g i n o n t h e t e s t sheet: A Press the Escape key. Menu: Maintenance Maintenance: Registration ACE082S Registration: Prt. Test Sheet Prt. Test Sheet: Tray 3Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer 44 2 B Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Adjustment”, and then press the # Enter key. C Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y t h e t r a y t o a d j u s t , a n d then press the # Enter key. D Press the {UU} or {TT} key to set t h e r eg i s t ra t io n v a lu e d ig i t s (mm). Note ? Increase the value to shift the print area in a positive direct i on ; de c r ea s e to shi f t in a negative direction. ? Pressing the {UU} or {TT} key makes the value increase or decrease in increments of 1.0 mm. E Press the # Enter key. F Press the Escape key. The current setting appears for 2 seconds, and then the printer returns to the previous menu. Print the test sheet to check the settings you have made. Press the On Line key. Registration: “Ready” appears on the display. Adjustment Adjustment: Vert.: Tray 3 Vert.: Tray 3: (-5.0 +5.0) 0 Feed Direction Printable area ZDJX900J Ready 45 3. Paper and Other Media Paper and Other Supported Media Paper Sizes This section describes the type, size, feed direction, and maximum amount of paper that can be loaded into each tray. Note ? The following symbols and terminology are used to represent the feed direction. ? Be careful of the paper feed direction. The direction is determined based on paper size. Input Paper Sizes (Metric version) In this manual On the display Paper feed direction L ? (Feed direction) A4 (210 × 297) 8 1/2 × 11 Short-edge feed direction K ? (Feed direction) A4 (297 × 210) 11 × 8 1/2 Long-edge feed direction Feed direction Size (mm) Bypass tray Paper tray (Tray 1) Paper feed unit (Tray 2/3/4) 2000-sheet Large Capacity Tray A3 L 297 × 420 B4 L 257 × 364 A4 L 210 × 297 K 297 × 210 B5 L 182 × 257 K 257 × 182 A5 L 148 × 210 K 210 × 148Paper and Other Media 46 3 • The size is exclusive. • The size is supported and the printer selects it automatically. • The size is supported, but it should be selected using the control panel. • The size is supported, but it should be set as a custom size using the control panel. B6 L 128 × 182 A6 L 105 × 148 12” × 18” L 305 × 457 DLT (11” × 17”) L 279 × 432 Legal (LG, 8 1 /2” × 14”) L 216 × 356 Letter (LT, 8 1 /2” × 11”) L 216 × 279 K 279 × 216 5 1 /2” × 8 1 /2” L 140 × 216 Executive (Exec., 7 1 /4” × 10 1 /2”) L 184 × 276 K 276 × 184 Folio (8 1 /4” × 13”) L 210 × 330 Foolscap (F4, 8 1 /2” × 13”) L 216 × 330 F/GL (8” × 13”) L 203 × 330 Com10 Env (9 1 /2” × 4 1 /8”) K 241.3 × 104.8 C5 (9.02” × 6.38”) K 229 × 162 C6 (6.38” × 4.49”) K 162 × 114 DL Env (8.66” × 4.33”) K 220 × 110 Monarch (7 1 /2” × 3 7 /8”) K 190.5 × 98.4 Custom Size - - * 8K (10 1 /2” × 15.35”) L 267 × 390 16K (7.68” × 10 1 /2”) L 195 × 267 K 267 × 195 Feed direction Size (mm) Bypass tray Paper tray (Tray 1) Paper feed unit (Tray 2/3/4) 2000-sheet Large Capacity TrayPaper and Other Supported Media 47 3 • * The supported size is approximately 90 - 305 mm in width, and 148 - 457 mm in length. The supported size may differ depending on the printer language you use. Set as a custom size setting using the control panel. When using the RPCS TM printer driver, sheets of up to 1260 mm in length can be set. • The size is not supported. Input Paper Sizes (Inch version) Feed direction Size (inch) Bypass tray Paper tray (Tray 1) Paper feed unit (Tray 2/3/4) 2000-sheet Large Capacity Tray 12” × 18” L 12” × 18” DLT (11” × 17”) L 11” × 17” Legal (LG) L 8 1 /2” × 14” Letter (LT) L 8 1 /2” × 11” K 11” × 8 1 /2” 5 1 /2” × 8 1 /2” L 5 1 /2” × 8 1 /2” Executive (Exec.) L 7 1 /4” × 10 1 /2” K 10 1 /2” × 7 1 /4” A3 L 11.26” × 16.54” B4 L 10.12” × 14.33” A4 L 8.26” × 5.83” K 5.83” × 8.26” B5 L 7.17” × 10.12” K 10.12” × 7.17” A5 L 5.83” × 8.26” K 8.26” × 5.83” B6 L 5.04” × 7.17” A6 L 4.13” × 5.63” Folio L 13” × 8 1 /4” Foolscap F4 K 13” × 8 1 /2”Paper and Other Media 48 3 • The size is exclusive. • The size is supported, and the printer selects it automatically. • The size is supported, but it should be selected using the control panel. • The size is supported, but it should be set as a custom size using the control panel. • * The supported size is approximately 3.5 - 12.01 inch in width, and 5.8 - 18 inch in length. The supported size may differ depending on the printer language you use. Set as a custom size setting using the control panel. When using the RPCS TM printer driver, sheets of up to 49.61 inch in length can be set. • The size is not supported. F/GL K 13” × 8” Com10 Env K 9 1 /2” × 4 1 /8” C5 K 9.02” × 6.38” C6 K 6.38” × 4.49” DL Env K 8.66” × 4.33” Monarch K 7 1 / 2” × 3 7 /8” Custom Size - - * 8K L 10 1 /2” × 15.35” 16K L 7.68” × 10 1 /2” K 10 1 /2” × 7.68” Feed direction Size (inch) Bypass tray Paper tray (Tray 1) Paper feed unit (Tray 2/3/4) 2000-sheet Large Capacity TrayPaper and Other Supported Media 49 3 Paper weight and number of sheets to be set *1 Check that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. Output Paper Sizes (Metric version) Supported paper weight Maximum number of sheets (plain paper) *1 Tray 1 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb) 500 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Tray 2 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb) 500 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Bypass tray 60 - 163 g/m2 (14 - 42 lb) 100 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 × 1) 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb) 500 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500 × 2) 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb) 1000 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Paper Bank Type 7100 (2000-sheet large capacity tray) 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb) 2000 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) SR770 (2 tray finisher) 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb) 2000 (80 g/m2 , 20 lb) Feed direction Size (mm) Standard tray External tray *1 2 tray finisher Booklet finisher A3 L 297 × 420 B4 L 257 × 364 A4 L 210 × 297 K 297 × 210 B5 L 182 × 257 K 257 × 182 A5 L 148 × 210 K 210 × 148 B6 L 128 × 182 A6 L 105 × 148 12” × 18” L 305 × 457 DLT (11” × 17”) L 279 × 432 Legal (LG, 8 1 /2” × 14”) L 216 × 356 Letter (LT, 8 1 /2” × 11”) L 216 × 279 K 279 × 216 5 1 /2” × 8 1 /2” L 140 × 216Paper and Other Media 50 3 • The size is supported. • The size is not supported. *1 The external tray does not support duplex printing. Output Paper Sizes (Inch version) Executive (Exec., 7 1 /4” × 10 1 /2”) L 184 × 276 K 276 × 184 Folio (8 1 /4” × 13”) L 210 × 330 Foolscap (F4, 8 1 /2” × 13”) L 216 × 330 F/GL (8” × 13”) L 203 × 330 Com10 Env (9 1 /2” × 4 1 /8”) K 241.3 × 104.8 C5 (9.02” × 6.38”) K 229 × 162 C6 (6.38” × 4.49”) K 162 × 114 DL Env (8.66” × 4.33”) K 220 × 110 Monarch (7 1 /2” × 3 7 /8”) K 190.5 × 98.4 Custom Size - - 8K (10 1 /2” × 15.35”) L 267 × 390 16K (7.68” × 10 1 /2”) L 195 × 267 K 267 × 195 Feed direction Size (inch) Standard tray External tray *1 2 tray finisher Booklet finisher 12” × 18” L 12” × 18” DLT (11” × 17”) L 11” × 17” Legal (LG) L 8 1 /2” × 14” Letter (LT) L 8 1 /2” × 11” K 11” × 8 1 /2” 5 1 /2” × 8 1 /2” L 5 1 /2” × 8 1 /2” Feed direction Size (mm) Standard tray External tray *1 2 tray finisher Booklet finisherPaper and Other Supported Media 51 3 • The size is supported and it should be set using the control panel. There is no dial in the tray. • The size is not supported. *1 The external tray does not support duplex printing. Executive (Exec.) L 7 1 /4” × 10 1 /2” K 10 1 /2” × 7 1 /4” A3 L 11.26” × 16.54” B4 L 10.12” × 14.33” A4 L 8.26” × 5.83” K 5.83” × 8.26” B5 L 7.17” × 10.12” K 10.12” × 7.17” A5 L 5.83” × 8.26” K 8.26” × 5.83” B6 L 5.04” × 7.17” A6 L 4.13” × 5.63” Folio L 8 1 /4” × 13” Foolscap F4 L 8 1 /2” × 13” F/GL L 8” × 13” Com10 Env K 9 1 /2” × 4 1 /8” C6 K 6.38” × 4.49” C5 K 9.02” × 6.38” DL Env K 8.66” × 4.33” Monarch K 7 1 /2” × 3 7 /8” Custom Size - - 8K L 10 1 /2” × 15.35” 16K L 7.68” × 10 1 /2” K 10 1 /2” × 7.68” Feed direction Size (inch) Standard tray External tray *1 2 tray finisher Booklet finisherPaper and Other Media 52 3 Paper Recommendations Loading Paper Important ? Do not use ink-jet printer paper because it may stick to the fusing unit and cause a paper misfeed. ? When printing on OHP transparencies that have a print side, load them with the print side over on the bypass tray. Not taking this precaution may cause them to stick to the fusing unit and cause misfeeds. ? Print quality cannot be guaranteed if recommended paper is not used. For details about recommended paper, contact your sales or service representative. ? Do not use paper that has already been printed onto by other printers. Storing Paper • Paper should always be stored properly. Improperly storing paper might result in poor print quality, paper misfeeds, or printer damage. Recommendations are as follows: • Avoid storing paper in humid areas. • Avoid exposing paper to direct sunlight. • Store paper on a flat surface. • Keep open reams of paper in the packaging it came in. Types of Paper and Other Media Plain Paper • Tray 1/2 can hold up to 500 sheets. Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500×1) can hold up to 500 sheets. Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 (500×2) can hold up to 1000 sheets. Paper Bank Type 7100 can hold up to 2000 sheets. Check that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. • The bypass tray can accommodate sheets 90-305 mm(3.5-12.01") wide and 148-457 mm(5.8-18") long. However, the paper size must be set using the control panel. When using the RPCS TM printer driver, sheets of up to 1260 mm(49.61") in length can be set. • When printing on the reverse side of plain paper that is already printed on, you should load it on the bypass tray and select [Plain (Duplex Backside)] from [Paper type:] using the printer driver.Paper Recommendations 53 3 Thick Paper • Use the bypass tray • The bypass tray can hold up to 135 kg (163 g/m2 ) of paper weight. Print quality on thicker paper cannot be guaranteed. • Check that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. • When printing on thick paper, select thick paper mode using the printer driver. • When printing on the reverse side of plain paper that is already printed on, you should load it on the bypass tray and select [Thick (Duplex Backside)] from [Paper type:] using the printer driver. Note ? The number of sheets that can be set may vary depending on paper thickness and type. OHP transparencies • When printing on OHP transparencies, use the bypass tray. • Load OHP transparencies on the tray with the print side over, otherwise they may stick to the fusing unit and cause a misfeed. • Remove unused OHP transparencies from the bypass tray after you are finished printing. They may stick together if left in the tray. • When printing on OHP transparencies, you should select the OHP transparency mode using the printer driver. • Check that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. • When printing multiple OHP transparencies, remove each sheet from the tray one by one before the next is printed out, or select [Slip sheet] in the printer driver. For details about using “Slip sheet”, see the printer driver Help.Paper and Other Media 54 3 Envelopes Important ? Only envelopes A and B as shown below are supported. *1 Misfeeds might also occur when using envelopes A and B depending on the length and shape of the flaps. • When printing on envelopes, use the bypass tray, and select [Thick Paper] as the paper type on the Paper Input menu on the control panel. See p.65 “Specifying a paper type for the Bypass Tray”. • Specifications for envelopes are as follows: • You can load up to 10 envelopes (72 - 92 g/m2 , 19 - 24 lb) in the bypass tray at the same time, without compressing them. Check the envelopes are not damp, and the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark on the side guide. • Check the print side is facing up when loading onto the bypass tray. • When loading envelopes, be sure to unfold the flaps and position them opposite to the paper feed direction. Supported *1 Supported *1 Not supported Metric version Inch version Weight 72 - 90 g/m2 19 - 24 lb Recommended weight and size 72 g/m 2 , 114 × 162 mm (C6 Env) 24 lb, 3 7 /8” × 7 1 /2” (Monarch)Paper Recommendations 55 3 • Make the printer driver setting for rotating the print image by 180 degrees. For details, see the printer driver Help. • Check there is no air in the envelopes before loading. • To get better print quality, it is recommended that you set the right, left, top, and bottom print margin, to at least 15 mm (0.6”) each. • Do not print on both sides of envelopes. • Load only one size and type of envelope at a time. • Before loading envelopes, flatten leading edges (the side going into the printer) by pressing a pencil or ruler across them. • Before loading envelopes, check they are rectangular in shape. • Supported sizes for envelopes are listed on p.45 “Paper and Other Media”. Paper not supported by this printer Avoid using the following unsupported types of paper: • Ink-jet printer paper • Bent, folded, or creased paper • Curled or twisted paper • Torn paper • Wrinkled paper • Damp paper • Paper that is dry enough to emit static electricity • Paper that has already been printed onto, except a preprinted letterhead paper • Coated paper • Special paper, such as thermal paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, and conductive paper • Paper whose weight is heavier or lighter than the limitation • Paper with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing • Label paper on which glue or base paper is exposed • Paper with clips or staplesPaper and Other Media 56 3 Print Area The following illustration shows the print area for this printer. Be sure to set the print margins correctly using your application. A : Print area Note ? Print area may vary depending on paper size, printer language, and printer driver settings. ? If you load paper larger than A3L in the bypass tray, hold it steady so it feeds properly. Paper feed accuracy and print quality may vary according to paper thickness and width. Do a test print to check the paper you want to use gives satisfactory results. ? The maximum length of the print area is 457 mm (18") in the paper feed direction (at 1200×1200 dpi). If paper exceeding 457 mm (18") in the paper feed direction is used, the machine may not print properly. 4.2mm (0.166 inch) 4.2mm (0.166 inch) 4.2mm (0.166 inch) 4.2mm (0.166 inch) Feed DirectionLoading Paper 57 3 Loading Paper Load paper and change the paper size in tray 1, tray 2, and the optional paper feed unit by following the procedures below. Important ? Tray 1 uses only 11 × 8 1 /2 K paper exclusively. Load 11 × 8 1 /2 paper at all times. ? The 2000-sheet large capacity tray uses only 11 × 8 1 /2 K paper exclusively. Load 11 × 8 1 /2 paper at all times. ? If you want to load A4 K paper in tray 1 and the optional 2000-sheet large capacity tray, contact your sales or service representative. Reference p . 4 5 “P a p e r S i z e s” f o r d e t a i l s about paper to be loaded in the paper tray and optional Paper Feed Unit Type 7100. Loading Paper in Tray 1 Important ? Tray 1 uses only 11 × 8 1 /2 K paper exclusively. Load 11 × 8 1 /2 paper at all times. ? If you want to load A4 K paper in tray 1, contact your sales or service representative. Slowly pull out the paper tray, until it stops. Load paper into the tray with the print side down. Important ? Check that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. Carefully slide the paper tray into the printer, until it stops. ZDJH003J ZDJY001JPaper and Other Media 58 3 Loading Paper in Tray 2 and the Optional Paper Feed Unit Type 7100 Paper of different sizes can be loaded in tray 2 and the 500- and 1000-sheet paper feed units (optional) by adjusting the positions of the side and end guides. This section describes loading paper in tray 2. Note ? If the side and end guides are in the right positions for the paper to be loaded, they do not have to be adjusted. Slowly slide the paper tray out, until it stops. Adjust the side guide according to the size and orientation of the paper as follows: A Release the side guide lock. B Press the side guide green lever ( ), adjust the position of the guide by moving it in the direction of the arrow ( ). Adjust the end guide according to the size and orientation of the paper by gripping both edges of the guide ( ), and then moving it in the direction of the arrow ( ). Align all four sides of the paper stack, and then load it in the tray. Important ? Check that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. ZDJH005J ZDJY003J ZDJY802J ZHXH760J ZDJY901JLoading Paper 59 3 Make sure the paper is fixed in p l a c e , a n d t h e n l o c k t h e s i d e guide. Slowly slide the paper tray back until it stops. Important ? Do not slide the paper tray in with force. If you do, the front and side guides might move. ? Be sure to adjust the side guides to the paper size, or misfeeds might occur. Loading paper in Paper Bank Type 7100 (2000-sheet large capacity tray) Important ? The 2000-sheet large capacity tray uses only 11 × 8 1 /2 K paper exclusively. Load 11 × 8 1 /2 paper at all times. ? If you want to load A4 K paper in the 2000-sheet large capacity tray, contact your sales or service representative. Slowly pull out the paper tray, until it stops. With the print side down, align a l l fou r s id e s o f th e two pap er stacks, and then load them next to each other in the tray. Each side has a limit of 1,000 sheets. Important ? Align the paper and load the stacks against the left and right walls, or misfeeds might occur. ? Check that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. Slowly push in the paper tray until it stops. ZDJY007J ACE025S ZDJY009JPaper and Other Media 60 3 If you load a paper size that is not selected automatically Note ? Paper sizes not selected automatically are B5L, 8 1 /2 × 14L, 8 1 /2 × 11L, 7 1 /4 × 10 1 /2L, 8 × 13L, 8 1 /2 × 13L, 8 1 /4 × 13L, 8K (10 1 /2 × 15.35)L, 16K (7.68 × 10 1 /2)L, 16K (10 1 /2 × 7.68)K. Reference p.58 “Loading Paper in Tray 2 and the Optional Paper Feed Unit Type 7100” for details about how to load the paper Important ? Tray 1 uses only 11 × 8 1 /2 K paper exclusively. Load 11 × 8 1 /2 paper at all times. ? 2000-sheet large capacity tray uses only 11 × 8 1 /2 K paper exclusivel y . L o a d 1 1 × 8 1 /2 p a p e r a t a l l times. ? If you want to load A4 K paper in tray 1 and the optional 2000-sheet large capacity tray, contact your sales or service representative. This section uses Letter (8 1 /2 × 11) L as an example. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “P a p e r I n p u t”, a n d t h e n press the # Enter key. The paper selection menu appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Tray Paper Size”, and then press the # Enter key. The paper tray selection menu appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the target pape r t r ay, and then press the # Enter key. The paper size selection menu appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the loaded paper size, and then press the # Enter key. After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. This completes the setting change. ACE082S Menu: Paper Input Paper Input: Tray Paper Size Tray Paper Size: Tray 2 Tray 2 : 8 1/2 x 11 Ready Loading Paper 61 3 Important ? After printing on a paper size that is not selected automatically, if you want to print on paper that is selected automatically again, reload the paper, proceed to step G, and return the setting to “Auto”. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “P a p e r I n p u t”, a n d t h e n press the # Enter key. The paper selection menu appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Tray Paper Size”, and then press the # Enter key. The paper tray selection menu appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the target paper t r ay, and then press the # Enter key. The paper size selection menu appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “ Auto”, and then press the # Enter key. After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Changing the paper type By selecting the paper type you want to load, the printer performs better. You can select from the following paper types: • Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Spec i al Pape r , Co lo r Pape r , Le t t e r - head, Preprinted Paper Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Menu: Paper Input Paper Input: Tray Paper Size Tray Paper Size: Tray 2 ACE082S Tray 2 *Auto Ready ACE082SPaper and Other Media 62 3 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “P a p e r I n p u t”, a n d t h e n press the # Enter key. The paper selection menu appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “P a p e r T y p e”, a n d t h e n press the # Enter key. The paper tray selection menu appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the target paper t r ay, and then press the # Enter key. The paper type selection menu appears. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the loaded paper type, and then press the # Enter key. After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu. Press the On Line key. “Ready” appears on the display. Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray Besides plain paper, you can use the bypass tray to load thick paper, envel o p e s , OHP t r a n s p a r e n c i e s , p a p e r longer than A3L, and paper that cannot be loaded in the paper trays or paper feed unit. • Set the size and direction of the loaded paper on the control panel or with the printer driver. Make sure the settings do not conflict. Otherwise, the paper may jam or the print quality may be affected. Note ? The bypass tray can accommodate sheets 90-305 mm (3.5-12.01") wide a n d 1 4 8 - 4 5 7 m m ( 5 . 8 - 1 8 " ) l o n g . However, the paper size must be set using the control panel. When using the RPCS TM printer driver, sheets of up to 1260 mm(49.61") in length can be set. ? If you load custom size paper or special paper, select the paper size using the control panel. The RPCS TM printer driver can select the paper size using the printer driver properties. The paper size selected using the printer driver overrides that selected using the control pane l . Se e p .64 “Sp e c if y i ng cu s tom size paper for the Bypass Tray”. ? If you load thick paper, OHP transparencies, or envelopes, make the se tt ings for thi ck paper or OHP transparencies using the control panel or printer driver. See p.65 “Specifying a paper type for the Bypass Tray”. Menu: Paper Input Paper Input: Paper Type Paper Type: Tray 2 Tray 2 Recycled Paper Ready Loading Paper 63 3 ? The number of pages that can be loaded in the bypass tray differs depending on paper type. Check that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. ? When loading paper in the bypass tray, use L orientation if possible. ? When loading the bypass tray with paper that will be delivered into the top-left tray, load the paper so the side you want to print on faces up. Limitation ? You cannot use the following functions when printing on paper loaded in the bypass tray: • Duplex Print • Job Separation • Staple/Punch • Auto Tray Select Open the bypass tray. Note ? If you load A4 or larger size paper, pull out the bypass tray extension, and then flip it open. Slide the side guides outward ( ), and then load paper pr int side up, until it stops ( ). Adjust the side guides to fit the paper width. Important ? Check that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the tray. ZDJH202J ZDJH203J ZDJH204J ZDJH205JPaper and Other Media 64 3 ? Shuffle the paper before loading the stack onto the tray, so multiple sheets are not fed in together. Set the paper size using the control panel as follows: A Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display B Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display “Paper Input” menu, and then press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: C Check “Bypass Size” appears, and then pres s the # En t e r key. The following message appears on the display. D Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the size and orientation of the paper in the bypass tray. A ft er abou t two s ec ond s , the display returns to the menu. E Press the On Line key. “R e ad y” a p p e a r s o n t h e d i s - play. Specifying custom size paper for the Bypass Tray Important ? The paper size selected using the printer driver overrides that selected using the control panel. You do not have to make settings using the control panel if you already made t h e m u s i n g t h e p r i n t e r d r i v e r . However, when printing with a printer driver other than the RPCS TM printer driver, you must make the settings using the control pane l . Fo r d et ai l s abou t th e p rin t e r driver, see Help. ? The printer cannot print from applications that do not support custom size paper. Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Menu: Paper Input Paper Input: Bypass Size Bypass Size *11 x 17 ACE082S Ready ACE082SLoading Paper 65 3 Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “P a p e r I n p u t”, a n d t h e n press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display. Check “Bypass Size” appears, and then press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “Cu s t om S i z e”, a n d t h e n press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to set the horizontal value, and then press the # Enter key . The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to set the vertical value, and then press the # Enter key . After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu. Press the On Line key . The following message appears on the display: Specifying a paper type for the Bypass Tray By selecting the paper type you want to load, the printer performs better. You can select from the following paper types: • Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Spec i al Pape r , Co lo r Pape r , Le t t e r - h e a d , P r e p r i n t e d P a p e r , O H P Transparencies, Thick Paper, Plain Paper (Duplex), Thick Paper (Duplex) Limitation ? You cannot use the following functions when printing on paper loaded in the bypass tray: • Duplex Print • Job Separation • Staple, Punch • Auto Tray Select Important ? Be sure to select the paper type when you load labels, thick paper, or OHP transparencies in the bypass tray. Note ? When printing labels, select thick paper as the paper type. Menu: Paper Input Paper Input: Bypass Size Bypass Size: Custom Size Custom Size: Vert. 11.69" Custom Size: Horiz. 8.27" Ready Paper and Other Media 66 3 Press the Menu key. “Menu” appears on the display. Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “P a p e r I n p u t”, a n d t h e n press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “P a p e r T y p e”, a n d t h e n press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to disp l a y “B y p a s s T r a y”, a n d t h e n press the # Enter key. The following message appears on the display: Press the {UU} or {TT} key to display the targe t paper type, and then press the # Enter key. After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu. Press the On Line key. The following message appears on the display: Menu: Paper Input Paper Input: Paper Type Paper Type: Bypass Tray ACE082S Bypass Tray: *Thick Paper Ready 67 4. Troubleshooting Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel This section explains what the messages that appear on the control panel mean and what to do when a particular message appears. Messages (in alphabetical order) Messages Description Recommended Action Add Staples The stapler is out of staples. Job is not stapled. Replace staples. See p.104 “Adding Staples”. Add Toner/Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black The printer is out of the indicated toner(s). Replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color(s). See p.4 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”. Add Toner: Cyan The printer is out of toner (C). Replace the toner cartridge (C). See p.4 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”. Add Toner: Magenta The printer is out of toner (M). Replace the toner cartridge (M). See p.4 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge””. Add Toner: Yellow The printer is out of toner (Y). Replace the toner cartridge (Y). See p.4 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”. Calibrating... The printer is calibrating the color. Wait a while. Call Service: EC Power Off On If Error Reoccur Call Service A communication error sent from the engine to the controller. A communication error sent from the engine to the controller. Cannot check Signal in Ad hoc An attempt to check the radio signal was made while the communication mode was set to [Ad hoc] in the interface settings. To check the radio signal , select Infrastructure in the communication mode settings. Change Setting Tray # Tray Paper Size: Paper Type: The paper size and type setting in the tray differs from that of actual paper size and type in the tray. Load paper of the selected size in the tray, and then change the paper size setting with the control panel. Or, press the Form Feed key, and then select the tray using the control panel. Or, press the Job Reset key to cancel the print job.Troubleshooting 68 4 Close Duplex Unit Cover The cover for the duplex unit is open. Close the cover for the duplex unit. Close Finisher Front Cover The front cover for the finisher is open. Close the front cover for the finisher. Close Finisher Upper Cover The finisher upper cover is open. Close the upper cover for the finisher. Close Finisher Upper Cover The paper entrance cover for the finisher is open. Close the upper entrance cover for the finisher. Close Front Cover The front cover is open. Close the front cover for the printer. Close Lower Right Cover The right cover for the paper feed table/Large Capacity Tray is open. Close the right cover for the paper feed table/Large Capacity Tray. Close Right Cover The right cover is open. Close the right cover. Close Upper Left Cover The upper left cover (the cover for the fusing unit) is open. Close the upper left cover. Close Upper Right Cover The upper right cover (the cover for the toner cartridge) is open. Close the upper right cover. DHCP assigned Cannot change An attempt to change the IP address, subnet mask or gateway address was made while DHCP was set to [On]. Make the change after setting DHCP to [Off]. Driver Setting Error (Memory) The printer identified a download error. This error may occur when the installed memory amount is less than the driver setting. The printer identified a download error. This error may occur when the installed memory amount is less than the driver setting. Duplex Cancelled The setting of Duplex Print has been cancelled. (a) To print the image correctly, add memory to the printer. (b) Be sure to use the correct paper. Empty Punch Receptacle The Punch Chips container is full of punch chips. Empty the punch waste box. See p.108 “Removing Punchhole Chips”. If the message appears the punch waste box is not full, remove the Punch-hole chips on the top of the punch waste box. See p.108 “If the message appears even after removing the Punch-hole chips”. Energy Save Mode In Energy Save Mode level 2. No action required. Messages Description Recommended ActionError & Status Messages on the Control Panel 69 4 Error: Enter 10 or 26 Characters An ID with an invalid number of digits was entered for the WEP key. Enter the correct number of digits for the WEP key. Error: Enter 5 or 13 Characters An ID with an invalid number of digits was entered for the WEP key. Enter the correct number of digits for the WEP key. Error: Tray # Form Feed Or Job Reset Then Power OffOn The printer identified the failure of the indicated paper tray. The job is not printed. Apply Form Feed from another tray or cancel the job, and then switch your printer Off, then back On. If the error continues, contact your sales or service representative. Exceeded Max. Pages (Collate) The printer identified a collation page overflow error. Add extra RAM. Install the optional hard disk drive. Exceeded Max. Stored Files The maximum number of stored files has been exceeded during Sample Print of Locked Print. Delete stored files. Exceeded Max. Stored Pages The maximum number of pages has been exceeded during Sample Print of Locked Print. Reduce the number of pages to print. Hardware Problem Ethernet The printer identified an Ethernet error. Turn the power off, and then on. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. Hardware Problem Finisher There is a problem with the finisher. Turn the power off, and then on. Remove and re-install the finisher correctly. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. See p.2 “Detaching and Reattaching the Options”. Hardware Problem HDD The printer identified a HDD Board error. Turn the power off, and then on. Remove and re-install the HDD board correctly. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. See “Printer Hard Disk”, Setup Guide. Messages Description Recommended ActionTroubleshooting 70 4 Hardware Problem IEEE 1394 The printer identified an IEEE 1394 interface board error. Turn the power off, and then on. Remove and re-install the IEEE 1394 interface board correctly. A Check the IEEE 1394 interface board is correctly attached to the computer. B Check the IEEE 1394 interface cable is securely connected. C Unplug the IEEE 1394 interface cable which is connected to the printer. D Restart the computer. If the message appears even after executing above operation, proceed to the following steps. E Execute the utility tool for IEEE 1394 interface board that is stored in the following path in the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”: UTILITY\1394 Important ? For details about using the utility tool for IEEE 1394, see the README file in the same directory in the CDROM. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. See “IEEE 1394 Interface Board”, Setup Guide. Hardware Problem Option RAM The printer identified an optional RAM error. Turn the power off, and then on. Remove and re-install the optional RAM. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. See “Memory Unit (SDRAM Module)”, Setup Guide. Messages Description Recommended ActionError & Status Messages on the Control Panel 71 4 Hardware Problem Parallel I/F There is a problem with the parallel interface. If you use the parallel I/F, replace the interface cable that caused the error. Turn the power off, and then on. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. Hardware Problem Printer font Problems with the font file for the Printer module. It is necessary to replace the print module. Hardware Problem Staple Unit There is a misfeed in the finisher or a problem with the staple unit. Remove misfed paper. Turn the power off, and then on. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. See p.93 “When “Remove Misfeed R: Finisher” Appears”. See p.101 “Removing Jammed Staples”. Hardware Problem Tray # There is a problem with the paper lift motor of Tray #. Turn the power off, and then on. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. Hardware Problem Wireless Board An error was detected in the IEEE 802.11b interface unit or the Bluetooth interface unit. Turn the power off, and then on. Remove and re-install the IEEE 802.11b interface unit or the Bluetooth interface unit correctly. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. See “IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit” or “Bluetooth Interface Unit”, Setup Guide. Hardware Problem Wireless Card The IEEE 802.11b interface unit or the Bluetooth interface unit could not be detected when the power was turned on. The IEEE 802.11b interface card or the Bluetooth interface card was removed after the power was turned on. An error was detected in the IEEE 802.11b interface card or the Bluetooth interface card. Turn the power off, and then on. Remove and re-install the IEEE 802.11b interface unit or the Bluetooth interface unit correctly. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. See “IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit” or “Bluetooth Interface Unit”, Setup Guide. Messages Description Recommended ActionTroubleshooting 72 4 HDD Full The maximum HDD area size for form/font has been exceeded. Delete disused form/font types. An HDD overflow error occurred during Sample Print or Locked Print. Delete stored files, or reduce the size of the Sample Print file or Locked Print file. HDD Not Installed The user tried to print the Locked Print data without the HDD installed. If you use the Locked Print feature, be sure you install HDD. If the error continues, contact your sales or service representative. Hex Dump Mode In Hex Dump Mode. No action required. I/O Buffer Overflow The maximum size of the I/O buffer has been exceeded. Increase the size of the I/O buffer through the I/F Setup. Invalid Password Try Again The password entered using the control panel is not correct. Enter the correct password using the control panel. Load Paper Tray # The indicated tray is out of paper. #: tray number Load paper into the indicated paper tray. Load Paper Tray Paper Size:Paper Type: A The printer received a request for a paper type, or paper size not supported by printer, and Tray Locking is not applicable. B The paper type and size loaded in the tray which the printer searched using Tray Locking is invalid for Duplex Print. Change the setting of the indicated paper input tray, or press the Job Reset key. Form Feed is not possible here. Loading Toner... The printer is loading toner. Wait a while. Menu Protected Cannot Change The menu is protected and the setting cannot be changed. Wait for two seconds until the previous display appears. No Files Exist There are no files available for Sample Print job or Locked Print job. Wait for two seconds until the previous display appears. Offline The printer is offline and cannot print data. Press the Online key. Please Wait The printer is initializing the development unit. Wait a while. Processing... Print data is being processed. Wait a while. Messages Description Recommended ActionError & Status Messages on the Control Panel 73 4 Punch-hole Chips are Full The Punch Chips container is full of punch chips. Empty the punch waste box. See p.108 “Removing Punchhole Chips”. If the message appears the punch waste box is not full, remove the Punch-hole chips on the top of the punch waste box. See p.108 “If the message appears even after removing the Punch-hole chips”. Ready The default ready message. The printer is ready to use. No action required. Remove Misfeed A:Internal Path See Instructions in Front Cover There is a misfeed in the printer. Remove the misfed paper following the instructions inside the front cover. For details, see p.91 “When “Remove Misfeed A:Internal Path” Appears”. Remove Misfeed B: Fusing Unit See Instructions in Front Cover There is a misfeed in the fusing unit. Remove the misfed paper following the instructions inside the front cover. For details, see p.91 “When “Remove Misfeed B: Fusing Unit” Appears”. Remove Misfeed R: Finisher Open Finisher Cover There is a misfeed in the finisher. Open the finisher cover and remove the misfed paper. For details, see p.93 “When “Remove Misfeed R: Finisher” Appears”. Remove Misfeed Y: Paper Tray See Instructions in Front Cover There is a misfeed in the specified input tray, or the printer is not feeding paper. Remove the misfed paper following the instructions inside the front cover. For details, see p.97 “When “Remove Misfeed Y: Paper Tray” Appears”. Remove Misfeed Z1: Duplex Unit See Instructions in Front Cover There is a misfeed in the duplex unit. Remove the misfed paper following the instructions inside the front cover. For details, see p.97 “When “Remove Misfeed Z1:Duplex Unit” Appears”. Remove Misfeed Z2:Dup.Feed Unit See Instructions in Front Cover There is a misfeed in the duplex feed unit. Remove the misfed paper. See p.98 “When “Remove Misfeed Z2:Dup.Feed Unit” Appears”. Messages Description Recommended ActionTroubleshooting 74 4 Remove Paper All Output Trays All output trays are full. Remove paper from all output trays. Remove Paper Finisher Tray # The indicated finisher shift tray is full. #:finisher shift tray number Remove the paper from the indicated finisher shift tray. Remove Paper Inside Finisher There is still paper in the finisher. Open the cover for the finisher and remove paper. See p.93 “When “Remove Misfeed R: Finisher” Appears”. Remove Paper Standard Tray The standard output tray is full. Remove the paper from the standard output tray. Replace Black Dev. Unit(TypeD) It is time to replace the black development unit. Replace the black development unit. Depending on your service contract, contact your sales or service representative. See p.15 “Replacing the Development Unit”. Replace Black PCU (Type F) It is time to replace the black PCU. Replace the black PCU. Depending on your service contract, contact your sales or service representative. See p.11 “Replacing the Photoconductor Unit”. Replace Color Dev. Unit(TypeB) It is time to replace the color development unit. Replace the color development unit. Depending on your service contract, contact your sales or service representative. See p.15 “Replacing the Development Unit”. Replace Color PCU (Type A) It is time to replace the color PCU. Replace the color PCU. Depending on your service contract, contact your sales or service representative. See p.11 “Replacing the Photoconductor Unit”. Replace Fuser Oil Unit (TypeG) It is time to replace the fuser oil unit. Replace the fuser oil unit. Depending on your service contract, contact your sales or service representative. See p.7 “Replacing the Fuser Oil Unit”. Messages Description Recommended ActionError & Status Messages on the Control Panel 75 4 Replace FuserOil Unit soon (TypeG) The fuser oil unit should be replaced soon. Prepare to replace the fuser oil unit. Depending on your service contract, contact your sales or service representative. See p.7 “Replacing the Fuser Oil Unit”. Replace Fusing Unit (Type C) It is time to replace the fusing unit. Replace the fusing unit. Depending on your service contract, contact your sales or service representative. See p.19 “Replacing the Fusing Unit”. Replace Transfer Belt It is time to replace the transfer belt. Replace the transfer belt. Depending on your service contract, contact your sales or service representative. Replace Waste Toner (Type E) It is time to replace the waste toner. Replace the waste toner bottle. Depending on your service contract, contact your sales or service representative. See p.25 “Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle”. Reset Develop. Unit Correctly Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black The indicated development unit(s) is/are not set correctly, or not set. Set the indicated development unit(s) correctly. See p.15 “Replacing the Development Unit”. Reset Duplex Unit Correctly The duplex paper feed unit is not set correctly or not set. Remove and re-install the duplex paper feed unit. If the error continues, contact your sales or service representative. See “Duplex Unit Type 7100”, Setup Guide. Reset Finisher Correctly The finisher is not set correctly, or not set. Turn the power off, and then on. Remove and re-install the finisher correctly. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. See p.2 “Detaching and Reattaching the Options”. Reset Fuser Oil Unit Correctly The fuser oil unit is not set correctly, or not set. Set the fuser oil unit correctly. See p.7 “Replacing the Fuser Oil Unit”. Reset Fusing Unit Correctly There is no fusing unit, or the fusing unit is not installed correctly. Set the fusing unit correctly. See p.19 “Replacing the Fusing Unit”. Messages Description Recommended ActionTroubleshooting 76 4 Reset PCU Correctly Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black The indicated photoconductor unit(s) is/are not set correctly, or not set. Set the indicated photoconductor unit(s) correctly. See p.11 “Replacing the Photoconductor Unit”. Reset Toner Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black The indicated toner cartridge is not set correctly. Set the indicated toner cartridge(s) correctly. See “Installing the Toner Cartridge”, Setup Guide. Reset Tray # Correctly The indicated paper input tray is not set correctly, or not set. Set the indicated paper input tray correctly. Reset Waste Oil Bottle correctly The waste oil bottle is not set correctly, or not set. Contact your sales or service representative. Reset Waste Toner Correctly The waste toner bottle is not set correctly, or not set. Set the waste toner bottle correctly. Resetting Job... Job is being reset. Wait a while. RPCS Graphic Error The graphic is not initialized because graphic memory was not reserved. Replace installed memory. RPCS Memory Overflow Printer memory is not initialized because CDC memory was not reserved via system call. Replace installed memory. RPCS Syntax Error The printer identified a syntax error. This error results from data corruption caused by transmission problems, interruption, data transmission from other drivers, etc. Be sure to use the correct driver. SC XXX-X Power Off On If Error Reoccur Call Service Turn the power off and then on. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. Turn the power off, and then on. If the message appears again, contact your sales or service representative. Setting change in process The settings are being changed. Wait a while. SSID not entered This message appears if the SSID has not been entered. Enter the SSID. Staple Cancelled The Staple feature has been cancelled. Check the paper orientation and layout is properly set, and make sure required settings for the finisher are selected. Toner is Almost Empty: Black The printer is almost out of toner (K). Prepare a replace the toner cartridge (K). Toner is Almost Empty: Cyan The printer is almost out of toner (C). Prepare a replace the toner cartridge (C). Messages Description Recommended ActionError & Status Messages on the Control Panel 77 4 Toner is Almost Empty: Magenta The printer is almost out of toner (M). Prepare a replace the toner cartridge (M). Toner is Almost Empty: Yellow The printer is almost out of toner (Y). Prepare a replace the toner cartridge (Y). Update Mode Err. Power Off On The printer has failed to start updating data. Turn the printer OFF and then back ON to restart. Waiting... The printer is waiting for the next data to print. Wait a while. Warming Up... The printer is warming up and not ready. Wait until the printer signals Ready. Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full The waste oil bottle is almost full. Contact your sales or service representative. Waste Oil Bottle is Full Call Service The waste oil bottle is full. Contact your sales or service representative. Waste Toner is Almost Full (E) The waste toner bottle is almost full. Prepare to replace the waste toner bottle. Depending on your service contract, contact your sales or service representative. See p.114 “Consumables”. Messages Description Recommended ActionTroubleshooting 78 4 Printer Does Not Print Possible cause Solutions Is the power on? Check the cable is securely plugged into the power outlet and the printer. Turn on the power. If the machine does not start up when the main power is switched on, check whether the earth leakage breaker has tripped. If it has, contact your sales or service representative. Do not reset the earth leakage breaker yourself. Does the Online indicator stay on? Press the On Line key so the indicator lights. Does the Error indicator stay red? Check the error message on the display and take the required action. Is paper loaded? Load paper into the paper tray or onto the bypass tray. See p.45 “Paper and Other Supported Media”. Can you print a configuration page? If you cannot print a configuration page, a printer malfunction is likely. You should contact your sales or service representative. See “Printing a Configuration Page”, Administrator Reference. Is the interface cable connecting the printer to the computer connected securely? Connect the interface cable properly. If there are any connectors or screws, check they are fastened securely. Are you using the correct interface cable? The type of interface cable you should use depends on the computer. Be sure to use the correct one. If the cable is damaged or worn, replace it. See “Appendix”, Administrator Reference. Does the Data In indicator blink or light after the print job is started? If the Data In indicator does not blink or light, the printer has not received the print data. • If the printer is connected to the computer with the interface cable, make sure the printer port settings are correct. • If the printer is connected to the computer via the network, contact your network administrator.Printer Does Not Print 79 4 Possible cause Solutions Is the Data In indicator blinking or lit after starting the print job? If it is not blinking or lit, data is not being received. If the printer is connected to the computer using the interface cable Make sure the following printer port settings are correct: • For parallel port connection, port LPT1 or LPT2 should be set. • For IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) port connection, port 1394_00(n) *1 should be set. *1 (n) is the number of printers connected. • Windows 95/98/Me A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Click to select the printer icon. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Details] tab. D Check the [Print to the following port] box to confirm that the correct port is selected. • Windows 2000 A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Click to select the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Port] tab. D Check the [Print to the following port] box to confirm the correct port is selected. • Windows XP Professional, Windows Server 2003 A Access the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar. B Click to select the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Port] tab. D Check the [Print to the following port(s).] box to confirm that the correct port is selected. • Windows XP Home Edition A Access the [Control Panel] window from [Start] on the taskbar. B Click [Printers and Other Hardware]. C Click [Printers and Faxes]. D Click to select the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties]. E Click the [Port] tab. F Check the [Print to the following port(s).] box to confirm that the correct port is selected.Troubleshooting 80 4 Is the Data In indicator blinking or lit after starting the print job? • Windows NT 4.0 A Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Printers]. B Click to select the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties]. C Click the [Port] tab. D Check the [Print to the following port] box to confirm the correct port is selected. Network Connection Contact your network administrator. When you use IEEE 1394 interface board. A Check the IEEE 1394 interface board is attached to the computer correctly. B Check the IEEE 1394 interface cable is connected securely. C Restart the computer. If the error occurs even after executing the above, proceed to the following steps. D Unplug the IEEE 1394 interface cable connected to the printer. E Execute the utility tool for IEEE 1394 interface board is stored in the following path on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”. UTILITY\1394 Important ? For details about using the utility tool for IEEE 1394, see the README file in the same directory on the CD-ROM. How is the signal strength when using the wireless LAN? Ad Hoc Mode or 802.11 Ad Hoc Mode Either move to a location where the signal is good or remove obstructions. Infrastructure Mode Check the signal status from the “Maintenance” menu on the control panel. If the signal is poor, either move to a location where it is good or remove obstructions. How is the signal strength when using Bluetooth? Try the following: • Check that the Bluetooth interface unit is installed properly. • Check that there are no obstructions between the computer, printer, and other devices. • Change the location of the computer. • Change the location of the printer. Possible cause SolutionsPrinter Does Not Print 81 4 If printing still does not start, contact your sales of service representative. Consult with the store where the printer was purchased for information about the location of sales of service representatives. When you use the Bluetooth interface unit. SPP A Make sure the machine you want to use appears in the 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager. B Make sure “Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx)” appears under Client Ports in the 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager. C Restart the computer, this printer, and the other devices. D Make sure no IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) or other Bluetooth devices are in use. Note ? Interference may occur with the IEEE 802.11b interface unit. Such interference may affect the transmission speed and other functions. E Transmissions between computers, other devices, and this printer can be blocked by obstructions. Move this printer, computers, and other devices, if necessary. HCRP, BIP A Restart the computer, this printer, and other devices. B Make sure no IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) or other Bluetooth devices are in use. Note ? Interference may occur with the IEEE 802.11b interface unit. Such interference may affect the transmission speed and other functions. C Transmissions between computers, other devices, and this printer can be blocked by obstructions. Move this printer, computers, other devices, if necessary. Possible cause SolutionsTroubleshooting 82 4 Other Printing Problems Problem Possible causes and solutions Black areas and lines are printed with an unnatural hue. • PCL 5c/PostScript 3 Select [CMY + K] for Gray Reproduction in the printer driver's [Advanced] dialog box under the [Print Quality] tab. • RPCS Select [CMY + K] for Gray Reproduction under the [Image Adjustments] tab in the printer driver's [Change User Settings] dialog box. Color documents are printed in black and white. The printer driver is not set up for color printing. • PCL 5c/PostScript 3 Select [Color] for the Color/Black and White under the printer driver's [Setup] tab. • RPCS Select [Color] for the Color/Black and White under the printer driver's [Print Settings] tab. For details, see the printer driver Help. Some applications normally print color text as black and white. Fine dot pattern does not print. • PCL 5c/PostScript 3 Change the [Dithering:] setting in the [Advanced] dialog box under the printer driver's [Print Quality] tab. • RPCS Change the [Dithering:] setting under the [Image Adjustments] tab in the [Change User Settings] dialog box under the [Print Quality] tab in the printer properties dialog box. For details, see the printer driver Help. Images are cut off, or excess pages are printed. You might be printing on paper that is smaller than the size selected in the application. Use paper the same size as that selected in the application. If you cannot load paper of the correct size, use the reduction function to reduce the image, and then print. See the printer driver Help. Printing is smudgy. If “Replace Color PCU (Type A)” or “Replace Black PCU (Type F)” appears on the display, replace the photoconductor unit. See p.11 “Replacing the Photoconductor Unit”. If the paper is creased or curled, prints may smudge. Postcards are especially prone to curling while being printed on, so make sure they are perfectly straight before loading them. Straighten them if necessary. Try reducing the print density. To adjust the print density, press the Menu key on the control panel and select [Image Density] from the Maintenance menu. See p.42 “Adjusting Image Density”.Other Printing Problems 83 4 Prints have smudges on the back. Automatic selection of paper size and feed direction may have been canceled, a specific paper size selected, and then paper with a different size and feed direction loaded. Enable automatic selection on the control panel. Alternatively, load paper with the same size and feed direction as the settings on the control panel. See p.60 “If you load a paper size that is not selected automatically”. The paper size and feed direction settings on the control panel may not match the size and feed direction of the paper in the bypass tray. Make the settings that match the size and feed direction of the paper in the bypass tray. See p.62 “Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray”. If the print area exceeds the paper size - for instance, when producing A4 prints on B5 paper — subsequent prints may have smudges on the back. Printing is entirely patchy. If “Add Toner XXX” (where “XXX” is a color) appears on the display, replace the appropriate color toner cartridge. See p.4 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”. Try reducing the print density. • To adjust the print density, press the Menu key on the control panel, and then select [Image Density] from the Maintenance menu. • See p.42 “Adjusting Image Density”. • If [Toner saving] is selected on the RPCS TM printer driver’s [Print Quality] tab, printing becomes faint. For details, see the printer driver Help. Printing is partly patchy. Try reducing the print density. To adjust the print density, press the Menu key on the control panel, and then select [Image Density] from the Maintenance menu. See p.42 “Adjusting Image Density”. If “Add Toner XXX” (where “XXX” is a color) appears on the display, replace the appropriate color toner cartridge. See p.4 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”. Make sure the toner cartridges and photoconductor unit are installed correctly. See p.4 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”. See p.11 “Replacing the Photoconductor Unit”. Non-recommended paper is loaded. Use paper recommended by the supplier. Make sure the machine is level. Prints have white lines on them. Clean the dustproof glass. See p.29 “Cleaning the DustProof Glass”. Prints have black lines on them. Clean the dustproof glass. See p.29 “Cleaning the DustProof Glass”. Problem Possible causes and solutionsTroubleshooting 84 4 Text and graphics are blurred. Select [Text Priority] under [4C.Graphic Mode], and then print. To set 4C.Graphic Mode, select [4C.Graphic Mode] from the Maintenance menu. Reduce the resolution, and then print. In the RPCS TM printer driver [Change User Settings] dialog box, change the [Resolution:] setting on the [Image Adjustments] tab. Try reducing the print density. It is recommended to reduce the image density of black, cyan, magenta, and yellow equally, as this will preserve the color balance. See p.42 “Adjusting Image Density”. Printing is skewed. Make sure the side guides inside the paper tray are locked. See p.58 “Loading Paper in Tray 2 and the Optional Paper Feed Unit Type 7100”. Make sure the lower left cover of the printer is properly closed. The print orientation is wrong. The paper orientation you selected may conflict with that selected in the printer driver option setup. Make the settings correctly. Printing is not done in the specified color. If printing is not done in the specified color, restart the printer by turning it off and back on, and then try printing again. The color changes considerably when you adjust it with the RPCS TM printer driver. When you adjust the color on the [Balance Adjustments] tab of the RPCS TM printer driver [Change User Settings] dialog box, do not change the values too much. Note that the printed colors will not be exactly the same as those in the sample image. For details, see the printer driver Help. Photographs are grainy. Some applications require the resolution to be reduced when printing. On the [Print Quality] tab, set [Print priority] to [Quality]. For details, see the printer driver Help. Fine dot patterns do not come out. In the RPCS TM printer driver [Change User Settings] dialog box, change the [Dithering:] setting on the [Image Adjustments] tab. For details, see the printer driver Help. Black areas and lines are not pure black In the RPCS TM printer driver [Change User Settings] dialog box, set [Gray reproduction (Text/Line Art):] on the [Image Adjustments] tab to [K (Black)]. For details, see the printer driver Help. The black areas in the gradation are not pure black. In the RPCS TM printer driver [Change User Settings] dialog box, set [Gray reproduction (Text/Line Art):] on the [Image Adjustments] tab to [CMY + K]. For details, see the printer driver Help. Solid lines are printed as broken lines. In the RPCS TM printer driver [Change User Settings] dialog box, change the [Dithering:] setting on the [Image Adjustments] tab. For details, see the printer driver Help. Problem Possible causes and solutionsOther Printing Problems 85 4 Two or more sheets are fed together. In the RPCS TM printer driver [Change User Settings] dialog box, change the [Dithering:] setting on the [Image Adjustments] tab. For details, see the printer driver Help. Fan the sheets well before loading them. See p.57 “Loading Paper”. It takes too much time to complete the print job. Photographs and other data-rich pages take a long time for the printer to process, so simply wait when printing such data. Changing the following settings may help speed up printing. • PCL 5c Select [600 dpi] as the Resolution under the [Print Quality] tab in the printer properties dialog box. • PostScript 3 Select [1200 dpi] or [600 dpi] as the Resolution under the [Print Quality] tab in the printer properties dialog box. Select [Fast] as the Gradation under the [Print Quality] tab in the printer properties dialog box. Select [PostScript (optimize for speed)] as the PostScript 3 output format under the [PostScript] tab in the printer properties dialog box. • RPCS Select [1200 x 600 dpi] or [600 x 600 dpi] as the Resolution under the [Image Adjustments] tab in the [Change User Settings] dialog box in the printer dialog box. Select [Speed] Print priority under the [Print Quality] tab in the printer properties dialog box. For details, see the printer driver Help. The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process. If the Data In indicator is blinking, data processing is in progress. Just wait until it resumes. If the “Warming Up...” message appears on the display, the printer is warming up. Wait a while. Note ? To maintain optimum quality, color adjustment is regularly executed during or after printing. Even if printing is not specified, color adjustment is sometimes executed automatically while the power is on. It takes too much time to resume printing. The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process. If the Data In indicator is blinking, data processing is in progress. Just wait until it resumes. The printer might be in Energy Saver mode. In this mode, the printer has to warm up before printing can start, and this takes time. To change how long it takes before the printer goes into Energy Saver mode or to disable Energy Saver mode, configure Energy Saver 1 or Energy Saver 2 in the System menu. Problem Possible causes and solutionsTroubleshooting 86 4 Output are not delivered to the selected tray you require. When using the bypass tray, the size selected on the display might be different from actual paper size. Select the correct paper size. See p.45 “Paper and Other Supported Media”. If you are using a Windows operating system, printer driver settings override those set using the control panel. Set the desired output tray using the printer driver. See the printer driver Help. Paper misfeeds occur frequently. Check the side guide of the paper tray is locked. See p.45 “Paper and Other Supported Media”. Paper size and feed direction of paper in the bypass tray might not be the same as those selected using the control panel. Check the settings on the control panel, and load paper of the correct size and feed direction. See p.45 “Paper and Other Supported Media”. Check the paper guide of the paper tray is attached properly. Solid areas, lines, or text are shiny or glossy when printed as a mixture of cyan, magenta, yellow. • PCL 5c/PostScript 3 Select [K (Black)] for Gray Reproduction in the printer driver's [Advanced] dialog box under the [Print Quality] tab. • RPCS Select [K (Black)] for Gray Reproduction under the [Image Adjustments] tab in the printer driver's [Change User Settings] dialog box. Solid lines are printed as broken lines. • PCL 5c/PostScript 3 Change the [Dithering:] setting in the [Advanced] dialog box under the printer driver's [Print Quality] tab. • RPCS Change the [Dithering:] setting under the [Image Adjustments] tab in the [Change User Settings] dialog box, under the [Print Quality] tab in the printer properties dialog box. For details, see the printer driver Help. Some parts of the print image are not clear. Make the image density darker. To adjust image density, press the Menu key on the control panel, and then select Image Density from the Maintenance menu. The color gradation has changed. Color gradation during color printing changes slightly, depending on a number of factors. If you print the same file repeatedly or toner was recently replaced, changes may occur in color tones. When this happens, to obtain suitable print results, color gradation can be corrected. See p.36 “Correcting the Color Gradation”. The color of the printout is different from the color on the computer display. Toner based color settings under the printer driver produce unexpected printout colors. Changing color settings using the printer driver produces unexpected printout colors. See the printer driver Help. Problem Possible causes and solutionsOther Printing Problems 87 4 The image is printed in the wrong orientation. The feed direction you selected and the feed direction selected in Option Setup of the RPCS TM printer driver may be conflicting. Make the proper settings. Color registration shifts when printing in color on thick paper. Press the Menu key, and then select Color Regist. from the Maintenance menu. See p.27 “Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer”. The control panel error message stays on after removing the misfed paper. Open the front cover of the printer, and then close it. The print image is not clear. Due to sudden temperature change, condensation might appear inside the printer, reducing print quality. If you move the printer from a cold room to a warmer room, do not use until it acclimatizes to the temperature. The print side of pages is hazy gray. Adjust image density. To adjust image density, press the Menu key, and select Image Density from the Maintenance menu. See p.27 “Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer”. If paper is curled, correct it. Curled or folded paper might result in hazy gray print. Curling often occurs with postcards, so be sure to correct it before printing. Printed images are different to computer screen images. When you use certain functions, such as enlargement and reduction, image layout might be different from that displayed on the computer screen. You might have selected to replace True Type fonts with printer fonts in the printing process. To print an image like that image on the computer screen, make settings to print out True Type fonts as an image. See the printer driver Help. The printer does not print at 1200 dpi, even if 1200 dpi resolution is selected. Printing at 1200 dpi is memory intensive. Therefore, depending on memory capacity, you may not be able to print at 1200 dpi. Either add memory to the printer, or reduce the size of data. See “Memory Capacity and Paper Size”, Administrator Reference. There are color differences in color documents. Press the Menu key, and then select Color Regist. from the Maintenance menu. See p.27 “Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer”. Problem Possible causes and solutionsTroubleshooting 88 4 Note ? If the problem cannot be solved, contact your sales or service representative. PDF Direct Print is not executed (PDF file is not printed). You must install an optional hard disk drive or set the value in [RAM Disk] on the System Menu to 2 MB or more. Reference For details about optional hard disk drive installation, see “Attaching the Hard Disk Drive”, Setup Guide. For details about [RAM Disk], see the “System Menu”, Administrator Reference. After adding a memory unit and setting the value in [RAM Disk] on the System Menu to 16 MB, the value in [RAM Disk] returns to 0 MB if the memory unit is removed. If this happens, reset the value in [RAM Disk] to 2 MB or more. Reference For details about [RAM Disk], see “System Menu”, Administrator Reference. When printing a PDF with a password set, set the password of the PDF file using the [PDF: Change PW] menu in [PDF Menu] or Web Image Monitor. Reference For details about [PDF: Change PW], see “PDF Menu”, Administrator Reference. For details about Web Image Monitor, see Help. PDF files not allowed to be printed by the PDF file security setting cannot be printed. As a result of printing using PDF Direct Print, characters are missing or misshapen. Before printing, embed the font in the PDF file to be printed. The paper size appears on the control panel and printing is not performed with PDF Direct Print. When using PDF Direct Print, printing will be performed only when paper of the size set within the PDF file is loaded. When a message indicating a paper size appears, either load paper of the indicated size in the paper tray or perform Form Feed. Also, if [Sub Paper Size] on the System Menu is set to [Auto], printing is performed assuming letter size and A4 size to be the same size. For example, when a PDF file set to A4 size paper is printed using PDF Direct Print and letter size paper is loaded in the paper tray, the file will be printed. This also applies to the reverse case. Problem Possible causes and solutionsAdditional Troubleshooting 89 4 Additional Troubleshooting Troubleshooting concerning the operation of this machine. Problems Solutions Strange noise is heard. If a supply was recently replaced or an option attached in the area the strange noise is coming from, check the supply or option is properly attached. If the strange noise persists, contact your sales of service representative. No e-mail is received when an Alert occurs and after resolving an Alert. Confirm [Notify by Email] is set to [On] using the System Menu on the control panel. See “System Menu”, Administrator Reference. Access the printer through Web Image Monitor, logging on as an Administrator, and then confirm the following settings in [Notification]: • Device E-mail Address • Groups to Notify • Select Groups/Items to Notify Reference For details about the settings, see Web Image Monitor Help. Access the printer through Web Image Monitor, logging on as an Administrator, and then confirm the settings of the SMTP server in [E-mail]. Reference For details about the settings, see Web Image Monitor Help. When the power is turned off before the e-mail is transmitted, the e-mail will not be received. Check the e-mail address set for the destination. Confirm the printer's operation history using the Web Image Monitor's System Log menu in [Network]. If the e-mail was sent but not received, it is possible the destination was incorrect. Also check the information concerning error e-mail from the mail server. The setting for [Notify by EMail] on the System Menu was changed from [Off] to [On], but email is not arriving. After changing the setting, turn the printer's power off and then back on again. Error notification e-mail was received, but no error-solved email is received. Check that e-mail is set to be sent using Web Image Monitor's [Notification] when an error is fixed. You must click the [Edit] button of [Detailed Settings of Each Item] in [Notification], and set [Notify when error:] to [Occurs & Fixed] on the displayed page. Reference For details about the settings, see Web Image Monitor Help.Troubleshooting 90 4 If the machine is still not operating satisfactorily, contact your sales or service representative. Consult with the store where the printer was purchased for information about the location of sales or service representatives. Alert Resolving is set for sending e-mail, but no error-solved e-mail is sent. If the power of the printer is turned off after an Alert occurs and the Alert is resolved during the time the power is off, no error-solved e-mail is sent. Alert Occurrence and Alert Resolving are set for sending email, but while no error notification e-mail is received, errorsolved e-mail is received. Error-notification e-mail is not sent if the problem is resolved before sending. However, an error solved e-mail is sent. The error-notification timing was changed, but no error notification e-mail was received for that timing. If an error-notification e-mail is sent before the error-notification timing is changed, another error-notification e-mail for that error will not be sent for the new timing. When no date information is included in sent e-mail, the mail server has a malfunction. Make the setting for obtaining time information from the SNTP server. For details about the settings, see Web Image Monitor Help. Printing using Bluetooth is slow. When using the Bluetooth interface unit, do the following: • Transmit fewer print jobs. • Make sure no IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) or other Bluetooth devices are in use. Note ? Interference may occur with the IEEE 802.11b interface unit. Such interference may affect the transmission speed and other functions. • Transmissions between the computer and the printer can be blocked by obstructions. Move the printer or computer if necessary. Note ? When you use a Bluetooth connection, print jobs are transmitted relatively slowly. Although the duplex unit is installed, the paper is printed on one side only. Restart the printer by turning it off and back on. If the problem persists, contact your sales or service representative. Problems SolutionsRemoving Misfed Paper 91 4 Removing Misfed Paper If a paper misfeed occurs, an error message appears indicating the location of the misfed paper on the display. Misfeed Recovery This printer has a misfeed recovery function that sends misfed paper to the standard tray or right cover. Usually, you can remove the misf e d p a p e r f r om o n e o r o t h e r o f these trays. When “Remove Misfeed A:Internal Path” Appears Open the bottom-right cover by pulling its lever. Move the blue lever up and down to feed the misfed paper, and then slowly pull out the paper. Close the right cover by pushing the area labeled “PUSH”. When “Remove Misfeed B: Fusing Unit” Appears R CAUTION: If the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher is installed, detach it from the printer. Reference See p.2 “Detaching the SR770 (2 Tray Finisher)” or p.2 “Detaching the SR910(Booklet Finisher)”. If the duplex unit is installed, open the duplex reversal unit. Reference p.3 “Opening and Closing the Duplex Reversal Unit” ZDJH206J ZHXH205J • The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch parts labelled “hot surface”. Touching a “hot surface” could result in a burn. ZDJP708JTroubleshooting 92 4 If the output tray is attached to the printer, raise it in the direction of the arrow ( ), and then remove it ( ). Slowly pull out the upper left cover for the printer. Open the upper left cover. Turn the blue dial in the direction of the arrow to push out the misfed paper, and slowly pull out the paper. Important ? Always turn the blue dial in the direction of the arrow. If you turn it in the reverse direction, p a p e r f e e d s i n t o t h e p r i n t e r , making i t d if fi cul t for you to take out. ? Do not pull out misfed paper. Use the blue dial to push it. Close the upper left cover ( ) and p u s h th e p a r t la b e le d “PUSH” next to the handle at the bottom rear, the back until it clicks ( ). ZDJP038J ZHXH010J ZHXH020J ZHXH670J ZHXH082J 1 2Removing Misfed Paper 93 4 If you removed the output tray in step , reattach it to. Insert the hooks of the output tray into the printer slits, and then lower it toward you. If the duplex unit is installed, close the duplex reversal unit. Reference p.3 “Opening and Closing the Duplex Reversal Unit” If the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher is installed, reattach it to the printer. Reference See p.2 “Detaching the SR770 (2 Tray Finisher)” or p.2 “Detaching the SR910(Booklet Finisher)”. When “Remove Misfeed R: Finisher” Appears Open the top cover (A) and front cover (B) of the 2 tray finisher, and then remove the misfed paper. Fold the output tray. A Raise it vertically. B Fold it over the printer top. ZDJH010J ZDJP206J ZHXH680J ZHXH690JTroubleshooting 94 4 Open the top cover for the 2 tray finisher, and then slowly pull out the misfed paper. Close the top cover slowly. Open the front cover for the 2 tray finisher. Check to see if there is misfed paper in areas A, B, C, and D. Check area A of step . Lift the lever ( ), and then while holding it up with your hand, slowly pull out the misfed paper. Slowly lower the lever to put it back into place. Check areas B and C of step . Lower the lever in the direction of the arrows ( ), and then slowly pull out the misfed paper. Slowly lift the lever to put it back into place. Check area D of step . Lift the lever in the direction of the arrow ( ), and then slowly pull out the misfed paper. Slowly lower the lever to put it back into place. Close the front cover of the 2 tray finisher. If the error message does not disappear even after misfed paper is removed, detach the 2 tray finisher from the printer to check for misfed paper there. ZDJY208J ZDJP209J ZDJH016J ZDJP210J ZDJP211J ZDJP212JRemoving Misfed Paper 95 4 Reference p . 2 “De t a c h i n g t h e S R 7 70 ( 2 Tray Finisher)” for details about how to detach/reattach the 2 tray finisher from/to the printer Put the output tray back into place. A Raise the tray. B Lower it slowly. When “Remove Misfeed R1” Appears Hold the release lever, and then remove the booklet finisher. Remove the misfed paper. Open the upper cover. ZHXH360J ZHXH370J ACE030S ACE031S ACE032STroubleshooting 96 4 Remove the misfed paper. Close the upper cover. Attach the booklet finisher. When “Remove Misfeed R2-4” Appears Hold the release lever, and then remove the booklet finisher. Open the front cover. Make sure the blue marker is visible. If not, turn knob R2 until it is visible. Remove the misfed paper. Hold lever R3, and then open the cover. Remove the misfed paper. ACE033S ACE034S ACE035S ACE036S ACE037S ACE038SRemoving Misfed Paper 97 4 Turn knob R4, and then remove the misfed paper. When “Remove Misfeed Y: Paper Tray” Appears Open the lower right cover of the paper feed unit, and then pull out the misfed paper. Close the lower right cover of the paper feed unit. When “Remove Misfeed Z1:Duplex Unit” Appears R CAUTION: If the 2 tray finisher or the booklet finisher is installed, detach it from the printer. Reference See p.2 “Detaching the SR770 (2 Tray Finisher)” or p.2 “Detaching the SR910(Booklet Finisher)”. Open the left cover of the duplex rever sal un it , and then remove the misfed paper. Do not pull the paper out forcefully. If you cannot remove the paper, proceed to step C. ACE039S ZDJY209J • The inside of the machine becomes very hot. Do not touch parts labelled “hot surface”. Touching a “hot surface” could result in a burn. ZHXH700JTroubleshooting 98 4 Push up the lock release button of the duplex reversal unit, and then hold it in place. Slowly lower the duplex reversal unit until it stops, and remove the misfed paper. Slowly raise the duplex reversal unit and insert until it clicks into p l ace. Raise the lef t cover , and then close it securely by pushing the area labeled “PUSH”. When “Remove Misfeed Z2:Dup.Feed Unit” Appears You can remove misfed paper from the duplex feed unit by following the procedure below. Note ? When a paper misfeed occurs in the duplex feed unit, the printer usually sends the misfed paper to the right cover, so there is no need to execute this procedure. See p.91 “When “Remove Misfeed A:Internal Path” Appears”. Important ? Be sure to remove misfed paper by f o l l owi ng t h e p r o c e d u r e b e l ow w h e n t h e “R e m o v e M i s f e e d Z2:Dup.Feed Unit” message appears on the display. Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Slowly open the front cover of the printer, remove the green screwdriver. Reference p.1 “Using the Screwdriver” Carefully pivot the waste oil bottle outward, in the direction of the arrow. ZHXH710J ZDJY212J ZHXH720J ZHXH150JRemoving Misfed Paper 99 4 R CAUTION: Remove the screw fastening the duplex feed unit using the provided screwdriver. You will use this screw to refasten the duplex feed unit later. Pinch the upper left area of the duplex feed unit, and then slowly pull it halfway out. Hold the duplex feed unit using both hands, place it on the vertical rail, and slide it straight out. Slowly place the duplex feed unit on the floor. Open it slowly, and remove the misfed paper. Important ? Do not forcefully open the duplex feed unit. It might damage the unit. Close the duplex feed unit. • Keep the waste oil bottle away from flames. There is a risk of fire or burns. ZHXH320J ZHXH780J ZHXH650J ZHXH660JTroubleshooting 100 4 Hold the duplex feed unit using both hands, place it on the vertical rail, and slide it slowly in until it stops. The vertical rail is in the position as shown. Refasten the duplex feed unit using the provided screwdriver. Use the screw removed in step . Note ? Be sure to return the provided screwdriver to its original position on the inside of the front cover. Slowly close the waste oil bottle in the direction of the arrow. Slowly close the front cover by pushing the two areas on the left and right. Plug in the power cable, and then turn on the power. ZHXH290J ZHXH300J ZHXH310J ZHXH160J ZDJH041JRemoving Jammed Staples 101 4 Removing Jammed Staples If “Add Staples” appears on the display, or the printer does not staple even after instructed, jammed staples might be the cause. SR770 (2 Tray Finisher) Open the front cover of the 2 tray finisher. The stapler is positioned in the location as shown. Remove the cartridge by pulling the green knob in the direction of the arrow. Open the cartridge face plate to unlock it. Remove jammed staples. Close the cartridge face plate so it clicks into place. Add Staples ACE079S ZDJP217J ZDJP227J ZDJP228J ZDJP229JTroubleshooting 102 4 Slant and insert the cartridge ( ), and then push in until it clicks into place ( ). Close the front cover of the 2 tray finisher. SR910 (Booklet Finisher) Open the front cover of the finisher. Hold the lever, and then pull out the staple unit. Turn knob R5 until the cartridge moves to the front. Push the cartridge button, and lift up while removing. Open the cartridge's faceplate. ZDJP218J ACE040S ACE049S ACE050S ACE051SRemoving Jammed Staples 103 4 Remove any jammed staples. Close the cartridge's faceplate. Push in the cartridge until it clicks. Close the front cover of the finisher. ACE052S ACE053S ACE054STroubleshooting 104 4 Adding Staples When “Add Staples” appears on the display, add a new staple refill. SR770 (2 Tray Finisher) Open the front cover of the 2 tray finisher. The stapler is positioned in the location as shown. Remove the cartridge by pulling the green knob in the direction of the arrow. Push the areas labeled “PUSH”, located on both sides of the stapler. The case cover on top rises. Pull the case cover up. Hook your finger in the hole of the empty refill case to pull it out. Add Staples ACE079S ZDJP217J ZDJP222J ZDJP223J ZDJP224JAdding Staples 105 4 Push in until the arrow on the refill case lines up with the arrow on the refill case cover. Push the case cover down until it clicks into place. Pull out the ribbon used for tying together the staples. Note ? Remove the entire length of the ribbon. Slant and insert the cartridge ( ), and then push in until it clicks into place ( ). Close the front cover of the 2 tray finisher. SR910 (Booklet Finisher) Open the front cover. Hold the lever, and then pull out the staple unit. ZDJP225J ZDJP230J ZDJP226J ZDJP218J ACE048STroubleshooting 106 4 Push the cartridge button, and then pull out the cartridge while lifting the cartridge. Hold both sides of the cartridge, and then pull up the upper unit of the cartridge. Remove the empty refill in the direction of the arrow. Push in the new cartridge until it clicks. Gently push down the upper unit. Pull out the ribbon. ACE041S ACE042S ACE043S ACE044S ACE045S ACE046SAdding Staples 107 4 Push in the cartridge until it clicks. Close the front cover of the finisher. ACE047STroubleshooting 108 4 Removing Punch-hole Chips When “Punch-hole Chips are Full” appears on the display, the punch waste box is full. Follow these steps to remove paper chips. Note ? The same message appears when t h e p u n c h w a s t e b o x i s n o t i n - stalled correctly. SR770 (2 Tray Finisher) Open the front cover of the 2 tray finisher. The punch waste box is positioned in the location shown in the illustration. Pull out the punch waste box, and then remove the paper chips. Re-install the punch waste box. Close the front cover of the 2 tray finisher. If the message appears even after removing the Punch-hole chips I f t he “Punch-ho l e Chip s ar e Full” message appears on the con t r o l pane l ev en wh e n th e p u n c h w a s t e b o x i s n o t f u l l , chips might be stuck around the p u n c h w a s t e b o x h o l e , a s s h o w n . R e m o v e p u n c h - h o l e chips from around the hole. Punch-hole Chips are Full ACE080S ZDJP220JRemoving Punch-hole Chips 109 4 SR910 (Booklet Finisher) Hold the release lever, and then pull out the booklet finisher. Pull out the punch waste box, and then remove the paper chips. Reinstall the punch waste box. Note ? If the message does not disappear, reinstall the punch waste box. Attach the booklet finisher. ZKVH220J ZKVH180J ZKVH190JTroubleshooting 110 4111 5. Appendix When the Front Cover Does Not Close If “Close Front Cover” appears on the d i s p l ay , t h e c ov e r i s n o t p ro p e r l y closed, even if it appears to be. If the front cover does not close, check the green lever is in the locked position, as shown. Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable. Turn the green lever clockwise. Slowly close the front cover by pushing the two areas on the left and right. Plug in the power cable, and then turn on the power. Close Front Cover ZHXH020N ZHXH420J ZDJH041JAppendix 112 5 Moving and Transporting the Printer R CAUTION: Note ? The printer weighs approximately 85 kg. Protect the printer by using the original packaging when transporting. Important ? Be sure to disconnect all cables from the printer before moving it. ? This printer is a piece of precision machinery. Take care to avoid damage during shipment. Moving the Printer R CAUTION: Note ? The printer weighs approximately 85 kg. • When moving the machine, each person should hold the handle on the sides, and lift slowly. Lifting carelessly or dropping it may cause injury. • When moving the printer, remember to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock. • When pulling out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock. • When lifting the machine, use the inset grips on both sides. Otherwise the printer could break or cause injury if dropped. • Before moving the machine, unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the cord is unplugged forcefully, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or cords can cause an electrical or fire hazard.Moving and Transporting the Printer 113 5 Moving the printer in the short distance Be sure to check the following: • The power is turned off. • The power cable is unplugged from the wall outlet. • The interface cable is unplugged from the printer. If you have installed external options, remove them. Be sure to close the bypass tray and front cover. Lift the printer and move it horizontally to the place you want to install it. Important ? Be sure to move the printer horizontally. Moving the printer slowly prevents toner scattering. ? If the paper feed unit(s) is installed, detach it and move the printer separately.Appendix 114 5 Consumables R CAUTION: Toner cartridge *1 A4 5% test chart, 5 pages/job Note ? The actual number of printed pages you get from a particular toner cartridge depends on the type and size of paper you are using, the contents of print images, and printing environment conditions. This means that toner cartridges may need replacing more frequently than indicated above. ? Toner cartridges that come with the printer are for setup purposes, and will not provide the number of pages described above. The average number of printable pages that can be expected from the toner cartridges included in the printer are as follows: • Black toner cartridge : about 10,000 pages • Cyan, magenta, and yellow toner cartridges : about 5,000 pages for each cartridge. Staple Cartridge • Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using only those specified by an authorized dealer. Toner cartridge Average printable number of pages per cartridge *1 Cyan 10,000 Magenta 10,000 Yellow 10,000 Black 20,000 Cartridge type Number of shots Staple cartridge 5000 shots × 1 with cartridge Staple Refill cartridge Refill 5000 shots × 3Consumables 115 5 Other consumables Note ? The actual lifespan of consumables depends on the type and size of paper you are using, the contents of print images, and printing environment conditions. This means that consumables may need replacing more frequently than indicated. Furthermore, the lifespan of color consumables may be considerably reduced, as mixed printing of black & white and color pages is common. *1 A4 5% test chart, 5 pages/job *2 When printing each page as a single job, the unit needs extra idling time, thus reducing its print life by half. Name Consumables Average printable number of pages *1 Printer Maintenance Kit Type 7100A Color photoconductor unit × 3 50,000 *2 Printer Maintenance Kit Type 7000B Color development unit × 3 100,000 *2 Printer Maintenance Kit Type 7100C Fusing unit × 1 100,000 *2 Printer Maintenance Kit Type 7000D Black development unit × 1 100,000 *2 Printer Maintenance Kit Type 3800E Waste toner bottle × 1 50,000 Printer Maintenance Kit Type 7100F Black photoconductor unit × 1 50,000 *2 Printer Maintenance Kit Type 7000G Fuser oil unit × 1 30,000 *2 116 INDEX A Adding Staples, 104 Additional Troubleshooting, 89 Adjusting Image Density, 42 Adjusting the Color Registration, 32 Auto Adjust, 32 Adjusting Tray Registration, 43 Appendix, 111 B Bypass Tray Custom Size, 64 Paper Type, 65 C Cleaning and Adjusting the Printer, 27 Cleaning the DustProof Glass, 29 Cleaning the Registration Roller, 28 Color Adjustment Checking the Test Sheet, 35 Consumables, 114 Correcting the Color Gradation, 36 D Data In indicator, 79 Detaching the SR770 (2 Tray Finisher), 2 Detaching the SR910 (Booklet Finisher), 2 Display panel, messages, 67 E Envelopes, 54 Error, 67 Error indicator, 78 L Loading Paper, 52, 57 Optional Paper Feed Unit, 58 Tray 1, 57 Tray 2, 58 Loading paper Bypass Tray, 62 Paper Bank Type 7100, 59 paper size, 60 paper type, 61 M messages, 67 Moving the Printer, 112 O OHP transparencies, 53 Online indicator, 78 Online key, 78 Opening and Closing the Duplex Reversal Unit, 3 Other Printing Problems, 82 P Paper and Other Media, 45 Paper Size, 45 Plain Paper, 52 Print Area, 56 Printer Does Not Print, 78 R Remove Misfed Paper Duplex Unit, 97 Finisher, 93 Fusing Unit, 91 Internal Path, 91 Paper Tray, 97 Removing Jammed Staples, 101 Removing Misfed Paper, 91 Removing Misfed Paper into the Duplex Feed Unit, 98 Removing Punch-hole Chips, 108 Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit, 1 Replacing the Development Unit, 15 Replacing the Dustproof Filter, 23 Replacing the Fuser Oil Unit, 7 Replacing the Fusing Unit, 19 Replacing the Photoconductor Unit, 11 Replacing the Toner Cartridge, 4 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle, 25117 S Screwdriver, 1 Set the Gradation Correction Value, 36 SR770 Removing Punch-hole Chips, 108 SR770 (2 Tray Finisher) Adding Staples, 104 Removing Jammed Staples, 101 SR910 (Booklet Finisher) Adding Staples, 105 Removing Jammed Staples, 102 Removing Punch-hole Chips, 109 Storing Paper, 52 T Thick Paper, 53 Toner Cartridge, 114 Troubleshooting, 67 V Viewing the Color Calibration Sample Sheet and Gradation Correction Sheet, 39 W When the Front Cover Does Not Close, 111118 EN USA G106-7528Copyright © 2004EN USA G106-7528 JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ

 

 

 

JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ

Search

Your search returned 803 models.
 
 
 Aficio 2003 (XJ80E)
  • Model: Aficio 2003 (XJ80E)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 2003 (XJ80E)


 Aficio 2103 (XJ80E)
  • Model: Aficio 2103 (XJ80E)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 2103 (XJ80E)


 Aficio 2203 (XJ80E)
  • Model: Aficio 2203 (XJ80E)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 2203 (XJ80E)


 Aficio 3006 (E-300)
  • Model: Aficio 3006 (E-300)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 3006 (E-300)


 Aficio 3131(E-750)
  • Model: Aficio 3131(E-750)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 3131(E-750)


 Aficio 4506 (RC-210)
  • Model: Aficio 4506 (RC-210)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 4506 (RC-210)


 Aficio CL3500N
  • Model: Aficio CL3500N
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio CL3500N
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL3500N


  • Model: Aficio CL7100
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Bring Color High Volume Printing Into Your Office.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL7100


  • Model: Aficio CL7100
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Bring Color High Volume Printing Into Your Office.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL7100


 AP1600
  • Model: AP1600
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP1600


 AP2000
  • Model: AP2000
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP2000


 AP2100
  • Model: AP2100
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP2100


 AP2700
  • Model: AP2700
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP2700
  • MANUAL
  • AP2700


 AP305
  • Model: AP305
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP305
  • MANUAL
  • AP305


 AP306
  • Model: AP306
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP306
  • MANUAL
  • AP306


 AP306D
  • Model: AP306D
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP306D
  • MANUAL
  • AP306D


 AP3800C
  • Model: AP3800C
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP3800C
  • MANUAL
  • AP3800C


 AP410
  • Model: AP410
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP410
  • MANUAL
  • AP410


 AP410N
  • Model: AP410N
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP410N
  • MANUAL
  • AP410N


 AP4400N
  • Model: AP4400N
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP4400N


 AP4500
  • Model: AP4500
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP4500


 AP505
  • Model: AP505
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP505


3815
  • Model: 3815
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Low Volume
  • A Versatile Desktop MFP System for the Small Business and Executive Suite


500SE
  • Model: 500SE
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • 500SE


AC104
  • Model: AC104
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • The smart, all-in one desktop document solution
  • MANUAL
  • AC104


Ricoh AC204
  • Model: AC204
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Multifunctional productivity in a single compact system
  • MANUAL
  • AC204


Ricoh AC205L
  • Model: AC205L
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Make every work day productive
  • MANUAL
  • AC205L


AC205
  • Model: AC205
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Make every work day productive
  • MANUAL
  • AC205


Aficio  3506 (E-310 v1.1)
  • Model: Aficio 3506 (E-310 v1.1)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 3506 (E-310 v1.1)


Aficio  5106 (BP100)
  • Model: Aficio 5106 (BP100)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 5106 (BP100)


Aficio  5106 (ZX3200/3300)
  • Model: Aficio 5106 (ZX3200/3300)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 5106 (ZX3200/3300)


Aficio  5206 (BP100)
  • Model: Aficio 5206 (BP100)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 5206 (BP100)


Aficio  5206 (ZX3200/3300)
  • Model: Aficio 5206 (ZX3200/3300)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 5206 (ZX3200/3300)


Aficio  6010 (E-800A)
  • Model: Aficio 6010 (E-800A)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 6010 (E-800A)


  • Model: Aficio 1013F
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Easy-to-Use, Expandable, Affordable. Designed for Your Small Workgroup
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1013F


  • Model: Aficio 1013
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Easy-to-Use, Expandable, Affordable. Designed for Your Small Workgroup
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1013


  • Model: Aficio 1015
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Dependable, Affordable, Expandable. Simply Designed for Your Small Workgroup.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1015


  • Model: Aficio 1018D
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Dependable, Affordable, Expandable. Simply Designed for Your Small Workgroup.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1018D


  • Model: Aficio 1018
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Dependable, Affordable, Expandable. Simply Designed for Your Small Workgroup.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1018


  • Model: Aficio 1022
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Engineered for Today's Technology Driven Workplace
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1022


  • Model: Aficio 1027
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • The "Copier of the Future Technology" is Available Today
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1027


Aficio 1032
  • Model: Aficio 1032
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 1032


  • Model: Aficio 1035
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Complete Networkable Office Solution
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1035


  • Model: Aficio 1035P
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Complete Networkable Office Solution


  • Model: Aficio 1045
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Tomorrow's Solution for Today's Office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1045


  • Model: Aficio 1045P
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Tomorrow's Solution for Today's Office


Aficio 1050
  • Model: Aficio 1050
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 1050
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1050


  • Model: Aficio 1055
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • The Digital Copy/Print System for Maximum Performance
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1055


  • Model: Aficio 1060
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Versatile Document Management... Copy Print System
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1060


  • Model: Aficio 1075
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Versatile Document Management... Copy Print System
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1075


  • Model: Aficio 1085
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • A Networked High Performance and Productive On-Demand Print Solution from Ricoh
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1085


  • Model: Aficio 1105
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Production Quality Imaging, Powerful High-Speed, High-Output, Printing & On-Line Finishing For Production Environments
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1105


  • Model: Aficio 1113
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Dependable and Affordable. Designed for your workgroup


Aficio 120
  • Model: Aficio 120
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 120
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 120


  • Model: Aficio 1224C
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Centralize Document Production and Distribution to Create a More Productive Workgroup


  • Model: Aficio 1224C
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Centralize Document Production and Distribution to Create a More Productive Workgroup


  • Model: Aficio 1232C
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Centralize Document Production and Distribution to Create a More Productive Workgroup


  • Model: Aficio 1232C
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Centralize Document Production and Distribution to Create a More Productive Workgroup


  • Model: Aficio 1232CSP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Centralize Document Production and Distribution to Create a More Productive Workgroup


  • Model: Aficio 1232CSP
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Centralize Document Production and Distribution to Create a More Productive Workgroup


  • Model: Aficio 150
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • MULTI-FUNCTION
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 150


Aficio 1515F
  • Model: Aficio 1515F
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 1515F


Aficio 1515MF
  • Model: Aficio 1515MF
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 1515MF


Aficio 1515
  • Model: Aficio 1515
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Desktop design, easy connectivity, affordable
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 1515


Aficio 180
  • Model: Aficio 180
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 180
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 180


  • Model: Aficio 200
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • MULTI-FUNCTION
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 200


  • Model: Aficio 2015
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Big-Business Productivity ...Budget-Friendly Functionality


Aficio 2016
  • Model: Aficio 2016
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Connect your office and work smarter
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2016


  • Model: Aficio 2018D
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Big-Business Productivity ...Connectivity You Can Afford


Aficio 2018
  • Model: Aficio 2018
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Big-business productivity and connectivity you can afford


Aficio 2020D
  • Model: Aficio 2020D
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Connect your office and work smarter
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2020D


Aficio 2020
  • Model: Aficio 2020
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Connect your office and work smarter
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2020


  • Model: Aficio 2022
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Versatile, Affordale Multifunctionality For Your Growing Business.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2022


  • Model: Aficio 2022SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Affordable Multifunctionality For Your Growing Business


  • Model: Aficio 2027
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Affordable Multifunctionality For Your Growing Business
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2027


Aficio 2032
  • Model: Aficio 2032
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 2032


Aficio 2035e
  • Model: Aficio 2035e
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Streamlining document management, optimizing productivity
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2035e


  • Model: Aficio 2035
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Complete Document Production and Distribution
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2035


  • Model: Aficio 2035SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Complete Document Production and Distribution


Aficio 2045e
  • Model: Aficio 2045e
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 2045e
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2045e


  • Model: Aficio 2045
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Tomorrow's Solution for Today's Office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2045


  • Model: Aficio 2045SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Tomorrow's Solution for Today's Office


Aficio 2051
  • Model: Aficio 2051
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • The New Ricoh Aficio 2051- High-End Performance Meets Rock-Solid Security!
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2051


Aficio 2060
  • Model: Aficio 2060
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • The New Ricoh Aficio 2060- High-End Performance Meets Rock-Solid Security!
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2060


Aficio 2075
  • Model: Aficio 2075
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • The New Ricoh Aficio 2075- High-End Performance Meets Rock-Solid Security!
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2075


Aficio 2090 (EB-105EX)
  • Model: Aficio 2090 (EB-105EX)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 2090 (EB-105EX)


Aficio 2090 (EB105EX)
  • Model: Aficio 2090 (EB105EX)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 2090 (EB105EX)


Aficio 2090
  • Model: Aficio 2090
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • High Performance Capabilities To Meet Your Business Requirements


Aficio 2090
  • Model: Aficio 2090
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • High Performance Capabilities To Meet Your Business Requirements


Aficio 2105 (EB-105EX)
  • Model: Aficio 2105 (EB-105EX)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 2105 (EB-105EX)


Aficio 2105 (EB105EX)
  • Model: Aficio 2105 (EB105EX)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 2105 (EB105EX)


Aficio 2105
  • Model: Aficio 2105
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • High Performance Capabilities to Meet Your Business Requirements


Aficio 2105
  • Model: Aficio 2105
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • High Performance Capabilities to Meet Your Business Requirements


Aficio 220
  • Model: Aficio 220
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 220
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 220


  • Model: Aficio 220
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • MULTI-FUNCTION
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 220


  • Model: Aficio 2228C
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Performance, Versatility, Value, Color


  • Model: Aficio 2228C
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Performance, Versatility, Value, Color


Aficio 2232C
  • Model: Aficio 2232C
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 2232C
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2232C


  • Model: Aficio 2232C
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Black & White When You Need It… Color When You Want It
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2232C


  • Model: Aficio 2232C
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Black & White When You Need It… Color When You Want It
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2232C


  • Model: Aficio 2238C
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Black & White When You Need It… Color When You Want It
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2238C


  • Model: Aficio 2238C
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Professional
  • Black & White When You Need It… Color When You Want It
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 2238C


  • Model: Aficio 250
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • MULTI-FUNCTION


  • Model: Aficio 270
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Built To Handle The Diverse Applications Of The Workgroup Environment
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 270


Aficio 3006 (RC-200)
  • Model: Aficio 3006 (RC-200)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 3006 (RC-200)


  • Model: Aficio 3006
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • A brilliant move for today's office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3006


Aficio 3025
  • Model: Aficio 3025
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • The power to perform
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3025


Aficio 3030
  • Model: Aficio 3030
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Affordable multifunctionality for your growing business
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3030


Aficio 3035
  • Model: Aficio 3035
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • MFP for the value-driven office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3035


Aficio 3045
  • Model: Aficio 3045
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • MFP for the value-driven office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3045


Aficio 3224C
  • Model: Aficio 3224C
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 3224C
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3224C


Aficio 3228C
  • Model: Aficio 3228C
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 3228C
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3228C


Aficio 3232C
  • Model: Aficio 3232C
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 3232C
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3232C


Aficio 3235C
  • Model: Aficio 3235C
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 3235C
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3235C


Aficio 3245C
  • Model: Aficio 3245C
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Best-in-class, full-color MFP with unrivaled speed, image quality and cost efficiency
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3245C


Aficio 3260C(E-7000)
  • Model: Aficio 3260C(E-7000)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 3260C(E-7000)


Aficio 3260C
  • Model: Aficio 3260C
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Replace many printers with one powerful system
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3260C


Aficio 3260C
  • Model: Aficio 3260C
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Replace many printers with one powerful system
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3260C


Aficio 340
  • Model: Aficio 340
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 340


Aficio 350
  • Model: Aficio 350
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 350


Aficio 3506 (E-310 v1.0)
  • Model: Aficio 3506 (E-310 v1.0)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 3506 (E-310 v1.0)


  • Model: Aficio 3506
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Accelerate Business Productivity With Top Quality Black & White and Color Imaging
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 3506


Aficio 350e
  • Model: Aficio 350e
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 350e
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 350e


Aficio 355
  • Model: Aficio 355
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 355


Aficio 355e
  • Model: Aficio 355e
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 355e


Aficio 4006 (E-300)
  • Model: Aficio 4006 (E-300)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 4006 (E-300)


Aficio 4006 (RC-200)
  • Model: Aficio 4006 (RC-200)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 4006 (RC-200)


  • Model: Aficio 4006
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • PRECISION REPRODUCTION... LIKE YOU'VE ALWAYS ENVISIONED IT


  • Model: Aficio 401
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Multifunctional
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 401


Aficio 4106 (E-300)
  • Model: Aficio 4106 (E-300)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 4106 (E-300)


Aficio 4106 (RC-200)
  • Model: Aficio 4106 (RC-200)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 4106 (RC-200)


  • Model: Aficio 4106
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • PRECISION REPRODUCTION... LIKE YOU'VE ALWAYS ENVISIONED IT
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 4106


Aficio 450
  • Model: Aficio 450
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 450


Aficio 4506 (E-310 v1.0)
  • Model: Aficio 4506 (E-310 v1.0)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 4506 (E-310 v1.0)


Aficio 4506 (E-310 v1.1)
  • Model: Aficio 4506 (E-310 v1.1)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 4506 (E-310 v1.1)


  • Model: Aficio 4506
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • BUSINESS PRODUCTIVITY SOARS WITH RICOH'S TRUE ALL-IN-ONE OFFICE SOLUTION
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 4506


Aficio 450e
  • Model: Aficio 450e
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 450e
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 450e


Aficio 455
  • Model: Aficio 455
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 455


Aficio 455e
  • Model: Aficio 455e
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 455e


Aficio 480W
  • Model: Aficio 480W
  • Category: Wide Format
  • Subcategory: All Wide Format
  • New technology for a new era of wide-format documentation
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 480W


  • Model: Aficio 550
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • MULTI-FUNCTION


Aficio 551 (EB70)
  • Model: Aficio 551 (EB70)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 551 (EB70)


  • Model: Aficio 551
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Merging Digital Performance and Connectivity Into One Powerful Solution
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 551


Aficio 5560
  • Model: Aficio 5560
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Professional
  • Breakthrough color for production-level applications
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 5560


Aficio 5560
  • Model: Aficio 5560
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Breakthrough color for production-level applications
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 5560


Aficio 6010 (E-650)
  • Model: Aficio 6010 (E-650)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 6010 (E-650)


Aficio 6110  (E-800A)
  • Model: Aficio 6110 (E-800A)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 6110 (E-800A)


Aficio 6110 (E-650)
  • Model: Aficio 6110 (E-650)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 6110 (E-650)


  • Model: Aficio 6110
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Professional
  • Aficio Color ™ BOLD, BRILLIANT, CREATIVE, POWERFUL
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 6110


Aficio 615C
  • Model: Aficio 615C
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Step up to all-in-one color copier
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 615C


  • Model: Aficio 650
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • MULTI-FUNCTION


Aficio 6510 (E-700)
  • Model: Aficio 6510 (E-700)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 6510 (E-700)


Aficio 6513 (E-710)
  • Model: Aficio 6513 (E-710)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 6513 (E-710)


Aficio 6513 (E-810)
  • Model: Aficio 6513 (E-810)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 6513 (E-810)


Aficio 6513 (E-820)
  • Model: Aficio 6513 (E-820)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 6513 (E-820)


  • Model: Aficio 6513
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Professional
  • A Complete Color Digital Imaging System that is versatile and cost-effective
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 6513


Aficio 700 (EB70)
  • Model: Aficio 700 (EB70)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 700 (EB70)


  • Model: Aficio 700
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • MULTI-FUNCTION
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 700


Aficio 850 (EB105)
  • Model: Aficio 850 (EB105)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 850 (EB105)


Aficio 850 (EB105e)
  • Model: Aficio 850 (EB105e)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio 850 (EB105e)


  • Model: Aficio 850
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • MULTI-FUNCTION
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio 850


  • Model: Aficio AP2600N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High Speed, High Volume Network Performance you can really work with.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio AP2600N


  • Model: Aficio AP2600
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High Speed, High Volume Network Performance you can really work with.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio AP2600


  • Model: Aficio AP2610N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • PRINTER


  • Model: Aficio AP2610
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High Speed, High Volume Network Performance you can really work with.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio AP2610


  • Model: Aficio AP2610
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • High Speed, High Volume Network Performance you can really work with.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio AP2610


Aficio AP3850C(Fiery 3850C)
  • Model: Aficio AP3850C(Fiery 3850C)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio AP3850C(Fiery 3850C)


Aficio AP610N
  • Model: Aficio AP610N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Powerful performance, professional results
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio AP610N


Aficio AP610N
  • Model: Aficio AP610N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Powerful performance, professional results
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio AP610N


  • Model: Aficio CL2000N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High-Speed and High-Efficiency in an Amazingly Affordable, Compact Color Laser Printer.


  • Model: Aficio CL2000N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • High-Speed and High-Efficiency in an Amazingly Affordable, Compact Color Laser Printer.


  • Model: Aficio CL2000
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Get The Power Choice: Color or Black and White
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL2000


  • Model: Aficio CL2000
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Get The Power Choice: Color or Black and White
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL2000


  • Model: Aficio CL3000
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • The Color Printer You Can't Afford not to Have
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL3000


  • Model: Aficio CL3000
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • The Color Printer You Can't Afford not to Have
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL3000


  • Model: Aficio CL3000e
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High Quality Color and Speed For Demanding Business Graphic Workgroups.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL3000e


  • Model: Aficio CL3000e
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • High Quality Color and Speed For Demanding Business Graphic Workgroups.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL3000e


  • Model: Aficio CL4000DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Small, Sturdy, and Packed with Big Performance
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL4000DN


  • Model: Aficio CL4000DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Small, Sturdy, and Packed with Big Performance
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL4000DN


  • Model: Aficio CL5000
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Reliable Color Document Printing with Excellent Quality and Low Running Costs
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL5000


  • Model: Aficio CL5000
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Reliable Color Document Printing with Excellent Quality and Low Running Costs
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL5000


  • Model: Aficio CL7000
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • The Color Laser Printer For The Most Demanding Business In The World... Yours
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL7000


Aficio CL7200
  • Model: Aficio CL7200
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Take print speed and productivity to a whole new level
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL7200


Aficio CL7200
  • Model: Aficio CL7200
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Take print speed and productivity to a whole new level
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio CL7200


Aficio Color 2003 (XJ80e)
  • Model: Aficio Color 2003 (XJ80e)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 2003 (XJ80e)


Aficio Color 2103 (XJ80e)
  • Model: Aficio Color 2103 (XJ80e)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 2103 (XJ80e)


Aficio Color 2203 (XJ80e)
  • Model: Aficio Color 2203 (XJ80e)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 2203 (XJ80e)


Aficio Color 3006 (E-300)
  • Model: Aficio Color 3006 (E-300)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 3006 (E-300)


Aficio Color 3131 (E-750)
  • Model: Aficio Color 3131 (E-750)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 3131 (E-750)


Aficio Color 3506 (E-310 v1.0)
  • Model: Aficio Color 3506 (E-310 v1.0)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 3506 (E-310 v1.0)


Aficio Color 3506 (E-310 v1.1)
  • Model: Aficio Color 3506 (E-310 v1.1)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 3506 (E-310 v1.1)


Aficio Color 4006 (E-300)
  • Model: Aficio Color 4006 (E-300)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 4006 (E-300)


Aficio Color 4106 (E-300)


Aficio Color 4506 (E-310 v1.0)
  • Model: Aficio Color 4506 (E-310 v1.0)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 4506 (E-310 v1.0)


Aficio Color 4506 (E-310 v1.1)
  • Model: Aficio Color 4506 (E-310 v1.1)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 4506 (E-310 v1.1)


Aficio Color 5106 (XJ Series)
  • Model: Aficio Color 5106 (XJ Series)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 5106 (XJ Series)


Aficio Color 5106(BP100)
  • Model: Aficio Color 5106(BP100)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 5106(BP100)


Aficio Color 5106(ZX3200/3300)
  • Model: Aficio Color 5106(ZX3200/3300)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 5106(ZX3200/3300)


Aficio Color 5206 (XJ Series)
  • Model: Aficio Color 5206 (XJ Series)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 5206 (XJ Series)


Aficio Color 5206(BP100)
  • Model: Aficio Color 5206(BP100)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 5206(BP100)


Aficio Color 5206(ZX3200/3300)
  • Model: Aficio Color 5206(ZX3200/3300)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 5206(ZX3200/3300)


Aficio Color 5560 (E-7000)
  • Model: Aficio Color 5560 (E-7000)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 5560 (E-7000)


Aficio Color 6010 (E-650)
  • Model: Aficio Color 6010 (E-650)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 6010 (E-650)


Aficio Color 6010 (E-800A)
  • Model: Aficio Color 6010 (E-800A)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 6010 (E-800A)


Aficio Color 6110 (E-650)
  • Model: Aficio Color 6110 (E-650)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 6110 (E-650)


Aficio Color 6110 (E-800A)
  • Model: Aficio Color 6110 (E-800A)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 6110 (E-800A)


Aficio Color 6510 (E-700)
  • Model: Aficio Color 6510 (E-700)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 6510 (E-700)


Aficio Color 6513 (E-710)
  • Model: Aficio Color 6513 (E-710)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 6513 (E-710)


Aficio Color 6513 (E-810)
  • Model: Aficio Color 6513 (E-810)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 6513 (E-810)


Aficio Color 6513 (E-820)
  • Model: Aficio Color 6513 (E-820)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio Color 6513 (E-820)


  • Model: Aficio FX10
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • MULTI-FUNCTION


Aficio G500
  • Model: Aficio G500
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio G500


  • Model: Aficio G500
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • The Ricoh Aficio G500 printer is designed for business users


  • Model: Aficio G500
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • The Ricoh Aficio G500 printer is designed for business users


Aficio G700
  • Model: Aficio G700
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio G700


  • Model: Aficio G700
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • The Ricoh Aficio G700 printer is designed for business users


  • Model: Aficio G700
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • The Ricoh Aficio G700 printer is designed for business users


Aficio GXe3300N
  • Model: Aficio GX e3300N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Make an environmentally sound decision: High quality, two-sided inkjet printing on plain paper.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX e3300N


Aficio GXe3300N
  • Model: Aficio GX e3300N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • Make an environmentally sound decision: High quality, two-sided inkjet printing on plain paper.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX e3300N


Aficio GXe3350N
  • Model: Aficio GX e3350N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Make an environmentally sound decision: High quality, two-sided inkjet printing on plain paper.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX e3350N


Aficio GXe3350N
  • Model: Aficio GX e3350N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • Make an environmentally sound decision: High quality, two-sided inkjet printing on plain paper.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX e3350N


Aficio GX e5550N
  • Model: Aficio GX e5550N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • GelSprinter technology combines the affordability and convenience of inkjet color with the speed and durability of a laser printer.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX e5550N


Aficio GX e5550N
  • Model: Aficio GX e5550N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • GelSprinter technology combines the affordability and convenience of inkjet color with the speed and durability of a laser printer.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX e5550N


Aficio GX e7700N
  • Model: Aficio GX e7700N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • Powerful performance for productive color printing
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX e7700N


GX2500
  • Model: Aficio GX2500
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX2500


GX2500
  • Model: Aficio GX2500
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • High quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX2500


GX3000
  • Model: Aficio GX3000
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX3000


GX3000
  • Model: Aficio GX3000
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX3000


GX3000sf
  • Model: Aficio GX3000sf
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX3000sf


GX3000sf
  • Model: Aficio GX3000sf
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX3000sf


GX3000sf
  • Model: Aficio GX3000sf
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX3000sf


GX3000s
  • Model: Aficio GX3000s
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX3000s


GX3000s
  • Model: Aficio GX3000s
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX3000s


GX3000s
  • Model: Aficio GX3000s
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • High-quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX3000s


Aficio GX3050N
  • Model: Aficio GX3050N
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio GX3050N
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX3050N


Aficio GX5050N
  • Model: Aficio GX5050N
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio GX5050N
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio GX5050N


Aficio MP 1100 (Prev)
  • Model: Aficio MP 1100 (Prev)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP 1100 (Prev)


Aficio MP 1100(EB-135)
  • Model: Aficio MP 1100(EB-135)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP 1100(EB-135)


Aficio MP 1350 (Prev)
  • Model: Aficio MP 1350 (Prev)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP 1350 (Prev)


Aficio MP 1350(EB-135)
  • Model: Aficio MP 1350(EB-135)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP 1350(EB-135)


Aficio MP1350
  • Model: Aficio MP 1350
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Making speed work
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 1350


Aficio MP1350
  • Model: Aficio MP 1350
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Making speed work
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 1350


Aficio MP 1600L (DDST)


Aficio MP 1600L
  • Model: Aficio MP 1600L
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Functional. Affordable. And built for today’s business.


Aficio MP 1600
  • Model: Aficio MP 1600
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Set a new, more productive pace
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 1600


Aficio MP 1600
  • Model: Aficio MP 1600SPF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Set a New, More Productive Pace
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 1600SPF


Aficio MP 161F
  • Model: Aficio MP 161F
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP 161F
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 161F


Aficio MP 161
  • Model: Aficio MP 161
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Small system, big savings
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 161


Aficio MP 161
  • Model: Aficio MP 161SPF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • The all-in-one system with the compact design
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 161SPF


Aficio MP 171F
  • Model: Aficio MP 171F
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Handle anything with a system that does everything.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 171F


Aficio MP 171
  • Model: Aficio MP 171
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Handle anything with a system that does everything.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 171


Aficio MP 171SPF
  • Model: Aficio MP 171SPF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Handle anything with a system that does everything.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 171SPF


Aficio MP 2000L (DDST)


Aficio MP 2000L
  • Model: Aficio MP 2000L
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Functional. Affordable. And built for today’s business.


Aficio MP 2000
  • Model: Aficio MP 2000
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Set a new, more productive pace
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2000


Aficio MP 2000
  • Model: Aficio MP 2000SPF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Set a New, More Productive Pace
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2000SPF


Aficio MP 201F
  • Model: Aficio MP 201F
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Make fast work of all your document-related tasks.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 201F


Aficio MP 201F
  • Model: Aficio MP 201SPF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Make fast work of all your document-related tasks.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 201SPF


Aficio MP 2352 SP
  • Model: Aficio MP 2352 SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Your choice for more efficient workflow
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2352 SP


Aficio MP 2352 SP
  • Model: Aficio MP 2352
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Your choice for more efficient workflow
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2352


Aficio MP 2500 DDST
  • Model: Aficio MP 2500 DDST
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP 2500 DDST
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2500 DDST


Aficio MP 2500
  • Model: Aficio MP 2500
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • More productivity. Less expensive.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2500


Aficio MP 2500
  • Model: Aficio MP 2500SPF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • More productivity. Less expensive.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2500SPF


Aficio MP 2510
  • Model: Aficio MP 2510
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • High-performance digital office system that combines power and functionality
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2510


Aficio MP 2550B
  • Model: Aficio MP 2550B
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • High-performance digital office system that combines power and functionality
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2550B


  • Model: Aficio MP 2550
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2550


Aficio MP 2851
  • Model: Aficio MP 2851
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • A versatile digital office system where reliability meets innovation.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2851


Aficio MP 2852 SP
  • Model: Aficio MP 2852 SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Your choice for more efficient workflow
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2852 SP


Aficio MP 2852 SP
  • Model: Aficio MP 2852
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Your choice for more efficient workflow
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 2852


Aficio MP 3010
  • Model: Aficio MP 3010
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • High-performance digital office system that combines power and functionality
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 3010


Aficio MP 301SPF
  • Model: Aficio MP 301SPF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Make fast work of all your document-related tasks.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 301SPF


Aficio MP 3350
  • Model: Aficio MP 3350
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP 3350
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 3350


Aficio MP 3350B
  • Model: Aficio MP 3350B
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • High-performance digital office system that combines power and functionality
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 3350B


Aficio MP 3351
  • Model: Aficio MP 3351
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • A versatile digital office system where reliability meets innovation.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 3351


Aficio MP 3352 SP
  • Model: Aficio MP 3352 SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Your choice for more efficient workflow
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 3352 SP


Aficio MP3352
  • Model: Aficio MP 3352
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Your choice for more efficient workflow
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 3352


Aficio MP 3500
  • Model: Aficio MP 3500
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • MFP for the value-driven office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 3500


Aficio MP 3500
  • Model: Aficio MP 3500P
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • MFP for the Value-driven Office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 3500P


Aficio MP 3500
  • Model: Aficio MP 3500SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • MFP for the Value-driven Office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 3500SP


Aficio MP 4000B
  • Model: Aficio MP 4000B
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Exceptional Speed, Optimal Efficiency, and Worry-Free Security.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 4000B


Aficio MP 4000
  • Model: Aficio MP 4000
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Exceptional MFP for the value-driven office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 4000


  • Model: Aficio MP 4000SPF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Exceptional Speed, Optimal Efficiency, and Worry-Free Security.


Aficio MP 4001
  • Model: Aficio MP 4001
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Exceptional MFP for the value-driven office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 4001


Aficio MP 4002
  • Model: Aficio MP 4002
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Customize workflow to maximize productivity
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 4002


Aficio MP 4002SP
  • Model: Aficio MP 4002SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Customize workflow to maximize productivity
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 4002SP


Aficio MP 4500
  • Model: Aficio MP 4500
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • MFP for the value-driven office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 4500


Aficio MP 5000B
  • Model: Aficio MP 5000B
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptional Speed, Optimal Efficiency, and Worry-Free Security.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 5000B


Aficio MP 5000
  • Model: Aficio MP 5000
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptional MFP for the value-driven office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 5000


Aficio MP 5001
  • Model: Aficio MP 5001
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptional MFP for the value-driven office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 5001


Aficio MP 5002
  • Model: Aficio MP 5002
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Customize workflow to maximize productivity
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 5002


Aficio MP 5002SP
  • Model: Aficio MP 5002SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Customize workflow to maximize productivity
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 5002SP


Aficio MP 5500 S/P
  • Model: Aficio MP 5500 S/P
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 5500 S/P


Aficio MP 5500
  • Model: Aficio MP 5500
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 5500


Aficio MP 6000 S/P
  • Model: Aficio MP 6000 S/P
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 6000 S/P


Aficio MP 6000
  • Model: Aficio MP 6000
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 6000


Aficio MP 6001
  • Model: Aficio MP 6001 SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 6001 SP


Aficio MP 6001
  • Model: Aficio MP 6001
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 6001


  • Model: Aficio MP 6500 S/P
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 6500 S/P


Aficio MP 6500
  • Model: Aficio MP 6500
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 6500


Aficio MP 7000 S/P
  • Model: Aficio MP 7000 S/P
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 7000 S/P


Aficio MP 7000
  • Model: Aficio MP 7000
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 7000


Aficio MP 7001sp
  • Model: Aficio MP 7001 SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 7001 SP


Aficio MP 7001
  • Model: Aficio MP 7001
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 7001


  • Model: Aficio MP 7500 S/P
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 7500 S/P


Aficio MP 7500
  • Model: Aficio MP 7500
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 7500


Aficio MP 8000
  • Model: Aficio MP 8000 S/P
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 8000 S/P


Aficio MP 8000
  • Model: Aficio MP 8000
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Exceptionally fast, sophisticated systems that are all business
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 8000


Aficio MP 8001sp
  • Model: Aficio MP 8001 SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 8001 SP


Aficio MP 8001
  • Model: Aficio MP 8001
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 8001


Aficio MP 9000 (EB-135)
  • Model: Aficio MP 9000 (EB-135)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP 9000 (EB-135)


Aficio MP 9000 (Prev)
  • Model: Aficio MP 9000 (Prev)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP 9000 (Prev)


Aficio MP9000
  • Model: Aficio MP 9000
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Making speed work
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 9000


Aficio MP9000
  • Model: Aficio MP 9000
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Making speed work
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 9000


Aficio MP 9001sp
  • Model: Aficio MP 9001 SP
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 9001 SP


Aficio MP 9001
  • Model: Aficio MP 9001
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Powerful system offers superior speed and unsurpassed performance with professional results
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP 9001


Aficio MP C2000
  • Model: Aficio MP C2000
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Any job. Any time. Any place.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C2000


Aficio MP C2030
  • Model: Aficio MP C2030
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Get outstanding productivity and lower total cost of ownership.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C2030


Aficio MP C2050
  • Model: Aficio MP C2050
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Everything You Need in a Single System
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C2050


Aficio MP C2050
  • Model: Aficio MP C2050SPF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Everything You Need in a Single System
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C2050SPF


Aficio MP C2051
  • Model: Aficio MP C2051
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Attention-grabbing color and efficient black-and-white in one compact system
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C2051


Aficio MP C2500 (E-3000)
  • Model: Aficio MP C2500 (E-3000)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C2500 (E-3000)


Aficio MP C2500 EFI Digital  Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C2500 EFI
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Digital Copier that Handles Color and Black & White


Aficio MP C2500 EFI Digital  Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C2500 EFI
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Professional
  • Digital Copier that Handles Color and Black & White


Aficio MP C2500 Digital Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C2500
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Digital Copier that Handles Color and Black & White
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C2500


Aficio MP C2550
  • Model: Aficio MP C2550
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Everything You Need in a Single System
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C2550


Aficio MP C2550
  • Model: Aficio MP C2550SPF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Everything You Need in a Single System
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C2550SPF


Aficio MP C2551
  • Model: Aficio MP C2551
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Attention-grabbing color and efficient black-and-white in one compact system
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C2551


Aficio MP C2800 (E-3100)
  • Model: Aficio MP C2800 (E-3100)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C2800 (E-3100)


Aficio MP C2800 Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C2800
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Enhance productivity for color and black & white.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C2800


Aficio MP C2800 Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C2800SPF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Enhance productivity for color and black & white.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C2800SPF


Aficio MP C3000 (E-3000)
  • Model: Aficio MP C3000 (E-3000)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C3000 (E-3000)


Aficio MP C3000 EFI Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C3000 EFI
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Color Copier with Fiery Print Controller


Aficio MP C3000 EFI Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C3000 EFI
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Professional
  • Color Copier with Fiery Print Controller


Aficio MP C3000 Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C3000
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Color Copier that is Versatile and Productive
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C3000


Aficio MP C3000SPF
  • Model: Aficio MP C3000SPF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Versatile, Productive, Reliable Color and Black and White
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C3000SPF


Aficio MP C3001
  • Model: Aficio MP C3001
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Versatile color in a secure, eco-friendly design.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C3001


  • Model: Aficio MP C3002/C3502/(E-3300) Fiery Controller
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm


Aficio MP C3002
  • Model: Aficio MP C3002
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Busy has never looked so easy
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C3002


Aficio MP C300
  • Model: Aficio MP C300
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Achieve a faster, smoother, smarter document workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C300


Aficio MP C300
  • Model: Aficio MP C300SR
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Achieve a faster, smoother, smarter document workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C300SR


Aficio MP C305
  • Model: Aficio MP C305
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Make fast work of all your document-related tasks.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C305


Aficio MP C3300 (E-3100)
  • Model: Aficio MP C3300 (E-3100)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C3300 (E-3100)


Aficio MP C3300 Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C3300
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Enhance productivity for color and black & white.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C3300


Aficio MP C3300SPF Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C3300SPF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Enhance productivity for color and black & white.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C3300SPF


Aficio MP C3500 (E-5000)
  • Model: Aficio MP C3500 (E-5000)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C3500 (E-5000)


Aficio MP C3500 EFI Multifunction Printer
  • Model: Aficio MP C3500 EFI
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Multifunction Printer with Fiery Print Controller


Aficio MP C3500 EFI Multifunction Printer
  • Model: Aficio MP C3500 EFI
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Professional
  • Multifunction Printer with Fiery Print Controller


Aficio MP C3500 SPF
  • Model: Aficio MP C3500 SPF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Any job, any time, any place
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C3500 SPF


Aficio MP C3500 Multifunction Printer
  • Model: Aficio MP C3500
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Multifunction Printer that is Fast and Productive
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C3500


Aficio MP C3501
  • Model: Aficio MP C3501
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Versatile color in a secure, eco-friendly design.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C3501


Aficio MP C3502
  • Model: Aficio MP C3502
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Busy has never looked so easy
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C3502


Aficio MP C4000 (E-5100)
  • Model: Aficio MP C4000 (E-5100)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C4000 (E-5100)


Aficio MP C4000
  • Model: Aficio MP C4000
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Outstanding color with exceptional versatility.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C4000


Aficio MP C4000
  • Model: Aficio MP C4000SPF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Outstanding color with exceptional versatility.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C4000SPF


Aficio MP C400
  • Model: Aficio MP C400
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Achieve a faster, smoother, smarter document workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C400


Aficio MP C400SR
  • Model: Aficio MP C400SR
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Achieve a faster, smoother, smarter document workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C400SR


Aficio MP C4500 (E-5000)
  • Model: Aficio MP C4500 (E-5000)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C4500 (E-5000)


Aficio MP C4500 EFI Multifunction Printer
  • Model: Aficio MP C4500 EFI
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Multifunction Printer with Fiery Print Controller


Aficio MP C4500 EFI Multifunction Printer
  • Model: Aficio MP C4500 EFI
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Professional
  • Multifunction Printer with Fiery Print Controller


Aficio MP C4500 SPF
  • Model: Aficio MP C4500 SPF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Versatile, Productive, Reliable Color and Black and White
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C4500 SPF


Aficio MP C4500 Multifunction Printer
  • Model: Aficio MP C4500
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Multifunction Printer that is Fast and Productive
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C4500


Aficio MP C4501
  • Model: Aficio MP C4501
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Versatile color in a secure, eco-friendly design.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C4501


  • Model: Aficio MP C4502/C4502A/C5502/C5502A/(E-5300) Fiery Controller
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm


Aficio MP C4502
  • Model: Aficio MP C4502
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Versatile color in a secure, eco-friendly design.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C4502


Aficio MP C5000 (E-5100)
  • Model: Aficio MP C5000 (E-5100)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C5000 (E-5100)


Aficio MP C5000
  • Model: Aficio MP C5000
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Outstanding color with exceptional versatility.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C5000


Aficio MP C5000SPF
  • Model: Aficio MP C5000SPF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Outstanding color with exceptional versatility.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C5000SPF


Aficio MP C5501
  • Model: Aficio MP C5501
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Versatile color in a secure, eco-friendly design.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C5501


Aficio MP C5502
  • Model: Aficio MP C5502
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Versatile color in a secure, eco-friendly design.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C5502


Aficio MP C6000 (E-7100 v1.1)
  • Model: Aficio MP C6000 (E-7100 v1.1)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C6000 (E-7100 v1.1)


Aficio MP C6000 (E-7100)
  • Model: Aficio MP C6000 (E-7100)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C6000 (E-7100)


Aficio MP C6000 Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C6000
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Color Copier with Simple to Use Operation
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C6000


Aficio MP C6000 Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C6000
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Professional
  • Color Copier with Simple to Use Operation
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C6000


Aficio MP C6000 Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C6000
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Color Copier with Simple to Use Operation
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C6000


Aficio MP C6501SP (E-7200)
  • Model: Aficio MP C6501SP (E-7200)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C6501SP (E-7200)


Aficio MP C6501SP Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C6501SP
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Color Copier with Simple to Use Operation
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C6501SP


Aficio MP C7500 (E-7100 v1.1)
  • Model: Aficio MP C7500 (E-7100 v1.1)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C7500 (E-7100 v1.1)


Aficio MP C7500 (E-7100)
  • Model: Aficio MP C7500 (E-7100)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C7500 (E-7100)


Aficio MP C7500 Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C7500
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Color Copier With Fast Print Speed
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C7500


Aficio MP C7500 Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C7500
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Professional
  • Color Copier With Fast Print Speed
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C7500


Aficio MP C7500 Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C7500
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Color Copier With Fast Print Speed
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C7500


Aficio MP C7501SP (E-7200)
  • Model: Aficio MP C7501SP (E-7200)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio MP C7501SP (E-7200)


Aficio MP C7501SP Color Copier
  • Model: Aficio MP C7501SP
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Color Copier With Fast Print Speed
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP C7501SP


Aficio MPW 2400
  • Model: Aficio MP W2400
  • Category: Planeras
  • Subcategory: Todas las Planeras
  • Productividad Multifuncional En Una Compacta Unidad
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP W2400


Aficio MP W3600
  • Model: Aficio MP W3600
  • Category: Wide Format
  • Subcategory: All Wide Format
  • Multifunctional productivity in a single footprint
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP W3600


Aficio MP W3601
  • Model: Aficio MP W3601
  • Category: Wide Format
  • Subcategory: All Wide Format
  • Wide Format Digital Imaging System
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP W3601


Aficio MP W5100
  • Model: Aficio MP W5100
  • Category: Wide Format
  • Subcategory: All Wide Format
  • High productivity. Color scanning. Fast output.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP W5100


Aficio MP W7140
  • Model: Aficio MP W7140
  • Category: Wide Format
  • Subcategory: All Wide Format
  • High productivity. Color scanning. Fast output.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP W7140


Aficio MP 1100
  • Model: Aficio MP1100
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Making speed work
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP1100


Aficio MP 1100
  • Model: Aficio MP1100
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Making speed work
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio MP1100


Aficio SG 3110DNw
  • Model: Aficio SG 3110DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • Full-color printing for any budget or environment
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SG 3110DN


Aficio SG 3110DNw
  • Model: Aficio SG 3110DNw
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • Full-color printing for any budget or environment
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SG 3110DNw


Aficio SP1000SF
  • Model: Aficio SP 1000SF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • The Aficio SP1000SF offers excellent flexibility for its class with time-saving functions normally found on higher-volume devices.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 1000SF


Aficio SP 1200SF
  • Model: Aficio SP 1200SF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • User-friendly multifunctionality for more efficient workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 1200SF


Aficio SP 1210N black & white laser printer
  • Model: Aficio SP 1210N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Creating Space for Affordable, Productive Printing
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 1210N


Aficio SP 3200SF
  • Model: Aficio SP 3200SF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Equipped to deliver high productivity in small offices
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 3200SF


Aficio SP 3300D
  • Model: Aficio SP 3300D
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Compact Size, Big Value, Highly Productive Performance
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 3300D


Aficio SP 3300D
  • Model: Aficio SP 3300D
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Compact Size, Big Value, Highly Productive Performance
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 3300D


The Aficio SP 3400N is a black & white laser printer.
  • Model: Aficio SP 3400N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Designed for Your Desktop and Your Budget
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 3400N


The Aficio SP 3400N is a black & white laser printer.
  • Model: Aficio SP 3400N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Designed for Your Desktop and Your Budget
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 3400N


The Aficio SP 3400SF is a black & white laser printer with copy, scan, and fax capabilities.
  • Model: Aficio SP 3400SF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Designed to deliver exactly what you need.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 3400SF


The Aficio SP 3410DN is a black & white laser printer.
  • Model: Aficio SP 3410DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Designed for Your Desktop and Your Budget
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 3410DN


The Aficio SP 3410DN is a black & white laser printer.
  • Model: Aficio SP 3410DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Designed for Your Desktop and Your Budget
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 3410DN


The Aficio SP 3410SF is a black & white laser printer with copy, scan, and fax capabilities.
  • Model: Aficio SP 3410SF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Designed to deliver exactly what you need.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 3410SF


Aficio SP 3500SF
  • Model: Aficio SP 3500SF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • Aficio SP 3500SF
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 3500SF


Aficio SP 3510DN
  • Model: Aficio SP 3510DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Discover the convenience of affordable network laser printing
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 3510DN


Aficio SP 3510SF
  • Model: Aficio SP 3510SF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • An affordable, compact multifunction product engineered for peak performance.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 3510SF


Aficio SP 4100N KP
  • Model: Aficio SP 4100N KP
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Empower Every User With Secure Mobile Printing


Aficio SP 4100N KP
  • Model: Aficio SP 4100N KP
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Empower Every User With Secure Mobile Printing


Aficio SP 4100NL
  • Model: Aficio SP 4100NL
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Impressive Performance, Excellent Value
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 4100NL


Aficio SP 4100N
  • Model: Aficio SP 4100N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Fast, convenient desktop printing
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 4100N


Aficio SP 4100N
  • Model: Aficio SP 4100N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Fast, convenient desktop printing
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 4100N


Aficio SP 4110N KP
  • Model: Aficio SP 4110N-KP
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Empower Every User With Secure Mobile Printing


Aficio SP 4110N KP
  • Model: Aficio SP 4110N-KP
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Empower Every User With Secure Mobile Printing


Aficio SP 4110N
  • Model: Aficio SP 4110N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Fast, convenient desktop printing
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 4110N


Aficio SP 4110N
  • Model: Aficio SP 4110N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Fast, convenient desktop printing
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 4110N


  • Model: Aficio SP 4210N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • High Productivity in a Compact Design
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 4210N


Aficio SP 4310N
  • Model: Aficio SP 4310N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • A scalable business printer solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 4310N


Aficio SP 4410SF
  • Model: Aficio SP 4410SF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Multifunction performance for everyday workflows.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 4410SF


Aficio SP 5100N
  • Model: Aficio SP 5100N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Fast, convenient desktop printing
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 5100N


Aficio SP 5100N
  • Model: Aficio SP 5100N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Fast, convenient desktop printing
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 5100N


Aficio SP 5200DN
  • Model: Aficio SP 5200DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • The value of maximum productivity
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 5200DN


Aficio SP 5200S
  • Model: Aficio SP 5200S
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Versatile, powerful performance with ease
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 5200S


Aficio SP 5210DN
  • Model: Aficio SP 5210DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • The value of maximum productivity
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 5210DN


Aficio SP 5210SF
  • Model: Aficio SP 5210SF
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 23-45 ppm
  • Versatile, powerful performance
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 5210SF


Aficio SP 5210SR
  • Model: Aficio SP 5210SR
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • Versatile, powerful performance
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 5210SR


Aficio SP 6330N
  • Model: Aficio SP 6330N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Think BIG. Get 11" x 17" capabilities in a desktop solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 6330N


Aficio SP 6330N
  • Model: Aficio SP 6330N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Think BIG. Get 11" x 17" capabilities in a desktop solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 6330N


Aficio SP 8100DN
  • Model: Aficio SP 8100DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • The fast and flexible answer for the connected office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 8100DN


Aficio SP 8100DN
  • Model: Aficio SP 8100DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • The fast and flexible answer for the connected office
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 8100DN


Aficio SP 8200DN
  • Model: Aficio SP 8200DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • High-performance printing for demanding workloads.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 8200DN


Aficio SP 9100DN
  • Model: Aficio SP 9100DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • The fast and flexible answer for connected offices
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 9100DN


Aficio SP 9100DN
  • Model: Aficio SP 9100DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • The fast and flexible answer for connected offices
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP 9100DN


Aficio SP C210
  • Model: Aficio SP C210
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High-speed black & white printer with convenient color at an affordable price
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C210


Aficio SP C210
  • Model: Aficio SP C210
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • High-speed black & white printer with convenient color at an affordable price
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C210


Aficio SP C210SF
  • Model: Aficio SP C210SF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Superior performance, modest price
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C210SF


Aficio SP C220N
  • Model: Aficio SP C220N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Cost-Effective Color Designed for Your Workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C220N


Aficio SP C220N
  • Model: Aficio SP C220N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Cost-Effective Color Designed for Your Workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C220N


SP C2220S
  • Model: Aficio SP C220S
  • Category: Color Multifunction
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Drive Productivity With A Single, Versatile System.


Aficio SP C221N
  • Model: Aficio SP C221N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Cost-Effective Color Designed for Your Workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C221N


Aficio SP C221N
  • Model: Aficio SP C221N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Cost-Effective Color Designed for Your Workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C221N


Aficio SP C221SF
  • Model: Aficio SP C221SF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Multifunction Printer that Offers Powerful Capabilities
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C221SF


Aficio SP C222DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C222DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Cost-Effective Color Designed for Your Workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C222DN


Aficio SP C222DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C222DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Cost-Effective Color Designed for Your Workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C222DN


Aficio SP C222SF Multifunction Printer
  • Model: Aficio SP C222SF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Multifunction Printer that Drives Producttivity
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C222SF


Aficio SP C231N
  • Model: Aficio SP C231N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Small In Size, Large In Value
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C231N


Aficio SP C231N
  • Model: Aficio SP C231N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Small In Size, Large In Value
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C231N


Aficio SP C231SF
  • Model: Aficio SP C231SF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Multitasking Made Easy
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C231SF


Aficio SP C232DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C232DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Small In Size, Large In Value
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C232DN


Aficio SP C232DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C232DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Small In Size, Large In Value
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C232DN


Aficio SP C232SF
  • Model: Aficio SP C232SF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Multitasking Made Easy
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C232SF


Aficio SP C240SF
  • Model: Aficio SP C240SF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Versatile performance in vivid color
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C240SF


Aficio SP C242DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C242DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Add color, reduce expenses
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C242DN


Aficio SP C242SF
  • Model: Aficio SP C242SF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Manage more jobs more efficiently.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C242SF


Aficio SP C311N
  • Model: Aficio SP C311N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Energize documents, reduce expenses.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C311N


Aficio SP C312DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C312DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Energize documents, reduce expenses.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C312DN


Aficio SP C320DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C320DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Robust capabilities, impressive results.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C320DN


Aficio SP C400DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C400DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High-Quality Color with Exceptional Value
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C400DN


Aficio SP C400DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C400DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • High-Quality Color with Exceptional Value
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C400DN


Aficio SP C410DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C410DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • The affordable color printer solution
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C410DN


Aficio SP C410DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C410DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • The affordable color printer solution
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C410DN


Aficio SP C411DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C411DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • The affordable color printer solution
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C411DN


Aficio SP C411DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C411DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • The affordable color printer solution
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C411DN


Aficio SP C420DN-KP
  • Model: Aficio SP C420DN-KP
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • A Secure Mobile Printing Solution That Allows Anyone to Print From Anywhere At Anytime.


Aficio SP C420DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C420DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • The affordable color printer solution
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C420DN


Aficio SP C420DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C420DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • The affordable color printer solution
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C420DN


Aficio SP C430DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C430DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Make ordinary documents look brilliant.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C430DN


Aficio SP C430DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C430DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Make ordinary documents look brilliant.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C430DN


Aficio SP C431DN-HS
  • Model: Aficio SP C431DN-HS
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Ricoh Puts the Power of Mobile Printing in the Hands of Every User.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C431DN-HS


Aficio SP C431DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C431DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Make ordinary documents look brilliant.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C431DN


Aficio SP C431DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C431DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Make ordinary documents look brilliant.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C431DN


  • Model: Aficio SP C811DN-DL
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C811DN-DL


  • Model: Aficio SP C811DN-DL
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C811DN-DL


Aficio SP C811DN Series
  • Model: Aficio SP C811DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C811DN


Aficio SP C811DN Series
  • Model: Aficio SP C811DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C811DN


  • Model: Aficio SP C811DN-T1
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C811DN-T1


  • Model: Aficio SP C811DN-T1
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C811DN-T1


  • Model: Aficio SP C811DN-T2
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C811DN-T2


  • Model: Aficio SP C811DN-T2
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C811DN-T2


  • Model: Aficio SP C811DN-T3
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C811DN-T3


  • Model: Aficio SP C811DN-T3
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Different departments. Different needs. One universal printing solution.
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C811DN-T3


Aficio SP C820DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C820DNLC
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Take Control Of Your Documents
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C820DNLC


Aficio SP C820DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C820DNLC
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Take Control Of Your Documents
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C820DNLC


Aficio SP C820DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C820DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Take Control Of Your Documents
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C820DN


Aficio SP C820DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C820DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Take Control Of Your Documents
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C820DN


Aficio SP C820DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C820DNT1
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Take Control Of Your Documents
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C820DNT1


Aficio SP C820DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C820DNT1
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Take Control Of Your Documents
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C820DNT1


Aficio SP C820DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C820DNT2
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Take Control Of Your Documents
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C820DNT2


Aficio SP C820DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C820DNT2
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Take Control Of Your Documents
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C820DNT2


Aficio SP C821DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C821DNLC
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Unleash Your In-house Capabilities
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C821DNLC


Aficio SP C821DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C821DNLC
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Unleash Your In-house Capabilities
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C821DNLC


Aficio SP C821DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C821DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Unleash Your In-house Capabilities
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C821DN


Aficio SP C821DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C821DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Unleash Your In-house Capabilities
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C821DN


Aficio SP C821DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C821DNT1
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Unleash Your In-house Capabilities
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C821DNT1


Aficio SP C821DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C821DNT1
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Unleash Your In-house Capabilities
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C821DNT1


Aficio SP C821DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C821DNX
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Unleash Your In-house Capabilities
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C821DNX


Aficio SP C821DN
  • Model: Aficio SP C821DNX
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Unleash Your In-house Capabilities
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP C821DNX


Aficio SP W2470
  • Model: Aficio SP W2470
  • Category: Wide Format
  • Subcategory: All Wide Format
  • State-of-the-art capabilities in a compact, economical printer
  • MANUAL
  • Aficio SP W2470


  • Model: Aficio SP3500N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser


Aficio SPC231D
  • Model: Aficio SPC231D
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Aficio SPC231D


  • Model: AP1400
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • PRINTERS
  • MANUAL
  • AP1400


  • Model: AP206
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • The World of Color Printing just got better.


AP3200
  • Model: AP3200
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Enhance Workgroup Productivity with Superior Speed, Print Performance & Versatility


AP3200
  • Model: AP3200
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Enhance Workgroup Productivity with Superior Speed, Print Performance & Versatility


  • Model: AP3800CMF
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • The Multi-functional Solution for Document Distribution and Delivery with uncompromising performance


  • Model: AP3800C
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Ricoh Aficio AP3800C Series Color Printers Unprecedented Speed and Complete On-Line Document Finishing at an Incredible Value


  • Model: AP3850C
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Uncompromising High Speed Document Production for the Workgroup.


  • Model: AP3850C
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Uncompromising High Speed Document Production for the Workgroup.


  • Model: AP400
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Affordable High-Performance Monochrome Laser Printers
  • MANUAL
  • AP400


  • Model: AP400
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Affordable High-Performance Monochrome Laser Printers
  • MANUAL
  • AP400


  • Model: AP400
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Affordable High-Performance Monochrome Laser Printers
  • MANUAL
  • AP400


AP4510
  • Model: AP4510
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Enhanced Power And Productivity In One Versatile Workgroup Solution


AP4510
  • Model: AP4510
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Enhanced Power And Productivity In One Versatile Workgroup Solution


AP505 (Fiery 500)
  • Model: AP505 (Fiery 500)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • AP505 (Fiery 500)


  • Model: AP600N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Exceptional Performance with Uncompromising Image Quality


  • Model: AP600N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Exceptional Performance with Uncompromising Image Quality


AP900
  • Model: AP900
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Fast, Right to the Finish
  • MANUAL
  • AP900


AP900
  • Model: AP900
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Fast, Right to the Finish
  • MANUAL
  • AP900


Bizworks 406DF
  • Model: Bizworks 406DF
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Bizworks 406DF


Bizworks 406eDF
  • Model: Bizworks 406eDF
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Bizworks 406eDF


Bizworks 706
  • Model: Bizworks 706
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Bizworks 706


BP20N
  • Model: BP20n
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Top-of-the line laser printing performance. Bottom-line affordability.
  • MANUAL
  • BP20n


  • Model: BP20
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Top-of-the-line laser printing performance. Bottom-line affordability.
  • MANUAL
  • BP20


  • Model: CL7000CMF
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Professional
  • Print, Scan, Copy, E-mail, Fax. How Can You Manage It All? One System, One Answer


  • Model: CL7000CMF
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Print, Scan, Copy, E-mail, Fax. How Can You Manage It All? One System, One Answer


  • Model: CL7000CMF
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Color Laser
  • Print, Scan, Copy, E-mail, Fax. How Can You Manage It All? One System, One Answer


  • Model: CL7000MF
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • PRINTER


Color Controller E-80
  • Model: Color Controller E-80
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Color Controller E-80


Color Controller E-80 for Software v2.0
  • Model: Color Controller E-80 for Software v2.0
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Color Controller E-80 for Software v2.0


Color Controller E-8100 for v1.1
  • Model: Color Controller E-8100 for v1.1
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Color Controller E-8100 for v1.1


DS5330
  • Model: DS5330
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • DS5330


E-8000 Fiery User Software
  • Model: E-8000 Fiery User Software
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • E-8000 Fiery User Software


Epson Stylus Pro 7700
  • Model: Epson Stylus Pro 7700
  • Category: Wide Format
  • Subcategory: All Wide Format
  • Redefining the Future of Printing
  • MANUAL
  • Epson Stylus Pro 7700


Epson Stylus Pro 9700
  • Model: Epson Stylus Pro 9700
  • Category: Wide Format
  • Subcategory: All Wide Format
  • Redefining the Future of Printing
  • MANUAL
  • Epson Stylus Pro 9700


Fax 1170L
  • Model: Fax 1170L
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Fax 1170L
  • MANUAL
  • Fax 1170L


Fax 1190L
  • Model: FAX 1190L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Low Volume
  • Designed for All-In-One Productivity
  • MANUAL
  • FAX 1190L


Fax 2400L
  • Model: Fax 2400L
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Fax 2400L
  • MANUAL
  • Fax 2400L


Fax 2700L
  • Model: Fax 2700L
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Fax 2700L
  • MANUAL
  • Fax 2700L


Fax 3310Le
  • Model: Fax 3310Le
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Fax 3310Le
  • MANUAL
  • Fax 3310Le


Fax 3700L
  • Model: Fax 3700L
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Fax 3700L
  • MANUAL
  • Fax 3700L


Fax 3800L
  • Model: Fax 3800L
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Fax 3800L
  • MANUAL
  • Fax 3800L


Fax 3900NF
  • Model: Fax 3900NF
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Fax 3900NF
  • MANUAL
  • Fax 3900NF


  • Model: FAX 4410L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Shift Your Office Communications into High Gear
  • MANUAL
  • FAX 4410L


  • Model: FAX 4410NF
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Integrate Sophisticated Faxing Performance with Network Cost Efficiency
  • MANUAL
  • FAX 4410NF


Fax 4420L
  • Model: Fax 4420L
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Fax 4420L


Fax 4420NF
  • Model: Fax 4420NF
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Fax 4420NF


Fax 4700L
  • Model: Fax 4700L
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Fax 4700L
  • MANUAL
  • Fax 4700L


  • Model: FAX1160L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Low Volume
  • The Perfect and Affordable Fit for Your Small Office or Workgroup


FAX1180L
  • Model: FAX1180L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Low Volume
  • A versatile desktop multifunction system for small businesses and executive suites
  • MANUAL
  • FAX1180L


  • Model: FAX1900L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Cost-effective and versatile partner to meet the needs of the small business or workgroup


  • Model: FAX2000L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • FAX
  • MANUAL
  • FAX2000L


  • Model: FAX2050L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Super Fast . . . Super Efficient . . . High Performance Fax System


FAX2210L
  • Model: FAX2210L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Efficient, simple, versatile...made for the work you do
  • MANUAL
  • FAX2210L


  • Model: FAX3310L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Efficient, Simple, Versatile...Made for the Work you do
  • MANUAL
  • FAX3310L


FAX3320L
  • Model: FAX3320L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Streamline workflow and increase efficiency with this powerful facsimile system
  • MANUAL
  • FAX3320L


  • Model: FAX3900L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Advanced Communication System to meet your office environment


  • Model: FAX3900NF
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Sophisticated Internet Faxing and Network Communications


FAX4430L
  • Model: FAX4430L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Advanced document communication tools for superior workflow
  • MANUAL
  • FAX4430L


FAX4430NF
  • Model: FAX4430NF
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • High-performance faxing for workgroups
  • MANUAL
  • FAX4430NF


  • Model: FAX4800L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • FAX


  • Model: FAX5000L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Providing Fax Productivity Through Network Connectivity
  • MANUAL
  • FAX5000L


FAX5510L
  • Model: FAX5510L
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Designed for today's demanding document communications needs
  • MANUAL
  • FAX5510L


FAX5510NF
  • Model: FAX5510NF
  • Category: Facsimile
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Advanced communications for the next generation
  • MANUAL
  • FAX5510NF


FS2 Color
  • Model: FS2 Color
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • FS2 Color


  • Model: FT7960
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • COPIERS


  • Model: FT7970
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • COPIERS


Ricoh FW770
  • Model: FW770
  • Category: Wide Format
  • Subcategory: All Wide Format
  • Wide-format analog copiers for companies that think big
  • MANUAL
  • FW770


  • Model: FW780
  • Category: Wide Format
  • Subcategory: All Wide Format
  • Wide-format analog copiers for companies
  • MANUAL
  • FW780


G7500
  • Model: G7500
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • Affordable color prints


G7500
  • Model: G7500
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • Affordable color prints


GX3050
  • Model: GX3050N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users


GX3050
  • Model: GX3050N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • High quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users


GX3050SFN Color Printer
  • Model: GX3050SFN
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Color Printer with Amazing Speed for Business Users


GX5050N
  • Model: GX5050N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • High quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users


GX5050N
  • Model: GX5050N
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • High quality, brilliant color with amazing speed for business users


i700 - Mac 10.2
  • Model: i700 - Mac 10.2
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • i700 - Mac 10.2
  • MANUAL
  • i700 - Mac 10.2


i700 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Model: i700 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • i700 - Mac OS 7.6
  • MANUAL
  • i700 - Mac OS 7.6


i700 - Mac OS 8x-9x
  • Model: i700 - Mac OS 8x-9x
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • i700 - Mac OS 8x-9x
  • MANUAL
  • i700 - Mac OS 8x-9x


i700 - Mac OS X
  • Model: i700 - Mac OS X
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • i700 - Mac OS X
  • MANUAL
  • i700 - Mac OS X


i700 - Win 2000
  • Model: i700 - Win 2000
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • i700 - Win 2000
  • MANUAL
  • i700 - Win 2000


i700 - Win 95
  • Model: i700 - Win 95
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • i700 - Win 95
  • MANUAL
  • i700 - Win 95


i700 - Win 98
  • Model: i700 - Win 98
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • i700 - Win 98
  • MANUAL
  • i700 - Win 98


i700 - Win ME
  • Model: i700 - Win ME
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • i700 - Win ME
  • MANUAL
  • i700 - Win ME


i700 - Win NT
  • Model: i700 - Win NT
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • i700 - Win NT
  • MANUAL
  • i700 - Win NT


i700 - Win XP
  • Model: i700 - Win XP
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • i700 - Win XP
  • MANUAL
  • i700 - Win XP


InfoPrint® Color 1866 MFP
  • Model: InfoPrint® Color 1866 MFP
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: General Office
  • Enhance Workgroup Productivity


IS01
  • Model: IS01
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • IS01
  • MANUAL
  • IS01


  • Model: IS100e
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printer Options
  • Document scanning and copying at your fingertips.


IS200e
  • Model: IS200e
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printer Options
  • A versatile multifunctional scan station for the connected office
  • MANUAL
  • IS200e


IS200e
  • Model: IS200e
  • Category: Scanners
  • Subcategory: Low-Mid Volume
  • A versatile multifunctional scan station for the connected office
  • MANUAL
  • IS200e


IS300e
  • Model: IS300e
  • Category: Scanners
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Document scanning and copying at your fingertips
  • MANUAL
  • IS300e


Savin IS330DC
  • Model: IS330DC
  • Category: Scanners
  • Subcategory: Low-Mid Volume
  • Full Color Scanning With Duplex Capabilities
  • MANUAL
  • IS330DC


IS410
  • Model: IS410
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • IS410


IS420
  • Model: IS420
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • IS420


IS430
  • Model: IS430
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • IS430
  • MANUAL
  • IS430


IS450
  • Model: IS450
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • IS450
  • MANUAL
  • IS450


IS50
  • Model: IS50
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • IS50


IS510
  • Model: IS510
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • IS510


IS520
  • Model: IS520
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • IS520


IS60
  • Model: IS60
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • IS60


Savin IS760D
  • Model: IS760D
  • Category: Scanners
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Performance reliability and flawless paper handling of mixed originals are second to none.


IS760
  • Model: IS760
  • Category: Scanners
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Performance reliability and flawless paper handling of mixed originals are second to none
  • MANUAL
  • IS760


IS800C
  • Model: IS800C
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • IS800C


JP1030
  • Model: JP1030
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • JP1030
  • MANUAL
  • JP1030


LP-M20
  • Model: LP-M20
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • LP-M20


LP-M32
  • Model: LP-M32
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • LP-M32


LP-M38
  • Model: LP-M38
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • LP-M38


  • Model: LS3000R
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: Duplicator Options
  • Increase your capacity for production


MP7040A
  • Model: MP7040A
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MP7040A


MP7040S
  • Model: MP7040S
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MP7040S


MP7040SE
  • Model: MP7040SE
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MP7040SE


MP7060A
  • Model: MP7060A
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MP7060A


MP7060S
  • Model: MP7060S
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MP7060S


MP7060SE
  • Model: MP7060SE
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MP7060SE


MP7080A
  • Model: MP7080A
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MP7080A


MP7083A
  • Model: MP7083A
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MP7083A


MP7120A
  • Model: MP7120A
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MP7120A


MP8040SE
  • Model: MP8040SE
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MP8040SE


MP9060A
  • Model: MP9060A
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MP9060A


MP9120A
  • Model: MP9120A
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MP9120A


  • Model:
  • Category: Multifunction B & W
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm


  • Model:
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • MANUAL


  • Model:
  • Category: Multifunction Color
  • Subcategory: Over 45 ppm
  • MANUAL


MV106
  • Model: MV106
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MV106
  • MANUAL
  • MV106


MV310
  • Model: MV310
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MV310
  • MANUAL
  • MV310


MV310E
  • Model: MV310E
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MV310E
  • MANUAL
  • MV310E


MV715
  • Model: MV715
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MV715


MV74
  • Model: MV74
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • MV74


NC 5006
  • Model: NC 5006
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • NC 5006


NC 5006 (150i)
  • Model: NC 5006 (150i)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • NC 5006 (150i)


NC 5006 (200i)
  • Model: NC 5006 (200i)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • NC 5006 (200i)


NC5006 (XJ Series)
  • Model: NC5006 (XJ Series)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • NC5006 (XJ Series)


PJ WX3131 digital business projector
  • Model: PJ WX3131
  • Category: Projectors
  • Subcategory: Mobile
  • The clear choice for a high-performance digital projector
  • MANUAL
  • PJ WX3131


PJ WX3231N digital business projector
  • Model: PJ WX3231N
  • Category: Projectors
  • Subcategory: Mobile
  • The clear choice for a high-performance digital projector
  • MANUAL
  • PJ WX3231N


PJ WX4130N
  • Model: PJ WX4130N
  • Category: Projectors
  • Subcategory: Ultra Short Throw
  • Short-throw projection with far-reaching results.
  • MANUAL
  • PJ WX4130N


PJ WX4130
  • Model: PJ WX4130
  • Category: Projectors
  • Subcategory: Ultra Short Throw
  • Short-throw projection with far-reaching results.
  • MANUAL
  • PJ WX4130


PJ X3131 digital business projector
  • Model: PJ X3131
  • Category: Projectors
  • Subcategory: Mobile
  • The clear choice for a high-performance digital projector
  • MANUAL
  • PJ X3131


PJ X3241N digital business projector
  • Model: PJ X3241N
  • Category: Projectors
  • Subcategory: Mobile
  • The clear choice for a high-performance digital projector
  • MANUAL
  • PJ X3241N


Printer Controller EB-1357
  • Model: Printer Controller EB-1357
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Printer Controller EB-1357


  • Model:
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • MANUAL


Priport DD 4450
  • Model: Priport DD 4450
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Speed, Quality And Value In A Mid-Volume Digital Duplicator
  • MANUAL
  • Priport DD 4450


Priport DX 3340
  • Model: Priport DX 3340
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: Low Volume
  • The digital duplicating advantage for professional educators and administrators
  • MANUAL
  • Priport DX 3340


Priport DX 3343
  • Model: Priport DX 3343
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: Low Volume
  • The digital duplicating advantage for professional educators and administrators
  • MANUAL
  • Priport DX 3343


Priport DX 4542
  • Model: Priport DX 4542
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Superior performance and low cost of ownership for unparalleled value
  • MANUAL
  • Priport DX 4542


Priport DX 4545
  • Model: Priport DX 4545
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • Speed, Quality And Value In A Mid-Volume Digital Duplicator
  • MANUAL
  • Priport DX 4545


Priport DX 4640PD
  • Model: Priport DX 4640PD
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • High-volume duplication with duplexing
  • MANUAL
  • Priport DX 4640PD


Priport HQ7000
  • Model: Priport HQ7000
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • An economical and reliable solution to production printing
  • MANUAL
  • Priport HQ7000


Priport HQ9000
  • Model: Priport HQ9000
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • An economical and reliable solution for production printing
  • MANUAL
  • Priport HQ9000


  • Model: PriPort JP5000
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: Mid Volume
  • DUPLICATOR
  • MANUAL
  • PriPort JP5000


  • Model: Priport JP730
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: Low Volume
  • Aenean ornare egestas dolor. Integer tellus odio, mollis vitae, pretium ultrices, malesuada ac, enim


  • Model: Priport VT6000
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • The Digital Duplicator with Outstanding 600 dpi Resolution


Pro 1106EX (EB-135)
  • Model: Pro 1106EX (EB-135)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Pro 1106EX (EB-135)


Pro 1356EX (EB-135)
  • Model: Pro 1356EX (EB-135)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Pro 1356EX (EB-135)


Pro 906EX (EB-135)
  • Model: Pro 906EX (EB-135)
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Pro 906EX (EB-135)


RCP40
  • Model: RCP40
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RCP40
  • MANUAL
  • RCP40


RCP80
  • Model: RCP80
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RCP80


RDC-5000 - Mac 10.2
  • Model: RDC-5000 - Mac 10.2
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5000 - Mac 10.2
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5000 - Mac 10.2


RDC-5000 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Model: RDC-5000 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5000 - Mac OS 7.6
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5000 - Mac OS 7.6


RDC-5000 - Mac OS 8x-9x


RDC-5000 - Mac OS X
  • Model: RDC-5000 - Mac OS X
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5000 - Mac OS X
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5000 - Mac OS X


RDC-5000  Win 2000
  • Model: RDC-5000 Win 2000
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5000 Win 2000
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5000 Win 2000


RDC-5000  Win 95
  • Model: RDC-5000 Win 95
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5000 Win 95
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5000 Win 95


RDC-5000  Win 98
  • Model: RDC-5000 Win 98
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5000 Win 98
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5000 Win 98


RDC-5000  Win ME
  • Model: RDC-5000 Win ME
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5000 Win ME
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5000 Win ME


RDC-5000  Win NT
  • Model: RDC-5000 Win NT
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5000 Win NT
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5000 Win NT


RDC-5000  Win XP
  • Model: RDC-5000 Win XP
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5000 Win XP
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5000 Win XP


RDC-5300 - Mac 10.2
  • Model: RDC-5300 - Mac 10.2
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5300 - Mac 10.2
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5300 - Mac 10.2


RDC-5300 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Model: RDC-5300 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5300 - Mac OS 7.6
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5300 - Mac OS 7.6


RDC-5300 - Mac OS 8x-9x


RDC-5300 - Mac OS X
  • Model: RDC-5300 - Mac OS X
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5300 - Mac OS X
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5300 - Mac OS X


RDC-5300  Win 2000
  • Model: RDC-5300 Win 2000
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5300 Win 2000
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5300 Win 2000


RDC-5300  Win 95
  • Model: RDC-5300 Win 95
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5300 Win 95
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5300 Win 95


RDC-5300  Win 98
  • Model: RDC-5300 Win 98
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5300 Win 98
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5300 Win 98


RDC-5300  Win ME
  • Model: RDC-5300 Win ME
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5300 Win ME
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5300 Win ME


RDC-5300  Win NT
  • Model: RDC-5300 Win NT
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5300 Win NT
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5300 Win NT


RDC-5300  Win XP
  • Model: RDC-5300 Win XP
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-5300 Win XP
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-5300 Win XP


RDC-6000 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Model: RDC-6000 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-6000 - Mac OS 7.6
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-6000 - Mac OS 7.6


RDC-6000 - Mac OS 8x-9x


RDC-6000 - Mac OS X
  • Model: RDC-6000 - Mac OS X
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-6000 - Mac OS X
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-6000 - Mac OS X


RDC-6000 - Mac10.2
  • Model: RDC-6000 - Mac10.2
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-6000 - Mac10.2
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-6000 - Mac10.2


RDC-6000  Win 2000
  • Model: RDC-6000 Win 2000
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-6000 Win 2000
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-6000 Win 2000


RDC-6000  Win 95
  • Model: RDC-6000 Win 95
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-6000 Win 95
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-6000 Win 95


RDC-6000  Win 98
  • Model: RDC-6000 Win 98
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-6000 Win 98
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-6000 Win 98


RDC-6000  Win ME
  • Model: RDC-6000 Win ME
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-6000 Win ME
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-6000 Win ME


RDC-6000  Win NT
  • Model: RDC-6000 Win NT
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-6000 Win NT
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-6000 Win NT


RDC-6000  Win XP
  • Model: RDC-6000 Win XP
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-6000 Win XP
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-6000 Win XP


RDC-7 - Mac 10.2
  • Model: RDC-7 - Mac 10.2
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-7 - Mac 10.2
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-7 - Mac 10.2


RDC-7 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Model: RDC-7 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-7 - Mac OS 7.6
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-7 - Mac OS 7.6


RDC-7 - Mac OS 8x-9x
  • Model: RDC-7 - Mac OS 8x-9x
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-7 - Mac OS 8x-9x
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-7 - Mac OS 8x-9x


RDC-7 - Mac OS X
  • Model: RDC-7 - Mac OS X
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-7 - Mac OS X
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-7 - Mac OS X


RDC-7  Win 2000
  • Model: RDC-7 Win 2000
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-7 Win 2000
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-7 Win 2000


RDC-7  Win 95
  • Model: RDC-7 Win 95
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-7 Win 95
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-7 Win 95


RDC-7  Win 98
  • Model: RDC-7 Win 98
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-7 Win 98
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-7 Win 98


RDC-7  Win ME
  • Model: RDC-7 Win ME
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-7 Win ME
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-7 Win ME


RDC-7  Win NT
  • Model: RDC-7 Win NT
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-7 Win NT
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-7 Win NT


RDC-7  Win XP
  • Model: RDC-7 Win XP
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RDC-7 Win XP
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-7 Win XP


  • Model: RDC-7
  • Category: Solutions
  • Subcategory: Printing Solutions
  • need text
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-7


  • Model: RDC-i700
  • Category: Solutions
  • Subcategory: Printing Solutions
  • need text
  • MANUAL
  • RDC-i700


Ricoh BB-HPL10A-R | High Definition Power Line Communications Ethernet Adaptor
  • Model: Ricoh BB-HPL10A-R
  • Category: Network Accessories
  • Subcategory: Ethernet Adaptors
  • High Definition Power Line Communications Ethernet Adaptor


Ricoh DDP 184
  • Model: Ricoh DDP 184
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Industrial Strength Printer for Production Environments


Ricoh DDP 70e
  • Model: Ricoh DDP 70e
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Industrial-strength printer for production environments


Ricoh DDP 92
  • Model: Ricoh DDP 92
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Industrial-strength printer for production environments


Ricoh EMP 156
  • Model: Ricoh EMP 156
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Dependable, high-volume printing


Ricoh GX7000
  • Model: Ricoh GX7000
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: All Printers
  • The Next Generation in High-Quality, High-Value Color Printing
  • MANUAL
  • Ricoh GX7000


Ricoh GX7000
  • Model: Ricoh GX7000
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - GelSprinter
  • The Next Generation in High-Quality, High-Value Color Printing
  • MANUAL
  • Ricoh GX7000


Ricoh Pro 1106EX
  • Model: Ricoh Pro 1106EX
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Ricoh Pro 1106EX
  • MANUAL
  • Ricoh Pro 1106EX


RICOH Pro 1107EX
  • Model: RICOH Pro 1107EX
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Exceptional uptime and flexibility for production workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro 1107EX


RICOH Pro 1107
  • Model: RICOH Pro 1107
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Nonstop printing for mission-critical documents.
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro 1107


Ricoh Pro 1356EX
  • Model: Ricoh Pro 1356EX
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Ricoh Pro 1356EX
  • MANUAL
  • Ricoh Pro 1356EX


RICOH Pro 1357EX
  • Model: RICOH Pro 1357EX
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Exceptional uptime and flexibility for production workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro 1357EX


RICOH Pro 1357
  • Model: RICOH Pro 1357
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Nonstop printing for mission-critical documents.
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro 1357


Ricoh Pro 906EX
  • Model: Ricoh Pro 906EX
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Ricoh Pro 906EX
  • MANUAL
  • Ricoh Pro 906EX


RICOH Pro 907EX
  • Model: RICOH Pro 907EX
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Exceptional uptime and flexibility for production workflow.
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro 907EX


RICOH Pro 907
  • Model: RICOH Pro 907
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Nonstop printing for mission-critical documents.
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro 907


Ricoh Pro C550EX v1.1
  • Model: Ricoh Pro C550EX v1.1
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Ricoh Pro C550EX v1.1


RICOH Pro C550EX
  • Model: RICOH Pro C550EX
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Build your business with high-speed color.
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro C550EX


RICOH Pro C651EX
  • Model: RICOH Pro C651EX
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Exceptional speed, quality and value for high-volume workflow
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro C651EX


Ricoh Pro C700EX v1.1
  • Model: Ricoh Pro C700EX v1.1
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • Ricoh Pro C700EX v1.1


RICOH Pro C700EX
  • Model: RICOH Pro C700EX
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Build your business with high-speed color.
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro C700EX


RICOH Pro C720 Color Production System
  • Model: RICOH Pro C720
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Capable, cost-effective color production.
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro C720


RICOH Pro C720s Color Production System
  • Model: RICOH Pro C720s
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Capable, cost-effective color production.
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro C720s


RICOH Pro C751EX
  • Model: RICOH Pro C751EX
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Exceptional speed, quality and value for high-volume workflow
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro C751EX


RICOH Pro C900 Color Production System
  • Model: RICOH Pro C900
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Improve Capacity and Build Your Business
  • MANUAL
  • RICOH Pro C900


RICOH Pro C900s Color Production System
  • Model: Ricoh Pro C900s
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Extreme Flexibility for High-Volume Printing Plus Scanning, Copying and Finishing
  • MANUAL
  • Ricoh Pro C900s


RICOH Pro C901 Color Production System
  • Model: Ricoh Pro C901
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Graphic Arts Edition
  • MANUAL
  • Ricoh Pro C901


RICOH Pro C901s Graphic Arts Edition Color Production System
  • Model: Ricoh Pro C901s
  • Category: Production Printing
  • Subcategory: High Volume
  • Graphic Arts Edition
  • MANUAL
  • Ricoh Pro C901s


RR1 - Mac 10.2
  • Model: RR1 - Mac 10.2
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR1 - Mac 10.2
  • MANUAL
  • RR1 - Mac 10.2


RR1 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Model: RR1 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR1 - Mac OS 7.6
  • MANUAL
  • RR1 - Mac OS 7.6


RR1 - Mac OS 8x-9x
  • Model: RR1 - Mac OS 8x-9x
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR1 - Mac OS 8x-9x
  • MANUAL
  • RR1 - Mac OS 8x-9x


RR1 - Mac OS X
  • Model: RR1 - Mac OS X
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR1 - Mac OS X
  • MANUAL
  • RR1 - Mac OS X


RR1 - Win 2000
  • Model: RR1 - Win 2000
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR1 - Win 2000
  • MANUAL
  • RR1 - Win 2000


RR1 - Win 95
  • Model: RR1 - Win 95
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR1 - Win 95
  • MANUAL
  • RR1 - Win 95


RR1 - Win 98
  • Model: RR1 - Win 98
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR1 - Win 98
  • MANUAL
  • RR1 - Win 98


RR1 - Win ME
  • Model: RR1 - Win ME
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR1 - Win ME
  • MANUAL
  • RR1 - Win ME


RR1 - Win NT
  • Model: RR1 - Win NT
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR1 - Win NT
  • MANUAL
  • RR1 - Win NT


RR1 - Win XP
  • Model: RR1 - Win XP
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR1 - Win XP
  • MANUAL
  • RR1 - Win XP


RR30 - Mac 10.2
  • Model: RR30 - Mac 10.2
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR30 - Mac 10.2
  • MANUAL
  • RR30 - Mac 10.2


RR30 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Model: RR30 - Mac OS 7.6
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR30 - Mac OS 7.6
  • MANUAL
  • RR30 - Mac OS 7.6


RR30 - Mac OS 8x-9x
  • Model: RR30 - Mac OS 8x-9x
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR30 - Mac OS 8x-9x
  • MANUAL
  • RR30 - Mac OS 8x-9x


RR30 - Mac OS X
  • Model: RR30 - Mac OS X
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR30 - Mac OS X
  • MANUAL
  • RR30 - Mac OS X


RR30 - Win 2000
  • Model: RR30 - Win 2000
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR30 - Win 2000
  • MANUAL
  • RR30 - Win 2000


RR30 - Win 95
  • Model: RR30 - Win 95
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR30 - Win 95
  • MANUAL
  • RR30 - Win 95


RR30 - Win 98
  • Model: RR30 - Win 98
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR30 - Win 98
  • MANUAL
  • RR30 - Win 98


RR30 - Win ME
  • Model: RR30 - Win ME
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR30 - Win ME
  • MANUAL
  • RR30 - Win ME


RR30 - Win NT
  • Model: RR30 - Win NT
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR30 - Win NT
  • MANUAL
  • RR30 - Win NT


RR30 - Win XP
  • Model: RR30 - Win XP
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • RR30 - Win XP
  • MANUAL


  • Model:
  • Category: Scanners
  • Subcategory: 13-22 ppm
  • MANUAL


SFX2000M
  • Model: SFX2000M
  • Category: SecureFax
  • Subcategory: All SecureFax
  • Compact and powerful SecureFax solution


SFX2000TE
  • Model: SFX2000TE
  • Category: SecureFax
  • Subcategory: All SecureFax
  • TEMPEST security, mobility and flexibility


SFX5510MSD
  • Model: SFX5510MSD
  • Category: SecureFax
  • Subcategory: All SecureFax
  • Digital high-performance facsimile


SP 3300DN
  • Model: SP 3300DN
  • Category: Printers
  • Subcategory: Printers - Monochrome Laser
  • Compact Size, Big Value, Highly Productive Performance
  • MANUAL
  • SP 3300DN


  • Model: TC-IIR
  • Category: Digital Duplicators
  • Subcategory: Duplicator Options
  • Add fast, two-color printing to your Priport


VC-20
  • Model: VC-20
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • VC-20


VT1730
  • Model: VT1730
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • VT1730
  • MANUAL
  • VT1730


VT1800
  • Model: VT1800
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • VT1800


VT2105
  • Model: VT2105
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • VT2105


VT2200
  • Model: VT2200
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • VT2200


VT2250
  • Model: VT2250
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • VT2250
  • MANUAL
  • VT2250


VT3600
  • Model: VT3600
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • VT3600
  • MANUAL
  • VT3600


VT3800
  • Model: VT3800
  • Category:
  • Subcategory:
  • VT3800
  • MANUAL
  • VT3800


Ricoh Wide Format Color Scanner
  • Model: Wide Format Color Scanner
  • Category: Wide Format
  • Subcategory: All Wide Format
  • Simply put, the Ricoh Wide Format Color Scanner gives you more time to focus on your work.

 

 

 

 

 

 

JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ OBJECTIF GR MACRO A12 50mm F2.5 Mode d’emploi Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif. Contenu de l’emballage Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous. Unité appareil photo Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil. Capuchon de l’objectif Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. ?Mode d’emploi (le présentmanuel) ? Garantie Capuchon du connecteur Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. Étui souple Introduction Pour utiliser cet objectif, vous devez l’installer sur un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Le présent mode d’emploi désigne l’objectif sous le nom d’unité appareil photo et détaille les fonctions et procédures de fonctionnement uniquement disponibles lorsque l’unité appareil photo est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR. Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir une utilisation sans danger. Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants. Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires, est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits. Exonération de responsabilité Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente. © 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout moment et sans avis préalable. Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel. Mesures de sécurité Symboles d’avertissement Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens. Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous. Danger Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Avertissement Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Attention Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées. Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites. Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action spécifique est interdite. Exemples = Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en toute sécurité. Danger Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique. Avertissement Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants. Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène, de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion, d’incendie ou de brûlure. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident. Attention Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge électrique. Consignes de sécurité relatives aux accessoires Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les instructions fournies avec ce produit.10 Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3 Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 6 Nomenclature de l’objectif...............................................................................12 Prise de vue..........................................................................................................13 Mode P : Changement de programme.......................................................................13 Mode M : Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................15 Réglages...............................................................................................................16 Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (menu prise de vue)..............................................16 Photos...........................................................................................................................17 Vidéos............................................................................................................................18 Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (menu prise de vue) .........................................................19 [Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées)..........................................................20 Table des matières11 Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Configuration)...............................................20 Réglages bague mise au point (Configuration).......................................................21 Caractéristiques..................................................................................................22 Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................28 Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................30 Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................31 Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................321 Nomenclature de l’objectif 1 2 4 3 1 Connecteur 2 Bague de mise au point 3 Objectif 4 Pare-soleil intégré1 Prise de vue Mode P : Changement de programme Les plages approximatives disponibles pour les combinaisons d’ouverture et de vitesse d’obturation sont indiquées ci-dessous. Les valeurs réelles peuvent variées selon la valeur d’exposition (EV). Dans ces exemples, le mode Flash est défini sur [Flash Non] et la sensibilité ISO est définie sur [ISO200].1 Ev5 Ev6 Ev7 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 Ev-1 Ev-2 Ev-3 F16 F22 F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8 F2.0 F1.4 F1.0 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20 F22.0 F2.51 Mode M : Exposition manuelle Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO sera fixée à 200 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle. 1 Réglages Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (menu prise de vue) Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/Taille] du menu de prise de vue. La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/ taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez sélectionner la taille de la vidéo.1 Photos Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2848×2848 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041 Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG. *2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut et en bas de l’affichage de la photo. *3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo. Vidéos Paramètre Taille vidéo HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×2401 Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (menu prise de vue) • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la sensibilité utilisée devient équivalente à la sensibilité ISO800. • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, la plage de sensibilité utilisée est la suivante. Taille de l’image (pixels) Défaut Minimum Maximum RAW 200 200 400 L 200 200 400 M 200 200 400 5M 200 200 400 3M 200 200 400 1M 200 200 400 VGA 200 200 4000 [Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées) Sous [Enr. Mes Réglages], vous pouvez aussi définir les options de [Réglages bague mise au point] de l’onglet de configuration. Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ». Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Configuration) La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante. Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Environ 1,0× L Environ 1,8× 3M Environ 1,2× M Environ 3,0× 1M Environ 1,5× 5M Environ 5,9× VGA1 Réglages bague mise au point (Configuration) Sous [Réglages bague mise au point], vous pouvez sélectionner un mode qui active les fonctions pour la mise au point automatique et la mise au point manuelle ou un mode qui active uniquement les fonctions pour la mise au point manuelle. Lorsque l’option [AF+MF] est sélectionnée, une fois le déclencheur enfoncé à mi-course pour régler la mise au point, la mise au point peut être réglée de manière plus précise en tournant la bague de mise au point. Paramètre AF+MF MF uniquement Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Si vous appuyez de nouveau sur le déclencheur après le réglage fin, la mise au point automatique est activée et le réglage est annulé. Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un boîtier GXR. Pixels réels Environ 12,3 millions Capteur d’image 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (nombre total de pixels : environ 12,9 millions) Objectif Distance focale 33mm (format 35 mm équivalent : 50mm) Ouverture (nombre f) f/2,5– f/22 (filtre à densité neutre utilisé pour les ouvertures f/22 en mode prise de vue automatique) Plage mise au point (de l’objectif) Environ 30cm–8 Environ 7cm (zoom optique 0,5×) en mode macro Construction 9 éléments en 8 groupes (1 objectifs asphériques avec 2 surfaces) Diamètre du filtre 40,5 mm Zoom 4,0× zoom numérique (photos), zoom numérique 3,6×(vidéos) ; environ 5,9× zoom de redimensionnement automatique (VGA) Mode mise au point AF multi et AF spot basé sur Contraste AF ; MF ; snap ; 8 (verrouillage de mise au point et assistance AF) Vitesse d’obturation Photos 1/3200–180s (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en fonction du mode prise de vue et flash) Vidéos 1/30–1/2000s Contrôle exposition Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique Mode Programme AE, priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle, priorité à l’obturation AE, fonction de décalage de la cible Correction de l’exposition Manuelle (+4,0 à -4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV), cadrage automatique (-2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV) Sensibilité ISO (sensibilité sortie standard) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Lampe incandescente, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ; cadrage auto balance des blancs Flash Portée (flash intégré) Environ 20cm–3,0m (ISO auto) Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture, priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports, paysage, nuit, correction biais), « Mes Réglages » Mode continu Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Continu (Taille d’image : RAW) Réduction du bruit désactivée ou activée (faible) : 4 photos, Réduction du bruit activée (forte) : 3 photos Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Cont.M + (un ensemble) Rap (1280 × 856) : 30 photos (24 images/s) Len (4288 × 2848) : 15 photos (3 images/s) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Taille de l’image (pixels) Photos 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848, 3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Taille fichier (approximative) RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 17 800Ko/image, FINE : 19 515Ko/image, VGA : 15 587Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 18 387Ko/image, FINE : 20 157Ko/image, VGA : 16 124Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 20 946Ko/image, FINE : 22 967Ko/image, VGA : 18 337Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 13 991Ko/image, FINE : 15 333Ko/image, VGA : 12 273Ko/image Taille fichier (approximative) L 16:9 NORMAL : 2 222Ko/image, FINE : 3 816Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 2 315Ko/image, FINE : 3 960Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 2 615Ko/image, FINE : 4 493Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 3 009Ko/image M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 475Ko/image, FINE : 2 509Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 1 574Ko/image, FINE : 2 662Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 1 744Ko/image, FINE : 2 968Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 186Ko/image, FINE : 2 003Ko/image 5M 4:3 FINE : 2 287Ko/image 3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image 1M 4:3 FINE : 812Ko/image VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image Longévité batterie (basée sur norme CIPA) DB-90 : environ 320 prises de vue*3 Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 68,7mm×57,9mm×71,3mm (fût d’objectif inclus, connecteur exclus) Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 113,9mm×70,2mm×77,1mm (fût d’objectif inclus) Poids (approximatif) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 263 g (capuchon de l’objectif et capuchon du connecteur non inclus) Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 423 g (batterie, carte mémoire, courroie d’encolure, capuchon du connecteur et capuchon de l’objectif non inclus) Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C Humidité fonctionnement 85 % ou moins Température stockage –20°C à 60°C *1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image. *2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de 640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée. Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE. Photos Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go RAW* FINE 4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625 3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380 2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065 L FINE 4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684 3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453 4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565 2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578  Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie JPEG. Vidéos Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go 1280×720 24 images/seconde 21s 3min 49s 7min 46s 15min 58s 31min 10s 62min 26s 125min 15s 640×480 24 images/seconde 1min 11min 2s 22min 27s 46min 10s 90min 7s 180min 32s 362min 9s 320×240 24 images/seconde 2min 25s 26min 24s 53min 43s 110min 27s 215min 35s 431min 52s 866min 19s 0 Précautions d’emploi • La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. • Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. • Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques. • Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif. • Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même température que l’environnement. • Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement ou un choc électrique. • Gardez le connecteur propre. Conseil : pour éviter la condensation--------------------------------------------- La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif.1 Entretien et stockage de l’équipement Entretien de l’équipement • Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce, ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. • Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition. • Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation Ricoh. • Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas. Stockage Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant). Garantie et réparation 1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au centre de réparation Ricoh. 2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de : 1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ; 2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ; 3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ; 4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement. 5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles. 3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé. 4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte. 5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté. * Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent vos droits légaux. * L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de garantie fournie avec l’équipement. 8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement) seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la production de l’équipement. 9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de son état originel peut être impossible. Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct. • Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution. • Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible. • Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer l’appareil au centre de réparation.En cas de problème Bureaux Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2009 Décembre FR F-FR Imprimé en Chine *L450 3972A* GR LENS A12 50mm F2.5 MACRO Instruction Manual The serial number may be found on the bottom of the lens. Package Contents Before using your Ricoh lens, confirm that the package contains the items listed below. Camera unit The serial number may be found on the bottom. Lens cap Comes attached to the camera unit. ? Instructionmanual (thismanual) ? Warranty Connector cap Comes attached to the camera unit. Soft case Introduction To use this lens, you need to attach it to a compatible camera body. Refer to the Camera Body User Guide for details about how to operate shooting and playback functions and change settings and to read important precautions for use. This instruction manual will refer to this lens as the “camera unit” and will explain functions and operating procedures that are available only when this camera unit is used with a compatible camera body. See also the GXR Camera Body User Guide. To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Safety precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use. Test shots Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly before taking photos on important occasions. Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines, and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright holder, is prohibited. Exemption from liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display images as a result of product malfunction. Warranty The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any expense thereby incurred. Radio interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device, reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio or television into a different outlet. © 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time without prior notice. Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover of this booklet. Safety Precautions Warning Symbols Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below. Danger This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Warning This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Caution This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical damage if ignored or incorrectly handled. Sample Warnings The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed. The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions. The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action is prohibited. Examples = Do not touch = Do not disassemble Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit. Danger Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard. Warning Keep the equipment out of the reach of children. Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service center if it is damaged. Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock. Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns. • Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as this may lead to disasters or accidents. Caution Do not allow the equipment to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands. Both pose the risk of electric shock. Safety Precautions for Accessories When using optional products, carefully read the instructions provided with the product before using that product.10 Package Contents................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3 Safety Precautions................................................................................................................ 6 Parts of the Lens .................................................................................................12 Shooting...............................................................................................................13 Mode P: Program Shift......................................................................................................13 Mode M: Manual Exposure..............................................................................................15 Settings ................................................................................................................16 [Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu) ......................................................16 Photographs...............................................................................................................17 Movies...........................................................................................................................18 [ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu).......................................................................19 [Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Options)..................................................................20 Table of Contents11 [Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup).........................................................................20 Focus Ring Settings (Setup)............................................................................................21 Specifications ......................................................................................................22 Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity..................................................................28 Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................30 Equipment Care and Storage.........................................................................................31 Warranty and Servicing....................................................................................................321 Parts of the Lens 1 2 4 3 1 Connector 2 Focus ring 3 Lens 4 Built-in hood1 Shooting Mode P: Program Shift The following shows the approximate ranges available for shutter speed and aperture combinations. The actual values may vary depending on EV (exposure value). In these examples, the flash mode is set to [Flash Off], and the ISO setting is set to [ISO200].1 Ev5 Ev6 Ev7 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 Ev-1 Ev-2 Ev-3 F16 F22 F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8 F2.0 F1.4 F1.0 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20 F22.0 F2.51 Mode M: Manual Exposure If [Auto] or [Auto-Hi] is selected for ISO Setting, ISO will be fixed at 200 while the camera is in manual exposure mode. 1 Settings [Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu) The following picture quality, image size and aspect ratio options are available for the [Picture Quality/Size] setting in the shooting menu. A photograph‘s file size will depend on the combination of picture quality and image size used. When recording movies, you can select the movie size.1 Photographs Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2848×2848 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041 Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy. *2 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear on the top and bottom of the picture display. *3 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear at the right and left sides of the picture display. Movies Item Movie size HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×2401 [ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu) • When [Auto] is selected and the flash is used, the sensitivity used will gain up to ISO800 equivalent. • When [Auto] is selected and the flash is not used, the range of the sensitivity used will be as follows. Picture size (pixels) Default Minimum Maximum RAW 200 200 400 L 200 200 400 M 200 200 400 5M 200 200 400 3M 200 200 400 1M 200 200 400 VGA 200 200 4000 [Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Options) In [Reg. My Settings], you can also set [Focus Ring Settings] options in the setup tab. For other options available, refer to the “Camera Body User Guide”. [Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup) The size of the recorded image varies depending on the auto resize zoom, as follows. Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Approx. 1.0× L Approx. 1.8× 3M Approx. 1.2× M Approx. 3.0× 1M Approx. 1.5× 5M Approx. 5.9× VGA1 Focus Ring Settings (Setup) In [Focus Ring Settings], you can set either a mode that enables functions for both autofocus and manual focus or a mode that enables functions for manual focus only. When [AF + MF] is selected, after the shutter button is pressed down halfway to set the focus, the focus can be fine tuned by turning the focus ring. Item AF + MF MF Only Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- If the shutter button is re-pressed after fine tuning, autofocus will activate and fine adjustment will be cancelled. Specifications Specifications are given for the camera unit mounted on a GXR body. Effective pixels Approximately 12.3 million Image sensor 23.6 mm × 15.7 mm CMOS (total pixels: approx. 12.9 million) Lens Focal length 33mm (35-mm format equivalent: 50mm) Aperture (f-number) f/2.5– f/22 (ND filter used for apertures of f/22 in auto shooting mode) Focus range (from lens) Approx. 30cm–8 Approx. 7cm (0.5× optical zoom) in macro mode Construction 9 elements in 8 groups (1 aspherical lens elements with 2 surfaces) Filter diameter 40.5 mm Zoom 4.0× digital zoom (photographs), 3.6 × digital zoom (movies); approx. 5.9× auto resize zoom (VGA) Focus mode Contrast AF-based multi and spot AF; MF; Snap; 8 (focus lock and AF-assist) Shutter speed Photographs 1/3200–180s (upper and lower limits vary according to shooting and flash mode) Movies 1/30–1/2000s Exposure control Metering TTL-CCD metering in multi (256-segment), center-weighted, and spot modes with autoexposure lock Mode Program AE, aperture priority AE, manual exposure, shutter priority AE, move target function Exposure compensation Manual (+4.0 to -4.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV), auto bracketing (-2EV to +2EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV) ISO sensitivity (Standard Output Sensitivity) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 White balance Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Outdoors, Cloudy, Incandescent Lamp, Fluorescent Lamp, Manual Settings, Detail; white balance bracketing Flash Range (built-in flash) Approx. 20cm–3.0m (ISO auto) Shooting mode Auto, program shift, aperture priority, shutter priority, manual, scene (movie, portrait, sports, landscape, nightscape, skew correction), “My Settings” Continuous mode Number of pictures shot in Continuous (Picture Size: RAW) Noise Reduction off or on (Weak): 4 pictures, Noise Reduction on (Strong): 3 pictures Number of pictures shot in M-Cont Plus (1 set) HI (1280×856) : 30 pictures (24 Frames/Sec), LO (4228×2848) : 15 pictures (3 Frames/Sec) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Image size (pixels) Photographs 4288 × 2416, 3776 × 2832, 4288 × 2848, 2848 × 2848, 3456 × 1944, 3072 × 2304, 3456 × 2304, 2304 × 2304, 2592 × 1944, 2048 × 1536, 1280 × 960, 640 × 480 Movies 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 File size (approx.) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17,800KB/frame, FINE: 19,515KB/frame, VGA: 15,587 KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 18,387KB/frame, FINE: 20,157KB/frame, VGA: 16,124 KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 20,946KB/frame, FINE: 22,967KB/frame, VGA: 18,337KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 13,991KB/frame, FINE: 15,333KB/frame, VGA: 12,273KB/frame  File size (approx.) L 16:9 NORMAL: 2,222KB/frame, FINE: 3,816KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 2,315KB/frame, FINE: 3,960KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 2,615KB/frame, FINE: 4,493KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 1,761KB/frame, FINE: 3,009KB/frame M 16:9 NORMAL: 1,475KB/frame, FINE: 2,509KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 1,574KB/frame, FINE: 2,662KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 1,744KB/frame, FINE: 2,968KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 1,186KB/frame, FINE: 2,003KB/frame 5M 4:3 FINE: 2,287KB/frame 3M 4:3 FINE: 1,474KB/frame 1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/frame VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/frame Battery life (based on CIPA standard) DB-90: approx. 320shots *3 Dimensions (W×H×D) Camera unit only: 68.7mm×57.9mm×71.3mm (including the lens barrel; excluding the connector) When mounted on the camera body: 113.9mm×70.2mm×77.1mm (including the lens barrel) Weight (approx.) Camera unit only: 263g (not including the lens cap or connector cap) When mounted on the camera body: 423g (not including the battery, memory card, neck strap, connector cap, or lens cap) Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C Operating humidity 85% or less Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C *1 The options available vary with image size. *2 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a FINE- or NORMAL-quality file with the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file 640×480 pixels in size). RAW files use the standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is used. We recommend that you carry spare batteries when in use for extended periods. Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity The following values are given as a reference of the storage capacity of the internal memory and memory cards of various sizes, by picture quality and image size, when using the FINE picture quality. Photographs Compression Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB RAW* FINE 4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625 3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380 2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065 L FINE 4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684 3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453 4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565 2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 Compression Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * When [RAW] is selected, this is the compression used for the JPEG copy. Movies Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 1280×720 24 frames/second 21sec. 3min. 49sec. 7min. 46sec. 15min. 58sec. 31min. 10sec. 62min. 26sec. 125min. 15sec. 640×480 24 frames/second 1min. 11min. 2sec. 22min. 27sec. 46min. 10sec. 90min. 7sec. 180min. 32sec. 362min. 9sec. 320×240 24 frames/second 2min. 25sec. 26min. 24sec. 53min. 43sec. 110min. 27sec. 215min. 35sec. 431min. 52sec. 866min. 19sec. 0 Precautions for Use • The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase. • Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any expenditure incurred thereby. • Do not drop the equipment or subject it to physical shocks. • When carrying the equipment, be careful that it does not strike other objects. Particular care is required to protect the lens. • Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible condensation inside the lens or malfunction of the equipment. This can be avoided by placing the equipment in a plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature its surroundings. • Keep the equipment dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe these precautions could result in malfunction of the equipment or electric shock. • Keep the connector clean. Tip: Avoiding Condensation -------------------------------------------------------- Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the heater has come on, or where the camera is exposed to cold air from an air conditioner or other device.1 Equipment Care and Storage Caring for the Equipment • Photographs can be affected by fingerprints and other foreign matter on the lens. Avoid touching the lens with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a blower from a camera supply store, or gently clean the lens with a soft, dry cloth. • Clean the equipment thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling cosmetics. Do not expose the equipment to volatile substances such as thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the equipment or its finish. • In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center. • This equipment is a high precision device. Do not disassemble. Storage Do not store the camera where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or humidity; large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe vibration; prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other insect repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for example, in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet). Warranty and Servicing 1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your equipment, any defective parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of equipment malfunction, contact the dealer from which you purchased the equipment or your nearest Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will not be reimbursed for the cost of bringing the equipment to the Ricoh Repair Center. 2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from: 1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual; 2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service center listed in the instruction manual; 3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.; 4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera Body User Guide”), leaking of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the equipment. 5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages, infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock, dropping of the equipment, or pressure on the equipment, and other unnatural causes. 3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees, including those incurred at an authorized service center. 4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the warranty card is not attached or if the distributor’s name or the purchase date have been changed or are not indicated on the card. 5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred during the warranty period. 6. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the equipment, such as expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not. 7. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the equipment was purchased. * The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit your legal rights. * The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card provided with this equipment. 8. Parts essential to the servicing of the equipment (that is, components required to maintain the functions and quality of the equipment) will be available for a period of five years after the equipment is discontinued. 9. Please note that if the equipment is seriously damaged by flooding, submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible. Notes------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Before sending the camera in for repair, check the camera body and read the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation. • Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete. • When sending the equipment to a service center, please include a note which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as possible. • Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the camera to the service center.If You Encounter a Problem with This Product Ricoh offices RICOH COMPANY, LTD. 3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530, Japan http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A. 1–800–22RICOH http://www.ricoh-usa.com/ RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK) (from within the UK) 02073 656 580 (from outside of the UK) +44 2073 656 580 RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN) (desde España) 91 406 9148 (desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148 RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMC ITALY) (dall’Italia) 02 696 33 451 (dall’estero) +39 02 696 33 451*L450 2971A* Ricoh offices RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS LIMITED 21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2009 December EN USA GB GB AE AE Printed in China OBIETTIVO GR A12 50mm F2.5 MACRO Manuale d’istruzioni Il numero di serie è riportato sul lato inferiore dell’obiettivo. Contenuto della confezione Prima di usare l’obiettivo Ricoh, verificare che la confezione contenga i seguenti articoli. Unità fotocamera Il numero di serie è riportato sul lato inferiore. Tappo copriobiettivo Attaccato all’unità fotocamera. ?Manuale d’istruzioni (questomanuale) ? Garanzia Copriconnettore Attaccato all’unità fotocamera. Custodia morbida Introduzione Questo obiettivo deve essere collegato a una fotocamera compatibile. Consultare il manuale d’istruzioni della fotocamera per i dettagli su come utilizzare le funzioni di ripresa e riproduzione delle immagini, su come modificare le impostazioni e sulle importanti precauzioni d’uso. In questo manuale d’istruzioni, l’obiettivo è detto “unità fotocamera”. Vengono spiegate le funzioni e le procedure operative consentite solo se si utilizza questa unità fotocamera con un corpo macchina compatibile. Vedere anche il manuale d’istruzioni della fotocamera GXR. Per sfruttare al meglio le funzionalità di questo prodotto, leggere attentamente questo manuale prima dell’uso. Tenerlo sempre a portata di mano per consultarlo, se necessario. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Precauzioni di sicurezza Leggere attentamente le precauzioni di sicurezza per garantire un uso sicuro. Scatti di prova Eseguire degli scatti di prova per assicurare che la fotocamera funzioni correttamente, prima di fare foto durante occasioni importanti. Copyright È vietata la riproduzione o modifica di documenti, riviste e altro materiale soggetto a copyright, per propositi diversi dall’uso personale, casalingo o di natura simile limitata, senza previo consenso del titolare del copyright. Esonero da responsabilità Ricoh Co., Ltd. declina ogni responsabilità per la mancata registrazione o visualizzazione di immagini da ascrivere a un guasto del prodotto. Garanzia La garanzia fornita è valida solo nel paese in cui è stato acquistato questo prodotto. Il produttore declina ogni responsabilità per l’assistenza sul prodotto in altri paesi o per le spese sostenute al riguardo. Interferenze radio L’utilizzo del prodotto nelle vicinanze di altri dispositivi elettronici può influire negativamente sul funzionamento della fotocamera e di tali apparecchiature. Le interferenze sono probabili in particolar modo se la fotocamera viene usata vicino a una radio o televisione. Per risolvere il problema spostare la fotocamera il più lontano possibile dalle apparecchiature, orientare nuovamente l’antenna della radio o televisione o collegare la radio o televisione a una presa elettrica differente. © 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. Tutti i diritti riservati. È vietata la riproduzione di questo manuale in parte o per intero, senza previo consenso scritto da parte di Ricoh. Ricoh si riserva il diritto di cambiare i contenuti del presente in qualsiasi momento e senza preavviso. Ricoh ha fatto quanto possibile per assicurare l’accuratezza delle informazioni contenute in questo manuale. Se, tuttavia, si dovessero notare errori od omissioni, si prega di comunicarceli all’indirizzo indicato sul retrocopertina. Precauzioni di sicurezza Simboli di allarme In tutto il presente manuale di istruzione e sul prodotto sono utilizzati vari simboli al fine di prevenire danni fisici a voi o a terzi e alla proprietà. I simboli e il loro significato sono illustrati qui sotto. Pericolo Questo simbolo indica un possibile pericolo mortale imminente o una grave lesione se ignorato o affrontato in modo errato. Allarme Questo simbolo indica che se le istruzioni vengono ignorate o eseguite in modo non corretto, ciò può provocare la morte o lesioni gravi. Attenzione Questo simbolo indica che se le istruzioni vengono ignorate o eseguite in modo non corretto, ciò può provocare lesioni o danni fisici. Esempi di allarme Il simbolo indica azioni che occorre eseguire. Il simbolo indica azioni proibite. Il simbolo può comparire assieme ad altri simboli per indicare che una determinata azione è vietata. Esempi = Non toccare = Non smontare Osservare le seguenti norme per un utilizzo sicuro dell’apparecchio. Pericolo Non cercare di smontare, riparare o alterare l’apparecchio da soli. La circuiteria ad alta tensione dell’apparecchio rappresenta un grave pericolo di natura elettrica. Allarme Tenere questo apparecchio fuori dalla portata dei bambini. Non toccare i componenti interni dell’apparecchio se fuoriescono in seguito a cadute o danneggiamenti. La circuiteria ad alta tensione dell’apparecchio può provocare una scossa elettrica. Estrarre la batteria il prima possibile, stando attenti ad evitare scosse elettriche o ustioni. Portare l’apparecchio al rivenditore o centro assistenza più vicino, se è difettoso. Non utilizzare l’apparecchio in luoghi dove possa venire a contatto con acqua, perché ciò potrebbe provocare incendi o scosse elettriche. Non utilizzare l’apparecchio vicino a gas infiammabili, benzine, diluenti o sostanze simili per evitare esplosioni, incendi o ustioni. • Non utilizzare l’apparecchio in luoghi in cui il suo utilizzo sia limitato o proibito perché può provocare disastri o incidenti. Attenzione Non lasciare che l’apparecchio si bagni. Inoltre, non utilizzarlo con le mani bagnate. In entrambi i casi si corre il rischio di scosse elettriche. Avvertenze di sicurezza per gli accessori Prima di utilizzare i prodotti opzionali, leggere attentamente le istruzioni fornite insieme ad essi.10 Contenuto della confezione ............................................................................................. 2 Introduzione........................................................................................................................... 3 Precauzioni di sicurezza ..................................................................................................... 6 Componenti dell’obiettivo................................................................................12 Ripresa..................................................................................................................13 Modo P: modifica programma.......................................................................................13 Modo M: esposizione manuale......................................................................................15 Impostazioni........................................................................................................16 Impostazione [Qualità/Dimensione immagine] (Menu di ripresa)...................16 Fotografie.....................................................................................................................17 Filmati............................................................................................................................18 Impostazione [Sensibilità ISO] (Menu di ripresa)....................................................19 [Reg. Impost] (Opzioni personalizzate chiave).........................................................20 Sommario11 Impostazione [Immagine Zoom Digitale] (Impostazioni)....................................20 Imp. ghiera di messa a fuoco (Impostazioni)............................................................21 Caratteristiche tecniche ....................................................................................22 Capacità nella memoria interna/scheda di memoria ............................................28 Precauzioni per l’uso .........................................................................................................30 Cura e conservazione dell’apparecchio......................................................................31 Servizio postvendita..........................................................................................................321 Componenti dell’obiettivo 1 2 4 3 1 Connettore 2 Ghiera di messa a fuoco 3 Obiettivo 4 Paraluce incorporato1 Ripresa Modo P: modifica programma Di seguito vengono mostrati gli intervalli approssimativi per le combinazioni di tempo di posa e aperture. Il valore effettivo potrebbe variare a seconda dell’EV (valore di esposizione). In questi esempi, la modalità flash è impostata su [Flash No] e la sensibilità ISO su [ISO200].1 Ev5 Ev6 Ev7 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 Ev-1 Ev-2 Ev-3 F16 F22 F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8 F2.0 F1.4 F1.0 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20 F22.0 F2.51 Modo M: esposizione manuale Se si seleziona [Auto] o [Alta-Auto] per Sensibilità ISO, mentre la fotocamera è in modo di esposizione manuale l’ISO sarà fissata su 200.1 Impostazioni Impostazione [Qualità/Dimensione immagine] (Menu di ripresa) Per l’impostazione [Qualità/Dimensione immagine] del Menu di ripresa sono disponibili le seguenti opzioni per qualità, dimensioni e formato delle immagini. La dimensione di un file fotografico dipende dai valori utilizzati per qualità e dimensione delle immagini. Quando si registrano i filmati, è possibile selezionarne la dimensione.1 Fotografie Voce Formato Compressione Dimensione immagine (pixel) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2848×2848 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041 Voce Formato Compressione Dimensione immagine (pixel) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Se si seleziona [RAW], questa sarà l’impostazione utilizzata per la copia in formato JPEG. *2 A seconda dell’area fotografata, potrebbero comparire delle fasce nere nella parte superiore e inferiore del display. *3 A seconda dell’area fotografata, potrebbero comparire delle fasce nere nella parte destra e sinistra del display. Filmati Voce Dimensione filmato HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×2401 Impostazione [Sensibilità ISO] (Menu di ripresa) • Se si seleziona [Auto] è si utilizza il flash, la sensibilità aumenta fino a un valore equivalente a ISO800. • Se si seleziona [Auto] è non si utilizza il flash, la gamma di sensibilità sarà la seguente. Dimensione immagine (pixel) Predefinito Minimo Massimo RAW 200 200 400 L 200 200 400 M 200 200 400 5M 200 200 400 3M 200 200 400 1M 200 200 400 VGA 200 200 4000 [Reg. Impost] (Opzioni personalizzate chiave) In [Reg. Impost] è anche possibile impostare l’opzione [Imp. ghiera di messa a fuoco] della scheda Impostazioni. Per le altre opzioni disponibili, consultare il “Manuale d’istruzioni della fotocamera”. Impostazione [Immagine Zoom Digitale] (Impostazioni) La dimensione dell’immagine registrata dipende dallo zoom con ridimensionamento automatico, come descritto di seguito. Rapporto di zoom Dimensione immagine (pixel) Rapporto di zoom Dimensione immagine (pixel) Circa 1,0× L Circa 1,8× 1M Circa 1,2× M Circa 3,0× 3M Circa 1,5× 5M Circa 5,9× VGA1 Imp. ghiera di messa a fuoco (Impostazioni) In [Imp. ghiera di messa a fuoco] è possibile impostare una modalità che attiva le funzioni per messa a fuoco sia automatica che manuale oppure una modalità che attiva le funzioni solo per messa a fuoco manuale. Se si seleziona [AF + MF], dopo aver premuto il tasto di scatto a metà corsa per impostare la messa a fuoco, è possibile regolarla ulteriormente con la ghiera. Voce AF + MF Solo MF Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Se si preme di nuovo il tasto di messa a fuoco dopo l’ulteriore regolazione, verrà attivato l’autofocus e la regolazione fine sarà annullata. Caratteristiche tecniche Le caratteristiche tecniche si riferiscono a un’unità fotocamera collegata a una fotocamera GXR. Pixel effettivi Circa 12,3 milioni Sensore immagini 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (pixel totali: circa 12,9 milioni) Obiettivo Lunghezza focale 33mm (equivalente al formato da 35 mm: 50mm) Apertura (cifra f) f/2.5– f/22 (filtro ND usato per le aperture di f/22 in modo di ripresa auto) Raggio del fuoco (dall’obiettivo) Circa 30cm–8 Circa 7cm (zoom ottico 0,5×) in modo Macro Fabbricazione 9 elementi in 8 gruppi (1 lente asferica con 2 superfici) Diametro filtro 40,5 mm Zoom Zoom digitale 4.0× (foto), zoom digitale 3.6× (video); funzione di riduzione automatica zoom circa 5,9× (VGA) Modo di messa a fuoco AF multi e spot basato su Contrasto AF; MF; Snap; 8 (blocco della messa a fuoco e assistenza AF) Tempo di posa Fotografie 1/3200–180s (i limiti superiore e inferiore variano a seconda dei modi di ripresa e dei modi flash) Filmati 1/30–1/2000s Controllo dell’esposizione Misurazione Modi fotometria TTL-CCD in multi (256 segmenti), media pesata al centro e spot con blocco AE. Modo AE programmato, AE con priorità di apertura diaframma, esposizione manuale, AE con priorità scatto, funzione Sposta puntat. Compensazione esposizione Manuale (da +4,0 a -4,0EV con incrementi di 1/3EV o 1/2EV), bracketing automatico (da -2EV a +2EV con incrementi di 1/3EV o 1/2EV) Sensibilità ISO (Standard Output Sensitivity - Sensibilità di uscita standard) Auto, Alta-Auto, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 Bil.Bianco Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Esterni, Nuvoloso, Lamp. Incandescente, Lamp. Fluorescente, Imp. Manuali, Partic.; bracketing del bilanciamento del bianco Flash Portata (flash incorporato) Circa 20cm–3,0m (ISO auto) Modo di ripresa Auto, Modifica programma, Priorità apertura, Priorità scatto, Manuale, Scena (Filmato, Ritratto, Sport, Paesaggio, Notturna, Correzione Obliquità), “Impost.” Modo Continuo Numero di foto scattate in modo Continuo (Formato immagine: RAW) Riduzione Disturbi disattivata o attivata (Leggera): 4 foto, Riduzione Disturbi attivata (Intensa): 3 foto Numero di foto scattate in modo M-Cont + (1 set) HI (1280×856): 30 foto (24 Fotogrammi/Sec), LO (4288×2848): 15 foto (3 Fotogrammi/Sec) Compressione*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Dimensione immagine (pixel) Fotografie 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848, 3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Filmati 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Formato file (circa) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17.800KB/fotogramma, FINE: 19.515KB/fotogramma, VGA: 15.587KB/fotogramma 4:3 NORMAL: 18.387KB/fotogramma, FINE: 20.157KB/fotogramma, VGA: 16.124KB/fotogramma 3:2 NORMAL: 20.946KB/fotogramma, FINE: 22.967KB/fotogramma, VGA: 18.337KB/fotogramma 1:1 NORMAL: 13.991KB/fotogramma, FINE: 15.333KB/fotogramma, VGA: 12.273KB/fotogramma Formato file (circa) L 16:9 NORMAL: 2.222KB/fotogramma, FINE: 3.816KB/fotogramma 4:3 NORMAL: 2.315KB/fotogramma, FINE: 3.960KB/fotogramma 3:2 NORMAL: 2.615KB/fotogramma, FINE: 4.493KB/fotogramma 1:1 NORMAL: 1.761KB/fotogramma, FINE: 3.009KB/fotogramma M 16:9 NORMAL: 1.475KB/fotogramma, FINE: 2.509KB/fotogramma 4:3 NORMAL: 1.574KB/fotogramma, FINE: 2.662KB/fotogramma 3:2 NORMAL: 1.744KB/fotogramma, FINE: 2.968KB/fotogramma 1:1 NORMAL: 1.186KB/fotogramma, FINE: 2.003KB/fotogramma 5M 4:3 FINE: 2.287KB/fotogramma 3M 4:3 FINE: 1.474KB/fotogramma 1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/fotogramma VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/fotogramma Durata della batteria (basata sullo standard CIPA) DB-90: circa 320 scatti *3 Dimensioni (L×A×P) Solo unità fotocamera: 68,7mm×57,9mm×71,3mm (incluso il cilindro dell’obiettivo; escluso il connettore) Unità montata sulla fotocamera: 113,9mm×70,2mm×77,1mm (Incluso il cilindro dell’obiettivo) Peso (appross.) Solo unità fotocamera: 263 g (escluso il tappo copriobiettivo o il copriconnettore) Unità montata sulla fotocamera: 423 g (senza batteria, scheda di memoria, tracolla, copriconnettore o tappo copriobiettivo) Temperatura operativa 0°C a 40°C Umidità operativa Massimo 85% Temperatura di immagazzinamento –20°C a 60°C *1 Le opzioni disponibili variano a seconda delle dimensioni dell’immagine. *2 Viene anche registrato un file JPEG (di qualità FINE o NORMAL dalle dimensioni del file RAW o un file VGA da 640×480 pixel). I file RAW usano il formato DNG standard promosso da Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Cifra puramente indicativa. Il numero effettivo di foto varia significativamente a seconda dell’uso della fotocamera. Si consiglia di avere a portata di mano batterie di riserva quando si usa la fotocamera per periodi prolungati. Capacità nella memoria interna/scheda di memoria I valori riportati di seguito sono indicativi della capacità di memorizzazione della memoria interna e delle schede di memoria di varie dimensioni, in base alla qualità e alla dimensione delle immagini, quando si usa la qualità FINE. Fotografie Compressione Dimensione immagine (pixel) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB RAW* FINE 4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625 3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380 2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065 L FINE 4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684 3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453 4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565 2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 Compressione Dimensione immagine (pixel) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Se si seleziona [RAW], questa sarà la compressione utilizzata per la copia in formato JPEG. Filmati Dimensione immagine (pixel) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 1280×720 24 fotogrammi/ secondo 21sec. 3min. 49sec. 7min. 46sec. 15min. 58sec. 31min. 10sec. 62min. 26sec. 125min. 15sec. 640×480 24 fotogrammi/ secondo 1min. 11min. 2sec. 22min. 27sec. 46min. 10sec. 90min. 7sec. 180min. 32sec. 362min. 9sec. 320×240 24 fotogrammi/ secondo 2min. 25sec. 26min. 24sec. 53min. 43sec. 110min. 27sec. 215min. 35sec. 431min. 52sec. 866min. 19sec. 0 Precauzioni per l’uso • La garanzia fornita è valida solo nel paese in cui è stato acquistato questo prodotto. • In caso di guasto mentre si è all’estero, il produttore declina ogni responsabilità per l’assistenza sul prodotto in altri paesi o per le spese sostenute al riguardo. • Non far cadere l’apparecchio o sottoporlo a urti fisici. • Quando si trasporta l’apparecchio, fare attenzione che non urti altri oggetti. Fare particolare attenzione a proteggere l’obiettivo. • Variazioni improvvise di temperatura possono causare condensa, cosa che determina condensa visibile all’interno dell’obiettivo o guasto dell’apparecchio. Per evitare questo problema infilare l’apparecchio in una busta di plastica per rallentare la variazione di temperatura e toglierlo dalla busta solo dopo che l’aria contenuta nella suddetta ha raggiunto la stessa temperatura dell’ambiente circostante. • Tenere l’apparecchio asciutto ed evitare di toccarlo con le mani bagnate. La mancata osservanza di queste precauzioni può dar luogo a guasti dell’apparecchio o scosse elettriche. • Tenere pulito il connettore. Suggerimento: evitare la formazione di condensa---------------------------- La condensa ha particolare probabilità di formarsi se ci si sposta in una zona dalla temperatura nettamente differente, in caso di umidità elevata, in una stanza fredda dopo l’accensione del riscaldamento, o quando la fotocamera è esposta all’aria fredda di un condizionatore o altro apparecchio.1 Cura e conservazione dell’apparecchio Cura dell’apparecchio • Le fotografie possono essere influenzate dalla presenta di impronte o altri corpi estranei presenti sull’obiettivo. Evitare di toccare l’obiettivo con le dita. Togliere la polvere o la lanugine con un compressore acquistato in un negozio di articoli fotografici, o pulire l’obiettivo con un panno morbido e asciutto. • Pulire accuratamente l’apparecchio dopo averlo usato in spiaggia o aver maneggiato dei cosmetici. Non esporre l’apparecchio a sostanze volatili, come solventi, benzine o pesticidi. Il mancato rispetto di questa precauzione potrebbe causare danni all’apparecchio o alle sue finiture. • Nel caso improbabile di un guasto, recarsi presso un Centro di assistenza Ricoh. • Questo è un apparecchio di alta precisione. Non smontarlo. Conservazione Non conservare la fotocamera in luoghi esposti a: calore o umidità elevati; variazioni significative di temperatura o umidità; polvere, sporco o sabbia; vibrazioni elevate; contatto prolungato con sostanze chimiche, tra cui palline di naftalina e altri repellenti per insetti, o contenenti prodotti in vinile o gomma; campi magnetici forti (ad esempio, nelle vicinanze di un monitor, trasformatore o calamita). Servizio postvendita 1. Questo prodotto è coperto da garanzia limitata. Durante il periodo di garanzia menzionato nella Garanzia fornita assieme all’apparecchio, i componenti difettosi saranno sostituiti gratuitamente. In caso di guasto, contattare il rivenditore presso cui è stato acquistato l’apparecchio o il Centro di assistenza Ricoh più vicino. Si prega di notare che non si verrà rimborsati per il trasporto dell’apparecchio al Centro di assistenza Ricoh. 2. Questa garanzia non copre danni da ascrivere a: 1 mancato rispetto delle istruzioni del manuale; 2 riparazioni, modiche o revisioni non condotte da un centro di assistenza autorizzato indicato nel manuale di istruzioni; 3 incendi, calamità naturali, casi di forza maggiore, fulmini, tensione anormale, ecc.; 4 conservazione errata (indicato nel “Manuale d’istruzioni della fotocamera”), perdite della batteria e altri liquidi, muffa o cura insufficiente dell’apparecchio. 5 immersione nell’acqua (allagamento), esposizione ad alcol o altre bevande, infiltrazione di sabbia e fango, urti fisici, caduta dell’apparecchio, pressione esercitata sull’apparecchio e altre cause non naturali. 3. Una volta scaduta la garanzia il proprietario sarà responsabile dei costi di riparazione, compresi quelli sostenuti presso un centro di assistenza autorizzato. 4. Il proprietario sarà responsabile di tutti i costi di riparazione, anche durante il periodo di validità della garanzia, se il tagliandino della suddetta non è accluso o se il nome del distributore o la data di acquisto sono stati modificati o non sono indicati sul tagliandino. 5. Le spese di revisione e ispezione accurata appositamente richieste dal proprietario saranno sostenute dallo stesso, anche durante il periodo di validità della garanzia. 6. I danni consequenziali da ascrivere a guasto dell’apparecchio, come le spese sostenute per l’esecuzione di foto o le perdite di profitti non saranno rimborsati, anche se si riferiscono al periodo di validità della garanzia. 7. La garanzia è valida esclusivamente nel paese di acquisto dell’apparecchio. * Le disposizioni di cui sopra si riferiscono alle riparazioni gratuite e non costituiscono un limite per i diritti legali dei clienti. * Il loro proposito è illustrato anche nel tagliandino di garanzia fornito con l’apparecchio. 8. I componenti essenziali per le procedure di assistenza dell’apparecchio (vale a dire, i componenti necessari per mantenere le funzioni e la qualità dell’apparecchio) saranno disponibili per cinque anni a partire dall’interruzione della produzione dell’apparecchio. 9. Si prega di notare che in caso di danni gravi da ascrivere ad allagamenti, immersioni, infiltrazioni di sabbia o fango, urti violenti o cadute, potrebbe non essere possibile riparare l’apparecchio e ripristinarne le condizioni originali. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Prima di inviare la fotocamera per la riparazione, controllarne il corpo e leggere nuovamente il manuale delle istruzioni per verificare il funzionamento corretto. • Alcune riparazioni necessitano di tempi prolungati. • Quando si invia l’apparecchio a un centro di assistenza, accludere una nota in cui si descrive il più precisamente possibile il componente difettoso e il problema. • Togliere tutti gli accessori non correlati al problema prima di inviare la fotocamera a un centro di assistenza.*L450 3974A* All’insorgere di problemi Sedi Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMC ITALY) (dall’Italia) 02 696 33 451 (dall’estero) +39 02 696 33 451 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2009 Dicembre IT I Stampato in Cina OBJECTIF RICOH S10 24-72mm F2.5-4.4 VC Mode d’emploi Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif. Contenu de l’emballage Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous. Unité appareil photo Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil. Capuchon de l’objectif Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. ?Mode d’emploi (le présentmanuel) ? Garantie Capuchon du connecteur Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. Étui souple Introduction Pour utiliser cet objectif, vous devez l’installer sur un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Le présent mode d’emploi désigne l’objectif sous le nom d’unité appareil photo et détaille les fonctions et procédures de fonctionnement uniquement disponibles lorsque l’unité appareil photo est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR. Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir une utilisation sans danger. Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants. Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires, est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits. Exonération de responsabilité Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente. © 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout moment et sans avis préalable. Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel. Mesures de sécurité Symboles d’avertissement Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens. Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous. Danger Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Avertissement Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Attention Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées. Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites. Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action spécifique est interdite. Exemples = Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en toute sécurité. Danger Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique. Avertissement Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants. Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène, de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion, d’incendie ou de brûlure. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident. Attention Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge électrique. Consignes de sécurité relatives aux accessoires Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les instructions fournies avec ce produit.10 Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3 Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 6 Nomenclature de l’objectif...............................................................................12 Prise de vue..........................................................................................................13 Mode P : Changement de programme.......................................................................13 Mode M : Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................15 Mode scène macro zoom ................................................................................................15 Réglages...............................................................................................................17 Réglages du menu de prise de vue en mode [Macro zoom]..............................17 Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (menu prise de vue)..............................................19 Photos...........................................................................................................................20 Vidéos............................................................................................................................21 Table des matières11 Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (menu prise de vue) .........................................................22 Réglage [Correction du bougé] (menu prise de vue)............................................23 [Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées)..........................................................23 [Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] (Options personnalisées).........................24 Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Configuration)...............................................24 Réglage [Zoom par paliers] (Configuration) .............................................................25 Réglage [Objectif de conversion] (Configuration)..................................................26 Caractéristiques..................................................................................................29 Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................34 Annexes................................................................................................................36 Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................36 Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................39 Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................40 Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................411 Nomenclature de l’objectif 1 4 3 2 1 Connecteur 2 Bague d’objectif 3 Objectif 4 Touche de dépose de la bague d’objectif1 Prise de vue Mode P : Changement de programme Les plages approximatives disponibles pour les combinaisons d’ouverture et de vitesse d’obturation sont indiquées ci-dessous. Les valeurs réelles peuvent variées selon la valeur d’exposition (EV). Dans ces exemples, le mode Flash est défini sur [Flash Non] et la sensibilité ISO est définie sur [ISO100].1 Ev6 Ev5 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 Ev-1 Ev-2 F16 F11 F15.8 F9.1 F2.5 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8 F2.0 F1.4 F1.0 8 4 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev7 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20 : Grand angle : Téléobjectif1 Mode M : Exposition manuelle Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO sera fixée à 100 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle. Mode scène macro zoom Lorsque le sélecteur de mode est placé sur SCENE, la sélection du mode [Macro zoom] optimise automatiquement la position du zoom. Vous pouvez ainsi prendre un sujet de plus grande taille qu’avec la prise de vue macro normale. Le zoom optique ne peut pas être utilisé en mode macro zoom. Pour les méthodes de prise de vue zoom, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ».1 Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Vous pouvez prendre des vues rapprochées à l’aide du mode macro zoom conformément aux distances suivantes. Environ 1cm (depuis la partie avant de l’objectif) Plage de prise de vue : environ 17×13mm (lorsque le zoom numérique n’est pas utilisé) Plage de prise de vue : environ 4,4×3,3mm (lorsque le zoom numérique 4,0×est utilisé) • Lorsque le paramètre [Qualité image/Taille] est réglé sur 4:3 pour [L], vous pouvez également régler le paramètre [Image zoom numérique] sur [Taille auto], le zoom avec changement de taille automatique est alors activé (GP. 24).1 Réglages Réglages du menu de prise de vue en mode [Macro zoom] Lorsque le paramètre [Macro zoom] est sélectionné, les rubriques du menu de prise de vue qui peuvent être définies et les valeurs par défaut sont les suivantes. Paramètre Réglage par défaut Qualité image/Taille L 4:3 NORMAL Mise au point AF Pré AF Non Mesure exposition Multi Réglages image Standard Mode continu Non Cadrage auto Non Correction exposition flash 0.01 Paramètre Réglage par défaut Niveau de flash manuel 1/2 Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau Réduction bruit Non Réduction bruit ISO > à ISO 401 Correction distorsion Non Retardateur personnalisé 2 img, 5 secondes Horodatage Non Correction de l’exposition 0.0 Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO Sensibilité ISO Auto Correction du bougé Oui1 Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (menu prise de vue) Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/Taille] du menu de prise de vue. La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/ taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez sélectionner la taille de la vidéo.0 Photos Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3648×2048 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3648×2736 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3648×2432 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2736×2736 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2048 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2736 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2432 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2736×2736 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3264×1840 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2448 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2176 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2448×24481 Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG. *2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut et en bas de l’affichage de la photo. *3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo. Vidéos Paramètre Taille vidéo VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (menu prise de vue) • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la sensibilité utilisée devient équivalente à la sensibilité ISO400. • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, la plage de sensibilité utilisée est la suivante. Taille de l’image (pixels) Défaut Minimum Maximum RAW 100 100 200 L 100 100 200 M 100 100 200 5M 100 100 200 3M 100 100 200 1M 100 100 238 VGA 100 100 283 Réglage [Correction du bougé] (menu prise de vue) L’activation de la fonction [Correction du bougé] limite les effets de flous occasionnés par le mouvement de l’appareil photo. Lorsque la correction du bougé de l’appareil est activée, le symbole E apparaît à l’écran. [Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées) Sous [Enr. Mes Réglages], vous pouvez aussi définir les options de [Zoom/ paliers] de l’onglet de configuration. Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ». [Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] (Options personnalisées) • [Zoom par paliers] peut être assigné aux touches Fn1/Fn2. • [AF/Snap], [Correction WB] et [Zoom par paliers] ne sont pas disponibles en appuyant sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 si le mode scène est réglé sur [Macro zoom]. Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Configuration) La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante. Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Environ 1× L Environ 1,8× 3M Environ 1,1× M Environ 2,9× 1M Environ 1,4× 5M Environ 5,7× VGA Réglage [Zoom par paliers] (Configuration) Si l’option [Zoom par paliers] est activée, il existe cinq niveaux de distance focale pour le zoom (équivalents à 24 mm, 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm et 72 mm*). * Équivalents aux distances d’un appareil photo 35 mm. Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Les distances focales du zoom lorsqu’un objectif à grande conversion est installé sur l’appareil photo sont équivalentes à 19 mm, 22 mm, 27 mm, 39 mm et 57 mm. • Les distances focales du zoom lorsqu’un objectif de téléconversion est installé sur l’appareil photo sont équivalentes à 45 mm, 53 mm, 65 mm, 93 mm et 135 mm. Cependant, si le zoom est effectué à une distance focale autre que 135 mm (côté téléobjectif), il est possible qu’un phénomène de dégradé mécanique (les coins de l’image sont sombres) apparaisse en périphérie de l’image. Réglage [Objectif de conversion] (Configuration) Avec les réglages [Objectif de conversion], vous pouvez indiquer si l’objectif à grande conversion (DW-6) ou l’objectif de téléconversion (TC-1) en option doit être utilisé. Réglages disponibles Description Non Même si un objectif de conversion est installé sur l’appareil photo, ce dernier ne le reconnaît pas comme tel. WIDE [DW-6] L’objectif de conversion est reconnu comme objectif à grande conversion (DW-6) lorsqu’il est installé sur l’appareil photo. TELE [TC-1] L’objectif de conversion est reconnu comme objectif de téléconversion (TC-1) lorsqu’il est installé sur l’appareil photo. Réglages disponibles Description Obj. installé *Réglage par défaut L’écran de sélection du type d’objectif de conversion s’affiche lors des événements suivants. Cela vous sera particulièrement utile si vous utilisez souvent les objectifs DW-6 et TC-1. • Quand l’appareil est mis sous tension alors qu’un objectif de conversion est installé • Lorsque l’objectif de conversion est installé sur l’appareil photo Lorsque [WIDE[DW-6]] ou [TELE[TC-1]] est sélectionné : Lors de la mise sous tension alors qu’un objectif de conversion est installé sur l’appareil, ou lors de l’installation d’un objectif de conversion, un symbole indiquant le type de l’objectif de conversion s’affiche momentanément au centre de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Un symbole plus petit apparaît ensuite en bas à droite de l’écran. Lorsque [Obj. installé] est sélectionné : Lors de la mise sous tension alors qu’un objectif de conversion est installé sur l’appareil, ou lors de l’installation d’un objectif de conversion, l’écran de sélection du type d’objectif de conversion s’affiche. Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner le réglage souhaité, puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. Un symbole indiquant le type de l’objectif de conversion s’affiche momentanément au centre de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Un symbole plus petit apparaît ensuite en bas à droite de l’écran. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Lorsque [Objectif de conversion] est réglé sur [TELE[TC-1]], l’appareil photo reconnaît l’objectif installé comme un objectif de téléconversion (TC-1) même si l’objectif installé est en réalité un objectif à grande conversion (DW-6). La réciproque est également vraie. • Si vous utilisez un objectif dont le réglage [Objectif de conversion] est différent de ce qu’il devrait être, les fonctions de prise de vue ne fonctionnent pas correctement. Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un boîtier GXR. Pixels réels Environ 10,0 millions Capteur d’image 1/1,7" CCD (nombre total de pixels : environ 10,4 millions) Objectif Distance focale De 5,1mm à 15,3mm (format 35mm équivalent : de 24mm à 72mm) Ouverture (nombre f) f/2,5– f/4,4 Plage mise au point (de l’objectif) Prise de vue normale : environ 30cm à 8 (grand angle/ téléobjectif) Prise de vue macro : environ 1cm à 8 (grand angle/macro zoom) ; environ 4cm à 8 (téléobjectif) Construction 11 éléments en 7 groupes (4 objectifs asphériques avec 4 surfaces) Zoom 3,0× zoom optique ; 4,0× zoom numérique ; environ 5,7× zoom de redimensionnement automatique (VGA)0 Mode mise au point AF multi et AF spot basé sur CCD ; MF ; snap ; 8 (verrouillage de mise au point et assistance AF) Vitesse d’obturation Photos 1/2000–180s (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en fonction du mode prise de vue et flash) Vidéos 1/30–1/2000s Contrôle exposition Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique Mode Programme AE, priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle, priorité à l’obturation AE, fonction de décalage de la cible Correction de l’exposition Manuelle (+4,0 à -4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV), cadrage automatique (-2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV) Sensibilité ISO (sensibilité sortie standard) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Lampe incandescente, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ; cadrage auto balance des blancs Flash Portée (flash intégré) Environ 20cm–4,5m (grand angle), Environ 15cm–2,7m (téléobjectif) 1 Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture, priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports, paysage, nuit, correction biais, macro zoom), « Mes Réglages » Mode continu Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Continu (Taille d’image : RAW) Réduction du bruit désactivée : 5 photos, Réduction du bruit désactivée : 4 photos, (sensibilité ISO: ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200) Réduction du bruit activée (faible ou forte) : 4 photos Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Cont.M + (un ensemble) Rap (640×480) : 30 photos (30 images/s), Len (3648×2736) : 15 photos (1,6 images/s) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Taille de l’image (pixels) Photos 3648×2048, 3648×2736, 3648×2432, 2736×2736, 3264×1840, 3264×2448, 3264×2176, 2448×2448, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Vidéos 640×480, 320×240 Taille fichier (approximative) RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 12 923Ko/image, FINE : 14 160Ko/image, VGA : 11 347Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 17 202Ko/image, FINE : 18 854Ko/image, VGA : 15 096Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 15 311Ko/image, FINE : 16 779Ko/image, VGA : 13 439Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 12 956Ko/image, FINE : 14 195Ko/image, VGA : 11 377Ko/image Taille fichier (approximative) L 16:9 NORMAL : 1 630Ko/image, FINE : 2 779Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 2 169Ko/image, FINE : 3 704Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 1 930Ko/image, FINE : 3 295Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 633Ko/image, FINE : 2 784Ko/image M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 329Ko/image, FINE : 2 253Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 2 990Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 1 567Ko/image, FINE : 2 660Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 327Ko/image, FINE : 2 248Ko/image 5M 4:3 FINE : 2 287Ko/image 3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image 1M 4:3 FINE : 812Ko/image VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image Longévité batterie (basée sur norme CIPA) DB-90 : environ 410 prises de vue*3 Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 68,7mm×57,9mm×38,6mm (protubérances exclues) Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 113,9mm×70,2mm×44,4mm (protubérances exclues) Poids (approximatif) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 161 g (capuchon de l’objectif et capuchon du connecteur non inclus) Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 325 g (batterie, carte mémoire, courroie d’encolure, capuchon du connecteur et capuchon de l’objectif non inclus) Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C Humidité fonctionnement 85 % ou moins Température stockage –20°C à 60°C *1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image. *2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de 640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Pour référence uniquement : le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée. Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE. Photos Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go RAW* FINE 3648×2048 6 68 138 272 556 1115 2237 3648×2736 4 51 104 204 418 837 1680 3648×2432 5 57 117 229 469 941 1888 2736×2736 6 68 138 271 555 1113 2232 L FINE 3648×2048 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546 3648×2736 22 242 497 965 1973 3953 7930 3648×2432 24 272 553 1087 2222 4452 8930 2736×2736 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546 Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go M FINE 3264×1840 36 397 808 1588 3245 6502 13043 3264×2448 27 300 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 3264×2176 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 2448×2448 36 400 808 1588 3245 6502 13043 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie JPEG. Vidéos Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go 640×480 30 images/seconde 49s 8min 55s 18min 8s 37min 18s 72min 50s 145min 54s 292min 41s 320×240 30 images/seconde 1min 59s 21min 39s 44min 2s 90min 33s 176min 44s 354min 3s 710min 13s Annexes Accessoires en option L’objectif RICOH peut être utilisé avec les éléments suivants (vendus séparément). Capuchon d’objectif (LC-2) Capuchon adaptateur (HA-3) Inclut un capuchon pour protéger l’objectif de la lumière solaire et un adaptateur pour les filtres de f43 mm d’usage général. Ceux-ci peuvent être utilisés pour améliorer la qualité de prise de vue lorsque le sujet est rétroéclairé. Objectif à grande conversion (DW-6) Un objectif à grande conversion qui permet la prise de vue en grand angle avec un agrandissement d’objectif de 0,79× (équivalent à un objectif grand angle de 19 mm sur un appareil photo 35 mm). À utiliser avec le capuchon adaptateur (étui inclus). Objectif de téléconversion (TC-1) Un objectif de téléconversion qui permet la prise de vue télé avec un agrandissement d’objectif de 1,88× (équivalent à un téléobjectif de 135 mm sur un appareil photo 35 mm). À utiliser avec le capuchon adaptateur (étui inclus). Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation fournie avec le produit. Le flash intégré du boîtier de l’appareil photo ne peut pas être utilisé avec des objectifs à grande conversion ou des capuchons d’objectif. Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/). • • • Montage et démontage de la bague d’objectif--------------------------------- Enlevez la bague d’objectif lors de l’utilisation de l’objectif à grande conversion, de l’objectif de téléconversion, du capuchon d’objectif à fixation ou du capuchon adaptateur. Démontage de la bague d’objectif Appuyez sur la touche de dépose de la bague d’objectif, faites tourner la bague d’objectif dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre avec l’appareil photo hors tension et retirez la bague du boîtier de l’appareil photo. Montage de la bague d’objectif Une fois l’appareil hors tension, alignez le repère sur la bague d’objectif (2) avec le repère du boîtier de l’appareil (1) et tournez la bague d’objectif dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre jusqu’à ce qu’un déclic soit émis. 2 1 Précautions d’emploi • La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. • Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. • Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques. • Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif. • Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même température que l’environnement. • Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement ou un choc électrique. • Gardez le connecteur propre. Conseil : pour éviter la condensation--------------------------------------------- La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif.0 Entretien et stockage de l’équipement Entretien de l’équipement • Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce, ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. • Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition. • Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation Ricoh. • Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas.1 Stockage Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant). Garantie et réparation 1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au centre de réparation Ricoh. 2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de : 1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ; 2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ; 3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ; 4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement. 5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles. 3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé. 4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte. 5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté. * Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent vos droits légaux. * L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de garantie fournie avec l’équipement. 8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement) seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la production de l’équipement. 9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de son état originel peut être impossible. Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct. • Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution. • Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible. • Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer l’appareil au centre de réparation.*L451 3972A* En cas de problème Bureaux Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2009 Décembre FR F-FR Imprimé en Chine RICOH LENS S10 24-72mm F2.5-4.4 VC Instruction Manual The serial number may be found on the bottom of the lens. Package Contents Before using your Ricoh lens, confirm that the package contains the items listed below. Camera unit The serial number may be found on the bottom. Lens cap Comes attached to the camera unit. ? Instruction manual (this manual) ? Warranty Connector cap Comes attached to the camera unit. Soft case Introduction To use this lens, you need to attach it to a compatible camera body. Refer to the Camera Body User Guide for details about how to operate shooting and playback functions and change settings and to read important precautions for use. This instruction manual will refer to this lens as the “camera unit” and will explain functions and operating procedures that are available only when this camera unit is used with a compatible camera body. See also the GXR Camera Body User Guide. To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Safety precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use. Test shots Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly before taking photos on important occasions. Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines, and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright holder, is prohibited. Exemption from liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display images as a result of product malfunction. Warranty The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any expense thereby incurred. Radio interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device, reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio or television into a different outlet. © 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time without prior notice. Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover of this booklet. Safety Precautions Warning Symbols Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below. Danger This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Warning This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Caution This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical damage if ignored or incorrectly handled. Sample Warnings The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed. The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions. The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action is prohibited. Examples = Do not touch = Do not disassemble Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit. Danger Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard. Warning Keep the equipment out of the reach of children. Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service center if it is damaged. Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock. Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns. • Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as this may lead to disasters or accidents. Caution Do not allow the equipment to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands. Both pose the risk of electric shock. Safety Precautions for Accessories When using optional products, carefully read the instructions provided with the product before using that product.10 Package Contents................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3 Safety Precautions................................................................................................................ 6 Parts of the Lens .................................................................................................12 Shooting...............................................................................................................13 Mode P: Program Shift......................................................................................................13 Mode M: Manual Exposure..............................................................................................15 The Zoom Macro Scene Mode.......................................................................................15 Settings ................................................................................................................17 Shooting Menu Settings in [Zoom Macro] Mode ...................................................17 [Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu) ......................................................19 Photographs...............................................................................................................20 Movies...........................................................................................................................21 Table of Contents11 [ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu).......................................................................22 [Camera Shake Correction] Setting (Shooting Menu)...........................................23 [Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Options)..................................................................23 [Set Fn1 Button]/[Set Fn2 Button] (Key Custom Options)....................................24 [Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup).........................................................................24 [Step Zoom] Setting (Setup)...........................................................................................25 [Conversion Lens] Setting (Setup)................................................................................26 Specifications ......................................................................................................29 Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity..................................................................35 Appendices..........................................................................................................37 Optional Accessories.........................................................................................................37 Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................40 Equipment Care and Storage.........................................................................................41 Warranty and Servicing....................................................................................................421 Parts of the Lens 1 4 3 2 1 Connector 2 Ring cap 3 Lens 4 Ring cap removal button1 Shooting Mode P: Program Shift The following shows the approximate ranges available for shutter speed and aperture combinations. The actual values may vary depending on EV (exposure value). In these examples, the flash mode is set to [Flash Off], and the ISO setting is set to [ISO100].1 Ev6 Ev5 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 Ev-1 Ev-2 F16 F11 F15.8 F9.1 F2.5 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8 F2.0 F1.4 F1.0 8 4 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev7 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20 : Wide : Tele1 Mode M: Manual Exposure If [Auto] or [Auto-Hi] is selected for ISO Setting, ISO will be fixed at 100 while the camera is in manual exposure mode. The Zoom Macro Scene Mode When the mode dial is set to SCENE, selecting the [Zoom Macro] mode will automatically optimize the zoom position, allowing you to shoot the subject at a larger size than with normal macro shooting. In zoom macro mode, the optical zoom cannot be used. For zoom shooting methods, refer to the “Camera Body User Guide”.1 Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • You can shoot close-ups using the zoom macro within the following distances. Approx. 1cm (from the front of the lens) Shooting range: Approx. 17×13mm (when digital zoom is not used) Shooting range: Approx. 4.4×3.3mm (when 4.0× digital zoom is used) • When [Picture Quality/Size] is set to 4:3 for [L], you can also set [Digital Zoom Image] to [Auto Resize], and auto resize zoom will be activated. (GP. 24)1 Settings Shooting Menu Settings in [Zoom Macro] Mode When [Zoom Macro] is selected, items from the shooting menu that can be set and default values are as follows. Item Default setting Picture Quality/Size L 4:3 NORMAL Focus AF Pre-AF Off Exposure Metering Multi Image Settings Standard Continuous Mode Off Auto Bracket Off Flash Exposure Compensation 0.01 Item Default setting Manual Flash Amount 1/2 Flash Synchro Settings 1st Curtain Noise Reduction Off Noise Reduction ISO Over ISO 401 Distortion Correction Off Custom Self-Timer 2 Pics, 5 seconds Date Imprint Off Exposure Compensation 0.0 White Balance Multi-P AUTO ISO Setting Auto Camera Shake Correction On1 [Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu) The following picture quality, image size and aspect ratio options are available for the [Picture Quality/Size] setting in the shooting menu. A photograph‘s file size will depend on the combination of picture quality and image size used. When recording movies, you can select the movie size.0 Photographs Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3648×2048 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3648×2736 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3648×2432 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2736×2736 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2048 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2736 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2432 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2736×2736 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3264×1840 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2448 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2176 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2448×24481 Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy. *2 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear on the top and bottom of the picture display. *3 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear at the right and left sides of the picture display. Movies Item Movie size VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 [ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu) • When [Auto] is selected and the flash is used, the sensitivity used will gain up to ISO400 equivalent. • When [Auto] is selected and the flash is not used, the range of the sensitivity used will be as follows. Picture size (pixels) Default Minimum Maximum RAW 100 100 200 L 100 100 200 M 100 100 200 5M 100 100 200 3M 100 100 200 1M 100 100 238 VGA 100 100 283 [Camera Shake Correction] Setting (Shooting Menu) Turning ON [Camera Shake Correction] minimizes blurring due to camera shake. When camera shake correction is activated, the E symbol appears on the screen. [Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Options) In [Reg. My Settings], you can also set [Step Zoom] options in the setup tab. For other options available, refer to the “Camera Body User Guide”. [Set Fn1 Button]/[Set Fn2 Button] (Key Custom Options) • [Step Zoom] can be assigned to the Fn1/Fn2 buttons. • [AF/Snap], [WB Correction], and [Step Zoom] is not available by pressing the Fn1/Fn2 buttons if the scene mode is set to [Zoom Macro]. [Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup) The size of the recorded image varies depending on the auto resize zoom, as follows. Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Approx. 1.0× L Approx. 1.8× 3M Approx. 1.1× M Approx. 2.9× 1M Approx. 1.4× 5M Approx. 5.7× VGA [Step Zoom] Setting (Setup) If [Step Zoom] is set to ON, the focal length for zoom is fixed at five steps (equivalent to 24 mm, 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, and 72 mm*). * Equivalent to that on a 35-mm camera. Notes------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Zoom focal lengths for when a wide conversion lens is attached to the camera are equivalent to 19 mm, 22 mm, 27 mm, 39 mm, and 57 mm. • Zoom focal lengths for when a tele conversion lens is attached to the camera are equivalent to 45 mm, 53 mm, 65 mm, 93 mm, and 135 mm. However, if zooming is performed at a focal length other than 135 mm (telephoto side), mechanical vignetting (a phenomenon in which the four corners of an image become dark) may occur in the periphery of the image. [Conversion Lens] Setting (Setup) In [Conversion Lens] settings, you can set whether to use either of an optional wide conversion lens (DW-6) or tele conversion lens (TC-1). Available Settings Description Off Even when a conversion lens is attached to the camera, the camera will not be recognize it as an attached conversion lens. WIDE [DW-6] When a conversion lens is attached to the camera, it will be recognized as a wide conversion lens (DW-6). TELE [TC-1] When a conversion lens is attached to the camera, it will be recognized as a tele conversion lens (TC-1). Available Settings Description Lens Attached *Default setting The conversion lens type selection screen always appears at the following times. This is useful when frequently using both the DW-6 and TC-1 lenses. • When the camera is turned on with a conversion lens attached • When the conversion lens is attached to the camera When [WIDE[DW-6]] or [TELE[TC-1]] is selected: When the power is turned on with a conversion lens attached, or when a conversion lens is attached, a symbol indicating the conversion lens type is displayed momentarily at the center of the picture display, and then a smaller symbol is displayed at the lower right of the picture display. When [Lens Attached] is selected: When the power is turned on with a conversion lens attached, or when a conversion lens is attached, the conversion lens type selection screen will display. Press the Fn1/Fn2 buttons to select the desired setting and then press the MENU/OK button. A symbol indicating the conversion lens type is displayed momentarily at the center of the picture display, and then a smaller symbol is displayed at the lower right of the picture display. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • When [Conversion Lens] is set to [TELE[TC-1]], even if the wide conversion lens (DW-6) is attached, the camera will recognize the attached lens as the tele conversion lens (TC-1). In addition, the opposite will be the same. • When a lens with a different [Conversion Lens] setting is attached, shooting functions will not operate properly. Specifications Specifications are given for the camera unit mounted on a GXR body. Effective pixels Approximately 10.0 million Image sensor 1/1.7" CCD (total pixels: approx. 10.4 million) Lens Focal length 5.1mm to 15.3mm (35-mm format equivalent: 24mm to 72mm) Aperture (f-number) f/2.5– f/4.4 Focus range (from lens) Normal shooting: Approx. 30cm to 8 (wide angle/telephoto end) Macro shooting: Approx. 1cm to 8 (wide angle/zoom macro); approx. 4cm to 8 (telephoto end) Construction 11 elements in 7 groups (4 aspherical lens elements with 4 surfaces) Zoom 3.0× optical zoom; 4.0× digital zoom; approx. 5.7× auto resize zoom (VGA)0 Focus mode CCD-based multi and spot AF; MF; Snap; 8 (focus lock and AF-assist) Shutter speed Photographs 1/2000–180s (upper and lower limits vary according to shooting and flash mode) Movies 1/30–1/2000s Exposure control Metering TTL-CCD metering in multi (256-segment), center-weighted, and spot modes with autoexposure lock Mode Program AE, aperture priority AE, manual exposure, shutter priority AE, move target function Exposure compensation Manual (+4.0 to -4.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV), auto bracketing (-2EV to +2EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV) ISO sensitivity (Standard Output Sensitivity) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 White balance Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Outdoors, Cloudy, Incandescent Lamp, Fluorescent Lamp, Manual Settings, Detail; white balance bracketing Flash Range (built-in flash) Approx. 20cm–4.5m (wide-angle), Approx. 15cm–2.7m (telephoto)1 Shooting mode Auto, program shift, aperture priority, shutter priority, manual, scene (movie, portrait, sports, landscape, nightscape, skew correction, zoom macro), “My Settings” Continuous mode Number of pictures shot in Continuous (Picture Size: RAW) Noise Reduction off: 5 pictures, Noise Reduction off: 4 pictures, (ISO sensitivity: ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200) Noise Reduction on (Weak or Strong): 4 pictures Number of pictures shot in M-Cont Plus (1 set) HI (640×480) : 30 pictures (30 Frames/Sec), LO (3648×2736) : 15 pictures (1.6 Frames/Sec) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Image size (pixels) Photographs 3648×2048, 3648×2736, 3648×2432, 2736×2736, 3264×1840, 3264×2448, 3264×2176, 2448×2448, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Movies 640×480, 320×240 File size (approx.) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 12,923KB/frame, FINE: 14,160KB/frame, VGA: 11,347KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 17,202KB/frame, FINE: 18,854KB/frame, VGA: 15,096KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 15,311KB/frame, FINE: 16,779KB/frame, VGA: 13,439KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 12,956KB/frame, FINE: 14,195KB/frame, VGA: 11,377KB/frame  File size (approx.) L 16:9 NORMAL: 1,630KB/frame, FINE: 2,779KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 2,169KB/frame, FINE: 3,704KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 1,930KB/frame, FINE: 3,295KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 1,633KB/frame, FINE: 2,784KB/frame M 16:9 NORMAL: 1,329KB/frame, FINE: 2,253KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 1,761KB/frame, FINE: 2,990KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 1,567KB/frame, FINE: 2,660KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 1,327KB/frame, FINE: 2,248KB/frame 5M 4:3 FINE: 2,287KB/frame 3M 4:3 FINE: 1,474KB/frame 1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/frame VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/frame Battery life (based on CIPA standard) DB-90: approx. 410 shots *3 Dimensions (W×H×D) Camera unit only: 68.7mm×57.9mm×38.6mm (excluding projections) When mounted on the camera body: 113.9mm×70.2mm×44.4mm (excluding projections) Weight (approx.) Camera unit only: 161g (not including the lens cap or connector cap) When mounted on the camera body: 325g (not including the battery, memory card, neck strap, connector cap, or lens cap) Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C Operating humidity 85% or less Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C *1 The options available vary with image size. *2 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a FINE- or NORMAL-quality file with the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file 640×480 pixels in size). RAW files use the standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is used. We recommend that you carry spare batteries when in use for extended periods. Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity The following values are given as a reference of the storage capacity of the internal memory and memory cards of various sizes, by picture quality and image size, when using the FINE picture quality. Photographs Compression Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB RAW* FINE 3648×2048 6 68 138 272 556 1115 2237 3648×2736 4 51 104 204 418 837 1680 3648×2432 5 57 117 229 469 941 1888 2736×2736 6 68 138 271 555 1113 2232 L FINE 3648×2048 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546 3648×2736 22 242 497 965 1973 3953 7930 3648×2432 24 272 553 1087 2222 4452 8930 2736×2736 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546 Compression Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB M FINE 3264×1840 36 397 808 1588 3245 6502 13043 3264×2448 27 300 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 3264×2176 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 2448×2448 36 400 808 1588 3245 6502 13043 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * When [RAW] is selected, this is the compression used for the JPEG copy. Movies Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 640×480 30 frames/second 49sec. 8min. 55sec. 18min. 8sec. 37min. 18sec. 72min. 50sec. 145min. 54sec. 292min. 41sec. 320×240 30 frames/second 1min. 59sec. 21min. 39sec. 44min. 2sec. 90min. 33sec. 176min. 44sec. 354min. 3sec. 710min. 13sec. Appendices Optional Accessories The RICOH LENS can be used with the items (sold separately) listed below. Lens Cap (LC-2) Hood & Adapter (HA-3) Includes a hood to protect the lens from sunlight and an adapter for f43-mm general-use filters. These can be used to enhance the shooting quality when the subject is backlit. Wide Conversion Lens (DW-6) A wide conversion lens that enables wide-angle shooting at a lens magnification of 0.79× (equivalent to a 19-mm wide-angle lens on a 35-mm camera). Use with the hood and adapter (case included). Tele Conversion Lens (TC-1) A tele conversion lens that enables telephoto shooting at a lens magnification of 1.88× (equivalent to a 135-mm telephoto lens on a 35-mm camera). Use with the hood and adapter (case included). Before using an optional accessory, see the documentation that came with the product. The built-in flash of the camera body can not be used with wide conversion lenses or lens hoods. For the latest information on optional accessories, visit the Ricoh website (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/). • • • Removing/attaching the ring cap ------------------------------------------------- Remove the ring cap when using the wide conversion lens, tele conversion lens, self retaining lens cap or hood & adapter. Removing the ring cap With the ring cap removal button pressed, turn the ring cap counterclockwise while the camera is turned off and remove from the camera body. Attaching the ring cap With the camera turned off, align the marking on the ring cap (2) with the marking on the camera body (1) and turn the ring cap clockwise until it clicks. 2 10 Precautions for Use • The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase. • Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any expenditure incurred thereby. • Do not drop the equipment or subject it to physical shocks. • When carrying the equipment, be careful that it does not strike other objects. Particular care is required to protect the lens. • Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible condensation inside the lens or malfunction of the equipment. This can be avoided by placing the equipment in a plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature its surroundings. • Keep the equipment dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe these precautions could result in malfunction of the equipment or electric shock. • Keep the connector clean. Tip: Avoiding Condensation -------------------------------------------------------- Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the heater has come on, or where the camera is exposed to cold air from an air conditioner or other device.1 Equipment Care and Storage Caring for the Equipment • Photographs can be affected by fingerprints and other foreign matter on the lens. Avoid touching the lens with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a blower from a camera supply store, or gently clean the lens with a soft, dry cloth. • Clean the equipment thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling cosmetics. Do not expose the equipment to volatile substances such as thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the equipment or its finish. • In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center. • This equipment is a high precision device. Do not disassemble. Storage Do not store the camera where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or humidity; large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe vibration; prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other insect repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for example, in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet). Warranty and Servicing 1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your equipment, any defective parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of equipment malfunction, contact the dealer from which you purchased the equipment or your nearest Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will not be reimbursed for the cost of bringing the equipment to the Ricoh Repair Center. 2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from: 1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual; 2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service center listed in the instruction manual; 3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.; 4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera Body User Guide”), leaking of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the equipment. 5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages, infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock, dropping of the equipment, or pressure on the equipment, and other unnatural causes. 3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees, including those incurred at an authorized service center. 4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the warranty card is not attached or if the distributor’s name or the purchase date have been changed or are not indicated on the card. 5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred during the warranty period. 6. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the equipment, such as expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not. 7. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the equipment was purchased. * The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit your legal rights. * The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card provided with this equipment. 8. Parts essential to the servicing of the equipment (that is, components required to maintain the functions and quality of the equipment) will be available for a period of five years after the equipment is discontinued. 9. Please note that if the equipment is seriously damaged by flooding, submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible. Notes------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Before sending the camera in for repair, check the camera body and read the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation. • Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete. • When sending the equipment to a service center, please include a note which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as possible. • Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the camera to the service center.If You Encounter a Problem with This Product Ricoh offices RICOH COMPANY, LTD. 3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530, Japan http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A. 1–800–22RICOH http://www.ricoh-usa.com/ RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK) (from within the UK) 02073 656 580 (from outside of the UK) +44 2073 656 580 RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN) (desde España) 91 406 9148 (desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148 RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMC ITALY) (dall’Italia) 02 696 33 451 (dall’estero) +39 02 696 33 451*L451 2971A* Ricoh offices RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS LIMITED 21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2009 December EN USA GB GB AE AE Printed in China OBJECTIF RICOH P10 28-300mm F3.5-5.6 VC* Mode d’emploi Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif. * VC signifie que cet objectif est doté de la technologie authentique Ricoh de stabilisation d’image de correction des vibrations. Contenu de l’emballage Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous. Unité appareil photo Le numéro de série est gravé sousl’appareil. Capuchon de l’objectif Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. ? Mode d’emploi (le présent manuel) ? Garantie Capuchon du connecteur Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. Étui souple Introduction Pour utiliser cet objectif, vous devez l’installer sur un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Le présent mode d’emploi désigne l’objectif sous le nom d’unité appareil photo et détaille les fonctions et procédures de fonctionnement uniquement disponibles lorsque l’unité appareil photo est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR. Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir une utilisation sans danger. Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants. Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires, est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits. Exonération de responsabilité Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente. © 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout moment et sans avis préalable. Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel. Mesures de sécurité Symboles d’avertissement Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens. Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous. Danger Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Avertissement Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Attention Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées. Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites. Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action spécifique est interdite. Exemples = Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en toute sécurité. Danger Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique. Avertissement Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants. Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène, de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion, d’incendie ou de brûlure. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident. Attention Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge électrique. Consignes de sécurité relatives aux accessoires Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les instructions fournies avec ce produit.10 Contenu de l’emballage ...................................................................................... 2 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 3 Mesures de sécurité ............................................................................................. 6 Nomenclature de l’objectif...............................................................................13 Mise à jour du produit.......................................................................................14 Mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo.....................................................14 Sélecteur plus-moins .........................................................................................17 Fonction supplémentaire du sélecteur plus-moins...............................................17 Prise de vue..........................................................................................................18 Mode P : Changement de programme.......................................................................18 A : Mode Priorité ouverture.............................................................................................20 S : Mode Priorité à l’obturation ......................................................................................20 Mode M : Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................21 Mode scène macro zoom ................................................................................................22 Table des matières11 Mode Vue double avec plage dynamique.................................................................23 Cibles multiples AF.............................................................................................................27 Cont.M + (lente) ..................................................................................................................29 Cont.M + (rapide)................................................................................................................31 Vites. cont (lente)/Vites. cont (rapide).........................................................................32 Cadrage de la mise au point...........................................................................................33 Réglage [Réduction bruit] ...............................................................................................36 Réglage de la balance des blancs.................................................................................37 Lecture..................................................................................................................38 Écran d’informations de l’unité appareil photo.......................................................38 Réglages...............................................................................................................39 Réglages du menu de prise de vue en mode [Macro zoom]..............................39 Réglages du menu de prise de vue en mode [Gamme dynamique]...............41 Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (menu prise de vue)..............................................42 Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (menu prise de vue) .........................................................45 Réglage [Correction du bougé] (menu prise de vue)............................................461 [Enr. Mes Réglages] (onglet des options personnalisées)....................................46 [Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] (onglet des options personnalisées)...47 [Manette ADJ Réglage] (onglet des options personnalisées) ............................47 Réglage [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] (onglet des options personnalisées).......................................................................48 Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (onglet de configuration)...........................49 Réglage [Zoom par paliers] (onglet de configuration) .........................................49 Caractéristiques..................................................................................................50 Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................56 Annexes................................................................................................................60 Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................60 Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................62 Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................63 Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................641 Nomenclature de l’objectif 1 3 2 1 Connecteur 2 Bague d’objectif 3 Objectif1 Mise à jour du produit Mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo Lorsque vous fixez pour la première fois l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil, la fonction de mise à jour de version démarre automatiquement si le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil doit être mis à jour. Dans ce cas, mettez à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil comme suit. Si la version du micrologiciel est déjà à jour, la fonction de mise à jour de version ne démarre pas et vous pouvez utiliser l’objectif immédiatement. 1 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension et fixez l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil. • Pour en savoir plus sur la fixation de l’unité appareil photo, reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.1 2 Mettez l’appareil photo sous tension. • Un message de confirmation relatif à la mise à jour du micrologiciel s’affiche. 3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner [Oui], puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. • La mise à jour du micrologiciel démarre et les messages suivants s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. [Vérification du fichier de réécriture] L’appareil photo est automatiquement mis hors tension puis sous tension. Après le redémarrage de l’appareil photo, l’écran de version du micrologiciel s’affiche et la mise à jour est terminée.1 Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Pour confirmer la version du micrologiciel, sélectionnez [Version du micrologiciel] dans le menu de configuration. Vous pouvez également, avec l’appareil photo hors tension, maintenir la touche6(Lecture) enfoncée pendant plus d’une seconde tout en maintenant la touche – enfoncée. La version du micrologiciel s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos pendant 20 secondes environ. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les mises à jour du micrologiciel, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc). Vous pouvez télécharger les dernières mises à jour du micrologiciel pour mettre à jour votre équipement.1 Sélecteur plus-moins Fonction supplémentaire du sélecteur plus-moins Lors de la sélection du mode flash, vous pouvez aussi utiliser le sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner le mode. Lorsque le mode retardateur est sélectionné, vous pouvez aussi utiliser le sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner les réglages.1 Prise de vue Mode P : Changement de programme Configurer le sélecteur de mode sur P (mode Changement de programme) vous permet de sélectionner une combinaison d’ouverture de l’objectif et de vitesse d’obturation. Si la sensibilité ISO est réglée sur [Auto] ou [AutoHi], l’appareil procède automatiquement au réglage de la sensibilité ISO afin d’obtenir l’exposition optimale. Le diagramme de la page suivante propose une estimation approximative de la plage de changement pour diverses combinaisons de valeurs d’ouverture et de vitesses d’obturation. La plage de changement varie en fonction de la valeur d’exposition (EV). Dans cet exemple, le mode Flash est défini sur [Flash Non] et la sensibilité ISO est définie sur [ISO100]. Pour la plus grande valeur d’ouverture de l’objectif, l’ouverture est utilisée avec le filtre à densité neutre. Dans ce cas, le degré de flou de l’arrière-plan reste le même. Le degré de flou est exprimé comme valeur d’ouverture (valeur F) même lorsqu’un filtre à densité neutre est utilisé.1 F16 F11 F15.4 F7.0 F5.6 F3.5 F8 F5.6 F4 F2.8 F2 F1.4 F1 Ev8 Ev7 Ev6 Ev5 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 : Grand angle : Téléobjectif0 A : Mode Priorité ouverture Configurer le sélecteur de mode sur A (mode Priorité ouverture) vous permet de définir manuellement l’ouverture de l’objectif. Pour la plus grande valeur d’ouverture de l’objectif, l’ouverture est utilisée avec le filtre à densité neutre. Lorsqu’un filtre à densité neutre est utilisé, le degré de flou de l’arrière-plan reste le même. Le nombre d’arrêts d’ouverture possibles varie en fonction de la position du zoom (2 arrêts à grand angle, 3 arrêts à téléobjectif). Si la sensibilité ISO est réglée sur [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi], l’appareil procède automatiquement au réglage de la sensibilité ISO afin d’obtenir l’exposition optimale. S : Mode Priorité à l’obturation Configurer le sélecteur de mode sur S (mode Priorité à l’obturation) vous permet de définir manuellement la vitesse d’obturation. L’appareil photo procède au réglage de la sensibilité dans la plage ISO 100 à ISO 3200 afin d’obtenir l’exposition optimale, quels que soient les réglages de sensibilité ISO. Pour la plus grande valeur d’ouverture de l’objectif, l’ouverture est utilisée avec le filtre à densité neutre. Lorsqu’un filtre à densité neutre est utilisé, le degré de flou de l’arrière-plan reste le même.1 Si le réglage [Décalage vitesse obt. auto] du menu de prise de vue est réglé sur [Oui], l’appareil procède automatiquement au réglage de la vitesse d’obturation afin d’obtenir la meilleure exposition lorsque celle-ci ne peut pas être obtenue avec la vitesse d’obturation définie manuellement. Le réglage [Décalage vitesse obt. auto] n’apparaît pas si le sélecteur de mode est réglé sur un mode autre que S. Mode M : Exposition manuelle Configurer le sélecteur de mode sur M (mode Exposition manuelle) vous permet de définir manuellement l’ouverture de l’objectif et la vitesse d’obturation séparément. Pour la plus grande valeur d’ouverture de l’objectif, l’ouverture est utilisée avec le filtre à densité neutre. Lorsqu’un filtre à densité neutre est utilisé, le degré de flou de l’arrière-plan reste le même. Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO sera fixée à 100 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle. Si la vitesse d’obturation est définie sur 1 seconde ou plus, la sensibilité ISO maximale possible est ISO400. La vitesse d’obturation maximale possible est de 30 secondes. Mode scène macro zoom Lorsque le sélecteur de mode est placé sur SCENE, la sélection du mode [Macro zoom] optimise automatiquement la position du zoom. Vous pouvez ainsi prendre un sujet de plus grande taille qu’avec la prise de vue macro normale. Le zoom optique ne peut pas être utilisé en mode macro zoom. Pour les méthodes de prise de vue zoom, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ». Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Vous pouvez prendre des vues rapprochées à l’aide du mode macro zoom conformément aux distances suivantes. Environ 1cm (depuis la partie avant de l’objectif) Plage de prise de vue : environ 19×14mm (lorsque le zoom numérique n’est pas utilisé) Plage de prise de vue : environ 4,8×3,6mm (lorsque le zoom numérique 4,0× est utilisé) • Lorsque le paramètre [Qualité image/Taille] est réglé sur 4:3 pour [L], vous pouvez également régler le paramètre [Image zoom numérique] sur [Taille auto], le zoom avec changement de taille automatique est alors activé. (GP. 47) Mode Vue double avec plage dynamique La « plage dynamique » d’un appareil photo numérique représente la gamme de luminosités pouvant être traitée par l’appareil. Lorsque vous sélectionnez le mode scène [Gamme dynamique] et que vous prenez une photo, la scène est reproduite selon une transition plus lisse entre les zones claires et les zones sombres, vous permettant ainsi de prendre une image plus réaliste. Avec le mode Vue double avec plage dynamique, deux photos consécutives sont prises avec des expositions différentes et les zones avec l’exposition appropriée sont combinées. La durée de prise de vue de ce mode est supérieure aux autres modes, veillez donc à ne pas bouger l’appareil lors de la prise de vue. Le symboleJ s’affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course. Deux photos consécutives Combinées et enregistrées Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Même si l’appareil photo est fixé à un trépied, il peut bouger lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur. Pour une stabilité maximale, il est recommandé d’utiliser le retardateur ou un déclencheur distant à câble CA-1 (vendu séparément). Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Cette fonction n’est pas disponible si [Qualité image/Taille] est réglé sur le mode RAW. • Le zoom numérique est désactivé avec cette fonction. • Le flash est réglé sur Flash Non avec cette fonction. • Le mode Vue double avec plage dynamique peut ne pas fonctionner si les conditions de prise de vue sont trop claires ou trop sombres. • La mesure [Multi] est recommandée. • Lorsque vous prenez un sujet se déplaçant rapidement, le sujet peut être déformé sur l’image enregistrée. • Le clignotement des lampes fluorescentes peut apparaître sous forme de bandes horizontales. Une lampe fluorescente peut aussi affecter les couleurs et la luminosité. Effet d’extension de plage dynamique L’option [Extension de plage dynamique] dans le menu Prise de vue propose cinq niveaux d’extension de plage dynamique : [AUTO], [Très faible], [Faible], [Moyenne] ou [Forte]. Plus l’effet d’extension est fort, plus la plage de luminosité pouvant être traitée par l’appareil est étendue. Pour modifier le réglage, sélectionnez le mode scène [Gamme dynamique] et modifiez le réglage [Extension de plage dynamique] dans le menu de prise de vue. Après la sélection d’un réglage autre que [Auto], appuyez sur la touche Fn2 pour afficher les [Options d’extension de plage dynamique] à l’écran. Choisissez la plage de tonalités ayant la priorité pour la plage dynamique étendue parmi [Lumières], [Ombres] et [Non]. Extension de plage dynamique + Prise de vue normale Si [Oui] est sélectionné pour [+ Prise de vue normale] dans le menu Prise de vue, l’appareil enregistre deux copies de chaque photo : une avec une plage dynamique étendue et une autre avec une exposition normale. Les deux copies s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos après la prise de vue, avec la copie originale à droite et la copie avec la plage dynamique étendue à gauche. Pour modifier le réglage, sélectionnez le mode scène [Gamme dynamique] et modifiez le réglage [+ Prise de vue normale] dans le menu de prise de vue. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Les histogrammes des images s’affichent après la prise de vue. Lorsque [Délai de validation LCD] de l’onglet de configuration est réglé sur [Garder], l’écran de confirmation reste affiché pour que vous puissiez vérifier les histogrammes et comparer facilement les images. Cibles multiples AF Lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course, l’appareil photo détermine automatiquement plusieurs positions de mise au point. Lorsque vous appuyez ensuite complètement sur le déclencheur, l’appareil effectue un décalage entre les différentes positions de mise au point en prenant 5 photos consécutives. Les 5 photos prises sont regroupées dans un ensemble et enregistrées dans un même fichier MP. Cette fonction est tout particulièrement utile pour une prise de vue en mode Téléobjectif et en mode Macro. Une icôneVverte s’affiche si l’appareil est capable d’effectuer la mise au point. Si l’appareil est incapable d’effectuer la mise au point, l’icôneV rouge clignote. Les positions de mise au point sélectionnées par l’appareil s’affichent uniquement pendant la lecture. * MP est un format de fichier pour l’enregistrement d’un ensemble de photos. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Le flash ne peut pas être utilisé. • La fonction de correction du bougé de l’appareil ne peut pas être utilisée. Si [Cib. multi AF] est réglé alors que la fonction de correction du bougé de l’appareil est activée,Echange pourF. • Cette fonction n’est pas disponible si [Qualité image/Taille] est réglé sur [RAW]. • Si [Mode Continu] est réglé sur un réglage autre que [Non], vous pouvez sélectionner les réglages Cibles multiples AF mais la fonction ne sera pas utilisée. • La prise de vue à intervalles n’est pas disponible lorsque Cibles multiples AF est défini. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Si cette fonction est activée lorsque vous utilisez le zoom numérique, ce dernier est désactivé et la prise de vue est effectuée selon l’agrandissement maximum du zoom optique (10,7×). • [Balance blancs] fonctionne selon le réglage [Auto] même si celui-ci est réglé sur [Multi-P AUTO]. Cont.M + (lente) Dans ce mode, l’appareil prend des photos tant que le déclencheur reste enfoncé mais seules les 15 dernières photos (ce qui correspond environ aux trois dernières secondes de la prise de vue) sont enregistrées pour créer un seul fichier multi-image (MP). Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- La durée nécessaire pour enregistrer 15 photos peut augmenter si l’éclairage est faible. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2L’appareil photo enregistre les 15 images prises pendant les 3 dernières secondes de prise de vue. 1Lorsque vous relâchez le déclencheur…0 Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • La taille d’image est réglée sur 3648×2736 NORMAL. • La date et le sens de chaque prise de vue de la séquence sont enregistrés séparément.1 Cont.M + (rapide) Dans ce mode, l’appareil prend des photos tant que le déclencheur reste enfoncé mais seules les 26 dernières images (ce qui correspond environ aux 0,9 dernières secondes de la prise de vue) sont enregistrées pour créer un seul fichier multi-image (MP). Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Lorsque vous prenez un sujet se déplaçant rapidement, le sujet peut être déformé sur l’image enregistrée. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2L’appareil photo enregistre les 26 images prises pendant les 0,9 dernières secondes de prise de vue. 1Lorsque vous relâchez le déclencheur… Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • La taille d’image est réglée sur 1728×1296 NORMAL. • La date et le sens de la dernière photo de la séquence sont aussi utilisés pour les photos restantes. Vites. cont (lente)/Vites. cont (rapide) 120 images consécutives sont enregistrées en une seconde (Vites. cont (rapide)) ou en deux secondes (Vites. cont (lente)). Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Lorsque vous prenez un sujet se déplaçant rapidement, le sujet peut être déformé sur l’image enregistrée. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • La taille d’image est réglée sur 640×480 VGA. • La date et le sens de la dernière photo de la séquence sont aussi utilisés pour les photos restantes. Cadrage de la mise au point Le cadrage de la mise au point est l’une des fonctions possibles avec le cadrage automatique. Le cadrage de la mise au point prend automatiquement 5 vues consécutives tout en modifiant progressivement la position de la mise au point. Vous pouvez régler l’intervalle utilisé pour modifier la position de la mise au point. 1 Sélectionnez [Cadrage auto] dans le menu de prise de vue et appuyez sur la touche Fn2. 2 Appuyez sur la touche +/– pour sélectionner [CADR MIS AU PT] et appuyez sur la touche Fn2. 3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner l’intervalle de la position de la mise au point et appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. • Le réglage est enregistré et l’affichage revient au menu de prise de vue. 4 Appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK, ou appuyez sur la touche Fn1 et ensuite sur la touche MENU/OK. • Le symbole s’affiche à l’écran. 5 Enfoncez le déclencheur à mi-course. • L’appareil effectue la mise au point en fonction du réglage [Mise au point]. 6 Enfoncez le déclencheur jusqu’en fin de course. • L’appareil prend 5 photos consécutives en fonction de la position de mise au point à l’étape 5. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Lorsque [Mise au point] est réglé sur [MF], la première photo est prise à la position de mise au point définie sans être mesurée. • [Balance blancs] fonctionne selon le réglage [Auto] même si celui-ci est réglé sur [Multi-P AUTO]. • Les photos sont prises et enregistrées dans l’ordre suivant : Position de mise au point Avant Centre (*) ? Arrière Ordre de prise de vue 2 3 1 4 5 Ordre d’enregistrement 1 2 3 4 5 * Effectuez la mise au point à la position définie pour le réglage [Mise au point] dans le menu de prise de vue. • Le flash est désactivé avec cette fonction. • Si [Mise au point] est réglé sur [Cib. multi AF], vous pouvez modifier les réglages de cadrage de la mise au point mais la fonction ne sera pas utilisée. • Si [Qualité image/Taille] est réglé sur [RAW], vous pouvez modifier le réglage de réduction du bruit mais la fonction n’est pas utilisée. • Si [Mode Continu] est réglé sur un réglage autre que [Non], vous pouvez modifier les réglages de cadrage de la mise au point mais la fonction ne sera pas utilisée. Réglage [Réduction bruit] Cette option sélectionne la réduction de bruit lors de la prise de vue. Choisissez entre [Non], [Auto], [Faible], [Forte] ou [MAX]. La durée nécessaire pour enregistrer les images varie selon l’option sélectionnée. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour prendre des photographies lorsque le mode scène est réglé sur un mode autre que [Portrait], [Sports] ou [Correction biais]. Réglage de la balance des blancs Cet objectif vous permet de définir la balance des blancs sur [Incandescent 1] ou [Incandescent 2]. Utilisez le réglage [Incandescent 1] ou [Incandescent 2] lorsque vous prenez des photos sous une lumière incandescente. Le réglage [Incandescent 2], par rapport à [Incandescent 1], donne une teinte légèrement rougeâtre. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Avec [Incandescent 2], vous pouvez obtenir les mêmes densités de couleur qu’avec le réglage [Incandescent] décrit dans le Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo. Lecture Écran d’informations de l’unité appareil photo L’information [A12], [S10] ou [P10] correspondante à chaque unité appareil photo s’affiche sur l’écran d’informations détaillées et dans le fichier Exif. Réglages Réglages du menu de prise de vue en mode [Macro zoom] Lorsque le paramètre [Macro zoom] est sélectionné, les rubriques du menu de prise de vue qui peuvent être définies et les valeurs par défaut sont les suivantes. Paramètre Réglage par défaut Qualité image/Taille L 4:3 NORMAL Mise au point AF Pré AF Non Mesure exposition Multi Réglages image Standard Mode continu Non Cadrage auto Non Correction exposition flash 0.00 Paramètre Réglage par défaut Niveau de flash manuel 1/2 Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau Réduction bruit Non Réduction bruit ISO > à ISO 401 Correction distorsion Non Retardateur personnalisé 2 img, 5 secondes Horodatage Non Correction de l’exposition 0.0 Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO Sensibilité ISO Auto Correction du bougé Oui1 Réglages du menu de prise de vue en mode [Gamme dynamique] Lorsque le paramètre [Gamme dynamique] est sélectionné, les éléments du menu de prise de vue qui peuvent être définis et les valeurs par défaut sont les suivants. Paramètre Réglage par défaut Qualité image/Taille L 4:3 NORMAL Mise au point AF Multi Dist. mise au pt snap 2,5m Instantané par pression Oui Pré AF Non Mesure exposition Multi Réglages image Standard Réduction bruit Non Réduction bruit ISO > à ISO 401 Correction distorsion Non Retardateur personnalisé 2 img, 5 secondes Horodatage Non Paramètre Réglage par défaut Correction de l’exposition 0.0 Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO Compensation balance blancs A:0, G:0 Sensibilité ISO Auto Correction du bougé Oui Extension de plage dynamique Auto + Prise de vue normale Non Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (menu prise de vue) Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/Taille] du menu de prise de vue. La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/ taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez sélectionner la taille de la vidéo. Photos Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) RAW 16:9* 2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 3648×2048 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 3648×2736 3:2* 2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 3648×2432 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 2736×2736 L (Large) 16:9* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2048 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2736 3:2* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2432 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL 2736×2736 M (Middle) 16:9* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3264×1840 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2448 3:2* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2176 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL 2448×2448 Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG. *2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut et en bas de l’affichage de la photo. *3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo. Vidéos Paramètre Taille vidéo HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (menu prise de vue) Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, la plage de sensibilité utilisée est la suivante. Taille de l’image (pixels) Défaut Minimum Maximum RAW 100 100 200 L 100 100 200 M 100 100 200 5M 100 100 200 3M 100 100 200 1M 100 100 238 VGA 100 100 283 • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la sensibilité utilisée devient équivalente à la sensibilité ISO400. Réglage [Correction du bougé] (menu prise de vue) Si [Correction du bougé] est réglé sur [Oui], les effets de flous dus au mouvement de l’appareil photo sont limités. Lorsque la correction du bougé de l’appareil est activée, le symboleE apparaît à l’écran. [Enr. Mes Réglages] (onglet des options personnalisées) Sous [Enr. Mes Réglages], vous pouvez aussi définir les options de [Zoom par paliers] et [Position du zoom] de l’onglet de configuration. Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ». [Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] (onglet des options personnalisées) • Les options [Zoom par paliers] et [AF/Cib.mult.AF] peuvent être assignées aux touches Fn1/Fn2. • [AF/Snap], [Correction WB], [Zoom par paliers] et [AF/Cib.mult.AF] ne sont pas disponibles en appuyant sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 si le mode scène est réglé sur [Macro zoom]. • Lorsque le mode scène est réglé sur [Gamme dynamique], les fonctions suivantes ne sont pas disponibles même si vous appuyez sur la touche Fn1 ou Fn2 : [JPEGBRAW], [Mode Continu], [Cadrage auto], [Correct. flash.], [Niveau flash], [Zoom par paliers] et [AF/Cib.mult.AF]. [Manette ADJ Réglage] (onglet des options personnalisées) Lorsque le mode scène est réglé sur [Gamme dynamique], les réglages enregistrés sous [Manette ADJ Réglage] sont [Correction de l’exposition] et [Balance blancs]. Les réglages disponibles ne peuvent pas être modifiés. Réglage [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] (onglet des options personnalisées) Si l’option [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] dans l’onglet des options personnalisées est réglée sur [Oui], vous pouvez écarter latéralement le levier ADJ. lorsque la prise de vue permet de modifier la sensibilité ISO. L’appareil est réglé par défaut sur [Non] lors de l’achat. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • La manette ADJ. peut être utilisée pour ajuster la sensibilité lorsque le déclencheur est enfoncé à mi-course en modes Changement de programme et Priorité ouverture (en mode Changement de programme, la sensibilité peut être ajustée, même après avoir relâché le déclencheur, tant que l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation s’affichent). Notez qu’une fois la sensibilité ajustée de cette manière, [Auto] et [Auto-Hi] ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés de nouveau. • En mode de priorité à l’obturation ou d’exposition manuelle, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le levier ADJ. pour modifier la sensibilité ISO. Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (onglet de configuration) La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante. Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Environ 1,0× L Environ 1,8× 3M Environ 1,1× M Environ 2,9× 1M Environ 1,4× 5M Environ 5,7× VGA Réglage [Zoom par paliers] (onglet de configuration) Si l’option [Zoom par paliers] est réglée sur [Oui], il existe huit niveaux de distance focale pour le zoom (équivalents à 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm, 200 mm et 300 mm*). * Équivalents aux distances d’un appareil photo 35 mm.0 Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un boîtier GXR. Pixels réels Environ 10,0 millions Capteur d’image Capteur CMOS 1/2,3" (nombre total de pixels : environ 10,6 millions) Objectif Distance focale De 4,9mm à 52,5mm (format 35 mm équivalent : de 28mm à 300mm) Ouverture (nombre f) f/3,5– f/5,6 Plage mise au point (de l’objectif) Prise de vue normale : environ 30cm à 8 (grand angle) ; environ 150 cm à 8 (téléobjectif) Prise de vue macro : environ 1cm à 8 (grand angle/macro zoom) ; environ 27cm à 8 (téléobjectif) Construction 10 éléments en 7 groupes (4 objectifs asphériques avec 5 surfaces) Zoom 10,7× zoom optique; zoom numérique 4,0× (2,8× pour les vidéos, images haute définition) ; zoom de redimensionnement automatique environ 5,7× (VGA)1 Mode mise au point AF Multi ; AF Spot ; MF : Snap ; 8 ; Cib. multi AF (lumière AF auxiliaire et cadrage de la mise au point disponibles) Vitesse d’obturation Photos 1/2000–30s (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en fonction du mode prise de vue et flash) Vidéos 1/30–1/2000s Contrôle exposition Mesure Mesure multiple (256 segments), mesure centrale pondérée, mesure spot (mesure TTL avec verrouillage AE) Mode Programme AE, priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle, priorité à l’obturation AE, fonction de décalage de la cible Correction de l’exposition Manuelle (+4,0 à –4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV), cadrage automatique (–2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV) Portée du lien d’exposition (mode prise de vue automatique, mesure centrale pondérée de la lumière) Arrêt à grand angle : 3,2 EV à 16,2 EV ; arrêt à téléobjectifs : 4,6 EV à 18,4 EV (portée du lien pour une sensibilité ISO automatique convertie en fonction de la valeur EV pour ISO100) • Lors de la prise de vue avec des valeurs proches de 6,0 EV ou inférieures, pour chaque réduction de la portée du lien d’exposition de 1,0 EV, l’appareil photo modifie le réglage de 0,25 EV vers une luminosité plus faible. Le changement maximum possible est de 1,0 EV. Sensibilité ISO (sensibilité sortie standard) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Incandescente1, Incandescente2, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ; cadrage auto balance des blancs Flash Portée (flash intégré) Environ 0,2m - 4,0m (grand angle), Environ 0,27m - 2,5m (téléobjectif) Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture, priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports, paysage, nuit, correction biais, double prise de vue à gamme dynamique, macro zoom), « Mes Réglages » Mode continu Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Continu (Taille d’image : RAW) Réduction du bruit désactivée : 5 photos, Réduction du bruit activée (Faible, Forte ou MAX) : 4 photos Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Cont.M + (un ensemble) Len (3648×2736) : 15 photos (5 images/s), Rap (1728×1296) : 26 photos (30 images/s) Mode continu Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Vites. Cont (un ensemble) Len (640×480) : 120 photos (60 images/s), Rap (640×480) : 120 photos (120 images/s) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Taille de l’image (pixels) Photos 3648×2048, 3648×2736, 3648×2432, 2736×2736, 3264×1840, 3264×2448, 3264×2176, 2448×2448, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Taille fichier (approximative) RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 13.053Ko/image, FINE : 14.289Ko/image, VGA : 11.477 Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 17.332Ko/image, FINE : 18.984Ko/image, VGA : 15.226 Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 15.440Ko/image, FINE : 16.909Ko/image, VGA : 13.568 Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 13.053Ko/image, FINE : 14.292Ko/image, VGA : 11.474 Ko/image Taille fichier (approximative) L 16:9 NORMAL : 1 630Ko/image, FINE : 2 779Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 2 169Ko/image, FINE : 3 705Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 1 931Ko/image, FINE : 3 295Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 633Ko/image, FINE : 2 785Ko/image M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 330Ko/image, FINE : 2 254Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 2 990Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 1 568Ko/image, FINE : 2 660Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 327Ko/image, FINE : 2 249Ko/image 5M 4:3 FINE : 2 288Ko/image 3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image 1M 4:3 FINE : 813Ko/image VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image Longévité batterie DB-90 : environ 440 prises de vue*3 (basée sur norme CIPA) Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 68,7mm×57,9mm×44mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA) Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 113,9mm×70,2mm×49,8mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA) Poids (approximatif) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 160g (capuchon de l’objectif et capuchon du connecteur non inclus) Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 367g (capuchon de l’objectif, batterie et carte mémoire SD inclus) Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C Humidité fonctionnement 85% ou moins Température stockage –20°C à 60°C *1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image. *2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de 640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Pour référence uniquement : le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée. Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE. Photos Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go RAW* FINE 3648×2048 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217 3648×2736 4 50 103 203 415 831 1688 3648×2432 5 57 116 228 466 934 1874 2736×2736 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217 L FINE 3648×2048 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546 3648×2736 22 242 491 965 1973 3953 7930 3648×2432 24 272 553 1087 2222 4452 8930 2736×2736 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546 M FINE 3264×1840 36 397 808 1588 3245 6502 13043 3264×2448 27 300 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 3264×2176 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 2448×2448 36 400 808 1588 3245 6502 13043 Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go 5M FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG. Mode continu Mode continu Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go Cont.M + (lente) 3648×2736 38 414 842 1653 3379 6769 13579 Cont.M + (rapide) 1728×1296 131 1438 2926 5746 11745 23530 47202 Vites. Cont 640×480 692 7553 15359 30159 61643 123489 247716 Vidéos Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go 1280×720 30 images/seconde 16 Sec. 3 min. 3 Sec. 6 min. 14 Sec. 12 min. 14 Sec. 25 min. 1 Sec. 50 min. 7 Sec. 100 min. 33 Sec. 640×480 30 images/seconde 49 Sec. 8 min. 55 Sec. 18 min. 8 Sec. 35 min. 38 Sec. 72 min. 50 Sec. 145 min. 54 Sec. 292 min. 41 Sec. 320×240 30 images/seconde 1 min. 59 Sec. 21 min. 39 Sec. 44 min. 2 Sec. 86 min. 28 Sec. 176 min. 44 Sec. 354 min. 3 Sec. 710 min. 13 Sec. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- La taille d’enregistrement sans interruption maximale pour une vidéo est de 4 Go. La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 12 minutes environ pour une taille de 1280 × 720, de 37 minutes environ pour une taille de 640 × 480 et de 90 minutes environ pour une taille de 320 × 240. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Lorsque la taille est définie sur 1280 × 720, l’utilisation de cartes mémoire SD/SDHC de classe 6 est recommandée.0 Annexes Accessoires en option L’objectif RICOH peut être utilisé avec les éléments suivants (vendus séparément). Capuchon d’objectif (LC-2) Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Les objectifs de conversion, pare-soleil et autres adaptateurs vendus séparément ne peuvent pas être fixés à cet objectif. • Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation fournie avec le produit. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).1 Montage et démontage de la bague d’objectif--------------------------------- Enlevez la bague d’objectif lors de l’utilisation de la bague d’objectif en option (LC-2). Démontage de la bague d’objectif Faites tourner la bague d’objectif dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre avec l’appareil photo hors tension, puis retirez la bague de l’unité appareil photo. Montage de la bague d’objectif Une fois l’appareil hors tension, alignez le repère sur la bague d’objectif (2) avec le repère de l’unité appareil photo (1) et tournez la bague d’objectif dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre jusqu’à ce qu’un déclic soit émis. 2 1 Précautions d’emploi • La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. • Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. • Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques. • Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif. • Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même température que l’environnement. • Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement ou un choc électrique. • Gardez le connecteur propre. Conseil : pour éviter la condensation--------------------------------------------- La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif. Entretien et stockage de l’équipement Entretien de l’équipement • Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce, ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. • Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition. • Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation Ricoh. • Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas. Stockage Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant). Garantie et réparation 1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au centre de réparation Ricoh. 2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de : 1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ; 2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ; 3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ; 4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement. 5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles. 3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé. 4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte. 5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté. * Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent vos droits légaux. * L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de garantie fournie avec l’équipement. 8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement) seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la production de l’équipement. 9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de son état originel peut être impossible. Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct. • Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution. • Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible. • Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer l’appareil au centre de réparation.*L452 3972A* En cas de problème Bureaux Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2010 juillet FR F-FR Imprimé en Chine RICOH-OBJEKTIV P10 28-300mm F3.5-5.6 VC* Bedienungsanleitung Die Seriennummer befindet sich auf der Unterseite des Objektivs. * VC weist darauf hin, dass diese Einheit mit der Vibrationskorrekturtechnologie zur Bildstabilisierung versehen ist. Packungsinhalt Vergewissern Sie sich vor Gebrauch Ihres Ricoh-Objektivs, dass die Packung die unten aufgeführten Teile enthält. Kameraeinheit Die Seriennummer befindetsich auf der Unterseite. Objektivdeckel Lst bei Lieferung an der Kameraeinheit befestigt. ?Bedienungsanleitung (diese Anleitung) ? Garantie Anschlussabdeckung Lst bei Lieferung an der Kameraeinheit befestigt. Beutel Einführung Das Objektiv ist für den Gebrauch auf ein kompatibles Kameragehäuse zu setzen. Hinweise zu den Aufnahme- und Wiedergabefunktionen und zu Änderungen von Einstellungen finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung des Kameragehäuses. Lesen Sie bitte auch die wichtigen Vorsichtshinweise zum Gebrauch. In dieser Bedienungsanleitung wird dieses Objektiv als die„Kameraeinheit“ bezeichnet, und es werden Funktionen und Verfahren erläutert, die nur bei Gebrauch dieser Kameraeinheit in Verbindung mit dem Kameragehäuse zur Verfügung stehen. Weitere Hinweise finden Sie im GXR-Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch. Um die Funktionen dieses Objektivs optimal nutzen zu können, lesen Sie diese Bedienungsanleitung vor dem Gebrauch aufmerksam durch. Bewahren Sie sie dann jederzeit griffbereit auf. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Sicherheitsmaßnahmen Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitsmaßnahmen sorgfältig durch, um einen sicheren Gebrauch zu gewährleisten. Probeaufnahmen Machen Sie Probeaufnahmen, bevor Sie bei wichtigen Anlässen fotografieren, um sicherzugehen, dass die Kamera ordnungsgemäß funktioniert. Copyright Die Wiedergabe oder Veränderung von urheberrechtlich geschützten Dokumenten, Zeitschriften und anderem Material ohne die Zustimmung des Urheberrechtsinhabers ist ausschließlich für den privaten, Heim- oder ähnlichen Gebrauch zugelassen. Haftungsausschluss Ricoh Co., Ltd. übernimmt keine Haftung für Fehler bei der Aufnahme oder Wiedergabe von Bildern aufgrund einer Fehlfunktion des Produkts. Garantie Die mitgelieferte Garantie ist nur im jeweiligen Kaufland gültig. Der Hersteller übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Wartung des Produkts in anderen Ländern oder für die Übernahme von hierdurch entstandenen Kosten. Funkstörung Der Betrieb dieses Produkts in der Nähe von anderen elektronischen Geräten kann sowohl die Kamera also auch das andere Gerät nachteilig beeinflussen. Störungen sind besonders wahrscheinlich, wenn die Kamera in der Nähe eines Radios oder Fernsehers verwendet wird. Dies kann behoben werden, indem Sie die Kamera so weit wie möglich vom anderen Gerät entfernen, die Radio- oder Fernsehantenne anders ausrichten oder das Radio oder den Fernseher an einer anderen Steckdose anschließen. © 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Diese Herausgabe darf nicht, vollständig oder teilweise, ohne ausdrückliche schriftliche Genehmigung von Ricoh vervielfältigt werden. Ricoh behält sich das Recht vor, den Inhalt dieses Dokuments jederzeit und ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern. Es wurde höchste Sorgfalt auf die Genauigkeit der Informationen in diesem Dokument gelegt. Sollten Sie dennoch Fehler oder Auslassungen feststellen, wären wir Ihnen sehr dankbar, wenn Sie uns unter der Adresse auf der Rückseite dieses Buchs benachrichtigen würden. Sicherheitsmaßnahmen Warnsymbole Verschiedene Symbole werden in dieser Bedienungsanleitung und auf dem Produkt verwendet, die Sie auf die Gefahr von Verletzungen des Benutzers und anderer Personen und die Gefahr von Sachbeschädigung hinweisen sollen. Die Symbole und ihre Bedeutung werden im Folgenden beschrieben. Gefahr Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Punkte, die bei Missachtung oder falscher Handhabung unmittelbar zu schweren Verletzungen oder Tod führen können. Warnung Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Punkte, die bei Missachtung oder falscher Handhabung zu schweren Verletzungen oder Tod führen können. Wichtig Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Punkte, die bei Missachtung oder falscher Handhabung zu Verletzungen oder Sachbeschädigung führen können. Warnhinweise Das Symbol kennzeichnet Aktionen, die unbedingt ausgeführt werden müssen. Das Symbol kennzeichnet verbotene Aktionen. Das Symbol kann mit anderen Symbolen kombiniert werden, um darauf hinzuweisen, dass bestimmte Handlungen verboten sind. Beispiele = Nicht berühren = Nicht zerlegen Beachten Sie die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßregeln, um einen sicheren Gebrauch dieses Gerätes zu gewährleisten. Gefahr Versuchen Sie nicht, das Gerät selbst zu zerlegen, zu reparieren oder zu verändern. Die Hochspannungs-Schaltkreise im Inneren des Gerätes können einen elektrischen Schlag verursachen. Warnung Bewahren Sie das Gerät außer Reichweite von Kindern auf. Berühren Sie keine Innenteile des Gerätes, falls sie durch Fallenlassen oder Beschädigung freigelegt werden. Die Hochspannungs-Schaltkreise im Inneren des Gerätes können einen elektrischen Schlag verursachen. Nehmen Sie den Akku unverzüglich heraus, und lassen Sie dabei Vorsicht walten, um elektrische Schläge oder Verbrennungen zu vermeiden. Bringen Sie das Gerät im Falle einer Beschädigung zu Ihrem Fachhändler oder zur nächsten Kundendienststelle. Benutzen Sie das Gerät nicht in einer feuchten Umgebung, weil dies zu einem Brand oder elektrischen Schlag führen könnte. Benutzen Sie das Gerät nicht in der Nähe von brennbaren Gasen, Benzin, Benzol, Verdünner oder ähnlichen Substanzen, weil sonst die Gefahr von Explosionen, Brand oder Verbrennungen besteht. • Benutzen Sie das Gerät nicht an Orten, wo der Gebrauch eingeschränkt oder verboten ist, weil dies zu Katastrophen oder Unfällen führen kann. Wichtig Lassen Sie die Kameraeinheit nicht nass werden. Bedienen Sie sie auch nicht mit nassen Händen. In beiden Fällen besteht Stromschlaggefahr. Sicherheitswarnungen für Sonderzubehör Bevor Sie ein optionales Zubehör verwenden, lesen Sie sich die mitgelieferte Dokumentation durch.10 Packungsinhalt ..................................................................................................... 2 Einführung............................................................................................................. 3 Sicherheitsmaßnahmen...................................................................................... 6 Teile des Objektivs..............................................................................................13 Aufrüsten des Produkts.....................................................................................14 Aktualisierung der Kamera-Firmware .........................................................................14 Auf/Ab-Einstellrad..............................................................................................17 Aufnahme ............................................................................................................18 Modus P: Programmschaltmodus................................................................................18 A: Blendenprioritätsmodus.............................................................................................20 S: Verschlussprioritätsmodus.........................................................................................20 Modus M: Manuelle Belichtung.....................................................................................21 Das Motivprogramm Zoom-Makro..............................................................................22 Doppelaufnahmemodus mit dynamischem Bereich ............................................23 Inhaltsverzeichnis11 Multi-Messfeld-AF ..............................................................................................................27 M-Serie Plus (Langs)...........................................................................................................29 M-Serie Plus (Schn.)............................................................................................................31 Geschw.-Serie (Langs)/Geschw.-Serie (Schn.)...........................................................32 Fokus-Reihe ..........................................................................................................................33 Einstellung [Rauschreduzierung]..................................................................................36 Weißabgleichseinstellung...............................................................................................37 Wiedergabe .........................................................................................................38 Kameraeinheit-Informationsanzeige...........................................................................38 Einstellungen ......................................................................................................39 Aufnahmemenüeinstellungen im [Zoom-Makro]-Modus...................................39 Einstellung des Aufnahme-Menüs im Modus [Dynamikbereich].....................41 [Bildqualität/Größe]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü).............................................42 [Einst. ISO-Empfindlichkeit]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü) ..............................45 [Verwacklungskorrektur]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü)...................................46 [Meine Einst. Reg.] (Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen)..............461 [Fn1-Taste einst.]/[Fn2-Taste einst.] (Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen).................................................................................................................47 [ADJ-Schalter Einstellung] (Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen)...............................................47 [ADJ. Direkte ISO-Steuerung]-Einstellung (Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen).................................................................................................................48 [Digitalzoombild]-Einstellung (Registerkarte Setup).............................................49 [Stufenzoom]-Einstellung (Registerkarte Setup) ....................................................49 Technische Daten ...............................................................................................50 Kapazität Interner Speicher/Speicherkarte...............................................................56 Anhang.................................................................................................................60 Separates Zubehör.............................................................................................................60 Vorsichtsmaßnahmen.......................................................................................................62 Wartung und Lagerung der Ausrüstung....................................................................63 Garantie und Kundendienst ...........................................................................................641 Teile des Objektivs 1 3 2 1 Anschluss 2 Ring 3 Objektiv1 Aufrüsten des Produkts Aktualisierung der Kamera-Firmware Beim ersten Anschluss der Kameraeinheit an das Kameragehäuse wird automatisch die Aktualisierungsfunktion gestartet, wenn die Firmware des Kameragehäuses veraltet ist. Aktualisieren Sie in diesem Fall die Firmware des Kameragehäuses auf folgende Weise. Ist die Firmware-Version auf dem aktuellen Stand, wird die Aktualisierungsfunktion nicht gestartet und Sie können das Objektiv sofort verwenden. 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Kamera abgeschaltet ist, und schließen Sie die Kameraeinheit am Kameragehäuse an. • Weitere Hinweise zum Anschluss der Kameraeinheit finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch des Kameragehäuses.1 2 Schalten Sie die Kamera ein. • Es wird eine Bestätigungsmeldung zur Aktualisierung der Firmware angezeigt. 3 Drücken Sie die Fn1/Fn2-Tasten, um [Ja] zu wählen. Drücken Sie anschließend die MENU/OK-Taste. • Daraufhin beginnt der Aktualisierungsvorgang der Firmware, und die folgenden Meldungen werden auf der Bildanzeige angezeigt: [Überschreibungsdatei wird geprüft] [Überschreibungsprogramm] Die Kamera schaltet sich automatisch aus und dann wieder an. Nach dem Kamera-Neustart wird die Firmware-Version auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt und das Update wird damit abgeschlossen.1 Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Wählen Sie zur Abfrage der Firmware-Version [Firmware-Version] im Setup-Menü. Halten Sie alternativ die Taste6(Wiedergabe) bei ausgeschalteter Kamera für mehr als eine Sekunde gedrückt, während Sie gleichzeitig die Taste – gedrückt halten. Daraufhin wird die FirmwareVersion ca. 20 Sekunden lang auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. • Aktuelle Informationen zu Firmware-Updates finden Sie auf der RicohWebsite (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc). Dort können Sie die neuesten Firmware-Updates herunterladen, um Ihre Ausrüstung zu aktualisieren.1 Auf/Ab-Einstellrad Zusätzliche Funktion für das Aufwärts/Abwärts-Einstellrad Bei der Auswahl des Blitz-Modus können Sie das Aufwärts/AbwärtsEinstellrad verwenden. Bei der Auswahl der Selbstauslöser-Einstellungen können Sie ebenfalls das Aufwärts/Abwärts-Einstellrad verwenden.1 Aufnahme Modus P: Programmschaltmodus Wenn Sie den Moduswahlschalter auf P (Programmschaltmodus) stellen, können Sie zwischen verschiedenen Kombinationen aus Blende und Verschlusszeit wählen. Ist die ISO-Empfindlichkeit auf [Auto] oder [Auto hoch] eingestellt, passt die Kamera automatisch die ISO-Empfindlichkeit an, um eine optimale Belichtung zu erzielen. Im Diagramm auf der folgenden Seite werden Schätzungen des Versatzbereichs für verschiedene Kombinationen aus Blendenwerten und Verschlusszeiten angezeigt. Der Versatzbereich hängt vom Belichtungswert (EV) ab. In diesen Beispielen ist der Blitzmodus auf [Blitz aus] und die ISOEmpfindlichkeit auf [ISO100] eingestellt. Für den größten Blendenwert wird diese zusammen mit dem ND-Filter verwendet. In diesem Fall ändert sich das Bokeh des Hintergrunds nicht. Selbst bei Gebrauch eines ND-Filters wird der Grad des Bokehs durch den Blendenwert (F-Wert) ausgedrückt.1 F16 F11 F15.4 F7.0 F5.6 F3.5 F8 F5.6 F4 F2.8 F2 F1.4 F1 Ev8 Ev7 Ev6 Ev5 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 : Weitwinkel : Tele0 A: Blendenprioritätsmodus Wenn Sie den Moduswahlschalter auf A (Blendenprioritätsmodus) stellen, können Sie die Blende manuell einstellen. Für den größten Blendenwert wird diese zusammen mit dem ND-Filter verwendet. Bei Gebrauch eines ND-Filters ändert sich das Bokeh des Hintergrunds nicht. Die Anzahl der verfügbaren Blendenstufen ist von der Position des Zoom abhängig (2 Stufen am Weitwinkel-Ende, 3 Stufen am Tele-Ende). Ist die ISO-Empfindlichkeit auf [Auto] oder [Auto hoch] eingestellt, passt die Kamera automatisch die ISO-Empfindlichkeit an, um eine optimale Belichtung zu erzielen. S: Verschlussprioritätsmodus Wenn Sie den Moduswahlschalter auf S (Verschlussprioritätsmodus) stellen, können Sie die Verschlusszeit manuell einstellen. Unabhängig von der gewählten ISO-Empfindlichkeit wählt die Kamera für eine optimale Belichtung eine ISO-Empfindlichkeit zwischen 100 und 3200. Für den größten Blendenwert wird diese zusammen mit dem ND-Filter verwendet. Bei Gebrauch eines ND-Filters ändert sich das Bokeh des Hintergrunds nicht. Wenn im Aufnahme-Menü die Einstellung [Verschlusszeit-Versatz] auf [Ein] eingestellt ist, passt die Kamera automatisch die Verschlusszeit an, um eine1 optimale Belichtung zu erzielen, wenn diese nicht anhand der manuell eingestellten Verschlusszeit erreicht werden kann. Die Einstellung [Verschlusszeit-Versatz] wird nur angezeigt, wenn der Moduswahlschalter auf S eingestellt ist. Modus M: Manuelle Belichtung Wenn Sie den Moduswahlschalter auf M (Manueller Belichtungsmodus) stellen, können Sie die Blende und die Verschlusszeit einzeln einstellen. Für den größten Blendenwert wird diese zusammen mit dem ND-Filter verwendet. Bei Gebrauch eines ND-Filters ändert sich das Bokeh des Hintergrunds nicht. Wenn [Auto] oder [Auto hoch] als Einstellung für die ISO-Empfindlichkeit gewählt wurde und sich die Kamera im manuellen Belichtungsmodus befindet, wird der ISO-Wert auf 100 festgesetzt. Bei einer Belichtungszeit von einer Sekunde oder länger ist die maximal verfügbare ISO-Empfindlichkeit ISO400. Die längste zur Auswahl stehende Belichtungszeit ist 30 Sekunden. Das Motivprogramm Zoom-Makro Wenn der Moduswahlschalter auf SCENE gestellt wurde, wird durch Auswahl des [Zoom-Makro]-Modus automatisch die Zoomposition optimiert. Dies ermöglicht, das Motiv größer als bei der normalen Makroaufnahme aufzunehmen. Im Zoom-Makro-Modus kann das optische Zoom nicht verwendet werden. Entnehmen Sie weitere Informationen zu den verschiedenen Zoommethoden dem„Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch“. Vorsicht---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Sie können Nahaufnahmen mittels der Zoom-Makro-Funktion von den folgenden Entfernungen aus aufnehmen: Ca. 1cm (von der Vorderkante des Objektivs) Aufnahmebereich: Ca. 19×14mm (wenn das Digitalzoom nicht verwendet wird) Aufnahmebereich: Ca. 4,8×3,6mm (wenn das 4,0× Digitalzoom verwendet wird) • Wenn die Option [Bildqualität/Größe] auf 4:3 für [L] eingestellt wurde, kann für [Digitalzoombild] die Option [Autoskalieren] ausgewählt und damit das Digitalzoom mit automatischer Skalierung aktiviert werden. (GS. 47) Doppelaufnahmemodus mit dynamischem Bereich Der„dynamische Bereich“ einer Digitalkamera ist der Helligkeitsbereich, der von der Kamera verarbeitet werden kann. Wenn Sie das Motivprogramm [Dynamikbereich] wählen und dann die Aufnahme erstellen, wird die Aufnahme mit einem fließenderen Übergang von den hellen zu den dunklen Bereichen wiedergegeben, wodurch Sie ein natürlicheres Bild erhalten. Bei der Doppelaufnahme mit dynamischem Bereich werden zwei Bilder nacheinander mit unterschiedlicher Belichtung aufgenommen. Anschließend werden die Bereiche mit den passenden Belichtungen miteinander kombiniert. Da bei diesem Modus eine längere Aufnahmezeit als bei anderen Modi verwendet wird, sollten Sie beim Aufnehmen von Bildern Verwacklungen vermeiden. Das SymbolJwird angezeigt, während Sie den Auslöser halb nach unten drücken. Zwei nacheinander aufgenommene Bilder Kombiniert und gespeichert Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Selbst wenn die Kamera auf einem Stativ befestigt ist, kann sie sich beim Drücken des Auslösers bewegen. Um eine maximale Stabilität zu gewährleisten, empfiehlt sich die Verwendung des Selbstauslösers oder des Kabel-Fernauslösers (CA-1) (separat erhältlich). Wichtig ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Die Funktion ist nicht verfügbar, wenn [Bildqualität/Größe] auf den RAWModus gestellt ist. • Bei Verwendung dieser Funktion ist der Digital-Zoom abgeschaltet. • Bei Verwendung dieser Funktion ist der Blitz auf [Blitz aus] eingestellt. • Die Doppelaufnahme mit dynamischem Bereich ist evtl. nicht wirksam, wenn die Aufnahmeumgebung zu hell oder zu dunkel ist. • [Multi]-Messung wird empfohlen. • Wenn Sie ein sich schnell bewegendes Motiv fotografieren, kann das Motiv auf dem aufgenommenen Bild verzerrt erscheinen. • Flimmern von Neonlicht kann als horizontale Streifen erscheinen. Neonlicht kann außerdem Farben und Helligkeit beeinträchtigen. Dynamisch. Bereich erweitern Von der Option [Dynamisch. Bereich erweitern] im Aufnahme-Menü werden fünf Stufen zum Erweitern des dynamischen Bereichs angeboten: [Auto], [Sehr schwach], [Schwach], [Mittel] und [Stark]. Je höher der Erweiterungseffekt, desto größer ist die Auswahl an Helligkeitsstufen, die mit der Kamera bearbeitet werden können. Um die Einstellung zu ändern, wählen Sie im Aufnahme-Menü das Motivprogramm [Dynamikbereich] und ändern Sie die Einstellung [Dynamisch. Bereich erweitern]. Wählen Sie eine beliebige Einstellung (außer [Auto]), und drücken Sie dann die Taste Fn2, um die [Optionen für Dynamisch. Bereich erweitern] anzuzeigen. Wählen Sie unter [Lichter], [Schatten] und [Aus] den Tonwert, der für den erweiterten dynamischen Bereich bevorzugt wird. Dynamisch. Bereich erweitern Plus Normalaufnahme Wenn im Aufnahme-Menü [Ein] für [Plus Normalaufnahme] ausgewählt ist, nimmt die Kamera zwei Kopien von jedem Foto auf: eine mit einem erweiterten dynamischen Bereich und die andere mit normaler Belichtung. Die beiden Kopien werden nach der Aufnahme auf der Bildanzeige angezeigt. Dabei erscheint die unveränderte Kopie rechts und die Kopie mit einem erweiterten dynamischen Bereich links. Um die Einstellung zu ändern, wählen Sie im Aufnahme-Menü das Motivprogramm [Dynamikbereich] und ändern Sie die Einstellung [Plus Normalaufnahme]. Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Nach der Aufnahme werden Histogramme der Bilder angezeigt. Wenn die Option [LCD-Bestätigung] in der Registerkarte Setup auf [Halten] eingestellt ist, bleibt der Bildschirm zur Bestätigung angezeigt, so dass Sie die Histogramme prüfen und die Bilder bequem vergleichen können. Multi-Messfeld-AF Wenn Sie den Auslöser halb nach unten drücken, bestimmt die Kamera automatisch mehrere Fokuspositionen. Wenn Sie den Auslöser dann ganz nach unten drücken, wechselt die Kamera zwischen den verschiedenen Fokuspositionen und nimmt fünf aufeinanderfolgende Bilder auf. Die fünf Standbilder werden dabei als Bildgruppe zusammengefasst und als MP-Datei gespeichert. Diese Funktion ist insbesondere nützlich für Teleaufnahmen und für Aufnahmen mit dem Makromodus. Das SymbolVerscheint in grün, wenn die Kamera scharfstellen kann. Wenn die Kamera nicht scharfstellen kann, blinkt das SymbolVin rot. Die von der Kamera gewählten Fokuspositionen werden nur während der Wiedergabe angezeigt. * MP ist ein Dateiformat zur Aufnahme einer Reihe von Standbildern. Wichtig ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Der Blitz kann nicht verwendet werden. • Die Verwacklungskorrekturfunktion kann nicht verwendet werden. Wenn [Mt-Messfeld AF] bei eingeschalteter Verwacklungskorrekturfunktion eingestellt wird, wechseltEaufF. • Diese Funktion ist nicht verfügbar, wenn [Bildqualität/Größe] auf [RAW] eingestellt ist. • Wurde der [Serien-Modus] auf eine beliebige Einstellung außer [Aus] eingestellt, können Sie die Multi-Messfeld-AF-Einstellungen auswählen; die Funktion wird allerdings nicht verwendet. • Bei der Verwendung der Option Multi-Messfeld-AF steht die Intervallaufnahme nicht zur Auswahl. Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Wenn diese Funktion bei Verwendung des Digital-Zooms eingeschaltet wird, wird das Digital-Zoom deaktiviert und die Aufnahme bei maximaler Vergrößerung des optischen Zooms (10,7-fach) durchgeführt. • Für den [Weißabgleich] gilt die Einstellung [Auto] auch dann, wenn [MltWA AUTO] gewählt wurde. M-Serie Plus (Langs) In diesem Modus nimmt die Kamera auf, während der Auslöser gedrückt wird, aber nur die letzten 15 Bilder (etwa die letzten drei Sekunden der Aufnahme) werden gespeichert und zu einer einzelnen Multibild (MP)- Datei zusammengestellt. Wichtig ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Die zum Speichern von 15 Bildern benötigte Zeit erhöht sich möglicherweise bei schlechter Beleuchtung. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2Speichert die Kamera die in den letzten 3 s aufgenommenen 15 Bilder. 1Wenn Sie den Finger vom Auslöser nehmen, …0 Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Die Bildgröße steht fest auf 3648×2736 NORMAL. • Datum und Ausrichtung jedes Bildes in der Folge werden separat gespeichert.1 M-Serie Plus (Schn.) In diesem Modus nimmt die Kamera auf, während der Auslöser gedrückt wird, aber nur die letzten 26 Bilder (etwa die letzten 0,9 Sekunden der Aufnahme) werden gespeichert und zu einer einzelnen Multibild (MP)- Datei zusammengestellt. Wichtig ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Wenn Sie ein sich schnell bewegendes Motiv fotografieren, kann das Motiv auf dem aufgenommenen Bild verzerrt erscheinen. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2Speichert die Kamera die in den letzten 26 s aufgenommenen 0,9 Bilder. 1Wenn Sie den Finger vom Auslöser nehmen, … Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Die Bildgröße steht fest auf 1728×1296 NORMAL. • Datum und Ausrichtung des letzten Bildes in der Folge werden auch für die restlichen Bilder verwendet. Geschw.-Serie (Langs)/Geschw.-Serie (Schn.) In einer Sekunde (Geschw.-Serie (Schn.)) oder zwei Sekunden (Geschw.- Serie (Langs)) werden 120 Bilder in Folge gespeichert. Wichtig ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Wenn Sie ein sich schnell bewegendes Motiv fotografieren, kann das Motiv auf dem aufgenommenen Bild verzerrt erscheinen. Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Die Bildgröße steht fest auf 640×480 VGA. • Datum und Ausrichtung des letzten Bildes in der Folge werden auch für die restlichen Bilder verwendet. Fokus-Reihe Die Funktion„Fokus-Reihe“ ist bei der Verwendung der Funktion „Automatische Belichtungsreihe“ verfügbar. Bei der Funktion„FokusReihe“ werden automatisch 5 aufeinanderfolgende Aufnahmen gemacht, während gleichzeitig die Position des Fokus allmählich geändert wird. Das Intervall zwischen den einzelnen Fokuspositionsänderungen ist einstellbar. 1 Wählen Sie im Aufnahme-Menü [Auto Belichtungs-Reihe], und drücken Sie die Taste Fn2. 2 Drücken Sie die Taste +/–, um [FOKUS-REIHE] zu wählen, und drücken Sie die Taste Fn2. 3 Drücken Sie die Tasten Fn1/Fn2, um die Zeitspanne zwischen den Fokuspositionsänderungen auszuwählen, und drücken Sie anschließend die MENU/OK-Taste. • Die Einstellung wird gespeichert und der Bildschirm kehrt wieder zum Aufnahme-Menü zurück. 4 Drücken Sie die MENU/OK-Taste bzw. drücken Sie die Taste Fn1 und dann die MENU/OK-Taste. • Das Symbol wird auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. 5 Drücken Sie den Auslöser halb nach unten. • Die Kamera stellt anhand der Einstellung für den [Fokus] scharf. 6 Drücken Sie den Auslöser ganz nach unten. • Die Kamera nimmt anhand der Fokusposition in Schritt 5 fünf aufeinanderfolgende Bilder auf. Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Wenn [Fokus] auf [MF] eingestellt ist, wird das erste Bild ohne Messung mit der eingestellten Fokusposition aufgenommen. • Für den [Weißabgleich] gilt die Einstellung [Auto] auch dann, wenn [MltWA AUTO] gewählt wurde. • Fotos werden in der folgenden Reihenfolge aufgenommen und gespeichert: Fokusposition Vorne Mitte (*) ? Hinten Aufnahmereihenfolge 2 3 1 4 5 Speicherreihenfolge 1 2 3 4 5 * Fixieren Sie den Fokus an der Position, die im Aufnahme-Menü in der Einstellung [Fokus] eingestellt wurde. • Bei Verwendung dieser Funktion ist der Blitz deaktiviert. • Wenn der [Fokus] auf [Mt-Messfeld AF] eingestellt ist, können Sie die Einstellung der Fokus-Reihe ändern. Die Funktion wird allerdings nicht verwendet. • Wenn [Bildqualität/Größe] auf [RAW] eingestellt ist, kann die Rauschreduzierungsfunktion angepasst werden; die Funktion wird jedoch nicht verwendet. • Wurde der [Serien-Modus] auf eine beliebige Einstellung außer [Aus] eingestellt, können Sie die Rauschreduzierungseinstellungen ändern. Die Funktion wird allerdings nicht verwendet. Einstellung [Rauschreduzierung] Aufnahme von Bildern unter Einsatz der Rauschreduzierung. Wählen Sie unter [Aus], [Auto], [Schwach], [Stark] und [MAX]. Die Aufnahmezeit der Bilder ist je nach gewählter Option unterschiedlich. Diese Funktion kann nicht für die Aufnahme von Fotos verwendet werden, wenn das Motivprogramm [Porträt], [Sport] oder [Schräg-Korrektur] eingestellt ist. Weißabgleichseinstellung Mit diesem Objektiv können Sie den Weißabgleich auf [Glühlampe1] oder [Glühlampe2] einstellen. Verwenden Sie die Einstellung [Glühlampe1] oder [Glühlampe2], wenn Sie unter Glühlampenlicht Fotos aufnehmen. Mit der Einstellung [Glühlampe2] erhalten die Fotos im Vergleich zur Einstellung [Glühlampe1] ein leichten Rotton. Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Mit der Einstellung [Glühlampe2] können Sie mit den gleichen Farbtönen Aufnahmen machen, wie mit der im Benutzerhandbuch des Kameragehäuses beschriebenen Einstellung [Glühlampe]. Wiedergabe Kameraeinheit-Informationsanzeige Die Informationen [A12], [S10] oder [P10] für jede Kameraeinheit erscheinen in der detaillierten Informationsanzeige und der Exif-Datei. Einstellungen Aufnahmemenüeinstellungen im [Zoom-Makro]-Modus Wurde der [Zoom-Makro]-Modus ausgewählt, können die folgenden Einstellpunkte des Aufnahmemenüs betätigt werden. Die Standardwerte sind ebenfalls aufgelistet: Option Standardeinstellung Bildqualität/Größe L 4:3 NORMAL Fokus AF Vor-AF Aus Lichtmessung Multi Bildeinstellungen Standard Serien-Modus Aus Automatische Belichtungsreihe Aus Blitzbelichtungs-Korrektur 0.00 Option Standardeinstellung Manuelle Blitzstärke 1/2 Einst. Blitzsynchronisierung 1. Vorhang Rauschreduzierung Aus Rauschreduzierung ISO ISO 401+ Verzerrungskorrektur Aus Individueller Selbstauslöser 2 Bilder, 5 Sekunden Datumsaufdruck Aus Belichtungs-Korrektur 0.0 Weißabgleich Mlt-WA AUTO Einst. ISO-Empfindlichkeit Auto Verwacklungskorrektur Ein1 Einstellung des Aufnahme-Menüs im Modus [Dynamikbereich] Wurde der [Dynamikbereich]-Modus ausgewählt, können die folgenden Optionen im Aufnahme-Menü eingestellt werden. Die Standardwerte sind ebenfalls aufgelistet: Option Standardeinstellung Bildqualität/Größe L 4:3 NORMAL Fokus Multi AF Fixfokus-Entfernung 2,5m Bild bei ganzem Durchdrücken Ein Vor-AF Aus Lichtmessung Multi Bildeinstellungen Standard Rauschreduzierung Aus Rauschreduzierung ISO ISO 401+ Verzerrungskorrektur Aus Individueller Selbstauslöser 2 Bilder, 5 Sekunden Datumsaufdruck Aus Option Standardeinstellung Belichtungs-Korrektur 0.0 Weißabgleich Mlt-WA AUTO Weißabgleichskorrektur A:0, G:0 Einst. ISO-Empfindlichkeit Auto Verwacklungskorrektur Ein Dynamisch. Bereich erweitern Auto Plus Normalaufnahme Aus [Bildqualität/Größe]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü) Die folgenden Optionen im Hinblick auf Bildqualität, Bildgröße und Bildseitenverhältnis stehen im Aufnahme-Menü für die [Bildqualität/Größe]-Einstellung zur Verfügung. Die Dateigröße eines Fotos ist sowohl von der Bildqualität als auch der Bildgröße abhängig. Bei der Aufnahme von Filmen können Sie die Filmgröße auswählen. Fotos Option Bildseitenverhältnis Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel) RAW 16:9* 2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 3648×2048 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 3648×2736 3:2* 2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 3648×2432 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 2736×2736 L (Groß) 16:9* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2048 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2736 3:2* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2432 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL 2736×2736 M (Medium) 16:9* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3264×1840 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2448 3:2* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2176 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL 2448×2448 Option Bildseitenverhältnis Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Wenn die Option [RAW] ausgewählt wird, wird diese Einstellung für die JPEG-Kopie verwendet. *2 Je nach dem fotografierten Bereich können schwarze Balken am oberen und unteren Rand der Bildanzeige erscheinen. *3 Je nach dem fotografierten Bereich können schwarze Balken am rechten und linken Rand der Bildanzeige erscheinen. Filme Option Filmgröße HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 [Einst. ISO-Empfindlichkeit]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü) Wenn die Option [Auto] ausgewählt ist und der Blitz nicht verwendet wird, wird eine der folgenden Lichtempfindlichkeitsspannen verwendet. Bildgröße (Pixel) Standard Minimum Maximum RAW 100 100 200 L 100 100 200 M 100 100 200 5M 100 100 200 3M 100 100 200 1M 100 100 238 VGA 100 100 283 • Wenn die Option [Auto] ausgewählt ist und der Blitz verwendet wird, erhöht sich die verwendete Lichtempfindlichkeit auf einen Wert der ISO400 entspricht. [Verwacklungskorrektur]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü) Wenn die [Verwacklungskorrektur] auf [Ein] gestellt wurde, werden Bildverwacklungen minimiert. Wenn die Kamera-Verwacklungskorrektur aktiviert ist, erscheint das Symbol Eauf dem Bildschirm. [Meine Einst. Reg.] (Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen) In der Registerkarte Setup können Sie auch den [Stufenzoom] bzw. die [Zoomposition] der Option [Meine Einst. Reg.] zuweisen. Entnehmen Sie weitere Informationen zu verfügbaren Optionen dem„KameraBenutzerhandbuch“. [Fn1-Taste einst.]/[Fn2-Taste einst.] (Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen) • Die Optionen [Stufenzoom] und [AF/Mlt-Feld AF] können den Fn1/Fn2- Tasten zugewiesen werden. • Wenn [Zoom-Makro] als Motivprogramm gewählt wurde, können die Optionen [AF/Fixfokus], [Weißabgl-Korr.] [Stufenzoom], und [AF/Mlt-Feld AF] nicht durch Drücken der Fn1/Fn2-Tasten aufgerufen werden. • Wenn das Motivprogramm auf [Dynamikbereich] eingestellt ist, sind die folgenden Funktionen nicht verfügbar, auch wenn Sie die Tasten Fn1 oder Fn2 drücken: [JPEGBRAW], [Serien-Modus], [Auto BelichtungsReihe], [Blitzkorrektur], [Blitzstärke], [Stufenzoom] und [AF/Mlt-Feld AF]. [ADJ-Schalter Einstellung] (Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen) Wenn das Motivprogramm auf [Dynamikbereich] eingestellt ist, lauten die unter [ADJ-Schalter Einstellung] registrierten Einstellung [BelichtungsKorrektur] und [Weißabgleich]. Die verfügbaren Einstellungen können nicht geändert werden. [ADJ. Direkte ISO-Steuerung]-Einstellung (Registerkarte Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen) Wenn in der Registerkarte„Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ [ADJ. Direkte ISO-Steuerung] auf [Ein] eingestellt ist, können Sie den ADJ.-Schalter zur Seite schieben, wenn eine Aufnahme möglich ist, um die ISOEmpfindlichkeit zu ändern. Die Standardeinstellung ab Werk ist [Aus]. Wichtig ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Der ADJ.-Schalter kann zur Anpassung der Empfindlichkeit verwendet werden, wenn der Auslöser im Programmschaltmodus und im Blendenprioritätsmodus halb durchgedrückt wird (im Programmschaltmodus kann die Empfindlichkeit auch nach dem Loslassen des Auslösers eingestellt werden, solange Verschlusszeit und Blende angezeigt werden). Beachten Sie, dass [Auto] und [Auto hoch] nicht erneut gewählt werden können, nachdem die Empfindlichkeit auf diese Weise eingestellt wurde. • Im Verschlussprioritätsmodus und manuellen Belichtungsmodus können Sie den ADJ.-Schalter nicht zur Änderung der ISO-Empfindlichkeit verwenden. [Digitalzoombild]-Einstellung (Registerkarte Setup) Je nach gewähltem Vergrößerungs-Wert des Zooms mit automatischer Skalierung ändert sich die Bildaufnahmegröße. Zoomfaktor Bildgröße (Pixel) Zoomfaktor Bildgröße (Pixel) Ca. 1,0× L Ca. 1,8× 3M Ca. 1,1× M Ca. 2,9× 1M Ca. 1,4× 5M Ca. 5,7× VGA [Stufenzoom]-Einstellung (Registerkarte Setup) Wenn die Option [Stufenzoom] auf [Ein] gestellt ist, wird die Brennweite des Zooms auf acht Schritte begrenzt (entspricht 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm, 200 mm und 300 mm*). * Entsprechend einer 35-mm-Kleinbildkamera.0 Technische Daten Die technischen Daten beziehen sich auf die auf ein GXR-Kameragehäuse gesetzte Kameraeinheit. Effektive Pixel Ca.10,0 Millionen Bildsensor 1/2,3 Zoll CMOS-Sensor (Gesamtanzahl der Pixel: ca. 10,6 Millionen) Objektiv Brennweite 4,9mm bis 52,5mm (35-mm-Format entspricht: 28mm bis 300mm) Blende (f-Zahl) f/3,5–f/5,6 FokusReichweite (vom Objektiv) Normalaufnahme: Ca. 30cm bis unendlich 8 (Weitwinkel); ca. 150 cm bis unendlich 8 (max. Telezoom) Makroaufnahme: Ca. 1cm bis unendlich 8 (Weitwinkel/ Makrozoom); ca. 27cm bis unendlich 8 (max. Telezoom) Objektivaufbau 10 Elemente in 7 Gruppen (4 asphärische Linsenelemente mit 5 Oberflächen) Zoom 10,7× optischer Zoom; 4,0× Digital-Zoom (2,8× für Filme, HDBild); ca. 5,7× Zoom mit automatischer Skalierung (VGA)1 Fokus-Modus Multi AF; Spot AF; MF: Fixfokus; 8 ; Mt-Messfeld AF (AFHilfslicht und Fokus-Reihe verfügbar) Verschlusszeit Fotos 1/2000–30Sek. (obere und untere Begrenzungswerte variieren je nach Aufnahme- und Blitzmodus) Filme 1/30–1/2000 Sek. Belichtungssteuerung Messung Multi-Belichtungsmessung (256 Segmente), mittenbetonte Belichtungsmessung, Spot-Belichtungsmessung (TTLMessung, AE-Sperre verfügbar) Modus Programm AE, Blendenprioritätsmodus AE, manuelle Belichtung, Verschlussprioritätsmodus AE, Messfeld wechseln-Funktion BelichtungsKorrektur Manuell (+4,0 bis –4,0EV in Schritten von 1/3EV oder 1/2EV), Automatische Belichtungsreihe (–2EV bis +2EV in Schritten von 1/3EV oder 1/2EV) Belichtungskombinationsbereich (Automatik-Aufnahmemodus, Mittenbetonte Belichtungsmessung) Weitwinkel: 3,2 bis 16,2 EV; Tele: 4,6 bis 18,4 EV (Kombinationsbereich für konvertierte ISO-Werte basierend auf EV für ISO100) • Werden Fotos mit einem Belichtungskorrekturwert von 6,0 EV oder weniger aufgenommen, verschiebt die Kamera die Einstellungen um 0,25 EV Richtung Unterbelichtung für jede 1,0 EV, um die sich der Belichtungskombinationsbereich verringert. Die Einstellung kann maximal um 1,0 EV verschoben werden. ISO-Empfindlichkeit(StandardAusgabeempfindlichkeit) Auto, Auto hoch, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 Weißabgleich Auto, Mlt-WA AUTO, Im Freien, Wolkig, Glühlampe1, Glühlampe2, Neonlicht, Man. Einst., Detail; automatische Weißabgleichreihe Blitz Reichweite (eingebauter Blitz) Ca. 0,2m - 4,0m (Weitwinkel) , Ca. 0,27m - 2,5m (Tele) Aufnahmemodus Auto, Programmschaltmodus, Blendenpriorität, Verschlusspriorität, manuell, Motivprogramm (Film, Porträt, Sport, Landschaft, Nachtmodus, Schräg-Korrektur, Dynamikbereich Doppelaufnahme, Makrozoom),„Meine Einstellungen“ SerienModus Anzahl der Aufnahmen im Serienmodus (Bildgröße: RAW) Bei deaktivierter Rauschreduzierung: 5 Bilder, Bei aktivierter Rauschreduzierung (schwach, stark oder maximal): 4 Bilder Anzahl der Aufnahmen im Modus M-Serie Plus (1 Set) Langsam (3648×2736) : 15 Aufnahmen (5 Bilder/Sek.), Schnell (1728×1296) : 26 Aufnahmen (30 Bilder/Sek.) SerienModus Anzahl der Aufnahmen bei einer GeschwindigkeitsSerie (1 Set) Langsam (640×480) : 120 Aufnahmen (60 Bilder/Sek.), Schnell (640×480) : 120 Aufnahmen (120 Bilder/Sek.) Komprimierung*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Bildgröße (Pixel) Fotos 3648×2048, 3648×2736, 3648×2432, 2736×2736, 3264×1840, 3264×2448, 3264×2176, 2448×2448, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Filme 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Dateigröße (ca.) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 13.053KB/Bild, FINE: 14.289KB/Bild, VGA: 11.477 KB/Bild 4:3 NORMAL: 17.332KB/Bild, FINE: 18.984KB/Bild, VGA: 15.226 KB/Bild 3:2 NORMAL: 15.440KB/Bild, FINE: 16.909KB/Bild, VGA: 13.568 KB/Bild 1:1 NORMAL: 13.053KB/Bild, FINE: 14.292KB/Bild, VGA: 11.474 KB/Bild Dateigröße (ca.) L 16:9 NORMAL: 1.630KB/Bild, FINE: 2.779KB/Bild 4:3 NORMAL: 2.169KB/Bild, FINE: 3.705KB/Bild 3:2 NORMAL: 1.931KB/Bild, FINE: 3.295KB/Bild 1:1 NORMAL: 1.633KB/Bild, FINE: 2.785KB/Bild M 16:9 NORMAL: 1.330KB/Bild, FINE: 2.254KB/Bild 4:3 NORMAL: 1.761KB/Bild, FINE: 2.990KB/Bild 3:2 NORMAL: 1.568KB/Bild, FINE: 2.660KB/Bild 1:1 NORMAL: 1.327KB/Bild, FINE: 2.249KB/Bild 5M 4:3 FINE: 2.288KB/Bild 3M 4:3 FINE: 1.474KB/Bild 1M 4:3 FINE: 813KB/Bild VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/Bild Lebensdauer der Batterie DB-90: ca. 440 Aufnahmen*3 (basierend auf CIPA-Standard) Maße (B×H×T) Nur Kameraeinheit: 68,7mm×57,9mm×44mm (Gemäß CIPA-Richtlinie) Auf Kameragehäuse aufgesetzt: 113,9mm×70,2mm×49,8mm (Gemäß CIPA-Richtlinie) Gewicht (ca.) Nur Kameraeinheit: 160 g (ausschließlich Objektivdeckel und Anschlussabdeckung) Auf Kameragehäuse aufgesetzt: 367 g (Einschließlich Objektivdeckel, Akku und SD-Speicherkarte) Temperatur bei Betrieb 0°C bis 40°C Luftfeuchtigkeit bei Betrieb 85% oder weniger Temperatur bei Lagerung –20°C bis 60°C *1 Die verfügbaren Optionen variieren je nach Bildgröße. *2 Gleichzeitig wird auch eine JPEG-Datei aufgezeichnet. (Die JPEG-Datei ist möglicherweise eine Datei mit der Bildqualität FINE oder NORMAL und hat dieselben Maße wie die RAW- oder VGA-Datei oder eine Datei mit der Bildqualität NORMAL und einer Bildgröße von 640×480 Pixeln.) RAW-Dateien verwenden das Standard DNG-Dateiformat von Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Dient nur zur Orientierung. Die tatsächliche Anzahl von Aufnahmen hängt stark davon ab, wie die Kamera verwendet wird. Wie empfehlen Ihnen, bei einer längeren Einsatzdauer Ersatzakkus bereit zu halten. Kapazität Interner Speicher/Speicherkarte Die folgenden Werte dienen als Leitfaden für die Speicherkapazität des internen Speichers und von Speicherkarten von verschiedener Größe, je nach Bildqualität und Bildgröße, bei Verwendung der Bildqualität FINE. Fotos Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel) Interner Speicher 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB RAW* FINE 3648×2048 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217 3648×2736 4 50 103 203 415 831 1688 3648×2432 5 57 116 228 466 934 1874 2736×2736 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217 L FINE 3648×2048 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546 3648×2736 22 242 491 965 1973 3953 7930 3648×2432 24 272 553 1087 2222 4452 8930 2736×2736 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546 M FINE 3264×1840 36 397 808 1588 3245 6502 13043 3264×2448 27 300 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 3264×2176 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 2448×2448 36 400 808 1588 3245 6502 13043 Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel) Interner Speicher 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 5M FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Wenn die Option [RAW] ausgewählt wird, wird diese Einstellung für die JPEG-Kopie verwendet. Serien-Modus Serien-Modus Bildgröße (Pixel) Interner Speicher 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB M-Serie Plus (Langs) 3648×2736 38 414 842 1653 3379 6769 13579 M-Serie Plus (Schn.) 1728×1296 131 1438 2926 5746 11745 23530 47202 Geschw.-Serie 640×480 692 7553 15359 30159 61643 123489 247716 Filme Bildgröße (Pixel) Interner Speicher 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 1280×720 30 Bilder/Sekunde 16 Sek. 3 Min. 3 Sek. 6 Min. 14 Sek. 12 Min. 14 Sek. 25 Min. 1 Sek. 50 Min. 7 Sek. 100 Min. 33 Sek. 640×480 30 Bilder/Sekunde 49 Sek. 8 Min. 55 Sek. 18 Min. 8 Sek. 35 Min. 38 Sek. 72 Min. 50 Sek. 145 Min. 54 Sek. 292 Min. 41 Sek. 320×240 30 Bilder/Sekunde 1 Min. 59 Sek. 21 Min. 39 Sek. 44 Min. 2 Sek. 86 Min. 28 Sek. 176 Min. 44 Sek. 354 Min. 3 Sek. 710 Min. 13 Sek. Wichtig ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Die maximale Aufnahmegröße eines ununterbrochenen Films beträgt 4 GB. Die maximale Aufnahmezeit beträgt ca. 12 Minuten bei einer Auflösung von 1280 × 720, ca. 37 Minuten bei 640 × 480 und ca. 90 Minuten bei 320 × 240. Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Bei einer Auflösung von 1280 × 720 wird die Verwendung einer SD/SDHCSpeicherkarte der Geschwindigkeitsklasse 6 oder mehr empfohlen. 0 Anhang Separates Zubehör Die RICOH LENS kann mit dem unten aufgeführten (separat erhältlichen) Zubehör betrieben werden. Objektivdeckel (LC-2) Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Separat erhältliche Vorsatzlinsen, Gegenlichtblenden und andere Adapter können nicht an diesem Objektiv befestigt werden. • Bevor Sie ein optionales Zubehör verwenden, lesen Sie sich die mitgelieferte Dokumentation durch. • Aktuelle Informationen zu optionalem Zubehör finden Sie auf der Ricoh-Website (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).1 Ring entfernen/anbringen ---------------------------------------------------------- Entfernen Sie bei Verwendung des optionalen Rings (LC-2) den schon angebrachten Ring. Entfernen des Rings Drehen Sie den Ring bei ausgeschalteter Kamera gegen den Uhrzeigersinn und entfernen Sie ihn von der Kameraeinheit. Anbringen des Rings Richten Sie bei ausgeschalteter Kamera die Markierung auf dem Ring (2) an der Markierung auf der Kameraeinheit (1) aus, und drehen Sie den Ring im Uhrzeigersinn, bis er einrastet. 2 1 Vorsichtsmaßnahmen • Die mitgelieferte Garantie ist nur im jeweiligen Kaufland gültig. • Sollte das Gerät außerhalb des Kauflandes ausfallen oder nicht richtig funktionieren, übernimmt der Hersteller keine Verantwortung für die Reparatur des Gerätes vor Ort oder für die Übernahme von hierdurch entstandenen Kosten. • Lassen Sie die Ausrüstung nicht fallen und setzen Sie sie keinen heftigen Stößen aus. • Wenn Sie die Ausrüstung tragen, achten Sie darauf, dass sie nicht an andere Gegenstände stößt. Besondere Vorsicht ist erforderlich, um das Objektiv zu schützen. • Abrupte Temperaturveränderungen können Kondensierung hervorrufen, was zu sichtbarem Beschlagen im Objektiv oder zu Fehlfunktionen der Ausrüstung führen kann. Dies kann vermieden werden, indem Sie die Ausrüstung in eine Plastiktüte stecken, um die Temperaturveränderung zu verlangsamen. Nehmen Sie sie erst heraus, wenn die Luft in der Tüte dieselbe Temperatur erreicht hat wie die Umgebung. • Halten Sie die Ausrüstung trocken und vermeiden Sie die Bedienung mit nassen Händen. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Vorsichtsmaßnahmen kann zur Fehlfunktion der Ausrüstung oder zu Stromschlägen führen. • Halten Sie den Anschluss sauber. Tipp: Vermeiden von Kondensierung --------------------------------------------- Kondensierung kann besonders leicht auftreten, wenn Sie in einen Raum mit einem drastischen Temperaturunterschied gehen, bei hoher Luftfeuchtigkeit, in einem kalten Raum, nachdem die Heizung angestellt wurde, oder wenn die Kamera kalter Luft aus Klimaanlagen oder anderen Geräten ausgesetzt ist. Wartung und Lagerung der Ausrüstung Wartung der Ausrüstung • Fotos können durch Fingerabdrücke oder andere Fremdkörper auf dem Objektiv beeinträchtigt werden. Vermeiden Sie es, das Objektiv mit den Fingern zu berühren. Entfernen Sie Staub oder Fussel mit einem Blasebalg aus dem Kamera-Fachhandel oder reinigen Sie das Objektiv vorsichtig mit einem weichen, trockenen Tuch. • Reinigen Sie die Ausrüstung gründlich, nachdem Sie sie am Strand benutzt haben oder während des Gebrauchs von Kosmetik. Setzen Sie die Ausrüstung keinen flüchtigen Substanzen wie etwa Verdünnungsmittel, Benzol oder Pestiziden aus. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Vorsichtsmaßnahmen kann zu Schäden der Ausrüstung oder ihrer Oberfläche führen. • Im seltenen Falle einer Fehlfunktion wenden Sie sich bitte an ein Ricoh. • Die Ausrüstung ist ein Hochpräzisionsgerät. Nehmen Sie sie nicht auseinander. Aufbewahrung Bewahren Sie die Kamera nicht auf, wo sie Folgendem ausgesetzt ist: extreme Hitze oder Feuchtigkeit; große Temperatur- oder Feuchtigkeitsveränderungen; Staub, Schmutz oder Sand; starke Vibrationen; längerer Kontakt mit Chemikalien inkl. Mottenkugeln und andere Insektenschutzmittel, oder mit Vinyl- oder Gummiprodukten; starke Magnetfelder (z. B. in der Nähe eines Monitors, Transformators oder Magnets). Garantie und Kundendienst 1. Dieses Produkt hat eine eingeschränkte Garantie. Während der Garantiezeit, die in der mitgelieferten Garantie angegeben ist, werden fehlerhafte Teile kostenlos repariert. Im Falle einer Fehlfunktion der Ausrüstung wenden Sie sich an den Händler, bei dem Sie die Ausrüstung gekauft haben, oder an das nächste Ricoh Reparaturzentrum. Bitte beachten Sie, dass Kosten, die entstehen, wenn Sie die Ausrüstung zum Ricoh Reparaturzentrum bringen, nicht übernommen werden können. 2. Diese Garantie umfasst keine Schäden, die durch Folgendes entstanden sind: 1 Nichtbeachtung der Anweisungen im Benutzerhandbuch; 2 Reparaturen, Veränderungen oder Überholungen, die nicht durch ein autorisiertes, im Handbuch aufgelistetes Servicezentrum durchgeführt wurden; 3 Brand, Naturkatastrophen, höhere Gewalt, Blitz, abweichende Spannung etc.; 4 Unsachgemäße Aufbewahrung (siehe„Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch“), Auslaufen von Batterien und anderen Flüssigkeiten, Schimmel oder sonstige mangelhafte Wartung der Ausrüstung; 5 Eintauchen in Wasser (Überschwemmen), Kontakt mit Alkohol oder anderen Getränken, Eindringen von Sand oder Schmutz, heftige Stöße, Fallenlassen der Ausrüstung oder Druckausübung auf die Ausrüstung oder andere unnatürliche Ursachen. 3. Nach Ablauf der Garantie haften Sie für alle Reparaturkosten, auch solche, die in einem autorisierten Servicezentrum durchgeführt werden. 4. Sie haften für alle Reparaturkosten, auch innerhalb der Garantiezeit, wenn die Garantiekarte nicht beigefügt ist, oder wenn der Händlername oder das Kaufdatum geändert wurden oder nicht auf der Karte angegeben sind. 5. Kosten für Überholung und umfassende Inspektion auf speziellen Wunsch des Kunden hin wird dem Kunden in Rechnung gestellt, unabhängig davon, ob sie innerhalb der Garantiezeit stattfanden oder nicht. 6. Folgeschäden, die durch Fehlfunktion der Ausrüstung entstehen, wie etwa Fotografiekosten oder Ausbleiben von erwartetem Gewinn, werden nicht erstattet, unabhängig davon, ob sie innerhalb der Garantiezeit stattfanden oder nicht. 7. Die Garantie ist nur in dem Land gültig, in dem die Ausrüstung gekauft wurde. * Die obengenannten Bedingungen beziehen sich auf kostenlose Reparaturen und schränken Ihre Rechte nicht ein. * Der Zweck der obengenannten Bedingungen wird auch auf der mit dieser Ausrüstung gelieferten Garantiekarte beschrieben. 8. Ersatzteile, die wesentlich für das Funktionieren der Ausrüstung sind (d. h. erforderliche Teile, die die Funktionen und Qualität der Ausrüstung ermöglichen), werden für einen Zeitraum von fünf Jahren nach Produktionsende des Objektivs zur Verfügung stehen. 9. Bitte beachten Sie, dass bei starker Beschädigung der Ausrüstung durch Überschwemmung, Untertauchen, Eindringen von Sand oder Schmutz, heftige Stöße oder Fallenlassen das Gerät möglicherweise nicht zu reparieren ist und die Wiederherstellung des ursprünglichen Zustandes unmöglich ist. Hinweise--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Bevor Sie die Kamera zur Reparatur einschicken, überprüfen Sie die Batterien und lesen Sie die Bedienungsanleitung erneut, um eine ordnungsgemäße Bedienung sicherzustellen. • Einige Reparaturen benötigen einen erheblichen Zeitraum zur Fertigstellung. • Wenn Sie die Ausrüstung an ein Servicezentrum schicken, legen Sie bitte ein Schreiben bei, auf dem Sie die defekten Teile und das Problem so genau wie möglich beschreiben. • Entfernen Sie alle Zubehörteile, die nichts mit dem Problem zu tun haben, bevor Sie die Kamera an das Servicezentrum schicken.*L452 3971A* Bei Problemen Ricoh-Niederlassungen RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2010 Juli GR D In China gedruckt RICOH LENS P10 28-300mm F3.5-5.6 VC* Instruction Manual The serial number may be found on the bottom of the lens. * VC indicates that this unit features Ricoh’s original Vibration Correction image stabilization technology. Package Contents Before using your Ricoh lens, confirm that the package contains the items listed below. Camera unit The serial number may be found on the bottom. Lens cap Comes attached to the camera unit. ? Instruction manual (this manual) ? Warranty Connector cap Comes attached to the camera unit. Soft case Introduction To use this lens, you need to attach it to a compatible camera body. Refer to the Camera Body User Guide for details about how to operate shooting and playback functions and change settings and to read important precautions for use. This instruction manual will refer to this lens as the “camera unit” and will explain functions and operating procedures that are available only when this camera unit is used with a compatible camera body. See also the GXR Camera Body User Guide. To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Safety precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use. Test shots Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly before taking photos on important occasions. Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines, and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright holder, is prohibited. Exemption from liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display images as a result of product malfunction. Warranty The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any expense thereby incurred. Radio interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device, reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio or television into a different outlet. © 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time without prior notice. Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover of this booklet. Safety Precautions Warning Symbols Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below. Danger This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Warning This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Caution This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical damage if ignored or incorrectly handled. Sample Warnings The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed. The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions. The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action is prohibited. Examples = Do not touch = Do not disassemble Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit. Danger Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard. Warning Keep the equipment out of the reach of children. Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service center if it is damaged. Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock. Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns. • Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as this may lead to disasters or accidents. Caution Do not allow the equipment to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands. Both pose the risk of electric shock. Safety Precautions for Accessories When using optional products, carefully read the instructions provided with the product before using that product.10 Package Contents................................................................................................. 2 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 3 Safety Precautions................................................................................................ 6 Parts of the Lens .................................................................................................13 Upgrading the Product .....................................................................................14 Updating the camera’s firmware...................................................................................14 Up-down dial.......................................................................................................17 Additional Function for Up-down Dial .......................................................................17 Shooting...............................................................................................................18 Mode P: Program Shift......................................................................................................18 A: Aperture Priority Mode................................................................................................20 S: Shutter Priority Mode ...................................................................................................20 Mode M: Manual Exposure..............................................................................................21 Table of Contents11 The Zoom Macro Scene Mode.......................................................................................22 Dynamic Range Double Shot Mode ............................................................................23 Multi-Target AF ....................................................................................................................27 M-Cont Plus (Low) ..............................................................................................................29 M-Cont Plus (Hi) ..................................................................................................................31 Speed Cont (Low)/Speed Cont (High).........................................................................32 Focus bracketing.................................................................................................................33 [Noise Reduction] Setting................................................................................................36 White balance setting.......................................................................................................37 Playback ...............................................................................................................38 Camera Unit Information Display .................................................................................38 Settings ................................................................................................................39 Shooting Menu Settings in [Zoom Macro] Mode ...................................................39 Shooting Menu Settings in [Dynamic Range] Mode .............................................41 [Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu) ......................................................421 [ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu).......................................................................45 [Camera Shake Correction] Setting (Shooting Menu)...........................................46 [Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Setting Tab)............................................................46 [Set Fn1 Button]/[Set Fn2 Button] (Key Custom Setting Tab).............................47 [ADJ Lever Setting] (Key Custom Settings Tab)........................................................47 [ADJ. Direct ISO Control] Setting (Key Custom Setting Tab) ...............................48 [Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup Tab).................................................................49 [Step Zoom] Setting (Setup Tab)...................................................................................49 Specifications ......................................................................................................50 Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity..................................................................56 Appendices..........................................................................................................59 Optional Accessories.........................................................................................................59 Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................61 Equipment Care and Storage.........................................................................................62 Warranty and Servicing....................................................................................................631 Parts of the Lens 1 3 2 1 Connector 2 Ring cap 3 Lens1 Upgrading the Product Updating the camera’s firmware When you first attach the camera unit to the camera body, the version update function will start automatically if the firmware of the camera’s body need to be updated. In such case, update the firmware of the camera’s body using the following procedure. If the firmware’s version is already up to date, the version update function will not start and you can use the lens right away. 1 Check that the camera is turned off and attach the camera unit to the camera body. • For details about how to attach the camera unit, refer to the Camera Body User Guide.1 2 Turn on the camera. • A confirmation message about updating the firmware appears. 3 Press the Fn1/Fn2 buttons to select [Yes] and then press the MENU/ OK button. • The firmware’s update begins and the following messages appear on the picture display. [Checking rewrite file] [Rewriting program] The camera will automatically turn off and then back on. After the camera restarts, the firmware’s version screen will be displayed and the update will be completed.1 Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • To confirm the firmware’s version, select [Firmware Version] in the setup menu. Alternatively, with the camera off, keep the6(Play) button pressed for more than 1 second while holding the – button pressed down. The firmware’s version will appear on the picture display for about 20 seconds. • For the latest information on firmware updates, see the Ricoh Web site (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). You can download the latest firmware updates to upgrade your equipment.1 Up-down dial Additional Function for Up-down Dial When selecting the Flash mode, you can also use the Up-down Dial. When selecting the Self-Timer settings, you can also use the Up-down Dial.1 Shooting Mode P: Program Shift Setting the mode dial to P (program shift mode) allows you to select a combination of aperture value and shutter speed. When the ISO setting is set to [Auto] or [Auto-Hi], the camera will adjust the ISO sensitivity automatically to obtain the optimal exposure. The diagram in the following page gives an approximated estimate of the shift range for various combinations of aperture values and shutter speeds. The shift range changes depending on the exposure value (EV). In this example, the flash mode is set to [Flash Off], and the ISO setting is set to [ISO100]. For the largest aperture value, it is used together with the ND filter. In this case, the degree to which the background is blurred does not change. The degree of blurring is expressed as the aperture value (F value) even when an ND filter is used.1 F16 F11 F15.4 F7.0 F5.6 F3.5 F8 F5.6 F4 F2.8 F2 F1.4 F1 Ev8 Ev7 Ev6 Ev5 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 : Wide : Tele0 A: Aperture Priority Mode Setting the mode dial to A (aperture priority mode) allows you to manually set the aperture value. For the largest aperture value, it is used together with the ND filter. When an ND filter is used, the degree to which the background is blurred does not change. The number of available aperture stops varies depending on the position of the zoom (2 stops at wide-angle end, 3 stops at telephoto end). When the ISO setting is set to [Auto] or [Auto-Hi], the camera will adjust the ISO sensitivity automatically to obtain the optimal exposure. S: Shutter Priority Mode Setting the mode dial to S (shutter priority mode) allows you to manually set the shutter speed. The camera will adjust the sensitivity in the range of ISO 100 to ISO 3200 to obtain the optimal exposure, regardless of the ISO sensitivity settings. For the largest aperture value, it is used together with the ND filter. When the [Shutter Speed Auto Shift] setting in the shooting menu is set to [On], the camera will automatically adjust the shutter speed to obtain the1 best exposure when it cannot be obtained using the shutter speed that was set manually. The [Shutter Speed Auto Shift] setting will not appear when the mode dial is set to a mode other than S. Mode M: Manual Exposure Setting the mode dial to M (manual exposure mode) allows you to manually set the aperture value and shutter speed separately. For the largest aperture value, it is used together with the ND filter. When an ND filter is used, the degree to which the background is blurred does not change. If [Auto] or [Auto-Hi] is selected for ISO Setting, ISO will be fixed at 100 while the camera is in manual exposure mode. If the shutter speed is set to 1 second or longer, the maximum ISO available is ISO400. The maximum shutter speed available is 30 seconds. The Zoom Macro Scene Mode When the mode dial is set to SCENE, selecting the [Zoom Macro] mode will automatically optimize the zoom position, allowing you to shoot the subject at a larger size than with normal macro shooting. In zoom macro mode, the optical zoom cannot be used. For zoom shooting methods, refer to the “Camera Body User Guide”. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • You can shoot close-ups using the zoom macro within the following distances. Approx. 1cm (from the front of the lens) Shooting range: Approx. 19×14mm (when digital zoom is not used) Shooting range: Approx. 4.8×3.6mm (when 4.0× digital zoom is used) • When [Picture Quality/Size] is set to 4:3 for [L], you can also set [Digital Zoom Image] to [Auto Resize], and auto resize zoom will be activated. (GP. 47) Dynamic Range Double Shot Mode The “dynamic range”of a digital camera refers to the range of brightness that can be processed by the camera. When you select the [Dynamic Range] scene mode and shoot, the scene is reproduced with a smooth transition from the bright areas to the dark areas, allowing you to capture a more natural-looking image. With dynamic range double shot, two consecutive pictures are taken with different exposures and then the areas with the appropriate exposure are combined together. This mode uses a longer shooting time than other modes, so be careful of camera shake when taking pictures. TheJsymbol is displayed while you half-press the shutter release button. Two consecutive shots Combined and saved Two consecutive shots Combined and saved Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Even when the camera is attached to a tripod, it may move when you press the shutter release button. For maximum stability it is recommended to use the self timer or the CA-1 cable switch (sold separately). Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • This function is not available when [Picture Quality/Size] is set to RAW mode. • When using this function, digital zoom will be turned off. • When using this function, the flash will be set to Flash Off. • Dynamic range double shot may not be effective if the shooting location is overly bright or dark. • [Multi] metering is recommended. • When shooting a fast-moving subject, the subject may be distorted in the recorded image. • Flicker from fluorescent lights may appear as horizontal bands. Fluorescent lighting may also affect colors and brightness. Dynamic Range Expansion Effect The [Dynamic Range Expansion] option in the shooting menu offers five levels of dynamic range expansion: [Auto], [Very Weak], [Weak], [Medium], and [Strong]. The stronger the expansion effect, the wider the range of brightnesses processed by the camera. To change the setting, select the [Dynamic Range] scene mode and change the [Dynamic Range Expansion] setting in the shooting menu. After selecting any setting except [Auto], press the Fn2 button to display the [Dynamic Range Expansion Options] on the screen. Choose the tone range given priority for expanded dynamic range from [Highlights], [Shadows], and [Off]. Dynamic Range Expansion Plus Normal Shooting When [On] is selected for [Plus Normal Shooting] in the shooting menu, the camera will record two copies of each photo: one with an expanded dynamic range and the other with normal exposure. The two copies are displayed in the picture display after shooting, with the unmodified copy on the right and the copy with an expanded dynamic range of the left. To change the setting, select the [Dynamic Range] scene mode and change the [Plus Normal Shooting] setting in the shooting menu. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Histograms of the images are displayed after shooting. When [LCD Confirmation Time] in the Setup tab is set to [Hold], the confirmation screen remains displayed so you can confirm the histograms and easily compare the images. Multi-Target AF When you half-press the shutter release button, the camera automatically determines multiple focus positions. When you then press the shutter release button all the way down, the camera shifts among the different focus positions, taking five consecutive pictures. The five still images are grouped together as a set and are recorded as an MP file. This function is especially useful for telephoto shooting and shooting with macro mode. A greenVicon will be displayed if the camera is able to focus. If the camera is unable to focus, the redVicon will blink. The focus positions selected by the camera are only displayed during playback. * MP is a file format for recording a set of still images. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The flash cannot be used. • The camera shake correction function cannot be used. If [Multi-trgt AF] is set while the camera shake correction function is turned on,Echanges toF. • This function is not available when [Picture Quality/Size] is set to [RAW]. • When [Continuous Mode] is set to any setting except [Off], you can change the Multi-target AF settings, but the function will not be used. • Interval shooting is not available when Multi-target AF is set. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • If this function is turned on when using the digital zoom, the digital zoom is disabled and shooting is performed at the maximum magnification for the optical zoom (10.7×). • [White Balance] functions according to the [Auto] setting even if it is set to [Multi-P AUTO]. M-Cont Plus (Low) In this mode, the camera shoots while the shutter-release button is pressed, but only the last 15 frames (about the last three seconds of shooting) are recorded to create a single multi-picture (MP) file. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The time needed to record 15 frames may increase if lighting is poor. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2The camera records the 15 frames taken in the last 3s of shooting. 1When you remove your finger from the shutter release button... 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2The camera records the 15 frames taken in the last 3s of shooting. 1When you remove your finger from the shutter release button...0 Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The image size is fixed at 3648×2736 NORMAL. • The date and orientation of each shot in the sequence are recorded separately.1 M-Cont Plus (Hi) In this mode, the camera shoots while the shutter-release button is pressed, but only the last 26 frames (about the last 0.9 seconds of shooting) are recorded to create a single multi-picture (MP) file. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When shooting a fast-moving subject, the subject may be distorted in the recorded image. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2The camera records the 26 frames taken in the last 0.9 seconds of shooting. 1When you remove your finger from the shutter release button... 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2The camera records the 26 frames taken in the last 0.9 seconds of shooting. 1When you remove your finger from the shutter release button... Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The image size is fixed at 1728×1296 NORMAL. • The date and orientation of the last shot in the sequence are also used for the remaining frames. Speed Cont (Low)/Speed Cont (High) 120 consecutive images are recorded in one second (Speed Cont (High)) or two seconds (Speed Cont (Low)). Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When shooting a fast-moving subject, the subject may be distorted in the recorded image. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The image size is fixed at 640×480 VGA. • The date and orientation of the last shot in the sequence are also used for the remaining frames. Focus bracketing Focus bracketing is one of the functions available when using auto bracketing. Focus bracketing automatically shoots 5 consecutive shots while gradually changing the position of the focus. You can adjust the interval used to change the focus position. 1 Select [Auto Bracket] in the shooting menu and press the Fn2 button. 2 Press the +/- button to select [FOCUS-BKT] and press the Fn2 button. 3 Press the Fn1/Fn2 buttons to select the focus position interval and press the MENU/OK button. • The setting is saved, and the display returns to the shooting menu. 4 Press the MENU/OK button, or press the Fn1 button and then the MENU/OK button. • The symbol appears on the screen. 5 Half-press the shutter release button. • The camera focuses according to the [Focus] setting. 6 Press the shutter release button all the way down. • The camera takes five consecutive pictures based on the focus position in Step 5. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • When [Focus] is set to [MF], the first picture is taken at the set focus position without being measured. • [White Balance] functions according to the [Auto] setting even if it is set to [Multi-P AUTO]. • Photographs are taken and recorded in the following order: Focus position Fore Center (*) ? Back Shooting order 2 3 1 4 5 Recording order 1 2 3 4 5 * Focus at the position set for the [Focus] setting in the shooting menu. • When using this function, the flash will be set to off. • When [Focus] is set to [Multi-trgt AF], you can change the focus bracketing settings but the function will not be used. • When [Picture Quality/Size] is set to [RAW], you can change the noise reduction setting but the function will not be used. • When [Continuous Mode] is set to any setting except [Off], you can change the focus bracketing settings, but the function will not be used. [Noise Reduction] Setting Perform noise reduction when taking photographs. Choose from [Off], [Auto], [Weak], [Strong], or [MAX]. The time required to record images varies with the option selected. You can use this function to shoot photographs when the scene mode is set to a mode other than [Portrait], [Sports] or [Skew Correct Mode]. White balance setting Using this lens you can set the white balance to [Incandescent 1] or [Incandescent 2]. Use the [Incandescent 1] or [Incandescent 2] setting when shooting under incandescent bulb light. Using [Incandescent 2] will leave a slightly redder tint, compared to [Incandescent 1]. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When using [Incandescent 2] you can shoot with the same color shades as with the [Incandescent] setting described in the Camera Body User Guide. Playback Camera Unit Information Display Information of [A12], [S10] or [P10] for each camera unit is displayed on the Detailed Information Display and the Exif file. Settings Shooting Menu Settings in [Zoom Macro] Mode When [Zoom Macro] is selected, items from the shooting menu that can be set and default values are as follows. Item Default setting Picture Quality/Size L 4:3 NORMAL Focus AF Pre-AF Off Exposure Metering Multi Image Settings Standard Continuous Mode Off Auto Bracket Off Flash Exposure Compensation 0.00 Item Default setting Manual Flash Amount 1/2 Flash Synchro Settings 1st Curtain Noise Reduction Off Noise Reduction ISO Over ISO 401 Distortion Correction Off Custom Self-Timer 2 Pics, 5 seconds Date Imprint Off Exposure Compensation 0.0 White Balance Multi-P AUTO ISO Setting Auto Camera Shake Correction On1 Shooting Menu Settings in [Dynamic Range] Mode When [Dynamic Range] is selected, items from the shooting menu that can be set and default values are as follows. Item Default setting Picture Quality/Size L 4:3 NORMAL Focus Multi AF Snap Focus Distance 2.5m Full Press Snap On Pre-AF Off Exposure Metering Multi Image Settings Standard Noise Reduction Off Noise Reduction ISO Over ISO 401 Distortion Correction Off Custom Self-Timer 2 Pics, 5 seconds Date Imprint Off Item Default setting Exposure Compensation 0.0 White Balance Multi-P AUTO White Balance Compensation A:0, G:0 ISO Setting Auto Camera Shake Correction On Dynamic Range Expansion Auto Plus Normal Shooting Off [Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu) The following picture quality, image size and aspect ratio options are available for the [Picture Quality/Size] setting in the shooting menu. A photograph‘s file size will depend on the combination of picture quality and image size used. When recording movies, you can select the movie size. Photographs Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels) RAW 16:9* 2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 3648×2048 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 3648×2736 3:2* 2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 3648×2432 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 2736×2736 L (Large) 16:9* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2048 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2736 3:2* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2432 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL 2736×2736 M (Middle) 16:9* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3264×1840 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2448 3:2* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2176 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL 2448×2448 Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy. *2 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear on the top and bottom of the picture display. *3 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear at the right and left sides of the picture display. Movies Item Movie size HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 [ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu) When [Auto] is selected and the flash is not used, the range of the sensitivity used will be as follows. Picture size (pixels) Default Minimum Maximum RAW 100 100 200 L 100 100 200 M 100 100 200 5M 100 100 200 3M 100 100 200 1M 100 100 238 VGA 100 100 283 • When [Auto] is selected and the flash is used, the sensitivity used will gain up to ISO400 equivalent. [Camera Shake Correction] Setting (Shooting Menu) When [Camera Shake Correction] is set to [On], the camera shake blurring is minimized. When camera shake correction is activated, theEsymbol appears on the screen. [Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Setting Tab) In [Reg. My Settings], you can also set [Step Zoom] and [Zoom Position] options in the setup tab. For other options available, refer to the “Camera Body User Guide”. [Set Fn1 Button]/[Set Fn2 Button] (Key Custom Setting Tab) • [Step Zoom] and [AF/M-trgt AF] can be assigned to the Fn1/Fn2 buttons. • [AF/Snap], [WB Correction], [Step Zoom], and [AF/M-trgt AF] is not available by pressing the Fn1/Fn2 buttons if the scene mode is set to [Zoom Macro]. • When the scene mode is set to [Dynamic Range], the following functions will not be available even if you press the Fn1 or Fn2 button: [JPEGB RAW], [Continuous Mode], [Auto Bracket], [Flash Comp.], [Flash Amount], [Step Zoom] and [AF/M-trgt AF]. [ADJ Lever Setting] (Key Custom Settings Tab) When the scene mode is set to [Dynamic Range], the settings registered under [ADJ Lever Setting] are [Exposure Compensation] and [White Balance]. The available settings cannot be changed. [ADJ. Direct ISO Control] Setting (Key Custom Setting Tab) When [ADJ. Direct ISO Control] in the Key Custom Settings tab is set to [On], you can push the ADJ. lever sideways when shooting is possible to change the ISO setting. The default setting at the time of purchase is [Off]. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The ADJ. lever can be used to adjust sensitivity while the shutter button is pressed halfway in program shift and aperture priority modes (in program shift mode, sensitivity can be adjusted even after the shutter button is released, as long as shutter speed and aperture are displayed). Note that once sensitivity has been adjusted in this manner, [Auto] and [Auto-Hi] can not be re-selected. • In shutter speed priority mode and manual exposure mode, you cannot use the ADJ. lever to change the ISO setting. [Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup Tab) The size of the recorded image varies depending on the auto resize zoom, as follows. Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Approx. 1.0× L Approx. 1.8× 3M Approx. 1.1× M Approx. 2.9× 1M Approx. 1.4× 5M Approx. 5.7× VGA [Step Zoom] Setting (Setup Tab) If [Step Zoom] is set to [On], the focal length for zoom is fixed at eight steps (equivalent to 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm, 200 mm, and 300 mm*). * Equivalent to that on a 35-mm camera.0 Specifications Specifications are given for the camera unit mounted on a GXR body. Effective pixels Approximately 10.0 million Image sensor 1/2.3" CMOS sensor (total pixels: approx. 10.6 million) Lens Focal length 4.9mm to 52.5mm (35-mm format equivalent: 28mm to 300mm) Aperture (f-number) f/3.5– f/5.6 Focus range (from lens) Normal shooting: Approx. 30cm to 8 (wide angle); approx. 150cm to 8 (telephoto end) Macro shooting: Approx. 1cm to 8 (wide angle/zoom macro); approx. 27cm to 8 (telephoto end) Construction 10 elements in 7 groups (4 aspherical lens elements with 5 surfaces) Zoom 10.7× optical zoom; 4.0× digital zoom (2.8× for movies, HD image); approx. 5.7× auto resize zoom (VGA) Focus mode Multi AF; Spot AF; MF: Snap; 8 ; Multi-trgt AF (AF auxiliary light and focus bracketing available)1 Shutter speed Photographs 1/2000–30s (upper and lower limits vary according to shooting and flash mode) Movies 1/30–1/2000s Exposure control Metering Multi metering (256-segment), center-weighted metering, spot metering (TTL metering, with AE lock) Mode Program AE, aperture priority AE, manual exposure, shutter priority AE, move target function Exposure compensation Manual (+4.0 to -4.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV), auto bracketing (-2EV to +2EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV) Exposure link range (Auto shooting mode, Centerweighted light metering) Wide-angle end: 3.2 EV to 16.2 EV; Telephoto end: 4.6 EV to 18.4 EV (link range for automatic ISO converted based on the EV for ISO100) • When shooting in surroundings with 6.0 EV or lower, for every 1.0 EV that the exposure link range decreases, the camera will shift the setting 0.25 EV toward the low brightness side. The maximum shift amount is 1.0 EV. ISO sensitivity (Standard Output Sensitivity) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 White balance Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Outdoors, Cloudy, Incandescent 1, Incandescent 2, Fluorescent Lamp, Manual Settings, Detail; white balance bracketing Flash Range (built-in flash) Approx. 0.2m–4.0m (wide-angle), Approx. 0.27m–2.5m (telephoto) Shooting mode Auto, program shift, aperture priority, shutter priority, manual, scene (movie, portrait, sports, landscape, nightscape, skew correction, dynamic range double shot, zoom macro),“My Settings” Continuous mode Number of pictures shot in Continuous (Picture Size: RAW) Noise Reduction off: 5 pictures, Noise Reduction on (Weak, Strong or MAX): 4 pictures Number of pictures shot in M-Cont Plus (1 set) Low (3648×2736) : 15 pictures (5 Frames/Sec), Hi (1728×1296) : 26 pictures (30 Frames/Sec) Continuous mode Number of pictures shot in Speed Cont (1 set) Low (640×480) : 120 pictures (60 Frames/Sec), Hi (640×480) : 120 pictures (120 Frames/Sec) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Image size (pixels) Photographs 3648×2048, 3648×2736, 3648×2432, 2736×2736, 3264×1840, 3264×2448, 3264×2176, 2448×2448, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Movies 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 File size (approx.) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 13,053KB/frame, FINE: 14,289KB/frame, VGA: 11,477KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 17,332KB/frame, FINE: 18,984KB/frame, VGA: 15,226KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 15,440KB/frame, FINE: 16,909KB/frame, VGA: 13,568KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 13,053KB/frame, FINE: 14,292KB/frame, VGA: 11,474KB/frame File size (approx.) L 16:9 NORMAL: 1,630KB/frame, FINE: 2,779KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 2,169KB/frame, FINE: 3,705KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 1,931KB/frame, FINE: 3,295KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 1,633KB/frame, FINE: 2,785KB/frame M 16:9 NORMAL: 1,330KB/frame, FINE: 2,254KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 1,761KB/frame, FINE: 2,990KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 1,568KB/frame, FINE: 2,660KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 1,327KB/frame, FINE: 2,249KB/frame 5M 4:3 FINE: 2,288KB/frame 3M 4:3 FINE: 1,474KB/frame 1M 4:3 FINE: 813KB/frame VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/frame Battery life DB-90: approx. 440 shots *3 (based on CIPA standard) Dimensions (W×H×D) Camera unit only: 68.7mm×57.9mm×44mm (Based on CIPA guide line) When mounted on the camera body: 113.9mm×70.2mm×49.8mm (Based on CIPA guide line) Weight (approx.) Camera unit only: 160g (not including the lens cap or connector cap) When mounted on the camera body: 367g (including the lens cap, battery, and SD memory card) Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C Operating humidity 85% or less Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C *1 The options available vary with image size. *2 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a FINE- or NORMAL-quality file with the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file 640×480 pixels in size). RAW files use the standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is used. We recommend that you carry spare batteries when in use for extended periods. Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity The following values are given as a reference of the storage capacity of the internal memory and memory cards of various sizes, by picture quality and image size, when using the FINE picture quality. Photographs Compression Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB RAW* FINE 3648×2048 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217 3648×2736 4 50 103 203 415 831 1688 3648×2432 5 57 116 228 466 934 1874 2736×2736 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217 L FINE 3648×2048 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546 3648×2736 22 242 491 965 1973 3953 7930 3648×2432 24 272 553 1087 2222 4452 8930 2736×2736 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546 M FINE 3264×1840 36 397 808 1588 3245 6502 13043 3264×2448 27 300 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 3264×2176 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 2448×2448 36 400 808 1588 3245 6502 13043 Compression Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 5M FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy. Continuous Mode Continuous Mode Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB M-Cont Plus (Low) 3648×2736 38 414 842 1653 3379 6769 13579 M-Cont Plus (High) 1728×1296 131 1438 2926 5746 11745 23530 47202 Speed Cont 640×480 692 7553 15359 30159 61643 123489 247716 Movies Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 1280×720 30 frames/second 16 sec. 3 min. 3 sec. 6 min. 14 sec. 12 min. 14 sec. 25 min. 1 sec. 50 min. 7 sec. 100 min. 33 sec. 640×480 30 frames/second 49 sec. 8 min. 55 sec. 18 min. 8 sec. 35 min. 38 sec. 72 min. 50 sec. 145 min. 54 sec. 292 min. 41 sec. 320×240 30 frames/second 1 min. 59 sec. 21 min. 39 sec. 44 min. 2 sec. 86 min. 28 sec. 176 min. 44 sec. 354 min. 3 sec. 710 min. 13 sec. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The maximum uninterrupted recording size for a single movie is 4 GB. The maximum recording time is around 12 minutes at 1280×720 size, around 37 minutes at 640×480 size, and around 90 minutes at 320×240 size. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When 1280 x 720 size is set, using SD/SDHC memory cards with a speed class of 6 or more is recommended. Appendices Optional Accessories The RICOH LENS can be used with the items (sold separately) listed below. Lens Cap (LC-2) Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Conversion lenses, hoods and other adapters sold separately cannot be attached to this lens. • Before using an optional accessory, see the documentation that came with the product. • For the latest information on optional accessories, visit the Ricoh website (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).0 Removing/attaching the ring cap ------------------------------------------------- Remove the ring cap when using the optional ring cap (LC-2). Removing the ring cap Turn the ring cap counterclockwise while the camera is turned off and remove from the camera unit. Attaching the ring cap With the camera turned off, align the marking on the ring cap (2) with the marking on the camera unit (1) and turn the ring cap clockwise until it clicks. 2 11 Precautions for Use • The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase. • Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any expenditure incurred thereby. • Do not drop the equipment or subject it to physical shocks. • When carrying the equipment, be careful that it does not strike other objects. Particular care is required to protect the lens. • Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible condensation inside the lens or malfunction of the equipment. This can be avoided by placing the equipment in a plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature its surroundings. • Keep the equipment dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe these precautions could result in malfunction of the equipment or electric shock. • Keep the connector clean. Tip: Avoiding Condensation -------------------------------------------------------- Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the heater has come on, or where the camera is exposed to cold air from an air conditioner or other device. Equipment Care and Storage Caring for the Equipment • Photographs can be affected by fingerprints and other foreign matter on the lens. Avoid touching the lens with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a blower from a camera supply store, or gently clean the lens with a soft, dry cloth. • Clean the equipment thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling cosmetics. Do not expose the equipment to volatile substances such as thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the equipment or its finish. • In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center. • This equipment is a high precision device. Do not disassemble. Storage Do not store the camera where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or humidity; large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe vibration; prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other insect repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for example, in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet). Warranty and Servicing 1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your equipment, any defective parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of equipment malfunction, contact the dealer from which you purchased the equipment or your nearest Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will not be reimbursed for the cost of bringing the equipment to the Ricoh Repair Center. 2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from: 1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual; 2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service center listed in the instruction manual; 3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.; 4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera Body User Guide”), leaking of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the equipment; 5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages, infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock, dropping of the equipment, or pressure on the equipment, and other unnatural causes. 3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees, including those incurred at an authorized service center. 4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the warranty card is not attached or if the distributor’s name or the purchase date have been changed or are not indicated on the card. 5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred during the warranty period. 6. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the equipment, such as expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not. 7. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the equipment was purchased. * The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit your legal rights. * The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card provided with this equipment. 8. Parts essential to the servicing of the equipment (that is, components required to maintain the functions and quality of the equipment) will be available for a period of five years after the equipment is discontinued. 9. Please note that if the equipment is seriously damaged by flooding, submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible. Notes------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Before sending the camera in for repair, check the camera body and read the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation. • Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete. • When sending the equipment to a service center, please include a note which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as possible. • Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the camera to the service center.If You Encounter a Problem with This Product Ricoh offices RICOH COMPANY, LTD. 3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530, Japan http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A. 1–800–22RICOH http://www.ricoh-usa.com/ RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK) (from within the UK) 02073 656 580 (from outside of the UK) +44 2073 656 580 RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN) (desde España) 91 406 9148 (desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148 RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMC ITALY) (dall’Italia) 02 696 33 451 (dall’estero) +39 02 696 33 451*L452 2971A* Ricoh offices RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS LIMITED 21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2010 July EN USA GB GB AE AE Printed in China OBJETIVO RICOH P10 F3.5-5.6 VC de 28-300mm* Manual de instrucciones El número de serie se encuentra en la parte inferior del objetivo. * VC indica que esta unidad incluye la tecnología de estabilización de imagen Vibration Correction original de Ricoh. Contenido del paquete Antes de utilizar su objetivo Ricoh, compruebe que el paquete contenga los siguientes elementos. Unidad cámara El número de serie se encuentra en la parte inferior. Tapa del objetivo Viene colocada en la unidad cámara. ? Manual de instrucciones (este manual) ? Garantía Tapa del conector Viene colocada en la unidad cámara. Funda blanda Introducción Para utilizar este objetivo, es necesario colocarlo en un cuerpo de cámara compatible. Consulte la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara para saber cómo ejecutar las funciones de disparo y reproducción y cambiar ajustes, así como para leer precauciones importantes de uso. En este manual de instrucciones se hace referencia a este objetivo como“unidad de cámara” y se explican las funciones y los procedimientos de manejo que sólo están disponibles al utilizar esta unidad de cámara con un cuerpo de cámara compatible. Véase también la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara GXR. Para sacar el mejor provecho de las funciones de este producto, lea atentamente este manual antes del uso. Conserve este manual a mano para poder consultarlo fácilmente. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Precauciones de seguridad Lea atentamente todas las precauciones de seguridad para garantizar un uso seguro. Fotografías de prueba Haga fotografías de prueba para asegurarse de que la cámara funcione adecuadamente antes de hacer fotografías en ocasiones importantes. Derechos de autor Queda prohibida la reproducción o alteración de documentos, revistas y otros materiales con derechos de autor, con una finalidad diferente a la personal, doméstica o de otro tipo igualmente limitado, sin el consentimiento del propietario de los derechos de autor. Exención de responsabilidad Ricoh Co., Ltd. no asume ninguna responsabilidad por no poder grabar o reproducir imágenes como resultado de un fallo de funcionamiento del producto. Garantía La garantía proporcionada con este producto sólo es válida dentro del país de compra. El fabricante no asume ninguna responsabilidad relacionada con el mantenimiento o la reparación del producto en otros países ni los gastos incurridos por este servicio. Interferencias radioeléctricas La utilización de este producto en las inmediaciones de otros equipos electrónicos puede afectar negativamente tanto a la cámara como al otro dispositivo. Las interferencias son particularmente probables si la cámara se utiliza muy cerca de una radio o un televisor. Esto puede resolverse alejando la cámara del otro dispositivo, reorientando la antena de radio o televisión, o conectando la radio o el televisor a otra toma de corriente. © 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda prohibida la reproducción total o parcial de esta publicación sin la autorización expresa por escrito de Ricoh. Ricoh se reserva el derecho a cambiar el contenido de este documento en cualquier momento y sin previo aviso. Se ha hecho todo lo posible por garantizar la precisión de la información de este documento. Si, a pesar de ello, detecta algún error u omisión, le agradeceríamos que nos lo notificara en la dirección que aparece en la contraportada de este manual. Precauciones de seguridad Símbolos de aviso En este manual de instrucciones y en el producto aparecen diversos símbolos de aviso que se deben tener en cuenta para evitarle lesiones a usted o a terceros, así como también daños materiales. A continuación se explican los símbolos y sus significados. Peligro Este símbolo indica que hay peligro inminente de muerte o de lesiones de gravedad debido a negligencia u operación incorrecta. Advertencia Este símbolo indica riesgos de muerte o lesiones de gravedad debido a negligencia u operación errónea. Precaución Este símbolo indica riesgos de lesiones o daños materiales debido a negligencia u operación errónea. Ejemplos de aviso El símbolo le indica las acciones que debe realizar. El símbolo le indica las acciones que no debe realizar. El símbolo puede estar combinado con otros símbolos para indicarle las acciones concretas que no debe realizar. Ejemplos = No tocar = No desmontar Para garantizar la seguridad en el uso de esta unidad, observe las siguientes precauciones. Peligro No intente desarmar, reparar o alterar el equipo por su cuenta. El circuito de alta tensión del interior del equipo representa un gran peligro eléctrico. Advertencia Guarde el equipo fuera del alcance de los niños. No toque los componentes internos del equipo en caso de que quedaran al descubierto debido a daños o una caída. El circuito de alta tensión del equipo podría provocar descargas eléctricas. Extraiga la batería lo más pronto posible, teniendo cuidado de evitar descargas eléctricas o quemaduras. Lleve el equipo dañado a su distribuidor o centro de asistencia técnica más cercano. No use el equipo en el baño o una ducha pues podría producirse incendio o descarga eléctrica. No use el equipo cerca de gases inflamables, gasolina, bencina, diluyente o sustancias similares, para evitar riesgos de explosión, incendio o quemaduras. • No use el equipo en un avión u otros lugares donde su uso esté restringido o prohibido, pues podría resultar en desastres o accidentes. Precaución No permita que el equipo se moje. Tampoco opere la cámara con las manos húmedas. Ambas acciones implican el riesgo de descargas eléctricas. Advertencias de seguridad para los accesorios Si utiliza productos opcionales, lea atentamente las instrucciones suministradas con el producto antes de usarlo.10 Contenido del paquete........................................................................................ 2 Introducción.......................................................................................................... 3 Precauciones de seguridad ................................................................................ 6 Componentes del objetivo...............................................................................13 Actualización del producto ..............................................................................14 Actualización del firmware de la cámara ...................................................................14 Dial hacia arriba/abajo ......................................................................................17 Función adicional del dial hacia arriba/hacia abajo...............................................17 Toma......................................................................................................................18 Modo P: Cambio de programas.....................................................................................18 A: Modo de prioridad de apertura................................................................................20 S: Modo de prioridad de obturación ...........................................................................20 Modo M: Exposición manual ..........................................................................................21 Modo Escena Macro Zoom .............................................................................................22 Índice11 Modo de doble disparo de rango dinámico.............................................................23 AF multiobjetivo .................................................................................................................27 M-Cont + (Baja)....................................................................................................................29 M-Cont + (Alta)....................................................................................................................31 Veloc. Cont (Baja)/Veloc. Cont (Alto)............................................................................32 Enfoque de la exposición automática.........................................................................33 Ajuste [Reducción ruido]..................................................................................................36 Ajuste del balance de blancos.......................................................................................37 Reproducción......................................................................................................38 Visualización de información de la unidad cámara................................................38 Ajustes ..................................................................................................................39 Ajustes del menú de disparo en modo [Macro Zoom] .........................................39 Ajustes del menú de disparo en modo [Rango dinámico]..................................41 Ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] (menú de disparo) ..............................42 Ajuste [Ajuste ISO] (Menú de disparo) ........................................................................45 Ajuste [Corre. Vibrac. de la cámara] (Menú de disparo)........................................461 [Reg. Mi Config.] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados)..........................................46 [Ajuste del botón de función 1]/[Ajuste del botón de función 2] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados) ...............................................................................................47 [Configuración Palanca ADJ ] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados) .................47 Ajuste [Control ISO directo de ADJ.] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados) ....48 Ajuste [Imagen Zoom Digital] (Pestaña de Configuración).................................49 Ajuste [Zoom Por Pasos] (Pestaña de Configuración) ...........................................49 Especificaciones..................................................................................................50 Capacidad de la memoria interna/tarjeta de memoria ........................................56 Apéndices ............................................................................................................60 Accesorios opcionales.......................................................................................................60 Precauciones de uso..........................................................................................................62 Cuidado del equipo y almacenamiento.....................................................................63 Garantía y servicio..............................................................................................................641 Componentes del objetivo 1 3 2 1 Conector 2 Tapa del anillo 3 Objetivo1 Actualización del producto Actualización del firmware de la cámara Cuando acopla por primera vez la unidad cámara al cuerpo de la cámara, la función de actualización de la versión se iniciará automáticamente si el firmware del cuerpo de la cámara tiene que actualizarse. En este caso, actualice el firmware del cuerpo de la cámara utilizando el siguiente procedimiento. Si la versión del firmware ya está actualizada, la función de actualización de la versión no se iniciará y podrá utilizar el objetivo inmediatamente. 1 Compruebe que la cámara esté apagada y acople la unidad cámara al cuerpo de la cámara. • Para obtener más información acerca de cómo acoplar la unidad cámara, consulte la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara.1 2 Encienda la cámara. • Aparecerá un mensaje de confirmación sobre la actualización del firmware. 3 Pulse los botones Fn1/Fn2 para seleccionar [Sí] y, a continuación, pulse el botón MENU/OK. • La actualización del firmware se inicia y los siguientes mensajes aparecerán en la pantalla: [Verif. escribir sobre archivo] [Escribir sobre programa] La cámara se desactivará automáticamente y, a continuación, la volverá a encender. Cuando la cámara encienda de nuevo, aparecerá la pantalla de la versión del firmware y la actualización habrá finalizado.1 Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Para comprobar la versión del firmware seleccione [Versión del firmware] en el menú de configuración. Otra posibilidad es que, con la cámara apagada, mantenga el botón6(Reproducir) pulsado durante más de 1 segundo mientras mantiene pulsado el botón –. La versión del firmware aparecerá en la pantalla durante unos 20 segundos. • Para obtener la información más reciente sobre las actualizaciones del firmware, visite la página web de Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc). Puede descargar las actualizaciones de firmware más recientes para actualizar el equipo.1 Dial hacia arriba/abajo Función adicional del dial hacia arriba/hacia abajo Puede usar el dial hacia arriba/abajo para seleccionar el modo de flash. También puede usar el dial hacia arriba/abajo para seleccionar los ajustes del autodisparador.1 Toma Modo P: Cambio de programas Si coloca el dial de modo en P (modo de cambio de programas), podrá ajustar una combinación de valor de apertura y la velocidad de obturación. Cuando el ajuste ISO está en [Auto] o [Alt Autom.], la cámara ajustará automáticamente la sensibilidad ISO para obtener una exposición óptima. El diagrama de la siguiente página ofrece una estimación aproximada del rango de cambios para varias combinaciones de los valores de apertura y las velocidades de obturación. El rango de cambios se modifica en función del valor de exposición (EV). En este ejemplo, el modo de flash está ajustado a [Flash No] y el ajuste ISO está en [ISO100]. Para los números f más grandes, la apertura se utiliza junto con el filtro ND. En este caso, no cambia el nivel de borrosidad del fondo. El nivel de borrosidad viene dado por valor de apertura (valor F), incluso si se utiliza el filtro ND.1 F16 F11 F15.4 F7.0 F5.6 F3.5 F8 F5.6 F4 F2.8 F2 F1.4 F1 Ev8 Ev7 Ev6 Ev5 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 : Gran angular : Teleobjetivo0 A: Modo de prioridad de apertura Si coloca el dial de modo en A (modo de prioridad de apertura), podrá ajustar manualmente el valor de apertura. Para los números f más grandes, la apertura se utiliza junto con el filtro ND. Cuando se usa un filtro ND, no cambia el nivel de borrosidad del fondo. El número de detenciones de aperturas disponibles varía en función de la posición del zoom (2 detenciones en el extremo de gran angular, 3 detenciones en el teleobjetivo). Cuando el ajuste ISO está en [Auto] o [Alt Autom.], la cámara ajustará automáticamente la sensibilidad ISO para obtener una exposición óptima. S: Modo de prioridad de obturación Si coloca el dial de modo en S (modo de prioridad de obturación), podrá ajustar manualmente la velocidad de obturación. La cámara ajustará automáticamente la sensibilidad en el intervalo de ISO 100 a ISO 3200 con el fin de obtener la mejor exposición independientemente de los ajustes de sensibilidad ISO. Para los números f más grandes, la apertura se utiliza1 junto con el filtro ND. Cuando se usa un filtro ND, no cambia el nivel de borrosidad del fondo. Cuando el ajuste [Amp. autom. veloc. obturac.] en el menú de disparo se ajuste en [On], la cámara ajustará automáticamente la velocidad de apertura para obtener la exposición óptima en caso de que no se pueda obtener utilizando la velocidad de apertura que se ajustó manualmente. El ajuste [Amp. autom. veloc. obturac.] no aparecerá cuando el dial de modo se ha ajustado en un modo distinto a S. Modo M: Exposición manual Si coloca el dial de modo en M (modo de exposición manual), podrá ajustar manualmente el valor de apertura y la velocidad de obturación. Para los números f más grandes, la apertura se utiliza junto con el filtro ND. Cuando se usa un filtro ND, no cambia el nivel de borrosidad del fondo. Si se selecciona [Auto] o [Alt Autom.] en Ajuste ISO, ISO se fijará a 100 mientras la cámara esté en modo de exposición manual. Si se ha ajustado la velocidad de obturador en 1 segundo o más, el máximo ISO disponible es ISO400. La máxima velocidad de obturador disponible es de 30 segundos. Modo Escena Macro Zoom Cuando el dial de modo esté en SCENE, la posición del zoom se optimizará automáticamente al seleccionar el modo [Macro Zoom], de esta manera el sujeto fotografiado será de mayor tamaño que en una fotografía macro normal. En el modo macro zoom no puede usarse el zoom óptico. Para más información sobre métodos de disparo, consulte la “Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara”. Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Se pueden tomar primeros planos manteniendo las distancias que se detallan a continuación: 1cm aprox. (desde la parte delantera del objetivo) Campo de la toma: 19×14mm aprox. (cuando no se usa el zoom digital) Campo de la toma: 4,8×3,6mm aprox. (cuando se usa el zoom digital de 4,0×) • Si [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] es 4:3 en [L], también se puede establecer [Imagen Zoom Digital] en [Rec Área] para activar el zoom con cambio de tamaño automático. (GP. 47) Modo de doble disparo de rango dinámico El“rango dinámico”de una cámara digital se refiere al área de brillo que puede procesarse con la cámara. Al seleccionar el modo de escena [Rango dinámico] y hace la fotografía, la escena se reproduce con una buena transición desde las zonas brillantes a las oscuras, lo que permite capturar una imagen de aspecto más natural. Con la función de doble disparo de rango dinámico, se hacen dos fotografías consecutivas con exposiciones diferentes, y luego se combinan entre sí las zonas con la exposición apropiada. Este modo utiliza un mayor tiempo de toma que otros modos, así que tenga cuidado con la vibración de la cámara al hacer las fotografías. El símboloJaparece cuando pulsa el disparador hasta la mitad. Dos fotografías consecutivas Combinadas y guardadas Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Incluso cuando la cámara está acoplada a un trípode, puede que se mueva al pulsar el disparador. Para conseguir una mayor estabilidad, se recomienda utilizar el autodisparador o el interruptor del cable CA-1 (se vende por separado). Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Esta función no está disponible cuando [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] está en modo RAW. • Al utilizar esta función, el zoom digital se desactivará. • Al utilizar esta función, el flash se ajustará en Flash No. • La función de doble disparo de rango dinámico podría no ser efectiva si la ubicación de la fotografía es excesivamente brillante u oscura. • Se recomienda la medición [Multi]. • Si se fotografía a un sujeto que se esté moviendo rápidamente, podría salir distorsionado en la imagen grabada. • El parpadeo de luces fluorescentes puede aparecer como bandas horizontales. Las luces fluorescentes también pueden afectar a los colores y al brillo. Efecto de expansión de rango dinámico La opción [Expansión de rango dinámico] del menú de toma ofrece cinco niveles de expansión de rango dinámico: [Auto], [Muy bajo], [Bajo], [Medio] y [Alto]. Cuanto mayor sea el efecto de expansión, mayor será el rango de brillo procesado por la cámara. Para cambiar el ajuste, seleccione el modo de escena [Rango dinámico] y cambie el ajuste [Expansión de rango dinámico] en el menú de disparo. Tras seleccionar cualquier ajuste excepto [Auto], pulse el botón Fn2 para mostrar [Opciones de expansión de rango dinámico] en la pantalla. Seleccione el rango de tonos de la prioridad dada para el rango dinámico ampliado de [Luz intens], [Sombras] y [Off]. Expansión de rango dinámico + fotografía normal Si se ha seleccionado [On] en [+ fotografía normal] en el menú de toma, la cámara grabará dos copias de cada foto: una con rango dinámico ampliado y otra con exposición normal. Las dos copias se muestran en la pantalla después de haberlas tomado, con la copia sin modificar a la derecha y la copia con rango dinámico ampliado a la izquierda. Para cambiar el ajuste, seleccione el modo de escena [Rango dinámico] y cambie el ajuste [+ fotografía normal] en el menú de disparo. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Después del disparo se muestran los histogramas de las imágenes. Cuando [Tiempo de Confirmación LCD] de la pestaña de Configuración está ajustado en [Mantener], la pantalla de confirmación sigue mostrándose para que pueda confirmar los histogramas y comparar fácilmente las imágenes. AF multiobjetivo Cuando pulsa a medias el disparador, la cámara determina automáticamente varias posiciones de enfoque. Cuando pulsa luego el disparador hasta el fondo, la cámara se va desplazando entre las distintas posiciones de enfoque, y toma 5 fotografías consecutivas. Las 5 fotografías consecutivas se agrupan formando un conjunto y se graban como un archivo MP. Esta función es especialmente útil para fotografía telefoto y fotografía en modo macro. Si la cámara puede enfocar, se mostrará un iconoVverde. Si la cámara no puede enfocar, el iconoVrojo parpadeará. Las posiciones de enfoque seleccionadas por la cámara sólo se muestran durante la reproducción. * MP es un formato de archivo para grabar un conjunto de fotografías. Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • No se puede usar el flash. • No se puede usar la función de corrección de la vibración de la cámara. Si se ajusta [Multiobjet. AF] mientras está activada la función de corrección de la vibración de la cámara,Ecambia aF. • Esta función no está disponible cuando [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] se ha ajustado en [RAW]. • Cuando [Modo Continuo] está ajustado en cualquier opción excepto en [Off], podrá seleccionar los ajustes AF multiobjetivo, pero no se utilizará la función. • El intervalo de disparo no está disponible cuando está ajustado el AF multiobjetivo. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Si esta función está encendida al utilizar el zoom digital, éste se desactiva y la fotografía se realiza con la máxima ampliación para el zoom óptico (10,7 aumentos). • [Balance Blancos] depende del ajuste de [Auto] aunque esté ajustado a [Multi-P AUTO]. M-Cont + (Baja) En este modo, la cámara dispara mientras se pulsa el disparador, pero únicamente se graban los 15 últimos fotogramas (aproximadamente los tres últimos segundos del disparo) para crear un único archivo con varias imágenes (MP). Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ El tiempo necesario para grabar 15 fotogramas puede aumentar si hay poca iluminación. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2La cámara graba los 15 fotogramas tomados en los últimos 3 s del disparo. 1Cuando retira el dedo del disparador...0 Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • El tamaño de imagen está fijado en 3648×2736 NORMAL. • La fecha y orientación de cada toma de la secuencia de graban por separado.1 M-Cont + (Alta) En este modo, la cámara dispara mientras se pulsa el disparador, pero únicamente se graban los 26 últimos fotogramas (aproximadamente los últimos 0,9 segundos del disparo) para crear un único archivo con varias imágenes (MP). Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Si se fotografía a un sujeto que se esté moviendo rápidamente, podría salir distorsionado en la imagen grabada. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2La cámara graba los 26 fotogramas tomados en los últimos 0,9 s del disparo. 1Cuando retira el dedo del disparador... Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • El tamaño de imagen está fijado en 1728×1296 NORMAL. • La fecha y orientación de la última toma de la secuencia también se utilizan para los fotogramas restantes. Veloc. Cont (Baja)/Veloc. Cont (Alto) Se graban 120 imágenes consecutivas en un segundo (Veloc. Cont (Alta)) o dos segundos (Veloc Cont (Baja)). Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Si se fotografía a un sujeto que se esté moviendo rápidamente, podría salir distorsionado en la imagen grabada. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • El tamaño de imagen está fijado en 640×480 VGA. • La fecha y orientación de la última toma de la secuencia también se utilizan para los fotogramas restantes. Enfoque de la exposición automática El enfoque de la exposición automática es una de las funciones disponibles cuando se utiliza el ajuste de exposición automática. El enfoque de la exposición automática dispara 5 disparos consecutivos automáticamente mientras se cambia gradualmente la posición del enfoque. Puede ajustar el intervalo utilizado para cambiar la posición del enfoque. 1 Seleccione [Ajst.Exp.Autom.] en el menú de disparo y pulse el botón Fn2. 2 Pulse el botón +/– para seleccionar [ENF. EXP AUTO] y pulse el botón Fn2. 3 Pulse los botones Fn1/Fn2 para seleccionar el intervalo de posición de enfoque y pulse el botón MENU/OK. • El ajuste se guarda y la pantalla vuelve al menú de disparo. 4 Pulse el botón MENU/OK, o bien pulse el botón Fn1 y luego el botón MENU/OK. • Aparece el símbolo en la pantalla. 5 Pulse el disparador hasta la mitad. • La cámara enfoca según el ajuste de la opción [Enfoque]. 6 Pulse el disparador hasta el fondo. • La cámara toma 5 fotografías consecutivas basándose en la posición del enfoque del paso 5. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Cuando [Enfoque] está ajustado a [MF], la primera fotografía se toma en la posición de enfoque ajustada sin ser medida. • [Balance Blancos] depende del ajuste de [Auto] aunque esté ajustado a [Multi-P AUTO]. • Las fotografías se toman y se graban en el siguiente orden: Posición de enfoque Parte delantera Centro (*) ? Parte trasera Orden de toma 2 3 1 4 5 Orden de grabación 1 2 3 4 5 * Enfoque en la posición establecida para el ajuste [Enfoque] en el menú de disparo. • Al utilizar esta función, el flash se ajustará en apagado. • Cuando [Enfoque] está ajustado en [Multiobjet. AF], podrá cambiar el ajuste del enfoque, pero no se utilizará la función. • Cuando la [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] está ajustada en [RAW], puede cambiar el ajuste de reducción de ruido pero dicha función no se utilizará. • Cuando [Modo Continuo] está ajustado en cualquier opción excepto en [Off], podrá cambiar los ajustes del enfoque, pero no se utilizará la función. Ajuste [Reducción ruido] Active la reducción de ruido cuando haga fotografías. Elija entre [Off], [Auto], [Bajo], [Alto] o [MAX]. El tiempo necesario para grabar imágenes varía según la opción seleccionada. Puede utilizar esta función para disparar fotografías cuando el modo de escena esté en un modo distinto de [Retrato], [Deportes] o [M. Cor. Trap.]. Ajuste del balance de blancos Cuando utilice este objetivo podrá ajustar el balance de blancos en [Incand.1] o [Incand. 2]. Utilice el ajuste [Incand. 1] o [Incand. 2] cuando dispare con bombilla incandescente. Al utilizar [Incand. 2] dejará un tinte un poco más rojo, comparado con [Incand. 1]. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Cuando utilice [Incand. 2] podrá disparar con los mismos sombreados del color como con el ajuste [Incand.] descrito en la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara. Reproducción Visualización de información de la unidad cámara La información de [A12], [S10] y [P10] para cada unidad cámara pueden visualizarse en Visualización de info detallada y en el archivo Exif. Ajustes Ajustes del menú de disparo en modo [Macro Zoom] Cuando está seleccionado [Macro Zoom], los elementos del menú de disparo que se pueden seleccionar y los valores predeterminados son los siguientes: Opción Ajuste predeterminado Resolución/Tamaño de imagen L 4:3 NORMAL Enfoque AF Pre-AF Off Medición Exposición Multi Ajustes de Imagen Estándar Modo Continuo Off Ajst.Exp.Autom. Off Compensación expo. flash 0.00 Opción Ajuste predeterminado Luz Flash Manual 1/2 Ajuste sincronizado de flash 1ª cortina Reducción de ruido Off Reducción de ruido ISO > ISO 401 Corrección de distorsión Off Autodisparador Personalizado 2 imágenes, 5 segundos Imprimir Fecha Off Compensación Exposición 0.0 Balance Blancos Multi-P AUTO Ajuste ISO Auto Corre. Vibrac. de la cámara On1 Ajustes del menú de disparo en modo [Rango dinámico] Cuando está seleccionado [Rango dinámico], los elementos del menú de disparo que se pueden seleccionar y los valores predeterminados son los siguientes: Opción Ajuste predeterminado Resolución/Tamaño de imagen L 4:3 NORMAL Enfoque Multi AF Distancia de enfoque inst. 2,5m Instantánea pulsación compl. On Pre-AF Off Medición Exposición Multi Ajustes de Imagen Estándar Reducción de ruido Off Reducción de ruido ISO > ISO 401 Corrección de distorsión Off Temporizador Personalizado 2 imágenes, 5 segundos Imprimir Fecha Off Opción Ajuste predeterminado Compensación Exposición 0.0 Balance Blancos Multi-P AUTO Compensación Balance Blancos A:0, G:0 Ajuste ISO Auto Corre. Vibrac. de la cámara On Expansión de rango dinámico Auto + fotografía normal Off Ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] (menú de disparo) Hay disponibles las siguientes opciones de calidad de imagen, tamaño de imagen y relación de aspecto para el ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] en el menú de disparo. El tamaño de archivo de una fotografía dependerá de la combinación de calidad y tamaño de imagen que se utilice. Al grabar vídeos se puede seleccionar el formato de vídeo. Fotografías Opción Relación de aspecto Compresión Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) RAW 16:9* 2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 3648×2048 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 3648×2736 3:2* 2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 3648×2432 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA* 1 2736×2736 L (grande) 16:9* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2048 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2736 3:2* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3648×2432 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL 2736×2736 M (mediano) 16:9* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3264×1840 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2448 3:2* 2 FINE/NORMAL 3264×2176 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL 2448×2448 Opción Relación de aspecto Compresión Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Si se selecciona [RAW], éste será el ajuste empleado para la copia en JPEG. *2 Según el área fotografiada, pueden aparecer bandas negras en la parte superior e inferior de la imagen visualizada. *3 Según el área fotografiada, pueden aparecer bandas negras en los lados derecho e izquierdo de la imagen visualizada. Vídeos Opción Formato de vídeo HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 Ajuste [Ajuste ISO] (Menú de disparo) Si se selecciona [Auto] y no se utiliza el flash, el rango de sensibilidad empleado será el siguiente. Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Valor predeterminado Mínimo Máximo RAW 100 100 200 L 100 100 200 M 100 100 200 5M 100 100 200 3M 100 100 200 1M 100 100 238 VGA 100 100 283 • Si se selecciona [Auto] y se utiliza el flash, la sensibilidad empleada aumentará hasta un nivel equivalente a ISO400. Ajuste [Corre. Vibrac. de la cámara] (Menú de disparo) Cuando [Corre. Vibrac. de la cámara] está ajustado en [On] se minimiza la borrosidad debida a la vibración de la cámara. Si se activa la corrección de la vibración de la cámara, aparece en la pantalla el símboloE. [Reg. Mi Config.] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados) En [Reg. Mi Config.], también se pueden elegir las opciones [Zoom Por Pasos] y [Posición del zoom] en el configuración. Para más información sobre las demás opciones disponibles, consulte la “Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara”. [Ajuste del botón de función 1]/[Ajuste del botón de función 2] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados) • [Zoom Por Pasos] y [AF/Multiob. AF] puede asignarse a los botones Fn1/Fn2. • [AF/Snap], [Compen. BB], [Zoom Por Pasos] y [AF/Multiob. AF] no son accesibles pulsando los botones Fn1/Fn2 si el modo de escena es [Macro Zoom]. • Cuando el modo de escena se ha ajustado en [Rango dinámico], las siguientes funciones no estarán disponibles incluso si pulsa el botón Fn1 o Fn2: [JPEGBRAW], [Modo Continuo], [Ajst.Exp.Autom.], [Comp. flash], [Luz Flash], [Zoom Por Pasos] y [AF/Multiob. AF]. [Configuración Palanca ADJ ] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados) Cuando el modo de escena se ajuste en [Rango dinámico], los ajustes registrados en [Configuración Palanca ADJ] son [Compensación Exposición] y [Balance Blancos]. Los ajustes disponibles no se pueden cambiar. Ajuste [Control ISO directo de ADJ.] (Pestaña de ajustes personalizados) Cuando el ajuste [Control ISO directo de ADJ.] en la pestaña de ajustes personalizados se ajusta en [On], puede empujar la palanca ADJ. hacia un lado cuando dispare para cambiar el ajuste ISO. El ajuste predeterminado es [Off]. Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Puede usarse la palanca ADJ. para ajustar la sensibilidad cuando el disparador esté pulsado hasta la mitad de su recorrido en los modos de cambio de programas y prioridad de apertura (en el modo de cambio de programas, puede ajustarse la sensibilidad incluso después de soltar el disparador, siempre que se visualicen la velocidad de obturación y apertura). Tenga en cuenta que una vez que ajuste la sensibilidad de esta manera, no podrá volver a seleccionar [Auto] ni [Alt Autom]. • En el modo de prioridad de velocidad de obturación y de exposición manual no podrá utilizar la palanca ADJ. para cambiar el ajuste ISO. Ajuste [Imagen Zoom Digital] (Pestaña de Configuración) El tamaño de la imagen grabada varía según el zoom con cambio de tamaño automático, tal como se indica a continuación. Índice de zoom Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Índice de zoom Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Aprox. 1,0× L Aprox. 1,8× 3M Aprox. 1,1× M Aprox. 2,9× 1M Aprox. 1,4× 5M Aprox. 5,7× VGA Ajuste [Zoom Por Pasos] (Pestaña de Configuración) Si está activado [On] el [Zoom Por Pasos], la distancia focal para el zoom queda fijada en ocho pasos (que equivalen a 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm, 135 mm, 200 mm y 300 mm*). * Equivalente a la de una cámara de 35 mm.0 Especificaciones La especificaciones corresponden a la unidad cámara montada en un cuerpo GXR. Píxeles efectivos Aproximadamente 10,0 millones Sensor de imagen Sensor 1/2,3" CMOS (píxeles totales: 10,6 millones aprox.) Objetivo Distancia focal De 4,9mm a 52,5mm (formato equivalente a 35 mm: de 28mm a 300mm) Apertura (número f) f/3,5– f/5,6 Rango de enfoque (desde el objetivo) Disparo normal: De 30cm aprox. a 8 (gran angular) y de 150 cm aprox. a 8 (teleobjetivo) Fotografía macro: De 1cm aprox. a 8 (gran angular/macro zoom) y de 27cm aprox. a 8 (teleobjetivo) Construcción 10 elementos en 7 grupos (4 elementos asféricos con 5 superficies) Zoom Zoom óptico de 10,7×; zoom digital de 4,0× (2,8× para vídeos, imagen HD); zoom con cambio de tamaño automático de 5,7× aprox. (VGA)1 Modo de enfoque Multi AF; Spot AF; MF: Snap; 8 ; Multiobjet. AF (luz auxiliar AF y ajustes del enfoque disponibles) Velocidad de obturación Fotografías 1/2000–30s (los límites superior e inferior varían según el modo de toma y flash) Vídeos 1/30–1/2000s Control de la exposición Medición Medición múltiple (256 segmentos), medición con ponderación central, medición puntual (medición TTL con Bloq. AE) Modo Programa AE, prioridad de apertura AE, exposición manual, prioridad de obturación AE, función Cambiar objeto Compensación de exposición Manual (+4,0 a –4,0EV en incrementos de 1/3EV o 1/2EV), horquillado automático (–2EV a +2EV en incrementos de 1/3EV o 1/2EV) Rango de vínculo de exposición (modo de disparo automático, medición con ponderación central) Extremo gran angular: de 3,2 EV a 16,2 EV; extremo teleobjetivo: de 4,6 EV a 18,4 EV (rango de vínculo para ISO convertido automático según el EV de ISO100) • Al tomar fotografías en entornos con EV de 6,0 o menos, por cada 1,0 EV que el rango del vínculo de exposición disminuye, la cámara cambiará el ajuste 0,25 EV hacia el lado de bajo brillo. La cantidad máxima de cambio es 1,0 EV. Sensibilidad ISO (sensibilidad de salida estándar) Auto, Alt Autom., ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 Balance de blancos Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Exterior, Nublado, Luz Incand.1, Luz Incand.2, Luz Fluorescente, Ajuste Manual, Detalle; horquillado de balance de blancos Flash Alcance (flash incorporado) 0,2m - 4,0m aprox. (gran angular), 0,27m - 2,5m aprox. (teleobjetivo) Modo de disparo Auto, cambio de programas, prioridad de apertura, prioridad de obturación, manual, escena (vídeo, retrato, deportes, paisaje, paisaje noche, corrección trap., doble disparo con rango dinámico, macro zoom),“Mi Config.” Modo Continuo Número de imágenes tomadas en modo Continuo (tamaño de imagen: RAW) Reducción de ruido desactivada: 5 imágenes, Reducción de ruido activada (Baja, Alta o MAX): 4 imágenes Número de fotografías tomadas en M-Cont + (1 grupo) Bajo (3648×2736) : 15 fotografías (5 fotogramas/seg), Alto (1728×1296) : 26 fotografías (30 fotogramas/seg) Modo Continuo Número de fotografías tomadas en Veloc. Cont (1 grupo) Bajo (640×480) : 120 fotografías (60 fotogramas/seg), Alto (640×480) : 120 fotografías (120 fotogramas/seg) Compresión*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Fotografías 3648×2048, 3648×2736, 3648×2432, 2736×2736, 3264×1840, 3264×2448, 3264×2176, 2448×2448, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Vídeos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Tamaño de archivo (aprox.) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 13.053KB/fotograma, FINE: 14.289KB/fotograma, VGA: 11.477 KB/fotograma 4:3 NORMAL: 17.332KB/fotograma, FINE: 18.984KB/fotograma, VGA: 15.226 KB/fotograma 3:2 NORMAL: 15.440KB/fotograma, FINE: 16.909KB/fotograma, VGA: 13.568 KB/fotograma 1:1 NORMAL: 13.053KB/fotograma, FINE: 14.292KB/fotograma, VGA: 11.474 KB/fotograma Tamaño de archivo (aprox.) L 16:9 NORMAL: 1.630KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.779KB/fotograma 4:3 NORMAL: 2.169KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.705KB/fotograma 3:2 NORMAL: 1.931KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.295KB/fotograma 1:1 NORMAL: 1.633KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.785KB/fotograma M 16:9 NORMAL: 1.330KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.254KB/fotograma 4:3 NORMAL: 1.761KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.990KB/fotograma 3:2 NORMAL: 1.568KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.660KB/fotograma 1:1 NORMAL: 1.327KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.249KB/fotograma 5M 4:3 FINE: 2.288KB/fotograma 3M 4:3 FINE: 1.474KB/fotograma 1M 4:3 FINE: 813KB/fotograma VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/fotograma Vida de la batería DB-90: aprox. 440 disparos *3 (basada en el estándar CIPA) Dimensiones (an.×al.×pr.) Sólo unidad cámara: 68,7mm×57,9mm×44mm (Basando en la pauta de CIPA) Al estar montada en el cuerpo de la cámara: 113,9mm×70,2mm×49,8mm (Basando en la pauta de CIPA) Peso (aprox.) Sólo unidad cámara: 160g (sin incluir la tapa del objetivo ni la tapa del conector) Al estar montada en el cuerpo de la cámara: 367g (incluida la tapa del objetivo, la batería y la tarjeta de memoria SD) Temperatura de funcionamiento 0°C a 40°C Humedad de funcionamiento 85% como máximo Temperatura de almacenamiento –20°C a 60°C *1 Las opciones disponibles pueden variar según el tamaño de la imagen. *2 También se graba un archivo JPEG (el archivo JPEG puede ser un archivo de calidad FINE o NORMAL con las dimensiones del archivo RAW o un archivo VGA con un tamaño de 640×480 píxeles). Los archivos RAW utilizan el formato DNG estándar promocionado por Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Sólo para referencia, el número real de tomas varía considerablemente según el uso que se le dé a la cámara. Se recomienda llevar alguna batería de repuesto si se va a usar la cámara durante un largo período de tiempo. Capacidad de la memoria interna/tarjeta de memoria Los siguientes valores se presentan como referencia de la capacidad de almacenamiento de la memoria interna y las tarjetas de memoria de distintos tamaños, por calidad de imagen y tamaño de imagen, utilizando una calidad de imagen FINE. Fotografías Compresión Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB RAW* FINE 3648×2048 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217 3648×2736 4 50 103 203 415 831 1688 3648×2432 5 57 116 228 466 934 1874 2736×2736 6 67 137 270 551 1105 2217 L FINE 3648×2048 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546 3648×2736 22 242 491 965 1973 3953 7930 3648×2432 24 272 553 1087 2222 4452 8930 2736×2736 29 323 653 1284 2624 5257 10546 M FINE 3264×1840 36 397 808 1588 3245 6502 13043 3264×2448 27 300 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 3264×2176 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 2448×2448 36 400 808 1588 3245 6502 13043 Compresión Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 5M FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Si se selecciona [RAW], éste será el ajuste empleado para la copia en JPEG. Modo Continuo Modo Continuo Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB M-Cont + (Baja) 3648×2736 38 414 842 1653 3379 6769 13579 M-Cont + (Alta) 1728×1296 131 1438 2926 5746 11745 23530 47202 Veloc. Cont 640×480 692 7553 15359 30159 61643 123489 247716 Vídeos Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 1280×720 30 fotogramas/ segundo 16 seg. 3 min. 3 seg. 6 min. 14 seg. 12 min. 14 seg. 25 min. 1 seg. 50 min. 7 seg. 100 min. 33 seg. 640×480 30 fotogramas/ segundo 49 seg. 8 min. 55 seg. 18 min. 8 seg. 35 min. 38 seg. 72 min. 50 seg. 145 min. 54 seg. 292 min. 41 seg. 320×240 30 fotogramas/ segundo 1 min. 59 seg. 21 min. 39 seg. 44 min. 2 seg. 86 min. 28 seg. 176 min. 44 seg. 354 min. 3 seg. 710 min. 13 seg. Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ El tamaño máximo para una grabación ininterrumpida de un solo vídeo es de 4 GB. El tiempo máximo de grabación es de unos 12 minutos en tamaño 1280 × 720, de unos 37 mintuos en tamaño 640 × 480 y de unos 90 minutos si se graba a 320 × 240. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Si se selecciona el tamaño 1280 × 720, se recomienda usar tarjetas de memoria SD/SDHC de Class 6 o mayor velocidad de transmisión mínima.0 Apéndices Accesorios opcionales La RICOH LENS puede usarse con los artículos (se venden por separado) que se relacionan a continuación. Tapa del objetivo (LC-2) Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Los objetivos de conversión, las capuchas u otros adaptadores que se venden por separado no se pueden acoplar a este objetivo. • Antes de usar un accesorio opcional, véase la documentación que viene con el producto. • Para ver lo último en accesorios opcionales, visite el sitio web de Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).1 Desmontaje y montaje de la tapa del anillo ------------------------------------ Retire la tapa del anillo cuando esté usando la tapa de anillo opcional (LC-2). Desmontaje de la tapa del anillo Gire la tapa del anillo en sentido contrario a las agujas del reloj mientras la cámara está apagada y retírela de la unidad cámara. Montaje de la tapa del anillo Con la cámara apagada, alinee la marca de la tapa del anillo (2) con la marca de la unidad cámara (1) y gire la tapa del anillo en sentido horario hasta que haga clic. 2 1 Precauciones de uso • La garantía proporcionada con este producto sólo es válida dentro del país de compra. • En caso de que el producto presente un defecto o fallo de funcionamiento mientras está fuera del país, el fabricante no asumirá ninguna responsabilidad en cuanto a la reparación del producto localmente ni a los gastos incurridos por esta. • No deje caer el equipo ni lo someta a fuertes golpes. • Cuando transporte el equipo, procure que no golpee otros objetos. Se requiere especial atención para proteger el objetivo. • Los cambios bruscos de temperatura podrían causar condensación, dando lugar a condensación visible dentro del objetivo o fallos de funcionamiento en el equipo. Esto puede evitarse colocando el equipo en una bolsa de plástico para atenuar el cambio de temperatura, y retirándolo sólo después de que el aire de la bolsa alcance la misma temperatura que el entorno. • Mantenga seco el equipo y evite sujetarlo con las manos húmedas. La no observancia de estas precauciones podría causar un fallo de funcionamiento del equipo o una descarga eléctrica. • Mantenga limpio el conector. Consejo: evitar la condensación--------------------------------------------------- Es particularmente probable que se produzca condensación si se desplaza a una zona con una brusca diferencia de temperatura, si la humedad es alta, en una habitación fría después de haber encendido el calefactor o cuando la cámara está expuesta al aire frío de un aparato de aire acondicionado u otro dispositivo. Cuidado del equipo y almacenamiento Cuidado del equipo • Las fotografías pueden verse afectadas por huellas y otras materias extrañas en el objetivo. Evite tocar el objetivo con los dedos. Retire el polvo o pelusa con un soplador, que puede adquirir en una tienda de suministro de cámaras, o limpie suavemente el objetivo con un paño seco y suave. • Limpie el equipo a fondo después de utilizarlo en la playa o manejar cosméticos. No exponga el equipo a sustancias volátiles como disolvente, benceno o pesticidas. La no observancia de esta precaución podría causar daños en el equipo o en su acabado. • En el caso improbable de fallo de funcionamiento, visite un centro de reparaciones Ricoh. • Este equipo es un dispositivo de alta precisión. No lo desmonte. Almacenamiento No guarde la cámara donde pueda estar expuesta a: calor o humedad excesivos; grandes cambios de temperatura o humedad; polvo, suciedad o arena; fuertes vibraciones; contacto prolongado con productos químicos, incluyendo bolas de alcanfor y otros repelentes de insectos, o con productos de vinilo o caucho; fuertes campos magnéticos (por ejemplo, en las proximidades de un monitor, transformador o imán). Garantía y servicio 1. Este producto está cubierto por una garantía limitada. Durante el periodo de garantía mencionado en la Garantía suministrada con el equipo, cualquier pieza defectuosa se reparará gratuitamente. En caso de fallo de funcionamiento del equipo, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor al que compró el equipo o con su centro de reparaciones Ricoh más cercano. Tenga en cuenta que no se le reembolsará el coste de llevar el equipo al centro de reparaciones Ricoh. 2. Esta garantía no cubre ningún daño resultante de: 1 no seguimiento de las instrucciones del manual de instrucciones; 2 reparación, modificación o revisión del producto no realizadas por uno de los centros de servicio autorizados incluidos en el manual de instrucciones; 3 incendio, desastre natural, fuerza mayor, relámpago, tensión anómala, etc.; 4 almacenamiento inadecuado (indicado en la “Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara”), fuga de batería y otros líquidos, moho o cualquier otro cuidado insuficiente del equipo. 5 inmersión en agua (inundación), exposición a alcohol u otras bebidas, infiltración de arena o barro, choque físico, caída del equipo o presión sobre el equipo y otras causas no naturales. 3. Cuando finalice el periodo de garantía, usted será responsable de los gastos de reparación, incluyendo los incurridos en un centro de servicio autorizado. 4. Será responsable de todos los gastos de reparación, incluso dentro del periodo de garantía, si no se presenta la tarjeta de garantía o si el nombre del distribuidor o la fecha de compra se han modificado o no están indicados en la tarjeta. 5. Los gastos de revisión e inspección completa por petición especial del cliente se cargarán al cliente, tanto si se producen durante el periodo de garantía como si no. 6. Cualquier daño consecuente derivado de un fallo del equipo, como gastos incurridos al tomar fotografías o pérdida de ganancias esperadas, no será reembolsado, independientemente de si ocurre dentro o fuera del periodo de garantía. 7. La garantía sólo es válida en el país en el que se compró el equipo. * Las disposiciones anteriores se refieren a reparaciones ofrecidas sin cargos y no limitan sus derechos legales. * La intención de las disposiciones anteriores también se describe en la tarjeta de garantía proporcionada con este equipo. 8. Las piezas esenciales para el mantenimiento del equipo (es decir, componentes necesarios para mantener las funciones y calidad de la cámara) estarán disponibles durante un periodo de cinco años a partir de la descontinuación del equipo. 9. Tenga en cuenta que si el equipo se daña seriamente por inundación, inmersión, infiltración de arena o barro, choques violentos o caída, es posible que no pueda repararse ni restaurarse a su estado original. Notas------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Antes de enviar la cámara para repararla, compruebe el cuerpo de la cámara y vuelva a leer el manual de instrucciones para garantizar un funcionamiento correcto. • Algunas reparaciones requieren mucho tiempo. • Cuando envíe el equipo a un centro de servicio, incluya una nota describiendo la pieza defectuosa y el problema con la mayor precisión posible. • Retire todos los accesorios no relacionados con el problema antes de enviar la cámara al centro de servicio.*L452 3973A* Si surge un problema Oficinas de Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN) (desde España) 91 406 9148 (desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2010 julio SP E Impreso en China GR LENS A12 28mm F2.5 Mode d’emploi Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif. Contenu de l’emballage Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous. Unité appareil photo Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil. Capuchon de l’objectif Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. ?Mode d’emploi (le présentmanuel) ? Garantie Capuchon du connecteur Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. Étui souple Introduction Pour utiliser cet objectif, vous devez l’installer sur un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Ce mode d’emploi décrit les fonctions et les consignes d’utilisation qui ne sont valides que lorsque cette unité appareil photo est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR. Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir une utilisation sans danger. Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants. Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires, est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits. Exonération de responsabilité Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente. © 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout moment et sans avis préalable. Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel. Mesures de sécurité Symboles d’avertissement Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens. Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous. Danger Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Avertissement Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Attention Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées. Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites. Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action spécifique est interdite. Exemples = Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en toute sécurité. Danger Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique. Avertissement Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants. Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène, de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion, d’incendie ou de brûlure. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident. Attention Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge électrique. Consignes de sécurité relatives aux accessoires Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les instructions fournies avec ce produit.10 Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3 Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 6 Nomenclature de l’objectif...............................................................................13 Mise à jour du produit.......................................................................................14 Mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo.....................................................14 Prise de vue..........................................................................................................17 Fonctions de prise de vue macro..................................................................................17 Mode P : Changement de programme.......................................................................18 Mode M : Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................20 Lecture..................................................................................................................21 Affichage des informations sur l’unité appareil photo .........................................21 Table des matières11 Réglages...............................................................................................................22 Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue)..............................................22 Photos...........................................................................................................................23 Vidéos............................................................................................................................24 Réglage [Réduction bruit] (Menu de prise de vue) ................................................25 Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (Menu prise de vue) .........................................................26 [Agrand. affich] (Menu de prise de vue).....................................................................27 [Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées)..........................................................28 [Confirmation du déclencheur] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées)...28 Réglages de la manette ADJ. (Menu onglet des options personnalisées).....29 Réglages des touches Fn1/Fn2 (Menu onglet des options personnalisées)....29 [Supprimer Mes Réglages] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées).........30 [Rétablir valeurs par défaut] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées)......30 Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration) ..........................31 [Réglages bague mise au point] (Onglet de configuration)................................321 [Réglage Zone AF Spot] (Menu onglet de configuration)....................................33 Caractéristiques..................................................................................................34 Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................40 Annexes................................................................................................................43 Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................43 Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................44 Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................46 Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................481 Nomenclature de l’objectif 1 2 3 1 Connecteur 2 Bague de mise au point 3 Objectif1 Mise à jour du produit Mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo Lorsque vous fixez pour la première fois l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil, la fonction de mise à jour de version démarre automatiquement si le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil doit être mis à jour. Dans ce cas, mettez à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil comme suit. Si la version du micrologiciel est déjà à jour, la fonction de mise à jour de version ne démarre pas et vous pouvez utiliser l’objectif immédiatement. 1 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension et fixez l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil. • Pour en savoir plus sur la fixation de l’unité appareil photo, reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.1 2 Mettez l’appareil photo sous tension. • Un message de confirmation relatif à la mise à jour du micrologiciel s’affiche. 3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner [Oui], puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. • La mise à jour du micrologiciel démarre et les messages suivants s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. [Vérification du fichier de réécriture] L’appareil photo est automatiquement mis hors tension puis sous tension. Après le redémarrage de l’appareil photo, l’écran de version du micrologiciel s’affiche et la mise à jour est terminée.1 Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Pour confirmer la version du micrologiciel, sélectionnez [Version du micrologiciel] dans le menu de configuration. Vous pouvez également, avec l’appareil photo hors tension, maintenir la touche 6 (Lecture) enfoncée pendant plus d’une seconde tout en maintenant la touche – enfoncée. La version du micrologiciel s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos pendant 20 secondes environ. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les mises à jour du micrologiciel, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc). Vous pouvez télécharger les dernières mises à jour du micrologiciel pour mettre à jour votre équipement.1 Prise de vue Fonctions de prise de vue macro Les fonctions Macrophotographie, Cible Macro, Macro Auto et Affichage de la distance de prise de vue minimale au cours des fonctions de prise de vue macro ne sont pas disponibles avec l’objectif A12 28 mm F2.5.1 Mode P : Changement de programme Le schéma à la page suivante fournit une estimation de la plage de décalage des différentes combinaisons de valeurs d’ouverture et de vitesses d’obturation. Les valeurs réelles peuvent variées selon la valeur d’exposition (EV). Dans ces exemples, le mode Flash est défini sur [Flash Non] et la sensibilité ISO est définie sur [ISO200].1 Ev5 Ev6 Ev7 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 Ev-1 Ev-2 Ev-3 F16 F22 F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8 F2.0 F1.4 F1.0 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20 F22.0 F2.50 Mode M : Exposition manuelle Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO sera fixée à 200 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle. 1 Lecture Affichage des informations sur l’unité appareil photo L’informations sur [A12 28mm] de l’unité appareil photo est affichent sur l’écran des informations détaillées. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- L’informations sur [A12 28mm] de l’unité appareil photo est affichent également dans le fichier Exif. Réglages Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue) Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/Taille] du menu de prise de vue. La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/ taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez sélectionner la taille de la vidéo. Photos Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2848×2848 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304 Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG. *2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut et en bas de l’affichage de la photo. *3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo. Vidéos Paramètre Taille vidéo HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 Réglage [Réduction bruit] (Menu de prise de vue) Réduisez le bruit lorsque vous prenez des photos. Choisissez parmi [Non], [Auto], [Faible], [Forte] ou [MAX]. Le temps nécessaire à l’enregistrement des images varie en fonction de l’option sélectionnée. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction lorsque [Portrait], [Sport] ou [Correction biais] est sélectionné pour le mode scène. Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (Menu prise de vue) • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la sensibilité utilisée devient équivalente à la sensibilité ISO800. • Lorsque [Auto] est sélectionné et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, les valeurs minimales et maximales respectives pour la sensibilité ISO seront 200 et 400, quelle que soit la taille de pixel (pixels). [Agrand. affich] (Menu de prise de vue) Si vous déplacez la cible avec les touches de direction (+/-/Fn1/Fn2) et appuyez de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK, la position de la cible sera agrandie, ce qui vous permettra de vérifier la mise au point. En appuyant de nouveau de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK, vous pouvez revenir à la vue standard depuis la vue agrandie. En appuyant de manière prolongée sur la touche t (retardateur) ou en sélectionnant [Agrandissement] dans le menu des réglages, vous pouvez régler l’agrandissement de l’affichage. Sélectionnez [2 ×], [4 ×] ou [8 ×] à l’aide de la touche +/-, puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Agrand. affich] dans [Réglages touches Fn1/Fn2] de l’onglet des options personnalisées. [Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées) Dans [Enr. Mes réglages], vous pouvez également définir les options [Réglages bague mise au point] et [Réglage Zone AF Spot] dans le menu Config. Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ». [Confirmation du déclencheur] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées) Lorsque [Confirmation du déclencheur] est défini sur [ADJ./DIRECT] dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, une pression à mi-course sur le déclencheur finalise les réglages en mode ADJ. et sur l’écran DIRECT, et vous pouvez alors prendre des photos. Lorsque [ADJ.] est défini, les réglages du mode ADJ. sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Lorsque [DIRECT] est défini, les réglages de l’écran DIRECT sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Une fois la prise de vue terminée, le système revient à l’écran de contrôle. Réglages de la manette ADJ. (Menu onglet des options personnalisées) Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Rapport d’affichage] dans [Réglage 1 de la manette ADJ.] à [Réglage 4 de la manette ADJ.] dans l’onglet des options personnalisées. Si vous définissez la fonction Rapport d’affichage et appuyez sur la touche de la manette ADJ., s’affiche, ce qui vous permet de définir le rapport d’affichage. Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ». Réglages des touches Fn1/Fn2 (Menu onglet des options personnalisées) Vous pouvez définir les fonctions [Agrand. affich] et [Rapport d’affichage] dans [Réglages de la touche Fn1] ou [Réglages de la touche Fn2] dans l’onglet des options personnalisées. Si vous définissez la fonction Rapport d’affichage et appuyez sur la touche Fn1 ou Fn2, vous pourrez définir le rapport d’affichage. Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ».0 [Supprimer Mes Réglages] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées) En sélectionnant [Supprimer Mes Réglages] dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, vous pouvez annuler les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes Réglages] pour [Boîte Mes Réglages] et pour [MY1], [MY2] et [MY3] sur le sélecteur de mode. [Rétablir valeurs par défaut] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées) Si [Rétablir valeurs par défaut] est sélectionné dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, les réglages personnalisés seront restaurés. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes Réglages] ne seront pas restaurés.1 Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration) La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante. Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Environ 1,0× L Environ 1,8× 3M Environ 1,2× M Environ 3,0× 1M Environ 1,5× 5M Environ 5,9× VGA [Réglages bague mise au point] (Onglet de configuration) Sous [Réglages bague mise au point], vous pouvez sélectionner un mode qui active les fonctions pour la mise au point automatique et la mise au point manuelle ou un mode qui active uniquement les fonctions pour la mise au point manuelle. Lorsque l’option [AF+MF] est sélectionnée, une fois le déclencheur enfoncé à mi-course pour régler la mise au point, la mise au point peut être réglée de manière plus précise en tournant la bague de mise au point. Paramètre AF+MF MF uniquement Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Si vous appuyez de nouveau sur le déclencheur après le réglage fin, la mise au point automatique est activée et le réglage est annulé. [Réglage Zone AF Spot] (Menu onglet de configuration) Vous pouvez sélectionner [Normal] ou [Repérer] pour la zone AF dans [Réglage Zone AF Spot] du menu de configuration. Lorsque [AF Spot] est sélectionné dans [Mise au point] du menu de prise de vue, la mise au point est définie sur le mode de zone AF sélectionné dans [Réglage Zone AF Spot]. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Lorsque [Repérer] est sélectionné, la vue de la zone AF est plus petite qu’en mode [Normal]. Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un boîtier GXR. Pixels réels Environ 12,3 millions Capteur d’image 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (nombre total de pixels : environ 12,9 millions) Objectif Distance focale 18,3mm (format 35 mm équivalent : 28mm) Ouverture (nombre f) f/2,5– f/22 (filtre à densité neutre utilisé pour les ouvertures f/22 en mode prise de vue automatique) Plage mise au point (de l’objectif) Environ 20cm–8 (téléobjectif) Construction 9 éléments en 6 groupes (2 objectifs asphériques avec 2 surfaces) Diamètre du filtre 40,5 mm Zoom 4,0× zoom numérique (photos), zoom numérique 3,6×(vidéos) ; environ 5,9× zoom de redimensionnement automatique (VGA) Mode mise au point AF multi et AF spot basé sur Contraste AF ; MF ; snap ; 8 (verrouillage de mise au point et assistance AF) Vitesse d’obturation Photos 1/3200–180s (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en fonction du mode prise de vue et flash) Vidéos 1/2000–1/30s Contrôle exposition Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique Mode Programme AE, priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle, priorité à l’obturation AE, fonction de décalage de la cible Correction de l’exposition Manuelle (+4,0 à -4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV), cadrage automatique (-2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV) Portée du lien d’exposition (mode prise de vue automatique, mesure centrale pondérée de la lumière) 2,2 EV–19,3 EV (portée du lien pour une sensibilité ISO automatique convertie en fonction de la valeur EV pour ISO100) • Lors de la prise de vue avec des valeurs proches de 6,0 EV ou inférieures, pour chaque réduction de la portée du lien d’exposition de 1,0 EV, l’appareil photo modifie le réglage de 0,25 EV vers une luminosité plus faible. Le changement maximum possible est de 1,0 EV. Sensibilité ISO (sensibilité sortie standard) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Incandescente1, Incandescente2, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ; cadrage auto balance des blancs Flash Portée (flash intégré) Environ 20cm–3,0m (ISO auto) (téléobjectif) Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture, priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports, paysage, nuit, correction biais), « Mes Réglages » Mode continu Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Continu (Taille d’image : RAW) Réduction du bruit désactivée ou activée (faible) : 4 photos, Réduction du bruit activée (forte) : 3 photos Réduction du bruit activée MAX : 3 photos Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Cont.M + (un ensemble) Rap (1280 × 856) : 30 photos (24 images/s) Len (4288 × 2848) : 15 photos (3 images/s) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Taille de l’image (pixels) Photos 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848, 3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Taille fichier (approximative) RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 17 800Ko/image, FINE : 19 515Ko/image, VGA : 15 587Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 18 387Ko/image, FINE : 20 157Ko/image, VGA : 16 124Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 20 946Ko/image, FINE : 22 967Ko/image, VGA : 18 337Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 13 991Ko/image, FINE : 15 333Ko/image, VGA : 12 273Ko/image Taille fichier (approximative) L 16:9 NORMAL : 2 222Ko/image, FINE : 3 816Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 2 315Ko/image, FINE : 3 960Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 2 615Ko/image, FINE : 4 493Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 3 009Ko/image M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 475Ko/image, FINE : 2 509Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 1 574Ko/image, FINE : 2 662Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 1 744Ko/image, FINE : 2 968Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 186Ko/image, FINE : 2 003Ko/image 5M 4:3 FINE : 2 287Ko/image 3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image 1M 4:3 FINE : 812Ko/image VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image Longévité batterie (basée sur norme CIPA) DB-90 : environ 320 prises de vue*3 Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 68,7mm×57,9mm×50,4mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA) Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 113,9mm×70,2mm×55,6mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA) Poids (approximatif) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 210 g Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 410 g (y compris la batterie et la carte mémoire SD) Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C Humidité fonctionnement 90% ou moins Température stockage –20°C à 60°C *1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image. *2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de 640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée.0 Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE. Photos Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go RAW* FINE 4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625 3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380 2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065 L FINE 4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684 3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453 4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565 2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 98151 Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie JPEG.  Vidéos Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go 1280×720 24 images/seconde 21s 3min 49s 7min 46s 15min 58s 31min 10s 62min 26s 125min 15s 640×480 24 images/seconde 1min 11min 2s 22min 27s 46min 10s 90min 7s 180min 32s 362min 9s 320×240 24 images/seconde 2min 25s 26min 24s 53min 43s 110min 27s 215min 35s 431min 52s 866min 19s Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- La taille d’enregistrement sans interruption maximale pour une vidéo est de 4 Go. La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 15 minutes environ pour une taille de 1280 × 720, de 46 minutes environ pour une taille de 640 × 480 et de 90 minutes environ pour une taille de 320 × 240. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos avec la taille de vidéo définie sur 1280 × 720, l’utilisation de cartes mémoire SD/SDHC de classe 6 est recommandée. Annexes Accessoires en option L’objectif RICOH peut être utilisé avec les éléments suivants (vendus séparément). Paresoleil d´objectif (LH-1) Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation fournie avec le produit. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/). Précautions d’emploi • La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. • Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. • Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques. • Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif. • Lors de la fixation d’un filtre ou d’un pare-soleil, veillez à ne pas exercer une pression excessive. • Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même température que l’environnement. • Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement ou un choc électrique. • Gardez le connecteur propre. Conseil : pour éviter la condensation--------------------------------------------- La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif. Entretien et stockage de l’équipement Entretien de l’équipement • Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce, ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. Faites particulièrement attention au voletcache objectif. • Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition. • Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation Ricoh. • Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas. Stockage • Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant). • Lorsque vous rangez votre appareil photo, veillez à l’installer dans un étui, etc., dans lequel la poussière ou les peluches ne pénètrent pas afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo. De plus, lorsque vous transportez l’appareil photo, ne le mettez pas directement dans une poche, etc., afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo. Garantie et réparation 1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au centre de réparation Ricoh. 2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de : 1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ; 2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ; 3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ; 4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement. 5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles. 3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé. 4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte. 5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté. * Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent vos droits légaux. * L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de garantie fournie avec l’équipement.0 8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement) seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la production de l’équipement. 9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de son état originel peut être impossible. Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct. • Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution. • Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible. • Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer l’appareil au centre de réparation.En cas de problème Bureaux Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2010 octobre FR F-FR Imprimé en Chine *L453 3972* GR LENS A12 28mm F2.5 Instruction Manual The serial number may be found on the bottom of the lens. Package Contents Before using your Ricoh lens, confirm that the package contains the items listed below. Camera unit The serial number may be found on the bottom. Lens cap Comes attached to the camera unit. ? Instructionmanual (thismanual) ? Warranty Connector cap Comes attached to the camera unit. Soft case Introduction To use this lens, you need to attach it to a compatible camera body. Refer to the Camera Body User Guide for details about how to operate shooting and playback functions and change settings and to read important precautions for use. This instruction manual will explain functions and operating procedures that are available only when this camera unit is used with a compatible camera body. See also the GXR Camera Body User Guide. To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Safety precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use. Test shots Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly before taking photos on important occasions. Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines, and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright holder, is prohibited. Exemption from liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display images as a result of product malfunction. Warranty The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any expense thereby incurred. Radio interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device, reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio or television into a different outlet. © 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time without prior notice. Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover of this booklet. Safety Precautions Warning Symbols Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below. Danger This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Warning This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Caution This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical damage if ignored or incorrectly handled. Sample Warnings The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed. The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions. The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action is prohibited. Examples = Do not touch = Do not disassemble Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit. Danger Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard. Warning Keep the equipment out of the reach of children. Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service center if it is damaged. Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock. Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns. • Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as this may lead to disasters or accidents. Caution Do not allow the equipment to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands. Both pose the risk of electric shock. Safety Precautions for Accessories When using optional products, carefully read the instructions provided with the product before using that product.10 Package Contents................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3 Safety Precautions................................................................................................................ 6 Parts of the Lens .................................................................................................13 Upgrading the Product .....................................................................................14 Updating the camera’s firmware...................................................................................14 Shooting...............................................................................................................17 Macro Functions..................................................................................................................17 Mode P: Program Shift......................................................................................................18 Mode M: Manual Exposure..............................................................................................20 Playback ...............................................................................................................21 Camera Unit Information Display .................................................................................21 Table of Contents11 Settings ................................................................................................................22 [Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu) ......................................................22 Photographs...............................................................................................................23 Movies...........................................................................................................................24 [Noise Reduction] Setting (Shooting Menu).............................................................25 [ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu).......................................................................26 [Enlrg Display] (Shooting Menu)...................................................................................27 [Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Options)..................................................................28 [Shutter Button Confirmation] (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu).....................28 ADJ. Lever Settings (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu)...........................................29 Fn1/Fn2 Buttons Settings (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu) ..............................29 [Delete My Settings] (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu) ........................................30 [Restore Defaults] (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu) .............................................30 [Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup Tab).................................................................31 [Focus Ring Settings] (Setup Tab) .................................................................................321 [Spot AF Area Setting] (Setup Tab Menu) ..................................................................33 Specifications ......................................................................................................34 Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity..................................................................40 Appendices..........................................................................................................43 Optional Accessories.........................................................................................................43 Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................44 Equipment Care and Storage.........................................................................................46 Warranty and Servicing....................................................................................................481 Parts of the Lens 1 2 3 1 Connector 2 Focus ring 3 Lens1 Upgrading the Product Updating the camera’s firmware When you first attach the camera unit to the camera body, the version update function will start automatically if the firmware of the camera’s body need to be updated. In such case, update the firmware of the camera’s body using the following procedure. If the firmware’s version is already up to date, the version update function will not start and you can use the lens right away. 1 Check that the camera is turned off and attach the camera unit to the camera body. • For details about how to attach the camera unit, refer to the Camera Body User Guide.1 2 Turn on the camera. • A confirmation message about updating the firmware appears. 3 Press the Fn1/Fn2 buttons to select [Yes] and then press the MENU/ OK button. • The firmware’s update begins and the following messages appear on the picture display. [Checking rewrite file] [Rewriting program] The camera will automatically turn off and then back on. After the camera restarts, the firmware’s version screen will be displayed and the update will be completed.1 Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • To confirm the firmware’s version, select [Firmware Version] in the setup menu. Alternatively, with the camera off, keep the 6 (Play) button pressed for more than 1 second while holding the – button pressed down. The firmware’s version will appear on the picture display for about 20 seconds. • For the latest information on firmware updates, see the Ricoh Web site (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). You can download the latest firmware updates to upgrade your equipment.1 Shooting Macro Functions The Macro Shooting, Macro Target, Auto Macro, and Minimum Shooting Distance Display during Macro Shooting functions are not available with the A12 28mm F2.5 lens.1 Mode P: Program Shift The diagram on the following page gives estimates of the shift range for various combinations of aperture values and shutter speeds. The actual values may vary depending on EV (exposure value). In these examples, the flash mode is set to [Flash Off], and the ISO setting is set to [ISO200].1 Ev5 Ev6 Ev7 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 Ev-1 Ev-2 Ev-3 F16 F22 F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8 F2.0 F1.4 F1.0 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20 F22.0 F2.50 Mode M: Manual Exposure If [Auto] or [Auto-Hi] is selected for ISO Setting, ISO will be fixed at 200 while the camera is in manual exposure mode. 1 Playback Camera Unit Information Display Information of [A12 28mm] for the camera unit is displayed on the Detailed Information Display. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Information of [A12 28mm] for the camera unit is also displayed in the Exif file. Settings [Picture Quality/Size] Setting (Shooting Menu) The following picture quality, image size and aspect ratio options are available for the [Picture Quality/Size] setting in the shooting menu. A photograph‘s file size will depend on the combination of picture quality and image size used. When recording movies, you can select the movie size. Photographs Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2848×2848 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304 Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy. *2 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear on the top and bottom of the picture display. *3 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear at the right and left sides of the picture display. Movies Item Movie size HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 [Noise Reduction] Setting (Shooting Menu) Perform noise reduction when taking photographs. Choose from [Off], [Auto], [Weak], [Strong], or [MAX]. The time required to record images varies with the option selected. You cannot use this function when [Portrait], [Sports], or [Skew Correct Mode] is selected for the scene mode. [ISO Setting] Setting (Shooting Menu) • When [Auto] is selected and the flash is used, the sensitivity used will gain up to ISO800 equivalent. • When [Auto] is selected and the flash is not used, the minimum and maximum values for the ISO sensitivity will be 200 and 400, respectively, regardless of the pixel size (pixels). [Enlrg Display] (Shooting Menu) If you move the target with the direction keys (+/-/Fn1/Fn2) and press and hold down the MENU/OK button, the target position will be magnified, allowing you to check the focus. By pressing and holding down the MENU/ OK button again, you can return to the standard view from the enlarged view. By pressing and holding down the t (self-timer) button, or by selecting [Display Magnification Ratio] from the Settings Menu, you can set the display magnification. Select from [2×], [4×], or [8×] with the +/- button, and then press the MENU/OK button. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You can set the [Enlrg Display] function in [Fn1/Fn2 Button Settings] on the Key Custom Settings tab. [Reg. My Settings] (Key Custom Options) In [Reg. My Settings], you can also set [Focus Ring Settings] and [Spot AF Area Setting] options in the setup menu. For other options available, refer to the “Camera Body User Guide”. [Shutter Button Confirmation] (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu) When [Shutter Button Confirmation] is set for [ADJ./DIRECT] on the Key Custom Settings tab, pressing the shutter release button halfway down will finalize settings in ADJ. mode and on the DIRECT screen, and you will be able to shoot pictures. When set for [ADJ.], the ADJ. mode settings will be finalized, enabling you to shoot pictures. When set for [DIRECT], the DIRECT screen settings will be finalized, enabling you to shoot pictures. After you finish shooting pictures, the system will return to the Monitoring screen. ADJ. Lever Settings (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu) You can set the [Aspect Ratio] function in [ADJ. Lever Setting 1] to [ADJ. Lever Setting 4] on the Key Custom Settings tab. If you set the Aspect Ratio function, and press the ADJ. Lever button, will appear, allowing you to set the aspect ratio. For other available options, refer to the “Camera Body User Guide”. Fn1/Fn2 Buttons Settings (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu) You can set the [Enlrg Display] and [Aspect Ratio] functions in [Fn1 Button Settings] or [Fn2 Button Settings] on the Key Custom Settings tab. If you set the Aspect Ratio function and press the Fn1 or Fn2 button, you will be able to set the aspect ratio. For other available options, refer to the “Camera Body User Guide”.0 [Delete My Settings] (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu) By selecting [Delete My Settings] on the Key Custom Settings tab, you can cancel the settings set in [Reg. My Settings] for [My Settings Box] and for [MY1], [MY2], and [MY3] on the mode dial. [Restore Defaults] (Key Custom Settings Tab Menu) If [Restore Defaults] is selected on the Key Custom Settings tab, the key custom settings will be reset. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Settings set in [Reg. My Settings] will not be reset.1 [Digital Zoom Image] Setting (Setup Tab) The size of the recorded image varies depending on the auto resize zoom, as follows. Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Approx. 1.0× L Approx. 1.8× 3M Approx. 1.2× M Approx. 3.0× 1M Approx. 1.5× 5M Approx. 5.9× VGA [Focus Ring Settings] (Setup Tab) In [Focus Ring Settings], you can set either a mode that enables functions for both autofocus and manual focus or a mode that enables functions for manual focus only. When [AF + MF] is selected, after the shutter button is pressed down halfway to set the focus, the focus can be fine tuned by turning the focus ring. Item AF + MF MF Only Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- If the shutter button is re-pressed after fine tuning, autofocus will activate and fine adjustment will be cancelled. [Spot AF Area Setting] (Setup Tab Menu) You can select either [Normal] or [Pinpoint] for the AF area in the [Spot AF Area Setting] in the setup menu. When [Spot AF] is selected in [Focus] in the Shooting Menu, the focus will be set to the AF area mode selected in the [Spot AF Area Setting]. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When [Pinpoint] is selected, the AF Area frame will be smaller than that in [Normal] mode. Specifications Specifications are given for the camera unit mounted on a GXR body. Effective pixels Approximately 12.3 million Image sensor 23.6 mm × 15.7 mm CMOS (total pixels: approx. 12.9 million) Lens Focal length 18.3mm (35-mm format equivalent: 28mm) Aperture (f-number) f/2.5– f/22 (ND filter used for apertures of f/22 in auto shooting mode) Focus range (from lens) Approx. 20cm–8 (telephoto end) Construction 9 elements in 6 groups (2 aspherical lens elements with 2 surfaces) Filter diameter 40.5 mm Zoom 4.0× digital zoom (photographs), 3.6 × digital zoom (movies); approx. 5.9× auto resize zoom (VGA) Focus mode Contrast AF-based multi and spot AF; MF; Snap; 8 (focus lock and AF-assist) Shutter speed Photographs 1/3200–180s (upper and lower limits vary according to shooting and flash mode) Movies 1/2000–1/30s Exposure control Metering TTL-CCD metering in multi (256-segment), center-weighted, and spot modes with autoexposure lock Mode Program AE, aperture priority AE, manual exposure, shutter priority AE, move target function Exposure compensation Manual (+4.0 to -4.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV), auto bracketing (-2EV to +2EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV) Exposure link range (Auto shooting mode, Centerweighted light metering) 2.2 EV to 19.3 EV (link range for automatic ISO converted based on the EV for ISO100) • When shooting in surroundings with 6.0 EV or lower, for every 1.0 EV that the exposure link range decreases, the camera will shift the setting 0.25 EV toward the low brightness side. The maximum shift amount is 1.0 EV. ISO sensitivity (Standard Output Sensitivity) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 White balance Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Outdoors, Cloudy, Incandescent Lamp1, Incandescent Lamp2, Fluorescent Lamp, Manual Settings, Detail; white balance bracketing Flash Range (built-in flash) Approx. 20cm–3.0m (ISO auto) (telephoto end) Shooting mode Auto, program shift, aperture priority, shutter priority, manual, scene (movie, portrait, sports, landscape, nightscape, skew correction), “My Settings” Continuous mode Number of pictures shot in Continuous (Picture Size: RAW) Noise Reduction off or on (Weak): 4 pictures Noise Reduction on (Strong): 3 pictures Noise Reduction on MAX: 3 pictures Number of pictures shot in M-Cont Plus (1 set) HI (1280×856) : 30 pictures (24 Frames/Sec) LO (4228×2848) : 15 pictures (3 Frames/Sec) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Image size (pixels) Photographs 4288 × 2416, 3776 × 2832, 4288 × 2848, 2848 × 2848, 3456 × 1944, 3072 × 2304, 3456 × 2304, 2304 × 2304, 2592 × 1944, 2048 × 1536, 1280 × 960, 640 × 480 Movies 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 File size (approx.) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17,800KB/frame, FINE: 19,515KB/frame, VGA: 15,587 KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 18,387KB/frame, FINE: 20,157KB/frame, VGA: 16,124 KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 20,946KB/frame, FINE: 22,967KB/frame, VGA: 18,337KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 13,991KB/frame, FINE: 15,333KB/frame, VGA: 12,273KB/frame  File size (approx.) L 16:9 NORMAL: 2,222KB/frame, FINE: 3,816KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 2,315KB/frame, FINE: 3,960KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 2,615KB/frame, FINE: 4,493KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 1,761KB/frame, FINE: 3,009KB/frame M 16:9 NORMAL: 1,475KB/frame, FINE: 2,509KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 1,574KB/frame, FINE: 2,662KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 1,744KB/frame, FINE: 2,968KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 1,186KB/frame, FINE: 2,003KB/frame 5M 4:3 FINE: 2,287KB/frame 3M 4:3 FINE: 1,474KB/frame 1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/frame VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/frame Battery life (based on CIPA standard) DB-90: approx. 320shots *3 Dimensions (W×H×D) Camera unit only: 68.7mm×57.9mm×50.4mm (Based on CIPA guide line) When mounted on the camera body: 113.9mm×70.2mm×55.6mm (Based on CIPA guide line) Weight (approx.) Camera unit only: 210g When mounted on the camera body: 410g (Including the battery and SD memory card) Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C Operating humidity 90% or less Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C *1 The options available vary with image size. *2 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a FINE- or NORMAL-quality file with the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file 640×480 pixels in size). RAW files use the standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is used. We recommend that you carry spare batteries when in use for extended periods.0 Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity The following values are given as a reference of the storage capacity of the internal memory and memory cards of various sizes, by picture quality and image size, when using the FINE picture quality. Photographs Compression Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB RAW* FINE 4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625 3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380 2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065 L FINE 4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684 3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453 4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565 2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 98151 Compression Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * When [RAW] is selected, this is the compression used for the JPEG copy.  Movies Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 1280×720 24 frames/second 21sec. 3min. 49sec. 7min. 46sec. 15min. 58sec. 31min. 10sec. 62min. 26sec. 125min. 15sec. 640×480 24 frames/second 1min. 11min. 2sec. 22min. 27sec. 46min. 10sec. 90min. 7sec. 180min. 32sec. 362min. 9sec. 320×240 24 frames/second 2min. 25sec. 26min. 24sec. 53min. 43sec. 110min. 27sec. 215min. 35sec. 431min. 52sec. 866min. 19sec. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The maximum uninterrupted recording size for a single movie is 4 GB. The maximum recording time is around 15 minutes at 1280×720 size, around 46 minutes at 640×480 size, and around 90 minutes at 320×240 size. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When recording movies with the movie size set to 1280×720, using SD/ SDHC memory cards with a speed class of 6 or more is recommended. Appendices Optional Accessories The RICOH LENS can be used with the items (sold separately) listed below. Lens Hood (LH-1) Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Before using an optional accessory, see the documentation that came with the product. • For the latest information on optional accessories, visit the Ricoh website (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/). Precautions for Use • The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase. • Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any expenditure incurred thereby. • Do not drop the equipment or subject it to physical shocks. • When carrying the equipment, be careful that it does not strike other objects. Particular care is required to protect the lens. • When attaching a filter or lens hood, be careful not to apply excessive force. • Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible condensation inside the lens or malfunction of the equipment. This can be avoided by placing the equipment in a plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature its surroundings. • Keep the equipment dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe these precautions could result in malfunction of the equipment or electric shock. • Keep the connector clean. Tip: Avoiding Condensation -------------------------------------------------------- Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the heater has come on, or where the camera is exposed to cold air from an air conditioner or other device. Equipment Care and Storage Caring for the Equipment • Photographs can be affected by fingerprints and other foreign matter on the lens. Avoid touching the lens with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a blower from a camera supply store, or gently clean the lens with a soft, dry cloth. Be especially careful around the barrel. • Clean the equipment thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling cosmetics. Do not expose the equipment to volatile substances such as thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the equipment or its finish. • In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center. • This equipment is a high precision device. Do not disassemble. Storage • Do not store the camera where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or humidity; large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe vibration; prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other insect repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for example, in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet). • When storing, place the product in a camera case, etc. that does not collect dirt or fluff to prevent dirt or dust from attaching itself to the camera. In addition, when carrying the camera, do not place the camera directly into a pocket, etc., in order to prevent dirt and dust from getting on the camera. Warranty and Servicing 1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your equipment, any defective parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of equipment malfunction, contact the dealer from which you purchased the equipment or your nearest Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will not be reimbursed for the cost of bringing the equipment to the Ricoh Repair Center. 2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from: 1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual; 2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service center listed in the instruction manual; 3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.; 4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera Body User Guide”), leaking of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the equipment. 5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages, infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock, dropping of the equipment, or pressure on the equipment, and other unnatural causes. 3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees, including those incurred at an authorized service center. 4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the warranty card is not attached or if the distributor’s name or the purchase date have been changed or are not indicated on the card. 5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred during the warranty period. 6. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the equipment, such as expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not. 7. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the equipment was purchased. * The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit your legal rights. * The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card provided with this equipment.0 8. Parts essential to the servicing of the equipment (that is, components required to maintain the functions and quality of the equipment) will be available for a period of five years after the equipment is discontinued. 9. Please note that if the equipment is seriously damaged by flooding, submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible. Notes------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Before sending the camera in for repair, check the camera body and read the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation. • Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete. • When sending the equipment to a service center, please include a note which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as possible. • Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the camera to the service center.1 If You Encounter a Problem with This Product Ricoh offices RICOH COMPANY, LTD. 3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530, Japan http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A. 1–800–22RICOH http://www.ricoh-usa.com/ RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK) (from within the UK) 02073 656 580 (from outside of the UK) +44 2073 656 580 RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN) (desde España) 91 406 9148 (desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148 RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMC ITALY) (dall’Italia) 02 696 33 451 (dall’estero) +39 02 696 33 451*L453 2971* Ricoh offices RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS LIMITED 21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2010 October EN USA GB GB AE AE Printed in China GR LENS A12 28mm F2.5 Bedienungsanleitung Die Seriennummer befindet sich auf der Unterseite des Objektivs. Packungsinhalt Vergewissern Sie sich vor Gebrauch Ihres Ricoh-Objektivs, dass die Packung die unten aufgeführten Teile enthält. Kameraeinheit Die Seriennummer befindet sich auf der Unterseite. Objektivdeckel Ist bei Lieferung an der Kameraeinheit befestigt. ?Bedienungsanleitung (diese Anleitung) ? Garantie Anschlussabdeckung Ist bei Lieferung an der Kameraeinheit befestigt. Beutel Einführung Das Objektiv ist für den Gebrauch auf ein kompatibles Kameragehäuse zu setzen. Hinweise zu den Aufnahme- und Wiedergabefunktionen und zu Änderungen von Einstellungen finden Sie in der Bedienungsanleitung des Kameragehäuses. Lesen Sie bitte auch die wichtigen Vorsichtshinweise zum Gebrauch. In dieser Bedienungsanleitung werden Funktionen und Verfahren erläutert, die nur bei Gebrauch dieser Kameraeinheit in Verbindung mit einem kompatiblen Kameragehäuse zur Verfügung stehen. Weitere Hinweise finden Sie im GXR-KameraBenutzerhandbuch. Um die Funktionen dieses Objektivs optimal nutzen zu können, lesen Sie diese Bedienungsanleitung vor dem Gebrauch aufmerksam durch. Bewahren Sie sie dann jederzeit griffbereit auf. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Sicherheitsmaßnahmen Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitsmaßnahmen sorgfältig durch, um einen sicheren Gebrauch zu gewährleisten. Probeaufnahmen Machen Sie Probeaufnahmen, bevor Sie bei wichtigen Anlässen fotografieren, um sicherzugehen, dass die Kamera ordnungsgemäß funktioniert. Copyright Die Wiedergabe oder Veränderung von urheberrechtlich geschützten Dokumenten, Zeitschriften und anderem Material ohne die Zustimmung des Urheberrechtsinhabers ist ausschließlich für den privaten, Heim- oder ähnlichen Gebrauch zugelassen. Haftungsausschluss Ricoh Co., Ltd. übernimmt keine Haftung für Fehler bei der Aufnahme oder Wiedergabe von Bildern aufgrund einer Fehlfunktion des Produkts. Garantie Die mitgelieferte Garantie ist nur im jeweiligen Kaufland gültig. Der Hersteller übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Wartung des Produkts in anderen Ländern oder für die Übernahme von hierdurch entstandenen Kosten. Funkstörung Der Betrieb dieses Produkts in der Nähe von anderen elektronischen Geräten kann sowohl die Kamera also auch das andere Gerät nachteilig beeinflussen. Störungen sind besonders wahrscheinlich, wenn die Kamera in der Nähe eines Radios oder Fernsehers verwendet wird. Dies kann behoben werden, indem Sie die Kamera so weit wie möglich vom anderen Gerät entfernen, die Radio- oder Fernsehantenne anders ausrichten oder das Radio oder den Fernseher an einer anderen Steckdose anschließen. © 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Diese Herausgabe darf nicht, vollständig oder teilweise, ohne ausdrückliche schriftliche Genehmigung von Ricoh vervielfältigt werden. Ricoh behält sich das Recht vor, den Inhalt dieses Dokuments jederzeit und ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern. Es wurde höchste Sorgfalt auf die Genauigkeit der Informationen in diesem Dokument gelegt. Sollten Sie dennoch Fehler oder Auslassungen feststellen, wären wir Ihnen sehr dankbar, wenn Sie uns unter der Adresse auf der Rückseite dieses Buchs benachrichtigen würden. Sicherheitsmaßnahmen Warnsymbole Verschiedene Symbole werden in dieser Bedienungsanleitung und auf dem Produkt verwendet, die Sie auf die Gefahr von Verletzungen des Benutzers und anderer Personen und die Gefahr von Sachbeschädigung hinweisen sollen. Die Symbole und ihre Bedeutung werden im Folgenden beschrieben. Gefahr Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Punkte, die bei Missachtung oder falscher Handhabung unmittelbar zu schweren Verletzungen oder Tod führen können. Warnung Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Punkte, die bei Missachtung oder falscher Handhabung zu schweren Verletzungen oder Tod führen können. Wichtig Dieses Symbol kennzeichnet Punkte, die bei Missachtung oder falscher Handhabung zu Verletzungen oder Sachbeschädigung führen können. Warnhinweise Das Symbol kennzeichnet Aktionen, die unbedingt ausgeführt werden müssen. Das Symbol kennzeichnet verbotene Aktionen. Das Symbol kann mit anderen Symbolen kombiniert werden, um darauf hinzuweisen, dass bestimmte Handlungen verboten sind. Beispiele = Nicht berühren = Nicht zerlegen Beachten Sie die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßregeln, um einen sicheren Gebrauch dieses Gerätes zu gewährleisten. Gefahr Versuchen Sie nicht, das Gerät selbst zu zerlegen, zu reparieren oder zu verändern. Die Hochspannungs-Schaltkreise im Inneren des Gerätes können einen elektrischen Schlag verursachen. Warnung Bewahren Sie das Gerät außer Reichweite von Kindern auf. Berühren Sie keine Innenteile des Gerätes, falls sie durch Fallenlassen oder Beschädigung freigelegt werden. Die Hochspannungs-Schaltkreise im Inneren des Gerätes können einen elektrischen Schlag verursachen. Nehmen Sie den Akku unverzüglich heraus, und lassen Sie dabei Vorsicht walten, um elektrische Schläge oder Verbrennungen zu vermeiden. Bringen Sie das Gerät im Falle einer Beschädigung zu Ihrem Fachhändler oder zur nächsten Kundendienststelle. Benutzen Sie das Gerät nicht in einer feuchten Umgebung, weil dies zu einem Brand oder elektrischen Schlag führen könnte. Benutzen Sie das Gerät nicht in der Nähe von brennbaren Gasen, Benzin, Benzol, Verdünner oder ähnlichen Substanzen, weil sonst die Gefahr von Explosionen, Brand oder Verbrennungen besteht. • Benutzen Sie das Gerät nicht an Orten, wo der Gebrauch eingeschränkt oder verboten ist, weil dies zu Katastrophen oder Unfällen führen kann. Wichtig Lassen Sie die Kameraeinheit nicht nass werden. Bedienen Sie sie auch nicht mit nassen Händen. In beiden Fällen besteht Stromschlaggefahr. Sicherheitswarnungen für Sonderzubehör Bevor Sie ein optionales Zubehör verwenden, lesen Sie sich die mitgelieferte Dokumentation durch.10 Packungsinhalt...................................................................................................................... 2 Einführung .............................................................................................................................. 3 Sicherheitsmaßnahmen..................................................................................................... 6 Teile des Objektivs..............................................................................................13 Aufrüsten des Produkts.....................................................................................14 Aktualisierung der Kamera-Firmware .........................................................................14 Aufnahme ............................................................................................................17 Makro-Funktionen..............................................................................................................17 Modus P: Programmschaltmodus................................................................................18 Modus M: Manuelle Belichtung.....................................................................................20 Wiedergabe .........................................................................................................21 Anzeige der Informationen zur Kameraeinheit.......................................................21 Inhaltsverzeichnis11 Einstellungen ......................................................................................................22 [Bildqualität/Größe]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü).............................................22 Fotos..............................................................................................................................23 Filme ..............................................................................................................................24 [Rauschreduzierung]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü)...........................................25 [Einst. ISO-Empfindlichkeit]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü) ..............................26 [Display vergr.] (Aufnahme-Menü)...............................................................................27 [Meine Einst. Reg.] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen)..........................................28 [Bestätigung mit Auslöser] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü)....................................................................................................28 ADJ.-Schaltereinstellungen (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü)....................................................................................................29 Fn1/Fn2-Tasteneinstellungen (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü)....................................................................................................29 [Meine Einstellungen löschen] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü)....................................................................................................301 [Standardwerte wiederherst.] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü)....................................................................................................30 [Digitalzoombild]-Einstellung (Setup-Registerkarte)............................................31 [Fokusring-Einstellungen] (Setup-Registerkarte) ...................................................32 [Spot-AF-Bereichs-Einstellung] (Setup-Registerkartenmenü) ...........................33 Technische Daten ...............................................................................................34 Kapazität Interner Speicher/Speicherkarte...............................................................40 Anhang.................................................................................................................43 Separates Zubehör.............................................................................................................43 Vorsichtsmaßnahmen.......................................................................................................44 Wartung und Lagerung der Ausrüstung....................................................................46 Garantie und Kundendienst ...........................................................................................481 Teile des Objektivs 1 2 3 1 Anschluss 2 Fokusring 3 Objektiv1 Aufrüsten des Produkts Aktualisierung der Kamera-Firmware Beim ersten Anschluss der Kameraeinheit an das Kameragehäuse wird automatisch die Aktualisierungsfunktion gestartet, wenn die Firmware des Kameragehäuses veraltet ist. Aktualisieren Sie in diesem Fall die Firmware des Kameragehäuses auf folgende Weise. Ist die Firmware-Version auf dem aktuellen Stand, wird die Aktualisierungsfunktion nicht gestartet und Sie können das Objektiv sofort verwenden. 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Kamera abgeschaltet ist, und schließen Sie die Kameraeinheit am Kameragehäuse an. • Weitere Hinweise zum Anschluss der Kameraeinheit finden Sie im Benutzerhandbuch des Kameragehäuses.1 2 Schalten Sie die Kamera ein. • Es wird eine Bestätigungsmeldung zur Aktualisierung der Firmware angezeigt. 3 Drücken Sie die Fn1/Fn2-Tasten, um [Ja] zu wählen. Drücken Sie anschließend die MENU/OK-Taste. • Daraufhin beginnt der Aktualisierungsvorgang der Firmware, und die folgenden Meldungen werden auf der Bildanzeige angezeigt: [Überschreibungsdatei wird geprüft] [Überschreibungsprogramm] Die Kamera schaltet sich automatisch aus und dann wieder an. Nach dem Kamera-Neustart wird die Firmware-Version auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt und das Update wird damit abgeschlossen.1 Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Wählen Sie zur Abfrage der Firmware-Version [Firmware-Version] im Setup-Menü. Halten Sie alternativ die Taste 6 (Wiedergabe) bei ausgeschalteter Kamera für mehr als eine Sekunde gedrückt, während Sie gleichzeitig die Taste – gedrückt halten. Daraufhin wird die FirmwareVersion ca. 20 Sekunden lang auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt. • Aktuelle Informationen zu Firmware-Updates finden Sie auf der RicohWebsite (http://ricoh.com/r_dc/de). Dort können Sie die neuesten Firmware-Updates herunterladen, um Ihre Ausrüstung zu aktualisieren.1 Aufnahme Makro-Funktionen Die folgenden Funktion können nicht mit dem Objektiv A12 28mm F2.5 verwendet werden: Makroaufnahme, Makroziel, Auto-Makro und Mindestentfernungsanzeige während der Makroaufnahme.1 Modus P: Programmschaltmodus Das Diagramm auf der folgenden Seite gibt einen Überblick über verschiedene Versatzkombinationen von Verschlusszeit und Blende. Die tatsächlichen Werte hängen vom Belichtungswert (EV) ab. In diesen Beispielen ist der Blitzmodus auf [Blitz aus] und die ISOEinstellung auf [ISO200] eingestellt.1 Ev5 Ev6 Ev7 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 Ev-1 Ev-2 Ev-3 F16 F22 F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8 F2.0 F1.4 F1.0 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20 F22.0 F2.50 Modus M: Manuelle Belichtung Wenn [Auto] oder [Auto hoch] als Einstellung für die ISO-Empfindlichkeit gewählt wurde und sich die Kamera im manuellen Belichtungsmodus befindet, wird der ISO-Wert auf 200 festgesetzt. 1 Wiedergabe Anzeige der Informationen zur Kameraeinheit In der Detailanzeige werden Informationen bezüglich des Objektivs [A12 28mm] für die Kameraeinheit angezeigt. Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- In der Exif-Datei werden ebenfalls Informationen bezüglich des Objektivs [A12 28mm] für die Kameraeinheit angezeigt. Einstellungen [Bildqualität/Größe]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü) Die folgenden Optionen im Hinblick auf Bildqualität, Bildgröße und Bildseitenverhältnis stehen im Aufnahme-Menü für die [Bildqualität/ Größe]-Einstellung zur Verfügung. Die Dateigröße eines Fotos ist sowohl von der Bildqualität als auch der Bildgröße abhängig. Bei der Aufnahme von Filmen können Sie die Filmgröße auswählen. Fotos Option Bildseitenverhältnis Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2848×2848 L (Groß) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848 M (Medium) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304 Option Bildseitenverhältnis Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Wenn die Option [RAW] ausgewählt wird, wird diese Einstellung für die JPEG-Kopie verwendet. *2 Je nach dem fotografierten Bereich können schwarze Balken am oberen und unteren Rand der Bildanzeige erscheinen. *3 Je nach dem fotografierten Bereich können schwarze Balken am rechten und linken Rand der Bildanzeige erscheinen. Filme Option Filmgröße HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 [Rauschreduzierung]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü) Die Rauschreduzierung wird während der Aufnahme von Fotos ausgeführt. Wählen Sie aus den Einstellungen [Aus], [Auto], [Schwach], [Stark] oder [MAX]. Je nach gewählter Option variiert die zum Speichern des Fotos benötigte Zeit. Diese Funktion kann nicht verwendet werden, wenn die Option [Porträt], [Sport] oder [Schräg-Korrektur] als Motivprogramm gewählt wurde. [Einst. ISO-Empfindlichkeit]-Einstellung (Aufnahme-Menü) • Wenn die Option [Auto] ausgewählt ist und der Blitz verwendet wird, entspricht die verwendete Lichtempfindlichkeit bis zu ISO800. • Wenn die Option [Auto] ausgewählt ist und der Blitz nicht verwendet wird, ändern sich die Mindest- und Höchstwerte der ISO-Empfindlichkeit zu 200 und 400, unabhängig von der Pixelgröße (Pixel). [Display vergr.] (Aufnahme-Menü) Wenn das Motiv mit den Richtungstasten (+/-/Fn1/Fn2) verschoben wird und Sie die MENU/OK-Taste drücken und gedrückt halten, wird das Motiv vergrößert angezeigt. Dies ist hilfreich, um die Scharfstellung zu überprüfen. Durch erneutes Drücken und Gedrückthalten der MENU/OKTaste wird von der vergrößerten wieder in die Standardansicht gewechselt. Die Anzeigevergrößerung kann durch Drücken und Gedrückthalten der Taste t (Selbstauslöser) oder durch Auswahl der Option [Vergrößerungsverhältnis] eingestellt werden. Wählen Sie mit der Taste +/- zwischen [2 ×], [4 ×] oder [8 ×], und drücken Sie dann auf die MENU/OKTaste. Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Die Funktion [Display vergr.] kann in der Registerkarte „Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ im Menü [Fn1/Fn2 Button Settings] eingestellt werden. [Meine Einst. Reg.] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen) Im Setup-Menü können Sie auch die Funktionen [Fokusring-Einstellungen] und [Spot-AF-Bereichs-Einstellung] der Option [Meine Einst. Reg.] zuweisen. Entnehmen Sie weitere Informationen zu verfügbaren Optionen dem „Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch“. [Bestätigung mit Auslöser] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü) Wenn in der Registerkarte „Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ für [ADJ./DIRECT] die Option [Bestätigung mit Auslöser] gewählt wurde, werden durch das Andrücken des Auslösers die Einstellungen im ADJ.-Modus und im DIRECTBildschirm bestätigt, und Sie können Fotos aufnehmen. Wenn diese Option für [ADJ.] festgelegt wurde, können die ADJ.-Moduseinstellungen bestätigt werden, und Sie können Fotos aufnehmen. Wenn diese Option für [DIRECT] festgelegt wurde, können die Einstellungen auf dem DIRECT-Bildschirm bestätigt werden, und Sie können Fotos aufnehmen. Nach Aufnahmebeendigung kehrt das System wieder zum Monitorbildschirm zurück. ADJ.-Schaltereinstellungen (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü) In der Registerkarte „Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ kann die Option [Bildseitenverhältnis] den Einstellungen [ADJ.-Schalter Einstellung 1] bis [ADJ.-Schalter Einstellung 4] zugewiesen werden. Wenn die Funktion Bildseitenverhältnis aktiviert wurde, und der ADJ.-Schalter betätigt wird, erscheint das Symbol und die Bildseitenverhältnis-Einstellungen können vorgenommen werden. Entnehmen Sie weitere Informationen zu verfügbaren Optionen dem „Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch“. Fn1/Fn2-Tasteneinstellungen (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü) Die Funktionen [Display vergr.] und [Bildseitenverhältnis] können in der Registerkarte „Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ im Menü [Fn1 Button Settings] oder [Fn2 Button Settings] eingestellt werden. Wenn die Bildseitenverhältnis-Funktion aktiviert wurde, und die Fn1- oder Fn2-Taste betätigt wird, können die Bildseitenverhältnis-Einstellungen vorgenommen werden. Entnehmen Sie weitere Informationen zu verfügbaren Optionen dem „Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch“.0 [Meine Einstellungen löschen] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü) Durch die Auswahl von [Meine Einstellungen löschen] in der Registerkarte „Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ werden die unter [Meine Einst. Reg.] gespeicherten Werte für [Feld Meine Einstellungen] und die im Moduswahlschalter gespeicherten Werte für [MY1], [MY2] und [MY3] gelöscht. [Standardwerte wiederherst.] (Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen Registerkartenmenü) Wenn die Option [Standardwerte wiederherst.] in der Registerkarte „Wichtigste eigene Einstellungen“ gewählt wurde, werden die wichtigsten benutzerdefinierten Einstellungen auf ihre Standardwerte zurückgesetzt. Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Die unter [Meine Einst. Reg.] vorgenommenen Einstellungen werden nicht zurückgesetzt.1 [Digitalzoombild]-Einstellung (Setup-Registerkarte) Je nach gewähltem Vergrößerungs-Wert des Zooms mit automatischer Skalierung ändert sich die Bildaufnahmegröße. Zoomfaktor Bildgröße (Pixel) Zoomfaktor Bildgröße (Pixel) Ca. 1,0× L Ca. 1,8× 3M Ca. 1,2× M Ca. 3,0× 1M Ca. 1,5× 5M Ca. 5,9× VGA [Fokusring-Einstellungen] (Setup-Registerkarte) In [Fokusring-Einstellungen] können Sie festlegen, ob dieser Modus mit dem Autofokus und manuellem Fokus verwendet werden soll oder nur mit dem manuellen Fokus. Wenn [AF + MF] ausgewählt ist, kann der Fokus nach dem Antippen des Auslösers durch Drehen des Fokusrings feineingestellt werden. Option AF + MF Nur MF Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Wird der Auslöser nach der Feineinstellung des Fokus noch einmal angedrückt, wird der Autofokus aktiviert und die Feinanpassung aufgehoben. [Spot-AF-Bereichs-Einstellung] (Setup-Registerkartenmenü) Im Setup-Menü kann für den AF-Bereich unter [Spot-AF-BereichsEinstellung] entweder die Option [Normal] oder [Pinpoint] gewählt werden. Wenn im Aufnahme-Menü unter [Focus] die Option [Spot AF] gewählt wurde, wird für den AF-Bereichsmodus die unter [Spot-AF-BereichsEinstellung] festgelegte Einstellung angewandt. Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Bei Auswahl von [Pinpoint] ist der AF-Bereichrahmen kleiner als bei Auswahl von [Normal]. Technische Daten Die technischen Daten beziehen sich auf die auf ein GXR-Kameragehäuse gesetzte Kameraeinheit. Effektive Pixel Ca.12,3 Millionen Bildsensor 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (Gesamtanzahl der Pixel: ca. 12,9 Millionen) Objektiv Brennweite 18,3mm (35-mm Format entspricht: 28mm) Blende (f-Zahl) f/2,5– f/22 (Verwendung von ND-Filter für Blenden von f/22 im Automatik-Aufnahmemodus) Fokus-Reichweite (vom Objektiv) Ca. 20cm–8 (Tele) Objektivaufbau 9 Elemente in 6 Gruppen (2 asphärische Linsenelemente mit 2 Oberflächen) Filterdurchmesser 40,5 mm Zoom Digitalzoom (Bilder)×4,0; Digitalzoom (Filme)×3,6; ca. 5,9× Zoom mit automatischer Skalierung (VGA) Fokus-Modus Kontrast-AF-basierter Multi und Spot AF; MF; Fixfokus; 8 (Fokussperre und AF-Hilfe) Verschlusszeit Fotos 1/3200–180s (obere und untere Begrenzungswerte variieren je nach Aufnahme- und Blitzmodus) Filme 1/2000–1/30s Belichtungssteuerung Messung TTL-CCD-Messung in Multi- (256 Segmente), Mehrfeld und Spot-Belichtungsmessung mit AE-Sperre Modus Programm AE, Blendenprioritätsmodus AE, manuelle Belichtung, Verschlussprioritätsmodus AE, Messfeld wechseln-Funktion BelichtungsKorrektur Manuell (+4,0 bis -4,0EV in Schritten von 1/3EV oder 1/2EV), Automatische Belichtungsreihe (-2EV bis +2EV in Schritten von 1/3EV oder 1/2EV) Belichtungskombinationsbereich (Automatik-Aufnahmemodus, Mittenbetonte Belichtungsmessung) 2,2 EV–19,3 EV (Kombinationsbereich für konvertierte ISO-Werte basierend auf EV für ISO100) • Werden Fotos mit einem Belichtungskorrekturwert von 6,0 EV oder weniger aufgenommen, verschiebt die Kamera die Einstellungen um 0,25 EV Richtung Unterbelichtung für jede 1,0 EV, um die sich der Belichtungskombinationsbereich verringert. Die Einstellung kann maximal um 1,0 EV verschoben werden. ISO-Empfindlichkeit (StandardAusgabeempfindlichkeit) Auto, Auto hoch, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 Weißabgleich Auto, Mlt-WA AUTO, Im Freien, Wolkig, Gluhlampenlicht1, Gluhlampenlicht2, Neonlicht, Man. Einst., Detail; automatische Weißabgleichreihe Blitz Reichweite (eingebauter Blitz) Ca. 20cm–3,0m (ISO Auto) (Tele) Aufnahmemodus Auto, Programmschaltmodus, Blendenpriorität, Verschlusspriorität, manuell, Motivprogramm (Film, Porträt, Sport, Landschaft, Nachtmodus, SchrägKorrektur), „Meine Einstellungen“ Serien-Modus Anzahl der Aufnahmen im Serienmodus (Bildgröße: RAW) Bei deaktivierter oder aktivierter Rauschreduzierung (schwach): 4 Bilder, Bei aktivierter Rauschreduzierung (stark): 3 Bilder Bei aktivierter Rauschreduzierung MAX: 3 Bilder Anzahl der Aufnahmen im Modus M-Serie Plus (1 Set) Schnell (1280×856) : 30 Aufnahmen (24 Bilder/s), Langsam (4288×2848) : 15 Aufnahmen (3 Bilder/s) Komprimierung*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Bildgröße (Pixel) Fotos 4288 × 2416, 3776 × 2832, 4288 × 2848, 2848 × 2848, 3456 × 1944, 3072 × 2304, 3456 × 2304, 2304 × 2304, 2592 × 1944, 2048 × 1536, 1280 × 960, 640 × 480 Filme 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Dateigröße (ca.) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17.800KB/Bild, FINE: 19.515KB/Bild, VGA: 15.587KB/Bild 4:3 NORMAL: 18.387KB/Bild, FINE: 20.157KB/Bild, VGA: 16.124KB/Bild 3:2 NORMAL: 20.946KB/Bild, FINE: 22.967KB/Bild, VGA: 18.337KB/Bild 1:1 NORMAL: 13.991KB/Bild, FINE: 15.333KB/Bild, VGA: 12.273KB/Bild Dateigröße (ca.) L 16:9 NORMAL: 2.222KB/Bild, FINE: 3.816KB/Bild 4:3 NORMAL: 2.315KB/Bild, FINE: 3.960KB/Bild 3:2 NORMAL: 2.615KB/Bild, FINE: 4.493KB/Bild 1:1 NORMAL: 1.761KB/Bild, FINE: 3.009KB/Bild M 16:9 NORMAL: 1.475KB/Bild, FINE: 2.509KB/Bild 4:3 NORMAL: 1.574KB/Bild, FINE: 2.662KB/Bild 3:2 NORMAL: 1.744KB/Bild, FINE: 2.968KB/Bild 1:1 NORMAL: 1.186KB/Bild, FINE: 2.003KB/Bild 5M 4:3 FINE: 2.287KB/Bild 3M 4:3 FINE: 1.474KB/Bild 1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/Bild VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/Bild Aufnahmekapazität (Akku) (basierend auf CIPA-Standard) DB-90: ca. 320 Aufnahmen*3 Maße (B×H×T) Nur Kameraeinheit: 68,7mm×57,9mm×50,4mm (Gemäß CIPA-Richtlinie) Auf Kameragehäuse aufgesetzt: 113,9mm×70,2mm×55,6mm (Gemäß CIPA-Richtlinie) Gewicht (ca.) Nur Kameraeinheit: 210g Auf Kameragehäuse aufgesetzt: 410g (Einschließlich des Akkus und der SD-Speicherkarte) Temperatur bei Betrieb 0°C bis 40°C Luftfeuchtigkeit bei Betrieb 90% oder weniger Temperatur bei Lagerung –20°C bis 60°C *1 Die verfügbaren Optionen variieren je nach Bildgröße. *2 Gleichzeitig wird auch eine JPEG-Datei aufgezeichnet. (Die JPEG-Datei ist möglicherweise eine Datei mit der Bildqualität FINE oder NORMAL und hat dieselben Maße wie die RAW- oder VGA-Datei oder eine Datei mit der Bildqualität NORMAL und einer Bildgröße von 640×480 Pixeln.) RAW-Dateien verwenden das Standard DNG-Dateiformat von Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Dient nur zur Orientierung. Die tatsächliche Anzahl von Aufnahmen hängt stark davon ab, wie die Kamera verwendet wird. Wie empfehlen Ihnen, bei einer längeren Einsatzdauer Ersatzakkus bereit zu halten.0 Kapazität Interner Speicher/Speicherkarte Die folgenden Werte dienen als Leitfaden für die Speicherkapazität des internen Speichers und von Speicherkarten von verschiedener Größe, je nach Bildqualität und Bildgröße, bei Verwendung der Bildqualität FINE. Fotos Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel) Interner Speicher 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB RAW* FINE 4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625 3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380 2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065 L FINE 4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684 3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453 4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565 2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 98151 Komprimierung Bildgröße (Pixel) Interner Speicher 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Wenn die Option [RAW] ausgewählt wird, wird dieser Wert für die Komprimierung der JPEGKopie verwendet.  Filme Bildgröße (Pixel) Interner Speicher 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 1280×720 24 Bilder/Sekunde 21s 3Min. 49s 7Min. 46s 15Min. 58s 31Min. 10s 62Min. 26s 125Min. 15 s 640×480 24 Bilder/Sekunde 1Min. 11Min. 2s 22Min. 27s 46Min. 10s 90Min. 7s 180Min. 32 s 362Min. 9 s 320×240 24 Bilder/Sekunde 2Min. 25s 26Min. 24s 53Min. 43s 110Min. 27 s 215Min. 35 s 431Min. 52s 866Min. 19 s Wichtig ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Die maximale Aufnahmegröße eines ununterbrochenen Films beträgt 4 GB. Die maximale Aufnahmezeit beträgt ca. 15 Minuten bei einer Auflösung von 1280 × 720, ca. 46 Minuten bei 640 × 480 und ca. 90 Minuten bei 320 × 240. Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Bei einer Auflösung von 1280 × 720 wird die Verwendung einer SD/SDHCSpeicherkarte der Geschwindigkeitsklasse 6 oder mehr empfohlen. Anhang Separates Zubehör Das RICOH Objektiv kann mit dem unten aufgeführten (separat erhältlichen) Zubehör betrieben werden. Gegenlichtblende (LH-1) Hinweis ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Bevor Sie ein optionales Zubehör verwenden, lesen Sie sich die mitgelieferte Dokumentation durch. • Aktuelle Informationen zu optionalem Zubehör finden Sie auf der Ricoh-Website (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/de). Vorsichtsmaßnahmen • Die mitgelieferte Garantie ist nur im jeweiligen Kaufland gültig. • Sollte das Gerät außerhalb des Kauflandes ausfallen oder nicht richtig funktionieren, übernimmt der Hersteller keine Verantwortung für die Reparatur des Gerätes vor Ort oder für die Übernahme von hierdurch entstandenen Kosten. • Lassen Sie die Ausrüstung nicht fallen und setzen Sie sie keinen heftigen Stößen aus. • Wenn Sie die Ausrüstung tragen, achten Sie darauf, dass sie nicht an andere Gegenstände stößt. Besondere Vorsicht ist erforderlich, um das Objektiv zu schützen. • Wenden Sie beim Anbringen des Filters oder der Gegenlichtblende keine übermäßige Kraft an. • Abrupte Temperaturveränderungen können Kondensierung hervorrufen, was zu sichtbarem Beschlagen im Objektiv oder zu Fehlfunktionen der Ausrüstung führen kann. Dies kann vermieden werden, indem Sie die Ausrüstung in eine Plastiktüte stecken, um die Temperaturveränderung zu verlangsamen. Nehmen Sie sie erst heraus, wenn die Luft in der Tüte dieselbe Temperatur erreicht hat wie die Umgebung. • Halten Sie die Ausrüstung trocken und vermeiden Sie die Bedienung mit nassen Händen. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Vorsichtsmaßnahmen kann zur Fehlfunktion der Ausrüstung oder zu Stromschlägen führen. • Halten Sie den Anschluss sauber. Tipp: Vermeiden von Kondensierung --------------------------------------------- Kondensierung kann besonders leicht auftreten, wenn Sie in einen Raum mit einem drastischen Temperaturunterschied gehen, bei hoher Luftfeuchtigkeit, in einem kalten Raum, nachdem die Heizung angestellt wurde, oder wenn die Kamera kalter Luft aus Klimaanlagen oder anderen Geräten ausgesetzt ist. Wartung und Lagerung der Ausrüstung Wartung der Ausrüstung • Fotos können durch Fingerabdrücke oder andere Fremdkörper auf dem Objektiv beeinträchtigt werden. Vermeiden Sie es, das Objektiv mit den Fingern zu berühren. Entfernen Sie Staub oder Fussel mit einem Blasebalg aus dem Kamera-Fachhandel oder reinigen Sie das Objektiv vorsichtig mit einem weichen, trockenen Tuch. Besonders um das Gewinde muss mit Sorgfalt vorgegangen werden. • Reinigen Sie die Ausrüstung gründlich, nachdem Sie sie am Strand benutzt haben oder während des Gebrauchs von Kosmetik. Setzen Sie die Ausrüstung keinen flüchtigen Substanzen wie etwa Verdünnungsmittel, Benzol oder Pestiziden aus. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Vorsichtsmaßnahmen kann zu Schäden der Ausrüstung oder ihrer Oberfläche führen. • Im seltenen Falle einer Fehlfunktion wenden Sie sich bitte an ein Ricoh. • Die Ausrüstung ist ein Hochpräzisionsgerät. Nehmen Sie sie nicht auseinander. Aufbewahrung • Bewahren Sie das Objektiv nicht auf, wo es Folgendem ausgesetzt ist: extreme Hitze oder Feuchtigkeit; große Temperatur- oder Feuchtigkeitsveränderungen; Staub, Schmutz oder Sand; starke Vibrationen; längerer Kontakt mit Chemikalien inkl. Mottenkugeln und andere Insektenschutzmittel, oder mit Vinyl- oder Gummiprodukten; starke Magnetfelder (z. B. in der Nähe eines Monitors, Transformators oder Magnets). • Um zu verhindern, dass sich auf dem Objektiv Schmutz Schmutz oder Fusseln ablagern, bewahren Sie das Produkt in Objektivtasche o.Ä. auf, in der sich kein Schmutz oder Fusseln ansammeln können. Zusätzlich sollte das Objektiv beim Transport nicht direkt in eine Tasche usw. gesteckt werden, um zu verhindern, dass sich Schmutz oder Staub auf ihr ablagert. Garantie und Kundendienst 1. Dieses Produkt hat eine eingeschränkte Garantie. Während der Garantiezeit, die in der mitgelieferten Garantie angegeben ist, werden fehlerhafte Teile kostenlos repariert. Im Falle einer Fehlfunktion der Ausrüstung wenden Sie sich an den Händler, bei dem Sie die Ausrüstung gekauft haben, oder an das nächste Ricoh Reparaturzentrum. Bitte beachten Sie, dass Kosten, die entstehen, wenn Sie die Ausrüstung zum Ricoh Reparaturzentrum bringen, nicht übernommen werden können. 2. Diese Garantie umfasst keine Schäden, die durch Folgendes entstanden sind: 1 Nichtbeachtung der Anweisungen im Benutzerhandbuch; 2 Reparaturen, Veränderungen oder Überholungen, die nicht durch ein autorisiertes, im Handbuch aufgelistetes Servicezentrum durchgeführt wurden; 3 Brand, Naturkatastrophen, höhere Gewalt, Blitz, abweichende Spannung etc.; 4 Unsachgemäße Aufbewahrung (siehe „Kamera-Benutzerhandbuch“), Auslaufen von Batterien und anderen Flüssigkeiten, Schimmel oder sonstige mangelhafte Wartung der Ausrüstung; 5 Eintauchen in Wasser (Überschwemmen), Kontakt mit Alkohol oder anderen Getränken, Eindringen von Sand oder Schmutz, heftige Stöße, Fallenlassen der Ausrüstung oder Druckausübung auf die Ausrüstung oder andere unnatürliche Ursachen. 3. Nach Ablauf der Garantie haften Sie für alle Reparaturkosten, auch solche, die in einem autorisierten Servicezentrum durchgeführt werden. 4. Sie haften für alle Reparaturkosten, auch innerhalb der Garantiezeit, wenn die Garantiekarte nicht beigefügt ist, oder wenn der Händlername oder das Kaufdatum geändert wurden oder nicht auf der Karte angegeben sind. 5. Kosten für Überholung und umfassende Inspektion auf speziellen Wunsch des Kunden hin wird dem Kunden in Rechnung gestellt, unabhängig davon, ob sie innerhalb der Garantiezeit stattfanden oder nicht. 6. Folgeschäden, die durch Fehlfunktion der Ausrüstung entstehen, wie etwa Fotografiekosten oder Ausbleiben von erwartetem Gewinn, werden nicht erstattet, unabhängig davon, ob sie innerhalb der Garantiezeit stattfanden oder nicht. 7. Die Garantie ist nur in dem Land gültig, in dem die Ausrüstung gekauft wurde. * Die obengenannten Bedingungen beziehen sich auf kostenlose Reparaturen und schränken Ihre Rechte nicht ein. * Der Zweck der obengenannten Bedingungen wird auch auf der mit dieser Ausrüstung gelieferten Garantiekarte beschrieben.0 8. Ersatzteile, die wesentlich für das Funktionieren der Ausrüstung sind (d. h. erforderliche Teile, die die Funktionen und Qualität der Ausrüstung ermöglichen), werden für einen Zeitraum von fünf Jahren nach Produktionsende des Objektivs zur Verfügung stehen. 9. Bitte beachten Sie, dass bei starker Beschädigung der Ausrüstung durch Überschwemmung, Untertauchen, Eindringen von Sand oder Schmutz, heftige Stöße oder Fallenlassen das Gerät möglicherweise nicht zu reparieren ist und die Wiederherstellung des ursprünglichen Zustandes unmöglich ist. Hinweise--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Bevor Sie das Objektiv zur Reparatur einschicken, überprüfen Sie die Batterien und lesen Sie die Bedienungsanleitung erneut, um eine ordnungsgemäße Bedienung sicherzustellen. • Einige Reparaturen benötigen einen erheblichen Zeitraum zur Fertigstellung. • Wenn Sie die Ausrüstung an ein Servicezentrum schicken, legen Sie bitte ein Schreiben bei, auf dem Sie die defekten Teile und das Problem so genau wie möglich beschreiben. • Entfernen Sie alle Zubehörteile, die nichts mit dem Problem zu tun haben, bevor Sie das Objektiv an das Servicezentrum schicken.Bei Problemen Ricoh-Niederlassungen RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2010 Oktober GR D In China gedruckt *L453 3971* GR LENS A12 28mm F2.5 Manual de instrucciones El número de serie se encuentra en la parte inferior del objetivo. Contenido del paquete Antes de utilizar su objetivo Ricoh, compruebe que el paquete contenga los siguientes elementos. Unidad cámara El número de serie se encuentra en la parte inferior. Tapa del objetivo Viene colocada en la unidad cámara. ? Manual de instrucciones (estemanual) ? Garantía Tapa del conector Viene colocada en la unidad cámara. Funda blanda Introducción Para utilizar este objetivo, es necesario colocarlo en un cuerpo de cámara compatible. Consulte la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara para saber cómo ejecutar las funciones de disparo y reproducción y cambiar ajustes, así como para leer precauciones importantes de uso. En este manual de instrucciones se explican las funciones y los modos de uso disponibles qué solo están disponibles al utilizar esta unidad de cámara con un cuerpo de cámara compatible. Véase también la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara GXR. Para sacar el mejor provecho de las funciones de este producto, lea atentamente este manual antes del uso. Conserve este manual a mano para poder consultarlo fácilmente. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Precauciones de seguridad Lea atentamente todas las precauciones de seguridad para garantizar un uso seguro. Fotografías de prueba Haga fotografías de prueba para asegurarse de que la cámara funcione adecuadamente antes de hacer fotografías en ocasiones importantes. Derechos de autor Queda prohibida la reproducción o alteración de documentos, revistas y otros materiales con derechos de autor, con una finalidad diferente a la personal, doméstica o de otro tipo igualmente limitado, sin el consentimiento del propietario de los derechos de autor. Exención de responsabilidad Ricoh Co., Ltd. no asume ninguna responsabilidad por no poder grabar o reproducir imágenes como resultado de un fallo de funcionamiento del producto. Garantía La garantía proporcionada con este producto sólo es válida dentro del país de compra. El fabricante no asume ninguna responsabilidad relacionada con el mantenimiento o la reparación del producto en otros países ni los gastos incurridos por este servicio. Interferencias radioeléctricas La utilización de este producto en las inmediaciones de otros equipos electrónicos puede afectar negativamente tanto a la cámara como al otro dispositivo. Las interferencias son particularmente probables si la cámara se utiliza muy cerca de una radio o un televisor. Esto puede resolverse alejando la cámara del otro dispositivo, reorientando la antena de radio o televisión, o conectando la radio o el televisor a otra toma de corriente. © 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda prohibida la reproducción total o parcial de esta publicación sin la autorización expresa por escrito de Ricoh. Ricoh se reserva el derecho a cambiar el contenido de este documento en cualquier momento y sin previo aviso. Se ha hecho todo lo posible por garantizar la precisión de la información de este documento. Si, a pesar de ello, detecta algún error u omisión, le agradeceríamos que nos lo notificara en la dirección que aparece en la contraportada de este manual. Precauciones de seguridad Símbolos de aviso En este manual de instrucciones y en el producto aparecen diversos símbolos de aviso que se deben tener en cuenta para evitarle lesiones a usted o a terceros, así como también daños materiales. A continuación se explican los símbolos y sus significados. Peligro Este símbolo indica que hay peligro inminente de muerte o de lesiones de gravedad debido a negligencia u operación incorrecta. Advertencia Este símbolo indica riesgos de muerte o lesiones de gravedad debido a negligencia u operación errónea. Precaución Este símbolo indica riesgos de lesiones o daños materiales debido a negligencia u operación errónea. Ejemplos de aviso El símbolo le indica las acciones que debe realizar. El símbolo le indica las acciones que no debe realizar. El símbolo puede estar combinado con otros símbolos para indicarle las acciones concretas que no debe realizar. Ejemplos = No tocar = No desmontar Para garantizar la seguridad en el uso de esta unidad, observe las siguientes precauciones. Peligro No intente desarmar, reparar o alterar el equipo por su cuenta. El circuito de alta tensión del interior del equipo representa un gran peligro eléctrico. Advertencia Guarde el equipo fuera del alcance de los niños. No toque los componentes internos del equipo en caso de que quedaran al descubierto debido a daños o una caída. El circuito de alta tensión del equipo podría provocar descargas eléctricas. Extraiga la batería lo más pronto posible, teniendo cuidado de evitar descargas eléctricas o quemaduras. Lleve el equipo dañado a su distribuidor o centro de asistencia técnica más cercano. No use el equipo en el baño o una ducha pues podría producirse incendio o descarga eléctrica. No use el equipo cerca de gases inflamables, gasolina, bencina, diluyente o sustancias similares, para evitar riesgos de explosión, incendio o quemaduras. • No use el equipo en un avión u otros lugares donde su uso esté restringido o prohibido, pues podría resultar en desastres o accidentes. Precaución No permita que el equipo se moje. Tampoco opere la cámara con las manos húmedas. Ambas acciones implican el riesgo de descargas eléctricas. Advertencias de seguridad para los accesorios Si utiliza productos opcionales, lea atentamente las instrucciones suministradas con el producto antes de usarlo.10 Contenido del paquete ...................................................................................................... 2 Introducción........................................................................................................................... 3 Precauciones de seguridad............................................................................................... 6 Componentes del objetivo...............................................................................13 Actualización del producto ..............................................................................14 Actualización del firmware de la cámara ...................................................................14 Toma......................................................................................................................17 Funciones de macro...........................................................................................................17 Modo P: Cambio de programas.....................................................................................18 Modo M: Exposición manual ..........................................................................................20 Reproducción......................................................................................................21 Pantalla de información de la unidad de cámara ...................................................21 Índice11 Ajustes ..................................................................................................................22 Ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] (menú de disparo) ..............................22 Fotografías...................................................................................................................23 Vídeos............................................................................................................................24 Ajuste de [Reducción ruido] (menú de disparo)......................................................25 Ajuste [Ajuste ISO] (menú de disparo)........................................................................26 [Ampliar pant.] (menú de disparo)...............................................................................27 [Reg. Mi Config.] (Opciones personalizados)............................................................28 [Confirmación disparador] (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados) ..............................................................................................................28 Configuración de palanca ADJ. (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados) ..............................................................................................................29 Configuración de botones Fn1/Fn2 (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados) ..............................................................................................................29 [Borrar Mi Config.] (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados)..............30 [Ajuste Original] (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados)..................301 Ajuste [Imagen Zoom Digital] (Pestaña de configuración) .................................31 [Ajustes de anillo de enfoque] (Pestaña de configuración).................................32 [Configuración área Spot AF] (menú de la pestaña de Configuración) ..........33 Especificaciones..................................................................................................34 Capacidad de la memoria interna/tarjeta de memoria ........................................40 Apéndices ............................................................................................................43 Accesorios opcionales.......................................................................................................43 Precauciones de uso..........................................................................................................44 Cuidado del equipo y almacenamiento.....................................................................46 Garantía y servicio..............................................................................................................481 Componentes del objetivo 1 2 3 1 Conector 2 Anillo de enfoque 3 Objetivo1 Actualización del producto Actualización del firmware de la cámara Cuando acopla por primera vez la unidad cámara al cuerpo de la cámara, la función de actualización de la versión se iniciará automáticamente si el firmware del cuerpo de la cámara tiene que actualizarse. En este caso, actualice el firmware del cuerpo de la cámara utilizando el siguiente procedimiento. Si la versión del firmware ya está actualizada, la función de actualización de la versión no se iniciará y podrá utilizar el objetivo inmediatamente. 1 Compruebe que la cámara esté apagada y acople la unidad cámara al cuerpo de la cámara. • Para obtener más información acerca de cómo acoplar la unidad cámara, consulte la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara.1 2 Encienda la cámara. • Aparecerá un mensaje de confirmación sobre la actualización del firmware. 3 Pulse los botones Fn1/Fn2 para seleccionar [Sí] y, a continuación, pulse el botón MENU/OK. • La actualización del firmware se inicia y los siguientes mensajes aparecerán en la pantalla: [Verif. escribir sobre archivo] [Escribir sobre programa] La cámara se desactivará automáticamente y, a continuación, la volverá a encender. Cuando la cámara encienda de nuevo, aparecerá la pantalla de la versión del firmware y la actualización habrá finalizado.1 Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Para comprobar la versión del firmware seleccione [Versión del firmware] en el menú de configuración. Otra posibilidad es que, con la cámara apagada, mantenga el botón 6 (Reproducir) pulsado durante más de 1 segundo mientras mantiene pulsado el botón –. La versión del firmware aparecerá en la pantalla durante unos 20 segundos. • Para obtener la información más reciente sobre las actualizaciones del firmware, visite la página web de Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc). Puede descargar las actualizaciones de firmware más recientes para actualizar el equipo.1 Toma Funciones de macro Las funciones Disparo macro, Objetivo macro, Macro automático y Visualización de la distancia mínima de disparo durante disparo macro no están disponibles con el objetivo A12 F2.5 de 28 mm.1 Modo P: Cambio de programas En el diagrama de la página siguiente se muestran las combinaciones posibles de intervalos para velocidad de obturación y apertura. Los valores reales pueden variar dependiendo del EV (valor de exposición). En estos ejemplos, el modo de flash está ajustado a [Flash No] y el ajuste ISO está en [ISO 200].1 Ev5 Ev6 Ev7 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 Ev-1 Ev-2 Ev-3 F16 F22 F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8 F2.0 F1.4 F1.0 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20 F22.0 F2.50 Modo M: Exposición manual Si se selecciona [Auto] o [Alt Autom.] en Ajuste ISO, ISO se fijará a 200 mientras la cámara esté en modo de exposición manual. 1 Reproducción Pantalla de información de la unidad de cámara Los detalles de [A12 28mm] para la unidad de cámara se muestran en la pantalla de información detallada. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Los detalles de [A12 28mm] para la unidad de cámara también se muestran en el archivo Exif. Ajustes Ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] (menú de disparo) Hay disponibles las siguientes opciones de calidad de imagen, tamaño de imagen y relación de aspecto para el ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] en el menú de disparo. El tamaño de archivo de una fotografía dependerá de la combinación de calidad y tamaño de imagen que se utilice. Al grabar vídeos se puede seleccionar el formato de vídeo. Fotografías Opción Relación de aspecto Compresión Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2848×2848 L (grande) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848 M (mediano) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304 Opción Relación de aspecto Compresión Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Si se selecciona [RAW], éste será el ajuste empleado para la copia en JPEG. *2 Según el área fotografiada, pueden aparecer bandas negras en la parte superior e inferior de la imagen visualizada. *3 Según el área fotografiada, pueden aparecer bandas negras en los lados derecho e izquierdo de la imagen visualizada. Vídeos Opción Formato de vídeo HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 Ajuste de [Reducción ruido] (menú de disparo) Reduce el ruido de la fotografía al tomarla. Elija entre [Off], [Auto], [Bajo], [Alto] o [MAX]. El tiempo necesario para grabar imágenes varía dependiendo de la opción seleccionada. No puede usar esta función si están seleccionados [Retrato], [Deporte] o [M. Cor. Trap.] como modo de escena. Ajuste [Ajuste ISO] (menú de disparo) • Si se selecciona [Auto] y se utiliza el flash, la sensibilidad empleada aumentará hasta un nivel equivalente a ISO800. • Si está seleccionado [Auto] y no se está usando el flash, los valores máximos y mínimos para la sensibilidad ISO serán 200 y 400 respectivamente, independientemente del tamaño del píxel (píxeles). [Ampliar pant.] (menú de disparo) Si mueve el objeto con las teclas de dirección (+/-/Fn1/Fn2) y mantiene pulsado el botón MENU/OK, se magnificará la posición del objeto, permitiéndole ver con detalle el enfoque. Si mantiene pulsado de nuevo el botón MENU/OK, puede volver a la vista estándar desde la vista aumentada. Para ajustar el aumento, mantenga pulsado el botón t (contador automático) o seleccione [Relación de aumento] en el menú de ajustes. Seleccione de entre [2×], [4×] o [8×] con el botón +/- y, a continuación pulse el botón MENU/OK. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Puede ajustar la función [Ampliar pant.] con [Configuración de botones Fn1/Fn2] en la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados. [Reg. Mi Config.] (Opciones personalizados) Desde [Reg. Mi Config.], también puede ajustar las opciones de [Ajustes de anillo de enfoque] y [Configuración área Spot AF] en el menú de configuración. Para más información sobre las demás opciones disponibles, consulte la “Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara”. [Confirmación disparador] (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados) Si se ha ajustado [Confirmación disparador] en [ADJ./DIRECT] en la pestaña de ajustes personalizados, pulse el botón del obturador hasta la mitad si desea terminar de configurar el modo ADJ. y la pantalla DIRECT. A continuación, podrá comenzar a hacer fotografías. Si se ha ajustado en [ADJ.], terminará la configuración del modo ADJ. y podrá comenzar a hacer fotografías. Si se ha ajustado en [DIRECT], terminará la configuración de la pantalla DIRECT y podrá comenzar a hacer fotografías. Una vez que haya hecho las fotografías, el sistema volverá a la pantalla de monitorización. Configuración de palanca ADJ. (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados) Puede establecer la función [Formato] de [Configuración de palanca ADJ. 1] en [Configuración de palanca ADJ. 4] en la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados. Si pulsa el botón de palanca ADJ. después de configurar la función de Formato, aparecerá el siguiente icono, que indica que puede ajustar el formato. Si desea información sobre otras funciones disponibles, consulte la Guía de usuario del cuerpo de cámara. Configuración de botones Fn1/Fn2 (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados) Puede ajustar las funciones [Ampliar pant.] y [Formato] desde [Configuración del botón Fn1] o [Configuración del botón Fn2] en la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados. Una vez que haya configurado la función de Formato, podrá ajustar el formato pulsando el botón Fn1 o Fn2. Si desea información sobre otras funciones disponibles, consulte la Guía de usuario del cuerpo de cámara.0 [Borrar Mi Config.] (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados) Si selecciona [Borrar Mi Config.] en la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados, podrá cancelar la configuración que ajustó en [Reg. Mi Config.] para [Cuadro Mi Config.] y para [MY1], [MY2] y [MY3] del dial de modo. [Ajuste Original] (menú de la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados) Si se ha seleccionado [Ajuste Original] en la pestaña de Ajustes personalizados, se reiniciará la configuración personalizada. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Los ajustes realizados en [Cuadro Mi Config] no se reiniciarán.1 Ajuste [Imagen Zoom Digital] (Pestaña de configuración) El tamaño de la imagen grabada varía según el zoom con cambio de tamaño automático, tal como se indica a continuación. Índice de zoom Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Índice de zoom Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Aprox. 1,0× L Aprox. 1,8× 3M Aprox. 1,2× M Aprox. 3,0× 1M Aprox. 1,5× 5M Aprox. 5,9× VGA [Ajustes de anillo de enfoque] (Pestaña de configuración) En [Ajustes de anillo de enfoque], puede seleccionar un modo que permita seleccionar funciones de enfoque tanto automático como manual o un modo que solo contenga funciones para el enfoque manual. Si está seleccionado [AF + MF] y se pulsa el disparador hasta la mitad para enfocar, podrá efectuar ajustes finos para el enfoque girando el anillo de enfoque. Opción AF + MF Sólo MF Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Si se vuelve a pulsar el disparador después de realizar un enfoque fino, se activará el enfoque automático y se cancelará el ajuste fino. [Configuración área Spot AF] (menú de la pestaña de Configuración) Puede seleccionar [Normal] o [Exacto] para el área AF de [Configuración área Spot AF] en el menú de configuración. Si se selecciona [Spot AF] en [Foco] desde el menú de disparo, se enfocará según el modo de área AF seleccionado en [Configuración área Spot AF]. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Cuando está seleccionado [Exacto], el marco del área AF es más pequeño que en el modo [Normal]. Especificaciones La especificaciones corresponden a la unidad cámara montada en un cuerpo GXR. Píxeles efectivos Aproximadamente 12,3 millones Sensor de imagen 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (píxeles totales: 12,9 millones aprox.) Objetivo Distancia focal 18,3mm (formato equivalente a 35 mm: 28mm) Apertura (número f) f/2,5– f/22 (filtro ND utilizado para aperturas de f/22 en modo de disparo automático) Rango de enfoque (desde el objetivo) Aprox. 20cm–8 (fin de telefoto) Construcción 9 elementos en 6 grupos (2 elementos asféricos con 2 superficies) Diámetro del filtro 40,5 mm Zoom Zoom digital de 4,0× (fotografías), zoom digital de 3,6× (vídeos); aprox. 5,9× zoom con cambio de tamaño automático (VGA) Modo de enfoque Multi y Spot AF basado en Contrast AF; MF; Snap; 8 (bloqueo de enfoque y ayuda AF) Velocidad de obturación Fotografías 1/3200–180s (los límites superior e inferior varían según el modo de toma y flash) Vídeos 1/2000–1/30s Control de la exposición Medición Medición TTL-CCD en modos multi (256 segmentos), ponderada central y foco con bloqueo de exposición automática Modo Programa AE, prioridad de apertura AE, exposición manual, prioridad de obturación AE, función Cambiar objeto Compensación de exposición Manual (+4,0 a -4,0EV en incrementos de 1/3EV o 1/2EV), horquillado automático (-2EV a +2EV en incrementos de 1/3EV o 1/2EV) Rango de vínculo de exposición (modo de disparo automático, medición con ponderación central) 2,2 EV–19,3 EV (rango de vínculo para ISO convertido automático según el EV de ISO100) • Al tomar fotografías en entornos con EV de 6,0 o menos, por cada 1,0 EV que el rango del vínculo de exposición disminuye, la cámara cambiará el ajuste 0,25 EV hacia el lado de bajo brillo. La cantidad máxima de cambio es 1,0 EV. Sensibilidad ISO (sensibilidad de salida estándar) Auto, Alt Autom., ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 Balance de blancos Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Exterior, Nublado, Luz Incand.1, Luz Incand.2, Luz Fluorescente, Ajuste Manual, Detalle; horquillado de balance de blancos Flash Alcance (flash incorporado) Aprox. 20cm–3,0m (ISO auto) (fin de telefoto) Modo de disparo Auto, cambio de programas, prioridad de apertura, prioridad de obturación, manual, escena (vídeo, retrato, deportes, paisaje, paisaje noche, corrección trap.), “Mi Config.” Modo Continuo Número de imágenes tomadas en modo Continuo (tamaño de imagen: RAW) Reducción de ruido desactivada o activada (Baja): 4 imágenes, Reducción de ruido activada (Alta): 3 imágenes Reducción de ruido activada MAX: 3 imágenes Número de fotografías tomadas en modo M-Cont + (1 grupo) A (1280×856): 30 fotografías (24 fotogramas/seg), B (4288×2848): 15 fotografías (3 fotogramas/seg) Compresión*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Fotografías 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848, 3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Vídeos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Tamaño de archivo (aprox.) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17.800KB/fotograma, FINE: 19.515KB/fotograma, VGA: 15.587KB/fotograma 4:3 NORMAL: 18.387KB/fotograma, FINE: 20.157KB/fotograma, VGA: 16.124KB/fotograma 3:2 NORMAL: 20.946KB/fotograma, FINE: 22.967KB/fotograma, VGA: 18.337KB/fotograma 1:1 NORMAL: 13.991KB/fotograma, FINE: 15.333KB/fotograma, VGA: 12.273KB/fotograma Tamaño de archivo (aprox.) L 16:9 NORMAL: 2.222KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.816KB/fotograma 4:3 NORMAL: 2.315KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.960KB/fotograma 3:2 NORMAL: 2.615KB/fotograma, FINE: 4.493KB/fotograma 1:1 NORMAL: 1.761KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.009KB/fotograma M 16:9 NORMAL: 1.475KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.509KB/fotograma 4:3 NORMAL: 1.574KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.662KB/fotograma 3:2 NORMAL: 1.744KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.968KB/fotograma 1:1 NORMAL: 1.186KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.003KB/fotograma 5M 4:3 FINE: 2.287KB/fotograma 3M 4:3 FINE: 1.474KB/fotograma 1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/fotograma VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/fotograma Vida de la batería (basada en el estándar CIPA) DB-90: aprox. 320 disparos *3 Dimensiones (an.×al.×pr.) Sólo unidad cámara: 68,7mm×57,9mm×50,4mm (Basando en la pauta de CIPA) Al estar montada en el cuerpo de la cámara: 113,9mm×70,2mm×55,6mm (Basando en la pauta de CIPA) Peso (aprox.) Sólo unidad cámara: 210 g Al estar montada en el cuerpo de la cámara: 410 g (Incluyendo la batería y la tarjeta de memoria SD) Temperatura de funcionamiento 0°C a 40°C Humedad de funcionamiento 90% como máximo Temperatura de almacenamiento –20°C a 60°C *1 Las opciones disponibles pueden variar según el tamaño de la imagen. *2 También se graba un archivo JPEG (el archivo JPEG puede ser un archivo de calidad FINE o NORMAL con las dimensiones del archivo RAW o un archivo VGA con un tamaño de 640×480 píxeles). Los archivos RAW utilizan el formato DNG estándar promocionado por Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Sólo para referencia, el número real de tomas varía considerablemente según el uso que se le dé a la cámara. Se recomienda llevar alguna batería de repuesto si se va a usar la cámara durante un largo período de tiempo.0 Capacidad de la memoria interna/tarjeta de memoria Los siguientes valores se presentan como referencia de la capacidad de almacenamiento de la memoria interna y las tarjetas de memoria de distintos tamaños, por calidad de imagen y tamaño de imagen, utilizando una calidad de imagen FINE. Fotografías Compresión Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB RAW* FINE 4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625 3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380 2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065 L FINE 4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684 3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453 4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565 2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 98151 Compresión Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Si se selecciona [RAW], ésta será la compresión empleada para la copia en JPEG.  Vídeos Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 1280×720 24 fotogramas/ segundo 21seg. 3min. 49seg. 7min. 46seg. 15min. 58seg. 31min. 10seg. 62min. 26seg. 125min. 15seg. 640×480 24 fotogramas/ segundo 1min. 11min. 2seg. 22min. 27seg. 46min. 10seg. 90min. 7seg. 180min. 32seg. 362min. 9seg. 320×240 24 fotogramas/ segundo 2min. 25seg. 26min. 24seg. 53min. 43seg. 110min. 27seg. 215min. 35seg. 431min. 52seg. 866min. 19seg. Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ El tamaño máximo para una grabación ininterrumpida de un solo vídeo es de 4 GB. El tiempo máximo de grabación es de unos 15 minutos en tamaño 1280 × 720, de unos 46 mintuos en tamaño 640 × 480 y de unos 90 minutos si se graba a 320 × 240. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Al grabar vídeos con tamaño de 1280 × 720, se recomienda usar tarjetas de memoria SD/SDHC de Class 6 o mayor velocidad de transmisión mínima. Apéndices Accesorios opcionales La RICOH LENS puede usarse con los artículos (se venden por separado) que se relacionan a continuación. Capucha para objetivo (LH-1) Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Antes de usar un accesorio opcional, véase la documentación que viene con el producto. • Para ver lo último en accesorios opcionales, visite el sitio web de Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/). Precauciones de uso • La garantía proporcionada con este producto sólo es válida dentro del país de compra. • En caso de que el producto presente un defecto o fallo de funcionamiento mientras está fuera del país, el fabricante no asumirá ninguna responsabilidad en cuanto a la reparación del producto localmente ni a los gastos incurridos por esta. • No deje caer el equipo ni lo someta a fuertes golpes. • Cuando transporte el equipo, procure que no golpee otros objetos. Se requiere especial atención para proteger el objetivo. • Tenga cuidado de no ejercer demasiada fuerza al incorporar un filtro o una capucha para objetivo. • Los cambios bruscos de temperatura podrían causar condensación, dando lugar a condensación visible dentro del objetivo o fallos de funcionamiento en el equipo. Esto puede evitarse colocando el equipo en una bolsa de plástico para atenuar el cambio de temperatura, y retirándolo sólo después de que el aire de la bolsa alcance la misma temperatura que el entorno. • Mantenga seco el equipo y evite sujetarlo con las manos húmedas. La no observancia de estas precauciones podría causar un fallo de funcionamiento del equipo o una descarga eléctrica. • Mantenga limpio el conector. Consejo: evitar la condensación--------------------------------------------------- Es particularmente probable que se produzca condensación si se desplaza a una zona con una brusca diferencia de temperatura, si la humedad es alta, en una habitación fría después de haber encendido el calefactor o cuando la cámara está expuesta al aire frío de un aparato de aire acondicionado u otro dispositivo. Cuidado del equipo y almacenamiento Cuidado del equipo • Las fotografías pueden verse afectadas por huellas y otras materias extrañas en el objetivo. Evite tocar el objetivo con los dedos. Retire el polvo o pelusa con un soplador, que puede adquirir en una tienda de suministro de cámaras, o limpie suavemente el objetivo con un paño seco y suave. Tenga especial cuidado al manipular la zona del tubo del objetivo. • Limpie el equipo a fondo después de utilizarlo en la playa o manejar cosméticos. No exponga el equipo a sustancias volátiles como disolvente, benceno o pesticidas. La no observancia de esta precaución podría causar daños en el equipo o en su acabado. • En el caso improbable de fallo de funcionamiento, visite un centro de reparaciones Ricoh. • Este equipo es un dispositivo de alta precisión. No lo desmonte. Almacenamiento • No guarde la cámara donde pueda estar expuesta a: calor o humedad excesivos; grandes cambios de temperatura o humedad; polvo, suciedad o arena; fuertes vibraciones; contacto prolongado con productos químicos, incluyendo bolas de alcanfor y otros repelentes de insectos, o con productos de vinilo o caucho; fuertes campos magnéticos (por ejemplo, en las proximidades de un monitor, transformador o imán). • Cuando guarde el producto, colóquelo dentro de una caja de cámara, etc., que esté limpia y donde no entren las pelusas para evitar que la suciedad o el polvo se adhieran a la cámara. Además, cuando lIeve la cámara, no la meta directamente en el bolsillo, etc., para evitar que se ensucie o le entre polvo. Garantía y servicio 1. Este producto está cubierto por una garantía limitada. Durante el periodo de garantía mencionado en la Garantía suministrada con el equipo, cualquier pieza defectuosa se reparará gratuitamente. En caso de fallo de funcionamiento del equipo, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor al que compró el equipo o con su centro de reparaciones Ricoh más cercano. Tenga en cuenta que no se le reembolsará el coste de llevar el equipo al centro de reparaciones Ricoh. 2. Esta garantía no cubre ningún daño resultante de: 1 no seguimiento de las instrucciones del manual de instrucciones; 2 reparación, modificación o revisión del producto no realizadas por uno de los centros de servicio autorizados incluidos en el manual de instrucciones; 3 incendio, desastre natural, fuerza mayor, relámpago, tensión anómala, etc.; 4 almacenamiento inadecuado (indicado en la “Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara”), fuga de batería y otros líquidos, moho o cualquier otro cuidado insuficiente del equipo. 5 inmersión en agua (inundación), exposición a alcohol u otras bebidas, infiltración de arena o barro, choque físico, caída del equipo o presión sobre el equipo y otras causas no naturales. 3. Cuando finalice el periodo de garantía, usted será responsable de los gastos de reparación, incluyendo los incurridos en un centro de servicio autorizado. 4. Será responsable de todos los gastos de reparación, incluso dentro del periodo de garantía, si no se presenta la tarjeta de garantía o si el nombre del distribuidor o la fecha de compra se han modificado o no están indicados en la tarjeta. 5. Los gastos de revisión e inspección completa por petición especial del cliente se cargarán al cliente, tanto si se producen durante el periodo de garantía como si no. 6. Cualquier daño consecuente derivado de un fallo del equipo, como gastos incurridos al tomar fotografías o pérdida de ganancias esperadas, no será reembolsado, independientemente de si ocurre dentro o fuera del periodo de garantía. 7. La garantía sólo es válida en el país en el que se compró el equipo. * Las disposiciones anteriores se refieren a reparaciones ofrecidas sin cargos y no limitan sus derechos legales. * La intención de las disposiciones anteriores también se describe en la tarjeta de garantía proporcionada con este equipo.0 8. Las piezas esenciales para el mantenimiento del equipo (es decir, componentes necesarios para mantener las funciones y calidad de la cámara) estarán disponibles durante un periodo de cinco años a partir de la descontinuación del equipo. 9. Tenga en cuenta que si el equipo se daña seriamente por inundación, inmersión, infiltración de arena o barro, choques violentos o caída, es posible que no pueda repararse ni restaurarse a su estado original. Notas------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Antes de enviar la cámara para repararla, compruebe el cuerpo de la cámara y vuelva a leer el manual de instrucciones para garantizar un funcionamiento correcto. • Algunas reparaciones requieren mucho tiempo. • Cuando envíe el equipo a un centro de servicio, incluya una nota describiendo la pieza defectuosa y el problema con la mayor precisión posible. • Retire todos los accesorios no relacionados con el problema antes de enviar la cámara al centro de servicio.*L453 3973* Si surge un problema Oficinas de Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN) (desde España) 91 406 9148 (desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2010 octubre SP E Impreso en China GXR MOUNT A12 Mode d’emploi Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif. Contenu de l’emballage Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous. Unité de montage d’objectif Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil. Bague de montage Est fixée à l’unité de montage d’objectif. Capuchon du connecteur Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. Dispositif de contrôle d’objectif Étui souple ? Mode d’emploi (le présentmanuel) ? Garantie Introduction Pour utiliser cette unité de montage d’objectif, vous devez fixer l’objectif à montage M Leica ou autre à un boîtier d’appareil photo GXR. Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Ce mode d’emploi décrit les fonctions et les consignes d’utilisation qui ne sont valides que lorsque cette unité de montage d’objectif est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR. Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir une utilisation sans danger. Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants. Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires, est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits. Exonération de responsabilité Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente. © 2011 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout moment et sans avis préalable. Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel. Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les objectifs, contactez un revendeur d’objectifs. Mesures de sécurité Symboles d’avertissement Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens. Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous. Danger Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Avertissement Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Attention Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées. Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites. Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action spécifique est interdite. Exemples = Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en toute sécurité. Danger Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique. Avertissement Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants. Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène, de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion, d’incendie ou de brûlure. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident.10 Attention Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge électrique. Consignes de sécurité relatives aux accessoires Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les instructions fournies avec ce produit.11 Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 4 Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 7 Nomenclature .....................................................................................................15 Nomenclature .....................................................................................................16 Mise à jour du micrologiciel............................................................................................16 Fixation de l’objectif...........................................................................................19 Détermination lorsqu’un objectif peut être utilisé avec l’unité de montage d’objectif ...........................................................................................................................19 Fixation de l’objectif...........................................................................................................22 Retrait de l’objectif .............................................................................................................22 Nettoyage du capteur........................................................................................23 Prise de vue..........................................................................................................24 Mise au point........................................................................................................................24 Table des matières1 P : Mode Changement de programme / A : Mode Priorité ouverture..................................... 24 S : Mode Priorité à la vitesse d’obturation..................................................................25 M : Mode Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................25 Ajout de modes Scène......................................................................................................26 Agrandissement de photos.............................................................................................27 Enregistrement de fonctions sur le sélecteur plus-moins...................................28 Ajout de tailles prises en charge pour le zoom de redimensionnement automatique....................................................................................................................28 Réglages...............................................................................................................29 Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue)..............................................29 Photos...........................................................................................................................30 Vidéos............................................................................................................................31 [Réduction bruit].................................................................................................................32 [Balance blancs]...................................................................................................................33 [Sensibilité ISO]....................................................................................................................34 [Assist. mise au pt]..............................................................................................................35 [Illum. périphérique]..........................................................................................................351 [Correction distorsion]......................................................................................................36 [Correction du dégradé de couleurs] ..........................................................................36 [Lim vitess obt flash]..........................................................................................................37 Menu onglet des options personnalisées......................................................38 [Enr. Mes Réglages]............................................................................................................38 [Éditer Mes Réglages]........................................................................................................38 [Confirmation du déclencheur].....................................................................................39 Manette ADJ. Réglage.......................................................................................................39 [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.]..........................................................................................40 [Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] ...........................................................................40 [Supprimer Mes Réglages] ..............................................................................................40 [Rétablir valeurs par défaut] ...........................................................................................41 [Touche Zoom] ....................................................................................................................41 Menu Config. .......................................................................................................42 [Sensibilité ISO auto-hi]....................................................................................................42 Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration) ..........................42 [Lecture zoom cible]..........................................................................................................431 Modification de [Sons touches].....................................................................................43 [Annul. affich. zoom]..........................................................................................................44 [Sélect. aide m. au point] .................................................................................................44 Caractéristiques..................................................................................................45 Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................50 Annexes................................................................................................................53 Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................53 Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................54 Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................56 Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................581 Nomenclature 1 2 3 1 Connecteur 2 Touche de libération de l'objectif 3 Monture latérale du boîtier1 Nomenclature Mise à jour du micrologiciel Lorsque vous fixez pour la première fois l’unité de montage d’objectif au boîtier de l’appareil photo, la fonction de mise à jour de version démarre automatiquement si le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil photo doit être mis à jour. Dans ce cas, mettez à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil comme suit. Si la version du micrologiciel est déjà à jour, la fonction de mise à jour de version ne démarre pas et vous pouvez utiliser l’objectif immédiatement. 1 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension et fixez l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil. • Pour en savoir plus sur la fixation de l’unité appareil photo, reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.1 2 Mettez le boîtier de l'appareil photo sous tension. • Un message de confirmation relatif à la mise à jour du micrologiciel s’affiche. 3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner [Oui], puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. • La mise à jour du micrologiciel démarre et les messages suivants s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. [Vérification du fichier de réécriture] [Programme de réécriture] L’appareil photo redémarre, la version du micrologiciel s’affiche, puis la mise à jour est terminée.1 Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Il n’est pas nécessaire que l’objectif soit installé lors de la mise à jour du micrologiciel. • Pour confirmer la version du micrologiciel, sélectionnez [Version du micrologiciel] dans le menu de configuration. Vous pouvez également, avec l’appareil photo hors tension, maintenir la touche 6 (Lecture) enfoncée pendant plus d’une seconde tout en maintenant la touche – enfoncée. La version du micrologiciel s’affiche pendant 20 secondes environ. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les mises à jour du micrologiciel, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/).1 Fixation de l’objectif Détermination lorsqu’un objectif peut être utilisé avec l’unité de montage d’objectif Vérifiez pour savoir si votre objectif peut être fixé à l’unité de montage d’objectif. 1 Alignez les orifices du dispositif de contrôle d’objectif avec les taquets du montage d’objectif, puis faites-glisser le dispositif de contrôle d’objectif bien droit sur l’objectif. • Faites-le glisser de sorte qu’il repose légèrement sur l’objectif.0 2 Placez l’objectif sur une surface plane, et vérifiez-le latéralement (du côté du bord). • Assurez-vous que le dispositif de contrôle d'objectif et la monture d'objectif sont fixés fermement sans aucun espacement. L‘objectif ne peut pas être fixé dans les cas suivants : L’objectif dépasse de la partie supérieure du dispositif de contrôle d’objectif. Un espacement existe entre le dispositif de contrôle d’objectif et le montage d’objectif. L’objectif peut être utilisé avec l’unité. L’objectif ne peut pas être utilisé avec l’unité. L’objectif ne peut pas être utilisé avec l’unité.1 Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Forcez l’installation de l’unité de montage d’objectif sur un objectif qui ne peut pas être utilisé risque d’endommager ou de rayer l’objectif ou l’unité de montage d’objectif. • Ne tentez pas de pousser le dispositif de contrôle d’objectif sur le montage d’objectif avec la force. Manipulez avec précaution afin de ne pas rayer ou endommager l’objectif lorsque vous le fixez. • Si vous utilisez un objectif rétractable, vérifiez que l’objectif est bien rétracté. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les objectifs compatibles avec l’unité de montage d’objectif, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www. ricoh.com/r_dc/). Veuillez noter que certains objectifs peuvent ne pas être compatibles en fonction de leurs conditions. Veuillez vérifier au préalable si l’objectif peut être fixé à l’aide du dispositif de contrôle. Fixation de l’objectif 1 Alignez le repère sur l’objectif avec la marque rouge sur l’unité de montage d’objectif, puis fixez l’objectif bien droit sur l’unité de montage d’objectif. 2 Tournez l'objectif vers la droite jusqu'à ce que les encoches de verrouillage de l’objectif s’alignent avec la rainure de verrouillage de celui-ci. Retrait de l’objectif 1 Tournez l’objectif vers la gauche tout en appuyant sur la touche de retrait d’objectif jusqu’à ce que la marque sur l’objectif soit alignée avec la marque rouge sur l’unité de montage d’objectif. 2 Tirez l’objectif bien droit pour le retirer. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Pour plus d’informations sur l’objectif, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de l’objectif et aux autres documents connexes. Nettoyage du capteur Procédez comme suit pour nettoyer le capteur. 1 Mettez sous tension. 2 Faites-glisser la touche Marche/Arrêt vers OFF tout en appuyant sur la touche N. • Mettez hors tension avec l’obturateur ouvert. 3 Nettoyez l’unité à l’aide d’un soufflant disponible dans le commerce. 4 Une fois le nettoyage terminé, mettez sous tension, puis hors tension de nouveau. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Ne touchez pas le capteur ou l’obturateur. • La couleur peut être pâle si le capteur est soumis à une lumière intense pendant une période prolongée. Ne posez pas l’appareil photo avec l’obturateur ouvert. • Lorsque l’option [Sél. init. déclench.] du menu de configuration est définie sur [OUVRIR], l’obturateur reste ouvert lorsque l’appareil est mis hors tension. • N’utilisez pas un pulvérisateur avec cet appareil. • N’insérez pas les bords du soufflant à l’intérieur du montage. • Les dommages occasionnés pendant le nettoyage ne sont pas pris en charge par la garantie. Prise de vue Mise au point L’unique mode de mise au point disponible est MF (Manual Focus, mise au point manuelle). Réglez la mise au point manuellement à l’aide de l’objectif. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- L’utilisation de l’option [Agrand. affich] (GP. 27) ou de l’option [Assist. mise au pt] (GP. 35) du menu de prise de vue simplifie la vérification de la mise au point. P : Mode Changement de programme / A : Mode Priorité ouverture P : Mode Changement de programme et A : Mode Priorité ouverture fonctionne comme c: Mode Prise de vue automatique.  S : Mode Priorité à la vitesse d’obturation Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, l’exposition sera réglée correctement dans la plage ISO lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode de priorité à la vitesse d’obturation. M : Mode Exposition manuelle Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO sera fixée à 200 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle. Vous avez le choix entre B (Bulb, ampoule) et T (Time, heure) pour la vitesse d’obturation. Avec le réglage B, l'image est exposée lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur et l’exposition se termine lorsque le déclencheur est relâché. Avec le réglage T, l’exposition commence lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur et se termine lorsque vous appuyez à nouveau sur le déclencheur. Dans ces deux modes, l’appareil photo cesse la prise de vue au bout de 180 secondes. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Les réglages B et T peuvent être utilisés à l’aide du déclencheur à câble optionnel (CA-1).  Ajout de modes Scène [Miniatures], [Contraste élevé N et B], [Flou artistique], [Traitement croisé], [Toy Camera] et [Déclencheur électronique] ont été ajoutés au mode Scène. [Déclencheur électronique] vous permet de prendre des photos sans vous soucier du son ou des vibrations du déclencheur. Vous pouvez sélectionner une vitesse d’obturation comprise entre 1/8000 sec. et 1 sec. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Veillez à remédier au bougé de l’appareil lorsque vous utilisez le mode [Déclencheur électronique] car un bougé de l’appareil est possible en raison de durées d’exposition différentes entre les parties supérieure et inférieure de l’écran. Ce mode n’est pas approprié si les sujets sont en mouvement. • Vous ne pouvez pas régler la sensibilité ISO sur 200 lorsque vous utilisez [Déclencheur électronique]. Agrandissement de photos Appuyez de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK pour agrandir et afficher le centre de l’écran. Appuyez de nouveau de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK pour agrandir le centre de l’écran et afficher la partie agrandie en plein écran. Appuyez de nouveau de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK pour revenir à l’affichage normal. Vous pouvez définir l’agrandissement de l’écran en appuyant de manière prolongée sur la touche t (Retardateur) ou en sélectionnant [Agrandissement] dans le menu de prise de vue. Sélectionnez [2×], [4×] ou [8×] à l’aide des touches +/-, puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. Vous pouvez déplacer la zone d’affichage agrandie à l’aide des touches de direction (+/-/Fn1/Fn2). Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • L’écran revient à l’affichage normal une fois la compensation d’exposition exécutée ou à l’aide de la touche Direct en mode Vue agrandie. • Si l’option Verr. AE est activée avant l’agrandissement de l’image entière, la fonction AE est exécutée en mode Vue agrandie et les photos sont prises avec les paramètres AE verrouillés. • Vous pouvez définir [Agrandir part.] et [Agrandir tout] sur [Rég. touche Fn1/Rég. touche Fn2] dans le menu des options personnalisées. Enregistrement de fonctions sur le sélecteur plus-moins Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes à l’aide du sélecteur plus-moins lorsque le mode Flash et le retardateur sont activés. Ajout de tailles prises en charge pour le zoom de redimensionnement automatique Le zoom de redimensionnement automatique prend en charge tous les rapports d’affichage. Réglages Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue) Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/ Taille]. La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/ taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez sélectionner la [Taille video].0 Photos Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2848×2848 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041 Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG. *2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut et en bas de l’affichage de la photo. *3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo. Vidéos Paramètre Taille vidéo HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 [Réduction bruit] Choisissez une réduction du bruit entre [Non], [Auto], [Faible], [Forte] ou [MAX]. Le temps nécessaire à l’enregistrement des images varie en fonction de l’option sélectionnée. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction lorsque [Portrait], [Sports], [Miniatures], [Contraste élevé N et B], [Flou artistique], [Traitement croisé], [Toy Camera] ou [Correction biais] est sélectionné dans les modes Scène. [Balance blancs] Vous pouvez sélectionner [Lampe incandescente1] ou [Lampe incandescente2] dans les réglages [Balance blancs]. Utilisez cette option avec une lampe incandescente. Le réglage [Lampe incandescente2], par rapport à [Lampe incandescente1], donne une teinte légèrement rougeâtre. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Avec [Lampe incandescente2], vous pouvez obtenir les mêmes densités de couleur qu’avec le réglage [Incandescent] décrit dans le Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo. • Si le flash est déclenché avec DISP. dans [Manuel], la balance des blancs est définie sur les résultats de mesure calculés lors du déclenchement du flash.  [Sensibilité ISO] [ISO-LO], [ISO 250], [ISO 320], [ISO 500], [ISO 640], [ISO 1000], [ISO 1250], [ISO 2000] et [ISO 2500] ont été ajoutés. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [ISO-LO] équivaut à ISO 100 ([Déclencheur électronique] du mode scène équivaut à ISO 125). Toutefois, la plage dynamique est réduite et des niveaux de luminosité supérieurs sont possibles. • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la sensibilité utilisée atteindra une sensibilité équivalente à ISO 800. • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, les valeurs minimales et maximales respectives pour la sensibilité ISO seront ISO 200 et ISO 400. ([Déclencheur électronique] en mode scène est ISO 250.) [Assist. mise au pt] Les contours et le contraste des images affichées sur l’écran sont intensifiés, facilitant le réglage de la mise au point. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vous pouvez sélectionner la méthode d’affichage de l’option Assist. mise au pt dans [Sélect. aide m. au point] dans le menu de configuration. (GP. 44) [Illum. périphérique] Vous pouvez corriger l’intensité de lumière d’arrière-plan dans la plage comprise entre -3 et +3. [Correction distorsion] Vous pouvez corriger la distorsion dans une image en sélectionnant [Barillet] ou [Coussinet], puis en sélectionnant [Forte], [Moyenne] ou [Faible]. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vous ne pouvez pas apporter des corrections à des images affichées sur l’écran d’affichage des photos ou à des images RAW. [Correction du dégradé de couleurs] Vous pouvez corriger les nuances de couleurs aux quatre coins de l’image. Vous pouvez corriger dans une plage comprise entre -4 et +4 pour R (rouge) et B (bleu). [Lim vitess obt flash] Utilisez cette option pour limiter la vitesse d’obturation à des vitesses inférieures lorsque le flash est utilisé pour empêcher un bougé de l’appareil photo. Sélectionnez entre [Auto], [1/2], [1/4], [1/8], [1/15], [1/30], [1/60] ou [1/125]. La vitesse d’obturation ne sera pas inférieure à la vitesse définie lorsque le flash est utilisé. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Le réglage de vitesse d’obturation maximale qui fonctionne avec le flash est de 1/180 sec. Le flash ne peut pas être utilisé avec des vitesses d’obturation supérieures à ce réglage. La vitesse d’obturation ne sera pas supérieure à 1/180 sec. lorsque le flash est utilisé. Ceci s’applique également à un flash externe. • Ce réglage n’est pas valide lors de l’utilisation du flash avec synchronisation lente.  Menu onglet des options personnalisées [Enr. Mes Réglages] Vous pouvez sélectionner entre l’une des options Mes réglages Boîte [1] à [6] et Carte [1] à [6] pour l’emplacement d’enregistrement. [Éditer Mes Réglages] Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres [Nom objectif], [Long. focale] et [Ouverture F] des fichiers Exif dans [Saisie info objectif] dans [Éditer Mes Réglages]. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Ces informations n’affectent pas les réglages de prise de vue.  [Confirmation du déclencheur] Lorsque l’option [ADJ./DIRECT] est définie, appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour finaliser les réglages en mode ADJ. et sur l’écran DIRECT. Vous pouvez alors prendre des photos. Lorsque l’option [ADJ.] est définie, les réglages du mode ADJ. sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Lorsque l’option [DIRECT] est définie, les réglages de l’écran DIRECT sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Une fois la prise de vue terminée, le système revient à l’écran de contrôle. Manette ADJ. Réglage Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Format] dans [Manette ADJ. Réglage 1] à [Manette ADJ. Réglage 4]. Si vous définissez la fonction Format et que vous appuyez sur la touche Manette ADJ. , s’affiche, vous permettant ainsi de définir le format.0 [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] Lorsque l’option [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] est réglée sur [Oui], vous pouvez pousser la manette ADJ. latéralement lorsque la prise de vue est possible pour modifier la sensibilité ISO. Le réglage par défaut est [Non]. [Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] Les fonctions [Agrand. affich], [Assist. mise au pt] et [Format] ont été ajoutées. [Supprimer Mes Réglages] Les réglages enregistrés pour [Boîte Mes Réglages] dans [Enr. Mes Réglages], pour [Carte] et pour [MY1], [MY2] et [MY3] sur le sélecteur de mode sont ramenés à leur valeur par défaut.1 [Rétablir valeurs par défaut] Les options personnalisées seront réinitialisées. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes Réglages] ne seront pas restaurés. [Touche Zoom] Vous pouvez sélectionner [Non], [Zoom numérique], [Correction de l’exposition] ou [Balance blancs] pour les fonctions assignées aux touches 8/9. Menu Config. [Sensibilité ISO auto-hi] Vous pouvez définir les limites supérieures de la sensibilité ISO et de la vitesse d’obturation afin de modifier la [Sensibilité ISO] lorsqu’elle est définie sur [Auto-Hi]. Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration) La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante. Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Environ 1,0× L Environ 1,8× 3M Environ 1,2× M Environ 3,0× 1M Environ 1,5× 5M Environ 5,9× VGA [Lecture zoom cible] Avec l’option Vue agrandie en mode de lecture, vous pouvez effectuer un zoom avant sur l’image centrée à la position à laquelle l’appareil photo a été placé par la cible pendant la prise de vue. Modification de [Sons touches] [Sons déclench.] est désactivé en mode [Cont.M + (rapide)]. Les sons du déclencheur ne sont pas désactivés lorsqu’un déclencheur mécanique ou lorsque l’option [Déclencheur électronique] dans le mode Scène est utilisé. Les sons de mise au point sont désactivés lorsque l’exposition est verrouillée lorsque vous appuyez jusqu’à mi-course sur le déclencheur. [Annul. affich. zoom] Vous pouvez choisir de conserver ou d’annuler la vue agrandie après la prise de photos en mode Vue agrandie. Sélectionnez [Non] pour conserver le mode Vue agrandie et [Oui] pour l’annuler une fois les photos prises. [Sélect. aide m. au point] Lorsque l'option [Aide m. au p.] est définie sur [Oui] dans le menu de prise de vue, vous pouvez sélectionner [MODE 1] ou [MODE 2]. MODE 1 : Les contours des sujets/objets mis au point sont améliorés. MODE 2 : L'écran d’affichage des photos passe en noir et blanc et la zone de mise au point brille en blanc. Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un boîtier GXR. Pixels réels Environ 12,3 millions Capteur d’image 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (nombre total de pixels : environ 12,9 millions) Zoom 4,0× zoom numérique (photos), zoom numérique 3,6×(vidéos) ; environ 5,9× zoom de redimensionnement automatique (VGA) Mode mise au point MF Vitesse d’obturation Photos 1/4000–180s, B (Bulb, ampoule), T (Time, heure) (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en fonction du mode prise de vue et flash) Vitesse d’obturation maximale de synchronisation Flash : 1/180 s Vidéos 1/2000–1/30s Contrôle exposition Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique Mode Priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle, fonction de décalage de la cible Correction de l’exposition Manuelle (+4,0 à -4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV), cadrage automatique (-2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV) Portée du lien d’exposition (mode prise de vue automatique, mesure centrale pondérée de la lumière) Pour l’utilisation d’un objectif standard (F2,5) : 1,2 EV à 13,2 EV (portée du lien pour une sensibilité ISO automatique convertie en fonction de la valeur EV pour ISO100) Sensibilité ISO (sensibilité sortie standard) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO-LO, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200 Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Incandescente1, Incandescente2, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ; cadrage auto balance des blancs Flash Réglage de puissance du flash Flash TTL, flash manuel, lumière ambiante auto (fonction disponible uniquement avec le flash externe GF-1) Numéro de guide 9,6 (équivalent : ISO 200) 6,8 (équivalent : ISO 100) Angle d’exposition à partir de 24 mm (équivalent : 35 mm) Synchronisation Synchronisation premier/deuxième rideau Autre Compatible avec le flash externe GF-1 Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture, priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports, paysage, nuit, correction biais, Miniatures, Contraste élevé N et B, Flou artistique, Traitement croisé, Toy Camera, Déclencheur électronique), Mes Réglages Mode continu Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Continu (Taille d’image : RAW) Réduction du bruit désactivée ou activée (faible) : 4 photos, Réduction du bruit activée (forte) : 3 photos Réduction du bruit activée MAX : 3 photos Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Cont.M + (un ensemble) Rap (1280 × 856) : 30 photos (24 images/s) Len (4288 × 2848) : 15 photos (3 images/s) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Taille de l’image (pixels) Photos 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848, 3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Taille fichier (approximative) RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 17 800Ko/image, FINE : 19 515Ko/image, VGA : 15 587Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 18 387Ko/image, FINE : 20 157Ko/image, VGA : 16 124Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 20 946Ko/image, FINE : 22 967Ko/image, VGA : 18 337Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 13 991Ko/image, FINE : 15 333Ko/image, VGA : 12 273Ko/image L 16:9 NORMAL : 2 222Ko/image, FINE : 3 816Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 2 315Ko/image, FINE : 3 960Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 2 615Ko/image, FINE : 4 493Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 3 009Ko/image M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 475Ko/image, FINE : 2 509Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 1 574Ko/image, FINE : 2 662Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 1 744Ko/image, FINE : 2 968Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 186Ko/image, FINE : 2 003Ko/image 5M 4:3 FINE : 2 287Ko/image 3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image Taille fichier (approximative) 1M 4:3 FINE : 812Ko/image VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image Longévité batterie (basée sur norme CIPA) DB-90 : environ 330 prises de vue*3 (Basé sur la directive CIPA) Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité de montage d’objectif uniquement : 79,1mm×60,9mm×40,5mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA) Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 120mm×70,2mm×45,7mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA) Tirage mécanique : 27,8mm Poids (approximatif) Unité de montage d’objectif uniquement : 170 g Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 370 g (y compris la batterie et la carte mémoire SD) Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C Humidité fonctionnement 90% ou moins Température stockage –20°C à 60°C0 *1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image. *2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de 640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée. Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE. Photos Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go RAW* FINE 4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625 3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380 2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 20651 Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go L FINE 4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684 3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453 4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565 2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie JPEG.  Vidéos Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go 1280×720 24 images/seconde 21s 3min 49s 7min 46s 15min 58s 31min 10s 62min 26s 125min 15s 640×480 24 images/seconde 1min 11min 2s 22min 27s 46min 10s 90min 7s 180min 32s 362min 9s 320×240 24 images/seconde 2min 25s 26min 24s 53min 43s 110min 27s 215min 35s 431min 52s 866min 19s Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- La taille d’enregistrement sans interruption maximale pour une vidéo est de 4 Go. La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 15 minutes environ pour une taille de 1280 × 720, de 46 minutes environ pour une taille de 640 × 480 et de 90 minutes environ pour une taille de 320 × 240. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos avec la taille de vidéo définie sur 1280 × 720, l’utilisation de cartes mémoire SD/SDHC de classe 6 est recommandée. Annexes Accessoires en option L’objectif RICOH peut être utilisé avec les éléments suivants (vendus séparément). Étui de boîtier + courroie d’encolure (SC-75B) Étui d’unité appareil photo (SC-75T) Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation fournie avec le produit. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/). Précautions d’emploi • La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. • Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. • Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques. • Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif. • Lors de la fixation d’un filtre ou d’un pare-soleil, veillez à ne pas exercer une pression excessive. • Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même température que l’environnement. • Ne touchez pas le capteur d’image. • Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement ou un choc électrique. • Gardez le connecteur propre. Conseil : pour éviter la condensation--------------------------------------------- La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif. Entretien et stockage de l’équipement Entretien de l’équipement • Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce, ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. Faites particulièrement attention au voletcache objectif. • Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition. • Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation Ricoh. • Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas. Stockage • Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant). • Lorsque vous rangez votre appareil photo, veillez à l’installer dans un étui, etc., dans lequel la poussière ou les peluches ne pénètrent pas afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo. De plus, lorsque vous transportez l’appareil photo, ne le mettez pas directement dans une poche, etc., afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo. Garantie et réparation 1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au centre de réparation Ricoh. 2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de : 1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ; 2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ; 3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ; 4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement. 5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles. 3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé. 4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte. 5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté. * Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent vos droits légaux. * L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de garantie fournie avec l’équipement.0 8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement) seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la production de l’équipement. 9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de son état originel peut être impossible. Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct. • Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution. • Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible. • Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer l’appareil au centre de réparation.1 En cas de problème Bureaux Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2011 août FR F-FR Imprimé en Chine *L454 3972* GXR MOUNT A12 Instruction Manual The serial number may be found on the bottom of the lens. Package Contents Before using your Ricoh lens, confirm that the package contains the items listed below. Lens mount unit The serial number may be found on the bottom. Mount cap Comes attached to the lens mount unit. Connector cap Comes attached to the lens mount unit. Lens checker Soft case ? Instructionmanual (thismanual) ? Warranty Introduction To use this lens mount unit, you need to attach Leica M Mount Lens etc. to GXR camera body. Refer to the Camera Body User Guide for details about how to operate shooting and playback functions and change settings and to read important precautions for use. This instruction manual will explain functions and operating procedures that are available only when this lens mount unit is used with a compatible camera body. See also the GXR Camera Body User Guide. To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Safety precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use. Test shots Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly before taking photos on important occasions. Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines, and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright holder, is prohibited. Exemption from liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display images as a result of product malfunction. Warranty The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any expense thereby incurred. Radio interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device, reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio or television into a different outlet. © 2011 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time without prior notice. Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover of this booklet. For the latest lens information, contact the lens retailer.  Safety Precautions Warning Symbols Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below. Danger This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Warning This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Caution This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical damage if ignored or incorrectly handled. Sample Warnings The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed. The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions. The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action is prohibited. Examples = Do not touch = Do not disassemble Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit. Danger Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard. Warning Keep the equipment out of the reach of children. Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service center if it is damaged. Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock. Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns. • Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as this may lead to disasters or accidents.10 Caution Do not allow the equipment to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands. Both pose the risk of electric shock. Safety Precautions for Accessories When using optional products, carefully read the instructions provided with the product before using that product.11 Package Contents................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 4 Safety Precautions................................................................................................................ 7 Names of Parts ....................................................................................................15 Upgrading the Product .....................................................................................16 Updating the firmware .....................................................................................................16 Attaching the Lens .............................................................................................19 Determining whether a lens can be used with the lens mount unit...............19 Attaching the Lens.............................................................................................................22 Removing the Lens............................................................................................................22 Cleaning the sensor unit...................................................................................23 Shooting...............................................................................................................24 Table of Contents1 Focus.......................................................................................................................................24 P: Program Shift Mode/A: Aperture Priority Mode.................................................24 S: Shutter Speed Priority Mode......................................................................................25 M: Manual Exposure Mode..............................................................................................25 Addition of Scene Modes.................................................................................................26 Enlarging pictures [Enlrg Display] ................................................................................27 Registering Functions to the Up-down Dial .............................................................28 Addition of Supported Sizes for Auto Resize Zoom...............................................28 Settings ................................................................................................................29 [Picture Quality/Size].........................................................................................................29 Photographs...............................................................................................................30 Movies...........................................................................................................................31 [Noise Reduction]...............................................................................................................32 [White Balance] ...................................................................................................................33 [ISO Setting]..........................................................................................................................341 [Focus Assist]........................................................................................................................35 [Peripheral illum.]................................................................................................................35 [Distortion Correction]......................................................................................................36 [Color shading correction]...............................................................................................36 [Flash Shut Spd Lim]..........................................................................................................37 Key Custom Settings Tab Menu .......................................................................38 [Reg. My Settings]...............................................................................................................38 [Edit My Settings]................................................................................................................38 [Shutter Button Confirmation].......................................................................................39 ADJ. Lever Settings.............................................................................................................39 [ADJ. Direct ISO Control] ..................................................................................................40 [Set Fn1/Fn2 Buttons]........................................................................................................40 [Delete My Settings] ..........................................................................................................40 [Restore Defaults] ...............................................................................................................41 [Zoom Button] .....................................................................................................................411 Setup Menu .........................................................................................................42 [ISO Auto-High Settings]..................................................................................................42 [Digital Zoom Image] Setting.........................................................................................42 [Target Zoom Play].............................................................................................................43 Changing [Operation Sounds].......................................................................................43 [Zoom Display Release]....................................................................................................44 [Focus assist selection]......................................................................................................44 Specifications ......................................................................................................45 Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity..................................................................50 Appendices..........................................................................................................53 Optional Accessories.........................................................................................................53 Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................54 Equipment Care and Storage.........................................................................................56 Warranty and Servicing....................................................................................................581 Names of Parts 1 2 3 1 Connector 2 Lens release button 3 Body-side mount1 Upgrading the Product Updating the firmware When you first attach the lens mount unit to the camera body, the version update function will start automatically if the firmware of the camera body need to be updated. In such case, update the firmware of the camera body using the following procedure. If the firmware version is already up to date, the version update function will not start and you can use the lens right away. 1 Check that the camera is turned off and attach the lens mount unit to the camera body. • For details about how to attach the lens mount unit, refer to the Camera Body User Guide.1 2 Turn on the camera body. • A confirmation message about updating the firmware appears. 3 Press the Fn1/Fn2 buttons to select [Yes] and then press the MENU/ OK button. • The firmware update begins and the following messages appear on the picture display. [Checking rewrite file] [Rewriting program] The camera restarts and the firmware version will be displayed, and then the update will be completed.1 Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The lens does not have to be attached when updating the firmware. • To confirm the firmware version, select [Firmware Version] in the setup menu. Alternatively, with the camera off, keep the 6 (Play) button pressed for more than 1 second while holding the – button pressed down. The firmware version will appear for about 20 seconds. • For the latest information on firmware updates, see the Ricoh Web site (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). 1 Attaching the Lens Determining whether a lens can be used with the lens mount unit Check to see if your lens can be attached to the lens mount unit. 1 Line up the holes on the lens checker with the tabs on the lens mount, and slide the lens checker straight onto the lens. • Slide it on so that it lightly rests on the lens.0 2 Place the lens on a flat surface, and check it from the side, edge-on. • Check to make sure that the lens checker and the lens mount side are firmly attached to each other with no gaps. The lens cannot be attached in the following cases: The lens is sticking out of the top of the lens checker. There are gaps between the lens checker and the lens mount. The lens can be used with the unit The lens cannot be used with the unit The lens cannot be used with the unit1 Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Forcibly attaching the lens mount unit to a lens that cannot be attached may cause the lens or lens mount unit to be scratched or damaged. • Do not attempt to forcibly push the lens checker onto the lens mount. Handle with care so as not to scratch or otherwise damage the lens when attaching it. • With retractable lenses, check the lens with it retracted. • For the latest information on lenses that can be attached to the lens mount unit, refer to the Ricoh website (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). Please note, however, that a lens may not be available for attachment depending on its condition. Make sure to confirm in advance whether it can be attached using the checker. Attaching the Lens 1 Line up the mark on the lens with the red mark on the lens mount unit, and attach the lens straight onto the lens mount unit. 2 Turn the lens to the right until the lens lock pin lines up with the lens lock groove. Removing the Lens 1 Turn the lens to the left while pressing the lens release button until the mark on the lens lines up with the red mark on the lens mount unit. 2 Pull the lens straight out to remove it. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- For more information on the lens, refer to the lens instruction manual and other related documents. Cleaning the sensor unit Follow the steps outlined below to clean the sensor. 1 Turn on the power. 2 Slide the POWER switch to OFF while pushing the N button. • Turn off power with the shutter left open. 3 Clean the unit using a blower from a camera supply store. 4 Once done cleaning, turn the power on and then off again. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Do not touch the sensor or shutter. • The color may fade if the sensor is subjected to intense light for long periods of time. Do not let the camera sit with the shutter open. • When the [Shutter Initial Sel.] in the setup menu is set to [OPEN], the shutter remains open when the power is turned off. • Do not use a spray blower with this device. • Do not insert the nozzle of the blower inside past the mount. • Damages during cleaning will not be covered by warranty. Be careful not to damage the device while cleaning it. Shooting Focus The only focus mode available is MF (Manual Focus). Adjust the focus manually using the lens. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Using [Enlrg Display] (GP. 27) or [Focus Assist] (GP. 35) from the shooting menu will make it easier to check the focus. P: Program Shift Mode/A: Aperture Priority Mode P: Program Shift Mode and A: Aperture Priority Mode operate in the same way as c: Auto Shooting Mode.  S: Shutter Speed Priority Mode If [Auto] or [Auto-Hi] is selected for the ISO setting, the exposure will be adjusted to the proper exposure within the ISO range while the camera is in shutter speed priority mode. M: Manual Exposure Mode If [Auto] or [Auto-Hi] is selected for ISO Setting, ISO will be fixed at 200 while the camera is in manual exposure mode. You can select between B (Bulb) and T (Time) for the shutter speed. With B, the image is exposed while the shutter release button is pressed and exposure ends when the button is released. With T, exposure starts when the shutter release button is pressed and ends when it is pressed again. In either mode, the camera stops shooting compulsorily once 180 sec. has elapsed. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B and T can both be operated using the optional cable switch (CA-1).  Addition of Scene Modes [Miniaturize], [High Contrast B&W], [Soft Focus], [Cross Process], [Toy Camera], and [Electronic Shutter] have been added to Scene Mode. [Electronic Shutter] allows you to take pictures without worrying about the shutter release sound or vibrations. You can select a shutter speed between 1/8000 sec. and 1 sec. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Take precautions for dealing with camera shake when using [Electronic Shutter] as camera shake may occur due to differences in exposure times between the top and bottom halves of the screen. It is not suitable for use with moving subjects. • You cannot set the ISO to 200 when using the [Electronic Shutter]. Enlarging pictures Pressing and holding down the MENU/OK button enlarges and displays the center. Pressing and holding down the MENU/OK button again enlarges the center and displays the enlarged part over the entire screen. Pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again returns to normal display. You can set the display magnification by pressing and holding down the t (Self-timer) button or by selecting [Magnification Ratio] from the shooting menu. Select from [2×], [4×], or [8×] using the +/- buttons, and then press the MENU/OK button. You can move the enlarged view area using the direction keys (+/-/Fn1/ Fn2). Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The display returns to the normal display when exposure compensation is executed, or with the Direct button, in Enlarged View mode. • If AE Lock is turned on before the entire image is enlarged, AE will continue to run during Enlarged View, and pictures will be captured at the locked AE settings. • You can register [Enlrg Part] and [Enlrg All] to the [Set Fn1/Fn2 Button] in the Key Custom Settings menu. Registering Functions to the Up-down Dial You can switch between modes using the Up-down dial when Flash mode and Self-timer are set to on. Addition of Supported Sizes for Auto Resize Zoom Auto resize zoom supports all aspect ratios. Settings [Picture Quality/Size] The following picture quality, image size and aspect ratio options are available for the [Picture Quality/Size] setting. A photograph‘s file size will depend on the combination of picture quality and image size used. When recording movies, you can select the [Movie Size].0 Photographs Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2848×2848 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041 Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy. *2 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear on the top and bottom of the picture display. *3 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear at the right and left sides of the picture display. Movies Item Movie size HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 [Noise Reduction] Perform noise reduction from [Off], [Auto], [Weak], [Strong], or [MAX]. The time required to record images varies with the option selected. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You cannot use this function when [Portrait], [Sports], [Miniaturize], [High Contrast B&W], [Soft Focus], [Cross Process], [Toy Camera], or [Skew Correct Mode] is selected in the scene modes. [White Balance] You can select [Incandescent Lamp1] or [Incandescent Lamp2] in the [White Balance] settings. Use with incandescent lighting. Using [Incandescent Lamp2] will leave a slightly redder tint compared to [Incandescent Lamp1]. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • When [Incandescent Lamp2] is selected, images will be shot with the same color shades as with the [Incandescent] setting described in the Camera Body User Guide. • If the flash is fired using DISP. in [Manual], the white balance will be set to the metering results calculated when the flash went off.  [ISO Setting] [ISO-LO], [ISO 250], [ISO320], [ISO 500], [ISO640], [ISO 1000], [ISO1250], [ISO 2000], and [ISO 2500] can be selected. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [ISO-LO] is equivalent to ISO 100 ([Electronic Shutter] of Scene Mode is equivalent to ISO 125). However, the dynamic range gets narrower and the higher brightness levels make whiteout more likely to occur. • When [Auto] is selected and the flash is used, the sensitivity used will gain up to ISO 800 equivalent. • When [Auto] is selected and the flash is not used, the minimum and maximum values for the ISO sensitivity will be ISO 200 and ISO 400. ([Electronic shutter] in scene mode is ISO 250.) [Focus Assist] The shape outlines and contrast of the images shown on the picture display are intensified, making it easier to adjust the focus. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You can select the display method for Focus Assist from [Focus assist selection] in the setup menu. (GP. 44) [Peripheral illum.] You can correct the background light intensity in the range of -3 to +3. [Distortion Correction] You can correct distortion in an image by selecting [Barrel] or [Pincushion] and then selecting [Strong], [Medium], or [Weak]. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You cannot make corrections to images displayed on the picture display or to RAW images. [Color shading correction] You can correct the color tones in the four corners of the image. You can correct in a range between -4 and +4 for both R and B. [Flash Shut Spd Lim] Use to limit the shutter speed to lower speeds while the flash is being used in order to prevent camera shake. Select from [Auto], [1/2], [1/4], [1/8], [1/15], [1/30], [1/60], or [1/125]. The shutter speed will not drop below the set speed while the flash is being used. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The maximum shutter speed setting that works with the flash is 1/180 sec. The flash cannot be used with shutter speeds faster than this setting. The shutter speed will not be faster than 1/180 sec. while the flash is being used. This applies to external flashes, as well. • This setting is invalid when using slow-sync flash.  Key Custom Settings Tab Menu [Reg. My Settings] You can select from any of My Settings Box [1] to [6] and Card [1] to [6] for the save location. [Edit My Settings] You can edit the [Lens Name], [Focal Length], and [F-aperture] for Exif files in [Lens Info. Input] from [Edit My Settings]. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- This information does not affect the shooting settings.  [Shutter Button Confirmation] When [ADJ./DIRECT] is set, pressing the shutter release button halfway down will finalize settings in ADJ. mode and on the DIRECT screen, and you will be able to shoot pictures. When [ADJ.] is set, the ADJ. mode settings will be finalized, enabling you to shoot pictures. When [DIRECT] is set, the DIRECT screen settings will be finalized, enabling you to shoot pictures. After you finish shooting pictures, the system will return to the Monitoring screen. ADJ. Lever Settings You can set the [Aspect Ratio] function in [ADJ. Lever Setting 1] to [ADJ. Lever Setting 4]. If you set the Aspect Ratio function, and press the ADJ. Lever button, will appear, allowing you to set the aspect ratio.0 [ADJ. Direct ISO Control] When [ADJ. Direct ISO Control] is set to [On], you can push the ADJ. lever sideways when shooting is possible to change the ISO setting. The default setting is [Off]. [Set Fn1/Fn2 Buttons] [Enlrg Display], [Focus Assist] and [Aspect Ratio] functions are added. [Delete My Settings] The settings registered to [My Settings Box] in [Reg. My Settings], to [Card], and to [MY1], [MY2], and [MY3] on the Mode dial return to their defaults.1 [Restore Defaults] The key custom settings will be reset. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Settings set in [Reg. My Settings] will not be reset. [Zoom Button] You can select from [Off], [Digital Zoom], [Exposure Compensation], or [White Balance] for the functions assigned to the 8/9 buttons.  Setup Menu [ISO Auto-High Settings] You can set the upper limits for the ISO setting and the shutter speed for switching the ISO setting when [ISO Setting] is set to [Auto-Hi]. [Digital Zoom Image] Setting The size of the recorded image varies depending on the auto resize zoom, as follows. Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Approx. 1.0× L Approx. 1.8× 3M Approx. 1.2× M Approx. 3.0× 1M Approx. 1.5× 5M Approx. 5.9× VGA [Target Zoom Play] With Enlarged Display in playback mode, you can zoom in on the image centered at the position to which the camera was shifted by target shift during shooting. Changing [Operation Sounds] [Shutter Sounds] goes off in [M-Cont Plus (High)]. The shutter sound does not go off when a mechanical shutter or [Electronic shutter] in the Scene mode is used. The focus sound goes off when the exposure is locked when the shutter release button is pressed halfway down. [Zoom Display Release] You can select whether to maintain or cancel the enlarged view after shooting pictures in Enlarged View mode. Selecting [Off] maintains Enlarged View mode and [On] cancels it after pictures are shot. [Focus assist selection] When [Focus Assist] is set to [On] in the shooting menu, you can select [MODE1] or [MODE2]. MODE1: Shape outlines for subjects/objects in focus are enhanced. MODE2: The picture display switches to black and white, and the area in focus glows in white. Specifications Specifications are given for the lens mount unit mounted on a GXR body. Effective pixels Approximately 12.3 million Image sensor 23.6 mm × 15.7 mm CMOS (total pixels: approx. 12.9 million) Zoom 4.0× digital zoom (photographs), 3.6 × digital zoom (movies); approx. 5.9× auto resize zoom (VGA) Focus mode MF Shutter speed Photographs 1/4000–180s, B (Bulb), T (Time) (upper and lower limits vary according to shooting and flash mode) Flash synchronized maximum shutter speed : 1/180s Movies 1/2000–1/30s Exposure control Metering TTL-CCD metering in multi (256-segment), center-weighted, and spot modes with autoexposure lock Mode Aperture priority AE, manual exposure, move target function Exposure compensation Manual (+4.0 to -4.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV), auto bracketing (-2EV to +2EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV)  Exposure link range (Auto shooting mode, Centerweighted light metering) With use of a standard lens (F2.5): 1.2 EV to 13.2 EV (link range for automatic ISO converted based on the EV for ISO 100) ISO sensitivity (Standard Output Sensitivity) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO-LO, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO2500, ISO 3200 White balance mode Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Outdoors, Cloudy, Incandescent Lamp1, Incandescent Lamp2, Fluorescent Lamp, Manual, Detail; white balance bracketing Flash Flash output adjustment TTL flash, manual flash, ambient light automatic (function available only with the external flash GF-1) Guide number 9.6 (equivalent: ISO 200) 6.8 (equivalent: ISO 100) Exposure angle from 24mm (equivalent: 35mm) Timing Front/rear curtain sync Other Compatible with the external flash GF-1 Shooting mode Auto, program shift, aperture priority, shutter priority, manual, scene (movie, portrait, sports, landscape, nightscape, skew correction, Miniaturize, High Contrast B&W, Soft Focus, Cross Process, Toy Camera, Electronic shutter), My Settings Continuous mode Number of pictures shot in Continuous (Picture Size: RAW) Noise Reduction off or on (Weak): 4 pictures Noise Reduction on (Strong): 3 pictures Noise Reduction on MAX: 3 pictures Number of pictures shot in M-Cont Plus (1 set) HI (1280×856) : 30 pictures (24 Frames/Sec) LO (4288×2848) : 15 pictures (3 Frames/Sec) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Image size (pixels) Photographs 4288 × 2416, 3776 × 2832, 4288 × 2848, 2848 × 2848, 3456 × 1944, 3072 × 2304, 3456 × 2304, 2304 × 2304, 2592 × 1944, 2048 × 1536, 1280 × 960, 640 × 480 Movies 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 File size (approx.) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17,800KB/frame, FINE: 19,515KB/frame, VGA: 15,587 KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 18,387KB/frame, FINE: 20,157KB/frame, VGA: 16,124 KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 20,946KB/frame, FINE: 22,967KB/frame, VGA: 18,337KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 13,991KB/frame, FINE: 15,333KB/frame, VGA: 12,273KB/frame L 16:9 NORMAL: 2,222KB/frame, FINE: 3,816KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 2,315KB/frame, FINE: 3,960KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 2,615KB/frame, FINE: 4,493KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 1,761KB/frame, FINE: 3,009KB/frame M 16:9 NORMAL: 1,475KB/frame, FINE: 2,509KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 1,574KB/frame, FINE: 2,662KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 1,744KB/frame, FINE: 2,968KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 1,186KB/frame, FINE: 2,003KB/frame 5M 4:3 FINE: 2,287KB/frame 3M 4:3 FINE: 1,474KB/frame  File size (approx.) 1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/frame VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/frame Battery life (based on CIPA standard) DB-90: approx. 330shots *3 (Based on CIPA guide line) Dimensions (W×H×D) Lens mount unit only: 79.1mm(w)×60.9mm(h)×40.5mm(d) (Based on CIPA guide line) When mounted on the camera body: 120mm(w)×70.2mm(h)×45.7mm(d) (Based on CIPA guide line) Flange back: 27.8mm Weight (approx.) Lens mount unit only: 170g When mounted on the camera body: 370g (Including the battery and SD memory card) Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C Operating humidity 90% or less Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C0 *1 The options available vary with image size. *2 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a FINE- or NORMAL-quality file with the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file 640×480 pixels in size). RAW files use the standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is used. We recommend that you carry spare batteries when in use for extended periods. Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity The following values are given as a reference of the storage capacity of the internal memory and memory cards of various sizes, by picture quality and image size, when using the FINE picture quality. Photographs Compression Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB RAW* FINE 4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625 3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380 2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 20651 Compression Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB L FINE 4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684 3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453 4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565 2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * When [RAW] is selected, this is the compression used for the JPEG copy.  Movies Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 1280×720 24 frames/second 21sec. 3min. 49sec. 7min. 46sec. 15min. 58sec. 31min. 10sec. 62min. 26sec. 125min. 15sec. 640×480 24 frames/second 1min. 11min. 2sec. 22min. 27sec. 46min. 10sec. 90min. 7sec. 180min. 32sec. 362min. 9sec. 320×240 24 frames/second 2min. 25sec. 26min. 24sec. 53min. 43sec. 110min. 27sec. 215min. 35sec. 431min. 52sec. 866min. 19sec. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The maximum uninterrupted recording size for a single movie is 4 GB. The maximum recording time is around 15 minutes at 1280×720 size, around 46 minutes at 640×480 size, and around 90 minutes at 320×240 size. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When recording movies with the movie size set to 1280×720, using SD/ SDHC memory cards with a speed class of 6 or more is recommended. Appendices Optional Accessories The Lens mount unit can be used with the items (sold separately) listed below. Body cover + neck strap (SC-75B) Unit cover (SC-75T) Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Before using an optional accessory, see the documentation that came with the product. • For the latest information on optional accessories, visit the Ricoh website (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/). Precautions for Use • The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase. • Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any expenditure incurred thereby. • Do not drop the equipment or subject it to physical shocks. • When carrying the equipment, be careful that it does not strike other objects. Particular care is required to protect the lens. • When attaching a filter or lens hood, be careful not to apply excessive force. • Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible condensation inside the lens or malfunction of the equipment. This can be avoided by placing the equipment in a plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature its surroundings. • Do not touch the image sensor. • Keep the equipment dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe these precautions could result in malfunction of the equipment or electric shock. • Keep the connector clean. Tip: Avoiding Condensation -------------------------------------------------------- Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the heater has come on, or where the camera is exposed to cold air from an air conditioner or other device. Equipment Care and Storage Caring for the Equipment • Photographs can be affected by fingerprints and other foreign matter on the lens. Avoid touching the lens with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a blower from a camera supply store, or gently clean the lens with a soft, dry cloth. Be especially careful around the barrel. • Clean the equipment thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling cosmetics. Do not expose the equipment to volatile substances such as thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the equipment or its finish. • In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center. • This equipment is a high precision device. Do not disassemble. Storage • Do not store the camera where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or humidity; large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe vibration; prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other insect repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for example, in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet). • When storing, place the product in a camera case, etc. that does not collect dirt or fluff to prevent dirt or dust from attaching itself to the camera. In addition, when carrying the camera, do not place the camera directly into a pocket, etc., in order to prevent dirt and dust from getting on the camera. Warranty and Servicing 1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your equipment, any defective parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of equipment malfunction, contact the dealer from which you purchased the equipment or your nearest Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will not be reimbursed for the cost of bringing the equipment to the Ricoh Repair Center. 2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from: 1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual; 2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service center listed in the instruction manual; 3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.; 4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera Body User Guide”), leaking of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the equipment. 5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages, infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock, dropping of the equipment, or pressure on the equipment, and other unnatural causes. 3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees, including those incurred at an authorized service center. 4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the warranty card is not attached or if the distributor’s name or the purchase date have been changed or are not indicated on the card. 5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred during the warranty period. 6. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the equipment, such as expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not. 7. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the equipment was purchased. * The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit your legal rights. * The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card provided with this equipment.0 8. Parts essential to the servicing of the equipment (that is, components required to maintain the functions and quality of the equipment) will be available for a period of five years after the equipment is discontinued. 9. Please note that if the equipment is seriously damaged by flooding, submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible. Notes------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Before sending the camera in for repair, check the camera body and read the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation. • Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete. • When sending the equipment to a service center, please include a note which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as possible. • Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the camera to the service center.1 If You Encounter a Problem with This Product Ricoh offices RICOH COMPANY, LTD. 3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530, Japan http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A. 1–800–22RICOH http://www.ricoh-usa.com/ RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK) (from within the UK) 02073 656 580 (from outside of the UK) +44 2073 656 580 RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN) (desde España) 91 406 9148 (desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148 RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMC ITALY) (dall’Italia) 02 696 33 451 (dall’estero) +39 02 696 33 451*L454 2971* Ricoh offices RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS LIMITED 21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2011 August EN USA GB GB AE AE Printed in China GXR MOUNT A12 Manual de instrucciones El número de serie se encuentra en la parte inferior del objetivo. Contenido del paquete Antes de utilizar su objetivo Ricoh, compruebe que el paquete contenga los siguientes elementos. Montura del objetivo El número de serie se encuentra en la parte inferior Tapa de montura Viene colocada en la montura del objetivo. Tapa del conector Viene colocada en la Montura del objetivo. Medidor de objetivo Funda blanda ? Manual de instrucciones (estemanual) ? Garantía Introducción Para utilizar esta montura de objetivo, es necesario colocar Leica M Mount Lens o similares en un cuerpo de cámara GXR. Consulte la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara para saber cómo ejecutar las funciones de disparo y reproducción y cambiar ajustes, así como para leer precauciones importantes de uso. En este manual de instrucciones se explican funciones y procedimientos de manejo que sólo están disponibles cuando esta montura de objetivo se usa con un cuerpo de cámara compatible. Véase también la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara GXR. Para sacar el mejor provecho de las funciones de este producto, lea atentamente este manual antes del uso. Conserve este manual a mano para poder consultarlo fácilmente. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Precauciones de seguridad Lea atentamente todas las precauciones de seguridad para garantizar un uso seguro. Fotografías de prueba Haga fotografías de prueba para asegurarse de que la cámara funcione adecuadamente antes de hacer fotografías en ocasiones importantes. Derechos de autor Queda prohibida la reproducción o alteración de documentos, revistas y otros materiales con derechos de autor, con una finalidad diferente a la personal, doméstica o de otro tipo igualmente limitado, sin el consentimiento del propietario de los derechos de autor. Exención de responsabilidad Ricoh Co., Ltd. no asume ninguna responsabilidad por no poder grabar o reproducir imágenes como resultado de un fallo de funcionamiento del producto. Garantía La garantía proporcionada con este producto sólo es válida dentro del país de compra. El fabricante no asume ninguna responsabilidad relacionada con el mantenimiento o la reparación del producto en otros países ni los gastos incurridos por este servicio. Interferencias radioeléctricas La utilización de este producto en las inmediaciones de otros equipos electrónicos puede afectar negativamente tanto a la cámara como al otro dispositivo. Las interferencias son particularmente probables si la cámara se utiliza muy cerca de una radio o un televisor. Esto puede resolverse alejando la cámara del otro dispositivo, reorientando la antena de radio o televisión, o conectando la radio o el televisor a otra toma de corriente. © 2011 RICOH CO., LTD. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda prohibida la reproducción total o parcial de esta publicación sin la autorización expresa por escrito de Ricoh. Ricoh se reserva el derecho a cambiar el contenido de este documento en cualquier momento y sin previo aviso. Se ha hecho todo lo posible por garantizar la precisión de la información de este documento. Si, a pesar de ello, detecta algún error u omisión, le agradeceríamos que nos lo notificara en la dirección que aparece en la contraportada de este manual. Para la última información sobre los objetivos, póngase en contacto con su punto de venta. Precauciones de seguridad Símbolos de aviso En este manual de instrucciones y en el producto aparecen diversos símbolos de aviso que se deben tener en cuenta para evitarle lesiones a usted o a terceros, así como también daños materiales. A continuación se explican los símbolos y sus significados. Peligro Este símbolo indica que hay peligro inminente de muerte o de lesiones de gravedad debido a negligencia u operación incorrecta. Advertencia Este símbolo indica riesgos de muerte o lesiones de gravedad debido a negligencia u operación errónea. Precaución Este símbolo indica riesgos de lesiones o daños materiales debido a negligencia u operación errónea. Ejemplos de aviso El símbolo le indica las acciones que debe realizar. El símbolo le indica las acciones que no debe realizar. El símbolo puede estar combinado con otros símbolos para indicarle las acciones concretas que no debe realizar. Ejemplos = No tocar = No desmontar Para garantizar la seguridad en el uso de esta unidad, observe las siguientes precauciones. Peligro No intente desarmar, reparar o alterar el equipo por su cuenta. El circuito de alta tensión del interior del equipo representa un gran peligro eléctrico. Advertencia Guarde el equipo fuera del alcance de los niños. No toque los componentes internos del equipo en caso de que quedaran al descubierto debido a daños o una caída. El circuito de alta tensión del equipo podría provocar descargas eléctricas. Extraiga la batería lo más pronto posible, teniendo cuidado de evitar descargas eléctricas o quemaduras. Lleve el equipo dañado a su distribuidor o centro de asistencia técnica más cercano. No use el equipo en el baño o una ducha pues podría producirse incendio o descarga eléctrica. No use el equipo cerca de gases inflamables, gasolina, bencina, diluyente o sustancias similares, para evitar riesgos de explosión, incendio o quemaduras. • No use el equipo en un avión u otros lugares donde su uso esté restringido o prohibido, pues podría resultar en desastres o accidentes.10 Precaución No permita que el equipo se moje. Tampoco opere la cámara con las manos húmedas. Ambas acciones implican el riesgo de descargas eléctricas. Advertencias de seguridad para los accesorios Si utiliza productos opcionales, lea atentamente las instrucciones suministradas con el producto antes de usarlo.11 Contenido del paquete ...................................................................................................... 2 Introducción........................................................................................................................... 4 Precauciones de seguridad............................................................................................... 7 Nombres de las partes.......................................................................................15 Actualización del producto ..............................................................................16 Actualización del firmware..............................................................................................16 Acoplamiento del objetivo...............................................................................19 Comprobar si un objetivo puede usarse con la unidad de montaje del objetivo .............................................................................................................................19 Acoplamiento del objetivo..............................................................................................22 Extracción del objetivo.....................................................................................................22 Limpieza de la unidad de sensor.....................................................................23 Toma......................................................................................................................24 Índice1 Enfoque..................................................................................................................................24 P: Modo de cambio de programas/A: Modo de prioridad de apertura ..........24 S: Modo de prioridad de velocidad de obturación.................................................25 M: Modo de exposición manual....................................................................................25 Añadir modos de escena .................................................................................................26 Ampliar imágenes..............................................................................................................27 Registro de funciones en el dial hacia arriba/abajo...............................................28 Añadir tamaños compatibles para el zoom con cambio de tamaño automático.......................................................................................................................28 Ajustes ..................................................................................................................29 Ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] (menú de disparo) ..............................29 Fotografías...................................................................................................................30 Vídeos............................................................................................................................31 [Reducción ruido]...............................................................................................................32 [Balance Blancos]................................................................................................................33 [Ajuste ISO]............................................................................................................................341 [Ayuda al enfoque].............................................................................................................35 [Luz periférica] .....................................................................................................................35 [Corrección de distorsión] ...............................................................................................36 [Corrección de sombreado de colores].......................................................................36 [Lím. vel.obtur.flash] ..........................................................................................................37 Menú de la pestaña de ajustes personalizados............................................38 [Reg. Mi Config.]..................................................................................................................38 [Editar Mi Config.]...............................................................................................................38 [Confirmación disparador] ..............................................................................................39 Conf. Pal. ADJ........................................................................................................................39 [Control ISO directo de ADJ.]..........................................................................................40 [Aj. Botón Fn1/Fn2] ............................................................................................................40 [Borrar Mi Config.] ..............................................................................................................40 [Ajuste Original]...................................................................................................................41 [Bot. Zoom] ...........................................................................................................................411 Menú de configuración .....................................................................................42 [Ajustes ISO Altos Automático]......................................................................................42 Ajuste [Imagen Zoom Digital] (Pestaña de configuración) .................................42 [Repr. zoom objeto] ...........................................................................................................43 Cambio de [Sonidos funcion.]........................................................................................43 [Anular visual. zoom].........................................................................................................44 [Sel. enfoque asistido].......................................................................................................44 Especificaciones..................................................................................................45 Capacidad de la memoria interna/tarjeta de memoria ........................................50 Apéndices ............................................................................................................53 Accesorios opcionales.......................................................................................................53 Precauciones de uso..........................................................................................................54 Cuidado del equipo y almacenamiento.....................................................................56 Garantía y servicio..............................................................................................................581 Nombres de las partes 1 2 3 1 Conector 2 Botón de expulsión del objetivo 3 Montura del lado del cuerpo1 Actualización del producto Actualización del firmware La primera vez que acople la montura del objetivo al cuerpo de la cámara, la actualización de la versión comenzará automáticamente si el firmware del cuerpo de la cámara requiere actualización. En este caso, actualice el firmware del cuerpo de la cámara utilizando el siguiente procedimiento. Si la versión del firmware ya está actualizada, la función de actualización de la versión no se iniciará y podrá utilizar el objetivo inmediatamente. 1 Compruebe que la cámara esté apagada y acople la unidad cámara al cuerpo de la cámara. • Para obtener más información acerca de cómo acoplar la unidad cámara, consulte la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara.1 2 Encienda el cuerpo de la cámara. • Aparecerá un mensaje de confirmación sobre la actualización del firmware. 3 Pulse los botones Fn1/Fn2 para seleccionar [Sí] y, a continuación, pulse el botón MENU/OK. • La actualización del firmware se inicia y los siguientes mensajes aparecerán en la pantalla: [Verif. escribir sobre archivo] [Escribir sobre programa] La cámara se reinicia mostrando en la pantalla la versión del firmware, la actualización queda entonces finalizada.1 Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • El objetivo no debe estar acoplado cuando se actualiza el firmware. • Para comprobar la versión del firmware seleccione [Versión del firmware] en el menú de configuración. Otra posibilidad es que, con la cámara apagada, mantenga el botón 6 (Reproducir) pulsado durante más de 1 segundo mientras mantiene pulsado el botón –. La versión del firmware aparece unos 20 segundos. • Para obtener la información más reciente sobre las actualizaciones del firmware, visite la página web de Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc).1 Acoplamiento del objetivo Comprobar si un objetivo puede usarse con la unidad de montaje del objetivo Compruebe si su objetivo puede acoplarse a la unidad de montaje. 1 Alinee los agujeros del comprobador de objetivo con las lengüetas en la montura del objetivo y deslice el medidor de objetivo directamente en el objetivo. • Deslícelo hasta que se apoye ligeramente en el objetivo.0 2 Coloque el objetivo en una superficie plana y compruébelo por el lado mirándolo de canto. • Compruebe que el medidor de objetivo y la montura del objetivo están firmemente encajadas sin dejar ningún hueco. El objetivo no se puede acoplar en los siguientes casos: Si el objetivo sobresale por la parte superior del medidor de objetivo. Si queda algún hueco entre el medidor de objetivo y la montura del objetivo. El objetivo se puede utilizar con la unidad El objetivo no se puede utilizar con la unidad El objetivo no se puede utilizar con la unidad1 Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Si se fuerza la montura del objetivo al intentar acoplarlo a un objetivo que no se puede acoplar, se puede rayar o dañar el objetivo o la montura. • No presione el medidor de objetivo a la fuerza para encajarlo en la montura. Manipúlelos con cuidado de de no rayarlos ni dañar el objetivo a la hora de acoplarlos. • Con objetivos retráctiles, mida el objetivo cuando esté retraído. • Para obtener la información más reciente sobre los objetivos que encajan con las unidades de montaje, visite la página web de Ricoh (http://www. ricoh.com/r_dc/). Sin embargo, recuerde que algunos objetivos no se pueden acoplar según las condiciones en las que estén. Compruebe de antemano si se puede acoplar utilizando el medidor. Acoplamiento del objetivo 1 Alinee la marca que hay en el objetivo con la marca roja de la montura del objetivo y acople el objetivo directamente en la montura. 2 Gire el objetivo hacia la derecha hasta que la clavija de fijación del objetivo encaje en la ranura de fijación del mismo. Extracción del objetivo 1 Gire el objetivo hacia la izquierda manteniendo pulsado el botón de extracción hasta que la marca del objetivo quede en línea con la marca roja de la montura. 2 Tire del objetivo en línea recta para extraerlo. Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Si desea más información sobre el objetivo, consulte el manual de instrucciones del mismo y los documentos relacionados. Limpieza de la unidad de sensor Siga los pasos que se indican a continuación para limpiar el sensor: 1 Encienda la cámara. 2 Deslice el interruptor POWER a la posición OFF mientras pulsa el botón N. • Apague la cámara con el obturador abierto. 3 Limpie la unidad con la ayuda de un soplador, que puede adquirir en una tienda de suministro de cámaras. 4 Cuando termine la limpieza, vuelva a encender y a apagar la cámara. Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • No toque el sensor ni el obturador. • Los colores pueden perderse si el sensor se expone a una luz intensa durante un tiempo prolongado. No deje la cámara apoyada con el obturador abierto. • Si [Sel. inicial obtur.] en el menú de configuración está ajustado en [ABRIR], el obturador seguirá abierto al apagar la cámara. • No use un soplador de aerosol con este dispositivo. • No introduzca los bordes del soplador más allá de la montura. • La garantía no cubre los daños que se produzcan durante la limpieza. Procure no dañar el dispositivo durante la limpieza. Toma Enfoque El único modo de enfoque disponible es MF (enfoque manual). Ajuste el enfoque manualmente con el objetivo. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Para comprobar el enfoque con mayor facilidad, use [Ampliar pant.] (GP. 27) o [Ayuda al enfoque] (GP. 35) en el menú de disparo. P: Modo de cambio de programas/A: Modo de prioridad de apertura P: Modo de cambio de programas y A: El modo de prioridad de apertura funciona de la misma forma que c: Modo de disparo automático.  S: Modo de prioridad de velocidad de obturación Si está seleccionado [Auto] o [Alt Autom.] para el ajuste ISO, la exposición se ajustará a la exposición adecuada dentro del rango ISO mientras la cámara se encuentre en el modo de prioridad de velocidad de obturación. M: Modo de exposición manual Si se selecciona [Auto] o [Alt Autom.] para los ajustes ISO, ISO se fijará en 200 mientras que la cámara está en modo de exposición manual. Puede seleccionar B (Bulb) o T (Time) para la velocidad del obturador. Con B, la imagen queda expuesta mientras se mantenga pulsado el disparador. La exposición finaliza al soltar el disparador. Con T, el disparador se pulsa para empezar y terminar la exposición. En ambos modos la cámara se detiene automáticamente al transcurrir 180 segundos. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B y T pueden usarse con el interruptor con cable opcional (CA-1).  Añadir modos de escena Al modo de escena se han añadido [Miniaturizar], [Alto contraste B y N], [Enfoque suave], [Proceso cruzado], [Cámara de juguete] y [Obturación electrónica]. [Obturación electrónica] permite tomar fotografías sin necesidad de preocuparse del sonido del disparador o de las vibraciones. Puede seleccionar una velocidad de obturación de entre 1/8000 s. y 1 s. Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Tenga cuidado a la hora de usar [Obturación electrónica] para las vibraciones de la cámara, ya que éstas pueden ocurrir debido a las diferencias de tiempos de exposición entre la mitad superior y la mitad inferior de la pantalla. No puede usarse para fotografiar sujetos en movimiento. • No se puede ajustar el ISO a 200 cuando se utiliza [Obturación electrónica]. Ampliar imágenes Al mantener pulsado el botón MENU/OK se amplía y se muestra el centro. Al mantener pulsado el botón MENU/OK de nuevo se amplía el centro y se muestra la parte ampliada ocupando toda la pantalla. Si mantiene pulsado el botón MENU/OK otra vez, se vuelve a la vista normal. Para ajustar la magnificación de la pantalla mantenga pulsado el botón t (autodisparador) o seleccione [Relación de aumento] en el menú de disparo. Use los botones +/- para seleccionar [2×], [4×] o [8×] y, a continuación, pulse el botón MENU/OK. Puede mover la zona de vista aumentada con las teclas de dirección (+/- /Fn1/Fn2). Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • La pantalla vuelve al modo normal cuando se realiza la compensación de exposición o pulsando el botón DIRECT en el modo de Vista ampliada. • Si se activa Bloq. AE antes de que se haya ampliado toda la imagen, el bloqueo AE seguirá ejecutándose durante la Vista ampliada, captando las imágenes con los ajustes AE. • Puede guardar [Aumentar parte] y [Aumentar todo] en [Aj. Botón Fn1/ Fn2] en el menú de ajustes personalizados. Registro de funciones en el dial hacia arriba/abajo Puede cambiar el modo con el dial hacia arriba/abajo cuando están activados los modos Flash y Autodisparador. Añadir tamaños compatibles para el zoom con cambio de tamaño automático El zoom con cambio de tamaño automático es compatible con todos los tamaños. Ajustes Ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen] (menú de disparo) Hay disponibles las siguientes opciones de calidad de imagen, tamaño de imagen y relación de aspecto para el ajuste [Resolución/Tamaño de imagen]. El tamaño de archivo de una fotografía dependerá de la combinación de calidad y tamaño de imagen que se utilice. Al grabar vídeos se puede seleccionar el formato de vídeo.0 Fotografías Opción Relación de aspecto Compresión Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2848×2848 L (grande) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848 M (mediano) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041 Opción Relación de aspecto Compresión Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Si se selecciona [RAW], éste será el ajuste empleado para la copia en JPEG. *2 Según el área fotografiada, pueden aparecer bandas negras en la parte superior e inferior de la imagen visualizada. *3 Según el área fotografiada, pueden aparecer bandas negras en los lados derecho e izquierdo de la imagen visualizada. Vídeos Opción Formato de vídeo HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 [Reducción ruido] Reducción de ruido en [Off], [Auto], [Bajo], [Alto] o [MAX]. El tiempo necesario para guardar imágenes varía en función de la opción seleccionada. Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Esta función no puede usarse si se ha seleccionado una de estas opciones en los modos de escena: [Retrato], [Deportes], [Miniaturizar], [Alto contraste B y N], [Enfoque suave], [Proceso cruzado], [Cámara de juguete] o [M. Cor. Trap]. [Balance Blancos] Puede seleccionar [Luz Incandescente1] o [Luz Incandescente2] en la configuración de [Balance Blancos]. Utilice con iluminación incandescente. [Luz Incandescente2] dejará un ligero tinte rojo en comparación con [Luz Incandescente1]. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Cuando está seleccionada [Luz Incandescente2], los sombreados de color de las imágenes serán los mismos que con el ajuste [Incandescente] descrito en la Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara. • Si se dispara el flash con el botón DISP. en [Manual], el balance de blancos se ajustará a los resultados de la medición calculada cuando se apaga el flash.  [Ajuste ISO] Se han añadido [ISO-LO], [ISO 250], [ISO 320], [ISO 500], [ISO 640], [ISO 1000], [ISO 1250], [ISO 2000] y [ISO 2500]. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [ISO-LO] es equivalente a ISO 100 ([Obturación electrónica] del modo de escena es equivalente a ISO 125). Sin embargo, el rango dinámico se reduce y, al aumentar los niveles de brillos es más probable que la imagen se quede en blanco. • Si se selecciona [Auto] y se utiliza el flash, la sensibilidad empleada aumentará hasta ser equivalente a ISO 800. • Si está seleccionado [Auto] y no se usa el flash, los valores mínimos y máximos para la sensibilidad ISO serán de ISO 200 y ISO 400. ([Obturación electrónica] en modo de escena es ISO 250.) [Ayuda al enfoque] Las líneas de las formas y el contraste de las imágenes que se visualizan en la pantalla se intensifican, lo que hace más fácil ajustar el enfoque. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Puede seleccionar el método de visualización de la Ayuda al enfoque con la opción [Sel. enfoque asistido] del menú de configuración. (GP. 44) [Luz periférica] Se puede corregir la intensidad de la luz de fondo en un intervalo de -3 a +3. [Corrección de distorsión] Se puede corregir la distorsión de una imagen seleccionando [Barril] o [Almohadón] y, a continuación, seleccionando [Alto], [Medio] o [Bajo]. Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ No se pueden corregir imágenes mostradas en la pantalla ni imágenes RAW. [Corrección de sombreado de colores] Se pueden corregir los tonos de color en las cuatro esquinas de la imagen. El intervalo de corrección puede ser de -4 a +4 tanto para R como para B. [Lím. vel.obtur.flash] Utilice esta opción para limitar la velocidad del obturador a niveles más bajos cuando se esté usando el flash para prevenir las vibraciones de la cámara. Están disponibles [Auto], [1/2], [1/4], [1/8], [1/15], [1/30], [1/60] y [1/125]. La velocidad del obturador no caerá por debajo de la velocidad ajustada cuando se esté usando el flash. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • La velocidad de obturación máxima que funciona con el flash es de 1/180 s. Con velocidades mayores, el flash no puede usarse. La velocidad de obturación nunca subirá de 1/180 s. si se usa el flash. Esto se aplica también a flashes externos. • Este ajuste no es válido si se utiliza un flash de sincronización baja.  Menú de la pestaña de ajustes personalizados [Reg. Mi Config.] Se puede seleccionar cualquier opción dentro de Cuadro Mi Config. [1] a [6] y Tarjeta [1] a [6] para la ubicación de las imágenes guardadas. [Editar Mi Config.] Desde [Entrada Info. Objet.] en el menú [Editar Mi Config.] se pueden editar [Nombre objet.], [Longitud focal] y [Apertura F] para los archivos Exif. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Esta información no afecta a los ajustes de disparo.  [Confirmación disparador] Cuando está activado [ADJ./DIRECT], si se pulsa el disparador hasta la mitad se cerrará la configuración de ajustes en el modo ADJ. y en la pantalla DIRECT pudiendo hacer fotografías. Cuando está activado [ADJ.] los ajustes del modo ADJ. se cerrarán y se podrán tomar fotografías. Cuando está activado [DIRECT] los ajustes de la pantalla DIRECT se cerrarán y se podrán tomar fotografías. Después de haber tomado las fotografías, el sistema vuelve a la pantalla de Monitorización. Conf. Pal. ADJ. Se puede ajustar la función de [Relación asp.] de [Configuración Palanca ADJ 1] a [Configuración Palanca ADJ 4]. Si se activa la función Relación asp. y se pulsa el botón de la Palanca ADJ., aparecerá para poder ajustar el tamaño.0 [Control ISO directo de ADJ.] Si [Control ISO directo de ADJ.] está ajustado en [On], se puede mover la palanca ADJ. hacia el lado cuando sea posible disparar para cambiar el ISO. El ajuste por defecto es [Off]. [Aj. Botón Fn1/Fn2] Se han añadido las funciones [Ampliar pant.], [Ayuda al enfoque] y [Relación asp.]. [Borrar Mi Config.] Los ajustes registrados en [Cuadro Mi Config.] de [Reg. Mi Config.], en [Tarjeta] y en [MY1], [MY2] y [MY3] en el Dial de modo vuelven a su configuración predeterminada.1 [Ajuste Original] Se reestablecerán los ajustes personalizados. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Los ajustes realizados en [Cuadro Mi Config] no se reiniciarán. [Bot. Zoom] Puede seleccionar entre [Off], [Zoom Digital], [Compensación Exposición] o [Balance de blancos] para las funciones asignadas a los botones 8/9. Menú de configuración [Ajustes ISO Altos Automático] Puede establecer los límites para el ajuste ISO y la velocidad de obturación a la hora de cambiar el [Ajuste ISO] cuando ésta esté ajustada en [Alt Autom.]. Ajuste [Imagen Zoom Digital] (Pestaña de configuración) El tamaño de la imagen grabada varía según el zoom con cambio de tamaño automático, tal como se indica a continuación. Índice de zoom Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Índice de zoom Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Aprox. 1,0× L Aprox. 1,8× 3M Aprox. 1,2× M Aprox. 3,0× 1M Aprox. 1,5× 5M Aprox. 5,9× VGA [Repr. zoom objeto] Con Ampliar pantalla en el modo de reproducción, es posible ampliar la imagen centrada en la posición a la que se movió la cámara cuando se usó la función de desplazamiento de objeto durante el disparo. Cambio de [Sonidos funcion.] [Sonidos disp.] se desactiva en [M-Cont + (Alta)]. El sonido del disparador no se apaga cuando se usa un disparador mecánico o la opción [Obturación electrónica] en el modo de escena. El sonido del enfoque se desactiva cuando se bloquea la exposición al pulsar el disparador hasta la mitad. [Anular visual. zoom] Puede elegir mantener o cancelar la vista aumentada después de fotografiar en el modo de Vista ampliada. Seleccione [Off] para mantener el modo de Vista ampliada y [On] para cancelarlo sólo cuando se hayan tomado las fotografías. [Sel. enfoque asistido] Seleccione [MODO 1] o [MODO 2] cuando [Enfoque asist.] esté ajustado en [On] en el menú de disparo. MODO 1: Se mejora el contorno de los sujetos/objetos enfocados. MODO 2: La pantalla cambia a blanco y negro y la zona enfocada brilla en blanco. Especificaciones La especificaciones corresponden a la unidad cámara montada en un cuerpo GXR. Píxeles efectivos Aproximadamente 12,3 millones Sensor de imagen 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (píxeles totales: 12,9 millones aprox.) Zoom Zoom digital de 4,0× (fotografías), zoom digital de 3,6× (vídeos); aprox. 5,9× zoom con cambio de tamaño automático (VGA) Modo de enfoque MF Velocidad de obturación Fotografías 1/4000–180s, B (Bulb), T (Time) (los límites superior e inferior varían según el modo de toma y flash) Velocidad máxima del obturador sincronizada con el flash: 1/180 s Vídeos 1/2000–1/30s Control de la exposición Medición Medición TTL-CCD en modos multi (256 segmentos), ponderada central y foco con bloqueo de exposición automática Modo Prioridad de apertura AE, exposición manual, función Cambiar objeto Compensación de exposición Manual (+4,0 a -4,0EV en incrementos de 1/3EV o 1/2EV), horquillado automático (-2EV a +2EV en incrementos de 1/3EV o 1/2EV)  Rango de vínculo de exposición (modo de disparo automático, medición con ponderación central) Con el uso de un objetivo estándar (F2.5): 1,2 EV a 13,2 EV (rango de vínculo para ISO convertido automático según el EV de ISO100) Sensibilidad ISO (sensibilidad de salida estándar) Auto, Alt Autom., ISO-LO, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200 Balance de blancos Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Exterior, Nublado, Luz Incand.1, Luz Incand.2, Luz Fluorescente, Ajuste Manual, Detalle; horquillado de balance de blancos Flash Ajuste de salida de flash Flash TTL, flash manual, modo automático de luz ambiente (la función sólo está disponible con el flash externo GF-1) Número de guía 9,6 (equivalente a ISO 200) 6,8 (equivalente a ISO 100) Ángulo de exposición desde 24 mm (equivalente a 35 mm) Temporización Sincronización de cortina frontal/trasera Otro Compatible con el flash externo GF-1 Modo de disparo Auto, cambio de programas, prioridad de apertura, prioridad de obturación, manual, escena (vídeo, retrato, deportes, paisaje, paisaje noche, corrección trap, Miniaturizar, Alto contraste B y N, Enfoque suave, Proceso cruzado, Cámara de juguete, Obturación electrónica), Mi Config. Modo Continuo Número de imágenes tomadas en modo Continuo (tamaño de imagen: RAW) Reducción de ruido desactivada o activada (Baja): 4 imágenes, Reducción de ruido activada (Alta): 3 imágenes Reducción de ruido activada MAX: 3 imágenes Número de fotografías tomadas en modo M-Cont + (1 grupo) A (1280×856): 30 fotografías (24 fotogramas/seg), B (4288×2848): 15 fotografías (3 fotogramas/seg) Compresión*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Fotografías 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848, 3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Vídeos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Tamaño de archivo (aprox.) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 17.800KB/fotograma, FINE: 19.515KB/fotograma, VGA: 15.587KB/fotograma 4:3 NORMAL: 18.387KB/fotograma, FINE: 20.157KB/fotograma, VGA: 16.124KB/fotograma 3:2 NORMAL: 20.946KB/fotograma, FINE: 22.967KB/fotograma, VGA: 18.337KB/fotograma 1:1 NORMAL: 13.991KB/fotograma, FINE: 15.333KB/fotograma, VGA: 12.273KB/fotograma Tamaño de archivo (aprox.) L 16:9 NORMAL: 2.222KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.816KB/fotograma 4:3 NORMAL: 2.315KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.960KB/fotograma 3:2 NORMAL: 2.615KB/fotograma, FINE: 4.493KB/fotograma 1:1 NORMAL: 1.761KB/fotograma, FINE: 3.009KB/fotograma M 16:9 NORMAL: 1.475KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.509KB/fotograma 4:3 NORMAL: 1.574KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.662KB/fotograma 3:2 NORMAL: 1.744KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.968KB/fotograma 1:1 NORMAL: 1.186KB/fotograma, FINE: 2.003KB/fotograma 5M 4:3 FINE: 2.287KB/fotograma 3M 4:3 FINE: 1.474KB/fotograma Tamaño de archivo (aprox.) 1M 4:3 FINE: 812KB/fotograma VGA 4:3 FINE: 197KB/fotograma Vida de la batería (basada en el estándar CIPA) DB-90: aprox. 330 disparos *3 (Basando en la pauta de CIPA) Dimensiones (an.×al.×pr.) Sólo montura del objetivo: 79,1mm×60,9mm×40,5mm (Basando en la pauta de CIPA) Al estar montada en el cuerpo de la cámara: 120,0mm×70,2mm×45,7mm (Basando en la pauta de CIPA) Distancia entre montura y punto focal: 27,8mm Peso (aprox.) Sólo montura del objetivo: 170 g Al estar montada en el cuerpo de la cámara: 370 g (Incluyendo la batería y la tarjeta de memoria SD) Temperatura de funcionamiento 0°C a 40°C Humedad de funcionamiento 90% como máximo Temperatura de almacenamiento –20°C a 60°C0 *1 Las opciones disponibles pueden variar según el tamaño de la imagen. *2 También se graba un archivo JPEG (el archivo JPEG puede ser un archivo de calidad FINE o NORMAL con las dimensiones del archivo RAW o un archivo VGA con un tamaño de 640×480 píxeles). Los archivos RAW utilizan el formato DNG estándar promocionado por Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Sólo para referencia, el número real de tomas varía considerablemente según el uso que se le dé a la cámara. Se recomienda llevar alguna batería de repuesto si se va a usar la cámara durante un largo período de tiempo. Capacidad de la memoria interna/tarjeta de memoria Los siguientes valores se presentan como referencia de la capacidad de almacenamiento de la memoria interna y las tarjetas de memoria de distintos tamaños, por calidad de imagen y tamaño de imagen, utilizando una calidad de imagen FINE. Fotografías Compresión Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB RAW* FINE 4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625 3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380 2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 20651 Compresión Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB L FINE 4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684 3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453 4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565 2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Si se selecciona [RAW], ésta será la compresión empleada para la copia en JPEG.  Vídeos Tamaño de la imagen (píxeles) Memoria interna 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 1280×720 24 fotogramas/ segundo 21seg. 3min. 49seg. 7min. 46seg. 15min. 58seg. 31min. 10seg. 62min. 26seg. 125min. 15seg. 640×480 24 fotogramas/ segundo 1min. 11min. 2seg. 22min. 27seg. 46min. 10seg. 90min. 7seg. 180min. 32seg. 362min. 9seg. 320×240 24 fotogramas/ segundo 2min. 25seg. 26min. 24seg. 53min. 43seg. 110min. 27seg. 215min. 35seg. 431min. 52seg. 866min. 19seg. Precaución------------------------------------------------------------------------------ El tamaño máximo para una grabación ininterrumpida de un solo vídeo es de 4 GB. El tiempo máximo de grabación es de unos 15 minutos en tamaño 1280 × 720, de unos 46 mintuos en tamaño 640 × 480 y de unos 90 minutos si se graba a 320 × 240. Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Al grabar vídeos con tamaño de 1280 × 720, se recomienda usar tarjetas de memoria SD/SDHC de Class 6 o mayor velocidad de transmisión mínima. Apéndices Accesorios opcionales La Montura del objetivo puede usarse con los artículos (se venden por separado) que se relacionan a continuación. Tapa del cuerpo + correa para el cuello (SC-75B) Tapa de la unidad (SC-75T) Nota -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Antes de usar un accesorio opcional, véase la documentación que viene con el producto. • Para ver lo último en accesorios opcionales, visite el sitio web de Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/). Precauciones de uso • La garantía proporcionada con este producto sólo es válida dentro del país de compra. • En caso de que el producto presente un defecto o fallo de funcionamiento mientras está fuera del país, el fabricante no asumirá ninguna responsabilidad en cuanto a la reparación del producto localmente ni a los gastos incurridos por esta. • No deje caer el equipo ni lo someta a fuertes golpes. • Cuando transporte el equipo, procure que no golpee otros objetos. Se requiere especial atención para proteger el objetivo. • Tenga cuidado de no ejercer demasiada fuerza al incorporar un filtro o una capucha para objetivo. • Los cambios bruscos de temperatura podrían causar condensación, dando lugar a condensación visible dentro del objetivo o fallos de funcionamiento en el equipo. Esto puede evitarse colocando el equipo en una bolsa de plástico para atenuar el cambio de temperatura, y retirándolo sólo después de que el aire de la bolsa alcance la misma temperatura que el entorno. • No toque el sensor de imagen. • Mantenga seco el equipo y evite sujetarlo con las manos húmedas. La no observancia de estas precauciones podría causar un fallo de funcionamiento del equipo o una descarga eléctrica. • Mantenga limpio el conector. Consejo: evitar la condensación--------------------------------------------------- Es particularmente probable que se produzca condensación si se desplaza a una zona con una brusca diferencia de temperatura, si la humedad es alta, en una habitación fría después de haber encendido el calefactor o cuando la cámara está expuesta al aire frío de un aparato de aire acondicionado u otro dispositivo. Cuidado del equipo y almacenamiento Cuidado del equipo • Las fotografías pueden verse afectadas por huellas y otras materias extrañas en el objetivo. Evite tocar el objetivo con los dedos. Retire el polvo o pelusa con un soplador, que puede adquirir en una tienda de suministro de cámaras, o limpie suavemente el objetivo con un paño seco y suave. Tenga especial cuidado al manipular la zona del tubo del objetivo. • Limpie el equipo a fondo después de utilizarlo en la playa o manejar cosméticos. No exponga el equipo a sustancias volátiles como disolvente, benceno o pesticidas. La no observancia de esta precaución podría causar daños en el equipo o en su acabado. • En el caso improbable de fallo de funcionamiento, visite un centro de reparaciones Ricoh. • Este equipo es un dispositivo de alta precisión. No lo desmonte. Almacenamiento • No guarde la cámara donde pueda estar expuesta a: calor o humedad excesivos; grandes cambios de temperatura o humedad; polvo, suciedad o arena; fuertes vibraciones; contacto prolongado con productos químicos, incluyendo bolas de alcanfor y otros repelentes de insectos, o con productos de vinilo o caucho; fuertes campos magnéticos (por ejemplo, en las proximidades de un monitor, transformador o imán). • Cuando guarde el producto, colóquelo dentro de una caja de cámara, etc., que esté limpia y donde no entren las pelusas para evitar que la suciedad o el polvo se adhieran a la cámara. Además, cuando lIeve la cámara, no la meta directamente en el bolsillo, etc., para evitar que se ensucie o le entre polvo. Garantía y servicio 1. Este producto está cubierto por una garantía limitada. Durante el periodo de garantía mencionado en la Garantía suministrada con el equipo, cualquier pieza defectuosa se reparará gratuitamente. En caso de fallo de funcionamiento del equipo, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor al que compró el equipo o con su centro de reparaciones Ricoh más cercano. Tenga en cuenta que no se le reembolsará el coste de llevar el equipo al centro de reparaciones Ricoh. 2. Esta garantía no cubre ningún daño resultante de: 1 no seguimiento de las instrucciones del manual de instrucciones; 2 reparación, modificación o revisión del producto no realizadas por uno de los centros de servicio autorizados incluidos en el manual de instrucciones; 3 incendio, desastre natural, fuerza mayor, relámpago, tensión anómala, etc.; 4 almacenamiento inadecuado (indicado en la “Guía del usuario del cuerpo de la cámara”), fuga de batería y otros líquidos, moho o cualquier otro cuidado insuficiente del equipo. 5 inmersión en agua (inundación), exposición a alcohol u otras bebidas, infiltración de arena o barro, choque físico, caída del equipo o presión sobre el equipo y otras causas no naturales. 3. Cuando finalice el periodo de garantía, usted será responsable de los gastos de reparación, incluyendo los incurridos en un centro de servicio autorizado. 4. Será responsable de todos los gastos de reparación, incluso dentro del periodo de garantía, si no se presenta la tarjeta de garantía o si el nombre del distribuidor o la fecha de compra se han modificado o no están indicados en la tarjeta. 5. Los gastos de revisión e inspección completa por petición especial del cliente se cargarán al cliente, tanto si se producen durante el periodo de garantía como si no. 6. Cualquier daño consecuente derivado de un fallo del equipo, como gastos incurridos al tomar fotografías o pérdida de ganancias esperadas, no será reembolsado, independientemente de si ocurre dentro o fuera del periodo de garantía. 7. La garantía sólo es válida en el país en el que se compró el equipo. * Las disposiciones anteriores se refieren a reparaciones ofrecidas sin cargos y no limitan sus derechos legales. * La intención de las disposiciones anteriores también se describe en la tarjeta de garantía proporcionada con este equipo.0 8. Las piezas esenciales para el mantenimiento del equipo (es decir, componentes necesarios para mantener las funciones y calidad de la cámara) estarán disponibles durante un periodo de cinco años a partir de la descontinuación del equipo. 9. Tenga en cuenta que si el equipo se daña seriamente por inundación, inmersión, infiltración de arena o barro, choques violentos o caída, es posible que no pueda repararse ni restaurarse a su estado original. Notas------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Antes de enviar la cámara para repararla, compruebe el cuerpo de la cámara y vuelva a leer el manual de instrucciones para garantizar un funcionamiento correcto. • Algunas reparaciones requieren mucho tiempo. • Cuando envíe el equipo a un centro de servicio, incluya una nota describiendo la pieza defectuosa y el problema con la mayor precisión posible. • Retire todos los accesorios no relacionados con el problema antes de enviar la cámara al centro de servicio.1 Si surge un problema Oficinas de Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN) (desde España) 91 406 9148 (desde fuera de España) +34 91 406 9148Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2011 agosto SP E Impreso en China *L454 3973* RICOH LENS A16 24-85mm F3.5-5.5 Mode d’emploi Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif. Contenu de l’emballage Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous. Unité appareil photo Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil. Capuchon de l’objectif Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. ? Mode d’emploi (le présent manuel) ? Garantie Capuchon du connecteur Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. Étui souple Introduction Pour utiliser cet objectif, vous devez l’installer sur un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Ce mode d’emploi décrit les fonctions et les consignes d’utilisation qui ne sont valides que lorsque cette unité appareil photo est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR. Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir une utilisation sans danger. Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants. Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires, est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits. Exonération de responsabilité Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente. © 2011 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout moment et sans avis préalable. Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel. Mesures de sécurité Symboles d’avertissement Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens. Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous. Danger Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Avertissement Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Attention Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées. Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites. Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action spécifique est interdite. Exemples = Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en toute sécurité. Danger Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique. Avertissement Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants. Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène, de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion, d’incendie ou de brûlure. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident. Attention Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge électrique. Consignes de sécurité relatives aux accessoires Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les instructions fournies avec ce produit.10 Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3 Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 6 Nomenclature .....................................................................................................15 Mise à jour du produit.......................................................................................16 Mise à jour du micrologiciel............................................................................................16 Prise de vue..........................................................................................................18 Indicateur de niveau..........................................................................................................18 Fonctions de prise de vue macro..................................................................................18 Flash intégré.........................................................................................................................18 Mode P : changement de programme........................................................................19 M : mode Exposition manuelle......................................................................................21 Ajout de modes Scène......................................................................................................21 Table des matières11 Agrandissement de photos.............................................................................................22 Ajout d’une nouvelle fonction de décalage de cible.............................................23 Enregistrement de fonctions sur le sélecteur plus-moins...................................24 Ajout de tailles prises en charge pour le zoom de redimensionnement automatique....................................................................................................................24 Mode lecture .......................................................................................................24 Affichage des informations sur l’unité appareil photo .........................................24 Réglages...............................................................................................................25 [Qualité image/Taille]........................................................................................................25 Photos...........................................................................................................................26 Vidéos............................................................................................................................27 [Cadrage auto].....................................................................................................................28 [Prise de vue à intervalles]...............................................................................................28 [Réduction bruit].................................................................................................................29 [Balance blancs]...................................................................................................................291 [Sensibilité ISO]....................................................................................................................30 [Assist. mise au pt]..............................................................................................................31 [Correction plage dynamique].......................................................................................32 [Décalage vitesse obt. auto] ...........................................................................................33 Menu onglet des options personnalisées......................................................34 [Enr. Mes Réglages]............................................................................................................34 [Manette ADJ Réglages]...................................................................................................34 [Confirmation du déclencheur].....................................................................................35 [Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] ...........................................................................35 [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.]..........................................................................................36 [Supprimer Mes Réglages] ..............................................................................................37 [Initialiser]..............................................................................................................................371 Menu Config. .......................................................................................................38 [Régl. sens. ISO par paliers]..............................................................................................38 [Sensibilité ISO auto-hi]....................................................................................................38 [Mode veille] [Extinction auto].......................................................................................38 [Réglage niveau] .................................................................................................................39 [Calibrage niveau (inclin.)]...............................................................................................39 Réglage [Image zoom numérique] ..............................................................................39 [Lecture zoom cible]..........................................................................................................40 [Réglage Zone AF Spot]....................................................................................................40 [Annul. affich. zoom]..........................................................................................................40 [Sélect. aide m. au point] .................................................................................................41 [Conserv conditions prise vue]......................................................................................41 [Aff. saturation des blancs]..............................................................................................42 [Copyright]............................................................................................................................42 [Version du micrologiciel]................................................................................................421 Caractéristiques..................................................................................................43 Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................49 Annexes................................................................................................................52 Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................52 Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................54 Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................56 Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................581 Nomenclature 1 2 3 1 Connecteur 2 Bague d’objectif 3 Objectif1 Mise à jour du produit Mise à jour du micrologiciel Lorsque vous fixez pour la première fois l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil, la fonction de mise à jour de version démarre automatiquement si le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil doit être mis à jour. Dans ce cas, mettez à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil comme suit. Si la version du micrologiciel est déjà à jour, la fonction de mise à jour de version ne démarre pas et vous pouvez utiliser l’objectif immédiatement. 1 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension et fixez l’unité de montage d’objectif au boîtier de l’appareil. • Pour en savoir plus sur la fixation de l’unité appareil photo, reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.1 2 Mettez le boîtier de l’appareil photo sous tension. • Un message de confirmation relatif à la mise à jour du micrologiciel s’affiche. 3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner [Oui], puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. • La mise à jour du micrologiciel démarre et les messages suivants s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. [Vérification du fichier de réécriture] [Programme de réécriture] L’appareil photo redémarre, la version du micrologiciel s’affiche, puis la mise à jour est terminée. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Pour vérifier la version du micrologiciel, avec l’appareil photo hors tension, maintenez la touche 6 (Lecture) enfoncée pendant plus d’une seconde tout en maintenant la touche – enfoncée. La version du micrologiciel s’affiche pendant 20 secondes environ. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les mises à jour du micrologiciel, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). 1 Prise de vue Indicateur de niveau Outre la direction horizontale, l’inclinaison (avant/arrière) peut également être vérifiée. Fonctions de prise de vue macro Les fonctions Macrophotographie, Cible Macro, Macro Auto et Affichage de la distance de prise de vue minimale au cours des fonctions de prise de vue macro ne sont pas disponibles. Flash intégré Si le flash intégré est utilisé, un dégradé se produit dans la partie inférieure de l’image. Utilisez le flash externe (GF-1) pour la photographie au flash.1 Mode P : changement de programme Le schéma à la page suivante fournit une estimation de la plage de décalage des différentes combinaisons de valeurs d’ouverture et de vitesses d’obturation. Les valeurs réelles peuvent variées selon la valeur d’exposition (EV). Dans ces exemples, le mode Flash est défini sur [Flash Non] et la sensibilité ISO est définie sur [ISO 200].0 : Grand angle : Téléobjectif Ev5 Ev6 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 Ev-1 Ev-2 8 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F16 F22 F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8 F2.0 F1.4 F1.0 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 -2 4 -3 8 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev7 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 F22.0 F3.5 1 M : mode Exposition manuelle Vous avez le choix entre B (Bulb, ampoule) et T (Time, heure) pour la vitesse d’obturation. Avec le réglage B, l’image est exposée lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur et l’exposition se termine lorsque le déclencheur est relâché. Avec le réglage T, l’exposition commence lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur et se termine lorsque vous appuyez à nouveau sur le déclencheur. Dans ces deux modes, l’appareil photo cesse la prise de vue au bout de 180 secondes. Les options [Auto] et [Auto-Hi] du réglage ISO peuvent également être utilisées. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Les réglages B et T peuvent être utilisés à l’aide du déclencheur à câble optionnel (CA-1). Ajout de modes Scène [Miniatures], [Contraste élevé N et B], [Flou artistique], [Traitement croisé] et [Toy Camera] ont été ajoutés au mode Scène. Un dégradé peut être défini dans [Traitement croisé] et [Toy Camera]. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Selon la version du micrologiciel utilisée, le réglage par défaut du dégradé peut être rétabli lors de la mise à jour de la version du micrologiciel. Agrandissement de photos Appuyez de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK pour agrandir et afficher le centre de l’écran. Appuyez de nouveau de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK pour agrandir le centre de l’écran et afficher la partie agrandie en plein écran. Appuyez de nouveau de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK pour revenir à l’affichage normal. Lors d’une mise au point manuelle, enfoncez le déclencheur à mi-course pour revenir à l’affichage normal. Vous pouvez définir l’agrandissement de l’écran en appuyant de manière prolongée sur la touche t (Retardateur) ou en sélectionnant [Agrandissement] dans le menu de prise de vue. Sélectionnez [2×], [4×] ou [8×] à l’aide des touches +/-, puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. Lors du déplacement de la cible ou de la mise au point manuelle, appuyez sur les touches de direction (+/-/Fn1/Fn2) pour déplacer la zone agrandie. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • L’écran revient à l’affichage normal lorsque les actions suivantes sont effectuées en mode Vue agrandie : • la compensation d’exposition est exécutée, • la touche Direct est actionnée. • Si l’option Verr. AE est activée avant l’agrandissement de l’image entière, la fonction AE est exécutée en mode Vue agrandie et les photos sont prises avec les paramètres AE verrouillés. • Vous pouvez définir [Agrandir part.] et [Agrandir tout] sur [Rég. touche Fn1/Rég. touche Fn2] dans le menu des options personnalisées. Ajout d’une nouvelle fonction de décalage de cible Une pression sur la manette ADJ. permet d’afficher le décalage de cible et de sélectionner la cible du suivi. Une pression sur la touche d pendant le décalage de cible permet de ramener la cible au centre de l’image. Une nouvelle pression sur la touche d permet d’annuler le décalage de cible. Enregistrement de fonctions sur le sélecteur plus-moins Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes à l’aide du sélecteur plus-moins lorsque le mode Flash et le retardateur sont activés. Ajout de tailles prises en charge pour le zoom de redimensionnement automatique Le zoom de redimensionnement automatique prend en charge tous les rapports d’affichage. Mode lecture Affichage des informations sur l’unité appareil photo Vous pouvez changer de page en appuyant sur les touches ! et ". Les informations sur l’unité appareil photo et de copyright s’affichent sur la seconde page. Réglages [Qualité image/Taille] L’option [RAW seulement] a été ajoutée. Cette option ne permet pas d’enregistrer simultanément une copie JPEG. Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/ Taille]. La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/ taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez sélectionner [Taille vidéo]. Photos Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4928×2768 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4352×3264 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4928×3264 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3264×3264 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4928×2768 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 4352×3264 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4928×3264 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×3264 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304 Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG. *2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut et en bas de l’affichage de la photo. *3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo. Vidéos Paramètre Taille vidéo HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 [Cadrage auto] L’option [ISO-BKT] peut être sélectionnée. Avec la valeur standard de sensibilité ISO définie dans le menu de prise de vue, 3 images peuvent être prises avec des sensibilités ISO différentes ; une à -1/3EV de la valeur standard (définie), une à la valeur standard (définie) et une à +1/3EV de la valeur standard (définie). Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- La prise de vue étant réalisée dans la plage de sensibilité ISO pouvant être définie, la plage de cadrage ne peut pas être de 1/3EV ou une image peut être prise avec les mêmes réglages en fonction de l’option [Sensibilité ISO]. [Prise de vue à intervalles] Le nombre de photos à prendre peut être défini. Lorsque celui-ci est défini, le « nombre de prises de vues restantes » s’affiche pendant la prise de vue. La prise de vue à intervalles peut être définie sur un minimum de 2 secondes, et le nombre de prises de vues à prendre peut être défini sur un maximum de 99 prises. [Réduction bruit] Choisissez une réduction du bruit entre [Non], [Auto], [Faible], [Forte] ou [MAX]. Le temps nécessaire à l’enregistrement des images varie en fonction de l’option sélectionnée. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction lorsque [Portrait], [Sports], [Miniatures], [Contraste élevé N et B], [Flou artistique], [Traitement croisé], [Toy Camera] ou [Correction biais] est sélectionné dans les modes Scène. [Balance blancs] Vous pouvez sélectionner [Lampe incandescente1] ou [Lampe incandescente2]. Le réglage [Lampe incandescente2], par rapport à [Lampe incandescente1], donne une teinte légèrement rougeâtre. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Avec [Lampe incandescente2], vous pouvez obtenir les mêmes densités de couleur qu’avec le réglage [Incandescent] décrit dans le Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo. 0 • Si le flash (GF-1) est déclenché avec DISP. dans [Manuel], la balance des blancs est définie sur les résultats de mesure calculés lors du déclenchement du flash. [Sensibilité ISO] Les options [Auto], [Auto-Hi], [ISO-LO] ou [ISO 200] à [ISO 3200] peuvent être sélectionnées. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [ISO-LO] est équivalent à ISO 100. Toutefois, la plage dynamique est réduite et des niveaux de luminosité supérieurs sont possibles. • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la sensibilité utilisée atteindra une sensibilité équivalente à ISO 800. • Le réglage de palier de la sensibilité ISO peut être sélectionné dans [Régl. sens. ISO par paliers] (GP. 38) dans le menu de configuration. • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, les valeurs minimales et maximales respectives pour la sensibilité ISO seront ISO 200 et ISO 400.1 [Assist. mise au pt] Les contours et le contraste des images affichées sur l’écran sont intensifiés, facilitant le réglage de la mise au point. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Lors d’une mise au point manuelle, l’intensification du contour ou du contraste de la forme est annulée en appuyant sur le déclencheur à micourse. • Vous pouvez sélectionner la méthode d’affichage de l’option Assist. mise au pt dans [Sélect. aide m. au point] dans le menu de configuration. (GP. 41) [Correction plage dynamique] L’appareil photo capture une large gamme de tonalités du foncé au clair. L’intensité peut être sélectionnée entre [Non], [Faible], [Moyenne] ou [Forte]. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Les réglages ISO disponibles sont limités en mode de correction de gamme dynamique. Régl. sens. ISO par paliers 1/3EV Régl. sens. ISO par paliers 1EV Faible ISO 400 à ISO 2000 ISO 400 à ISO 1600 Moyenne ISO 500 à ISO 1600 ISO 800 à ISO 1600 Forte ISO 640 à ISO 1250 ISO 800 • Si l’option [Forte] est sélectionnée, une quantité supérieure de bruit peut se produire dans les images. • La correction de gamme dynamique reste sans effet si vous utilisez le zoom numérique. • L’effet souhaité peut ne pas être obtenu si la scène est trop claire ou trop sombre. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Le réglage [Multi] pour Mesure exposition est recommandé lorsque vous utilisez la fonction de correction de gamme dynamique. • La correction de gamme dynamique peut être appliquée à une image RAW. [Décalage vitesse obt. auto] Si le réglage [Décalage vitesse obt. auto] du menu de prise de vue est réglé sur [Oui] et que le sélecteur de mode est réglé sur « S », l’appareil procède automatiquement au réglage de la vitesse d’obturation afin d’obtenir la meilleure exposition lorsque celle-ci ne peut pas être obtenue avec la vitesse d’obturation définie manuellement. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Le réglage [Décalage vitesse obt. auto] n’apparaît pas si le sélecteur de mode est réglé sur un mode autre que « S ». Menu onglet des options personnalisées [Enr. Mes Réglages] Vous pouvez sélectionner entre l’une des options Mes réglages Boîte [1] à [6] et Carte [1] à [6] pour l’emplacement d’enregistrement. [Réglage Zone AF Spot] dans le menu de configuration et la position du zoom peuvent également être enregistrés. Lorsque l’option [Position du zoom] est sélectionnée dans [Éditer Mes Réglages], les réglages peuvent être modifiés. [Manette ADJ Réglages] Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Format] dans [Manette ADJ Réglage 1] à [Manette ADJ Réglage 4]. Si vous définissez la fonction Format et que vous appuyez sur la touche Manette ADJ. , s’affiche, vous permettant ainsi de définir le format. [Confirmation du déclencheur] Lorsque l’option [ADJ./DIRECT] est définie, appuyez sur le déclencheur à mi-course pour finaliser les réglages en mode ADJ. et sur l’écran DIRECT. Vous pouvez alors prendre des photos. Lorsque l’option [ADJ.] est définie, les réglages du mode ADJ. sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Lorsque l’option [DIRECT] est définie, les réglages de l’écran DIRECT sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Une fois la prise de vue terminée, le système revient à l’écran de contrôle. [Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] Les fonctions [Agrand. affich], [Assist. mise au pt], [Format] et [Correction plage dynamique] ont été ajoutées. [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] Lorsque l’option [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] est réglée sur [Oui], vous pouvez pousser la manette ADJ. latéralement lorsque la prise de vue est possible pour modifier la sensibilité ISO. Le réglage par défaut est [Non]. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • La manette ADJ. peut être utilisée pour ajuster la sensibilité lorsque le déclencheur est enfoncé à mi-course en modes Changement de programme et Priorité ouverture (en mode Changement de programme, la sensibilité peut être ajustée, même après avoir relâché le déclencheur, tant que l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation s’affichent). Notez qu’une fois la sensibilité ajustée de cette manière, [Auto] et [Auto-Hi] ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés de nouveau. • En mode d’exposition manuelle, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la manette ADJ. pour modifier la sensibilité ISO. [Supprimer Mes Réglages] Les réglages enregistrés pour [Boîte Mes Réglages] dans [Enr. Mes Réglages], pour [Carte] et pour [MY1], [MY2] et [MY3] sur le sélecteur de mode sont ramenés à leur valeur par défaut. [Initialiser] Les options personnalisées seront réinitialisées. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes Réglages] ne seront pas restaurés. Menu Config. [Régl. sens. ISO par paliers] La [Sensibilité ISO] dans les réglages de prise de vue peut être réglée par intervalles de [1EV] ou [1/3EV]. [Sensibilité ISO auto-hi] Vous pouvez définir les limites supérieures de la sensibilité ISO et de la vitesse d’obturation afin de modifier la [Sensibilité ISO] lorsqu’elle est définie sur [Auto-Hi]. [Mode veille] [Extinction auto] Vous pouvez définir la durée qui doit s’écouler avant que l’appareil photo ne passe en [Mode veille] ou n’active l’option [Extinction auto] dans une plage comprise entre 1 et 30 minutes. [Réglage niveau] Les options [Non], [Niv. + inclin.], [Niveau], [Niveau + Son] et [Son] peuvent etre selectionnees. [Calibrage niveau (inclin.)] Enregistrez la perspective actuelle comme perspective standard. Réglage [Image zoom numérique] La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante. Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Environ 1× L Environ 2,1× 3M Environ 1,4× M Environ 3,4× 1M Environ 1,7× 5M Environ 6,8× VGA0 [Lecture zoom cible] Avec l’option Vue agrandie en mode de lecture, vous pouvez effectuer un zoom avant sur l’image centrée à la position à laquelle l’appareil photo a été placé par la cible pendant la prise de vue. [Réglage Zone AF Spot] Vous pouvez sélectionner la zone AF lorsque l’option [Mise au point] dans le menu des réglages de prise de vue est définie sur [AF Spot]. L’option [Normal] ou [Précis] peut être sélectionnée. La zone AF de l’option [Précis] est plus petite que celle de l’option [Normal]. [Annul. affich. zoom] Vous pouvez choisir de conserver ou d’annuler la vue agrandie après la prise de photos en mode Vue agrandie. Sélectionnez [Non] pour conserver le mode Vue agrandie et [Oui] pour l’annuler une fois les photos prises.1 [Sélect. aide m. au point] Lorsque l’option [Aide m. au p.] est définie sur [Oui] dans le menu de prise de vue, vous pouvez sélectionner [MODE 1] ou [MODE 2]. MODE 1 : Les contours des sujets/objets mis au point sont améliorés. MODE 2 : L’écran d’affichage des photos passe en noir et blanc et la zone de mise au point brille en blanc. [Conserv conditions prise vue] Lorsque cette option est définie sur [Oui] et si vous continuez à appuyer sur le déclencheur à mi-course après la prise de vue sans le relâcher, les réglages de mise au point, d’ouverture, de vitesse d’obturation, de sensibilité ISO et de balance des blancs sont conservés. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Les conditions de prise de vue ne sont pas conservées dans les cas suivants. • [Vidéo] et [Correction biais] en mode scène • Prise de vue à intervalles • Mode continu • Retardateur • Lorsque cette option est définie sur [Oui], l’option [Multi-P AUTO] de [Balance blancs] est identique à l’option [Auto] et [Correction plage dynamique] ne s’applique pas. [Aff. saturation des blancs] Lorsque cette option est définie sur [Oui], les zones de saturation des blancs de l’image clignotent lorsqu’elles sont affichées en mode de lecture de saturation des blancs. [Copyright] Entrez les informations de copyright afin que celles-ci s’affichent dans les données Exif de l’image. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Les informations de copyright enregistrées peuvent être consultées dans l’écran de détails + histogramme de l’écran de lecture. [Version du micrologiciel] La version du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo s’affiche. Si un fichier de mise à jour du micrologiciel est enregistré sur une carte mémoire, le micrologiciel peut être mis à jour. Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un boîtier GXR. Pixels réels Environ 16,2 millions Capteur d’image CMOS 23,6 × 15,7 mm (nombre total de pixels : environ 16,5 millions) Objectif Distance focale 15,7 à 55,5 mm (format 35 mm équivalent : de 24 à 85 mm) Ouverture (nombre f) f/3,5 – f/5,5 Plage de mise au point (de l’objectif) Environ 25 cm à 8 (téléobjectif) Construction 11 éléments en 9 groupes (3 objectifs asphériques avec 6 surfaces) Diamètre du filtre 55 mm Zoom 4,0× zoom numérique (photos), 3,6 × zoom numérique (vidéos) ; environ 6,8× zoom de redimensionnement automatique (VGA) Mode mise au point Contraste AF multi et AF spot ; MF ; snap ; 8 (verrouillage de mise au point et assistance AF) Vitesse d’obturation Photos 1/3200–180s, B (Bulb), T (Time) (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en fonction du mode prise de vue et flash) Vidéos 1/2000–1/30s Contrôle exposition Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique Mode Programme AE, priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle, priorité à l’obturation AE, fonction de décalage de la cible Correction de l’exposition Manuelle (-4,0 à +4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV), cadrage automatique (-2,0 à +2,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV) Portée du lien d’exposition (mode prise de vue automatique, mesure centrale pondérée de la lumière) Grand angle : 3,2–16,8EV Téléobjectif : 3,6–18,1EV (Plage d’exposition pour la sensibilité ISO automatique calculée avec des valeurs pour 100 ISO.) Remarque : À 6,0EV ou inférieur, chaque baisse de 1,0EV correspond à une baisse de 0,25EV en termes de luminosité. La luminosité baisse de -1,0EV maximum. Sensibilité ISO (sensibilité sortie standard) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO-LO, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200 Mode de balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Lampe incandescente1, Lampe incandescente2, Lampe fluorescente, Manuel, Détail ; cadrage auto balance des blancs Flash (avec GF-1) Réglage de puissance du flash Flash TTL, flash manuel, lumière ambiante auto Mode flash Réduction des yeux rouges, activé, synchronisation lente, manuel Synchronisation Synchronisation premier/deuxième rideau Mode prise de vue Mode prise de vue auto, Mode changement programme, Mode priorité ouverture, Priorité Vitesse obt., Mode exposition manuelle, Scène (Vidéo, Portrait, Sports, Paysage, Nuit, Correction biais, Miniatures, Contraste élevé N et B, Flou artistique, Traitement croisé, Toy Camera, Mes Réglages Mode continu Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Continu (Taille d’image : RAW) Réduction du bruit Non : 3 photos Réduction du bruit Oui : 2 photos Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Cont.M + (un ensemble) HI (1280×856) : 30 photos (30 images/s), LO (4928×3264) : 14 photos (2,5 images/s) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Taille de l’image (pixels) Photos 4928×2768, 4352×3264, 4928×3264, 3264×3264, 3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Taille de fichier (approximative) RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 23 445Ko/image, FINE : 25 703Ko/image, VGA : 20 508 Ko/image, RAW seulement : 20 332Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 24 443Ko/image, FINE : 26 795Ko/image, VGA : 21 405 Ko/image , RAW seulement : 21 181Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 27 603Ko/image, FINE : 30 265Ko/image, VGA : 24 139Ko/image , RAW seulement : 23 937Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 18 383Ko/image, FINE : 20 147Ko/image, VGA : 16 105Ko/image , RAW seulement : 15 929Ko/image L 16:9 NORMAL : 2 901Ko/image, FINE : 4 999Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 3 041Ko/image, FINE : 5 226Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 3 415Ko/image, FINE : 5 889Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 2 288Ko/image, FINE : 3 927Ko/image  Taille de fichier (approximative) M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 481Ko/image, FINE : 2 514Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 1 579Ko/image, FINE : 2 668Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 1 749Ko/image, FINE : 2 974Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 192Ko/image, FINE : 2 008Ko/image 5M 4:3 FINE : 2 293Ko/image 3M 4:3 FINE : 1 479Ko/image Taille de fichier (approximative) 1M 4:3 FINE : 818Ko/image VGA 4:3 FINE : 202Ko/image Longévité batterie (basée sur norme CIPA) DB-90 : environ 400prises de vue*3 (basé sur la norme CIPA) Dimensions (l×h×p) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 71,4mm(l)×70,5mm(h)×93,3mm(p) (basé sur la norme CIPA) Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 113,9mm(l)×74,7mm(h)×98,5mm(p) (basé sur la norme CIPA) Poids (approximatif) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 350g Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 550g (y compris la batterie et la carte mémoire SD) Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C Humidité fonctionnement 90% ou inférieure Température stockage –20°C à 60°C *1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image. *2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW, ou qu’un fichier VGA d’une taille de 640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée. Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE. Photos Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go RAW* FINE 4928×2768 3 37 76 150 306 614 1233 4352×3264 3 36 73 144 294 589 1182 4928×3264 2 31 64 127 260 522 1047 3264×3264 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 L FINE 4928×2768 16 179 365 718 1468 2941 5900 4352×3264 15 172 349 685 1401 2807 5632 4928×3264 14 152 310 609 1245 2495 5006 3264×3264 21 228 465 914 1868 3743 75100 Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 723 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 368 4028 7681 15082 30828 61759 123888 * Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie JPEG. 1 Vidéos Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go 1280×720 30 images/seconde 16 sec. 3 min. 3 sec. 6 min. 14 sec. 12 min. 14 sec. 25 min. 1 sec. 50 min. 7 sec. 100 min. 33 sec. 640×480 30 images/seconde 49 sec. 8 min. 55 sec. 18 min. 8 sec. 35 min. 38 sec. 72 min. 50 sec. 145 min. 54 sec. 292 min. 41 sec. 320×240 30 images/seconde 1 min. 59 sec. 21 min. 39 sec. 44 min. 2 sec. 86 min. 28 sec. 176 min. 44 sec. 354 min. 3 sec. 710 min. 13 sec. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- La taille d’enregistrement sans interruption maximale pour une vidéo est de 4 Go. La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 15 minutes environ pour une taille de 1280×720, de 46 minutes environ pour une taille de 640×480 et de 90 minutes environ pour une taille de 320×240. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos avec la taille vidéo définie sur 1280×720, l’utilisation de cartes mémoire SD/SDHC avec une classe de vitesse 6 est recommandée. Annexes Accessoires en option L’unité appareil photo peut être utilisée avec les éléments suivants (vendus séparément). Capuchon d’objectif (LC-3) Pare-soleil d’objectif (LH-2) Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation fournie avec le produit. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Le capuchon d’objectif (LC-3) et le pare-soleil d’objectif (LH-2) ne peuvent pas être utilisés ensemble. Si le pare-soleil d’objectif (LH-2) est fixé alors que le capuchon d’objectif (LC- 3) l’est déjà, le capuchon d’objectif peut casser. Montage et démontage de la bague d’objectif--------------------------------- Enlevez la bague d’objectif lors de l’utilisation de la bague d’objectif en option (LC-3). Démontage de la bague d’objectif Faites tourner la bague d’objectif dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre avec l’appareil photo hors tension, puis retirez la bague de l’unité appareil photo. Montage de la bague d’objectif Une fois l’appareil hors tension, alignez le repère sur la bague d’objectif (2) avec le repère de l’unité appareil photo (1) et tournez la bague d’objectif dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre jusqu’à ce qu’un déclic soit émis. 1 22 Précautions d’emploi • La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. • En cas de panne ou de dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. • Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques. • Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif. • Lors de la fixation d’un filtre ou d’un pare-soleil, veillez à ne pas exercer une pression excessive. • Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation visible ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même température que l’environnement. • Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement ou un choc électrique. • Gardez le connecteur propre. Conseil : pour éviter la condensation--------------------------------------------- La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif. Entretien et stockage de l’équipement Entretien de l’équipement • Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce, ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. Faites particulièrement attention autour du fût d’objectif. • Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition. • Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation Ricoh. • Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas. Stockage • Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant). • Lorsque vous rangez votre appareil photo, veillez à l’installer dans un étui, etc., dans lequel la poussière ou les peluches ne pénètrent pas afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo. De plus, lorsque vous transportez l’appareil photo, ne le mettez pas directement dans une poche, etc., afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo. Garantie et réparation 1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au centre de réparation Ricoh. 2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de : 1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ; 2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ; 3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ; 4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement ; 5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles. 3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé. 4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même pendant la période de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte. 5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté. * Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent vos droits légaux. * L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de garantie fournie avec l’équipement.0 8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement) seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la production de l’équipement. 9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de son état originel peut être impossible. Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct. • Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution. • Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible. • Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer l’appareil au centre de réparation.1 Numéros de téléphone des centres d’aide en Europe UK (from within the UK) 0203 026 2290 (from outside the UK) +44 203 026 2290 Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 France (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 Italia (dall'Italia) 02 4032 6427 (dall'estero) +39 02 4032 6427 España (desde España) 911 230396 (desde fuera de España) +34 911 230396 Belgique (en dehors de la Belgique) +32 2 8088300 (Français) (van buiten België) +32 505 51082 (Vlaams) Nederland (van buiten Nederland) +31 208081108 http://www.service.ricohpmmc.com/ Site web PHOTO STYLE pour les utilisateurs des appareils photos numériques Ricoh PHOTO STYLE offre de précieuses informations aux utilisateurs des appareils photos numériques Ricoh pour les faire goûter aux plaisirs de la photographie. Connaissances générales Explications faciles des mécanismes et fonctions des appareils photos numériques Technique photo Techniques de photographie utiles présentées par sujet Galerie de photographes Photos prises par des photographes professionnels Concours photo Une collection de superbes photos des quatre coins du monde Accédez à l’URL suivante : http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/photostyle/*L455 3972A* En cas de problème Bureaux Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japon Décembre 2011 FR F-FR Imprimé en Chine RICOH LENS A16 24-85mm F3.5-5.5 Instruction Manual The serial number may be found on the bottom of the lens. Package Contents Before using your Ricoh lens, confirm that the package contains the items listed below. Camera unit The serial number may be found on the bottom. Lens cap Comes attached to the camera unit. ? Instructionmanual (thismanual) ? Warranty Connector cap Comes attached to the camera unit. Soft case Introduction To use this lens, you need to attach it to a compatible camera body. Refer to the Camera Body User Guide for details about how to operate shooting and playback functions and change settings and to read important precautions for use. This instruction manual will explain functions and operating procedures that are available only when this camera unit is used with a compatible camera body. See also the GXR Camera Body User Guide. To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Safety precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use. Test shots Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly before taking photos on important occasions. Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines, and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright holder, is prohibited. Exemption from liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display images as a result of product malfunction. Warranty The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any expense thereby incurred. Radio interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device, reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio or television into a different outlet. © 2011 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time without prior notice. Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover of this booklet. Safety Precautions Warning Symbols Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below. Danger This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Warning This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Caution This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical damage if ignored or incorrectly handled. Sample Warnings The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed. The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions. The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action is prohibited. Examples = Do not touch = Do not disassemble Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit. Danger Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard. Warning Keep the equipment out of the reach of children. Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service center if it is damaged. Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock. Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns. • Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as this may lead to disasters or accidents. Caution Do not allow the equipment to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands. Both pose the risk of electric shock. Safety Precautions for Accessories When using optional products, carefully read the instructions provided with the product before using that product.10 Package Contents................................................................................................................. 2 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3 Safety Precautions................................................................................................................ 6 Names of Parts ....................................................................................................15 Upgrading the Product .....................................................................................16 Updating the firmware .....................................................................................................16 Shooting...............................................................................................................18 Level Indicator .....................................................................................................................18 Macro Functions..................................................................................................................18 Built-in Flash.........................................................................................................................18 Mode P: Program Shift......................................................................................................19 M: Manual Exposure Mode..............................................................................................21 Addition of Scene Modes.................................................................................................21 Table of Contents11 Enlarging pictures..............................................................................................................22 Addition of new target shift function..........................................................................23 Registering Functions to the Up-down Dial .............................................................24 Addition of Supported Sizes for Auto Resize Zoom...............................................24 Playback Mode....................................................................................................24 Camera Unit Information Display .................................................................................24 Settings ................................................................................................................25 [Picture Quality/Size].........................................................................................................25 Photographs...............................................................................................................26 Movies...........................................................................................................................27 [Auto Bracket] ......................................................................................................................28 [Interval Shooting] .............................................................................................................28 [Noise Reduction]...............................................................................................................29 [White Balance] ...................................................................................................................29 [ISO Setting]..........................................................................................................................301 [Focus Assist]........................................................................................................................31 [Dynamic Range Compensation]..................................................................................32 [Shutter Speed Auto Shift] ..............................................................................................33 Key Custom Settings Tab Menu .......................................................................34 [Reg. My Settings]...............................................................................................................34 [ADJ. Lever Settings]..........................................................................................................34 [Shutter Button Confirmation].......................................................................................35 [Set Fn1/Fn2 Buttons]........................................................................................................35 [ADJ. Direct ISO Control] ..................................................................................................36 [Delete My Settings] ..........................................................................................................37 [Restore Defaults] ...............................................................................................................371 Setup Menu .........................................................................................................38 [ISO Step Setting]................................................................................................................38 [ISO Auto-High Settings]..................................................................................................38 [Sleep Mode] [Auto Power Off] .....................................................................................38 [Level Setting]......................................................................................................................39 [Level (Tilt) Calibration] ....................................................................................................39 [Digital Zoom Image] Setting.........................................................................................39 [Target Zoom Play].............................................................................................................40 [Spot AF Area Setting].......................................................................................................40 [Zoom Display Release]....................................................................................................40 [Focus assist selection]......................................................................................................41 [Keep shooting conditions].............................................................................................41 [White Saturation Display] ..............................................................................................42 [Copyright notice] ..............................................................................................................42 [Firmware Version]..............................................................................................................421 Specifications ......................................................................................................43 Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity..................................................................49 Appendices..........................................................................................................52 Optional Accessories.........................................................................................................52 Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................54 Equipment Care and Storage.........................................................................................56 Warranty and Servicing....................................................................................................581 Names of Parts 1 2 3 1 Connector 2 Ring cap 3 Lens1 Upgrading the Product Updating the firmware When you first attach the camera unit to the camera body, the version update function will start automatically if the firmware of the camera body need to be updated. In such case, update the firmware of the camera body using the following procedure. If the firmware version is already up to date, the version update function will not start and you can use the lens right away. 1 Check that the camera is turned off and attach the lens mount unit to the camera body. • For details about how to attach the camera unit, refer to the Camera Body User Guide.1 2 Turn on the camera body. • A confirmation message about updating the firmware appears. 3 Press the Fn1/Fn2 buttons to select [Yes] and then press the MENU/ OK button. • The firmware update begins and the following messages appear on the picture display. [Checking rewrite file] [Rewriting program] The camera restarts and the firmware version will be displayed, and then the update will be completed. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • To confirm the firmware version, with the camera off, keep the 6 (Play) button pressed for more than 1 second while holding the – button pressed down. The firmware version will appear for about 20 seconds. • For the latest information on firmware updates, see the Ricoh Web site (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). 1 Shooting Level Indicator In addition to the horizontal direction, tilt (front-back direction) can also be checked. Macro Functions The Macro Shooting, Macro Target, Auto Macro, and Minimum Shooting Distance Display during Macro Shooting functions are not available. Built-in Flash If the built-in flash is used, vignetting will occur in the bottom portion of the image. Use the external flash (GF-1) for flash photography.1 Mode P: Program Shift The diagram on the following page gives estimates of the shift range for various combinations of aperture values and shutter speeds. The actual values may vary depending on EV (exposure value). In these examples, the flash mode is set to [Flash Off], and the ISO setting is set to [ISO 200].0 : Wide : Tele Ev5 Ev6 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 Ev-1 Ev-2 8 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 F16 F22 F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8 F2.0 F1.4 F1.0 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 -2 4 -3 8 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev7 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 F22.0 F3.5 1 M: Manual Exposure Mode You can select between B (Bulb) and T (Time) for the shutter speed. With B, the image is exposed while the shutter release button is pressed and exposure ends when the button is released. With T, exposure starts when the shutter release button is pressed and ends when it is pressed again. In either mode, the camera stops shooting compulsorily once 180 sec. has elapsed. [Auto] and [Auto-Hi] of the ISO setting can also be used. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- B and T can both be operated using the optional cable switch (CA-1). Addition of Scene Modes [Miniaturize], [High Contrast B&W], [Soft Focus], [Cross Process], and [Toy Camera] have been added to Scene Mode. Vignetting can be set in [Cross Process] and [Toy Camera]. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Depending on the firmware version that was being used, the setting for vignetting may be reset to the default when the firmware version is updated. Enlarging pictures Pressing and holding down the MENU/OK button enlarges and displays the center. Pressing and holding down the MENU/OK button again enlarges the center and displays the enlarged part over the entire screen. Pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again returns to normal display. When focusing manually, press the shutter button halfway to return to normal display. You can set the display magnification by pressing and holding down the t (Self-timer) button or by selecting [Magnification Ratio] from the shooting menu. Select from [2×], [4×], or [8×] using the +/- buttons, and then press the MENU/OK button. When moving the target or focusing manually, press the direction keys (+/- /Fn1/Fn2) to move the magnified area. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The display returns to the normal display when the following is operated in Enlarged View mode: • exposure compensation is executed • the Direct button is operated • If AE Lock is turned on before the entire image is enlarged, AE will continue to run during Enlarged View, and pictures will be captured at the locked AE settings. • You can register [Enlrg Part] and [Enlrg All] to the [Set Fn1/Fn2 Button] in the Key Custom Settings menu. Addition of new target shift function Pressing the ADJ. lever displays target shift and enables selecting the tracking target. Pressing the d button during target shift returns the target to the center of the image. Pressing the d button again cancels target shift. Registering Functions to the Up-down Dial You can switch between modes using the Up-down dial when Flash mode and Self-timer are set to on. Addition of Supported Sizes for Auto Resize Zoom Auto resize zoom supports all aspect ratios. Playback Mode Camera Unit Information Display You can switch the page by pressing the ! and " buttons. Camera unit information and copyright information are displayed on the second page. Settings [Picture Quality/Size] The [RAW only] option has been added. This option does not simultaneously save a JPEG copy. The following picture quality, image size and aspect ratio options are available for the [Picture Quality/Size] setting. A photograph‘s file size will depend on the combination of picture quality and image size used. When recording movies, you can select the [Movie Size]. Photographs Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4928×2768 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4352×3264 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4928×3264 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3264×3264 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4928×2768 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 4352×3264 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4928×3264 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 3264×3264 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304 Item Aspect ratio Compression Image size (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 When [RAW] is selected, this is the setting used for the JPEG copy. *2 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear on the top and bottom of the picture display. *3 Depending on the area photographed, black bands may appear at the right and left sides of the picture display. Movies Item Movie size HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 [Auto Bracket] [ISO-BKT] can be selected. With the value set for the ISO sensitivity setting in the shooting menu as the standard, 3 images can be shot with differing ISO settings; one at -1/3EV of the standard (set) value, one at the standard (set) value, and one at +1/3EV of the standard (set) value. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Since shooting is performed within the ISO sensitivity range that can be set, the bracketing range may not be 1/3EV or an image may be shot with the same settings, depending on the [ISO Setting]. [Interval Shooting] The number of shots to be taken can be set. When this is set, the “remaining number of shots” is displayed during shooting. The shooting interval can be set to a minimum of 2 seconds, and the number of shots to be taken can be set to a maximum of 99 shots. [Noise Reduction] Perform noise reduction from [Off], [Auto], [Weak], [Strong], or [MAX]. The time required to record images varies with the option selected. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You cannot use this function when [Portrait], [Sports], [Miniaturize], [High Contrast B&W], [Soft Focus], [Cross Process], [Toy Camera], or [Skew Correct Mode] is selected in the scene modes. [White Balance] You can select [Incandescent Lamp1] or [Incandescent Lamp2]. Using [Incandescent Lamp2] will leave a slightly redder tint compared to [Incandescent Lamp1]. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • When [Incandescent Lamp2] is selected, images will be shot with the same color shades as with the [Incandescent] setting described in the Camera Body User Guide. 0 • If the flash (GF-1) is fired using DISP. in [Manual], the white balance will be set to the metering results calculated when the flash went off. [ISO Setting] [Auto], [Auto-Hi], [ISO-LO], [ISO 200] to [ISO 3200] can be selected. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [ISO-LO] is equivalent to ISO 100. However, the dynamic range gets narrower and the higher brightness levels make whiteout more likely to occur. • When [Auto] is selected and the flash is used, the sensitivity used will gain up to ISO 800 equivalent. • The step setting for ISO can be selected in [ISO Step Setting] (GP. 38) in the setup menu. • When [Auto] is selected and the flash is not used, the minimum and maximum values for the ISO sensitivity will be ISO 200 and ISO 400.1 [Focus Assist] The shape outlines and contrast of the images shown on the picture display are intensified, making it easier to adjust the focus. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • When focusing manually, the intensification of the shape outline or contrast will be released by pressing the shutter button halfway. • You can select the display method for Focus Assist from [Focus assist selection] in the setup menu. (GP. 41) [Dynamic Range Compensation] The camera captures a wide range of tones from dark to bright. The intensity can be selected from [Off], [Weak], [Medium], or [Strong]. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Available ISO settings are limited in dynamic range compensation mode. ISO Step Setting 1/3EV ISO Step Setting 1EV Weak ISO 400 to ISO 2000 ISO 400 to ISO 1600 Medium ISO 500 to ISO 1600 ISO 800 to ISO 1600 Strong ISO 640 to ISO 1250 ISO 800 • If [Strong] is selected, more noise are likely to occur in images. • If using the digital zoom, Dynamic Range Compensation has no effect. • The desired effect may not be achieved if the scene is too bright or too dark. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Setting [Multi] for Exposure Metering is recommended when using the dynamic range compensation function. • Dynamic range compensation can be applied to a RAW image. [Shutter Speed Auto Shift] When the [Shutter Speed Auto Shift] setting in the shooting menu is set to [On] while the mode dial is set to “S”, the camera will automatically adjust the shutter speed to obtain the best exposure when it cannot be obtained using the shutter speed that was set manually. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The [Shutter Speed Auto Shift] setting will not appear when the mode dial is set to a mode other than “S”. Key Custom Settings Tab Menu [Reg. My Settings] You can select from any of My Settings Box [1] to [6] and Card [1] to [6] for the save location. [Spot AF Area Setting] in the setup menu and the zoom position can also be registered. When [Zoom Position] in [Edit My Settings] is selected, settings can be edited. [ADJ. Lever Settings] You can set the [Aspect Ratio] function in [ADJ. Lever Setting 1] to [ADJ. Lever Setting 4]. If you set the Aspect Ratio function, and press the ADJ. Lever button, will appear, allowing you to set the aspect ratio. [Shutter Button Confirmation] When [ADJ./DIRECT] is set, pressing the shutter release button halfway down will finalize settings in ADJ. mode and on the DIRECT screen, and you will be able to shoot pictures. When [ADJ.] is set, the ADJ. mode settings will be finalized, enabling you to shoot pictures. When [DIRECT] is set, the DIRECT screen settings will be finalized, enabling you to shoot pictures. After you finish shooting pictures, the system will return to the Monitoring screen. [Set Fn1/Fn2 Buttons] [Enlrg Display], [Focus Assist], [Aspect Ratio], and [Dynamic Range Compensation] functions are added. [ADJ. Direct ISO Control] When [ADJ. Direct ISO Control] is set to [On], you can push the ADJ. lever sideways when shooting is possible to change the ISO setting. The default setting is [Off]. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The ADJ. lever can be used to adjust sensitivity while the shutter button is pressed halfway in program shift and aperture priority modes (in program shift mode, sensitivity can be adjusted even after the shutter button is released, as long as shutter speed and aperture are displayed). Note that once sensitivity has been adjusted in this manner, [Auto] and [Auto-Hi] can not be re-selected. • In manual exposure mode, you cannot use the ADJ. lever to change the ISO setting. [Delete My Settings] The settings registered to [My Settings Box] in [Reg. My Settings], to [Card], and to [MY1], [MY2], and [MY3] on the Mode dial return to their defaults. [Restore Defaults] The key custom settings will be reset. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Settings set in [Reg. My Settings] will not be reset. Setup Menu [ISO Step Setting] The [ISO Setting] in the shooting settings menu can be set in intervals of [1EV] or [1/3EV]. [ISO Auto-High Settings] You can set the upper limits for the ISO setting and the shutter speed for switching the ISO setting when [ISO Setting] is set to [Auto-Hi]. [Sleep Mode] [Auto Power Off] You can set the time allowed to elapse before the camera enters [Sleep Mode] or activates [Auto Power Off] from a range of 1 minute to 30 minutes. [Level Setting] [Off], [Level + Tilt], [Level], [Level + Sound], and [Sound] can be selected. [Level (Tilt) Calibration] Register the current perspective as the standard. [Digital Zoom Image] Setting The size of the recorded image varies depending on the auto resize zoom, as follows. Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Zoom ratio Image size (pixels) Approx. 1.0× L Approx. 2.1× 3M Approx. 1.4× M Approx. 3.4× 1M Approx. 1.7× 5M Approx. 6.8× VGA0 [Target Zoom Play] With Enlarged Display in playback mode, you can zoom in on the image centered at the position to which the camera was shifted by target shift during shooting. [Spot AF Area Setting] You can select the AF area for when [Focus] in the shooting settings menu is set to [Spot AF]. [Normal] or [Pinpoint] can be selected. The AF area for [Pinpoint] is smaller than the AF area for [Normal]. [Zoom Display Release] You can select whether to maintain or cancel the enlarged view after shooting pictures in Enlarged View mode. Selecting [Off] maintains Enlarged View mode and [On] cancels it after pictures are shot.1 [Focus assist selection] When [Focus Assist] is set to [On] in the shooting menu, you can select [MODE1] or [MODE2]. MODE1: Shape outlines for subjects/objects in focus are enhanced. MODE2: The picture display switches to black and white, and the area in focus glows in white. [Keep shooting conditions] When this is set to [On], if you continue to press the shutter release button halfway after shooting without releasing the shutter, the focus, aperture, shutter speed, ISO, and white balance settings are retained. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The shooting conditions are not retained in the following cases. • [Movie] and [Skew Correct Mode] of scene mode • Interval shooting • Continuous mode • Self-timer • When set to [On], [Multi-P AUTO] of [White Balance] operates as [Auto] and [Dynamic Range Compensation] is invalid. [White Saturation Display] When set to [On], the white saturation areas of the image flash when displayed in White Saturation of playback mode. [Copyright notice] Enter the copyright information to write this information into the Exif data of the image. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The recorded copyright information can be checked in the details + histogram display of the playback screen. [Firmware Version] The firmware version of the camera is displayed. If a firmware update file is saved on a memory card, the firmware can be updated. Specifications Specifications are given for the camera unit mounted on a GXR body. Effective pixels Approximately 16.2 million Image sensor 23.6 mm × 15.7 mm CMOS (total pixels: approx. 16.5 million) Lens Focal length 15.7 mm to 55.5 mm (35-mm format equivalent: 24 mm to 85 mm) Aperture (f-number) f/3.5 – f/5.5 Focus range (from lens) Approx. 25 cm – 8 (telephoto end) Construction 11 elements in 9 groups (3 aspherical lens elements with 6 surfaces) Filter diameter 55 mm Zoom 4.0× digital zoom (photographs), 3.6 × digital zoom (movies); approx. 6.8× auto resize zoom (VGA) Focus mode Contrast AF-based multi and spot AF; MF; Snap; 8 (focus lock and AF-assist) Shutter speed Photographs 1/3200–180s, B (Bulb), T (Time) (upper and lower limits vary according to shooting and flash mode) Movies 1/2000–1/30s Exposure control Metering TTL-CCD metering in multi (256-segment), center-weighted, and spot modes with autoexposure lock Mode Program AE, aperture priority AE, manual exposure, shutter priority AE, move target function Exposure compensation Manual (-4.0 to +4.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV), auto bracketing (-2.0 to +2.0EV in increments 1/3EV or 1/2EV) Exposure link range (Auto shooting mode, Centerweighted light metering) Wide angle: 3.2–16.8EV Telephoto: 3.6–18.1EV (Exposure range for auto ISO calculated using values for ISO 100.) Note: At 6.0EV or lower, each drop of 1.0EV is associated with a 0.25EV drop in brightness. Brightness drops by no more than -1.0EV. ISO sensitivity (Standard Output Sensitivity) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO-LO, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200 White balance mode Auto, Multi-P AUTO, Outdoors, Cloudy, Incandescent Lamp1, Incandescent Lamp2, Fluorescent Lamp, Manual, Detail; white balance bracketing Flash (with GF-1) Flash output adjustment TTL flash, manual flash, ambient light automatic Flash Mode Red-eye reduction, Flash On, Slow sync, Manual Timing Front/rear curtain sync Shooting mode Auto Shooting Mode, Program Shift Mode, Aperture Priority Mode, Shutter Speed Priority, Manual Exposure Mode, scene mode (Movie, Portrait, Sports, Landscape, Nightscape, Skew Correct Mode, Miniaturize, High Contrast B&W, Soft Focus, Cross Process, Toy Camera), My Settings Continuous mode Number of pictures shot in Continuous (Picture Size: RAW) Noise Reduction off: 3 pictures Noise Reduction on: 2 pictures Number of pictures shot in M-Cont Plus (1 set) HI (1280×856) : 30 pictures (30 Frames/Sec) LO (4928×3264) : 14 pictures (2.5 Frames/Sec) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Image size (pixels) Photographs 4928×2768, 4352×3264, 4928×3264, 3264×3264, 3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Movies 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 File size (approx.) RAW 16:9 NORMAL: 23,445KB/frame, FINE: 25,703KB/frame, VGA: 20,508 KB/frame, RAW only: 20,332KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 24,443KB/frame, FINE: 26,795KB/frame, VGA: 21,405 KB/frame, RAW only: 21,181KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 27,603KB/frame, FINE: 30,265KB/frame, VGA: 24,139KB/frame, RAW only: 23,937KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 18,383KB/frame, FINE: 20,147KB/frame, VGA: 16,105KB/frame, RAW only: 15,929KB/frame L 16:9 NORMAL: 2,901KB/frame, FINE: 4,999KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 3,041KB/frame, FINE: 5,226KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 3,415KB/frame, FINE: 5,889KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 2,288KB/frame, FINE: 3,927KB/frame  File size (approx.) M 16:9 NORMAL: 1,481KB/frame, FINE: 2,514KB/frame 4:3 NORMAL: 1,579KB/frame, FINE: 2,668KB/frame 3:2 NORMAL: 1,749KB/frame, FINE: 2,974KB/frame 1:1 NORMAL: 1,192KB/frame, FINE: 2,008KB/frame 5M 4:3 FINE: 2,293KB/frame 3M 4:3 FINE: 1,479KB/frame File size (approx.) 1M 4:3 FINE: 818KB/frame VGA 4:3 FINE: 202KB/frame Battery life (based on CIPA standard) DB-90: approx. 400shots *3 (Based on CIPA guide line) Dimensions (W×H×D) Camera unit only: 71.4mm(w)×70.5mm(h)×93.3mm(d) (Based on CIPA guide line) When mounted on the camera body: 113.9mm(w)×74.7mm(h)×98.5mm(d) (Based on CIPA guide line) Weight (approx.) Camera unit only: 350g When mounted on the camera body: 550g (Including the battery and SD memory card) Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C Operating humidity 90% or less Storage temperature –20°C to 60°C *1 The options available vary with image size. *2 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a FINE- or NORMAL-quality file with the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file 640×480 pixels in size). RAW files use the standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is used. We recommend that you carry spare batteries when in use for extended periods. Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity The following values are given as a reference of the storage capacity of the internal memory and memory cards of various sizes, by picture quality and image size, when using the FINE picture quality. Photographs Compression Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB RAW* FINE 4928×2768 3 37 76 150 306 614 1233 4352×3264 3 36 73 144 294 589 1182 4928×3264 2 31 64 127 260 522 1047 3264×3264 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 L FINE 4928×2768 16 179 365 718 1468 2941 5900 4352×3264 15 172 349 685 1401 2807 5632 4928×3264 14 152 310 609 1245 2495 5006 3264×3264 21 228 465 914 1868 3743 75100 Compression Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 723 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 368 4028 7681 15082 30828 61759 123888 * When [RAW] is selected, this is the compression used for the JPEG copy. 1 Movies Image size (pixels) Internal memory 1GB 2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB 1280×720 30 frames/second 16sec. 3min. 3sec. 6min. 14sec. 12min. 14sec. 25min. 1sec. 50min. 7sec. 100min. 33sec. 640×480 30 frames/second 49sec. 8min. 55sec. 18min. 8sec. 35min. 38sec. 72min. 50sec. 145min. 54sec. 292min. 41sec. 320×240 30 frames/second 1min. 59sec. 21min. 39sec. 44min. 2sec. 86min. 28sec. 176min. 44sec. 354min. 3sec. 710min. 13sec. Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The maximum uninterrupted recording size for a single movie is 4 GB. The maximum recording time is around 15 minutes at 1280×720 size, around 46 minutes at 640×480 size, and around 90 minutes at 320×240 size. Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When recording movies with the movie size set to 1280×720, using SD/ SDHC memory cards with a speed class of 6 or more is recommended. Appendices Optional Accessories The camera unit can be used with the items (sold separately) listed below. Les cap (LC-3) Lens hood (LH-2) Note -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Before using an optional accessory, see the documentation that came with the product. • For the latest information on optional accessories, visit the Ricoh website (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/). Caution ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The lens cap (LC-3) and lens hood (LH-2) cannot be used together. If the lens hood (LH-2) is attached when the lens cap (LC-3) is already attached, the lens cap may break. Removing/attaching the ring cap ------------------------------------------------- Remove the ring cap when using the optional ring cap (LC-3). Removing the ring cap Turn the ring cap counterclockwise while the camera is turned off and remove from the camera unit. Attaching the ring cap With the camera turned off, align the marking on the ring cap (2) with the marking on the camera unit (1) and turn the ring cap clockwise until it clicks. 1 22 Precautions for Use • The warranty supplied with this product is only valid within the country of purchase. • Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any expenditure incurred thereby. • Do not drop the equipment or subject it to physical shocks. • When carrying the equipment, be careful that it does not strike other objects. Particular care is required to protect the lens. • When attaching a filter or lens hood, be careful not to apply excessive force. • Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible condensation inside which can lead to the malfunction of the equipment. This can be avoided by placing the equipment in a plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature its surroundings. • Keep the equipment dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe these precautions could result in malfunction of the equipment or electric shock. • Keep the connector clean. Tip: Avoiding Condensation -------------------------------------------------------- Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the heater has come on, or where the camera is exposed to cold air from an air conditioner or other device. Equipment Care and Storage Caring for the Equipment • Photographs can be affected by fingerprints and other foreign matter on the lens. Avoid touching the lens with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a blower from a camera supply store, or gently clean the lens with a soft, dry cloth. Be especially careful around the barrel. • Clean the equipment thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling cosmetics. Do not expose the equipment to volatile substances such as thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the equipment or its finish. • In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center. • This equipment is a high precision device. Do not disassemble. Storage • Do not store the camera where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or humidity; large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe vibration; prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other insect repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for example, in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet). • When storing, place the product in a camera case, etc. that does not collect dirt or fluff to prevent dirt or dust from attaching itself to the camera. In addition, when carrying the camera, do not place the camera directly into a pocket, etc., in order to prevent dirt and dust from getting on the camera. Warranty and Servicing 1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your equipment, any defective parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of equipment malfunction, contact the dealer from which you purchased the equipment or your nearest Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will not be reimbursed for the cost of bringing the equipment to the Ricoh Repair Center. 2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from: 1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual; 2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service center listed in the instruction manual; 3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.; 4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera Body User Guide”), leaking of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the equipment. 5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages, infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock, dropping of the equipment, or pressure on the equipment, and other unnatural causes. 3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees, including those incurred at an authorized service center. 4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the warranty card is not attached or if the distributor’s name or the purchase date have been changed or are not indicated on the card. 5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred during the warranty period. 6. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the equipment, such as expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not. 7. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the equipment was purchased. * The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit your legal rights. * The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card provided with this equipment.0 8. Parts essential to the servicing of the equipment (that is, components required to maintain the functions and quality of the equipment) will be available for a period of five years after the equipment is discontinued. 9. Please note that if the equipment is seriously damaged by flooding, submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible. Notes------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Before sending the camera in for repair, check the camera body and read the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation. • Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete. • When sending the equipment to a service center, please include a note which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as possible. • Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the camera to the service center.1 Telephone Support Numbers in Europe UK (from within the UK) 0203 026 2290 (from outside the UK) +44 203 026 2290 Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 France (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 Italia (dall'Italia) 02 4032 6427 (dall'estero) +39 02 4032 6427 España (desde España) 911 230396 (desde fuera de España) +34 911 230396 Belgique (en dehors de la Belgique) +32 2 8088300 (Français) (van buiten België) +32 505 51082 (Vlaams) Nederland (van buiten Nederland) +31 208081108 http://www.service.ricohpmmc.com/ PHOTO STYLE Website for Ricoh Digital Camera Users PHOTO STYLE offers useful information to make photos and photography more enjoyable for Ricoh digital camera users. Basic Knowledge Easy explanations on the mechanisms and functions of digital cameras Photo-technique Useful photography techniques organized by subject Photographers Gallery Photos taken by professional photographers Photo contest A collection of brilliant photos gathered from around the world Access the following URL: http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/photostyle/*L455 2971A* If You Encounter a Problem with This Product Ricoh offices RICOH COMPANY, LTD. 3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530, Japan http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A. 1–800–22RICOH http://www.ricoh-usa.com/ RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS LIMITED 21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2011 December EN USA GB GB AE AE Printed in China Avant de commencer Avant d’utiliser votre boîtier d’appareil photo, prenez le temps de vous familiariser avec les commandes et les écrans d’affichage (pages 1–10). Reportez-vous à cette section pour référence pendant votre lecture du reste du manuel. Photographie et lecture de base Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser l’appareil photo pour la première fois. Elle détaille les étapes à suivre pour préparer l’appareil, prendre des photos et les lire (pages 11–44). Référence Lisez cette section pour en savoir plus sur les sujets non traités dans la section « Photographie et lecture de base ». Elle détaille la prise de vue avancée, les options de lecture, ainsi que la manière d’imprimer des photos, de configurer les réglages de l’appareil et de copier des photos sur un ordinateur (pages 45–187). La batterie rechargeable doit être chargée avant usage. La batterie n’est pas chargée au moment de l’achat. BOÎTIER DE L’APPAREIL PHOTO NUMÉRIQUE GXR Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo Le numéro de série du produit est gravé sous le boîtier de l’appareil photo.ii Contenu de l’emballage Vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous. * L’aspect des éléments inclus peut être différent. Boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR Le numéro de série est gravé sous le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Câble USB avec connecteur mini-B Il permet de raccorder le boîtier de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur. Câble A/V Il permet de boîtier de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur. Capuchon du connecteur Ce capuchon est installé sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Protège-griffe alimentée Cette protection est installée sur la griffe alimentée du boîtier de l’appareil. Batterie rechargeable DB-90 Chargeur de batterie BJ-9 • CD : il contient le logiciel et un Mode d’emploi du logiciel. • Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo (le présent manuel) • Courroie d’encolure • Garantie Conseil : fixation dela courroie d’encolure Passez les extrémités de la courroie d’encolure dans les oeillets de la courroie, de chaque côté du boîtier de l’appareil photo, et insérez les extrémités dans les attaches, comme indiqué sur l’illustration.iii Avis • Mesures de sécurité : Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir une utilisation sans danger. • Essais de prise de vue : Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants. • Copyright : La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires, est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits. • Exonération de responsabilité : Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. • Garantie : cet appareil est fabriqué en fonction des caractéristiques locales et la garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. • Interférences radio : L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente. © 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout moment et sans avis préalable. Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista et Internet Explorer sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Macintosh et Mac OS sont des marques déposées d’Apple Inc. aux ÉtatsUnis et dans d’autres pays. Adobe, le logo Adobe et Adobe Reader sont des marques commerciales d’Adobe Systems Incorporated. HDMI, le logo et High-Definition Multimedia Interface sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC. Tous les autres noms de marque mentionnés dans ce document sont la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs.iv Consignes de sécurité Symboles d’avertissement Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens. Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous. Danger Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Avertissement Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Attention Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Exemples designalisation d’avertissement Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées. Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites. Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action spécifique est interdite. Exemples Ne pas toucher Ne pas démonter Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en toute sécurité. Danger Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vousmême l’appareil. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique. Ne tentez pas de démonter, de modifier ou de souder vousmême la batterie.v Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu, ne la chauffez pas, ne la stockez pas dans des endroits où la température est élevée (par exemple près d’un feu ou à l’intérieur d’une voiture), et ne la jetez pas n’importe où. Veillez également à ne pas mouiller la batterie, à ne pas la jeter dans l’eau ou dans la mer. N’essayez pas de percer la batterie ou de la compresser. Veillez à ne pas faire tomber la batterie ni à lui faire subir de choc important. N’utilisez pas de batterie visiblement endommagée ou déformée. Avertissement En cas d’anomalies telles que de la fumée ou des odeurs inhabituelles, mettez l’appareil immédiatement hors tension. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Si vous alimentez l’appareil via le secteur, veillez à débrancher le cordon d’alimentation de la prise secteur pour éviter tout incendie ou choc électrique. Arrêtez d’utiliser l’appareil dès qu’il présente de tels signes de dysfonctionnement. Contactez le centre de service après-vente dès que possible. Mettez l’appareil immédiatement hors tension s’il entre en contact avec un objet métallique, de l’eau, du liquide ou si tout autre objet pénètre à l’intérieur du boîtier de l’appareil. Retirez la batterie et la carte mémoire dès que possible en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Si vous alimentez l’appareil via le secteur, veillez à débrancher le cordon d’alimentation de la prise secteur pour éviter tout incendie ou choc électrique. Arrêtez d’utiliser l’appareil dès qu’il présente de tels signes de dysfonctionnement. Contactez le centre de service après-vente dès que possible.vi Si l’écran d’affichage des photos est endommagé, évitez tout contact avec les cristaux liquides qu’il contient. Suivez les mesures d’urgence suivantes si besoin : • PEAU : Si des cristaux liquides entrent en contact avec la peau, essuyez et rincez la zone affectée à grande eau, puis lavez-la au savon. • YEUX : Si des cristaux liquides pénètrent dans les yeux, lavezles à l’eau propre pendant au moins 15 minutes et consultez immédiatement un médecin. • INGESTION : Si des cristaux liquides sont ingérés, rincez la bouche à grande eau. Il faut ensuite boire de l’eau en grande quantité et se faire vomir. Consultez immédiatement un médecin. Pour empêcher toute fuite, surchauffe, ignition ou explosion de la batterie, prenez les précautions suivantes : • Utilisez uniquement la batterie recommandée pour cet appareil. • Ne transportez pas ou ne stockez pas la batterie avec des objets métalliques, par exemple des stylos à bille métalliques, des colliers, des pièces de monnaie, des broches, etc. • Ne placez pas la batterie dans un four à micro-ondes ou un conteneur à haute pression. • Si vous constatez une fuite de liquide de batterie ou une odeur inhabituelle, un changement de couleur, etc. en cours d’utilisation ou pendant la charge, retirez immédiatement la batterie du boîtier de l’appareil photo ou du chargeur et rangez-la dans un endroit à l’abri de toute source de flammes. Pour empêcher toute ignition, électrocution ou explosion de la batterie pendant la charge, prenez les précautions suivantes : • N’alimentez l’appareil qu’à la tension indiquée. Évitez également d’utiliser des adaptateurs multi-supports et des cordons prolongateurs. • Faites attention de ne pas endommager ni d’entortiller les cordons d’alimentation. Ne placez pas d’objet lourd sur les cordons d’alimentation, ne le tirez pas et ne le pliez pas de façon excessive. • Ne branchez ou ne débranchez pas le cordon d’alimentation avec les mains mouillées. Pour débrancher un cordon d’alimentation, attrapez-le toujours par sa fiche. • Ne couvrez pas l’appareil pendant la charge.vii Ne laissez pas la batterie et la carte mémoire SD utilisées dans cet appareil à portée des enfants, afin d’éviter tout risque d’ingestion accidentelle. L’ingestion des fluides de batterie est extrêmement dangereuse pour l’être humain. En cas d’ingestion, recherchez immédiatement une aide médicale. Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants. Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène, de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion, d’incendie ou de brûlure. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident. Essuyez la poussière qui s’accumule sur la prise d’alimentation électrique de l’appareil afin d’éviter tout risque d’incendie. Pour éviter les risques d’incendie, de choc électrique ou de blessure, n’utilisez pas le chargeur de batterie avec les transformateurs électroniques disponibles dans le commerce lorsque vous voyagez à l’étranger.viii Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en toute sécurité. Attention Tout contact avec du liquide s’échappant d’une batterie peut entraîner des brûlures. Si une partie du corps entre en contact avec une batterie endommagée, lavez immédiatement la zone à grande eau. (N’utilisez pas de savon.) Si une batterie commence à fuir, retirez-la immédiatement de l’appareil et essuyez soigneusement le logement de la batterie avant d’en installer une autre. Branchez les cordons d’alimentation fermement dans la prise secteur. Un cordon mal branché peut causer un incendie. Ne laissez pas le boîtier de l’appareil photo prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge électrique. Ne dirigez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule, car cela risquerait de lui faire perdre le contrôle de son véhicule et pourrait entraîner un accident. Consignes de sécurité relatives aux accessoires Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les instructions fournies avec ce produit.ix Manuels du produit Les manuels suivants sont livrés avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR : Mode d’emploi du boîtier del’appareil photo (le présent livret) Ce manuel décrit l’utilisation de votre appareil et l’installation du logiciel fourni. * Lisez le présent manuel, ainsi que la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo. Mode d’emploi du logiciel (fichier PDF) Le Mode d’emploi du logiciel décrit la procédure pour copier des photos de votre appareil vers un ordinateur, afin de les visualiser et de les retoucher. Ce manuel est disponible en plusieurs langues et chaque version est disponible dans son propre dossier, lui-même situé dans le dossier « DC Manual » du CD fourni. Pour vous y référer plus facilement, copiez le fichier PDF du CD sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur. Le logiciel de visualisation et de retouche photo « Irodio Photo & Video Studio » est également fourni avec le produit. Pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation de ce logiciel, consultez le menu Aide dans le logiciel Irodio Photo & Video Studio, ou téléphonez à l’un des centres d’assistance client suivants : • Amérique du Nord (U.?S.?A.): +1–800–458–4029 (appel gratuit) • Royaume- Uni, Allemagne, France et Espagne : +800–1532–4865 (appel gratuit) • Autres pays européens : +44–1489–564–764 • Chine : +86–21–5385–3786 • Autres pays d’Asie : +63–2–438–0090 Heures d’ouverture : de 9h00 à 17h00x Table des matières Contenu de l’emballage......................................................................................... ii Avis..................................................................................................................................... iii Consignes de sécurité............................................................................................iv Manuels du produit.................................................................................................ix Avant de commencer 1 Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser votre appareil photo pour la première fois. Introduction ....................................................................................2 Nomenclature de l’appareil photo..................................................................2 Photographie et lecture de base 11 Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser votre appareil photo pour la première fois. Premiers pas ..................................................................................12 Chargement de la batterie................................................................................12 Insertion de la batterie.........................................................................................14 Insertion des cartes mémoire .........................................................................15 Installation de l’unité appareil photo sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo..............................................................................................................................17 Mise sous et hors tension ..................................................................................18 Configuration de base.........................................................................................20 Prise de vue photographique ....................................................21 Tenue de l’appareil photo..................................................................................21 Prise de vue.................................................................................................................22 Zoom..............................................................................................................................26 Prise de vue rapprochée (mode macro)...................................................27 Photographie au flash..........................................................................................28 Retardateur.................................................................................................................31 Indicateur de niveau.............................................................................................32 Visualisation et suppression de photos ...................................34 Visualisation de photos.......................................................................................34 Suppression de photos.......................................................................................39 Touche O (DISP.) .................................................................................................42xi Référence 45 Lisez cette section pour en savoir plus sur les fonctions de l’appareil photo. Plus sur la photographie.............................................................46 Mode P : changement de programme .....................................................46 Mode A : priorité à l’ouverture ........................................................................48 Mode S : priorité à l’obturation.......................................................................49 Mode M : exposition manuelle.......................................................................50 Mode 4: Réglages pour diverses scènes....................................52 Modes « MY » : utilisation des réglages personnalisés.....................57 Menu prise de vue..................................................................................................58 Fonctions de lecture ....................................................................94 Visualisation de vidéos.........................................................................................94 Affichage de fichiers MP.....................................................................................95 Menu des réglages de la lecture..............................................101 Menu lecture........................................................................................................... 101 Visualisation des photos sur un téléviseur........................................... 118 Impression de photos................................................................120 Raccordement du boîtier de l’appareil photo ................................... 120 Impression................................................................................................................ 122 Réglages de l’appareil ...............................................................126 Options personnalisées.................................................................................... 129 Configuration ......................................................................................................... 139 Copie des photos sur un ordinateur.......................................151 Windows.................................................................................................................... 151 Macintosh................................................................................................................. 162 Remarques techniques..............................................................167 Résolution des problèmes.............................................................................. 167 Caractéristiques..................................................................................................... 175 Éléments vendus séparément..................................................................... 178 Utilisation du produit à l’étranger.............................................................. 183 Précautions d’emploi ......................................................................................... 183 Entretien et stockage......................................................................................... 185 Garantie et réparation....................................................................................... 186 NOTICES..................................................................................................................... 187 Index .............................................................................................188xii UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Avant de commencer Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser votre appareil photo pour la première fois. Introduction .............................................................. 2UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Introduction Ce manuel décrit comment prendre des photos et les lire ensuite. Pour vous assurer de tirer le meilleur parti de ce produit, lisez attentivement ce manuel avant utilisation et conservez-le à portée de main pendant l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nomenclature de l’appareil photo Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page dont le numéro est indiqué à droite de chaque élément. Vue deface 3 4 5 6 7 12 11 13 8 9 10 14 1 2 1 Sélecteurplus-moins.....................5 2 Touchededéverrouillagedu sélecteurde mode.........................4 3 Sélecteurde mode........................4 4 Déclencheur ..........................21,23 5 Interrupteur MARCHE/ARRÊT...18,21 6 Lumière AFauxiliaire...........31,140 7 Griffealimentée........................181 8 Couvercledu flash .......................29 9 Microphone..................................– 10 Pointd’attachedeladragonne......ii 11 Repèred’alignementpour fixer l’unitéappareilphoto..................17 12 Connecteur..................................17 13 Levierdedéverrouillagedel’unité appareilphoto.............................17 14 Flash............................................28UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Vue de dos 4 1 2 3 17 16 13 14 15 12 9 22 21 20 19 5 6 23 7 8 10 18 11 1 Touche DIRECT..............................5 2 Touche OPEN/f (flash)...............29 3 Touche VF/LCD ............................42 4 Écran d’affichagedesphotos.........8 5 Témoin de miseaupoint automatique/flash ...18,22,29,141 6 Connecteurducâble USB ..........................120,159,160,162 7 Connecteurducâble A/V ...........118 8 Connecteurducâble mini HDMI...119 9 Manette ADJ. ........................5,134 10 Touche6(lecture) ................................19,34,94,101 11 ToucheN(macro)......................27 12 Touche8(téléobjectif)/ z(vueagrandie).................26,36 13 Touche9(grandangle)/ Z(affichage mosaïque)......26,36 14 Pavédirectionnel.........................37 + (!).....................................137 – (%).....................................137 Fn1(fonction 1) (#)...............136 Fn2(fonction 2) ($)...............136 15 ToucheC/D ....................................58,101,126 16 ToucheO(DISP.)....................42 17 Touchet(retardateur)/ d(supprimer) .....................31,39 18 Visde fixation dutrépied...........176 19 Couvercledulogementdela batterie/carte........................14,15 20 Levierdedéverrouillage........14,15 21 Haut-parleur ................................– 22 Pointd’attachedeladragonne......ii 23 Couvercleduconnecteur ...118,121UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Sélecteur de mode Avant une prise de vue, appuyez sur la touche de déverrouillage du sélecteur de mode (1) et faites tourner le sélecteur pour choisir un mode de prise de vue (2). 1 2 5 (automatique) : l’appareil définit l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation pour obtenir une exposition optimale (page 21). M (exposition manuelle) : vous choisissez l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation (page 50). MY, MY2, MY («mes réglages») : vous sélectionnez l’un des réglages enregistrés via Enr. Mes réglages (pages 57, 129). A (priorité à l’ouverture) : vous choisissez l’ouverture et vous laissez l’appareil régler la vitesse d’obturation pour obtenir une exposition optimale (page 48). 4 (scène) : l’appareil optimise les réglages pour le sujet, la scène ou la vidéo actuelle (page 52). S(priorité à l’obturation) : vous choisissez la vitesse d’obturation et vous laissez l’appareil régler l’ouverture pour obtenir une exposition optimale (page 49). P (changement de programme) : vous choisissez entre des combinaisons d’ouverture et de vitesse d’obturation qui produisent la même exposition (page 46).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Sélecteur plus-moins et manette ADJ. Lors de la visualisation des photos ou pendant la navigation dans les menus, vous pouvez utiliser le sélecteur plus-moins à la place des touches + et –, ainsi que la manette ADJ. à la place des touches Fn et Fn2. La manette ADJ. et le sélecteur plus-moins peuvent également être utilisés pour sélectionner l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation dans les modes P, A, S et M. Sélecteur plus-moins Manette ADJ. Vous pouvez assigner à la manette ADJ. des rubriques fréquemment utilisées du menu prise de vue, pour en faciliter l’accès (page 134). Pour afficher une rubrique du menu prise de vue, centrez la manette ADJ. et enfoncez-la ; vous pouvez alors utiliser la manette et le sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner une option. Remarque Les rubriques Options sélecteur de mode M et Options du sélecteur de mode lecture de l’onglet des options personnalisées peuvent être utilisées pour modifier les fonctions assignées au sélecteur plus-moins et à la manette ADJ. (page 138). Touche DIRECT Appuyez sur la touche DIRECT en mode prise de vue pour afficher les réglages actuels de prise de vue. DIRECTUtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Écran DIRECT Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page dont le numéro est indiqué à droite de chaque élément. 1 2 3 8 4 5 12 16 13 18 10 9 11 15 14 17 6 7 1 Modeprisedevue.........................4 2 Ouverture........................46,48,50 3 Vitessed’obturation.........46,49,50 4 Mode flash ..................................28 5 Niveaudecompensation du flash/ niveaude flash manuel .........78,79 6 Correction del’exposition ............85 7 ISO...............................................90 8 Balancedesblancs ......................86 9 Mode miseaupoint.....................64 10 Mesureexposition.......................70 11 Réglages image...........................71 12 Qualitéimage/taille/taillevidéo...61 13 Cadrage.......................................75 14 Continu........................................73 15 Zoned’information........................7 16 Mode macro................................27 17 Verrouill. AE...............................136 18 Retardateur.................................31 Modification des réglages de prise de vue au niveau de l’écran DIRECT Sur l’écran DIRECT, déplacez le curseur à l’aide de la touche +, –, Fn ou Fn2 ou de la manette ADJ. (gauche et droite) pour sélectionner une rubrique, puis modifiez directement le réglage à l’aide du sélecteur plus-moins. Il est possible d’ajuster la correction de l’exposition à l’aide des touches + et – (à la place du sélecteur plus-moins).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Affichage des options pour les réglages de prise de vue Si vous appuyez sur la manette ADJ. lorsqu’une rubrique est sélectionnée au niveau de l’écran DIRECT, les options de la rubrique de réglage s’affichent. Sélectionnez l’option souhaitée à l’aide des touches + et – ou du sélecteur plus-moins, puis appuyez sur la manette ADJ. ou sur la touche C/D pour définir l’option. Attention Il n’est pas possible de modifier les réglages du mode prise de vue, du mode macro, du mode retardateur et du mode flash du flash intégré en sélectionnant la rubrique au niveau de l’écran DIRECT. Modifiez les réglages à l’aide du sélecteur de mode ou des touches situées sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Remarques • Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour modifier le réglage de l’image d’arrière-plan (page 140). • Appuyez sur C/D au niveau de l’écran DIRECT pour afficher le menu prise de vue (page 59). • Une fois la correction de l’exposition réglée, appuyez sur Fn, Fn2 ou la manette ADJ. (vers la gauche ou la droite) pour placer le curseur sur d’autres rubriques. • En mode exposition manuelle, l’indicateur d’exposition permettant d’obtenir l’exposition optique s’affiche à la place du curseur de correction d’exposition. • En mode changement de programme, la vitesse d’obturation et l’ouverture sont modifiées en même temps de manière à produire la même exposition. • Le nom de la rubrique du menu prise de vue correspondant à la rubrique sélectionnée au niveau de l’écran DIRECT s’affiche dans la zone d’information. Affichage de la page suivante ou précédente Si les rubriques affichées à l’écran s’étendent sur plusieurs pages, vous pouvez afficher la page suivante ou précédente en appuyant sur la touche + ou – ou en faisant tourner le sélecteur plus-moins tout en maintenant la touche DIRECT enfoncée.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Écran d’affichage des photos Les indicateurs suivants peuvent s’afficher pendant la prise de vue et la lecture. Prise de vue (photo) Prise de vue (vidéo) 4:3 N F 2.5 25cm- 1/50 200 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 15 18 31 19 27 28 29 30 26 32 20 25 24 22 23 21 37 38 F 2.5 1/50 200 34 33 35 36 1 Mode flash ............28 2 Niveaudecompensation du flash /de flash manuel..............78,79 3 Modescène...........52 Continu..................73 4 Modeprisedevue ................................4 5 Nombred’expositions restantes ?* ............177 6 Destination............15 7 Dist. miseaupt snap .........................64,68 8 Qualitéimage/taille ..............................61 9 Mode miseaupoint/ instantanépar pression............64,69 10 Balancedesblancs / compensation dela balancedesblancs ..........................86,89 11 Mesureexposition...70 12 Réglages image.....71 13 Cadrage.................75 14 Histogramme........44 15 Correction dela déformation ..........81 16 Réduction debruit...80 17 Correction dubougé...92 18 Horodatage...........84 19 Niveaudebatterie...10 20 Verrouillage d’exposition automatique.......136 21 Retardateur...........31 22 Mode macro..........27 23 Distance min deprise devue.................144 24 Rapportdezoom numérique............26 25 Barredezoom.......26 26 Prisedevueà intervalles .............83 27 Indicateurd’exposition ..............................50 28 Ouverture...46,48,50UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 9 29 Vitessed’obturation ...................46,49,50 30 Correction de l’exposition............85 31 ISO.........................90 32 Indicateurde niveau...32 33 Avertissement d’exposition...........86 34 Avertissementde flou .........................24,93 35 Profondeurdechamp ..............................64 36 Barrede miseaupoint ..............................64 37 Longueurdevidéo .......................63,177 38 Tempsdisponible ?* ..............................55 * Approximation uniquement ; la capacité réelle varie selon les conditions de prise de vue et la fabrication de la carte mémoire. L’écran affiche « 9999 » lorsqu’il reste suffisamment de mémoire pour plus de 9 999 photos. Remarque Il est possible d’afficher les réglages de prise de vue en appuyant sur la touche DIRECT (page 5). Lecture (photos) Lecture (vidéos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4:3 N 2010/0101 00:20 F 2.5 ISO 200 1/50 EV+0.7 2010/01/01 00:20 16 15 17 18 1 Numérode fichier....– 2 Imageactuelle........– 3 Images totales.........– 4 Indicateurde mode lecture.....................– 5 Imageprotégée...112 6 Indicateurdetirage DPOF...................115 7 Source...................15 8 Qualitéimage/taille ..............................61 9 Dated’enregistrement .......................20,149 10 Ouverture...46,48,50 11 ISO.........................90 12 Correction de l’exposition............85 13 Vitessed’obturation ...................46,49,50 14 Niveaudebatterie...10 15 Longueur/ tempsécoulé............– 16 Indicateurde progression...............– 17 Balancedesblancs...86 18 Compensation dela balancedesblancs...89UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 0 Remarques • L’écran d’affichage des photos peut également afficher des avertissements et des messages. • Des informations supplémentaires peuvent être affichées en appuyant sur la touche DISP. (page 42). 4:3 N 2.5 200 Indicateur du niveau de batterie Le niveau de batterie est illustré par l’icône située dans l’angle inférieur droit de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Icône Description (vert) Batterie pleine. (vert) Batterie partiellement déchargée. (orange) Batterie pratiquement vide. Rechargez-la ou remplacez-la dès que possible. UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Premiers pas............................................................ 2 Prise de vue photographique.................................... 2 Visualisation et suppression de photos......................  Photographie et lecture de base Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser votre appareil photo pour la première fois.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Premiers pas Préparez l’appareil photo avant son utilisation. Chargement de la batterie La batterie rechargeable (DB-90) fournie avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo n’est pas chargée au moment de l’achat. Avant utilisation, chargez la batterie avec le chargeur de batterie BJ-9 fourni. 1 Insérez la batterie dans le chargeur. Placez la batterie avec l’étiquette vers le haut, les repères « + » et « – » faisant face aux repères équivalents du chargeur. Attention Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement orientée. 2 Connectez le cordon d’alimentation au chargeur, puis procédez au branchement. Le témoin du chargeur s’allume pendant la charge de la batterie. Une batterie vide se rechargera en cinq heures environ, à 25°C. Remarque Si le témoin du chargeur clignote, c’est que la batterie ou le chargeur est défaillant. Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation et retirez la batterie du chargeur.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  3 Retirez la batterie. Le chargement est terminé lorsque le témoin du chargeur s’éteint. Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation et retirez la batterie du chargeur. Attention • Batterie rechargeable Li-ion : utilisez uniquement une batterie DB-90 d’origine. N’utilisez pas de batterie non conçue par Ricoh pour ce boîtier d’appareil photo. • La batterie peut être chaude immédiatement après usage. Avant de retirer la batterie, mettez l’appareil hors tension et patientez le temps qu’elle refroidisse. • Retirez la batterie si l’appareil ne doit pas être utilisé pendant une période prolongée. Conseil :capacité dela batterie Le nombre de prises de vue possibles avec une batterie DB-90 complètement chargée varie en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Les tests sont effectués en conformité avec les normes CIPA, dans les conditions suivantes : à une température de 23 °C, écran d’affichage des photos allumé, prise de vue toutes les 30 secondes avec flash déclenché une fois sur deux. L’appareil photo est mis hors tension, puis sous tension toutes les 10 prises de vue. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Insertion de la batterie Assurez-vous d’abord que l’appareil photo est hors tension avant d’insérer ou de retirer la batterie. 1 Ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/ carte. Déverrouillez (1) et ouvrez (2) le couvercle. 2 Insérez la batterie. En utilisant la batterie pour appuyer sur le loquet, insérez-la jusqu’au fond. Le loquet se verrouillera lorsque la batterie sera complètement enfoncée. 1 2 3 Fermez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/ carte. Fermez (1) et verrouillez (2) le couvercle. Attention Assurez-vous que le couvercle est verrouillé. 1 2 Retrait dela batterie Déverrouillez et ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/carte, enfoncez le loquet pour le relâcher, puis retirez la batterie. Veillez à ne pas faire tomber la batterie. Attention Si l’appareil ne doit pas être utilisé pendant une période prolongée, retirez la batterie et stockez-la dans un endroit froid et sec.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Insertion des cartes mémoire Les photos peuvent être stockées dans la mémoire interne du boîtier de l’appareil photo (86Mo) ou bien sur des cartes mémoire SD et SDHC optionnelles. La mémoire interne est utilisée si aucune carte n’est insérée ; dans le cas contraire, c’est la carte qui sera utilisée plutôt que la mémoire interne. Assurez-vous d’abord que l’appareil photo est hors tension avant d’insérer ou de retirer une carte mémoire. 1 Ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/ carte. Déverrouillez (1) et ouvrez (2) le couvercle. 1 2 2 Insérez la carte. En tenant la carte comme indiqué sur l’illustration, glissez-la dans la fente jusqu’à ce qu’elle soit verrouillée. 3 Fermez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/ carte. Fermez (1) et verrouillez (2) le couvercle. 1 2UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Retrait descartesmémoire Déverrouillez et ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/carte, puis appuyez sur la carte mémoire pour l’éjecter. La carte peut alors être retirée. Attention • Les photos ne seront pas enregistrées dans la mémoire interne lorsqu’une carte mémoire est insérée, même si celle-ci est pleine. • Conservez propres les contacts de la carte mémoire. Conseil : protection contrel’écriture Basculez le curseur de protection contre l’écriture situé sur la carte mémoire en position « LOCK » pour empêcher l’écrasement ou la suppression des données de la carte et le formatage de la carte. Il est impossible de prendre des photos lorsque la carte est protégée ; utilisez la protection de la carte uniquement pour empêcher une perte accidentelle des données et assurez-vous de libérer la carte avant la prise de vue. Remarques • Formatez les cartes mémoire avant leur première utilisation ou après les avoir utilisées dans un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif (page 139). Assurez-vous de sauvegarder toutes les données importantes avant le formatage. • Consultez la page 177 pour en savoir plus sur la capacité des cartes mémoire. • Il est possible de copier les photos de la mémoire interne sur des cartes mémoire (page 115).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Installation de l’unité appareil photo sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo Veillez à ce que l’appareil photo soit hors tension avant d’installer ou de retirer l’unité appareil photo sur le/du boîtier de l’appareil photo. Retirez les capuchons de connecteur du boîtier et de l’unité appareil photo. Alignez le côté gauche de l’unité appareil photo sur le repère d’alignement situé sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo, puis faites glisser l’unité appareil photo vers la gauche jusqu’à ce qu’un déclic soit émis. Repère d’alignement pour l’installation de l’unité appareil photo Retrait de l’unité appareil photo du boîtier de l’appareil photo Faites glisser le levier de déverrouillage de l’unité appareil photo vers la droite et retirez l’unité appareil photo. Veillez à ne pas faire tomber le boîtier de l’appareil photo et l’unité appareil photo lors du retrait de l’unité appareil photo.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Mise sous et hors tension Mode prise de vue Placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/ ARRÊT sur MARCHE pour mettre l’appareil photo sous tension. L’appareil photo émet le son de démarrage. Le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash clignote plusieurs secondes pendant le démarrage de l’appareil. Pour mettre l’appareil photo hors tension, placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/ARRÊT sur ARRÊT. Le nombre de photos prises ce jour s’affiche avant la mise hors tension. (L’appareil affiche zéro si l’horloge n’a pas été configurée. Si vous mettez l’appareil hors tension après avoir modifié l’horloge (page 20), l’appareil affiche le nombre de photos prises depuis la modification du réglage de l’horloge.) Attention Les modifications des réglages continu (page 73), intervalle (page 83) et retardateur (page 31) sont perdues lors de la mise hors tension de l’appareil. La mise hors tension de l’appareil restaure les réglages des modes MY avec les valeurs enregistrées dans Enr. Mes Réglages. Les autres réglages ne sont pas affectés.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 9 Mode lecture Lorsque l’appareil photo est hors tension, maintenez la touche 6 enfoncée pendant environ une seconde pour activer le mode lecture de l’appareil photo. Appuyez de nouveau sur la touche 6 pour mettre l’appareil photo hors tension. Conseil :mode deveilleetmise horstension automatique L’appareil photo éteint l’écran ou se met automatiquement hors tension pour économiser l’argent si aucune opération n’est effectuée au cours de la durée indiquée sous Mode veille (page 141) et Extinction auto (page 141).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 20 Configuration de base Une boîte de dialogue de sélection de la langue s’affiche lors de la première mise sous tension de l’appareil. Procédez comme suit pour choisir une langue et configurer la date et l’heure. Pour quitter une fois la configuration terminée, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Vous pouvez à tout moment modifier la langue, l’heure et la date dans le menu de configuration (page 149). 1 Sélectionnez une langue. Appuyez sur +, –, Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner une langue et appuyez sur C/D. 2 Configurez l’horloge. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner l’année, le mois, le jour, l’heure, les minutes ou le format de date, puis appuyez sur + ou – pour modifier. Après avoir vérifié que la date est correcte, appuyez sur C/D. Une boîte de dialogue de confirmation s’affiche ; appuyez sur C/D pour valider votre choix. Remarques • Si vous laissez la batterie dans le boîtier de l’appareil pendant au moins deux heures, les réglages de l’horloge et de la langue sont conservés pendant environ une semaine une fois la batterie retirée. • La date et l’heure d’enregistrement peuvent être inscrites sur les photos (page 84).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Prise de vue photographique Après avoir configuré l’appareil photo comme indiqué dans « Premiers pas » (page 12), vous êtes prêt à prendre des photos. Placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/ ARRET sur MARCHE pour mettre l’appareil sous tension et tournez le sélecteur de mode sur 5. Tenue de l’appareil photo 1 Tenez l’appareil à deux mains. Tenez l’appareil à deux mains avec les coudes légèrement collés au corps. Attention Assurez-vous que l’objectif ou le flash n’est pas obstrué par vos doigts, vos cheveux ou la courroie d’encolure. 2 Préparez-vous à prendre la photo. Posez le doigt sur le déclencheur.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 22 Prise de vue 1 Effectuez la mise au point. Cadrez votre sujet au centre de l’écran d’affichage des photos et appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point et définir l’exposition. 4:3 N Si l’appareil peut effectuer la mise au point, les cadres de mise au point des objets mis au point s’affichent en vert (neuf cadres maximum). Si l’appareil photo est incapable d’effectuer la mise au point, le cadre de mise au point au centre clignote en rouge et le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash clignote en vert. Témoin de mise au point automatique/flash Cadre de mise au point 2 Prenez une photo. Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. L’image s’affiche pendant quelques secondes juste après la prise de vue (page 142) et est enregistrée dans la mémoire interne ou sur la carte mémoire.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Conseil : le déclencheur L’appareil photo dispose d’un déclencheur à deux étapes. Pour effectuer la mise au point, appuyez légèrement sur le déclencheur jusqu’à ce que vous sentiez une résistance. Cette action est dénommée « appuyer sur le déclencheur jusqu’à micourse ». Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Conseil :mise au point Le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash et le cadre de mise au point indiquent si le sujet est mis au point. État de la mise au point Cadre de mise au point Témoin de mise au point automatique/flash Avant la mise au point Blanc Éteint Sujet mis au point Vert Allumé (vert) Mise au point impossible Rouge (clignotant) Clignotant (vert) L’appareil peut être dans l’incapacité d’effectuer la mise au point dans les cas suivants : • Objets manquant de contraste comme le ciel, un mur d’une seule couleur ou le capot d’une voiture • Objets plats contenant uniquement des lignes horizontales • Objets se déplaçant rapidement • Objets faiblement éclairés • Objets avec des reflets brillants ou en contre-jour • Objets clignotant comme des lampes fluorescentes • Sources lumineuses pointées comme des ampoules, des projecteurs ou des LED Notez qu’un ou plusieurs cadres de mise au point peuvent être affichés en vert, même si l’appareil est incapable d’effectuer la mise au point sur les objets ci-dessus ; vérifiez la mise au point sur l’écran d’affichage des photos avant la prise de vue. Si l’appareil est incapable d’effectuer la mise au point, verrouillez la mise au point sur un autre objet situé à la même distance de l’appareil que votre sujet, puis recomposez l’ensemble et prenez la photo (page 25).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Conseil : pouréviterles photos floues Pour empêcher les effets de flou provoqués par un déplacement de l’appareil au moment du déclenchement (« bougé de l’appareil »), appuyez sur le déclencheur doucement et sans à- coups. Des effets de flou sont notamment probables si : • Le flash est désactivé et l’éclairage est faible • Le zoom numérique est utilisé (page 26) Dans les cas où des effets de flou seraient particulièrement susceptibles de se produire à cause d’un bougé de l’appareil, l’icône J s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Tenez fermement l’appareil et effectuez de nouveau la mise au point, ou essayez l’une des solutions suivantes : • Activez le flash ( ) ou utilisez le flash automatique ( ; voir page 28) • Choisissez une sensibilité ISO supérieure (page 90) • Utilisez le retardateur (page 31) • Utilisez la fonction de correction du bougé de l’appareil (page 92) Remarques • Si le flash doit se déclencher lors de la prise de vue, un pré-flash sera émis pour faciliter la mise au point et le réglage de l’exposition. • L’icône s’affiche en cas de surexposition ou de sousexposition. • Vous pouvez choisir la durée d’affichage des photos sur l’écran d’affichage des photos après les prises de vue. Si vous le souhaitez, les photos peuvent rester affichées jusqu’à ce que le déclencheur soit enfoncé jusqu’à mi-course (page 142).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Verrouillage de la mise au point Utilisez le verrouillage de la mise au point pour composer des photos dans lesquelles le sujet n’est pas au centre du cadre. Le verrouillage de la mise au point peut être également utilisé si l’appareil photo est incapable d’effectuer la mise au point. 1 Effectuez la mise au point. Positionnez votre sujet au centre de l’écran d’affichage des photos et appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. 4:3 N 2 Recomposez la photo. Tout en maintenant le déclencheur enfoncé jusqu’à mi-course pour verrouiller la mise au point, recomposez la photo. Composition finale Sujet principal 3 Prenez une photo. Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Attention Si la distance entre l’appareil et le sujet change alors que le verrouillage de la mise au point est activé, effectuez de nouveau la mise au point en fonction de la nouvelle distance.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Zoom La touche 8 (téléobjectif) permet d’effectuer un zoom avant et la touche 9 (grand angle), un zoom arrière. 4:3 N 9 8 4:3 N Zoom arrière Zoom avant 1 Cadrez la photo en utilisant les touches 8 et 9. 2 Effectuez la mise au point. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course. 3 Prenez une photo. Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Remarques • Si vous utilisez l’unité appareil photo sans zoom optique, le zoom numérique fonctionne à la place. • Lors de l’utilisation d’une unité appareil photo équipée d’un zoom optique et d’un zoom numérique, pour passer du zoom optique au zoom numérique, relâchez la touche 8 une fois le taux maximum d’agrandissement atteint par le zoom optique, puis appuyez de nouveau sur la touche 8. Pour passer du zoom numérique au zoom optique, maintenez la touche 9 enfoncée. • Vous pouvez consulter le taux de zoom optique dans la barre de zoom de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Lors de l’utilisation du zoom numérique, le taux de zoom est affiché dans l’écran d’affichage des photos. • Le zoom numérique ne peut être utilisé lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/Taille (page 61).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Prise de vue rapprochée (mode macro) Utilisez le mode macro pour la prise de vue rapprochée de petits objets. 1Appuyez sur la touche N. L’icône N s’affiche brièvement au centre de l’écran d’affichage des photos. N s’affiche ensuite dans la partie supérieure gauche de l’écran. 2 Effectuez la mise au point. Cadrez le sujet sur l’écran d’affichage des photos et appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course. 3 Prenez une photo. 4:3 N Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Pour quitter le mode macro, appuyez de nouveau sur la touche N. Remarque L’option AF Spot est utilisée en mode macro même si l’option AF Multi, Snap ou 8 est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Photographie au flash Le flash se déclenche uniquement s’il est ouvert. Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f pour ouvrir le flash et appuyez de nouveau sur la touche pour choisir l’un des modes flash suivants : Mode Description Flash Non Le flash est éteint. Auto Le flash se déclenche automatiquement si nécessaire. Flash yeux roug. Ce mode réduit l’effet « yeux rouges » des portraits pris au flash. Flash Oui Le flash se déclenche à chaque prise de vue. Synchro. Flash Ce mode combine le flash avec des vitesses d’obturation lentes. Utilisez-le pour prendre des portraits incluant des détails de l’arrière-plan ou de la vue de nuit. L’utilisation d’un trépied est recommandée pour éviter les effets de flou. Flash manuel Le flash se déclenche à chaque prise de vue. Le niveau de flash peut être défini sous Niveau de flash manuel (page 79). Remarque La plage d’efficacité du flash varie en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 29 Utilisation du flash intégré 1 Ouvrez le flash. Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f. OPEN 2 Sélectionnez un mode flash. Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f pour sélectionner un mode flash. L’icône du mode flash s’affiche dans le coin supérieur gauche de l’écran. Remarques • Le mode flash sélectionné reste actif jusqu’à ce qu’un nouveau mode soit choisi. • Le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash clignote lorsque le flash se charge. La prise de vue devient possible dès que le témoin cesse de clignoter. 3 Effectuez la mise au point et prenez la photo. Si le flash doit se déclencher lors de la prise de vue, un pré-flash sera émis pour faciliter la mise au point et le réglage de l’exposition.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 0 Remarques • Pour refermer le flash lorsqu’il n’est pas utilisé, appuyez doucement au centre du couvercle du flash jusqu’à ce qu’il soit verrouillé. • Le flash s’éteint automatiquement dans les modes vidéo, continu et cadrage. • N’utilisez pas le flash intégré lorsqu’un flash optionnel est branché. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut endommager l’appareil. Attention N’utilisez pas le flash trop près des yeux de votre sujet. La plus grande prudence est recommandée pour photographier des enfants. Ne pointez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule à moteur.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Retardateur Faites votre choix parmi le retardateur de dix secondes, le retardateur de deux secondes et le retardateur personnalisé. Utilisez le retardateur de deux secondes pour éviter le flou occasionné par le bougé de l’appareil lorsque le déclencheur est enfoncé. Avec le réglage personnalisé, un nombre donné de photos peuvent être prises à un intervalle défini. Définissez l’intervalle de prise de vue et le nombre de photos à l’aide du Retardateur personnalisé dans le menu prise de vue (page 82). 1 Choisissez un mode retardateur. Appuyez sur la touche t une fois pour sélectionner le retardateur de dix secondes, deux fois pour sélectionner le retardateur de deux secondes et trois fois pour sélectionner le retardateur personnalisé. Appuyez une quatrième fois sur la touche pour désactiver le retardateur. La sélection actuelle s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Remarque Le mode retardateur sélectionné reste actif jusqu’à ce qu’un nouveau mode soit choisi. 2Démarrez le retardateur. Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour verrouiller la mise au point et démarrer le retardateur. Si vous sélectionnez le retardateur de dix secondes ou le retardateur personnalisé, le flash auxiliaire AF se déclenche. Remarque Appuyez sur C/D pour annuler le retardateur personnalisé pendant la prise de vue. 4:3 N UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Indicateur de niveau Utilisez l’indicateur de niveau pour niveler l’appareil photo pour photographier des bâtiments ou des paysages. C’est particulièrement utile pour les compositions dans lesquelles l’horizon est visible. 1Affichez les options. Appuyez et tenez enfoncée la touche O (DISP.) jusqu’à ce que les options de réglage de niveau s’affichent. 2 Sélectionnez une option. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer l’option sélectionnée. Options Description Non Indicateur de niveau non affiché. Affichage L’indicateur de niveau s’affiche au niveau de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Le niveau et le sens d’inclinaison peuvent être vérifiés au niveau de l’indicateur de niveau. L’indicateur s’affiche en vert lorsque l’appareil photo est de niveau, en orange si l’appareil photo est incliné et en rouge si le niveau d’inclinaison est supérieur au niveau maximal pouvant être affiché par l’indicateur. L’indicateur de niveau ne s’affiche pas si l’écran est éteint, si les indicateurs sont cachés ou si la grille de cadrage est affichée (page 42). Aff. + son Identique à l’option Affichage, sauf qu’un signal sonore est régulièrement émis lorsque l’appareil est de niveau. Son Un signal sonore est régulièrement émis lorsque l’appareil est de niveau. L’indicateur de niveau ne s’affiche pas sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Fonctionnement del’indicateur de niveau 4:3 N Vert 4:3 N Orange Niveau de l’appareil L’appareil est incliné vers la gauche 4:3 N Rouge 4:3 N Appareil photo penché trop loin vers la droite L’appareil est incliné à 90 ° vers la gauche Remarque L’indicateur de niveau peut être également paramétré dans le menu configuration (pages 144). Attention • L’indicateur de niveau ne s’affiche pas si l’appareil est à l’envers, si une vidéo est en cours d’enregistrement ou si la prise de vue à intervalles est activée. • Le signal sonore n’est pas émis si le volume de l’appareil photo est désactivé (page 142). • L’indicateur de niveau est destiné uniquement à servir de guide et il ne doit pas être utilisé comme un niveau à bulle ou dans d’autres applications ou un degré élevé de précision est requis. Sa précision chute lorsque l’appareil est en mouvement ou si vous photographiez un véhicule ou une plate-forme en déplacement. UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Visualisation et suppression de photos Les photos peuvent être visualisées sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Visualisation de photos Appuyez sur la touche 6 en mode prise de vue pour afficher la dernière photo visualisée. Appuyez de nouveau sur la touche 6 pour quitter le mode prise de vue. Conseil :si l’appareil photo est horstension Lorsque l’appareil photo est hors tension, maintenez la touche 6 enfoncée pendant environ une seconde pour activer le mode lecture de l’appareil photo. Appuyez sur Fn2 pour visualiser les photos dans l’ordre d’enregistrement et sur Fn pour les visualiser dans l’ordre inverse. Appuyez sur – pour avancer de dix images et sur + pour reculer de dix images. UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Une photo en arrière 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Dix photos en arrière + 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Fn 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Fn2 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N – Une photo en avant Dix photos en avant 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Attention L’appareil photo enregistre des copies JPEG des images RAW pour les afficher sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Lorsqu’une image RAW est sélectionnée pour lecture, l’appareil affiche la copie JPEG et un indicateur RAW s’affiche. Si la copie JPEG a été supprimée via un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif, l’appareil affichera un petit aperçu de l’image RAW et vous ne serez pas en mesure d’en visualiser des agrandissements. Consultez les pages 62 et 63 pour en savoir plus sur l’enregistrement des images RAW. Conseil :visualisation des photosenmode prise devue Les photos sont affichées sur l’écran d’affichage des photos immédiatement après les prises de vue. Vous pouvez choisir la durée d’affichage des photos avec Délai de validation LCD de l’onglet de configuration (page 142). UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Conseil :visualisation des photos delamémoireinterne Si une carte mémoire est insérée, les photos sur la carte sont affichées mais les photos de la mémoire interne ne peuvent pas être visualisées, même si la carte mémoire est vide. Les photos de la mémoire interne ne s’affichent que si aucune carte n’est insérée dans le boîtier de l’appareil. Conseil :rotation automatique Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Rotation auto de l’onglet de configuration (page 143), les photos sont automatiquement affichées dans le sens correct sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Visualisation de plusieurs photos Appuyez sur la touche z ou Z pour sélectionner le nombre de photos à afficher (une, 20 ou 81) ou pour classer les photos en fonction de la date à laquelle elles ont été prises. 1 image 20 images 4:3 N 2010 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 2010 F 2.5 Trier par date 81 images UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Des vues multi-images peuvent être utilisées pour sélectionner des photos à afficher ou à supprimer. Dans les vues multi-images, utilisez le pavé directionnel pour sélectionner des photos. Conseil : pavé directionnel Il est possible de déplacer le curseur en oblique en appuyant sur les sections diagonales du pavé directionnel. Remarques • Pour afficher une photo en plein écran, appuyez sur la manette ADJ. dans une vue multi-images. • Pour afficher les photos de la page précédente ou suivante dans une vue multi-images : • Dans une vue 20 et 81 images, appuyez sur la touche +, –, Fn, Fn2 ou sur la manette ADJ. (gauche ou droite) ou faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins tout en maintenant la touche DIRECT enfoncée. • Dans la vue classée par date, si vous appuyez sur la touche + ou –, ou si vous faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins tout en maintenant la touche DIRECT enfoncée, la page suivante ou précédente s’affiche. Appuyez sur la touche Fn, Fn2 ou sur la manette ADJ. (gauche ou droite) tout en maintenant la touche DIRECT enfoncée pour afficher les photos prises le jour suivant ou précédent. Si vous appuyez sur la touche Fn2 ou sur la manette ADJ. vers la droite sur la dernière photo, les photos prises la date suivante sont affichées. UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Zoom en lecture Appuyez sur la touche z ou faites tourner le sélecteur plusmoins vers la droite pour effectuer un zoom avant sur la photo actuellement affichée en plein écran. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour effectuer un zoom avant selon le taux d’agrandissement sélectionné sous Zoom par 1 seule pression (page 143). Les opérations suivantes peuvent être réalisées : Commande Action z Zoom avant. Sélecteur plus-moins Zoom avant en le tournant à droite et zoom en arrière en le tournant à gauche. C/D Lorsqu’une image est agrandie, appuyez pour afficher l’image au taux d’agrandissement sélectionné pour Zoom par 1 seule pression. Si une image s’affiche au taux d’agrandissement sélectionné pour Zoom par 1 seule pression, appuyez sur la touche C/D pour annuler le zoom. pavé directionnel Déplacement des zones à afficher. Manette ADJ. Affichage d’autres photos au même rapport de zoom en appuyant dessus vers la droite ou la gauche. Z Zoom arrière. Remarques • L’agrandissement maximum varie selon la taille de l’image : Taille d’image Agrandissement maximum L, M, 5M, 3M 16× 1M 6,7× VGA 3,4× • Le zoom en lecture n’est pas disponible avec les vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +. • Si l’option Réglage 2 est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Options du sélecteur de mode lecture dans l’onglet des options personnalisées (page 138), la manette ADJ. et le sélecteur plus-moins peuvent être utilisés pour visualiser d’autres zones de l’image.9 UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Suppression de photos Procédez comme suit pour supprimer des photos. Suppression de photos individuelles 1Affichez une photo. Affichez la photo à supprimer dans une vue une image (page 34). 2Appuyez sur la touche d. Les options sont affichées (vous pouvez modifier la photo en appuyant sur Fn ou Fn2). 3 Sélectionnez Effacer un. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Effacer un, puis appuyez sur C/D. Un message s’affiche pendant la suppression. Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour supprimer d’autres Cphotos ou sélectionnez Annuler et appuyez sur /D pour quitter. Suppression de tous les fichiers Pour supprimer tous les fichiers, appuyez sur la touche d pour afficher les options de suppression, comme indiqué ci-dessus, et sélectionnez Suppr. tout. Une boîte de dialogue de confirmation s’affiche ; appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner Oui, puis appuyez sur C/D.0 UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Suppression de plusieurs fichiers Procédez comme suit pour supprimer plusieurs fichiers. 1Appuyez sur la touche d. Dans une vue multi-images, passez à l’étape 2. Dans une vue une image, les options illustrées à droite s’affichent. Sélectionnez Suppr. multi et appuyez sur C/D. 2 Sélectionnez Sél. indiv. ou Sél. série. Pour sélectionner les images une par une, sélectionnez CSél. indiv., appuyez sur /D et passez à l’étape 3. Pour sélectionner les images en définissant des séries, sélectionnez Sél. série, appuyez sur C/ D et passez à l’étape 3.1. Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour quitter sans supprimer les fichiers. 3 Sélectionnez une photo. Utilisez le pavé directionnel (page 37) pour sélectionner des photos, puis appuyez sur C/D. L’image sélectionnée est marquée d’une icône d. Pour désélectionner une photo, sélectionnez-la et appuyez de nouveau sur C/D. 4:3 N 4:3 N  UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Conseil :sélection deséries Pour basculer entre les paramètres Sél. indiv. et Sél. série, appuyez sur la manette ADJ. et procédez comme suit : 3.1 Utilisez le pavé directionnel pour sélectionner la première image d’une série, puis appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer. L’image sélectionnée est marquée d’une icône d. Pour désélectionner l’image, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. 4:3 N 3.2 Utilisez le pavé directionnel pour sélectionner la dernière Cimage, puis appuyez sur /D pour confirmer. Les images sélectionnées sont marquées d’une icône d. 4:3 N Répétez les étapes 3.1-3.2 pour sélectionner des séries supplémentaires ou appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour revenir à l’étape 3 et sélectionner ou désélectionner des photos individuelles. 4Appuyez sur la touche d. Une boîte de dialogue de confirmation s’affiche. 5 Sélectionnez Oui. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner Oui, puis appuyez sur C/D.2 UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Touche O (DISP.) Appuyez sur la touche O (DISP.) pour afficher les informations sur l’écran d’affichage des photos en mode prise de vue et en mode lecture. Activation/Désactivation DeL’écran D’affichage Des Photos Si vous appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD lorsque l’écran d’affichage des photos est allumé, l’écran s’éteint. Certaines opérations de l’appareil photo ne sont pas disponibles lorsque l’écran d’affichage des photos est éteint. Appuyez de nouveau sur la touche VF/LCD pour allumer l’écran d’affichage des photos. Si un viseur LCD est installé, appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD pour commuter entre le viseur LCD et l’écran d’affichage des photos. Mode prise de vue Appuyez sur la touche O (DISP.) pour faire défiler les affichages suivants : Indicateurs affichés 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Indicateurs+ histogramme Pas d’indicateurs 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Grille de cadrage (pas d’indicateurs) Conseil : la grille decadrage Reportez-vous à la page 144 pour la sélection d’un type de grille de cadrage. UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Remarque Si l’option Affichage ou Aff. + son est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Réglage niveau (page 32), un indicateur de niveau apparaît lorsque les indicateurs sont affichés. Mode lecture Appuyez sur la touche O (DISP.) pour faire défiler les affichages suivants : Indicateurs affichés 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 Détails+ histogramme Pas d’indicateurs 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 Surbrillance Conseil :Surbrillance Les parties clignotantes de l’affichage Surbrillance indiquent les zones « lessivées », dans lesquelles des détails peuvent avoir été perdus à cause de la surexposition. Vérifiez les images avec l’affichage Surbrillance après une prise de vue en plein soleil ou dans d’autres conditions où des parties de l’image pourraient avoir été surexposées. S’il s’avère que des détails importants peuvent avoir été perdus, choisissez une valeur de correction d’exposition plus faible et prenez une nouvelle photo (page 85). Notez que l’affichage est destiné uniquement à servir de guide et qu’il ne peut être totalement fiable. UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Conseil : l’histogramme L’histogramme est un graphique illustrant la distribution des pixels selon la luminosité de l’image. La luminosité est représentée par l’axe horizontal, avec les zones sombres à gauche et les zones claires à droite. Le nombre de pixels est représenté par l’axe vertical. L’histogramme peut être utilisé pour évaluer l’exposition et vérifier la perte des détails dans les zones claires et sombres, sans que la luminosité de votre environnement n’affecte votre jugement. Un histogramme dans lequel les pixels sont regroupés sur la droite indique que l’image peut être surexposée, tandis qu’un histogramme dans lequel les pixels sont regroupés à gauche indique que l’image peut être sous-exposée. Surexposé Sous-exposé Si l’exposition de l’image s’avère incorrecte, vous pouvez utiliser la correction d’exposition pour corriger l’exposition des photos suivantes du même sujet (page 85 ; notez que la correction d’exposition peut se révéler insuffisante dans certains cas pour obtenir une exposition correcte). L’histogramme peut être également utilisé comme un guide pour le réglage du contraste des photos après les prises de vue (page 107). L’histogramme est destiné uniquement à servir de guide et peut ne pas être totalement fiable, notamment dans les cas où le flash serait utilisé ou l’éclairage ambiant serait faible.PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie  Plus sur la photographie...........................................  Fonctions de lecture................................................. 9 Menu des réglages de la lecture...............................0 Impression de photos..............................................20 Réglages de l’appareil .............................................2 Copie des photos sur un ordinateur.......................... Remarques techniques............................................ Référence Lisez cette section pour en savoir plus sur les fonctions de l’appareil photo. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Plus sur la photographie Cette section détaille les modes P, A, S, M, 4 et MY, ainsi que l’utilisation des options du menu prise de vue. Mode P : changement de programme Lorsque le sélecteur de mode est réglé sur P (changement de programme), vous pouvez utiliser le sélecteur plus-moins pour choisir parmi les différentes combinaisons d’ouverture et de vitesse d’obturation, produisant toutes la même exposition. 1 Choisissez le mode P. Placez le sélecteur de mode sur P. Le mode prise de vue est indiqué par une icône sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N 2Mesurez l’exposition. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour mesurer l’exposition. L’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation actuelles s’affichent sur le moniteur. 2.5 200 3 Choisissez l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation. Relâchez le déclencheur et faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner une combinaison d’ouverture et de vitesse d’obturation. 4:3 N  PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Remarque L’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation peuvent être configurées pendant dix secondes après avoir relâché le déclencheur. 4 Prenez une photo. Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Remarque Les combinaisons d’ouverture et de vitesse d’obturation disponibles pour chaque valeur d’exposition varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode A : priorité à l’ouverture En mode A (priorité à l’ouverture), vous choisissez l’ouverture et l’appareil photo sélectionne la vitesse d’obturation. Choisissez de grandes ouvertures (petits nombres f) pour mettre en valeur le sujet principal en rendant flou l’arrière-plan et les détails de l’avant-plan. Choisissez de petites ouvertures (grands nombres f) pour effectuer la mise au point sur l’arrière-plan et le sujet principal. 1 Choisissez le mode A. Placez le sélecteur de mode sur A. L’ouverture actuelle s’affiche en orange. 2 Choisissez une ouverture. Faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner une ouverture. Votre sélection prend effet uniquement lorsque la photo est prise ; il est impossible de prévisualiser son effet sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 3Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour définir la mise au point et l’exposition. La vitesse d’obturation sélectionnée par l’appareil s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N 4 Prenez une photo. Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Remarque Si l’option Décalage ouverture auto est activée (page 92), l’appareil réglera l’ouverture pour obtenir une exposition optimale. 4:3 N 9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode S : priorité à l’obturation En mode S (priorité à l’obturation), vous choisissez la vitesse d’obturation et l’appareil photo sélectionne l’ouverture. Choisissez des vitesses d’obturation rapides pour « geler » le mouvement et des vitesses d’obturation lentes pour souligner le mouvement en rendant flous les objets en déplacement. 1 Choisissez le mode S. Placez le sélecteur de mode sur S. La vitesse d’obturation actuelle s’affiche en orange. 2 Choisissez une vitesse d’obturation. Faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner une vitesse d’obturation. 3Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour définir la mise au point et l’exposition. L’ouverture sélectionnée par l’appareil s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 2.5 200 4 Prenez une photo. Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Remarque L’ouverture maximum (c.-à-d. le nombre f le plus bas possible) peut ne pas être sélectionnée à des vitesses d’obturation lentes, même lorsque le sujet est faiblement éclairé. 4:3 N 0 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode M: exposition manuelle En mode M (exposition manuelle), vous utilisez le sélecteur plusmoins pour choisir l’ouverture et la manette ADJ. pour sélectionner la vitesse d’obturation. 1 Choisissez le mode M. Placez le sélecteur de mode sur M. Le mode prise de vue, l’indicateur d’exposition, ainsi que l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation actuelles, s’affichent à l’écran. 4:3 N 2 Choisissez une ouverture et une vitesse d’obturation. Faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour choisir une ouverture, puis appuyez sur la manette ADJ. vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour sélectionner une vitesse d’obturation (le cas échéant, les rôles des deux commandes peuvent être inversés, voir page 138). Les effets peuvent être prévisualisés sur l’écran d’affichage des photos et sont reflétés par l’indicateur d’exposition (si l’image doit être sous-exposée ou surexposée de plus de 2EV, il est impossible d’en prévisualiser les effets et l’indicateur devient orange). 3 Prenez une photo. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point, puis appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. –2–2 EVEV +2+2 EVEV PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Remarques • Les vitesses d’obturation disponibles varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo et du réglage de l’ouverture. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. • Si l’option Auto ou Auto-Hi est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Sensibilité ISO (page 90), la sensibilité ISO sera fixée en mode exposition manuelle. La sensibilité ISO fixée varie en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. • Choisissez des vitesses d’obturation lentes pour des durées d’exposition prolongées. Pour réduire les effets de flou provoqués par un bougé de l’appareil, tenez-le fermement à deux mains ou utilisez un trépied. L’écran d’affichage des photos s’éteint lorsque l’obturateur est ouvert. À de faibles vitesses d’obturation, l’appareil traite automatiquement les photos pour supprimer le bruit, en augmentant le délai nécessaire à l’enregistrement des images à environ deux fois la vitesse d’obturation. • Le verrouillage de l’exposition automatique (AE) n’est pas disponible en mode exposition manuelle. Si l’option Verrouill. AE est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Rég. touche Fn ou Rég. touche Fn2 dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, un appui sur la touche affectée en mode exposition manuelle définira l’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur proche de celle nécessaire pour obtenir une exposition optimale. De même, si l’option Comp. expo. est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Réglages bouton +/– (page 137) dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, un appui sur les touches + et – n’affichera pas les options de correction d’exposition en mode exposition manuelle, mais définira plutôt l’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur proche de celle nécessaire pour obtenir une exposition optimale. C’est particulièrement utile lorsque vous souhaitez utiliser une exposition optimale comme point de départ pour modifier l’exposition. L’option Mode M par 1 seule pression (page 138) dans l’onglet des options personnalisées détermine si l’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation est modifiée pour obtenir une exposition optimale. 2 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode 4: Réglages pour diverses scènes pour enregistrer des vidéos ou Sélectionnez le mode 4 choisir une des options adaptées à des scènes spécifiques. Les réglages de l’appareil photo sont automatiquement optimisés pour le type de sujet sélectionné. Les options suivantes font partie des options disponibles en mode 4. Option Description Vidéo Cette option permet d’enregistrer des vidéos avec le son (page 54). Portrait À utiliser lors de la prise de portraits. Sports À utiliser lors de la prise de vue d’objets en mouvement. Paysage À utiliser lors de la prise de paysages avec beaucoup de verdure ou un ciel bleu. Nuit À utiliser lors de la prise de scènes de nuit. En mode nuit, le flash se déclenche lorsque toutes les conditions suivantes sont réunies : • Le flash est réglé sur Auto. • Le flash est indispensable parce qu’il fait noir. • Il y a une personne ou un objet à proximité. Correction biais Cette option réduit les effets de perspective lors de la prise de vue d’objets rectangulaires, comme des panneaux d’affichage ou des cartes de visite (page 56). PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Pour sélectionner une option du mode scène : 1 Placez le sélecteur de mode sur 4. L’option actuellement 4sélectionnée pour le mode s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 2Appuyez sur C/D. Le menu du mode scène s’affiche. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Appuyez sur +, –, Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner une option et appuyez sur C/D pour revenir au mode prise de vue, avec l’option sélectionnée affichée en haut de l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4 Prenez une photo. • Mode vidéo : voir page 54. • Mode Correction biais : voir page 56. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Conseil : utilisation desmenus Pour accéder aux menus prise de vue, options personnalisées et configuration en mode 4, appuyez sur la touche C/D pour afficher le menu du mode scène, puis appuyez sur Fn pour sélectionner l’onglet mode. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner l’onglet du menu prise de vue (page 58), l’onglet des options personnalisées (page 127) ou l’onglet de configuration (page 128), puis appuyez sur Fn2 pour placer le curseur dans le menu sélectionné. Consultez la page 59 pour en savoir plus sur les options du menu prise de vue disponibles dans chaque mode. 1 2 3 4 1Onglet mode 2Onglet du menu prise de vue 3Onglet des options personnalisées 4Onglet de configuration Enregistrement de vidéos Enregistrez des vidéos avec le son. Les vidéos sont stockées sous la forme de fichier AVI. 1 Sélectionnez 3 en mode 4. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner 3 (vidéo), puis appuyez sur C/D. Le mode est indiqué par une icône sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 2 Enregistrez la vidéo. Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour démarrer l’enregistrement ; appuyez de nouveau pour l’arrêter. L’enregistrement se termine automatiquement lorsque la mémoire est pleine. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Attention • L’icône clignote ; la durée d’enregistrement et la durée restante disponible s’affichent pendant l’enregistrement. • Les bruits émis par l’appareil photo peuvent être enregistrés sur la vidéo. • Les vidéos peuvent avoir une durée de 90 minutes ou une taille de 4Go. En fonction du type de carte mémoire utilisée, l’enregistrement vidéo peut se terminer avant que cette durée ou cette taille soit atteinte. La durée totale maximale de tous les fichiers vidéo qui peuvent être stockés dans la mémoire interne ou sur une carte mémoire varie en fonction des options sélectionnées pour Taille vidéo (page 61). Remarques • Le flash ne peut être utilisé en mode vidéo. • L’appareil effectue la mise au point lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur pour démarrer l’enregistrement. • La durée restante est calculée en fonction de la quantité de mémoire disponible et ne peut pas diminuer de façon régulière. • Les options du menu prise de vue sont différentes de celles disponibles dans les autres modes (page 60). • Chargez la batterie avant la prise de vue. Pour les enregistrements de longue durée, choisissez des cartes mémoire avec une vitesse d’écriture rapide et vérifiez la quantité de mémoire disponible avant l’enregistrement vidéo. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode 4: correction biais Pour prendre des photos en mode Correction biais, cadrez le sujet afin qu’il occupe le cadre entier et appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre la photo. Si l’appareil détecte un objet dont la perspective peut être corrigée, l’objet est entouré par un cadre orange. L’appareil peut détecter jusqu’à cinq objets ; pour sélectionner un objet différent, appuyez sur Fn2, pour enregistrer la photo sans aucune correction de perspective, appuyez sur +. Si l’appareil est incapable de détecter un sujet approprié, un message d’erreur s’affiche et la photo sera enregistrée sans modification. Attention L’appareil enregistre deux images : la photo non modifiée et une copie qui a été traitée pour corriger la perspective. Aucune photo ne sera prise si la mémoire est insuffisante pour enregistrer deux images. L’appareil peut être dans l’incapacité de corriger la perspective dans les cas suivants : • Le sujet n’est pas mis au point. • Les quatre bords du sujet ne sont pas clairement visibles. • Il existe peu de contraste entre le sujet et l’arrière-plan. • L’arrière-plan contient de nombreux détails fins. Conseil :correction biais L’option Correction biais du menu lecture peut être utilisée pour corriger la perspective des photos enregistrées (page 110). PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Modes «MY »: utilisation des réglages personnalisés Pour prendre des photos à l’aide des réglages enregistrés sous l’option MY1 avec Enr. Mes Réglages de l’onglet des options personnalisées (page 129), placez le sélecteur de mode sur MY. Sélectionnez MY2 pour prendre des photos en utilisant les réglages enregistrés avec MY2 et MY pour prendre des photos en utilisant les réglages enregistrés avec MY3. 1 Placez le sélecteur de mode sur MY, MY2 ou MY. Le mode prise de vue enregistré avec Enr. Mes Réglages s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Remarque Les réglages peuvent être configurés dans les modes MY. Les réglages enregistrés avec Enr. Mes Réglages sont restaurés lorsqu’un autre mode est sélectionné ou si l’appareil photo est mis hors tension. Conseil :choisir unmode prise devue Pour choisir un mode prise de vue en mode MY sans modifier d’autres réglages, utilisez l’option Changement de mode prise de vue dans le menu prise de vue (page 92). L’option Changement de mode prise de vue n’est pas disponible pour les modes MY auquel un mode scène est attribué. 2 Prenez une photo. Consultez la section sur le mode prise de vue sélectionné pour en savoir plus. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Menu prise de vue Les touches +, –, Fn, Fn2 et C/D vous permettent de naviguer dans les menus. Attention Le menu prise de vue ne s’affiche pas lorsque l’unité appareil photo n’est pas installée sur le boîtier. 1Affichez le menu prise de vue. Dans les modes autres que le mode 4, si vous appuyez sur C/D en mode prise de vue, le menu prise de vue s’affiche. CEn mode Conseil4:mode4, un appui sur /D affiche le menu mode ; appuyez sur Fn pour sélectionner l’onglet mode, sur – pour afficher le menu prise de vue et sur Fn2 pour placer le curseur dans le menu. La barre de défilement indique la position dans le menu 2 Sélectionnez une rubrique de menu. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une rubrique du menu et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options de la rubrique sélectionnée. Remarque Les éléments de la page suivante peuvent être affichés en appuyant sur – et sur le touche DIRECT simultanément.9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie 3 Sélectionnez une option. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option. Appuyez sur C/D pour sélectionner et passer au mode prise de vue ou sur Fn pour sélectionner et revenir au menu prise de vue. Les rubriques disponibles dans le menu prise de vue varient avec le mode prise de vue. Modes5, P, A,S,M,MY,MY2 etMY Option Défaut Page Qualité image/Taille L4:3 N 61 Mise au point AF Multi 64 Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68 Instantané par pression Oui 69 Pré AF Non 70 Mesure exposition Multi 70 Réglages image Standard 71 Mode continu Non 73 Cadrage auto Non 75 Correction exposition flash 0.0 78 Niveau de flash manuel 1/2 79 Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau 79 Réduction bruit Non 80 Réduction bruit ISO > àISO 401 80 Correction distorsion Non 81 Option Défaut Page Macro auto Non 81 Retardateur personnalisé 2img,5s 82 Prise de vue à intervalles — 83 Horodatage Non 84 Correction de l’exposition* 1 0.0 85 Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86 Compensation balance blancs A :0, G :0 89 Sensibilité ISO Auto 90 Initialiser * 2 — 91 Décalage ouverture auto * 3 Non 92 Changement de mode prise de vue * 4 — 92 Correction du bougé * 5 Oui 920 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode4:vidéo Option Défaut Page Taille vidéo VGA640 61 Mise au point AF Multi 64 Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68 Pré AF Non 70 Option Défaut Page Balance blancs Auto 86 Compensation balance blancs A :0, G :0 89 Mode4: Portrait/Sports/Nuit Option Défaut Page Qualité image/Taille L4:3 N 61 Mise au point AF Multi 64 Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68 Instantané par pression Oui 69 Pré AF Non 70 Correction exposition flash 0.0 78 Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau 79 Option Défaut Page Correction distorsion Non 81 Retardateur personnalisé 2img,5s 82 Horodatage Non 84 Correction de l’exposition 0.0 85 Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86 Correction du bougé* 5 Oui 92 Mode4: Paysage Option Défaut Page Qualité image/Taille L4:3 N 61 Correction distorsion Non 81 Retardateur personnalisé 2img,5s 82 Horodatage Non 84 Correction de l’exposition 0.0 85 Option Défaut Page Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86 Correction du bougé* 5 Oui 92 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode4:correction biais Option Défaut Page Qualité image/Taille 1M 4:3F 61 Mise au point AF Multi 64 Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68 Instantané par pression Oui 69 Pré AF Non 70 Mesure exposition Multi 70 Réglages image Standard 71 Correction exposition flash 0.0 78 Option Défaut Page Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau 79 Correction distorsion Non 81 Horodatage Non 84 Correction de l’exposition 0.0 85 Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86 Sensibilité ISO Auto 90 Correction du bougé* 5 Oui 92 * 1 Non disponibleen mode M. * 2 Mode5uniquement. * 3 Mode A uniquement. * 4 Mode MY, MY2 ou MY uniquement. * 5 Ilestpossiblequecettefonction nesoitpas disponibleselon letyped’unitéappareilphoto. Qualité image/Taille/Taille vidéo La taille des images détermine le nombre de photos et de vidéos qui peuvent être stockées dans la mémoire interne ou sur une carte mémoire. Pour les photos, le rapport d’affichage et la qualité de l’image peuvent être sélectionnés pour chaque option. La taille de l’image varie en fonction de l’association de l’option sélectionnée, du rapport d’affichage et de la qualité. Pour les vidéos, sélectionnez l’option souhaitée.2 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Pourles photos Option Rapport d’affichage Taux de compression Description RAW 16:9* 2 , 4:3, 3:2 *2 , 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL/ VGA* 1 • Adapté dans le cadre du traitement ou de la retouche de l’image sur un ordinateur. L 16:9* 2 , 4:3, 3:2* 2 , 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL • Adapté dans le cadre de l’impression grand format ou du rognage de l’image sur un ordinateur. M 16:9* 2 , 4:3, 3:2* 2 , 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL 5M 4:3 FINE • Adapté dans le cadre de l’impression. 3M 4:3 FINE 1M* 4 4:3 FINE • Adapté dans le cadre de la prise d’un grand nombre de photos. VGA* 4 4:3 FINE • Adapté dans le cadre de la prise d’un grand nombre de photos, de l’ajout d’images à des courriers électroniques ou de la publication d’images sur le Web. * 1 Le réglage s’applique à la copie JPEG. * 2 Les parties supérieure et inférieure de l’écran sont noircies. * 3 Les côtés gauche et droit de l’écran sont noircis. * 4 1M et VGA sont disponibles en mode Correction biais. Remarques • Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour plus de détails concernant la taille d’image de chaque option. • Les options du paramètre Qualité image/Taille peuvent être affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134). PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Conseil : qualité d’image L’appareil photo prend en charge les qualités d’image suivantes : • Normal : la compression JPEG est utilisée pour réduire la taille du fichier. • Fine : faible taux de compression pour obtenir des images de haute qualité. La taille des fichiers est plus importante que lors de l’utilisation de la qualité Normal. • RAW : les données d’image RAW sont enregistrées au format DNG ; des copies JPEG sont également créées. L’appareil affiche uniquement la copie JPEG ; les fichiers DNG peuvent être visualisés et retouchés sur un ordinateur en utilisant le logiciel fourni Irodio Photo & Video Studio (Windows uniquement) ou une application de retouche photo existante prenant en charge le format DNG. Contrairement aux images de qualité normale et fine, les images RAW ne sont pas compressées. Cela augmente la taille de fichier mais évite la perte de qualité associée à la compression JPEG. Notez ce qui suit lors de la prise de vue d’images RAW : • Certaines fonctions du menu prise de vue ne sont pas disponibles pour la prise d’images RAW. Reportez-vous à la description de chaque réglage pour plus de détails. Les options Réglages image et Horodatage s’appliquent uniquement aux copies JPEG et n’ont aucun effet sur les fichiers DNG. • Le nombre de photos RAW qui peuvent être prises en une seule rafale en mode continu varie en fonction de l’unité appareil photo et des réglages du menu prise de vue. Pourlesvidéos Option Taille d’image VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 Remarques • Les options disponibles pour les vidéos varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. • Les vidéos peuvent avoir une durée de 90 minutes ou une taille de 4 Go. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mise au point Choisissez la méthode utilisée pour la mise au point. L’appareil photo utilise par défaut la mise au point automatique. Option Description AF Multi* L’appareil sélectionne la zone de mise au point sur le sujet le plus proche, ce qui évite des prises de vue sans mise au point en empêchant une mise au point sur l’arrière-plan. AF Spot* L’appareil effectue la mise au point sur le sujet au centre du cadre. MF (miseau point manuelle) La mise au point est effectuée manuellement (page 65). Snap La mise au point s’effectue à la distance sélectionnée sous Dist. mise au pt snap (page 68) pour un déclenchement rapide. 8 (infini) La distance de mise au point est définie sur l’infini lors de la prise de vue de scènes à distance. * L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT. Lorsque l’option MF, Snap ou 8 est sélectionnée, la sélection est indiquée par une icône au niveau de l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Conseil : Profondeur dechamp Profondeur de champ est la partie de l’image (plage de distance) qui apparaît nette. Les petites ouvertures (grands nombres f) augmentent la profondeur de champ, élargissant la scène mise au point ; les grandes ouvertures (petits nombres f) diminuent la profondeur de champ, mettant en valeur le sujet principal en rendant flou l’avantplan et l’arrière-plan. Avec les réglages MF, Snap et 8, la barre de mise au point indique la profondeur de champ dans les modes prise de vue M, A et P (en mode P, la profondeur de champ est uniquement indiquée lorsque le déclencheur est enfoncé à mi-course et que les valeurs d’ouverture sont affichées). Profondeur de champ (vert) Barre de mise au point (les distances sont approximatives) Profondeur de champ (vert) Barre de mise au point (les distances  PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Remarques • Fn et Fn2 peuvent être utilisées pour basculer entre la mise au point automatique, manuelle ou snap (page 136). • Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur le sujet au centre de l’écran d’affichage des photos et vérifier la mise au point, maintenez C/D enfoncée. Maintenez de nouveau la touche enfoncé pour revenir à l’affichage normal de la prise de vue. 4:3 N 2.5 30 Mise au point :MF(mise au pointmanuelle) La mise au point manuelle peut être utilisée pour verrouiller la mise au point ou pour effectuer la mise au point lorsque l’appareil photo est incapable d’utiliser la mise au point automatique. 1 Sélectionnez MF (mise au point manuelle) dans le menu Mise au point. Le mode mise au point et la barre de mise au point sont affichés sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N 2.5 30 2 Choisissez la distance de mise au point. Tout en maintenant la touche N enfoncée, faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour effectuer la mise au point. Lors de l’utilisation de l’unité appareil photo équipée d’une bague de mise au point, réglez la mise au point à l’aide de la bague. 3 Prenez une photo. Consultez la section sur le mode prise de vue sélectionné pour en savoir plus. Remarque En mode mise au point manuelle, l’appareil photo peut effectuer la mise au point sur le sujet à courte distance (macro) même si le mode macro n’est pas activé. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Choix delamise au pointetcible demesure La sélection de cible peut être utilisée pour définir la mise au point et l’exposition pour les sujets excentrés, sans déplacer l’appareil photo, et cette fonction facilite l’utilisation d’un trépied. 1Activez la sélection de cible. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. dans les modes mise au point autres que MF, puis appuyez sur la manette vers la gauche ou la droite pour sélectionner P. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner l’une des options suivantes et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer. Option Description AE/AF Mesure Spot et mise au point automatique Spot ; choisissez la cible de mise au point et d’exposition. AF Mise au point automatique Spot ; choisissez la cible de mise au point. L’exposition est mesurée à l’aide de l’option sélectionnée pour Mesure exposition (page 70). AE Mesure Spot ; choisissez la cible de mesure. La mise au point est définie par l’option sélectionnée pour Mise au point (page 64). Non La sélection de cible est désactivée. 2 Positionnez la cible. À l’aide du pavé directionnel (page 37), placez le réticule Csur le sujet, puis appuyez sur /D. Pour retourner au menu de sélection de cible, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie 3 Prenez une photo. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour définir la mise au point et/ou l’exposition pour le sujet sélectionné, puis appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Remarques • La sélection de cible n’est pas disponible en mode mise au point manuelle (page 65). • La cible sélectionnée reste active jusqu’à ce qu’une nouvelle cible soit choisie. Notez que la cible sera réinitialisée si vous choisissez une nouvelle option dans le menu sélection de cible, ou si vous sélectionnez la mise au point manuelle. • Lorsque le mode macro est activé en mode 4, la cible de mise au point du mode macro peut être sélectionnée en appuyant sur la manette ADJ., en sélectionnant U et en utilisant le pavé directionnel pour placer le réticule comme indiqué à la page 68. • Les touches Fn peuvent être utilisées pour la sélection de la cible de mise au point en mode macro (page 68). Notez que, si les touches Fn ont été utilisées pour sélectionner la cible de mise au point, la manette ADJ. ne peut pas être utilisée pour la sélection de cible jusqu’à ce que la cible soit réinitialisée. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Sélection deciblemacro Si l’option Cible macro est attribuée à la touche Fn ou Fn2 (page 136), vous pouvez sélectionner le mode macro en appuyant sur la touche affectée en mode prise de vue. Le réticule illustré à droite s’affiche ; utilisez le pavé directionnel (page 37) pour placer le réticule sur le sujet, puis appuyez sur C/D (pour quitter sans définir la cible, appuyez sur la touche DISP.). Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point sur la cible sélectionnée, puis appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Si vous avez utilisé la manette ADJ. pour sélectionner une cible de mise au point (page 66), vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner le mode cible macro à l’aide des touches Fn et Fn2 avant que la cible soit annulée. Dist. mise au pt snap Sélectionnez la distance à laquelle l’appareil photo effectue la mise au point lorsque l’option Snap est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64) ou lorsque l’option Instantané par pression est activée (page 69). Sélectionnez 1m, 1,5m, 2m, 2,5m, 3m, 3,5 m, 5m ou 8 (infini). Remarque Lorsque l’option Snap est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point ou lorsque l’option Instantané par pression est activée, la distance de mise au point snap peut être également sélectionnée en tournant le sélecteur plus-moins tout en appuyant sur la touche N.9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Instantané par pression Prenez des photos sans pause pour la mise au point lorsque l’option AF Multi ou AF Spot est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64). Option Description Non La fonction est désactivée. Oui Si le déclencheur est enfoncé jusqu’au bout en une seule fois, l’appareil prendra la photo à la distance de mise au point sélectionnée sous Dist. mise au pt snap. Choisissez cette option lorsqu’un déclenchement rapide est requis. Hi ISO auto. Comme pour l’option Oui, sauf que la sensibilité ISO est automatiquement réglée sur Auto-Hi (page 90). Remarque Il est possible de modifier la distance de mise au point snap en tournant le sélecteur plus-moins tout en appuyant sur la touche N. Conseil :mise au point automatique L’appareil effectue la mise au point normalement si vous appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course. Attention • L’option Instantané par pression n’est pas disponible en mode macro ou lorsque l’option MF, Snap ou 8 est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64). • Faites attention aux effets de flou provoqués par un bougé de l’appareil.0 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Pré AF Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée lorsque l’option AF Multi ou AF Spot est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64), l’appareil photo continuera à effectuer la mise au point, même lorsque le déclencheur n’est pas enfoncé à mi-course (la plage de mise au point est plus étroite qu’avec la mise au point normale). Cela peut diminuer le délai nécessaire à la mise au point, améliorant potentiellement la réponse du déclencheur. Attention • Pré AF n’est pas disponible lorsque l’option MF, Snap ou 8 est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64). • L’utilisation de l’option Pré AF augmente la décharge de la batterie. Mesure exposition Choisissez la méthode utilisée par l’appareil photo pour mesurer la lumière pour l’exposition. Option Description Multi* L’appareil photo mesure la lumière sur 256 zones du cadre. Centre L’appareil mesure la lumière du cadre entier mais attribue le plus de poids au centre. Utilisez ce réglage lorsque le sujet au centre du cadre est plus clair ou plus sombre que l’arrière-plan. Spot L’appareil mesure la lumière avec le sujet au centre du cadre, en garantissant qu’il est exposé de manière optimale, même s’il est sensiblement plus clair ou plus sombre que l’arrière-plan. * L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT. Lorsque l’option Centre ou Sport est sélectionnée, la sélection est indiquée par une icône au niveau de l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N  PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Réglages image Ajustez le contraste, la netteté et l’éclat (intensité) ou prenez des photos monochromes. Option Description Vif Prenez des photos éclatantes avec un contraste, une netteté et un éclat renforcés. Standard* Contraste, netteté et éclat normaux. Naturel Cette option permet de créer une image plus douce avec un contraste, une netteté et un éclat réduits. Noir et Blanc Cette option permet de prendre des photos en noir et blanc. Le contraste et la netteté peuvent être ajustés manuellement. N et B (TE) (Effetdetons) Cette option permet de créer des photos monochromes avec une teinte sépia, rouge, verte, bleue ou pourpre. L’éclat, le contraste et la netteté peuvent être ajustés manuellement. Réglage 1 Réglage 2 Cette option permet d’effectuer des ajustements manuels de l’éclat, du contraste, de la netteté, des couleurs et de la teinte pour créer des réglages personnalisés, qui peuvent ensuite être rappelés à votre convenance. * L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT. Pour les réglages différents de Standard, la sélection actuelle est indiquée par une icône sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Pour configurer individuellement les réglages Noir et Blanc, N et B(TE), Réglage1 ou Réglage2, sélectionnez l’option souhaitée et appuyez sur Fn2.2 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie 1Ajustez les réglages personnalisés de reproduction des couleurs. • Noir et Blanc : appuyez sur + et – pour sélectionner une option, puis appuyez sur Fn1 et Fn2 pour la modifier. • N et B(TE) : réglez l’éclat, le contraste et la netteté comme indiqué ci-dessus. Pour choisir une teinte, sélectionnez Effet de tons et appuyez sur Fn2. Appuyez sur + et – pour sélectionner une option, puis appuyez sur Fn pour confirmer. • Réglage 1/Réglage 2 : réglez l’éclat, le contraste et la netteté comme indiqué ci-dessus. Pour ajuster des couleurs individuelles, sélectionnez Réglages individuels des couleurs et appuyez sur Fn2. appuyez sur + et – pour sélectionner une option, puis appuyez sur Fn et Fn2 pour la modifier. Appuyez sur C/D pour quitter lorsque les réglages sont terminés. Pour activer les réglages enregistrés, sélectionnez Rappeler réglages et appuyez sur Fn2. Appuyez sur la touche + ou – pour sélectionner une option, puis sur C/D. 2 Retournez au menu Réglages image. Appuyez sur C/D une fois les réglages terminés. 3 Revenez au mode prise de vue. Appuyez sur C/D ou appuyez sur Fn1, puis appuyez sur C/D. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie L’option actuellement sélectionnée pour Réglages image s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Remarque Les options du paramètre Réglages image peuvent être affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134). Mode continu Prenez des photos en continu. • Continu : l’appareil prend des photos tant que le déclencheur est enfoncé. Toutes les photos prises dans ce mode sont enregistrées en tant qu’images individuelles. • Cont.M + (mémoireinversecontinueplus) : l’appareil prend des photos tant que le déclencheur est enfoncé. Les photos consécutives prises avant que le déclencheur soit relâché sont enregistrées dans un fichier MP (page 95). Cont.M + peut être défini sur une des options suivantes : Cont.M + (rap) et Cont.M + (len). Lorsque vous relâchez le déclencheur… …l’appareil enregistre des photos consécutives. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Remarque Pour les options Cont.M + (rap) et Cont.M + (len), la taille des images et le nombre d’images enregistrées dans un même fichier MP varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. Pour les réglages différents de Non, la sélection actuelle est indiquée par une icône sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Attention Le zoom numérique est disponible avec les réglages Cont.M +, même si l’option Taille auto est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Image zoom numérique. Remarques • Pour les réglages différents de Non, le flash est automatiquement désactivé, la mise au point et l’exposition sont définies lors de la première prise de vue de la série et la balance des blancs Auto est utilisée à la place de l’option Multi-P AUTO (page 86). • Si vous relâchez le déclencheur avant que le nombre d’images à enregistrer dans un fichier MP soit atteint, les photos prises lorsque la touche était enfoncée sont enregistrées dans un fichier MP. Conseil : fichierMP MP est un format de fichier qui permet d’enregistrer un ensemble de photos. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Cadrage auto L’appareil photo enregistre deux ou trois copies d’une image avec différentes expositions, balances des blancs ou couleurs. Option Description Non* La fonction de cadrage automatique est désactivée. AE-BKT L’appareil photo enregistre trois copies d’une photo dans la plage de valeurs d’exposition indiquée. WB-BKT L’appareil enregistre trois copies de chaque photo : une avec une dominante rougeâtre « chaude », une deuxième avec la balance des blancs actuellement sélectionnée dans le menu prise de vue (page 86) et une troisième avec une dominante bleuâtre « froide ». Cette option vous permet de faire un choix lorsque vous rencontrez Affichage après la prise de vue CL-BKT Cette option enregistre des photos en noir et blanc et en couleur, ou bien en noir et blanc, en couleur et en monochrome teinté (page 77). * L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT. La sélection actuelle est indiquée par une icône sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N  PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Remarques • Le cadrage n’est pas disponible lorsqu’une option autre que Non est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mode Continu. Le cadrage balance des blancs n’est pas disponible lors des prises de vue monochromes. • Le cadrage balance des blancs et le cadrage couleur ne sont pas disponibles lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/Taille (page 61). • Le flash est automatiquement désactivé lorsque le cadrage est activé. • Le balance des blancs Auto est utilisée à la place de l’option Multi-P AUTO lorsque l’option AE-BKT est sélectionnée. AE-BKT:Cadrageexposition Pour définir des variations de la valeur d’exposition : 1 Sélectionnez AE-BKT. Sélectionnez AE-BKT et appuyez sur Fn2. 2 Spécifiez la valeur de compensation de l’exposition. Déplacez le curseur à l’aide de Fn ou Fn2, appuyez sur + ou – pour spécifier la valeur de compensation, puis appuyez sur C/D. 3 Revenez au mode prise de vue. Appuyez sur C/D ou sur Fn, puis sur C/ D. Remarques • Si la même valeur de correction d’exposition est définie, seule une image est affichée pour la valeur. • La valeur des pas de correction peut être définie sous Pas de corr. expo/flash dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140). PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie CL-BKT:cadragecouleur Le nombre et le type de photos enregistrées lorsque l’option CL-BKT est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Cadrage auto dépend de l’option choisie pour CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE) dans l’onglet de configuration (page 146) : • Non : l’appareil photo enregistre deux copies de chaque photo, l’une en noir et blanc et la seconde en couleur. • Oui : l’appareil enregistre trois copies de chaque photo, l’une en noir et blanc, la deuxième en couleur et la troisième utilisant une teinte sélectionnée pour N et B(TE) dans le menu Réglages image (page 71). Copie N et B(TE) Conseil :contraste, nettetéet intensité Le contraste, la netteté et l’éclat des images de la séquence cadrage sont déterminés par les options sélectionnées dans le menu Réglages image (page 71). La copie en noir et blanc est enregistrée avec les réglages les plus récemment utilisés pour Noir et Blanc, la copie en monochrome teinté avec les réglages les plus récemment utilisés pour N et B (TE), et la copie couleur avec le réglage actuellement utilisé pour Réglages image (si Noir et Blanc ou N et B (TE) est sélectionné, la copie couleur sera enregistrée avec le réglage Standard). PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Correction exposition flash Réglez le niveau de flash sur une valeur comprise entre –2,0 et +2,0, par pas de 1/2 ou 1/3 EV. La sélection de Correction exposition flash dans le menu prise de vue affiche le curseur illustré à droite ; appuyez sur + ou – pour choisir une valeur de correction d’exposition du flash et appuyez sur C/D. La correction d’exposition du flash s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos, sauf si le flash est désactivé. 4:3 N Remarques • Consultez la page 28 pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation du flash. • La valeur des pas de correction peut être définie sous Pas de corr. expo/flash dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140). Attention Il se peut que la correction d’exposition du flash ne fonctionne pas en dehors de la portée du flash. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus sur la portée du flash.9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Niveau de flash manuel Choisissez la quantité de lumière produite par le flash en mode flash manuel (page 28). Le niveau de flash est exprimé sous la forme d’une fraction de la puissance totale (toutes les valeurs sont approximatives) : Max 1/1.4 1/2 1/2.8 1/4 1/5.6 1/8 1/11 1/16 1/22 1/32 1/64 Le niveau de flash s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos en mode flash manuel. 4:3 N Remarque La correction d’exposition du flash n’est pas disponible en mode flash manuel. Attention Ne pointez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule à moteur et n’utilisez pas le flash à proximité des yeux du sujet. La plus grande prudence est recommandée pour photographier des enfants. Réglage synchro du flash Choisissez le type de synchronisation avec l’obturateur. • 1er rideau : le flash se déclenche au début de l’exposition. Cette option est recommandée pour la plupart des situations. • 2e rideau : le flash se déclenche à la fin de l’exposition. Cette option produit des traînées de lumière derrière les sources d’éclairage en mouvement.0 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Réduction bruit Choisissez Faible ou Forte pour réduire le « bruit » (variations aléatoires de la luminosité et de la couleur) dans les photos prises avec des sensibilités ISO élevées. La sensibilité ISO minimum, à laquelle s’applique la réduction du bruit, peut être sélectionnée en utilisant l’option Réduction bruit ISO. s’affiche lorsque la réduction du bruit est activée. 4:3 N Remarques • Lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/Taille (page 61), la réduction du bruit s’applique uniquement à la copie JPEG et pas au fichier DNG. • La durée nécessaire pour enregistrer les photos varie selon l’option sélectionnée pour Réduction bruit. Réduction bruit ISO Sélectionnez la sensibilité ISO minimum à laquelle s’applique la réduction du bruit lorsque l’option Faible ou Forte est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Réduction bruit. Sélectionnez Tous (la réduction du bruit s’applique à toutes les sensibilités ISO), > à ISO 201, > à ISO 401, > à ISO 801, ISO 1601 ou ISO3200. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Correction distorsion Réglez l’option Correction distorsion sur Oui pour corriger automatiquement la déformation de l’image lors de la prise de vue. s’affiche lorsque la correction de la déformation est activée. 4:3 N Attention • Il est possible que la correction ne soit pas appliquée selon le type d’unité appareil photo ou si cela n’est pas nécessaire en raison de la position du zoom, même si l’option Correction distorsion est réglée sur Oui. Le symbole de correction de la déformation s’affiche cependant en mode lecture pour les images auxquelles la correction n’est pas appliquée. • La fonction de correction de la déformation n’est pas disponible pour les fichiers DNG, les copies JPEG de données brutes, les fichiers MP et les vidéos. • Lorsque l’option Correction distorsion est réglée sur Oui, l’angle de vue change. • L’image corrigée ne s’affiche pas sur l’écran d’affichage des photos, même si l’option Correction distorsion est réglée sur Oui. Macro auto Lorsque l’option Macro auto est réglée sur Oui, l’appareil photo active automatiquement le mode macro lors de la mise au point sur un sujet proche de l’objectif si le mode macro n’est pas activé. N s’affiche lorsque l’appareil photo passe en mode macro.2 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Retardateur personnalisé Pour définir le nombre de photos à prendre et l’intervalle de prise de vue pour le réglage personnalisé de l’option retardateur, sélectionnez Retardateur personnalisé dans le menu prise de vue et procédez comme suit : 1 Sélectionnez le nombre de photos à prendre et l’intervalle de prise de vue. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner les Cnombres, appuyez sur + ou – pour modifier. /D pour revenir au mode prise de vue. 2Démarrez la prise de vue. Appuyez sur le déclencheur. Le nombre de photos indiqué est automatiquement pris à l’intervalle sélectionné. Appuyez sur C/D pour annuler le retardateur avant que le nombre de photos indiqué soit pris. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Prise de vue à intervalles Pour prendre automatiquement des photos à des intervalles entre cinq secondes et une heure, sélectionnez Prise de vue à intervalles dans le menu prise de vue et procédez comme suit : 1 Choisissez un intervalle. Appuyez sur Fn et Fn2 pour sélectionner les heures, les minutes ou les secondes, puis appuyez sur + et – pour Cmodifier. Appuyez sur /D pour revenir au mode prise de vue. Intervalle s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N 2Démarrez la prise de vue. Appuyez sur le déclencheur. Ensuite, l’appareil prend automatiquement les photos à l’intervalle sélectionné. 3Arrêtez la prise de vue. Appuyez sur C/D pour terminer la prise de vue. Attention • Le retardateur n’est pas disponible en mode 4. • L’intervalle est réinitialisé à zéro lorsque l’appareil est mis hors tension. • Si le délai nécessaire pour enregistrer les photos est supérieur à l’intervalle sélectionné, la prochaine photo n’est pas prise tant que l’enregistrement n’est pas terminé. • Le flash externe ne se déclenche pas en mode prise de vue à intervalles. Utilisez le flash intégré. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Remarques • Utilisez une batterie pleine et assurez-vous qu’il y a suffisamment d’espace dans la mémoire interne ou sur la carte mémoire. La prise de vue à intervalles prend automatiquement fin lorsque la mémoire interne ou la carte mémoire est pleine. • Les photos peuvent être prises à tout moment en appuyant sur le déclencheur. • Si l’option Continu ou Cont.M + est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mode Continu, la prise de vue en continu est automatiquement désactivée. Horodatage L’appareil photo incruste la date de la prise de vue sur la photo. Sélectionnez Date (AA/MM/JJ) ou Date et Heure (AA/MM/JJ hh:mm). DATE s’affiche lorsque l’horodatage est activé. 4:3 N Remarques • L’horodatage n’est pas disponible lorsque l’horloge n’est pas configurée. Configurez l’horloge (page 20, 149) avant d’utiliser l’horodatage. • La date ne peut pas être incrustée sur les vidéos. • Lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/Taille, la date est incrustée uniquement sur la copie JPEG et pas dans le fichier DNG. • La date est incrustée définitivement sur l’image et ne peut plus être effacée. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Correction de l’exposition La correction de l’exposition peut être requise dans les situations suivantes : • Contre-jour très lumineux : le sujet qui subit un contre-jour puissant peut être sous-exposé. Essayez d’augmenter la correction de l’exposition. • Le cadre est dominé par des objets très lumineux : le sujet peut être sous-exposé. Essayez d’augmenter la correction de l’exposition. • Le cadre est pratiquement sombre (par exemple, un sujet sous un projecteur dans une scène sombre) : le sujet peut être surexposé. Essayez de réduire la correction d’exposition. 1Affichez le curseur de correction d’exposition. Sélectionnez Correction de l’exposition dans le menu prise de vue et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher le curseur illustré sur la droite. 2 Réglez la correction d’exposition. Appuyez sur + ou – pour régler la valeur de correction de l’exposition. Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre une photo ou appuyez sur C/D pour revenir au mode prise de vue. Pour les réglages différents de 0.0, la correction de l’exposition s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N  PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Attention La correction de l’exposition n’est pas disponible en mode M. Remarque La valeur des pas de correction peut être définie sous l’option Pas de corr. expo/flash dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140). Balance blancs Avec le réglage Multi-P AUTO par défaut, l’appareil photo règle automatiquement la balance des blancs afin qu’un sujet blanc apparaisse blanc, quelle que soit la couleur de la source lumineuse. Il peut être cependant nécessaire d’adapter la balance des blancs à la source lumineuse, dans les cas d’un éclairage mixte ou de la prise de vue d’un sujet avec une couleur unie. Option Description Auto* L’appareil règle automatiquement la balance des blancs. Multi-P AUTO L’appareil règle la balance des blancs en tenant compte des différences d’éclairage dans les différentes zones du cadre (en mode continu, cette option est équivalente à l’option Auto). En extérieur Utilisez cette option lors des prises de vue en lumière du jour sous un ciel clair. Nuageux Utilisez cette option lors des prises de vue en lumière du jour sous un ciel nuageux. Lampe incandescente Utilisez cette option avec une lampe incandescente. Lampe fluorescente Utilisez cette option avec une lampe fluorescente. Réglage manuel Cette option permet de mesurer manuellement la balance des blancs (page 88). Détail Cette option permet d’affiner le réglage de la balance des blancs (page 88). * L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Pour les réglages différents de Auto, la sélection actuelle est indiquée par une icône sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Attention • La balance des blancs automatique peut ne pas produire les résultats souhaités en cas d’absence d’objets blancs dans la scène. Pour y remédier, il suffit d’ajouter un objet blanc dans la scène avant la prise de vue. • Les options différentes de Auto peuvent ne pas produire les résultats souhaités si le flash est utilisé. Sélectionnez Auto lors de l’utilisation du flash 1Affichez les options de la balance des blancs. Sélectionnez Balance blancs dans le menu prise de vue et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options. 2 Sélectionnez une option. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option. Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre une photo ou appuyez sur la manette ADJ. ou sur C/ D pour revenir au mode prise de vue. Remarque Les options Balance blancs peuvent être affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134). PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Manuel :mesure dela balance des blancs Pour mesurer une valeur de la balance des blancs : 1 Sélectionnez Réglage manuel. Sélectionnez Réglage manuel dans le menu balance des blancs. 2Mesurez la balance des blancs. Cadrez une feuille de papier blanc ou un autre objet blanc, afin de remplir tout le cadre, et appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Répétez les étapes 1 et 2 jusqu’à ce que l’effet souhaité soit obtenu. 3 Revenez au mode prise de vue. Appuyez sur C/D pour retourner au mode prise de vue. Remarque La sélection d’une option différente de Réglage manuel réinitialise la balance des blancs manuelle. Détail :réglage fin dela balance des blancs Pour affiner le réglage de la balance des blancs : 1 Sélectionnez Détail. Sélectionnez Détail dans le menu balance des blancs et appuyez sur la touche DISP..9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie 2 Choisissez une valeur. Appuyez sur + ou – pour choisir une balance des Cblancs. Appuyez sur /D lorsque les réglages sont terminés. 3 Revenez au mode prise de vue. Appuyez sur C/D pour retourner au mode prise de vue. Remarque La sélection d’une option différente de Détail réinitialise la balance des blancs détaillée. Compensation balance blancs Compensez les dominantes couleurs en modifiant la balance des blancs sur les axes vert-magenta ou bleu-ambre. Les modifications s’appliquent à l’option actuellement sélectionnée pour la balance des blancs et à toutes les options sélectionnées tant que les modifications sont en cours. La sélection de l’option Compensation balance blancs dans le menu prise de vue (page 58) affiche les commandes illustrées à droite. Sélectionnez la compensation de la balance des blancs à l’aide du pavé directionnel (page 37). Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour rétablir une valeur de compensation de la balance des blancs neutre. Appuyez sur C/D pour enregistrer les modifications et quitter ou appuyez deux fois sur la touche DISP. pour annuler. SFlb Bleu Vert Magenta Ambre Quantité90 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie La compensation de la balance des blancs s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Remarques • La compensation de la balance des blancs peut être assignée à la manette ADJ. (page 134). Pour réinitialiser, sélectionnez Réinitial. et appuyez sur C/D. • La compensation de la balance des blancs peut également être assignée aux touches Fn (page 136). • Si le sélecteur de mode est placé sur 4, la compensation de la balance des blancs est uniquement disponible en mode vidéo. • L’option Compensation balance blancs du menu lecture (page 109) n’utilise pas les mêmes valeurs que celles du menu prise de vue. Sensibilité ISO Réglez la sensibilité de l’appareil photo par rapport à la lumière. Des valeurs élevées peuvent être utilisées pour obtenir des vitesses d’obturation plus rapides, lorsque le sujet est faiblement éclairé, et éviter ainsi les effets de flou. • Auto : l’appareil règle automatiquement la sensibilité en fonction de la luminosité, de la distance du sujet, des options sélectionnées pour le mode macro, ainsi que pour la taille et la qualité d’image. • Auto-Hi (haute sensibilité automatique) : l’appareil photo ajuste automatiquement la sensibilité en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. En comparaison du réglage Auto, il est possible de sélectionner des sensibilités plus élevées pour les sujets mal éclairés. La sensibilité maximum peut être sélectionnée à l’aide de Sensibilité ISO auto-hi dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140).9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie • ISO (valeur) : l’appareil photo effectue la prise de vue à l’aide de la valeur ISO sélectionnée. Les valeurs ISO disponibles varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. La sensibilité actuelle est indiquée sur l’écran d’affichage des photos (si l’option Auto ou Auto-Hi est sélectionnée, la sensibilité sélectionnée par l’appareil est indiquée lorsque le déclencheur est enfoncé à mi-course). 2.5 ISO 200 1 Sélectionnez une option de sensibilité ISO. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option. 2 Prenez une photo ou retournez au mode prise de vue. Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre une photo ou appuyez sur C/D pour revenir au mode prise de vue. Remarques • Les options du paramètre Sensibilité ISO peuvent être affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134). • La sensibilité lors de l’utilisation du flash et la plage de sensibilités disponibles varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation de l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. • Du « bruit » (variations de la luminosité et de la couleur) peut apparaître dans les photos prises avec des sensibilités élevées. Initialiser Pour restaurer les réglages par défaut du menu prise de vue (page 59), placez le sélecteur de mode sur 5 et sélectionnez Initialiser dans le menu prise de vue. Une boîte de dialogue de confirmation s’affiche ; sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/D pour restaurer les valeurs par défaut et quitter le mode prise de vue.92 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Décalage ouverture auto Lorsque l’option Oui est sélectionnée, l’appareil photo règle automatiquement l’ouverture pour éviter la surexposition en mode priorité à l’ouverture. Remarque Le décalage de l’ouverture automatique est uniquement disponbible en mode priorité à l’ouverture. Changement de mode prise de vue Lorsque le sélecteur de mode est placé sur un mode MY (page 57), vous pouvez utiliser cette option pour basculer entre les modes 5, P, A, S et M sans tourner le sélecteur de mode sur une nouvelle valeur. Cette option est uniquement disponible en mode MY. Elle n’est cependant pas disponible si un mode scène est attribué au mode MY. Correction du bougé Réglez l’option Correction du bougé sur Oui pour éviter les effets de flou dus à un bougé de l’appareil. E s’affiche lorsque la correction du bougé est activée.9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Attention • Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible selon l’unité appareil photo. • La fonction de correction du bougé n’est pas disponible en mode vidéo, en mode continu et lorsque la vitesse d’obturation est réglée sur une seconde ou plus en mode exposition manuelle. Si la fonction est activée en mode continu ou lorsque la vitesse d’obturation est réglée sur une seconde ou plus en mode exposition manuelle, E devient F, et en mode vidéo, E disparaît. • La fonction de correction du bougé ne peut empêcher le flou occasionné par les mouvements du sujet (à cause du vent, etc.). • Les effets de la fonction de correction du bougé varient en fonction de l’environnement. Remarque J apparaît sur l’écran d’affichage des photos lorsque des effets de bougé sont susceptibles de se produire.Fonctions de lectUre 9 Fonctions de lecture Cette section décrit comment visualiser des vidéos et des fichiers MP. Visualisation de vidéos Procédez comme suit pour visualiser des vidéos. 1Appuyez sur la touche 6. Appuyez sur la touche 6 pour afficher les photos au niveau de l’écran d’affichage des photos. 2Affichez la vidéo. Appuyez sur +, –, Fn et Fn2 (page 34) pour faire défiler les images jusqu’à la première image de la vidéo à afficher. Les vidéos sont marquées par une icône 3. 3Démarrez la lecture. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour démarrer la lecture. La progression est indiquée sur l’écran de lecture. Les opérations suivantes peuvent être réalisées : Action Commande Description Avance/ Rembobinage z/Z Maintenez la touche z enfoncée pour l’avance rapide, maintenez la touche Z enfoncée pour le rembobinage. Si la vidéo est en pause, appuyez sur la touche z ou Z pour avancer ou rembobiner d’une image à la fois ; tenez la touche enfoncée pour une avance ou un rembobinage lent. Pause/ Reprise ADJ. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour mettre en pause ; appuyez de nouveau pour reprendre la lecture. Réglage du volume +/– Appuyez sur + pour augmenter le volume et sur – pour le diminuer. 2010Fonctions de lectUre 9 Affichage de fichiers MP Lorsque vous prenez des photos à l’aide de la fonction Cont.M +, les photos sont enregistrées dans un fichier MP. Procédez comme suit pour visualiser des fichiers MP. Remarque Les photos prises en mode continu normal peuvent être lues de la meme maniere que les images normales. 1Appuyez sur la touche 6. 2Affichez le fichier MP. Le fichier MP s’affiche avec le symbole S. L’affichage change de la manière suivante. 2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.0 1/55 Affichage de l’étape 2 • Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour commuter entre l’affichage normal et l’absence d’affichage. • Il est impossible d’agrandir les photos, même en appuyant sur la touche z. Les images sont affichées sous forme de mosaïque. • Les autres opérations sont identiques à celles effectuées pour les photos normales. z Manette ADJ. Z 2010/03/01 14:09 F 3.3 6/6 1 55 Vue mosaïque • Les images des fichiers MP sont affichées sous forme de mosaïque. • Utilisez le pavé directionnel (page 37) pour sélectionner une image. • La touche DISP. est désactivée. z Manette ADJ. Z 100-0001 6 6 2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0 F 3.3 1/55 Vue une image • Une image sélectionnée dans la vue mosaïque est affichée. • Appuyez sur z pour agrandir l’image. Manette ADJ.Fonctions de lectUre 9 2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0 F 3.3 1/55 100-0001 2 6 Diaporama • Les photos sont automatiquement affichées dans l’ordre où elles ont été prises, en commençant par l’image affichée. Les opérations disponibles pendant le diaporama sont indiquées ci-dessous. Pause/lecture Appuyez sur la manette ADJ.. Avance rapide Maintenez la touche z enfoncée pendant la lecture. Retour Maintenez la touche Z enfoncée pendant la lecture. Ralenti Maintenez la touche z enfoncée pendant la pause. Rembobinage lent Maintenez la touche Z enfoncée pendant la pause. Image suivante Appuyez sur la touche z pendant la pause. Image précédente Appuyez sur la touche Z pendant la pause. Première image Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. vers la gauche pendant la pause. Dernière image Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. vers la droite pendant la pause. Attention • Les fonctions DPOF, Découper, Changer de taille, Correction biais (mode lecture), Compensation de niveau et Compensation balance blancs ne sont pas disponibles pour les fichiers MP. • Les fonctions Réglage fonction indicateur et Protéger ne peuvent être définies pour les images individuelles d’un fichier MP. Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur ou Protéger est définie lors de l’affichage de la vue mosaïque ou de la vue une image, le réglage est appliqué au fichier MP et non à l’image individuelle. • Les images individuelles des fichiers MP ne peuvent être supprimées.Fonctions de lectUre 9 Exportation de fichiers MP Procédez comme suit pour extraire des images d’un fichier MP et les enregistrer individuellement. Remarques • Les images extraites sont enregistrées sous la même taille que l’image d’origine. • Les fichiers originaux sont conservés après extraction. 1Appuyez sur la touche 6. 2Appuyez sur le fichier MP que vous souhaitez exporter. Le fichier MP s’affiche avec le symbole S. Pour exporter plusieurs images, vous pouvez également appuyer sur la touche z de manière à afficher la vue mosaïque, puis passer à l’étape 3. 2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.0 1/55 3Appuyez sur C/D. Le menu des réglages de la lecture apparaît. 4Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Exporter photos, puis appuyez sur Fn2.Fonctions de lectUre 9 Sélection d’uneimage 5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner 1 image. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner l’image. 6Appuyez sur C/D. Sélection de plusieursimages distinctes 5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Sél. mult, puis appuyez sur C/D. Si la vue mosaïque a été affichée à l’étape 2 de la page 97, passez à l’étape 5. 6Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Sél. indiv., puis appuyez sur C/D. 7 Sélectionnez l’image et appuyez sur C/D. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour afficher l’écran permettant de définir une plage d’images. Reportez-vous à l’étape 7 et aux étapes suivantes, à la page 99. 8 Répétez l’étape 7 pour sélectionner toutes les images. Pour désélectionner une image, sélectionnez-la et appuyez sur C/D. 9Appuyez sur la touche N. 10 Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/D.Fonctions de lectUre 99 Sélection d’une plage de plusieursimages 5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Sél. mult, puis appuyez sur C/D. Si la vue mosaïque a été affichée à l’étape 2 de la page 97, passez à l’étape 5. 6Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Sél. série, puis appuyez sur C/D. 7 Sélectionnez le point de départ de la plage d’images que vous souhaitez définir et appuyez sur C/D. En cas d’erreur lors de la sélection du point de départ de la plage d’images, appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour retourner à l’écran de sélection du point de départ. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour afficher l’écran permettant de définir des images distinctes. Reportez-vous à l’étape 7 et aux étapes suivantes, à la page 98. 8 Sélectionnez le point final de la plage d’images que vous souhaitez définir et appuyez sur C/D. Exporter photos Démarrage Exécuter 9 Répétez les étapes 7 et 8 pour définir l’ensemble des plages. 10Appuyez sur la touche N. 11 Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/D.Fonctions de lectUre 00 Sélection detouteslesimages 5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Toutes vues, puis appuyez sur C/ D. 6 Sélectionnez Oui, puis appuyez sur C/D.0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Menu des réglages de la lecture Cette section détaille les options du menu lecture et décrit comment visualiser les photos sur un téléviseur. Menu lecture Appuyez sur la touche 6 en mode prise de vue et procédez comme suit. 1Affichez le menu lecture. Appuyez sur C/D. 2 Sélectionnez une rubrique de menu. Appuyez sur + ou – pour faire défiler le menu et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options de la rubrique sélectionnée. Remarque Les éléments de la page suivante peuvent être affichés en appuyant sur – et sur le bouton DIRECT simultanément. Le menu lecture contient les options suivantes : Option Page Réglage fonction indicateur 102 Affichage photos marquées 103 Changer de taille 104 Découper 105 Compensation de niveau 106 Compensation balance blancs 109 Correction biais 110 Option Page Diaporama 111 Protéger 112 Copier sur carte depuis mémoire interne 115 DPOF 115 Exporter photos 97 Restaurer fichier 11702 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Remarque Les menus de configuration de l’appareil photo sont accessibles à partir du menu lecture (page 126). Réglage fonction indicateur Enregistrez les fichiers d’images fréquemment visualisés sous Réglage fonction indicateur (20 fichiers maximum) de manière à pouvoir les rappeler facilement par la suite à l’aide de la fonction Affichage photos marquées. Définition/annulation d’un fichier à la fois Pour définir ou annuler un fichier à la fois, affichez l’image et appuyez sur C/D. Sélectionnez Réglage fonction indicateur dans le menu lecture et appuyez sur la touche Fn2. Sélectionnez Régler ou Annuler et appuyez sur C/D. Remarques • Lorsqu’un fichier est sélectionné, le symbole s’affiche à l’écran. • Il n’est plus possible de définir de fichier lorsque 20 fichiers sont sélectionnés. Annulez la sélection de certains fichiers et sélectionnez les fichiers souhaités. Définition/annulation de plusieurs fichiers à la fois Procédez comme suit pour définir ou annuler plusieurs fichiers à la fois. 1Affichez la vue mosaïque. Appuyez sur z en mode lecture. 2 Sélectionnez une photo. Sélectionnez une photo et appuyez sur C/D. 3 Sélectionnez Réglage fonction indicateur et appuyez sur Fn2. Les photos sélectionnées sont marquées d’une icône .0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre 4 Sélectionnez des photos supplémentaires. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner des photos supplémentaires et appuyez sur C/D. Répétez cette procédure pour définir ou annuler l’ensemble des fichiers souhaités. Pour annuler la sélection des photos, appuyez sur C/D une fois le fichier sélectionné. Attention • Si le nom du fichier indiqué sous Réglage fonction indicateur est modifié à l’aide d’un ordinateur, la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est annulée pour le fichier. • Lorsque le contenu de la mémoire interne est copié sur une carte mémoire SD, la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur définie pour les fichiers de la mémoire interne est annulée. • Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée pour un fichier de carte mémoire SD, le dossier [CLIPINFO] et le fichier CLIP.CLI sont créés sur la carte mémoire SD. S’ils sont supprimés, la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est annulée pour les fichiers correspondants. • Si le nom d’un fichier est modifié à l’aide d’un ordinateur, il est possible que la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur ne puisse être activée pour le fichier. • La fonction Réglage fonction indicateur peut uniquement être sélectionnée pour les photos prises à l’aide de cet appareil. Affichage photos marquées Pour afficher les photos pour lesquelles la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée, sélectionnez Affichage photos marquées dans le menu lecture. Remarques • Le fichier pour lequel la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée qui dispose du plus petit numéro de fichier est affiché.0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre • Appuyez sur le déclencheur ou sur la touche 6 pour activer le mode prise de vue. • Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur n’est sélectionnée pour aucun fichier, un message s’affiche et le menu lecture réapparaît. • Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée pour plusieurs fichiers, appuyez sur la touche N pour afficher le fichier avec le plus petit numéro de fichier. • Lorsqu’un fichier pour lequel la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée est affiché en plein écran, appuyez sur les touches +, –, Fn ou Fn2 pour passer à l’image précédente ou suivante. Changer de taille Pour créer une petite copie d’une photo, sélectionnez Changer de taille dans le menu lecture (page 101) et choisissez une taille. Les photos prises au format L, M, M ou M (page 61) peuvent être copiées au format M ou VGA et les photos prises au format M peuvent être copiées au format VGA. Il est impossible de changer la taille des vidéos et des photos de qualité RAW. Remarques • Les images sont copiées selon un rapport d’affichage de 4 : 3. Si le rapport d’affichage de la photo originale est de 16 : 9, 3 : 2, ou 1 : 1, les côtés gauche et droit ou les parties supérieure et inférieure des images sont rognés et affichés avec une bordure noire à l’écran. • Consultez la page 61 pour en savoir plus sur le choix de la taille des photos pendant la prise de vue.0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Découper Procédez comme suit pour découper une photo et l’enregistrer dans un fichier distinct. 1Affichez une photo. Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture et appuyez sur C/D. 2 Sélectionner Découper. Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu lecture, sélectionnez Découper, puis appuyez sur Fn2. Pour annuler le rognage, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. 3Découpez la photo. Définissez la taille du cadre de découpage avec la touche z ou Z et la position du cadre de découpage avec le pavé directionnel (page 37), puis appuyez sur C/D. Attention • Seules les photos prises avec cet appareil peuvent être rognées. • Les vidéos et les fichiers MP ne peuvent être rognés. • Pour les images RAW (page 61), la fonction de rognage s’applique uniquement à la copie JPEG. • Les photos peuvent être rognées à plusieurs reprises. La qualité de l’image se dégrade cependant à chaque recompression. Remarques • Lors du rognage d’une image, le taux de compression devient Fin. Pour les images d’autres tailles, le taux de compression est identique à l’image d’origine. • Les réglages disponibles pour la taille du cadre de découpage varient en fonction de la taille de l’image d’origine. À chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche z, la taille du cadre de découpage diminue d’un niveau (13 niveaux maximum).0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre • La taille de l’image découpée varie en fonction de la taille d’origine de l’image et du niveau de rognage (taille du cadre de découpage). Compensation de niveau Cette option crée des copies traitées pour régler la luminosité et le contraste. Corrigez automatiquement la luminosité et le contraste ou procédez à des ajustements manuels à l’aide d’un histogramme. Auto :correction de niveau automatique 1Affichez une photo. Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture. 2 Sélectionnez Compensation de niveau. Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu lecture, sélectionnez Compensation de niveau et appuyez sur Fn2. 3 Sélectionner Auto. Sélectionnez Auto et appuyez sur Fn2. Si l’appareil photo est capable de créer une copie, un aperçu s’affiche avec l’image originale affichée dans l’angle supérieur gauche et la copie corrigée à droite. Si l’appareil n’est pas capable de créer une copie, un message d’erreur s’affiche et l’appareil quitte le menu lecture.0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre 4 Copiez l’image. Appuyez sur C/D. Pour quitter sans créer de copie, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie la photo. Manuel :correction de niveaumanuelle Affichez la photo à copier et sélectionnez l’option Manuel pour le paramètre Compensation de niveau dans le menu lecture pour afficher un aperçu comme indiqué à la page précédente, puis procédez comme suit. 1 Sélectionnez le point noir, le point blanc ou le point médian. L’aperçu manuel contient un histogramme montrant comment les pixels sont distribués sur l’image en fonction de la luminosité, avec les pixels sombres sur la gauche et les pixels clairs sur la droite. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour faire défiler le point noir, le point médian et le point blanc, puis appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour placer le point sélectionné avec une luminosité et un contraste améliorés, comme décrit à la page suivante. Pour obtenir de l’aide, appuyez sur la touche N ; appuyez de nouveau sur cette touche pour revenir à l’aperçu. 2 Copiez l’image. Appuyez sur C/D. Pour quitter sans créer de copie, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie la photo. De gauche à droite : point noir, point médian, point blanc De gauche à droite : point noir, point médian, point blanc0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Conseil :choix du point noir, du point blancet du pointmédian • Réglage de la luminosité : pour éclaircir l’image, déplacez le point médian vers la gauche. Pour assombrir l’image, déplacez le point médian vers la droite. • Correction de l’exposition : si l’image est surexposée, déplacez le point noir vers la droite jusqu’à ce qu’il soit aligné avec le pixel le plus sombre de l’histogramme (voir à droite). Si l’image est sous-exposée, déplacez le point blanc vers la gauche jusqu’à ce qu’il soit aligné avec le pixel le plus clair. Vous pouvez alors déplacer le point médian vers la droite ou la gauche pour ajuster la luminosité. Correction de la surexposition • Augmentation du contraste : pour augmenter le contraste, alignez le point noir sur le pixel le plus sombre et le point blanc sur le pixel le plus clair, comme illustré à droite. Vous pouvez alors déplacer le point médian vers la droite ou la gauche pour ajuster la luminosité. Attention • La compensation de niveau est disponible uniquement pour les photos prises avec cet appareil. Elle n’est pas disponible avec les vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +. Le résultat souhaité peut ne pas être obtenu avec des photos monochromes. • La compensation de niveau peut être appliquée à plusieurs reprises. La qualité de l’image se dégrade cependant à chaque recompression.09 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Compensation balance blancs Cette option crée des copies dont la balance des blancs a été modifiée. 1Affichez une photo. Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture. 2 Sélectionnez Compensation balance blancs. Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu lecture, sélectionnez Compensation balance blancs et appuyez sur Fn2. 3 Réglez la balance des blancs. Sélectionnez la compensation de la balance des blancs à l’aide du pavé directionnel (page 37). Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour rétablir une valeur de compensation de la balance des blancs neutre. 4Appuyez sur C/D. Appuyez sur C/D pour copier l’image (pour quitter sans créer de copie, appuyez deux fois sur DISP.). Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie la photo.0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Attention • La compensation de la balance des blancs est disponible uniquement pour les photos prises avec cet appareil. Elle n’est pas disponible avec les vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +. Le résultat souhaité peut ne pas être obtenu avec des photos monochromes. • La compensation de la balance des blancs peut être appliquée à plusieurs reprises. La qualité de l’image se dégrade cependant à chaque recompression. Correction biais Cette option permet de créer des copies traitées pour réduire les effets de perspective des objets rectangulaires, comme des tableaux d’affichage ou des cartes de visite. 1Affichez une photo. Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture. 2 Sélectionnez Correction biais. Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu lecture, sélectionnez Correction biais et appuyez sur Fn2. Si l’appareil photo est capable de détecter un objet auquel la correction de perspective peut être appliquée, un message s’affiche et l’objet concerné est marqué d’un cadre jaune. L’appareil peut détecter jusqu’à cinq objets ; pour sélectionner un objet différent, appuyez sur Fn2, pour quitter sans aucune correction de perspective, appuyez sur +. Si l’appareil est incapable de détecter un objet approprié, un message d’erreur s’affiche. MenU des réglages de la lectUre 3Appuyez sur C/D. Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie la photo. La copie prend de 2 à 46 secondes, en fonction de la taille d’image. Attention La correction des biais est disponible uniquement pour les photos prises avec cet appareil. Elle n’est pas disponible avec les vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +. Pour les images RAW (page 61), la correction des biais s’applique uniquement à la copie JPEG. Remarques • La copie est de la même taille que l’original. Plus la taille des images est importante, plus la création de la copie prend du temps : Taille Durée (approximative) Taille Durée (approximative) L 24s 3M 8s M 18s 1M 5s 5M 12s VGA 2s Pour réduire la durée de traitement nécessaire, créez une petite copie de l’original en utilisant Changer de taille (page 104) et exécutez la correction des biais sur la copie. • La durée nécessaire pour la correction des biais varie en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. • La correction des biais peut être également appliquée pendant la prise de vue (page 56). Diaporama Cette option permet de démarrer un diaporama automatique. Les photos s’affichent dans l’ordre d’enregistrement avec un intervalle de trois secondes. Lors de la visualisation d’une vidéo, la lecture démarre automatiquement. Le diaporama se répète en boucle ; appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche pour l’arrêter.2 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Protéger Cette option protège les photos contre une suppression accidentelle. Les fichiers protégés sont marqués d’une icône illustrée à droite. 4:3 N Attention Le formatage efface tous les fichiers, y compris les fichiers protégés. Protection des photosindividuelles Pour protéger ou supprimer la protection des fichiers individuels, affichez la photo, sélectionnez Protéger dans le menu lecture, et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options illustrées à droite (si l’image affichée n’est pas la bonne, appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour afficher les Cautres photos). Sélectionnez 1 fichier et appuyez sur /D. MenU des réglages de la lectUre Modification del’état de protection de plusieurs fichiers Procédez comme suit pour modifier l’état de protection de plusieurs fichiers sélectionnés. 1 Sélectionnez Protéger dans le menu lecture, puis appuyez sur Fn2. Dans une vue multi-images, passez à l’étape 2. Dans une vue une image, les options illustrées à droite s’affichent. Sélectionnez Sél mult et appuyez sur C/D. 2 Sélectionnez Sél. indiv. ou Sél. série. Sélectionnez Protéger dans le menu lecture, et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options illustrées à droite. Pour sélectionner les images une par une, sélectionnez Sél. indiv., appuyez sur C/D et passez à l’étape 3. Pour sélectionner les images en définissant des plages, sélectionnez Sel. série, appuyez sur C/ D et passez à l’étape 3.1. 3 Sélectionnez une photo. Utilisez le pavé directionnel (page 37) pour sélectionner des photos, puis appuyez sur C/D. Les photos protégées sont marquées par une icône . Pour supprimer la protection d’une photo, sélectionnez-la et appuyez de nouveau sur C/D. 4:3 N 4:3 N  MenU des réglages de la lectUre Conseil :sélection deséries Pour basculer entre les paramètres Sél. indiv. et Sél. série, appuyez sur la manette ADJ. et procédez comme suit : 3.1 Utilisez le pavé directionnel pour sélectionner la première image de la série, puis appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer. L’image sélectionnée est marquée par une icône. Pour désélectionner l’image, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. 4:3 N 3.2 Utilisez le pavé directionnel pour sélectionner la dernière Cimage, puis appuyez sur /D pour confirmer. Les images sélectionnées sont marquées d’une icône . 4:3 N Répétez les étapes 3.1-3.2 pour sélectionner des séries supplémentaires ou appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour sélectionner ou désélectionner des photos individuelles, comme indiqué à l’étape 3. 4Appuyez sur la touche N. Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil photo protège les fichiers sélectionnés. L’appareil revient ensuite à la lecture normale. Protection ou suppression dela protection detousles fichiers Pour protéger tous les fichiers, sélectionnez Protéger, puis appuyez sur Fn2. Sélectionnez CSélect. tout et appuyez sur /D. Pour supprimer la protection de tous les fichiers, sélectionnez Annuler tout et appuyez sur C/D. MenU des réglages de la lectUre Copier sur carte depuis mémoire interne Pour copier tous les fichiers de la mémoire interne sur une carte mémoire, insérez la carte mémoire dans le boîtier de l’appareil photo et sélectionnez Copier sur carte depuis mémoire interne dans le menu lecture. Un message s’affiche pendant le déroulement de la copie ; l’appareil revient ensuite à la lecture lorsque la copie est terminée. Remarques • Si l’espace disponible sur la carte mémoire est insuffisant pour copier tous les fichiers de la mémoire interne, un message s’affiche. Pour copier uniquement les fichiers correspondant à l’espace disponible, sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/ D; pour quitter sans copier aucun fichier, sélectionnez Non. • Il est impossible de copier les fichiers de la carte mémoire dans la mémoire interne. DPOF Pour commander des tirages professionnels de photos sur une carte mémoire, utilisez cette option pour créer un « bon à tirer » numérique listant les photos à tirer et le nombre de tirages, puis déposez la carte mémoire dans un centre de service de tirage numérique prenant en charge la norme DPOF. Remarque Si un fichier RAW est sélectionné pour l’impression, seule la copie JPEG sera imprimée. Conseil : DPOF DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) est une norme utilisée pour définir les photos à tirer et le nombre de tirages. Les photos sélectionnées pour le tirage sont marquées d’un indicateur de tirage DPOF (page 9). MenU des réglages de la lectUre Sélection des photosindividuelles à tirer Pour ajouter ou supprimer une photo du bon à tirer, affichez la photo, sélectionnez DPOF dans le menu lecture, puis appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options illustrées à droite (si l’image affichée n’est pas la bonne, appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour afficher les autres photos). Sélectionnez 1 fichier et appuyez sur C/D. Sélection detoutesles photos à tirer Pour sélectionner toutes les photos à tirer, sélectionnez DPOF, appuyez sur Fn2, sélectionnez CSélect. tout, puis appuyez sur /D. Pour supprimer toutes les photos du bon à tirer, sélectionnez Annuler tout et appuyez sur C/D. Sélection de plusieurs photos à tirer Pour sélectionner plusieurs photos à tirer : 1 Sélectionnez DPOF. Appuyez sur C/D dans une vue multi-images pour afficher le menu lecture. Sélectionnez DPOF et appuyez sur Fn2. MenU des réglages de la lectUre 2 Sélectionnez les photos et choisissez le nombre de tirages. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner des photos supplémentaires et sur + ou Fn2 pour choisir le nombre de copies. Pour supprimer une photo du bon à tirer, appuyez sur – jusqu’à ce que zéro s’affiche. 3Appuyez sur C/D. Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil crée le bon à tirer. L’appareil revient ensuite à la vue multiimages. Restaurer fichier Pour restaurer tous les fichiers supprimés, sélectionnez Restaurer fichier dans le menu lecture, puis appuyez sur Fn2. Un message de confirmation s’affiche. Sélectionnez Oui, puis appuyez sur C/D. Remarque Un message s’affiche s’il n’y a aucun fichier à restaurer. Attention Les fichiers ne peuvent être restaurés après l’exécution d’une des opérations suivantes. • Mise hors tension de l’appareil • Basculement du mode lecture vers le mode prise de vue • Utilisation de la fonction DPOF, Changer de taille, Copier sur carte depuis mémoire interne, Correction biais, Compensation de niveau, Compensation balance blancs ou Découper. • Suppression de fichiers avec des réglages DPOF • Initialisation de la mémoire interne ou de la carte mémoire SD • Réglage ou annulation des fichiers pour la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur • Exportation de fichiers MP à l’aide de la fonction Exporter photos MenU des réglages de la lectUre Visualisation des photos sur un téléviseur Pour visualiser les photos sur un téléviseur, raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo à l’aide du câble A/V fourni. 1Mettez l’appareil hors tension. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension avant de brancher ou débrancher le câble A/V. 2 Raccordez le câble A/V au téléviseur. Insérez la fiche blanche dans le connecteur d’entrée audio et la fiche jaune dans le connecteur d’entrée vidéo. Assurez-vous que les fiches sont fermement insérées. N’utilisez pas la force. Entrée vidéo (jaune) Entrée audio (blanc) 3 Raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Ouvrez le couvercle du connecteur et branchez le câble dans le connecteur du câble A/V. N’utilisez pas la force. 4 Réglez le téléviseur sur le canal vidéo. Sélectionnez l’entrée vidéo. Consultez le manuel du téléviseur pour en savoir plus. 5Mettez le boîtier de l’appareil photo sous tension. Appuyez sur la touche 6 pendant environ une seconde pour mettre l’appareil sous tension en mode lecture. L’écran d’affichage des photos et le hautparleur du boîtier de l’appareil photo s’éteignent, puis les photos et les vidéos s’affichent sur le téléviseur.9 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Attention N’utilisez pas la force ou ne tirez pas sur le câble A/V lorsque vous manipulez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avec le câble A/V branché. Remarques • Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut être raccordé au connecteur d’entrée vidéo d’un enregistreur vidéo et les photos peuvent être enregistrées en vidéo ou sur DVD. • Le boîtier de l’appareil photo doit être raccordé aux téléviseurs qui prennent en charge le format HDMI à l’aide d’un câble mini HDMI (vendu séparément). Consultez la documentation fournie avec le téléviseur pour en savoir plus. • Si vous branchez ou débranchez le câble mini HDMI, l’écran passe à la vue d’une seule photo. Lorsque le menu est affiché, l’écran ne passe pas à la vue d’une seule photo même si vous branchez ou débranchez le câble mini HDMI. • Lorsque vous branchez le boîtier de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur à l’aide d’un câble mini HDMI, les sons de fonctionnement sont désactivés. • Le boîtier de l’appareil prend en charge les normes vidéo suivantes : NTSC (utilisée en Amérique du Nord, aux Caraïbes, dans une partie de l’Amérique du Sud et dans certains pays d’Asie du Sud-est) et PAL (utilisée au Royaume-Uni et dans la plupart des pays d’Europe, en Australie, en Nouvelle-Zélande et dans une partie de l’Asie et de l’Afrique). La norme SECAM n’est pas prise en charge. Si possible, l’appareil est réglé sur la norme utilisée dans votre pays ou votre région au départ de l’usine ; avant de raccorder l’appareil à un dispositif utilisant une norme vidéo différente, choisissez le mode vidéo approprié (page 149).20 MP i ression de Photos Impression de photos Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut être raccordé à une imprimante via le câble USB fourni, et les photos peuvent être directement imprimées à partir du boîtier de l’appareil photo sans utiliser d’ordinateur. Attention Une vidéo ne peut pas être imprimée. Si un fichier RAW est sélectionné pour l’impression, seule la copie JPEG sera imprimée. Remarque Le boîtier de l’appareil photo est conforme à PictBridge, une norme largement utilisée pour l’impression directe, et seules des imprimantes compatibles PictBridge peuvent être utilisées pour l’impression directe. Consultez la documentation fournie avec votre imprimante pour savoir si la norme PictBridge est prise en charge. Raccordement du boîtier de l’appareil photo Raccordez l’imprimante à l’alimentation électrique à l’aide du câble USB fourni. 1Mettez l’appareil hors tension. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension avant de brancher ou débrancher le câble USB. 2 Raccordez le câble USB à l’imprimante. Raccordez le câble USB à l’imprimante et mettez l’imprimante sous tension.2 MP i ression de Photos 3 Raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Ouvrez le couvercle du connecteur et branchez le câble dans le connecteur du câble USB. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ.. L’appareil s’allume et le message illustré à droite s’affiche ; appuyez alors une nouvelle fois sur la manette ADJ.. Remarque Si vous n’appuyez pas sur la manette ADJ. pendant l’affichage du message ci-dessus, celui-ci peut dans certains cas être remplacé après deux secondes par un message indiquant que l’appareil est raccordé à un ordinateur. Mettez l’appareil hors tension et appuyez de nouveau sur la manette ADJ.. Le message est remplacé par l’écran de lecture PictBridge (si l’écran de lecture PictBridge ne s’affiche pas, c’est que l’appareil est en train d’établir la connexion avec l’imprimante). Attention N’utilisez pas la force ou ne tirez pas sur le câble USB lorsque vous manipulez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avec le câble branché.22 MP i ression de Photos Impression Les photos peuvent être imprimées une par une, ou plusieurs photos peuvent être sélectionnées pour l’impression. Si une carte mémoire est insérée, les photos seront imprimées à partir de la carte mémoire ; dans le cas contraire, les photos seront imprimées à partir de la mémoire interne. Attention Ne débranchez pas le câble USB pendant l’impression. Remarque Si une erreur s’affiche pendant l’impression, vérifiez l’imprimante et agissez en conséquence. Impression des photos une par une Pour imprimer une photo sélectionnée : 1 Sélectionnez une photo. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 jusqu’à ce que la photo souhaitée s’affiche sur l’écran de lecture PictBridge, puis appuyez sur la manette ADJ.. Le menu illustré à droite Cs’affiche, sélectionnez 1 fichier et appuyez sur /D. Conseil : impression d’unecopie detoutesles photos Pour imprimer une copie de toutes les photos, appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour afficher les options illustrées ci-dessus et sélectionnez Ts fich..2 MP i ression de Photos 2 Réglez les paramètres d’impression. Le menu illustré à droite s’affiche ; sélectionnez une rubrique et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options disponibles ou choisissez Sélec imprim pour utiliser les réglages par défaut de l’imprimante actuelle (les options disponibles varient selon le type d’imprimante ; il est impossible de sélectionner des rubriques non prises en charge par l’imprimante connectée). Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer et revenir au menu impression directe. Paramètre Description Format papier Choisissez un format de papier. Type de papier Choisissez un type de papier. Type d’impr. Choisissez le nombre d’images par page. Impression date Ce paramètre permet d’inclure la date et l’heure d’enregistrement. Consultez la pages 20 et 149 pour en savoir plus sur la sélection du format d’affichage de la date et de l’heure. Si la photo a été prise avec l’option Horodatage (page 84), seule la date horodatée sera imprimée. Nom du fichier Ce paramètre permet d’inclure le nom du fichier. Optimisation image Choisissez si l’imprimante doit optimiser ou non les données de la photo. Taille impr. Choisissez la taille d’impression. Qlté impr. Choisissez la qualité d’impression. Impr. rapport * Ce paramètre permet d’imprimer un rapport. Nombre de copies Choisissez le nombre de copies imprimées. Économie d’encre * Ce paramètre permet d’utiliser moins de toner pendant l’impression. 1 face/2 faces * Ce paramètre permet d’imprimer ou non sur les deux faces du papier. * Imprimantes Ricoh uniquement. Consultez http://www.ricoh.com/ pour en savoir plus.2 MP i ression de Photos Remarque Pour configurer l’option sélectionnée comme paramètre par défaut pour l’imprimante actuelle lorsque le boîtier de l’appareil photo est connecté, appuyez sur la manette ADJ.. Le menu illustré à droite s’affiche ; sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/D. Sélectionnez Non pour quitter sans modifier le paramètre par défaut. 3Démarrez l’impression. CPour démarrer l’impression, appuyez sur /D lorsque le menu impression directe illustré à l’étape 2 s’affiche. Un message s’affiche pendant l’impression ; pour quitter avant la fin de l’impression, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. L’écran de lecture PictBridge s’affiche lorsque l’impression est terminée.2 MP i ression de Photos Impression de plusieurs photos Pour imprimer plusieurs photos : 1Appuyez sur la touche Z. Les photos s’affichent dans une vue multi-images. 2 Sélectionnez une photo. Sélectionnez une photo et appuyez sur C/D. 3 Choisissez le nombre de copies. Appuyez sur + ou – pour choisir le nombre de copies. Les photos sélectionnées sont marquées d’une icône ; pour désélectionner une photo, appuyez sur – jusqu’à ce que zéro s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez des photos supplémentaires. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner des photos supplémentaires et sur + ou – pour choisir le nombre de copies. 5 Réglez les paramètres d’impression. Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu impression directe. Réglez les paramètres comme indiqué à la page 123. 6Démarrez l’impression. Pour démarrer l’impression, appuyez sur C/ D lorsque le menu impression directe s’affiche. Un message s’affiche pendant l’impression ; pour quitter avant la fin de l’impression, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. L’écran de lecture PictBridge s’affiche lorsque l’impression est terminée. 4:3 N 2 réglages de l a’ PPareil Réglages de l’appareil Vous pouvez accéder aux menus permettant de modifier les réglages de l’appareil photo à partir des menus prise de vue et lecture (pages 58 et 101). 1Affichez les menus. Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu du mode actuel (page 58) (en mode scène, l’onglet MODE s’affiche). 2 Sélectionnez un onglet. Appuyez sur Fn pour sélectionner l’onglet du menu actuel et appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner l’onglet des options personnalisées (page 127) ou l’onglet de configuration (page 128). Appuyez sur Fn2 pour placer le curseur sur l’onglet sélectionné. 1 2 1Onglet des options personnalisées 2Onglet de configuration 3 Sélectionnez une rubrique de menu. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une rubrique du menu et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options de la rubrique sélectionnée. 4 Sélectionnez une option. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer et quitter (la procédure peut être différente pour certaines rubriques ; consultez la page de la rubrique concernée).2 réglages de l a’ PPareil L’onglet des options personnalisées contient les options suivantes : Option Défaut Page Enr. Mes Réglages — 129 Récupération de Mes Réglages — 131 Éditer Mes Réglages — 132 Fonct. réglage Mon réglage Non 133 Comp. BB de Mes Réglages Non 133 Manette ADJ Réglage  Balanceblancs 134 Manette ADJ Réglage 2 ISO 134 Manette ADJ Réglage  Qualité 134 Manette ADJ Réglage  Réglages image 134 Option Défaut Page Déclencheur ADJ Non 135 Rég. touche Fn AF/MF 136 Rég. touche Fn2 Flash manuel 136 Réglages bouton +/– Comp.expo. 137 Options du sélecteur de mode lecture Réglage1 138 Options sélecteur de mode M Réglage1 138 Mode M par  seule pression Prioroverture 1382 réglages de l a’ PPareil L’onglet de configuration contient les options suivantes : Option Défaut Page Format [Carte] — 139 Format [Mémoire interne] — 139 Luminosité LCD — 139 Transparence écran DIRECT Normale 140 Pas de corr. expo/flash 1/3EV 140 Sensibilité ISO auto-hi AUTO 400 140 Flash auxiliaire AF Oui 140 Mode veille 5?Minuten 141 Extinction auto 5?Minuten 141 Écran de lecture LCD 141 Attén. luminosité auto LCD Oui 142 Délai de validation LCD 0,5?secondes 142 Sons touches Tous 142 Réglages volume (moyenne) 142 Zoom par  seule pression 9,8?× 143 Rotation auto Oui 143 Distance min de prise de vue Afficher 144 Option Défaut Page Réglage niveau Affichage 144 Options affichage du cadrage 144 Affichage touche Fn Oui 145 Afficher nom de Mon Réglage Non 145 Affichage infos prise de vue Non 145 CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE) Oui 146 Réglage espace couleurs sRVB 146 Image zoom numérique Normale 147 Mémo position curseur menu Non 147 N° séquentiel de la carte Oui 148 Réglage date — 149 Language/L (Variable * ) 149 Sortie vidéo (Variable * ) 149 Sortie HMDI AUTO 149 Lancer extraction réglages Boîtier 150 * Variableselon lepaysoularégion d’achat. Attention • Il est possible que les options affichées au niveau des onglets des options personnalisées et de configuration varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. • Il est possible que les options affichées au niveau des onglets des options personnalisées et de configuration varient selon si l’unité appareil photo est installée ou non sur le boîtier.29 réglages de l a’ PPareil Options personnalisées Enr. Mes Réglages Les réglages enregistrés via Enr. Mes Réglages peuvent être rappelés en positionnant le sélecteur de mode sur MY, MY2 ou MY, vous permettant de créer facilement et de rappeler jusqu’à six jeux pour les réglages de prise de vue fréquemment utilisés. 1Ajustez les réglages. Configurez l’appareil photo avec les réglages souhaités. Ci-après sont indiqués certains réglages pouvant être enregistrés dans les réglages MY : • Réglages de l’appareil : Mode prise de vue (mode 5, P, A, S, M ou 4), position du zoom (mode 4), ouverture (modes A et M), vitesse d’obturation (modes S et M), modes mise au point manuelle, macro, flash, retardateur et affichage. • Options du menu prise de vue : toutes les options à l’exception des options Prise de vue à intervalles, Décalage ouverture auto et Changement de mode prise de vue. La compensation de la balance des blancs peut être attribuée si le réglage Comp. BB de Mes Réglages est activé (page 133). • Options de configuration : Rég. touche Fn/Rég. touche Fn2 (si l’option Fonct. réglage Mon réglage est activée ; voir page 133), Reglages bouton +/-, Sensibilite ISO auto-hi, Pas de corr. expo/ flash, Distance min de prise de vue, Reglage niveau, Options affichage du cadrage, Affichage infos prise de vue, CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE) et Image zoom numerique. Remarque Les réglages pouvant être enregistrés dans les réglages MY varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.0 réglages de l a’ PPareil 2 Sélectionnez Enr. Mes Réglages. Sélectionnez Enr. Mes Réglages au niveau de l’onglet des options personnalisées, puis appuyez sur Fn2. 3 Enregistrez les réglages. Pour attribuer les réglages aux fonctions MY, MY2 et MY du sélecteur de mode, sélectionnez MY1, MY2 Cou MY3 et appuyez sur /D (pour quitter sans enregistrer les réglages, appuyez sur la touche DISP.). Pour enregistrer les réglages dans une « boîte » à rappeler et à assigner ultérieurement au sélecteur de mode (page 131), sélectionnez Boîte Mes Réglages et appuyez sur Fn2. Sélectionnez la boîte Csouhaitée et appuyez sur /D. Les boîtes sans nom seront nommées avec la date du jour. Si un nom a déjà été assigné à la boîte, la boîte de dialogue illustrée à droite s’affiche. Sélectionnez Oui pour utiliser le nom actuel et Non pour utiliser un nom basé sur la date du jour. réglages de l a’ PPareil Récupération de Mes Réglages Copiez les réglages d’une « boîte » vers MY, MY2 ou MY. Sélectionnez Récupération de Mes Réglages dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, appuyez sur Fn2, puis procédez comme suit. 1 Sélectionnez une destination. Sélectionnez la destination des réglages mémorisés (MY1, MY2 ou MY3) et appuyez sur Fn2. 2 Sélectionnez la source. Sélectionnez les réglages qui seront attribués à la position choisie sur le sélecteur de mode et appuyez sur C/ D. Pour quitter sans assigner les réglages au sélecteur de mode, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Attention Si Éditer Mes Réglages est utilisé pour modifier les boîtes actuellement assignées au sélecteur de mode, les modifications seront prises en compte lorsque le sélecteur de mode sera positionné sur la position assignée à la boîte concernée. Les modifications apportées aux réglages directement assignés à MY, MY2 ou MY ne sont cependant pas prises en compte dans les boîtes actuellement assignées au sélecteur de mode, et si les boîtes sont modifiées par la suite, ces modifications ne seront pas prises en compte dans les réglages assignés à MY, MY2 ou MY.2 réglages de l a’ PPareil Éditer Mes Réglages Modifiez et renommez les réglages enregistrés avec Enr. Mes Réglages. Sélectionnez Éditer Mes Réglages dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, appuyez sur Fn2, puis procédez comme suit. 1 Sélectionnez un réglage. Pour assigner les réglages à MY, MY2 ou MY sur le sélecteur de mode, sélectionnez MY1, MY2 ou MY3 et appuyez sur Fn2. Pour modifier les réglages d’une « boîte », sélectionnez Boîte Mes Réglages et appuyez sur Fn2. Sélectionnez la boîte souhaitée et appuyez sur Fn2. 2Modifiez les réglages. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner les rubriques et appuyez sur Fn2 pour les modifier (consultez la section de chaque rubrique dans ce manuel pour en savoir plus). Après avoir modifié chaque rubrique, appuyez sur Fn pour revenir à la liste des réglages, où vous pouvez modifier d’autres réglages. 3 Enregistrez les modifications et quittez. Appuyez sur C/D pour enregistrer les modifications et quitter (pour quitter sans enregistrer les modifications, appuyez sur la touche DISP.). réglages de l a’ PPareil Conseil : nommerMes Réglages Sélectionnez Nom à l’étape 2 pour renommer le réglage. Le nom actuel est sélectionné dans la zone du nom ; pour modifier le nom actuel, appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour positionner le curseur dans la zone du nom et appuyez sur – pour placer le curseur dans la zone du clavier (pour supprimer le nom actuel, appuyez sur – lorsque le nom est sélectionné). Sélectionnez les caractères à l’aide de +, –, Fn ou Fn2 et appuyez sur C/D pour saisir le caractère sélectionné à la position actuelle du curseur (pour supprimer le caractère avant la position actuelle du curseur, sélectionnez [Suppr.]). Appuyez sur la touche t pour basculer entre majuscules et minuscules. Les noms peuvent avoir jusqu’à 32 caractères de long. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour quitter ou sur la touche DISP. pour quitter sans renommer les réglages. Fonct. réglage Mon réglage Sélectionnez Oui pour enregistrer les réglages attribués aux touches Fn (page 136) dans les réglages MY enregistrés sous Enr. Mes Réglages. Comp. BB de Mes Réglages Sélectionnez Oui pour enregistrer le réglage de compensation de la balance des blancs (page 89) dans les réglages MY enregistrés sous Enr. Mes Réglages. Zone du nom Zone du clavier Zone du clavier réglages de l a’ PPareil Manette ADJ Réglage Assignez jusqu’à quatre options fréquemment utilisées à la manette ADJ. pour un accès rapide en mode 5, P, A, S ou M. Par défaut, la manette ADJ. peut être utilisée pour la balance des blancs (page 86), la sensibilité ISO (page 90), la qualité d’image (page 61) et le réglage des images (page 71). Les fonctions suivantes peuvent également être attribuées : compensation de la balance des blancs (page 89), mise au point (page 64), mesure (page 70), continu (page 73), cadrage (page 75), compensation du flash (page 78), niveau de flash manuel (page 79) et correction de l’exposition (page 85). En mode 4, la manette ADJ. peut être utilisée pour sélectionner la balance des blancs et la compensation de l’exposition (la compensation de l’exposition n’est pas disponible en mode vidéo). réglages de l a’ PPareil Utilisation delamanette ADJ. Pour sélectionner une option actuellement assignée à la manette ADJ. : 1Affichez les options. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. en mode prise de vue et appuyez sur la manette vers la gauche ou vers la droite ou appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour afficher les options attribuées à la manette. Réglage 1 Réglage 2 Réglage 4 Réglage 3 2 Sélectionnez une option. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option et appuyez sur la manette ADJ. ou sur C/D. Conseil Maintenez la manette ADJ. enfoncée pour faire défiler rapidement les options disponibles. Déclencheur ADJ Sélectionnez Oui pour utiliser le déclencheur afin de valider l’option sélectionnée en mode ADJ.. réglages de l a’ PPareil Rég. touche Fn1/Fn2 Sélectionnez les fonctions attribuées aux touches Fn et Fn2 avec les options Rég. touche Fn1/Fn2 de l’onglet des options personnalisées. Ci-après sont indiquées certaines des fonctions pouvant être attribuées aux touches Fn et Fn2. Option Description AF/MF Cette option permet de basculer entre AF multi ou AF spot et la mise au point manuelle (page 64). * 1, 3 AF/Snap Cette option permet de basculer entre AF multi ou AF spot et la mise au point snap (page 64). * 4 Verrouill. AE Cette option permet de verrouiller l’exposition. * 2, 5 JPEG>RAW* 10 Si une option autre que RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/Taille, appuyez sur la touche Fn pour sélectionner une option RAW avec le même rapport d’affichage (page 61). * 5, 6 Couleur>N et B Sélectionnez l’option Noir et Blanc pour le paramètre Réglages image (page 71). * 7 Couleur>TE Sélectionnez l’option N et B(TE) pour le paramètre Réglages image (page 71). * 7 Comp. expo. Cette option affiche le curseur de la correction d’exposition (page 85). * 5 Balance blancs Cette option permet d’afficher les options de la balance des blancs (page 86). Correction WB Cette option affiche les commandes de compensation de la balance des blancs (page 89). * 9 ISO Cette option permet d’afficher les options de sensibilité ISO (page 90). * 7 Qualité Cette option affiche les options de qualité et de taille de l’image (page 61). Mise au point Cette option affiche les options de mise au point (page 64). * 4 Réglages image Cette option affiche les options de réglage des images (page 71). * 7 Mesure expo. Cette option affiche les options de mesure de l’exposition (page 70). * 7 Mode Continu Cette option affiche les options de prise de vue en continu (page 73). * 8 Cadrage auto Cette option affiche les options de cadrage (page 75). * 8 Cible macro Cette option permet de positionner la cible de mise au point en mode macro (page 68). * 3 Correct. flash Cette option affiche le curseur de compensation du flash (page 78). * 4, 5 Niveau flash Cette option permet de régler la puissance du flash manuel (page 79). * 8 réglages de l a’ PPareil * 1 Si la mise au point est verrouillée en mode mise au point automatique (page 64), la sélection de la mise au point manuelle définit la distance de mise au point sur la distance à laquelle la mise au point est verrouillée. * 2 L’exposition ne peut pas être verrouillée en mode M. Un appui sur la touche Fn en mode M définit l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation sur des valeurs proches de celles nécessaires pour obtenir une exposition optimale. * 3 Non disponible lorsque l’option Portrait, Sports, Paysage ou Nuit est sélectionnée en mode 4. * 4 Non disponible lorsque Paysage est sélectionné en mode 4. * 5 Non disponible lorsque Vidéo est sélectionné en mode 4. * 6 Non disponible lorsque Correction biais est sélectionné en mode 4. * 7 Non disponible en mode 4 autre que Correction biais. * 8 Non disponible en mode 4. * 9 Non disponible en mode 4 autre que Vidéo. * 10 La taille des images de fichiers RAW varie en fonction des réglages sélectionnés sous Qualité image/Taille. Réglages sous Qualité image/Taille Taille des données RAW L (16:9), M (16:9), 5M, 3M, 1M, VGA RAW (16:9) L (4:3), M (4:3) RAW (4:3) L (3:2), M (3:2) RAW (3:2) L (1:1), M (1:1) RAW (1:1) Par défaut, l’option AF/MF est attribuée à la touche Fn et l’option Niveau flash à la touche Fn2 button. Réglages bouton +/- Sélectionnez les fonctions à attribuer aux touches + et –. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Non, Correct. flash (page 78), Niveau de flash manuel (page 79) et Correction de l’exposition (page 85). réglages de l a’ PPareil Options du sélecteur de mode lecture/options sélecteur de mode M Sélectionnez les fonctions à attribuer à la manette ADJ. et au sélecteur plus-moins en mode lecture et en mode M. Options du sélecteur de mode lecture Options sélecteur de mode M Réglage 1 Réglage 2 Réglage 1 Réglage 2 Manette ADJ. Image suivante/ précédente Défilement gauche/droite Vitesse d’obturation Ouverture Sélecteur plusmoins Zoom avant/ arrière Défilement haut/bas Ouverture Vitesse d’obturation Mode M par 1 seule pression Lorsque la correction d’exposition est assignée aux touches + et – (page 137) ou lorsque le verrouillage AE est assigné aux touches Fn et Fn2 (page 136), un appui sur la touche concernée en mode exposition manuelle définit l’ouverture et/ou la vitesse d’obturation sur des valeurs proches de celles nécessaires pour obtenir une exposition optimale. Sélectionnez un réglage parmi les options suivantes. • Prior overture : l’ouverture conserve la valeur sélectionnée ; la vitesse d’obturation est ajustée pour obtenir une exposition optimale. • Prior obturat. : la vitesse d’obturation conserve la valeur sélectionnée ; l’ouverture est ajustée pour obtenir une exposition optimale. • Programme : l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation sont ajustées pour obtenir une exposition optimale. Remarque En mode exposition manuelle, la correction de l’exposition ne peut pas être effectuée avec les touches + et – et le verrouillage AE ne peut pas être obtenu avec les touches Fn.9 réglages de l a’ PPareil Configuration Format [Carte]/Format [Mémoire interne] Sélectionnez Format [Carte] pour formater la carte mémoire avant la première utilisation, après l’avoir utilisée dans un autre dispositif, ou si une erreur de carte s’affiche lorsque la carte est insérée dans le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Sélectionnez Format [Mémoire interne] si un message s’affiche vous demandant de formater la mémoire interne. Attention • Le formatage supprime définitivement toutes les données sur la carte ou dans la mémoire interne. Avant le formatage, copiez sur un ordinateur toutes les données que vous souhaitez conserver (page 151). • Sélectionner Format [Carte] affiche un message d’erreur si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée. Mettez l’appareil hors tension et insérez une carte mémoire. Conseil : protection contrel’écriture Pour empêcher le formatage des cartes mémoire, faites glisser le curseur de protection contre l’écriture sur la position « LOCK » (page 16). Replacez le curseur sur sa position originale pour retrouver un fonctionnement normal. Luminosité LCD Cette option permet d’afficher la commande illustrée à droite. Appuyez sur + ou – pour ajuster la luminosité de l’écran d’affichage Cdes photos, puis appuyez sur /D pour retourner au menu configuration. Appuyez de nouveau sur C/D pour quitter le mode prise de vue ou le mode lecture.0 réglages de l a’ PPareil Remarque L’écran luminosité affiche la vue à travers l’objectif (mode prise de vue) ou la photo la plus récemment affichée (mode lecture ; si aucune photo n’est disponible en lecture, aucune image n’est affichée sur l’écran luminosité). Transparence écran DIRECT Sélectionnez l’intensité de l’image d’arrière-plan affichée sur l’écran DIRECT : Sombre, Normal, Clair ou Image désactiv. Pas de corr. expo/ flash Sélectionnez la valeur des pas pour la correction de l’exposition et la compensation du flash. Sélectionnez 1/2EV ou 1/3EV. Remarque En mode priorité à l’obturation, la valeur des pas est réglée sur 1/3EV, même si l’option 1/2EV est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Pas de corr. expo/ flash. Sensibilité ISO auto-hi Choisissez la sensibilité maximum sélectionnée par l’appareil photo lorsque Auto-Hi est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO en mode prise de vue (page 90). Sélectionnez ISO 200 (AUTO 200), 400 (AUTO 400), 800 (AUTO 800), 1600 (AUTO 1600) ou 3200 (AUTO3200). Remarque Du bruit (variations de la luminosité et de la couleur) peut apparaître dans les photos prises avec des sensibilités élevées. Flash auxiliaire AF Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée, le flash auxiliaire AF s’allume pour aider au fonctionnement de la mise au point, lorsque le sujet est faiblement éclairé. réglages de l a’ PPareil Mode veille Sélectionnez la durée à l’issue de laquelle le mode veille de l’écran d’affichage des photos est activé. Sélectionnez Non, 1 minute, 5 minutes ou 30 minutes. Le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash s’allume en mode veille. Appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche pour annuler le mode veille. Attention • Le boîtier de l’appareil photo ne passe pas en mode veille lorsque : • Le menu prise de vue, options personnalisées ou configuration est affiché. • Le boîtier de l’appareil photo est mis sous tension en appuyant sur la touche 6 et que l’interrupteur MARCHE-ARRÊT est sur ARRÊT. • L’objectif de l’unité appareil photo n’est pas replié en mode veille. Extinction auto Choisissez le délai avant que l’appareil se mette automatiquement hors tension pour économiser l’énergie en cas de non-utilisation. Sélectionnez Non (l’appareil photo ne s’éteint pas automatiquement), 1 minute, 5 minutes ou 30 minutes. Remarque Lorsque les options Mode veille et Extinction auto sont activées, la fonction Extinction auto est activée une fois la durée définie pour Mode veille écoulée. Écran de lecture Sélectionnez l’écran d’affichage des images : LCD (écran d’affichage des photos) ou VF (viseur), lorsque le viseur LCD(VF-2) est installé sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Si le viseur n’est pas installé, les images sont affichées sur l’écran d’affichage des photos quel que soit le réglage de l’option Écran de lecture.2 réglages de l a’ PPareil Attén. luminosité auto LCD Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée, l’écran d’affichage des photos s’atténue pour économiser de l’énergie lorsque l’appareil photo est maintenu immobile pendant environ cinq secondes en mode prise de vue. Déplacez l’appareil photo ou appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche pour rétablir la luminosité de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Délai de validation LCD Choisissez la durée d’affichage des photos sur l’écran d’affichage des photos immédiatement après la prise de vue. Sélectionnez 0,5, 1, 2 et 3secondes, Garder (les photos s’affichent jusqu’à ce que le déclencheur soit enfoncé à mi-course et elles peuvent être visualisées avec le zoom en lecture ou supprimées ; voir pages 38 et 39) ou Non (les photos ne sont pas affichées sur l’écran d’affichage des photos après la prise de vue). Sons touches Choisissez lorsque l’appareil émet un son. Option Description Tous Des sons sont émis au démarrage, lorsque le déclencheur est relâché, lorsque l’appareil effectue la mise au point et lorsqu’une erreur survient. Si Son ou Aff.+son est sélectionné pour Réglage niveau (page 32), l’appareil émettra également un signal sonore à intervalles réguliers lorsque l’appareil est de niveau. Son niveau Si l’option Son ou Aff.+Son est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Réglage niveau, l’appareil émet un signal sonore à intervalles réguliers lorsqu’il est de niveau. Sons déclench. Des sons sont émis lorsque le déclencheur est relâché ou lorsqu’une erreur survient. Si Son ou Aff.+son est sélectionné pour Réglage niveau, l’appareil émettra un signal sonore à intervalles réguliers lorsque l’appareil est de niveau. Réglages volume Sélectionnez le volume pour les sons décrits dans la section « Son touches ». Choisissez entre (non), (faible), (moyen) et (fort). réglages de l a’ PPareil Zoom par 1 seule pression Sélectionnez l’agrandissement avec lequel les photos Csont affichées lors d’un zoom avant en utilisant la touche /D ou la manette ADJ. (page 38). Sélectionnez 5,7×, 9,8× ou 16×. Remarques • Le taux d’agrandissement maximal varie en fonction de la taille de l’image (page 38). • Si le taux d’agrandissement maximal d’une taille d’image est inférieur au réglage spécifié dans Zoom par 1 seule pression, l’image peut être agrandie au taux maximal de la taille d’image (page 38). Rotation auto Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher automatiquement les photos avec l’orientation correcte pendant la lecture. Attention L’affichage des vidéos, des photos prises avec la fonction Cont.M + (page 73) et des photos prises alors que l’appareil photo est à l’envers ou fortement incliné vers l’avant ou vers l’arrière ne subit aucune rotation. Les photos ne sont pas pivotées lorsque l’unité appareil photo n’est pas fixée sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo, pendant les diaporamas, en vue multi-images ou affichées sur un téléviseur, ni lorsque l’appareil est à l’envers ou si l’appareil est renversé pendant le zoom en lecture ou lorsqu’une correction des biais est en cours. Remarque Lors du cadrage ou lors de la prise de photos à l’aide de la fonction Continu, l’appareil photo enregistre uniquement l’orientation de la première photo de chaque série. Les photos restantes ne s’affichent pas avec l’orientation correcte si l’appareil a été renversé pendant la prise de vue. réglages de l a’ PPareil Distance min de prise de vue Sélectionnez Afficher pour afficher la distance minimale de prise de vue sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Réglage niveau L’appareil photo vous informe que l’image est de niveau lors de la prise de vue à l’aide de l’indicateur de niveau et de sons. Choisissez les réglages de l’indicateur de niveau (page 32). Options affichage du cadrage Choisissez le type de la grille de cadrage disponible en mode prise de vue (page 42). Paramètre Description Une grille trois par trois pour des compositions en « règle de trois ». Une grille quatre par quatre avec des diagonales d’un angle à l’autre qui facilitent le centrage du sujet. Cette grille est utilisée pour des photos d’architecture ou de produits à afficher. Une grille deux par deux, avec le centre du cadre libre, pour faciliter la visualisation du sujet. Cette grille est utilisée pour les sujets en mouvement. réglages de l a’ PPareil Affichage touche Fn Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher les options actuellement assignées aux touches Fn lorsque l’appareil photo est mis sous tension, lorsque le mode prise de vue est sélectionné ou lorsqu’un nouveau mode est sélectionné avec le sélecteur de mode. Afficher nom de Mon Réglage Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher le nom des réglages assignés à la position actuelle du sélecteur de mode, lorsque le sélecteur est positionné sur MY, MY2 ou MY. Affichage infos prise de vue Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher les icônes de prise de vue dans un cadre entourant la vue à travers l’objectif (page 8), facilitant le cadrage des photos sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Le cadre n’est pas affiché en mode vidéo. 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 4:3 N  réglages de l a’ PPareil CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE) Choisissez le nombre et le type de copies créées avec le cadrage couleur (page 77). Sélectionnez Oui pour enregistrer trois copies de chaque prise de vue (une en noir et blanc, une deuxième en couleur et une troisième en monochrome teinté), Non pour enregistrer deux copies (une en noir et blanc et la seconde en couleur). Remarque Quel que soit le réglage choisi, trois copies de chaque photo sont enregistrées si l’option N et B(TE) est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Réglages image. Réglage espace couleurs Choisissez l’espace colorimétrique utilisé pour enregistrer les photos. sRVB est largement utilisé pour reproduire des images numériques, mais offre une gamme de couleurs plus petite que AdobeRVB. Attention L’espace colorimétrique Adobe RVB a été développé par Adobe Systems Inc. et il est compatible avec l’espace colorimétrique par défaut utilisé dans Adobe Photoshop et d’autres logiciels de retouche photo. Cependant, notez que les couleurs seront correctement reproduites uniquement dans les logiciels prenant en charge l’espace colorimétrique Adobe RVB. Notez également qu’un équipement spécialisé est requis pour imprimer la plage entière des couleurs de la gamme Adobe RVB ; lors d’une impression avec une imprimante domestique grand public ou à travers un service de tirages photo numérique, les couleurs seront généralement moins vives que celles des photos utilisant l’espace colorimétrique sRVB. réglages de l a’ PPareil Image zoom numérique Indiquez comment les photos prises à l’aide du zoom numérique sont enregistrées. • Normale : zoom numérique normal. Une partie de l’image est rognée et la photo est agrandie au format sélectionné sous Qualité image/Taille, ce qui entraîne une baisse de la qualité de l’image. • Taille auto : une partie de l’image est rognée et l’image est enregistrée au format rogné. La qualité de l’image reste la même. La taille de l’image est cependant réduite. La taille de l’image rognée varie en fonction du taux de zoom. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo. Le zoom Taille auto est uniquement disponible lorsque le rapport 4:3 est sélectionné pour L, sous Qualité image/Taille (page 61). La taille d’image actuelle s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos lorsque l’appareil photo effectue un zoom avant. 4:3 N Attention La fonction Taille auto n’a aucun effet lorsque l’option Cont.M + ou Correction biais est sélectionnée en mode 4 ou lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/ Taille. Mémo position curseur menu Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée, la rubrique la plus récemment utilisée sera sélectionnée lorsque le menu s’affiche. réglages de l a’ PPareil N° séquentiel de la carte Choisissez comment l’appareil photo nomme les fichiers image lors de l’enregistrement des photos sur une carte mémoire. • Oui : les noms de fichier sont composés de « R » suivi d’un nombre à sept chiffres (par exemple « R0010001. jpg »), par ordre ascendant de 0010001 à 9999999. Lorsqu’une nouvelle carte mémoire est insérée, la numérotation des fichiers continue à partir du dernier nombre utilisé. • Non : les noms de fichier sont composés de « RIMG » suivi d’un nombre à quatre chiffres (par exemple « RIMG0001.jpg »), par ordre ascendant de 0001 à 9999. Lorsqu’une nouvelle carte mémoire est insérée, la numérotation des fichiers est réinitialisée (0001). Remarques • Cette option s’applique uniquement aux cartes mémoire. Les noms de photo dans la mémoire interne sont composés de « RIMG » suivi d’un nombre à quatre chiffres. • Les photos copiées sur un ordinateur à l’aide de DL-10 (page 151) se voient attribuer un nouveau nom, composé de « RIMG » suivi d’un nombre à quatre chiffres. • Les photos prises avec AdobeRVB sélectionné pour Réglage espace couleurs (page 146) sont indiquées par des noms de fichier commençant par un soulignement (p.ex. « _R010001. jpg » ou « _RIMG001.jpg »). Attention Lorsque l’option Oui est sélectionnée, aucune autre photo ne peut être enregistrée sur la carte mémoire si celle-ci contient un dossier numéroté 999 et un nom de fichier terminant par 9999 ; lorsque l’option Non est sélectionnée, aucune autre photo ne peut être enregistrée sur la carte mémoire si celle-ci contient un fichier numéroté 9999. Pour prendre des photos supplémentaires, formatez la carte après avoir copié son contenu sur un ordinateur.9 réglages de l a’ PPareil Réglage date Configurez l’horloge de l’appareil (page 20). Remarque Si vous laissez la batterie dans le boîtier de l’appareil photo pendant au moins deux heures, la batterie peut être ensuite retirée pendant environ une semaine sans qu’il soit nécessaire de reconfigurer l’horloge. Language/L Choisissez la langue d’affichage des messages et des menus de l’appareil photo. Option Description Option Description Japonais ??????? Russe English Anglais Chinois simplifié Deutsch Allemand Chinois traditionnel Français Français Coréen Italiano Italien Thaï Español Espagnol Sortie vidéo Si vous raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur ou un magnétoscope (page 118), choisissez une sortie vidéo qui correspond à la norme utilisée par le dispositif. L’appareil prend en charge les normes NTSC et PAL ; SECAM n’est pas pris en charge. Sortie HDMI Sélectionnez la résolution de sortie des images lors de l’utilisation d’un câble mini HDMI. Sélectionnez AUTO ou Manuel. Remarque Le réglage normal est AUTO. Si la résolution des images affichées sur le téléviseur est faible avec l’option Auto, sélectionnez Manuel. Il est possible que la qualité de l’image s’améliore.0 réglages de l a’ PPareil Lancer extraction réglages Lors de la mise hors tension de l’appareil photo, les réglages sont enregistrés dans le boîtier de l’appareil photo et dans l’unité appareil photo. Sélectionnez la destination de lecture des réglages : Boîtier ou Unité app. ph.. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Copie des photos sur un ordinateur Cette section décrit comment copier des photos du boîtier de l’appareil photo sur votre ordinateur. Les instructions pour Windows sont détaillées ci-dessous ; pour Macintosh, les instructions commencent à la page 162. Remarque Les boîtes de dialogue qui illustrent cette section peuvent légèrement différer de celles affichées sur votre ordinateur. Windows Vous pouvez copier des photos sur votre ordinateur avec l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Installez le logiciel DL-10 fourni (page 153) et utilisez-le pour copier des photos comme indiqué à la page 159. • Copiez des photos sans l’aide du logiciel DL-10 ou d’un autre logiciel de copie d’images (page 160). Remarque Des instructions détaillées sont disponibles dans le Mode d’emploi du logiciel sur le CD fourni (page ix).2 coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Configuration requise Avant d’utiliser le CD fourni, vérifiez que votre ordinateur est compatible avec les exigences suivantes. Consultez la documentation fournie avec votre ordinateur pour en savoir plus. OS Windows 2000 Professional SP 4, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional SP 3, Windows Vista SP 2 CPU Windows 2000/Windows XP : Pentium® lll 500MHz ou supérieur Windows Vista : Pentium® lll 1GHz ou supérieur RAM Windows 2000/Windows XP : 256Mo ou plus Windows Vista : 512Mo ou plus Espace disque disponible Un minimum de 160Mo est requis pour l’installation Vidéo 1024×768 pixels ou plus avec couleurs 16 bits ou plus Divers • Lecteur CD-ROM compatible • Port USB compatible Attention • Les systèmes d’exploitation de 64 bits ne sont pas pris en charge. Les systèmes d’exploitation, qui ont été mis à jour à partir d’une version précédente, ne sont pas pris en charge car l’USB pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement. Le logiciel fourni peut ne pas fonctionner correctement sur des systèmes qui ont été mis à jour ou modifiés avec des versions Service Pack. • Connectez le boîtier de l’appareil photo directement sur le port USB intégré. Les ports USB rajoutés via le bus PCI ou d’autres cartes d’extension ne sont pas pris en charge. Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut ne pas fonctionner correctement s’il est raccordé à un concentrateur USB ou à un clavier. • Plus de RAM peut être nécessaire pour la gestion des vidéos et des gros fichiers. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr CD fourni À l’insertion du CD fourni dans un lecteur de CD-ROM, la boîte de dialogue illustrée à droite s’affiche. • Installation du logiciel : installez les applications suivantes. DL-10 : cette application permet de copier des photos sur l’ordinateur en une seule opération. Irodio Photo & Video Studio : cette application permet de visualiser et de retoucher des photos sur l’ordinateur. Pour en savoir plus, consultez le menu Aide dans Irodio Photo & Video Studio ou consultez le site web suivant : http://www.pixela. co.jp/oem/irodio/e/irodio_digitalphoto_videostudio/ Pilote USB : cette application permet de raccorder les anciens appareils photo Ricoh à des ordinateurs sous Windows 98, Windows 98 SE, Windows Me ou Windows 2000. Cette application n’est pas nécessaire pour ce produit. Pilote WIA : cette application permet de raccorder les anciens appareils photo Ricoh aux ordinateurs sous Windows XP et Windows Vista. Cette application n’est pas nécessaire pour ce produit. • Voir le manuel de l’utilisateur (version logiciel) : visualisez le Mode d’emploi du logiciel au format PDF (page ix). Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader est requis ; le cas échéant, installez Adobe Reader comme indiqué à la page 156. • Voir le contenu du CD-ROM : parcourez le contenu du CD, qui comprend Adobe Reader (page 156). Pour installer Irodio Photo & Video Studio sans installer d’autres applications, ouvrez le dossier « Irodio Photo & Video Studio » et double-cliquez sur Irodio Photo & Video Studio.exe. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Installation du logiciel Suivez la procédure de la page suivante pour installer le logiciel fourni. Les illustrations proviennent de Windows XP. Attention • Si le boîtier de l’appareil photo est raccordé à l’ordinateur, débranchez-le avant de commencer l’installation. • Les utilisateurs de l’application « Caplio » doivent savoir que l’application « DC » fournie avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo remplace les éléments suivants de la suite logicielle Caplio : Logiciel Caplio Logiciel DC RICOH Gate La DL-10 Caplio Viewer DU-10 * Caplio Server SR-10 * Caplio Setting ST-10 * *Non utilisé par ce produit. Si le logiciel Caplio ci-dessus est actuellement installé, il vous sera demandé de le désinstaller avant d’installer le logiciel DC fourni. Suivez les instructions à l’écran. L’installation du logiciel DC remplace Caplio Viewer, Caplio Server et Caplio Setting avec les applications listées ci-dessus, qui peuvent être utilisées de la même façon que les versions Caplio (notez que ces logiciels ne seront pas installés si vous avez désinstallé le logiciel Caplio comme indiqué à la page 158 avant d’installer le logiciel DC). Notez que la désinstallation du logiciel pour les anciens appareils photo Ricoh peut réinitialiser les préférences utilisateur de DL-10 ou RICOH Gate La. • Les droits Administrateur sont requis pour l’installation. • DL-10 est conçu pour fonctionner dans un environnement individuel et ne peut pas être exécuté en réseau. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr 1 Insérez le CD fourni. Mettez l’ordinateur sous tension et insérez le CD fourni dans le lecteur CD-ROM. • Windows Vista : une boîte de dialogue d’exécution automatique s’affiche. Cliquez sur Exécuter Autorun.exe pour afficher la fenêtre de l’assistant d’installation. • Autres versions de Windows : la fenêtre de l’assistant d’installation s’affiche automatiquement. 2 Cliquez sur Installation du logiciel. • Windows Vista : une boîte de dialogue « Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur » s’affiche. Cliquez sur Permettre pour afficher la boîte de dialogue de sélection de la langue. • Autres versions de Windows : la boîte de dialogue de sélection de la langue s’affiche automatiquement. 3 Sélectionnez une langue et cliquez sur OK. La boîte de dialogue illustrée à droite s’affiche ensuite. Cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Sélectionnez une destination. Le logiciel fourni sera installé dans le dossier indiqué dans Dossier Cible. Cliquez sur Suivant. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr 5 Confirmez la destination et cliquez sur [Suivant]. L’installateur Irodio Photo & Video Studio démarre (selon votre ordinateur, la fenêtre d’accueil illustrée à droite peut rester affichée un certain temps avant que l’installation commence). Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour installer le logiciel fourni. 6 Cliquez sur Terminer. La boîte de dialogue illustrée à droite s’affiche lorsque l’installation est terminée. Cliquez sur Terminer. 7 Redémarrez l’ordinateur. Un message s’affiche vous demandant de redémarrer votre ordinateur. Sélectionnez Oui, je souhaite redémarrer mon ordinateur maintenant et cliquez sur Terminer pour redémarrer l’ordinateur. 8Débloquez DL-10. Une boîte de dialogue de sécurité Windows s’affiche après le redémarrage. Cliquez sur Débloquer pour le logiciel DL-10. Remarque Consultez la page 158 pour en savoir plus sur la désinstallation du logiciel. Installation de l’application Adobe Reader Adobe Reader est requis pour visualiser le Mode d’emploi du logiciel. Si Adobe Reader n’est pas déjà installé, il est possible de le faire à partir du CD fourni comme indiqué ci-dessous. Attention • Débranchez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avant de commencer l’installation. • Les droits Administrateur sont requis pour l’installation. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr 1 Insérez le CD fourni. Mettez l’ordinateur sous tension et insérez le CD fourni dans le lecteur CD-ROM. • Windows Vista : une boîte de dialogue d’exécution automatique s’affiche. Cliquez sur Exécuter Autorun.exe pour afficher la fenêtre de l’assistant d’installation. • Autres versions de Windows : la fenêtre de l’assistant d’installation s’affiche automatiquement. 2 Cliquez sur Voir le contenu du CD-ROM. Le contenu du CD s’affiche. 3 Installez Adobe Reader. Double-cliquez sur le dossier « Acrobat Reader », puis sur le dossier de la langue de votre choix. Double-cliquez sur le fichier commençant par « AdbeRdr910 » et suivez les instructions à l’écran. Si une boîte de dialogue « Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur » s’affiche, cliquez sur Continuer. Remarques • Consultez le menu Aide dans Adobe Reader pour en savoir plus sur Adobe Reader. • L’installation de l’application Adobe Reader 9.1 nécessite MSI (Microsoft Windows Installer) version 3.1 ou supérieure et soit Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6.0 ou supérieure, soit Firefox version 2.0 ou supérieure. Microsoft Internet Explorer et Microsoft Windows Installer sont disponibles via la mise à jour de Microsoft. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Désinstallation du logiciel Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour désinstaller le logiciel DC ou Irodio Photo & Video Studio. Attention • Les droits Administrateur sont requis pour la désinstallation. • Quittez toutes les applications ouvertes avant de continuer. 1 Ouvrez « Ajout/Suppression de programmes » dans le Panneau de configuration. Ouvrez le menu « Démarrer » de Windows et sélectionnez Panneau de configuration (Windows XP ou Windows Vista) ou Paramètres > Panneau de configuration. Double-cliquez sur Ajout/ Suppression de programmes. 2Désinstallez le logiciel. Sélectionnez le logiciel à désinstaller (DC Software ou Irodio Photo & Video Studio), puis cliquez sur Modifier/Supprimer. Une boîte de dialogue de confirmation s’affiche ; cliquez sur OK. Si un message s’affiche pour signaler qu’un fichier partagé a été détecté, sélectionnez Ne plus afficher ce message et cliquez sur Oui. Fermez toutes les fenêtres ouvertes lorsque le processus de désinstallation est terminé. Après la désinstallation du logiciel Irodio Photo & Video Studio, redémarrez l’ordinateur.9 coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Copie de photos à l’aide du logiciel DL-10 Après l’installation du logiciel DC, suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour copier des photos sur votre ordinateur. 1Mettez l’appareil hors tension. 2 Branchez le câble USB fourni. Raccordez le câble au port USB de l’ordinateur. Attention • Ne forcez pas et ne tirez pas sur le câble lorsque vous manipulez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avec le câble branché. • Ne déplacez pas le boîtier de l’appareil photo lorsque le câble est branché. Raccordez le câble à l’appareil photo comme illustré. L’appareil se met sous tension, le logiciel DL-10 démarre et le transfert commence automatiquement. Les photos sont copiées dans des répertoires du dossier « Digital Camera » dans « Mes documents » (si vous utilisiez précédemment le logiciel Caplio, les photos seront plutôt copiées dans des répertoires du dossier « Caplio »). Les photos sont classées par date d’enregistrement dans des répertoires séparés ; assurez-vous que l’horloge de l’appareil est correctement configurée avant la prise de vue. 3Débranchez le câble lorsque le transfert est terminé. Consultez la page 161 pour en savoir plus.0 coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Remarque Appliquez les procédures suivantes si le transfert ne démarre pas automatiquement. Cliquez sur Sauvegarder dans la fenêtre DL-10. Assurez-vous que l’option Enregistrer automatiquement lorsqu’il est connecté à un port USB est sélectionnée dans la boîte de dialogue « Réglages d’option » du logiciel DL-10. Redémarrez l’ordinateur et répétez la procédure ci-dessus. Copie de photos sans l’aide du logiciel DL-10 Si DL-10 n’est pas installé, vous pouvez copier des photos sur l’ordinateur comme indiqué ci-dessous. Les illustrations de cette section proviennent de Windows XP. 1Mettez l’appareil hors tension. 2 Branchez le câble USB fourni. Raccordez le câble au port USB de l’ordinateur, puis au boîtier de l’appareil photo. L’appareil se met sous tension automatiquement. 3 Copiez les fichiers de l’appareil sur l’ordinateur. L’appareil est listé comme disque amovible dans « Poste de travail », avec les photos stockées dans des dossiers comme illustré à droite. Si une carte mémoire est insérée dans l’appareil, le disque sera nommé comme illustré à droite et le contenu de la carte mémoire s’affichera. Si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée, le disque sera nommé « RICOHDCI » et le contenu de la mémoire interne s’affichera. Copiez les photos dans l’emplacement souhaité de votre ordinateur. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Attention • Ne mettez pas l’appareil hors tension et ne débranchez pas le câble USB tant que la copie n’est pas terminée. • Les fichiers dans le dossier de destination avec le même nom que les photos copiées seront écrasés. Le cas échéant, renommez les fichiers avant de commencer la copie. • N’utilisez pas l’ordinateur pour visualiser ou retoucher les photos d’une carte mémoire. Les photos qui ont été visualisées ou retouchées sur l’ordinateur ne peuvent plus être affichées sur l’appareil. Copiez les photos sur l’ordinateur pour les visualiser et les retoucher. Déconnexion du boîtier de l’appareil photo Avant de déconnecter le boîtier de l’appareil photo de l’ordinateur, cliquez sur l’icône « Retirer le périphérique en toute sécurité » ou « Déconnecter ou éjecter le matériel » dans la zone de notification (l’illustration cidessus montre l’icône sous Windows XP) et sélectionnez Retirer Périphérique de stockage de masse USB en toute sécurité ou Arrêter Périphérique de stockage de masse USB dans le menu contextuel. Vous pouvez alors débrancher le câble USB. Remarques • Un message d’avertissement peut s’afficher si le câble USB est débranché sans d’abord retirer l’appareil du système comme indiqué ci-dessus. Assurez-vous de retirer l’appareil du système avant de débrancher le câble. • Vérifiez que le transfert est terminé avant de retirer l’appareil du système et de débrancher le câble.2 coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Macintosh Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut être utilisé avec Mac OS X versions 10.4 à 10.5.7. Attention Le logiciel VM-1 (page 164) et le Mode d’emploi du logiciel (uniquement sur les ordinateurs équipés de l’application Acrobat) peuvent être utilisés avec les ordinateurs Macintosh. Copie des photos sur un ordinateur Macintosh 1Mettez l’appareil hors tension. 2 Branchez le câble USB fourni. Raccordez le câble au port USB de l’ordinateur. Attention • Ne forcez pas et ne tirez pas sur le câble lorsque vous manipulez l’appareil photo avec le câble branché. • Ne déplacez pas l’appareil photo lorsque le câble est branché. Raccordez le câble au boîtier de l’appareil photo comme illustré. L’appareil se met sous tension automatiquement. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr 3 Copiez les fichiers de l’appareil sur l’ordinateur. L’appareil s’affiche comme un volume sur le bureau, avec les photos stockées dans des dossiers comme illustré à droite. Si une carte mémoire est insérée dans l’appareil, le disque sera nommé comme illustré à droite et le contenu de la carte mémoire s’affichera. Si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée, le disque sera nommé « RICOHDCI » et le contenu de la mémoire interne s’affichera. Copiez les photos dans l’emplacement souhaité de votre ordinateur. Déconnexion du boîtier de l’appareil photo Avant de débrancher l’appareil de l’ordinateur, faites glisser le volume de l’appareil sur la poubelle ou sélectionnez le volume de l’appareil et choisissez Éjecter dans le menu Fichier. Vous pouvez alors débrancher le câble USB. Remarques • Un message d’avertissement peut s’afficher si le câble USB est débranché sans d’abord retirer l’appareil du système comme indiqué ci-dessus. Assurez-vous de retirer l’appareil du système avant de débrancher le câble. • Vérifiez que le transfert est terminé avant de retirer l’appareil du système et de débrancher le câble. • Le raccordement du boîtier de l’appareil photo à un ordinateur Macintosh peut engendrer la création de fichiers « FINDER. DAT » ou « .DS_Store » qui seront considérés comme des fichiers incorrects par l’appareil. Ces fichiers peuvent être supprimés sans risque. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Utilisation de lecteur de fichiers MP Lorsque vous prenez des photos à l’aide de la fonction Cont.M +, les photos sont enregistrées dans un fichier MP. Grâce au lecteur de fichiers MP VM-1, vous pouvez lire des fichiers MP sur votre ordinateur Macintosh et exporter des photos. Cette section explique comment installer et désinstaller le logiciel VM-1 qui est inclus sur le CD-ROM fourni. Pour plus de détails concernant la lecture de fichiers MP sur votre ordinateur ou l’exportation de photos de fichiers MP à l’aide du lecteur de fichiers MP, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du logiciel » disponible sur le CD-ROM fourni. Configuration requise pourl’utilisation du lecteur de fichiersMP fourni Les environnements suivants sont nécessaires pour utiliser le lecteur de fichiers MP fourni. Vérifiez votre ordinateur ou le manuel de l’utilisateur de l’ordinateur. Systèmes d’exploitation pris en charge Mac OS X versions 10.4 à 10.5.7 Macintosh Série Macintosh Apple Inc. Mémoire interne Mac OS X 10.4 256 Mo ou plus Mac OS X 10.5 512 Mo ou plus Mémoire disque dur disponible 5 Mo ou plus Lecteur de CD-ROM Lecteur de CD-ROM compatible avec l’ordinateur Macintosh susmentionné Remarque Le logiciel VM-1 prend en charge les langues suivantes : japonais, anglais, français et chinois (simplifié). coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Installation du logiciel VM-1 1 Insérez le CD fourni. Mettez l’ordinateur Macintosh sous tension et insérez le CD fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM. 2 Sélectionnez le disque d’installation. Double-cliquez sur l’icône RICOH > le dossier VM- 1 > l’icône VM-1 Installer.pkg. La fenêtre Installer VM-1 s’affiche, cliquez sur Continuer. Lorsque la fenêtre de sélection de l’emplacement d’installation s’affiche, sélectionnez le disque d’installation, puis cliquez sur Continuer. 3 Installez le logiciel VM-1. Cliquez sur Installer, saisissez votre nom et votre mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. Un message vous informant que l’installation est terminée s’affiche, cliquez sur Fermer. Pour sélectionner un autre emplacement d’installation, cliquez sur Changer l’emplacement de l’installation.... Pour mettre le logiciel VM-1 à niveau, cliquez sur Mettre à jour. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Désinstallation du logiciel VM-1 Attention • Si d’autres logiciels sont en cours d’exécution ou si des données n’ont pas été enregistrées, fermez les logiciels et enregistrez les données avant de désinstaller VM-1. • En cas d’erreur pendant la désinstallation, mettez votre système d’exploitation Mac à jour avec la dernière version disponible. 1 Ouvrez le dossier des utilitaires VM-1. Ouvrez le dossier Applications > le dossier Utilitaires > le dossier VM-1 Utility. 2Double-cliquez sur l’icône VM-1 Uninstaller. La fenêtre de confirmation de la désinstallation s’affiche. Cliquez sur OK. 3 Saisissez votre nom et votre mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. Un message vous informant que la désinstallation est terminée s’affiche, cliquez sur OK. reMarqUes techniqUes Remarques techniques Résolution des problèmes Messages d’erreur Si un message d’erreur s’affiche, procédez comme suit. Message Solution Page Insérerunecarte. Aucunecarte mémoireinsérée. Insérezunecarte. 15 Régler ladate. L’horloge de l’appareil photo n’est pas configurée. Configurez l’horlogedel’appareil. 20, 149 Nombrede fi chiers limites La limitede numérotation des fichiersde l’appareil est atteinte. Insérezuneautrecarte. 15, 148 Fichier incorrect L’appareil ne peut pas afficher le fichier. Utilisez un ordinateur pourvérifier lecontenudu fichieret supprimer le fichier. — Mémoireinsuffisant. Poursuivrelacopie? L’espacesur lacarte mémoireest insuffisantpour copier tous les fichiers. Insérezuneautrecarte. 15 Protégé Le fichierestprotégéet nepeutpasêtresupprimé. 112 Carteprotégéeen écriture. Lacarteestprotégéecontrel’écriture(verrouillée). Déverrouillez lacarte. 16 Fichier non sélectionné pour l’impression. Le fichier est une vidéo ou un autre fichier qui ne peut pas être sélectionnépour l’impression. — Espace mémoire insuffisant / Faiblecapacité La mémoire est insuffisante pour stocker des fichiers supplémentaires.Supprimezdes fichiersexistantsouaugmentez laquantitéde mémoiredisponible. 39, 139 Nombre maximum d’images sélectionnées pour impression. Réglez le nombredetiragespour lesautres images sur zéro. 125 Formater la mémoire interne. La mémoire interne n’est pas formatée correctement. Formatez la mémoireinterne. 139 Formatez lacarte. Lacarte n’estpas formatéecorrectement.Formatez lacartedans leboîtierdel’appareilphoto. 139 Erreur carte Formatezlacarte.Si lemessagepersiste, lacarteestdéfectueuse; nel’utilisezplus. 139 Écrituredesdonnées L’appareil enregistre des données. Patientez jusqu’à la fin de l’enregistrement. — Pasde fichier Aucun fichierdisponiblepour lecture. — Enregi. impossible Lamémoireestpleine. Utilisezuneautrecarte,ouretirezlacarte etutilisez la mémoireinterne. 15 reMarqUes techniqUes Problèmes relatifs au boîtier de l’appareil photo Alimentation Problème Cause Solution Page L’appareilphoto nese metpas sous tension. La batterie est vide ou n’est pas insérée. Vérifiez que la batterie est correctement insérée. Chargez la batterie (batterie rechargeable uniquement). 12,14 Labatterieest incompatible. Utilisez labatteriefournie. 13 La batterie n’est pas orientée correctement. Insérez et orientez correctement labatterie. 14 L’appareilphoto se met hors tension pendant l’utilisation. L’appareil s’est mis hors tension automatiquement pour économiser l’énergie. Mettez l’appareil sous tension. 18 Labatterieestvide. Chargez la batterie (batterie rechargeableuniquement). 12 Labatterieest incompatible. Utilisez labatteriefournie. 13 L’appareilphoto nese metpas hors tension. L’appareil fonctionne mal. Retirezet réinsérez labatterie. 14 L’indicateurde batteriefaible s’afficheou l’appareil se met hors tension alors quelabatterieest encorechargée. Labatterieest incompatible. Utilisez labatteriefournie. 13 Ilest impossiblede charger labatterie. Labatterieaatteint la fin desavie decharge. Remplacez-la par une batterie neuve. 14 Labatterie sedécharge rapidement. La température est très haute ou trèsbasse. — — Un faible éclairage nécessite une utilisation excessivedu flash. — —9 reMarqUes techniqUes Prise devue Problème Cause Solution Page Aucunephoto n’est priselorsquele déclencheurest enfoncé. Labatterieestvide. Chargez la batterie (batterie rechargeableuniquement). 12 L’appareil photo est hors tension oupasen modeprisedevue. Placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/ ARRÊT sur MARCHE pour mettre l’appareil photo sous tension ou appuyezsur6poursélectionner le modeprisedevue. 18,34 L’appareil photo est en mode lecture. Appuyezsur6poursélectionner le modeprisedevue. 34 Ledéclencheur n’apasétéenfoncé jusqu’aubout. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’aubout. 22 Lacarte mémoire n’estpas formatée. Formatez lacarte. 139 Lacarte mémoireestpleine. Insérez une nouvelle carte ou supprimezdes fichiers. 15,39 La carte mémoire a atteint la fin desavieutile. Insérezune nouvellecarte. 15 Le flash est en cours de chargement. Patientez jusqu’àcequeletémoin du flash arrêtedeclignoter. 29 Lacarte mémoireestverrouillée. Déverrouillez lacarte. 16 Les contacts de la carte mémoire sont sales. Nettoyez-le avec un chiffon doux et sec. — Impossibled’afficher lesphotosaprès la prisedevue. La durée d’affichage est trop courte. Choisissez une durée d’affichage plus longue. 142 L’écran d’affichage desphotosest vide. L’appareil photo est éteint ou l’écran d’affichage des photos est noir. Mettez l’appareil sous tension ou réglez la luminosité de l’écran d’affichagedesphotos. 18, 139 L’écran d’affichage des photos est éteint. Appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD pour activer l’écran d’affichagedesphotos. 42 LeviseurLCD aétéactivé. Appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD pour activer l’écran d’affichagedesphotos. 42 Lecâble A/V estbranché. Débranchez lecâble. 118 L’appareilphoto est incapable d’effectuer la mise aupointen mode miseaupoint automatique. L’objectifest sale. Nettoyez-le avec un chiffon doux et sec. — Lesujet n’estpasaucentreducadre. Utilisez leverrouillagede miseaupoint. 25 Lesujet n’estpasadaptéàla mise aupointautomatique. Utilisez le verrouillage de mise au pointoula miseaupoint manuelle. 25,65 Lesujetest tropproche. Utilisez le mode macro ou éloignez-vousdusujet. 270 reMarqUes techniqUes Problème Cause Solution Page Lesphotos sont floues. J L’appareil photo bouge pendant la prisedevue. Utilisez un trépied. Utilisez la fonction de correction du bougé de l’appareil photo. Placez les coudes contrelecorps. 21,92 L’éclairage est faible et les vitesses d’obturation sont lentes. Utilisez le flash. Sélectionnez une sensibilitéISO plusélevée. Utilisezla fonction de correction du bougé de l’appareilphoto. 29,90, 92 Le flash nese déclenchepasou ne serechargepas. Le flash n’estpasouvert. Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f (réglage/ouverture du flash) pour déployer le flash. 29 Le flash n’estpas complètementouvert. Negênezpas l’ouverturedu flash. — Le flash nepeutpasêtreutilisédans les cas suivants : • Lorsquecadrageexposition,cadrage balance des blancs ou cadrage couleurest réglé • En modecontinu • En modevidéo Modifiez les réglagesdel’appareil. 54,73, 75 Le flash estdésactivé. Déployez le flash. Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f (réglage/ouverture du flash)pourannuler le flash. 29 Labatterieestvide. Chargez la batterie (batterie rechargeableuniquement). 12 Le flash n’éclairepas lesujet. La distance jusqu’au sujet est supérieureàlaportéedu flash. Rapprochez-vousdusujet. — Lesujetest sombre. Augmentez lapuissancedu flash. 78 Le flash sedéclenchetroplentement. Augmentez lapuissancedu flash. 78 Le flash n’estpas complètementouvert. Negênezpas l’ouverturedu flash. — Lesphotos sont trop claires. Lapuissancedu flash est tropforte. Réduisez la puissance du flash, éloignez-vous du sujet ou utilisez unesourced’éclairagedifférente. 78 Laphotoest surexposée. Utilisezlacorrection d’exposition ouchoisissez unevitessed’obturation plus rapide. 50,85 L’écran d’affichage des photos est tropclair. Réglez la luminosité de l’écran d’affichagedesphotos. 139 Lesphotos sont trop foncées. Le flash est désactivé ou le sujet est faiblementéclairé. Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f (réglage/ouverture du flash) pour déployer le flash. 29 Laphotoest sous-exposée. Utilisezlacorrection d’exposition ouchoisissez unevitessed’obturation plus lente. 50,85 L’écran d’affichage des photos est tropfoncé. Réglez la luminosité de l’écran d’affichagedesphotos. 139 reMarqUes techniqUes Problème Cause Solution Page Les couleurs nesont pas naturelles. L’appareil est incapable de régler la balance des blancs, par rapport aux conditions de prise de vue, en utilisant la balance des blancs automatique. Insérez un objetblancdans le cadre ou choisissez une autre option de balancedesblancs. 86 Les informations sur laphoto ne s’affichentpas. Les indicateurs sont cachés. Appuyez sur DISP. pour afficher les indicateurs. 42 Laluminositéde l’écran d’affichage desphotos change pendant la miseau point. L’éclairage ambiant est faible ou différent de celui qui a été utilisé pour la miseaupointautomatique. C’est normal et il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement. — Desbandes verticales («traînées») apparaissent sur la photo. Lesujetest clair. C’est normal et il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement. — L’indicateurde niveau nes’affiche pas. L’optionNon ouSon estsélectionnée pour leparamètre Réglage niveau. Sélectionnez Affichage ou Aff. + son. 32 Les indicateurs sont cachés. Appuyez sur DISP. pour afficher les indicateurs. 42 L’appareilphotoestàl’envers. Tenez l’appareilorientécorrectement. 21 Laphoto n’estpas de niveau,bien quel’indicateurde niveauindiquait quel’appareilphoto l’était. L’appareil a bougé pendant la prise devue. Ne prenez pas de photos à partir d’objetsen déplacement. — Lesujet n’estpasde niveau. Vérifiez lesujet. — Lecture/suppression Problème Cause Solution Page Impossibledelire lesphotos. L’appareil n’estpasen modelecture. Appuyez sur6. 19,34 Lecâble A/V estbranchéde manière incorrecte. Rebranchez lecâble A/V. 118 Le mode vidéo n’est pas adapté au téléviseur. Choisissezun autre modevidéo. 149 L’écran de lecture s’affiche dans le viseurLCD. RéglezÉcran de lecturesurLCD. 1412 reMarqUes techniqUes Problème Cause Solution Page Impossiblede visualiser les photos sur lacarte mémoire. La carte mémoire est vide ou non insérée. Insérezunecartequiaétéformatée dans leboîtierdel’appareilphotoet qui contientdesphotosenregistrées avec celui-ci. 15, 139 Lacarte n’apasétéformatéedans le boîtierdel’appareilphoto. Les photos ont été créées avec un autredispositif. Les contacts de la carte mémoire sont sales. Nettoyez-le avec un chiffon doux et sec. — Lacartefonctionne mal. Insérez une autre carte. Si vous pouvez visualiser les photos sur la seconde carte, la première carte est probablement défectueuse; ne l’utilisezplus. — L’écran d’affichage desphotos s’est éteint. Labatterieestvide. Chargez la batterie (batterie rechargeableuniquement). 12 L’appareil s’est mis hors tension automatiquement pour économiser l’énergie. Mettez l’appareil sous tension. 18 Impossiblede supprimer le fichier. Le fichierestprotégé. Supprimez laprotection. 112 Lacarte mémoireestverrouillée. Impossiblede Déverrouillez lacarte mémoire. 16 formater lacarte. Lacarteestverrouillée. Divers Problème Cause Solution Page Impossibled’insérer lacarte mémoire. La carte n’est pas orientée correctement. Insérez et orientez correctement lacarte. 15 Les commandes del’appareilphoto restent sanseffet. Labatterieestvide. Chargez la batterie (batterie rechargeableuniquement). 12 L’appareil fonctionne mal. Mettez l’appareil hors tension,puis sous tension de nouveau. 18 Retirezet réinsérez labatterie. 14 Ladateest incorrecte. L’horloge n’est pas configurée correctement. Configurez l’horlogeavec ladateet l’heurecorrectes. 20,149 Ladateaété réinitialisée. La batterie n’a pas été insérée pendantenviron unesemaine. Configurez l’horlogeavec ladateet l’heurecorrectes. 20,149 L’appareilphoto nese metpas hors tension automatiquement. L’option Non est sélectionnéepour leparamètreExtinction auto. Choisissezun autreréglage. 141 L’appareilphoto n’émetaucun son. Leson est coupé. Choisissez une autre option pour Réglages volume. 32,142 reMarqUes techniqUes Problème Cause Solution Page Lesphotos ne s’affichentpas sur letéléviseur. Le mode vidéo n’est pas adapté autéléviseur. Choisissezun autre modevidéo. 149 Lecâble A/V n’estpasbranché. Branchez lecâble A/V. 118 Letéléviseur n’estpas réglésur le canald’entréevidéo. Configurez le téléviseur sur le canald’entréevidéo. — Problèmes relatifs à l’ordinateur Pour en savoir plus, consultez le Mode d’emploi du logiciel, disponible au format PDF sur le CD fourni. Alertes desécurité(Windows Vista/WindowsXP) Consultez ce qui suit si Windows XP Service Pack 3 ou Windows Vista Service Pack 2 affiche une alerte de sécurité lorsque le boîtier de l’appareil photo est raccordé ou lorsque le logiciel DL-10 démarre. Les illustrations de cette section proviennent de Windows XP. Si une alerte de sécurité s’affiche, vérifiez que le programme provient d’une source fiable et cliquez sur Débloquer. Attention Si vous ne pouvez pas identifier le programme et la source, cliquez sur Maintenir le blocage pour empêcher votre ordinateur d’être infecté par un virus ou un logiciel malveillant. reMarqUes techniqUes Si vous avez cliqué sur Maintenir le blocage pour bloquer une application Ricoh, vous pouvez la débloquer dans le pare-feu Windows. 1 Ouvrez le « pare-feu Windows » dans le Panneau de configuration. Ouvrez le menu « Démarrer » et sélectionnez Panneau de configuration, puis double-cliquez sur Pare-feu Windows (si le pare-feu Windows n’est pas listé, cliquez sur Basculer vers l’affichage classique dans l’angle supérieur gauche du panneau de configuration Windows). 2Autorisez l’application Ricoh à accéder à Internet. Dans la boîte de dialogue « Pare-feu Windows », cliquez sur l’onglet Exceptions et vérifiez si le logiciel DL-10 est listé dans « Programmes et services ». Si c’est le cas, cochez la case à côté de DL-10 et cliquez sur OK. Dans le cas contraire, cliquez sur Ajouter un programme… pour ajouter DL-10 à la liste des exceptions. Si vous avez cliqué sur Me redemander ultérieurement pour bloquer DL-10, une alerte de sécurité s’affichera la prochaine fois que le programme démarrera. Cliquez sur Débloquer pour supprimer le blocage. reMarqUes techniqUes Caractéristiques Flash Mode Auto(le flash sedéclenchelorsquel’éclairageest faibleouquele sujetestàcontre-jour),yeuxrouges,activé, synchronisation lente, manuel,désactivé Portée(flash intégré) Consultez ladocumentation fournieavec l’unitéappareilphoto. Compensation de flash ±2,0EV parpasde1/2EV ou1/3EV Niveaude flash manuel MAX,1/1.4,1/2,1/2.8,1/4,1/5.6,1/8,1/11,1/16,1/22,1/32,1/64 Écran d’affichagedes photos 3,0” LCD transparent ;environ 920000pixels Modeprisedevue Auto, changementdeprogramme,prioritéàl’ouverture,prioritéà l’obturation, manuel, scène,« Mes Réglages» Qualitéd’image Fine, Normal, RAW(DNG)?* 1 Stockage Carte mémoireSD/SDHC; mémoireinterne(environ 86?Mo) Taille fichier?* 2 (environ) 5M FINE:environ 2287 Ko/image 3M FINE:environ 1474 Ko/image 1M FINE:environ 812 Ko/image VGA FINE:environ 197 Ko/image Format fichier Photos JPEG (Exifversion 2.21)?* 3 , RAW(DNG) Vidéos AVI?* 4 (compatible OpenDML Motion JPEG) Compression CompatibleJPEG lignedebase(photosetvidéos) Autresoptionsprise devue Prisedevueen continu(continu,Cont.M +) ; retardateur (délaide déclenchementd’environ 10?sou2?s),ouoption personnalisée; prisedevueàintervalles (de5?sà1 heure,par incrémentsde5?s)?* 5 ; cadragecouleur ; N et B (TE) ; sélection d’espacecolorimétrique; réduction bruit ;affichaged’histogramme;grilledecadrage; indicateurdeprofondeurdechamp; indicateurde niveau;griffe alimentée Autresoptions lecture Rotation d’imageautomatique,vue multi-images ; zoom en lecture (jusqu’à16?×) ; redimensionnement Interface Connecteur Mini-B USB 2.0(hautdébit) ; stockagede masse?* 6 ; sortieaudio1,0?Vp-p(75?O) ;Connecteurducâble mini HDMI (typeC) Format signalvidéo NTSC,PAL Sourcealimentation Batterierechargeable DB-90(3,6?V) Longévitébatterie(basée sur normeCIPA)?* 7 Consultez ladocumentation fournieavec l’unitéappareilphoto. reMarqUes techniqUes Dimensions (L?×?H?×?P) 113,9?mm?×?70,2?mm?×?28,9?mm (protubérancesexclues) Poids (approximatif) • Boîtierdel’appareilphoto(batterie, carte mémoire, courroie d’encolureet capuchon duconnecteurexclus) :160?g • Batterie, courroied’encolureet capuchon duconnecteur :66?g Visde fixation dutrépied 1/4-20UNC Duréestockagedate Environ 1semaine Température fonctionnement 0?°Cà40?°C Humidité fonctionnement 85%ou moins Températurestockage –20?°Cà60?°C * 1 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité fine ou normale avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou un fichier VGA). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe Systems, Inc. * 2 Pour plus de détails concernant les formats RAW, L et M, reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo. * 3 Compatible avec le système Design rule for Camera File system (DCF, une norme JEITA) et DPOF. La compatibilité avec d’autres appareils n’est pas garantie. * 4 Audio : PCM 32 kHz, monophonique de 16 bits * 5 Flash désactivé. * 6 Le stockage de masse est pris en charge sous Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista et Mac OS X 10.4–10.5.7. * 7 Mesurée conformément à la norme CIPA. Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon l’utilisation de l’appareil. reMarqUes techniqUes Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire Le nombre approximatif d’images ou la longueur approximative des vidéos qui peuvent être stockées dans la mémoire interne ou sur une carte mémoire, selon les différentes configurations, varie en fonction du type d’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo. Remarques • La durée maximale d’une vidéo est de 90 minutes (soit une taille de 4Go). • Le nombre maximal de prises de vue qu’il est possible de prendre en une seule rafale est de 999. Si la mémoire peut encore stocker plus de 999 photos, « 999 » s’affiche sur le moniteur. • En fonction du sujet, le nombre de photos qu’il est possible de prendre peut différer du nombre de prises de vue restantes. • La capacité varie selon les conditions de prise de vue et la fabrication de la carte mémoire. • Utilisez une carte mémoire haut débit pour de longues périodes de prise de vue. reMarqUes techniqUes Éléments vendus séparément Le boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR peut être utilisé avec les accessoires optionnels suivants : Unité appareil photo Batterie rechargeable DB-90 Chargeur de batterie BJ-9 Déclencheur à câble CA- Il s’agit d’un déclencheur distant à câble qui se fixe au connecteur USB du boîtier de l’appareil photo. Viseur LCD VF-2 Il s’agit d’un viseur électrique qui se fixe sur la griffe alimentée du boîtier de l’appareil photo. Il offre une couverture de 100 % et peut être ajusté sur 90° sans parallaxe linéaire. Il facilite la prise de vue à faible angle. Flash externe GF- Flash externe développé pour les appareils photo numériques avec système de flash automatique avec posemètre. Courroie d’encolure ST-9 reMarqUes techniqUes Étui souple SC-S Étui souple SC-L Remarques • Avant d’utiliser des accessoires optionnels, lisez le manuel fourni avec le produit. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc. com/).0 reMarqUes techniqUes Appareil photo et accessoires Étui souple SC-55S/SC-55L Courroie d’encolure ST-3 Déclencheur à câble CA-1 Batterie rechargeable DB-90 (fournie) Chargeur de batterie BJ-9 (fourni) Raccordé au connecteur USB Unité appareil photo Fixé à l’unité appareil photo Fixé à la griffe alimentée Flash GF-1 Viseur LCD VF-2 reMarqUes techniqUes Le flash GF-1 (optionnel) Un flash optionnel GF-1 peut être raccordé sur la griffe alimentée. 1 Fermez le couvercle du flash (page 2). 2 Installez le flash. Mettez hors tension l’appareil et le GF-1, puis montez le GF-1 sur la griffe alimentée. Griffe alimentée 3Mettez le flash et l’appareil photo sous tension. 4Appuyez sur la touche DIRECT. 5 Sélectionnez la rubrique du mode flash optionnel. Déplacez le curseur à l’aide de la touche +, –, Fn, Fn2 ou de la manette ADJ. (gauche et droite) pour sélectionner la rubrique. 6 Sélectionnez un mode flash. Faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner un mode flash. Remarques • La rubrique du mode flash optionnel ne s’affiche pas lorsque le GF-1 est hors tension. • Mettez le GF-1 hors tension pour la prise de vue sans flash. • Si la rubrique du mode flash optionnel n’est pas affichée, mettez hors tension l’appareil et le GF-1, puis démontez et remontez le flash.2 reMarqUes techniqUes Autres flashes Utilisez uniquement des flashes avec un terminal à un signal, sous la forme d’un contact en X, avec une tension positive inférieure à 20V. Utilisez un flash qui couvre l’angle de vue de l’objectif. 1 Fermez le couvercle du flash (page 2). 2 Installez le flash. Mettez hors tension l’appareil et le flash optionnel, puis montez le flash sur la griffe alimentée. 3 Configurez manuellement l’ouverture. Mettez l’appareil sous tension, sélectionnez le mode A ou M, puis choisissez une ouverture (pages 18, 48, 50). 4 Choisissez manuellement une sensibilité ISO. Sélectionnez une option différente de Auto pour la sensibilité ISO (page 90). 5Mettez le flash sous tension. Mettez le flash sous tension et configurez-le en mode automatique. Réglez l’ouverture et la sensibilité ISO sur les valeurs sélectionnées avec l’appareil. Faites un essai de prise de vue et ajustez l’ouverture du flash et la sensibilité ISO le cas échéant. Mettez hors tension le flash optionnel avant de le démonter de l’appareil. Attention • Si le flash externe est activé, il se déclenchera à chaque prise de vue quel que soit le mode flash sélectionné sur l’appareil. Mettez le flash hors tension pour la prise de vue sans flash. • Les flashes optionnels sont en principe utilisés pour des portées supérieures à celle du flash intégré. L’utilisation d’un flash optionnel pour des portées inférieures peut entraîner une surexposition. reMarqUes techniqUes Utilisation du produit à l’étranger Utilisation du chargeur de batterie BJ-9 Ce produit est conçu pour être utilisé avec des courants de 100-240V et 50 ou 60Hz. Avant votre déplacement, achetez un adaptateur de voyage pour la connexion sur tout type de prises utilisées dans votre destination. N’utilisez pas ces produits avec des transformateurs électriques, qui pourraient les endommager. Garantie Ce produit a été fabriqué pour être utilisé dans le pays d’achat et la garantie n’est pas valable dans d’autres pays. Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. Lecturesur un téléviseur Le câble A/V fourni peut être utilisé pour raccorder le produit à un téléviseur ou un moniteur équipé d’un terminal d’entrée vidéo. Le produit prend en charge les formats vidéo NTSC et PAL ; avant de raccorder le produit à un dispositif vidéo, sélectionnez le mode de sortie vidéo approprié. Précautions d’emploi • La garantie n’est pas valable dans d’autres pays. Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. reMarqUes techniqUes • Ne faites pas tomber le produit et évitez-lui les chocs physiques. Lors du transport du produit, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’écran d’affichage des photos. • Le flash peut chauffer s’il est déclenché plusieurs fois de suite. N’utilisez pas le flash plus que nécessaire. N’utilisez pas le flash au contact de votre corps ou d’autres objets. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des brûlures ou un incendie. • L’utilisation du flash à proximité des yeux de votre sujet peut entraîner une déficience visuelle temporaire. La plus grande prudence est recommandée pour photographier des enfants. Ne pointez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule à moteur. • La batterie peut chauffer en cas d’utilisation intensive. Patientez le temps qu’elle refroidisse avant de la retirer du produit. • Il peut être difficile de lire l’écran d’affichage des photos sous la lumière directe du soleil. • Vous pouvez vous apercevoir que la luminosité de l’écran d’affichage des photos varie ou que le moniteur présente des pixels éteints ou toujours allumés. C’est normal pour tous les moniteurs LCD et il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement. • Ne forcez pas sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. • Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation visible à l’intérieur du produit ou des dysfonctionnements. Cela peut être évité en plaçant le produit dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même température que l’environnement. • Pour éviter d’endommager le produit, n’insérez pas d’objet dans les fentes du microphone et du haut-parleur. • Protégez les bornes du connecteur de la poussière. • Conservez le produit sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de l’appareil ou un choc électrique. • Faites un essai de prise de vue pour vous assurer que le produit fonctionne correctement avant de l’utiliser dans des occasions importantes, comme un voyage ou un mariage. Nous vous recommandons de conserver ce manuel et des batteries de rechange à portée de main. reMarqUes techniqUes Conseil : pouréviterla condensation La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en marche, ou lorsque le produit est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif. Entretien et stockage Entretien du produit • Nettoyez l’écran d’affichage des photos en l’essuyant avec un chiffon doux légèrement imprégné d’un nettoyant pour écran, sans solvant organique. • Nettoyez soigneusement le produit après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas le produit à des substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut endommager le produit ou sa finition. • Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation Ricoh. • Le produit contient des circuits haute tension. Ne le démontez pas. • L’écran d’affichage des photos peut se rayer facilement ; évitez de le toucher avec des objets durs. Stockage • Ne stockez pas le produit dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant). • Retirez la batterie si le produit ne doit pas être utilisé pendant une longue période. Avant le nettoyage Mettez l’appareil hors tension et retirez la batterie. reMarqUes techniqUes Garantie et réparation 1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec le produit, toute pièce défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement,contactezledistributeurquivousavenduleproduitouvotrecentrederéparation Ricoh leplusproche. Veuillez noterquevous neserezpasremboursédesfraisdetransportpour livrer leproduitau centrederéparation Ricoh. 2. Cettegarantie necouvreaucun dommagerésultantde: 1 non-respectdes instructionsdu moded’emploi ; 2 réparation, modification ourévision non réaliséeparun centredeserviceagréé, listédans le moded’emploi ; 3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale,etc. ; 4 stockageinapproprié(indiquédans le« Moded’emploiduboîtierdel’appareilphoto»), fuitedebatterie etautres fluides, moisissureoutoutautredéfautd’entretien duproduit. 5 immersion dansl’eau(inondation),exposition àl’alcoolouàd’autresboissons, infiltration desableoude boue, chocphysique, chuteoupression exercéesur leproduitetautres causes non naturelles. 3. Après l’expiration delapériodedegarantie, tous les fraisderéparation serontàvotrecharge,ycomprisceux d’un centredeserviceagréé. 4.??Tous les fraisderéparation serontàvotrecharge, mêmeàl’intérieurdelapériodedegarantie, si lacartede garantie n’estpas jointeousi le nomdudistributeurouladated’achat n’estpas indiquéouaétémodifiésur lacarte. 5.??Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à sa charge complète que la périodedegarantieaitexpiréou non. 6.??Cettegarantie s’appliqueuniquement auproduit etpas aux accessoires, comme l’étui et la courroie, ni à la batterieetauxautres consommables fournis. 7.??Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance du produit, comme les frais de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profitattendu, neserapas rembourséquelapériodedegarantieaitexpiréou non. 8.??Lagarantieestvalableuniquementdans lepaysoùleproduitaétéacheté. * Lesdispositions ci-dessus seréfèrentauxréparationsgratuiteset nelimitentvosdroits légaux. * L’objectifdesdispositions ci-dessusestégalementdécrit sur lacartedegarantiefournieavec leproduit. 9. Lespiècesessentiellesàlaréparation duproduit (c’est-à-direlescomposants nécessairesaufonctionnement et à la qualité du produit) seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la production duproduit. 10.Veuillez noter que si le produit est sérieusement endommagé par une inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sableoudeboue,des chocs violentsouune chute, ilpeut être impossiblede le réparer et la restauration deson étatoriginelpeutêtreimpossible. Remarques • Avant d’envoyer le produit en réparation, vérifiez la batterie et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct. • Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution. • Lors de l’envoi du produit à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible. • Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer le produit au centre de réparation. • Cette garantie ne s’applique pas aux données stockées dans la mémoire interne et sur les cartes mémoire. reMarqUes techniqUes NOTICES USA FCC Part 15 Class B The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, then user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. (FCC 15.105B) Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. (FCC 15.21) Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connection to a host computer in order to comply with FCC emission limits. (FCC 15.27) COMPLIANCEINFORMATION STATEMENT Product Name: CAMERA BODY Model Number: GXR This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell NJ, 07006 Tel.: 1-800-225-1899 Noteto Usersin Canada Note: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 RemarqueConcernant les Utilisateurs au Canada Avertissement: Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB- 003 du Canada. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Index Symboles Mode 5 (auto)................................. 4, 21 Touche d (supprimer).................... 3, 39 Touche O (DISP.)............................ 3, 42 Touche N (macro)............................ 3, 27 Touche OPEN/f (flash)................... 3, 29 Touche 6 (lecture).........3, 19, 94, 101 t (retardateur).................................. 3, 31 Touche 8/z....................... 3, 26, 36, 38 Touche 9/Z...................... 3, 26, 36, 38 A Adobe Reader...................................... 156 Affichage infos prise de vue ........... 145 Affichage touche Fn .......................... 145 Afficher nom de Mon Réglage....... 145 Alerte ...................................................... 173 B Balance blancs........................................86 Batterie......................................................12 C Câble A/V........................................... ii, 118 Câble USB..................120, 159, 160, 162 Cadrage.....................................................75 Caplio...................................................... 154 Carte mémoire.............................. 15, 139 CD..................................... ix, 153, 155, 157 Changement de mode prise de vue ...................................................................92 Chargeur de batterie.................. 12, 183 Cible de mise au point.........................66 CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE)................. 146 Comp. BB de Mes Réglages............. 133 Compensation balance blancs.........89 Compensation de flash .................... 136 Compensation de niveau ................ 106 Configuration....................................... 128 Connecteur du câble A/V ..................... 3 Contraste........................................ 71, 106 Contre-jour..............................................85 Copier sur carte depuis mémoire interne.................................................. 115 Correction biais............................ 56, 110 Correction du bougé............................92 Correction exposition flash................78 Couleur.................................71, 75, 86, 89 Courroie d’encolure....................... ii, 179 Couvercle du connecteur..................... 3 Couvercle du flash................................... 2 Couvercle du logement de la batterie/carte............................ 3, 14, 15 D Décalage ouverture..............................92 Déclencheur....................................... 2, 23 Déclencheur à câble.......................... 178 Déclencheur ADJ................................ 135 Défaut.....................................59, 127, 128 Délai de validation LCD.................... 142 Diaporama ............................................ 111 Dist. mise au pt snap............................68 DL-10..............................................153, 159 DNG............................................................63 DPOF....................................................... 115 E Écran d’affichage des photos...3, 8, 42 Éditer Mes Réglages.......................... 132 Éléments vendus séparément....... 178 Enr.Mes Réglages................................ 129 Exposition .........................................50, 85 Extinction auto.................................... 141 F Flash, optionnel................................... 181 Flash auxiliaire AF....................2, 31, 140 Flou.............................................................24 Fonct. réglage Mon réglage ........... 1339 Format [Carte]...................................... 139 Format [Mémoire interne]............... 139 G Griffe alimentée .................... 2, 181, 182 Grille de cadrage.......................... 42, 144 H Haut-parleur.............................................. 3 HDMI ..............................................119, 149 Histogramme................................ 44, 108 Horloge ........................................... 20, 149 Horodatage .............................................84 I Image zoom numérique.................. 147 Impression ............................................ 122 Indicateur de niveau ............................32 Initialiser...................................................91 Instantané par pression ......................69 Interrupteur MARCHE/ARRÊT ...... 2, 18 Irodio Photo & Video Studio........... 153 J JPEG............................................................63 L Lancer extraction réglages............. 150 Language/L................................... 149 Lecture, photos......................................34 Lecture, téléviseur.............................. 118 Lecture, vidéos.......................................94 Logiciel................................................... 154 Luminosité............................44, 106, 139 Luminosité LCD................................... 139 M Macintosh.............................................. 162 Manette ADJ................................ 3, 5, 134 Mémoire, interne......................... 15, 139 Mémo position curseur menu....... 147 Menu lecture........................................ 101 Menu prise de vue ................................58 Messages d’erreur .............................. 167 Mesure.......................................................66 Mesure exposition.................................70 Microphone............................................... 2 Mise au point..........................................64 Mise au point automatique ........22, 64 Mise au point manuelle ......................65 Mode A (priorité à l’ouverture).... 4, 48 Mode continu .........................................73 Mode flash ...............................................28 Mode M (exposition manuelle)... 4, 50 Mode macro............................................27 Mode M par 1 seule pression......... 138 Mode P (changement de programme)..................................... 4, 46 Mode S (priorité à l’obturation)... 4, 49 Mode 4...................................... 4, 52 Modes MY ........................................... 4, 57 Mode vidéo..............................................54 Monochrome ...................................71, 75 N N° séquentiel de la carte ................. 148 Netteté ......................................................71 Niveau de batterie.................................10 Niveau de flash.......................................79 Noir et Blanc.....................................71, 75 NTSC...............................................149, 183 O Options du sélecteur de mode lecture.................................................. 138 Options personnalisées.................... 127 Options sélecteur de mode M....... 138 Ordinateur............................................. 151 Ouverture...................................46, 48, 50 P PAL ..................................................149, 183 PictBridge.............................................. 120 Pré AF.........................................................70 Prise de vue à intervalles....................83 Profondeur de champ..........................6490 Protéger................................................. 112 Q Qualité image/Taille .............................61 R Rapprochée (prise de vue).................27 RAW............................................................62 Récupération de Mes Réglages..... 131 Réduction bruit......................................80 Réduction bruit ISO..............................80 Réglage espace couleurs................. 146 Réglage niveau.................................... 144 Réglages image......................................71 Réglage synchro du flash ...................79 RICOH Gate La...................................... 154 Rotation auto....................................... 143 S SD, SDHC...................................................15 Sélecteur de mode..............................2, 4 Sélecteur plus-moins.........................2, 5 Sensibilité ISO.........................................90 Sensibilité ISO auto-hi ...................... 140 Sons touches........................................ 142 Sortie vidéo .......................................... 149 Suppression de photos.......................39 Surbrillance..............................................43 T Taille video...............................................63 Téléviseur............................................... 118 Témoin de mise au point automatique/flash .......................................3, 18, 22, 29, 141 Touche DIRECT .....................................3, 5 Touche Fn1, Fn2..............................3, 136 Touche C/D.......3, 58, 101, 126 V Verrouillage de la mise au point......25 Vis de fixation du trépied...................... 3 Visualisation de photos.......................34 Vitesse d’obturation.......................46, 49 VM-1...............................................165, 166 Volume............................................ 94, 142 Vue multi-images..................................36 Z Zoom..........................................................26 Zoom en lecture ....................................38 Zoom numérique ..................................26 Zoom par 1 seule pression.............. 143Numéros de téléphone des centres d’aide en Europe UK (from within the UK) (from outsideof the UK) 02073 656 580 +44 2073 656 580 Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands) (außerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 +49 6331 268 438 France (àpartirdelaFrance) (en dehorsdelaFrance) 0800 88 18 70 +33 1 60 60 19 94 Italia (dall’Italia) (dall’estero) 02 696 33 451 +39 02 696 33 451 España (desdeEspaña) (desdefueradeEspaña) 91 406 9148 +34 91 406 9148 http://www.service.ricohpmmc.com/Del’espritécologique à la préservation et à la gestion del’environnement Ricoh promeut avec résolution les technologies douces et le souci volontariste de l’environnement, adoptant ainsi une attitude civique visant à préserver les ressources irremplaçables de notre planète. Pour réduire la charge éco-agressive des appareils photo numériques, Ricoh travaille aussi sur les “Économies d’énergie par réduction de la consommation” et la “Réduction des substances chimiques nuisibles à l’environnement dans les produits”. En cas de problème Voir d’abord la section “Résolution des problèmes” (page 165) dans ce manuel. Si le problème persiste, contacter la société Ricoh. Bureaux Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) OberratherStr.6,40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331268438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +496331268438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH FRANCES.A.S. (PMMCFRANCE) (àpartirdelaFrance) 0800881870 (en dehorsdelaFrance) +33160601994 À propos de Irodio Photo & Video Studio Amériquedu Nord(USA) (Appelgratuit) +1–800–458–4029 Europe Royaume-Uni, Allemagne,FranceetEspagne: (Appelgratuit) +800–1532–4865 Autrespays : +44–1489–564–764 Asie +63–2–438–0090 Chine +86–21–5385–3786 Heuresdebureau:9h00-17h00 *L754 3972A* Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2009 Décembre EN FR F-FR Imprimé en Chine Before You Begin Before using your camera body, take a few moments to familiarize yourself with the controls and displays (pages 1–10). Refer to this section as you read through the rest of the manual. Basic Photography and Playback Read this section before using the camera for the first time. It covers the steps involved in readying the camera for use, taking photographs, and playing them back (pages 11–44). Reference Read this section for information on topics not covered in “Basic Photography and Playback.” It covers advanced shooting and playback options, and describes how to print photographs, customize camera settings, and copy pictures to a computer (pages 45–187). The rechargeable battery needs to be charged before use. The battery is not charged at the time of purchase. GXR DIGITAL CAMERA BODY Camera Body User Guide The product serial number can be found on the bottom of the camera body.ii Package Contents Confirm that the package contains the items listed below. * The actual appearance of included items may differ. GXR camera body The serial number can be found on the bottom of the camera body. USB cable with mini-B connector Connect the camera body to a computer or printer. A/V cable Connect the camera body to a TV. Connector Cap The cap comes mounted on the camera body. Hot shoe cover The cover comes mounted on the hot shoe of the camera body. DB-90 rechargeable battery BJ-9 battery charger • CD: Contains software and a Software User Guide. • Camera Body User Guide (this manual) • Neck strap • Warranty Tip: Attaching the NeckStrap Put the ends of the neck strap through the strap eyelets on each side of the camera body, and thread the ends through the clips as shown.iii Notices • Safety precautions: Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use. • Test shots: Take test shots to ensure that the camera is working properly before taking photos on important occasions. • Copyright: Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines, and other materials, other than for personal, home, or other similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright holder, is prohibited. • Exemption from liability: Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or display images as a result of product malfunction. • Warranty: This product is manufactured to local specifications and the warranty is valid within the country of purchase. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product in other countries or bearing any expense thereby incurred. • Radio interference: Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic equipment may adversely affect both the camera and the other device. Interference is particularly likely if the camera is used in close proximity to a radio or television. This can be resolved by moving the camera as far as possible from the other device, reorienting the radio or television antenna, or plugging the radio or television into a different outlet. © 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time without prior notice. Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover of this booklet. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of America and other countries. Macintosh and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States of America and other countries. Adobe, the Adobe logo, and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. HDMI, the Logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners.iv Safety Precautions Warning Symbols Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below. Danger This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Warning This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Caution This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical damage if ignored or incorrectly handled. SampleWarnings The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed. The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions. The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action is prohibited. Examples Do not touch Do not disassemble Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this equipment. Danger Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard. Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or directly solder the battery.v Do not put the battery in a fire, attempt to heat it, use it in a high temperature environment such as next to a fire or inside a car, or abandon it. Do not put it into water or the sea or allow it to get wet. Do not attempt to pierce, hit, compress, drop, or subject the battery to any other severe impact or force. Do not use a battery that is significantly damaged or deformed. Warning Turn off the power immediately in the event of abnormalities such as smoke or unusual odors being emitted. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. If you are drawing power from a household electrical outlet, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet to avoid fire or electrical hazards. Discontinue use of the equipment immediately if it is malfunctioning. Contact the nearest service center at your earliest convenience. Turn off the power immediately if any metallic object, water, liquid or other foreign object gets into the camera body. Remove the battery and memory card as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. If you are drawing power from a household electrical outlet, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet to avoid fire or electrical hazards. Discontinue use of the equipment immediately if it is malfunctioning. Contact the nearest service center at your earliest convenience.vi Avoid any contact with the liquid crystal inside the picture display, should the monitor be damaged. Follow the appropriate emergency measures below. • SKIN: If any of the liquid crystal gets on your skin, wipe it off and rinse the affected area thoroughly with water, then wash well with soap. • EYES: If it gets in your eyes, wash your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical advice immediately. • INGESTION: If any of the liquid crystal is ingested, rinse the mouth out thoroughly with water. Have the person drink a large amount of water and induce vomiting. Seek medical assistance immediately. Follow these precautions to prevent the battery from leaking, overheating, igniting or exploding. • Do not use a battery other than those specifically recommended for the equipment. • Do not carry or store together with metal objects such as ballpoint pens, necklaces, coins, hairpins, etc. • Do not put the battery into a microwave or high pressure container. • If leakage of battery fluid or a strange odor, color change, etc. is noticed during use or during charging, remove the battery from the camera body or battery charger immediately and keep it away from fire. Please observe the following in order to prevent fire, electrical shock or cracking of the battery while charging. • Use only the indicated power supply voltage. Also avoid the use of multi-socket adapters and extension cords. • Do not damage, bundle or alter power cords. Also, do not place heavy objects on, stretch or bend power cords. • Do not connect or disconnect the power plug with wet hands. Always grip the plug section when disconnecting a power cord. • Do not cover equipment while charging.vii Keep the battery and SD memory card used in this equipment out of the reach of children to prevent accidental ingestion. Consumption is harmful to human beings. If swallowed, seek medical assistance immediately. Keep the equipment out of the reach of children. Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service center if it is damaged. Do not use the equipment in wet areas as this could result in fire or electric shock. Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns. Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as this may lead to disasters or accidents. Wipe off any dust that accumulates on the electrical plug as this may lead to fire. To avoid the risk of fire, electric shock or injury, do not use the battery charger with commercially available electronic transformers when traveling abroad.viii Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit. Caution Contact with fluid leaking from a battery can lead to burns. If part of your body comes in contact with a damaged battery, rinse the area with water immediately. (Do not use soap.) If a battery starts to leak, remove it immediately from the equipment and wipe the battery chamber thoroughly before replacing it with a new battery. Plug the power cords securely into the electrical outlets. Loose cords pose a fire hazard. Do not allow the camera body to get wet. In addition, do not operate it with wet hands. Both pose the risk of electric shock. Do not fire the flash at drivers of vehicles, as this may cause the driver to lose control and result in a traffic accident. Safety Precautions for Accessories When using optional products, carefully read the instructions provided with the product before using that product.ix Product Manuals The following manuals are provided with the GXR camera body: Camera Body User Guide (this booklet) This guide describes how to use your camera and install the supplied software. * Read this guide along with the documentation provided with the camera unit. Software User Guide (pdf file) The Software User Guide describes how to copy pictures from your camera body to a computer for display and editing. It is available in several languages, each in its own folder in the “DC Manual” folder on the supplied CD. For ease of reference, copy the pdf file from the CD to your computer hard disk. “Irodio Photo & Video Studio” image viewing and editing software is also included with this product. For information on using this software, see the Help menu in Irodio Photo & Video Studio or telephone one of the following customer support centers: • North America (U.?S.?A.): +1–800–458–4029 (toll free) • U. K., Germany, France, and Spain: +800–1532–4865 (toll free) • Other European countries: +44–1489–564–764 • China: +86–21–5385–3786 • Other Asian countries: +63–2–438–0090 Business hours: 9:00 AM to 5:00 PMx Table of Contents Package Contents...................................................................................................... ii Notices............................................................................................................................. iii Safety Precautions....................................................................................................iv Product Manuals........................................................................................................ix Before You Begin 1 Read this section before using your camera body for the first time. Introduction ....................................................................................2 Parts of the Camera Body .....................................................................................2 Basic Photography and Playback 11 Read this section before using your camera for the first time. First Steps.......................................................................................12 Charging the Battery.............................................................................................12 Inserting the Battery .............................................................................................14 Inserting Memory Cards.....................................................................................15 Attaching the Camera Unit to the Camera Body................................17 Turning the Power On and Off.......................................................................18 Basic Setup..................................................................................................................20 Taking Photographs.....................................................................21 Holding the Camera..............................................................................................21 Taking a Photograph.............................................................................................22 Zoom..............................................................................................................................26 Close-ups (Macro Mode)....................................................................................27 Flash Photography .................................................................................................28 Self-Timer .....................................................................................................................31 Tilt Indicator................................................................................................................32 Viewing and Deleting Photographs..........................................34 Viewing Photographs...........................................................................................34 Deleting Photographs..........................................................................................39 O (DISP.) Button...................................................................................................42xi Reference 45 Read this section for more information on camera functions. More on Photography .................................................................46 Mode P: Program Shift.........................................................................................46 Mode A: Aperture Priority..................................................................................48 Mode S: Shutter Priority ......................................................................................49 4Mode M: Manual Exposure ...............................................................................50 Mode: Settings for Various Scenes..............................................52 “MY” Modes: Using Custom Settings...........................................................57 Shooting Menu ........................................................................................................58 Playback Functions ......................................................................94 Viewing Movies........................................................................................................94 Viewing MP Files......................................................................................................95 Playback Menu............................................................................101 Playback Menu ...................................................................................................... 101 Viewing Pictures on TV..................................................................................... 118 Printing Photographs ................................................................120 Connecting the Camera Body ..................................................................... 120 Printing....................................................................................................................... 122 Camera Settings..........................................................................126 Key Custom Options.......................................................................................... 129 Setup............................................................................................................................ 139 Copying Pictures to a Computer..............................................151 Windows.................................................................................................................... 151 Macintosh................................................................................................................. 162 Technical Notes...........................................................................167 Troubleshooting................................................................................................... 167 Specifications.......................................................................................................... 175 Optional Accessories......................................................................................... 178 Using the Product Abroad.............................................................................. 183 Precautions for Use............................................................................................. 183 Care and Storage.................................................................................................. 185 Warranty and Servicing.................................................................................... 186 NOTICES..................................................................................................................... 187 Index .............................................................................................188xii First-time user? read this.  Before You Begin Read this section before using your camera body for the first time. Introduction .............................................................. 2First-time user? read this. 2 Introduction This manual describes how to take pictures and play them back. To ensure that you get the most from this product, read this manual thoroughly before use and keep it handy when using the product. Parts of the Camera Body For more information, refer to the page number to the right of each item. Front 3 4 5 6 7 12 11 13 8 9 10 14 1 2 1 Up-down dial ................................5 2 Modedial lockrelease...................4 3 Modedial ......................................4 4 Shutter-releasebutton..........21,23 5 Power switch.........................18,21 6 AFauxiliarylight.................31,140 7 Hot shoe....................................181 8 Flash cover...................................29 9 Microphone..................................– 10 Strapeyelet...................................ii 11 Alignment markforattaching cameraunit.................................17 12 Connector....................................17 13 Cameraunit releaselever............17 14 Flash............................................28First-time user? read this.  Back 4 1 2 3 17 16 13 14 15 12 9 22 21 20 19 5 6 23 7 8 10 18 11 1 DIRECTbutton ..............................5 2 OPEN/f(flash)button................29 3 VF/LCD button.............................42 4 Picturedisplay...............................8 5 Autofocus/flash lamp ................................18,22,29,141 6 Connector for USB cable ..........................120,159,160,162 7 Connector for A/V cable.............118 8 Connector for HDMI mini cable...119 9 ADJ. lever..............................5,134 10 6(playback)button ................................19,34,94,101 11 N(macro)button......................27 12 8(telephoto)/z(enlarged view)button .........................26,36 13 9(wide-angle)/Z(thumbnail display)button......................26,36 14 Directionalpad............................37 + (!).....................................137 – (%).....................................137 Fn1(Function1) (#)...............136 Fn2(Function2) ($)...............136 15C/Dbutton ....................................58,101,126 16 O(DISP.)button ....................42 17 t(self-timer)/d(delete)button ..............................................31,39 18 Tripodscrew hole......................176 19 Battery/cardcover.................14,15 20 Releaselever .........................14,15 21 Speaker ........................................– 22 Strapeyelet...................................ii 23 Connector cover.................118,121First-time user? read this.  Mode Dial Before shooting, press the mode dial lock release (1) and rotate the mode dial to choose a shooting mode (2). 1 2 5(auto): The camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure (page 21). M (manual exposure): You choose shutter speed and aperture (page 50). MY, MY2, MY (“mysettings”): Recall settings saved using Reg. My Settings (pages 57, 129). A (aperture priority): You choose an aperture and let the camera adjust the shutter speed for optimal exposure (page 48). 4(scene): Optimize settings for the current subject or scene, or shoot movies (page 52). S(shutter priority): You choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for optimal exposure (page 49). P (programshift): You choose from combinations of shutter speed and aperture that produce the same exposure (page 46).First-time user? read this.  Up-down Dial and ADJ. Lever When viewing pictures or navigating the menus, you can use the up-down dial in place of + and –, and the ADJ. lever in place of Fn and Fn2. The ADJ. lever and up-down dial can also be used to select shutter speed and aperture in P, A, S, and M modes. Up-down dial ADJ. lever You can assign frequently-used shooting menu items to the ADJ. lever for easy access (page 134). To display a shooting menu item, center the ADJ. lever and press it in; you can then use the lever and up-down dial to select an option. Note The M Mode Dial Options and Playback Mode Dial Options items in the key custom options tab can be used to change the assigned functions of the up-down dial and ADJ. lever (page 138). DIRECT Button Press the DIRECT button in the shooting mode to display the current shooting settings. DIRECTFirst-time user? read this.  DIRECTscreen For more information, refer to the page number to the right of each item. 1 2 3 8 4 5 12 13 18 10 9 11 15 14 16 17 6 7 1 Shooting mode..............................4 2 Aperture..........................46,48,50 3 Shutter speed..................46,49,50 4 Flash mode..................................28 5 Flash compensation/manual flash amount.........................78,79 6 Exposurecompensation ..............85 7 ISO...............................................90 8 Whitebalance.............................86 9 Focus mode.................................64 10 Exposure metering......................70 11 Imagesettings ............................71 12 Picturequality/size/moviesize....61 13 Bracketing...................................75 14 Continuous..................................73 15 Information area...........................7 16 Macro mode................................27 17 AELock......................................136 18 Self-timer....................................31 Changing the Shooting Settings on the DIRECT screen On the DIRECT screen, move the cursor using +, –, Fn, Fn2 or the ADJ. lever (left and right) to highlight an item, and change the setting directly using the up-down dial. The exposure compensation can be adjusted using + and – instead of the up-down dial.First-time user? read this.  Displaying the Options for the Shooting Settings Pressing the ADJ. lever when an item is highlighted on the DIRECT screen displays the options for the setting item. Select the desired option using + and –, or the updown dial, and then press the ADJ. lever or the C/ D button to set the option. Caution The settings of shooting mode, macro mode, self-timer, and flash mode for built-in flash cannot be changed by selecting the item on the DIRECT screen. Change the settings using the mode dial or the buttons on the camera body. Notes • Pressing the DISP. button changes the setting of background image (page 140). • Pressing C/D on the DIRECT screen will display the shooting menu (page 59). • After setting the exposure compensation, press Fn, Fn2, or the ADJ. lever (left or right) to move the cursor to other items. • When in manual exposure mode, the exposure indicator to achieve optical exposure will be displayed instead of the exposure compensation slider. • When in program shift mode, the value of shutter speed and aperture will be changed at the same time to produce the same exposure. • The item name of shooting menu corresponding to the selected item on the DIRECT screen will be displayed in the information area. Displaying the Next or Previous Page If the items displayed on a screen extends over multiple pages, you can display the next or previous page by pressing + or –, or rotating the up-down dial while pressing the DIRECT button.First-time user? read this.  Picture Display The following indicators may be displayed during shooting and playback. Shooting (still photography) Shooting (movie mode) 4:3 N F 2.5 25cm- 1/50 200 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 15 18 31 19 27 28 29 30 26 32 20 25 24 22 23 21 37 38 F 2.5 1/50 200 34 33 35 36 1 Flash mode............28 2 Flash compensation/ manual flash amount .........................78,79 3 Scene mode...........52 Continuous.............73 4 Shooting mode........4 5 Numberofexposures remaining ?* ..........177 6 Destination............15 7 Snapfocusdistance .........................64,68 8 Picturequality/size ..............................61 9 Focus mode/full press snap........64,69 10 Whitebalance/ whitebalance compensation ...86,89 11 Exposure metering ..............................70 12 Imagesettings ......71 13 Bracketing.............75 14 Histogram .............44 15 Distortion correction ..............................81 16 Noisereduction .....80 17 Camerashake correction..............92 18 Dateimprint..........84 19 Batterylevel..........10 20 Autoexposurelock ............................136 21 Self-timer..............31 22 Macro mode..........27 23 Minimum shooting distance...............144 24 Digital zoom ratio ..............................26 25 Zoom bar...............26 26 Interval shooting...83 27 Exposureindicator ..............................50 28 Aperture.....46,48,50First-time user? read this. 9 29 Shutter speed ...................46,49,50 30 Exposure compensation .......85 31 ISO.........................90 32 Tilt indicator..........32 33 Exposure warning.................86 34 Blur warning....24,93 35 Depth of field........64 36 Focusbar...............64 37 Movielength..63,177 38 Timeavailable ?* ......55 * Approximation only; actual capacity varies with shooting conditions and make of memory card. Display shows “9999” when memory remains for over 9,999 images. Note The shooting settings can be viewed by pressing the DIRECT button (page 5). Playback (photographs) Playback (movies) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4:3 N 2010/0101 00:20 F 2.5 ISO 200 1/50 EV+0.7 2010/01/01 00:20 16 15 17 18 1 File number.............– 2 Current frame..........– 3 Total frames ............– 4 Playback mode indicator..................– 5 Protectedimage..112 6 DPOFprint indicator..............115 7 Source...................15 8 Picturequality/size ..............................61 9 Dateof recording .......................20,149 10 Aperture.....46,48,50 11 ISO.........................90 12 Exposure compensation .......85 13 Shutter speed ...................46,49,50 14 Batterylevel..........10 15 Length/elapsedtime ................................– 16 Progress indicator....– 17 Whitebalance.......86 18 Whitebalance compensation .........89First-time user? read this. 0 Notes • The picture display may also display warnings and messages. • Additional information can be viewed by pressing the DISP. button (page 42). 4:3 N 2.5 200 The BatteryLevel Indicator Battery level is shown by the icon at the bottom right corner of the picture display. Icon Description (green) Battery fully charged. (green) Battery partially discharged. (orange) Low battery. Charge or replace as soon as possible. First-time user? read this.  First Steps................................................................ 2 Taking Photographs................................................. 2 Viewing and Deleting Photographs...........................  Basic Photography and Playback Read this section before using your camera for the first time.First-time user? read this. 2 First Steps Prepare the camera for use. Charging the Battery The rechargeable battery (DB-90) supplied with the camera body is not charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery in the supplied BJ-9 battery charger before use. 1 Place the battery in the charger. Place the battery label up with the “+” and “–” labels oriented to match the labels on the charger. Caution Be sure the battery is in the correct orientation. 2 Connect the power cord to the charger, and then plug in. The charger lamp will light while the battery charges. An exhausted battery will recharge in about five hours at 25°C. Note If the charger lamp blinks, a battery or charger fault may have occurred. Unplug the power cord and remove the battery from the charger.First-time user? read this.  3 Remove the battery. Charging is complete when the charger lamp turns off. Unplug the power cord and remove the battery from the charger. Cautions • Rechargeable Li-ion battery: Use only a genuine DB-90 battery. Do not use a battey not specifically designated by Ricoh for use in this camera body. • The battery may be hot immediately after use. Before removing the battery, turn the power off and wait for the battery to cool down. • Remove the battery if the camera will not be used for extended periods. Tip: BatteryCapacity The number of shots that can be taken with a fully-charged DB-90 battery differs depending on the camera unit. The tests are conducted according to CIPA standards under the following conditions: at the temperature of 23 °C (73 °F); with the picture display on; shoot every 30 seconds with flash fired every other shot; turn the camera off and on every 10 shots taken. See the documentation provided with the camera unit for details.First-time user? read this.  Inserting the Battery Be sure the power is off before inserting or removing the battery. 1 Open the battery/card cover. Unlatch (1) and open (2) the cover. 2 Insert the battery. Using the battery to keep the battery latch pressed downward, slide the battery in. The latch will click into place when the battery is fully inserted. 1 2 3 Close the battery/card cover. Close (1) and latch (2) the cover. Caution Be sure the cover is latched. 1 2 Removing the Battery Unlatch and open the battery/card cover, press the latch downward to release it, and then remove the battery. Be careful not to drop the battery. Caution If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove and store the battery in a cool dry place.First-time user? read this.  Inserting Memory Cards Pictures can be stored in the camera body’s 86MB internal memory, or optional SD and SDHC memory cards. Internal memory is used if no card is inserted; if a card is inserted, the card will be used instead. Be sure the power is off before inserting or removing a memory card. 1 Open the battery/card cover. Unlatch (1) and open (2) the cover. 1 2 2 Insert the card. Holding the memory card in the orientation as shown, slide it in until it clicks into place. 3 Close the battery/card cover. Close (1) and latch (2) the cover. 1 2First-time user? read this.  RemovingMemoryCards Unlatch and open the battery/card cover, and then press the memory card in to eject it. The card can then be removed. Cautions • Pictures will not be saved to internal memory when a memory card is inserted, even if the memory card is full. • Keep the memory card contacts clean. Tip:Write Protection Slide the write-protection switch on memory card to “LOCK” to keep data from being written to or deleted from the card and to prevent the card from being formatted. Pictures cannot be taken when the memory card is locked; lock the card only to prevent accidental loss of data and be sure to unlock the card before shooting. Notes • Format memory cards before first use or after they have been used in a computer or other device (page 139). Be sure to back up any important data before formatting. • See page 177 for information on memory card capacity. • Pictures can be copied to memory cards from internal memory (page 115).First-time user? read this.  Attaching the Camera Unit to the Camera Body Be sure the power is off before attaching or removing the camera unit to/from the camera body. Remove the connector caps from the camera body and camera unit respectively. Align the left side of the camera unit with the alignment mark on the camera body, and then slide the camera unit to the left until it clicks. Alignment mark for attaching camera unit Removing the Camera Unit from the Camera Body Slide the camera unit release lever to the right, and remove the camera unit. Be careful not to drop the camera body and camera unit when removing the camera unit from the camera body.First-time user? read this.  Turning the Power On and Off Shooting Mode Slide the power switch to ON to turn the camera on. The camera will play the start-up sound. The autofocus/flash lamp blinks for several seconds while the camera starts up. To turn the camera off, slide the power switch to OFF. The number of pictures taken so far that day will be displayed before the camera turns off (zero is displayed if the camera clock has not been set; if you turn the camera off after changing the clock (page 20), the camera will display the number of pictures taken after the clock setting was changed). Caution Changes to continuous (page 73), interval (page 83), and selftimer (page 31) settings are lost when the camera is turned off. Turning the camera off restores settings for MY modes to the values saved with Reg. My Settings. Other settings are unaffected.First-time user? read this. 9 Playback Mode When the power is off, pressing the 6 button for about a second turns the camera on in playback mode. Press the 6 button again to turn the power off. Tip:SleepMode and Auto Power Off The camera will turn the display or power off automatically to save power if no operations are performed for the specified time in the Sleep Mode (page 141) and Auto Power Off (page 141).First-time user? read this. 20 Basic Setup A language-selection dialog is displayed the first time the camera is turned on. Follow the steps below to choose a language and set the time and date. To exit before setup is complete, press the DISP. button. The language, time, and date can be changed at any time in the setup menu (page 149). 1 Select a language. Press +, –, Fn, or Fn2 to highlight a language, and press C/D. 2 Set the clock. Press Fn or Fn2 to highlight the year, month, day, hour, minute, or date format, and then press + or – to change. After checking that the date is correct, press C/D. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press C/D to set the clock. Notes • If you leave the battery in the camera body for at least two hours, the clock and language settings are retained for about a week after the battery was removed. • The time and date of recording can be imprinted on photographs (page 84).First-time user? read this. 2 Taking Photographs After setting up the camera as described in “First Steps” (page 12), you are ready to take photographs. Slide the power switch to ON to turn the camera on, and rotate the mode dial to 5. Holding the Camera 1Hold the camera in both hands. Hold the camera in both hands with your elbows lightly pressed against your body. Caution Be sure that your fingers, hair or the neck strap do not obstruct the lens or flash. 2Get ready to shoot. Rest the finger on the shutter-release button.First-time user? read this. 22 Taking a Photograph 1 Focus. Frame your subject in the center of the picture display and press the shutter-release button halfway to set focus and exposure. 4:3 N If the camera is able to focus, the focus frames for the objects in focus are displayed in green (up to nine frames). If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame blinks red and the autofocus/flash lamp blinks green. Autofocus/flash lamp Focus frame 2 Take a picture. Gently press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the picture. The picture is displayed immediately after shooting for a few seconds (page 142), and saved to internal memory or memory card.First-time user? read this. 2 Tip:Shutter-Release Button The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. To focus, lightly press the shutter-release button until you feel resistance. This is called “pressing the shutter-release button halfway.” Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. Tip:Focus The autofocus/flash lamp and the focus frame show whether the subject is in focus. Focus status Focus frame Autofocus/flash lamp Before focusing White Off Subject in focus Green On (green) Unable to focus Red (blinks) Blinks (green) The camera may be unable to focus on the following: • Objects that lack contrast, such as the sky, a wall that is only one color, or the hood of a car • Flat objects containing only horizontal lines • Fast-moving objects • Objects that are poorly lit • Objects with bright reflections or backlighting • Flickering objects, such as fluorescent lights • Point light sources, such as light bulbs, spotlights, or LEDs Note that one or more focus frames may be displayed in green even if the camera is unable to focus on the above subjects; check focus in the picture display before shooting. If the camera is unable to focus, lock focus on another object at the same distance from the camera as your subject, then recompose the photograph and take the picture (page 25).First-time user? read this. 2 Tip: Avoiding Blurred Pictures To prevent blurring caused by the camera movement when the shutter is released (“camera shake”), press the shutter-release button smoothly and gently. Blurring is particularly likely to occur if: • The flash is off and lighting is poor • Using digital zoom (page 26) In situations in which photographs are especially prone to blurring caused by camera shake, a J icon will be displayed in the picture display. Hold the camera steady and try focusing again, or attempt one of the followings: • Turning the flash on ( ) or using auto flash ( ; see page 28) • Choosing a higher ISO (page 90) • Using the self-timer (page 31) • Using the camera shake correction (page 92) Notes • If the flash will fire when the picture is taken, a pre-flash will be emitted to assist focus and exposure. • In the case of overexposure or underexposure, a icon will be displayed. • You can choose how long pictures are displayed in the picture display after shooting. If desired, photographs can be displayed until the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (page 142).First-time user? read this. 2 Focus Lock Use focus lock to compose photographs in which the subject is not in the center of the frame. Focus lock can also be used if the camera is unable to focus. 1 Focus. Position your subject in the center of the picture display and press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. 4:3 N 2 Recompose the photograph. Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway to lock focus, recompose the photograph. Final composition Main subject 3 Take a picture. Gently press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the picture. Caution If the distance between the camera and subject changes while focus lock is in effect, focus again at the new distance.First-time user? read this. 2 Zoom The 8 (telephoto) button can be used to zoom in and the 9 (wide-angle) button to zoom out. 4:3 N 9 8 4:3 N Zoom out Zoom in 1 Frame the picture using the 8 and 9 buttons. 2 Focus. Press the shutter-release button halfway. 3 Take a picture. Gently press the shutterrelease button the rest of the way down. Notes • If using the camera unit without optical zoom, digital zoom works instead of optical zoom. • If using a camera unit equipped with optical and digital zoom, to switch from optical zoom to digital zoom, release the 8 button once at the maximum magnification by the optical zoom, and then press the 8 button again. To switch from digital zoom to optical zoom, press and hold the 9 button. • You can check the amount of optical zoom with the zoom bar in the picture display. When using the digital zoom, the zoom ratio is displayed in the picture display. • When RAW is selected for Picture Quality/Size (page 61), digital zoom cannot be used.First-time user? read this. 2 Close-ups (Macro Mode) Use macro mode for close-ups of small objects. 1 Press the N button. A N icon will be briefly displayed in the center of the picture display. N will then appear at the upper left of the display. 2 Focus. Frame the subject in the picture display and press the shutter-release button halfway. 3 Take a picture. 4:3 N Gently press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down. To exit macro mode, press the N button again. Note Even if Multi AF, Snap, 8 is selected for Focus, Spot AF is used in macro mode (page 64).First-time user? read this. 2 Flash Photography The flash only fires when it is raised. Press the OPEN/f button to raise the flash, and press the button again to choose from the following flash modes: Mode Description Flash Off The flash is off. Auto The flash fires automatically when required. Red-Eye Flash Reduces “red-eye” in portraits taken with the flash. Flash On The flash fires with every shot. Flash Synchro. Combines the flash with slow shutter speeds. Use when taking portraits that include details of the background or nightscape. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur. Manual Flash The flash fires with every shot. The amount of flash can be set in Manual Flash Amount (page 79). Note The effective range of the flash differs depending on the camera unit. See the documentation provided with the camera unit for details.First-time user? read this. 29 Using the Built-in Flash 1 Raise the flash. Press the OPEN/f button. OPEN 2 Select a flash mode. Press the OPEN/f button to select a flash mode. The flash mode icon appears at the top left corner of the display. Notes • The selected flash mode remains in effect until a new mode is chosen. • The autofocus/flash lamp blinks while the flash charges. Photographs can be taken when the lamp stops blinking. 3 Focus and shoot. If the flash will fire when the picture is taken, a preflash will be emitted to assist focus and exposure.First-time user? read this. 0 Notes • To close the flash when it is not in use, gently press the center of the flash cover down until it latches. • The flash turns off automatically in movie, continuous, and bracketing modes. • Do not use the built-in flash when an optional flash is attached. Failure to observe this precaution could cause damage to the product. Caution Do not use the flash unit in close proximity to your subject’s eyes. Particular care should be observed when photographing infants. Do not direct the flash at the operator of a motor vehicle.First-time user? read this.  Self-Timer Choose from ten-second, two-second, and custom setting timers. Use the two-second timer to prevent blur caused by camera movement when the shutter-release button is pressed. With the custom setting, a specified number of pictures can be taken at a specified interval. Set the shooting interval and number of pictures with Custom Self-Timer in the shooting menu (page 82). 1 Choose a self-timer mode. Press the t button once to select the ten-second timer, twice to select the twosecond timer, and three times to select the custom setting timer. Pressing the button the fourth time turns the timer off. The current selection is displayed in the picture display. Note The selected self-timer mode remains in effect until a new mode is chosen. 2 Start the timer. Press the shutter-release button to lock focus and start the timer. If the ten-second timer or custom setting timer is selected, the AF auxiliary light will light. Note Press C/D to cancel the custom setting timer during shooting. 4:3 N First-time user? read this. 2 Tilt Indicator Use the tilt indicator to level the camera when photographing buildings or landscapes. It is particularly useful for compositions in which the horizon is visible. 1Display options. Press and hold the O (DISP.) button until level setting options are displayed. 2 Select an option. CPress + or – to highlight an option, and press /D to select the highlighted option. Option Description Off Tilt indicator is not displayed. Display Tilt indicator is shown in the picture display. The amount and direction of tilt can be checked in the tilt indicator. The indicator turns green when the camera is level, orange when the camera is tilted, and red if the degree of tilt exceeds the maximum degree that can be displayed with the indicator. Tilt indicator is not shown if the display is off, indicators are hidden, or the framing grid is displayed (page 42). Disp + Snd Same as Display, except that a beep sounds periodically when the camera is level. Sound A beep sounds periodically when the camera is level. The tilt indicator is not displayed in the picture display.First-time user? read this.  Understanding theTilt Indicator 4:3 N Green 4:3 N Orange Camera level Camera tilted left 4:3 N Red 4:3 N Camera tilted too far to the right Camera tilted 90 ° left Note Tilt indicator settings can also be adjusted in the setup menu (page 144). Cautions • The tilt indicator is not displayed when the camera is upside down, movies are being recorded, or the interval timer is on. • The beep does not sound if the camera’s volume is set off (page 142). • The tilt indicator is intended as a guide only and should not be used as a spirit level or in other applications in which a high degree of precision is required. Accuracy drops when the camera is in motion or you are shooting on a vehicle or other moving platform. First-time user? read this. Viewing and Deleting Photographs Pictures can be viewed in the picture display. Viewing Photographs Press the 6 button in shooting mode to display the last photograph viewed. Press the 6 button again to exit to shooting mode. Tip: If theCamera Is Off If the power is off, press the 6 button for about a second to turn the camera on in playback mode. Press Fn2 to view photographs in the recorded order, Fn to view in reverse order. Press – to skip ten frames ahead, + to go back ten frames. First-time user? read this. Back one photo 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Back ten photos + 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Fn 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Fn2 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N – Ahead one photo Ahead ten photos 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Caution The camera records JPEG copies of RAW images for display in the picture display. When a RAW image is selected for playback, the camera shows the JPEG copy and a RAW indicator is displayed. If the JPEG copy has been deleted using a computer or other device, the camera will display a small preview of the RAW image, but you will not be able to view the image at larger magnifications. See pages 62, 63 for information on recording RAW images. Tip: Viewing Picturesin ShootingMode Photographs are displayed in the picture display immediately after shooting. You can choose how long pictures are displayed using LCD Confirmation Time in the setup tab (page 142). First-time user? read this. Tip: Viewing the Picturesin InternalMemory If a memory card is inserted, the pictures on the memory card will be displayed; the pictures in internal memory cannot be viewed even if the memory card is empty. The pictures in internal memory will only be displayed if no card is inserted in the camera body. Tip: Auto Rotate If On is selected for Auto Rotate in the setup tab (page 143), pictures will be automatically displayed in the correct orientation in the picture display. Viewing Multiple Photographs Press the z or Z button to choose the number of photographs to display from one, 20, and 81, or to choose to sort photographs by the date that photographs were taken. Single frame 20 frames 4:3 N 2010 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 2010 F 2.5 Last File Sort by date 81 frames First-time user? read this. Multi-frame views can be used to select images for display or deletion. In multi-frame views, use the directional pad to highlight photographs. Tip: Directional Pad The cursor can be moved in an oblique direction by pressing the diagonal portions on the directional pad. Notes • To display a photograph full frame, press the ADJ. lever in multiframe view. • To display the photographs on the previous or next page in the multi-frame view: • In the 20- and 81-frame view, press +, –, Fn, Fn2, or ADJ. lever (left or right), or rotating the up-down dial while pressing the DIRECT button. • In the sort by date view, pressing + or –, or rotating the updown dial while pressing the DIRECT button displays the next or previous page. Pressing Fn, Fn2, or ADJ. lever (left or right) while pressing the DIRECT button displays the photographs taken next or previous date. If pressing Fn2, or ADJ. lever to the right with the cursor at the last photograph, the photographs taken the next date is displayed. First-time user? read this. Playback Zoom Press the z button or rotate the up-down dial to the right to zoom in on the photograph currently displayed full frame. To zoom in to the magnification selected with One Press Zoom Ratio (page 143), press the ADJ. lever. The following operations can be performed: Use To z Zoom in. Up-down dial Rotate right to zoom in, left to zoom out. C/D When an image is magnified, press to display the image in the magnification ratio selected for One Press Zoom Ratio. If an image is displayed at the magnification selected for One Press Zoom Ratio, pressing C/D cancels zoom. Directional pad Move the areas to be displayed. ADJ. lever Press left or right to view other images at same zoom ratio. Z Zoom out. Notes • Maximum magnification varies with image size: Image size Maximum magnification L, M, 5M, 3M 16× 1M 6.7× VGA 3.4× • Playback zoom is not available with movies or pictures taken using M-Cont Plus. • If Setting2 is selected for Playback Mode Dial Options in the key custom options tab (page 138), the ADJ. lever and up-down dial can be used to view other areas of the image.9 First-time user? read this. Deleting Photographs Follow the steps below to delete photographs. Deleting Individual Photographs 1Display a photograph. Display a photograph you want to delete in singleframe playback (page 34). 2 Press the d button. The options will be displayed (you can change the photograph by pressing Fn or Fn2). 3 Select Delete One. CPress + or – to highlight Delete One, and press /D. A message is displayed during deletion. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to delete additional photographs, or highlight Cancel and press C/D to exit. Deleting All Files To delete all files, press the d button to display delete options as described above, and select Delete All. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press Fn or CFn2 to highlight Yes, and press /D.0 First-time user? read this. Deleting Multiple Files Follow the steps below to delete multiple files. 1 Press the d button. In multi-frame playback, proceed to step 2. In singleframe playback, the options shown at right will be displayed. Highlight Delete Multi and press C/D. 2 Select Sel. Indiv. or Sel. Range. To select images one at a time, highlight Sel. Indiv., press C/D, and proceed to step 3. To select images by specifying ranges, Chighlight Sel. Range, press /D, and proceed to step 3.1. Press the DISP. button to exit at any time without deleting files. 3 Select a photograph. Use the directional pad (page 37) to highlight Cphotographs, and press /D. Selected picture is marked with a d icon. To deselect a photograph, highlight it and press C/D again. 4:3 N 4:3 N  First-time user? read this. Tip:Selecting Ranges To switch from Sel. Indiv. to Sel. Range, press the ADJ. lever and follow the steps below: 3.1 Use the directional pad to highlight the first image of a range, and press C/D to select. The selected image is marked with a d icon. To deselect the image, press the DISP. button. 4:3 N 3.2 Use the directional pad to highlight the last image, and press C/D to select. The selected images are marked with a d icon. 4:3 N Repeat steps 3.1–3.2 to select additional ranges, or press the ADJ. lever to return to step 3 to select or deselect individual photographs. 4 Press the d button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed. 5 Select Yes. Press Fn or Fn2 to highlight Yes, and press C/D.2 First-time user? read this. O (DISP.) Button Press the O (DISP.) button to display the information in the picture display in shooting and playback modes. Turning the Picture Display On/Off Pressing the VF/LCD button while the picture display is on turns the picture display off. Some camera operations are not available when the picture display is off. Pressing the VF/LCD button again turns the picture display on. When a LCD viewfinder is attached, pressing the VF/LCD button switches between the LCD viewfinder and the picture display. Shooting Mode Press the O (DISP.) button to cycle through the following displays: Indicators displayed 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Indicators+ histogram No indicators 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Framing grid (no indicators) Tip:TheFraming Grid See page 144 on choosing a type of framing grid. First-time user? read this. Note If Display or Disp + Snd is selected for Level Setting (page 32), a tilt indicator appears when indicators are displayed. Playback Mode Press the O (DISP.) button to cycle through the following displays: Indicators displayed 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 White Saturation 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 White Saturation Details+ histogram No indicators 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 White Saturation 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 White Saturation Highlights Tip: Highlights The flashing portions of the highlights display indicate “washed out” areas in which details may have been lost to overexposure. Check images with the highlights display after shooting in direct sunlight or in other conditions in which parts of the image may be overexposed. If it seems important details may have been lost, choose a lower exposure compensation value and shoot again (page 85). Note that the display is intended only as a guide and may not be entirely accurate. First-time user? read this. Tip: Histogram The histogram is a graph showing the distribution of pixels of different brightness in the image. Brightness is plotted on the horizontal axis, with shadows at the left and highlights at the right. The vertical axis gives the number of pixels. The histogram can be used to assess exposure and check for loss of detail in highlights and shadows without the brightness of your surroundings affecting your judgement. A histogram in which pixels are clustered on the right indicates that the image may be overexposed, while a histogram in which pixels are clustered on the left indicates that the image may be underexposed. Overexposed Underexposed If the image appears to be incorrectly exposed, you may be able to use exposure compensation to correct exposure in subsequent photographs of the same subject (page 85; note that exposure compensation may be insufficient to produce the correct exposure in some cases). The histogram can also be used as a guide when adjusting contrast in photographs after shooting (page 107). The histogram is intended as a guide only and may not be completely accurate, particularly in cases in which the flash is used or ambient lighting is poor. More on Photography...............................................  Playback Functions................................................... 9 Playback Menu........................................................0 Printing Photographs..............................................20 Camera Settings......................................................2 Copying Pictures to a Computer ............................... Technical Notes....................................................... Reference Read this section for more information on camera functions. more on PhotograPhy More on Photography This section provides information on P, A, S, M, 4, and MY modes and on using shooting menu options. Mode P: Program Shift When the mode dial is rotated to P (program shift), you can use the up-down dial to choose from several combinations of shutter speed and aperture, all of which produced the same exposure. 1 Choose mode P. Rotate the mode dial to P. The shooting mode is shown by an icon in the picture display. 4:3 N 2Measure exposure. Press the shutter-release button halfway to measure exposure. The current shutter speed and aperture appear in the display. 2.5 200 3 Choose shutter speed and aperture. Release the shutter-release button and rotate the up-down dial to select a combination of shutter speed and aperture. 4:3 N  more on PhotograPhy Note Shutter speed and aperture can be adjusted for ten seconds after releasing the shutter-release button. 4 Take a picture. Gently press the shutter-release button all the way down to take the photograph. Note The combinations of shutter speed and aperture available at each exposure value differ depending on the camera unit. See the documentation provided with the camera unit for details. more on PhotograPhy Mode A: Aperture Priority In mode A (aperture priority), you choose the aperture and the camera selects the shutter speed. Choose large apertures (low f-numbers) to emphasize the main subject by blurring background and foreground details. Choose small apertures (high f-numbers) to bring both the background and main subject into focus. 1 Choose mode A. Rotate the mode dial to A. The current aperture is displayed in orange. 2 Choose an aperture. Rotate the up-down dial to choose an aperture. Your selection only takes effect when the photograph is taken; the effect cannot be previewed in the picture display. 3 Press the shutter-release button halfway. Press the shutter-release button halfway to set focus and exposure. The shutter speed selected by the camera will be displayed in the picture display. 4:3 N 4 Take a picture. Gently press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down. Note If auto aperture shift is on (page 92), the camera will adjust aperture for optimal exposure. 4:3 N 9 more on PhotograPhy Mode S: Shutter Priority In mode S (shutter priority), you choose the shutter speed and the camera selects the aperture. Choose fast shutter speeds to “freeze” motion, slow shutter speeds to emphasize motion by blurring moving objects. 1 Choose mode S. Rotate the mode dial to S. The current shutter speed is displayed in orange. 2 Choose shutter speed. Rotate the up-down dial to choose a shutter speed. 3 Press the shutter-release button halfway. Press the shutter-release button halfway to set focus and exposure. The aperture selected by the camera will be displayed in the picture display. 2.5 200 4 Take a picture. Gently press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. Note Maximum aperture (i.e., the lowest possible f-number) may not be selected at slow shutter speeds, even when the subject is poorly lit. 4:3 N 0 more on PhotograPhy Mode M: Manual Exposure In mode M (manual exposure), use the up-down dial to choose aperture and the ADJ. lever to select a shutter speed. 1 Choose mode M. Rotate the mode dial to M. The shooting mode, exposure indicator, and current aperture and shutter speed appear in the display. 4:3 N 2 Choose an aperture and shutter speed. Rotate the up-down dial to choose an aperture and press the ADJ. lever left or right to select a shutter speed (if desired, the roles of the two controls can be reversed; see page 138). The effects can be previewed in the picture display and are reflected in the exposure indicator (if the image would be under- or over-exposed by more than 2EV, the effects cannot be previewed and the indicator turns orange). 3 Take a picture. Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus, and then gently press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. –2–2 EVEV +2+2 EVEV more on PhotograPhy Notes • The shutter speeds that can be set depend on the camera unit and the aperture setting. See the documentation provided with the camera unit for details. • If Auto or Auto-Hi is selected for ISO Setting (page 90), ISO value will be fixed in manual exposure mode. The fixed value for ISO differs depending on the camera unit. See the documentation provided with the camera unit for details. • Choose slower shutter speeds for longer exposure times. To reduce blur caused by camera shake, hold the camera steadily in both hands or use a tripod. The picture display turns off while the shutter is open. At slow shutter speed, the camera automatically processes photographs to remove noise, increasing the time needed to record images to about twice the shutter speed. • Autoexposure (AE) lock is not available in manual exposure mode. If AE Lock is selected for Set Fn Button or Set Fn2 Button in the key custom options tab, pressing the assigned button in manual exposure mode will set shutter speed or aperture to a value close to that needed for optimal exposure. Similarly, if Exposure Comp. is selected for +/– Button Settings (page 137) in the key custom options tab, pressing the + and – buttons will not display exposure compensation options in manual exposure mode, but will instead set shutter speed or aperture to a value close to that needed for optimal exposure. This is useful when you want to use optimal exposure as a starting point for modifying exposure. The One Press M Mode (page 138) option in the key custom options tab determines whether shutter speed or aperture is altered to achieve optimal exposure.2 more on PhotograPhy 4 Mode: Settings for Various Scenes Select 4 mode to shoot movies or to choose one of the options that are suitable for particular scenes. Camera settings are automatically optimized for the selected subject type. The following is some of the options that can be selected in the 4 mode. Option Description Movie Shoot movies with sound (page 54). Portrait Use when taking portrait pictures. Sports Use when taking pictures of moving objects. Landscape Use when taking scenery pictures with abundant greenery or blue sky. Nightscape Use when shooting night scenes. In nightscape mode, the flash fires when all of the following conditions are satisfied: • The flash is set to Auto. • The flash is determined to be necessary because it is dark. • There is a figure or another object nearby. Skew Correct Mode Reduce the effects of perspective when photographing rectangular objects, such as message boards or business cards (page 56). more on PhotograPhy To select a scene mode option: 1 Rotate the mode dial to 4. The option currently selected for 4 mode appears in the display. 2 Press C/D. A menu for scene mode is displayed. 3 Select an option. CPress +, –, Fn or Fn2 to highlight an option and press /D to return to shooting mode with the selected option shown at the top of the display. 4 Take a picture. • Movie mode: See page 54. • Skew correct mode: See page 56. more on PhotograPhy Tip: Using theMenus To access the shooting, key custom mode, press options and setup menus in C/D to display the 4 scene mode menu and press Fn to highlight the mode tab. Press + or – to highlight the shooting menu tab (page 58), key custom options tab (page 127), or setup tab (page 128), and press Fn2 to place the cursor in the selected menu. See page 59 for information on the shooting menu options available in each mode. 1 2 3 4 1Mode tab 2Shooting menu tab 3Key custom options tab 4Setup tab Recording Movies Shoot movies with sound. Movies are stored as AVI files. 1 Select 3 in 4 mode. CPress + or – to highlight 3 (movie), and press /D. The mode is shown by an icon in the picture display. 2 Shoot. Press the shutter-release button to begin recording; press again to end. Recording ends automatically when memory is full. more on PhotograPhy Cautions • A icon blinks, and the recording time and remaining available time are displayed during recording. • Sounds made by the camera may be recorded with the movie. • Movies may be up to 90 minutes in length or 4GB in size. Depending on the type of memory card used, shooting may end before this length or size is reached. The maximum total length of all movie files that can be stored in internal memory or on a memory card varies with the options selected for Movie Size (page 61). Notes • The flash cannot be used in movie mode. • The camera focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed to begin recording. • The amount of time remaining is calculated based on the amount of memory available and may not diminish at an even rate. • Shooting menu options differ from those available in other modes (page 60). • Charge the battery before shooting. For long recordings, choose memory cards with high write speeds and check the amount of memory available before shooting. more on PhotograPhy 4 Mode: Skew Correct To take pictures in skew correct mode, frame the subject so that it occupies as much of the frame as possible and press the shutter-release button to take the photograph. If the camera detects an object of which perspective can be corrected, the object is shown surrounded by an orange frame. The camera can detect up to five objects; press Fn2 to select a different object, or press + to record the photograph without correcting perspective. If the camera is unable to detect a suitable object, an error message will be displayed and the photograph will be recorded without modification. Caution The camera records two images: the unmodified photograph and a copy that has been processed to correct perspective. No photograph will be taken if memory is insufficient to record two images. The camera may be unable to correct perspective if: • The subject is out of focus. • The four edges of the subject are not clearly visible. • There is little contrast between the subject and the background. • The background contains many fine details. Tip:SkewCorrection The Skew Correction in the playback menu can be used to correct perspective of saved photographs (page 110). more on PhotograPhy “MY” Modes: Using Custom Settings To take photographs using settings saved in MY1 option with Reg. My Settings in the key custom options tab (page 129), rotate the mode dial to MY. Select MY2 to take photographs using the settings saved with MY2, MY to take photographs using the settings saved with MY3. 1 Rotate the mode dial to MY, MY2, or MY. The shooting mode saved using Reg. My Settings will be displayed in the picture display. 4:3 N Note Settings can be adjusted in MY modes. The settings saved with Reg. My Settings are restored when another mode is selected or the camera is turned off. Tip:Choosing a ShootingMode To choose a shooting mode in MY mode without changing other settings, use the Switch Shooting Mode option in the shooting menu (page 92). Switch Shooting Mode is not available for MY modes that a scene mode is assigned to. 2 Take a picture. See the section on the selected shooting mode for more information. more on PhotograPhy Shooting Menu Use the +, –, Fn, Fn2, and C/D buttons to navigate the menus. Caution The shooting menu is not displayed when the camera unit is not attached to the camera body. 1Display the shooting menu. In modes other than 4, pressing C/D in shooting mode displays the shooting menu. Tip:4Mode CIn 4 mode, pressing /D displays the mode menu; press Fn to highlight the mode tab, press – to display the shooting menu, and Fn2 to place the cursor in the menu. Scroll bar shows position in menu 2 Select a menu item. Press + or – to highlight a menu item and press Fn2 to display options for the highlighted item. Note The items on the next page can be displayed by pressing – while pressing the DIRECT button.9 more on PhotograPhy 3 Select an option. Press + or – to highlight an option. Press C/ D to select and exit to shooting mode, or press Fn to select and return to the shooting menu. The items available in the shooting menu differ depending on the shooting mode. 5, P, A,S,M,MY,MY2 andMYModes Option Default Page Picture Quality/Size L4:3 N 61 Focus Multi AF 64 Snap Focus Distance 2.5?m 68 Full Press Snap On 69 Pre-AF Off 70 Exposure Metering Multi 70 Image Settings Standard 71 Continuous Mode Off 73 Auto Bracket Off 75 Flash Exposure Compensation 0.0 78 Manual Flash Amount 1/2 79 Flash Synchro Settings 1stCurtain 79 Noise Reduction Off 80 Noise Reduction ISO Over ISO 401 80 Distortion Correction Off 81 Option Default Page Auto Macro Off 81 Custom Self-Timer 2Pics,5Sec. 82 Interval Shooting — 83 Date Imprint Off 84 Exposure Compensation* 1 0.0 85 White Balance Multi-P AUTO 86 White Balance Compensation A:0, G:0 89 ISO Setting Auto 90 Restore Defaults* 2 — 91 Auto Aperture Shift* 3 Off 92 Switch Shooting Mode* 4 — 92 Camera Shake Correction * 5 On 920 more on PhotograPhy 4Mode:Movie Option Default Page Movie Size VGA640 61 Focus Multi AF 64 Snap Focus Distance 2.5?m 68 Pre-AF Off 70 Option Default Page White Balance Auto 86 White Balance Compensation A:0, G:0 89 4Mode: Portrait/Sports/Nightscape Option Default Page Picture Quality/Size L4:3 N 61 Focus Multi AF 64 Snap Focus Distance 2.5?m 68 Full Press Snap On 69 Pre-AF Off 70 Flash Exposure Compensation 0.0 78 Flash Synchro Settings 1stCurtain 79 Option Default Page Distortion Correction Off 81 Custom Self-Timer 2Pics,5Sec. 82 Date Imprint Off 84 Exposure Compensation 0.0 85 White Balance Multi-P AUTO 86 Camera Shake Correction * 5 On 92 4Mode:Landscape Option Default Page Picture Quality/Size L4:3 N 61 Distortion Correction Off 81 Custom Self-Timer 2Pics,5Sec. 82 Date Imprint Off 84 Exposure Compensation 0.0 85 Option Default Page White Balance Multi-P AUTO 86 Camera Shake Correction * 5 On 92 more on PhotograPhy 4Mode:SkewCorrect Option Default Page Picture Quality/Size 1M 4:3F 61 Focus Multi AF 64 Snap Focus Distance 2.5?m 68 Full Press Snap On 69 Pre-AF Off 70 Exposure Metering Multi 70 Image Settings Standard 71 Flash Exposure Compensation 0.0 78 Option Default Page Flash Synchro Settings 1stCurtain 79 Distortion Correction Off 81 Date Imprint Off 84 Exposure Compensation 0.0 85 White Balance Multi-P AUTO 86 ISO Setting Auto 90 Camera Shake Correction * 5 On 92 * 1 Notavailablein mode M. * 25modeonly. * 3 Mode A only. * 4 Mode MY, MY2 or MY only. * 5 This function is notavailabledependingon thetypeof cameraunit. Picture Quality/Size / Movie Size Image size determines the number of photographs and movies that can be stored in internal memory or on a memory card. For still images, the aspect ratio and picture quality can be selected for each option. The picture size differs depending on the combination of the selected option, aspect ratio and quality. For movies, select the desired option.2 more on PhotograPhy ForStill Images Option Aspect ratio Compression rate Description RAW 16:9* 2 , 4:3, 3:2* 2 , 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL/ VGA* 1 • Suitable for further image processing or editing on a computer. L 16:9* 2 , 4:3, 3:2* 2 , 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL • Suitable for printing at larger size or cropping the M image on a computer. 16:9* 2 , 4:3, 3:2* 2 , 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL 5M 4:3 FINE • Suitable for printing. 3M 4:3 FINE 1M* 4 4:3 FINE • Suitable for taking large number of photographs. VGA* 4 4:3 FINE • Suitable for taking large number of photographs, attaching the images to e-mail or posting images on the web. * 1 The setting is applied for the JPEG copy. * 2 The upper and lower parts on the display are blacked out. * 3 The left and right sides on the display are blacked out. * 4 1M and VGA are the options available in the Skew Correct mode. Notes • See the documentation provided with the camera unit for details on the picture size for each option. • Options for Picture Quality/Size can be displayed by pressing the ADJ. lever (page 134). more on PhotograPhy Tip: Picture Quality The camera supports the following picture qualities: • Normal: JPEG compression is used to reduce file size. • Fine: Compression rate is low to achieve high picture quality. File size becomes larger comparing to Normal quality. • RAW: RAW image data are saved in DNG format; JPEG copies are also created. The camera displays only the JPEG copy; DNG files can be viewed and edited on a computer using the supplied Irodio Photo & Video Studio Software (Windows only) or commercially-available applications that support the DNG format. Unlike normal- and fine-quality images, RAW images are not compressed. This increases file size but avoids the loss of quality associated with JPEG compression. Note the following when shooting RAW images: • Some functions of the shooting menu are not available for shooting RAW images. See the description of each setting for details. Image Settings and Date Imprint options apply only to JPEG copies and have no effect on the DNG files. • The number of RAW photographs that can be taken in a single burst in continuous mode differs depending on the camera unit and the settings of shooting menu. ForMovies Option Image size VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 Notes • The options for movies differ depending on the camera unit. See the documentation provided with the camera unit for details. • Movies may be up to 90 minutes in length or 4 GB in size. more on PhotograPhy Focus Choose how the camera focuses. By default, the camera uses autofocus. Option Description Multi AF* The camera selects the focus area with the closest subject, preventing out-of-focus shots by keeping the camera from focusing on the background. Spot AF* Focus on the subject in the center of the frame. MF (manual focus) Focus manually (page 65). Snap Focus is fixed at distance selected with Snap Focus Distance (page 68) for quick shutter response. 8 (infinity) Fix the focus distance at infinity when photographing distant scenes. * The icon is displayed on the DIRECT screen only. When MF, Snap, or 8 is selected, the current selection is shown by an icon in the picture display. 4:3 N Tip: Depth ofField Depth of field is the portion (range of distance) that appears sharp in an image. Small apertures (high f-numbers) increase depth of field, bringing more of the scene into focus; large apertures (low f-numbers) decrease depth of field, emphasizing the main subject by blurring the foreground and background. At settings of MF, Snap, and 8, the focus bar shows depth of field in shooting modes M, A, and P (in mode P, depth of field is only shown when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway and aperture values are displayed). Depth of field (green) Focus bar (distances are approximate) Depth of field (green) Focus bar (distances are  more on PhotograPhy Notes • Fn and Fn2 buttons can be used to switch back and forth between autofocus and manual or snap focus (page 136). • To zoom in on the subject in the center of the picture display and check focus, press and hold C/ D. Press and hold the button again to return to the normal shooting display. 4:3 N 2.5 30 Focus:MF(ManualFocus) Manual focus can be used to lock focus or to focus when the camera is unable to focus using autofocus. 1 Select MF (manual focus) in the Focus menu. The focus mode and focus bar are displayed in the picture display. 4:3 N 2.5 30 2 Choose the focus distance. While pressing the N button, rotate the up-down dial to focus. When using the camera unit with the focus ring, adjust the focus using the ring. 3 Take a picture. See the section on the selected shooting mode for more information. Note In manual focus mode, the camera can focus on the subject at close range (macro) even if macro mode is not set. more on PhotograPhy Choosing theFocus andMetering Target Target selection can be used to set focus and exposure for off-center subjects without moving the camera, making it easier to use a tripod. 1Activate target selection. Press the ADJ. lever in the focus modes other than MF, and then press the lever to the left or right to highlight P. Press + or – to highlight one of the following options and press C/D to select. Option Description AE/AF Spot metering and spot autofocus; choose the focus and exposure target. AF Spot autofocus; choose the focus target. Exposure is metered using the option selected for Exposure Metering (page 70). AE Spot metering; choose the metering target. Focus is set using the option selected for Focus (page 64). Off Target selection is off. 2 Position the target. Use the directional pad (page 37) to position the cross hairs over your subject, and press C/D. To return to the target selection menu, press the DISP. button. more on PhotograPhy 3 Take a picture. Press the shutter-release button halfway to set focus and/or exposure for the selected subject and then gently press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the picture. Notes • Target selection is not available in manual focus mode (page 65). • The selected target remains in effect until a new target is selected. Note that target will be reset if you choose a new option in the target-selection menu or select manual focus. • When macro mode is on in 4 mode, the focus target for macro mode can be selected by pressing the ADJ. lever, selecting U, and using the directional pad to position the cross-hairs as described on page 68. • The Fn buttons can be used for focus target selection in macro mode (page 68). Note that if the Fn buttons have been used to select the focus target, the ADJ. lever cannot be used for target selection until the target is reset. more on PhotograPhy Macro TargetSelection If Macro Target is assigned to the Fn or Fn2 button (page 136), you can select macro mode by pressing the assigned button in shooting mode. The crosshairs shown at right will be displayed; use the directional pad (page 37) to position the cross-hairs over your subject, and press C/D (to exit without setting the target, press the DISP. button). Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus on the selected target, and then gently press the shutterrelease button the rest of the way down to take the picture. If the ADJ. lever has been used to select a focus target (page 66), you cannot select macro target mode by pressing Fn and Fn2 until the target is canceled. Snap Focus Distance Select the distance at which the camera focuses when Snap is selected for Focus (page 64) or Full Press Snap is on (page 69). Choose from 1m (3.3ft.), 1.5m (4.9ft.), 2m (6.6ft.), 2.5m (8.2ft.), 3m (9.9ft.), 3.5 m (11.5 ft.), 5m (16.4ft.), and 8 (infinity). Note When Snap is selected for Focus or Full Press Snap is on, the snap focus distance can also be selected by rotating the updown dial while pressing the N button.9 more on PhotograPhy Full Press Snap Take photographs without pausing to focus the camera when Multi AF or Spot AF is selected for Focus (page 64). Option Description Off The function is off. On If the shutter-release is pressed all the way down in one motion, the camera will take a picture at the focus distance selected for Snap Focus Distance. Choose when quick shutter response is required. Auto-Hi ISO Same as On, except that ISO sensitivity is automatically set to Auto-Hi (page 90). Note The snap focus distance can be changed by rotating the updown dial while pressing the N button. Tip: Autofocus The camera will focus normally if you press the shutter-release button halfway. Cautions • Full press snap is not available in macro mode or when MF, Snap, or 8 is selected for Focus (page 64). • Care is required to avoid blur caused by camera movement.0 more on PhotograPhy Pre-AF If On is selected when Multi AF or Spot AF is selected for Focus (page 64), the camera will continue to focus even when the shutter-release button is not pressed halfway (the focus range is narrower than for normal focus). This may decrease the time needed to focus, potentially improving shutter response. Cautions • Pre-AF is not available when MF, Snap, or 8 is selected for Focus (page 64). • Using pre-AF increases the drain on the battery. Exposure Metering Choose how the camera measures light for exposure. Option Description Multi* The camera measures light in 256 areas of the frame. Center The camera measures light in the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to the center. Use when the subject in the center of the frame is brighter or darker than the background. Spot The camera measures light with the subject in the center of a frame, ensuring the optimal exposure even when it is markedly brighter or darker than the background. * The icon is displayed on the DIRECT screen only. When Center or Spot is selected, the current selection is shown by an icon in the picture display. 4:3 N  more on PhotograPhy Image Settings Adjust contrast, sharpness, and vividness (color depth) or take monochrome photographs. Option Description Vivid Take vivid photographs with heightened contrast, sharpness, and vividness. Standard* Normal contrast, sharpness, and vividness. Natural Creates a softer image with decrease in contrast, sharpness, and vividness. Black & White Take photographs in black and white. Contrast and sharpness can be adjusted manually. B&W (TE) (ToningEffect) Creates monochrome photographs with a sepia, red, green, blue, or purple tint. Vividness, contrast, and sharpness can be adjusted manually. Setting 1 Setting 2 Make individual adjustments to vividness, contrast, sharpness, colors and hue to create custom settings that can be recalled as desired. * The icon is displayed on the DIRECT screen only. At settings other than Standard, the current selection is shown by an icon in the picture display. 4:3 N To make individual adjustments to the settings for Black & White, B&W (TE), Setting1, or Setting2, highlight the desired option and press Fn2.2 more on PhotograPhy 1Adjust custom color reproduction settings. • Black & White: Press + and – to highlight an option and press Fn1 and Fn2 to change. • B&W (TE): Adjust vividness, contrast, and sharpness as described above. To choose a tint, highlight Toning Effect and press Fn2. Press + and – to highlight an option and press Fn to select. • Setting1/Setting2: Adjust vividness, contrast, and sharpness as described above. To adjust individual colors, highlight Individual Color Settings and press Fn2. Press + and – to highlight an option and press Fn and Fn2 to change. Press C/D to exit when settings are complete. To call the registered settings, highlight Recall Settings and press Fn2. Press + or – button to highlight an option and press C/D. 2 Return to the Image Settings menu. Press C/D when settings are complete. 3 Exit to shooting mode. CPress C/D, or press Fn1 and then press /D. more on PhotograPhy The option currently selected for Image Settings will be displayed in the picture display. 4:3 N Note Options for Image Settings can be displayed by pressing the ADJ. lever (page 134). Continuous Mode Shoot photographs in continuous sequence. • Continuous: The camera shoots while the shutter-release button is pressed. All the photographs taken in this mode are saved as individual still images. • M-Cont Plus (memory-reversal continuousplus): The camera shoots while the shutter-release button is pressed. Consecutive still images taken before releasing the shutter-release button are saved as one MP file (page 95). M-Cont Plus can be selected from M-Cont + (HI) and M-Cont + (LO). When you remove your finger from the shutter release button… …the camera records consecutive still images. more on PhotograPhy Note For M-Cont + (HI) and M-Cont + (LO) options, image sizes and the number of images saved as one MP file differ depending on the camera unit. See the documentation provided with the camera unit for details. At settings other than Off, the current selection is shown by an icon in the picture display. 4:3 N Caution Digital zoom is available at settings M-Cont Plus even if Auto Resize is selected for Digital Zoom Image. Notes • At settings other than Off, the flash turns off automatically, focus and exposure are fixed with the first shot in each series, and Auto white balance is used in place of Multi-P AUTO (page 86). • If you release the shutter-release button before reaching the number of images that are saved as one MP file, the photographs taken while pressing the button will be saved as one MP file. Tip:MP file MP is a file format for recording a set of still images. more on PhotograPhy Auto Bracket The camera records two or three copies of an image with variations in exposure, white balance or color. Option Description OFF* Auto bracket function is off. AE-BKT The camera records three copies of a photograph in the specified variation of exposure value. WB-BKT The camera records three copies of each photograph: one with a “warm,” reddish cast, a second at the white balance currently selected in the shooting menu (page 86), and a third with a “cool,” blueish cast. Choose when you find it difficult to select the correct white balance. Display after shooting CL-BKT Record photographs in both black-and-white and color or in black-and-white, color, and tinted monochrome (page 77). * The icon is displayed on the DIRECT screen only. The current selection is shown by an icon in the picture display. 4:3 N  more on PhotograPhy Notes • Bracketing is not available when an option other than Off is selected for Continuous Mode. White balance bracketing is not available when shooting monochrome photographs. • White balance bracketing and color bracketing are not available when RAW is selected for Picture Quality/Size (page 61). • The flash turns off automatically when bracketing is in effect. • Auto white balance is used in place of Multi-P AUTO when AEBKT is selected. AE-BKT:Exposure Bracketing To specify variations for exposure value: 1 Select AE-BKT. Highlight AE-BKT and then press Fn2. 2 Specify the exposure compensation value. Move the cursor using Fn or Fn2, press + or – to specify the compensation value, and then press C/D. 3 Return to shooting mode. CPress C/D, or press Fn and then press /D. Notes • If the same exposure compensation value is set, only one image will be displayed for the same value. • The step value of the compensation can be set with Exposure/ Flash Comp. Step in the setup tab (page 140). more on PhotograPhy CL-BKT:Color Bracketing The number and type of photographs recorded when CL-BKT is selected for Auto Bracket depends on the option selected for CL-BKT Black & White (TE) in the setup tab (page 146): • Off: The camera records two copies of each photograph, one in black and white and a second in color. • On: The camera records three copies of each photograph, one in black and white, a second in color, and a third using the tint selected for B&W (TE) in the Image Settings menu (page 71). B&W (TE) copy Tip:Contrast,Sharpness, and Color Depth The contrast, sharpness, and vividness of the images in the bracketing sequence are determined by the options selected in the Image Settings menu (page 71). The black-and-white copy is recorded at the settings most recently selected for Black & White, the tinted monochrome copy at the settings most recently selected for B&W (TE), and the color copy at the setting currently selected for Image Settings (if Black & White or B&W (TE) is selected, the color copy will be recorded at a setting of Standard). more on PhotograPhy Flash Exposure Compensation Adjust flash amount between –2.0 to +2.0 in steps of 1/2 or 1/3 EV. Selecting Flash Exposure Compensation in the shooting menu displays the slider shown at right; press + or – to choose a flash exposure compensation value and press C/D. Flash exposure compensation is displayed in the picture display except when the flash is off. 4:3 N Notes • See page 28 for information on using the flash. • The step value of the compensation can be set with Exposure/ Flash Comp. Step in the setup tab (page 140). Caution Flash exposure compensation may have no effect outside the range of the flash. See the documentation provided with the camera unit for details on the range of flash.9 more on PhotograPhy Manual Flash Amount Choose amount of light produced by the flash in manual flash mode (page 28). Flash amount is expressed as a fraction of full power (all values are approximate): FULL 1/1.4 1/2 1/2.8 1/4 1/5.6 1/8 1/11 1/16 1/22 1/32 1/64 Flash level is displayed in the picture display in manual flash mode. 4:3 N Note Flash exposure compensation is not available in manual flash mode. Caution Do not direct the flash at a person operating a motor vehicle or use the flash close to the subject’s eyes. Particular care should be observed when photographing infants. Flash Synchro Settings Choose how the flash synchronizes with the shutter. • 1st Curtain: The flash fires at the beginning of the exposure. Recommended in most situations. • 2nd Curtain: The flash fires at the end of the exposure. This option produces trails of light behind moving light sources.0 more on PhotograPhy Noise Reduction Choose Weak or Strong to reduce noise (random variations in brightness and color) in photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities. The minimum ISO sensitivity at which noise reduction applies can be selected using Noise Reduction ISO. is displayed when noise reduction is on. 4:3 N Notes • When RAW is selected for Picture Quality/Size (page 61), noise reduction applies only to the JPEG copy, not to the DNG file. • The time needed to record photographs varies with the option selected for Noise Reduction. Noise Reduction ISO Select the minimum ISO sensitivity to apply noise reduction function to when Weak or Strong is selected for Noise Reduction. Choose from All (noise reduction applies at all ISO sensitivities), Over ISO 201, Over ISO 401, Over ISO 801, Over ISO1601, and ISO3200. more on PhotograPhy Distortion Correction Set Distortion Correction to On to shoot by automatically correcting the distortion of the image. is displayed when distortion correction is on. 4:3 N Cautions • Even if Distortion Correction is set to On, the correction is not applied depending on the type of camera unit or when it is not necessary depending on the zoom position. However, the distortion correction symbol will appear in playback mode for the images without the correction applied. • The distortion correction function is not available for DNG files, JPEG copies for raw data, MP files, and movies. • When Distortion Correction is set to On, the angle of view will change. • The corrected image will not be displayed in the picture display even if Distortion Correction is set to On. Auto Macro With Auto Macro set to On, the camera automatically switches to the macro mode when focusing on a subject close to the lens even if the camera is not in macro mode. N is displayed when the camera switches to macro mode.2 more on PhotograPhy Custom Self-Timer To set the number of photographs to take and the interval of shooting for the custom setting of the selftimer option, select Custom Self-Timer in the shooting menu and follow the steps below: 1 Choose the number of photographs to take and the interval of shooting. Press Fn or Fn2 to highlight the numbers, and press + or – to change. Press C/D to return to shooting mode. 2 Start shooting. Press the shutter-release button. The specified number of photographs will be taken automatically at the selected interval. Press C/D to cancel the self-timer before finishing shooting the specified number of photographs. more on PhotograPhy Interval Shooting To take photographs automatically at intervals of from five seconds to one hour, select Interval Shooting in the shooting menu and follow the steps below: 1 Choose an interval. Press Fn and Fn2 to highlight hours, minutes, or seconds and press + and – to change. Press C/D to return to shooting mode. Interval is displayed in the picture display. 4:3 N 2 Start shooting. Press the shutter-release button. Photographs will be taken automatically at the selected interval. 3 End shooting. Press C/D to end shooting. Cautions • The interval timer is not available in 4 mode. • The interval resets to zero when the camera is turned off. • If the time needed to record photographs is longer than the selected interval, the next photograph will not be taken until recording is complete. • The external flash unit will not fire in interval shooting mode. Use the built-in flash instead. more on PhotograPhy Notes • Use a fully-charged battery and be sure that sufficient space remains in internal memory or on the memory card. Interval timer photography ends automatically when the internal memory or memory card becomes full. • Photographs can be taken at any time by pressing the shutterrelease button. • If Continuous or M-Cont Plus is selected for Continuous Mode, continuous shooting turns off automatically. Date Imprint The camera imprints the shooting date on a picture. Select an option from Date (YY/MM/DD) and Date and Time (YY/MM/DD hh:mm). DATE is displayed when date imprint is on. 4:3 N Notes • Date imprint is not available when the clock is not set. Set the clock (pages 20, 149) before using date imprint. • The date cannot be imprinted on movies. • When RAW is selected for Picture Quality/Size, the date is imprinted only on the JPEG copy, not the DNG file. • The date is permanently imprinted on the image and cannot be removed. more on PhotograPhy Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation may be required in the following situations: • Very bright backlighting: Subjects that are very strongly backlit may be underexposed. Try increasing exposure compensation. • The frame is dominated by very bright objects: The subject may be underexposed. Try increasing exposure compensation. • The frame is mostly dark (for example, a spotlit subject on a darkened stage): The subject may be overexposed. Try reducing exposure compensation. 1Display the exposure compensation slider. Highlight Exposure Compensation in the shooting menu, and press Fn2 to display the slider shown at right. 2Adjust exposure compensation. Press + or – to adjust an exposure compensation value. Press the shutter-release button to take a picture or press C/D to return to shooting mode. At settings other than 0.0, exposure compensation is displayed in the picture display. 4:3 N  more on PhotograPhy Caution Exposure compensation is not available in mode M. Note The step value of the compensation can be set with the Exposure/Flash Comp. Step option in the setup tab (page 140). White Balance At the default setting of Multi-P AUTO, the camera automatically adjusts white balance so that a white subject will appear white regardless of the color of the light source. It may however be necessary to match white balance to the light source under mixed lighting or when photographing a subject that is a solid color. Option Description Auto* The camera adjusts white balance automatically. Multi-P AUTO The camera adjusts white balance to account for differences in lighting in separate areas of the frame (in continuous mode, this option is equivalent to Auto). Outdoors Use when shooting in daylight under clear skies. Cloudy Use when shooting in daylight under cloudy skies. Incandescent Lamp Use with incandescent lighting. Fluorescent Lamp Use with fluorescent lighting. Manual Settings Measure white balance manually (page 88). Detail Make fine adjustments to white balance (page 88). * The icon is displayed on the DIRECT screen only. more on PhotograPhy At settings other than Auto, the current selection is shown by an icon in the picture display. 4:3 N Cautions • Auto white balance may not produce the desired results in scenes without white objects. This can be corrected by adding a white object to the scene before shooting. • Options other than Auto may not produce the desired results when the flash is used. Select Auto when using the flash. 1Display white balance options. Highlight White Balance in shooting menu, and press Fn2 to display options. 2 Select an option. Press + or – to select an option. Press the shutter-release button to take a picture or press the ADJ. lever or C/D to return to shooting mode. Note Options for White balance can be displayed by pressing the ADJ. lever (page 134). more on PhotograPhy Manual:MeasuringWhite Balance To measure a value for white balance: 1 Select Manual Settings. Highlight Manual Settings in the white balance menu. 2Measure white balance. Frame a blank piece of paper or other white object so that it fills the frame and press the DISP. button. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the desired effect is achieved. 3 Return to shooting mode. Press C/D to return to shooting mode. Note Selecting an option other than Manual Settings resets manual white balance. Detail:Making Fine AdjustmentstoWhite Balance To make fine adjustments to white balance: 1 Select Detail. Highlight Detail in the white balance menu and press the DISP. button.9 more on PhotograPhy 2 Choose a setting. Press + or – to choose a white balance. Press C/D when settings are complete. 3 Return to shooting mode. Press C/D to return to shooting mode. Note Selecting an option other than Detail resets detail white balance. White Balance Compensation Compensate for color casts by modifying white balance on the green-magenta or blue-amber axis. The modifications apply to the option currently selected for white balance and to all options selected while the modifications are in effect. Selecting White Balance Compensation in the shooting menu (page 58) displays the controls shown at right. Choose white balance compensation using the directional pad (page 37). Press the DISP. button to reset white balance compensation to a neutral value. Press C/D to save changes and exit, or press the DISP. button twice to cancel. Blue Green Magenta Amber Amount90 more on PhotograPhy White balance compensation is shown in the picture display. 4:3 N Notes • White balance compensation can be assigned to the ADJ. lever (page 134). CTo reset, highlight Reset and press /D. • White balance compensation can also be assigned to the Fn buttons (page 136). • When the mode dial is rotated to 4, white balance compensation is only available in movie mode. • The White Balance Compensation option in the playback menu (page 109) does not use the same values as the shooting menu option. ISO Setting Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light. Higher values can be used for faster shutter speeds when the subject is poorly lit, preventing blur. • Auto: The camera automatically adjusts sensitivity according to brightness, the distance to the subject, the options selected for macro mode, and picture quality and size. • Auto-Hi (high sensitivity auto): The camera automatically adjusts sensitivity according to shooting conditions. Comparing to the Auto setting, higher sensitivities can be selected for the subject poorly lit. The maximum sensitivity can be selected with ISO Auto-High Settings in the setup tab (page 140).9 more on PhotograPhy • ISO (value): The camera shoots with the selected ISO value. Available ISO values differ depending on the camera unit. See the documentation provided with the camera unit for details. The current sensitivity is shown in the picture display (if Auto or Auto-Hi is selected, the sensitivity selected by the camera is shown when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway). 2.5 ISO 200 1 Select an ISO sensitivity option. Press + or – to select an option. 2 Shoot or return to the shooting mode. Press the shutter-release button to take a picture, or press C/D to return to shooting mode. Notes • Options for ISO setting can be displayed by pressing the ADJ. lever (page 134). • The sensitivity when using the flash and the range of available sensitivities differ depending on the camera unit. See the documentation of the camera unit for details. • “Noise” (random variations in brightness and color) may appear in photographs taken at high sensitivities. Restore Defaults To restore default shooting menu settings (page 59), rotate the mode dial to 5 and select Restore Defaults in the shooting menu. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press C/D to restore default values and exit to shooting mode.92 more on PhotograPhy Auto Aperture Shift When On is selected, the camera will automatically adjust aperture to prevent overexposure in the aperture priority mode. Note Auto aperture shift is available only in the aperture priority mode. Switch Shooting Mode When the mode dial is rotated to a MY mode (page 57), you can use this option to switch between 5, P, A, S, and M modes without rotating the mode dial to a new setting. This option is only available in MY modes, however, it is not available if a scene mode is assigned to MY mode. Camera Shake Correction Select Camera Shake Correction to On to prevent blur caused by camera shake. E is displayed when camera shake correction is on.9 more on PhotograPhy Cautions • This function is not available depending on the camera unit. • The camera shake correction function is not available in movie mode, continuous mode, or when the shutter speed is set to 1 or more seconds in manual exposure mode. If the function is set on in continuous mode or when the shutter speed is set to 1 or more seconds in manual exposure mode, E changes to F, and in the movie mode, E disappears. • The camera shake correction function cannot prevent the blur caused by the movement of the subject (caused by wind, etc.). • Effects of the camera shake correction function differ depending on the surroundings. Note J appears in the picture display when camera shake is likely to occur.Playback Functions 9 Playback Functions This section describes how to view movies and MP files. Viewing Movies Follow the steps below to view movies. 1 Press the 6 button. Press the 6 button to display pictures in the picture display. 2Display the movie. Press +, –, Fn, and Fn2 (page 34) to scroll through pictures until the first frame of the movie is displayed. Movies are indicated by a 3 icon. 3 Start playback. Press the ADJ. lever to start playback. Progress is shown in the playback display. The following operations can be performed: To Press Description Advance/ rewind z/Z Hold the z button to fast forward, and the Z button to rewind. If movie is paused, press the z or Z button to advance or rewind one frame; keep the button pressed for slow advance or rewind. Pause/ resume ADJ. Press the ADJ. lever to pause; press again to resume. Adjust volume +/– Press + to increase volume, – to decrease. 2010Playback Functions 9 Viewing MP Files When you shoot images with M-Cont Plus, the images are recorded as one MP file. Follow the steps below to view MP files. Note Images shot in normal continuous mode can be played back in the same way as normal still images. 1 Press the 6 button. 2Display the MP file. The MP file is displayed with the S symbol. The display changes as follows. 2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.0 1/55 Display for step 2 • Press the DISP. button to change between “Normal” and “No Display”. • The images cannot be enlarged even if the z button is pressed. The images are displayed in thumbnail view. • The other operations are the same as those for normal still images. z ADJ. lever Z 2010/03/01 14:09 F 3.3 6/6 1 55 Thumbnail view • The MP file images are displayed in thumbnail view. • Use the directional pad (page 37) to select a frame. z • The DISP. button is disabled. ADJ. lever Z 100-0001 6 6 2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0 F 3.3 1/55 Single frame view • Single frame selected on the thumbnail view is displayed. • Press the z button to enlarge the image. ADJ. leverPlayback Functions 9 2010/01/01 02:33 Stop ISO 200 EV +1.0 F 3.3 1/55 100-0001 2 6 Slide Show • Images are displayed automatically in the order they were consecutively shot, starting with the displayed frame. The operations during slide show are shown below. Pause/Playback Press the ADJ. lever. Fast Forward Press and hold z during playback. Rewind Press and hold Z during playback. Slow Playback Press and hold z during pause. Slow Rewind Press and hold Z during pause. Next Frame Press z during pause. Previous Frame Press Z during pause. First Frame Press the ADJ. lever to the left during pause. Last Frame Press the ADJ. lever to the right during pause. Cautions • The DPOF, Trim, Resize, Skew Correction (playback mode), Level Compensation, and White Balance Compensation functions are not available for MP files. • Flag Function Setting and Protect cannot be set for individual frames in an MP file. If Flag Function Setting or Protect is set when the thumbnail view or single image view is displayed, the setting will be applied to the MP file instead of an individual frame. • Individual frame of an MP file cannot be deleted.Playback Functions 9 Exporting MP Files Follow the steps below to extract specific frames from an MP file and save each frame as an individual still image. Notes • The extracted image is saved in the same size as the original. • The original files will be retained after extraction. 1 Press the 6 button. 2Display the MP file you want to export. The MP file is displayed with the S symbol. To export multiple frames, you can also press the z button to display thumbnail view, and then go to step 3. 2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.0 1/55 3 Press C/D. The playback menu appears. 4 Press + or – to select Export Still Images, and then press Fn2.Playback Functions 9 Selecting OneFrame 5 Press + or – to select 1 Frame. Press Fn or Fn2 to select the frame. 6 Press C/D. SpecifyingMultipleFramesSeparately 5 Press C+ or – to select Sel Mult, and then press /D. If thumbnail view was displayed in step 2 on page 97, skip step 5. 6 Press + or – to select Sel. CIndiv., and then press /D. 7 Select the frame, and then press C/D. Press the ADJ. lever to switch to the display for specifying a range of frames. See step 7 and beyond on page 99. 8 Repeat step 7 to select all the frames. CTo deselect a frame, highlight the frame and press /D. 9 Press the N button. 10 Select Yes, and then press C/D.Playback Functions 99 Specifying a Range ofMultipleFrames 5 Press C+ or – to select Sel Mult, and then press /D. If thumbnail view was displayed in step 2 on page 97, skip step 5. 6 Press + or – to select Sel. CRange, and then press /D. 7 Select the starting point for the range of frames you want to specify, and press C/D. If you make a mistake when selecting the starting point for the range of frames, press the DISP. button to return to the screen for selecting the starting point. Press the ADJ. lever to switch to the display for specifying frames separately. See step 7 and beyond on page 98. 8 Select the ending point for the range of frames you Cwant to specify, and press /D. Export Still Images Start Execute 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 to specify all ranges. 10 Press the N button. 11 Select Yes, and then press C/D.Playback Functions 00 Selecting AllFrames 5 Press + or – to select CAll Frames, and press /D. 6 Select CYes, and then press /D.0 Playback menu Playback Menu This section details the options in the playback menu and describes how to view pictures on a TV. Playback Menu Press the 6 button in shooting mode and follow the steps below. 1Display the playback menu. Press C/D. 2 Select a menu item. Press + or – to scroll through the menu and press Fn2 to display options for the highlighted item. Note The items on the next page can be displayed by pressing – while pressing the DIRECT button. The playback menu contains the following options: Option Page Flag Function Setting 102 Flag Function Display 103 Resize 104 Trim 105 Level Compensation 106 White Balance Compensation 109 Skew Correction 110 Option Page Slide Show 111 Protect 112 Copy to Card from Internal Memory 115 DPOF 115 Export Still Images 97 Recover File 11702 Playback menu Note The menus for camera setup can be accessed from the playback menu (page 126). Flag Function Setting Register the frequently viewed image files to Flag Function Setting (up to 20 files) to recall the images easily by selecting Flag Function Display at a later time. Setting/Canceling OneFile at a Time CTo set or cancel one file at a time, play the picture back and press /D. Highlight Flag Function Setting in the playback menu and press Fn2 button. Highlight Set or Cancel, and then press C/D. Notes • When a file is set, the symbol appears on the screen. • If 20 files have already been set, no more files can be set. Cancel some files and set desired files. Setting/CancelingMultiple files at a Time Follow the steps below to set or cancel multiple files at a time. 1Display the thumbnail view. Press the z button in playback mode. 2 Select a picture. Highlight a picture and press C/D. 3 Select Flag Function Setting and then press Fn2. Selected pictures are marked with the icon.0 Playback menu 4 Select additional photographs. Press Fn or Fn2 to highlight additional photographs and press C/D. Repeat this procedure to set or cancel all the desired files. To cancel the selected photographs, press C/D when the file is selected. Cautions • If the name of the file set to Flag Function Setting is changed using a computer, Flag Function Setting is canceled for the file. • When the contents of the internal memory are copied to an SD memory card, Flag Function Setting that have been set for the files in the internal memory is canceled. • When a file in an SD memory card is set to Flag Function Setting, [CLIPINFO] folder and CLIP.CLI file are created on the SD memory card. If these are deleted, Flag Function Setting is canceled for the corresponding files. • If the name of a file is changed using a computer, Flag Function Setting may not be able to be set to the files. • Only images taken using this camera body can be set to Flag Function Setting. Flag Function Display To display the images set to Flag Function Setting, select Flag Function Display in the playback menu. Notes • The file set to Flag Function Setting with the smallest file number is displayed. • Pressing the shutter - release button or the 6 button switches to shooting mode.0 Playback menu • If no files are set to Flag Function Setting, a message appears and the display returns to the playback menu. • If multiple files are set to Flag Function Setting, pressing the N button displays the image with the smallest file number. • When a file set to Flag Function Setting is displayed in the full frame, pressing the +, –, Fn or Fn2 buttons switches to the previous or next image. Resize To create a small copy of a photograph, select Resize in the playback menu (page 101) and choose a size. The photographs taken in L, M, M or M size (page 61) can be copied in M or VGA size, and the photographs taken in M can be copied in VGA. Movies and RAW-quality photographs cannot be resized. Notes • The images are copied in the aspect ratio of 4 : 3. If the aspect ratio of original photograph is 16 : 9, 3 : 2, or 1 : 1, the left and right, or the upper and lower parts of images are trimmed and displayed with black border on the screen. • See page 61 for information on choosing the size of photographs during shooting.0 Playback menu Trim Follow the steps below to trim a still image and then save it as a separate file. 1Display a photograph. Display the photograph to be copied in playback mode. 2 Select Trim. Press C/D to display the playback menu, highlight Trim, and press Fn2. To cancel trimming, press the DISP. button. 3 Trim the photograph. Set the size of the trimming frame with the z or Z button, and the position of the trimming frame with the directional pad (page C 37), and then press /D. Cautions • Only images taken using this camera body can be trimmed. • Movies and MP files cannot be trimmed. • For RAW images (page 61), trimming function applies only to the JPEG copy. • Images can be trimmed repeatedly, however, the quality of the image will be degraded each time by recompression. Notes • If an image is trimmed, the compression rate changes to Fine. For images in other sizes, the compression rate will be the same as the original’s. • The available settings for the trimming frame size differ depending on the original image size. Each time you press the z button, the trimming frame decreases in size by one level, at the maximum of 13 levels.0 Playback menu • The trimmed image size differs depending on the image’s original size and the trimming level (the size of trimming frame). Level Compensation Create copies that have been processed to adjust brightness and contrast. Correct brightness and contrast automatically or make manual adjustments using a histogram. Auto: AutomaticLevelCompensation 1Display a photograph. Display the photograph to be copied in playback mode. 2 Select Level Compensation. Press C/D to display the playback menu, highlight Level Compensation, and press Fn2. 3 Select Auto. Highlight Auto and press Fn2. If the camera is able to create a copy, a preview will be displayed with the original image displayed at upper left, the corrected copy at right. If the camera cannot create a copy, an error message will be displayed and the camera will exit to the playback menu.0 Playback menu 4 Copy the image. Press C/D. To exit without creating a copy, press the DISP. button. A message will be displayed while the camera copies the photograph. Manual:ManualLevelCompensation Display the photograph to be copied and select Manual for Level Compensation in the playback menu to display a preview as described on the preceding page, then follow the steps below. 1 Select the black point, white point, or mid-point. The manual preview contains a histogram showing how pixels of different brightnesses are distributed in the image, with dark pixels (shadows) on the left and bright pixels (highlights) on the right. Press the ADJ. lever in to cycle through the black point, mid-point, and white point and press Fn or Fn2 to position the selected point for enhanced brightness and contrast as described on the following page. For help, press the N button; press the button again to return to the preview display. 2 Copy the image. Press C/D. To exit without creating a copy, press the DISP. button. A message will be displayed while the camera copies the photograph. From left to right: black point, midpoint, white point0 Playback menu Tip:Choosing the Black Point,White Point, andMid-Point • Adjusting brightness: To make the image brighter, move the mid-point to the left. Moving the mid-point to the right makes the image darker. • Correcting exposure: If the image is overexposed, move the black point to the right until it lines up with the darkest pixel in the histogram (see right). If the image is underexposed, move the white point to the left until it lines up with the brightest pixel. You can then move the mid-point left or right to adjust brightness. Correcting overexposure • Increasing contrast: To increase contrast, align the black point and white point with the darkest and brightest pixels as shown at right. You can then move the mid-point left or right to adjust brightness. Cautions • Level compensation is available only with still images taken using this camera body. It is not available with movies or pictures taken using M-Cont Plus. The desired results may not be achieved with monochrome images. • Level compensation can be applied multiple times, however, the quality of the image will be degraded each time by recompression.09 Playback menu White Balance Compensation Create copies with modified white balance. 1Display a photograph. Display the photograph to be copied in playback mode. 2 Select White Balance Compensation. Press C/D to display the playback menu, highlight White Balance Compensation, and press Fn2. 3Adjust white balance. Choose white balance compensation using the directional pad (page 37). Press the DISP. button to reset white balance compensation to a neutral value. 4 Press C/D. Press C/D to copy the image (to exit without creating a copy, press DISP. twice). A message will be displayed while the camera copies the photograph.0 Playback menu Cautions • White balance compensation is available only with still images taken using this camera body. It is not available with movies or pictures taken using M-Cont Plus. The desired results may not be achieved with monochrome images. • White balance compensation can be applied multiple times, however, the quality of the image will be degraded each time by recompression. Skew Correction Create copies that have been processed to reduce the effects of perspective on rectangular objects, such as message boards or business cards. 1Display a photograph. Display the photograph to be copied in playback mode. 2 Select Skew Correction. Press C/D to display the playback menu, highlight Skew Correction, and press Fn2. If the camera is able to detect an object that can be used to correct perspective, a message will be displayed with the object shown by an yellow frame. The camera can detect up to five objects; to select a different object, press Fn2, or press + to exit without correcting perspective. If the camera is unable to detect a suitable subject, an error message will be displayed. Playback menu 3 Press C/D. A message will be displayed while the camera copies the photograph. Copying takes from about 2 to 46 seconds, depending on image size. Caution Skew correction is available only with still images taken using this camera body. It is not available with movies or pictures taken using M-Cont Plus. For RAW images (page 61), skew correction applies only to the JPEG copy. Notes • The copy is the same size as the original. More time is needed to create a copy for larger image sizes: Size Time (approx.) Size Time (approx.) L 24sec. 3M 8sec. M 18sec. 1M 5sec. 5M 12sec. VGA 2sec. To reduce the time required, create a small copy of the original using Resize (page 104) and perform skew correction on the copy. • The time required for skew correction differs depending on the camera unit. • Skew correction can also be performed during shooting (page 56). Slide Show Selecting this option starts an automated slide show. Pictures are displayed at three second intervals in the recorded order. When a movie is displayed, movie playback begins automatically. The slide show repeats until stopped; press any button to end the slide show.2 Playback menu Protect Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Protected files are indicated by the icon shown at right. 4:3 N Caution Formatting erases all files, including protected files. Protecting Individual Pictures To protect or remove protection from individual files, play the picture back, select Protect in the playback menu, and press Fn2 to display the options shown at right (if the desired image is not displayed, press Fn or Fn2 to view other pictures). Highlight 1 File and press C/D. Playback menu Changing the ProtectStatus ofMultipleFiles Follow the steps below to change the protect status of multiple selected files. 1 Select Protect in the playback menu, and press Fn2. In multi-frame playback, proceed to step 2. In singleframe playback, the options shown at right will be displayed. Highlight Sel Mult and press C/D. 2 Select Sel. Indiv. or Sel. Range. Select Protect in the playback menu, and press Fn2 to display the options shown at right. To select images one at a time, highlight Sel. Indiv., press C/D, and proceed to step 3. To select images by specifying ranges highlight Sel. Range, press C/D, and proceed to step 3.1. 3 Select a photograph. Use the directional pad (page 37) to highlight a Cphotograph, and press /D. Protected pictures are marked with a icon. To remove protection from a photograph, highlight it and press C/ D again. 4:3 N 4:3 N  Playback menu Tip:Selecting Ranges To switch from Sel. Indiv. to Sel. Range, press the ADJ. lever and follow the steps below: 3.1 Use the directional pad to highlight the first image of the range, and press C/D to select. The selected image is marked with an icon. To deselect the image, press the DISP. button. 4:3 N 3.2 Use the directional pad to highlight the last image, and press C/D to select. The selected images will be marked with a icon. 4:3 N Repeat steps 3.1–3.2 to select additional ranges, or press the ADJ. lever to select or deselect individual photographs as described in step 3. 4 Press the N button. A message will be displayed while the camera protects the selected files. The camera will then return to normal playback. Protecting or Removing Protection fromAllFiles To protect all files, select Protect and press Fn2. Highlight Select All and press C/D. To remove protection from all files, highlight Cancel All and press C/D. Playback menu Copy to Card from Internal Memory To copy all files from internal memory to a memory card, insert the memory card in the camera body and select Copy to Card from Internal Memory in the playback menu. A message will be displayed while copying is in progress; the camera will return to playback when copying is complete. Notes • If the space available on the memory card is insufficient to copy all the files in internal memory, a message will be displayed. To copy only those files that will fit in the space available, highlight Yes and press C/D; to exit without copying any files, select No. • Files cannot be copied to internal memory from a memory card. DPOF To request professional prints of the photographs on a memory card, first use this option to create a digital “print order” listing the photographs you wish to print and the number of prints, and then take the memory card to a digital print service center that supports the DPOF standard. Note If a RAW file is selected for printing, only the JPEG copy will be printed. Tip: DPOF DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) is a standard used to specify the photographs to be printed and the number of prints. Photographs selected for printing are marked with a DPOF print indicator (page 9). Playback menu Selecting Individual Photographsfor Printing To add a photograph to or remove it from the print order, play the picture back, select DPOF in the playback menu, and press Fn2 to display the options shown at right (if the desired image is not displayed, press Fn or Fn2 to view other pictures). Highlight 1 File and press C/D. Selecting All Photographsfor Printing To select all photographs for printing, select DPOF, press Fn2, highlight Select All, and press C/D. To remove all photographs from the print order, highlight Cancel All and press C/D. SelectingMultiple Photographsfor Printing To select multiple photographs for printing: 1 Select DPOF. Press C/D in multiframe playback to display the playback menu. Highlight DPOF and press Fn2. Playback menu 2 Select photographs and choose the number of prints. Press Fn or Fn2 to highlight additional photographs and + or – to choose the number of prints. To remove a photograph from the print order, press – until zero is displayed. 3 Press C/D. A message will be displayed while the camera creates the print order. The camera will then return to multi-frame playback. Recover File To restore all the deleted files, select Recover File in playback menu, and then press Fn2. The confirmation message appears. Select Yes and then press C/D. Note If there are no files to be restored, a message appears. Cautions The files cannot be restored after performing any of the following operations. • Turning the camera off • Switching from playback mode to shooting mode • Using DPOF, Resize, Copy to Card from Internal Memory, Skew Correction, Level Compensation, White Balance Compensation or Trim function. • Deleting files with DPOF settings • Initializing Internal memory or SD memory card • Setting or canceling files for Flag Function Setting • Exporting MP files using Export Still Images Playback menu Viewing Pictures on TV To view pictures on a TV, connect the camera body using the supplied A/V cable. 1 Turn the camera body off. Be sure the power is off before connecting or disconnecting the A/V cable. 2 Connect the A/V cable to the TV. Insert the white plug into the audio input connector, the yellow plug into the video input connector. Be sure the plugs are securely connected. Do not use force. Video input (yellow) Audio input (white) 3 Connect the camera body. Open the connector cover and plug the cable into the A/V cable connector. Do not use force. 4 Tune the television to the video channel. Select video input. See the television manual for details. 5 Turn the camera body on. Press the 6 button for about a second to turn the camera body on in playback mode. The camera body’s picture display and speaker will turn off, and photographs and movies will be played back on the TV.9 Playback menu Caution Do not use force or tug the A/V cable when handling the camera body with the A/V cable connected. Notes • The camera body can be connected to the video input connector on a video recorder, and pictures can be recorded to video or DVD. • The camera body can be connected to TVs that support HDMI using an HDMI mini cable (sold separately). See the documentation provided with TVs for details. • If connecting or disconnecting the HDMI mini cable, the display switches to single-frame view. When the menu is displayed, it will not switch to single-frame view even if connecting or disconnecting the HDMI mini cable. • When connecting the camera body to a TV using an HDMI mini cable, the operational sounds turn off. • The camera body supports the following video standards: NTSC (used in North America, the Caribbean, parts of Latin America, and some East Asian countries) and PAL (used in the United Kingdom and much of Europe, Australia, New Zealand, and parts of Asia and Africa). SECAM is not supported. Where possible, it is set to the standard used in your country or region before shipment; before connecting the camera body to a device that uses a different video standard, choose the appropriate video mode (page 149).20 Printing PhotograPhs Printing Photographs The camera body can be connected to a printer via the supplied USB cable, and photographs can be printed directly from the camera body without using a computer. Caution Movies cannot be printed. If a RAW file is selected for printing, only the JPEG copy will be printed. Note The camera body conforms to PictBridge, a standard widely used for direct printing, and direct printing is consequently only available with PictBridge-compliant printers. See the documentation provided with your printer for information on whether it supports PictBridge. Connecting the Camera Body Connect the power to the printer using the supplied USB cable. 1 Turn the camera body off. Be sure that the power is off before connecting or disconnecting the USB cable. 2 Connect the USB cable to the printer. Connect the USB cable to the printer and turn the printer on.2 Printing PhotograPhs 3 Connect the camera body. Open the connector cover and plug the cable into the USB cable connector. Press the ADJ. lever. The camera body will turn on and the message shown at right will be displayed; press the ADJ. lever again immediately. Note If you do not press the ADJ. lever while the above message is displayed, it may in some cases be replaced after two seconds by a message stating that the camera body is connecting to a computer. Turn the camera body off and press the ADJ. lever again. The message will be replaced by the PictBridge playback display (if the PictBridge playback display does not appear, the camera body is still establishing a connection to the printer). Caution Do not use force when connecting the USB cable or when handling the camera body with the cable connected.22 Printing PhotograPhs Printing Photographs can be printed one at a time or multiple photographs can be selected for printing. If a memory card is inserted, the pictures will be printed from the memory card; otherwise pictures will be printed from internal memory. Caution Do not disconnect the USB cable while printing is in progress. Note If an error is displayed during printing, check the printer and take the appropriate action. Printing Photographs One at a Time To print a selected photograph: 1 Select a Photograph. Press Fn or Fn2 until the desired Photograph is shown in the PictBridge playback display and press the ADJ. lever. The menu shown at right will be displayed; highlight 1 File and press C/D. Tip: Printing OneCopy of All Photographs To print one copy of all Photographs, press the ADJ. lever to display the options shown above and select All Files. Cancel 1 File All Files Execute Cancel 1 File All Files Execute2 Printing PhotograPhs 2Adjust printer settings. The menu shown at right will be displayed; highlight an item and press Fn2 to view the options available, or choose Printer Select to use the default setting for the current printer (the options available vary with the type of printer; items not supported by the connected printer cannot be selected). Press + or – to highlight an option and press C/D to select and return to the direct print menu. Item Description Paper Size Choose the paper size. Paper Type Choose the paper type. Layout Choose the number of pictures per page. Date Print Include the time and date of recording. See pages 20 and 149 for information on selecting the order in which the time and date are displayed. If the picture was taken using Date Imprint (page 84), only the imprinted date will be printed. File Name Print Include the file name. Optimize Image Choose whether the printer optimizes photo data. Print Size Choose the print size. Print Quality Choose the print quality. Report Print * Print a report. Printing Quantity Choose the number of copies. Toner Saving * Use less toner during printing. 1-Side/2-Sides * Print on one or both sides of the paper. * Ricoh printers only. Visit http://www.ricoh.com/ for details.2 Printing PhotograPhs Note To select the highlighted option as the default for the current printer when the camera body is connected, press the ADJ. lever. The menu shown at right will be Cdisplayed; highlight Set and press /D. Select Cancel to exit without changing the default setting. 3 Start printing. To start printing, press C/D when the direct print menu shown in step 2 is displayed. A message is displayed during printing; to exit before printing is complete, press the DISP. button. The PictBridge playback display will appear when printing is complete.2 Printing PhotograPhs Printing Multiple Photographs To print multiple photographs: 1 Press the Z button. Photographs will be displayed in multi-frame playback. 2 Select a picture. CHighlight a picture and press /D. 3 Choose the number of prints. Press + or – to choose the number of prints. Selected pictures are marked with a icon; to deselect a photograph, press – until zero is display. 4 Select additional Photographs. Press Fn or Fn2 to highlight additional photographs and press + or – to choose the number of prints. 5Adjust printer settings. Press C/D to display the direct print menu. Adjust settings as described on page 123. 6 Start printing. To start printing, press C/D when the direct print menu is displayed. A message is displayed during printing; to exit before printing is complete, press the DISP. button. The PictBridge playback display will appear when printing is complete. 4:3 N 2 camera settings Camera Settings The menus for modifying the camera settings can be accessed from the shooting and playback menus (pages 58 and 101). 1Display the menus. Press C/D to display the menu for the current mode on page 58 (in scene mode, a MODE tab will be displayed). 2 Select a tab. Press Fn to highlight the tab for the current menu and press + or – to highlight the key custom options tab (page 127) or the setup tab (page 128). Press Fn2 to place the cursor in the selected tab. 1 2 1Key custom options tab 2Setup tab 3 Select a menu item. Press + or – to highlight a menu item and press Fn2 to display options for the highlighted item. 4 Select an option. CPress + or – to highlight an option and press /D to select and exit (the procedure may differ for some items; see the page for the item).2 camera settings The key custom options tab contains the following options. Option Default Page Reg. My Settings — 129 Recall My Settings — 131 Edit My Settings — 132 My Settings for Fn Settings Off 133 My Settings WB Comp. Off 133 ADJ Lever Setting  White Balance 134 ADJ Lever Setting 2 ISO 134 ADJ Lever Setting  Quality 134 ADJ Lever Setting  ImageSettings 134 Option Default Page ADJ Shutter Confirmation Off 135 Set Fn Button AF/MF 136 Set Fn2 Button ManualFlash 136 +/– Button Settings ExposureComp. 137 Playback Mode Dial Options Setting1 138 M Mode Dial Options Setting1 138 One Press M Mode AprtrPriority 1382 camera settings The setup tab contains the following options: Option Default Page Format [Card] — 139 Format [Internal Memory] — 139 LCD Brightness — 139 DIRECT Screen Transparency Normal 140 Exposure/Flash Comp. Step 1/3EV 140 ISO Auto-High Settings AUTO 400 140 AF Auxiliary Light On 140 Sleep Mode 5?minutes 141 Auto Power Off 5?minutes 141 Playback Screen LCD 141 LCD Auto Dim On 142 LCD Confirmation Time 0.5?seconds 142 Operation Sounds All 142 Volume Settings (medium) 142 One Press Zoom Ratio 9.8?× 143 Auto Rotate On 143 Minimum Shooting Distance Show 144 Option Default Page Level Setting Display 144 Grid Guide Display Options 144 Fn Button Display On 145 Show My Setting Name Off 145 Shooting Info. Display Frame Off 145 CL-BKT Black & White (TE) On 146 Color Space Set sRGB 146 Digital Zoom Image Normal 147 Store Menu Cursor Position Off 147 Card Sequence No. On 148 Date Settings — 149 Language/L (Varies * ) 149 Video Out Mode (Varies * ) 149 HDMI Output AUTO 149 Start Settings Readout Body 150 * Varies with countryor region ofpurchase. Cautions • The options displayed in the key custom options tab and setup tab may differ depending on whether the camera unit is attached to the camera body. • The options displayed in the key custom options tab and setup tab may differ depending on the camera unit.29 camera settings Key Custom Options Reg. My Settings Settings saved using Reg. My Settings can be recalled by rotating the mode dial to MY, MY2, or MY, allowing you to easily create and recall up to six sets of frequently-used shooting settings. 1Adjust settings. Set the camera to the desired settings. The following is some of the settings that can be saved in MY settings: •4Camera settings: Shooting mode (5, P, A, S, M, or mode), zoom position (in 4 mode), aperture (in A and M modes), shutter speed (in S and M modes), manual focus, macro, flash, selftimer and display modes. • Shooting menu options: All options except Interval Shooting, Auto Aperture Shift, and Switch Shooting Mode. White balance compensation can be assigned if My Settings WB Comp. is on (page 133). • Setup options: Set Fn Button/Set Fn2 Button (if My Settings for Fn Settings is on; see page 133), +/– Button Settings, ISO Auto-High Settings, Exposure/Flash Comp. Step, Minimum Shooting Distance, Level Setting, Grid Guide Display Options, Shooting Info. Display Frame, CL-BKT Black & White (TE), and Digital Zoom Image. Note The settings that can be saved in MY settings differ depending on the camera unit. See the documentation provided with the camera unit for details.0 camera settings 2 Select Reg My Settings. Highlight Reg. My Settings in the key custom options tab, and press Fn2. 3 Save settings. To assign the settings to MY, MY2, or MY on the mode dial, highlight MY1, MY2, or MY3, and press C/D (to exit without saving settings, press the DISP. button). To save the settings to a “box” to be recalled and assigned to the mode dial at a later date (page 131), select My Settings Box and press Fn2. Highlight the desired box and press C/D. Unnamed boxes will be named using the current date. If the box has already been assigned a name, the dialog shown at right will be displayed. Select Yes to use the current name, No to use a name based on the current date. camera settings Recall My Settings Copy settings from a “box” to MY, MY2, or MY. Select Recall My Settings in the key custom options tab, press Fn2, and follow the steps below. 1 Select a destination. Highlight the destination for the stored settings (MY1, MY2, or MY3) and press Fn2. 2 Select the source. Highlight the settings that will be assigned to the selected position on the mode dial and press C/ D. To exit without assigning settings to the mode dial, press the DISP. button. Caution If Edit My Settings is used to edit boxes that are currently assigned to the mode dial, the changes will be reflected when the mode dial is rotated to the position assigned to the box. Changes to settings assigned directly to MY, MY2, or MY are not however reflected in the boxes currently assigned to the mode dial, and if the boxes are subsequently changed, these changes will not be reflected in the settings assigned to MY, MY2, or MY.2 camera settings Edit My Settings Edit and rename settings saved with Reg. My Settings. Select Edit My Settings in the key custom options tab, press Fn2, and follow the steps below. 1 Select a setting. To edit the settings assigned to MY, MY2, or MY on the mode dial, highlight MY1, MY2, or MY3 and press Fn2. To edit “box” settings, select My Settings Box and press Fn2. Highlight the desired box and press Fn2. 2 Edit settings. Press + or – to highlight items and press Fn2 to edit (see the section for each item in this manual for more information). After editing each item, press Fn to return to the settings list, where you can edit additional settings. 3 Save changes and exit. Press C/D to save changes and exit (to exit without saving changes, press the DISP. button). camera settings Tip: NamingMySettings Select Name in step 2 to rename the setting. The current name is highlighted in the name area; to edit the current name, press Fn or Fn2 to position the cursor in the name area and press – to place the cursor in the keyboard area (to delete the current name, press – while the name is highlighted). Highlight characters using +, –, Fn, or Fn2, and press C/D to enter the highlighted character at the current cursor position (to delete the character at the current cursor position, select [Delete]). Press the tbutton to switch between upper and lower case. Names can be up to 32 characters long. Press the ADJ. lever to exit, or press the DISP. button to exit without renaming the settings. My Settings for Fn Settings Select On to save the settings assigned to the Fn buttons (page 136) to MY settings saved in Reg. My Settings. My Settings WB Comp. Select On to save the white balance compensation setting (page 89) to MY settings saved in Reg. My Settings. Name area Keyboard area Keyboard area camera settings ADJ Lever Setting Assign up to four frequently-used options to the ADJ. lever for quick access in 5, P, A, S, and M modes. At default, the ADJ. lever can be used for white balance (page 86), ISO setting (page 90), picture quality (page 61), and image setting (page 71). The following functions can also be assigned; white balance compensation (page 89), focus (page 64), metering (page 70), continuous (page 73), bracketing (page 75), flash compensation (page 78), manual flash amount (page 79), and exposure compensation (page 85). In 4 mode, the ADJ. lever can be used to select white balance and exposure compensation (exposure compensation is not available for Movie mode). camera settings Using the ADJ.Lever To select an option currently assigned to the ADJ. lever: 1Display options. Press the ADJ. lever in shooting mode, and press the lever to the left or right, or press Fn or Fn2 to view the options assigned to the lever. Setting 1 Setting 2 Setting 4 Setting 3 2 Select an option. Press + or – to highlight an option, and press the ADJ. lever or press C/D. Tip Press and hold the ADJ. lever to page rapidly through the available options. ADJ Shutter Confirmation Select On to use the shutter-release button to select the highlighted option in the ADJ. mode. camera settings Set Fn1/Fn2 Button Choose the functions assigned to the Fn and Fn2 buttons with Set Fn1/Fn2 Button in the key custom options tab. The following is some of the functions that can be assigned to the Fn and Fn2 buttons. Option Description AF/MF Switch between multi AF or spot AF and manual focus (page 64).* 1, 3 AF/Snap Switch between multi AF or spot AF and snap focus (page 64).* 4 AE Lock Lock exposure.* 2, 5 JPEG>RAW* 10 If options other than RAW is selected for Picture Quality/ Size, pressing the Fn button selects a RAW option with the same aspect ratio (page 61).* 5, 6 Color>B&W Select Black & White for Image Settings (page 71).* 7 Color>TE Select B&W (TE) for Image Settings (page 71).* 7 Exposure Comp. Display the exposure compensation slider (page 85).* 5 White Balance Display white balance options (page 86). WB Correction Display white balance compensation controls (page 89).* 9 ISO Display ISO sensitivity options (page 90).* 7 Quality Display picture quality/size options (page 61). Focus Display focus options (page 64).* 4 Image Settings Display image setting options (page 71).* 7 Expo. Metering Display exposure metering options (page 70).* 7 Cont. Mode Display continuous shooting options (page 73).* 8 Auto Bracket Display bracketing options (page 75).* 8 Macro Target Position the focus target in macro mode (page 68).* 3 Flash Comp. Display the flash compensation slider (page 78).* 4, 5 camera settings Option Description Flash Amount Adjust manual flash output (page 79).* 8 * 1 If focus is locked in autofocus mode (page 64), selecting manual focus sets the focus distance to the distance at which focus is locked. * 2 Exposure cannot be locked in mode M. Pressing the Fn button in mode M sets shutter speed and aperture to values close to those needed for optimal exposure. * 3 Not available when Portrait, Sports, Landscape or Nightscape is selected in 4 mode. * 4 Not available when Landscape is selected in 4 mode. * 5 Not available when Movie is selected in 4 mode. * 6 Not available when Skew Correction is selected in 4 mode. * 7 Not available in 4 mode other than Skew Correction. * 8 Not available in 4 mode. * 9 Not available in 4 mode other than Movie. * 10 The image sizes of the files switched to RAW differ depending on the settings selected in Picture Quality/Size. Settings in Picture Quality/Size Sizes in RAW Data L (16:9), M (16:9), 5M, 3M, 1M, VGA RAW (16:9) L (4:3), M (4:3) RAW (4:3) L (3:2), M (3:2) RAW (3:2) L (1:1), M (1:1) RAW (1:1) By default, AF/MF is assigned to the Fn button and Flash Amount to the Fn2 button. +/– Button Settings Choose the functions to assign to the + and – buttons. Choose from Off, Flash Comp. (page 78), Flash Amount (page 79), and Exposure Compensation (page 85). camera settings Playback Mode Dial Options/M Mode Dial Options Choose the functions to assign to the ADJ. lever and updown dial for playback zoom and in mode M. Playback Mode Dial Options M Mode Dial Options Setting1 Setting2 Setting1 Setting2 ADJ. lever Next/previous frame Scroll left/right Shutter speed Aperture Updown dial Zoom in/out Scroll up/ down Aperture Shutter speed One Press M Mode When exposure compensation is assigned to the + and – buttons (page 137) or AE lock is assigned to the Fn and Fn2 button (page 136), pressing the assigned button in manual exposure mode sets shutter speed and/or aperture to values close to those needed for optimal exposure. Select a setting from the following options. • Aprtr Priority: Aperture remains at the selected value; shutter speed is adjusted for optimal exposure. • Shttr Priority: Shutter speed remains at the selected value; aperture is adjusted for optimal exposure. • Program: Both aperture and shutter speed are adjusted for optimal exposure. Note In manual exposure mode, exposure compensation cannot be performed with the + and – buttons, nor can AE lock be performed with the Fn buttons.9 camera settings Setup Format [Card]/Format [Internal Memory] Select Format [Card] to format the memory card before first use, after using it in another device, or if a card error is displayed when the card is inserted in the camera body. Select Format [Internal Memory] if a message is displayed prompting you to format internal memory. Cautions • Formatting permanently deletes all data on the card or in internal memory. Before formatting, copy any data you wish to keep to a computer (page 151). • Selecting Format [Card] when no memory card is inserted displays an error message. Turn the power off and insert a memory card. Tip:Write Protection To prevent memory cards from being formatted, slide the writeprotect switch to the “LOCK” position (page 16). Restore the switch to its original position to resume normal operation. LCD Brightness Selecting this option displays the control shown at right. Press + or – to adjust picture display brightness, and press C/D to return to the setup menu. Press C/D again to exit to shooting or playback mode.0 camera settings Note The brightness display shows the view through the lens (shooting mode) or the most recently viewed picture (playback mode; if no picture is available for playback, no image will be shown in the brightness display). DIRECT Screen Transparency Choose the density of the background image displayed on the DIRECT screen from Dark, Normal, Light, or Image OFF. Exposure/Flash Comp. Step Choose the step value for the exposure compensation and flash compensation. Choose from the value of 1/2EV or 1/3EV. Note In the shutter priority mode, step value is set to 1/3EV even if 1/2EV is selected for Exposure/Flash Comp. Step. ISO Auto-High Settings Choose the maximum sensitivity selected by the camera when Auto-Hi is selected for ISO Setting in the shooting menu (page 90). Choose from settings of ISO 200 (AUTO 200), 400 (AUTO 400), 800 (AUTO 800), 1600 (AUTO 1600) or 3200 (AUTO3200). Note Noise (random variations in brightness and color) may appear in photographs taken at high sensitivities. AF Auxiliary Light If On is selected, the AF auxiliary light will light to assist the focus operation when the subject is poorly lit. camera settings Sleep Mode Choose the delay before the picture display enters sleep mode. Choose from Off, 1 minute, 5 minutes or 30 minutes. Autofocus/flash lamp lights in sleep mode. Press any button to cancel the sleep mode. Cautions • The camera body does not enter sleep mode when: • Shooting, playback, key custom optins or setup menu is displayed. • The camera body is turned on by pressing the 6 button with the power switch at OFF position. • The lens of camera unit is not retracted in the sleep mode. Auto Power Off Choose the delay before the camera turns off automatically to save power when no operations are performed. Select from Off (the camera does not turn off automatically), 1 minute, 5 minutes, and 30 minutes. Note When Sleep and Auto Power Off are set, Auto Power Off works after the specified time for Sleep has elapsed. Playback Screen Choose the screen to display playback images from LCD (picture display) or VF (viewfinder) for when the LCD viewfinder (VF-2) is attached to the camera body. When the viewfinder is not attached, the playback images are displayed in the picture display regardless of the setting for Playback Screen.2 camera settings LCD Auto Dim If On is selected, the picture display dims to save power when the camera is not moved for approximately five seconds in shooting mode. Move the camera or press any button to return to the original picture display brightness. LCD Confirmation Time Choose how long photographs are displayed in the picture display immediately after shooting. Select from 0.5, 1, 2, and 3seconds, Hold (photograph is displayed until shutter-release button is pressed halfway and can be viewed with playback zoom or deleted; see pages 38 and 39), and Off (photographs are not displayed in the picture display after shooting). Operation Sounds Choose when the camera plays a sound. Option Description All Sounds are played at startup, when the shutter is released, when the camera focuses, and when an error occurs. If Sound or Disp+Snd is selected for Level Setting (page 32), the camera will also beep at regular intervals when the camera is level. Level Sound If Sound or Disp+Snd is selected for Level Setting, the camera will beep at regular intervals when the camera is level. Shutter Sounds Sounds are played when the shutter is released or an error occurs. If Sound or Disp+Snd is selected for Level Setting, the camera will beep at regular intervals when the camera is level. Volume Settings Select the volume for the sounds described in “Operation Sounds.” Choose from (off), (low), (medium), and (high). camera settings One Press Zoom Ratio Select the magnification at which pictures are displayed when zoomed in using the C/D button or ADJ. lever (page 38). Choose from 5.7×, 9.8×, and 16×. Notes • Maximum magnification ratio differs depending on the image size (page 38). • If the maximum magnification ratio of an image size is smaller than the setting specified in One Press Zoom Ratio, the image can be magnified at the maximum ratio for the image size (page 38). Auto Rotate Select On to automatically display pictures in the correct orientation during playback. Caution Movies, pictures taken using M-Cont Plus (page 73), and pictures taken with the camera upside down or tilted sharply forward or back are not rotated for display. Pictures are not rotated when the camera unit is not attached to the camera body, during slide shows, in multi-frame playback, or when displayed on a TV, nor are they rotated when the camera is upside down or if the camera is rotated during playback zoom or while skew correction is in progress. Note During bracketing or when taking pictures using Continuous, the camera only records the orientation for the first photograph in each series. The remaining photographs will not be displayed in the correct orientation if the camera was rotated during shooting. camera settings Minimum Shooting Distance Select Show to display the minimum shooting distance in the picture display. Level Setting The camera uses a tilt indicator and sounds to let you know whether the image is level during shooting. Choose tilt indicator settings (page 32). Grid Guide Display Options Choose the type of framing grid available in shooting mode (page 42). Item Description A three-by-three grid for “rule of thirds” composition. A four-by-four grid with diagonal lines running from corner to corner makes it easy to find the center of the subject. Use for architectural photography or photographing products for display. A two-by-two grid with the center of the frame left clear to make it easier to view the subject. Use if your subject is in motion. camera settings Fn Button Display Select On to display the options currently assigned to the Fn buttons when the camera is turned on, shooting mode is selected, or a new mode is selected with the mode dial. Show My Setting Name Select On to display the name of the settings assigned to the current position on the mode dial when the dial is rotated to MY, MY2, or MY. Shooting Info. Display Frame Select On to display shooting icons in a frame surrounding the view through the lens (page 8), making it easier to frame photographs in the picture display. The frame is not displayed in movie mode. 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 4:3 N  camera settings CL-BKT Black & White (TE) Choose the number and type of copies created with color bracketing (page 77). Select On to record three copies of each shot (one in black and white, a second in color, and a third using a monochrome tint), Off to record two copies (one in black and white and the second in color). Note Regardless of the selected setting, three copies of each photograph will be recorded if B&W (TE) is selected for Image Settings. Color Space Setting Choose the color space used to record photographs. sRGB is widely used to reproduce digital images but offers a smaller gamut of colors than AdobeRGB. Caution The Adobe RGB color space was developed by Adobe Systems, Inc., and is compatible with the default color space used in Adobe Photoshop and other image editing software. Note, however, that colors will only be reproduced correctly in software that supports the Adobe RGB color space. Also note that specialized equipment is required to print the full range of colors in the Adobe RGB gamut; when printed using consumer household printers or digital photo print services, colors will generally be less vivid than in photographs that use the sRGB color space. camera settings Digital Zoom Image Choose how the image taken using the digital zoom will be saved. • Normal: Normal digital zoom. It crops a portion of an image and enlarges the portion back to the size selected in Picture Quality/Size, resulting in lower image quality. • Auto Resize: It crops a portion of an image and save the image in the cropped size. It keeps from decreasing the image quality, however, the image size becomes smaller. The sizes of cropped image differ depending on the zoom ratio. See the documentation provided with the camera unit. Auto Resize zoom is available only when 4:3 for L is selected for Picture Quality/Size (page 61). The current picture size is displayed in the picture display when the camera is zoomed in. 4:3 N Caution Auto Resize has no effect when M-Cont Plus or Skew Correction is selected in 4 mode, or when RAW is selected for Picture Quality/Size. Store Menu Cursor Position If On is selected, the most-recently accessed item will be highlighted when menus are displayed. camera settings Card Sequence No. Choose how the camera names image files when saving photographs to a memory card. • On: File names consist of “R” followed by a seven-digit number (e.g., “R0010001.jpg”), assigned in ascending order from 0010001 to 9999999. When a new memory card is inserted, file numbering continues from the last number used. • Off: File names consist of “RIMG” followed by a fourdigit number (e.g., “RIMG0001.jpg”), assigned in ascending order from 0001 to 9999. When a new memory card is inserted, file numbering is reset to 0001. Notes • This option applies only to memory cards. The names of Photographs in internal memory consist of “RIMG” and a fourdigit number. • Photographs copied to a computer using DL-10 (page 151) are given new names consisting of “RIMG” and a four-digit number. • Photographs taken with AdobeRGB selected for Color Space Setting (page 146) are indicated by file names beginning with an underscore (e.g., “_R010001.jpg” or “_RIMG001.jpg”). Caution When On is selected, no further photographs can be stored if the memory card contains a folder numbered 999 and a file name ending in 9999; when Off is selected, no further photographs can be stored if the memory card contains a file numbered 9999. To take additional Photographs, format the card after copying its contents to a computer.9 camera settings Date Settings Set the camera clock (page 20). Note If you leave the battery in the camera body for at least two hours, the battery can be removed for about a week without resetting the clock. Language/L Choose the language in which camera messages and menus are displayed. Option Description Option Description Japanese ??????? Russian English English Simplified Chinese Deutsch German Traditional Chinese Français French Korean Italiano Italian Thai Español Spanish Video Out Mode When connecting the camera body to a TV or VCR (page 118), choose a video out mode that matches the standard used in the device. The camera body supports NTSC and PAL; SECAM is not supported. HDMI Output Choose the resolution of image output using an HDMI mini cable. Choose the setting from AUTO or Manual. Note Normally, select AUTO. If the resolution of image displayed on TV is low with the Auto setting, select Manual. The image may be improved.0 camera settings Start Settings Readout When the camera turns off, the settings are saved both in camera body and camera unit. Choose the destination to read out the settings from Body or Camera Unit. coPying Pictures to a comPuter Copying Pictures to a Computer This section describes how to copy pictures from the camera body to your computer. Instructions for Windows may be found below; those for the Macintosh begin on page 162. Note The dialogs shown in this section may differ from those displayed by your computer. Windows You can copy pictures to your computer by either of the following methods: • Install the supplied DL-10 software (page 153) and use it to copy pictures as described on page 159. • Copy pictures without using DL-10 or other image copy software. (page 160). Note Detailed instructions may be found in the Software User Guide on the supplied CD (page ix).2 coPying Pictures to a comPuter System Requirements Before using the supplied CD, check that your computer meets the following requirements. See the documentation provided with your computer for details. OS Windows 2000 Professional SP 4, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional SP 3, Windows Vista SP 2 CPU Windows 2000/Windows XP: Pentium® lll 500MHz or faster Windows Vista: Pentium® lll 1GHz or faster RAM Windows 2000/Windows XP: 256MB or more Windows Vista: 512MB or more Free disk space A minimum of 160MB required for installation Video 1024×768 pixels or more with 16-bit color or better Miscellaneous • Compatible CD-ROM drive • Compatible USB port Cautions • 64-bit operating systems are not supported. Operating systems that have been upgraded from an earlier version are not supported, as USB may fail to function as expected. The supplied software may not function as expected with systems that have been patched or updated with Service Pack releases. • Connect the camera body directly to a built-in USB port. USB ports added via PCI-bus or other extension boards or cards are not supported. The camera body may not function as expected when connected via a USB hub or keyboard. • More RAM may be required when handling movies and other large files. coPying Pictures to a comPuter Supplied CD Inserting the supplied CD in a CD-ROM drive displays the dialog shown at right. • Installing the software: Install the following software. DL-10: Copy pictures to the computer in a single operation. Irodio Photo & Video Studio: View, manage, edit pictures on the computer. For more information, see the Help menu in Irodio Photo & Video Studio or visit the following website: http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/irodio/e/irodio_digitalphoto_ videostudio/ USB driver: Connect earlier Ricoh cameras to computers running Windows 98, Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, or Windows 2000. Not required for this product. WIA driver: Connect earlier Ricoh cameras to computers running Windows XP or Windows Vista. Not required for this product. • Browse User’s Manual (Software Version): View the Software User Guide in pdf format (page ix). Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader is required; if necessary, install Adobe Reader as described on page 156. • Browse CD-ROM Content: View the contents of the CD, which include Adobe Reader (page 156). To install Irodio Photo & Video Studio without installing other software, open the “Irodio Photo & Video Studio” folder and double-click Irodio Photo & Video Studio.exe. coPying Pictures to a comPuter Installing the Software Follow the steps on the next page to install the supplied software. Illustrations are from Windows XP. Cautions • If the camera body is connected to the computer, disconnect the camera body before beginning installation. • Users of existing “Caplio” software should note that the “DC” software supplied with the camera body replaces the following items in the Caplio software package: Caplio software DC software RICOH Gate La DL-10 Caplio Viewer DU-10 * Caplio Server SR-10 * Caplio Setting ST-10 * *Not used by this product. If the above Caplio software is currently installed, you will be prompted to uninstall it before installing the supplied DC software. Follow the on-screen instructions. Installing the DC software replaces Caplio Viewer, Caplio Server, and Caplio Setting with the software listed above, which can be used in the same way as the Caplio versions (note that those software will not be installed if you uninstalled the Caplio software as described on page 158 before installing the DC software). Note that uninstalling the software for earlier Ricoh cameras may reset user preferences for DL-10 or RICOH Gate La. • Administrator privileges are required for installation. • DL-10 is for use in a stand-alone environment and cannot be run over a network. coPying Pictures to a comPuter 1 Insert the supplied CD. Turn the computer on and insert the supplied CD in a CD-ROM drive. • Windows Vista: An Autorun dialog will be displayed. Click Run Autorun.exe to display the installer dialog. • Other versions of Windows: The installer dialog will be displayed automatically. 2 Click Installing the software. • Windows Vista: A “User Account Control” dialog will be displayed. Click Allow to display a languageselection dialog. • Other versions of Windows: A language-selection dialog will be displayed. 3 Select a language and click OK. The dialog shown at right will be displayed. Click Next. 4 Select a destination. The supplied software will be installed to the folder shown under Destination Folder. Click Next. coPying Pictures to a comPuter 5 Confirm the destination location and then click [Next]. The Irodio Photo & Video Studio installer will start (depending on your computer, the splash screen at right may be displayed for some time before installation begins). Follow the onscreen instructions to install the supplied software. 6 Click Finish. The dialog shown at right will be displayed when installation is complete. Click Finish. 7 Restart the computer. A message will be displayed prompting you to restart your computer. Select Yes, I want to restart my computer now and click Finish to restart the computer. 8Unblock DL-10. A Windows security dialog will be displayed when the computer restarts. Click Unblock for DL-10. Note See page 158 for information on uninstalling the software. Installing Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is required to view the Software User Guide. If Adobe Reader is not already installed, it can be installed from the supplied CD as described below. Cautions • Disconnect the camera body before beginning installation. • Administrator privileges are required for installation. coPying Pictures to a comPuter 1 Insert the supplied CD. Turn the computer on and insert the supplied CD in a CD-ROM drive. • Windows Vista: An Autorun dialog will be displayed. Click Run Autorun.exe to display the installer dialog. • Other versions of Windows: The installer dialog will be displayed automatically. 2 Click Browse CD-ROM Content. The contents of the CD will be displayed. 3 Install Adobe Reader. Double-click the “Adobe Reader” folder and then double-click the folder for the language of your choice. Double-click the file beginning with “AdbeRdr910” and follow the on-screen instructions. If a “User Account Control” dialog is displayed, click Continue. Notes • See the Adobe Reader Help menu for information on Adobe Reader. • Installation of Adobe Reader 9.1 requires MSI (Microsoft Windows Installer) version 3.1 or later and either Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later or Firefox 2.0 or later. Microsoft Internet Explorer and Microsoft Windows Installer are available via Microsoft Update. coPying Pictures to a comPuter Uninstalling the Software Follow the steps below to uninstall DC software or Irodio Photo & Video Studio. Cautions • Administrator privileges are required for uninstallation. • Exit any applications that may be running before proceeding. 1 Open the “Add/Remove Programs” Control Panel. Open the Windows “Start” menu and select Control Panel (Windows XP or Windows Vista) or Settings > Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. 2Uninstall the software. Select the software you wish to uninstall (DC Software or Irodio Photo & Video Studio) and click Change/Remove. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; click OK. If a message appears warning that a shared file has been detected, select Don’t display this message again and click Yes. Close any open windows when the uninstall process is complete. After uninstalling Irodio Photo & Video Studio, restart the computer.9 coPying Pictures to a comPuter Copying Pictures Using DL-10 After installing DC software, follow the steps below to copy pictures to your computer. 1 Turn the camera body off. 2 Connect the supplied USB cable. Connect the cable to the computer USB port. Cautions • Do not use force when connecting the cable or when handling the camera body with the cable connected. • Do not move the camera body with the cable connected. Connect the cable to the camera body as shown. The camera body will turn on, DL- 10 will start, and transfer will begin automatically. Pictures are copied to folders in the “Digital Camera” folder in “My Documents” (if you were previously using Caplio software, pictures will instead be copied to folders in the “Caplio” folder). Pictures are sorted into separate folders by date of recording; make sure the camera clock is set to the correct date and time before shooting. 3Disconnect the cable when transfer is complete. See page 161 for more information.0 coPying Pictures to a comPuter Note If transfer does not begin automatically, try the following procedures. Click Save in the DL-10 window. Check that Saves automatically when connected to USB is selected in the DL-10 “Option Settings” dialog. Restart the computer and repeat the above steps. Copying Pictures Without Using DL-10 If DL-10 is not installed, you can copy pictures to the computer as described below. The illustrations in this section are from Windows XP. 1 Turn the camera body off. 2 Connect the supplied USB cable. Connect the cable to the computer USB port and then to the camera body. The camera body will turn on automatically. 3 Copy files from the camera body to the computer. The camera body will be listed as a removable drive in “My Computer” with pictures stored in folders as shown at right. If a memory card is inserted in the camera body, the drive will be named as shown at right and the contents of the memory card will be displayed. If no memory card is inserted, the drive will be named “RICOHDCI” and the contents of internal memory will be displayed. Copy pictures to the desired location on your computer. coPying Pictures to a comPuter Cautions • Do not turn the power off or disconnect the USB cable until copying is complete. • Files in the destination folder with the same name as the pictures being copied will be overwritten. If necessary, rename files before copying begins. • Do not use a computer to view or edit pictures on a memory card. Pictures that have been viewed or modified on a computer can no longer be displayed on the camera body. Copy pictures to the computer for viewing and editing. Disconnecting the Camera Body Before disconnecting the camera body from the computer, click the “Safely Remove Hardware” or “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon in the taskbar (the illustration above shows the icon for Windows XP) and select Safely Remove USB Mass Storage Device or Stop USB Mass Storage Device from the menu that appears. You can then disconnect the USB cable. Notes • A warning may be displayed if the USB cable is disconnected without first removing the camera body from the system as described above. Be sure to remove the camera body from the system before disconnecting the cable. • Confirm that transfer is complete before removing the camera body from the system and disconnecting the cable.2 coPying Pictures to a comPuter Macintosh The camera body can be used with Mac OS X versions 10.4–10.5.7. Caution The VM-1 software (page 164) and Software Users Guide (only on computers with Acrobat installed) can be used with Macintosh computers. Copying Pictures to a Macintosh 1 Turn the camera body off. 2 Connect the supplied USB cable. Connect the cable to the computer USB port. Cautions • Do not use force when connecting the cable or when handling the camera body with the cable connected. • Do not move the camera body with the cable connected. Connect the cable to the camera body as shown. The camera body will turn on automatically. coPying Pictures to a comPuter 3 Copy files from the camera body to the computer. The camera body will appear as a volume on the desktop with pictures stored in folders as shown at right. If a memory card is inserted in the camera body, the drive will be named as shown at right and the contents of the memory card will be displayed. If no memory card is inserted, the drive will be named “RICOHDCI” and the contents of internal memory will be displayed. Copy pictures to the desired location on your computer. Disconnecting the Camera Body Before disconnecting the camera body from the computer, drag the camera body volume into the Trash or select the camera body volume and choose Eject from the File menu. You can then disconnect the USB cable. Notes • A warning may be displayed if the USB cable is disconnected without first removing the camera body from the system as described above. Be sure to remove the camera body from the system before disconnecting the cable. • Confirm that transfer is complete before removing the camera body from the system and disconnecting the cable. • Connecting the camera body to a Macintosh computer may result in the creation of “FINDER.DAT” or “.DS_Store” files that will be listed by the camera body as unmatched files. These files can be deleted without risk. coPying Pictures to a comPuter Using the MP File Viewer When you shoot images with M-Cont Plus, the images are recorded as one MP file. By using the VM-1 MP file viewer, you can play back MP files on your Macintosh computer and export still images. This section explains how to install and uninstall the VM-1 software that is included on the supplied CDROM. For details on how to play back MP files on your computer or export still images from MP files using the MP file viewer, see the “Software User Guide” available from the supplied CD-ROM. SystemRequirementsfor Using theSuppliedMP fileviewer The following environments are necessary for using the supplied MP file viewer. Please check your computer, or the computer’s user manual. Operating Systems Supported Mac OS X 10.4 to 10.5.7 Macintosh computer Apple Inc. Macintosh Series Internal Memory Mac OS X 10.4 256 MB or more Mac OS X 10.5 512 MB or more Hard Disk Available Memory 5 MB or more CD-ROM Drive A CD-ROM drive compatible with the above-mentioned Macintosh computer Note VM-1 supports Japanese, English, French and Chinese (Simplified). coPying Pictures to a comPuter Installing VM-1 1 Insert the supplied CD. Turn on the Macintosh computer and insert the supplied CD in a CD-ROM drive. 2 Select the disk for installation. Double-click the RICOH icon > VM-1 folder > VM-1 Installer.pkg icon. The Install VM-1 window will be displayed; click Continue. When the window for selecting the installation location appears, select the disk for installation, and then click Continue. 3 Install VM-1. Click Install and enter your name and password, and then click OK. A message that the installation is complete will be displayed; click Close. To change the installation location, click Change Install Location.... To upgrade VM-1, click Upgrade. coPying Pictures to a comPuter Uninstalling VM-1 Cautions • If you have any other software applications running or data that has not been saved, quit the other software applications and save the data before uninstalling VM-1. • If an error occurs during the uninstallation process, update your Mac OS to the latest version. 1 Open the VM-1 utility folder. Open the Applications folder > Utilities folder > VM-1 Utility folder. 2Double-click the VM-1 Uninstaller icon. The uninstall confirmation dialog will be displayed. Click OK. 3 Enter your name and password, and then click OK. A message that the uninstallation is complete will be displayed; click OK. technical notes Technical Notes Troubleshooting Error Messages If an error message is displayed, take the steps listed below. Message Solution Page Insert card No memorycardis inserted. Insert card. 15 Setdate. Cameraclockis not set.Set cameraclock. 20, 149 File Number OverLimit Cameraisoutof file numbers. Insertanother card. 15, 148 UnmatchedFile Camera cannot display file. Use computer to check file contents anddelete file. — Insufficient memory. Continue? Space on memory card is insufficient to copy all files. Insert another card. 15 Protected Fileisprotectedandcannotbedeleted. 112 CardIsWrite-Protected. Cardis writeprotected(locked). Unlockcard. 16 Print settings cannotbe set for this file. Fileisa movieorother filethat cannotbeselectedforprinting. — Insufficient Memory/ Capacityshort Insufficientmemorytostoreadditional files. Deleteexisting files or increaseamountof memoryavailable. 39, 139 Maximumnumberof imagesselectedforprinting.Set numberof prints forother images tozero. 125 Format internal memory. Internal memory is not correctly formatted. Format internal memory. 139 Format card. Cardis not correctlyformatted.Format cardin camerabody. 139 CardError Format card. If messagepersists, cardis faulty;discontinueuse. 139 Writing Data Camerais savingdata.Waituntil saveis complete. — NoFile No filesavailableforplayback. — Cannot Record Memoryis full. Useanother cardor removecardanduseinternal memory. 15 technical notes Camera Body-Related Problems PowerSupply Problem Cause Solution Page Thecameradoes not turn on. Battery is exhausted or not inserted. Check that battery is correctly inserted. Charge battery (rechargeablebatteryonly). 12,14 Batteryis incompatible. Usesuppliedbattery. 13 Battery is not in correct orientation. Insert battery in correct orientation. 14 Thecameraturns off duringuse. Camera has turned off automaticallytosavepower. Turn cameraon. 18 Batteryisexhausted. Charge battery (rechargeable batteryonly). 12 Batteryis incompatible. Usesuppliedbattery. 13 Thecameradoes not turn off. Camera malfunction. Removeandreinsertbattery. 14 Low battery indicatordisplayed or cameraturnsoff when battery has chargeremaining. Batteryis incompatible. Usesuppliedbattery. 13 Batterycannotbe charged. Battery has reached end of charginglife. Replace with a new battery. 14 Batteryisquickly exhausted. Ambient temperatureis very high orverylow. — — Poor lighting requires extensive useof flash. — —9 technical notes Shooting Problem Cause Solution Page Nopicturetaken when shutterreleasebutton is pressed. Batteryisexhausted. Charge battery (rechargeable batteryonly). 12 Power is off or not in shooting mode. Slide the power switch to ON to turn camera on or press 6 to select shooting mode. 18,34 Camerais in playback mode. Press 6 to select shooting mode. 34 Shutter-release button was not fullypressed. Press shutter-release button all the waydown. 22 Memorycardis not formatted. Format card. 139 Memorycardis full. Insert new cardordelete files. 15,39 Memory card has reached end of workinglife. Insert new card. 15 Flash is charging. Wait until flash lamp stops blinking. 29 Memorycardis locked. Unlockcard. 16 Memorycardcontactsaredirty. Clean with soft,drycloth. — Cannotview Photographsafter shooting. Displaytimeis tooshort. Chooselongerdisplaytime. 142 Picturedisplayis blank. Power is off or picture display is dark. Turn camera on or adjust picture displaybrightness. 18, 139 Picturedisplayisoff. Press the VF/LCD button to turn picturedisplayon. 42 Display has been switched to the LCD viewfinder. Press the VF/LCD button toswitch tothepicturedisplay. 42 A/V cableis connected. Disconnect cable. 118 Cameraunableto focus in autofocus mode. Lens isdirty. Clean with soft,drycloth. – Subject is notat centerof frame. Usefocus lock. 25 Subject not suitableforautofocus. Usefocus lockor manual focus. 25,65 Subject is tooclose. Use macro mode or move away from subject. 270 technical notes Problem Cause Solution Page Picturesare blurred. J Camera movedduringshooting. Use a tripod. Use the camera shake correction function. Press elbowsagainstyourbody. 21,92 Lighting is poor and shutter speedsareslow. Use the flash. Choose higher ISO setting. Use the camera shake correction function. 29, 90, 92 Flash does not fire or will not charge. Flash is not raised. Press OPEN/fbutton (flash open/ setting) toopen the flash. 29 Flash cover is not fullyopen. Do notobstruct flash cover. — The flash cannot be used in the followingcases: • When exposure bracket, white balance bracket, or color bracket is set • In continuous mode • In movie mode Changecamerasettings. 54,73 75 Flash isoff. Open the flash. Press OPEN/f button (flash open/setting) to cancel flash off. 29 Batteryisexhausted. Charge battery (rechargeable batteryonly). 12 Flash does not illuminatesubject. The distance to the subject exceeds the flash range. Movecloser tosubject. – Subject isdark. Increase flash output. 78 Flash output is toolow. Increase flash output. 78 Flash cover is not fullyopen. Do notobstruct flash cover. — Photographsare toobright. Flash output is too high. Reduce flash output, move away from subject,orusedifferent light source. 78 Photograph isoverexposed. Use exposure compensation or choosefaster shutter speed. 50,85 Picturedisplayis toobright. Adjustpicturedisplaybrightness. 139 Photographsare toodark. Flash is off and subject is poorly lit. Press OPEN/fbutton (flash open/ setting) toopen the flash. 29 Photograph isunderexposed. Use exposure compensation or chooseslower shutter speed. 50,85 Picturedisplayis toodark. Adjustpicturedisplaybrightness. 139 technical notes Problem Cause Solution Page Colorsare unnatural. Camera unable to adjust white balance for shooting conditions usingauto whitebalance. Include white object in Photograph or choose another whitebalanceoption. 86 Photograph information not displayed. Indicatorsare hidden. Press DISP. todisplayindicators. 42 Picturedisplay brightnesschanges duringfocusing. Ambient lightingispoorordiffers from thatusedforautofocus. This is normal and does not indicatea malfunction. — Vertical streaks (“smear”)appear in photographs. Subject isbright. This is normal and does not indicatea malfunction. — Tilt indicator is not displayed. Off or Sound selected for Level Setting. Choose Displayor Disp + Snd. 32 Indicatorsare hidden. Press DISP. todisplayindicators. 42 Thecameraisupsidedown. Hold the camera in the correct orientation. 21 Photograph is not level,although tilt indicator showed that camera was level. Camera was moving when Photograph was taken. Do not takepictures from moving objects. — Subject is not level. Checkthesubject. — Playback/Deletion Problem Cause Solution Page Cannotplay picturesback. Camerais not in playback mode. Press6. 19,34 A/V cableincorrectlyconnected. Reconnect A/V cable. 118 Video modedoes not match TV. Chooseanothervideo mode. 149 The playback screen displays in theLCD viewfinder. Set Playback Screen toLCD. 1412 technical notes Problem Cause Solution Page Cannotview pictureson memorycard. Memory card empty or not inserted. Insert card that has been formatted in camera body and contains pictures recorded with camerabody. 15, 139 Card was not formattedin camera body. Pictures were created with other device. Memorycardcontactsaredirty. Clean with soft,drycloth. — Card malfunction. Insert another card. If you can view pictureson secondcard, first card has probably malfunctioned; discontinueuse. — Picturedisplay has turnedoff. Batteryisexhausted. Charge battery (rechargeable batteryonly). 12 Camera has turned off automaticallytosavepower. Turn cameraon. 18 Cannotdelete file. Fileisprotected. Removeprotection. 112 Memorycardis locked. Cannot format Unlock memorycard. 16 card. Cardis locked. Miscellaneous Problem Cause Solution Page Cannot insert memorycard. Cardis not in correctorientation. Insert in correctorientation. 15 Cameracontrols have noeffect. Batteryisexhausted. Charge battery (rechargeable batteryonly). 12 Camera malfunction. Turn camera off and then on again. 18 Removeandreinsertbattery. 14 Dateis incorrect. Clockis not set correctly. Set clock to correct date and time. 20,149 Date hasbeen reset. Battery has notbeen insertedfor abouta week. Set clock to correct date and time. 20,149 Cameradoes not turn off automatically. Off is selected for Auto Power Off. Chooseanother setting. 141 Cameradoes not beep. Beepis muted. Choose another option for Volume Settings. 32,142 technical notes Problem Cause Solution Page Picturesare not displayedon TV. Video modedoes not match TV. Chooseanothervideo mode. 149 A/V cable not connected. Connect A/V cable. 118 TV is not tuned to VIDEO IN channel. TuneTV to VIDEO IN channel. — Computer-Related Problems For more information, refer to the Software User Guide, available in pdf format on the supplied CD. Security Alerts(Windows Vista/WindowsXP) Consult the following if Windows XP Service Pack 3 or Windows Vista Service Pack 2 displays a security alert when the camera body is connected or DL-10 starts. The illustrations in this section are from Windows XP. If a security alert is displayed, confirm that the program is from a reliable source and click Unblock. Caution If you cannot identify the program and source, click Keep Blocking to prevent your computer from being affected by virus or malware. technical notes If you clicked Keep Blocking to block a Ricoh application, you can remove the block in Windows Firewall. 1 Open the “Windows Firewall” Control Panel. Open the “Start” menu and select Control Panel, then double-click Windows Firewall (if Windows Firewall is not listed, click Switch to Classic View at the top left corner of the Control Panel window). 2Allow the Ricoh application Internet access. In the “Windows Firewall” dialog, click the Exceptions tab and check whether DL-10 is listed under “Programs and Services.” If it is, place a check in the check box next to DL-10 and click OK. If it is not listed, click Add Program… to add DL-10 to the list of exceptions. If you clicked Ask Me Later to block DL-10, a security alert will be displayed the next time the program starts. Click Unblock to remove the block. technical notes Specifications Flash Mode Auto(flash fires when lightingispooror subject isbacklit), red-eye, on, slow sync, manual,off Range(built-in flash) Seethedocumentation provided with thecameraunit. Flash compensation ±2.0EV in incrementsof1/2EV or1/3EV Manual flash amount FULL,1/1.4,1/2,1/2.8,1/4,1/5.6,1/8,1/11,1/16,1/22,1/32,1/64 Picturedisplay 3.0? transparentLCD;approx.920,000pixels Shooting mode Auto,program shift,aperturepriority, shutterpriority, manual, scene, “MySettings” Picturequality Fine, Normal, RAW(DNG)?* 1 Storage SD/SDHC memorycard, internal memory(approx.86?MB) File size?* 2 (approx.) 5M FINE:approx.2287KB/frame 3M FINE:approx.1474KB/frame 1M FINE:approx.812KB/frame VGA FINE:approx.197KB/frame File format Photographs JPEG (Exif Ver.2.21)?* 3 , RAW(DNG) Movies AVI?* 4 (OpenDML Motion JPEG compliant) Compression JPEG baselinecompliant (photographsand movies) Other shootingoptions Continuous shooting(continuous, M-ContPlus); self-timer (shutter releasedelayofapprox.10?sor2?s,or custom setting); interval timer (intervalsof5?s to1 hour in incrementsof5?s)?* 5 ; colorbracketing; B&W(TE); color spaceselection; noisereduction; histogram display; framinggrid;depth-of-fieldindicator; tilt indicator; hot shoe Otherplaybackoptions Autoimagerotation; multi-frameplayback;playbackzoom (upto 16?×); resize Interface USB 2.0(High-Speed) Mini-B connector; MassStorage?* 6 ;audio output1.0?Vp-p(75?O), HDMI mini cableconnector (TypeC) Videosignal format NTSC,PAL Power source DB-90rechargeablebattery(3.6?V) Batterylife(basedon CIPA standard)?* 7 Seethedocumentation provided with thecameraunit. technical notes Dimensions (W?×?H?×?D) 113.9?mm?×?70.2?mm?×?28.9?mm (excludingprojections) Weight (approx.) • Camerabody(excludingbattery, memorycard, neckstrap,and connector cap):160?g • Battery, neckstrap,andconnector cap:66?g Tripodscrew hole 1/4-20UNC Datestoragetime Approx.1 week Operatingtemperature 0?°Cto40?°C Operating humidity 85%or less Storagetemperature –20?°Cto60?°C * 1 A JPEG file is also recorded (the JPEG file may be a fine- or normalquality file with the dimensions as the RAW file or a VGA file). RAW files use the standard DNG format promoted by Adobe Systems, Inc. * 2 For details on RAW, L, M sizes, see the documentation provided with the camera unit. * 3 Compatible with the Design rule for Camera File system (DCF, a JEITA standard) and DPOF. Full compatibility with other devices is not guaranteed. * 4 Audio: PCM 32 kHz, 16 bit monaural * 5 Flash off. * 6 Mass Storage is supported under Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Mac OS X 10.4–10.5.7. * 7 Measured according to CIPA standard. For reference only; actual number of shots varies greatly according to how camera is used.  technical notes Internal Memory/Memory Card Capacity The approximate number of frames or length of movies that can be stored in internal memory or on a memory card at different settings varies depending on the type of camera unit. See the documentation provided with the camera unit. Notes • Each movie can be up to 90 minutes long (4GB in size). • The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst is 999. If memory remains for more than 999 exposures, “999” is shown in the display. • Depending on the subject, the number of pictures that can be taken may differ from the number of exposures remaining. • Capacity varies with shooting conditions and the make of memory card. • Use a high-speed memory card when shooting for extended periods. technical notes Optional Accessories The GXR camera body can be used with the following optional accessories: Camera unit DB-90 rechargeable battery BJ-9 battery charger CA- cable switch A wired remote shutter release that attaches to the USB connector of the camera body. VF-2 LCD viewfinder An electrical viewfinder that attaches to the hot shoe of the camera body. This offers viewfinder coverage of 100% and can be adjusted up to 90° without any parallax, and enables easy lowangle shooting. GF- external flash An external flash that is developed for digital camera with TTL autoflash system. ST- neck strap9 technical notes SC-S soft case SC-L soft case Notes • Before using optional accessories, read the manual provided with the product. • For the latest information on optional accessories, visit the Ricoh website (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/).0 technical notes Camera System and Accessories Attach to hot shoe SC-55S/SC-55L soft case ST-3 neck strap CA-1 cable switch DB-90 rechargeable battery (supplied) BJ-9 battery charger (supplied) Attach to USB connector Camera unit GF-1 flash unit VF-2 LCD viewfinder Attach camera unit technical notes The GF-1 Flash Unit (Optional) An optional GF-1 flash unit can be connected to the hot shoe. 1 Close the flash cover (page 2). 2Attach the flash. Turn the camera and the GF-1 off and attach the GF-1 to the hot shoe. Hot shoe 3 Turn the flash and camera on. 4 Press the DIRECT button. 5 Select the optional flash mode item. Move the cursor using +, –, Fn, Fn2 or the ADJ. lever (left and right) to highlight the item. 6 Select a flash mode. Rotate the up-down dial to select a flash mode. Note • The optional flash mode item is not displayed when the GF-1 is turned off. • Turn the GF-1 off to shoot without the flash. • If the optional flash mode item is not displayed, turn the GF-1 and camera off and then remove and reattach flash.2 technical notes OtherFlash Units Use only flash units with one signal terminal, which must be an X-contact with a positive voltage of no more than 20V. Use a flash that covers the angle of view of the lens. 1 Close the flash cover (page 2). 2Attach the flash. Turn the camera and the optional flash unit off and attach the flash to the hot shoe. 3 Set aperture manually. Turn the camera on, select mode A or M, and choose an aperture (pages 18, 48, 50). 4 Choose a manual ISO sensitivity setting. Select an option other than Auto for ISO sensitivity (page 90). 5 Turn the flash on. Turn the flash on and set it to auto mode. Set aperture and ISO sensitivity to the values selected with the camera. Take a test shot and adjust flash aperture and ISO settings as necessary. Turn the optional flash unit off before removing it from the camera. Cautions • If the external flash is on, it will fire with every shot regardless to the flash mode selected with the camera. Turn the flash unit off to shoot without the flash. • Optional flash units are in principle for use at ranges that exceed the range of the built-in flash. Using an optional flash unit at shorter ranges may result in overexposure. technical notes Using the Product Abroad Using BJ-9 BatteryCharger This product is for use with currents of 100–240V and 50 or 60Hz. Before travelling, purchase a travel adapter for connection to the type of outlets used at your destination. Do not use these products with electrical transformers, as this could damage the product. Warranty This product was manufactured for use in the country of purchase, and the warranty is not valid in other countries. Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any expenditure incurred thereby. Television Playback The supplied A/V cable can be used to connect this product to televisions and monitors equipped with a video input terminal. This product supports the NTSC and PAL video formats; before connecting the product to a video device, select the appropriate video output mode. Precautions for Use • The warranty is not valid in other countries. Should the product fail or malfunction while out of the country, the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing any expenditure incurred thereby. technical notes • Do not drop this product or subject it to physical shocks. When carrying the product, be careful that it does not strike other objects. Particular care is required to protect the picture display. • The flash may overheat if fired many times in succession. Do not use the flash more than necessary. Do not use the flash in close contact with your body or other objects. Failure to observe these precautions could result in burns or fire. • Using the flash unit in close proximity to your subject’s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment. Particular care should be observed when photographing infants. Do not direct the flash at the operator of a motor vehicle. • Battery may become hot with extended use. Wait for the battery to cool before removing it from this product. • The picture display may be difficult to read in direct sunlight. • You may notice that picture display varies in brightness or contains pixels that do not light or that are always lit. This is common to all LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction. • Do not apply force to the picture display. • Abrupt changes in temperature may cause condensation, resulting in visible condensation inside this product, or malfunction. This can be avoided by placing this product in a plastic bag to slow the temperature change, and removing it only after the air in the bag has reached the same temperature as its surroundings. • To prevent damage to the product, do not insert objects into the holes in the microphone and speaker coverings. • Keep the terminals of the connector free of dust. • Keep this product dry and avoid handling it with wet hands. Failure to observe these precautions could result in product malfunction or electric shock. • Take a test shot to ensure that this product is functioning properly before using it on important occasions such as travel or weddings. We recommend that you keep this manual and spare batteries at hand. technical notes Tip: Avoiding Condensation Condensation is particularly likely to occur if you move to an area with a sharply different temperature, if humidity is high, in a cold room after the heater has come on, or where this product is exposed to cold air from an air conditioner or other device. Care and Storage Caring forthis product • Clean the picture display by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a small amount of any monitor cleaner that does not contain organic solvents. • Clean this product thoroughly after using it at the beach or handling cosmetics. Do not expose this product to volatile substances such as thinner, benzene, or pesticides. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to this product or its finish. • In the unlikely event of malfunction, visit a Ricoh Repair Center. • This product contains high-voltage circuits. Do not disassemble. • The picture display is easily scratched; avoid touching it with hard objects. Storage • Do not store this product where it will be exposed to: extreme heat or humidity; large changes in temperature or humidity; dust, dirt, or sand; severe vibration; prolonged contact with chemicals, including mothballs and other insect repellent, or with vinyl or rubber products; strong magnetic fields (for example, in the vicinity of a monitor, transformer, or magnet). • Remove the battery if the product will be left unused for a long period of time. BeforeCleaning Turn the power off and remove the battery. technical notes Warranty and Servicing 1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period mentioned in the Warranty supplied with thisproduct,anydefectiveparts willberepairedfreeofcharge. In theeventofamalfunction, contact thedealer from which youpurchasedthisproductor your nearest Ricoh RepairCenter.Please note thatyou will notbereimbursedfor thecostofbringingthisproduct tothe Ricoh RepairCenter. 2. This warrantydoes not coveranydamageresultingfrom: 1 failuretofollow theinstructions in theinstruction manual; 2 repair, modification or overhaul not conductedby an authorizedservice center listedin the instruction manual; 3 fire, naturaldisaster,actof God, lightning,abnormalvoltage,etc.; 4 improper storage(notedin the“Camera Body User Guide”), leakingofbatteryandother fluids, mold,or otherwiseinsufficient careof thisproduct. 5 submergence in water (flooding), exposure to alcohol or other beverages, infiltration of sand or mud, physical shock,droppingof thisproduct,orpressureon thisproduct,andotherunnatural causes. 3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees, including those incurred at an authorizedservicecenter. 4.??You willbeliableforall repair fees,even within the warrantyperiod, if the warrantycardis notattachedor if thedistributor’s nameor thepurchasedate havebeen changedorare not indicatedon thecard. 5.??Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the customer will be charged to the customer, whetheror not theyareincurredduringthe warrantyperiod. 6.??This warrantyonlyapplies tothisproductand not totheaccessories, such as thecaseandstrap, nordoes it applytothebatteryandother consumablesprovided. 7.??Anyconsequentialdamagesarisingfromfailureof thisproduct,such asexpensesincurredin takingpictures or lossofexpectedprofit, will notbereimbursed whether theyoccurduringthe warrantyperiodor not. 8.??The warrantyisonlyvalidin thecountryin which thisproduct waspurchased. * Theaboveprovisions refer torepairsofferedfreeof charge,anddo not limityour legal rights. * Theintention of theaboveprovisions isalsodescribedin the warrantycardprovided with thisproduct. 9. Partsessential totheservicingof thisproduct (that is, components requiredto maintain thefunctionsand qualityof theproduct) willbeavailableforaperiodof fiveyearsafter thisproduct isdiscontinued. 10.Please note that if this product is seriously damaged by flooding, submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocksordropping, it may notbe repairable, andrestoration toitsoriginal condition maybe impossible. Notes • Before sending this product in for repair, check the battery and read the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation. • Some repairs require a significant amount of time to complete. • When sending this product to a service center, please include a note which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as possible. • Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending this product to the service center. • This warranty does not apply to data stored on memory cards or in internal memory. technical notes NOTICES USA FCC Part 15 Class B The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, then user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. (FCC 15.105B) Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. (FCC 15.21) Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connection to a host computer in order to comply with FCC emission limits. (FCC 15.27) COMPLIANCEINFORMATION STATEMENT Product Name: CAMERA BODY Model Number: GXR This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell NJ, 07006 Tel.: 1-800-225-1899 Noteto Usersin Canada Note: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 RemarqueConcernant les Utilisateurs au Canada Avertissement: Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB- 003 du Canada. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Index Symbols 5 (auto) mode................................. 4, 21 d (delete) button............................. 3, 39 O (DISP.) button............................. 3, 42 N (macro) button ............................ 3, 27 OPEN/f(flash) button..................... 3, 29 6 (playback) button......3, 19, 94, 101 t (Self-Timer).................................... 3, 31 8/z button........................ 3, 26, 36, 38 9/Z button....................... 3, 26, 36, 38 A A (aperture priority) mode............ 4, 48 A/V cable ........................................... ii, 118 ADJ. lever...................................... 3, 5, 134 ADJ Shutter Confirmation............... 135 Adobe Reader...................................... 156 AF auxiliary light......................2, 31, 140 Alert......................................................... 173 Aperture......................................46, 48, 50 Aperture Shift.........................................92 Autofocus..........................................22, 64 Autofocus/flash lamp .......................................3, 18, 22, 29, 141 Auto Power Off.................................... 141 Auto Rotate........................................... 143 B Backlighting ............................................85 Battery.......................................................12 Battery/card cover..................... 3, 14, 15 Battery charger............................. 12, 183 Battery level.............................................10 Black & White ...................................71, 75 Blur..............................................................24 Bracketing................................................75 Brightness.............................44, 106, 139 C Cable switch......................................... 178 Camera shake correction....................92 Caplio...................................................... 154 Card Sequence No. ............................ 148 CD..................................... ix, 153, 155, 157 CL-BKT Black & White (TE) ............... 146 Clock................................................. 20, 149 Close-up....................................................27 Color......................................71, 75, 86, 89 Color Space Setting........................... 146 Computer.............................................. 151 Connector cover...................................... 3 Connector for A/V cable........................ 3 Continuous Mode .................................73 Contrast........................................... 71, 106 Copy to Card from Internal Memory ................................................................ 115 D Date Imprint............................................84 Defaults..................................59, 127, 128 Deleting Photographs.........................39 Depth of Field.........................................64 Digital zoom............................................26 Digital Zoom Image........................... 147 DIRECT button......................................3, 5 DL-10..............................................153, 159 DNG............................................................63 DPOF....................................................... 115 E Edit My Settings.................................. 132 Error Messages.................................... 167 Exposure............................................50, 85 Exposure Metering................................70 F Flash, optional ..................................... 181 Flash amount..........................................79 Flash compensation .......................... 136 Flash cover................................................. 29 Flash Exposure Compensation.........78 Flash mode ..............................................28 Flash Synchro Settings........................79 Fn1, Fn2 button...............................3, 136 Fn Button Display............................... 145 Focus..........................................................64 Focus Lock................................................25 Focus target.............................................66 Format [Card]....................................... 139 Format [Internal Memory]............... 139 Full Press Snap........................................69 G Grid................................................... 42, 144 H HDMI ..............................................119, 149 Highlights.................................................43 Histogram....................................... 44, 108 Hot shoe .................................. 2, 181, 182 I Image Settings.......................................71 Interval Shooting...................................83 Irodio Photo & Video Studio........... 153 ISO Auto-High Settings.................... 140 ISO Setting...............................................90 J JPEG............................................................63 K Key custom options........................... 127 L Language/L................................... 149 LCD Brightness.................................... 139 LCD Confirmation Time.................... 142 Level Compensation.......................... 106 Level Setting......................................... 144 M M (manual exposure) mode ......... 4, 50 Macintosh.............................................. 162 Macro Mode ............................................27 Manual Focus..........................................65 Memory, internal ......................... 15, 139 CMemory card................................. 15, 139 /D button........3, 58, 101, 126 Metering...................................................66 Microphone............................................... 2 M Mode Dial Options........................ 138 Mode dial................................................2, 4 Monochrome ...................................71, 75 Movie mode ............................................54 Movie size.................................................63 Multi-frame playback...........................36 MY modes........................................... 4, 57 My Settings for Fn Settings............. 133 My Settings WB Comp. ..................... 133 N Neck strap ......................................... ii, 179 Noise Reduction.....................................80 Noise Reduction ISO.............................80 NTSC...............................................149, 183 O One Press M Mode ............................. 138 One Press Zoom Ratio ...................... 143 Operation Sounds.............................. 142 Optional accessories......................... 178 P P(program shift) mode................... 4, 46 PAL ..................................................149, 183 PictBridge.............................................. 120 Picture display ...............................3, 8, 42 Picture Quality/Size ..............................61 Playback, movies...................................94 Playback, photographs........................34 Playback, TV.......................................... 118 Playback Menu.................................... 101 Playback Mode Dial Options.......... 138 Playback Zoom.......................................38 Power switch...................................... 2, 1890 Pre-AF ........................................................70 Printing................................................... 122 Protect.................................................... 112 R RAW............................................................62 Recall My Settings.............................. 131 Reg. My Settings................................. 129 Restore Defaults.....................................91 RICOH Gate La...................................... 154 S 4S(shutter priority) mode ................ 4, 49 mode...................................... 4, 52 SD, SDHC...................................................15 Setup....................................................... 128 Sharpness.................................................71 Shooting Info. Display Frame......... 145 Shooting Menu ......................................58 Show My Setting Name.................... 145 Shutter-release button................... 2, 23 Shutter speed ..................................46, 49 Skew correction ........................... 56, 110 Slide Show............................................. 111 Snap Focus Distance ............................68 Software................................................. 154 Speaker ....................................................... 3 Start Settings Readout ..................... 150 Store Menu Cursor Position............ 147 Switch Shooting Mode........................92 T Tilt Indicator............................................32 Tripod screw hole.................................... 3 TV ............................................................. 118 U Up-down dial........................................2, 5 USB cable...................120, 159, 160, 162 V Video Out Mode.................................. 149 Viewing Photographs..........................34 VM-1...............................................165, 166 Volume............................................ 94, 142 W White Balance.........................................86 White Balance Compensation ..........89 Z Zoom..........................................................26Telephone Support Numbers in Europe UK (from within the UK) (from outsideof the UK) 02073 656 580 +44 2073 656 580 Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands) (außerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 +49 6331 268 438 France (àpartirdelaFrance) (en dehorsdelaFrance) 0800 88 18 70 +33 1 60 60 19 94 Italia (dall’Italia) (dall’estero) 02 696 33 451 +39 02 696 33 451 España (desdeEspaña) (desdefueradeEspaña) 91 406 9148 +34 91 406 9148 http://www.service.ricohpmmc.com/Fromenvironmental friendlinessto environmentalconservation and to environmentalmanagement Ricoh is aggressively promoting environment-friendly activities and also environment conservation activities to solve the great subject of management as one of the citizens on our precious earth. To reduce the environmental loads of digital cameras, Ricoh is also trying to solve the great subjects of "Saving energy by reducing power consumption" and "Reducing environment-affecting chemical substances contained in products". IfYou Encounter a Problemwith This Product See “Troubleshooting” (page 167) in this manual. If the problem persists, contact a Ricoh office. Ricoh offices RICOH COMPANY,LTD. 3-2-3,Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku,YokohamaCity, Kanagawa222-8530, Japan http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc RICOH AMERICASCORPORATION 5 DedrickPlace,WestCaldwell, New Jersey07006, U.S.A. 1–800–22RICOH http://www.ricoh-usa.com/ RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) OberratherStr.6,40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331268438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +496331268438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK) (from within the UK) 02073656580 (from outsideof the UK) +442073656580 RICOH FRANCES.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (àpartirdelaFrance) 0800881870 (en dehorsdelaFrance) +33160601994 RICOH ESPANA,S.A. (PMMCSPAIN) (desdeEspaña) 914069148 (desdefueradeEspaña) +34914069148 RICOH ITALIA S.p.A. (PMMCITALY) (dall’Italia) 0269633451 (dall’estero) +390269633451 RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS LIMITED 21/F, One Kowloon,1WangYuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong Support for Irodio Photo & Video Studio North America(U.S. A.) +1–800–458–4029(toll free) Europe UK, Germany,FranceandSpain: +800–1532–4865(toll free) Other countries: +44–1489–564–764 Asia +63–2–438–0090 China +86–21–5385–3786 Business hours:9:00 AM to5:00PM Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2009 Decenber EN EN USA GB GB AE AE Printed in China *L754 2971A* ??? ?????????????????? ???????????????????????????? (P.13-22)? ??? ????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????????????????(P.23-54)? ??? ???????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? (P.55-214)? GXR DIGITAL CAMERA BODY ?????(????) ???????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????? ???????????????????????? GXR ??? ????????? ????????? ???? ?????? ????? ??(DB-90) ??????????? (BJ-9) ?????? ??? ????????? ???? ?????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????? AV ???? ????????? ????????? USB ???? (miniB ???) ????????? ????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ¦ CD-ROM ?????????????(???????)???????????? ¦ ????? (????)·???(??) ¦ ???????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????(?? 2 ??)? ????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????????? ???????????? Web ????????????? http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/regist/ ???????????????E ???(????????????? ?????)???????????????? ???????????????????????????????????? ??????????????? ???????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????? ?????????????? ??????? ??????????? ??????????????????????????? ???????????????? ????????? ??????????????????????????? ???????? ??????? ???????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? ??????? ??????? ??????????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ??????? ??????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? ????????????????????????? ???????? ??????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????? ????????????? • ?????????????????? • ????????????????????? • ?????????? ????????? B ????????????????? ??????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? ?????????????? ??????????????????????? VCCI-B ?????????????????????????? © 2009 RICOH CO.,LTD. ???????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????? Microsoft®?Windows®?Windows Vista®?Internet Explorer® ? ? ? Microsoft Corporation ? ? ? ? ?????????????????? Macintosh®?Mac OS® ????????????????? Apple Inc. ?????? Adobe®?Adobe ???Reader® ??Adobe Systems Incorporated(?????????)????? ????????????????????? HDMI? ?????? High-Definition Multimedia Interface ??HDMI Licensing LLC ??? ?????????? ??????????????????????????????1 ??????? ?????? ???????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????? ?? ??????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?? ?? ??????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????? ?? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????? ???? ?????????????????????????? ?????????????????????? ???????????????????? ??? ??:???? ??:???? ?????????????????????????????? ?? ??????????????????????????????????? ???????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ??????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????? ??????????????????????????2 ?? ??????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ???????????????? ??????????(?????????)???????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ???????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????????? ?????? • ???????????????????????? 15 ???????? ????????????? • ?????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ??? • ??????????????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????????? ??????????? • ????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????? ???????? ??????????????????????????????????? ???? • ?????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????? • ?????????????????? ????????????????? SD ???????????????? ???????????·??????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????3 ???????·???????????????????????·??? ??????????????????????????????????? ???????? ??????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????? ????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ??????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ?????? ???????????????????????? AC ????????? ?????????? AC ??????????·??·??????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ???? AC ???????????????????·??·?????? ????? ??????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?? ???????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????(????????? ??????) ??????????????????????????????????? ????????? ????????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ?????????? ??(?????????)?????????????????????? ????????????????? ???????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????????4 ???????????? GXR ????????? 2 ????????????????? ??????(????)?(??) ??????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? ????? * ??????????????????????????? ??????(???????)?(PDF ????) ??????????????????????????? ??? ??????(???????)?????? CD-ROM ??? ???????????????? ??????????(????? ??)????????????? ???????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???????????????? ? PDF ????????????? ??????????? ??????????????????????????????????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ?????????Irodio Photo & Video Studio ??????????Irodio Photo & Video Studio?????????????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ????????·?????????????? ?????????????????? ???????? ???????????? ??????:0570-02-3500 TEL:06-6633-2990 (PHS ?????????????????) FAX:06-6633-2992 ? 556-0011 ???????????? 2-10-70 ??????? 25F ????:???~??? 10:00 ~ 18:00 (???????????????) ??????????Irodio Photo & Video Studio ????????????? http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/irodio/j/irodio_digitalphoto_videostudio/5 ??? ??????? ..................................................................................................1 ???????????? .............................................................................4 ??? 13 ???? ........................................................................................................... 14 ???????? ........................................................................................... 14 ??????????? .............................................................................. 16 ??????????/ ADJ. ??????? ....................................... 17 ?????????????? ......................................................................17 ADJ. ??????? .............................................................................................17 DIRECT ??????? ............................................................................... 18 DIRECT ?????????? .......................................................................19 ???????????????????? .........................................19 ???????????.....................................................................................19 ?????????....................................................................................... 20 ??? 23 ????? ....................................................................................................... 24 ?????????????????? ..................................................24 ???????????.....................................................................................26 ????????????? ...........................................................................27 ????????????? ...........................................................................29 ?????/???? .........................................................................................29 ??????? ........................................................................................................31 ???? ........................................................................................................... 32 ???????? ...................................................................................................32 ???? .......................................................................................................................33 ???????????.....................................................................................37 ???????(?????) ........................................................................38 ????????????? ...........................................................................39 ?????????? .........................................................................................41 ????????????? ...........................................................................426 ???? ........................................................................................................... 44 ?????????? .........................................................................................44 ?????? .............................................................................................................46 ?????????? .........................................................................................48 ???? ........................................................................................................... 49 1 ????????? ..........................................................................................49 ????????????? ...........................................................................49 ??????????????? .................................................................50 DISP. ?????????????? ....................................................... 52 ?????? .............................................................................................................52 ?????? .............................................................................................................53 ??? 55 1 ??????? 56 ???????????????????????????? (P:???????????) ............................................................... 56 ????????????(A:???????) ................................ 58 ?????????????????? (S:??????????????) ................................................... 59 ?????????????????????? (M:??????????) .................................................................. 60 ??????????????(SCENE:??????) .................. 62 ?-?????????.....................................................................................63 ??????? ........................................................................................................64 ???????????? ................................................................................65 ???????????? (MY1 ~ MY3:???????????) .......................................... 66 ???????????? .......................................................................... 67 ????????????? ...........................................................................67 ?????/??????????(??·???/?????) ... 71 ?????? .............................................................................................................71 ????? ..................................................................................................................73 ?????????????(?????)............................................ 74 ???????????????(MF) ...................................................76 AE/AF ???????????????????????? ......77 ???????????????????????? .....................797 ?????????????????? (????????????) .................................................................. 80 ???????????????????????????? (????? ????) ............................................................................. 80 ??????????????????????????? (??AF) ..................................................................................................... 81 ?????????(??) ........................................................................ 82 ?????????(????) ................................................................ 83 ???????????????????????? .....................84 ???????(??) ................................................................................ 86 ??/????????/??????????????? (????????) .................................................................................. 88 ??????????????? (AE-BKT:?????????) ...............................................................88 ???????????????????? (WB-BKT:?????????????) ..........................................89 ???????????(CL-BKT:????????)..................90 ?????????????(?????????) ........................... 92 ?????????????????????? (?????????????) .............................................................. 93 ?????????????????? (???????????) ...................................................................... 94 ????????(?????????) ................................................ 94 ?????????????? ISO ??????? (????????? ISO ??) ............................................................. 95 ???????????????(??????????) ............... 95 ????????????(??????)............................................ 96 ?????????????????????? (???????)....................................................................................... 96 ???????????(????????) ....................................... 97 ??????????(??????) .................................................... 98 ??????(????) ............................................................................ 99 ??????????(????????)..........................................100 ???????????????(????) ...................................102 ???????????????(????) ...................................103 ????????????????(??????????) .........104 ?????????(ISO ??) ..............................................................1068 ????????????????(???????) .....................107 ???????????????????(???????) .........108 ???????????????????????? (???????).....................................................................................108 ??????????????(?????) .....................................109 2 ??????? 110 ??????? .............................................................................................110 MP ??????? .....................................................................................111 MP ????????? ...................................................................................113 3 ?????????(????????) 116 ???????????? ........................................................................116 ????????????? ........................................................................116 ???????????????(??????[??]) ...............117 1??????????/???? .........................................................117 ?????????????/???? ...............................................118 [??????[??]]?????????? (??????[??]) ..........................................................................119 ??????????(???????) ..............................................119 ???????????(?????) ..................................................120 ?????????????????(?????) .........................121 ??????? .....................................................................................................121 ??????? .....................................................................................................122 ?????????????(??????????) .....................124 ???????????????(????) .....................................125 ??????????(???????) ..............................................127 ?????????????(?????)..........................................127 1 ???????????? .........................................................................127 ?????????????????? ...............................................128 ??????????????/????...........................................130 ??????????????????????? (???????????????) ....................................................130 ?????????????(DPOF:?????) ..........................131 ?????????? DPOF ??/???? .....................................131 ???????? DPOF ??/???? ..............................................132 ??????? DPOF ???? ..................................................................1339 ?????????????(??????) .....................................134 ?????????.....................................................................................135 4 ?????????????? 137 ??????????????? ............................................................137 ?????????????? ................................................................138 ???????? .........................................................................................139 1 ???????????????? .....................................................139 ???????????..................................................................................141 ?????? ..........................................................................................................143 5 ??????????(??????) 144 ?????????? ................................................................................144 ????????? ...........................................................................................144 ????????????(??????????) .........................147 ????????????? ........................................................................147 ???????????????? BOX ????????? (????????????) ................................................................149 ?????????????(??????????) .....................150 ????????? Fn ????????????????? (Fn ??? MY ??) ..............................................................................152 ????????????????????????????? ????(??????????? MY ??) .................................152 ADJ. ???????????(ADJ. ?????) ..............................153 ???????????..................................................................................154 ADJ. ????????????????????? (ADJ ??????????) ...............................................................154 ?????????????????? (Fn1 ?????/ Fn2 ?????) ..................................................155 ???????????????????...........................................156 ???????????????????????? ..................157 +/-???????????(+-?????) .............................157 ADJ. ???/??????????????????? (????? ??????/ M ??? ??????) ...................158 ?????????????????????????? ???????????(M ???????????) ................159 ???????/???????????? (???[???]/???[??????]) .................................16010 ???????????????(??????????) .............161 DIRECT ??????????(DIRECT ?????) ......................161 ???????????????????? (??·????????) ....................................................................162 ISO AUTO-HI ???????(ISO AUTO-HI ??) ..........................162 AF ??????????(AF ???) .................................................162 ???????????(????) ......................................................163 ???????????????(????????) .....................163 ?????????????(???????) .................................164 ??????????(????????)..........................................164 ??????????(??????) ..................................................164 ??????????(???) ..............................................................165 ??????????(???????) ..............................................165 ????????????????????? (????????????) ................................................................166 ??????????????(????????) .........................166 ??????????????????(????????) .........167 ?????????????(?????)..........................................167 ???????????(???????????) .........................168 Fn ???????????(Fn ???????) ..............................168 ??????????????????????????? (????????????) ................................................................169 ???????????????(??????????) .............169 CL-BKT ?????????????(CL-BKT ?? (TE)) ...............169 ????????(?????) ..............................................................170 ?????????????(?????????) .........................170 ????????????(????????????) .................171 ????????????(????? NO.) .....................................172 ??·???????(????) ..........................................................173 ????????(Language /??) .................................................173 ?????????????(?????)..........................................173 HDMI ???????????(HDMI ??) .....................................174 ??????????????????????? (?????????) ............................................................................17411 6 ???????????? 175 Windows ??????? .........................................................................175 ??? CD-ROM ??????????? ............................................176 CD-ROM ??? ...................................................................................................177 ????????????????????????? ???????? ...........................................................................................179 Adobe Reader ????????? .........................................................181 ?????????(????????)?? .................................183 DL-10 ???????????????................................................184 DL-10 ????????????? .........................................................185 ???????????????? .........................................................187 Macintosh ??????? .......................................................................188 ???????????? .............................................................................188 ???????????????? .........................................................190 MP ??????????? .........................................................................190 7 ?? 193 ??????? .............................................................................................193 ??????????????? ..............................................................193 ???????? ................................................................................................194 ??????/????????? .........................................................200 ???? .........................................................................................................202 ??????/?????????????? .................................203 ???????? .........................................................................................204 ???????????..................................................................................206 AC ?????(???)??? ................................................................207 ???????(???)??? ............................................................209 ?????????? ................................................................................211 ??????? .............................................................................................212 ???????/???????? ........................................................213 ???????????? ........................................................................214 ?? .................................................................................................................215 ??????????? RING CUBE .....................................................21812??? ??????????? ?????????? ???? ....................................... 14 ???????? ....................... 14 ???????????........... 16 ??????????/ ADJ. ??????? ............. 17 DIRECT ??????? ........... 18 ????????? ................... 2014 ????????????????????? ???? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????? ???????? ?? 3 4 5 6 7 12 11 13 8 9 10 14 1 2 1 ?????????? ........ P.17 2 ?????? ........................... P.16 3 ??????? ...................... P.16 4 ???????? ........P.33?34 5 ?????? ........................... P.29 6 AF ??? ......................P.41?162 7 ?????? ........................ P.209 8 ???????? .................. P.39 9 ??? ..............................................- 10 ?????????? ...??? 11 ????????????? ??? .......................................... P.29 12 ?? ............................................... P.29 13 ???????????? ?? ............................................... P.29 14 ???????? .................. P.3915 ????????????????????? 1 DIRECT ??? ........................ P.18 2 OPEN/f(????? ????/??)??? ... P.39 3 VF/LCD ??? ........................ P.52 4 ?????? ........................... P.20 5 ????????/????? ??? ........P.29?33?40?163 6 USB ?? .............. P.138?184?185?188 7 AV ???? ........................... P.135 8 HDMI ?????? .......... P.136 9 ADJ. ??? ..................P.17?153 10 6(??)??? ....................P.30?44?110?116 11 N(???)??? ............. P.38 12 8(??)/ z(????) ??? ................................P.37?46 13 9(??)/ Z(???????) ??? .......................................P.37?46 14 ???? ..................................... P.47 +(!) ................................ P.157 –(%)................................. P.157 Fn1(#) ........................... P.155 Fn2($) ........................... P.155 15 MENU/OK ??? ...............................P.67?116?144 16 O( DISP.)??? .............. P.52 17 t(???????)/ d(? ?) .......................................P.41?49 18 ????? ............................. P.202 19 ?????/?????? ...............................................P.26?27 20 ????? ......................P.26?27 21 ??(DC ??)???? ??? ....................................... P.207 22 ????? ....................................- 23 ?????????? ...??? 24 ????? .................P.135?138 ?? 4 1 2 3 14 15 9 23 22 21 20 19 6 24 7 8 10 18 11 5 17 16 13 1216 ????????????????????? ??????????? ??????????????? ??????????????? ??????? ??????????????? ?????(?)????(?)? A:???????(P. 5 8) ??????????????????????????????? ???????????? M:?????? ????(P. 6 0) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????? P:? ? ? ? ? ? ?????(P.56) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???????? ???????? ???? 5: ? ? ? ? ? ???(P.33) ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???????? ???????? ???????? MY1?MY2?MY3:???? ???????(P.66) [??????????]? ????????????? S:? ? ? ? ? ? ???????? (P. 5 9) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???????? SCENE:??????(P.62) ???????????????? ???????????????? 1 2217 ????????????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? / ADJ. ? ? ? ? ??? ?????????????? ??????????????????+/-?????????? ?????????????(F ?)?????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????? ADJ. ??????? ADJ.?????????????????????????ADJ.??? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????(ADJ. ???GP.153)????Fn1 / Fn2 ? ??????????????????????????????? ??? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????????[????? ??????]/[M ??? ??????]/????????????? ADJ. ???????? ?????(GP.158)? ADJ. ??? ??????????18 ????????????????????? DIRECT ??????? ? ? ? ? ? ? DIRECT ? ? ? ? ? ??????????????? ??????????????? ????????????? DIRECT ?? 1 2 3 8 4 5 12 13 18 10 9 11 15 14 16 17 6 7 DIRECT 1 ????? ................................ P.16 2 ??? ..................... P.56?58?60 3 ????????? .................................... P.56?59?60 4 ???????? .................. P.39 5 ?????????/ ????????????? ...............................................P.92?93 6 ???? ..................................... P.99 7 ISO ?? ................................... P.106 8 ???????? ............... P.100 9 ???????? .................. P.74 10 ????? ................................ P.82 11 ???? ..................................... P.83 12 ??·???/????? ......................................................... P.71 13 ??????? ...................... P.88 14 ?? ............................................... P.86 15 ???????? .................. P.19 16 ????? ................................ P.38 17 AE ??? ................................ P.156 18 ??????? ...................... P.4119 ????????????????????? DIRECT ?????????? + / – / Fn1 / Fn2 ??? ADJ. ???(??)?????????? ???????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? + / – ???????????????? ???????????????????? + / – / Fn1 / Fn2 ??? ADJ. ???(??)????????? ???? ADJ. ???????????????????????? ??????+/–??????????????????ADJ.??? ??? MENU/OK ????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ???? DIRECT ??????????????????????? ????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • DISP. ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (GP.161)? • DIRECT ???????????? MENU/OK ????????? ????????????????(GP.67)? • ???????????????????Fn1 / Fn2 ?????? ADJ. ???(??)?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????(GP.61)? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????? ??????????? ??????????????????DIRECT ????????? + / – ???????????????????????????? ???????20 ????????????????????? ????????? ????????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN F 2.5 FF 22..55 200 200 25cm- 2255ccmm-- 1/50 1/50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 15 18 31 19 27 28 29 30 2626 3232 2020 25 24 22 23 21 37 38 ????? ?????? F 2.5 FF 22..55 1/50 1/50 200 200 34 33 35 36 1 ???????? .................. P.39 2 ?????????/ ????????????? ...............................................P.92?93 3 ??????/?? ...P.62?86 4 ???????? .................. P.16 5 ?????? ........................ P.203 6 ??? .......................................... P.27 7 ???????????? .... P.80 8 ??·??? ........................... P.71 9 ????????/???? ? ???? .....................P.74?80 10 ???????????/ ?????????? .........................................P.100?104 11 ????? ................................ P.82 12 ???? ..................................... P.83 13 ??????? ........................ P.88 14 ???????? .................. P.52 15 ?????????? ........ P.95 16 ????????? ............. P.94 17 ????? ............................. P.109 18 ?????? ........................... P.98 19 ????? ................................ P.22 20 AE ??? ................................ P.155 21 ??????? ...................... P.41 22 ????? ................................ P.38 23 ?????? ........................ P.167 24 ?????????? ........ P.37 25 ????? ................................ P.37 26 ???????? .................. P.9721 ????????????????????? 27 ?????????? ........ P.61 28 ??? ..................... P.56?58?60 29 ????????? .................................... P.56?59?60 30 ???? ..................................... P.99 31 ISO ?? ................................... P.106 32 ????????? ...P.42?167 33 ??????? ...................... P.35 34 ???????? .....P.35?109 35 ????? ................................ P.75 36 ??????? ...................... P.75 37 ???? ........................P.73?203 38 ?????? ........................... P.64 ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? • ???????????????????????(?????? ??????????)??????????????????? ?????? • ??????? 1 ?????????9999????????? • DIRECT ?????????????????????(GP. 1 8)? ????????? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4:3 N 44::33 NN 2010/0101 00:20 22001100//00110011 0000::2200 F 2.5 FF 22..55 ISO 200 IISSOO 220000 1/50 1/50 EV+0.7 EEVV++00..77 ?????? 2010/01/01 22001100//0011//0011 00:20 0000::2200 16 15 17 18 ????? 1 ?????? ...............................- 2 ??????? ..........................- 3 ?????? ...............................- 4 ?????? ...............................- 5 ????? ............................. P.127 6 DPOF ........................................ P.131 7 ??? .......................................... P.45 8 ??·??? ........................... P.71 9 ?????? ..............P.31?173 10 ??? ..................... P.56?58?60 11 ISO ?? ................................... P.106 12 ???? ..................................... P.99 13 ????????? .................................... P.56?59?60 14 ????? ................................ P.22 15 ??????????? .......- 16 ??????? ..........................- 17 ??????????? ...................................................... P.100 18 ?????????? ..... P.10422 ????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????????????? ????????????????? ?? • DISP. ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????????(GP.52)? ????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????????????? ????? ?? ?? ??????????????? ?? ????????????????????????? ???? ????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- AC ????????????? ??????????????? ?????????????????????????? 4:3 N 4:3 N 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 2.5 200??? ??????????? ????????? ????? ................................... 24 ???? ....................................... 32 ???? ....................................... 44 ???? ....................................... 49 DISP. ???? ?????????? .......... 5224 ???????????????????? ????? ???????????????????? ?????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????? 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????? • ????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??????? • ??????????????????(DB-90)??????? ??????? • ?????????????????(BJ-9)????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ?????????????????? 2 ??????????????????????????? ??????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? ????? ?? ?? ??? ?? ???? ?? ??????????????????????? ???????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ????25 ???????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????? 5 ???????????(25????)? ?????? ???????????????????????????????? DB-90?(??)??????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??????????????(DB-90)????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????? ?????? -------------------------------------------------------------- ??????(?????)?????????????????? ??????????CIPA ?????????????????(? ? 23???????????30 ???????2 ?? 1 ?????? ???10 ?????????????/???????)????? ???????????????????????????26 ???????????????????? ??????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????????????? 1 ???????OPEN???? ???????????/?? ???????? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????? • ??????????????? ?????????????? • ??????????????? ???????????? 3 ? ? ? ? ? / ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????? ???????????????????? ???????OPEN???????????????/?????? ???????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????/???????????????????????? ????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????? 1 2 1 2227 ???????????????????? ????????????? ???????(??)???????????????????? ??????????????????????? ???????????????? ----------------------------------- ????????? SD ??????????? SDHC ?????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????? ??????? ------------------------------------------------------------ ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????(GP.130)? 1 ? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN? ? ? ? ? ??????????/???? ?????? 2 SD ?????????????? ? ??? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? SD ?????????????? • ? ? ? ? ? - ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????????? 3 ?????/?????????? ? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN? ? ? ? ? ????????????? 1 2 1 2228 ???????????????????? ?????????????? ???????OPEN???????????????/?????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? ???????(??)???? ???????????????????????????????(? ?)???????????????????? 86MB ??? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????P.45 ?? ?????? • ???????????????????????????? ???????????????????? ------------------------- ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??LOCK? ???????????????????????? ??????????????????????LOCK? ?????????? ?LOCK????????????????????? ???????????????????????? ?????????LOCK??????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????(GP.203)? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????(GP.160)? • ??????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????(GP.160)?29 ???????????????????? ????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????? ????????????????????????? ????????????????? ????????????????? ????????????????? ???????? ?????????????? ???????????????? ???????????????? ???????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ????????? ?????/???? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ON ??????????? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?????/????????????? ????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????30 ???????????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? OFF ??????????? OFF ???????????????? ??????????????????? ??????????????0 ???? ??????????????????????????????? ???? ??????????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??6(? ? ) ? ? ??? 1 ?????????????? ???????????????? • 6????????????????? ? ? 6 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????? ?? ??? ?? ?? OFF P.86 ???????? 0 ? P.97 ??????? ??? ?? P.41 • ???????????(GP.66)?????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ????????????????? --------------------------------- • ??????????????????????????(????) ????????(????????)?????? • ????(GP.163)?????????(GP.163)????? ???????? Today31 ???????????????????? ??????? ????????????????????????????? 1 ?· ?· ?· ?· ?· ? ? ? ? ? ?? • + / - ? ? ? ? ? ? ??Fn1 / Fn2 ? ????????? • DISP. ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??? 2 ??????????MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??????????? 1 ?????????????????? ?????? • ???????????????????????????? 2 ? ????????????? • ?????????????(GP.173)? • ????????????(GP.98)?32 ???????????????????? ???? ?????????????????????? ???????? ???????????????????????? 1 ???????????????? ??????????? 2 ?????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ???????????33 ???????????????????? ???? 1 ????????????????? 5 ?? ??? 2 ?????????????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN • ????????????????? ???? • ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ??/??????????????? ??? • ?? 9 ??????????????? ????????????? 3 ???????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????????????? ????????/ ???????? ??34 ???????????????????? ???????????????? ----------------------------------- ??????????2 ???????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????? ?????????????????????? ?????????? ---------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ??/???????????????? ????????? ??? ????????/ ???????? ??????? ? ?? ???????? ? ??? ???????????? ?(??) ??? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????? • ???????????(????????????????) • ????????????? • ??????? • ???????? • ??????????????? • ??????????????? • ????????(?????????????? LED ??) ?????????????????????????????? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (????????GP.35)?35 ???????????????????? ???????? --------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????(???)????????????????? ???????????????????? • J???????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????? • ??????[AUTO]???[????]???(GP.39) • ISO ??????(GP.106) • ??????????(GP.41) • ??????????(GP.109) • ??????????????????????????????? • ??????????????????? • ???????????????(GP.37) ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??????????AE ??????????????????? • ?????????????????? ??????????? • ???????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????????(GP.164)? ??????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????(????????)? 1 ????????????????? 5 ?? ???36 ???????????????????? 2 ??????????????????????????? ????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN ????????????????????? 3 ???????????????????? ??????? ???????????? 4 ???????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ???????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????37 ???????????????????? ??????????? 8(??)?????????????????????????? ??9(??)???????????????????????? ????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??8 ? ? ? ? 9 ?????? 2 ???????????????? ???? 3 ????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ???????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????(8)????????????? ?? 8 ?????????????????????????? ?????????????????????9 ???????? ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?????? • [??·???]?[RAW]??????????(GP.71)?? ???????????????38 ???????????????????? ???????(?????) N(???)????????????????????????? ?????????????????? 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??N ? ? ? ? ? ? • ??????????? N ????? ????????? N ???????? 2 ??????????????? ????? 3 ????????????? • ????????????????? ? N ????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ?????????[?????](GP. 7 4)?[??? AF]/[??? ?]/[8]?????????????[???? AF]????? ???? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 39 ???????????????????? ????????????? OPEN/f(?????????/??)????????????? ?????????(??????)??????????????? ?????????? ????????????OPEN/f ??????????????? ?????????????????????[AUTO]??? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????? ???? ????????????? AUTO ????????????????????? ????????? ???? ???????????????????? ???? ?????????????? ??????? ????????????????????? ????????????????????? ?????????????????? ??????? ???????????????????[? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (GP.93)? 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN/f ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????? OPEN OPEN40 ???????????????????? 2 OPEN/f ?????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??? • ??????????????????/??????????? ??????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????????????????????????? • OPEN/f ?????????????????????????? ????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????????????????? • ??????????AE ??????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???????????????(GP.209)?????????? ??????????? • ?????????[???????]???????????? ???????? • ????????????????(?????)???????? ???????????????????????41 ???????????????????? ?????????? ?????????10 ???2 ?????????????????? ???????????? 2 ????????????[????] ????????????????????????????[?? ??]?????????????????????[???????] ??????????(GP.96) 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??t( ? ? ? ? ???)?????? • ????????????????? ?? • ?????????????????? ????????????????? ????????? • t ????????[10 ?]B[2 ?]B[????]B[??? ??]?????????????? 2 ????????????? • ???????????????????????? AF ???? ?????? • [????]???????????????????????? 2 ???????????????????????????????? 1 ????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ???????t ????[??? ??]???????? • [2 ?]???? AF ??????????? • [ ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? MENU/OK ???????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 42 ???????????????????? ????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????? 1 ?????????DISP. ???? ????? • ? 2 ?????????????? 2 +/-??????????? ???? ?? OFF ?????????????????? ???? ????????????????? ??+? ?????????????????????????? ????????????????? ??? ?????????????????????????? ???????????????????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ?????(GP.52)? • ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????? • ???????????????????(GP.167)????? ?????43 ???????????????????? • [???????](GP.165)?[ ](??)???? ??????[?????]?[??+?]???[???]??? ??????????????? ???????????? 4 3: N 4 3: N 4:3 N ???????????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN ??????????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN ????? ?? 4:3 N 44::33 NN ????????? ???? ?? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (GP.52)???????????????????[?????] ?[??+?]?????????????????????? • ?????????(??????????????????)? ?????????????????????????????? ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????44 ???????????????????? ???? ??????????????????????????????? ?????????? ?????????? ?????? 6(??)???????? ??????????????????? ??????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 ? ? ? ? ? 1 ? ? ??????????????????? ???????????????????? +/-/ Fn1 / Fn2 ?????????? ????????????????Fn1/ Fn2??????????? ???????????????? 2010 2010 2010 2010 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 FF 22..55 200 200 200 200 F 2.5 FF 22..55 2010 2010 200 200 F 2.5 FF 22..55 F 2.5 FF 22..55 200 200 F 2.5 FF 22..55 200 200 4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN 10 ???? 10 ???? 1 ???? 1 ???? ????????????????????6?????????45 ???????????????????? ????????????? -------------------------------------------- ???????????????????????? • ???????????????? • ?????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- [??·???]? RAW ??????????????(GP.71)? DNG????????????JPEG??????????????? JPEG ???????????????????????????? DNG ??????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- [??·???]? RAW ????????????????????? ??????? JPEG ?????????????????RAW ?? ??????????????? ??????????????? -------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????[??????] ????????????(GP.164)? ??????? ------------------------------------------------------------ ???????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????? ???????????? ---------------------------------------------- ???????????[????????]?[ON]?????? ???(GP.166)???????????????????????46 ???????????????????? ?????? ????? 20 ??81 ?????????????????? ??????????????????????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN 2010 2010 F 2.5 FF 22..55 200 200 4:3 N 44::33 NN 2010 2010 F 2.5 FF 22..55 ?????? Z(???????)?? ??????20 ??????????? 20 ? ? ? ? ? ? Z ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ?? 81 ??????????? 81 ? ? ? ? ? ? Z ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ?????????????? • 7 ????????????????? ??????????????? ? XX ??? ??????? 4:3 N 2010 2.547 ???????????????????? ???????? --------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ??? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ?????? 1 ?????????ADJ. ????????? ????????? • 20 ????? 81 ?????:DIRECT ??????????+ / – / Fn1 / Fn2 ?????? ADJ. ???(??)??????? ?????????????? • ????????:DIRECT ??????????+ / – ???? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? DIRECT ??????????Fn1 / Fn2 ????????? ADJ. ??????????????????????????? Fn2 ? ????? ADJ. ??????????????????????48 ???????????????????? ?????????? z(????)???????????????????????? ?????????????????????????ADJ. ???? ???[????????????](GP.166)???????? ?????????? ???????? z ???/ Z ??? ? ? ? 1 ? ? ? ? / ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? (GP.47)????????????????? MENU/OK ??? ?????????????? MENU/OK ?? ?????????????????[???? ????????]?????????????? [????????????]???????? ????????????1 ????????? ?????????? ??????????????????? ADJ. ??? ADJ. ??????????????????/ ???????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (GP.71)?????????? [??·???]??? ????(????) L?M?5M?3M 16 ? 1M 6.7 ? VGA 3.4 ? • ????????? ADJ. ????????????????M ? ?????????????????? • ???????????[???????????]?[?? 2] ??????(GP.158)??????? ADJ. ????????? ??????????????????????49 ???????????????????? ???? ??????????????????????????????? ???? 1 ????????? 1 6(??)?????? 2 Fn1 / Fn2 ??????????? ??????? 3 d(??)?????? 4 +/-????[1 ??????] ????? • Fn1 / Fn2 ???????????? ???????? 5 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????????????? 4 ??? ?????? ????????????? 1 6(??)??????? d ?????? 2 +/-????[???????]????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????Fn2 ? ? ? ?[ ? ? ] ? ? ? ??MENU/ OK ?????????50 ???????????????????? ??????????????? ??????????????????????????? 1 ??? ???????????????????????????????? ?????????????? d(??)???????????? ???????????? ??? DISP. ????????????????? ????????? 1 ????????? 1 +/-????[??????]? ??? MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ?????? 2 +/-????[1 ?????]? ??? MENU/OK ?????? 3 ???????????????? ???MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ????????????????? • ????????????????? ?????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? MENU/OK ?????????????? • ADJ. ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (GP.51)? 4 d ?????? 5 Fn1 / Fn2 ????[??]?? ???MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ?????????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 51 ???????????????????? ????????????? 1 +/-????[??????]???? MENU/OK ??? ??? • ??????????????????????? 2 +/-????[?????]???? MENU/OK ?????? 3 ???????????????? ???????????MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ????????????????? • ????????????????? ?????? • ????????????????????DISP. ???????? ?????????????? • ADJ. ? ? ? ? ? ? ??1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (GP.50)? 4 ??????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? MENU/ OK ?????? • ????????????????? ?????? 5 ?? 3 ? 4 ?????????????????????? ????? • ???????????????????ADJ.???????1?? ??????????????????????? MENU/OK ?? ??????? 6 d ?????? 7 Fn1 / Fn2 ????[??]?????MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????? 4:3 N 4:3 N 52 ???????????????????? DISP. ?????????????? O(DISP.)??????????????/???????????? ??????????????? ?????????/?????? ----------------------------------- ???????????????? VF/LCD ??????????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????????????? VF/LCD ?????????????? ????????? ?????????????????? VF/LCD ????????? ?????????????????????????? ?????? O(DISP.)???? 1 ???????????????????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN ????? ???? ???????? ????????? ????????? ------------------------------------------------------ • ?????????????????????????????? ??????? • ???????????????????[?????????? ?]?????(GP.168)?53 ???????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [?????]?[????]???[??+?]???????? ??(GP.167)??????????????????????? ????????????(GP.52)? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????? • ADJ. ????MENU/OK ????6(??)????????? • O(DISP.)??????????? • [+-?????]?[OFF]??(GP.157)?+/-???? ????? ?????? O(DISP.)???? 1 ???????????????????? ????? ????????????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 44::33 NN 2010 2010 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 FF 22..55 200 200 F 2.5 FF 22..55 200 200 2.5 2.5 200 200 ???? ??????? ??????? ------------------------------------------------------------ ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????-??????(GP.99)????????????? ?????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????????????????54 ???????????????????? ???????? --------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ??????????(??)??????????(???)??? ???????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????(GP. 9 9)?? ??????????? ???????? ???????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????(GP.121)? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ??????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ??? ??????????? ???????? 1 ??????? ....................... 56 2 ??????? .....................110 3 ????????? (????????) ............116 4 ?????????? ???? .................................137 5 ?????????? (??????).....................144 6 ???????????? ...175 7 ?? ..........................................1931 56 ??????? 1 ??????? ??????????????????? ????????? (P:???????????) ???????? P(???????????)????????? ????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????? 1 ???????? P ????? • ????????????????? ????? 2 ?????????????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????????????? 3 ?????????????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN 2.5 2.5 200 2001 57 ??????? 4 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ??????????????? ????????? • ????????????????? ????10 ???????????? ????????????????? ??? 5 ???????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 58 ??????? ???????????? (A:???????) ???????? A(???????)????????????? ???????????????????????????????? ????????????????? ???????????????????????? 1 ???????? A ????? • ????????????????? ????????????????? ?????? 2 ???????????????? ??????? 3 ?????????????? • ????????????????? ???????? 4 ???????????????? ???? ??????? ------------------------------------------------------------ ?????????(?????)???????????????? ???????????????????????(??????)?? ???????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ?????????[???????]?[ON]????(GP.108)? ?????????????????????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 59 ??????? ?????????????????? (S:??????????????) ???????? S(??????????????)??????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? 1 ???????? S ????? • ????????????????? ????????????????? ???????????? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ?????????????? 3 ?????????????? • ????????????????? ?? 4 ???????????????? ???? ????????????? -------------------------------------------- ???????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????(?? F ?)?????????? ??? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 2.5 22.5 2..55 200 2200 200001 60 ??????? ??????????????????? ???(M:??????????) ???????? M(??????????)?????????? ????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??? ADJ. ????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? 1 ???????? M ????? • ????????????????? ?????????????????? ????????????????? ??? 2 ???????????????? ???????????????? ??ADJ. ???????????? ?????? • ???????????[M ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ?(GP.158) ? ? ? ? ???????? ADJ. ??????? ?????????????????????????????? ???????????ADJ. ?????????????? • ??????????????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 4:3 N 44::33 NN 3.6 3.6 4:3 N 44::33 NN 3.6 3.61 61 ??????? • ????????+??????????? ???-???????????????? ?????????? • ???? –2EV ?? +2EV ?????????????????? ???????????? • ???? –2EV ?? +2EV ?????????????????? ?????????????????????? 3 ?????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ISO ? ? ?[AUTO] ? ? ?[AUTO-HI] ?????????ISO ??????????ISO ??????? ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????? • ???????????[M???????????]??????? ?????????????????????????????? ?(GP.159)? • ???????????[+-?????]?[????]??? ???????(GP.157)????????????+/-??? ?????????????????????????????(? ???????????????)??????????????? ??????????????????????????????? • ???????????[Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?????] ? Fn(???????)1 ??? Fn2 ????[AE ???]?? ????????????????? AE ?????????Fn1 ??? Fn2 ??????????????(?????????? ??????)??????????????????????? ??????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????? 2 ???????????????? –2EV –2EV +2EV1 62 ??????? ?????????????? (SCENE:??????) ???????? SCENE ??????????????????? ????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????????????? ?? ????????????(GP.64)? ?????? ????????????? ???? ?????????????????? ?? ???????????????????? ?? ????????????? ?????????????? ???????????????????????? ????????? • ????????[AUTO]??? • ???????????????????? • ?????????????????? ???? ????????????????????????? ????????????????????????? ???????(GP.65)? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????????????????????????P.69 ????? ?????1 63 ??????? ?-????????? 1 ???????? SCENE???? ? • ????????????????? ????????????????? ???????? 2 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????? 3 + / - / Fn1 / Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????? 4 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????????????? ????????????????????? ---------------------- ????????????????? ????????????????? ??????????? MENU/OK ? ? ? ? ? ??Fn1 ? ? ? ?[MODE] ???????????????-? ??? 1 ???????????2 ? ??????????????3??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ????????? P. 6 7?P.145?P.146 ?????????? [MODE]?? ?????? ?????????? ???????? [MODE]?? ?????? ?????????? ????????1 64 ??????? ??????? ??????????????????????1 ?? AVI ???? ?????????? 1 ??????????????????????????? ??????? • ??????? ???????????????????? ???? 2 ????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??????????????????????? • ????????????????????????(GP.203)? ?????????????????????????????? ?????????? • 1????????????????90??????4GB????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???????????????? • ??1?????????????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????? • ????????????????????????(GP.69)? • ????????????? AC ?????(???)????? ??????? • ?????????????????????? SD ?????? ?????????????????????????1 65 ??????? ???????????? 1 ??????????????????????????? ???? • ?????????????????????????? 5 ??? ?????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?? 2 ?????? Fn2 ???????? • ???????????????????????? • ??????????????+????????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- [????]?????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????? • ???????????????????????????? • ??????? • ???? 4 ?????????? • ??????????????? • ???????? • ?????????????????????????????? ? 2 ????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????(GP.125)?1 66 ??????? ???????????? (MY1 ~ MY3:???????????) ???????? MY1 ~ MY3 ????? ??????????????????? ??MY1?MY2?MY3 ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ????????[??????????] ??????(GP.147)? MY1?MY2?MY3 ??????[???? ??????]?[MY1]?[MY2]?[MY3] ????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????????? MY1 ~ MY3 ????????? ?????????????????????? ------------------- ?????????[???????](GP.108)???????? ??????????????????[??????????]?? ????????????[???????]????????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN [ ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??]?????? ???????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN [ ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??]?????? ????????1 67 ???????(????????) ???????????? ?????? MENU/OK ???????????????????? ???? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????????????????????????????? ????????? ????????????? ????????????? 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? MENU/OK ? ? ? ? ?? • ???????????????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??Fn1 ? ? ? ? [MODE] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? - ? ? ? ? 1 ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ??????????? 2 +/-????????????? ?? • ???????-????????? ? DIRECT ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? - ? ? ?????????????????? 3 Fn2 ?????? • ???????????????? 4 +/-???????????? ???????? ???????? ???1 68 ???????(????????) 5 MENU/OK ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? Fn1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????????? ???????? SCENE ????? ???? ????? ??? ??·??? L 4:3 N P.71 ????? ??? AF P.74 ???????????? 2.5m P.80 ????? ???? ON P.80 ??AF OFF P.81 ?? ??? P.82 ???? ?????? P.83 ?? OFF P.86 ???????? OFF P.88 ????????? 0.0 P.92 ????????????? 1/2 P.93 ??????????? ?? P.94 ????????? OFF P.94 ????????? ISO ?? ISO401 ?? P.95 ?????????? OFF P.95 ?????? OFF P.96 ??????? 2 ? ,5 ? P.96 ???????? ? P.97 ?????? OFF P.98 ????* 1 0.0 P.99 ???????? ??????? AUTO P.100 ?????????? A:0,G:0 P.104 ISO ?? AUTO P.106 ???????* 2 ? P.107 ???????* 3 OFF P.108 ??????? * 4 ? P.108 ????? * 5 ON P.1091 69 ???????(????????) ???????[??]??? ???? ????? ??? ????? VGA640 P.71 ????? ??? AF P.74 ???????????? 2.5m P.80 ??AF OFF P.81 ???????? AUTO P.100 ?????????? A:0,G:0 P.104 ???????[??????]/[????]/[??]? ?? ???? ????? ??? ??·??? L 4:3 N P.71 ????? ??? AF P.74 ???????????? 2.5m P.80 ????? ???? ON P.80 ?? AF OFF P.81 ????????? 0.0 P.92 ??????????? ?? P.94 ?????????? OFF P.95 ??????? 2 ? ,5 ? P.96 ?????? OFF P.98 ???? 0.0 P.99 ???????? ??????? AUTO P.100 ????? * 5 ON P.109 *1 ???????? M ???????????? *2 ???????? 5 ???????????? *3 ???????? A ???????????? *4 ???????? MY1 ~ MY3 ???????????? *5 ??????????????????????????????1 70 ???????(????????) ???????[??]??? ???? ????? ??? ??·??? L 4:3 N P.71 ?????????? OFF P.95 ??????? 2 ? ,5 ? P.96 ?????? OFF P.98 ???? 0.0 P.99 ???????? ??????? AUTO P.100 ????? * 5 ON P.109 ???????[????]??? ???? ????? ??? ??·??? 1M 4:3 F P.71 ????? ??? AF P.74 ???????????? 2.5m P.80 ????? ???? ON P.80 ??AF OFF P.81 ?? ??? P.82 ???? ?????? P.83 ????????? 0.0 P.92 ??????????? ?? P.94 ?????????? OFF P.95 ?????? OFF P.98 ???? 0.0 P.99 ???????? ??????? AUTO P.100 ISO ?? AUTO P.106 ????? * 5 ON P.109 ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ?????(GP.144)?1 71 ???????(????????) ?????/?????????? (??·???/?????) ????????(GP.67)?[??·???]???????? ??????????????????????[?????]?? ?????? ?????? ???? ?????? ??? ?????? RAW 16:9* 2?4:3? 3:2* 2?1:1* 3 FINE/ NORMAL/ VGA* 1 • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????·????? L 16:9* 2?4:3? 3:2* 2?1:1* 3 FINE/ NORMAL • ????????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? M 16:9* 2?4:3? ?????????? 3:2* 2?1:1* 3 FINE/ NORMAL 5M 4:3 FINE • ?????? 3M 4:3 FINE 1M* 4 4:3 FINE • ????????? VGA* 4 4:3 FINE • ????????? • ???????? • Web ???????? *1 ??????????? *2 ????????????????????????????? *3 ????????????????????????????? *4 ???????[????]?????????[1M]???[VGA] ???????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ? ? ? ? ? ??ADJ. ? ? ? ? ? ?· ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (P.153)? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?????1 72 ???????(????????) • ??????/?????????????????[??·???] ?????????? • ? ? ? ? ?( ? ? ? ) ? Normal ? ? ?(N)?Fine ? ? ?(F)? RAW ???? 3 ???????? Normal ??? ?????????????????????? ???? Fine ??? Normal ??????????????????? ??????????????????? RAW ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? RAW ? ? ? ? ? ? (.DNG ? ? ? ? ) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? JPEG ??????????????? DNG ???????????????????? ?????????·??????? Windows ???????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ????????Macintosh ?????? ?? DNG ?????????????????? ??????? RAW ???????? -------------------------------------------------- • JPEG ???????????????????????????? ?????????RAW ??????????????????? ?????????????????????????? • RAW ????????????????????????? • RAW ??????????????????????????? ??????????????? • [??????]????????DNG ??????????? ?????????? JPEG ??????????????? • ???????????[????]????????? JPEG ?? ???????????? • RAW ????[??]??????????????????? ????????????????????????????? ??? • ??????????????????? JPEG ???????1 73 ???????(????????) ????? ???? ????? VGA640 640 × 480 QVGA320 320 × 240 ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????? • ????????????(????????????????) ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????? • 1????????????????90??????4GB?????1 74 ???????(????????) ?????????????(?????) ????????(GP.67)?[?????]????????? ??????????? ??????????????????????????????? (AF)?????????????? ??????(?????)????????? 5 ???????? ???? ?? ??? AF* 9 ??? AF ???????????????????? ????????????????????????? ????? ???? AF* AF ????????????? 1 ?????????? ??????? MF(???? ??????) ??????????????????? ???? ????????????????????????? ?????[????????????](GP. 8 0)? ??????? 8(???) ????????????????????????? ?????????????? * ????? DIRECT ???????????? [MF][????] ? [8]????????? ? ?????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [Fn1?????]???[Fn2?????]?[AF/MF]????? (GP.155)??Fn(???????)1??? Fn2?????????? ??????????????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 75 ???????(????????) • [Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?????]?[AF/ ????]? ????(GP.155)??Fn1 ??? Fn2 ??????????? ???????????????? • MENU/OK ???????????? ????????????????? ???????????? MENU/OK ????????????????? ?????????? ????????????? -------------------------------------------- • [MF]?[????]?[8]?????????????????? ???????????????????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN 4.2 4.2 3030 ????? ??????? ????? ???? ??????????/ ??????? ?????????????? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ?????????????? ?? ??????????? ?????????????? ( ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?)????????????? ????????/ ??????????????/ ?????? ?????????????? • ???????????????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN 2.5 2.5 3030 4:3 N 44::33 NN 2.5 2.5 30301 76 ???????(????????) ??????? ------------------------------------------------------------ ??????????????????????????????? ????????????(??????)??????????? ???????????????(?????)????????? ???????????????(MF) ??????????????????????????????? ?????(MF:??????????)? ????????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????? • [Fn1?????]???[Fn2?????]?[AF/MF]????? (GP.155)??Fn(???????)1??? Fn2?????????? ??????????????????????? 1 ?????????[?????] ?[MF]????? • ???[MF]???????? • ?????????????????? ?????????????(GP.75) ???????? • ????????????????? ???????????????? 2 N ?????????????????????????? ??? • ????????????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????N ????????????? ?????????????????? 3 ???????????????? 4:3 N 44::33 NN 2.5 2.5 3030 4:3 N 44::33 NN 2.5 2.5 30301 77 ???????(????????) AE/AF ?????????????????????? ?? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????? AE ?????????????????? AF ????????????????????????????? ??? 1 ADJ. ?????? 2 ADJ. ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? P ????? • ???????????? 3 + / - ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ?? ?? AE/AF AE ????? AE?AF ????? AF ?????????? ?????????(???? AE ????? AF ????? ???????????)? AF AF ????? AF ?????????????????? ???????????[??](GP.82)??????? ?????? AE AE?????AE???????????????????? ????????????[?????](GP.74)??? ?????????? OFF AE/AF ????????????? ?????1 78 ???????(????????) 4 ??????????????? • ????????????????? ???????????????? • DISP. ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? 2 ? ? ? ?????? 5 MENU/OK ?????? 6 ?????????????? • [AE/AF]??????????????? AE ????? AF ?? ????????? • [AF]??????????????? AF ??????????? • [AE]??????????????? AE ??????????? ????????? 7 ????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • AF ????????????????????????????? ????????? • ????????????????? ADJ. ??????? U ?? ????????????????????(GP.79)?U ??? ???????P.79 ??? 3 ???????????? • Fn(???????)1 ??? Fn2 ?????????????? ??????(GP.79)???????????????ADJ. ??? ????? AF/AE ?????????????? • [?????]?[MF]?????????(GP.74)??AE/AF ?????????????????? • ??????????????????????????????? ????????????? • [AE]?[AF]?[AE/AF]???????? • [?????]?[MF]?????1 79 ???????(????????) ???????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??? AF ?????????????????????????? ?????????????? [????????]????????Fn(???????)1 ?? ? Fn2 ????[????????]??????????????? 1 ???????????[Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ? ????]?[????????]????? • ????? P.155 ?????????? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??Fn1 ? ? ? Fn2 ?????? • ????????????????? ??? 3 ??????????????? • ????????????????? ???????????????? 4 MENU/OK ?????? • DISP. ???????????????????????????? 5 ?????????????? • ??????????????????? 6 ????????????? • N(???)???????????????????????? ???? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ADJ. ???? AE/AF ?????????????(GP.77)??? ?????????Fn1 ??? Fn2 ??????????????? ????????????1 80 ???????(????????) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (????????????) ????????(GP.67)?[????????????]??? [?????](GP. 7 4)?[????]???????????? ?????????????????????? ???? 1m 1.5m 2m 2.5m 3m 3.5m 5m 8 ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- [?????]?[????]??????????[????? ??? ?]???????????N ????????????????? ????????????????????? ??????????????????? ?????????(????? ????) ????????[?????]?[??? AF]???[???? AF]?????????(GP.74)? ?????????????(? ????)?????????[OFF]?????????????? ??[????????????]??????????????? ???????? ???? ?? OFF ??? AF ?????????? ON ????????????[?????????? ??]?????????????????? ON ISO AUTO HI ????????????[?????????? ??]????????????????????? ISO ????[ISO ??]????????????? ????[AUTO-HI](GP.106)??????1 81 ???????(????????) ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????[MF]?[????]?[8]????????? ????????????? • ???????????? ????????????? • ????? ?????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [????? ????]?[ON]??????????????? ??????????????????????????? • N ????????????????????????????? ?????????? ??????????????????? ????????(??AF) ????????(GP.67)?[??AF]?[ON]???????[??? ? ? ] ?[ ? ? ? AF] ? ? ?[ ? ? ? ? AF] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (GP.74)?????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????[MF]?[????]?[8]??????AF ? ???????? • [??AF]?[ON]?????[OFF]???????????? ??????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??AF ???????????????????????????? ??????1 82 ???????(????????) ?????????(??) ????????(GP.67)?[??]???????????? ??????(??????????)???????? ??????????? 3 ???????? ???? ?? ??? * ??????? 256 ?????????????? ??????????? ?? ??????????????????????? ???????????????????????? ???? ??????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ??????????????????? * ????? DIRECT ???????????? [??]?[????]?????????? ????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 83 ???????(????????) ?????????(????) ????????(GP.67)?[????]?????????? ???????????????????????? ?????? 6 ?????????? ???? ?? ???? ?????????????????[??????] ???????????????????????? ?? ?????? * 1 ???????? ????? ?????????????????[??????] ???????????????????????? ???? ?? ????????[??????]?[??????]? ???? 9 ?????????? ?? (TE* 2 ) ???????????????[??]?[??]?[? ?????]?[??????]???????? [??]?[??????]?[??????]????? 9 ?????????? [??]?[???]?[???]?[????]?[???]? [????]???????? ?? 1 /?? 2 [??]?[??????]?[??????]?[???? ?]????????????????????? [??]?[??????]?[??????]????? 9 ?????????? [?????]??[??]?[??]??????? ?[????]?[????]?[??????]?[???]? [????]??????????????????? 9 ?????????? [??????]????????????????? ??????? *1 ????? DIRECT ???????????? *2 Toning effect ??1 84 ???????(????????) [??????]???????????? ????????????? ???????????????????????? [??]?[?? (TE)]?[?? 1]???[?? 2]????????? ?????????? ?????????????????????????? 1 ?????????[????]?????Fn2 ?????? 2 [??]?[?? ( TE)]?[?? 1]???[?? 2]????? Fn2 ?????? 3 +/-????????????Fn1 / Fn2 ??????? ??? ?? ?? (TE) ?? 1 /?? 2 • ?? (TE) ?[??]??Fn2 ?????????+/-????? ??????Fn1 ?????????? • ? ? 1 / ? ? 2 ?[ ? ? ? ? ? ] ? Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????+/-????????? ??Fn1/Fn2???????????? MENU/OK ?????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 85 ???????(????????) • ? ? 1 / ? ? 2 ?[ ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????????????+/-? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??MENU/OK ? ? ???????????????? 4 MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????????? 5 MENU/OK ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? Fn1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? MENU/OK ? ????? • ????????????????? ???? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????ADJ. ?????????????????(GP.153)? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 86 ???????(????????) ???????(??) ??????????????????????????????? ???(GP.67)?[??]??????? ????????2???????? ?? ??????????????????? ??????????????????? ?????1 ????????? ??????????????????? ??????????????(GP.44)? M ????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????? 1 ????1 ? ? MP ????????????(GP.111)?[M ?????(HI)] ?[M ?????(LO)]???????????? 1. ??????????????????…… 2. ??????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- [M ?????(HI)]?[M ?????(LO)]??????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????1 87 ???????(????????) ??????????????????? ???? ??????????????????? ???(GP.67)?[??]?[OFF]? ???? MENU/OK ????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • M ?????????????????????[??????? ??](GP.170)?[???????]???????????? ????????????? • ??/ M ??????????[????????](GP.100)? [??????? AUTO]?????????[AUTO]?????? • ??????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???????????????? • ?????????????????????? • ??????????????????????????????? ??????? • M ? ? ? ? ? ??1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????????????????????????????? ????? 1 ?? MP ?????????????? • [????? NO.]?[ON]?????????(GP.172)??? ???????????? 4 ???9999????????????? ???????????????????????? MP ???????? ---------------------------------------------------- MP ?????????????? 1 ????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 88 ???????(????????) ??/????????/??????? ????????(????????) ????????(GP.67)????????????????? ?????????????????????? 3 ???????? ?????? ????????????????? ???? ?? OFF* ??????????????? AE-BKT ???????? 3 ??????? WB-BKT ??????????????????????????? ??????????????????? 3 ??????? ?????? CL-BKT ??????? 2 ?????????????? (TE) ? 3 ??????????????? * ????? DIRECT ???????????? ??????????????? (AE-BKT:?????????) [AE-BKT]?????????????? 3????????????????? ?????????????????? ???????? 1 ?????????[????????]?????Fn2 ? ?? -0.3 0.0 -0.3 0.0 +0.31 89 ???????(????????) 2 [AE-BKT]?????Fn2 ??? • ??????????????? 3 Fn1 / Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? + / -?????????? 4 MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ???? 5 MENU/OK ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? Fn1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? MENU/OK ? ????? • ????????????????? ?????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????????????1 ???????????? • ???????????????????? • ???????????????? • [????????](GP.100)?[??????? AUTO]?? ???????????[AUTO]????????? ???????????????????? (WB-BKT:?????????????) [WB-BKT]????????????? ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ??????? 3 ?????????? ???? ?????????????????? ????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN ??? RED BLUE RED BLUE1 90 ???????(????????) ???????????????????? ??????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [??·???]? RAW ??????????????? • ???????????????????? • ???????????????? • [????]?[??]???[?? (TE)]??????????? ???????????????????? • ????????????????????????(GP.100)? ???????????(CL-BKT:????????) [CL-BKT]?????????????? 2 ???????????? ?? (TE) ? 3 ??????????????? ????????? ( TE) ????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?[CL-BKT ? ? (TE)](GP.169) ? ON ? ? ? ?? ? ? ???????[????](GP.83)? [?? (TE)]??????? ??? ?? ???? ???????????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ?[CL-BKT ? ? ( TE)] (GP.169)? OFF ????? ??? ?? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 91 ???????(????????) ??????? (TE) ??????? ---------------------------------- ?? (TE) ?????????????? ? ? ? ?[ ? ? ? ? ] ?[ ? ? (TE)] (GP.83)??????? ??????????????????? ??????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [??·???]? RAW ??????????????? • ???????????????????? • ???????????????? ?????????????????????????? ?????? -------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ???[????](GP.83)?????????????????? • ?????????????: [????]?[??]???????????? • ??????????? (TE) ??: [????]?[?? (TE)]???????????? • ??????????????: [????]?????????????????????????[? ???]?[??]???[?? (TE)]??????????[?? ??]?[??????]???????????? ??? ?? ???? [?? (TE)]??? ??? ?? ???? [?? (TE)]??? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 92 ???????(????????) ????????????? (?????????) ????????(GP.67)?[?????????]?????? ????????????????????? –2.0EV ~ +2.0EV ?? ??1/2 ??? 1/3EV ?????????? ?????????????????[??·????????]? ???????????(GP.162)? 1 ?????????[????? ????]?????Fn2 ??? ??? • ??????????????????? 2 +/-?????????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ??????[????]?????? ?????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????????????????????P.39 ?????? ???? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 93 ???????(????????) ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ???? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????(?????????????) ????????(GP.67)?[?????????????]??? ?????????[???????]???????(GP.39)?? ?????????????????? ??????????????????????? ???? FULL 1/1.4 1/2 1/2.8 1/4 1/5.6 1/8 1/11 1/16 1/22 1/32 1/64 ???????????????????? ?????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????[???????]?????[???????? ?????]???????????[?????????]??? ?????????? • [?????????????]???????????????? ????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????????????????(?????)?????????? ????????????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 94 ???????(????????) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (???????????) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?(GP.67) ?[? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ?? ??????????????????????? ???? ?? ?? ???????????????????????????? ??????????? ?? ???????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????????????????? ????????(?????????) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?(GP.67) ?[? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ?[ ? ] ???[?]????????????????????????? ?????? ??????????????????? ???????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ISO ? ? ??[????????? ISO ??]?? ?????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [??·???]? RAW ??????????????????? ??? JPEG ???????????????????????? ??????DNG ?????????????????????? ?????????? • [?????????]???????????????????? ?????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 95 ???????(????????) ?????????????? ISO ??? ????(????????? ISO ??) ????????(GP.67)?[????????? ISO ??]??? [?????????]?[?]???[?]?????????? ???????? ISO ?????????? ???? ??? ISO201 ?? ISO401 ?? ISO801 ?? ISO1601 ?? ISO3200 ??????????????? (??????????) ????????(GP. 6 7)?[??????????]?[ON] ??????????????????????????????? ??????? [??????????]???????? ?????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ???????????????[??????????]?[ON] ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ????????? • [??·???]? RAW ????????DNG ?????JPEG ?? ?????????????????????????? • M ????????????????????????????? ????????? • [??????????]?[ON]???????????????? • [????-?????]?[ON]?????????????? ???????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 96 ???????(????????) ????????????(??????) ????????(GP.67)?[??????]?[ON]???? ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????? ??????????????????? ??????????????? ??????????????????? ???(???????) ????????[????]????????????????? ???????? ????? 1 ~ 10 ??????? 5 ~ 10 ????????? 1 ?????????[???????]?????Fn2 ?? ???? 2 Fn1/Fn2??????????? +/-?????????? • +/-?????????????? ?????????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? 4 ???????????????? • ????????????????????? • ???????????MENU/OK ????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 97 ???????(????????) ???????????(????????) ????????(GP.67)?[????????]??????? ????????????????????? ??????5 ?~ 1 ?????? 5 ??????????? 1 ?????????[????????]?????Fn2 ? ????? 2 Fn1 / Fn2 ??????????? +/-?????????? • +/-?????????????? ???????????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ???[??????]???????? 4 ???????????????? • ?????????????????? 5 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??MENU/ OK ?????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????????????????? • ???????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 98 ???????(????????) ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????????? AC ?????(???)????? ??????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?[ ? ? ]?[M ? ? ? ? ? HI]???[M ????? LO]??????????????[OFF] ????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????? 0 ???????????? ???????????? ??????????(??????) ????????(GP.67)?[??????]??[??]?? ?[??]????????????????(?/?/?)??? ??(?/?/? ?:?)???????? ??????????????????? ????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??·??????????????[??????]??????? ???????·???????????(GP.31?173)? • ?????????????? • RAW ???????????DNG ?????????????? ??DNG ???????????? JPEG ??????????? ?? • ????????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 99 ???????(????????) ??????(????) ????????(GP.67)?[????]???+/-???? ??????????????????????????????? ????????? ????+???????????-??????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????????? ??????? ????????????????????(??? ???)??????????+???????? ???????? ???? ????????(??????)???+???? ???? ???????? ???? ?????????(??????)???-??? ????? ??????????????????????-? ??????? 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?[ ? ? ? ? ] ?????Fn2 ?????? 2 +/-?????????? • - 4.0EV ~ +4.0EV ? ? ??1/2 ? ? ? 1/3EV ?????????? • ????????????????? ????????????1 100 ???????(????????) 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ?? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ?????????????????[??·????????]? ???????????(GP.162)? ??????????(????????) ????????(GP. 6 7)?[????????]??? ADJ. ??? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????? ?????????????????[??????? AUTO]?? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 101 ???????(????????) ???????????? 8 ????? ???? ?? ???* ?????????? ??????? AUTO ??/??????????????????????? ????????????????????????? ?????????????????? ?? ??(??)???????????? ?? ??????????????????? ??? ????????????????? ??? ????????????????? ???? ?????????(GP.102)? ???? ???-??-?????????? 16 ?????? ????????(GP.103)? * ????? DIRECT ???????????? 1 ?????????[????????]?????Fn2 ? ????? 2 +/-????[M]?[CT]??????? • ?????????????????????????????1 102 ???????(????????) 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????ADJ. ????????????????????? (GP.153)? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? • ???????????[AUTO]??????????????? ??????????[AUTO]???????????????? • ?????????????[??????? AUTO]?????? ???????[AUTO]???????? ???????????????(????) 1 ??????????? ADJ. ?????????????? [M]????? 2 ???????????????? ??????????? 3 DISP. ?????? • ????????????????? ???????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 103 ???????(????????) 4 MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ????? • ????????????????? ? 1 ~ 3 ????????????? ???????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????????????????? 1 ?[M]????????? ???????????????(????) 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ADJ. ? ?????????????[CT] ?????DISP. ?????? • ????????????????? ?????? 2 +/-?????????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? 4 MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 104 ???????(????????) ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????????????????? 1 ?[CT]????????? ???????????????? (??????????) ????????(GP.67)?[??????????]???? ?????????????? [????????](GP.100)????????????????? ????(???????????????????????)?? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????? 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?[ ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ?? Fn2 ?????? • ???????????????????????? 2 ??????????????? ??????????????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ???????????????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ???????????????? • ???????????????? ??DISP. ????????? • ???????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? DISP. ????????? • ???????????????? ????????????? ??? ???? ??? ???? ???? ??? ???? ??? ????1 105 ???????(????????) 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???????????[ADJ. ??? ??1/2/3/4(]GP.153)?[WB ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??ADJ. ??????[WB ??]????? MENU/OK ???????????? ????????????????? ? ? ? ? ?[ ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ? MENU/OK ???????????? ????????? • [Fn1 ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ?[Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ](GP.155) ?[WB ??]???????????Fn(???????)1 ??? Fn2 ???????????????????????????? • ?????????[??]???????????? • ??????[??????????](GP.124)??????? ????? ?????????????????? ????????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 1 106 ???????(????????) ?????????(ISO ??) ????????(GP.67)?[ ISO ??]??? ADJ. ????? ISO ?????????? ????????????????? ???? ?? AUTO* 1 ??/???/???/??·????????? ???????????????? AUTO-HI (????????) ??????????????????????? ??[AUTO]?????????????????? [AUTO-HI]? ISO ?????????????? ? ? ? ?[ISO AUTO-HI ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ? ? (GP.162) ISO(??)* 2 ???? ISO ????????? *1 ????????????????????? ISO ???????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????? *2 ????? ISO ????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ISO ?????? --------------------------------------------------------- ISO ???????????????????????????ISO ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- •[AUTO]???[AUTO-HI]????????????????? ? ISO ???????????????? ISO ????????? ?????(??????????)? • ISO ????????????????????????1 107 ???????(????????) 1 ?????????[ISO ??]?????Fn2 ????? ? 2 +/-??????????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????ADJ. ???? ISO ???????????(GP.153)? ???????????????? (???????) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (GP.67)?[???????]??????? 1 ???????? 5 ????? MENU/OK ?????? 2 ?????????[????? ??]?????Fn2 ????? ? • ???????????????? 3 [??]???????????? ????MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????P.68 ??????????1 108 ???????(????????) ??????????????????? (???????) A(????)???(GP.58)?????????????(GP.67) ?[???????]?[ON]????????????????? ????????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????? A ?????????????[???????] ????????? ??????????????????? ?????(???????) ????????(GP.67)?[???? ???]?????????????? (GP.66)????????????? ?????????????????? ????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????? MY1 ~ MY3 ?????????????[???? ???]????????????[??????????]???? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? MY1 ~ MY3 ?????????[???????]?????????1 109 ???????(????????) ?????????????? (?????) ????????(GP.67)?[?????]? ON ??????? ?????????????? ????????????????E??????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???????????????????????????? • ??????????????????????????? 1 ?? ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????? ? ???????????? ???????????? 1 ???????? ?E?F??? ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? 3[??]?????E????????? • ?????(??????????????)????????? ???????????? • ??????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????????????J???????????2 110 ??????? 2 ??????? ??????? ?????????????????????? 1 6(??)?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??? • ??????????? 1 ????????????????? 2 ?????????? • 3 ???????????????? ??????? 3 ADJ. ?????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ????????????????? ?????????? ??? ???? z ????????? ???? ???? Z ????????? ????/?? ADJ. ?????? ????? ?????? z ????????? ????? ?????? Z ????????? ????????? ?????? z ?????? ????????? ?????? Z ?????? ??????? ???/??????+/-?????? 2010 22010 2001100 2010 22010 20011002 111 ??????? MP ??????? M ????????1 ???????????1 ?? MP ????? ????????MP ????????????????????? ??? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????????????????????????????? 1 6(??)?????? 2 ????? MP ???????? ? • S ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? MP ??????? 3 ?????????????? z ADJ. ??? Z 2 0 1 0 / 0 3 / 0 1 1 4 : 0 9 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.0 1 / 5 5 ?? 2 ????? • DISP. ??????????????????? ??????????? • z(????)?????????????? ????????????????? • ????????????????????? ??? 2 0 1 0 / 0 3 / 0 1 1 4 : 0 9 F 3 . 3 6 / 6 1 5 5 z ADJ. ??? Z ???? • MP ???????????????? • ????????????????? • DISP. ????????? 2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.0 1/55 2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.02 112 ??????? ADJ. ??? 100-0001 110000--00000011 2010/01/01 22001100//0011//0011 02:33 0022::3333 ISO 200 IISSOO 220000 EV +1.0 EEVV ++11..00 F 3.3 FF 33..33 1/55 1/55 ????? • ???????????????1 ????? ??? • z ??????????????????? ??? ????? ??? 2010/01/01 22001100//0011//0011 02:33 0022::3333 ISO 200 IISSOO 220000 EV +1.0 EEVV ++11..00 F 3.3 FF 33..33 1/55 1/55 100-0001 110000--00000011 ??????? • ????????????????????? ??????????????? • ?????????????????????? ????/?? ADJ. ?????? ??? ???? z ????????? ???? ???? Z ????????? ????? ?????? z ????????? ????? ?????? Z ????????? ????????? ?????? z ?????? ????????? ?????? Z ?????? ????????? ?????? ADJ. ????????? ????????? ?????? ADJ. ????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • MP ???????[DPOF]?[?????]?[???????]?[? ???](?????)?[?????]?[??????????]? ??????????? • MP ??????????[??????[??]]?[?????] ????????????????????? 1 ?????[?? ????[??]]?[?????]?????????????? MP ???????????? • MP ??????1??????????????????2 113 ??????? MP ????????? M ?????????? MP ?????????????????? ????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????????????? • ?????????????????? 1 6(??)?????? 2 ?????? MP ??????? ?? • S?????????????? MP ??????? • ???????????????z ? ????????????????? 3 ??????????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????? 4 +/-????[??????? ?]????Fn2 ?????? 2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.0 1/55 2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.02 114 ??????? 1 ????? 5 +/-????[1 ??]??? • Fn1 / Fn2 ???????????? ?? 6 MENU/OK ?????? ?????????????? 5 +/-????[????]???? MENU/OK ?????? • P.113 ??? 2 ?????????? ?????? 5 ????????? 6 + / - ? ? ? ?[1 ? ? ? ? ? ] ????MENU/OK ?????? 7 ???????MENU/OK ?????? • ADJ. ??????????????????????????P.115 ??? 7 ???????????? 8 ?? 7 ????????????????? • ???????????????????? MENU/OK ????? ??????????? 9 N ?????? 10[??]????MENU/OK ??????2 115 ??????? ?????????????? 5 +/-????[????]???? MENU/OK ?????? • P.113 ??? 2 ?????????? ?????? 5 ????????? 6 +/-????[?????]? ???MENU/OK ?????? 7 ???????????????????MENU/OK ??? ??? • ????????????????????DISP. ???????? ??????????????? • ADJ. ????????1 ??????????????????? ??P.114 ??? 7 ???????????? 8 ??????????????? ????MENU/OK ?????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??DISP. ? ???????????????? 9 ?? 7?8 ??????????? ?????? 10N ?????? 11[??]????MENU/OK ?????? ???????? 5 +/-????[???]???? MENU/OK ?????? 6 [??]????MENU/OK ??? ??? ?????u?G ?????u?G   ?? ?? ?????u?G ?????u?G   ?? ??3 116 ?????????(????????) 3 ?????????(????????) ???????????? ?????? MENU/OK ???????????????????? ???? ????????????? 1 6(??)???????????????? 2 MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????? 3 +/-????????????? ?? • ???????-????????? ? DIRECT ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? - ? ? ?????????????????? 4 Fn2 ?????? • ???????????????? ?????????? ???? ??? ??????[??] P.117 ??????[??] P.119 ??????? P.119 ????? P.120 ????? P.121 ?????????? P.124 ???? P.125 ???? ??? ??????? P.127 ????? P.127 ??????????? ???? P.130 DPOF P.131 ???????? P.113 ?????? P.134 ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????????????????????????????? ????(GP.144)?3 117 ?????????(????????) ??????????????? (??????[??]) ??????????????[??????[??]]????? ????[??????[??]]????????????????[? ?????[??]]???20 ?????????????????? 1??????????/???? 1 ????????????????????????MENU/ OK ?????? • ???????????????? 2 [??????[??]]?????Fn2 ?????? 3 [??]???[??]????? 4 MENU/OK ?????? • ??????????????? ?? ????????? ???????????????? ????????????3 118 ?????????(????????) ?????????????/???? 1 ?????? Z ?????? 2 ??????????1???????????MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????? 3 [??????[??]]?????Fn2 ?????? • ????? ? ????? ??????????? 4 ??????????????? ?????MENU/OK ??? 5 ? ? 4 ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ???????????????? ? • ?????????????????????? MENU/OK ??? ??????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [??????[??]]??????????????????? ???????[??????[??]]??????????? • ?????????? SD ??????????????????? ??[??????[??]]??????????? • SD ??????????????[??????[??]]??? ????SD ?????????[CLIPINFO]??????? CLIP. CLI ???????????????????????[????? ?[??]]?????????????? • ????????????????????????[?????? [??]]??????????????? • [??????[??]]??????????????????? ???????? ???????? ???????? ????   ?? ??+? ???????? ???????? ????   4:3 N ?? ??+? 4:3 N 3 119 ?????????(????????) [??????[??]]???????? ??(??????[??]) ?????????[??????[??]]???????[????? ?[??]]???????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [??????[??]]??????????????????? ?????????????????? • ???????????????? 6 ???????????? ??????? • [??????[??]]????????????????????? ????????????????????? • [??????[??]]?????????????????N ? ?????????????????????????? • ???????????????????+/-/ Fn1 / Fn2 ?? ???????/????????????????? ??????????(???????) ????????(GP.116)?[???????]??????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????? [??·???]??? ???????? L?M?5M?3M 1M?VGA 1M VGA ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????????????? • RAW ?????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • 16:9 ??? 3:2 ??????????????????????? 4:3 ???????????????? • 1:1 ??????????????????????? 4:3 ???? ???????????? • ?????????????????(GP.71)?3 120 ?????????(????????) ???????????(?????) ??????????????????????????????? ????? 1 ??????????????????????MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????? 2 [?????]?????Fn2 ?? ???? • [?????]?????????? • ?????????????????? DISP. ????????? 3 z / Z ??????????????????????? • t ????????????????????????????? 4 ??????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???? 5 MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???????????????????????????? • ???M ????????????????????????? • RAW ???(GP.71)???????????????? JPEG ?? ?????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????3 121 ?????????(????????) ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??????????????????? Fine ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????z ???????????????? 1 ???????? ??? 13 ??????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?(??????????)?????????? ????????????????? (?????) ????????(GP.116)?[?????]????????? ?????????????[AUTO]???[MANUAL]???? ????????[MANUAL]?????????(GP.54)??? ????????????? ??????? 1 ????????????????????????MENU/ OK ?????? • ???????????????? 2 [?????]?????Fn2 ?? ????3 122 ?????????(????????) 3 [AUTO] ? ? ? ??Fn2 ? ? ? ? ?? • ????????????????? ???? • ????????????????? ????????????????? ?????????????? • ??????????????????DISP. ????????? 4 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????? ??????? 1 ????????????????????????MENU/ OK ?????? • ???????????????? 2 [?????]?[MANUAL]?????Fn2 ?????? • ????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????? • ??????????????????DISP. ????????? 3 ADJ. ????????????? ???????????? • ????????????????? ???????(??)??????? ???(???)????????? ????????ADJ. ???????? ? ?? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????? • ????? N ????????????????????????? ?? N ?????????????????? 4 Fn1 / Fn2 ??????????????????????? • ??????????????????????????????? ???? ????3 123 ?????????(????????) 5 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????? ????? ----------------------------------------------------------------- ? 1)??????????????????: • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????????????? • ??????????????????? ??????????? ? 2)?????????????????? ????????: • ??????????????????? ??????????????????? ????? • ??????????????????? ??????????????????? ????? • ??????????????????? ?????????????????? ? 3)?????????????????? ??: • ??????????????????? ??????????????????? ??????????????????? ??????????????????? ??? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???????????????????????????? • ???M ????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????? ?????????3 124 ?????????(????????) ????????????? (??????????) ????????(GP.116)?[??????????]???? ?????????(????(G)?????(M)????(B)? ????(A))???????????? 1 ??????????????????????????? ??MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????? 2 [??????????]????? Fn2 ?????? • ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ????????????????? 3 ??????????????? ??????????????? ? • ????????????????? ??????????????? • ????????????????? ??????????????? • ??????????????????DISP. ????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??? DISP. ????????? • ????? N ????????????????????????? ?? N ?????????????????? 4 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????????3 125 ?????????(????????) ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ??? • ???M ????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????????????? ??????????????? (????) ????????(GP.116)?[????]?????????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????????? 1 ???????????????????????MENU/ OK ?????? • ???????????????? 2 [????]?????Fn2 ??? ??? • ????????????????? ??????????? 5 ????? ????????????? • ????????????????? ??????????????? • ????????????????Fn2 ???????????? ?????????????? • ??????????????+????????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????????3 126 ?????????(????????) ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??????????????????????????? • ???M ???????????????????????? • RAW ???(GP.71)???????????????? JPEG ?? ????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????(GP.119)???????? ????? • ???????????????????????????????? ????????????????????? ??? ???? L ? 24 ? M ? 18 ? 5M ? 12 ? 3M ? 8 ? 1M ? 5 ? VGA ? 2 ? • ???????????[????]????????????? ??????????(GP.65)?3 127 ?????????(????????) ??????????(???????) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?( ? ? ? ? ???)????? ?????????[???????]? Fn2 ????????????????? ????? ??????????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???? 3 ????????? • ???1???????????????????????????? ?????????????(?????) ????????(GP.116)?[?????]?????????? ???????????(?????)????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ??? 1 ???????????? 1 ??????????????????????MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????? 2 [?????]?????Fn2 ?? ????3 128 ?????????(????????) 3 [1 ????]????????? ? ? ? ? ? ??MENU/OK ? ? ? ??? • Fn1 / Fn2 ???????????? ???????? • ????????????????? ???????? • ????????????????? 1 ????????????????? ?????????????????? ????????????? ?????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????? ????????? 1 ?????????[?????]?????Fn2 ?????? 2 [????]?????MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ???????????? 3 [1 ?????]?????MENU/ OK ?????? 4 ?????????????? MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???? • ?????????????????????????? • ??????????????????????? MENU/OK ?? ????????? • ADJ. ?????????????????????????(GP.129)? 2010 2010 2.5 2.5 200 200 4:3 N 44::33 NN 2010 2010 2.5 2.5 200 200 4:3 N 44::33 NN 3 129 ?????????(????????) 5 N ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????? ????????? 1 ?????????[?????]?????Fn2 ????? ? 2 [????]?????MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????????????????? 3 [?????]?????MENU/OK ?????? 4 ??????????????? ???? MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ????????????????? • ?????????????DISP. ?? ??????????????? • ADJ. ??????????????? ??????????(GP.128)? 5 ??????????????? ???? MENU/OK ?????? • ?? 4 ? 5 ???????????? ??????? • ????????????????? ????????????????? ?? 6 N ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????? 4:3 N 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 3 130 ?????????(????????) ??????????????/???? ??????????????????????????????? ??? 1 ?????????[?????] ?????Fn2 ?????? 2 [???????]???[??? ????]????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????????????? ???????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????? (???????????????) ????????(GP.116)?[???????????????] ?????????????????????????????? ??????? 1 ????????????? • ???????????????????P.27 ????????3 131 ?????????(????????) 2 ?????????[?????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?] ? ? ? ?? Fn2 ?????? • ?????????????????? ????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ???[??]????????????????[???]?? ??? MENU/OK ???????????? • ??????????????????????????? ????????????? ( DPOF:?????) ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????????(GP.116)?[DPOF]??????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- RAW????????????JPEG???????DPOF??????? DPOF ?? ----------------------------------------------------------------- DPOF(Digital Print Order Format)???????????????? ???????????????????????????????? ??????????? DPOF???????????????? ?????????? DPOF ??/???? 1 ????????????????????MENU/OK ?? ???? • ????????????????3 132 ?????????(????????) 2 [DPOF]?????Fn2 ???? ?? 3 [1 ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ?? MENU/OK ?????? • Fn1 / Fn2 ???????????? ???? • DPOF ????????? DPOF ?? ??????????????DPOF ????????????????? ????? ???????? DPOF ??/???? ??????????? DPOF ????????????????? ??? 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?[DPOF] ? ????Fn2 ?????? 2 [???????]???[??? ????]?????3 133 ?????????(????????) 3 MENU/OK ?????? • DPOF ????????? DPOF ???????????????? DPOF ?????????????????????? ??????? DPOF ???? ??????????????? DPOF ????????????? ??????? 1 ??????????????MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????? 2 [DPOF]?????Fn2 ???? ?? 3 Fn1 / Fn2 ???? DPOF ??????????????+ /-????????????? • DPOF ????????? DPOF ???????????????? • DPOF ??????????????????? 4 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???????? DPOF ??????????????????? ?????????????[0]????? MENU/OK ???? ????? • ??????? DPOF ??????????????(GP.132)?3 134 ?????????(????????) ????????????? (??????) ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????????? • ????? • ?????????????????? • DPOF???????????????????????????? ??????????????????? • DPOF ????????????? • ????????? SD ????????????? • [??????[??]]??????????? • [????????]? MP ????????? 1 ?????????[????? ?]????Fn2 ??? • ????????????????? • ????????????????? ?????????????? 2 [??]????MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????????3 135 ?????????(????????) ????????? ??? AV ?????????????????????????? ???????????????? 1 ????????????AV?? ??????????? • AV ????????????????? ?(??)????????????? ??(??)??????????? 2 ?????????????????????? 3 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? AV ? ? ? ? ? AV ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? 4 ????????????????????(???????? ??????) • ????????????????????? 5 ??????? ON ?????? ??????6(??)???? ? 1 ????????????? ???????? ??????(??) ??????(??)3 136 ?????????(????????) ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????????????????????????(? ????)????????????????? • AV ???????????????????? • AV ????????????????????????????? • AV ??????????AV ????????????????? ???????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???? DVD ?????????????? AV ???????? ????????????? DVD ????????????? • ???? HDMI ??????(???)?????HDMI ???? ?????????????????????????????? ??????? • HDMI ???????????/?????????1 ????? ??????????????????? • HDMI ??????????????????????????? ?????????????? • ?????????????????NTSC ??(??????? ???????)?????????????????PAL??(?? ???????????????)?????PAL ??????? ???????(GP.173)?????????????????? ??????4 137 ?????????????? 4 ?????????????? ??????????????? ?????????????????????? USB ??????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??(.AVI)?????????? • RAW ??????????????????? JPEG ?????? ??????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??????????????????????? PictBridge(? ??????)????????? • ??????????????????????? PictBridge ?? ?????????????????????????????? ?????4 138 ?????????????? ?????????????? ?????????????????? USB ??????????? 1 ?????????????????????? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? USB ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??????? ADJ. ?????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ???????????? • ????????????????? [????...]?????????? 2 ???? ADJ. ????????? ??????????????2 ?? ??????[PC ??? ...]??? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????1???????????? • ???????????????? ???????? • [???···]??????????? ????????????????? ?? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • USB ???????????????????? • USB ????????????????????????????? • USB ??????????USB ???????????????? ????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- USB ????????????????????????????? ??????????????????4 139 ?????????????? ???????? PictBridge ??????????????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ??????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????USB ??????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????[????????]????????????????? ??????????????????????????? 1 ???????????????? 1 ????????????????? Fn1 / Fn2 ????? ??????????????? 2 ADJ. ????????????? ?????[1 ????]???[? ????]????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ?????4 140 ?????????????? 4 ???????Fn2 ?????? ??????? • ????????????????? ????????????????? ????????????????? ??[???????]??????? ??????????(???)?? ?????? ???? ?? ????? ????????????? ???? ???????????? ????? 1????????????????1???????? ?????????????????????????? ???? ??(???)????????????????? ???????????????????????? ?????????????(GP.98)???????? ??????????? OFF ??????????? ??????? ?????????????????? ???? ?????(???)?????????????? ??????????? ??????? ????????????????? ???? ??????????? ????* ?????????(GP.143)? ???? ??????????? ??????* ????????????????????????? ??/??* ???????????????[??]??????? ???????????????????????? ??????? 1 ???????P. 1 4 1 ??? 3 ??? ????????????1 ?????????? * ????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????? ????(http://www.ricoh.co.jp/office/)???????? 5 ?????????MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????????? • ?? 4 ? 5 ???????????????????????4 141 ?????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ? ? 4 ? ? ? ? ADJ. ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ??[??]??????MENU/OK ? ???????????[???]?? ??????????????????? ?????????????? 6 MENU/OK ?????? • ??????????????[??? ...]?????????? • ?????????????DISP. ???????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????? ??????????? 1 ??????????????? Z(???????)?? ???????????? 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? MENU/OK ?????? 3 ?????????????????? • Fn1 / Fn2 ????????????????+/-?????? ????????? • ???????? ???????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 4 142 ?????????????? 4 MENU/OK ?????? • ????????????????? ????? 5 ???????Fn2 ????????????? • ?????????????P.140 ???????? 6 ?????????MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????????? • ?? 5 ? 6 ??????????????????????? 7 MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????????????????? ????????????? • ??????????????[??? ...]?????????? • ?????????????DISP. ???????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????4 143 ?????????????? ?????? ???????????????[????]?????????? [????]??[?????]?[A4]?????PictBridge ??? ?????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????(http:// www.ricoh.co.jp/office/)???????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ??????????? 1 ?????? 2 ?????? 3 ?????? 4 ?????? 1 ?????? 2 ?????? 3 ?????? 4 ?????? ???? 1 ???? 1 ???? 1 ~ 10 ?????? 1 ?????? 2 ?????? ???? 15 144 ??????????(??????) 5 ??????????(??????) ?????????? ????????(GP.67)?????????(GP.116)?? ??????????????????????????????? ???? ??????????????????????????????? ???????? ????????? 1 ?????????????? MENU/OK ?????? • ??????????????????????????? • ??????????[MODE]?????????? 2 Fn1 ????????????? ???? • ????????????? 3 +/-???????????? • ????????????????? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ?????????????????? 4 Fn2 ??????????????? 5 +/-??????????????? • ???????-?????????? DIRECT ???????? ?-???????????????????? 6 Fn2 ?????? • ???????????????? 7 +/-???????????? ?????????? ????????5 145 ??????????(??????) 8 MENU/OK ?????????? Fn1 ??????? MENU/OK ? ????? • ??????????????? • ????????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ?? ?? MENU/OK ??????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ????????????????? ?????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????? ???????????????? ???? ????? ??? ?????????? - P.147 ???????????? - P.149 ?????????? - P.150 Fn ??? MY ?? OFF P.152 ??????????? MY ?? OFF P.152 ADJ. ????? 1 ???????? P.153 ADJ. ????? 2 ISO P.153 ADJ. ????? 3 ?? P.153 ADJ. ????? 4 ???? P.153 ADJ?????????? OFF P.154 Fn1????? AF/MF P.155 Fn2????? ??????? P.155 +-????? ???? P.157 ????? ?????? ?? 1 P.158 M ??? ?????? ?? 1 P.158 M ??????????? ???? P.1595 146 ??????????(??????) ?????????????? ???? ????? ??? ???[???] - P.160 ???[??????] - P.160 ?????????? - P.161 DIRECT ????? ?? P.161 ??·???????? 1/3EV P.162 ISO AUTO-HI ?? AUTO 400 P.162 AF ??? ON P.162 ???? 5 ? P.163 ???????? 5 ? P.163 ??????? LCD P.164 ???????? ON P.164 ?????? 0.5? P.164 ??? ??? P.165 ??????? ?[( )] P.165 ???????????? 9.8 ? P.166 ???????? ON P.166 ???????? ?? P.167 ????? ???? P.167 ??????????? P.168 Fn ??????? ON P.168 ???????????? OFF P.169 ?????????? OFF P.169 CL-BKT ?? (TE) ON P.169 ????? sRGB P.170 ????????? ?? P.170 ???????????? OFF P.171 ????? NO. ON P.172 ???? - P.173 Language /??* ??? P.173 ?????* NTSC P.173 HDMI ?? AUTO P.174 ????????? ??? P.174 * ?????????????????????5 147 ??????????(??????) ???????????? (??????????) ??????????(GP.145)?[??????????]??? ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????????? ?????????[???????? BOX]? 6????????? ??????[MY1]?[MY2]?[MY3]?????????(GP.149)? ????????????? 1 ????????????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????????? ????? • ?????(5/P/A/S/M/SCENE)• A / M ???????? • S / M ???????????? • MF ????????? • ????????????? • ???????? • ?????? • DISP. ??? • ??????? ??????????/???????????(GP.145?146) • Fn1?????/ Fn2????? * • +-????? • ISO AUTO-HI ?? • ??·???????? • ???????? • ????? • ??????????? • ?????????? • CL-BKT ?? (TE) • ????????? * [Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?????]??[Fn ??? MY ??](GP.152)?[ON]???????????????? ?????????? ????????(GP.67) [????????]?[???????]?[???????]??? ??????????????[??????????]??[?? ????????? MY ??](GP.152)?[ON]??????? ????????????????5 148 ??????????(??????) 2 ???????????[???? ??????]????? Fn2 ? ????? 3 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??MENU/ OK ?????? • [MY1]?[MY2]?[MY3]????? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???????? • ???????? BOX ?????? ?[???????? BOX]??? ? ? Fn2 ? ? ?? ? ?[1] ~[6] ???????????????? ?? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??? ? ? _Set???????????? • ???????????????? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???[??]?????????? ???????????????[? ??]?????????? _Set?? ?????????? • ?????????DISP. ????? ??????? • ???????????????????????????????5 149 ??????????(??????) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? BOX ????????? (????????????) ??????????(GP.145)?[????????????] ???????????[MY1]~[MY3]???????????? ??????????? BOX ????????????? 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? Fn2 ?????? 2 ???????? BOX ????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??MENU/OK ?????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????????????? ????????? • ?????????DISP. ?????? ?????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- MY1 ~ MY3 ????????? BOX ?????????????? ???? BOX ????????(GP.150)? MY1 ~ MY3 ??? ????????????5 150 ??????????(??????) ????????????? (??????????) ??????????(GP.145)?[??????????]??? MY1 ~ MY3 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? BOX ???????????????????????? 1 ??????????????? ???Fn2 ?????? • [MY1]?[MY2]?[MY3]?????? ?????????????? • ???????? BOX ?????? ???????????????[? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? BOX] ? ? ? ? ? Fn2 ? ? ?? ? ?[1] ~[6] ? ? ?????? 2 ????????????Fn2 ? ????? • +/-????????????? • ????????????????? ???????????? • [??????????]??????? ??????????????????(GP.151)? 3 Fn1 ??????????? • ??????????????? 2 ? 3 ???????? 4 MENU/OK ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????5 151 ??????????(??????) ???????????????? ----------------------------------- ??????????????[??????????]??????? ???????????????????? 1 ?????????????[? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ?? Fn2 ?????? • [??????????]?????? ????????????????? ????????????? • ????????????????? ????????????????? ????????????????????????????? 3 ????????? 2 ?????????????????????????Fn1 / Fn2 ?????? • ??????????????????????????????? ?????????? 3 -????????????????????? 4 +/-/ Fn1 / Fn2 ?????? ? ? ? ??MENU/OK ? ? ? ? ? ??? • ????????????????? ??????????? • ????????????????? ????????????????? ?????[??]?????? • t ????????????????????????????? ?????? • ??????????? 16 ????? 32 ??????? • ????????????????DISP. ???????????? ??????? ??????? ???????5 152 ??????????(??????) 5 ADJ. ?????? • ?????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- MY1 ~ MY3 ????????? BOX ?????????????? ???? BOX ????????? MY1 ~ MY3 ????????? ?????? MY1 ~ MY3 ????????????????????? BOX ?? ???????????????????????????? BOX ? ?????????MY1 ~ MY3 ???????????????? ????????? Fn ???????? ?????????(Fn ??? MY ??) ??????????(GP.145)?[ Fn ??? MY ??]?[ON] ??????????????????????????????? ?????(GP.155)????????????????? ??????????????????? ?????????????? (??????????? MY ??) ??????????(GP.145)?[??????????? MY ??]?[ON]??????????????????????? ??????????(GP.104)??????????5 153 ??????????(??????) ADJ. ??????????? (ADJ. ?????) ??????????(GP.145)?[ADJ. ????? 1]~[ADJ. ????? 4]? ADJ. ????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????? ?????????????? ???? ??? OFF - ???? P. 9 9 ???????? ?????[ADJ. ????? 1]??? P.100 WB ?? P.104 ISO ?????[ADJ. ????? 2]??? P.106 ?? ?????[ADJ. ????? 3]??? P. 7 1 ????? P. 7 4 ???? ?????[ADJ. ????? 4]??? P. 8 3 ?? P. 8 2 ?? P. 8 6 ???????? P. 8 8 ???? P. 9 2 ??????? P. 3 9 ?????? ??????????????????????????????? ????? ?????? ???? ?? ???????? ???? ?????????????5 154 ??????????(??????) ??????????? 1 ?????? ADJ. ?????? • ADJ. ???????????? 2 ADJ. ????????????Fn1 / Fn2 ??????? ????????? • ???????[ADJ. ????? 1]~[ADJ. ????? 4]?[? ???????]?[ISO]?[??]?[????]????????? ??? ADJ. ????? 1 ADJ. ????? 2 ADJ. ????? 4 ADJ. ????? 3 3 +/-?????????? 4 ADJ. ?????? MENU/OK ??????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ADJ. ?????????????????????????? ADJ. ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????(ADJ ??????????) ??????????(GP.145)?[ ADJ. ??????????] ?[ON]?????????????????????? ADJ. ?? ????????????5 155 ??????????(??????) ?????????????????? (Fn1 ?????/ Fn2 ?????) Fn(???????)1 ??? Fn2 ?????????????Fn1 ??? Fn2 ??????????????????????????? ???????? Fn1 ??? Fn2 ???????????????????????? (GP.145)?[ Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?????]?????? ????? Fn1 ????[AF/MF]?Fn2 ??? ?[???????]?????????? ????Fn1 ??? Fn2 ????????????????????? ???????????????[Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ? ????]??????????Fn1 ??? Fn2 ????????? ?????? ???? 5? M? S? A? P ?????? ??? ?? ????? ? ?? ? ? ?? ?? ???? AF/MF ? ? ? P.156 AF/ ???? ? ? ? ? ? ? P.156 AE ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? P.156 JPEG ? RAW ? ? ? ? ? P.156 ?????? ? ? P.156 ???? TE ? ? P.156 ???? ? ? ? ? ? ? P.99 ???????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? P.100 WB ?? ? ? P.104 ISO ? ? P.1065 156 ??????????(??????) ???? 5? M? S? A? P ?????? ??? ?? ????? ? ?? ? ? ?? ?? ???? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? P.71 ????? ? ? ? ? ? ? P.74 ???? ? ? P.83 ?? ? ? P.82 ?? ? P.86 ???????? ? P.88 ???????? ? ? ? P.79 ???? ? ? ? ? ? P.92 ??????? ? P.39 ??????????????????? ???? ?? AF/MF* 1 [?????](GP.74)???????????? AF ??????? AF?MF ?????????????? ??????? AF ? MF???????? AF ? MF ? ????????? AF/ ???? [?????](GP.74)???????????? AF ??????? AF?????????????????? ???????? AF ????????????? AF ? ?????????????? AE ???* 2 ?????(AE ???)??????AE ?????? ??????????????AEL??????????? ?????????????? JPEG ? RAW* 3 [??·???](GP.71)? RAW ????????? ?????????? RAW ?????????? ?????? [????](GP.83)?[??]?????????? ???[??]?????????? ???? TE [????](GP.83)?[?? (TE)]???????? ?????[?? (TE)]??????????5 157 ??????????(??????) *1 ????????????????????(GP.35)?????? MF??????????????MF??????????????? ??????????????????? *2 ???????????? AE ???????????Fn1 ??? Fn2 ??????????????(????????????????) ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????? *3 RAW ????????????????[??·???]????? ?????????????? [??·???]??? Fn1 ??? Fn2 ??? L(16:9)?M(16:9)?5M?3M? 1M?VGA RAW(16:9) L(4:3)?M(4:3) RAW(4:3) L(3:2)?M(3:2) RAW(3:2) L(1:1)?M(1:1) RAW(1:1) ???????????????????????? [????]~[???????]???????????????? ??????????????????????????????? +/-??????????? (+-?????) ??????????(GP.145)?[+-?????]??????? ???+/-??????????????????? ???? ?? OFF ? ????????? P.92 ??????? P.93 ???? P.995 158 ??????????(??????) ADJ. ???/????????????? ??????(????? ??????/ M ??? ??????) ??????????(GP.145)?[????? ??????]? ????????? ADJ. ??????????????????? ?????? ???? ADJ. ??? ?????????? ?? 1 ???????? ??????? ?? 2 ???????? ???????? [ M??? ??????]??????????????? ADJ.??? ?????????????????????? ???? ADJ. ??? ?????????? ?? 1 ??????????? ???? ?? 2 ???? ???????????5 159 ??????????(??????) ??????????????????? ?????????????????? (M ???????????) ??????????(GP.145)?[ M ???????????] ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????????? M ????????????????????????????? • [+-?????](GP.157)?+/-????[????]?? ? • [Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?????](GP.155)? Fn(?? ?????)1 ??? Fn2 ????[AE ???]??? ???? ?? ???? +/-?????? Fn1 ??? Fn2 ????????? ????????????????????????? ????????? ??????? +/- ? ? ? ? ? ? Fn1 ? ? ? Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ????????????????????????? ?????????? ????? +/-?????? Fn1 ? ? ? Fn2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ?????????????????????????? ???? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- [+-?????]?+/-????[????]???????[Fn1 ?????]???[Fn2 ?????]? Fn1 ??? Fn2 ????[AE ???]????????????????????? M ????? ???????????????????5 160 ??????????(??????) ???????/???????????? (???[???]/???[??????]) ??????????? ???????????????(GP.146)?[???[???]] ???????????????????????? • ????????????????? • ????????????????????????????? • [????????????]??????????????????? ?????????? [?????????????????]????????????? ??????????????(GP.146)?[???[??????]] ?????????????????? ???????/??????????????????????? ???????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?????(GP.175)??????????????????? • ?????????????????[???[???]]???? ???????????????????????????????? ?????????????????? ????????????????????????? ----------- • ????????????????LOCK???????????? ???????????????(GP.28)? • ?LOCK????????????????????????5 161 ??????????(??????) ??????????????? (??????????) ????????(GP.146)?[??????????]???? ????????????????? 1 +/-???????????? • ????????????????? ????????????????? ????? 2 ??????????????MENU/OK ?????? • ???????????????? 3 MENU/OK ?????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????[??????????]????????????? ?????????????????[??????????]?? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? DIRECT ?????????? (DIRECT ?????) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?(GP.146) ?[DIRECT ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ?? DIRECT ???????????????????? ???? ?? ?? ?? ?? OFF5 162 ??????????(??????) ??????????????????? ?(??·????????) ????????(GP.146)?[??·????????]??? ???????????????????????????? ???? 1/2EV 1/3EV ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????????????????[??·????????] ?[1/2EV]????????[1/3EV]?????????? ISO AUTO-HI ??????? (ISO AUTO-HI ??) ????????(GP.146)?[ ISO AUTO-HI ??]?????? ??????[ISO ??]?????[AUTO-HI](????????) (GP.106)? ISO ????????????? ???? AUTO 200 AUTO 400 AUTO 800 AUTO1600 AUTO3200 ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ISO ???????????????????????? AF ??????????(AF ???) ????????(GP.146)?[ AF ???]?[ON]??????? ????????????????????????? AF ???? ????AF ????????5 163 ??????????(??????) ???????????(????) ????????(GP.146)?[????]?????????? ???????????????????????????????? ????????/????????????????????? ????????????????????? ???? OFF 1 ? 5 ? 30 ? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????? • ??????????????????????????/?? ????????????????? • ??????? OFF ??????6(??)???????? ??(GP.30) • ?????????????????????????????? ???? ??????????????? (????????) ????????(GP.146)?[????????]?????? ?????????(????????)?????????? ???? OFF 1 ? 5 ? 30 ? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????5 164 ??????????(??????) ????????????? (???????) ??????????(GP.146)?[???????]????? ?????????(VF-2)?????????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ?????????????????????[???????]? ???????????????????????????? ???? ?? LCD ?????????????????? VF ??????????????????????? ???????????????? ??????????(????????) ????????(GP.146)?[????????]?[ON]? ??????????????????????????? 5 ??? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????? ??????????(??????) ????????(GP.146)?[??????]???????? ??????????????????????? ???? OFF 0.5 ? 1 ? 2 ? 3 ? HOLD ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- [HOLD]??????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????(GP.48)? ?????(GP.49)?????5 165 ??????????(??????) ??????????(???) ????????(GP.146)?[???]??????????? ?????? ???????????????? 5 ????? ??? ???????????????? ?????? ???????????????????? ?????? ????? ??????????????????????????? ????????????? ??? ?????????????????????????? ????????? ???? [?????]?[??+?]???[???]????? ????(GP.42)????????????????? ???????????????????? ???? ?? ??? ??????????? ???? ????????? ?????? ???????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????????????????[???]???????? ?????????? ??????????(???????) ????????(GP.146)?[???????]??????? ?????????? ???? (??) (???) (???) (???)5 166 ??????????(??????) ??????????????????? ??(????????????) ????????(GP.146)?[????????????]??? ?????? ADJ. ?????????????(GP.48)???? ?????? MENU/OK ???????????????(GP.48) ????????????? ???? 5.7 ? 9.8 ? 16 ? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ??????(GP.48)? • ?????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????? ?????????????? (????????) ????????(GP.146)?[????????]?????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????? [ON]???????????????????????????? ??????????5 167 ??????????(??????) ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???????[????????]?[ON]????????? ????????????? • ????????????????????? • ?? • M ???????????? • ???????(GP.46) • ??????????????????????? • ??????????????????????? • ?????????????????? • ????????????????(GP.125) • ????????????????[????????]?[ON] ?????????????????????????????? ??????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????????????????1 ??????????? ??????????? ?????????????????? (????????) ????????(GP.146)?[????????]?[??]? ??????????????????????????????? ????????? ?????????????(?????) ????????(GP.146)?[?????]????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????P.42 ?????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ???????????????????????????? • [???????]?[ ](??)??????????[? ????]?[??+?]???[???]?????????? ????????5 168 ??????????(??????) ??????????? (???????????) ????????(GP.146)?[???????????]??? ??????????????????????????????? ?? P.52 ?????????? ???? ?? ??? 3 ??????3 ??????????? ?????? ??? 4 ?????????????????? ?????????????????????? ???????? ??? 2 ?????????????????? ?????????????????????? ???????????????????? Fn ??????????? (Fn ???????) ????????(GP.146)?[ Fn ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ?[ON] ? ? ? ? ? ?? ?????????????????? ?? 2 ???????? ????? ?????????????????? ?????????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 5 169 ??????????(??????) ???????????????????? ???????(????????????) ????????(GP.146)?[???? ????????]?[ON]??????? ? ? ? ? ? ? MY1 ~ MY3 ? ? ? ? ? ? ??????????????????? ??????????????????? ??????????????? (??????????) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?(GP.146) ?[? ? ????????]?[ON]??????? ??????????????(GP.52) ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ??????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????????????????????????? CL-BKT ????????????? (CL-BKT ?? (TE)) [ ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ?[CL-BKT] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (GP.88)?????????? ( TE) ? 3 ???????????? 2 ??????????????? ????????(GP.146)?[ CL-BKT ?? ( TE)]?????/ ???/?? (TE) ? 3 ?????????????/???? 2 ? ?????????????????????? 2010 2010 4:3 N 44::33 NN 2010 2010 4:3 N 44::33 NN 4:3 N 5 170 ??????????(??????) ???? ?? ON ?????????[????????]?[CL-BKT]??? ??????/???/?? ( TE) ? 3 ??????????? OFF ?????????[????????]?[CL-BKT]??? ??????/???? 2 ??????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- [CL-BKT ?? (TE)]?[OFF]????????????????[? ???]?[?? (TE)]?????????????/???/?? (TE) ? 3 ??????????? ????????(?????) ????????(GP.146)?[?????]????????? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? sRGB ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? AdobeRGB ????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??????? AdobeRGB ??????????????????? Photoshop ????????????????????????? ???????????????? • AdobeRGB ????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ??sRGB ???????????????????AdobeRGB ? ????????????·????????????????? ??????? • AdobeRGB ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? AdobeRGB ????????????????????????? ?????????????????? ????????????? (?????????) ????????(GP.146)?[?????????]?[??? ????]????? 8 / 9 ????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????(????)?????????5 171 ??????????(??????) ????????????[??·???]?[L]? 4:3 ????? ????(GP.71)?????????? ???? ?? ?? ????????????? ??????? ???????????????????? ?????????8 ???????? ??1 ??????????????? ?????????????????? ????????? ?????????????? ----------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • M ?????????????[????]?????[???? ???]??????????????????????????? • [??·???]? RAW ???????????????? ???????????? (????????????) ????????(GP.146)?[????????????]?[ON] ??????????????????????????????? ????? 4:3 N 444:3 N 44::::3333 NNNN 5 172 ??????????(??????) ????????????(????? NO.) ???????????????????????????????? ???????????????? ????????(GP.146)?[????? NO.]????????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????? ???? ?? ON(?????) ?????????????R????? 7 ??? ???(R0010001.jpg ~ R9999999.jpg)???? ???????? ??????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ???? OFF(??????)? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? RIMG0001.jpg ~ RIMG9999.jpg ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????? RIMG9999 ??????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??????????????????[????? NO.]?[OFF] ??????????????????? • [?????]?[AdobeRGB]?????????(GP.170)?? ??????????_?(??????)?????? • DL-10 ?????????????(GP.184)????????? ??????????????[????? NO.]?[ON]??? ?????????????RIMG****.jpg?(**** ???)??? ????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [????? NO.]?[OFF]?????RIMG9999 ??????? ????????????????????????????? • [????? NO.]?[ON]???????????? 999 ??? ????R9999999???????????????? 999????? R***9999 ?????????????????????5 173 ??????????(??????) ??·???????(????) ????????(GP.146)?[????]?????·???? ?????????????? P.31 ?????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ??????????? 1 ??????????????·??? ???????????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? 2 ?????????????? ????????(Language /??) ????????(GP.146)?[ Language /??]?????? ??????????????????? ???? ??? English(??) ?????????????(?????) ????????(GP.146)?[?????]?????? AV ?? ??????????????????????????????? ?(GP.135)??????????????? ???? ?? NTSC ?????????????? PAL ????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- SECAM ?????????????5 174 ??????????(??????) HDMI ??????????? (HDMI ??) ????????(GP.146)?[HDMI ??]???HDMI ???? ?????????????????????????? ???? AUTO MANUAL ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????[AUTO]??????????[AUTO]????????? ???????????????????[MANUAL]?????? ?????????????????????? ??????????????????? ????(?????????) ??????????????????????????????? ???????? ????????(GP.146)?[?????????]????? ????????????????????????????? ???? ??? ???????6 175 ???????????? 6 ???????????? ???????????????? OS ?????????? Windows ??????? Macintosh ???????? P.188 ???????? ?????????????????? 2 ??????????? 1 DL-10 ???????????????????????? ????(GP.184) • DL-10 ??????????? CD-ROM ???????????? ??????????????(GP.179)? 2 DL-10 ???????????????????????? ????(GP.185) ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????????????????????CD-ROM ???? ??????????(???????)????????????? ????(???????)????????????P.178 ???? ??????6 176 ???????????? ??? CD-ROM ??????????? ??? CD-ROM ??????????????????? ????????????????????????????? ?? OS Windows 2000 Professional Service Pack 4(?? ??) Windows XP Home Edition Service Pack 3(?? ??)/Professional Service Pack 3(????) Windows Vista Service Pack 2(????) CPU W i n d o w s 2 0 0 0 / W i n d o w s X P:Pe n t i um ® ? 500MHz ?? Windows Vista:Pentium® ? 1GHz ?? ???? Windows 2000/Windows XP:256MB ?? Windows Vista:512MB ?? ?????????? ?????????? 160MB ?? ?????????? 1024 × 768 ????? ?????????? 65000 ??? CD-ROM ???? ?????????????? CD-ROM ???? USB ??? ?????????????? USB ??? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • 64 ??????????????? • OS ????????????????????? USB ????? ???????????????????????? • OS ???????????????????????????? ?????????????????? • ????(PCI ????)????????? USB ??????? ??????????? • HUB ????? USB ???????????????????? ??????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????????????6 177 ???????????? CD-ROM ??? ??? CD-ROM ??????????? ?????????????????? ????? ??? ?? ??? ?????????? ??? ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ??????????? P.178 ?????(????? ??)??? ??????(???????)?(PDF) ???????? P.178 CD-ROM ?????? ??? CD-ROM ??????????? ????? P.178 RICOH ??????? ??????????????????* - RICOH ??????? ??????? ?????????????????? ????????* - ?????·?? ?????????????????? ??????* - * ?????????????????????6 178 ???????????? ?????????????(GP.179) ????????????????????? ??????? ?? DL-10 ?????????????????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ?????????·??·??????? USB ????? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? Windows 98/Windows 98SE/ Windows Me/Windows 2000 ?????????? ??????????????? WIA ????? ????????? Windows XP/Windows Vista ? ???????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Irodio Photo & Video Studio ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??Irodio Photo & Video Studio ?????????????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ?????????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?(http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/irodio/j/irodio_ digitalphoto_videostudio/)?????????? ?????(???????)??? CD-ROM ????????(???????)?(PDF ????)? ?????? ? ? ? ? ? ? Acrobat Reader ? ? ? Adobe Reader ? ? ? ? ?? Acrobat Reader ??? Adobe Reader ????????????? ????Adobe Reader ?????????????(GP.181)? CD-ROM ?????? CD-ROM ??????????????????? CD-ROM ???[?????????????]????????? ?????????????????Adobe Reader ??????? ?????????????P.181 ?????????? ?Irodio Photo & Video Studio? ? ? ? ? ? ? Irodio Photo &Video Studio.exe ????????????Irodio Photo & VideoStudio ? ?????????????6 179 ???????????? ????????????????????????? ???????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????? USB ??????????????????? ???????? • DC Software ?????????????? Caplio Software ?? ?????????????????????? Caplio Software DC Software RICOH Gate La DL-10 Caplio Viewer DU-10* Caplio Server SR-10* Caplio Setting ST-10* * ???????????? ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ???????? Caplio Viewer?Caplio Server?Caplio Setting ????????? ?????????????????????????????? ??????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? DU-10?SR-10?ST-10 ????????????(??????? ???GP.183)? • ????????????????????????RICOH Gate La ??? DL-10 ?[???????]?????????????? ????? • ???????????????????????????????? • DL-10 ??????????????????????????? ????????????6 180 ???????????? ???? Windows XP ????????????? 1 ? ? ? ? ? CD-ROM ? ? ? ? ? ??? CD-ROM ?????? Windows Vista ??? OS ??? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????????????? Windows Vista ??? • ?????????????? • [Autorun.exe ???]???????????????????? ???????????????????? 2 [?????????????]??????? Windows Vista ??? OS ??? • [???????]?????????? Windows Vista ??? • ???????????????????????? • ???????????????[??]??????????[? ??????]?????????? 3 ???????[OK]??????? • [DC Software ?? InstallShield Wizard ?????]?????? ???? 4 [??]??????? • [??????????]????? ????? 5 ????????????[??] ??????? • [????????????]??? ???????6 181 ???????????? 6 ??????????????[??]??????? • ? ? ? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ????????????????? ????????????????? ????????????????? ????????????????? ????? • ????????????????? ????????????????? ????? 7 [??]??????? 8 ???????????????????[???????? ????????????]??????[??]????? ?? • ???????????? • ?????Windows?????????????????????? 9 DL-10 ?[?????????]?????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ???????????????????????(??????? ?)????(GP.183)? Adobe Reader ????????? Adobe Reader ????????(???????)???????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????? USB ??????????????????? ???????? • ????????????????????????????????6 182 ???????????? 1 ? ? ? ? ? CD-ROM ? ? ? ? ? ??? CD-ROM ?????? Windows Vista ??? OS ??? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????????????? Windows Vista ??? • ?????????????? • [Autorun.exe ???]???????????????????? ???????????????????? 2 [CD-ROM ??????]??????? • CD-ROM ???????????????? 3 [Adobe Reader] ? ? ? ? >[Japanese] ? ? ? ? > [AdbeRdr910_ja_JP](AdbeRdr910_ja_JP.exe) ? ? ? ? ?????? • Windows Vista ??????????????????????? ?????????[??]?????????? 4 ???????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Adobe Reader ??????Adobe Reader ?????????? ???? • Adobe Reader 9.1 ??????????????Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0?6.0(Service Pack 1)???? 7.0?8.0?Firefox 2.0 ? ?? 3.0 ??????Microsoft Update ????????? • Adobe Reader 9.1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??MSI(Microsoft Windows Installer)3.1 ????????Microsoft Update ??? ??????6 183 ???????????? ?????????(????????)?? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ???? • ?????????????????????????????? DC Software 1 ??????[????]???????[??]-[????? ????](Windows XP?Windows Vista ????[?? ???????])????? 2 [??????????????]????(Windows XP ??? ?[???????????]????)?????????? 3 [DC Software]?????[?????]??????? 4 ?????????????????[OK]??????? • [?????????]????????????? 5 [??]??????? • ???????????????????????????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio 1 ??????[????]???????[??]-[????? ????](Windows XP?Windows Vista ????[?? ???????])????? 2 [??????????????]????(Windows XP ??? ?[???????????]????)?????????? 3 [Irodio Photo & Video Studio]?????[?????]? ?????? 4 ?????????????????[OK]??????? • ???????????????????????????? 5 ??????????6 184 ???????????? DL-10 ??????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????? 1 ?????????????????????? 2 ??? USB ?????????? USB ???????? 3 USB ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? USB ? ?????? • ??????????????? • DL-10 ??????????????? ???????? • DL-10 ?[????????]???? ???????[Digital Camera]?????????????? ????????????????????[Digital Camera]?? ??????????(Caplio Software ???????????? ???[Caplio]????????????)?????????? ????????????????????? 4 ??????????????????????????? ?(GP.187) ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ????????????????????????????? • DL-10 ???????[??]?????????? • ?????????? 1 ~ 4 ?????????? • DL-10 ?[???????]??????????[USB ???? ???????]???????????????????6 185 ???????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • USB ???????????????????? • USB ????????????????????????????? • USB ??????????USB ???????????????? ????????? DL-10 ????????????? ????????????????????????????????? 1 ?????????????????????? 2 ??? USB ?????????? USB ???????? 3 USB ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? USB ? ?????? • ??????????????? • ????????[????????]? ?????????????? 4 ?????????????? ?????????????? • ??????????????? ?????????? • ??????????????? ??????????????? ??????????????? ??????????????? ??? • ??????????????? ????????????[RICOHDCI]?????? Windows XP ????? Windows XP ?????6 186 ???????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????? USB ?????????? ???????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??? • ?????????????????????????????? ????·??·?????????????????????? ??????????????·??·???????????? ?????????????????6 187 ???????????? ???????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ???(??? Windows XP ??????? OS ????????? ???????????????)? 1 ??????????????? ??????????????? ???????? 2 [USB ??????????? - ????(E:)* ????? ?????]??????????? * ??????????????????????????? 3 USB ????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????? USB ??????????????????? ????????????????????????????? USB ??????????????? • ??????? USB ????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????6 188 ???????????? Macintosh ??????? Windows ???????? P.175 ???????? ???????? OS ????????? • Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.5.7 ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Macintosh ???VM-1 ?????????????(???????)? (????? Acrobat ????????????????)???? ?????????VM-1 ?????????????????P.191 ?????????? ???????????? 1 ?????????????????????? 2 ??? USB ?????????? USB ???????? 3 USB ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? USB ? ?????? • ??????????????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????????6 189 ???????????? 4 ?????????????? ?????????????? • ??????????????? ??????????? • ??????????????? ??????????????? ??????????????? ??????????????? ??? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? [RICOHDCI]?????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • USB ???????????????????? • USB ????????????????????????????? • USB ??????????USB ???????????????? ?????????6 190 ???????????? ???????????????? 1 ???????????????????????????? ?????????????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????? 2 USB ????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [????]?????[????]???????????????? • ????????? USB ??????????????????? ????????????????????????????? USB ??????????????? • ??????? USB ????????????????????? ????????????????????????????? • Macintosh ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?FINDER.DAT? ?.DS_Store? ???????????????????????? ????[?????????????]???????????? ????????????????????????? MP ??????????? M ????????1 ?????????? 1 ?? MP ?????? ??????? MP ???????? VM-1 ?????MP ????? Macintosh ? ??????????????????????????????? ???????? CD-ROM ?? VM-1 ????????????? ??????????????????????????MP ??? ??????????????? MP ?????????????? MP ????????????????????????CD-ROM ? ?????????????(???????)???????????6 191 ???????????? ????? MP ?????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?? OS Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.5.7 Macintosh ?? Apple ?? Macintosh ???? ?????? Mac OS X 10.4 256MB ?? Mac OS X 10.5 512MB ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??? 5MB ?? CD-ROM ???? ?? Macintosh ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? CD-ROM ? ? ?? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- VM-1 ?????????????????????????????? VM-1 ????????? 1 Macintosh ?????CD-ROM ???????? CD-ROM ?????? 2 [RICOH]?????????????? 3 [VM-1]?????????????? 4 [VM-1 Installer.pkg]?????????????? • [VM-1 ???????]?????????? 5 [???]??????? • ?????????????????????? 6 ?????????????????[???]??????? 7 [??????]??????? • ????????????????[??????????…]?? ???????6 192 ???????????? • VM-1 ??????????????[???????]????? ???? • ??????????????????????? 8 ????????????[OK]??????? • ?????????????????????? 9 [???]??????? VM-1 ???(????????)?? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ?????????? • ??????????????????????Mac OS ????? ????????????????????? 1 [????????]??????? 2 [???????]??????? 3 [VM-1 Utility]??????? 4 [VM-1 Uninstaller]?????????????? • ???????????????????? 5 [OK]??????? • ??????????????????????? 6 ????????????[OK]??????? • ???????????????????????? 7 [OK]???????7 193 ?? 7 ?? ??????? ??????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????? ???????? ??????? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ??????????????????????? ?????? P. 2 7 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???? ??????????????????????? ?? P. 3 1 P. 1 7 3 FILE NUMBER OVER ??????????????????????? ???????? P. 2 7 P. 1 7 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??? ??????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ?? - ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ????? ??????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ?? P. 2 7 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ??????????????????????? ?? P. 1 2 7 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??? ?????LOCK(??????)?????????? ??????????? P. 2 8 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??????? ??????????????(????)??? - ??????? ???????????????????????? ?????????????? P. 4 9 P. 1 6 0 ??????????????????????? ???????????? 0 ???????? P. 1 4 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??????? ???????????????????? P. 1 6 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???? ??????????????????????? ?????????? P. 1 6 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ??????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ????????????????????? P. 1 6 0 ????????? ??????????????????????? ?????????????? - ??????????????????????????? - ???????? ??????? 0 ??????????????? ??????????????? P. 2 77 194 ?? ???????? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??? ???????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ???????????? ?? AC????????? P. 2 4 P. 2 6 P. 2 0 7 ???????????? ???? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????? P. 2 5 AC ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???????? ????????? P. 2 0 7 ????????? ????????? P. 2 6 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ???????????? ???????????? ????? ????????? P. 2 9 ?????????? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??AC ? ???????? P. 2 4 P. 2 6 P. 2 0 7 ???????????? ???? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????? P. 2 5 ????????? ?? ???????? ???????????AC ???????????? ????? P. 2 6 P. 2 0 7 ????????? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ????????? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ???????? ???????????? ???? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????? P. 2 5 ????????? ???? ????????? ???????????? ?? P. 2 5 ????????? ???????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? - - ???????????? ???????????? - -7 195 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??? ????????? ????????? ?? ?????????? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??AC ? ???????? P. 2 4 P. 2 6 P. 2 0 7 ???????????? ???????????? ?? ??????? ON ??? ???????????? ? ?? ? ? ? 6( ? ? ) ???????????? ???? P. 2 9 P. 4 4 ???????????? 6 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??????? P. 4 4 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??????? ???????????? ?? P. 3 4 ???????????? ?????? ?????? P. 1 6 0 ???????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????? ??? P. 2 7 P. 4 9 ??????????? ?????????????P. 2 7 ?????????? ????????/??? ???????????? ?????? P. 4 0 ?????????LOCK? ?????? ?LOCK( ? ? ? ? ? ? )? ?????? P. 2 8 ???????????? ?????? ???????????? ?? - ????????? ??? ?????????? ???????????? P. 1 6 4 ????????? ??? ???????????? ??????????? ???????????? ???????????? ?? P. 2 9 P. 1 6 1 ???????????? ???? VF/LCD ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? P. 5 2 ???????????? ????????? VF/LCD ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? P. 5 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? / AV ? ? ???????????? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? / AV ? ? ?????? P. 1 3 57 196 ?? ?? ?? ?? ??? ????????? ????????? ?? ?????????? ???????????? ?????? - ???????????? ???? ???????????? ?? P. 3 5 ???????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????? ???? P. 3 5 P. 7 6 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ???????????? ????? P. 3 8 ??????? (J? ? ? ? ? ? ???) ???????????? ???????????? ??? ????????????? ???????? ??????????? P. 3 2 P. 1 0 9 ?????(????)? ???????????? ???????????? ???????? ??????????? ISO ??????? ??????????? P. 3 9 P. 1 0 6 P. 1 0 9 ????????? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????????? ?? ???????????? ?????? OPEN/f( ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??/??)?????? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??????? P. 3 9 ???????????? ???????? ???????????? ???????????? ???????? P. 3 9 ???????????? ???????????? ?? • ??????????? ??????????? ?????????? • ????? • ????? ???????????? ???????????? ??????? P. 3 9 P. 6 4 P. 8 6 P. 8 8 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?????? ???????????? ? ? ??OPEN/f( ? ? ? ??????/??)?? ???????????? P. 3 9 ?????????? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???????????? ??? AC ??????? ?? P. 2 4 P. 2 6 P. 2 0 7 ????????? ????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ???????????? ?????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? P. 3 9 ??????????? ???????????? ?? P. 9 2 ???????????? ??? ???????????? ?? P. 9 2 ???????????? ???????? ???????????? ???????????? ???????? P. 3 97 197 ?? ?? ?? ?? ??? ????????? ???????????? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ???????????? ??? ???????????? ???????????? ????? P. 9 2 ???????????? ???????????? ???????? P. 6 0 P. 9 9 ???????????? ????? ???????????? ???? P. 1 6 1 ???????? ???????????? ?????? ???????????? ? ? ??OPEN/f( ? ? ? ??????/??)?? ???????????? P. 3 9 ?????????? ???????????? ???????? P. 6 0 P. 9 9 ???????????? ????? ???????????? ???? P. 1 6 1 ????????? ?????? ???????????? ???????????? ???? ???????????? ???????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? [AUTO]?????? P. 1 0 0 ????????? ???????? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ?????? DISP. ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??????? P. 5 2 AF ???????? ????????? ??? ???????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ???????????? ???? ?????????? - ????????? ???? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ???????????? ??????? - ????????? ???????? [ ? ? ? ? ? ] ?[OFF] ???[???]???? ???? [?????]?[????] ???[??+?]??? ??? P. 4 2 ???????????? ???????????? ?????? DISP. ?????????? ???????????? ????????? P. 5 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ( ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?)??????? ??????????? ? ????????? ????????? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ???????????? ??? ???????????? ?? ? ???????????? ????????? ?7 198 ?? ??/?? ?? ?? ?? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? 6(??)??????? P. 4 4 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? / AV ? ? ???????????? ??? ????????? P. 1 3 5 [ ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ? ?????? ??????????? P. 1 7 3 ???????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? [???????]?[LCD] ?????? P. 1 6 4 ????????? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ????????? ???????????? ???????????? ???????????? ?????????? ???????????? ??? P. 2 7 ????????????? ???????????? ???????????? ??????????? P. 2 7 P. 1 6 0 ???????????? ???????????? ???????????? ???????? - ???????????? ?????? ???????????? ?? - ???????????? ?????? ???????????? ???????????? ???????????? ???????????? ???????????? ???? - ??????? ?????????? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???????????? ??? AC ??????? ?? P. 2 4 P. 2 6 P. 2 0 7 ???????????? ???????????? ????? ????????? P. 2 9 ????????? ??? ???????????? ?? ??????????? P. 1 2 7 ?????????LOCK? ?????? ?LOCK( ? ? ? ? ? ? )? ?????? P. 2 8 ????????? ??????? ?????????LOCK? ?????? ?LOCK( ? ? ? ? ? ? )? ?????? P. 2 87 199 ?? ??? ?? ?? ?? ??? ????????? ???? ???????? ????????? P. 2 7 ????????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ?????????? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???????????? ??? AC ??????? ?? P. 2 4 P. 2 6 P. 2 0 7 ???????? ???????????? ????????? P. 2 9 ???????????AC ???????????? ????? P. 2 6 P. 2 0 7 ????????? ?????·?????? ?????? ?????·?????? ?? P. 3 1 P. 1 7 3 ????????? ?????? ??????????? ???????????? 1 ??????????? ????????????? ?????? P. 3 1 P. 1 7 3 ????????? ????? ?????????[OFF] ??????? ???????????? ????? P. 1 6 3 ????????? ??????????? [???????]??? ?????????? P. 1 6 5 ????????? [?????]????? ?????? ??????????? P. 1 7 3 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ???????????? ??? P. 1 3 5 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???????????? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? -7 200 ?? ??????/????????? ??????????????????(???????)?(PDF ?? ??)???????? Windows XP Service Pack3?Windows Vista Service Pack2 ????????????? Windows XP Service Pack3??? Windows Vista Service Pack2??? ??????????????????????????????(? ??????USB???)???????????????????? ???????????????????? ???? Windows XP ????????????? ??????????????? ??????????[??????? ??]??????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????[??????]????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????? [??????]???????????? Windows ?????????????????? 1 [????]B[?????????]????????? 2 [Windows ????????]? ????????? • [Windows ????????]??? ???????????[????? ????????]???????? ????7 201 ?? 3 [??]????????? 4 [????????????]?? [DL-10]????????? 5 [OK]?????????? [??????]???????????? ??????????????[Windows ????????????] ??????????????????[?????????]?? ??????7 202 ?? ???? ????? ? ? ? ? ? ??? ???(??????????????)/????/? ???/???????/???????/???? ???? ??????????????????????? ???? ± 2.0EV 1/2 ??? 1/3EV ???? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? FUL L?1 / 1 . 4?1 / 2?1 / 2 . 8?1 / 4?1 / 5 . 6?1 / 8?1 / 1 1? 1/16?1/22?1/32?1/64 ?????? 3.0???????? 92???? ????? ????????/???????????/???? ???/??????????????/?????? ????/??????/??????????? ????? F(Fine)?N(Normal)?RAW(DNG ??????)* 1 ???? SD ????????SDHC ?????????????? (? 86MB) ????? ?? * 2 5M FINE:? 2287KB /?? 3M FINE:? 1474KB /?? 1M FINE:? 812KB /?? VGA FINE:? 197KB /?? ????? ??? ??? JPEG(Exif ver2.21)* 3?RAW(DNG) ?? AVI* 4(Open DML Motion JPEG ????????) ???? JPEG ??????????(??????) ????????? ??/ M ?????????????(????:? 10 ?/? 2 ?/??????)???????????(? ???:5 ?~ 1 ???5 ???)* 5?????????? ?? ( TE)????????????????????? ?????????????????????????? ????????? ????????? ??????????????????(?????? 16 ?)???????? ?????????? USB2.0(High-Speed USB)Mini-B????????* 6??? ??? OUT 1.0Vp-p(75 O)?HDMI ??????(Type C) ??????? NTSC?PAL ??? ?? ????????????? DB-90(3.6V) AC ?????(AC-5 ?????):3.8V ???? CIPA ???? * 7?????????????????? ?????? ??·?? 113.9mm(?)× 70.2mm(??)× 28.9mm(???) (??????) ?? ??? 160g(?????/???????/????? ???/????????) ???? 66g(?????/????????/?? ????) ??????? 1/4–20UNC ??????? ? 1 ?? ?????? 0?~ 40?7 203 ?? ?????? 85% ?? ?????? –20?~ 60? *1 RAW ?????? Fine / Normal ??? VGA ? JPEG ??????DNG ??? ???? RAW????????? 1????????????????????? ??????? *2 RAW?L?M ???????????????????????????????? *3 DCF ? ??DPOF ? ??DCF ? JEITA ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?Design rule for Camera File system? ?????(????????????????????????)? *4 ??? PCM 32kHz?16bit ??????? *5 ????? OFF ?? *6 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??Windows 2000?Windows XP?Windows Vista?Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.5.7 ????????? *7 ??????? CIPA ??????????????????????????? ?????? ??????/?????????????? ??????/??????????????/????????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • 1????????????????90??????4GB????? • ???????????????999 ??????????? 1000 ???????????????????999????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???????????? • ???????????????????????(?????? ??????????)??????????????????? ?????? • ?????????????????????????????? ???7 204 ?? ???????? GXR ????????????????????? ??????? AC ?????(AC-5) ???????? ?????(DB-90) ????? ??????(BJ-9) ???????? (CA-1) ??????????? (VF-2) USB ?????????? ???????????? ???????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? 100%? ????? 90 ????? ???????????? ??????????? ??????? (GF-1) ??????(SC-55S)??????(SC-55L) T TL ?????????? ???????????? ????????7 205 ?? ???????? (ST-3) • ????????????????????????????????? • ???????????????????????(http://www.ricoh. co.jp/dc)????????7 206 ?? ??????????? ???????????? ?????? (SC-55S / SC-55L) ???????? (ST-3) ???????? (CA-1) USB ??? ???? AC ????? (AC-5) ????? ??????(BJ-9) ???? ???????? ?????(DB-90) ???? ?????? ???? ????????????? ??????? (GF-1) ??????????? (VF-2)7 207 ?? AC ?????(???)??? ??????????????????????????????? ??? AC ?????????????????? AC ????????????????????????????? ????????????? 1 ? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN? ? ? ? ? ??????????/???? ?????? • ????????????????? ????? 2 AC ??????????? ????? • ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ???????? 3 ??(DC ??)????? ????????????? ?? 4 ?????/?????????? ? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN? ? ? ? ? ????????????? 5 ???????????????? 1 27 208 ?? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????/???????????????????????? ????????????????? • ?????? AC ???????????????????? • ?????????????????AC ???????????? ??????????????? • ???????? AC ???????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? • AC ????????????? ????????????? ???????????????????????????? • AC ???????????AC ???????????????? ??????????????? AC ???????????? AC ????????????????????????????? ??????????? 1 ??????????????? 2 ???????OPEN???????????????/?? ???????? 3 AC ???????????????? 4 ? ? ? ? ? / ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ??OPEN? ?????????????????7 209 ?? ???????(???)??? ?????????????????? ?????????????????? ????????? ???????????(GF-1)??????? 1 ????????????(GP.14) 2 ??????????????????????????? ??????????????? 3 ???????????????????? 4 DIRECT ?????? 5 + / – / Fn1 / Fn2 ? ? ? ADJ. ???(??)???????? ??????????? 6 ??????????????? ??? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ?????????????????????????????? ?????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????????????? • ??????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ??????7 210 ?? GF-1 ????????????????? 1 ????????????(GP.14) 2 ??????????????????????????? ??????????????? 3 ?????????????????? A ??? M ???? ??????????(GP.58?P. 6 0) 4 ISO ???[AUTO]???????(GP.106) 5 ????????????????????????(???) ????????? ISO ??????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????????????? ?? ------------------------------------------------------------------------- • ????????????????????????????? • GF-1 ???????????????????????????? ??????????? • X ?????????????? • X ??????+????? • X ?????? 20V ??????? • ?????????????????????????????? ????????? • ????????????????????? X ???????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? • ???????????? ISO ???????????????? ?????????????????????????????? ????? ISO ???????????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????? • ?????????????????????????????? ??????(????)??????????????????? ?????????????7 211 ?? ?????????? AC ?????(??:AC-5)????????????(??: BJ-9)???? ?? 100 ~ 240V?50Hz / 60Hz ????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??????????? ??????????????????????????????? ??? ?????? ????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????? ???????????? ?????????????????? ????????????(???????)?????????? ? AV ????????????? ??????????? NTSC ? PAL ?????????????? ???????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????7 212 ?? ??????? • ???????????????????????? • ??????????????????????????????????? ????????????????? • ??????????????????????????????? • ??????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????? • ??????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????? • ??????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????? • ??????????????????????????????????? ???(?????)? • ??????????????????????????????????? ????????? • ??????????????????????????????????? ????????? • ??????????????????????????????????? ??????? • ??????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ???????????? • ??????????????????? • ??????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????? • ??????????????????????????????????? ???? • ???????????????????? • ??????????????????????????????????? ????????????????? • ?????(?????????)??????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? ????????????????? ??????????? ------------------------------------------------- • ??????????????????? • ??????? • ????????????????????????????7 213 ?? ???????/???????? ???? • ???????????????????????????????? • ???????????????????????????????? ??? • ???????????????????????????????? ???????? • ????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????? • ???????????????????????????????? ??????? • ???????????????????????????????? ??????(??????????????)?????????? ???????????????? ??/???????? • ???????????????????????????????? ??????????? ????????????????????? ????????????? ????????? ??????????????????????????????? ????????????(?????????????????) • ???????????????????????????????? ???? ????????? • ??????????????? • ??? AC ???????????????????????7 214 ?? ???????????? 1. ????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????? 2. ?????????????????????????????? ? ???????????????????????????? ? ???????????????????????????????????? ????????????? ? ??????????????????????? ? ?(?)???????(????????????)??????????? (?)??????????????????? ? ??????(????????)???????????????????? ????????? ? ??????????? ? ????????????????????????????????????? 3. ????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????? ??????? 4. ????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????? 5. ????????????????????????????????????? ????????????(???)????????????? 6. ????????????????????????????????????? ??????????????????????????????????? 7. ????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????? 8. ??????????????????? (This warranty is valid only in Japan.) ????????????????????????????????????? ????????? 9. ???????????????????????????????????? 10. ???????????(???????????????????)??5 ?? ???????????? 11. ?(?)???(?)???????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????????? 12. ??????????????????????????? ?????????? • ??????????????????????(?????????)????? ????? • ?????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????????? • ??????????????????????????? • ??????????????????????????215 ?? ??·??? AC ????? ........................................ 207 ADJ. ?????????? ............. 154 ADJ. ??? ................................. 15.17.153 Adobe Reader ........................................ 181 AE/AF ????? ................................... 77 AE ??? ......................................... 155.156 AF/MF ............................................... 155.156 AF/ ???? .................................. 155.156 AF ??? ..................................... 14.41.162 AVI ???? ............................................... 64 AV ???? .............................................. 135 AV ???? ................................................ 15 CL-BKT ?? (TE) .................................... 169 DC Software .................................. 179.183 DISP.(O)??? .......................... 15.52 DL-10 ................................................. 179.184 DPOF ........................................................... 131 Fine ??? ........................................... 71.72 Fn1/Fn2 ??? ............................... 15.155 Fn ??? MY ?? ................................ 152 Fn ??????? ................................ 168 Irodio Photo & Video Studio .......................................................... 178.183 ISO AUTO-HI ?? ................................. 162 ISO ?? ...................................................... 106 JPEG ? RAW ................................. 155.156 Language /?? .................................. 173 MENU/OK ??? ........... 15.67.116.144 MODE ?? ................................................. 63 M ??? ?????? ...................... 158 M ??????????? ............. 159 M ?????............................................. 86 Normal ??? .................................... 71.72 PictBridge ................................................. 137 RAW ??? .......................................... 71.72 SD ??????? ................................. 27 USB ???? .............. 138.184.185.188 USB ?? ...................................................... 15 USB ????? ...................................... 178 WIA ????? ...................................... 178 ? ?????????? .................... 14.17 ???? ....................................................... 46 ????? ................................................ 170 ???????? .................................... 97 ???????? .................................. 193 ???????? .............................. 16.33 ???????? .................................. 163 ????????/???????? ......................................... 15.29.33.40.163 ???????? .................................... 88 ? ????? NO. ....................................... 172 ????? ............................ 15.26.27.207 ??????? ...................................... 209 ????(z ???) .............. 15.46.48 ??·??? ............................................. 71 ?????? ........................................... 164 ??????? ...................................... 119 ???? ....................................................... 83 ?????? ................................ 15.20.52 ?????????? ........................ 161 ???? TE..................................... 155.156 ?????? ................................. 155.156 ????????(CL-BKT) ............ 90 ?????????? .............. 144.145 ????????? ...................... 52.168 ? ??????? ...................................... 164 ???????? .................................. 116 ????? ............................ 15.30.44.116 ????? ?????? .................. 158 ?? ................................................................. 49 ??(d)/???????(t) ??? .......................................... 15.41.49 ?????????? ........................ 169 ??????? ...................................... 107 ???????? .................................... 67 ??????? ...................................... 108216 ???????(Z)??? ......................................................... 15.46.48 ????? .................................................. 15 ??????(SCENE) ................. 16.62 ??????? ...................................... 108 ???????(A) ........................ 16.58 ??????????????(S) ................................................................ 16.59 ???????? .............................. 14.34 ???[???] .................................... 160 ???[??????] ..................... 160 ????? ................................................ 167 ????????? ............................... 42 ??? ............................................................ 37 ?????????? .................... 14.15 ???????????? ................ 80 ????? .................................................. 15 ??????? ...................................... 127 ???????? ........................ 144.146 ??????? ........................................ 41 ??? .......................................................... 165 ??????? ...................................... 165 ?? ................................................................. 82 ? ????????? ............................. 137 ???????? .................................. 166 ????? .................................................. 15 ???? ..................................................... 143 ????????? ............................. 170 ??? ................................................... 35.109 ??(DC ??)??????? ... 15 ????? .................................................. 22 ?? ........................................................... 62.64 ? ?????? .................................... 27.203 ??????????????? .................................................................... 130 ???? ....................................... 62.65.125 ???? ..................................................... 173 ???????? ................. ??? .205 ????????? ............................... 94 ????????? ISO ?? ........... 95 ? ??????? ........................................ 53 ?????/?????? ................................................ 15.26.27.207 ??????????? ............ 24.204 ????? .................................................. 75 ?????? .................................... 54.123 ?????? ............................................. 98 ????? ................................................ 173 ????? .................................................. 74 ??????? ........................................ 75 ???????? .................................... 35 ?????(OPEN/f)??? ................................................................ 15.39 ???????? .................................... 14 ??????????? ..................... 94 ????????? ............................... 92 ???????? .................................... 14 ????????????? ........... 93 ?? AF .......................................................... 81 ???????????(P) ..... 16.56 ????? ................................................ 127 ?????? ........................... 14.209.210 ???????? .................................. 100 ????????????? (WB-BKT) ......................................... 88.89 ?????????? .............. 104.124 ??????????? MY ?? .................................................................... 152 ? ????? ............................................ 52.53 ??? ............................................................ 14 ?????????? ........................ 147 ?????????? ........................ 150 ?????????? ........................ 151 ???????????? .............. 169 ??????????? (MY1?MY2?MY3) ................... 16.66 ???????????? .............. 149 ???????? .................................... 79217 ?????? ....................................... 15.38 ??????????(MF) ........... 76 ??????????(M) ........ 16.60 ???????????? .............. 171 ??????? .................................. 14.16 ? ????????????? ..... 24.26 ????? ................................................ 121 ?? ................................................................. 86 ???? ....................................................... 99 ? ???????????? .............. 166218 ??????????? RING CUBE RING CUBE ?????????????????????????? ????????????????? 8F ??????????????·??????????????? ?????? 9F ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ??????????????????????????????? ?????? http://ringcube.jp/ ???????? 5-7-2 ?????????? 8F/ 9F (?? 9F) ????:11:00 ~ 20:00 (?????) ??????:03-3289-1521???? 1. ???????????????????? 1 ???????????????? ????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????????? 2. ??????????????????????????? (1) ??????(?????????????)???????? (2) ??????????????????????????????????? ?? (3) ??????????????????????? (4) ?(?)???????(????????????)?????????? ?(?)??????????????????? (5) ??????(????????)??????????????????? ?????????? (6) ??????(??????????)???????? (7) ??????????????????????????????????? ?? 3. ????????????????????????????????????? ???????(???)?????????????? 4. ????????????????(??·??????????????·?? ???????????????)????????????? 5. ????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????? 6. ????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????? 7. ??????????????????? (This warranty is valid only in Japan) ????????????????????????????????????? ????????? 8. ?????????????? ??? ?????????????????????????????????????? ??? ?????????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????????? ?????? ?????????????????????????????????????? ???????????? ?????????????????????????????????????? ??? ??????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????? * * * * * * *?????????????????????????? ??????????????? ??????????????? ??????????????? ??????????????? ?????????? ?????????????????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????? ??? 1. ????????????????????????????????????? ????????????????????????????????????? 2. ??????????????·?????????????????????? ?????????????????? 3. ????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? 4. ????????????????????????????????????? ???????????????????? ??????????? ??????????? ??????????? ??????????? Li-ion 00 ????????*L754 1971A* ????????????? ¦???? http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/ ¦Ricoh Photo Style(??&??????) http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/photostyle/ ¦???????? http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/support/ ¦??????(????????????????) http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/support/repair/ ??????? ??????????????????????????????????????????? ????? ¦???????(FAQ) ?????·?????? http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/support/faq/ ????????? http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/support/repair/faqs/ ¦???????????? ???????? http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/support/contact/ ?? 0120-000475 FAX 0120-479417 ????:9:00 ~ 18:00(?????????) ????????????????????????????????·???? ???????????? ¦?Irodio Photo & Video Studio????? ???????? ??????:0570-02-3500 ??:06-6633-2990 ????: ???~??? 10:00 ~ 18:00 (????????????????????????) ???? ¦??????/????????? (??????????????????????????) ???????????(???????????????) < ???????? > http://www.ricoh.co.jp/dc/support/repair/mail.html < ???? > 0120-053956 ???? 9:00 ~ 17:00 (????????????????????????????????) ????????????????????????????????·??? ????????????? ¦??????????? (????????????????????????????????) ???????????????? ? 104-0061 ???????? 6-14-7 ? 3 ????? 1 ? ???? 9:30 ~ 17:00 ?? 03-3543-4187 ???????????????? ? 564-0053 ?????????? 34-5 ????? 7 ? ???? 9:30 ~ 17:00 ?? 06-6338-9092 ??????? ? 104-8222 ???????? 8-13-1 ????? ??:0120-000475(???????) 2009 ? 12 ? JA Printed in China GXR ????? ????? ?????????????? ?????????????? ???(????) ???? ??????????,??????????????????? (P.1–10)??????????????????? ??????? ??????????,??????????????????? ???????????????(P.11–44)? ?? ?????????“???????”???????????? ????????????,????????????????? ??????????????(P.45–187)? ???(????) ??????????????????????????????? ????? ???????????????????,???????????????? (???) ?????????????????????????? ?????????ii ????? ????????????? * ?????????????? GXR ????? ???????? ???? ? mini-B ??? USB ??? ???????? ???????? A/V ??? ???????? ????? ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??? ??? ???????? ???????? DB-90 ????? BJ-9 ??? • ??:???????????????(???)? • ??????????(????) • ?? • ??? ??:???? ???????????????? ????????,??????? ??????? ?? ?????????????????? (???)?????????????? ? PDF ??????????????? ?????(???)???????? ??iii ?? • ????:?????????????????????? • ????:????????????,?????????????? ?????? • ???:??????????????????,????????? ??????????????????,???????????? • ????:??????????????????,???????? ?????,????? • ???:???????????,???????????????? ???????????????????? • ????:???????????????,??????????? ???????????????????????????????? ???????????????:??????????????,? ??????????????,????????????????? ????? © ???? 2009 ???????????????????????,?? ????????????????????????????????? ????,??????? ????????????????????????????????? ????,???????????????????,??,??????? Microsoft?Windows?Windows Vista ? Internet Explorer ? Microsoft Corporation ??????????????Macintosh ? Mac OS ? Apple Inc. ???? ??????????Adobe?Adobe ??? Adobe Reader ? Adobe Systems Incorporated ???? HDMI? ??? High-Denition Multimedia Interface ? HDMI Licensing LLC ????????? ???????????????????????????????????iv ???? ???? ?????????????????????????? ?????????????????????????? ??????????????? ?? ??????????????????? ?????????????? ?? ??????????????????? ????????? ?? ??????????????????? ??????????? ???? ????????????? ?????????? ???????????,??????????? ?? ???? ???? ??????????????????? ?? ??????????????????????? ??????????? ???????????????????v ????????????????,?????? ??????????????????????? ????,?????? ???????????????????????? ????????????????? ????????????? ?? ????????????????,?????? ?????????,????????????? ??????????,???????????? ??,???????????????????, ?????????????????????? ????????????????????????, ???????????????????,??? ????????????????????,?? ????????????,??????????? ????????,?????????????? ????????vi ?????????????,?????????? ???????,??????????? • ??:?????????,?????????? ???,???????? • ??:?????????,??????? 15 ? ?????????? • ??:???????,???????????? ??????????????????? ????????????????????????? • ??????????????????????? • ??????????????????????? ????? • ????????????????? • ????????,?????????????? ?????,????????????????? ????????? ??????????????????????? ??? • ??????????????????????? ??????? • ??????????????????,???? ????????????????? • ??????????????????????? ??????? • ???????????vii ?????????? SD ???????????? ????????????????????,?? ??????? ???????????????? ??????????????????,????? ??,???????????????????? ???,???????????????????, ????????????????? ????????????,?????????? ??? ??????????????????????? ????,???????????? ?????????????????,????? ??????? ???????????,????????? ??????,???????????,???? ????????????????viii ??????????????????? ?? ??????????????????????? ?????????,???????????(?? ?????) ????????,???????????,?? ????????????? ??????????????????????? ?????? ???????????,??????????? ??????????? ????????????????,?????? ?????????????? ?????? ????? ???????,?????????? ????????????ixx ?????? ?????..................................................................................................................................... ii ??.....................................................................................................................................................iii ????..........................................................................................................................................iv ???? 1 ??????????,??????? ??.................................................................................................................................2 ???????.........................................................................................................................2 ??????? 11 ??????????,??????? ????.....................................................................................................................12 ?????..................................................................................................................................12 ????........................................................................................................................................14 ?????..................................................................................................................................15 ??????????????..............................................................................17 ???????......................................................................................................................18 ????........................................................................................................................................20 ????.....................................................................................................................21 ?????..................................................................................................................................21 ????........................................................................................................................................22 ??...................................................................................................................................................26 ??(????)....................................................................................................................27 ?????..................................................................................................................................28 ??...................................................................................................................................................31 ?????..................................................................................................................................32 ???????.......................................................................................................34 ????........................................................................................................................................34 ????........................................................................................................................................39 O(DISP.)??....................................................................................................................42xi ?? 45 ????????????,??????? ?????????.............................................................................................46 ?? P:????..................................................................................................................46 ?? A:????..................................................................................................................48 ?? S:????...................................................................................................................49 ?? M:????.................................................................................................................50 4??:????????..............................................................................52 “MY”??:???????.....................................................................................57 ????........................................................................................................................................58 ????.....................................................................................................................94 ????........................................................................................................................................94 ?? MP ??..............................................................................................................................95 ????.................................................................................................................. 101 ????.....................................................................................................................................101 ?????????........................................................................................................118 ????.................................................................................................................. 120 ???????...................................................................................................................120 ??................................................................................................................................................122 ?????............................................................................................................. 126 ?????...............................................................................................................................129 ?????...............................................................................................................................139 ????????............................................................................................... 151 Windows......................................................................................................................................151 Macintosh....................................................................................................................................162 ????.................................................................................................................. 167 ????.....................................................................................................................................167 ??................................................................................................................................................175 ?????...............................................................................................................................178 ??????.........................................................................................................................183 ??????.........................................................................................................................183 ?????...............................................................................................................................185 ????.....................................................................................................................................186 ??............................................................................................................................ 188xii ????????????  ???? ??????????,??????? ??..................................................................................... 2????????????  ?? ?????????????????????????? ?????,?????????????,?????? ??????????????? ??????? ??????,??????????????? ?? 3 4 5 6 7 12 11 13 8 9 10 14 1 2 1 ????............................................5 2 ??????????.........4 3 ????............................................4 4 ????..................................21, 23 5 ????..................................18, 21 6 AF ???.............................31, 140 7 ??..................................................181 8 ????......................................... 29 9 ???...............................................- 10 ?????.......................................ii 11 ???????? ????......................................... 17 12 ??.................................................... 17 13 ??????????...... 17 14 ???............................................... 28????????????  ?? 4 1 2 3 17 16 13 14 15 12 9 22 21 20 19 5 6 23 7 8 10 18 11 1 DIRECT ??.....................................5 2 OPEN/f(???)?? ................................................................ 29 3 VF/LCD ??................................. 42 4 ?????......................................8 5 ????/?????? ......................................18, 22, 29, 141 6 USB ????? ..............................120, 159, 160, 162 7 A/V ?????........................118 8 HDMI ???????.......119 9 ADJ. ?.......................................5, 134 10 6(??)?? ......................................19, 34, 94, 100 11 N(??)??......................... 27 12 8(??)/ z(????) ??.............................................26, 36 13 9(??)/ Z(???? ??)??............................26, 36 14 ????......................................... 37 + (!)..............................................137 – (%)..............................................137 Fn1(?? 1)(#)..............136 Fn1(?? 2)($)..............136 15C/D?? ...........................................58, 101, 126 16 O(DISP.)??...................... 42 17 t(??)/ d(??) ??.............................................31, 39 18 ??????...........................176 19 ??/????.................14, 15 20 ?????............................14, 15 21 ???...............................................- 22 ?????.......................................ii 23 ???..................................118, 121????????????  ???? ???,????????? ????(1)?????? ??????????(2)? 1 2 5(??):???? ?????????? ??????(P.21)? M(????):?? ????????? (P.50)? MY1?MY2?MY3(“????”):?????? ????(P.57?129)?????? A(????):?? ?????????? ?????????? ??(P.48)? 4(??):?? ?????????? ???,?????? (P.52)? S(????):?? ????????? ????????? ????(P.49)? P(????):?? ????????? ????????? ????(P.46)?????????????  ????? ADJ. ? ??????????,???? ?????? + ? –,???? ADJ. ??? Fn1 ? Fn2?ADJ. ????? ?????? P?A?S ? M ??? ?????????? ???? ADJ.? ?????????????? ADJ. ?,??????? ?(P.134)???????????,?? ADJ. ????? ????????;??,?????????????? ????? ?? ????????? M ??????????????????? ???????????? ADJ. ????(P.138)? DIRECT ?? ???????? DIRECT ???? ???????? DIRECT????????????  DIRECT ?? ??????,??????????????? 1 2 3 8 4 5 12 13 18 10 9 11 15 14 16 17 6 7 1 ????............................................4 2 ??.....................................46, 48, 50 3 ????..........................46, 49, 50 4 ?????................................... 28 5 ????/ ?????............................78, 79 6 ????......................................... 85 7 ISO........................................................ 90 8 ???............................................... 86 9 ????......................................... 64 10 ??.................................................... 70 11 ????......................................... 71 12 ???? · ??.......................... 61 13 ??.................................................... 75 14 ??.................................................... 73 15 ????............................................7 16 ????......................................... 27 17 AE ??...........................................136 18 ??.................................................... 31 ?? DIRECT ???????? ? DIRECT ???,?? +?–?Fn1?Fn2 ? ADJ. ?(?? ???)??????????,??????????? ??????????? + ? – ????,??????? ???????????????  ????????? ? DIRECT ????????????,?? ADJ. ???? ??????????? + ? – ????????????, ???? ADJ. ??C/D??????? ? ????????????????????????,???? ????? DIRECT ????????????????????? ????????????? ?? • ?? DISP. ??,??????????(P.140)? • ? DIRECT ?????C/D???????(P.59)? • ???????,?? Fn1?Fn2 ? ADJ. ?(?????)??? ????????? • ?????????,?????????????????? ??????????? • ?????????,?????????????,???? ??????? • ? DIRECT ???????????????????????? ????? ????????? ?????????????????,?????? DIRECT ? ?????? + ? –,???????????????????????????????  ????? ????????,???????????? ??(????) ??(????) 4:3 N F 2.5 25cm- 1/50 200 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 15 18 31 19 27 28 29 30 26 32 20 25 24 22 23 21 37 38 F 2.5 1/50 200 34 33 35 36 1 ?????.........28 2 ????/ ????? ..............................78, 79 3 ????...............52 ??..........................73 4 ????................. 4 5 ?????? * ...................................177 6 ?????.........15 7 ?????? ??..................64, 68 8 ???? · ?? ......................................61 9 ????/?? ????.......64, 69 10 ???/ ????? ............................... 86, 89 11 ??..........................70 12 ????...............71 13 ??..........................75 14 ???.....................44 15 ????...............81 16 ????...............80 17 ??????? ......................................92 18 ?????? ......................................84 19 ????...............10 20 ?????? ...................................136 21 ??..........................31 22 ????...............27 23 ?????? ...................................144 24 ??????...26 25 ???.....................26 26 ????...............83 27 ????...............50 28 ??..........46, 48, 50????????????  29 ???? ......................46, 49, 50 30 ????...............85 31 ISO..............................90 32 ?????.........32 33 ????...............86 34 ????.......24, 93 35 ??..........................64 36 ???.....................64 37 ????....63, 177 38 ???? * ............55 * ?????;?????????????????????????? ??????????? 9,999 ??,??? 9999? ?? ?? DIRECT ??(P.5)???????? ??(??) ??(??) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4:3 N 2010/0101 00:20 F 2.5 ISO 200 1/50 EV+0.7 2010/01/01 00:20 16 15 17 18 1 ????..............- 2 ????..............- 3 ???....................- 4 ?????? .....................................- 5 ?????......112 6 DPOF ???? ...................................115 7 ??..........................15 8 ???? · ?? ......................................61 9 ????....20, 149 10 ??..........46, 48, 50 11 ISO..............................90 12 ????...............85 13 ???? ......................46, 49, 50 14 ????...............10 15 ?????/ ?????........- 16 ????..............- 17 ???.....................86 18 ?????.........89???????????? 0 ?? • ???????????????? • ?? DISP. ??(P.42)???????? 4:3 N 2.5 200 ?????? ????????????????????? ?? ?? (??) ?????? (??) ?????????? (??) ??????????????? ????????????  ????.........................................................................12 ????.........................................................................21 ???????...........................................................34 ??????? ??????????,???????????????????  ???? ?????????? ????? ??????????????(DB-90)????????? ???,?????? BJ-9 ??????????? ? 1?????????? ???,????????,?“+”?“–”???? ???????????? ? ????????????? ? 2??????????,?????? ???,???????????? 25 °C ????? ????????????? 5 ??? ?? ?????????,????????????????? ?????,??????????????????????  ? 3????? ??????????????????????,? ????????? ? • ????????:?????? DB-90 ?????????? ????????????? • ???????????????,??????,????? ????????? • ???????????,?????? ??:???? ???? DB-90 ?????????????????? CIPA ?? ???????????,??????:??? 23 °C;???? ???;????????? 30 ???????????????; ??? 10 ????????????????????????? ??????????????  ???? ???????????????? ? 1????/????? ??(1)???(2)??? ? 2????? ???????,??? ??????????? ??????????? ??????? 1 2 ? 3????/????? ??(1)???(2)??? ? ???????? 1 2 ???? ???????/????,?????????,??? ????????????? ? ???????????,????????????????? ??????????????  ????? ????????????? 86MB ??????,??? ? SD ? SDHC ??????????????,???? ??????;???????,??????????? ????? ????????????????? ? 1????/????? ??(1)???(2)??? 1 2 ? 2?????? ???????????,? ????????????? ?????? ? 3????/????? ??(1)???(2)??? 1 2????????????  ????? ???????/????,????????????? ?????????? ? • ???????????,???????,???????? ??????? • ????????????? ??:??? ????????“LOCK”????? ???,?????????????, ??????????? ??????????????;?????????????? ????,???????????? ?? • ???????????????????,??????? (P.139)?????,????????????? • ??????????,???? 177 ???? • ??????????????????????(P.115)?????????????  ?????????????? ??????????????/??????????? ???,????????? ?????????????? ?????????????? ?????????????? ?,???????????? ???????? ???????? ???? ????????????? ???????????? ????,??????? ??? ???????????? ??,????????? ??????????????????????  ??????? ???? ??????? ON ??????? ???????????????, ????/?????????? ??? ???????,??????? ? OFF???????,????? ??????????????? (??????????,??? 0; ???????????(P.20), ??????????????? ????????)? ? ??????,???(P.73)???(P.83)???(P.31)??? ???????????????? MY ??????????? ???????????????????????????????  ???? ?????,??6??? 1 ?? ???????????????? ????6???????? ??:??????????? ???????(P.141)???????(P.141)??????? ???????,??????????????,?????????????????? 0 ???? ????????,????????????????? ?????????????????????????? ??????,??? DISP. ????????????? ???????????(P.149)? ? 1??????? ?? +?–?Fn1 ? Fn2 ??? ????????C/D? ? 2????? ?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????? ????????????? ?,???? + ? – ????? C?????????,?? /D???,???? C??????????;?? /D??????? ?? • ???????????????? 2 ??,??????,? ??????????? 1 ??? • ??????????????(P.84)?????????????  ???? ??“????”(P.12)???? ???????,??????? ?????????? ON ???? ?,?????????5? ????? ? 1???????? ??????????,?? ??????? ? ??????????????? ???????? ? 2????? ???????????????????????  ???? ? 1??? ?????????????,?????????? ???????? 4:3 N ????????,????? ????(?? 9 ?)???? ??? ????????,????? ????????/????? ??????? ????/?????? ??? ? 2????? ???????????????????,???? ??????(P.142),????????????? ???????????????  ??:???? ?????????????????????,??????? ??????????????“?????????”???? ??????????? ??:?? ????/??????????????????????? ???? ??? ????/?????? ??? ?? ?? ??????? ?? ??(??) ???? ??(??) ??(??) ???????????????: • ???????,?????????????????? • ??????????? • ??????? • ??????? • ??????????? • ?????,????? • ???,????????? LED ???,?????????????????,??????? ???????????;????????????????? ???????,????????????????????, ???????????(P.25)?????????????  ??:?????? ??????????????????????(“???? ?”),????????????????????????: • ?????????? • ??????(P.26) ????????????????????,???????? ?J????????????????,????????? ??: • ?????( )???????( ;???? 28 ???) • ????? ISO(P.90) • ????(P.31) • ?????????(P.92) ?? • ????????????,??????????????? ????? • ??????????????,??? ??? • ????????????????????????????, ?????????????????(P.142)?????????????  ??? ?????????????????????????? ??????????????? ? 1??? ?????????????,?????????? ???? 4:3 N ? 2????? ???????????????,??????? ???? ????? ? 3????? ???????????????? ? ????????,?????????????????,?? ??????????????????????  ?? ???? 8(??)??????,?? 9(??)?? ????? 4:3 N 9 8 4:3 N ?? ?? ? 1??8?9??????? ? 2??? ????????? ? 3????? ???????????? ?? • ?????????????????,?????????? ?? • ????????????????????,??????? ?????????? 8 ??,?????? 8 ?????, ???????????????????????????, ???9??? • ???????????????????????????? ???,??????????????? • ????? · ????? RAW ?(P.61),?????????????????????  ??(????) ????????????????? ? 1?? N ??? N ??????????? ???????? N ??? ????????? ? 2??? ?????????????, ??????????? ? 3????? 4:3 N ???????????? ????????,????? N ??? ?? ??????,???????????????????,?? ?????????(P.64)?????????????  ????? ?????????????? OPEN/f ????????, ??????????????????: ?? ?? ???? ?????? ?? ???????????? ???? ?? ???????????????“??”? ???? ???????????? ???? ?????????????????????????? ????????????????? ???? ???????????????????????(P.79) ???? ?? ????????????????????????????? ???????????????????  ??????? ? 1?????? ?? OPEN/f ??? OPEN ? 2???????? ?? OPEN/f ?????????????????? ????????????? ?? • ????????????,????????? • ??????????/??????????????? ???????????? ? 3?????? ????????????,??????????? ????????????????????? 0 ?? • ???????????????,???????????? ??????? • ????????????,????????? • ??????????,?????????,??????? ??? ? ????????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????????  ?? ?? 10 ??2 ????????????? 2 ?????? ?????????????????????????? ??,??????????????????????? ?????????????????(P.82)? ? 1??????? ??? t ????? 10 ??? ?,?????? 2 ????, ????????????? ????????????? ??? ?????????????? ?? ???????????,????????? ? 2?????? ??????????????????????? 10 ?????????????,AF ??????? ?? ??????C/D??????????? 4:3 N ????????????  ????? ?????????????????????????? ??????????????,????????? ? 1????? ??O(DISP.)????? ????????? ? 2??????? ?? + ? – ????????,????C/D ?????????? ?? ?? ? ????????? ?? ??????????????????????,???? ???????????????,?????????;? ?????,??????;?????????????? ??????,???????????????????? ????????(P.42),?????????? ??+ ?? ?????,?????????????????????? ?? ??????????????????????????? ???????????????????????  ?????????? 4:3 N ?? 4:3 N ?? ????????? ??????? 4:3 N ?? 4:3 N ??????? ???????? 90° ?? ???????????????????(P.144)? ? • ?????????????????????,?????? ???? • ???????????????(P.142),???????? • ?????????,?????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ????????,??????????? ???????????? ??????? ????????????? ???? ???????6??????? ???????? ????6?????????? ??:?????????? ?????,?? 6 ??? 1 ??????????????? ???? ?? Fn2 ?????????,?? Fn1 ????????? ?? – ??? 10 ???,?? + ??? 10 ?? ???????????? ?? 1 ? 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N ?? 10 ? + 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Fn1 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Fn2 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N – ?? 1 ? ?? 10 ? 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N ? ?????? RAW ??? JPEG ??,???????????? ??? RAW ???????,????? JPEG ??,??? RAW ??????????????? JPEG ????,?????? RAW ?????????,????????????????? ?? RAW ?????,???? 62 ? 63 ???? ??:?????????? ???,????????????????????????? ??????????????????(P.142)? ???????????? ??:??????????? ???????,??????????;???????,?? ????????????????????????????? ???,?????????????? ??:???? ????????????????(P.143),???????? ????????????? ?????? ?? z ? Z ????? 1 ??20 ?? 81 ??????????? ?,????????????? ?? ?? 20 ? 4:3 N 2010 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 2010 F 2.5 ????? 81 ? ???????????? ?????????????????????? ????????,?????????????? ??:???? ??????????????,???????????? ?? • ??????????,???????????? ADJ. ?? • ???????????????????: • ? 20 ???? 81 ????,?? DIRECT ??????? +?–? Fn1?Fn2 ? ADJ. ?(?????),???????? • ????????,?? DIRECT ??????? + ? –,?? ??????????????????????? DIRECT ? ?????? Fn1?Fn2 ? ADJ. ?????????????? ????????????????,?? Fn2 ??,???? ? ADJ. ?????????????? ???????????? ???? ?? z ?????????????????????? ???????????????????(P.143)??? ???,??? ADJ. ?? ????????: ?? ?? z ??? ???? ???????,???????? C/D ?????,????????????????????? C??????????????????????,??? /D????? ???? ????????? ADJ. ? ????????????????????? Z ??? ?? • ??????????????: ???? ???? L?M?5M?3M 16 ? 1M 6.7 ? VGA 3.4 ? • ????????????? M ????????? • ???????????????????????? 2(P.138), ? ADJ. ??????????????????? ???????????? ???? ???????????? ?????? ? 1????? ???????(P.34)?????????????? ? 2?? d ??? ???????(????? ? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????)? ? 3??????? ?? + ? – ????????,????C/D? ?????,?????????????????? 2 ? 3 ???????,??????????C/ D??? ?????? ????????,?????? ??? d ??????????? ??????????????? ????;?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ??? ??,????C/D?0 ???????????? ?????? ??????????????? ? 1?? d ??? ?????????,??? ?? 2?????????,? ????????????? C???????????? /D? ? 2???????????? ???????????,? C????????,??? /D ? ? ? ? 3? ? ????????????, C?????????,?? /D????? 3.1?? ? DISP. ?????????? ???? ? 3????? ??????(P.37)???? ?????C/D??? ???? d ???????? ???????,????? ???????C/D? 4:3 N 4:3 N  ???????????? ??:???? ??????????????,??? ADJ. ?????? ??: 3.1 ????????????? ?????,????C/ D??????????? d ?????????????, ??? DISP. ??? 4:3 N 3.2 ?????????????? ??,????C/D?? ????????? d ????? 4:3 N ???? 3.1–3.2 ??????,??? ADJ. ????? 3,? ????????????? ? 4?? d ??? ????????????? ? 5???? ?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????, ????C/D? ???????????? O(DISP.)?? ?????????,??O(DISP.)???????? ??????? ??/??????? ?????????,?? VF/LCD ????????????? ??????,???????????????? VF/LCD ?? ????????? ??? LCD ????,?? VF/LCD ???? LCD ??????? ??????? ???? ??O(DISP.)?????????????? ???? 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N ?? + ??? ??? 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N ???? (???) ??:???? ?????????????,???? 144 ???? ???????????? ?? ????????????? + ??(P.32),????????? ????? ???? ??O(DISP.)?????????????? ???? 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 ???? + ??? ??? 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 ?? ??:?? ??????????????????????????“??” ????????????????????????????? ????,???????????????????????, ????????????????(P.85)????,????? ??,????????? ???????????? ??:??? ?????????????????????????????, ?????,??????????????????????? ???????????????,????????????? ???????????????????,????????? ?,???????,???????????? ???? ???? ???????????,????????????????? ????????(P.85;???,??????,?????? ??????????)????????????,????? ????(P.107)? ???????????????,????????????? ??????????????????  ?????????.................................................46 ????.........................................................................94 ????...................................................................... 101 ????...................................................................... 120 ?????................................................................. 126 ????????................................................... 151 ????...................................................................... 167 ?? ????????????,??????? ????????? ????????? ??????? P?A?S?M?4? MY ??,??? ??????????? ?? P:???? ????????? P(????) ?,????????????? ??????????????? ????? ? 1???? P? ???????? P????? ????????????? ??? 4:3 N ? 2????? ????????????? ????????????? ?????? 2.5 200 ? 3?????????? ????????????? ?????????????? 4:3 N  ????????? ?? ???????,?? 10 ?????????????? ? 4????? ???????????????? ?? ??????(EV)???????????????????? ??????????????????????? ????????? ?? A:???? ??? A(????)?,??? ???,??????????? ????(? f ?)??????? ??????????????? ????(? f ?)??????? ????????? ? 1???? A? ???????? A???? ??????? ? 2????? ?????????????? ????????????? ?;???????????? ??? ? 3????????? ?????????????? ?????????????? ????????? 4:3 N ? 4????? ???????????? ?? ??????????(P.92),???????????????? 4:3 N  ????????? ?? S:???? ??? S(????)?,???? ????,?????????? ?????“??”??,??? ??????????????? ?????? ? 1???? S? ???????? S????? ???????? ? 2??????? ????????????? ? 3????????? ????????????? ????????????? ????????? 2.5 200 ? 4????? ???????????????? ?? ?????????,??????,???????????? ??(??? f ?)? 4:3 N 0 ????????? ?? M:???? ??? M(????)?,??? ????????,?? ADJ. ?? ?????? ? 1???? M? ???????? M???? ????????????? ???????????? 4:3 N ? 2?????????? ????????????, ???????? ADJ. ??? ??????(????,? ????????????? ??;???? 138 ???)??????????? ????????,??????????(???? ???(?? –2EV)?????(?? 2EV),??? ????????????)? ? 3????? ????????????,??????????? ??????? ––22 EEVV ++22 EEVV ????????? ?? • ???????????????????????????? ??????????? • ?????????,? ISO ?????????????? (P.90),ISO ??????ISO ???????????????? ???????????????? • ???????????????????????????? ??????,????????????????????? ???,?????????????????,?????? ?????????,?????????????????? ????? 2 ?? • ????(AE)????????????????????? ???? Fn1 ????? Fn2 ??????? AE ??,???? ?????????????,?????????????? ???????????,??????????? +/– ??? ?(P.137)???????,?????????? + ? – ?? ???????????,???????????????? ???????????????????????????, ???????????????????? M ??(P.138)? ????????????????????????? ????????? 4??:???????? ??4????????,? ??????????????? ??????????????? ?????? ??????4?????? ????? ?? ?? ?? ??????(P.54)? ?? ?????????? ?? ????????????? ?? ?????????????????????? ?? ?????????? ??????,????????????????: • ????????? • ????,?????????????? • ??????????? ???? ?? ???????(???????)???????? (P.56)? ????????? ???????????????: ? 1????????4? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??4 ? 2??C/D? ????????? ? 3??????? C?? +?–?Fn1 ? Fn2 ????????,??? /D??????,???????????? ???? ? 4????? • ????:???? 54 ???? • ??????:???? 56 ???? ????????? ??:???? ???4??????????? ???????,???C/D? ?????????? Fn1 ????? ?????? + ? – ???????? ???(P.58)????????(P.127) ?????(P.128),???? Fn2 ?? ????????????????? ???????????,???? 59 ???? 1 2 3 4 1???? 2?????? 3??????? 4???? ???? ?????????? AVI ??????? ? 1?4?????3? ?? + ? – ????3(??),????C/D? ????????????? ?????? ? 2??? ??????????,????????????? ?????????? ????????? ? • ?????, ????,??????????????? • ?????????????????? • ?????? 90 ??,???? 4GB???????????, ???????????????????????????? ?????????????,???????(P.61)???? ??????? ?? • ?????????????? • ???????????,?????? • ??????????????,??????????? • ???????????????????(P.60)? • ???,???????????????,???????? ??????,??????????????? ????????? 4??:???? ??????????????,??????????? ??????????,??????????????? ???????????????,?????????? ???????????????????;??? Fn2 ? ?????,??? + ???????????????? ??????????,??????????????? ?????????? ? ?????????:???????????????????? ????????????,???????????????? ????????????: • ?????? • ????????????? • ????????????????? • ???????????? ??:???? ???????????????????????(P.110)? ????????? “MY”??:??????? ??????????????? ???? MY1 ????????? ???(P.129),???????? ? MY1??? MY2 ???? MY2 ? ????????,?? MY3 ?? ?? MY3 ?????????? ? 1???????? MY1?MY2 ? MY3? ????????????? ?????????????? 4:3 N ?? ? MY ??????????????????????,? ??????????????????? ??:?????? ??? MY ???????????????????,?? ???????????????(P.92)????????? ? MY ???,?????????? ? 2????? ??????,??????????????? ????????? ???? ??? +?–?Fn1?Fn2 ?C/D??????? ? ?????????????????,???????? ? 1??????? ?4??????,?? ??????C/D ?? ?????? ??:4?? ?4???,??C/D ???????;?? Fn1 ??? ?????,??? – ????? ?,???? Fn2 ??????? ?? ?????????? ???????? ? 2????????? ?? + ? – ???????? ??,???? Fn2 ???? ???????? ?? ??? DIRECT ??????? – ? ?????????? ????????? ? 3??????? ?? + ? – ????????????C/D? ??????????,??? Fn1 ???????? ???? ???????????????????????? 5?P?A?S?M?MY1?MY2? MY3?? ?? ??? ?? ???? · ?? L 4:3 N 61 ?? ???? 64 ???????? 2.5m 68 ?????? ? 69 ????? ? 70 ?? ???? 70 ???? ?? 71 ?? ? 73 ????? ? 75 ????? 0.0 78 ????? 1/2 79 ??????? ??? 79 ???? ? 80 ???? ISO ISO 401 ?? 80 ?? ??? ?? ???? ? 81 ???? ? 81 ????? 2 ?,5 ? 82 ???? — 83 ?????? ? 84 ???? * 1 0.0 85 ??? ?? AWB 86 ????? A: 0,G: 0 89 ISO ??? ?? 90 ??????? * 2 — 91 ?????? * 3 ? 92 ?????? * 4 — 92 ??????? * 5 ? 920 ????????? 4??:?? ?? ??? ?? ???? VGA640 61 ?? ???? 64 ???????? 2.5m 68 ?? ??? ?? ????? ? 70 ??? ?? 86 ????? A: 0, G: 0 89 4??:??/??/?? ?? ??? ?? ???? · ?? L 4:3 N 61 ?? ???? 64 ???????? 2.5m 68 ?????? ? 69 ????? ? 70 ????? 0.0 78 ??????? ??? 79 ?? ??? ?? ???? ? 81 ????? 2 ?,5 ? 82 ?????? ? 84 ???? 0.0 85 ??? ?? AWB 86 ??????? * 5 ? 92 4??:?? ?? ??? ?? ???? · ?? L 4:3 N 61 ???? ? 81 ????? 2 ?,5 ? 82 ?????? ? 84 ?? ??? ?? ???? 0.0 85 ??? ?? AWB 86 ??????? * 5 ? 92 ????????? 4??:???? ?? ??? ?? ???? · ?? 1M 4:3 F 61 ?? ???? 64 ???????? 2.5m 68 ?????? ? 69 ????? ? 70 ?? ???? 70 ???? ?? 71 ????? 0.0 78 ?? ??? ?? ??????? ??? 79 ???? ? 81 ?????? ? 84 ???? 0.0 85 ??? ?? AWB 86 ISO ??? ?? 90 ??????? * 5 ? 92 * 1 ? M ??????? * 2 ??5??? * 3 ?? A ??? * 4 ?? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ??? * 5 ??????????????? ???? ???? · ??/???? ?????????????????????????? ???? ??????,??????????????????? ????????????????????????? ????,????????? ????????? ?????? ?? ??? ??? ?? RAW 16:9* 2 , 4:3, 3:2* 2 , 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL/ VGA* 1 • ????????????? ????? L 16:9* 2 , 4:3, 3:2* 2 , 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL • ????????????? ????? M 16:9* 2 , 4:3, 3:2* 2 , 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL 5M 4:3 FINE • ????? 3M 4:3 FINE 1M* 4 4:3 FINE • ????????? VGA* 4 4:3 FINE • ????????????? ????????????? ?????? * 1 ??????? JPEG ??? * 2 ????????????? * 3 ????????????? * 4 1M ? VGA ???????????????? ?? • ???????????????,???????????? ?? • ?? ADJ. ?(P.134)???????? · ????? ????????? ??:???? ??????????????: • NORMAL(??):?? JPEG ????????? • FINE(??):?????,????????????? NORMAL ????,??????? • RAW:? DNG ???? RAW ????;???? JPEG ???? ????? JPEG ??;??????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ??(?? Windows)??? DNG ????????????? ????? DNG ??? ?????????????,RAW ????????????? ?????,???? JPEG ????????????? RAW ? ??,???????: • ?? RAW ???,??????????????????,? ?????????????????????????? JPEG ???? DNG ????? • ??????,???????? RAW ??????????? ?????????????? ???? ?? ???? VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 ?? • ???????????????????????????? ????? • ?????? 90 ?????? 4GB? ????????? ?? ????????????????,?????????? ?? ?? ???? * ?????????????????,?????? ???????????? ???? * ???????????? ???? ??????(P.65)? ?? ???????????????(P.68)?????? ?????????? ??? ?????????????????? * ??????? DIRECT ???? ???????????????, ??????????????? ????? 4:3 N ??:?? ????????????????????(? f ?)????, ?????????;???(? f ?) ?????,???????????? ?????????????????? ????,???????? M?A ? P ??????(??? P ?,????? ?????????????,???? ?)? ??(??) ???(??? ???) ????????? ?? • Fn1 ? Fn2 ???????????????????????? ?(P.136)? • ???????????????? ??????,???C/D? ????????????????? 4:3 N 2.5 30 ??:???? ????????????,????????????? ???????? ? 1????????????? ????????????? ????? 4:3 N 2.5 30 ? 2????? ?? N ????,??????????????? ??????????,???????? ? 3????? ??????,??????????????? ?? ???????,?????????,??????????? ??????(??)? ????????? ????????? ????????????????,????????? ?????????,????????? ? 1??????? ????????????? ?? ADJ. ?,??????? ???????? P??? + ? – ???????????, ? ? ? ?C/D ? ? ? ?? ?? ?? AE/AF ????????;??????????? AF ????;????????????????(P.70)??? ???????? AE ???;????????????????(P.64)???? ??????? ? ??????? ? 2????? ??????(P.37)???? C????????,???? /D? ??????????,?? ? DISP. ??? ????????? ? 3????? ???????????????????/???, ???????????????????? ?? • ???????????(P.65)????? • ?????????????????????,?????? ???????????????????,??????? • ??4??????????,?????? ADJ. ?,?? U,???? 68 ????,???????????????? ????????? • Fn ???????????????????(P.68)????, ???? Fn ????????,???????,ADJ. ??? ???????? ????????? ?????? ????????? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?? (P.136),????????????? ????????????????? ????????????;???? ???(P.37)???????????, ????C/D(??????? ????,??? DISP. ??)???? ????????????,???????????????? ???? ???? ADJ. ???????(P.66),??????,????? ?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ????????? ???????? ??????????(P.64)?????????(P.69)?, ??????????? 1m?1.5m?2m?2.5m?3m?3.5m? 5m ? 8(???)? ?? ??????????????????,?????????? ????? N ???????????????? ????????? ?????? ????????????????(P.64),?????? ????????????? ?? ?? ? ?????? ? ????????????,???????????? ???????????????????????? ????? ISO ? ISO ?????????????(P.90)??,????? ?? ????????????? N ??????????????? ??:???? ??????????,????????? ? • ????????????????????????(P.64), ?????????? • ?????????????????0 ????????? ????? ?????????????????(P.64)????, ???????????,?????????(??,? ??????????)??????????????, ??????????? ? • ?????????????????(P.64),????????? • ????????????????? ?? ??????????? ?? ?? ???? * ??????? 256 ?????? ???? ????????????,???????????? ????????????????????????? ??? ??????????????,?????????? ????????????????? * ??????? DIRECT ???? ????????????,?? ??????????????? ??? 4:3 N  ????????? ???? ?????????????(?????)???????? ?? ?? ?? ???????????????????????? ???? ?? * ?????????????? ?? ???????????????????????? ?? ?????????????????????? ??(TE) (????) ???????????????????????? ????????????????? ?? 1 ?? 2 ???????????????????????? ??????????????? * ??????? DIRECT ???? ?????????,????? ?????????????? 4:3 N ???????????(TE)??? 1 ??? 2 ???, ???????????? Fn2? ????????? ? 1???????????? • ??:?? + ? – ????? ?????? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?? ??? • ??(TE):??????? ?????????????? ????????,???? ???????? Fn2??? + ? – ?????????? ? Fn1 ????? • ?? 1 /?? 2:????? ????????????? ???????????,? ????????????? Fn2??? + ? – ????? ?????? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?? ??????????C/D??? ?????????,???????????? CFn2??? + ? – ??????????,???? /D????? ? 2????????? ???????C/D? ? 3??????? ??C/D,??? Fn1,????C/D? ????????? ????????????? ????????? 4:3 N ?? ?? ADJ. ??????????(P.134)? ?? ??????? • ??:????????,??? ???????? ??????????????? ?????????? • M ???(????????):????????,?? ????????????????,???????? ????,???????????? MP ??(P.95)? M ????? M ???(?)? M ???(?)???? ??? ????????… …????????????? ????????? ?? ?? M ???(?)? M ???(?)??,???????? ?? MP ????????????????????????? ??????????? ????????,?????? ????????????? 4:3 N ? ? M ??????,??????,????????????? ???? ?? • ????????,???????,??????????? ?????????????????,?????????? ??? AWB(P.86)? • ??????????? MP ???????????????, ????????????????? MP ??? ??:MP ?? MP ??????????????? ????????? ????? ?????????????????????? 2 ?? 3 ???? ?? ?? ? * ?????????? AE-BKT ???????????????????????? WB-BKT ??????????????:? ????????,?????? ???????????????? (P.86),???????????? ??????????????,? ?????? ?????? CL-BKT ????????????,??????????????? (P.77)? * ??????? DIRECT ???? ??????????????? ???? 4:3 N  ????????? ?? • ????????????,??????????????? ?????????? • ?????? · ??(P.61)???? RAW,????????? ??????????? • ????????????? • ??? AE-BKT ?,????????????? AWB? AE-BKT:????? ???????: ? 1?? AE-BKT? ???? AE-BKT,???? Fn2? ? 2???????? ?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ????,? ? + ? – ?????,??? ?C/D? ? 3??????? ??C/D,??? Fn1 ???C/D? ?? • ?????????????,????????? • ?????????????????? · ??????(P.140) ????? ????????? CL-BKT:??????? ????????? CL-BKT ?,??????????? ?????????? CL-BKT ??(TE)?????(P.146): • ?:????????????? ?,?????,??????? • ?:????????????? ?,?????,?????,? ??????????????? ?(TE)(P.71)??????? ??(TE)?? ??:????????????? ????????????????????????????? (P.71)??????????????????????????, ?????????(TE)???????????,????? ?????????????????(?????????(TE), ???????????????)? ????????? ????? ? –2.0 ? +2.0 ??? 1/2 ? 1/3 EV ?? ???????????????? ??????????????? ?;?? + ? – ????????? ??,????C/D? ????????,?????? ???????????? 4:3 N ?? • ??????????,???? 28 ???? • ?????????????????? · ??????(P.140) ????? ? ???????,???????????????????,? ????????????? ????????? ????? ?????????????????????(P.28)?? ??????????(????????): FULL 1/1.4 1/2 1/2.8 1/4 1/5.6 1/8 1/11 1/16 1/22 1/32 1/64 ?????????,????? ?????????? 4:3 N ?? ?????????,????????? ? ????????????????,???????????? ?????????????????? ??????? ?????????????? • ???:???????????????????? • ???:????????????????????? ????????0 ????????? ???? ?????????? ISO ????????????(? ???????????)????????? ISO ??? ????????? ISO ???? ???????????? 4:3 N ?? • ????? · ????? RAW(P.61)?,???????? JPEG ??,????? DNG ??? • ????????????????????????? ???? ISO ??????????????,??????????? ?? ISO ????????(??? ISO ???????? ???)?ISO 201 ???ISO 401 ???ISO 801 ???ISO 1601 ??? ISO3200 ?????? ????????? ???? ??????????,??????????????? ??? ???????????? 4:3 N ? • ???????????,???????????????? ???????????????,???????????? ?????,?????????? • ?????????? DNG ???????? JPEG ???MP ? ????? • ?????????,???????? • ?????????????????,?????????? ?? ???? ?????????,???????????????? ????????????,????????????? ?? N ???????????????? ????????? ????? ????????????????????????? ?,??????????????,????????: ? 1?????????????? ?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ??????,??? + ? – ????? ??C/D???????? ? 2????? ???????????????????????? ???? ???????????,??C/D ???? ?? ????????? ???? ??? 5 ?? 1 ?????????????,????? ???????????????: ? 1??????? ?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ??????? ?????,???? + ? – ???????C/D ? ??????? ???????????? 4:3 N ? 2????? ??????????????????????? ? 3????? ??C/D?????? ? •4??????????? • ??????????? 0? • ???????????????????,???????? ??,???????????? • ???????????????????????????? ????????? ?? • ?????????,?????????????????? ????????????????,?????????? • ????????????????? • ????????? M ???,?????????? ?????? ????????????????????(YY/MM/DD) ???????(YY/MM/DD hh:mm)??? ??????????,?? DATE? 4:3 N ?? • ???????????????????????????? ???(P.20?149)? • ??????????? • ????? · ????? RAW ?,?????? JPEG ???,? ???? DNG ???? • ??????????????????? ????????? ???? ??????????????: • ??????:?????????????????? ?????????? • ?????????:??????????????? ????? • ?????????(??,???????????): ???????????????????? ? 1?????????? ????????????? ?,???? Fn2 ????? ??????? ? 2??????? ?? + ? – ??????????????????? ?,???C/D??????? ? 0.0 ??????,?????? ????????? 4:3 N  ????????? ? M ??????????? ?? ?????????????????? · ???????? (P.140)????? ??? ??????? AWB ?,??????????,??? ???????,?????????????????? ??????????,?????????????? ?? ?? ?? * ??????????? ?? AWB ??????????????????????(?? ???,????????)? ?? ???????????? ?? ?????????????? ??? ????????? ??? ????????? ???? ???????(P.88)? ???? ??????????(P.88)? * ??????? DIRECT ???? ????????? ?????????,????? ?????????????? 4:3 N ? • ??????????,????????????????? ??????????????????? • ??????,????????????????????? ????? ? 1???????? ?????????????,???? Fn2 ????? ? 2??????? ?? + ? – ??????? ???????????,??? ADJ. ??C/ D??????? ?? ????? ADJ. ???????????(P.134)? ????????? ??:????? ???????????: ? 1??????? ??????????? ? ???? ? 2?????? ????????????? ??,????????? DISP. ??????? 1 ? 2 ? ???????? ? 3??????? ??C/D???????? ?? ???????????????????? ????:?????????? ???????????????: ? 1??????? ??????????? ? ?????? DISP. ??? ????????? ? 2??????? ?? + ? – ???????? ???????C/D? ? 3??????? ??C/D???????? ?? ???????????????????????? ????? ?????-?????-?????????????? ?????????????????????????? ??????? ?????????????(P.58) ??????????????? ???(P.37)????????? ? DISP. ???????????? ??????C/D???? ????,??? DISP. ????? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??? ??0 ????????? ???????????????? 4:3 N ?? • ????????? ADJ. ?(P.134)? C??????,?????????? /D? • ?????????? Fn ??(P.136)? • ?????????4?,?? ????????????? • ?????????????(P.109) ???????????????????? ISO ??? ?????????????????????,???? ?,???????????????? ISO ???? • ??:?????????????????????? ?????????????????????? • ?????:??????????????????? ???,????????????????????? ??????????? ISO ??????????? (P.140)? ????????? • ISO(?):???????? ISO ????????? ISO ????????????????????????? ????? ??????????????(? ???????????,??? ??????????????? ????)? 2.5 ISO 200 ? 1???? ISO ?????? ?? + ? – ??????? ? 2?????????? ??????????,???C/D ???? ??? ?? • ????? ADJ. ?????? ISO ?????(P.134)? • ???????????????????????????? ?????????????????? • ????????????????“??”(???????? ????)? ??????? ????????????(P.59),????????? 5 ???????????????????????? ?????;??????,????C/D ??? ?????????? ????????? ?????? ?????????????,???????????? ?????? ?? ??????????????????? ?????? ?????????“MY”??? (P.57)?,????????5?P? A?S ? M ??????,???? ??????????????? ?? MY ?????;??,??? ????? MY ???,????? ??????? ?????????????????????????? E??????????????? ????????? ? • ???????????????? • ???????????,???????????????? 1 ?????,?????????????????????, ???????????????? 1 ?????,????? ???,E????F;??????,E???? • ???????????????????(??????)? ????? • ???????????????????????? ?? ???????????,J???????????????  ???? ???????????? MP ??? ???? ???????????? ? 1??6??? ??6?????????????? ? 2????? ?? +?–?Fn1 ? Fn2 ??(P.34) ????,????????? ????????? 3 ??? ?? ? 3????? ?? ADJ. ???????????????????, ????????: ?? ?? ?? ??/?? z/Z ?? z ?????,?? Z ??????? ??????,?? z ? Z ??????? ?????;?????????????? ?? ??/?? ADJ. ?? ADJ. ????;????????? ???? +/– ?? + ?????,?? – ??????? 2010????  ?? MP ?? ?? M ????????,???????? MP ???? ???????? MP ??? ?? ????????????????????????????? ???? ? 1??6??? ? 2?? MP ??? ??? MP ?????S??? ????????? 2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.0 1/55 ?? 2 ??? • ?? DISP. ????“??”?“???”?? ??? • ??????,????? z ??????? ????????????? • ?????????????? z ADJ.? Z 2010/03/01 14:09 F 3.3 6/6 1 55 ?????? • MP ??????????????? • ??????(P.37)??????? • DISP. ??????? z ADJ.? Z 100-0001 6 6 2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0 F 3.3 1/55 ???? • ???????????????? • ?? z ?????? ADJ.?????  2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0 F 3.3 1/55 100-0001 2 6 ????? • ???????????????????? ???????????? ??/?? ?? ADJ. ?? ?? ?????? z? ?? ?????? Z? ?? ?????? z? ?? ?????? Z? ????? ?????? z? ????? ?????? Z? ??? ???????? ADJ. ?? ???? ???????? ADJ. ?? ? • DPOF???????????????(????)????? ???????????? MP ??? • ???? MP ??????????????????????? ??????????????????????????,? ?????? MP ?????????? • MP ????????????????  ?? MP ?? ???????? MP ????????,??????? ????????? ?? • ????????????????? • ?????,????????? ? 1??6??? ? 2?????? MP ??? ????S??? MP ??? ????????,???? ?? z ????????? ?,?????? 3? 2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.0 1/55 ? 3??C/D? ??????? ? 4?? + ? – ????????, ???? Fn2?????  ?? 1 ??? ? 5?? + ? – ?? 1 ?? ?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ????? ? 6??C/D? ???????? ? 5?? + ? – ??????,????C/D? ???? 97 ????? 2 ?? ?????,????? 5? ? 6?? + ? – ??????,? ???C/D? ? 7????,????C/D? ?? ADJ. ?????????????????? 99 ????? 7 ???? ? 8???? 7 ??????? C??????????,????????,???? /D? ? 9?? N ??? 10???,????C/D?????  ????????? ? 5?? + ? – ??????,????C/D? ???? 97 ????? 2 ?? ?????,????? 5? ? 6?? + ? – ??????,? ???C/D? 7??????????????,????C/D? ?????????????,? DISP. ?????? ??????? ?? ADJ. ?????????????????? 98 ????? 7 ???? ? 8????????????? ?,????C/D? ?????? ?? ?? ? 9???? 7 ? 8 ??????? 10?? N ??? 11???,????C/D????? 00 ?????? ? 5?? + ? – ??????,? ???C/D? ? 6???,????C/D?0 ???? ???? ?????????????????????????? ??? ???? ????????6??,????????? ? 1??????? ??C/D? ? 2????????? ?? + ? – ?????,?? Fn2 ????????? ????? ?? ??? DIRECT ??????? – ??????????? ??????????: ?? ?? ?????? 102 ?????? 103 ?????? 104 ?? 105 ???? 106 ????? 109 ???? 110 ?? ?? ????? 111 ?? 112 ???????????? 115 DPOF 115 ?????? 97 ???? 1170 ???? ?? ?????????????(P.126)??? ?????? ???????????????????(????? 20 ???),???????????????????? ??? ????/?????? ?????????????,?????,????C/D? ????????????????,???? Fn2 ?????? ??????,????C/D? ?? • ????????,?????????? • ??????? 20 ???,???????????????? ????,?????????? ????/?????? ??????????????????? ? 1????????? ??????? z ??? ? 2????? ???????????C/D? ? 3????????,???? Fn2? ?????? ?????0 ???? ? 4??????? ?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ????????,????C/ D?????????????????????? ??????,?????????C/D? ? • ????????????????????????,??? ???????????? • ??????????? SD ????,??????????? ???????????? • ? SD ???????????????????,????? SD ?????? [CLIPINFO] ???? CLIP.CLI ????????? ??????,???????????????? • ??????????????,????????????? ????? • ??????????????????????????? ?????? ????????????????,????????? ??????? ?? • ??????????????????????? • ???????6??????????0 ???? • ???????????????,???????????, ??????????? • ????????????????,??? N ??????? ?????????? • ???????????????????,?? +?–?Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????????????????? ?????? ???????????,?????????????? ?(P.101)?????????? L?M?5M ? 3M ??(P.61) ????????? 1M ? VGA ?????,??? 1M ? ?????????? VGA ????????? RAW ?? ??????????? ?? • ?????????? 4 : 3???????????? 16 : 9?3 : 2 ? 1 : 1,??????????????????,?????? ????? • ?????????????????,???? 61 ????0 ???? ?? ?????????????,???????????? ?? ? 1????? ??????????????? ? 2????? ??C/D??????,??????,?? ?? Fn2???????,??? DISP. ??? ? 3????? ?? z ? Z ??????????,??????? (P.37)????????,????C/D? ? • ?????????????????? • ??????? MP ??? • ?? RAW ??(P.61),???????? JPEG ??? • ????????,??,??????????????? ?? • ?????????,?????????? FINE?????? ????,?????????? • ???????????????????????????? z ???,?????????????,?????? 13 ?? • ??????????????????????(????? ?)??????0 ???? ???? ?????????????????????????, ????????????? ??:?????? ? 1????? ???????????????? ? 2??????? ? ?C/D ? ? ? ? ? ?,??????????? ?? Fn2? ? 3????? ????????? Fn2??? ???????,????? ??????,?????? ?,??????????? ????????,???? ?????????,??? ???????? ? 4????? ??C/D?????????????,??? DISP. ???????????????,????? ???????0 ???? ??:?????? ????????,????????????????, ?????????,????????? ? 1???????????? ????????????, ????????????? ????,??????(??) ????????(??)? ?????? ADJ. ?????? ??????????,?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ???????,? ????????????? ?????????????, ??? N ??;???????????????? ? 2????? ??C/D?????????????,??? DISP. ???????????????,????? ??????? ? ? ? ?: ? ?? ??????0 ???? ??:??????????? • ????:???????,???? ????????????????? ??? • ?????:???????,??? ????????????????? ??(???)????????,? ????????????????? ????????????????? ????????? ?????? • ?????:???????,??? ????????????????? ????????????????? ???????? ? • ???????????????????????????? ??? M ???????????????????????? • ????????????,??,???????????? ???0 ???? ????? ???????????? ? 1????? ???????????????? ? 2???????? ??C/D??????, ????????????? ? Fn2? ? 3?????? ??????(P.37)???? ?????? DISP. ????? ??????????? ? 4??C/D? ??C/D ?????(?????????? ??,???? DISP.)?????????????, ????????????0 ???? ? • ???????????????????????????? ???? M ???????????????????????? • ??????????,??,??????????????? ???? ??????(???????)???,??????? ??????? ? 1????? ???????????????? ? 2??????? ??C/D??????, ????????????? Fn2???????????? ???????,?????? ?????,???????? ????????????? 5 ???;????????,??? Fn2 ??? + ?? ????????????????????????, ?????????????? ???? ? 3??C/D? ????????????,???????????? ???????? 2 ? 46 ?,???????? ? ????????????????????????????? ?? M ??????????? RAW ??(P.61),?????? ??? JPEG ??? ?? • ?????????????????????,?????? ?????: ?? ??(???) ?? ??(???) L 24 ? 3M 8 ? M 18 ? 1M 5 ? 5M 12 ? VGA 2 ? ????????,?????????(P.104)?????? ???????,???????????? • ????????????????????? • ??????????????(P.56)? ????? ???????????????????????? 3 ? ???????????,?????????? ???,??????????;??????????? ????? ???? ?? ??????????????? ?????????? 4:3 N ? ??????????,????????? ?????? ??????????????? ????,?????,???? ???????,?? Fn2 ?? ????????(?????? ??,??? Fn1 ? Fn2 ???? C??)???????????? /D? ???? ??????????? ????????????????????? ? 1??????????,??? Fn2? ?????????,??? ?? 2?????????,? ????????????? ??????????C/ D? ? 2???????????? ??????????,?? ? Fn2 ????????? ?????????????, C?????????,??? /D ???? 3??? ???????????,? C????????,??? /D???? 3.1? ? 3????? ??????(P.37)???? ?????C/D??? ????? ??????? ??????,?????? ???????C/D ? ?? 4:3 N 4:3 N  ???? ??:???? ??????????????,??? ADJ. ?????? ??: 3.1 ????????????? ?????,????C/ D???????????? ????????????,? ?? DISP. ??? 4:3 N 3.2 ?????????????? ??,????C/D?? ????????? ??? ?? 4:3 N ???? 3.1–3.2 ???????,?? ADJ. ?????? 3 ???????????????? ? 4?? N ??? ?????????????????,?????? ?????????????????? ????????????????? ????????,?????,? ?? Fn2???????????? ??C/D????????? ????,??????????? ????C/D? ???? ???????????? ?????????????????????,???? ????????,????????????????? ???????????,???????????;?? ???,??????????? ?? • ?????????????????????????,?? ????????????????????????,??? ??????C/D;??????????????,? ????? • ??????????????????? DPOF ????????????????,????????? ?????“????”,???????????????, ?????????? DPOF ???????????? ?? ??? RAW ??????,???? JPEG ??? ??:DPOF DPOF(????????)????????????????? ????????????????? DPOF ????(P.9)? ???? ?????????? ??????????????? ??,?????,?????? ??? DPOF ??? Fn2,??? ????????(?????? ??,??? Fn1 ? Fn2 ???? C??)???????????? /D? ?????????? ????????????,?? ? DPOF ??? Fn2,?????? ?????????C/D? ??????????????, C??????????????? /D? ?????????? ???????????????: ? 1?? DPOF? ???????????C/ D ??????????? DPOF ??? Fn2? ???? ? 2???????????? ?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????????,?? + ? – ?? ?????????????????????,?? ? – ???? 0? ? 3??C/D? ??????????????,????????? ???????????????? ???? ???????????,???????????? C?,???? Fn2?????????????,???? /D? ?? ???????????,????????? ? ?????????,???????? • ????? • ???????????? • ?? DPOF???????????????????????? ?????????????????? • ???? DPOF ????? • ????????? SD ??? • ?????????????? • ?????????? MP ?? ???? ????????? ???????????,?????? A/V ?????? ????? ? 1???????? ????? A/V ?????,????????? ? 2? A/V ?????????? ?????????????, ????????????? ????????????? ?? ????(??) ????(??) ? 3???????? ?????,??????? A/V ??????????? ? 4???????????? ?????????????? ??????? ? 5???????? ?? 6 ??? 1 ???????????????? ???????????????,???????? ????????? ???? ? ????? A/V ???????????,????,????? A/V ???? ?? • ?????????????????????,?????? ????? DVD ?? • ?????????? HDMI ?????(??)????? HDMI ??????????????????? • ??????? HDMI ?????,????????????? ???,??????? HDMI ?????,????????? ???? • ?? HDMI ??????????????????,????? ????? • ??????????????:NTSC(???????????? ????????????????)? PAL(???????? ?????????????????????????)??? ? SECAM????,????????????????????; ?????????????????????,?????? ????(P.149)?0 ???? ???? ???????????? USB ?????????,?? ????????????????????? ? ?????????? RAW ??????,???? JPEG ??? ?? ???????? PictBridge,????????????????, ?????????? PictBridge ?????????????? ??? PictBridge ???,???????????? ??????? ?????? USB ?????????????? ? 1???????? ????? USB ?????,????????? ? 2? USB ?????????? ?? USB ?????????????? ???? ? 3???????? ?????,??????? USB ?????? ?? ADJ. ????????? ?,??????????? ??;?????? ADJ. ?? ?? ?????????????? ADJ. ?,??????,2 ? ???????????????,??????????? ???????,????????????? ADJ. ?? ???????? PictBridge ????(? PictBridge ? ??????,????????????????? ?)? ? ?? USB ????????????????????,????? ???? ?? ??????????,??????????????? ????,??????????;?????????? ????? ? ?????????? USB ???? ?? ??????????,?????????????? ???????? ???????????: ? 1????? ?? Fn1 ? Fn2,????? ??? PictBridge ????? ??,???? ADJ. ??? ????????????; C????????,???? /D? ??:?????????? ????????????,??? ADJ. ???????? ???,????????? ???? ? 2???????? ????????????? ??;?????????? ? Fn2 ???????,?? ????????????? ??????(?????? ???????;????? ??????????)??? + ? – ??????? ?,????C/D ???????????? ?? ?? ?? ???? ??????? ???? ??????? ???? ?????????? ???? ??????????????????????? ????,???? 20?149 ?????????? ?????(P.84)???,????????? ????? ??????? ???? ??????????????? ?????? ??????? ???? ??????? ???? * ????? ???? ??????? ???? * ???????????? ??/?? * ???????????? * ?????????????http://www.ricoh.com/? ???? ?? ??????????????? ?????????????,? ?? ADJ. ??????????? ??????;???????? ?C/D????????? ?????????? ? 3????? ??????,???? 2 ???????????? ???C/D?????????????;? ?????????,??? DISP. ????????, ??????? PictBridge ????? ???? ?????? ???????????: ? 1??Z??? ????????????? ? 2????? ???????????C/ D? ? 3??????? ?? + ? – ???????? ???? ????;??? ?????,??? – ??? ? 0? ? 4??????? ?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????????,?? + ? – ?? ??????? ? 5???????? ??C/D ????????????? 123 ? ???????? ? 6????? ??????,?????????????C/ D?????????????;???????? ??,??? DISP. ????????,?????? ? PictBridge ????? 4:3 N  ????? ????? ??????????(P.58?101)?????????? ????? ? 1????? ??C/D ??????????(P.58)(?? ????,???? MODE ??)? ? 2??????? ?? Fn1 ????????? ???,?? + ? – ???? ?????????(P.127) ?????(P.128)??? Fn2 ??????????? 1 2 1??????? 2???? ? 3????????? ?? + ? – ???????? ??,???? Fn2 ???? ???????? ? 4??????? ?? + ? – ????????,????C/D ???????(???????????;???? ??????)? ????? ?????????????? ?? ??? ?? ?????? — 129 ?????? — 131 ?????? — 132 Fn ??????? ? 133 ??????? ? 133 ADJ. ??? 1 ??? 134 ADJ. ??? 2 ISO 134 ADJ. ??? 3 ?? 134 ?? ??? ?? ADJ. ??? 4 ???? 134 ADJ ?????? ? 135 Fn1 ???? AF/MF 136 Fn2 ???? ???? 136 +/– ???? ???? 137 ???????? ?? 1 138 M ?????? ?? 1 138 ?? M ?? ???? 138 ????? ??????????: ?? ??? ?? ??? [ ??? ] — 139 ??? [ ???? ? ] — 139 ??????? — 139 DIRECT ????? ?? 140 ?? · ?????? 1/3EV 140 ISO ?????? AUTO 400 140 AF ??? ? 140 ???? 5 ? 141 ?????? 5 ? 141 ???? ??? 141 ??????? ? 142 ?????? 0.5 ? 142 ??? ?? 142 ?????? (?) 142 ???? 9.8 ? 143 ???? ? 143 ?? ??? ?? ?????? ?? 144 ????? ?? 144 ?????? 144 Fn ?????? ? 145 ???????? ? 145 ??????? ? 145 CL-BKT ??(TE) ? 146 ?????? sRGB 146 ?????? ?? 147 ?????? ? 147 ????? ? 148 ???? — 149 Language/L (?? * ) 149 ???? (?? * ) 149 HDMI ?? AUTO 149 ??????? ?? 150 * ??????????? ? • ???????????????????????????? ???????????????? • ???????????????????????????? ????? ????? ????? ?????? ??????? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ?????????? ??????,??????????????????? ? 6 ???? ? 1????? ???????????????????????? ??????: •4?????:????(5?P?A?S?M ? ??)?????(?4???)???(? A ? M ???)?????(? S ? M ???)??? ?????????????????? • ??????:???????????????? ??????????????????????? ??(P.133),??????????? • ????:Fn1 ????/ Fn2 ????(? Fn ?? ???????????;???? 133 ???)? +/– ?????ISO ????????? · ????? ??????????????????????? ???????CL-BKT ??(TE)???????? ?? ????????????????????????????? ???????????????0 ????? ? 2????????? ????????????? ??????,???? Fn2? ? 3????? ????????? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ? ? ? ?, ? ? ? ? C? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ? ? ? /D(???????? ????,??? DISP. ??)? ????????????? ??????????“?” ?(P.131),???????? ??? Fn2????????? ??C/D? ????????????? ?????????????, ????????????? ????????????? ?,??????????? ?????? ????? ?????? ?“?”?????? MY1?MY2 ? MY3? ?????????????????,?? Fn2,??? ?????? ? 1????????? ?????????????? ??(MY1?MY2 ? MY3)?? ? Fn2? ? 2??????? ????????????? C????????,???? /D? ?????????????????,??? DISP. ??? ? ????????????????????????,???? ????????????????,???????????? ?? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ??????????????????? ????????,???????????,???????? ???? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ???????? ????? ?????? ???????????????????? ?????????????????,?? Fn2,??? ?????? ? 1??????? ??????????? MY1? MY2 ? MY3 ?????,?? ??? MY1?MY2 ? MY3 ?? ? Fn2? ????“?”??,??? ???????? Fn2???? ??????? Fn2? ? 2????? ?? + ? – ??????,?? ?? Fn2 ????(????? ?,???????????? ????)????????, ?? Fn1 ???????,?? ????????? ? 3???????? ??C/D ???????(???????? ????,??? DISP. ??)? ????? ??:?????? ??? 2 ?????(???)??? ????????????????? ??;????????,??? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????????,?? – ? ??????????(?????? ??,??????????? –)?? ? +?–?Fn1 ? Fn2 ???????, ??C/D?????????? ????????(???????? ??????,??? [ ?? ])??? t ????????????????????? 32 ????? ? ADJ. ???,??? DISP. ?????????????? Fn ??????? ????????? Fn ?????(P.136)?????? ????? MY ??? ??????? ?????????????(P.89)????????? ?? MY ??? ???? ???? ????? ADJ. ??? ? 5?P?A?S ? M ???,??? ADJ. ????? 4 ? ????,???????????????,ADJ. ??? ????(P.86)?ISO ???(P.90)?????(P.61)?? ???(P.71)??????????;?????(P.89)? ??(P.64)???(P.70)???(P.73)???(P.75)??? ??(P.78)??????(P.79)?????(P.85)? ?4???,ADJ. ??????????????? ?(????????????)? ????? ?? ADJ. ? ??????? ADJ. ?????????: ? 1????? ???????? ADJ. ?,??????????, ??? Fn1 ? Fn2,????????????? ??1 ??2 ?? 4 ?? 3 ? 2??????? C?? + ? – ??????,???? ADJ. ???? /D? ?? ?? ADJ. ????????????? ADJ ?????? ????? ADJ. ??????????????????? ????? Fn1/Fn2 ???? ????????????? Fn1/ Fn2 ??????? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?? ???? ????????? Fn1 ? Fn2 ?????? ?? ?? AF/MF ?????????????(P.64)?????* 1, 3 AF/Snap ?????????????(P.64)?????* 4 AE ?? ?????* 2, 5 JPEG>RAW* 10 ??????? · ????? RAW ????,??? Fn ?? ????????????? RAW ??(P.61)?* 5. 6 ?? > ?? ??????????(P.71)?* 7 ?? >TE ??????????(TE)(P.71)?* 7 ???? ?????????(P.85)?* 5 ??? ???????(P.86)? WB ?? ?????????(P.89)?* 9 ISO ?? ISO ?????(P.90)?* 7 ?? ?????? · ????(P.61)? ?? ??????(P.64)?* 4 ???? ????????(P.71)?* 7 ?? ??????(P.70)?* 7 ?? ??????(P.73)?* 8 ????? ??????(P.75)?* 8 ???? ????????????(P.68)?* 3 ???? ?????????(P.78)?* 4,5 ??? ???????(P.79)?* 8 ????? * 1 ????????(P.64)?????,?????????????? ??????? * 2 ??? M ??????????? M ?,?? Fn ?????????? ???????????????? * 3 ?4????????????????????? * 4 ?4???????????? * 5 ?4???????????? * 6 ?4?????????????? * 7 ??????,?4??????? * 8 ?4??????? * 9 ????,?4??????? * 10 ??? RAW ??????????????? · ??????????? ?? ???? · ????? RAW ???? L(16:9)?M(16:9)?5M?3M?1M?VGA RAW(16:9) L(4:3)?M(4:3) RAW(4:3) L(3:2)?M(3:2) RAW(3:2) L(1:1)?M(1:1) RAW(1:1) ?????,AF/MF ???? Fn1 ??,??????? Fn2 ??? +/– ???? ?????? + ? – ???????????????(P.78)? ???(P.79)?????(P.85)? ????? ????????/ M ?????? ????????? M ?,??? ADJ. ???????? ?? ???????? M ?????? ?? 1 ?? 2 ?? 1 ?? 2 ADJ.? ???/??? ??/??? ???? ?? ?? ?? ??/?? ??/??? ?? ???? ?? M ?? ????????? + ? – ??(P.137),?? AE ???? ?? Fn1 ? Fn2 ??(P.136)?,??????????? ???????????/?????????????? ???????????????? • ????:????????;??????????? ?????? • ????:??????????;????????? ?????? • ??:???????????????????? ?? ????????,???? + ? – ????????,???? ? Fn ???? AE ??? ????? ????? ????????/?????????? ?????????????????????????: ?????,?????????,?????????? ?????????????????????????? ??,?????????????? ? • ???????????????????????????? ???,???????????????????(P.151)? • ??????????????????,?????????? ???????????????? ??:??? ??????????,?????????“LOCK”??(P.16)? ???????????????? ??????? ??????????????? ???? + ? – ???????? ??,??C/D ????? ????????C/D ?? ?????????0 ????? ?? ??????????????(????)????????(? ???;???????????,????????????? ??)? DIRECT ????? ??? DIRECT ??????????????????? ?????? ?? · ?????? ?????????????????? 1/2EV ? 1/3EV? ?? ????????,????? · ????????? 1/2EV,?? ?????? 1/3EV? ISO ?????? ????????? ISO ?????????????, ????????????(P.90)?????????: ISO 200(AUTO 200)?400(AUTO 400)?800(AUTO 800)? 1600(AUTO 1600)? 3200(AUTO3200)? ?? ??????????????????(?????????? ??)? AF ??? ?????,???????? AF ?????????? ????? ????? ???? ??????????????????????1 ??? 5 ??? 30 ?????????,????/?????? ???????????????? ? • ??????,?????????????: • ???????????????????? • ?????? OFF ??,????6?????????? • ??????,????????????? ?????? ???????????????,?????????? ????????(?????????)?1 ???5 ?? ? 30 ??????? ?? ???????????????,?????????????, ????????? ???? ? LCD ???(VF-2)????????,? LCD(??? ??)? VF(???)?????????????? ???????,??????????,??????? ??????? ????? ??????? ??????,?????,????? 5 ??????? ??????????,??????????????? ?????????????????? ?????? ?????????????????????????? ??????:0.5?1?2 ? 3 ????(???????? ???????,????????????,????? ?;???? 38 ? 39 ???)???(???????? ????????)? ??? ???????????? ?? ?? ?? ????????????????????,??????? ??????????????????? + ??(P.32),?? ????????????????????? ???? ???????????????? + ??,???????? ??????????????? ??? ???????????????????????????? ??????? + ??,????????????????? ?????? ?????? ??“???”??????????????? (?)? (?)? (?)? (?)? ????? ???? ????C/D??? ADJ. ??????(P.38)?? ?????????? 5.7 ??9.8 ?? 16 ?? ?? • ?????????(P.38)?????? • ????????????????????,??????? ?????????(P.38)? ???? ?????????????????????? ? ????? M ???(P.73)???????????????? ????????????????????????????? ????????,???????????????????? ???????,???????????????????:? ????????,???????????,???????? ????? ?? ??????????????,?????????????? ??????????????????,?????????? ????????? ????? ?????? ???????????????????? ????? ?????????????????????????? ????????????????(P.32)? ?????? ?????????????????(P.42)? ?? ?? 3×3 ???????? 4×4 ????,???????????????, ????????????????????? ?????? 2×2 ????,??????,???????? ?????????? ????? Fn ?????? ????,????? Fn ???? ??????????:???? ?,???????,????? ???????????? ???????? ????,???????? MY1? MY2 ? MY3 ???,?????? ??????????????? ??? ??????? ????,?????????? ????????(P.8),???? ??????????????? ?????????? 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 4:3 N  ????? CL-BKT ??(TE) ???????????(P.77)???????????? ??????????? 3 ???(?????,???? ?,??????????),?????? 2 ???(? ????,??????)? ?? ????????,????????(TE)?,??????? ? 3 ???? ?????? ??????????????sRGB ????????? ?,????? AdobeRGB ??? ? Adobe RGB ????? Adobe Systems Inc. ??,????? Adobe Photoshop ???????????????????????? ?,??????? Adobe RGB ??????????????? ??,?? Adobe RGB ???????????????;??? ?????????????????,????????? sRGB ?????????? ????? ?????? ?????????????????? • ??:???????????????,?????? ?????? · ????????,????????? • ????:????????,???????????? ??????????,??,??????????? ????????????????????????? ????? ???? · ????? L ? 4:3 ?(P.61),??????? ??? ????????,?????? ?????????? 4:3 N ? ?4?????? M ?????????,?????? · ? ???? RAW ?,????????? ?????? ?????,??????????????????? ????? ????? ???????????????????????? • ?:?????“R”??? 0010001 ? 9999999 ???? ???? 7 ?????(??:“R0010001.jpg”)???? ?????,????????????????? • ?:?????“RIMG”??? 0001 ? 9999 ????? ??? 4 ?????(??:“RIMG0001.jpg”)????? ????,???????? 0001? ?? • ???????????????????????“RIMG”? 4 ?????? • ?? DL-10(P.151)??????????“RIMG”? 4 ???? ???? • ??????(P.146)??? AdobeRGB ????????? ??????????(??,“_R010001.jpg”?“_RIMG001. jpg”)? ? ?????,???????????? 999 ???????? 9999 ???????,???????????;?????,? ??????????? 9999 ???,???????????? ??????,???????????????,?????? ??? ????? ???? ???????(P.20)? ?? ??????????????? 2 ??,?????????? ????????? Language/L ???????????????? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??????? ?? English ?? ???? Deutsch ?? ???? Français ?? ?? Italiano ???? ?? Español ???? ???? ????????????????(P.118)?,???? ?????????????????????? NTSC ? PAL,??? SECAM? HDMI ?? ???? HDMI ????????????????? AUTO ?????? ?? ??????? AUTO????? AUTO ??????????? ??????,??????????????????0 ????? ??????? ??????,??????????????? ?????????????????????? ???????? ???????? ?????????????????????????? ??? Windows ??;?? Macintosh ????????? 162 ???? ?? ????????????????????????? Windows ??????????????????: • ????? DL-10 ??(P.153),???? 159 ????? ?????????? • ??? DL-10 ?????????????(P.160)? ?? ??????????????????????(???)? ???????? ???? ?????????,???????????????? ??????????????? ???? Windows 2000 Professional SP 4?Windows XP Home Edition/ Professional SP 3?Windows Vista SP 2 CPU Windows 2000/Windows XP:Pentium® lll 500MHz ??? Windows Vista:Pentium® lll 1GHz ??? ?? Windows 2000/Windows XP:256MB ??? Windows Vista:512MB ??? ?????? ?????? 160MB ?? 1024×768 ?????,???? 16 ??? ?? • ???????? • ??? USB ?? ? • ??? 64 ?????????????????????,?? USB ???????????? Service Pack ????????? ????,?????????????? • ???????????? USB ?????????? PCI ??? ????????????? USB ?????? USB ????? ?????,?????????????? • ????????????????????? ???????? ???? ??????????????? ???????????? • ?????:??????? DL-10:????????????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio:??? ??????????????? ???,??? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ?????????????:http://www.pixela.co.jp/ oem/irodio/e/irodio_digitalphoto_videostudio/ USB ????:???????????????? Windows 98?Windows 98 SE?Windows Me ? Windows 2000 ?????? ????? WIA ????:???????????????? Windows XP ?Windows Vista ??????????? • ?? CD-ROM ???:??????,????? Adobe Reader(P.156)?????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ? ???????,???“Irodio Photo & Video Studio”? ????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio.exe? ???????? ???? ????????????????????? Windows XP? ? • ????????????,??????????????? • ??“Caplio”????????,?????????“DC”? ???? Caplio ?????????: Caplio ?? DC ?? RICOH Gate La DL-10 Caplio Viewer DU-10 * Caplio Server SR-10 * Caplio Setting ST-10 * * ??????? ???????? Caplio ??,????? DC ???,???? ?????? Caplio ??????????????????? ??? DC ??,????????? Caplio Viewer?Caplio Server ? Caplio Setting,????? Caplio ????????(???, ?? DC ???,????? 158 ??????? Caplio ??,? ????????)????,??????????????? ???? DL-10 ? RICOH Gate La ?????? • ???????????? • DL-10 ??????,?????????? ???????? ? 1???????? ????????????? ??????? • Windows Vista:????? ????????????? ??? Autorun.exe ???? ?????? • ?? Windows ??:??? ??????????? ? 2???????? • Windows Vista:?????????“??????” ?????????????????? • ?? Windows ??:?????????????? ??? ? 3???????????? ????????????? ?????????? ? 4????????? ????????????? ????????????? ??? ???????? ? 5??????,???????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ?? ??????(?????? ????????????? ?,??????????)? ????????????? ????? ? 6????? ?????,???????? ?????????????? ? 7??????? ????????????????????????, ???????????????????????? ? 8??? DL-10 ???? ????????????? Windows ?????? ??????????? DL-10 ???? ?? ?????????,???? 158 ???? ?? Adobe Reader ????????????(???) ??? Adobe Reader?????????? Adobe Reader,?????? ?????????? ? • ?????????????????? • ???????????? ???????? ? 1???????? ????????????? ??????? • Windows Vista:????? ????????????? ??? Autorun.exe ???? ?????? • ?? Windows ??:??? ??????????? ? 2???? CD-ROM ???? ???????????? ? 3?? Adobe Reader? ??“Adobe Reader”???,?????????? ??????????“AdbeRdr910”?????,? ?????????????????“??????” ???,?????? ?? • ?? Adobe Reader ???,??? Adobe Reader ????? • ?? Adobe Reader 9.1 ?? MSI(Microsoft Windows Installer)3.1 ? ?????? Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 ??????? Firefox 2.0 ? ? ? ? ??Microsoft Internet Explorer ? Microsoft Windows Installer ??? Microsoft Update ???? ???????? ???? ????????? DC ??? Irodio Photo & Video Studio? ? • ???????????? • ?????,????????????????? ? 1??“??/????”????? ?? Windows ??“??”????????? (Windows XP ? Windows Vista)???? > ????? ????/????? ? 2????? ?????????(DC ??? Irodio Photo & Video Studio)?????/?????????????? ???;???????????????????? ??,??????????????? ???????????????? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ?,???????? ???????? ?? DL-10 ???? ??? DC ???,???????????????? ? 1???????? ? 2????? USB ???? ?????????? USB ? ?? ? • ?? USB ?????????? ??????????,??? ?? • ???????,?????????? ????????????? ???????????,DL-10 ????,????????? ??????????“??? ?”??“Digital Camera”?? ?(??????? Caplio ??, ???????“Caplio”?? ??????)????????????????? ?;?????????????????????? ? 3??????????? ??????,???? 161 ????0 ???????? ?? ???????,???????? ?? DL-10 ??????? ?? DL-10“????”????? USB ???,??????? ????? ?????????????? ??? DL-10 ???? ???? DL-10,?????????????????? ???????Windows XP? ? 1???????? ? 2????? USB ???? ????????????? USB ??,?????? ???????????????????? ? 3??????????????? ???????????? ???????“??? ?”?,???????? ???????????? ????????,??? ????????,??? ???????????? ????,??????? “RICOHDCI”,?????????????????? ????????????????? ???????? ? • ???????????????USB???? • ??????????????????????????,?? ???????????? • ???????????????????????????? ???????????????????????????? ?????? ?????????? ???????????????, ????????“??????” ?“???????”??(?????? Windows XP ? ???),?????????????? USB ????? ????? USB Mass Storage Device??????? USB ? ??? ?? • ??? USB ??????????????????????? ?,?????????????????????????? ???,??????? • ???????????????????,???????? ?? ???????? Macintosh ????????? Mac OS X ?? 10.4–10.5.7 ???? ? VM-1 ??(P.164)??? Macintosh ?????? ?????? Macintosh ? 1???????? ? 2????? USB ???? ?????????? USB ? ?? ? • ?? USB ?????????? ??????????,??? ?? • ???????,?????????? ?????????????? ?????????????? ???????? ? 3??????????????? ???????????? ?????,?????? ???????????? ??????????,? ??????????,? ???????????? ??????,????? ? ?“RICOHDCI”, ? ? ? ???????????????????????? ???????? ?????????? ???????????????,?????????? ????,????????????????????? ?,?????? USB ???? ?? • ??? USB ??????????????????????? ?,?????????????????????????? ???,??????? • ???????????????????,???????? ?? • ????????? Macintosh ???????“FINDER.DAT”? “.DS_Store”????????????????,??????? ???????? ?? MP ????? ?? M ????????,????????? MP ??? ???? VM-1 MP ?????? Macintosh ????? MP ??,???????? ?????????????????? VM-1 ????? ???? MP ??????????? MP ???? MP ?? ?????????,??????????“????? ?????(???)”? ???? MP ?????????? ???? MP ???????????? ??????????????? ??????? Mac OS X 10.4 ? 10.5.7 Macintosh ?? Apple Inc. Macintosh ?? ????? Mac OS X 10.4 256 MB ??? Mac OS X 10.5 512 MB ??? ???????? 5 MB ??? ????? ???? Macintosh ???????? ?? VM-1 ???????????????? ???????? ??VM-1 ? 1???????? ?? Macintosh ?????????????????? ? 2??????? ?? RICOH ?? > VM-1 ??? > VM-1 Installer.pkg ? ????????? VM-1 ??;????????? ????????,???????,??????? ? 3??VM-1? ????,?????????,????????? ???????????;????? ????????,????????? .... ????VM-1,?????? ???????? ??VM-1 ? • ?????????????????????,???? VM-1 ????????????????? • ??????????,?? Mac OS ???????? ? 1??VM-1 ???????? ?? Applications ??? > Utilities ??? > VM-1 Utility ???? ? 2??VM-1 Uninstaller ??? ???????????,?????? ? 3????????,?????? ??????????????;????? ???? ???? ???? ???? ???????????,???????? ?? ?? ?? ?????? ?????????????? 15 ?????? ?????????????????? 20, 149 ???????? ?????????????????????? ?? 15, 148 ?????? ?????????????????????? ?????? — ????,??? ? ? ??????????????????????? 15 ???????? ?????????? 112 ????????????????(??)???????? 16 ???????? ?? ???????????????????? — ???? ?????????????????????? ???? 39, 139 ?????,???????????????? ??????? 0? 125 ???????? ??? ?????????????????????? 139 ???????? ?????????????????????? ??? 139 ????????? ???????????????,?????? ????;????????? 139 ????? ?????????????????? — ???? ????????? — ???? ?????????????????????? ????? 15 ???? ????????? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?????? ?? ??????????? ??? ??????????? ?????(????? ??)? 12, 14 ?????? ???????? 13 ????????? ??????????? 14 ?????? ???? ??????????? ?? ?????? 18 ???????? ?????(????? ??)? 12 ?????? ???????? 13 ?????? ?? ?????? ?????????? 14 ?????? ?,???? ?????? ?????? ?? ?????? ???????? 13 ??????? ??????????? ?? ????? 14 ?????? ???? ?????????? — — ???,??????? ???? — — ???? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?????? ?????? ?? ???????? ?????(????? ??)? 12 ??????????? ?????? ??????? ON ??? ??,??? 6 ???? ??? 18, 34 ?????????? ??6??????? 34 ?????????? ????????? 22 ???????? ??????? 139 ?????? ???????????? 15, 39 ??????????? ??? ??????? 15 ???????? ??????????? ?? 29 ??????? ??????? 16 ?????????? ????????? — ?????? ???? ????????? ?????????? 142 ?????? ?? ??????????? ??? ??????????? ????? 18, 139 ???????? ?? VF/LCD ?????? ???? 42 ?????? LCD ???? ?? VF/LCD ?????? ????? 42 ??? A/V ???? ?????? 118 ?????? ?????? ???? ????? ????????? — ?????????? ?????? 25 ??????????????????????? 25, 65 ?????????? ??????????? ?? 270 ???? ?? ?? ?? ?? ????? J ?????????? ??????????? ??????????? ????? 21, 92 ?????????? ??????????? ISO ?????????? ?????? 29, 90, 92 ?????? ?????? ??????? ?? OPEN/f ??(??? ??/??)?????? 29 ?????????? ????????? — ??????????? ?: • ??????????? ??????????? ???? • ????? • ????? ???????? 54, 73, 75 ?????????? ???????? OPEN/f ??(?????/??) ?????? 29 ???????? ?????(????? ??)? 12 ?????? ????? ??????????? ???? ?????? — ?????? ?????? 78 ?????? ?????? 78 ?????????? ????????? — ????? ?????? ?????,????? ???????? 78 ??????? ??????????? ?????? 50, 85 ???????? ?????????? 139 ????? ???????????? ?? ?? OPEN/f ??(??? ??/??)?????? 29 ??????? ??????????? ?????? 50, 85 ???????? ?????????? 139 ???? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?????? ??????????? ???????????? ??????????? ?????????? 86 ???????? ?????? ?? DISP. ????? 42 ????,? ?????? ????? ??????????? ???????? ???????????? — ??????? ??(“??”)? ?????? ???????????? — ?????? ??? ??????????? ??? ??????? + ??? 32 ?????? ?? DISP. ????? 42 ??????? ???????????? 21 ?????? ?????? ????,? ??????? ???????????? ??????????? ??? — ?????????? ?????? — ??/?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??????? ??????????? ??6? 19, 34 A/V ????????? ???? A/V ???? 118 ????????????????????? 149 ? LCD ???????? ??? ???????? LCD? 141 ???? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?????? ?????? ??????????? ????? ??????????? ??????????? ??????????? 15, 139 ??????????? ????? ?????????? ?????????? ????????? — ?????? ??????????? ?????????,? ??????????; ??????? — ?????? ??? ???????? ?????(????? ??)? 12 ??????????? ?? ?????? 18 ??????? ?????? ????? 112 ??????? ?????? ????????? 16 ??? ??????? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?????? ?? ?????????? ????????? 15 ?????? ?? ???????? ?????(????? ??)? 12 ?????? ??????????? ?? 18 ?????????? 14 ?????? ??????????? ??????????? ??????? 20, 149 ?????? ??????????? ???? ??????????? ??????? 20, 149 ?????? ???? ??????????? ??????? 141 ?????? ???? ????????? ??????????? ??? 32, 142 ???? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?????? ?????? ?????????? ?? ????????? 149 A/V ??????? ?? A/V ???? 118 ??????????? ??? ??????????? ??? — ?????? ??????,???????? PDF ????????? ????(???)? ????(Windows Vista/Windows XP) ?????????? DL-10 ?,? Windows XP Service Pack 3 ? Windows Vista Service Pack 2 ???????,???? ??????????Windows XP? ???????,??????? ???????????? ? ??????????????,?????????????? ??????????????? ???? ?????????????????,???Windows ? ???????? ? 1??“Windows ???”????? ??“??”??????? ??,???? Windows ?? ?(???? Windows ???, ????????????? ????????)? ? 2????????????? ?? ?“Windows ???”????, ?????????“??? ??”????? DL-10??? ??,??? DL-10 ????? ??????????,?? ????… ??? DL-10 ?? ?????? ??????????? DL-10,??????????? ?????????????????? ???? ?? ??? ?? ??(???????????,?????)??? ?????????????????????? ??(? ????) ?????????????? ???? ±2.0EV,? 1/2EV ? 1/3EV ??? ???? ? FULL?1/1.4?1/2?1/2.8?1/4?1/5.6?1/8?1/11?1/16? 1/22?1/32?1/64 ????? 3.0? ???????,? 92 ??? ???? ????????????????????????“? ???” ???? ??????RAW(DNG)* 1 ?? SD/SDHC ???;?????(? 86MB) ?? ?? * 2 (???) 5M ??:? 2287KB /? 3M ??:? 1474KB /? 1M ??:? 812KB /? VGA ??:? 197KB /? ???? ?? JPEG(Exif Ver.2.21)* 3 ?RAW(DNG) ?? AVI* 4 (?? OpenDML Motion JPEG ????) ?? ?? JPEG ????(?????) ?????? ????(???M ???);??(??????? 10 ?? 2 ?,??????);??????(??? 5 ?? 1 ??,? 5 ??????)* 5 ;?????? ?;??(TE);??????;????;?????; ????;????;?????;?? ?????? ??????;?????;????(?? 16 ?); ?????? ?? USB 2.0(??)Mini-B ??;????? * 6 ;???? 1.0Vp-p(75O);HDMI ???????(Type C) ?????? NTSC?PAL ?? DB-90 ?????(3.6V) ???? (?? CIPA ??)* 7 ?????????????? ???? ??(? × ? × ?)113.9mm×70.2mm×28.9mm(???????) ??(???) • ?????(????????????????): 160g • ?????????:66g ?????? 1/4-20UNC ?????? ? 1 ? ???? 0 °C ? 40 °C ???? 85% ??? ???? –20 °C ? 60 °C * 1 ???? JPEG ??(JPEG ???????????,??? RAW ??? VGA ????)?RAW ??????? Adobe Systems Inc. ????? DNG ??? * 2 ?? RAW?L?M ?????,?????????????? * 3 ? DPOF ??????????????(DCF,?? JEITA ??)???? ??????????? * 4 Audio:PCM 32 kHz,16 ? monaural ?? * 5 ?????????????? * 6 Windows 2000?Windows XP?Windows Vista ? Mac OS X 10.4–10.5.7 ???? ???? * 7 ?? CIPA ?????????;?????????????????? ????? ???? ?????/????? ???????,?????????????????? ?????????????????????????? ????????? ?? • ???????? 90 ??(??? 4GB)? • ????????????? 999?????????????? ?? 999 ?,???????“999”? • ???????,???????????????????? ?????? • ????????????????? • ????????,????????? ???? ????? ???????????????: ????? DB-90 ????? BJ-9 ??? CA-1 ????? ???????? USB ?????? ????? VF-2 LCD ??? ???????????????? ??????? 100% ??????, ???????????????? ? 90°,????????????? GF-1 ????? ???????????????, ??TTL ??????? ST-3 ?? ???? SC-55S ?? SC-55L ?? ?? • ????????,?????????????? • ???????????,???????(http://www.ricoh. com/r_dc/)?0 ???? ???????? SC-55S/SC-55L ?? ST-3 ?? CA-1 ????? DB-90 ????? (??) BJ-9 ??? (??) ??? USB ?? ????? ??????? ????? GF-1 ????? VF-2 LCD ??? ???? GF-1 ?????(??) ??? GF-1 ???????????? ? 1??????(P.2)? ? 2?????? ?????? GF-1,?? GF-1 ?????? ?? ? 3?????????? ? 4?? DIRECT ??? ? 5???????????? ??+?–?Fn1?Fn2?ADJ. ?(?????)???? ??????? ? 6???????? ???????????????? ?? • ? GF-1 ???,?????????????? • ???????????,??? GF-1? • ?????????????,??? GF-1 ????,???? ????????? ???? ??????? ??????????????????,??????? ???????? 20V ? X ?????????????? ???? ? 1??????(P.2)? ? 2?????? ??????????????,????????? ?? ? 3??????? ?????,???? A ? M,??????(P.18? 48?50)? ? 4?????? ISO ?????? ??????? ISO ?????(P.90)? ? 5?????? ???????????????????? ISO ?? ???????????????????????? ???????? ISO ???? ????????????,??????? ? • ?????????,???????????????,?? ????????????????????,??????? ???? • ???????????????????????????? ??????????????????????? ???? ?????? ?? BJ-9 ??? ?????? 100–240V ? 50 ? 60Hz ??????,?? ?????????????????????????? ????????????,??????????? ??? ??????????,??????????????? ??,?????????,????????????? ?,?????????????,????? ????? ????? A/V ???,??????????????? ???????????????? NTSC ? PAL ????; ???????????,????????????? ?????? • ???????,?????????????,??? ?????????????????????,??? ???????? • ????????????????????????? ????????????????????????? ??????? • ????????????????????????? ?????? ???? • ?????????????????,?????????, ??????????????,?????????????, ????? • ?????????????????????,??????? ????????????????? • ?????????????????????? • ?????????????????,??????????? ???????????????? LCD ??????????? ??? • ?????????? • ?????????????,?????????????? ???????,???????????????????, ????????????????????????? • ????????,??????????????????? ??????? • ???????????? • ???????????????????,???????? ?????? • ?????????????????,?????????? ??????????????????????????? ???? ??:???? ???????????????:?????????????, ???????,????????????,???????? ??????????? ????? ????? • ????????,????????????(??????) ?????? • ?????????????????,?????????? ????????????,??,???????????, ???????????????? • ??????,???????????? • ??????????????? • ???????????;????????? ?? • ????????????:????;?????????; ??????????;????;???????(???? ???????)????????;????????(??, ????????????)? • ?????????????,?????? ??? ???????????? ???? ???? 1. ????????????????????????????????, ???????????????????,???????????? ???????????????,???????????????? ??????? 2. ?????,???????,????????: 1 ????????????????????? 2 ??????????????????????????????? ??????????? 3 ????????????????????????????? 4 ????(“??????????”???)??????????? ????,?????????????????????? 5 ?(?)???????????????(?)????????? ?????????????????? 3. ??????,?????????????,??????????? ??? 4. ??????,??????????????????????,?? ???????????? 5. ?????????,?????????????????????? ????? 6. ????????,??????????????????????? ??? 7. ?????????,??????????????(??????? ????????????),????? 8. ?????????????? * ????????????,???????????????? * ??????????????????????? 9. ???????(?????????????????),????? ?????? 5 ?? 10. ?(?)???(?)????????????????,????? ???????????? ???? ?? • ?????????,?????????????????????? ?????? • ?????????????? • ?????????????,??????,??????????? ????? • ?????????????,???????????????? • ???,??????????????????? ?? ?? 5(??)??.....................................4, 21 d(??)??............................................39 O(DISP.)??...................................3, 42 N(??)??......................................3, 27 OPEN/f(???)??...................3, 29 6(??)??..................3, 19, 94, 101 t(??).....................................................3, 31 8/z ??...................................3, 26, 36, 38 9/Z ??..................................3, 26, 36, 38 A A(????)??.............................4, 48 A/V ???.................................................ii, 118 A/V ?????............................................... 3 ADJ ??????....................................135 ADJ. ?......................................................3, 5, 134 Adobe Reader................................................156 AF ???...........................................2, 31, 140 B ???..................................................................86 ?????.......................................................89 ???????........................................133 ??........................................................................75 ??????..............................................129 ??.....................................................................112 ??................................................................50, 85 ??................................................................ii, 179 ??????..............................................132 ??........................................................................26 ????.............................................................38 C Caplio..................................................................154 CL-BKT ??(TE)......................................146 ??................................................71, 75, 86, 89 ???...............................................................142 ??................................................................66, 70 ????.............................................................34 ???.......................................................12, 183 ???............................................59, 127, 128 ????????????............115 ???.......................................................15, 139 ?????....................................................148 ????..........................................................167 D DIRECT ??................................................... 3, 5 DL-10........................................................153, 159 DNG.........................................................................63 DPOF ...................................................................115 ??.....................................................................122 ??................................................................71, 75 ????..........................................................106 ??........................................................................12 ??/????..............................3, 14, 15 ????.............................................................10 ??.....................................................................151 ???...............................................................118 ????........................................................2, 18 ????.............................................................54 ????.............................................................63 ???.......................................................71, 106 ??........................................................................64 ????.............................................................66 ?????.......................................................36 F Fn ??????.......................................145 Fn ???????.................................133 Fn1?Fn2 ??........................................3, 136 ??........................................................................43 G ????????.....................................139 ??????????..........................139 ??..........................................ix, 153, 155, 157 ??........................................................46, 48, 50 ????.............................................................92 H HDMI.........................................................119, 149 ??................................................................71, 75 ?????....................................................111 ??????..............................................131 ??,???..............................................118 ??,??.......................................................94 ??,??.......................................................34 ????..........................................................101 ????????...................................138 I Irodio Photo & Video Studio.................153 ISO ???.........................................................90 ISO ??????.....................................140 J JPEG........................................................................63 ??????..............................................147 ??????.................................................84 ????.............................................................83 ????.............................................................80 ???? ISO....................................................80 ???.................................................................... 3 ??........................................................................27 ??........................................................................64 ??.....................................................................173 K ????........................................................2, 23 ????.....................................................46, 49 ????????......................................68 L Language/L............................................149 ?????....................................................178 ??........................................................................73 ??..................................................44, 106, 139 M M(????)??............................4, 50 M ??????........................................138 CMacintosh.........................................................162 /D??................3, 58, 101, 126 MY ??..........................................................4, 57 ???.................................................................... 2 ??........................................................................24 ????.......................................................... 2, 4 N NTSC.........................................................149, 183 ?????............................................15, 139 ????.............................................................85 P P(????)??..............................4, 46 PAL.............................................................149, 183 PictBridge .........................................................120 Q ???????........................................150 ??????.................................................92 ?????.......................................................32 R RAW.........................................................................62 RICOH Gate La ...............................................154 ??.....................................................2, 181, 182 ??.....................................................................154 S 4S(????)??..............................4, 49 ??..................................................4, 52 SD, SDHC..............................................................15 ??????................................................... 3 ??????..............................................146 ????.............................................................39 ????..........................................................136 ???,??..............................................181 ????............................................................... 2 ?????.......................................................28 ???????...........................................79 ???..................................................................79 ?????.......................................................78 ????.............................................................580 ???????...........................................91 ???????........................................145 ??.............................................................20, 149 ????..........................................................149 ????.............................................................65 ????.............................................................26 ??????..............................................147 ?????....................................................144 T ????.............................................................27 ????.......................................................... 2, 5 ?????............................................ 3, 8, 42 ??????..............................................142 ????.............................................................71 ???? · ??.............................................61 U USB ???.....................120, 159, 160, 162 V VM-1..........................................................165, 166 W ??????.................................................69 ??.............................................................42, 144 X ???..................................................................71 ????????...................................145 ???????........................................139 ????..................................................56, 110 Y ???.................................................................... 3 ?? M ??...................................................138 ????..........................................................143 ??.............................................................94, 142 ???..................................................................25 ?????.......................................................70 Z ?????....................................................128 ???????...........................................92 ???.......................................................44, 108 ?????....................................................127 ????.....................................................22, 64 ????/?????? .................................................3, 18, 22, 29, 141 ??????..............................................141 ????..........................................................143?????????? (???) ?????????????????????????? ??????????? • ??????????,???????????“??? ?”? • ?????????????????????????? ? ? ?,? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?“? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? (???)”? • ????????????????,????????? ?“??????????(???)”?2 ????? ?????............................................ 2 ?1? ?????????(Windows?) ????.............................................. 4 ???DL-10???? .................................. 6 ??DL-10???????? ............................ 8 Windows XP Service Pack 3? Windows Vista Service Pack 2?????? ............ 10 ????????????............................. 13 DL-10????? ..................................... 14 ??/??DL-10............................................ 14 DL10 ??.................................................. 15 [????]????? ...................................... 17 [??????]????? .................................. 20 ?SD??????? .................................. 22 SD???????........................................... 22 ??????MP?? .................................. 23 ?2? ?????????(Macintosh?) ?????????????........................... 26 ????????????............................. 28 ?SD??????? .................................. 29 SD???????........................................... 29 ??????MP?? .................................. 30 ?MP???????? ................................ 32 ?? ????............................................. 36?1? ????????? (Windows?) ?????????????????? ?? (Windows)?4 ???? ???????????????? 1. ???DL-10???????????? (GP.6) ???????????????????[????]? ???????? 2. ??DL-10?????????????????? (GP.8) ? ? ? ? DL-10,? ? ? ? DC Software?? ? ? ? DC Software ???,???????????“???? ??????(???)” • ?????????????????USB ???????? ??????? • ?????? SD ??????????????????? SD????????????? • ??????USB?????????? • ?????????????????? • ??Windows Vista?“Windows Photo Gallery”????? ? ? ? ? ?,? ? ? ? ? ? SD ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?,??????????? • ?????????????????????????? ??????????????5 • DC Software?????????????Caplio Software? ????????,????? (*) ????????? • ?????????,???????????????? ?? • ????????? SD ???,???????????? ????????SD???,???????????? • ?????????????Windows? Caplio Software DC Software RICOH Gate La DL-10 Caplio Viewer DU-10 (*) Caplio Server SR-10 (*) Caplio Setting ST-10 (*)6 ???DL-10???? 1. ?????????? 2. ????USB?????????USB???? 3. ?USB??????????USB??? ?????? ???????????,???????????? ????????,???????????[????]? ?Windows XP???????7 4. ????????,??????????? ??????????????? ??????[RICOHDCI]????????????? • ?????????????????,???????? ?????????,???????????????? ????? • ????DC Software,????DL-10 [????]???? [USB???,??????]?????????8 ??DL-10???????? DL-10 ? [ ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? [Digital Camera] ????????????[Digital Camera] ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ???(? ? ? ? ? ? ? Caplio Software,??????????[Caplio]??????) ????,?????????????? 1. ?????????? 2. ?USB????????????USB??? 3. ?USB??????????USB??? ?????,DL-10??,???DL-10??? ?????????9 ?????????,????????: • ??DL-10???[??]??? • ?????????????1?3? • ??DL-10?[????]?????[USB???,????? ?]???????? • ?DL-10?[????]???[??????????]??? ?(GP.17),???????????999?????? 1000????????,????999???,?????? ??????????[OK]???,??DL-10???[??] ???????USB??????????? • ???DL-10??????(?????????????), ??????????USB???? • ?? DL-10 ??????????,??????????? ??? • ???????????????????????,?? ?????? • ??????????,??????????????? ???? • ??DL-10??????????,???[????]?? [ ? ],??????? [RIMG****.jpg](**** ????? ?)???? • ??DL-10???,???P.14? • ??DL-10 [????]??????,???P.17? • ?????????????,???P.13?10 Windows XP Service Pack 3?Windows Vista Service Pack 2?????? ??????Windows Vista Service Pack 2 ?????? Windows XP Service Pack 3??????????????? ?,????????USB ?????????????? ?? ?????????????? ??????Windows XP???????? ????????: 1. ???????????????????,?? ??[????]??? ????????,??????,??????????? ??[????]??????????????11 ????[????]??: ????????Windows?????? 1. ??[Windows ???]????? ??[??]????? [????],???? [Windows ???](???? Windows ???,???????? ???? [???????] ??)?12 2. ??????????????? ?[Windows ???]????,?? [??] ???? ?[?????] ????? DL-10?????,??? DL-10 ???????? [??]?????,?? [? ???…] ??? DL-10 ???????? ????[????]??: ???????,???[Windows ????] ?????? ????[????]?13 ???????????? ?????????????,????????[??? ? ? ? ] ? [ ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ] ? ? ? ?(? ? ? ? ? ? Windows XP ????),?????????? [???? USB ???????] ? [??USB Mass Strage Device], ?????? USB ???? • ???????????????USB ??,????“?? ??????”??? • ???????????USB ?????????????? ??????USB??????????14 DL-10????? ?? DL-10???DC Software????? ??????????????????,??????? ????? ?? ???DL-10,??????????? • ??DL-10????[MENU]??,?????????[? ?](???“DL10 ??”)? • ???????DL-10??,?????????[??]? ???? ????DL-10?????,????????? • ?[ ??] ??,???[ ????] ?[ ??],???? [DC Software],????[DL-10]? DL-10??????????????????? ??/??DL-1015 ????DL-10,?????????DL-10??? 1 [MENU]?? ???????????? 2 [??]?? ?????????????? ??[?????...??[ADJ.]?????????]???? ???????????,????[??]??? DL10 ?? [????] ?????????????????? ??????[????]??????? ?????(GP.17) [??????] ??DL-10????????(GP.20) [??] ??DL-10???? [??] ??DL-10?16 3 [????]?? ?????[????]??????? 4 [???]?? ????????Windows????????????? ?????,???????? 5 ??? ???????USB?????,“???”????? ?,???????“???”,??[??????]? ???????,“???”???,??????? ?,????[??????]?17 ????DL-10???[MENU]????????????[? ???],??[????]???? ???,??????????????????? DL-10 ? RICOH Gate La ?????? [????]????? ?? ?? ??? 1 [USB?? ?,?? ????] ???????,???????? ?USB??????,??????? ??????? ?????????,?????? ????USB??????,???? ????????DL-10???[??] ????? ???? 2 [??? ??] ???????????????? [????]??[Digital Camera]? ????????,??[??]?? ?????,????????18 3 [??? ??] ??????????? [????] ????????????“2 [? ????]”????????? [???????] ??????????????? ??,???????????? ??????? ?)2010 ? 1 ? 1 ??????: [20100101]??? [???????] ??????????????? ?????????,????? ?????? ?????????“????+ ???+3????”? ?)2010?1?1?????: [20100101_001]???? [20100101_002]??? ???? ???? ???? ?? 4 [??? ???? ???] ???????,???????? ???????????????[? ????]??[????]?[??? ????]?????? ???????????,???? ??????????? ????????,??????? ??????? * ???????Caplio Software, ?????DL-10 [????]?[? ?????????]???,?? RICOH Gate La???????SD? ?????????????? ???? ???? ? ?? ?? ???19 5 [??? ???] ???????????????, ??????????????[??] ? ?,? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??? 6 [??? ???? ??] ???????,???????? ????????? ????????,???????? ???? ?? 7 [???? IP??] ???????,???????? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ??? ? ? ?,? ? ?????????? 0.0.0.0 ?? ?? ???20 ???3??????DL-10???????? ????DL-10???[MENU]????????????[? ?????],??[??????]???? [??????]?????21 1 [??????] ?3???????????????? 2 [??] ?????[??????]???????22 ?SD??????? ????PC??????????SD??????????? ???SD????????????????? ??????????????????,???????? ????????SD?????,???????????? ???????????????,?????????? • ?? PC ????????????,??? SD ?????? ???????????SD??????PC ??????, ??????????? • ?????????????????SD????????? ??? ????? ??????????????????????????? ??????,????????SD?????????? SD??????? ????23 ??????MP?? ? ? ? ? M ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?,? ? ? ? ? MP ? ??????Irodio Photo & Video Studio??????MP ??? ??????Irodio Photo & Video Studio???,??? ???????“??????????(???)”? 1. ?MP????????????? • ???????????,???P.4? 2. ??Irodio Photo & Video Studio? 3. ??????,?????1?????? • ?????(1)???????? 4. ????????MP??? • MP????????????(2)??? • ??MP???????????????(3)?? (2) (3) (4) (5) (1)24 5. ????????????MP????????? • ?????????????(4) ???????(5) ????MP????????? 6. ????????MP??? • ????????????????????? • ?????????????????????,????? ??????MP???????????????????? ???,???Irodio Photo & Video Studio? “??”? • ??Irodio Photo & Video Studio?????,??? Pixela Co., Ltd.???? http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/irodio/e/ irodio_digitalphoto_videostudio/?2? ????????? (Macintosh?) ?????????????????? ??(Macintosh)? ? Macintosh ?????? VM-1 ???? ?“??????????(???)”?26 ????????????? 1. ?????????? 2. ????USB?????????USB???? 3. ?USB??????????USB??? ?????? ???????????,???????????? ????????,??????????????27 4. ????????,??????????? ??????????????? ??????[RICOHDCI]????????????? • ?????????????????USB ???????? ??????? • ?????? SD ??????????????????? SD????????????? • ??????USB?????????? • ?????????????????? • ?????????????????????????? ?????????????? • ?????????,???????????????? ?? • ?????????????????,??????????? ??????,????????????????????? • ??SD????,?????????,???????????28 ???????????? 1. ?????????????[???]??? ????????????????,?????? 2. ??USB???? • ?????Mac OS 9[??]???Mac OS X[??]????[??] ????? • ??? USB ??????????????????????, ???????????????????????????,? ?????? • ?????????????????,?????????? • ??????? Macintosh ???????“FINDER.DAT”? “.DS_Store”??????????????,???????29 ?SD??????? ????PC??????????SD??????????? ???SD????????????????? ??????????????????,???????? ????????SD?????,???????????? ???????????????,?????????? • ?? PC ????????????,??? SD ?????? ???????????SD??????PC ??????, ??????????? • ?????????????????SD????????? ??? ????? ??????????????????????????? ??????,????????SD?????????? SD??????? ????30 ??????MP?? ? ? ? ? M ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?,? ? ? ? ? MP ? ?????VM-1??????MP??? ??????VM-1???,??????????“??? ???????(???)”? 1. ?MP?????Macintosh???? • ???????????,???P.26? 2. ??[????]???? 3. ??[VM-1]??? • ??[VM-1]??? 4. ?[??]?????[??],???[VM-1]??? ??[??],??????MP??,????[? ?]? • ??MP??????????? • MP ????????????[VM-1] ??????? ???????999?31 5. ????????????[<<]?[>>],???? ????? • ??????,???????????MP??,???MP? ????[VM-1]??????,????VM-1???MP??? • ????[VM-1]?????????????????,[<<] ?[>>]????? • ??????? ??? ????? ???? ?????32 ?MP???????? ??????M??????MP?????????,?? ???????????????????MP?????? ??????,???????????????? • ????????????????? • ???????,??????????MP????3??? ????????? • ?????,????????? 1. ?MP?????Macintosh???? • ???????????,???P.26? 2. ??[????]???? 3. ??[VM-1]??? • ??[VM-1]??? 4. ?[??]???[????]? • ??[????]??? 5. ??[??],??????????????,? ???[??]? 6. ??[??]?33 ??[????]? 7. ?[??]?????[??],???[VM-1]??? ??[??],??????MP??,????[? ?]? 8. ?[??]????[???????],????[? ???]? • MP??????????????????? ??[????]? 7. ?[??]?????[??],???[VM-1]??? ??[??],??????MP??,????[? ?]? 8. ??[<<]?[>>],??????????? 9. ?[??]????[???????],????[? ???]? • ????????????34??36 ???? ????1 ?????? ??1 ????USB?????????USB??,??????? ?????? ????????USB??? • ????????????USB??? • ????????,??????????? ?????USB???,???USB?????? ??2 ??????????? ??????????,??????????????? ??? ??3 ??????????????? ?????????Windows?????,??????? ?????????????SD????????????37 ????2 ???DL-10?[????]???[????? ?????],???????????? ?? ??????????????,??????????? ?? ??[??????????]??????,?????? ??????????????? ????3 ???????????????????? ???????????,????? ?? ???DL-10 [????]???[??????????], ??????????????????DL-10 [????] ????[??????????]? ????4 ??????????????[?????]? ?? ???????????,????????????[?? ????]?????[??????],????????? ???????SD?????????????????? ????????,????????????????USB ???????????,???????????????????,?????,?????? ?????????????,? ????,?????,???? ??,???????????? ??,???????????, ???????????? ??????????????? ?,????????“????”??“??????????????” ?????????? ?????? ?????????“????”(GP.167)??????????,???? ??????? ?????????/????? ?????????? ??:???????? 1 ????? 21 ? ??: 510030 ??: 4007003828 ? 95105931 ?? Irodio Photo & Video Studio ??(??) ??:(????)+1–800–458–4029 ?? ???????????? ??:(????)+800–1532–4865 ???? ??: +44–1489–564–764 ?? ??: +63–2–438–0090 ?? ??: 021–5385–3786 ????: ?? 9:00 – ?? 5:00 ?????? ??:?????????? 8-13-1 ???? ??: 104-8222 ????????: Q/TLN DC0003-2009 ??:?? 2009 ? 11 ??? CK CK *L754 4973A* RICOH BOÎTIER DE L’APPAREIL PHOTO NUMÉRIQUE GXR Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil phot

http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/pdf/gxr/GXR_F.pdf GXR MOUNT A12 Mode d’emploi

http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/pdf/gxr/mount_a12_fr.pdf GR LENS A12 28mm F2.5 Mode d’emploi

http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/pdf/gxr/a12-28_f.pdf

RICOH Gate pour Windows (en français)

http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/pdf/rr10/ricohgate-frwin.pdf

RICOH Gate pour Macintosh (en français)

http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/pdf/rr10/ricohgate-frmac.pdf

G700 Camera User Guide

http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/support/manual/pdf/g700/g700_en.pdf#page=1 Remote Communication Gate 5 Uesr's Guide

http://support.ricoh.com/bb_v1oi/pub_e/oi/0001038/0001038444/VUZMU/UsersGuide_en.pdf

Avant de commencer Avant d’utiliser votre boîtier d’appareil photo, prenez le temps de vous familiariser avec les commandes et les écrans d’affichage (pages 1–10). Reportez-vous à cette section pour référence pendant votre lecture du reste du manuel. Photographie et lecture de base Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser l’appareil photo pour la première fois. Elle détaille les étapes à suivre pour préparer l’appareil, prendre des photos et les lire (pages 11–44). Référence Lisez cette section pour en savoir plus sur les sujets non traités dans la section « Photographie et lecture de base ». Elle détaille la prise de vue avancée, les options de lecture, ainsi que la manière d’imprimer des photos, de configurer les réglages de l’appareil et de copier des photos sur un ordinateur (pages 45–187). La batterie rechargeable doit être chargée avant usage. La batterie n’est pas chargée au moment de l’achat. BOÎTIER DE L’APPAREIL PHOTO NUMÉRIQUE GXR Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo Le numéro de série du produit est gravé sous le boîtier de l’appareil photo.ii Contenu de l’emballage Vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous. * L’aspect des éléments inclus peut être différent. Boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR Le numéro de série est gravé sous le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Câble USB avec connecteur mini-B Il permet de raccorder le boîtier de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur. Câble A/V Il permet de boîtier de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur. Capuchon du connecteur Ce capuchon est installé sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Protège-griffe alimentée Cette protection est installée sur la griffe alimentée du boîtier de l’appareil. Batterie rechargeable DB-90 Chargeur de batterie BJ-9 • CD : il contient le logiciel et un Mode d’emploi du logiciel. • Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo (le présent manuel) • Courroie d’encolure • Garantie Conseil : fixation dela courroie d’encolure Passez les extrémités de la courroie d’encolure dans les oeillets de la courroie, de chaque côté du boîtier de l’appareil photo, et insérez les extrémités dans les attaches, comme indiqué sur l’illustration.iii Avis • Mesures de sécurité : Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir une utilisation sans danger. • Essais de prise de vue : Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants. • Copyright : La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires, est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits. • Exonération de responsabilité : Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. • Garantie : cet appareil est fabriqué en fonction des caractéristiques locales et la garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. • Interférences radio : L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente. © 2009 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout moment et sans avis préalable. Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista et Internet Explorer sont des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Macintosh et Mac OS sont des marques déposées d’Apple Inc. aux ÉtatsUnis et dans d’autres pays. Adobe, le logo Adobe et Adobe Reader sont des marques commerciales d’Adobe Systems Incorporated. HDMI, le logo et High-Definition Multimedia Interface sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC. Tous les autres noms de marque mentionnés dans ce document sont la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs.iv Consignes de sécurité Symboles d’avertissement Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens. Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous. Danger Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Avertissement Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Attention Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Exemples designalisation d’avertissement Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées. Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites. Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action spécifique est interdite. Exemples Ne pas toucher Ne pas démonter Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en toute sécurité. Danger Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vousmême l’appareil. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique. Ne tentez pas de démonter, de modifier ou de souder vousmême la batterie.v Ne jetez pas la batterie au feu, ne la chauffez pas, ne la stockez pas dans des endroits où la température est élevée (par exemple près d’un feu ou à l’intérieur d’une voiture), et ne la jetez pas n’importe où. Veillez également à ne pas mouiller la batterie, à ne pas la jeter dans l’eau ou dans la mer. N’essayez pas de percer la batterie ou de la compresser. Veillez à ne pas faire tomber la batterie ni à lui faire subir de choc important. N’utilisez pas de batterie visiblement endommagée ou déformée. Avertissement En cas d’anomalies telles que de la fumée ou des odeurs inhabituelles, mettez l’appareil immédiatement hors tension. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Si vous alimentez l’appareil via le secteur, veillez à débrancher le cordon d’alimentation de la prise secteur pour éviter tout incendie ou choc électrique. Arrêtez d’utiliser l’appareil dès qu’il présente de tels signes de dysfonctionnement. Contactez le centre de service après-vente dès que possible. Mettez l’appareil immédiatement hors tension s’il entre en contact avec un objet métallique, de l’eau, du liquide ou si tout autre objet pénètre à l’intérieur du boîtier de l’appareil. Retirez la batterie et la carte mémoire dès que possible en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Si vous alimentez l’appareil via le secteur, veillez à débrancher le cordon d’alimentation de la prise secteur pour éviter tout incendie ou choc électrique. Arrêtez d’utiliser l’appareil dès qu’il présente de tels signes de dysfonctionnement. Contactez le centre de service après-vente dès que possible.vi Si l’écran d’affichage des photos est endommagé, évitez tout contact avec les cristaux liquides qu’il contient. Suivez les mesures d’urgence suivantes si besoin : • PEAU : Si des cristaux liquides entrent en contact avec la peau, essuyez et rincez la zone affectée à grande eau, puis lavez-la au savon. • YEUX : Si des cristaux liquides pénètrent dans les yeux, lavezles à l’eau propre pendant au moins 15 minutes et consultez immédiatement un médecin. • INGESTION : Si des cristaux liquides sont ingérés, rincez la bouche à grande eau. Il faut ensuite boire de l’eau en grande quantité et se faire vomir. Consultez immédiatement un médecin. Pour empêcher toute fuite, surchauffe, ignition ou explosion de la batterie, prenez les précautions suivantes : • Utilisez uniquement la batterie recommandée pour cet appareil. • Ne transportez pas ou ne stockez pas la batterie avec des objets métalliques, par exemple des stylos à bille métalliques, des colliers, des pièces de monnaie, des broches, etc. • Ne placez pas la batterie dans un four à micro-ondes ou un conteneur à haute pression. • Si vous constatez une fuite de liquide de batterie ou une odeur inhabituelle, un changement de couleur, etc. en cours d’utilisation ou pendant la charge, retirez immédiatement la batterie du boîtier de l’appareil photo ou du chargeur et rangez-la dans un endroit à l’abri de toute source de flammes. Pour empêcher toute ignition, électrocution ou explosion de la batterie pendant la charge, prenez les précautions suivantes : • N’alimentez l’appareil qu’à la tension indiquée. Évitez également d’utiliser des adaptateurs multi-supports et des cordons prolongateurs. • Faites attention de ne pas endommager ni d’entortiller les cordons d’alimentation. Ne placez pas d’objet lourd sur les cordons d’alimentation, ne le tirez pas et ne le pliez pas de façon excessive. • Ne branchez ou ne débranchez pas le cordon d’alimentation avec les mains mouillées. Pour débrancher un cordon d’alimentation, attrapez-le toujours par sa fiche. • Ne couvrez pas l’appareil pendant la charge.vii Ne laissez pas la batterie et la carte mémoire SD utilisées dans cet appareil à portée des enfants, afin d’éviter tout risque d’ingestion accidentelle. L’ingestion des fluides de batterie est extrêmement dangereuse pour l’être humain. En cas d’ingestion, recherchez immédiatement une aide médicale. Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants. Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène, de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion, d’incendie ou de brûlure. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident. Essuyez la poussière qui s’accumule sur la prise d’alimentation électrique de l’appareil afin d’éviter tout risque d’incendie. Pour éviter les risques d’incendie, de choc électrique ou de blessure, n’utilisez pas le chargeur de batterie avec les transformateurs électroniques disponibles dans le commerce lorsque vous voyagez à l’étranger.viii Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en toute sécurité. Attention Tout contact avec du liquide s’échappant d’une batterie peut entraîner des brûlures. Si une partie du corps entre en contact avec une batterie endommagée, lavez immédiatement la zone à grande eau. (N’utilisez pas de savon.) Si une batterie commence à fuir, retirez-la immédiatement de l’appareil et essuyez soigneusement le logement de la batterie avant d’en installer une autre. Branchez les cordons d’alimentation fermement dans la prise secteur. Un cordon mal branché peut causer un incendie. Ne laissez pas le boîtier de l’appareil photo prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge électrique. Ne dirigez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule, car cela risquerait de lui faire perdre le contrôle de son véhicule et pourrait entraîner un accident. Consignes de sécurité relatives aux accessoires Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les instructions fournies avec ce produit.ix Manuels du produit Les manuels suivants sont livrés avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR : Mode d’emploi du boîtier del’appareil photo (le présent livret) Ce manuel décrit l’utilisation de votre appareil et l’installation du logiciel fourni. * Lisez le présent manuel, ainsi que la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo. Mode d’emploi du logiciel (fichier PDF) Le Mode d’emploi du logiciel décrit la procédure pour copier des photos de votre appareil vers un ordinateur, afin de les visualiser et de les retoucher. Ce manuel est disponible en plusieurs langues et chaque version est disponible dans son propre dossier, lui-même situé dans le dossier « DC Manual » du CD fourni. Pour vous y référer plus facilement, copiez le fichier PDF du CD sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur. Le logiciel de visualisation et de retouche photo « Irodio Photo & Video Studio » est également fourni avec le produit. Pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation de ce logiciel, consultez le menu Aide dans le logiciel Irodio Photo & Video Studio, ou téléphonez à l’un des centres d’assistance client suivants : • Amérique du Nord (U.?S.?A.): +1–800–458–4029 (appel gratuit) • Royaume- Uni, Allemagne, France et Espagne : +800–1532–4865 (appel gratuit) • Autres pays européens : +44–1489–564–764 • Chine : +86–21–5385–3786 • Autres pays d’Asie : +63–2–438–0090 Heures d’ouverture : de 9h00 à 17h00x Table des matières Contenu de l’emballage......................................................................................... ii Avis..................................................................................................................................... iii Consignes de sécurité............................................................................................iv Manuels du produit.................................................................................................ix Avant de commencer 1 Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser votre appareil photo pour la première fois. Introduction ....................................................................................2 Nomenclature de l’appareil photo..................................................................2 Photographie et lecture de base 11 Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser votre appareil photo pour la première fois. Premiers pas ..................................................................................12 Chargement de la batterie................................................................................12 Insertion de la batterie.........................................................................................14 Insertion des cartes mémoire .........................................................................15 Installation de l’unité appareil photo sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo..............................................................................................................................17 Mise sous et hors tension ..................................................................................18 Configuration de base.........................................................................................20 Prise de vue photographique ....................................................21 Tenue de l’appareil photo..................................................................................21 Prise de vue.................................................................................................................22 Zoom..............................................................................................................................26 Prise de vue rapprochée (mode macro)...................................................27 Photographie au flash..........................................................................................28 Retardateur.................................................................................................................31 Indicateur de niveau.............................................................................................32 Visualisation et suppression de photos ...................................34 Visualisation de photos.......................................................................................34 Suppression de photos.......................................................................................39 Touche O (DISP.) .................................................................................................42xi Référence 45 Lisez cette section pour en savoir plus sur les fonctions de l’appareil photo. Plus sur la photographie.............................................................46 Mode P : changement de programme .....................................................46 Mode A : priorité à l’ouverture ........................................................................48 Mode S : priorité à l’obturation.......................................................................49 Mode M : exposition manuelle.......................................................................50 Mode 4: Réglages pour diverses scènes....................................52 Modes « MY » : utilisation des réglages personnalisés.....................57 Menu prise de vue..................................................................................................58 Fonctions de lecture ....................................................................94 Visualisation de vidéos.........................................................................................94 Affichage de fichiers MP.....................................................................................95 Menu des réglages de la lecture..............................................101 Menu lecture........................................................................................................... 101 Visualisation des photos sur un téléviseur........................................... 118 Impression de photos................................................................120 Raccordement du boîtier de l’appareil photo ................................... 120 Impression................................................................................................................ 122 Réglages de l’appareil ...............................................................126 Options personnalisées.................................................................................... 129 Configuration ......................................................................................................... 139 Copie des photos sur un ordinateur.......................................151 Windows.................................................................................................................... 151 Macintosh................................................................................................................. 162 Remarques techniques..............................................................167 Résolution des problèmes.............................................................................. 167 Caractéristiques..................................................................................................... 175 Éléments vendus séparément..................................................................... 178 Utilisation du produit à l’étranger.............................................................. 183 Précautions d’emploi ......................................................................................... 183 Entretien et stockage......................................................................................... 185 Garantie et réparation....................................................................................... 186 NOTICES..................................................................................................................... 187 Index .............................................................................................188xii UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Avant de commencer Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser votre appareil photo pour la première fois. Introduction .............................................................. 2UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Introduction Ce manuel décrit comment prendre des photos et les lire ensuite. Pour vous assurer de tirer le meilleur parti de ce produit, lisez attentivement ce manuel avant utilisation et conservez-le à portée de main pendant l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nomenclature de l’appareil photo Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page dont le numéro est indiqué à droite de chaque élément. Vue deface 3 4 5 6 7 12 11 13 8 9 10 14 1 2 1 Sélecteurplus-moins.....................5 2 Touchededéverrouillagedu sélecteurde mode.........................4 3 Sélecteurde mode........................4 4 Déclencheur ..........................21,23 5 Interrupteur MARCHE/ARRÊT...18,21 6 Lumière AFauxiliaire...........31,140 7 Griffealimentée........................181 8 Couvercledu flash .......................29 9 Microphone..................................– 10 Pointd’attachedeladragonne......ii 11 Repèred’alignementpour fixer l’unitéappareilphoto..................17 12 Connecteur..................................17 13 Levierdedéverrouillagedel’unité appareilphoto.............................17 14 Flash............................................28UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Vue de dos 4 1 2 3 17 16 13 14 15 12 9 22 21 20 19 5 6 23 7 8 10 18 11 1 Touche DIRECT..............................5 2 Touche OPEN/f (flash)...............29 3 Touche VF/LCD ............................42 4 Écran d’affichagedesphotos.........8 5 Témoin de miseaupoint automatique/flash ...18,22,29,141 6 Connecteurducâble USB ..........................120,159,160,162 7 Connecteurducâble A/V ...........118 8 Connecteurducâble mini HDMI...119 9 Manette ADJ. ........................5,134 10 Touche6(lecture) ................................19,34,94,101 11 ToucheN(macro)......................27 12 Touche8(téléobjectif)/ z(vueagrandie).................26,36 13 Touche9(grandangle)/ Z(affichage mosaïque)......26,36 14 Pavédirectionnel.........................37 + (!).....................................137 – (%).....................................137 Fn1(fonction 1) (#)...............136 Fn2(fonction 2) ($)...............136 15 ToucheC/D ....................................58,101,126 16 ToucheO(DISP.)....................42 17 Touchet(retardateur)/ d(supprimer) .....................31,39 18 Visde fixation dutrépied...........176 19 Couvercledulogementdela batterie/carte........................14,15 20 Levierdedéverrouillage........14,15 21 Haut-parleur ................................– 22 Pointd’attachedeladragonne......ii 23 Couvercleduconnecteur ...118,121UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Sélecteur de mode Avant une prise de vue, appuyez sur la touche de déverrouillage du sélecteur de mode (1) et faites tourner le sélecteur pour choisir un mode de prise de vue (2). 1 2 5 (automatique) : l’appareil définit l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation pour obtenir une exposition optimale (page 21). M (exposition manuelle) : vous choisissez l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation (page 50). MY, MY2, MY («mes réglages») : vous sélectionnez l’un des réglages enregistrés via Enr. Mes réglages (pages 57, 129). A (priorité à l’ouverture) : vous choisissez l’ouverture et vous laissez l’appareil régler la vitesse d’obturation pour obtenir une exposition optimale (page 48). 4 (scène) : l’appareil optimise les réglages pour le sujet, la scène ou la vidéo actuelle (page 52). S(priorité à l’obturation) : vous choisissez la vitesse d’obturation et vous laissez l’appareil régler l’ouverture pour obtenir une exposition optimale (page 49). P (changement de programme) : vous choisissez entre des combinaisons d’ouverture et de vitesse d’obturation qui produisent la même exposition (page 46).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Sélecteur plus-moins et manette ADJ. Lors de la visualisation des photos ou pendant la navigation dans les menus, vous pouvez utiliser le sélecteur plus-moins à la place des touches + et –, ainsi que la manette ADJ. à la place des touches Fn et Fn2. La manette ADJ. et le sélecteur plus-moins peuvent également être utilisés pour sélectionner l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation dans les modes P, A, S et M. Sélecteur plus-moins Manette ADJ. Vous pouvez assigner à la manette ADJ. des rubriques fréquemment utilisées du menu prise de vue, pour en faciliter l’accès (page 134). Pour afficher une rubrique du menu prise de vue, centrez la manette ADJ. et enfoncez-la ; vous pouvez alors utiliser la manette et le sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner une option. Remarque Les rubriques Options sélecteur de mode M et Options du sélecteur de mode lecture de l’onglet des options personnalisées peuvent être utilisées pour modifier les fonctions assignées au sélecteur plus-moins et à la manette ADJ. (page 138). Touche DIRECT Appuyez sur la touche DIRECT en mode prise de vue pour afficher les réglages actuels de prise de vue. DIRECTUtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Écran DIRECT Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à la page dont le numéro est indiqué à droite de chaque élément. 1 2 3 8 4 5 12 16 13 18 10 9 11 15 14 17 6 7 1 Modeprisedevue.........................4 2 Ouverture........................46,48,50 3 Vitessed’obturation.........46,49,50 4 Mode flash ..................................28 5 Niveaudecompensation du flash/ niveaude flash manuel .........78,79 6 Correction del’exposition ............85 7 ISO...............................................90 8 Balancedesblancs ......................86 9 Mode miseaupoint.....................64 10 Mesureexposition.......................70 11 Réglages image...........................71 12 Qualitéimage/taille/taillevidéo...61 13 Cadrage.......................................75 14 Continu........................................73 15 Zoned’information........................7 16 Mode macro................................27 17 Verrouill. AE...............................136 18 Retardateur.................................31 Modification des réglages de prise de vue au niveau de l’écran DIRECT Sur l’écran DIRECT, déplacez le curseur à l’aide de la touche +, –, Fn ou Fn2 ou de la manette ADJ. (gauche et droite) pour sélectionner une rubrique, puis modifiez directement le réglage à l’aide du sélecteur plus-moins. Il est possible d’ajuster la correction de l’exposition à l’aide des touches + et – (à la place du sélecteur plus-moins).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Affichage des options pour les réglages de prise de vue Si vous appuyez sur la manette ADJ. lorsqu’une rubrique est sélectionnée au niveau de l’écran DIRECT, les options de la rubrique de réglage s’affichent. Sélectionnez l’option souhaitée à l’aide des touches + et – ou du sélecteur plus-moins, puis appuyez sur la manette ADJ. ou sur la touche C/D pour définir l’option. Attention Il n’est pas possible de modifier les réglages du mode prise de vue, du mode macro, du mode retardateur et du mode flash du flash intégré en sélectionnant la rubrique au niveau de l’écran DIRECT. Modifiez les réglages à l’aide du sélecteur de mode ou des touches situées sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Remarques • Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour modifier le réglage de l’image d’arrière-plan (page 140). • Appuyez sur C/D au niveau de l’écran DIRECT pour afficher le menu prise de vue (page 59). • Une fois la correction de l’exposition réglée, appuyez sur Fn, Fn2 ou la manette ADJ. (vers la gauche ou la droite) pour placer le curseur sur d’autres rubriques. • En mode exposition manuelle, l’indicateur d’exposition permettant d’obtenir l’exposition optique s’affiche à la place du curseur de correction d’exposition. • En mode changement de programme, la vitesse d’obturation et l’ouverture sont modifiées en même temps de manière à produire la même exposition. • Le nom de la rubrique du menu prise de vue correspondant à la rubrique sélectionnée au niveau de l’écran DIRECT s’affiche dans la zone d’information. Affichage de la page suivante ou précédente Si les rubriques affichées à l’écran s’étendent sur plusieurs pages, vous pouvez afficher la page suivante ou précédente en appuyant sur la touche + ou – ou en faisant tourner le sélecteur plus-moins tout en maintenant la touche DIRECT enfoncée.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Écran d’affichage des photos Les indicateurs suivants peuvent s’afficher pendant la prise de vue et la lecture. Prise de vue (photo) Prise de vue (vidéo) 4:3 N F 2.5 25cm- 1/50 200 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 15 18 31 19 27 28 29 30 26 32 20 25 24 22 23 21 37 38 F 2.5 1/50 200 34 33 35 36 1 Mode flash ............28 2 Niveaudecompensation du flash /de flash manuel..............78,79 3 Modescène...........52 Continu..................73 4 Modeprisedevue ................................4 5 Nombred’expositions restantes ?* ............177 6 Destination............15 7 Dist. miseaupt snap .........................64,68 8 Qualitéimage/taille ..............................61 9 Mode miseaupoint/ instantanépar pression............64,69 10 Balancedesblancs / compensation dela balancedesblancs ..........................86,89 11 Mesureexposition...70 12 Réglages image.....71 13 Cadrage.................75 14 Histogramme........44 15 Correction dela déformation ..........81 16 Réduction debruit...80 17 Correction dubougé...92 18 Horodatage...........84 19 Niveaudebatterie...10 20 Verrouillage d’exposition automatique.......136 21 Retardateur...........31 22 Mode macro..........27 23 Distance min deprise devue.................144 24 Rapportdezoom numérique............26 25 Barredezoom.......26 26 Prisedevueà intervalles .............83 27 Indicateurd’exposition ..............................50 28 Ouverture...46,48,50UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 9 29 Vitessed’obturation ...................46,49,50 30 Correction de l’exposition............85 31 ISO.........................90 32 Indicateurde niveau...32 33 Avertissement d’exposition...........86 34 Avertissementde flou .........................24,93 35 Profondeurdechamp ..............................64 36 Barrede miseaupoint ..............................64 37 Longueurdevidéo .......................63,177 38 Tempsdisponible ?* ..............................55 * Approximation uniquement ; la capacité réelle varie selon les conditions de prise de vue et la fabrication de la carte mémoire. L’écran affiche « 9999 » lorsqu’il reste suffisamment de mémoire pour plus de 9 999 photos. Remarque Il est possible d’afficher les réglages de prise de vue en appuyant sur la touche DIRECT (page 5). Lecture (photos) Lecture (vidéos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4:3 N 2010/0101 00:20 F 2.5 ISO 200 1/50 EV+0.7 2010/01/01 00:20 16 15 17 18 1 Numérode fichier....– 2 Imageactuelle........– 3 Images totales.........– 4 Indicateurde mode lecture.....................– 5 Imageprotégée...112 6 Indicateurdetirage DPOF...................115 7 Source...................15 8 Qualitéimage/taille ..............................61 9 Dated’enregistrement .......................20,149 10 Ouverture...46,48,50 11 ISO.........................90 12 Correction de l’exposition............85 13 Vitessed’obturation ...................46,49,50 14 Niveaudebatterie...10 15 Longueur/ tempsécoulé............– 16 Indicateurde progression...............– 17 Balancedesblancs...86 18 Compensation dela balancedesblancs...89UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 0 Remarques • L’écran d’affichage des photos peut également afficher des avertissements et des messages. • Des informations supplémentaires peuvent être affichées en appuyant sur la touche DISP. (page 42). 4:3 N 2.5 200 Indicateur du niveau de batterie Le niveau de batterie est illustré par l’icône située dans l’angle inférieur droit de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Icône Description (vert) Batterie pleine. (vert) Batterie partiellement déchargée. (orange) Batterie pratiquement vide. Rechargez-la ou remplacez-la dès que possible. UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Premiers pas............................................................ 2 Prise de vue photographique.................................... 2 Visualisation et suppression de photos......................  Photographie et lecture de base Lisez d’abord cette section avant d’utiliser votre appareil photo pour la première fois.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Premiers pas Préparez l’appareil photo avant son utilisation. Chargement de la batterie La batterie rechargeable (DB-90) fournie avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo n’est pas chargée au moment de l’achat. Avant utilisation, chargez la batterie avec le chargeur de batterie BJ-9 fourni. 1 Insérez la batterie dans le chargeur. Placez la batterie avec l’étiquette vers le haut, les repères « + » et « – » faisant face aux repères équivalents du chargeur. Attention Assurez-vous que la batterie est correctement orientée. 2 Connectez le cordon d’alimentation au chargeur, puis procédez au branchement. Le témoin du chargeur s’allume pendant la charge de la batterie. Une batterie vide se rechargera en cinq heures environ, à 25°C. Remarque Si le témoin du chargeur clignote, c’est que la batterie ou le chargeur est défaillant. Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation et retirez la batterie du chargeur.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  3 Retirez la batterie. Le chargement est terminé lorsque le témoin du chargeur s’éteint. Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation et retirez la batterie du chargeur. Attention • Batterie rechargeable Li-ion : utilisez uniquement une batterie DB-90 d’origine. N’utilisez pas de batterie non conçue par Ricoh pour ce boîtier d’appareil photo. • La batterie peut être chaude immédiatement après usage. Avant de retirer la batterie, mettez l’appareil hors tension et patientez le temps qu’elle refroidisse. • Retirez la batterie si l’appareil ne doit pas être utilisé pendant une période prolongée. Conseil :capacité dela batterie Le nombre de prises de vue possibles avec une batterie DB-90 complètement chargée varie en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Les tests sont effectués en conformité avec les normes CIPA, dans les conditions suivantes : à une température de 23 °C, écran d’affichage des photos allumé, prise de vue toutes les 30 secondes avec flash déclenché une fois sur deux. L’appareil photo est mis hors tension, puis sous tension toutes les 10 prises de vue. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Insertion de la batterie Assurez-vous d’abord que l’appareil photo est hors tension avant d’insérer ou de retirer la batterie. 1 Ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/ carte. Déverrouillez (1) et ouvrez (2) le couvercle. 2 Insérez la batterie. En utilisant la batterie pour appuyer sur le loquet, insérez-la jusqu’au fond. Le loquet se verrouillera lorsque la batterie sera complètement enfoncée. 1 2 3 Fermez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/ carte. Fermez (1) et verrouillez (2) le couvercle. Attention Assurez-vous que le couvercle est verrouillé. 1 2 Retrait dela batterie Déverrouillez et ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/carte, enfoncez le loquet pour le relâcher, puis retirez la batterie. Veillez à ne pas faire tomber la batterie. Attention Si l’appareil ne doit pas être utilisé pendant une période prolongée, retirez la batterie et stockez-la dans un endroit froid et sec.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Insertion des cartes mémoire Les photos peuvent être stockées dans la mémoire interne du boîtier de l’appareil photo (86Mo) ou bien sur des cartes mémoire SD et SDHC optionnelles. La mémoire interne est utilisée si aucune carte n’est insérée ; dans le cas contraire, c’est la carte qui sera utilisée plutôt que la mémoire interne. Assurez-vous d’abord que l’appareil photo est hors tension avant d’insérer ou de retirer une carte mémoire. 1 Ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/ carte. Déverrouillez (1) et ouvrez (2) le couvercle. 1 2 2 Insérez la carte. En tenant la carte comme indiqué sur l’illustration, glissez-la dans la fente jusqu’à ce qu’elle soit verrouillée. 3 Fermez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/ carte. Fermez (1) et verrouillez (2) le couvercle. 1 2UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Retrait descartesmémoire Déverrouillez et ouvrez le couvercle du logement de la batterie/carte, puis appuyez sur la carte mémoire pour l’éjecter. La carte peut alors être retirée. Attention • Les photos ne seront pas enregistrées dans la mémoire interne lorsqu’une carte mémoire est insérée, même si celle-ci est pleine. • Conservez propres les contacts de la carte mémoire. Conseil : protection contrel’écriture Basculez le curseur de protection contre l’écriture situé sur la carte mémoire en position « LOCK » pour empêcher l’écrasement ou la suppression des données de la carte et le formatage de la carte. Il est impossible de prendre des photos lorsque la carte est protégée ; utilisez la protection de la carte uniquement pour empêcher une perte accidentelle des données et assurez-vous de libérer la carte avant la prise de vue. Remarques • Formatez les cartes mémoire avant leur première utilisation ou après les avoir utilisées dans un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif (page 139). Assurez-vous de sauvegarder toutes les données importantes avant le formatage. • Consultez la page 177 pour en savoir plus sur la capacité des cartes mémoire. • Il est possible de copier les photos de la mémoire interne sur des cartes mémoire (page 115).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Installation de l’unité appareil photo sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo Veillez à ce que l’appareil photo soit hors tension avant d’installer ou de retirer l’unité appareil photo sur le/du boîtier de l’appareil photo. Retirez les capuchons de connecteur du boîtier et de l’unité appareil photo. Alignez le côté gauche de l’unité appareil photo sur le repère d’alignement situé sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo, puis faites glisser l’unité appareil photo vers la gauche jusqu’à ce qu’un déclic soit émis. Repère d’alignement pour l’installation de l’unité appareil photo Retrait de l’unité appareil photo du boîtier de l’appareil photo Faites glisser le levier de déverrouillage de l’unité appareil photo vers la droite et retirez l’unité appareil photo. Veillez à ne pas faire tomber le boîtier de l’appareil photo et l’unité appareil photo lors du retrait de l’unité appareil photo.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Mise sous et hors tension Mode prise de vue Placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/ ARRÊT sur MARCHE pour mettre l’appareil photo sous tension. L’appareil photo émet le son de démarrage. Le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash clignote plusieurs secondes pendant le démarrage de l’appareil. Pour mettre l’appareil photo hors tension, placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/ARRÊT sur ARRÊT. Le nombre de photos prises ce jour s’affiche avant la mise hors tension. (L’appareil affiche zéro si l’horloge n’a pas été configurée. Si vous mettez l’appareil hors tension après avoir modifié l’horloge (page 20), l’appareil affiche le nombre de photos prises depuis la modification du réglage de l’horloge.) Attention Les modifications des réglages continu (page 73), intervalle (page 83) et retardateur (page 31) sont perdues lors de la mise hors tension de l’appareil. La mise hors tension de l’appareil restaure les réglages des modes MY avec les valeurs enregistrées dans Enr. Mes Réglages. Les autres réglages ne sont pas affectés.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 9 Mode lecture Lorsque l’appareil photo est hors tension, maintenez la touche 6 enfoncée pendant environ une seconde pour activer le mode lecture de l’appareil photo. Appuyez de nouveau sur la touche 6 pour mettre l’appareil photo hors tension. Conseil :mode deveilleetmise horstension automatique L’appareil photo éteint l’écran ou se met automatiquement hors tension pour économiser l’argent si aucune opération n’est effectuée au cours de la durée indiquée sous Mode veille (page 141) et Extinction auto (page 141).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 20 Configuration de base Une boîte de dialogue de sélection de la langue s’affiche lors de la première mise sous tension de l’appareil. Procédez comme suit pour choisir une langue et configurer la date et l’heure. Pour quitter une fois la configuration terminée, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Vous pouvez à tout moment modifier la langue, l’heure et la date dans le menu de configuration (page 149). 1 Sélectionnez une langue. Appuyez sur +, –, Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner une langue et appuyez sur C/D. 2 Configurez l’horloge. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner l’année, le mois, le jour, l’heure, les minutes ou le format de date, puis appuyez sur + ou – pour modifier. Après avoir vérifié que la date est correcte, appuyez sur C/D. Une boîte de dialogue de confirmation s’affiche ; appuyez sur C/D pour valider votre choix. Remarques • Si vous laissez la batterie dans le boîtier de l’appareil pendant au moins deux heures, les réglages de l’horloge et de la langue sont conservés pendant environ une semaine une fois la batterie retirée. • La date et l’heure d’enregistrement peuvent être inscrites sur les photos (page 84).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Prise de vue photographique Après avoir configuré l’appareil photo comme indiqué dans « Premiers pas » (page 12), vous êtes prêt à prendre des photos. Placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/ ARRET sur MARCHE pour mettre l’appareil sous tension et tournez le sélecteur de mode sur 5. Tenue de l’appareil photo 1 Tenez l’appareil à deux mains. Tenez l’appareil à deux mains avec les coudes légèrement collés au corps. Attention Assurez-vous que l’objectif ou le flash n’est pas obstrué par vos doigts, vos cheveux ou la courroie d’encolure. 2 Préparez-vous à prendre la photo. Posez le doigt sur le déclencheur.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 22 Prise de vue 1 Effectuez la mise au point. Cadrez votre sujet au centre de l’écran d’affichage des photos et appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point et définir l’exposition. 4:3 N Si l’appareil peut effectuer la mise au point, les cadres de mise au point des objets mis au point s’affichent en vert (neuf cadres maximum). Si l’appareil photo est incapable d’effectuer la mise au point, le cadre de mise au point au centre clignote en rouge et le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash clignote en vert. Témoin de mise au point automatique/flash Cadre de mise au point 2 Prenez une photo. Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. L’image s’affiche pendant quelques secondes juste après la prise de vue (page 142) et est enregistrée dans la mémoire interne ou sur la carte mémoire.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Conseil : le déclencheur L’appareil photo dispose d’un déclencheur à deux étapes. Pour effectuer la mise au point, appuyez légèrement sur le déclencheur jusqu’à ce que vous sentiez une résistance. Cette action est dénommée « appuyer sur le déclencheur jusqu’à micourse ». Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Conseil :mise au point Le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash et le cadre de mise au point indiquent si le sujet est mis au point. État de la mise au point Cadre de mise au point Témoin de mise au point automatique/flash Avant la mise au point Blanc Éteint Sujet mis au point Vert Allumé (vert) Mise au point impossible Rouge (clignotant) Clignotant (vert) L’appareil peut être dans l’incapacité d’effectuer la mise au point dans les cas suivants : • Objets manquant de contraste comme le ciel, un mur d’une seule couleur ou le capot d’une voiture • Objets plats contenant uniquement des lignes horizontales • Objets se déplaçant rapidement • Objets faiblement éclairés • Objets avec des reflets brillants ou en contre-jour • Objets clignotant comme des lampes fluorescentes • Sources lumineuses pointées comme des ampoules, des projecteurs ou des LED Notez qu’un ou plusieurs cadres de mise au point peuvent être affichés en vert, même si l’appareil est incapable d’effectuer la mise au point sur les objets ci-dessus ; vérifiez la mise au point sur l’écran d’affichage des photos avant la prise de vue. Si l’appareil est incapable d’effectuer la mise au point, verrouillez la mise au point sur un autre objet situé à la même distance de l’appareil que votre sujet, puis recomposez l’ensemble et prenez la photo (page 25).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Conseil : pouréviterles photos floues Pour empêcher les effets de flou provoqués par un déplacement de l’appareil au moment du déclenchement (« bougé de l’appareil »), appuyez sur le déclencheur doucement et sans à- coups. Des effets de flou sont notamment probables si : • Le flash est désactivé et l’éclairage est faible • Le zoom numérique est utilisé (page 26) Dans les cas où des effets de flou seraient particulièrement susceptibles de se produire à cause d’un bougé de l’appareil, l’icône J s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Tenez fermement l’appareil et effectuez de nouveau la mise au point, ou essayez l’une des solutions suivantes : • Activez le flash ( ) ou utilisez le flash automatique ( ; voir page 28) • Choisissez une sensibilité ISO supérieure (page 90) • Utilisez le retardateur (page 31) • Utilisez la fonction de correction du bougé de l’appareil (page 92) Remarques • Si le flash doit se déclencher lors de la prise de vue, un pré-flash sera émis pour faciliter la mise au point et le réglage de l’exposition. • L’icône s’affiche en cas de surexposition ou de sousexposition. • Vous pouvez choisir la durée d’affichage des photos sur l’écran d’affichage des photos après les prises de vue. Si vous le souhaitez, les photos peuvent rester affichées jusqu’à ce que le déclencheur soit enfoncé jusqu’à mi-course (page 142).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Verrouillage de la mise au point Utilisez le verrouillage de la mise au point pour composer des photos dans lesquelles le sujet n’est pas au centre du cadre. Le verrouillage de la mise au point peut être également utilisé si l’appareil photo est incapable d’effectuer la mise au point. 1 Effectuez la mise au point. Positionnez votre sujet au centre de l’écran d’affichage des photos et appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point. 4:3 N 2 Recomposez la photo. Tout en maintenant le déclencheur enfoncé jusqu’à mi-course pour verrouiller la mise au point, recomposez la photo. Composition finale Sujet principal 3 Prenez une photo. Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Attention Si la distance entre l’appareil et le sujet change alors que le verrouillage de la mise au point est activé, effectuez de nouveau la mise au point en fonction de la nouvelle distance.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Zoom La touche 8 (téléobjectif) permet d’effectuer un zoom avant et la touche 9 (grand angle), un zoom arrière. 4:3 N 9 8 4:3 N Zoom arrière Zoom avant 1 Cadrez la photo en utilisant les touches 8 et 9. 2 Effectuez la mise au point. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course. 3 Prenez une photo. Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Remarques • Si vous utilisez l’unité appareil photo sans zoom optique, le zoom numérique fonctionne à la place. • Lors de l’utilisation d’une unité appareil photo équipée d’un zoom optique et d’un zoom numérique, pour passer du zoom optique au zoom numérique, relâchez la touche 8 une fois le taux maximum d’agrandissement atteint par le zoom optique, puis appuyez de nouveau sur la touche 8. Pour passer du zoom numérique au zoom optique, maintenez la touche 9 enfoncée. • Vous pouvez consulter le taux de zoom optique dans la barre de zoom de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Lors de l’utilisation du zoom numérique, le taux de zoom est affiché dans l’écran d’affichage des photos. • Le zoom numérique ne peut être utilisé lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/Taille (page 61).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Prise de vue rapprochée (mode macro) Utilisez le mode macro pour la prise de vue rapprochée de petits objets. 1Appuyez sur la touche N. L’icône N s’affiche brièvement au centre de l’écran d’affichage des photos. N s’affiche ensuite dans la partie supérieure gauche de l’écran. 2 Effectuez la mise au point. Cadrez le sujet sur l’écran d’affichage des photos et appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course. 3 Prenez une photo. 4:3 N Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Pour quitter le mode macro, appuyez de nouveau sur la touche N. Remarque L’option AF Spot est utilisée en mode macro même si l’option AF Multi, Snap ou 8 est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64).UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Photographie au flash Le flash se déclenche uniquement s’il est ouvert. Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f pour ouvrir le flash et appuyez de nouveau sur la touche pour choisir l’un des modes flash suivants : Mode Description Flash Non Le flash est éteint. Auto Le flash se déclenche automatiquement si nécessaire. Flash yeux roug. Ce mode réduit l’effet « yeux rouges » des portraits pris au flash. Flash Oui Le flash se déclenche à chaque prise de vue. Synchro. Flash Ce mode combine le flash avec des vitesses d’obturation lentes. Utilisez-le pour prendre des portraits incluant des détails de l’arrière-plan ou de la vue de nuit. L’utilisation d’un trépied est recommandée pour éviter les effets de flou. Flash manuel Le flash se déclenche à chaque prise de vue. Le niveau de flash peut être défini sous Niveau de flash manuel (page 79). Remarque La plage d’efficacité du flash varie en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 29 Utilisation du flash intégré 1 Ouvrez le flash. Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f. OPEN 2 Sélectionnez un mode flash. Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f pour sélectionner un mode flash. L’icône du mode flash s’affiche dans le coin supérieur gauche de l’écran. Remarques • Le mode flash sélectionné reste actif jusqu’à ce qu’un nouveau mode soit choisi. • Le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash clignote lorsque le flash se charge. La prise de vue devient possible dès que le témoin cesse de clignoter. 3 Effectuez la mise au point et prenez la photo. Si le flash doit se déclencher lors de la prise de vue, un pré-flash sera émis pour faciliter la mise au point et le réglage de l’exposition.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 0 Remarques • Pour refermer le flash lorsqu’il n’est pas utilisé, appuyez doucement au centre du couvercle du flash jusqu’à ce qu’il soit verrouillé. • Le flash s’éteint automatiquement dans les modes vidéo, continu et cadrage. • N’utilisez pas le flash intégré lorsqu’un flash optionnel est branché. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut endommager l’appareil. Attention N’utilisez pas le flash trop près des yeux de votre sujet. La plus grande prudence est recommandée pour photographier des enfants. Ne pointez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule à moteur.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Retardateur Faites votre choix parmi le retardateur de dix secondes, le retardateur de deux secondes et le retardateur personnalisé. Utilisez le retardateur de deux secondes pour éviter le flou occasionné par le bougé de l’appareil lorsque le déclencheur est enfoncé. Avec le réglage personnalisé, un nombre donné de photos peuvent être prises à un intervalle défini. Définissez l’intervalle de prise de vue et le nombre de photos à l’aide du Retardateur personnalisé dans le menu prise de vue (page 82). 1 Choisissez un mode retardateur. Appuyez sur la touche t une fois pour sélectionner le retardateur de dix secondes, deux fois pour sélectionner le retardateur de deux secondes et trois fois pour sélectionner le retardateur personnalisé. Appuyez une quatrième fois sur la touche pour désactiver le retardateur. La sélection actuelle s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Remarque Le mode retardateur sélectionné reste actif jusqu’à ce qu’un nouveau mode soit choisi. 2Démarrez le retardateur. Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour verrouiller la mise au point et démarrer le retardateur. Si vous sélectionnez le retardateur de dix secondes ou le retardateur personnalisé, le flash auxiliaire AF se déclenche. Remarque Appuyez sur C/D pour annuler le retardateur personnalisé pendant la prise de vue. 4:3 N UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. 2 Indicateur de niveau Utilisez l’indicateur de niveau pour niveler l’appareil photo pour photographier des bâtiments ou des paysages. C’est particulièrement utile pour les compositions dans lesquelles l’horizon est visible. 1Affichez les options. Appuyez et tenez enfoncée la touche O (DISP.) jusqu’à ce que les options de réglage de niveau s’affichent. 2 Sélectionnez une option. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer l’option sélectionnée. Options Description Non Indicateur de niveau non affiché. Affichage L’indicateur de niveau s’affiche au niveau de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Le niveau et le sens d’inclinaison peuvent être vérifiés au niveau de l’indicateur de niveau. L’indicateur s’affiche en vert lorsque l’appareil photo est de niveau, en orange si l’appareil photo est incliné et en rouge si le niveau d’inclinaison est supérieur au niveau maximal pouvant être affiché par l’indicateur. L’indicateur de niveau ne s’affiche pas si l’écran est éteint, si les indicateurs sont cachés ou si la grille de cadrage est affichée (page 42). Aff. + son Identique à l’option Affichage, sauf qu’un signal sonore est régulièrement émis lorsque l’appareil est de niveau. Son Un signal sonore est régulièrement émis lorsque l’appareil est de niveau. L’indicateur de niveau ne s’affiche pas sur l’écran d’affichage des photos.UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci.  Fonctionnement del’indicateur de niveau 4:3 N Vert 4:3 N Orange Niveau de l’appareil L’appareil est incliné vers la gauche 4:3 N Rouge 4:3 N Appareil photo penché trop loin vers la droite L’appareil est incliné à 90 ° vers la gauche Remarque L’indicateur de niveau peut être également paramétré dans le menu configuration (pages 144). Attention • L’indicateur de niveau ne s’affiche pas si l’appareil est à l’envers, si une vidéo est en cours d’enregistrement ou si la prise de vue à intervalles est activée. • Le signal sonore n’est pas émis si le volume de l’appareil photo est désactivé (page 142). • L’indicateur de niveau est destiné uniquement à servir de guide et il ne doit pas être utilisé comme un niveau à bulle ou dans d’autres applications ou un degré élevé de précision est requis. Sa précision chute lorsque l’appareil est en mouvement ou si vous photographiez un véhicule ou une plate-forme en déplacement. UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Visualisation et suppression de photos Les photos peuvent être visualisées sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Visualisation de photos Appuyez sur la touche 6 en mode prise de vue pour afficher la dernière photo visualisée. Appuyez de nouveau sur la touche 6 pour quitter le mode prise de vue. Conseil :si l’appareil photo est horstension Lorsque l’appareil photo est hors tension, maintenez la touche 6 enfoncée pendant environ une seconde pour activer le mode lecture de l’appareil photo. Appuyez sur Fn2 pour visualiser les photos dans l’ordre d’enregistrement et sur Fn pour les visualiser dans l’ordre inverse. Appuyez sur – pour avancer de dix images et sur + pour reculer de dix images. UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Une photo en arrière 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Dix photos en arrière + 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Fn 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Fn2 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N – Une photo en avant Dix photos en avant 2010 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 200 F 2.5 2010 200 F 2.5 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Attention L’appareil photo enregistre des copies JPEG des images RAW pour les afficher sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Lorsqu’une image RAW est sélectionnée pour lecture, l’appareil affiche la copie JPEG et un indicateur RAW s’affiche. Si la copie JPEG a été supprimée via un ordinateur ou un autre dispositif, l’appareil affichera un petit aperçu de l’image RAW et vous ne serez pas en mesure d’en visualiser des agrandissements. Consultez les pages 62 et 63 pour en savoir plus sur l’enregistrement des images RAW. Conseil :visualisation des photosenmode prise devue Les photos sont affichées sur l’écran d’affichage des photos immédiatement après les prises de vue. Vous pouvez choisir la durée d’affichage des photos avec Délai de validation LCD de l’onglet de configuration (page 142). UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Conseil :visualisation des photos delamémoireinterne Si une carte mémoire est insérée, les photos sur la carte sont affichées mais les photos de la mémoire interne ne peuvent pas être visualisées, même si la carte mémoire est vide. Les photos de la mémoire interne ne s’affichent que si aucune carte n’est insérée dans le boîtier de l’appareil. Conseil :rotation automatique Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Rotation auto de l’onglet de configuration (page 143), les photos sont automatiquement affichées dans le sens correct sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Visualisation de plusieurs photos Appuyez sur la touche z ou Z pour sélectionner le nombre de photos à afficher (une, 20 ou 81) ou pour classer les photos en fonction de la date à laquelle elles ont été prises. 1 image 20 images 4:3 N 2010 F 2.5 200 4:3 N 2010 F 2.5 Trier par date 81 images UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Des vues multi-images peuvent être utilisées pour sélectionner des photos à afficher ou à supprimer. Dans les vues multi-images, utilisez le pavé directionnel pour sélectionner des photos. Conseil : pavé directionnel Il est possible de déplacer le curseur en oblique en appuyant sur les sections diagonales du pavé directionnel. Remarques • Pour afficher une photo en plein écran, appuyez sur la manette ADJ. dans une vue multi-images. • Pour afficher les photos de la page précédente ou suivante dans une vue multi-images : • Dans une vue 20 et 81 images, appuyez sur la touche +, –, Fn, Fn2 ou sur la manette ADJ. (gauche ou droite) ou faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins tout en maintenant la touche DIRECT enfoncée. • Dans la vue classée par date, si vous appuyez sur la touche + ou –, ou si vous faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins tout en maintenant la touche DIRECT enfoncée, la page suivante ou précédente s’affiche. Appuyez sur la touche Fn, Fn2 ou sur la manette ADJ. (gauche ou droite) tout en maintenant la touche DIRECT enfoncée pour afficher les photos prises le jour suivant ou précédent. Si vous appuyez sur la touche Fn2 ou sur la manette ADJ. vers la droite sur la dernière photo, les photos prises la date suivante sont affichées. UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Zoom en lecture Appuyez sur la touche z ou faites tourner le sélecteur plusmoins vers la droite pour effectuer un zoom avant sur la photo actuellement affichée en plein écran. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour effectuer un zoom avant selon le taux d’agrandissement sélectionné sous Zoom par 1 seule pression (page 143). Les opérations suivantes peuvent être réalisées : Commande Action z Zoom avant. Sélecteur plus-moins Zoom avant en le tournant à droite et zoom en arrière en le tournant à gauche. C/D Lorsqu’une image est agrandie, appuyez pour afficher l’image au taux d’agrandissement sélectionné pour Zoom par 1 seule pression. Si une image s’affiche au taux d’agrandissement sélectionné pour Zoom par 1 seule pression, appuyez sur la touche C/D pour annuler le zoom. pavé directionnel Déplacement des zones à afficher. Manette ADJ. Affichage d’autres photos au même rapport de zoom en appuyant dessus vers la droite ou la gauche. Z Zoom arrière. Remarques • L’agrandissement maximum varie selon la taille de l’image : Taille d’image Agrandissement maximum L, M, 5M, 3M 16× 1M 6,7× VGA 3,4× • Le zoom en lecture n’est pas disponible avec les vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +. • Si l’option Réglage 2 est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Options du sélecteur de mode lecture dans l’onglet des options personnalisées (page 138), la manette ADJ. et le sélecteur plus-moins peuvent être utilisés pour visualiser d’autres zones de l’image.9 UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Suppression de photos Procédez comme suit pour supprimer des photos. Suppression de photos individuelles 1Affichez une photo. Affichez la photo à supprimer dans une vue une image (page 34). 2Appuyez sur la touche d. Les options sont affichées (vous pouvez modifier la photo en appuyant sur Fn ou Fn2). 3 Sélectionnez Effacer un. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Effacer un, puis appuyez sur C/D. Un message s’affiche pendant la suppression. Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour supprimer d’autres Cphotos ou sélectionnez Annuler et appuyez sur /D pour quitter. Suppression de tous les fichiers Pour supprimer tous les fichiers, appuyez sur la touche d pour afficher les options de suppression, comme indiqué ci-dessus, et sélectionnez Suppr. tout. Une boîte de dialogue de confirmation s’affiche ; appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner Oui, puis appuyez sur C/D.0 UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Suppression de plusieurs fichiers Procédez comme suit pour supprimer plusieurs fichiers. 1Appuyez sur la touche d. Dans une vue multi-images, passez à l’étape 2. Dans une vue une image, les options illustrées à droite s’affichent. Sélectionnez Suppr. multi et appuyez sur C/D. 2 Sélectionnez Sél. indiv. ou Sél. série. Pour sélectionner les images une par une, sélectionnez CSél. indiv., appuyez sur /D et passez à l’étape 3. Pour sélectionner les images en définissant des séries, sélectionnez Sél. série, appuyez sur C/ D et passez à l’étape 3.1. Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour quitter sans supprimer les fichiers. 3 Sélectionnez une photo. Utilisez le pavé directionnel (page 37) pour sélectionner des photos, puis appuyez sur C/D. L’image sélectionnée est marquée d’une icône d. Pour désélectionner une photo, sélectionnez-la et appuyez de nouveau sur C/D. 4:3 N 4:3 N  UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Conseil :sélection deséries Pour basculer entre les paramètres Sél. indiv. et Sél. série, appuyez sur la manette ADJ. et procédez comme suit : 3.1 Utilisez le pavé directionnel pour sélectionner la première image d’une série, puis appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer. L’image sélectionnée est marquée d’une icône d. Pour désélectionner l’image, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. 4:3 N 3.2 Utilisez le pavé directionnel pour sélectionner la dernière Cimage, puis appuyez sur /D pour confirmer. Les images sélectionnées sont marquées d’une icône d. 4:3 N Répétez les étapes 3.1-3.2 pour sélectionner des séries supplémentaires ou appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour revenir à l’étape 3 et sélectionner ou désélectionner des photos individuelles. 4Appuyez sur la touche d. Une boîte de dialogue de confirmation s’affiche. 5 Sélectionnez Oui. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner Oui, puis appuyez sur C/D.2 UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Touche O (DISP.) Appuyez sur la touche O (DISP.) pour afficher les informations sur l’écran d’affichage des photos en mode prise de vue et en mode lecture. Activation/Désactivation DeL’écran D’affichage Des Photos Si vous appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD lorsque l’écran d’affichage des photos est allumé, l’écran s’éteint. Certaines opérations de l’appareil photo ne sont pas disponibles lorsque l’écran d’affichage des photos est éteint. Appuyez de nouveau sur la touche VF/LCD pour allumer l’écran d’affichage des photos. Si un viseur LCD est installé, appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD pour commuter entre le viseur LCD et l’écran d’affichage des photos. Mode prise de vue Appuyez sur la touche O (DISP.) pour faire défiler les affichages suivants : Indicateurs affichés 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Indicateurs+ histogramme Pas d’indicateurs 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N Grille de cadrage (pas d’indicateurs) Conseil : la grille decadrage Reportez-vous à la page 144 pour la sélection d’un type de grille de cadrage. UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Remarque Si l’option Affichage ou Aff. + son est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Réglage niveau (page 32), un indicateur de niveau apparaît lorsque les indicateurs sont affichés. Mode lecture Appuyez sur la touche O (DISP.) pour faire défiler les affichages suivants : Indicateurs affichés 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 Détails+ histogramme Pas d’indicateurs 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 4:3 N 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 2010 2010 F 2.5 200 F 2.5 200 2.5 200 Surbrillance Conseil :Surbrillance Les parties clignotantes de l’affichage Surbrillance indiquent les zones « lessivées », dans lesquelles des détails peuvent avoir été perdus à cause de la surexposition. Vérifiez les images avec l’affichage Surbrillance après une prise de vue en plein soleil ou dans d’autres conditions où des parties de l’image pourraient avoir été surexposées. S’il s’avère que des détails importants peuvent avoir été perdus, choisissez une valeur de correction d’exposition plus faible et prenez une nouvelle photo (page 85). Notez que l’affichage est destiné uniquement à servir de guide et qu’il ne peut être totalement fiable. UtilisateUr débUtant ? VeUillez lire ceci. Conseil : l’histogramme L’histogramme est un graphique illustrant la distribution des pixels selon la luminosité de l’image. La luminosité est représentée par l’axe horizontal, avec les zones sombres à gauche et les zones claires à droite. Le nombre de pixels est représenté par l’axe vertical. L’histogramme peut être utilisé pour évaluer l’exposition et vérifier la perte des détails dans les zones claires et sombres, sans que la luminosité de votre environnement n’affecte votre jugement. Un histogramme dans lequel les pixels sont regroupés sur la droite indique que l’image peut être surexposée, tandis qu’un histogramme dans lequel les pixels sont regroupés à gauche indique que l’image peut être sous-exposée. Surexposé Sous-exposé Si l’exposition de l’image s’avère incorrecte, vous pouvez utiliser la correction d’exposition pour corriger l’exposition des photos suivantes du même sujet (page 85 ; notez que la correction d’exposition peut se révéler insuffisante dans certains cas pour obtenir une exposition correcte). L’histogramme peut être également utilisé comme un guide pour le réglage du contraste des photos après les prises de vue (page 107). L’histogramme est destiné uniquement à servir de guide et peut ne pas être totalement fiable, notamment dans les cas où le flash serait utilisé ou l’éclairage ambiant serait faible.PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie  Plus sur la photographie...........................................  Fonctions de lecture................................................. 9 Menu des réglages de la lecture...............................0 Impression de photos..............................................20 Réglages de l’appareil .............................................2 Copie des photos sur un ordinateur.......................... Remarques techniques............................................ Référence Lisez cette section pour en savoir plus sur les fonctions de l’appareil photo. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Plus sur la photographie Cette section détaille les modes P, A, S, M, 4 et MY, ainsi que l’utilisation des options du menu prise de vue. Mode P : changement de programme Lorsque le sélecteur de mode est réglé sur P (changement de programme), vous pouvez utiliser le sélecteur plus-moins pour choisir parmi les différentes combinaisons d’ouverture et de vitesse d’obturation, produisant toutes la même exposition. 1 Choisissez le mode P. Placez le sélecteur de mode sur P. Le mode prise de vue est indiqué par une icône sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N 2Mesurez l’exposition. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour mesurer l’exposition. L’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation actuelles s’affichent sur le moniteur. 2.5 200 3 Choisissez l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation. Relâchez le déclencheur et faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner une combinaison d’ouverture et de vitesse d’obturation. 4:3 N  PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Remarque L’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation peuvent être configurées pendant dix secondes après avoir relâché le déclencheur. 4 Prenez une photo. Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Remarque Les combinaisons d’ouverture et de vitesse d’obturation disponibles pour chaque valeur d’exposition varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode A : priorité à l’ouverture En mode A (priorité à l’ouverture), vous choisissez l’ouverture et l’appareil photo sélectionne la vitesse d’obturation. Choisissez de grandes ouvertures (petits nombres f) pour mettre en valeur le sujet principal en rendant flou l’arrière-plan et les détails de l’avant-plan. Choisissez de petites ouvertures (grands nombres f) pour effectuer la mise au point sur l’arrière-plan et le sujet principal. 1 Choisissez le mode A. Placez le sélecteur de mode sur A. L’ouverture actuelle s’affiche en orange. 2 Choisissez une ouverture. Faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner une ouverture. Votre sélection prend effet uniquement lorsque la photo est prise ; il est impossible de prévisualiser son effet sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 3Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour définir la mise au point et l’exposition. La vitesse d’obturation sélectionnée par l’appareil s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N 4 Prenez une photo. Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Remarque Si l’option Décalage ouverture auto est activée (page 92), l’appareil réglera l’ouverture pour obtenir une exposition optimale. 4:3 N 9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode S : priorité à l’obturation En mode S (priorité à l’obturation), vous choisissez la vitesse d’obturation et l’appareil photo sélectionne l’ouverture. Choisissez des vitesses d’obturation rapides pour « geler » le mouvement et des vitesses d’obturation lentes pour souligner le mouvement en rendant flous les objets en déplacement. 1 Choisissez le mode S. Placez le sélecteur de mode sur S. La vitesse d’obturation actuelle s’affiche en orange. 2 Choisissez une vitesse d’obturation. Faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner une vitesse d’obturation. 3Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour définir la mise au point et l’exposition. L’ouverture sélectionnée par l’appareil s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 2.5 200 4 Prenez une photo. Appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Remarque L’ouverture maximum (c.-à-d. le nombre f le plus bas possible) peut ne pas être sélectionnée à des vitesses d’obturation lentes, même lorsque le sujet est faiblement éclairé. 4:3 N 0 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode M: exposition manuelle En mode M (exposition manuelle), vous utilisez le sélecteur plusmoins pour choisir l’ouverture et la manette ADJ. pour sélectionner la vitesse d’obturation. 1 Choisissez le mode M. Placez le sélecteur de mode sur M. Le mode prise de vue, l’indicateur d’exposition, ainsi que l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation actuelles, s’affichent à l’écran. 4:3 N 2 Choisissez une ouverture et une vitesse d’obturation. Faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour choisir une ouverture, puis appuyez sur la manette ADJ. vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour sélectionner une vitesse d’obturation (le cas échéant, les rôles des deux commandes peuvent être inversés, voir page 138). Les effets peuvent être prévisualisés sur l’écran d’affichage des photos et sont reflétés par l’indicateur d’exposition (si l’image doit être sous-exposée ou surexposée de plus de 2EV, il est impossible d’en prévisualiser les effets et l’indicateur devient orange). 3 Prenez une photo. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point, puis appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. –2–2 EVEV +2+2 EVEV PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Remarques • Les vitesses d’obturation disponibles varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo et du réglage de l’ouverture. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. • Si l’option Auto ou Auto-Hi est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Sensibilité ISO (page 90), la sensibilité ISO sera fixée en mode exposition manuelle. La sensibilité ISO fixée varie en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. • Choisissez des vitesses d’obturation lentes pour des durées d’exposition prolongées. Pour réduire les effets de flou provoqués par un bougé de l’appareil, tenez-le fermement à deux mains ou utilisez un trépied. L’écran d’affichage des photos s’éteint lorsque l’obturateur est ouvert. À de faibles vitesses d’obturation, l’appareil traite automatiquement les photos pour supprimer le bruit, en augmentant le délai nécessaire à l’enregistrement des images à environ deux fois la vitesse d’obturation. • Le verrouillage de l’exposition automatique (AE) n’est pas disponible en mode exposition manuelle. Si l’option Verrouill. AE est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Rég. touche Fn ou Rég. touche Fn2 dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, un appui sur la touche affectée en mode exposition manuelle définira l’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur proche de celle nécessaire pour obtenir une exposition optimale. De même, si l’option Comp. expo. est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Réglages bouton +/– (page 137) dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, un appui sur les touches + et – n’affichera pas les options de correction d’exposition en mode exposition manuelle, mais définira plutôt l’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation sur une valeur proche de celle nécessaire pour obtenir une exposition optimale. C’est particulièrement utile lorsque vous souhaitez utiliser une exposition optimale comme point de départ pour modifier l’exposition. L’option Mode M par 1 seule pression (page 138) dans l’onglet des options personnalisées détermine si l’ouverture ou la vitesse d’obturation est modifiée pour obtenir une exposition optimale. 2 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode 4: Réglages pour diverses scènes pour enregistrer des vidéos ou Sélectionnez le mode 4 choisir une des options adaptées à des scènes spécifiques. Les réglages de l’appareil photo sont automatiquement optimisés pour le type de sujet sélectionné. Les options suivantes font partie des options disponibles en mode 4. Option Description Vidéo Cette option permet d’enregistrer des vidéos avec le son (page 54). Portrait À utiliser lors de la prise de portraits. Sports À utiliser lors de la prise de vue d’objets en mouvement. Paysage À utiliser lors de la prise de paysages avec beaucoup de verdure ou un ciel bleu. Nuit À utiliser lors de la prise de scènes de nuit. En mode nuit, le flash se déclenche lorsque toutes les conditions suivantes sont réunies : • Le flash est réglé sur Auto. • Le flash est indispensable parce qu’il fait noir. • Il y a une personne ou un objet à proximité. Correction biais Cette option réduit les effets de perspective lors de la prise de vue d’objets rectangulaires, comme des panneaux d’affichage ou des cartes de visite (page 56). PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Pour sélectionner une option du mode scène : 1 Placez le sélecteur de mode sur 4. L’option actuellement 4sélectionnée pour le mode s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 2Appuyez sur C/D. Le menu du mode scène s’affiche. 3 Sélectionnez une option. Appuyez sur +, –, Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner une option et appuyez sur C/D pour revenir au mode prise de vue, avec l’option sélectionnée affichée en haut de l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4 Prenez une photo. • Mode vidéo : voir page 54. • Mode Correction biais : voir page 56. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Conseil : utilisation desmenus Pour accéder aux menus prise de vue, options personnalisées et configuration en mode 4, appuyez sur la touche C/D pour afficher le menu du mode scène, puis appuyez sur Fn pour sélectionner l’onglet mode. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner l’onglet du menu prise de vue (page 58), l’onglet des options personnalisées (page 127) ou l’onglet de configuration (page 128), puis appuyez sur Fn2 pour placer le curseur dans le menu sélectionné. Consultez la page 59 pour en savoir plus sur les options du menu prise de vue disponibles dans chaque mode. 1 2 3 4 1Onglet mode 2Onglet du menu prise de vue 3Onglet des options personnalisées 4Onglet de configuration Enregistrement de vidéos Enregistrez des vidéos avec le son. Les vidéos sont stockées sous la forme de fichier AVI. 1 Sélectionnez 3 en mode 4. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner 3 (vidéo), puis appuyez sur C/D. Le mode est indiqué par une icône sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 2 Enregistrez la vidéo. Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour démarrer l’enregistrement ; appuyez de nouveau pour l’arrêter. L’enregistrement se termine automatiquement lorsque la mémoire est pleine. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Attention • L’icône clignote ; la durée d’enregistrement et la durée restante disponible s’affichent pendant l’enregistrement. • Les bruits émis par l’appareil photo peuvent être enregistrés sur la vidéo. • Les vidéos peuvent avoir une durée de 90 minutes ou une taille de 4Go. En fonction du type de carte mémoire utilisée, l’enregistrement vidéo peut se terminer avant que cette durée ou cette taille soit atteinte. La durée totale maximale de tous les fichiers vidéo qui peuvent être stockés dans la mémoire interne ou sur une carte mémoire varie en fonction des options sélectionnées pour Taille vidéo (page 61). Remarques • Le flash ne peut être utilisé en mode vidéo. • L’appareil effectue la mise au point lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur pour démarrer l’enregistrement. • La durée restante est calculée en fonction de la quantité de mémoire disponible et ne peut pas diminuer de façon régulière. • Les options du menu prise de vue sont différentes de celles disponibles dans les autres modes (page 60). • Chargez la batterie avant la prise de vue. Pour les enregistrements de longue durée, choisissez des cartes mémoire avec une vitesse d’écriture rapide et vérifiez la quantité de mémoire disponible avant l’enregistrement vidéo. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode 4: correction biais Pour prendre des photos en mode Correction biais, cadrez le sujet afin qu’il occupe le cadre entier et appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre la photo. Si l’appareil détecte un objet dont la perspective peut être corrigée, l’objet est entouré par un cadre orange. L’appareil peut détecter jusqu’à cinq objets ; pour sélectionner un objet différent, appuyez sur Fn2, pour enregistrer la photo sans aucune correction de perspective, appuyez sur +. Si l’appareil est incapable de détecter un sujet approprié, un message d’erreur s’affiche et la photo sera enregistrée sans modification. Attention L’appareil enregistre deux images : la photo non modifiée et une copie qui a été traitée pour corriger la perspective. Aucune photo ne sera prise si la mémoire est insuffisante pour enregistrer deux images. L’appareil peut être dans l’incapacité de corriger la perspective dans les cas suivants : • Le sujet n’est pas mis au point. • Les quatre bords du sujet ne sont pas clairement visibles. • Il existe peu de contraste entre le sujet et l’arrière-plan. • L’arrière-plan contient de nombreux détails fins. Conseil :correction biais L’option Correction biais du menu lecture peut être utilisée pour corriger la perspective des photos enregistrées (page 110). PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Modes «MY »: utilisation des réglages personnalisés Pour prendre des photos à l’aide des réglages enregistrés sous l’option MY1 avec Enr. Mes Réglages de l’onglet des options personnalisées (page 129), placez le sélecteur de mode sur MY. Sélectionnez MY2 pour prendre des photos en utilisant les réglages enregistrés avec MY2 et MY pour prendre des photos en utilisant les réglages enregistrés avec MY3. 1 Placez le sélecteur de mode sur MY, MY2 ou MY. Le mode prise de vue enregistré avec Enr. Mes Réglages s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Remarque Les réglages peuvent être configurés dans les modes MY. Les réglages enregistrés avec Enr. Mes Réglages sont restaurés lorsqu’un autre mode est sélectionné ou si l’appareil photo est mis hors tension. Conseil :choisir unmode prise devue Pour choisir un mode prise de vue en mode MY sans modifier d’autres réglages, utilisez l’option Changement de mode prise de vue dans le menu prise de vue (page 92). L’option Changement de mode prise de vue n’est pas disponible pour les modes MY auquel un mode scène est attribué. 2 Prenez une photo. Consultez la section sur le mode prise de vue sélectionné pour en savoir plus. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Menu prise de vue Les touches +, –, Fn, Fn2 et C/D vous permettent de naviguer dans les menus. Attention Le menu prise de vue ne s’affiche pas lorsque l’unité appareil photo n’est pas installée sur le boîtier. 1Affichez le menu prise de vue. Dans les modes autres que le mode 4, si vous appuyez sur C/D en mode prise de vue, le menu prise de vue s’affiche. CEn mode Conseil4:mode4, un appui sur /D affiche le menu mode ; appuyez sur Fn pour sélectionner l’onglet mode, sur – pour afficher le menu prise de vue et sur Fn2 pour placer le curseur dans le menu. La barre de défilement indique la position dans le menu 2 Sélectionnez une rubrique de menu. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une rubrique du menu et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options de la rubrique sélectionnée. Remarque Les éléments de la page suivante peuvent être affichés en appuyant sur – et sur le touche DIRECT simultanément.9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie 3 Sélectionnez une option. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option. Appuyez sur C/D pour sélectionner et passer au mode prise de vue ou sur Fn pour sélectionner et revenir au menu prise de vue. Les rubriques disponibles dans le menu prise de vue varient avec le mode prise de vue. Modes5, P, A,S,M,MY,MY2 etMY Option Défaut Page Qualité image/Taille L4:3 N 61 Mise au point AF Multi 64 Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68 Instantané par pression Oui 69 Pré AF Non 70 Mesure exposition Multi 70 Réglages image Standard 71 Mode continu Non 73 Cadrage auto Non 75 Correction exposition flash 0.0 78 Niveau de flash manuel 1/2 79 Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau 79 Réduction bruit Non 80 Réduction bruit ISO > àISO 401 80 Correction distorsion Non 81 Option Défaut Page Macro auto Non 81 Retardateur personnalisé 2img,5s 82 Prise de vue à intervalles — 83 Horodatage Non 84 Correction de l’exposition* 1 0.0 85 Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86 Compensation balance blancs A :0, G :0 89 Sensibilité ISO Auto 90 Initialiser * 2 — 91 Décalage ouverture auto * 3 Non 92 Changement de mode prise de vue * 4 — 92 Correction du bougé * 5 Oui 920 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode4:vidéo Option Défaut Page Taille vidéo VGA640 61 Mise au point AF Multi 64 Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68 Pré AF Non 70 Option Défaut Page Balance blancs Auto 86 Compensation balance blancs A :0, G :0 89 Mode4: Portrait/Sports/Nuit Option Défaut Page Qualité image/Taille L4:3 N 61 Mise au point AF Multi 64 Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68 Instantané par pression Oui 69 Pré AF Non 70 Correction exposition flash 0.0 78 Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau 79 Option Défaut Page Correction distorsion Non 81 Retardateur personnalisé 2img,5s 82 Horodatage Non 84 Correction de l’exposition 0.0 85 Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86 Correction du bougé* 5 Oui 92 Mode4: Paysage Option Défaut Page Qualité image/Taille L4:3 N 61 Correction distorsion Non 81 Retardateur personnalisé 2img,5s 82 Horodatage Non 84 Correction de l’exposition 0.0 85 Option Défaut Page Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86 Correction du bougé* 5 Oui 92 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mode4:correction biais Option Défaut Page Qualité image/Taille 1M 4:3F 61 Mise au point AF Multi 64 Dist. mise au pt snap 2.5?m 68 Instantané par pression Oui 69 Pré AF Non 70 Mesure exposition Multi 70 Réglages image Standard 71 Correction exposition flash 0.0 78 Option Défaut Page Réglage synchro du flash 1er rideau 79 Correction distorsion Non 81 Horodatage Non 84 Correction de l’exposition 0.0 85 Balance blancs Multi-P AUTO 86 Sensibilité ISO Auto 90 Correction du bougé* 5 Oui 92 * 1 Non disponibleen mode M. * 2 Mode5uniquement. * 3 Mode A uniquement. * 4 Mode MY, MY2 ou MY uniquement. * 5 Ilestpossiblequecettefonction nesoitpas disponibleselon letyped’unitéappareilphoto. Qualité image/Taille/Taille vidéo La taille des images détermine le nombre de photos et de vidéos qui peuvent être stockées dans la mémoire interne ou sur une carte mémoire. Pour les photos, le rapport d’affichage et la qualité de l’image peuvent être sélectionnés pour chaque option. La taille de l’image varie en fonction de l’association de l’option sélectionnée, du rapport d’affichage et de la qualité. Pour les vidéos, sélectionnez l’option souhaitée.2 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Pourles photos Option Rapport d’affichage Taux de compression Description RAW 16:9* 2 , 4:3, 3:2 *2 , 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL/ VGA* 1 • Adapté dans le cadre du traitement ou de la retouche de l’image sur un ordinateur. L 16:9* 2 , 4:3, 3:2* 2 , 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL • Adapté dans le cadre de l’impression grand format ou du rognage de l’image sur un ordinateur. M 16:9* 2 , 4:3, 3:2* 2 , 1:1* 3 FINE/NORMAL 5M 4:3 FINE • Adapté dans le cadre de l’impression. 3M 4:3 FINE 1M* 4 4:3 FINE • Adapté dans le cadre de la prise d’un grand nombre de photos. VGA* 4 4:3 FINE • Adapté dans le cadre de la prise d’un grand nombre de photos, de l’ajout d’images à des courriers électroniques ou de la publication d’images sur le Web. * 1 Le réglage s’applique à la copie JPEG. * 2 Les parties supérieure et inférieure de l’écran sont noircies. * 3 Les côtés gauche et droit de l’écran sont noircis. * 4 1M et VGA sont disponibles en mode Correction biais. Remarques • Reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour plus de détails concernant la taille d’image de chaque option. • Les options du paramètre Qualité image/Taille peuvent être affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134). PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Conseil : qualité d’image L’appareil photo prend en charge les qualités d’image suivantes : • Normal : la compression JPEG est utilisée pour réduire la taille du fichier. • Fine : faible taux de compression pour obtenir des images de haute qualité. La taille des fichiers est plus importante que lors de l’utilisation de la qualité Normal. • RAW : les données d’image RAW sont enregistrées au format DNG ; des copies JPEG sont également créées. L’appareil affiche uniquement la copie JPEG ; les fichiers DNG peuvent être visualisés et retouchés sur un ordinateur en utilisant le logiciel fourni Irodio Photo & Video Studio (Windows uniquement) ou une application de retouche photo existante prenant en charge le format DNG. Contrairement aux images de qualité normale et fine, les images RAW ne sont pas compressées. Cela augmente la taille de fichier mais évite la perte de qualité associée à la compression JPEG. Notez ce qui suit lors de la prise de vue d’images RAW : • Certaines fonctions du menu prise de vue ne sont pas disponibles pour la prise d’images RAW. Reportez-vous à la description de chaque réglage pour plus de détails. Les options Réglages image et Horodatage s’appliquent uniquement aux copies JPEG et n’ont aucun effet sur les fichiers DNG. • Le nombre de photos RAW qui peuvent être prises en une seule rafale en mode continu varie en fonction de l’unité appareil photo et des réglages du menu prise de vue. Pourlesvidéos Option Taille d’image VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 Remarques • Les options disponibles pour les vidéos varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. • Les vidéos peuvent avoir une durée de 90 minutes ou une taille de 4 Go. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Mise au point Choisissez la méthode utilisée pour la mise au point. L’appareil photo utilise par défaut la mise au point automatique. Option Description AF Multi* L’appareil sélectionne la zone de mise au point sur le sujet le plus proche, ce qui évite des prises de vue sans mise au point en empêchant une mise au point sur l’arrière-plan. AF Spot* L’appareil effectue la mise au point sur le sujet au centre du cadre. MF (miseau point manuelle) La mise au point est effectuée manuellement (page 65). Snap La mise au point s’effectue à la distance sélectionnée sous Dist. mise au pt snap (page 68) pour un déclenchement rapide. 8 (infini) La distance de mise au point est définie sur l’infini lors de la prise de vue de scènes à distance. * L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT. Lorsque l’option MF, Snap ou 8 est sélectionnée, la sélection est indiquée par une icône au niveau de l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Conseil : Profondeur dechamp Profondeur de champ est la partie de l’image (plage de distance) qui apparaît nette. Les petites ouvertures (grands nombres f) augmentent la profondeur de champ, élargissant la scène mise au point ; les grandes ouvertures (petits nombres f) diminuent la profondeur de champ, mettant en valeur le sujet principal en rendant flou l’avantplan et l’arrière-plan. Avec les réglages MF, Snap et 8, la barre de mise au point indique la profondeur de champ dans les modes prise de vue M, A et P (en mode P, la profondeur de champ est uniquement indiquée lorsque le déclencheur est enfoncé à mi-course et que les valeurs d’ouverture sont affichées). Profondeur de champ (vert) Barre de mise au point (les distances sont approximatives) Profondeur de champ (vert) Barre de mise au point (les distances  PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Remarques • Fn et Fn2 peuvent être utilisées pour basculer entre la mise au point automatique, manuelle ou snap (page 136). • Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur le sujet au centre de l’écran d’affichage des photos et vérifier la mise au point, maintenez C/D enfoncée. Maintenez de nouveau la touche enfoncé pour revenir à l’affichage normal de la prise de vue. 4:3 N 2.5 30 Mise au point :MF(mise au pointmanuelle) La mise au point manuelle peut être utilisée pour verrouiller la mise au point ou pour effectuer la mise au point lorsque l’appareil photo est incapable d’utiliser la mise au point automatique. 1 Sélectionnez MF (mise au point manuelle) dans le menu Mise au point. Le mode mise au point et la barre de mise au point sont affichés sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N 2.5 30 2 Choisissez la distance de mise au point. Tout en maintenant la touche N enfoncée, faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour effectuer la mise au point. Lors de l’utilisation de l’unité appareil photo équipée d’une bague de mise au point, réglez la mise au point à l’aide de la bague. 3 Prenez une photo. Consultez la section sur le mode prise de vue sélectionné pour en savoir plus. Remarque En mode mise au point manuelle, l’appareil photo peut effectuer la mise au point sur le sujet à courte distance (macro) même si le mode macro n’est pas activé. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Choix delamise au pointetcible demesure La sélection de cible peut être utilisée pour définir la mise au point et l’exposition pour les sujets excentrés, sans déplacer l’appareil photo, et cette fonction facilite l’utilisation d’un trépied. 1Activez la sélection de cible. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. dans les modes mise au point autres que MF, puis appuyez sur la manette vers la gauche ou la droite pour sélectionner P. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner l’une des options suivantes et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer. Option Description AE/AF Mesure Spot et mise au point automatique Spot ; choisissez la cible de mise au point et d’exposition. AF Mise au point automatique Spot ; choisissez la cible de mise au point. L’exposition est mesurée à l’aide de l’option sélectionnée pour Mesure exposition (page 70). AE Mesure Spot ; choisissez la cible de mesure. La mise au point est définie par l’option sélectionnée pour Mise au point (page 64). Non La sélection de cible est désactivée. 2 Positionnez la cible. À l’aide du pavé directionnel (page 37), placez le réticule Csur le sujet, puis appuyez sur /D. Pour retourner au menu de sélection de cible, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie 3 Prenez une photo. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour définir la mise au point et/ou l’exposition pour le sujet sélectionné, puis appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Remarques • La sélection de cible n’est pas disponible en mode mise au point manuelle (page 65). • La cible sélectionnée reste active jusqu’à ce qu’une nouvelle cible soit choisie. Notez que la cible sera réinitialisée si vous choisissez une nouvelle option dans le menu sélection de cible, ou si vous sélectionnez la mise au point manuelle. • Lorsque le mode macro est activé en mode 4, la cible de mise au point du mode macro peut être sélectionnée en appuyant sur la manette ADJ., en sélectionnant U et en utilisant le pavé directionnel pour placer le réticule comme indiqué à la page 68. • Les touches Fn peuvent être utilisées pour la sélection de la cible de mise au point en mode macro (page 68). Notez que, si les touches Fn ont été utilisées pour sélectionner la cible de mise au point, la manette ADJ. ne peut pas être utilisée pour la sélection de cible jusqu’à ce que la cible soit réinitialisée. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Sélection deciblemacro Si l’option Cible macro est attribuée à la touche Fn ou Fn2 (page 136), vous pouvez sélectionner le mode macro en appuyant sur la touche affectée en mode prise de vue. Le réticule illustré à droite s’affiche ; utilisez le pavé directionnel (page 37) pour placer le réticule sur le sujet, puis appuyez sur C/D (pour quitter sans définir la cible, appuyez sur la touche DISP.). Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour effectuer la mise au point sur la cible sélectionnée, puis appuyez doucement sur le déclencheur jusqu’au bout pour prendre la photo. Si vous avez utilisé la manette ADJ. pour sélectionner une cible de mise au point (page 66), vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner le mode cible macro à l’aide des touches Fn et Fn2 avant que la cible soit annulée. Dist. mise au pt snap Sélectionnez la distance à laquelle l’appareil photo effectue la mise au point lorsque l’option Snap est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64) ou lorsque l’option Instantané par pression est activée (page 69). Sélectionnez 1m, 1,5m, 2m, 2,5m, 3m, 3,5 m, 5m ou 8 (infini). Remarque Lorsque l’option Snap est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point ou lorsque l’option Instantané par pression est activée, la distance de mise au point snap peut être également sélectionnée en tournant le sélecteur plus-moins tout en appuyant sur la touche N.9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Instantané par pression Prenez des photos sans pause pour la mise au point lorsque l’option AF Multi ou AF Spot est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64). Option Description Non La fonction est désactivée. Oui Si le déclencheur est enfoncé jusqu’au bout en une seule fois, l’appareil prendra la photo à la distance de mise au point sélectionnée sous Dist. mise au pt snap. Choisissez cette option lorsqu’un déclenchement rapide est requis. Hi ISO auto. Comme pour l’option Oui, sauf que la sensibilité ISO est automatiquement réglée sur Auto-Hi (page 90). Remarque Il est possible de modifier la distance de mise au point snap en tournant le sélecteur plus-moins tout en appuyant sur la touche N. Conseil :mise au point automatique L’appareil effectue la mise au point normalement si vous appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course. Attention • L’option Instantané par pression n’est pas disponible en mode macro ou lorsque l’option MF, Snap ou 8 est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64). • Faites attention aux effets de flou provoqués par un bougé de l’appareil.0 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Pré AF Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée lorsque l’option AF Multi ou AF Spot est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64), l’appareil photo continuera à effectuer la mise au point, même lorsque le déclencheur n’est pas enfoncé à mi-course (la plage de mise au point est plus étroite qu’avec la mise au point normale). Cela peut diminuer le délai nécessaire à la mise au point, améliorant potentiellement la réponse du déclencheur. Attention • Pré AF n’est pas disponible lorsque l’option MF, Snap ou 8 est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mise au point (page 64). • L’utilisation de l’option Pré AF augmente la décharge de la batterie. Mesure exposition Choisissez la méthode utilisée par l’appareil photo pour mesurer la lumière pour l’exposition. Option Description Multi* L’appareil photo mesure la lumière sur 256 zones du cadre. Centre L’appareil mesure la lumière du cadre entier mais attribue le plus de poids au centre. Utilisez ce réglage lorsque le sujet au centre du cadre est plus clair ou plus sombre que l’arrière-plan. Spot L’appareil mesure la lumière avec le sujet au centre du cadre, en garantissant qu’il est exposé de manière optimale, même s’il est sensiblement plus clair ou plus sombre que l’arrière-plan. * L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT. Lorsque l’option Centre ou Sport est sélectionnée, la sélection est indiquée par une icône au niveau de l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N  PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Réglages image Ajustez le contraste, la netteté et l’éclat (intensité) ou prenez des photos monochromes. Option Description Vif Prenez des photos éclatantes avec un contraste, une netteté et un éclat renforcés. Standard* Contraste, netteté et éclat normaux. Naturel Cette option permet de créer une image plus douce avec un contraste, une netteté et un éclat réduits. Noir et Blanc Cette option permet de prendre des photos en noir et blanc. Le contraste et la netteté peuvent être ajustés manuellement. N et B (TE) (Effetdetons) Cette option permet de créer des photos monochromes avec une teinte sépia, rouge, verte, bleue ou pourpre. L’éclat, le contraste et la netteté peuvent être ajustés manuellement. Réglage 1 Réglage 2 Cette option permet d’effectuer des ajustements manuels de l’éclat, du contraste, de la netteté, des couleurs et de la teinte pour créer des réglages personnalisés, qui peuvent ensuite être rappelés à votre convenance. * L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT. Pour les réglages différents de Standard, la sélection actuelle est indiquée par une icône sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Pour configurer individuellement les réglages Noir et Blanc, N et B(TE), Réglage1 ou Réglage2, sélectionnez l’option souhaitée et appuyez sur Fn2.2 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie 1Ajustez les réglages personnalisés de reproduction des couleurs. • Noir et Blanc : appuyez sur + et – pour sélectionner une option, puis appuyez sur Fn1 et Fn2 pour la modifier. • N et B(TE) : réglez l’éclat, le contraste et la netteté comme indiqué ci-dessus. Pour choisir une teinte, sélectionnez Effet de tons et appuyez sur Fn2. Appuyez sur + et – pour sélectionner une option, puis appuyez sur Fn pour confirmer. • Réglage 1/Réglage 2 : réglez l’éclat, le contraste et la netteté comme indiqué ci-dessus. Pour ajuster des couleurs individuelles, sélectionnez Réglages individuels des couleurs et appuyez sur Fn2. appuyez sur + et – pour sélectionner une option, puis appuyez sur Fn et Fn2 pour la modifier. Appuyez sur C/D pour quitter lorsque les réglages sont terminés. Pour activer les réglages enregistrés, sélectionnez Rappeler réglages et appuyez sur Fn2. Appuyez sur la touche + ou – pour sélectionner une option, puis sur C/D. 2 Retournez au menu Réglages image. Appuyez sur C/D une fois les réglages terminés. 3 Revenez au mode prise de vue. Appuyez sur C/D ou appuyez sur Fn1, puis appuyez sur C/D. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie L’option actuellement sélectionnée pour Réglages image s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Remarque Les options du paramètre Réglages image peuvent être affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134). Mode continu Prenez des photos en continu. • Continu : l’appareil prend des photos tant que le déclencheur est enfoncé. Toutes les photos prises dans ce mode sont enregistrées en tant qu’images individuelles. • Cont.M + (mémoireinversecontinueplus) : l’appareil prend des photos tant que le déclencheur est enfoncé. Les photos consécutives prises avant que le déclencheur soit relâché sont enregistrées dans un fichier MP (page 95). Cont.M + peut être défini sur une des options suivantes : Cont.M + (rap) et Cont.M + (len). Lorsque vous relâchez le déclencheur… …l’appareil enregistre des photos consécutives. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Remarque Pour les options Cont.M + (rap) et Cont.M + (len), la taille des images et le nombre d’images enregistrées dans un même fichier MP varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. Pour les réglages différents de Non, la sélection actuelle est indiquée par une icône sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Attention Le zoom numérique est disponible avec les réglages Cont.M +, même si l’option Taille auto est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Image zoom numérique. Remarques • Pour les réglages différents de Non, le flash est automatiquement désactivé, la mise au point et l’exposition sont définies lors de la première prise de vue de la série et la balance des blancs Auto est utilisée à la place de l’option Multi-P AUTO (page 86). • Si vous relâchez le déclencheur avant que le nombre d’images à enregistrer dans un fichier MP soit atteint, les photos prises lorsque la touche était enfoncée sont enregistrées dans un fichier MP. Conseil : fichierMP MP est un format de fichier qui permet d’enregistrer un ensemble de photos. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Cadrage auto L’appareil photo enregistre deux ou trois copies d’une image avec différentes expositions, balances des blancs ou couleurs. Option Description Non* La fonction de cadrage automatique est désactivée. AE-BKT L’appareil photo enregistre trois copies d’une photo dans la plage de valeurs d’exposition indiquée. WB-BKT L’appareil enregistre trois copies de chaque photo : une avec une dominante rougeâtre « chaude », une deuxième avec la balance des blancs actuellement sélectionnée dans le menu prise de vue (page 86) et une troisième avec une dominante bleuâtre « froide ». Cette option vous permet de faire un choix lorsque vous rencontrez Affichage après la prise de vue CL-BKT Cette option enregistre des photos en noir et blanc et en couleur, ou bien en noir et blanc, en couleur et en monochrome teinté (page 77). * L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT. La sélection actuelle est indiquée par une icône sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N  PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Remarques • Le cadrage n’est pas disponible lorsqu’une option autre que Non est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mode Continu. Le cadrage balance des blancs n’est pas disponible lors des prises de vue monochromes. • Le cadrage balance des blancs et le cadrage couleur ne sont pas disponibles lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/Taille (page 61). • Le flash est automatiquement désactivé lorsque le cadrage est activé. • Le balance des blancs Auto est utilisée à la place de l’option Multi-P AUTO lorsque l’option AE-BKT est sélectionnée. AE-BKT:Cadrageexposition Pour définir des variations de la valeur d’exposition : 1 Sélectionnez AE-BKT. Sélectionnez AE-BKT et appuyez sur Fn2. 2 Spécifiez la valeur de compensation de l’exposition. Déplacez le curseur à l’aide de Fn ou Fn2, appuyez sur + ou – pour spécifier la valeur de compensation, puis appuyez sur C/D. 3 Revenez au mode prise de vue. Appuyez sur C/D ou sur Fn, puis sur C/ D. Remarques • Si la même valeur de correction d’exposition est définie, seule une image est affichée pour la valeur. • La valeur des pas de correction peut être définie sous Pas de corr. expo/flash dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140). PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie CL-BKT:cadragecouleur Le nombre et le type de photos enregistrées lorsque l’option CL-BKT est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Cadrage auto dépend de l’option choisie pour CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE) dans l’onglet de configuration (page 146) : • Non : l’appareil photo enregistre deux copies de chaque photo, l’une en noir et blanc et la seconde en couleur. • Oui : l’appareil enregistre trois copies de chaque photo, l’une en noir et blanc, la deuxième en couleur et la troisième utilisant une teinte sélectionnée pour N et B(TE) dans le menu Réglages image (page 71). Copie N et B(TE) Conseil :contraste, nettetéet intensité Le contraste, la netteté et l’éclat des images de la séquence cadrage sont déterminés par les options sélectionnées dans le menu Réglages image (page 71). La copie en noir et blanc est enregistrée avec les réglages les plus récemment utilisés pour Noir et Blanc, la copie en monochrome teinté avec les réglages les plus récemment utilisés pour N et B (TE), et la copie couleur avec le réglage actuellement utilisé pour Réglages image (si Noir et Blanc ou N et B (TE) est sélectionné, la copie couleur sera enregistrée avec le réglage Standard). PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Correction exposition flash Réglez le niveau de flash sur une valeur comprise entre –2,0 et +2,0, par pas de 1/2 ou 1/3 EV. La sélection de Correction exposition flash dans le menu prise de vue affiche le curseur illustré à droite ; appuyez sur + ou – pour choisir une valeur de correction d’exposition du flash et appuyez sur C/D. La correction d’exposition du flash s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos, sauf si le flash est désactivé. 4:3 N Remarques • Consultez la page 28 pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation du flash. • La valeur des pas de correction peut être définie sous Pas de corr. expo/flash dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140). Attention Il se peut que la correction d’exposition du flash ne fonctionne pas en dehors de la portée du flash. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus sur la portée du flash.9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Niveau de flash manuel Choisissez la quantité de lumière produite par le flash en mode flash manuel (page 28). Le niveau de flash est exprimé sous la forme d’une fraction de la puissance totale (toutes les valeurs sont approximatives) : Max 1/1.4 1/2 1/2.8 1/4 1/5.6 1/8 1/11 1/16 1/22 1/32 1/64 Le niveau de flash s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos en mode flash manuel. 4:3 N Remarque La correction d’exposition du flash n’est pas disponible en mode flash manuel. Attention Ne pointez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule à moteur et n’utilisez pas le flash à proximité des yeux du sujet. La plus grande prudence est recommandée pour photographier des enfants. Réglage synchro du flash Choisissez le type de synchronisation avec l’obturateur. • 1er rideau : le flash se déclenche au début de l’exposition. Cette option est recommandée pour la plupart des situations. • 2e rideau : le flash se déclenche à la fin de l’exposition. Cette option produit des traînées de lumière derrière les sources d’éclairage en mouvement.0 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Réduction bruit Choisissez Faible ou Forte pour réduire le « bruit » (variations aléatoires de la luminosité et de la couleur) dans les photos prises avec des sensibilités ISO élevées. La sensibilité ISO minimum, à laquelle s’applique la réduction du bruit, peut être sélectionnée en utilisant l’option Réduction bruit ISO. s’affiche lorsque la réduction du bruit est activée. 4:3 N Remarques • Lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/Taille (page 61), la réduction du bruit s’applique uniquement à la copie JPEG et pas au fichier DNG. • La durée nécessaire pour enregistrer les photos varie selon l’option sélectionnée pour Réduction bruit. Réduction bruit ISO Sélectionnez la sensibilité ISO minimum à laquelle s’applique la réduction du bruit lorsque l’option Faible ou Forte est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Réduction bruit. Sélectionnez Tous (la réduction du bruit s’applique à toutes les sensibilités ISO), > à ISO 201, > à ISO 401, > à ISO 801, ISO 1601 ou ISO3200. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Correction distorsion Réglez l’option Correction distorsion sur Oui pour corriger automatiquement la déformation de l’image lors de la prise de vue. s’affiche lorsque la correction de la déformation est activée. 4:3 N Attention • Il est possible que la correction ne soit pas appliquée selon le type d’unité appareil photo ou si cela n’est pas nécessaire en raison de la position du zoom, même si l’option Correction distorsion est réglée sur Oui. Le symbole de correction de la déformation s’affiche cependant en mode lecture pour les images auxquelles la correction n’est pas appliquée. • La fonction de correction de la déformation n’est pas disponible pour les fichiers DNG, les copies JPEG de données brutes, les fichiers MP et les vidéos. • Lorsque l’option Correction distorsion est réglée sur Oui, l’angle de vue change. • L’image corrigée ne s’affiche pas sur l’écran d’affichage des photos, même si l’option Correction distorsion est réglée sur Oui. Macro auto Lorsque l’option Macro auto est réglée sur Oui, l’appareil photo active automatiquement le mode macro lors de la mise au point sur un sujet proche de l’objectif si le mode macro n’est pas activé. N s’affiche lorsque l’appareil photo passe en mode macro.2 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Retardateur personnalisé Pour définir le nombre de photos à prendre et l’intervalle de prise de vue pour le réglage personnalisé de l’option retardateur, sélectionnez Retardateur personnalisé dans le menu prise de vue et procédez comme suit : 1 Sélectionnez le nombre de photos à prendre et l’intervalle de prise de vue. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner les Cnombres, appuyez sur + ou – pour modifier. /D pour revenir au mode prise de vue. 2Démarrez la prise de vue. Appuyez sur le déclencheur. Le nombre de photos indiqué est automatiquement pris à l’intervalle sélectionné. Appuyez sur C/D pour annuler le retardateur avant que le nombre de photos indiqué soit pris. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Prise de vue à intervalles Pour prendre automatiquement des photos à des intervalles entre cinq secondes et une heure, sélectionnez Prise de vue à intervalles dans le menu prise de vue et procédez comme suit : 1 Choisissez un intervalle. Appuyez sur Fn et Fn2 pour sélectionner les heures, les minutes ou les secondes, puis appuyez sur + et – pour Cmodifier. Appuyez sur /D pour revenir au mode prise de vue. Intervalle s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N 2Démarrez la prise de vue. Appuyez sur le déclencheur. Ensuite, l’appareil prend automatiquement les photos à l’intervalle sélectionné. 3Arrêtez la prise de vue. Appuyez sur C/D pour terminer la prise de vue. Attention • Le retardateur n’est pas disponible en mode 4. • L’intervalle est réinitialisé à zéro lorsque l’appareil est mis hors tension. • Si le délai nécessaire pour enregistrer les photos est supérieur à l’intervalle sélectionné, la prochaine photo n’est pas prise tant que l’enregistrement n’est pas terminé. • Le flash externe ne se déclenche pas en mode prise de vue à intervalles. Utilisez le flash intégré. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Remarques • Utilisez une batterie pleine et assurez-vous qu’il y a suffisamment d’espace dans la mémoire interne ou sur la carte mémoire. La prise de vue à intervalles prend automatiquement fin lorsque la mémoire interne ou la carte mémoire est pleine. • Les photos peuvent être prises à tout moment en appuyant sur le déclencheur. • Si l’option Continu ou Cont.M + est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Mode Continu, la prise de vue en continu est automatiquement désactivée. Horodatage L’appareil photo incruste la date de la prise de vue sur la photo. Sélectionnez Date (AA/MM/JJ) ou Date et Heure (AA/MM/JJ hh:mm). DATE s’affiche lorsque l’horodatage est activé. 4:3 N Remarques • L’horodatage n’est pas disponible lorsque l’horloge n’est pas configurée. Configurez l’horloge (page 20, 149) avant d’utiliser l’horodatage. • La date ne peut pas être incrustée sur les vidéos. • Lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/Taille, la date est incrustée uniquement sur la copie JPEG et pas dans le fichier DNG. • La date est incrustée définitivement sur l’image et ne peut plus être effacée. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Correction de l’exposition La correction de l’exposition peut être requise dans les situations suivantes : • Contre-jour très lumineux : le sujet qui subit un contre-jour puissant peut être sous-exposé. Essayez d’augmenter la correction de l’exposition. • Le cadre est dominé par des objets très lumineux : le sujet peut être sous-exposé. Essayez d’augmenter la correction de l’exposition. • Le cadre est pratiquement sombre (par exemple, un sujet sous un projecteur dans une scène sombre) : le sujet peut être surexposé. Essayez de réduire la correction d’exposition. 1Affichez le curseur de correction d’exposition. Sélectionnez Correction de l’exposition dans le menu prise de vue et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher le curseur illustré sur la droite. 2 Réglez la correction d’exposition. Appuyez sur + ou – pour régler la valeur de correction de l’exposition. Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre une photo ou appuyez sur C/D pour revenir au mode prise de vue. Pour les réglages différents de 0.0, la correction de l’exposition s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N  PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Attention La correction de l’exposition n’est pas disponible en mode M. Remarque La valeur des pas de correction peut être définie sous l’option Pas de corr. expo/flash dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140). Balance blancs Avec le réglage Multi-P AUTO par défaut, l’appareil photo règle automatiquement la balance des blancs afin qu’un sujet blanc apparaisse blanc, quelle que soit la couleur de la source lumineuse. Il peut être cependant nécessaire d’adapter la balance des blancs à la source lumineuse, dans les cas d’un éclairage mixte ou de la prise de vue d’un sujet avec une couleur unie. Option Description Auto* L’appareil règle automatiquement la balance des blancs. Multi-P AUTO L’appareil règle la balance des blancs en tenant compte des différences d’éclairage dans les différentes zones du cadre (en mode continu, cette option est équivalente à l’option Auto). En extérieur Utilisez cette option lors des prises de vue en lumière du jour sous un ciel clair. Nuageux Utilisez cette option lors des prises de vue en lumière du jour sous un ciel nuageux. Lampe incandescente Utilisez cette option avec une lampe incandescente. Lampe fluorescente Utilisez cette option avec une lampe fluorescente. Réglage manuel Cette option permet de mesurer manuellement la balance des blancs (page 88). Détail Cette option permet d’affiner le réglage de la balance des blancs (page 88). * L’icône s’affiche uniquement sur l’écran DIRECT. PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Pour les réglages différents de Auto, la sélection actuelle est indiquée par une icône sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Attention • La balance des blancs automatique peut ne pas produire les résultats souhaités en cas d’absence d’objets blancs dans la scène. Pour y remédier, il suffit d’ajouter un objet blanc dans la scène avant la prise de vue. • Les options différentes de Auto peuvent ne pas produire les résultats souhaités si le flash est utilisé. Sélectionnez Auto lors de l’utilisation du flash 1Affichez les options de la balance des blancs. Sélectionnez Balance blancs dans le menu prise de vue et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options. 2 Sélectionnez une option. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option. Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre une photo ou appuyez sur la manette ADJ. ou sur C/ D pour revenir au mode prise de vue. Remarque Les options Balance blancs peuvent être affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134). PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Manuel :mesure dela balance des blancs Pour mesurer une valeur de la balance des blancs : 1 Sélectionnez Réglage manuel. Sélectionnez Réglage manuel dans le menu balance des blancs. 2Mesurez la balance des blancs. Cadrez une feuille de papier blanc ou un autre objet blanc, afin de remplir tout le cadre, et appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Répétez les étapes 1 et 2 jusqu’à ce que l’effet souhaité soit obtenu. 3 Revenez au mode prise de vue. Appuyez sur C/D pour retourner au mode prise de vue. Remarque La sélection d’une option différente de Réglage manuel réinitialise la balance des blancs manuelle. Détail :réglage fin dela balance des blancs Pour affiner le réglage de la balance des blancs : 1 Sélectionnez Détail. Sélectionnez Détail dans le menu balance des blancs et appuyez sur la touche DISP..9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie 2 Choisissez une valeur. Appuyez sur + ou – pour choisir une balance des Cblancs. Appuyez sur /D lorsque les réglages sont terminés. 3 Revenez au mode prise de vue. Appuyez sur C/D pour retourner au mode prise de vue. Remarque La sélection d’une option différente de Détail réinitialise la balance des blancs détaillée. Compensation balance blancs Compensez les dominantes couleurs en modifiant la balance des blancs sur les axes vert-magenta ou bleu-ambre. Les modifications s’appliquent à l’option actuellement sélectionnée pour la balance des blancs et à toutes les options sélectionnées tant que les modifications sont en cours. La sélection de l’option Compensation balance blancs dans le menu prise de vue (page 58) affiche les commandes illustrées à droite. Sélectionnez la compensation de la balance des blancs à l’aide du pavé directionnel (page 37). Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour rétablir une valeur de compensation de la balance des blancs neutre. Appuyez sur C/D pour enregistrer les modifications et quitter ou appuyez deux fois sur la touche DISP. pour annuler. SFlb Bleu Vert Magenta Ambre Quantité90 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie La compensation de la balance des blancs s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. 4:3 N Remarques • La compensation de la balance des blancs peut être assignée à la manette ADJ. (page 134). Pour réinitialiser, sélectionnez Réinitial. et appuyez sur C/D. • La compensation de la balance des blancs peut également être assignée aux touches Fn (page 136). • Si le sélecteur de mode est placé sur 4, la compensation de la balance des blancs est uniquement disponible en mode vidéo. • L’option Compensation balance blancs du menu lecture (page 109) n’utilise pas les mêmes valeurs que celles du menu prise de vue. Sensibilité ISO Réglez la sensibilité de l’appareil photo par rapport à la lumière. Des valeurs élevées peuvent être utilisées pour obtenir des vitesses d’obturation plus rapides, lorsque le sujet est faiblement éclairé, et éviter ainsi les effets de flou. • Auto : l’appareil règle automatiquement la sensibilité en fonction de la luminosité, de la distance du sujet, des options sélectionnées pour le mode macro, ainsi que pour la taille et la qualité d’image. • Auto-Hi (haute sensibilité automatique) : l’appareil photo ajuste automatiquement la sensibilité en fonction des conditions de prise de vue. En comparaison du réglage Auto, il est possible de sélectionner des sensibilités plus élevées pour les sujets mal éclairés. La sensibilité maximum peut être sélectionnée à l’aide de Sensibilité ISO auto-hi dans l’onglet de configuration (page 140).9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie • ISO (valeur) : l’appareil photo effectue la prise de vue à l’aide de la valeur ISO sélectionnée. Les valeurs ISO disponibles varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. La sensibilité actuelle est indiquée sur l’écran d’affichage des photos (si l’option Auto ou Auto-Hi est sélectionnée, la sensibilité sélectionnée par l’appareil est indiquée lorsque le déclencheur est enfoncé à mi-course). 2.5 ISO 200 1 Sélectionnez une option de sensibilité ISO. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option. 2 Prenez une photo ou retournez au mode prise de vue. Appuyez sur le déclencheur pour prendre une photo ou appuyez sur C/D pour revenir au mode prise de vue. Remarques • Les options du paramètre Sensibilité ISO peuvent être affichées en appuyant sur la manette ADJ. (page 134). • La sensibilité lors de l’utilisation du flash et la plage de sensibilités disponibles varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation de l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus. • Du « bruit » (variations de la luminosité et de la couleur) peut apparaître dans les photos prises avec des sensibilités élevées. Initialiser Pour restaurer les réglages par défaut du menu prise de vue (page 59), placez le sélecteur de mode sur 5 et sélectionnez Initialiser dans le menu prise de vue. Une boîte de dialogue de confirmation s’affiche ; sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/D pour restaurer les valeurs par défaut et quitter le mode prise de vue.92 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Décalage ouverture auto Lorsque l’option Oui est sélectionnée, l’appareil photo règle automatiquement l’ouverture pour éviter la surexposition en mode priorité à l’ouverture. Remarque Le décalage de l’ouverture automatique est uniquement disponbible en mode priorité à l’ouverture. Changement de mode prise de vue Lorsque le sélecteur de mode est placé sur un mode MY (page 57), vous pouvez utiliser cette option pour basculer entre les modes 5, P, A, S et M sans tourner le sélecteur de mode sur une nouvelle valeur. Cette option est uniquement disponible en mode MY. Elle n’est cependant pas disponible si un mode scène est attribué au mode MY. Correction du bougé Réglez l’option Correction du bougé sur Oui pour éviter les effets de flou dus à un bougé de l’appareil. E s’affiche lorsque la correction du bougé est activée.9 PlUs sUr la PhotograPhie Attention • Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible selon l’unité appareil photo. • La fonction de correction du bougé n’est pas disponible en mode vidéo, en mode continu et lorsque la vitesse d’obturation est réglée sur une seconde ou plus en mode exposition manuelle. Si la fonction est activée en mode continu ou lorsque la vitesse d’obturation est réglée sur une seconde ou plus en mode exposition manuelle, E devient F, et en mode vidéo, E disparaît. • La fonction de correction du bougé ne peut empêcher le flou occasionné par les mouvements du sujet (à cause du vent, etc.). • Les effets de la fonction de correction du bougé varient en fonction de l’environnement. Remarque J apparaît sur l’écran d’affichage des photos lorsque des effets de bougé sont susceptibles de se produire.Fonctions de lectUre 9 Fonctions de lecture Cette section décrit comment visualiser des vidéos et des fichiers MP. Visualisation de vidéos Procédez comme suit pour visualiser des vidéos. 1Appuyez sur la touche 6. Appuyez sur la touche 6 pour afficher les photos au niveau de l’écran d’affichage des photos. 2Affichez la vidéo. Appuyez sur +, –, Fn et Fn2 (page 34) pour faire défiler les images jusqu’à la première image de la vidéo à afficher. Les vidéos sont marquées par une icône 3. 3Démarrez la lecture. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour démarrer la lecture. La progression est indiquée sur l’écran de lecture. Les opérations suivantes peuvent être réalisées : Action Commande Description Avance/ Rembobinage z/Z Maintenez la touche z enfoncée pour l’avance rapide, maintenez la touche Z enfoncée pour le rembobinage. Si la vidéo est en pause, appuyez sur la touche z ou Z pour avancer ou rembobiner d’une image à la fois ; tenez la touche enfoncée pour une avance ou un rembobinage lent. Pause/ Reprise ADJ. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour mettre en pause ; appuyez de nouveau pour reprendre la lecture. Réglage du volume +/– Appuyez sur + pour augmenter le volume et sur – pour le diminuer. 2010Fonctions de lectUre 9 Affichage de fichiers MP Lorsque vous prenez des photos à l’aide de la fonction Cont.M +, les photos sont enregistrées dans un fichier MP. Procédez comme suit pour visualiser des fichiers MP. Remarque Les photos prises en mode continu normal peuvent être lues de la meme maniere que les images normales. 1Appuyez sur la touche 6. 2Affichez le fichier MP. Le fichier MP s’affiche avec le symbole S. L’affichage change de la manière suivante. 2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.0 1/55 Affichage de l’étape 2 • Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour commuter entre l’affichage normal et l’absence d’affichage. • Il est impossible d’agrandir les photos, même en appuyant sur la touche z. Les images sont affichées sous forme de mosaïque. • Les autres opérations sont identiques à celles effectuées pour les photos normales. z Manette ADJ. Z 2010/03/01 14:09 F 3.3 6/6 1 55 Vue mosaïque • Les images des fichiers MP sont affichées sous forme de mosaïque. • Utilisez le pavé directionnel (page 37) pour sélectionner une image. • La touche DISP. est désactivée. z Manette ADJ. Z 100-0001 6 6 2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0 F 3.3 1/55 Vue une image • Une image sélectionnée dans la vue mosaïque est affichée. • Appuyez sur z pour agrandir l’image. Manette ADJ.Fonctions de lectUre 9 2010/01/01 02:33 ISO 200 EV +1.0 F 3.3 1/55 100-0001 2 6 Diaporama • Les photos sont automatiquement affichées dans l’ordre où elles ont été prises, en commençant par l’image affichée. Les opérations disponibles pendant le diaporama sont indiquées ci-dessous. Pause/lecture Appuyez sur la manette ADJ.. Avance rapide Maintenez la touche z enfoncée pendant la lecture. Retour Maintenez la touche Z enfoncée pendant la lecture. Ralenti Maintenez la touche z enfoncée pendant la pause. Rembobinage lent Maintenez la touche Z enfoncée pendant la pause. Image suivante Appuyez sur la touche z pendant la pause. Image précédente Appuyez sur la touche Z pendant la pause. Première image Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. vers la gauche pendant la pause. Dernière image Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. vers la droite pendant la pause. Attention • Les fonctions DPOF, Découper, Changer de taille, Correction biais (mode lecture), Compensation de niveau et Compensation balance blancs ne sont pas disponibles pour les fichiers MP. • Les fonctions Réglage fonction indicateur et Protéger ne peuvent être définies pour les images individuelles d’un fichier MP. Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur ou Protéger est définie lors de l’affichage de la vue mosaïque ou de la vue une image, le réglage est appliqué au fichier MP et non à l’image individuelle. • Les images individuelles des fichiers MP ne peuvent être supprimées.Fonctions de lectUre 9 Exportation de fichiers MP Procédez comme suit pour extraire des images d’un fichier MP et les enregistrer individuellement. Remarques • Les images extraites sont enregistrées sous la même taille que l’image d’origine. • Les fichiers originaux sont conservés après extraction. 1Appuyez sur la touche 6. 2Appuyez sur le fichier MP que vous souhaitez exporter. Le fichier MP s’affiche avec le symbole S. Pour exporter plusieurs images, vous pouvez également appuyer sur la touche z de manière à afficher la vue mosaïque, puis passer à l’étape 3. 2010/03/01 14:09 ISO 200 F 3.3 EV +1.0 1/55 3Appuyez sur C/D. Le menu des réglages de la lecture apparaît. 4Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Exporter photos, puis appuyez sur Fn2.Fonctions de lectUre 9 Sélection d’uneimage 5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner 1 image. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner l’image. 6Appuyez sur C/D. Sélection de plusieursimages distinctes 5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Sél. mult, puis appuyez sur C/D. Si la vue mosaïque a été affichée à l’étape 2 de la page 97, passez à l’étape 5. 6Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Sél. indiv., puis appuyez sur C/D. 7 Sélectionnez l’image et appuyez sur C/D. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour afficher l’écran permettant de définir une plage d’images. Reportez-vous à l’étape 7 et aux étapes suivantes, à la page 99. 8 Répétez l’étape 7 pour sélectionner toutes les images. Pour désélectionner une image, sélectionnez-la et appuyez sur C/D. 9Appuyez sur la touche N. 10 Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/D.Fonctions de lectUre 99 Sélection d’une plage de plusieursimages 5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Sél. mult, puis appuyez sur C/D. Si la vue mosaïque a été affichée à l’étape 2 de la page 97, passez à l’étape 5. 6Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Sél. série, puis appuyez sur C/D. 7 Sélectionnez le point de départ de la plage d’images que vous souhaitez définir et appuyez sur C/D. En cas d’erreur lors de la sélection du point de départ de la plage d’images, appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour retourner à l’écran de sélection du point de départ. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour afficher l’écran permettant de définir des images distinctes. Reportez-vous à l’étape 7 et aux étapes suivantes, à la page 98. 8 Sélectionnez le point final de la plage d’images que vous souhaitez définir et appuyez sur C/D. Exporter photos Démarrage Exécuter 9 Répétez les étapes 7 et 8 pour définir l’ensemble des plages. 10Appuyez sur la touche N. 11 Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/D.Fonctions de lectUre 00 Sélection detouteslesimages 5Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner Toutes vues, puis appuyez sur C/ D. 6 Sélectionnez Oui, puis appuyez sur C/D.0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Menu des réglages de la lecture Cette section détaille les options du menu lecture et décrit comment visualiser les photos sur un téléviseur. Menu lecture Appuyez sur la touche 6 en mode prise de vue et procédez comme suit. 1Affichez le menu lecture. Appuyez sur C/D. 2 Sélectionnez une rubrique de menu. Appuyez sur + ou – pour faire défiler le menu et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options de la rubrique sélectionnée. Remarque Les éléments de la page suivante peuvent être affichés en appuyant sur – et sur le bouton DIRECT simultanément. Le menu lecture contient les options suivantes : Option Page Réglage fonction indicateur 102 Affichage photos marquées 103 Changer de taille 104 Découper 105 Compensation de niveau 106 Compensation balance blancs 109 Correction biais 110 Option Page Diaporama 111 Protéger 112 Copier sur carte depuis mémoire interne 115 DPOF 115 Exporter photos 97 Restaurer fichier 11702 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Remarque Les menus de configuration de l’appareil photo sont accessibles à partir du menu lecture (page 126). Réglage fonction indicateur Enregistrez les fichiers d’images fréquemment visualisés sous Réglage fonction indicateur (20 fichiers maximum) de manière à pouvoir les rappeler facilement par la suite à l’aide de la fonction Affichage photos marquées. Définition/annulation d’un fichier à la fois Pour définir ou annuler un fichier à la fois, affichez l’image et appuyez sur C/D. Sélectionnez Réglage fonction indicateur dans le menu lecture et appuyez sur la touche Fn2. Sélectionnez Régler ou Annuler et appuyez sur C/D. Remarques • Lorsqu’un fichier est sélectionné, le symbole s’affiche à l’écran. • Il n’est plus possible de définir de fichier lorsque 20 fichiers sont sélectionnés. Annulez la sélection de certains fichiers et sélectionnez les fichiers souhaités. Définition/annulation de plusieurs fichiers à la fois Procédez comme suit pour définir ou annuler plusieurs fichiers à la fois. 1Affichez la vue mosaïque. Appuyez sur z en mode lecture. 2 Sélectionnez une photo. Sélectionnez une photo et appuyez sur C/D. 3 Sélectionnez Réglage fonction indicateur et appuyez sur Fn2. Les photos sélectionnées sont marquées d’une icône .0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre 4 Sélectionnez des photos supplémentaires. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner des photos supplémentaires et appuyez sur C/D. Répétez cette procédure pour définir ou annuler l’ensemble des fichiers souhaités. Pour annuler la sélection des photos, appuyez sur C/D une fois le fichier sélectionné. Attention • Si le nom du fichier indiqué sous Réglage fonction indicateur est modifié à l’aide d’un ordinateur, la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est annulée pour le fichier. • Lorsque le contenu de la mémoire interne est copié sur une carte mémoire SD, la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur définie pour les fichiers de la mémoire interne est annulée. • Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée pour un fichier de carte mémoire SD, le dossier [CLIPINFO] et le fichier CLIP.CLI sont créés sur la carte mémoire SD. S’ils sont supprimés, la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est annulée pour les fichiers correspondants. • Si le nom d’un fichier est modifié à l’aide d’un ordinateur, il est possible que la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur ne puisse être activée pour le fichier. • La fonction Réglage fonction indicateur peut uniquement être sélectionnée pour les photos prises à l’aide de cet appareil. Affichage photos marquées Pour afficher les photos pour lesquelles la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée, sélectionnez Affichage photos marquées dans le menu lecture. Remarques • Le fichier pour lequel la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée qui dispose du plus petit numéro de fichier est affiché.0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre • Appuyez sur le déclencheur ou sur la touche 6 pour activer le mode prise de vue. • Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur n’est sélectionnée pour aucun fichier, un message s’affiche et le menu lecture réapparaît. • Si la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée pour plusieurs fichiers, appuyez sur la touche N pour afficher le fichier avec le plus petit numéro de fichier. • Lorsqu’un fichier pour lequel la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur est activée est affiché en plein écran, appuyez sur les touches +, –, Fn ou Fn2 pour passer à l’image précédente ou suivante. Changer de taille Pour créer une petite copie d’une photo, sélectionnez Changer de taille dans le menu lecture (page 101) et choisissez une taille. Les photos prises au format L, M, M ou M (page 61) peuvent être copiées au format M ou VGA et les photos prises au format M peuvent être copiées au format VGA. Il est impossible de changer la taille des vidéos et des photos de qualité RAW. Remarques • Les images sont copiées selon un rapport d’affichage de 4 : 3. Si le rapport d’affichage de la photo originale est de 16 : 9, 3 : 2, ou 1 : 1, les côtés gauche et droit ou les parties supérieure et inférieure des images sont rognés et affichés avec une bordure noire à l’écran. • Consultez la page 61 pour en savoir plus sur le choix de la taille des photos pendant la prise de vue.0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Découper Procédez comme suit pour découper une photo et l’enregistrer dans un fichier distinct. 1Affichez une photo. Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture et appuyez sur C/D. 2 Sélectionner Découper. Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu lecture, sélectionnez Découper, puis appuyez sur Fn2. Pour annuler le rognage, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. 3Découpez la photo. Définissez la taille du cadre de découpage avec la touche z ou Z et la position du cadre de découpage avec le pavé directionnel (page 37), puis appuyez sur C/D. Attention • Seules les photos prises avec cet appareil peuvent être rognées. • Les vidéos et les fichiers MP ne peuvent être rognés. • Pour les images RAW (page 61), la fonction de rognage s’applique uniquement à la copie JPEG. • Les photos peuvent être rognées à plusieurs reprises. La qualité de l’image se dégrade cependant à chaque recompression. Remarques • Lors du rognage d’une image, le taux de compression devient Fin. Pour les images d’autres tailles, le taux de compression est identique à l’image d’origine. • Les réglages disponibles pour la taille du cadre de découpage varient en fonction de la taille de l’image d’origine. À chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche z, la taille du cadre de découpage diminue d’un niveau (13 niveaux maximum).0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre • La taille de l’image découpée varie en fonction de la taille d’origine de l’image et du niveau de rognage (taille du cadre de découpage). Compensation de niveau Cette option crée des copies traitées pour régler la luminosité et le contraste. Corrigez automatiquement la luminosité et le contraste ou procédez à des ajustements manuels à l’aide d’un histogramme. Auto :correction de niveau automatique 1Affichez une photo. Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture. 2 Sélectionnez Compensation de niveau. Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu lecture, sélectionnez Compensation de niveau et appuyez sur Fn2. 3 Sélectionner Auto. Sélectionnez Auto et appuyez sur Fn2. Si l’appareil photo est capable de créer une copie, un aperçu s’affiche avec l’image originale affichée dans l’angle supérieur gauche et la copie corrigée à droite. Si l’appareil n’est pas capable de créer une copie, un message d’erreur s’affiche et l’appareil quitte le menu lecture.0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre 4 Copiez l’image. Appuyez sur C/D. Pour quitter sans créer de copie, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie la photo. Manuel :correction de niveaumanuelle Affichez la photo à copier et sélectionnez l’option Manuel pour le paramètre Compensation de niveau dans le menu lecture pour afficher un aperçu comme indiqué à la page précédente, puis procédez comme suit. 1 Sélectionnez le point noir, le point blanc ou le point médian. L’aperçu manuel contient un histogramme montrant comment les pixels sont distribués sur l’image en fonction de la luminosité, avec les pixels sombres sur la gauche et les pixels clairs sur la droite. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour faire défiler le point noir, le point médian et le point blanc, puis appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour placer le point sélectionné avec une luminosité et un contraste améliorés, comme décrit à la page suivante. Pour obtenir de l’aide, appuyez sur la touche N ; appuyez de nouveau sur cette touche pour revenir à l’aperçu. 2 Copiez l’image. Appuyez sur C/D. Pour quitter sans créer de copie, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie la photo. De gauche à droite : point noir, point médian, point blanc De gauche à droite : point noir, point médian, point blanc0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Conseil :choix du point noir, du point blancet du pointmédian • Réglage de la luminosité : pour éclaircir l’image, déplacez le point médian vers la gauche. Pour assombrir l’image, déplacez le point médian vers la droite. • Correction de l’exposition : si l’image est surexposée, déplacez le point noir vers la droite jusqu’à ce qu’il soit aligné avec le pixel le plus sombre de l’histogramme (voir à droite). Si l’image est sous-exposée, déplacez le point blanc vers la gauche jusqu’à ce qu’il soit aligné avec le pixel le plus clair. Vous pouvez alors déplacer le point médian vers la droite ou la gauche pour ajuster la luminosité. Correction de la surexposition • Augmentation du contraste : pour augmenter le contraste, alignez le point noir sur le pixel le plus sombre et le point blanc sur le pixel le plus clair, comme illustré à droite. Vous pouvez alors déplacer le point médian vers la droite ou la gauche pour ajuster la luminosité. Attention • La compensation de niveau est disponible uniquement pour les photos prises avec cet appareil. Elle n’est pas disponible avec les vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +. Le résultat souhaité peut ne pas être obtenu avec des photos monochromes. • La compensation de niveau peut être appliquée à plusieurs reprises. La qualité de l’image se dégrade cependant à chaque recompression.09 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Compensation balance blancs Cette option crée des copies dont la balance des blancs a été modifiée. 1Affichez une photo. Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture. 2 Sélectionnez Compensation balance blancs. Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu lecture, sélectionnez Compensation balance blancs et appuyez sur Fn2. 3 Réglez la balance des blancs. Sélectionnez la compensation de la balance des blancs à l’aide du pavé directionnel (page 37). Appuyez sur la touche DISP. pour rétablir une valeur de compensation de la balance des blancs neutre. 4Appuyez sur C/D. Appuyez sur C/D pour copier l’image (pour quitter sans créer de copie, appuyez deux fois sur DISP.). Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie la photo.0 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Attention • La compensation de la balance des blancs est disponible uniquement pour les photos prises avec cet appareil. Elle n’est pas disponible avec les vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +. Le résultat souhaité peut ne pas être obtenu avec des photos monochromes. • La compensation de la balance des blancs peut être appliquée à plusieurs reprises. La qualité de l’image se dégrade cependant à chaque recompression. Correction biais Cette option permet de créer des copies traitées pour réduire les effets de perspective des objets rectangulaires, comme des tableaux d’affichage ou des cartes de visite. 1Affichez une photo. Affichez la photo à copier en mode lecture. 2 Sélectionnez Correction biais. Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu lecture, sélectionnez Correction biais et appuyez sur Fn2. Si l’appareil photo est capable de détecter un objet auquel la correction de perspective peut être appliquée, un message s’affiche et l’objet concerné est marqué d’un cadre jaune. L’appareil peut détecter jusqu’à cinq objets ; pour sélectionner un objet différent, appuyez sur Fn2, pour quitter sans aucune correction de perspective, appuyez sur +. Si l’appareil est incapable de détecter un objet approprié, un message d’erreur s’affiche. MenU des réglages de la lectUre 3Appuyez sur C/D. Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil copie la photo. La copie prend de 2 à 46 secondes, en fonction de la taille d’image. Attention La correction des biais est disponible uniquement pour les photos prises avec cet appareil. Elle n’est pas disponible avec les vidéos ou les photos enregistrées/prises à l’aide de Cont.M +. Pour les images RAW (page 61), la correction des biais s’applique uniquement à la copie JPEG. Remarques • La copie est de la même taille que l’original. Plus la taille des images est importante, plus la création de la copie prend du temps : Taille Durée (approximative) Taille Durée (approximative) L 24s 3M 8s M 18s 1M 5s 5M 12s VGA 2s Pour réduire la durée de traitement nécessaire, créez une petite copie de l’original en utilisant Changer de taille (page 104) et exécutez la correction des biais sur la copie. • La durée nécessaire pour la correction des biais varie en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. • La correction des biais peut être également appliquée pendant la prise de vue (page 56). Diaporama Cette option permet de démarrer un diaporama automatique. Les photos s’affichent dans l’ordre d’enregistrement avec un intervalle de trois secondes. Lors de la visualisation d’une vidéo, la lecture démarre automatiquement. Le diaporama se répète en boucle ; appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche pour l’arrêter.2 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Protéger Cette option protège les photos contre une suppression accidentelle. Les fichiers protégés sont marqués d’une icône illustrée à droite. 4:3 N Attention Le formatage efface tous les fichiers, y compris les fichiers protégés. Protection des photosindividuelles Pour protéger ou supprimer la protection des fichiers individuels, affichez la photo, sélectionnez Protéger dans le menu lecture, et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options illustrées à droite (si l’image affichée n’est pas la bonne, appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour afficher les Cautres photos). Sélectionnez 1 fichier et appuyez sur /D. MenU des réglages de la lectUre Modification del’état de protection de plusieurs fichiers Procédez comme suit pour modifier l’état de protection de plusieurs fichiers sélectionnés. 1 Sélectionnez Protéger dans le menu lecture, puis appuyez sur Fn2. Dans une vue multi-images, passez à l’étape 2. Dans une vue une image, les options illustrées à droite s’affichent. Sélectionnez Sél mult et appuyez sur C/D. 2 Sélectionnez Sél. indiv. ou Sél. série. Sélectionnez Protéger dans le menu lecture, et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options illustrées à droite. Pour sélectionner les images une par une, sélectionnez Sél. indiv., appuyez sur C/D et passez à l’étape 3. Pour sélectionner les images en définissant des plages, sélectionnez Sel. série, appuyez sur C/ D et passez à l’étape 3.1. 3 Sélectionnez une photo. Utilisez le pavé directionnel (page 37) pour sélectionner des photos, puis appuyez sur C/D. Les photos protégées sont marquées par une icône . Pour supprimer la protection d’une photo, sélectionnez-la et appuyez de nouveau sur C/D. 4:3 N 4:3 N  MenU des réglages de la lectUre Conseil :sélection deséries Pour basculer entre les paramètres Sél. indiv. et Sél. série, appuyez sur la manette ADJ. et procédez comme suit : 3.1 Utilisez le pavé directionnel pour sélectionner la première image de la série, puis appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer. L’image sélectionnée est marquée par une icône. Pour désélectionner l’image, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. 4:3 N 3.2 Utilisez le pavé directionnel pour sélectionner la dernière Cimage, puis appuyez sur /D pour confirmer. Les images sélectionnées sont marquées d’une icône . 4:3 N Répétez les étapes 3.1-3.2 pour sélectionner des séries supplémentaires ou appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour sélectionner ou désélectionner des photos individuelles, comme indiqué à l’étape 3. 4Appuyez sur la touche N. Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil photo protège les fichiers sélectionnés. L’appareil revient ensuite à la lecture normale. Protection ou suppression dela protection detousles fichiers Pour protéger tous les fichiers, sélectionnez Protéger, puis appuyez sur Fn2. Sélectionnez CSélect. tout et appuyez sur /D. Pour supprimer la protection de tous les fichiers, sélectionnez Annuler tout et appuyez sur C/D. MenU des réglages de la lectUre Copier sur carte depuis mémoire interne Pour copier tous les fichiers de la mémoire interne sur une carte mémoire, insérez la carte mémoire dans le boîtier de l’appareil photo et sélectionnez Copier sur carte depuis mémoire interne dans le menu lecture. Un message s’affiche pendant le déroulement de la copie ; l’appareil revient ensuite à la lecture lorsque la copie est terminée. Remarques • Si l’espace disponible sur la carte mémoire est insuffisant pour copier tous les fichiers de la mémoire interne, un message s’affiche. Pour copier uniquement les fichiers correspondant à l’espace disponible, sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/ D; pour quitter sans copier aucun fichier, sélectionnez Non. • Il est impossible de copier les fichiers de la carte mémoire dans la mémoire interne. DPOF Pour commander des tirages professionnels de photos sur une carte mémoire, utilisez cette option pour créer un « bon à tirer » numérique listant les photos à tirer et le nombre de tirages, puis déposez la carte mémoire dans un centre de service de tirage numérique prenant en charge la norme DPOF. Remarque Si un fichier RAW est sélectionné pour l’impression, seule la copie JPEG sera imprimée. Conseil : DPOF DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) est une norme utilisée pour définir les photos à tirer et le nombre de tirages. Les photos sélectionnées pour le tirage sont marquées d’un indicateur de tirage DPOF (page 9). MenU des réglages de la lectUre Sélection des photosindividuelles à tirer Pour ajouter ou supprimer une photo du bon à tirer, affichez la photo, sélectionnez DPOF dans le menu lecture, puis appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options illustrées à droite (si l’image affichée n’est pas la bonne, appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour afficher les autres photos). Sélectionnez 1 fichier et appuyez sur C/D. Sélection detoutesles photos à tirer Pour sélectionner toutes les photos à tirer, sélectionnez DPOF, appuyez sur Fn2, sélectionnez CSélect. tout, puis appuyez sur /D. Pour supprimer toutes les photos du bon à tirer, sélectionnez Annuler tout et appuyez sur C/D. Sélection de plusieurs photos à tirer Pour sélectionner plusieurs photos à tirer : 1 Sélectionnez DPOF. Appuyez sur C/D dans une vue multi-images pour afficher le menu lecture. Sélectionnez DPOF et appuyez sur Fn2. MenU des réglages de la lectUre 2 Sélectionnez les photos et choisissez le nombre de tirages. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner des photos supplémentaires et sur + ou Fn2 pour choisir le nombre de copies. Pour supprimer une photo du bon à tirer, appuyez sur – jusqu’à ce que zéro s’affiche. 3Appuyez sur C/D. Un message s’affiche pendant que l’appareil crée le bon à tirer. L’appareil revient ensuite à la vue multiimages. Restaurer fichier Pour restaurer tous les fichiers supprimés, sélectionnez Restaurer fichier dans le menu lecture, puis appuyez sur Fn2. Un message de confirmation s’affiche. Sélectionnez Oui, puis appuyez sur C/D. Remarque Un message s’affiche s’il n’y a aucun fichier à restaurer. Attention Les fichiers ne peuvent être restaurés après l’exécution d’une des opérations suivantes. • Mise hors tension de l’appareil • Basculement du mode lecture vers le mode prise de vue • Utilisation de la fonction DPOF, Changer de taille, Copier sur carte depuis mémoire interne, Correction biais, Compensation de niveau, Compensation balance blancs ou Découper. • Suppression de fichiers avec des réglages DPOF • Initialisation de la mémoire interne ou de la carte mémoire SD • Réglage ou annulation des fichiers pour la fonction Réglage fonction indicateur • Exportation de fichiers MP à l’aide de la fonction Exporter photos MenU des réglages de la lectUre Visualisation des photos sur un téléviseur Pour visualiser les photos sur un téléviseur, raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo à l’aide du câble A/V fourni. 1Mettez l’appareil hors tension. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension avant de brancher ou débrancher le câble A/V. 2 Raccordez le câble A/V au téléviseur. Insérez la fiche blanche dans le connecteur d’entrée audio et la fiche jaune dans le connecteur d’entrée vidéo. Assurez-vous que les fiches sont fermement insérées. N’utilisez pas la force. Entrée vidéo (jaune) Entrée audio (blanc) 3 Raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Ouvrez le couvercle du connecteur et branchez le câble dans le connecteur du câble A/V. N’utilisez pas la force. 4 Réglez le téléviseur sur le canal vidéo. Sélectionnez l’entrée vidéo. Consultez le manuel du téléviseur pour en savoir plus. 5Mettez le boîtier de l’appareil photo sous tension. Appuyez sur la touche 6 pendant environ une seconde pour mettre l’appareil sous tension en mode lecture. L’écran d’affichage des photos et le hautparleur du boîtier de l’appareil photo s’éteignent, puis les photos et les vidéos s’affichent sur le téléviseur.9 MenU des réglages de la lectUre Attention N’utilisez pas la force ou ne tirez pas sur le câble A/V lorsque vous manipulez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avec le câble A/V branché. Remarques • Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut être raccordé au connecteur d’entrée vidéo d’un enregistreur vidéo et les photos peuvent être enregistrées en vidéo ou sur DVD. • Le boîtier de l’appareil photo doit être raccordé aux téléviseurs qui prennent en charge le format HDMI à l’aide d’un câble mini HDMI (vendu séparément). Consultez la documentation fournie avec le téléviseur pour en savoir plus. • Si vous branchez ou débranchez le câble mini HDMI, l’écran passe à la vue d’une seule photo. Lorsque le menu est affiché, l’écran ne passe pas à la vue d’une seule photo même si vous branchez ou débranchez le câble mini HDMI. • Lorsque vous branchez le boîtier de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur à l’aide d’un câble mini HDMI, les sons de fonctionnement sont désactivés. • Le boîtier de l’appareil prend en charge les normes vidéo suivantes : NTSC (utilisée en Amérique du Nord, aux Caraïbes, dans une partie de l’Amérique du Sud et dans certains pays d’Asie du Sud-est) et PAL (utilisée au Royaume-Uni et dans la plupart des pays d’Europe, en Australie, en Nouvelle-Zélande et dans une partie de l’Asie et de l’Afrique). La norme SECAM n’est pas prise en charge. Si possible, l’appareil est réglé sur la norme utilisée dans votre pays ou votre région au départ de l’usine ; avant de raccorder l’appareil à un dispositif utilisant une norme vidéo différente, choisissez le mode vidéo approprié (page 149).20 MP i ression de Photos Impression de photos Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut être raccordé à une imprimante via le câble USB fourni, et les photos peuvent être directement imprimées à partir du boîtier de l’appareil photo sans utiliser d’ordinateur. Attention Une vidéo ne peut pas être imprimée. Si un fichier RAW est sélectionné pour l’impression, seule la copie JPEG sera imprimée. Remarque Le boîtier de l’appareil photo est conforme à PictBridge, une norme largement utilisée pour l’impression directe, et seules des imprimantes compatibles PictBridge peuvent être utilisées pour l’impression directe. Consultez la documentation fournie avec votre imprimante pour savoir si la norme PictBridge est prise en charge. Raccordement du boîtier de l’appareil photo Raccordez l’imprimante à l’alimentation électrique à l’aide du câble USB fourni. 1Mettez l’appareil hors tension. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension avant de brancher ou débrancher le câble USB. 2 Raccordez le câble USB à l’imprimante. Raccordez le câble USB à l’imprimante et mettez l’imprimante sous tension.2 MP i ression de Photos 3 Raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Ouvrez le couvercle du connecteur et branchez le câble dans le connecteur du câble USB. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ.. L’appareil s’allume et le message illustré à droite s’affiche ; appuyez alors une nouvelle fois sur la manette ADJ.. Remarque Si vous n’appuyez pas sur la manette ADJ. pendant l’affichage du message ci-dessus, celui-ci peut dans certains cas être remplacé après deux secondes par un message indiquant que l’appareil est raccordé à un ordinateur. Mettez l’appareil hors tension et appuyez de nouveau sur la manette ADJ.. Le message est remplacé par l’écran de lecture PictBridge (si l’écran de lecture PictBridge ne s’affiche pas, c’est que l’appareil est en train d’établir la connexion avec l’imprimante). Attention N’utilisez pas la force ou ne tirez pas sur le câble USB lorsque vous manipulez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avec le câble branché.22 MP i ression de Photos Impression Les photos peuvent être imprimées une par une, ou plusieurs photos peuvent être sélectionnées pour l’impression. Si une carte mémoire est insérée, les photos seront imprimées à partir de la carte mémoire ; dans le cas contraire, les photos seront imprimées à partir de la mémoire interne. Attention Ne débranchez pas le câble USB pendant l’impression. Remarque Si une erreur s’affiche pendant l’impression, vérifiez l’imprimante et agissez en conséquence. Impression des photos une par une Pour imprimer une photo sélectionnée : 1 Sélectionnez une photo. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 jusqu’à ce que la photo souhaitée s’affiche sur l’écran de lecture PictBridge, puis appuyez sur la manette ADJ.. Le menu illustré à droite Cs’affiche, sélectionnez 1 fichier et appuyez sur /D. Conseil : impression d’unecopie detoutesles photos Pour imprimer une copie de toutes les photos, appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour afficher les options illustrées ci-dessus et sélectionnez Ts fich..2 MP i ression de Photos 2 Réglez les paramètres d’impression. Le menu illustré à droite s’affiche ; sélectionnez une rubrique et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options disponibles ou choisissez Sélec imprim pour utiliser les réglages par défaut de l’imprimante actuelle (les options disponibles varient selon le type d’imprimante ; il est impossible de sélectionner des rubriques non prises en charge par l’imprimante connectée). Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer et revenir au menu impression directe. Paramètre Description Format papier Choisissez un format de papier. Type de papier Choisissez un type de papier. Type d’impr. Choisissez le nombre d’images par page. Impression date Ce paramètre permet d’inclure la date et l’heure d’enregistrement. Consultez la pages 20 et 149 pour en savoir plus sur la sélection du format d’affichage de la date et de l’heure. Si la photo a été prise avec l’option Horodatage (page 84), seule la date horodatée sera imprimée. Nom du fichier Ce paramètre permet d’inclure le nom du fichier. Optimisation image Choisissez si l’imprimante doit optimiser ou non les données de la photo. Taille impr. Choisissez la taille d’impression. Qlté impr. Choisissez la qualité d’impression. Impr. rapport * Ce paramètre permet d’imprimer un rapport. Nombre de copies Choisissez le nombre de copies imprimées. Économie d’encre * Ce paramètre permet d’utiliser moins de toner pendant l’impression. 1 face/2 faces * Ce paramètre permet d’imprimer ou non sur les deux faces du papier. * Imprimantes Ricoh uniquement. Consultez http://www.ricoh.com/ pour en savoir plus.2 MP i ression de Photos Remarque Pour configurer l’option sélectionnée comme paramètre par défaut pour l’imprimante actuelle lorsque le boîtier de l’appareil photo est connecté, appuyez sur la manette ADJ.. Le menu illustré à droite s’affiche ; sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur C/D. Sélectionnez Non pour quitter sans modifier le paramètre par défaut. 3Démarrez l’impression. CPour démarrer l’impression, appuyez sur /D lorsque le menu impression directe illustré à l’étape 2 s’affiche. Un message s’affiche pendant l’impression ; pour quitter avant la fin de l’impression, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. L’écran de lecture PictBridge s’affiche lorsque l’impression est terminée.2 MP i ression de Photos Impression de plusieurs photos Pour imprimer plusieurs photos : 1Appuyez sur la touche Z. Les photos s’affichent dans une vue multi-images. 2 Sélectionnez une photo. Sélectionnez une photo et appuyez sur C/D. 3 Choisissez le nombre de copies. Appuyez sur + ou – pour choisir le nombre de copies. Les photos sélectionnées sont marquées d’une icône ; pour désélectionner une photo, appuyez sur – jusqu’à ce que zéro s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez des photos supplémentaires. Appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour sélectionner des photos supplémentaires et sur + ou – pour choisir le nombre de copies. 5 Réglez les paramètres d’impression. Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu impression directe. Réglez les paramètres comme indiqué à la page 123. 6Démarrez l’impression. Pour démarrer l’impression, appuyez sur C/ D lorsque le menu impression directe s’affiche. Un message s’affiche pendant l’impression ; pour quitter avant la fin de l’impression, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. L’écran de lecture PictBridge s’affiche lorsque l’impression est terminée. 4:3 N 2 réglages de l a’ PPareil Réglages de l’appareil Vous pouvez accéder aux menus permettant de modifier les réglages de l’appareil photo à partir des menus prise de vue et lecture (pages 58 et 101). 1Affichez les menus. Appuyez sur C/D pour afficher le menu du mode actuel (page 58) (en mode scène, l’onglet MODE s’affiche). 2 Sélectionnez un onglet. Appuyez sur Fn pour sélectionner l’onglet du menu actuel et appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner l’onglet des options personnalisées (page 127) ou l’onglet de configuration (page 128). Appuyez sur Fn2 pour placer le curseur sur l’onglet sélectionné. 1 2 1Onglet des options personnalisées 2Onglet de configuration 3 Sélectionnez une rubrique de menu. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une rubrique du menu et appuyez sur Fn2 pour afficher les options de la rubrique sélectionnée. 4 Sélectionnez une option. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option et appuyez sur C/D pour confirmer et quitter (la procédure peut être différente pour certaines rubriques ; consultez la page de la rubrique concernée).2 réglages de l a’ PPareil L’onglet des options personnalisées contient les options suivantes : Option Défaut Page Enr. Mes Réglages — 129 Récupération de Mes Réglages — 131 Éditer Mes Réglages — 132 Fonct. réglage Mon réglage Non 133 Comp. BB de Mes Réglages Non 133 Manette ADJ Réglage  Balanceblancs 134 Manette ADJ Réglage 2 ISO 134 Manette ADJ Réglage  Qualité 134 Manette ADJ Réglage  Réglages image 134 Option Défaut Page Déclencheur ADJ Non 135 Rég. touche Fn AF/MF 136 Rég. touche Fn2 Flash manuel 136 Réglages bouton +/– Comp.expo. 137 Options du sélecteur de mode lecture Réglage1 138 Options sélecteur de mode M Réglage1 138 Mode M par  seule pression Prioroverture 1382 réglages de l a’ PPareil L’onglet de configuration contient les options suivantes : Option Défaut Page Format [Carte] — 139 Format [Mémoire interne] — 139 Luminosité LCD — 139 Transparence écran DIRECT Normale 140 Pas de corr. expo/flash 1/3EV 140 Sensibilité ISO auto-hi AUTO 400 140 Flash auxiliaire AF Oui 140 Mode veille 5?Minuten 141 Extinction auto 5?Minuten 141 Écran de lecture LCD 141 Attén. luminosité auto LCD Oui 142 Délai de validation LCD 0,5?secondes 142 Sons touches Tous 142 Réglages volume (moyenne) 142 Zoom par  seule pression 9,8?× 143 Rotation auto Oui 143 Distance min de prise de vue Afficher 144 Option Défaut Page Réglage niveau Affichage 144 Options affichage du cadrage 144 Affichage touche Fn Oui 145 Afficher nom de Mon Réglage Non 145 Affichage infos prise de vue Non 145 CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE) Oui 146 Réglage espace couleurs sRVB 146 Image zoom numérique Normale 147 Mémo position curseur menu Non 147 N° séquentiel de la carte Oui 148 Réglage date — 149 Language/L (Variable * ) 149 Sortie vidéo (Variable * ) 149 Sortie HMDI AUTO 149 Lancer extraction réglages Boîtier 150 * Variableselon lepaysoularégion d’achat. Attention • Il est possible que les options affichées au niveau des onglets des options personnalisées et de configuration varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. • Il est possible que les options affichées au niveau des onglets des options personnalisées et de configuration varient selon si l’unité appareil photo est installée ou non sur le boîtier.29 réglages de l a’ PPareil Options personnalisées Enr. Mes Réglages Les réglages enregistrés via Enr. Mes Réglages peuvent être rappelés en positionnant le sélecteur de mode sur MY, MY2 ou MY, vous permettant de créer facilement et de rappeler jusqu’à six jeux pour les réglages de prise de vue fréquemment utilisés. 1Ajustez les réglages. Configurez l’appareil photo avec les réglages souhaités. Ci-après sont indiqués certains réglages pouvant être enregistrés dans les réglages MY : • Réglages de l’appareil : Mode prise de vue (mode 5, P, A, S, M ou 4), position du zoom (mode 4), ouverture (modes A et M), vitesse d’obturation (modes S et M), modes mise au point manuelle, macro, flash, retardateur et affichage. • Options du menu prise de vue : toutes les options à l’exception des options Prise de vue à intervalles, Décalage ouverture auto et Changement de mode prise de vue. La compensation de la balance des blancs peut être attribuée si le réglage Comp. BB de Mes Réglages est activé (page 133). • Options de configuration : Rég. touche Fn/Rég. touche Fn2 (si l’option Fonct. réglage Mon réglage est activée ; voir page 133), Reglages bouton +/-, Sensibilite ISO auto-hi, Pas de corr. expo/ flash, Distance min de prise de vue, Reglage niveau, Options affichage du cadrage, Affichage infos prise de vue, CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE) et Image zoom numerique. Remarque Les réglages pouvant être enregistrés dans les réglages MY varient en fonction de l’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo pour en savoir plus.0 réglages de l a’ PPareil 2 Sélectionnez Enr. Mes Réglages. Sélectionnez Enr. Mes Réglages au niveau de l’onglet des options personnalisées, puis appuyez sur Fn2. 3 Enregistrez les réglages. Pour attribuer les réglages aux fonctions MY, MY2 et MY du sélecteur de mode, sélectionnez MY1, MY2 Cou MY3 et appuyez sur /D (pour quitter sans enregistrer les réglages, appuyez sur la touche DISP.). Pour enregistrer les réglages dans une « boîte » à rappeler et à assigner ultérieurement au sélecteur de mode (page 131), sélectionnez Boîte Mes Réglages et appuyez sur Fn2. Sélectionnez la boîte Csouhaitée et appuyez sur /D. Les boîtes sans nom seront nommées avec la date du jour. Si un nom a déjà été assigné à la boîte, la boîte de dialogue illustrée à droite s’affiche. Sélectionnez Oui pour utiliser le nom actuel et Non pour utiliser un nom basé sur la date du jour. réglages de l a’ PPareil Récupération de Mes Réglages Copiez les réglages d’une « boîte » vers MY, MY2 ou MY. Sélectionnez Récupération de Mes Réglages dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, appuyez sur Fn2, puis procédez comme suit. 1 Sélectionnez une destination. Sélectionnez la destination des réglages mémorisés (MY1, MY2 ou MY3) et appuyez sur Fn2. 2 Sélectionnez la source. Sélectionnez les réglages qui seront attribués à la position choisie sur le sélecteur de mode et appuyez sur C/ D. Pour quitter sans assigner les réglages au sélecteur de mode, appuyez sur la touche DISP.. Attention Si Éditer Mes Réglages est utilisé pour modifier les boîtes actuellement assignées au sélecteur de mode, les modifications seront prises en compte lorsque le sélecteur de mode sera positionné sur la position assignée à la boîte concernée. Les modifications apportées aux réglages directement assignés à MY, MY2 ou MY ne sont cependant pas prises en compte dans les boîtes actuellement assignées au sélecteur de mode, et si les boîtes sont modifiées par la suite, ces modifications ne seront pas prises en compte dans les réglages assignés à MY, MY2 ou MY.2 réglages de l a’ PPareil Éditer Mes Réglages Modifiez et renommez les réglages enregistrés avec Enr. Mes Réglages. Sélectionnez Éditer Mes Réglages dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, appuyez sur Fn2, puis procédez comme suit. 1 Sélectionnez un réglage. Pour assigner les réglages à MY, MY2 ou MY sur le sélecteur de mode, sélectionnez MY1, MY2 ou MY3 et appuyez sur Fn2. Pour modifier les réglages d’une « boîte », sélectionnez Boîte Mes Réglages et appuyez sur Fn2. Sélectionnez la boîte souhaitée et appuyez sur Fn2. 2Modifiez les réglages. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner les rubriques et appuyez sur Fn2 pour les modifier (consultez la section de chaque rubrique dans ce manuel pour en savoir plus). Après avoir modifié chaque rubrique, appuyez sur Fn pour revenir à la liste des réglages, où vous pouvez modifier d’autres réglages. 3 Enregistrez les modifications et quittez. Appuyez sur C/D pour enregistrer les modifications et quitter (pour quitter sans enregistrer les modifications, appuyez sur la touche DISP.). réglages de l a’ PPareil Conseil : nommerMes Réglages Sélectionnez Nom à l’étape 2 pour renommer le réglage. Le nom actuel est sélectionné dans la zone du nom ; pour modifier le nom actuel, appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour positionner le curseur dans la zone du nom et appuyez sur – pour placer le curseur dans la zone du clavier (pour supprimer le nom actuel, appuyez sur – lorsque le nom est sélectionné). Sélectionnez les caractères à l’aide de +, –, Fn ou Fn2 et appuyez sur C/D pour saisir le caractère sélectionné à la position actuelle du curseur (pour supprimer le caractère avant la position actuelle du curseur, sélectionnez [Suppr.]). Appuyez sur la touche t pour basculer entre majuscules et minuscules. Les noms peuvent avoir jusqu’à 32 caractères de long. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. pour quitter ou sur la touche DISP. pour quitter sans renommer les réglages. Fonct. réglage Mon réglage Sélectionnez Oui pour enregistrer les réglages attribués aux touches Fn (page 136) dans les réglages MY enregistrés sous Enr. Mes Réglages. Comp. BB de Mes Réglages Sélectionnez Oui pour enregistrer le réglage de compensation de la balance des blancs (page 89) dans les réglages MY enregistrés sous Enr. Mes Réglages. Zone du nom Zone du clavier Zone du clavier réglages de l a’ PPareil Manette ADJ Réglage Assignez jusqu’à quatre options fréquemment utilisées à la manette ADJ. pour un accès rapide en mode 5, P, A, S ou M. Par défaut, la manette ADJ. peut être utilisée pour la balance des blancs (page 86), la sensibilité ISO (page 90), la qualité d’image (page 61) et le réglage des images (page 71). Les fonctions suivantes peuvent également être attribuées : compensation de la balance des blancs (page 89), mise au point (page 64), mesure (page 70), continu (page 73), cadrage (page 75), compensation du flash (page 78), niveau de flash manuel (page 79) et correction de l’exposition (page 85). En mode 4, la manette ADJ. peut être utilisée pour sélectionner la balance des blancs et la compensation de l’exposition (la compensation de l’exposition n’est pas disponible en mode vidéo). réglages de l a’ PPareil Utilisation delamanette ADJ. Pour sélectionner une option actuellement assignée à la manette ADJ. : 1Affichez les options. Appuyez sur la manette ADJ. en mode prise de vue et appuyez sur la manette vers la gauche ou vers la droite ou appuyez sur Fn ou Fn2 pour afficher les options attribuées à la manette. Réglage 1 Réglage 2 Réglage 4 Réglage 3 2 Sélectionnez une option. Appuyez sur + ou – pour sélectionner une option et appuyez sur la manette ADJ. ou sur C/D. Conseil Maintenez la manette ADJ. enfoncée pour faire défiler rapidement les options disponibles. Déclencheur ADJ Sélectionnez Oui pour utiliser le déclencheur afin de valider l’option sélectionnée en mode ADJ.. réglages de l a’ PPareil Rég. touche Fn1/Fn2 Sélectionnez les fonctions attribuées aux touches Fn et Fn2 avec les options Rég. touche Fn1/Fn2 de l’onglet des options personnalisées. Ci-après sont indiquées certaines des fonctions pouvant être attribuées aux touches Fn et Fn2. Option Description AF/MF Cette option permet de basculer entre AF multi ou AF spot et la mise au point manuelle (page 64). * 1, 3 AF/Snap Cette option permet de basculer entre AF multi ou AF spot et la mise au point snap (page 64). * 4 Verrouill. AE Cette option permet de verrouiller l’exposition. * 2, 5 JPEG>RAW* 10 Si une option autre que RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/Taille, appuyez sur la touche Fn pour sélectionner une option RAW avec le même rapport d’affichage (page 61). * 5, 6 Couleur>N et B Sélectionnez l’option Noir et Blanc pour le paramètre Réglages image (page 71). * 7 Couleur>TE Sélectionnez l’option N et B(TE) pour le paramètre Réglages image (page 71). * 7 Comp. expo. Cette option affiche le curseur de la correction d’exposition (page 85). * 5 Balance blancs Cette option permet d’afficher les options de la balance des blancs (page 86). Correction WB Cette option affiche les commandes de compensation de la balance des blancs (page 89). * 9 ISO Cette option permet d’afficher les options de sensibilité ISO (page 90). * 7 Qualité Cette option affiche les options de qualité et de taille de l’image (page 61). Mise au point Cette option affiche les options de mise au point (page 64). * 4 Réglages image Cette option affiche les options de réglage des images (page 71). * 7 Mesure expo. Cette option affiche les options de mesure de l’exposition (page 70). * 7 Mode Continu Cette option affiche les options de prise de vue en continu (page 73). * 8 Cadrage auto Cette option affiche les options de cadrage (page 75). * 8 Cible macro Cette option permet de positionner la cible de mise au point en mode macro (page 68). * 3 Correct. flash Cette option affiche le curseur de compensation du flash (page 78). * 4, 5 Niveau flash Cette option permet de régler la puissance du flash manuel (page 79). * 8 réglages de l a’ PPareil * 1 Si la mise au point est verrouillée en mode mise au point automatique (page 64), la sélection de la mise au point manuelle définit la distance de mise au point sur la distance à laquelle la mise au point est verrouillée. * 2 L’exposition ne peut pas être verrouillée en mode M. Un appui sur la touche Fn en mode M définit l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation sur des valeurs proches de celles nécessaires pour obtenir une exposition optimale. * 3 Non disponible lorsque l’option Portrait, Sports, Paysage ou Nuit est sélectionnée en mode 4. * 4 Non disponible lorsque Paysage est sélectionné en mode 4. * 5 Non disponible lorsque Vidéo est sélectionné en mode 4. * 6 Non disponible lorsque Correction biais est sélectionné en mode 4. * 7 Non disponible en mode 4 autre que Correction biais. * 8 Non disponible en mode 4. * 9 Non disponible en mode 4 autre que Vidéo. * 10 La taille des images de fichiers RAW varie en fonction des réglages sélectionnés sous Qualité image/Taille. Réglages sous Qualité image/Taille Taille des données RAW L (16:9), M (16:9), 5M, 3M, 1M, VGA RAW (16:9) L (4:3), M (4:3) RAW (4:3) L (3:2), M (3:2) RAW (3:2) L (1:1), M (1:1) RAW (1:1) Par défaut, l’option AF/MF est attribuée à la touche Fn et l’option Niveau flash à la touche Fn2 button. Réglages bouton +/- Sélectionnez les fonctions à attribuer aux touches + et –. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Non, Correct. flash (page 78), Niveau de flash manuel (page 79) et Correction de l’exposition (page 85). réglages de l a’ PPareil Options du sélecteur de mode lecture/options sélecteur de mode M Sélectionnez les fonctions à attribuer à la manette ADJ. et au sélecteur plus-moins en mode lecture et en mode M. Options du sélecteur de mode lecture Options sélecteur de mode M Réglage 1 Réglage 2 Réglage 1 Réglage 2 Manette ADJ. Image suivante/ précédente Défilement gauche/droite Vitesse d’obturation Ouverture Sélecteur plusmoins Zoom avant/ arrière Défilement haut/bas Ouverture Vitesse d’obturation Mode M par 1 seule pression Lorsque la correction d’exposition est assignée aux touches + et – (page 137) ou lorsque le verrouillage AE est assigné aux touches Fn et Fn2 (page 136), un appui sur la touche concernée en mode exposition manuelle définit l’ouverture et/ou la vitesse d’obturation sur des valeurs proches de celles nécessaires pour obtenir une exposition optimale. Sélectionnez un réglage parmi les options suivantes. • Prior overture : l’ouverture conserve la valeur sélectionnée ; la vitesse d’obturation est ajustée pour obtenir une exposition optimale. • Prior obturat. : la vitesse d’obturation conserve la valeur sélectionnée ; l’ouverture est ajustée pour obtenir une exposition optimale. • Programme : l’ouverture et la vitesse d’obturation sont ajustées pour obtenir une exposition optimale. Remarque En mode exposition manuelle, la correction de l’exposition ne peut pas être effectuée avec les touches + et – et le verrouillage AE ne peut pas être obtenu avec les touches Fn.9 réglages de l a’ PPareil Configuration Format [Carte]/Format [Mémoire interne] Sélectionnez Format [Carte] pour formater la carte mémoire avant la première utilisation, après l’avoir utilisée dans un autre dispositif, ou si une erreur de carte s’affiche lorsque la carte est insérée dans le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Sélectionnez Format [Mémoire interne] si un message s’affiche vous demandant de formater la mémoire interne. Attention • Le formatage supprime définitivement toutes les données sur la carte ou dans la mémoire interne. Avant le formatage, copiez sur un ordinateur toutes les données que vous souhaitez conserver (page 151). • Sélectionner Format [Carte] affiche un message d’erreur si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée. Mettez l’appareil hors tension et insérez une carte mémoire. Conseil : protection contrel’écriture Pour empêcher le formatage des cartes mémoire, faites glisser le curseur de protection contre l’écriture sur la position « LOCK » (page 16). Replacez le curseur sur sa position originale pour retrouver un fonctionnement normal. Luminosité LCD Cette option permet d’afficher la commande illustrée à droite. Appuyez sur + ou – pour ajuster la luminosité de l’écran d’affichage Cdes photos, puis appuyez sur /D pour retourner au menu configuration. Appuyez de nouveau sur C/D pour quitter le mode prise de vue ou le mode lecture.0 réglages de l a’ PPareil Remarque L’écran luminosité affiche la vue à travers l’objectif (mode prise de vue) ou la photo la plus récemment affichée (mode lecture ; si aucune photo n’est disponible en lecture, aucune image n’est affichée sur l’écran luminosité). Transparence écran DIRECT Sélectionnez l’intensité de l’image d’arrière-plan affichée sur l’écran DIRECT : Sombre, Normal, Clair ou Image désactiv. Pas de corr. expo/ flash Sélectionnez la valeur des pas pour la correction de l’exposition et la compensation du flash. Sélectionnez 1/2EV ou 1/3EV. Remarque En mode priorité à l’obturation, la valeur des pas est réglée sur 1/3EV, même si l’option 1/2EV est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Pas de corr. expo/ flash. Sensibilité ISO auto-hi Choisissez la sensibilité maximum sélectionnée par l’appareil photo lorsque Auto-Hi est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO en mode prise de vue (page 90). Sélectionnez ISO 200 (AUTO 200), 400 (AUTO 400), 800 (AUTO 800), 1600 (AUTO 1600) ou 3200 (AUTO3200). Remarque Du bruit (variations de la luminosité et de la couleur) peut apparaître dans les photos prises avec des sensibilités élevées. Flash auxiliaire AF Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée, le flash auxiliaire AF s’allume pour aider au fonctionnement de la mise au point, lorsque le sujet est faiblement éclairé. réglages de l a’ PPareil Mode veille Sélectionnez la durée à l’issue de laquelle le mode veille de l’écran d’affichage des photos est activé. Sélectionnez Non, 1 minute, 5 minutes ou 30 minutes. Le témoin de mise au point automatique/flash s’allume en mode veille. Appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche pour annuler le mode veille. Attention • Le boîtier de l’appareil photo ne passe pas en mode veille lorsque : • Le menu prise de vue, options personnalisées ou configuration est affiché. • Le boîtier de l’appareil photo est mis sous tension en appuyant sur la touche 6 et que l’interrupteur MARCHE-ARRÊT est sur ARRÊT. • L’objectif de l’unité appareil photo n’est pas replié en mode veille. Extinction auto Choisissez le délai avant que l’appareil se mette automatiquement hors tension pour économiser l’énergie en cas de non-utilisation. Sélectionnez Non (l’appareil photo ne s’éteint pas automatiquement), 1 minute, 5 minutes ou 30 minutes. Remarque Lorsque les options Mode veille et Extinction auto sont activées, la fonction Extinction auto est activée une fois la durée définie pour Mode veille écoulée. Écran de lecture Sélectionnez l’écran d’affichage des images : LCD (écran d’affichage des photos) ou VF (viseur), lorsque le viseur LCD(VF-2) est installé sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo. Si le viseur n’est pas installé, les images sont affichées sur l’écran d’affichage des photos quel que soit le réglage de l’option Écran de lecture.2 réglages de l a’ PPareil Attén. luminosité auto LCD Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée, l’écran d’affichage des photos s’atténue pour économiser de l’énergie lorsque l’appareil photo est maintenu immobile pendant environ cinq secondes en mode prise de vue. Déplacez l’appareil photo ou appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche pour rétablir la luminosité de l’écran d’affichage des photos. Délai de validation LCD Choisissez la durée d’affichage des photos sur l’écran d’affichage des photos immédiatement après la prise de vue. Sélectionnez 0,5, 1, 2 et 3secondes, Garder (les photos s’affichent jusqu’à ce que le déclencheur soit enfoncé à mi-course et elles peuvent être visualisées avec le zoom en lecture ou supprimées ; voir pages 38 et 39) ou Non (les photos ne sont pas affichées sur l’écran d’affichage des photos après la prise de vue). Sons touches Choisissez lorsque l’appareil émet un son. Option Description Tous Des sons sont émis au démarrage, lorsque le déclencheur est relâché, lorsque l’appareil effectue la mise au point et lorsqu’une erreur survient. Si Son ou Aff.+son est sélectionné pour Réglage niveau (page 32), l’appareil émettra également un signal sonore à intervalles réguliers lorsque l’appareil est de niveau. Son niveau Si l’option Son ou Aff.+Son est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Réglage niveau, l’appareil émet un signal sonore à intervalles réguliers lorsqu’il est de niveau. Sons déclench. Des sons sont émis lorsque le déclencheur est relâché ou lorsqu’une erreur survient. Si Son ou Aff.+son est sélectionné pour Réglage niveau, l’appareil émettra un signal sonore à intervalles réguliers lorsque l’appareil est de niveau. Réglages volume Sélectionnez le volume pour les sons décrits dans la section « Son touches ». Choisissez entre (non), (faible), (moyen) et (fort). réglages de l a’ PPareil Zoom par 1 seule pression Sélectionnez l’agrandissement avec lequel les photos Csont affichées lors d’un zoom avant en utilisant la touche /D ou la manette ADJ. (page 38). Sélectionnez 5,7×, 9,8× ou 16×. Remarques • Le taux d’agrandissement maximal varie en fonction de la taille de l’image (page 38). • Si le taux d’agrandissement maximal d’une taille d’image est inférieur au réglage spécifié dans Zoom par 1 seule pression, l’image peut être agrandie au taux maximal de la taille d’image (page 38). Rotation auto Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher automatiquement les photos avec l’orientation correcte pendant la lecture. Attention L’affichage des vidéos, des photos prises avec la fonction Cont.M + (page 73) et des photos prises alors que l’appareil photo est à l’envers ou fortement incliné vers l’avant ou vers l’arrière ne subit aucune rotation. Les photos ne sont pas pivotées lorsque l’unité appareil photo n’est pas fixée sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo, pendant les diaporamas, en vue multi-images ou affichées sur un téléviseur, ni lorsque l’appareil est à l’envers ou si l’appareil est renversé pendant le zoom en lecture ou lorsqu’une correction des biais est en cours. Remarque Lors du cadrage ou lors de la prise de photos à l’aide de la fonction Continu, l’appareil photo enregistre uniquement l’orientation de la première photo de chaque série. Les photos restantes ne s’affichent pas avec l’orientation correcte si l’appareil a été renversé pendant la prise de vue. réglages de l a’ PPareil Distance min de prise de vue Sélectionnez Afficher pour afficher la distance minimale de prise de vue sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Réglage niveau L’appareil photo vous informe que l’image est de niveau lors de la prise de vue à l’aide de l’indicateur de niveau et de sons. Choisissez les réglages de l’indicateur de niveau (page 32). Options affichage du cadrage Choisissez le type de la grille de cadrage disponible en mode prise de vue (page 42). Paramètre Description Une grille trois par trois pour des compositions en « règle de trois ». Une grille quatre par quatre avec des diagonales d’un angle à l’autre qui facilitent le centrage du sujet. Cette grille est utilisée pour des photos d’architecture ou de produits à afficher. Une grille deux par deux, avec le centre du cadre libre, pour faciliter la visualisation du sujet. Cette grille est utilisée pour les sujets en mouvement. réglages de l a’ PPareil Affichage touche Fn Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher les options actuellement assignées aux touches Fn lorsque l’appareil photo est mis sous tension, lorsque le mode prise de vue est sélectionné ou lorsqu’un nouveau mode est sélectionné avec le sélecteur de mode. Afficher nom de Mon Réglage Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher le nom des réglages assignés à la position actuelle du sélecteur de mode, lorsque le sélecteur est positionné sur MY, MY2 ou MY. Affichage infos prise de vue Sélectionnez Oui pour afficher les icônes de prise de vue dans un cadre entourant la vue à travers l’objectif (page 8), facilitant le cadrage des photos sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. Le cadre n’est pas affiché en mode vidéo. 4:3 N 4:3 N 2010 4:3 N  réglages de l a’ PPareil CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE) Choisissez le nombre et le type de copies créées avec le cadrage couleur (page 77). Sélectionnez Oui pour enregistrer trois copies de chaque prise de vue (une en noir et blanc, une deuxième en couleur et une troisième en monochrome teinté), Non pour enregistrer deux copies (une en noir et blanc et la seconde en couleur). Remarque Quel que soit le réglage choisi, trois copies de chaque photo sont enregistrées si l’option N et B(TE) est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Réglages image. Réglage espace couleurs Choisissez l’espace colorimétrique utilisé pour enregistrer les photos. sRVB est largement utilisé pour reproduire des images numériques, mais offre une gamme de couleurs plus petite que AdobeRVB. Attention L’espace colorimétrique Adobe RVB a été développé par Adobe Systems Inc. et il est compatible avec l’espace colorimétrique par défaut utilisé dans Adobe Photoshop et d’autres logiciels de retouche photo. Cependant, notez que les couleurs seront correctement reproduites uniquement dans les logiciels prenant en charge l’espace colorimétrique Adobe RVB. Notez également qu’un équipement spécialisé est requis pour imprimer la plage entière des couleurs de la gamme Adobe RVB ; lors d’une impression avec une imprimante domestique grand public ou à travers un service de tirages photo numérique, les couleurs seront généralement moins vives que celles des photos utilisant l’espace colorimétrique sRVB. réglages de l a’ PPareil Image zoom numérique Indiquez comment les photos prises à l’aide du zoom numérique sont enregistrées. • Normale : zoom numérique normal. Une partie de l’image est rognée et la photo est agrandie au format sélectionné sous Qualité image/Taille, ce qui entraîne une baisse de la qualité de l’image. • Taille auto : une partie de l’image est rognée et l’image est enregistrée au format rogné. La qualité de l’image reste la même. La taille de l’image est cependant réduite. La taille de l’image rognée varie en fonction du taux de zoom. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo. Le zoom Taille auto est uniquement disponible lorsque le rapport 4:3 est sélectionné pour L, sous Qualité image/Taille (page 61). La taille d’image actuelle s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos lorsque l’appareil photo effectue un zoom avant. 4:3 N Attention La fonction Taille auto n’a aucun effet lorsque l’option Cont.M + ou Correction biais est sélectionnée en mode 4 ou lorsque l’option RAW est sélectionnée pour le paramètre Qualité image/ Taille. Mémo position curseur menu Si l’option Oui est sélectionnée, la rubrique la plus récemment utilisée sera sélectionnée lorsque le menu s’affiche. réglages de l a’ PPareil N° séquentiel de la carte Choisissez comment l’appareil photo nomme les fichiers image lors de l’enregistrement des photos sur une carte mémoire. • Oui : les noms de fichier sont composés de « R » suivi d’un nombre à sept chiffres (par exemple « R0010001. jpg »), par ordre ascendant de 0010001 à 9999999. Lorsqu’une nouvelle carte mémoire est insérée, la numérotation des fichiers continue à partir du dernier nombre utilisé. • Non : les noms de fichier sont composés de « RIMG » suivi d’un nombre à quatre chiffres (par exemple « RIMG0001.jpg »), par ordre ascendant de 0001 à 9999. Lorsqu’une nouvelle carte mémoire est insérée, la numérotation des fichiers est réinitialisée (0001). Remarques • Cette option s’applique uniquement aux cartes mémoire. Les noms de photo dans la mémoire interne sont composés de « RIMG » suivi d’un nombre à quatre chiffres. • Les photos copiées sur un ordinateur à l’aide de DL-10 (page 151) se voient attribuer un nouveau nom, composé de « RIMG » suivi d’un nombre à quatre chiffres. • Les photos prises avec AdobeRVB sélectionné pour Réglage espace couleurs (page 146) sont indiquées par des noms de fichier commençant par un soulignement (p.ex. « _R010001. jpg » ou « _RIMG001.jpg »). Attention Lorsque l’option Oui est sélectionnée, aucune autre photo ne peut être enregistrée sur la carte mémoire si celle-ci contient un dossier numéroté 999 et un nom de fichier terminant par 9999 ; lorsque l’option Non est sélectionnée, aucune autre photo ne peut être enregistrée sur la carte mémoire si celle-ci contient un fichier numéroté 9999. Pour prendre des photos supplémentaires, formatez la carte après avoir copié son contenu sur un ordinateur.9 réglages de l a’ PPareil Réglage date Configurez l’horloge de l’appareil (page 20). Remarque Si vous laissez la batterie dans le boîtier de l’appareil photo pendant au moins deux heures, la batterie peut être ensuite retirée pendant environ une semaine sans qu’il soit nécessaire de reconfigurer l’horloge. Language/L Choisissez la langue d’affichage des messages et des menus de l’appareil photo. Option Description Option Description Japonais ??????? Russe English Anglais Chinois simplifié Deutsch Allemand Chinois traditionnel Français Français Coréen Italiano Italien Thaï Español Espagnol Sortie vidéo Si vous raccordez le boîtier de l’appareil photo à un téléviseur ou un magnétoscope (page 118), choisissez une sortie vidéo qui correspond à la norme utilisée par le dispositif. L’appareil prend en charge les normes NTSC et PAL ; SECAM n’est pas pris en charge. Sortie HDMI Sélectionnez la résolution de sortie des images lors de l’utilisation d’un câble mini HDMI. Sélectionnez AUTO ou Manuel. Remarque Le réglage normal est AUTO. Si la résolution des images affichées sur le téléviseur est faible avec l’option Auto, sélectionnez Manuel. Il est possible que la qualité de l’image s’améliore.0 réglages de l a’ PPareil Lancer extraction réglages Lors de la mise hors tension de l’appareil photo, les réglages sont enregistrés dans le boîtier de l’appareil photo et dans l’unité appareil photo. Sélectionnez la destination de lecture des réglages : Boîtier ou Unité app. ph.. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Copie des photos sur un ordinateur Cette section décrit comment copier des photos du boîtier de l’appareil photo sur votre ordinateur. Les instructions pour Windows sont détaillées ci-dessous ; pour Macintosh, les instructions commencent à la page 162. Remarque Les boîtes de dialogue qui illustrent cette section peuvent légèrement différer de celles affichées sur votre ordinateur. Windows Vous pouvez copier des photos sur votre ordinateur avec l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Installez le logiciel DL-10 fourni (page 153) et utilisez-le pour copier des photos comme indiqué à la page 159. • Copiez des photos sans l’aide du logiciel DL-10 ou d’un autre logiciel de copie d’images (page 160). Remarque Des instructions détaillées sont disponibles dans le Mode d’emploi du logiciel sur le CD fourni (page ix).2 coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Configuration requise Avant d’utiliser le CD fourni, vérifiez que votre ordinateur est compatible avec les exigences suivantes. Consultez la documentation fournie avec votre ordinateur pour en savoir plus. OS Windows 2000 Professional SP 4, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional SP 3, Windows Vista SP 2 CPU Windows 2000/Windows XP : Pentium® lll 500MHz ou supérieur Windows Vista : Pentium® lll 1GHz ou supérieur RAM Windows 2000/Windows XP : 256Mo ou plus Windows Vista : 512Mo ou plus Espace disque disponible Un minimum de 160Mo est requis pour l’installation Vidéo 1024×768 pixels ou plus avec couleurs 16 bits ou plus Divers • Lecteur CD-ROM compatible • Port USB compatible Attention • Les systèmes d’exploitation de 64 bits ne sont pas pris en charge. Les systèmes d’exploitation, qui ont été mis à jour à partir d’une version précédente, ne sont pas pris en charge car l’USB pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement. Le logiciel fourni peut ne pas fonctionner correctement sur des systèmes qui ont été mis à jour ou modifiés avec des versions Service Pack. • Connectez le boîtier de l’appareil photo directement sur le port USB intégré. Les ports USB rajoutés via le bus PCI ou d’autres cartes d’extension ne sont pas pris en charge. Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut ne pas fonctionner correctement s’il est raccordé à un concentrateur USB ou à un clavier. • Plus de RAM peut être nécessaire pour la gestion des vidéos et des gros fichiers. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr CD fourni À l’insertion du CD fourni dans un lecteur de CD-ROM, la boîte de dialogue illustrée à droite s’affiche. • Installation du logiciel : installez les applications suivantes. DL-10 : cette application permet de copier des photos sur l’ordinateur en une seule opération. Irodio Photo & Video Studio : cette application permet de visualiser et de retoucher des photos sur l’ordinateur. Pour en savoir plus, consultez le menu Aide dans Irodio Photo & Video Studio ou consultez le site web suivant : http://www.pixela. co.jp/oem/irodio/e/irodio_digitalphoto_videostudio/ Pilote USB : cette application permet de raccorder les anciens appareils photo Ricoh à des ordinateurs sous Windows 98, Windows 98 SE, Windows Me ou Windows 2000. Cette application n’est pas nécessaire pour ce produit. Pilote WIA : cette application permet de raccorder les anciens appareils photo Ricoh aux ordinateurs sous Windows XP et Windows Vista. Cette application n’est pas nécessaire pour ce produit. • Voir le manuel de l’utilisateur (version logiciel) : visualisez le Mode d’emploi du logiciel au format PDF (page ix). Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader est requis ; le cas échéant, installez Adobe Reader comme indiqué à la page 156. • Voir le contenu du CD-ROM : parcourez le contenu du CD, qui comprend Adobe Reader (page 156). Pour installer Irodio Photo & Video Studio sans installer d’autres applications, ouvrez le dossier « Irodio Photo & Video Studio » et double-cliquez sur Irodio Photo & Video Studio.exe. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Installation du logiciel Suivez la procédure de la page suivante pour installer le logiciel fourni. Les illustrations proviennent de Windows XP. Attention • Si le boîtier de l’appareil photo est raccordé à l’ordinateur, débranchez-le avant de commencer l’installation. • Les utilisateurs de l’application « Caplio » doivent savoir que l’application « DC » fournie avec le boîtier de l’appareil photo remplace les éléments suivants de la suite logicielle Caplio : Logiciel Caplio Logiciel DC RICOH Gate La DL-10 Caplio Viewer DU-10 * Caplio Server SR-10 * Caplio Setting ST-10 * *Non utilisé par ce produit. Si le logiciel Caplio ci-dessus est actuellement installé, il vous sera demandé de le désinstaller avant d’installer le logiciel DC fourni. Suivez les instructions à l’écran. L’installation du logiciel DC remplace Caplio Viewer, Caplio Server et Caplio Setting avec les applications listées ci-dessus, qui peuvent être utilisées de la même façon que les versions Caplio (notez que ces logiciels ne seront pas installés si vous avez désinstallé le logiciel Caplio comme indiqué à la page 158 avant d’installer le logiciel DC). Notez que la désinstallation du logiciel pour les anciens appareils photo Ricoh peut réinitialiser les préférences utilisateur de DL-10 ou RICOH Gate La. • Les droits Administrateur sont requis pour l’installation. • DL-10 est conçu pour fonctionner dans un environnement individuel et ne peut pas être exécuté en réseau. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr 1 Insérez le CD fourni. Mettez l’ordinateur sous tension et insérez le CD fourni dans le lecteur CD-ROM. • Windows Vista : une boîte de dialogue d’exécution automatique s’affiche. Cliquez sur Exécuter Autorun.exe pour afficher la fenêtre de l’assistant d’installation. • Autres versions de Windows : la fenêtre de l’assistant d’installation s’affiche automatiquement. 2 Cliquez sur Installation du logiciel. • Windows Vista : une boîte de dialogue « Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur » s’affiche. Cliquez sur Permettre pour afficher la boîte de dialogue de sélection de la langue. • Autres versions de Windows : la boîte de dialogue de sélection de la langue s’affiche automatiquement. 3 Sélectionnez une langue et cliquez sur OK. La boîte de dialogue illustrée à droite s’affiche ensuite. Cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Sélectionnez une destination. Le logiciel fourni sera installé dans le dossier indiqué dans Dossier Cible. Cliquez sur Suivant. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr 5 Confirmez la destination et cliquez sur [Suivant]. L’installateur Irodio Photo & Video Studio démarre (selon votre ordinateur, la fenêtre d’accueil illustrée à droite peut rester affichée un certain temps avant que l’installation commence). Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour installer le logiciel fourni. 6 Cliquez sur Terminer. La boîte de dialogue illustrée à droite s’affiche lorsque l’installation est terminée. Cliquez sur Terminer. 7 Redémarrez l’ordinateur. Un message s’affiche vous demandant de redémarrer votre ordinateur. Sélectionnez Oui, je souhaite redémarrer mon ordinateur maintenant et cliquez sur Terminer pour redémarrer l’ordinateur. 8Débloquez DL-10. Une boîte de dialogue de sécurité Windows s’affiche après le redémarrage. Cliquez sur Débloquer pour le logiciel DL-10. Remarque Consultez la page 158 pour en savoir plus sur la désinstallation du logiciel. Installation de l’application Adobe Reader Adobe Reader est requis pour visualiser le Mode d’emploi du logiciel. Si Adobe Reader n’est pas déjà installé, il est possible de le faire à partir du CD fourni comme indiqué ci-dessous. Attention • Débranchez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avant de commencer l’installation. • Les droits Administrateur sont requis pour l’installation. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr 1 Insérez le CD fourni. Mettez l’ordinateur sous tension et insérez le CD fourni dans le lecteur CD-ROM. • Windows Vista : une boîte de dialogue d’exécution automatique s’affiche. Cliquez sur Exécuter Autorun.exe pour afficher la fenêtre de l’assistant d’installation. • Autres versions de Windows : la fenêtre de l’assistant d’installation s’affiche automatiquement. 2 Cliquez sur Voir le contenu du CD-ROM. Le contenu du CD s’affiche. 3 Installez Adobe Reader. Double-cliquez sur le dossier « Acrobat Reader », puis sur le dossier de la langue de votre choix. Double-cliquez sur le fichier commençant par « AdbeRdr910 » et suivez les instructions à l’écran. Si une boîte de dialogue « Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur » s’affiche, cliquez sur Continuer. Remarques • Consultez le menu Aide dans Adobe Reader pour en savoir plus sur Adobe Reader. • L’installation de l’application Adobe Reader 9.1 nécessite MSI (Microsoft Windows Installer) version 3.1 ou supérieure et soit Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6.0 ou supérieure, soit Firefox version 2.0 ou supérieure. Microsoft Internet Explorer et Microsoft Windows Installer sont disponibles via la mise à jour de Microsoft. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Désinstallation du logiciel Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour désinstaller le logiciel DC ou Irodio Photo & Video Studio. Attention • Les droits Administrateur sont requis pour la désinstallation. • Quittez toutes les applications ouvertes avant de continuer. 1 Ouvrez « Ajout/Suppression de programmes » dans le Panneau de configuration. Ouvrez le menu « Démarrer » de Windows et sélectionnez Panneau de configuration (Windows XP ou Windows Vista) ou Paramètres > Panneau de configuration. Double-cliquez sur Ajout/ Suppression de programmes. 2Désinstallez le logiciel. Sélectionnez le logiciel à désinstaller (DC Software ou Irodio Photo & Video Studio), puis cliquez sur Modifier/Supprimer. Une boîte de dialogue de confirmation s’affiche ; cliquez sur OK. Si un message s’affiche pour signaler qu’un fichier partagé a été détecté, sélectionnez Ne plus afficher ce message et cliquez sur Oui. Fermez toutes les fenêtres ouvertes lorsque le processus de désinstallation est terminé. Après la désinstallation du logiciel Irodio Photo & Video Studio, redémarrez l’ordinateur.9 coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Copie de photos à l’aide du logiciel DL-10 Après l’installation du logiciel DC, suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour copier des photos sur votre ordinateur. 1Mettez l’appareil hors tension. 2 Branchez le câble USB fourni. Raccordez le câble au port USB de l’ordinateur. Attention • Ne forcez pas et ne tirez pas sur le câble lorsque vous manipulez le boîtier de l’appareil photo avec le câble branché. • Ne déplacez pas le boîtier de l’appareil photo lorsque le câble est branché. Raccordez le câble à l’appareil photo comme illustré. L’appareil se met sous tension, le logiciel DL-10 démarre et le transfert commence automatiquement. Les photos sont copiées dans des répertoires du dossier « Digital Camera » dans « Mes documents » (si vous utilisiez précédemment le logiciel Caplio, les photos seront plutôt copiées dans des répertoires du dossier « Caplio »). Les photos sont classées par date d’enregistrement dans des répertoires séparés ; assurez-vous que l’horloge de l’appareil est correctement configurée avant la prise de vue. 3Débranchez le câble lorsque le transfert est terminé. Consultez la page 161 pour en savoir plus.0 coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Remarque Appliquez les procédures suivantes si le transfert ne démarre pas automatiquement. Cliquez sur Sauvegarder dans la fenêtre DL-10. Assurez-vous que l’option Enregistrer automatiquement lorsqu’il est connecté à un port USB est sélectionnée dans la boîte de dialogue « Réglages d’option » du logiciel DL-10. Redémarrez l’ordinateur et répétez la procédure ci-dessus. Copie de photos sans l’aide du logiciel DL-10 Si DL-10 n’est pas installé, vous pouvez copier des photos sur l’ordinateur comme indiqué ci-dessous. Les illustrations de cette section proviennent de Windows XP. 1Mettez l’appareil hors tension. 2 Branchez le câble USB fourni. Raccordez le câble au port USB de l’ordinateur, puis au boîtier de l’appareil photo. L’appareil se met sous tension automatiquement. 3 Copiez les fichiers de l’appareil sur l’ordinateur. L’appareil est listé comme disque amovible dans « Poste de travail », avec les photos stockées dans des dossiers comme illustré à droite. Si une carte mémoire est insérée dans l’appareil, le disque sera nommé comme illustré à droite et le contenu de la carte mémoire s’affichera. Si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée, le disque sera nommé « RICOHDCI » et le contenu de la mémoire interne s’affichera. Copiez les photos dans l’emplacement souhaité de votre ordinateur. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Attention • Ne mettez pas l’appareil hors tension et ne débranchez pas le câble USB tant que la copie n’est pas terminée. • Les fichiers dans le dossier de destination avec le même nom que les photos copiées seront écrasés. Le cas échéant, renommez les fichiers avant de commencer la copie. • N’utilisez pas l’ordinateur pour visualiser ou retoucher les photos d’une carte mémoire. Les photos qui ont été visualisées ou retouchées sur l’ordinateur ne peuvent plus être affichées sur l’appareil. Copiez les photos sur l’ordinateur pour les visualiser et les retoucher. Déconnexion du boîtier de l’appareil photo Avant de déconnecter le boîtier de l’appareil photo de l’ordinateur, cliquez sur l’icône « Retirer le périphérique en toute sécurité » ou « Déconnecter ou éjecter le matériel » dans la zone de notification (l’illustration cidessus montre l’icône sous Windows XP) et sélectionnez Retirer Périphérique de stockage de masse USB en toute sécurité ou Arrêter Périphérique de stockage de masse USB dans le menu contextuel. Vous pouvez alors débrancher le câble USB. Remarques • Un message d’avertissement peut s’afficher si le câble USB est débranché sans d’abord retirer l’appareil du système comme indiqué ci-dessus. Assurez-vous de retirer l’appareil du système avant de débrancher le câble. • Vérifiez que le transfert est terminé avant de retirer l’appareil du système et de débrancher le câble.2 coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Macintosh Le boîtier de l’appareil photo peut être utilisé avec Mac OS X versions 10.4 à 10.5.7. Attention Le logiciel VM-1 (page 164) et le Mode d’emploi du logiciel (uniquement sur les ordinateurs équipés de l’application Acrobat) peuvent être utilisés avec les ordinateurs Macintosh. Copie des photos sur un ordinateur Macintosh 1Mettez l’appareil hors tension. 2 Branchez le câble USB fourni. Raccordez le câble au port USB de l’ordinateur. Attention • Ne forcez pas et ne tirez pas sur le câble lorsque vous manipulez l’appareil photo avec le câble branché. • Ne déplacez pas l’appareil photo lorsque le câble est branché. Raccordez le câble au boîtier de l’appareil photo comme illustré. L’appareil se met sous tension automatiquement. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr 3 Copiez les fichiers de l’appareil sur l’ordinateur. L’appareil s’affiche comme un volume sur le bureau, avec les photos stockées dans des dossiers comme illustré à droite. Si une carte mémoire est insérée dans l’appareil, le disque sera nommé comme illustré à droite et le contenu de la carte mémoire s’affichera. Si aucune carte mémoire n’est insérée, le disque sera nommé « RICOHDCI » et le contenu de la mémoire interne s’affichera. Copiez les photos dans l’emplacement souhaité de votre ordinateur. Déconnexion du boîtier de l’appareil photo Avant de débrancher l’appareil de l’ordinateur, faites glisser le volume de l’appareil sur la poubelle ou sélectionnez le volume de l’appareil et choisissez Éjecter dans le menu Fichier. Vous pouvez alors débrancher le câble USB. Remarques • Un message d’avertissement peut s’afficher si le câble USB est débranché sans d’abord retirer l’appareil du système comme indiqué ci-dessus. Assurez-vous de retirer l’appareil du système avant de débrancher le câble. • Vérifiez que le transfert est terminé avant de retirer l’appareil du système et de débrancher le câble. • Le raccordement du boîtier de l’appareil photo à un ordinateur Macintosh peut engendrer la création de fichiers « FINDER. DAT » ou « .DS_Store » qui seront considérés comme des fichiers incorrects par l’appareil. Ces fichiers peuvent être supprimés sans risque. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Utilisation de lecteur de fichiers MP Lorsque vous prenez des photos à l’aide de la fonction Cont.M +, les photos sont enregistrées dans un fichier MP. Grâce au lecteur de fichiers MP VM-1, vous pouvez lire des fichiers MP sur votre ordinateur Macintosh et exporter des photos. Cette section explique comment installer et désinstaller le logiciel VM-1 qui est inclus sur le CD-ROM fourni. Pour plus de détails concernant la lecture de fichiers MP sur votre ordinateur ou l’exportation de photos de fichiers MP à l’aide du lecteur de fichiers MP, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du logiciel » disponible sur le CD-ROM fourni. Configuration requise pourl’utilisation du lecteur de fichiersMP fourni Les environnements suivants sont nécessaires pour utiliser le lecteur de fichiers MP fourni. Vérifiez votre ordinateur ou le manuel de l’utilisateur de l’ordinateur. Systèmes d’exploitation pris en charge Mac OS X versions 10.4 à 10.5.7 Macintosh Série Macintosh Apple Inc. Mémoire interne Mac OS X 10.4 256 Mo ou plus Mac OS X 10.5 512 Mo ou plus Mémoire disque dur disponible 5 Mo ou plus Lecteur de CD-ROM Lecteur de CD-ROM compatible avec l’ordinateur Macintosh susmentionné Remarque Le logiciel VM-1 prend en charge les langues suivantes : japonais, anglais, français et chinois (simplifié). coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Installation du logiciel VM-1 1 Insérez le CD fourni. Mettez l’ordinateur Macintosh sous tension et insérez le CD fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM. 2 Sélectionnez le disque d’installation. Double-cliquez sur l’icône RICOH > le dossier VM- 1 > l’icône VM-1 Installer.pkg. La fenêtre Installer VM-1 s’affiche, cliquez sur Continuer. Lorsque la fenêtre de sélection de l’emplacement d’installation s’affiche, sélectionnez le disque d’installation, puis cliquez sur Continuer. 3 Installez le logiciel VM-1. Cliquez sur Installer, saisissez votre nom et votre mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. Un message vous informant que l’installation est terminée s’affiche, cliquez sur Fermer. Pour sélectionner un autre emplacement d’installation, cliquez sur Changer l’emplacement de l’installation.... Pour mettre le logiciel VM-1 à niveau, cliquez sur Mettre à jour. coPie des Photos sUr Un ordinateUr Désinstallation du logiciel VM-1 Attention • Si d’autres logiciels sont en cours d’exécution ou si des données n’ont pas été enregistrées, fermez les logiciels et enregistrez les données avant de désinstaller VM-1. • En cas d’erreur pendant la désinstallation, mettez votre système d’exploitation Mac à jour avec la dernière version disponible. 1 Ouvrez le dossier des utilitaires VM-1. Ouvrez le dossier Applications > le dossier Utilitaires > le dossier VM-1 Utility. 2Double-cliquez sur l’icône VM-1 Uninstaller. La fenêtre de confirmation de la désinstallation s’affiche. Cliquez sur OK. 3 Saisissez votre nom et votre mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. Un message vous informant que la désinstallation est terminée s’affiche, cliquez sur OK. reMarqUes techniqUes Remarques techniques Résolution des problèmes Messages d’erreur Si un message d’erreur s’affiche, procédez comme suit. Message Solution Page Insérerunecarte. Aucunecarte mémoireinsérée. Insérezunecarte. 15 Régler ladate. L’horloge de l’appareil photo n’est pas configurée. Configurez l’horlogedel’appareil. 20, 149 Nombrede fi chiers limites La limitede numérotation des fichiersde l’appareil est atteinte. Insérezuneautrecarte. 15, 148 Fichier incorrect L’appareil ne peut pas afficher le fichier. Utilisez un ordinateur pourvérifier lecontenudu fichieret supprimer le fichier. — Mémoireinsuffisant. Poursuivrelacopie? L’espacesur lacarte mémoireest insuffisantpour copier tous les fichiers. Insérezuneautrecarte. 15 Protégé Le fichierestprotégéet nepeutpasêtresupprimé. 112 Carteprotégéeen écriture. Lacarteestprotégéecontrel’écriture(verrouillée). Déverrouillez lacarte. 16 Fichier non sélectionné pour l’impression. Le fichier est une vidéo ou un autre fichier qui ne peut pas être sélectionnépour l’impression. — Espace mémoire insuffisant / Faiblecapacité La mémoire est insuffisante pour stocker des fichiers supplémentaires.Supprimezdes fichiersexistantsouaugmentez laquantitéde mémoiredisponible. 39, 139 Nombre maximum d’images sélectionnées pour impression. Réglez le nombredetiragespour lesautres images sur zéro. 125 Formater la mémoire interne. La mémoire interne n’est pas formatée correctement. Formatez la mémoireinterne. 139 Formatez lacarte. Lacarte n’estpas formatéecorrectement.Formatez lacartedans leboîtierdel’appareilphoto. 139 Erreur carte Formatezlacarte.Si lemessagepersiste, lacarteestdéfectueuse; nel’utilisezplus. 139 Écrituredesdonnées L’appareil enregistre des données. Patientez jusqu’à la fin de l’enregistrement. — Pasde fichier Aucun fichierdisponiblepour lecture. — Enregi. impossible Lamémoireestpleine. Utilisezuneautrecarte,ouretirezlacarte etutilisez la mémoireinterne. 15 reMarqUes techniqUes Problèmes relatifs au boîtier de l’appareil photo Alimentation Problème Cause Solution Page L’appareilphoto nese metpas sous tension. La batterie est vide ou n’est pas insérée. Vérifiez que la batterie est correctement insérée. Chargez la batterie (batterie rechargeable uniquement). 12,14 Labatterieest incompatible. Utilisez labatteriefournie. 13 La batterie n’est pas orientée correctement. Insérez et orientez correctement labatterie. 14 L’appareilphoto se met hors tension pendant l’utilisation. L’appareil s’est mis hors tension automatiquement pour économiser l’énergie. Mettez l’appareil sous tension. 18 Labatterieestvide. Chargez la batterie (batterie rechargeableuniquement). 12 Labatterieest incompatible. Utilisez labatteriefournie. 13 L’appareilphoto nese metpas hors tension. L’appareil fonctionne mal. Retirezet réinsérez labatterie. 14 L’indicateurde batteriefaible s’afficheou l’appareil se met hors tension alors quelabatterieest encorechargée. Labatterieest incompatible. Utilisez labatteriefournie. 13 Ilest impossiblede charger labatterie. Labatterieaatteint la fin desavie decharge. Remplacez-la par une batterie neuve. 14 Labatterie sedécharge rapidement. La température est très haute ou trèsbasse. — — Un faible éclairage nécessite une utilisation excessivedu flash. — —9 reMarqUes techniqUes Prise devue Problème Cause Solution Page Aucunephoto n’est priselorsquele déclencheurest enfoncé. Labatterieestvide. Chargez la batterie (batterie rechargeableuniquement). 12 L’appareil photo est hors tension oupasen modeprisedevue. Placez l’interrupteur MARCHE/ ARRÊT sur MARCHE pour mettre l’appareil photo sous tension ou appuyezsur6poursélectionner le modeprisedevue. 18,34 L’appareil photo est en mode lecture. Appuyezsur6poursélectionner le modeprisedevue. 34 Ledéclencheur n’apasétéenfoncé jusqu’aubout. Appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’aubout. 22 Lacarte mémoire n’estpas formatée. Formatez lacarte. 139 Lacarte mémoireestpleine. Insérez une nouvelle carte ou supprimezdes fichiers. 15,39 La carte mémoire a atteint la fin desavieutile. Insérezune nouvellecarte. 15 Le flash est en cours de chargement. Patientez jusqu’àcequeletémoin du flash arrêtedeclignoter. 29 Lacarte mémoireestverrouillée. Déverrouillez lacarte. 16 Les contacts de la carte mémoire sont sales. Nettoyez-le avec un chiffon doux et sec. — Impossibled’afficher lesphotosaprès la prisedevue. La durée d’affichage est trop courte. Choisissez une durée d’affichage plus longue. 142 L’écran d’affichage desphotosest vide. L’appareil photo est éteint ou l’écran d’affichage des photos est noir. Mettez l’appareil sous tension ou réglez la luminosité de l’écran d’affichagedesphotos. 18, 139 L’écran d’affichage des photos est éteint. Appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD pour activer l’écran d’affichagedesphotos. 42 LeviseurLCD aétéactivé. Appuyez sur la touche VF/LCD pour activer l’écran d’affichagedesphotos. 42 Lecâble A/V estbranché. Débranchez lecâble. 118 L’appareilphoto est incapable d’effectuer la mise aupointen mode miseaupoint automatique. L’objectifest sale. Nettoyez-le avec un chiffon doux et sec. — Lesujet n’estpasaucentreducadre. Utilisez leverrouillagede miseaupoint. 25 Lesujet n’estpasadaptéàla mise aupointautomatique. Utilisez le verrouillage de mise au pointoula miseaupoint manuelle. 25,65 Lesujetest tropproche. Utilisez le mode macro ou éloignez-vousdusujet. 270 reMarqUes techniqUes Problème Cause Solution Page Lesphotos sont floues. J L’appareil photo bouge pendant la prisedevue. Utilisez un trépied. Utilisez la fonction de correction du bougé de l’appareil photo. Placez les coudes contrelecorps. 21,92 L’éclairage est faible et les vitesses d’obturation sont lentes. Utilisez le flash. Sélectionnez une sensibilitéISO plusélevée. Utilisezla fonction de correction du bougé de l’appareilphoto. 29,90, 92 Le flash nese déclenchepasou ne serechargepas. Le flash n’estpasouvert. Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f (réglage/ouverture du flash) pour déployer le flash. 29 Le flash n’estpas complètementouvert. Negênezpas l’ouverturedu flash. — Le flash nepeutpasêtreutilisédans les cas suivants : • Lorsquecadrageexposition,cadrage balance des blancs ou cadrage couleurest réglé • En modecontinu • En modevidéo Modifiez les réglagesdel’appareil. 54,73, 75 Le flash estdésactivé. Déployez le flash. Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f (réglage/ouverture du flash)pourannuler le flash. 29 Labatterieestvide. Chargez la batterie (batterie rechargeableuniquement). 12 Le flash n’éclairepas lesujet. La distance jusqu’au sujet est supérieureàlaportéedu flash. Rapprochez-vousdusujet. — Lesujetest sombre. Augmentez lapuissancedu flash. 78 Le flash sedéclenchetroplentement. Augmentez lapuissancedu flash. 78 Le flash n’estpas complètementouvert. Negênezpas l’ouverturedu flash. — Lesphotos sont trop claires. Lapuissancedu flash est tropforte. Réduisez la puissance du flash, éloignez-vous du sujet ou utilisez unesourced’éclairagedifférente. 78 Laphotoest surexposée. Utilisezlacorrection d’exposition ouchoisissez unevitessed’obturation plus rapide. 50,85 L’écran d’affichage des photos est tropclair. Réglez la luminosité de l’écran d’affichagedesphotos. 139 Lesphotos sont trop foncées. Le flash est désactivé ou le sujet est faiblementéclairé. Appuyez sur la touche OPEN/f (réglage/ouverture du flash) pour déployer le flash. 29 Laphotoest sous-exposée. Utilisezlacorrection d’exposition ouchoisissez unevitessed’obturation plus lente. 50,85 L’écran d’affichage des photos est tropfoncé. Réglez la luminosité de l’écran d’affichagedesphotos. 139 reMarqUes techniqUes Problème Cause Solution Page Les couleurs nesont pas naturelles. L’appareil est incapable de régler la balance des blancs, par rapport aux conditions de prise de vue, en utilisant la balance des blancs automatique. Insérez un objetblancdans le cadre ou choisissez une autre option de balancedesblancs. 86 Les informations sur laphoto ne s’affichentpas. Les indicateurs sont cachés. Appuyez sur DISP. pour afficher les indicateurs. 42 Laluminositéde l’écran d’affichage desphotos change pendant la miseau point. L’éclairage ambiant est faible ou différent de celui qui a été utilisé pour la miseaupointautomatique. C’est normal et il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement. — Desbandes verticales («traînées») apparaissent sur la photo. Lesujetest clair. C’est normal et il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement. — L’indicateurde niveau nes’affiche pas. L’optionNon ouSon estsélectionnée pour leparamètre Réglage niveau. Sélectionnez Affichage ou Aff. + son. 32 Les indicateurs sont cachés. Appuyez sur DISP. pour afficher les indicateurs. 42 L’appareilphotoestàl’envers. Tenez l’appareilorientécorrectement. 21 Laphoto n’estpas de niveau,bien quel’indicateurde niveauindiquait quel’appareilphoto l’était. L’appareil a bougé pendant la prise devue. Ne prenez pas de photos à partir d’objetsen déplacement. — Lesujet n’estpasde niveau. Vérifiez lesujet. — Lecture/suppression Problème Cause Solution Page Impossibledelire lesphotos. L’appareil n’estpasen modelecture. Appuyez sur6. 19,34 Lecâble A/V estbranchéde manière incorrecte. Rebranchez lecâble A/V. 118 Le mode vidéo n’est pas adapté au téléviseur. Choisissezun autre modevidéo. 149 L’écran de lecture s’affiche dans le viseurLCD. RéglezÉcran de lecturesurLCD. 1412 reMarqUes techniqUes Problème Cause Solution Page Impossiblede visualiser les photos sur lacarte mémoire. La carte mémoire est vide ou non insérée. Insérezunecartequiaétéformatée dans leboîtierdel’appareilphotoet qui contientdesphotosenregistrées avec celui-ci. 15, 139 Lacarte n’apasétéformatéedans le boîtierdel’appareilphoto. Les photos ont été créées avec un autredispositif. Les contacts de la carte mémoire sont sales. Nettoyez-le avec un chiffon doux et sec. — Lacartefonctionne mal. Insérez une autre carte. Si vous pouvez visualiser les photos sur la seconde carte, la première carte est probablement défectueuse; ne l’utilisezplus. — L’écran d’affichage desphotos s’est éteint. Labatterieestvide. Chargez la batterie (batterie rechargeableuniquement). 12 L’appareil s’est mis hors tension automatiquement pour économiser l’énergie. Mettez l’appareil sous tension. 18 Impossiblede supprimer le fichier. Le fichierestprotégé. Supprimez laprotection. 112 Lacarte mémoireestverrouillée. Impossiblede Déverrouillez lacarte mémoire. 16 formater lacarte. Lacarteestverrouillée. Divers Problème Cause Solution Page Impossibled’insérer lacarte mémoire. La carte n’est pas orientée correctement. Insérez et orientez correctement lacarte. 15 Les commandes del’appareilphoto restent sanseffet. Labatterieestvide. Chargez la batterie (batterie rechargeableuniquement). 12 L’appareil fonctionne mal. Mettez l’appareil hors tension,puis sous tension de nouveau. 18 Retirezet réinsérez labatterie. 14 Ladateest incorrecte. L’horloge n’est pas configurée correctement. Configurez l’horlogeavec ladateet l’heurecorrectes. 20,149 Ladateaété réinitialisée. La batterie n’a pas été insérée pendantenviron unesemaine. Configurez l’horlogeavec ladateet l’heurecorrectes. 20,149 L’appareilphoto nese metpas hors tension automatiquement. L’option Non est sélectionnéepour leparamètreExtinction auto. Choisissezun autreréglage. 141 L’appareilphoto n’émetaucun son. Leson est coupé. Choisissez une autre option pour Réglages volume. 32,142 reMarqUes techniqUes Problème Cause Solution Page Lesphotos ne s’affichentpas sur letéléviseur. Le mode vidéo n’est pas adapté autéléviseur. Choisissezun autre modevidéo. 149 Lecâble A/V n’estpasbranché. Branchez lecâble A/V. 118 Letéléviseur n’estpas réglésur le canald’entréevidéo. Configurez le téléviseur sur le canald’entréevidéo. — Problèmes relatifs à l’ordinateur Pour en savoir plus, consultez le Mode d’emploi du logiciel, disponible au format PDF sur le CD fourni. Alertes desécurité(Windows Vista/WindowsXP) Consultez ce qui suit si Windows XP Service Pack 3 ou Windows Vista Service Pack 2 affiche une alerte de sécurité lorsque le boîtier de l’appareil photo est raccordé ou lorsque le logiciel DL-10 démarre. Les illustrations de cette section proviennent de Windows XP. Si une alerte de sécurité s’affiche, vérifiez que le programme provient d’une source fiable et cliquez sur Débloquer. Attention Si vous ne pouvez pas identifier le programme et la source, cliquez sur Maintenir le blocage pour empêcher votre ordinateur d’être infecté par un virus ou un logiciel malveillant. reMarqUes techniqUes Si vous avez cliqué sur Maintenir le blocage pour bloquer une application Ricoh, vous pouvez la débloquer dans le pare-feu Windows. 1 Ouvrez le « pare-feu Windows » dans le Panneau de configuration. Ouvrez le menu « Démarrer » et sélectionnez Panneau de configuration, puis double-cliquez sur Pare-feu Windows (si le pare-feu Windows n’est pas listé, cliquez sur Basculer vers l’affichage classique dans l’angle supérieur gauche du panneau de configuration Windows). 2Autorisez l’application Ricoh à accéder à Internet. Dans la boîte de dialogue « Pare-feu Windows », cliquez sur l’onglet Exceptions et vérifiez si le logiciel DL-10 est listé dans « Programmes et services ». Si c’est le cas, cochez la case à côté de DL-10 et cliquez sur OK. Dans le cas contraire, cliquez sur Ajouter un programme… pour ajouter DL-10 à la liste des exceptions. Si vous avez cliqué sur Me redemander ultérieurement pour bloquer DL-10, une alerte de sécurité s’affichera la prochaine fois que le programme démarrera. Cliquez sur Débloquer pour supprimer le blocage. reMarqUes techniqUes Caractéristiques Flash Mode Auto(le flash sedéclenchelorsquel’éclairageest faibleouquele sujetestàcontre-jour),yeuxrouges,activé, synchronisation lente, manuel,désactivé Portée(flash intégré) Consultez ladocumentation fournieavec l’unitéappareilphoto. Compensation de flash ±2,0EV parpasde1/2EV ou1/3EV Niveaude flash manuel MAX,1/1.4,1/2,1/2.8,1/4,1/5.6,1/8,1/11,1/16,1/22,1/32,1/64 Écran d’affichagedes photos 3,0” LCD transparent ;environ 920000pixels Modeprisedevue Auto, changementdeprogramme,prioritéàl’ouverture,prioritéà l’obturation, manuel, scène,« Mes Réglages» Qualitéd’image Fine, Normal, RAW(DNG)?* 1 Stockage Carte mémoireSD/SDHC; mémoireinterne(environ 86?Mo) Taille fichier?* 2 (environ) 5M FINE:environ 2287 Ko/image 3M FINE:environ 1474 Ko/image 1M FINE:environ 812 Ko/image VGA FINE:environ 197 Ko/image Format fichier Photos JPEG (Exifversion 2.21)?* 3 , RAW(DNG) Vidéos AVI?* 4 (compatible OpenDML Motion JPEG) Compression CompatibleJPEG lignedebase(photosetvidéos) Autresoptionsprise devue Prisedevueen continu(continu,Cont.M +) ; retardateur (délaide déclenchementd’environ 10?sou2?s),ouoption personnalisée; prisedevueàintervalles (de5?sà1 heure,par incrémentsde5?s)?* 5 ; cadragecouleur ; N et B (TE) ; sélection d’espacecolorimétrique; réduction bruit ;affichaged’histogramme;grilledecadrage; indicateurdeprofondeurdechamp; indicateurde niveau;griffe alimentée Autresoptions lecture Rotation d’imageautomatique,vue multi-images ; zoom en lecture (jusqu’à16?×) ; redimensionnement Interface Connecteur Mini-B USB 2.0(hautdébit) ; stockagede masse?* 6 ; sortieaudio1,0?Vp-p(75?O) ;Connecteurducâble mini HDMI (typeC) Format signalvidéo NTSC,PAL Sourcealimentation Batterierechargeable DB-90(3,6?V) Longévitébatterie(basée sur normeCIPA)?* 7 Consultez ladocumentation fournieavec l’unitéappareilphoto. reMarqUes techniqUes Dimensions (L?×?H?×?P) 113,9?mm?×?70,2?mm?×?28,9?mm (protubérancesexclues) Poids (approximatif) • Boîtierdel’appareilphoto(batterie, carte mémoire, courroie d’encolureet capuchon duconnecteurexclus) :160?g • Batterie, courroied’encolureet capuchon duconnecteur :66?g Visde fixation dutrépied 1/4-20UNC Duréestockagedate Environ 1semaine Température fonctionnement 0?°Cà40?°C Humidité fonctionnement 85%ou moins Températurestockage –20?°Cà60?°C * 1 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité fine ou normale avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou un fichier VGA). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe Systems, Inc. * 2 Pour plus de détails concernant les formats RAW, L et M, reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo. * 3 Compatible avec le système Design rule for Camera File system (DCF, une norme JEITA) et DPOF. La compatibilité avec d’autres appareils n’est pas garantie. * 4 Audio : PCM 32 kHz, monophonique de 16 bits * 5 Flash désactivé. * 6 Le stockage de masse est pris en charge sous Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista et Mac OS X 10.4–10.5.7. * 7 Mesurée conformément à la norme CIPA. Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon l’utilisation de l’appareil. reMarqUes techniqUes Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire Le nombre approximatif d’images ou la longueur approximative des vidéos qui peuvent être stockées dans la mémoire interne ou sur une carte mémoire, selon les différentes configurations, varie en fonction du type d’unité appareil photo. Consultez la documentation fournie avec l’unité appareil photo. Remarques • La durée maximale d’une vidéo est de 90 minutes (soit une taille de 4Go). • Le nombre maximal de prises de vue qu’il est possible de prendre en une seule rafale est de 999. Si la mémoire peut encore stocker plus de 999 photos, « 999 » s’affiche sur le moniteur. • En fonction du sujet, le nombre de photos qu’il est possible de prendre peut différer du nombre de prises de vue restantes. • La capacité varie selon les conditions de prise de vue et la fabrication de la carte mémoire. • Utilisez une carte mémoire haut débit pour de longues périodes de prise de vue. reMarqUes techniqUes Éléments vendus séparément Le boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR peut être utilisé avec les accessoires optionnels suivants : Unité appareil photo Batterie rechargeable DB-90 Chargeur de batterie BJ-9 Déclencheur à câble CA- Il s’agit d’un déclencheur distant à câble qui se fixe au connecteur USB du boîtier de l’appareil photo. Viseur LCD VF-2 Il s’agit d’un viseur électrique qui se fixe sur la griffe alimentée du boîtier de l’appareil photo. Il offre une couverture de 100 % et peut être ajusté sur 90° sans parallaxe linéaire. Il facilite la prise de vue à faible angle. Flash externe GF- Flash externe développé pour les appareils photo numériques avec système de flash automatique avec posemètre. Courroie d’encolure ST-9 reMarqUes techniqUes Étui souple SC-S Étui souple SC-L Remarques • Avant d’utiliser des accessoires optionnels, lisez le manuel fourni avec le produit. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc. com/).0 reMarqUes techniqUes Appareil photo et accessoires Étui souple SC-55S/SC-55L Courroie d’encolure ST-3 Déclencheur à câble CA-1 Batterie rechargeable DB-90 (fournie) Chargeur de batterie BJ-9 (fourni) Raccordé au connecteur USB Unité appareil photo Fixé à l’unité appareil photo Fixé à la griffe alimentée Flash GF-1 Viseur LCD VF-2 reMarqUes techniqUes Le flash GF-1 (optionnel) Un flash optionnel GF-1 peut être raccordé sur la griffe alimentée. 1 Fermez le couvercle du flash (page 2). 2 Installez le flash. Mettez hors tension l’appareil et le GF-1, puis montez le GF-1 sur la griffe alimentée. Griffe alimentée 3Mettez le flash et l’appareil photo sous tension. 4Appuyez sur la touche DIRECT. 5 Sélectionnez la rubrique du mode flash optionnel. Déplacez le curseur à l’aide de la touche +, –, Fn, Fn2 ou de la manette ADJ. (gauche et droite) pour sélectionner la rubrique. 6 Sélectionnez un mode flash. Faites tourner le sélecteur plus-moins pour sélectionner un mode flash. Remarques • La rubrique du mode flash optionnel ne s’affiche pas lorsque le GF-1 est hors tension. • Mettez le GF-1 hors tension pour la prise de vue sans flash. • Si la rubrique du mode flash optionnel n’est pas affichée, mettez hors tension l’appareil et le GF-1, puis démontez et remontez le flash.2 reMarqUes techniqUes Autres flashes Utilisez uniquement des flashes avec un terminal à un signal, sous la forme d’un contact en X, avec une tension positive inférieure à 20V. Utilisez un flash qui couvre l’angle de vue de l’objectif. 1 Fermez le couvercle du flash (page 2). 2 Installez le flash. Mettez hors tension l’appareil et le flash optionnel, puis montez le flash sur la griffe alimentée. 3 Configurez manuellement l’ouverture. Mettez l’appareil sous tension, sélectionnez le mode A ou M, puis choisissez une ouverture (pages 18, 48, 50). 4 Choisissez manuellement une sensibilité ISO. Sélectionnez une option différente de Auto pour la sensibilité ISO (page 90). 5Mettez le flash sous tension. Mettez le flash sous tension et configurez-le en mode automatique. Réglez l’ouverture et la sensibilité ISO sur les valeurs sélectionnées avec l’appareil. Faites un essai de prise de vue et ajustez l’ouverture du flash et la sensibilité ISO le cas échéant. Mettez hors tension le flash optionnel avant de le démonter de l’appareil. Attention • Si le flash externe est activé, il se déclenchera à chaque prise de vue quel que soit le mode flash sélectionné sur l’appareil. Mettez le flash hors tension pour la prise de vue sans flash. • Les flashes optionnels sont en principe utilisés pour des portées supérieures à celle du flash intégré. L’utilisation d’un flash optionnel pour des portées inférieures peut entraîner une surexposition. reMarqUes techniqUes Utilisation du produit à l’étranger Utilisation du chargeur de batterie BJ-9 Ce produit est conçu pour être utilisé avec des courants de 100-240V et 50 ou 60Hz. Avant votre déplacement, achetez un adaptateur de voyage pour la connexion sur tout type de prises utilisées dans votre destination. N’utilisez pas ces produits avec des transformateurs électriques, qui pourraient les endommager. Garantie Ce produit a été fabriqué pour être utilisé dans le pays d’achat et la garantie n’est pas valable dans d’autres pays. Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. Lecturesur un téléviseur Le câble A/V fourni peut être utilisé pour raccorder le produit à un téléviseur ou un moniteur équipé d’un terminal d’entrée vidéo. Le produit prend en charge les formats vidéo NTSC et PAL ; avant de raccorder le produit à un dispositif vidéo, sélectionnez le mode de sortie vidéo approprié. Précautions d’emploi • La garantie n’est pas valable dans d’autres pays. Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. reMarqUes techniqUes • Ne faites pas tomber le produit et évitez-lui les chocs physiques. Lors du transport du produit, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’écran d’affichage des photos. • Le flash peut chauffer s’il est déclenché plusieurs fois de suite. N’utilisez pas le flash plus que nécessaire. N’utilisez pas le flash au contact de votre corps ou d’autres objets. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des brûlures ou un incendie. • L’utilisation du flash à proximité des yeux de votre sujet peut entraîner une déficience visuelle temporaire. La plus grande prudence est recommandée pour photographier des enfants. Ne pointez pas le flash vers le conducteur d’un véhicule à moteur. • La batterie peut chauffer en cas d’utilisation intensive. Patientez le temps qu’elle refroidisse avant de la retirer du produit. • Il peut être difficile de lire l’écran d’affichage des photos sous la lumière directe du soleil. • Vous pouvez vous apercevoir que la luminosité de l’écran d’affichage des photos varie ou que le moniteur présente des pixels éteints ou toujours allumés. C’est normal pour tous les moniteurs LCD et il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement. • Ne forcez pas sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. • Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation visible à l’intérieur du produit ou des dysfonctionnements. Cela peut être évité en plaçant le produit dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même température que l’environnement. • Pour éviter d’endommager le produit, n’insérez pas d’objet dans les fentes du microphone et du haut-parleur. • Protégez les bornes du connecteur de la poussière. • Conservez le produit sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de l’appareil ou un choc électrique. • Faites un essai de prise de vue pour vous assurer que le produit fonctionne correctement avant de l’utiliser dans des occasions importantes, comme un voyage ou un mariage. Nous vous recommandons de conserver ce manuel et des batteries de rechange à portée de main. reMarqUes techniqUes Conseil : pouréviterla condensation La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en marche, ou lorsque le produit est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif. Entretien et stockage Entretien du produit • Nettoyez l’écran d’affichage des photos en l’essuyant avec un chiffon doux légèrement imprégné d’un nettoyant pour écran, sans solvant organique. • Nettoyez soigneusement le produit après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas le produit à des substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut endommager le produit ou sa finition. • Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation Ricoh. • Le produit contient des circuits haute tension. Ne le démontez pas. • L’écran d’affichage des photos peut se rayer facilement ; évitez de le toucher avec des objets durs. Stockage • Ne stockez pas le produit dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant). • Retirez la batterie si le produit ne doit pas être utilisé pendant une longue période. Avant le nettoyage Mettez l’appareil hors tension et retirez la batterie. reMarqUes techniqUes Garantie et réparation 1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec le produit, toute pièce défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement,contactezledistributeurquivousavenduleproduitouvotrecentrederéparation Ricoh leplusproche. Veuillez noterquevous neserezpasremboursédesfraisdetransportpour livrer leproduitau centrederéparation Ricoh. 2. Cettegarantie necouvreaucun dommagerésultantde: 1 non-respectdes instructionsdu moded’emploi ; 2 réparation, modification ourévision non réaliséeparun centredeserviceagréé, listédans le moded’emploi ; 3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale,etc. ; 4 stockageinapproprié(indiquédans le« Moded’emploiduboîtierdel’appareilphoto»), fuitedebatterie etautres fluides, moisissureoutoutautredéfautd’entretien duproduit. 5 immersion dansl’eau(inondation),exposition àl’alcoolouàd’autresboissons, infiltration desableoude boue, chocphysique, chuteoupression exercéesur leproduitetautres causes non naturelles. 3. Après l’expiration delapériodedegarantie, tous les fraisderéparation serontàvotrecharge,ycomprisceux d’un centredeserviceagréé. 4.??Tous les fraisderéparation serontàvotrecharge, mêmeàl’intérieurdelapériodedegarantie, si lacartede garantie n’estpas jointeousi le nomdudistributeurouladated’achat n’estpas indiquéouaétémodifiésur lacarte. 5.??Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à sa charge complète que la périodedegarantieaitexpiréou non. 6.??Cettegarantie s’appliqueuniquement auproduit etpas aux accessoires, comme l’étui et la courroie, ni à la batterieetauxautres consommables fournis. 7.??Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance du produit, comme les frais de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profitattendu, neserapas rembourséquelapériodedegarantieaitexpiréou non. 8.??Lagarantieestvalableuniquementdans lepaysoùleproduitaétéacheté. * Lesdispositions ci-dessus seréfèrentauxréparationsgratuiteset nelimitentvosdroits légaux. * L’objectifdesdispositions ci-dessusestégalementdécrit sur lacartedegarantiefournieavec leproduit. 9. Lespiècesessentiellesàlaréparation duproduit (c’est-à-direlescomposants nécessairesaufonctionnement et à la qualité du produit) seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la production duproduit. 10.Veuillez noter que si le produit est sérieusement endommagé par une inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sableoudeboue,des chocs violentsouune chute, ilpeut être impossiblede le réparer et la restauration deson étatoriginelpeutêtreimpossible. Remarques • Avant d’envoyer le produit en réparation, vérifiez la batterie et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct. • Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution. • Lors de l’envoi du produit à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible. • Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer le produit au centre de réparation. • Cette garantie ne s’applique pas aux données stockées dans la mémoire interne et sur les cartes mémoire. reMarqUes techniqUes NOTICES USA FCC Part 15 Class B The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, then user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. (FCC 15.105B) Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. (FCC 15.21) Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connection to a host computer in order to comply with FCC emission limits. (FCC 15.27) COMPLIANCEINFORMATION STATEMENT Product Name: CAMERA BODY Model Number: GXR This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell NJ, 07006 Tel.: 1-800-225-1899 Noteto Usersin Canada Note: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 RemarqueConcernant les Utilisateurs au Canada Avertissement: Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB- 003 du Canada. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Index Symboles Mode 5 (auto)................................. 4, 21 Touche d (supprimer).................... 3, 39 Touche O (DISP.)............................ 3, 42 Touche N (macro)............................ 3, 27 Touche OPEN/f (flash)................... 3, 29 Touche 6 (lecture).........3, 19, 94, 101 t (retardateur).................................. 3, 31 Touche 8/z....................... 3, 26, 36, 38 Touche 9/Z...................... 3, 26, 36, 38 A Adobe Reader...................................... 156 Affichage infos prise de vue ........... 145 Affichage touche Fn .......................... 145 Afficher nom de Mon Réglage....... 145 Alerte ...................................................... 173 B Balance blancs........................................86 Batterie......................................................12 C Câble A/V........................................... ii, 118 Câble USB..................120, 159, 160, 162 Cadrage.....................................................75 Caplio...................................................... 154 Carte mémoire.............................. 15, 139 CD..................................... ix, 153, 155, 157 Changement de mode prise de vue ...................................................................92 Chargeur de batterie.................. 12, 183 Cible de mise au point.........................66 CL-BKT Noir et Blanc (TE)................. 146 Comp. BB de Mes Réglages............. 133 Compensation balance blancs.........89 Compensation de flash .................... 136 Compensation de niveau ................ 106 Configuration....................................... 128 Connecteur du câble A/V ..................... 3 Contraste........................................ 71, 106 Contre-jour..............................................85 Copier sur carte depuis mémoire interne.................................................. 115 Correction biais............................ 56, 110 Correction du bougé............................92 Correction exposition flash................78 Couleur.................................71, 75, 86, 89 Courroie d’encolure....................... ii, 179 Couvercle du connecteur..................... 3 Couvercle du flash................................... 2 Couvercle du logement de la batterie/carte............................ 3, 14, 15 D Décalage ouverture..............................92 Déclencheur....................................... 2, 23 Déclencheur à câble.......................... 178 Déclencheur ADJ................................ 135 Défaut.....................................59, 127, 128 Délai de validation LCD.................... 142 Diaporama ............................................ 111 Dist. mise au pt snap............................68 DL-10..............................................153, 159 DNG............................................................63 DPOF....................................................... 115 E Écran d’affichage des photos...3, 8, 42 Éditer Mes Réglages.......................... 132 Éléments vendus séparément....... 178 Enr.Mes Réglages................................ 129 Exposition .........................................50, 85 Extinction auto.................................... 141 F Flash, optionnel................................... 181 Flash auxiliaire AF....................2, 31, 140 Flou.............................................................24 Fonct. réglage Mon réglage ........... 1339 Format [Carte]...................................... 139 Format [Mémoire interne]............... 139 G Griffe alimentée .................... 2, 181, 182 Grille de cadrage.......................... 42, 144 H Haut-parleur.............................................. 3 HDMI ..............................................119, 149 Histogramme................................ 44, 108 Horloge ........................................... 20, 149 Horodatage .............................................84 I Image zoom numérique.................. 147 Impression ............................................ 122 Indicateur de niveau ............................32 Initialiser...................................................91 Instantané par pression ......................69 Interrupteur MARCHE/ARRÊT ...... 2, 18 Irodio Photo & Video Studio........... 153 J JPEG............................................................63 L Lancer extraction réglages............. 150 Language/L................................... 149 Lecture, photos......................................34 Lecture, téléviseur.............................. 118 Lecture, vidéos.......................................94 Logiciel................................................... 154 Luminosité............................44, 106, 139 Luminosité LCD................................... 139 M Macintosh.............................................. 162 Manette ADJ................................ 3, 5, 134 Mémoire, interne......................... 15, 139 Mémo position curseur menu....... 147 Menu lecture........................................ 101 Menu prise de vue ................................58 Messages d’erreur .............................. 167 Mesure.......................................................66 Mesure exposition.................................70 Microphone............................................... 2 Mise au point..........................................64 Mise au point automatique ........22, 64 Mise au point manuelle ......................65 Mode A (priorité à l’ouverture).... 4, 48 Mode continu .........................................73 Mode flash ...............................................28 Mode M (exposition manuelle)... 4, 50 Mode macro............................................27 Mode M par 1 seule pression......... 138 Mode P (changement de programme)..................................... 4, 46 Mode S (priorité à l’obturation)... 4, 49 Mode 4...................................... 4, 52 Modes MY ........................................... 4, 57 Mode vidéo..............................................54 Monochrome ...................................71, 75 N N° séquentiel de la carte ................. 148 Netteté ......................................................71 Niveau de batterie.................................10 Niveau de flash.......................................79 Noir et Blanc.....................................71, 75 NTSC...............................................149, 183 O Options du sélecteur de mode lecture.................................................. 138 Options personnalisées.................... 127 Options sélecteur de mode M....... 138 Ordinateur............................................. 151 Ouverture...................................46, 48, 50 P PAL ..................................................149, 183 PictBridge.............................................. 120 Pré AF.........................................................70 Prise de vue à intervalles....................83 Profondeur de champ..........................6490 Protéger................................................. 112 Q Qualité image/Taille .............................61 R Rapprochée (prise de vue).................27 RAW............................................................62 Récupération de Mes Réglages..... 131 Réduction bruit......................................80 Réduction bruit ISO..............................80 Réglage espace couleurs................. 146 Réglage niveau.................................... 144 Réglages image......................................71 Réglage synchro du flash ...................79 RICOH Gate La...................................... 154 Rotation auto....................................... 143 S SD, SDHC...................................................15 Sélecteur de mode..............................2, 4 Sélecteur plus-moins.........................2, 5 Sensibilité ISO.........................................90 Sensibilité ISO auto-hi ...................... 140 Sons touches........................................ 142 Sortie vidéo .......................................... 149 Suppression de photos.......................39 Surbrillance..............................................43 T Taille video...............................................63 Téléviseur............................................... 118 Témoin de mise au point automatique/flash .......................................3, 18, 22, 29, 141 Touche DIRECT .....................................3, 5 Touche Fn1, Fn2..............................3, 136 Touche C/D.......3, 58, 101, 126 V Verrouillage de la mise au point......25 Vis de fixation du trépied...................... 3 Visualisation de photos.......................34 Vitesse d’obturation.......................46, 49 VM-1...............................................165, 166 Volume............................................ 94, 142 Vue multi-images..................................36 Z Zoom..........................................................26 Zoom en lecture ....................................38 Zoom numérique ..................................26 Zoom par 1 seule pression.............. 143Numéros de téléphone des centres d’aide en Europe UK (from within the UK) (from outsideof the UK) 02073 656 580 +44 2073 656 580 Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands) (außerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 +49 6331 268 438 France (àpartirdelaFrance) (en dehorsdelaFrance) 0800 88 18 70 +33 1 60 60 19 94 Italia (dall’Italia) (dall’estero) 02 696 33 451 +39 02 696 33 451 España (desdeEspaña) (desdefueradeEspaña) 91 406 9148 +34 91 406 9148 http://www.service.ricohpmmc.com/Del’espritécologique à la préservation et à la gestion del’environnement Ricoh promeut avec résolution les technologies douces et le souci volontariste de l’environnement, adoptant ainsi une attitude civique visant à préserver les ressources irremplaçables de notre planète. Pour réduire la charge éco-agressive des appareils photo numériques, Ricoh travaille aussi sur les “Économies d’énergie par réduction de la consommation” et la “Réduction des substances chimiques nuisibles à l’environnement dans les produits”. En cas de problème Voir d’abord la section “Résolution des problèmes” (page 165) dans ce manuel. Si le problème persiste, contacter la société Ricoh. Bureaux Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) OberratherStr.6,40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331268438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +496331268438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH FRANCES.A.S. (PMMCFRANCE) (àpartirdelaFrance) 0800881870 (en dehorsdelaFrance) +33160601994 À propos de Irodio Photo & Video Studio Amériquedu Nord(USA) (Appelgratuit) +1–800–458–4029 Europe Royaume-Uni, Allemagne,FranceetEspagne: (Appelgratuit) +800–1532–4865 Autrespays : +44–1489–564–764 Asie +63–2–438–0090 Chine +86–21–5385–3786 Heuresdebureau:9h00-17h00 *L754 3972A* Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2009 Décembre EN FR F-FR Imprimé en Chine GXR MOUNT A12 Mode d’emploi Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif. Contenu de l’emballage Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous. Unité de montage d’objectif Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil. Bague de montage Est fixée à l’unité de montage d’objectif. Capuchon du connecteur Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. Dispositif de contrôle d’objectif Étui souple ? Mode d’emploi (le présentmanuel) ? Garantie Introduction Pour utiliser cette unité de montage d’objectif, vous devez fixer l’objectif à montage M Leica ou autre à un boîtier d’appareil photo GXR. Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Ce mode d’emploi décrit les fonctions et les consignes d’utilisation qui ne sont valides que lorsque cette unité de montage d’objectif est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR. Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir une utilisation sans danger. Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants. Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires, est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits. Exonération de responsabilité Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente. © 2011 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout moment et sans avis préalable. Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel. Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les objectifs, contactez un revendeur d’objectifs. Mesures de sécurité Symboles d’avertissement Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens. Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous. Danger Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Avertissement Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Attention Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées. Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites. Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action spécifique est interdite. Exemples = Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en toute sécurité. Danger Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique. Avertissement Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants. Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène, de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion, d’incendie ou de brûlure. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident.10 Attention Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge électrique. Consignes de sécurité relatives aux accessoires Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les instructions fournies avec ce produit.11 Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 4 Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 7 Nomenclature .....................................................................................................15 Nomenclature .....................................................................................................16 Mise à jour du micrologiciel............................................................................................16 Fixation de l’objectif...........................................................................................19 Détermination lorsqu’un objectif peut être utilisé avec l’unité de montage d’objectif ...........................................................................................................................19 Fixation de l’objectif...........................................................................................................22 Retrait de l’objectif .............................................................................................................22 Nettoyage du capteur........................................................................................23 Prise de vue..........................................................................................................24 Mise au point........................................................................................................................24 Table des matières1 P : Mode Changement de programme / A : Mode Priorité ouverture..................................... 24 S : Mode Priorité à la vitesse d’obturation..................................................................25 M : Mode Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................25 Ajout de modes Scène......................................................................................................26 Agrandissement de photos.............................................................................................27 Enregistrement de fonctions sur le sélecteur plus-moins...................................28 Ajout de tailles prises en charge pour le zoom de redimensionnement automatique....................................................................................................................28 Réglages...............................................................................................................29 Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue)..............................................29 Photos...........................................................................................................................30 Vidéos............................................................................................................................31 [Réduction bruit].................................................................................................................32 [Balance blancs]...................................................................................................................33 [Sensibilité ISO]....................................................................................................................34 [Assist. mise au pt]..............................................................................................................35 [Illum. périphérique]..........................................................................................................351 [Correction distorsion]......................................................................................................36 [Correction du dégradé de couleurs] ..........................................................................36 [Lim vitess obt flash]..........................................................................................................37 Menu onglet des options personnalisées......................................................38 [Enr. Mes Réglages]............................................................................................................38 [Éditer Mes Réglages]........................................................................................................38 [Confirmation du déclencheur].....................................................................................39 Manette ADJ. Réglage.......................................................................................................39 [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.]..........................................................................................40 [Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] ...........................................................................40 [Supprimer Mes Réglages] ..............................................................................................40 [Rétablir valeurs par défaut] ...........................................................................................41 [Touche Zoom] ....................................................................................................................41 Menu Config. .......................................................................................................42 [Sensibilité ISO auto-hi]....................................................................................................42 Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration) ..........................42 [Lecture zoom cible]..........................................................................................................431 Modification de [Sons touches].....................................................................................43 [Annul. affich. zoom]..........................................................................................................44 [Sélect. aide m. au point] .................................................................................................44 Caractéristiques..................................................................................................45 Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................50 Annexes................................................................................................................53 Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................53 Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................54 Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................56 Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................581 Nomenclature 1 2 3 1 Connecteur 2 Touche de libération de l'objectif 3 Monture latérale du boîtier1 Nomenclature Mise à jour du micrologiciel Lorsque vous fixez pour la première fois l’unité de montage d’objectif au boîtier de l’appareil photo, la fonction de mise à jour de version démarre automatiquement si le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil photo doit être mis à jour. Dans ce cas, mettez à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil comme suit. Si la version du micrologiciel est déjà à jour, la fonction de mise à jour de version ne démarre pas et vous pouvez utiliser l’objectif immédiatement. 1 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension et fixez l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil. • Pour en savoir plus sur la fixation de l’unité appareil photo, reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.1 2 Mettez le boîtier de l'appareil photo sous tension. • Un message de confirmation relatif à la mise à jour du micrologiciel s’affiche. 3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner [Oui], puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. • La mise à jour du micrologiciel démarre et les messages suivants s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. [Vérification du fichier de réécriture] [Programme de réécriture] L’appareil photo redémarre, la version du micrologiciel s’affiche, puis la mise à jour est terminée.1 Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Il n’est pas nécessaire que l’objectif soit installé lors de la mise à jour du micrologiciel. • Pour confirmer la version du micrologiciel, sélectionnez [Version du micrologiciel] dans le menu de configuration. Vous pouvez également, avec l’appareil photo hors tension, maintenir la touche 6 (Lecture) enfoncée pendant plus d’une seconde tout en maintenant la touche – enfoncée. La version du micrologiciel s’affiche pendant 20 secondes environ. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les mises à jour du micrologiciel, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/).1 Fixation de l’objectif Détermination lorsqu’un objectif peut être utilisé avec l’unité de montage d’objectif Vérifiez pour savoir si votre objectif peut être fixé à l’unité de montage d’objectif. 1 Alignez les orifices du dispositif de contrôle d’objectif avec les taquets du montage d’objectif, puis faites-glisser le dispositif de contrôle d’objectif bien droit sur l’objectif. • Faites-le glisser de sorte qu’il repose légèrement sur l’objectif.0 2 Placez l’objectif sur une surface plane, et vérifiez-le latéralement (du côté du bord). • Assurez-vous que le dispositif de contrôle d'objectif et la monture d'objectif sont fixés fermement sans aucun espacement. L‘objectif ne peut pas être fixé dans les cas suivants : L’objectif dépasse de la partie supérieure du dispositif de contrôle d’objectif. Un espacement existe entre le dispositif de contrôle d’objectif et le montage d’objectif. L’objectif peut être utilisé avec l’unité. L’objectif ne peut pas être utilisé avec l’unité. L’objectif ne peut pas être utilisé avec l’unité.1 Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Forcez l’installation de l’unité de montage d’objectif sur un objectif qui ne peut pas être utilisé risque d’endommager ou de rayer l’objectif ou l’unité de montage d’objectif. • Ne tentez pas de pousser le dispositif de contrôle d’objectif sur le montage d’objectif avec la force. Manipulez avec précaution afin de ne pas rayer ou endommager l’objectif lorsque vous le fixez. • Si vous utilisez un objectif rétractable, vérifiez que l’objectif est bien rétracté. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les objectifs compatibles avec l’unité de montage d’objectif, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www. ricoh.com/r_dc/). Veuillez noter que certains objectifs peuvent ne pas être compatibles en fonction de leurs conditions. Veuillez vérifier au préalable si l’objectif peut être fixé à l’aide du dispositif de contrôle. Fixation de l’objectif 1 Alignez le repère sur l’objectif avec la marque rouge sur l’unité de montage d’objectif, puis fixez l’objectif bien droit sur l’unité de montage d’objectif. 2 Tournez l'objectif vers la droite jusqu'à ce que les encoches de verrouillage de l’objectif s’alignent avec la rainure de verrouillage de celui-ci. Retrait de l’objectif 1 Tournez l’objectif vers la gauche tout en appuyant sur la touche de retrait d’objectif jusqu’à ce que la marque sur l’objectif soit alignée avec la marque rouge sur l’unité de montage d’objectif. 2 Tirez l’objectif bien droit pour le retirer. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Pour plus d’informations sur l’objectif, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi de l’objectif et aux autres documents connexes. Nettoyage du capteur Procédez comme suit pour nettoyer le capteur. 1 Mettez sous tension. 2 Faites-glisser la touche Marche/Arrêt vers OFF tout en appuyant sur la touche N. • Mettez hors tension avec l’obturateur ouvert. 3 Nettoyez l’unité à l’aide d’un soufflant disponible dans le commerce. 4 Une fois le nettoyage terminé, mettez sous tension, puis hors tension de nouveau. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Ne touchez pas le capteur ou l’obturateur. • La couleur peut être pâle si le capteur est soumis à une lumière intense pendant une période prolongée. Ne posez pas l’appareil photo avec l’obturateur ouvert. • Lorsque l’option [Sél. init. déclench.] du menu de configuration est définie sur [OUVRIR], l’obturateur reste ouvert lorsque l’appareil est mis hors tension. • N’utilisez pas un pulvérisateur avec cet appareil. • N’insérez pas les bords du soufflant à l’intérieur du montage. • Les dommages occasionnés pendant le nettoyage ne sont pas pris en charge par la garantie. Prise de vue Mise au point L’unique mode de mise au point disponible est MF (Manual Focus, mise au point manuelle). Réglez la mise au point manuellement à l’aide de l’objectif. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- L’utilisation de l’option [Agrand. affich] (GP. 27) ou de l’option [Assist. mise au pt] (GP. 35) du menu de prise de vue simplifie la vérification de la mise au point. P : Mode Changement de programme / A : Mode Priorité ouverture P : Mode Changement de programme et A : Mode Priorité ouverture fonctionne comme c: Mode Prise de vue automatique.  S : Mode Priorité à la vitesse d’obturation Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, l’exposition sera réglée correctement dans la plage ISO lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode de priorité à la vitesse d’obturation. M : Mode Exposition manuelle Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO sera fixée à 200 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle. Vous avez le choix entre B (Bulb, ampoule) et T (Time, heure) pour la vitesse d’obturation. Avec le réglage B, l'image est exposée lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur et l’exposition se termine lorsque le déclencheur est relâché. Avec le réglage T, l’exposition commence lorsque vous appuyez sur le déclencheur et se termine lorsque vous appuyez à nouveau sur le déclencheur. Dans ces deux modes, l’appareil photo cesse la prise de vue au bout de 180 secondes. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Les réglages B et T peuvent être utilisés à l’aide du déclencheur à câble optionnel (CA-1).  Ajout de modes Scène [Miniatures], [Contraste élevé N et B], [Flou artistique], [Traitement croisé], [Toy Camera] et [Déclencheur électronique] ont été ajoutés au mode Scène. [Déclencheur électronique] vous permet de prendre des photos sans vous soucier du son ou des vibrations du déclencheur. Vous pouvez sélectionner une vitesse d’obturation comprise entre 1/8000 sec. et 1 sec. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Veillez à remédier au bougé de l’appareil lorsque vous utilisez le mode [Déclencheur électronique] car un bougé de l’appareil est possible en raison de durées d’exposition différentes entre les parties supérieure et inférieure de l’écran. Ce mode n’est pas approprié si les sujets sont en mouvement. • Vous ne pouvez pas régler la sensibilité ISO sur 200 lorsque vous utilisez [Déclencheur électronique]. Agrandissement de photos Appuyez de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK pour agrandir et afficher le centre de l’écran. Appuyez de nouveau de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK pour agrandir le centre de l’écran et afficher la partie agrandie en plein écran. Appuyez de nouveau de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK pour revenir à l’affichage normal. Vous pouvez définir l’agrandissement de l’écran en appuyant de manière prolongée sur la touche t (Retardateur) ou en sélectionnant [Agrandissement] dans le menu de prise de vue. Sélectionnez [2×], [4×] ou [8×] à l’aide des touches +/-, puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. Vous pouvez déplacer la zone d’affichage agrandie à l’aide des touches de direction (+/-/Fn1/Fn2). Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • L’écran revient à l’affichage normal une fois la compensation d’exposition exécutée ou à l’aide de la touche Direct en mode Vue agrandie. • Si l’option Verr. AE est activée avant l’agrandissement de l’image entière, la fonction AE est exécutée en mode Vue agrandie et les photos sont prises avec les paramètres AE verrouillés. • Vous pouvez définir [Agrandir part.] et [Agrandir tout] sur [Rég. touche Fn1/Rég. touche Fn2] dans le menu des options personnalisées. Enregistrement de fonctions sur le sélecteur plus-moins Vous pouvez basculer entre les modes à l’aide du sélecteur plus-moins lorsque le mode Flash et le retardateur sont activés. Ajout de tailles prises en charge pour le zoom de redimensionnement automatique Le zoom de redimensionnement automatique prend en charge tous les rapports d’affichage. Réglages Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue) Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/ Taille]. La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/ taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez sélectionner la [Taille video].0 Photos Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2848×2848 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×23041 Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG. *2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut et en bas de l’affichage de la photo. *3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo. Vidéos Paramètre Taille vidéo HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 [Réduction bruit] Choisissez une réduction du bruit entre [Non], [Auto], [Faible], [Forte] ou [MAX]. Le temps nécessaire à l’enregistrement des images varie en fonction de l’option sélectionnée. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction lorsque [Portrait], [Sports], [Miniatures], [Contraste élevé N et B], [Flou artistique], [Traitement croisé], [Toy Camera] ou [Correction biais] est sélectionné dans les modes Scène. [Balance blancs] Vous pouvez sélectionner [Lampe incandescente1] ou [Lampe incandescente2] dans les réglages [Balance blancs]. Utilisez cette option avec une lampe incandescente. Le réglage [Lampe incandescente2], par rapport à [Lampe incandescente1], donne une teinte légèrement rougeâtre. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Avec [Lampe incandescente2], vous pouvez obtenir les mêmes densités de couleur qu’avec le réglage [Incandescent] décrit dans le Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo. • Si le flash est déclenché avec DISP. dans [Manuel], la balance des blancs est définie sur les résultats de mesure calculés lors du déclenchement du flash.  [Sensibilité ISO] [ISO-LO], [ISO 250], [ISO 320], [ISO 500], [ISO 640], [ISO 1000], [ISO 1250], [ISO 2000] et [ISO 2500] ont été ajoutés. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [ISO-LO] équivaut à ISO 100 ([Déclencheur électronique] du mode scène équivaut à ISO 125). Toutefois, la plage dynamique est réduite et des niveaux de luminosité supérieurs sont possibles. • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la sensibilité utilisée atteindra une sensibilité équivalente à ISO 800. • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, les valeurs minimales et maximales respectives pour la sensibilité ISO seront ISO 200 et ISO 400. ([Déclencheur électronique] en mode scène est ISO 250.) [Assist. mise au pt] Les contours et le contraste des images affichées sur l’écran sont intensifiés, facilitant le réglage de la mise au point. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vous pouvez sélectionner la méthode d’affichage de l’option Assist. mise au pt dans [Sélect. aide m. au point] dans le menu de configuration. (GP. 44) [Illum. périphérique] Vous pouvez corriger l’intensité de lumière d’arrière-plan dans la plage comprise entre -3 et +3. [Correction distorsion] Vous pouvez corriger la distorsion dans une image en sélectionnant [Barillet] ou [Coussinet], puis en sélectionnant [Forte], [Moyenne] ou [Faible]. Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vous ne pouvez pas apporter des corrections à des images affichées sur l’écran d’affichage des photos ou à des images RAW. [Correction du dégradé de couleurs] Vous pouvez corriger les nuances de couleurs aux quatre coins de l’image. Vous pouvez corriger dans une plage comprise entre -4 et +4 pour R (rouge) et B (bleu). [Lim vitess obt flash] Utilisez cette option pour limiter la vitesse d’obturation à des vitesses inférieures lorsque le flash est utilisé pour empêcher un bougé de l’appareil photo. Sélectionnez entre [Auto], [1/2], [1/4], [1/8], [1/15], [1/30], [1/60] ou [1/125]. La vitesse d’obturation ne sera pas inférieure à la vitesse définie lorsque le flash est utilisé. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Le réglage de vitesse d’obturation maximale qui fonctionne avec le flash est de 1/180 sec. Le flash ne peut pas être utilisé avec des vitesses d’obturation supérieures à ce réglage. La vitesse d’obturation ne sera pas supérieure à 1/180 sec. lorsque le flash est utilisé. Ceci s’applique également à un flash externe. • Ce réglage n’est pas valide lors de l’utilisation du flash avec synchronisation lente.  Menu onglet des options personnalisées [Enr. Mes Réglages] Vous pouvez sélectionner entre l’une des options Mes réglages Boîte [1] à [6] et Carte [1] à [6] pour l’emplacement d’enregistrement. [Éditer Mes Réglages] Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres [Nom objectif], [Long. focale] et [Ouverture F] des fichiers Exif dans [Saisie info objectif] dans [Éditer Mes Réglages]. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Ces informations n’affectent pas les réglages de prise de vue.  [Confirmation du déclencheur] Lorsque l’option [ADJ./DIRECT] est définie, appuyez sur le déclencheur jusqu’à mi-course pour finaliser les réglages en mode ADJ. et sur l’écran DIRECT. Vous pouvez alors prendre des photos. Lorsque l’option [ADJ.] est définie, les réglages du mode ADJ. sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Lorsque l’option [DIRECT] est définie, les réglages de l’écran DIRECT sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Une fois la prise de vue terminée, le système revient à l’écran de contrôle. Manette ADJ. Réglage Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Format] dans [Manette ADJ. Réglage 1] à [Manette ADJ. Réglage 4]. Si vous définissez la fonction Format et que vous appuyez sur la touche Manette ADJ. , s’affiche, vous permettant ainsi de définir le format.0 [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] Lorsque l’option [Contrôle ISO direct de ADJ.] est réglée sur [Oui], vous pouvez pousser la manette ADJ. latéralement lorsque la prise de vue est possible pour modifier la sensibilité ISO. Le réglage par défaut est [Non]. [Rég. touche Fn1]/[Rég. touche Fn2] Les fonctions [Agrand. affich], [Assist. mise au pt] et [Format] ont été ajoutées. [Supprimer Mes Réglages] Les réglages enregistrés pour [Boîte Mes Réglages] dans [Enr. Mes Réglages], pour [Carte] et pour [MY1], [MY2] et [MY3] sur le sélecteur de mode sont ramenés à leur valeur par défaut.1 [Rétablir valeurs par défaut] Les options personnalisées seront réinitialisées. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes Réglages] ne seront pas restaurés. [Touche Zoom] Vous pouvez sélectionner [Non], [Zoom numérique], [Correction de l’exposition] ou [Balance blancs] pour les fonctions assignées aux touches 8/9. Menu Config. [Sensibilité ISO auto-hi] Vous pouvez définir les limites supérieures de la sensibilité ISO et de la vitesse d’obturation afin de modifier la [Sensibilité ISO] lorsqu’elle est définie sur [Auto-Hi]. Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration) La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante. Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Environ 1,0× L Environ 1,8× 3M Environ 1,2× M Environ 3,0× 1M Environ 1,5× 5M Environ 5,9× VGA [Lecture zoom cible] Avec l’option Vue agrandie en mode de lecture, vous pouvez effectuer un zoom avant sur l’image centrée à la position à laquelle l’appareil photo a été placé par la cible pendant la prise de vue. Modification de [Sons touches] [Sons déclench.] est désactivé en mode [Cont.M + (rapide)]. Les sons du déclencheur ne sont pas désactivés lorsqu’un déclencheur mécanique ou lorsque l’option [Déclencheur électronique] dans le mode Scène est utilisé. Les sons de mise au point sont désactivés lorsque l’exposition est verrouillée lorsque vous appuyez jusqu’à mi-course sur le déclencheur. [Annul. affich. zoom] Vous pouvez choisir de conserver ou d’annuler la vue agrandie après la prise de photos en mode Vue agrandie. Sélectionnez [Non] pour conserver le mode Vue agrandie et [Oui] pour l’annuler une fois les photos prises. [Sélect. aide m. au point] Lorsque l'option [Aide m. au p.] est définie sur [Oui] dans le menu de prise de vue, vous pouvez sélectionner [MODE 1] ou [MODE 2]. MODE 1 : Les contours des sujets/objets mis au point sont améliorés. MODE 2 : L'écran d’affichage des photos passe en noir et blanc et la zone de mise au point brille en blanc. Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un boîtier GXR. Pixels réels Environ 12,3 millions Capteur d’image 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (nombre total de pixels : environ 12,9 millions) Zoom 4,0× zoom numérique (photos), zoom numérique 3,6×(vidéos) ; environ 5,9× zoom de redimensionnement automatique (VGA) Mode mise au point MF Vitesse d’obturation Photos 1/4000–180s, B (Bulb, ampoule), T (Time, heure) (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en fonction du mode prise de vue et flash) Vitesse d’obturation maximale de synchronisation Flash : 1/180 s Vidéos 1/2000–1/30s Contrôle exposition Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique Mode Priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle, fonction de décalage de la cible Correction de l’exposition Manuelle (+4,0 à -4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV), cadrage automatique (-2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV) Portée du lien d’exposition (mode prise de vue automatique, mesure centrale pondérée de la lumière) Pour l’utilisation d’un objectif standard (F2,5) : 1,2 EV à 13,2 EV (portée du lien pour une sensibilité ISO automatique convertie en fonction de la valeur EV pour ISO100) Sensibilité ISO (sensibilité sortie standard) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO-LO, ISO 200, ISO 250, ISO 320, ISO 400, ISO 500, ISO 640, ISO 800, ISO 1000, ISO 1250, ISO 1600, ISO 2000, ISO 2500, ISO 3200 Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Incandescente1, Incandescente2, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ; cadrage auto balance des blancs Flash Réglage de puissance du flash Flash TTL, flash manuel, lumière ambiante auto (fonction disponible uniquement avec le flash externe GF-1) Numéro de guide 9,6 (équivalent : ISO 200) 6,8 (équivalent : ISO 100) Angle d’exposition à partir de 24 mm (équivalent : 35 mm) Synchronisation Synchronisation premier/deuxième rideau Autre Compatible avec le flash externe GF-1 Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture, priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports, paysage, nuit, correction biais, Miniatures, Contraste élevé N et B, Flou artistique, Traitement croisé, Toy Camera, Déclencheur électronique), Mes Réglages Mode continu Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Continu (Taille d’image : RAW) Réduction du bruit désactivée ou activée (faible) : 4 photos, Réduction du bruit activée (forte) : 3 photos Réduction du bruit activée MAX : 3 photos Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Cont.M + (un ensemble) Rap (1280 × 856) : 30 photos (24 images/s) Len (4288 × 2848) : 15 photos (3 images/s) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Taille de l’image (pixels) Photos 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848, 3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Taille fichier (approximative) RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 17 800Ko/image, FINE : 19 515Ko/image, VGA : 15 587Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 18 387Ko/image, FINE : 20 157Ko/image, VGA : 16 124Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 20 946Ko/image, FINE : 22 967Ko/image, VGA : 18 337Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 13 991Ko/image, FINE : 15 333Ko/image, VGA : 12 273Ko/image L 16:9 NORMAL : 2 222Ko/image, FINE : 3 816Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 2 315Ko/image, FINE : 3 960Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 2 615Ko/image, FINE : 4 493Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 3 009Ko/image M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 475Ko/image, FINE : 2 509Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 1 574Ko/image, FINE : 2 662Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 1 744Ko/image, FINE : 2 968Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 186Ko/image, FINE : 2 003Ko/image 5M 4:3 FINE : 2 287Ko/image 3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image Taille fichier (approximative) 1M 4:3 FINE : 812Ko/image VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image Longévité batterie (basée sur norme CIPA) DB-90 : environ 330 prises de vue*3 (Basé sur la directive CIPA) Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité de montage d’objectif uniquement : 79,1mm×60,9mm×40,5mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA) Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 120mm×70,2mm×45,7mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA) Tirage mécanique : 27,8mm Poids (approximatif) Unité de montage d’objectif uniquement : 170 g Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 370 g (y compris la batterie et la carte mémoire SD) Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C Humidité fonctionnement 90% ou moins Température stockage –20°C à 60°C0 *1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image. *2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de 640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée. Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE. Photos Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go RAW* FINE 4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625 3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380 2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 20651 Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go L FINE 4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684 3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453 4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565 2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 9815 M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie JPEG.  Vidéos Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go 1280×720 24 images/seconde 21s 3min 49s 7min 46s 15min 58s 31min 10s 62min 26s 125min 15s 640×480 24 images/seconde 1min 11min 2s 22min 27s 46min 10s 90min 7s 180min 32s 362min 9s 320×240 24 images/seconde 2min 25s 26min 24s 53min 43s 110min 27s 215min 35s 431min 52s 866min 19s Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- La taille d’enregistrement sans interruption maximale pour une vidéo est de 4 Go. La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 15 minutes environ pour une taille de 1280 × 720, de 46 minutes environ pour une taille de 640 × 480 et de 90 minutes environ pour une taille de 320 × 240. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos avec la taille de vidéo définie sur 1280 × 720, l’utilisation de cartes mémoire SD/SDHC de classe 6 est recommandée. Annexes Accessoires en option L’objectif RICOH peut être utilisé avec les éléments suivants (vendus séparément). Étui de boîtier + courroie d’encolure (SC-75B) Étui d’unité appareil photo (SC-75T) Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation fournie avec le produit. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/). Précautions d’emploi • La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. • Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. • Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques. • Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif. • Lors de la fixation d’un filtre ou d’un pare-soleil, veillez à ne pas exercer une pression excessive. • Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même température que l’environnement. • Ne touchez pas le capteur d’image. • Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement ou un choc électrique. • Gardez le connecteur propre. Conseil : pour éviter la condensation--------------------------------------------- La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif. Entretien et stockage de l’équipement Entretien de l’équipement • Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce, ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. Faites particulièrement attention au voletcache objectif. • Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition. • Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation Ricoh. • Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas. Stockage • Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant). • Lorsque vous rangez votre appareil photo, veillez à l’installer dans un étui, etc., dans lequel la poussière ou les peluches ne pénètrent pas afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo. De plus, lorsque vous transportez l’appareil photo, ne le mettez pas directement dans une poche, etc., afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo. Garantie et réparation 1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au centre de réparation Ricoh. 2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de : 1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ; 2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ; 3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ; 4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement. 5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles. 3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé. 4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte. 5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté. * Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent vos droits légaux. * L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de garantie fournie avec l’équipement.0 8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement) seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la production de l’équipement. 9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de son état originel peut être impossible. Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct. • Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution. • Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible. • Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer l’appareil au centre de réparation.1 En cas de problème Bureaux Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2011 août FR F-FR Imprimé en Chine *L454 3972* GR LENS A12 28mm F2.5 Mode d’emploi Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’objectif. Contenu de l’emballage Avant d’utiliser votre objectif Ricoh, vérifiez dans l’emballage qu’il ne manque aucun des éléments listés ci-dessous. Unité appareil photo Le numéro de série est gravé sous l’appareil. Capuchon de l’objectif Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. ?Mode d’emploi (le présentmanuel) ? Garantie Capuchon du connecteur Est fixé à l’unité appareil photo. Étui souple Introduction Pour utiliser cet objectif, vous devez l’installer sur un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo pour plus de détails concernant l’utilisation des fonctions de prise de vue et de lecture et la modification des réglages et pour prendre connaissance des consignes d’utilisation importantes. Ce mode d’emploi décrit les fonctions et les consignes d’utilisation qui ne sont valides que lorsque cette unité appareil photo est utilisée avec un boîtier d’appareil photo compatible. Reportez-vous également au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo GXR. Pour utiliser les fonctions du produit de manière optimale, lisez attentivement le présent manuel avant utilisation. Veuillez conserver le présent manuel à portée de main pour pouvoir vous y référer facilement. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Mesures de sécurité Lisez attentivement toutes les mesures de sécurité pour garantir une utilisation sans danger. Essais de prise de vue Faites des essais de prise de vue pour vérifier le fonctionnement correct de l’appareil avant de prendre des photos d’événements importants. Copyright La reproduction ou la modification de documents, de magazines et d’autres sources sujettes aux droits d’auteur, autrement que pour des raisons personnelles, domestiques ou limitées similaires, est interdite sans le consentement du propriétaire des droits. Exonération de responsabilité Ricoh Co., Ltd. décline toute responsabilité en cas de défaillance de l’enregistrement ou de l’affichage des photos résultant d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. Garantie La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit dans d’autres pays ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. Interférences radio L’utilisation de cet appareil dans le voisinage d’un autre équipement électronique peut affecter défavorablement à la fois l’appareil photo et l’autre dispositif. Des interférences sont notamment probables si l’appareil est utilisé à proximité d’une radio ou d’un téléviseur. Ce problème peut être résolu en déplaçant l’appareil aussi loin que possible de l’autre dispositif, en réorientant l’antenne de la radio ou du téléviseur, ou encore en branchant la radio ou le téléviseur sur une prise secteur différente. © 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. Tous droits réservés. Cette publication ne peut être reproduite en tout ou en partie sans l’autorisation expresse et écrite de Ricoh. Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce document à tout moment et sans avis préalable. Tous les efforts ont été faits pour garantir l’exactitude des informations contenues dans ce document. Dans le cas où vous rencontreriez néanmoins une erreur ou une omission, nous vous serions reconnaissants de bien vouloir nous en avertir à l’adresse indiquée en quatrième de couverture de ce manuel. Mesures de sécurité Symboles d’avertissement Divers symboles sont utilisés tout au long de ce manuel et sur le produit lui-même pour prévenir tout risque de blessure ou de dommage aux biens. Ces symboles et leur signification sont détaillés ci-dessous. Danger Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner rapidement la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Avertissement Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner la mort ou des blessures corporelles sérieuses si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Attention Ce symbole signale des dangers qui peuvent entraîner des blessures corporelles ou des dommages aux biens si les instructions correspondantes ne sont pas ou sont mal suivies. Exemples de signalisation d’avertissement Le symbole vous signale des actions qui doivent être effectuées. Le symbole vous signale des actions interdites. Le symbole peut être combiné avec d’autres pour indiquer qu’une action spécifique est interdite. Exemples = Ne pas toucher = Ne pas démonter Prenez les précautions indiquées ci-dessous pour utiliser ce matériel en toute sécurité. Danger Ne tentez pas de démonter, de réparer ou de modifier vous-même l’appareil. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil vous font courir un risque de choc électrique. Avertissement Conservez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants. Si le mécanisme interne de l’appareil est exposé suite à un choc ou autre type de dommage, ne touchez aucun composant interne. Les circuits à haute tension de l’appareil peuvent causer des chocs électriques. Retirez la batterie dès que possible, en prenant soin d’éviter tout choc électrique ou brûlure. Apportez l’appareil au revendeur ou au service après-vente le plus proche s’il est endommagé. N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans un endroit humide car vous risqueriez de provoquer un incendie ou de subir une décharge électrique. N’utilisez pas l’appareil à proximité de gaz inflammables, d’essence, de benzène, de solvant ou de substances du même type pour éviter tout risque d’explosion, d’incendie ou de brûlure. • N’utilisez pas l’appareil dans des lieux où son usage est limité ou interdit afin d’éviter tout risque de catastrophe ou d’accident. Attention Ne laissez pas l’équipement prendre l’eau ou se mouiller. Ne l’utilisez pas non plus avec les mains mouillées. Dans les deux cas, vous risquez de subir une décharge électrique. Consignes de sécurité relatives aux accessoires Avant d’utiliser un produit optionnel, lisez attentivement les instructions fournies avec ce produit.10 Contenu de l’emballage ..................................................................................................... 2 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3 Mesures de sécurité............................................................................................................. 6 Nomenclature de l’objectif...............................................................................13 Mise à jour du produit.......................................................................................14 Mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo.....................................................14 Prise de vue..........................................................................................................17 Fonctions de prise de vue macro..................................................................................17 Mode P : Changement de programme.......................................................................18 Mode M : Exposition manuelle ......................................................................................20 Lecture..................................................................................................................21 Affichage des informations sur l’unité appareil photo .........................................21 Table des matières11 Réglages...............................................................................................................22 Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue)..............................................22 Photos...........................................................................................................................23 Vidéos............................................................................................................................24 Réglage [Réduction bruit] (Menu de prise de vue) ................................................25 Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (Menu prise de vue) .........................................................26 [Agrand. affich] (Menu de prise de vue).....................................................................27 [Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées)..........................................................28 [Confirmation du déclencheur] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées)...28 Réglages de la manette ADJ. (Menu onglet des options personnalisées).....29 Réglages des touches Fn1/Fn2 (Menu onglet des options personnalisées)....29 [Supprimer Mes Réglages] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées).........30 [Rétablir valeurs par défaut] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées)......30 Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration) ..........................31 [Réglages bague mise au point] (Onglet de configuration)................................321 [Réglage Zone AF Spot] (Menu onglet de configuration)....................................33 Caractéristiques..................................................................................................34 Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire................................................................40 Annexes................................................................................................................43 Accessoires en option.......................................................................................................43 Précautions d’emploi.........................................................................................................44 Entretien et stockage de l’équipement.......................................................................46 Garantie et réparation.......................................................................................................481 Nomenclature de l’objectif 1 2 3 1 Connecteur 2 Bague de mise au point 3 Objectif1 Mise à jour du produit Mise à jour du micrologiciel de l’appareil photo Lorsque vous fixez pour la première fois l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil, la fonction de mise à jour de version démarre automatiquement si le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil doit être mis à jour. Dans ce cas, mettez à jour le micrologiciel du boîtier de l’appareil comme suit. Si la version du micrologiciel est déjà à jour, la fonction de mise à jour de version ne démarre pas et vous pouvez utiliser l’objectif immédiatement. 1 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension et fixez l’unité appareil photo au boîtier de l’appareil. • Pour en savoir plus sur la fixation de l’unité appareil photo, reportez-vous au Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo.1 2 Mettez l’appareil photo sous tension. • Un message de confirmation relatif à la mise à jour du micrologiciel s’affiche. 3 Appuyez sur les touches Fn1/Fn2 pour sélectionner [Oui], puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. • La mise à jour du micrologiciel démarre et les messages suivants s’affichent sur l’écran d’affichage des photos. [Vérification du fichier de réécriture] L’appareil photo est automatiquement mis hors tension puis sous tension. Après le redémarrage de l’appareil photo, l’écran de version du micrologiciel s’affiche et la mise à jour est terminée.1 Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Pour confirmer la version du micrologiciel, sélectionnez [Version du micrologiciel] dans le menu de configuration. Vous pouvez également, avec l’appareil photo hors tension, maintenir la touche 6 (Lecture) enfoncée pendant plus d’une seconde tout en maintenant la touche – enfoncée. La version du micrologiciel s’affiche sur l’écran d’affichage des photos pendant 20 secondes environ. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les mises à jour du micrologiciel, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc). Vous pouvez télécharger les dernières mises à jour du micrologiciel pour mettre à jour votre équipement.1 Prise de vue Fonctions de prise de vue macro Les fonctions Macrophotographie, Cible Macro, Macro Auto et Affichage de la distance de prise de vue minimale au cours des fonctions de prise de vue macro ne sont pas disponibles avec l’objectif A12 28 mm F2.5.1 Mode P : Changement de programme Le schéma à la page suivante fournit une estimation de la plage de décalage des différentes combinaisons de valeurs d’ouverture et de vitesses d’obturation. Les valeurs réelles peuvent variées selon la valeur d’exposition (EV). Dans ces exemples, le mode Flash est défini sur [Flash Non] et la sensibilité ISO est définie sur [ISO200].1 Ev5 Ev6 Ev7 Ev4 Ev3 Ev2 Ev1 Ev0 Ev-1 Ev-2 Ev-3 F16 F22 F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8 F2.0 F1.4 F1.0 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 Ev8 Ev9 Ev10 Ev11 Ev12 Ev13 Ev14 Ev15 Ev16 Ev17 Ev18 Ev19 Ev20 F22.0 F2.50 Mode M : Exposition manuelle Si [Auto] ou [Auto-Hi] est sélectionné pour Sensibilité ISO, la sensibilité ISO sera fixée à 200 lorsque l’appareil photo est en mode exposition manuelle. 1 Lecture Affichage des informations sur l’unité appareil photo L’informations sur [A12 28mm] de l’unité appareil photo est affichent sur l’écran des informations détaillées. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- L’informations sur [A12 28mm] de l’unité appareil photo est affichent également dans le fichier Exif. Réglages Réglage [Qualité image/Taille] (Menu prise de vue) Les options de qualité de l’image, de taille de l’image et de rapport d’affichage suivantes sont disponibles pour le réglage [Qualité image/Taille] du menu de prise de vue. La taille du fichier des photos dépend de l’association qualité de l’image/ taille de l’image utilisée. Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos, vous pouvez sélectionner la taille de la vidéo. Photos Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) RAW 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL/VGA*1 2848×2848 L (Large) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2416 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3776×2832 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 4288×2848 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2848×2848 M (Middle) 16:9*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×1944 4:3 FINE/NORMAL 3072×2304 3:2*2 FINE/NORMAL 3456×2304 1:1*3 FINE/NORMAL 2304×2304 Paramètre Rapport d’affichage Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) 5M 4:3 FINE 2592×1944 3M 4:3 FINE 2048×1536 1M 4:3 FINE 1280×960 VGA 4:3 FINE 640×480 *1 Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit du réglage utilisé pour la copie JPEG. *2 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent en haut et en bas de l’affichage de la photo. *3 Selon la zone photographiée, il est possible que des bandes noires apparaissent sur le côté droit et sur le côté gauche de l’affichage de la photo. Vidéos Paramètre Taille vidéo HD1280 1280×720 VGA640 640×480 QVGA320 320×240 Réglage [Réduction bruit] (Menu de prise de vue) Réduisez le bruit lorsque vous prenez des photos. Choisissez parmi [Non], [Auto], [Faible], [Forte] ou [MAX]. Le temps nécessaire à l’enregistrement des images varie en fonction de l’option sélectionnée. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction lorsque [Portrait], [Sport] ou [Correction biais] est sélectionné pour le mode scène. Réglage [Sensibilité ISO] (Menu prise de vue) • Lorsque l’option [Auto] est sélectionnée et que le flash est utilisé, la sensibilité utilisée devient équivalente à la sensibilité ISO800. • Lorsque [Auto] est sélectionné et que le flash n’est pas utilisé, les valeurs minimales et maximales respectives pour la sensibilité ISO seront 200 et 400, quelle que soit la taille de pixel (pixels). [Agrand. affich] (Menu de prise de vue) Si vous déplacez la cible avec les touches de direction (+/-/Fn1/Fn2) et appuyez de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK, la position de la cible sera agrandie, ce qui vous permettra de vérifier la mise au point. En appuyant de nouveau de manière prolongée sur la touche MENU/OK, vous pouvez revenir à la vue standard depuis la vue agrandie. En appuyant de manière prolongée sur la touche t (retardateur) ou en sélectionnant [Agrandissement] dans le menu des réglages, vous pouvez régler l’agrandissement de l’affichage. Sélectionnez [2 ×], [4 ×] ou [8 ×] à l’aide de la touche +/-, puis appuyez sur la touche MENU/OK. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Agrand. affich] dans [Réglages touches Fn1/Fn2] de l’onglet des options personnalisées. [Enr. Mes Réglages] (Options personnalisées) Dans [Enr. Mes réglages], vous pouvez également définir les options [Réglages bague mise au point] et [Réglage Zone AF Spot] dans le menu Config. Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ». [Confirmation du déclencheur] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées) Lorsque [Confirmation du déclencheur] est défini sur [ADJ./DIRECT] dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, une pression à mi-course sur le déclencheur finalise les réglages en mode ADJ. et sur l’écran DIRECT, et vous pouvez alors prendre des photos. Lorsque [ADJ.] est défini, les réglages du mode ADJ. sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Lorsque [DIRECT] est défini, les réglages de l’écran DIRECT sont finalisés, ce qui vous permet de prendre des photos. Une fois la prise de vue terminée, le système revient à l’écran de contrôle. Réglages de la manette ADJ. (Menu onglet des options personnalisées) Vous pouvez définir la fonction [Rapport d’affichage] dans [Réglage 1 de la manette ADJ.] à [Réglage 4 de la manette ADJ.] dans l’onglet des options personnalisées. Si vous définissez la fonction Rapport d’affichage et appuyez sur la touche de la manette ADJ., s’affiche, ce qui vous permet de définir le rapport d’affichage. Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ». Réglages des touches Fn1/Fn2 (Menu onglet des options personnalisées) Vous pouvez définir les fonctions [Agrand. affich] et [Rapport d’affichage] dans [Réglages de la touche Fn1] ou [Réglages de la touche Fn2] dans l’onglet des options personnalisées. Si vous définissez la fonction Rapport d’affichage et appuyez sur la touche Fn1 ou Fn2, vous pourrez définir le rapport d’affichage. Pour les autres options disponibles, reportez-vous au « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo ».0 [Supprimer Mes Réglages] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées) En sélectionnant [Supprimer Mes Réglages] dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, vous pouvez annuler les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes Réglages] pour [Boîte Mes Réglages] et pour [MY1], [MY2] et [MY3] sur le sélecteur de mode. [Rétablir valeurs par défaut] (Menu onglet des options personnalisées) Si [Rétablir valeurs par défaut] est sélectionné dans l’onglet des options personnalisées, les réglages personnalisés seront restaurés. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Les réglages définis dans [Enr. Mes Réglages] ne seront pas restaurés.1 Réglage [Image zoom numérique] (Onglet de configuration) La taille de l’image enregistrée varie en fonction du zoom de redimensionnement automatique, de la manière suivante. Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Rapport de zoom Taille de l’image (pixels) Environ 1,0× L Environ 1,8× 3M Environ 1,2× M Environ 3,0× 1M Environ 1,5× 5M Environ 5,9× VGA [Réglages bague mise au point] (Onglet de configuration) Sous [Réglages bague mise au point], vous pouvez sélectionner un mode qui active les fonctions pour la mise au point automatique et la mise au point manuelle ou un mode qui active uniquement les fonctions pour la mise au point manuelle. Lorsque l’option [AF+MF] est sélectionnée, une fois le déclencheur enfoncé à mi-course pour régler la mise au point, la mise au point peut être réglée de manière plus précise en tournant la bague de mise au point. Paramètre AF+MF MF uniquement Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Si vous appuyez de nouveau sur le déclencheur après le réglage fin, la mise au point automatique est activée et le réglage est annulé. [Réglage Zone AF Spot] (Menu onglet de configuration) Vous pouvez sélectionner [Normal] ou [Repérer] pour la zone AF dans [Réglage Zone AF Spot] du menu de configuration. Lorsque [AF Spot] est sélectionné dans [Mise au point] du menu de prise de vue, la mise au point est définie sur le mode de zone AF sélectionné dans [Réglage Zone AF Spot]. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Lorsque [Repérer] est sélectionné, la vue de la zone AF est plus petite qu’en mode [Normal]. Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques correspondent à l’unité appareil photo installée sur un boîtier GXR. Pixels réels Environ 12,3 millions Capteur d’image 23,6 mm×15,7 mm CMOS (nombre total de pixels : environ 12,9 millions) Objectif Distance focale 18,3mm (format 35 mm équivalent : 28mm) Ouverture (nombre f) f/2,5– f/22 (filtre à densité neutre utilisé pour les ouvertures f/22 en mode prise de vue automatique) Plage mise au point (de l’objectif) Environ 20cm–8 (téléobjectif) Construction 9 éléments en 6 groupes (2 objectifs asphériques avec 2 surfaces) Diamètre du filtre 40,5 mm Zoom 4,0× zoom numérique (photos), zoom numérique 3,6×(vidéos) ; environ 5,9× zoom de redimensionnement automatique (VGA) Mode mise au point AF multi et AF spot basé sur Contraste AF ; MF ; snap ; 8 (verrouillage de mise au point et assistance AF) Vitesse d’obturation Photos 1/3200–180s (les limites inférieures et supérieures varient en fonction du mode prise de vue et flash) Vidéos 1/2000–1/30s Contrôle exposition Mesure Mesure TTL-CCD en modes multi (256 segments), central pondéré, et spot avec verrouillage de l’exposition automatique Mode Programme AE, priorité à l’ouverture AE, exposition manuelle, priorité à l’obturation AE, fonction de décalage de la cible Correction de l’exposition Manuelle (+4,0 à -4,0EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV), cadrage automatique (-2EV à +2EV par incrément de 1/3EV ou 1/2EV) Portée du lien d’exposition (mode prise de vue automatique, mesure centrale pondérée de la lumière) 2,2 EV–19,3 EV (portée du lien pour une sensibilité ISO automatique convertie en fonction de la valeur EV pour ISO100) • Lors de la prise de vue avec des valeurs proches de 6,0 EV ou inférieures, pour chaque réduction de la portée du lien d’exposition de 1,0 EV, l’appareil photo modifie le réglage de 0,25 EV vers une luminosité plus faible. Le changement maximum possible est de 1,0 EV. Sensibilité ISO (sensibilité sortie standard) Auto, Auto-Hi, ISO 200, ISO 400, ISO 800, ISO 1600, ISO 3200 Balance des blancs Auto, Multi-P AUTO, En extérieur, Nuageux, Incandescente1, Incandescente2, Lampe fluorescente, Réglage manuel, Détail ; cadrage auto balance des blancs Flash Portée (flash intégré) Environ 20cm–3,0m (ISO auto) (téléobjectif) Mode prise de vue Auto, changement de programme, priorité à l’ouverture, priorité à l’obturation, manuel, scène (vidéo, portrait, sports, paysage, nuit, correction biais), « Mes Réglages » Mode continu Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Continu (Taille d’image : RAW) Réduction du bruit désactivée ou activée (faible) : 4 photos, Réduction du bruit activée (forte) : 3 photos Réduction du bruit activée MAX : 3 photos Nombre de photos prises à l’aide de l’option Cont.M + (un ensemble) Rap (1280 × 856) : 30 photos (24 images/s) Len (4288 × 2848) : 15 photos (3 images/s) Compression*1 FINE, NORMAL, RAW (DNG) *2 Taille de l’image (pixels) Photos 4288×2416, 3776×2832, 4288×2848, 2848×2848, 3456×1944, 3072×2304, 3456×2304, 2304×2304, 2592×1944, 2048×1536, 1280×960, 640×480 Vidéos 1280×720, 640×480, 320×240 Taille fichier (approximative) RAW 16:9 NORMAL : 17 800Ko/image, FINE : 19 515Ko/image, VGA : 15 587Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 18 387Ko/image, FINE : 20 157Ko/image, VGA : 16 124Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 20 946Ko/image, FINE : 22 967Ko/image, VGA : 18 337Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 13 991Ko/image, FINE : 15 333Ko/image, VGA : 12 273Ko/image Taille fichier (approximative) L 16:9 NORMAL : 2 222Ko/image, FINE : 3 816Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 2 315Ko/image, FINE : 3 960Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 2 615Ko/image, FINE : 4 493Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 761Ko/image, FINE : 3 009Ko/image M 16:9 NORMAL : 1 475Ko/image, FINE : 2 509Ko/image 4:3 NORMAL : 1 574Ko/image, FINE : 2 662Ko/image 3:2 NORMAL : 1 744Ko/image, FINE : 2 968Ko/image 1:1 NORMAL : 1 186Ko/image, FINE : 2 003Ko/image 5M 4:3 FINE : 2 287Ko/image 3M 4:3 FINE : 1 474Ko/image 1M 4:3 FINE : 812Ko/image VGA 4:3 FINE : 197Ko/image Longévité batterie (basée sur norme CIPA) DB-90 : environ 320 prises de vue*3 Dimensions (L×H×P) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 68,7mm×57,9mm×50,4mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA) Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 113,9mm×70,2mm×55,6mm (Basé sur la directive CIPA) Poids (approximatif) Unité appareil photo uniquement : 210 g Lors de l’installation sur le boîtier de l’appareil photo : 410 g (y compris la batterie et la carte mémoire SD) Température fonctionnement 0°C à 40°C Humidité fonctionnement 90% ou moins Température stockage –20°C à 60°C *1 Les options disponibles varient selon la taille d’image. *2 Un fichier JPEG est également enregistré (le fichier JPEG peut être d’une qualité FINE ou NORMAL avec les mêmes dimensions que le fichier RAW ou VGA pour une taille de 640×480 pixels). Les fichiers RAW utilisent le format standard DNG promu par Adobe Systems, Inc. *3 Pour référence uniquement ; le nombre réel de prises de vue varie énormément selon l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nous vous recommandons d’emporter des batteries de rechange lors d’une utilisation pendant une période prolongée.0 Capacité mémoire interne/carte mémoire Les valeurs suivantes sont données à titre de référence de la capacité de stockage de la mémoire interne et de cartes mémoire de différentes tailles, en fonction de la qualité d’image et de la taille d’image, lors de l’utilisation de la qualité d’image FINE. Photos Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go RAW* FINE 4288×2416 4 49 100 197 404 810 1625 3776×2832 4 47 97 191 391 784 1573 4288×2848 3 42 85 168 343 688 1380 2848×2848 5 63 128 251 513 1029 2065 L FINE 4288×2416 21 235 476 935 1912 3830 7684 3776×2832 20 227 462 907 1854 3715 7453 4288×2848 18 200 407 799 1633 3272 6565 2848×2848 27 299 608 1195 2442 4893 98151 Compression Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go M FINE 3456×1944 32 357 724 1419 2902 5814 11662 3072×2304 30 337 683 1341 2741 5491 11014 3456×2304 27 302 614 1206 2466 4941 9913 2304×2304 41 447 903 1774 3627 7267 14578 5M/FINE 2592×1944 34 373 758 1490 3045 6101 12238 3M/FINE 2048×1536 53 581 1182 2321 4744 9503 19063 1M/FINE 1280×960 96 1059 2118 4160 8505 17039 34181 VGA/FINE 640×480 395 4316 8778 17237 35231 70579 141581 * Lorsque l’option [RAW] est sélectionnée, il s’agit de la compression utilisée pour la copie JPEG.  Vidéos Taille de l’image (pixels) Mémoire interne 1Go 2Go 4Go 8Go 16Go 32Go 1280×720 24 images/seconde 21s 3min 49s 7min 46s 15min 58s 31min 10s 62min 26s 125min 15s 640×480 24 images/seconde 1min 11min 2s 22min 27s 46min 10s 90min 7s 180min 32s 362min 9s 320×240 24 images/seconde 2min 25s 26min 24s 53min 43s 110min 27s 215min 35s 431min 52s 866min 19s Attention -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- La taille d’enregistrement sans interruption maximale pour une vidéo est de 4 Go. La durée maximale d’enregistrement est de 15 minutes environ pour une taille de 1280 × 720, de 46 minutes environ pour une taille de 640 × 480 et de 90 minutes environ pour une taille de 320 × 240. Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Lors de l’enregistrement de vidéos avec la taille de vidéo définie sur 1280 × 720, l’utilisation de cartes mémoire SD/SDHC de classe 6 est recommandée. Annexes Accessoires en option L’objectif RICOH peut être utilisé avec les éléments suivants (vendus séparément). Paresoleil d´objectif (LH-1) Remarque ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Avant d’utiliser un accessoire optionnel, consultez la documentation fournie avec le produit. • Pour connaître les dernières informations sur les accessoires optionnels, visitez le site web Ricoh (http://www.ricohpmmc.com/). Précautions d’emploi • La garantie fournie avec le produit est uniquement valable dans le pays d’achat. • Dans le cas d’une panne ou d’un dysfonctionnement de l’appareil à l’étranger, le fabricant décline toute responsabilité quant à la réparation du produit localement ou à la prise en charge de toute dépense associée. • Ne faites pas tomber l’équipement et évitez-lui les chocs physiques. • Lors du transport de l’équipement, faites attention de ne pas le cogner dans d’autres objets. Faites particulièrement attention à protéger l’objectif. • Lors de la fixation d’un filtre ou d’un pare-soleil, veillez à ne pas exercer une pression excessive. • Des changements brutaux de température peuvent provoquer de la condensation visible dans l’objectif ou des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement. Cela peut être évité en plaçant l’équipement dans un sac plastique pour ralentir le changement de température, puis en le retirant une fois que l’air dans le sac a atteint la même température que l’environnement. • Conservez l’équipement sec et évitez de le manipuler avec les mains mouillées. Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des dysfonctionnements de l’équipement ou un choc électrique. • Gardez le connecteur propre. Conseil : pour éviter la condensation--------------------------------------------- La condensation se produit généralement lorsque vous vous rendez dans un endroit avec une brusque différence de température, si l’humidité est élevée, dans une pièce froide après que le chauffage ait été mis en marche, ou lorsque l’appareil est exposé à de l’air froid en provenance d’un climatiseur ou d’un autre dispositif. Entretien et stockage de l’équipement Entretien de l’équipement • Les photos peuvent être altérées par des empreintes ou d’autres matières étrangères sur l’objectif. Évitez de toucher l’objectif avec les doigts. Éliminez la poussière ou les peluches avec un soufflant disponible dans le commerce, ou nettoyez doucement l’objectif avec un chiffon doux et sec. Faites particulièrement attention au voletcache objectif. • Nettoyez soigneusement l’équipement après l’avoir utilisé à la plage ou après avoir manipulé des produits cosmétiques. N’exposez pas l’équipement à des substances volatiles comme du diluant, du benzène ou des pesticides. Le nonrespect de cette consigne peut endommager l’équipement ou sa finition. • Dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement, consultez un centre de réparation Ricoh. • Cet équipement est un dispositif de haute précision. Ne le démontez pas. Stockage • Ne stockez pas l’appareil photo dans un endroit sujet à : chaleur ou humidité extrême ; grands changements de température ou d’humidité ; poussière, saleté ou sable ; fortes vibrations ; contact prolongé avec des produits chimiques, notamment des boules de naphtaline ou d’autres produits insecticides, ou des produits en vinyle ou en caoutchouc ; champs magnétiques puissants (par exemple à proximité d’un moniteur, d’un transformateur ou d’un aimant). • Lorsque vous rangez votre appareil photo, veillez à l’installer dans un étui, etc., dans lequel la poussière ou les peluches ne pénètrent pas afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo. De plus, lorsque vous transportez l’appareil photo, ne le mettez pas directement dans une poche, etc., afin d’empêcher la saleté ou la poussière de se déposer sur l’appareil photo. Garantie et réparation 1. Ce produit bénéficie d’une garantie limitée. Pendant la période de garantie indiquée sur la carte de garantie fournie avec votre équipement, toute pièce défectueuse sera réparée gratuitement. Dans le cas d’un dysfonctionnement de l’équipement, contactez le distributeur qui vous a vendu l’équipement ou votre centre de réparation Ricoh le plus proche. Veuillez noter que vous ne serez pas remboursé des frais de transport pour livrer votre équipement au centre de réparation Ricoh. 2. Cette garantie ne couvre aucun dommage résultant de : 1 non-respect des instructions du mode d’emploi ; 2 réparation, modification ou révision non réalisée par un centre de service agréé, listé dans le mode d’emploi ; 3 incendie, sinistre, catastrophe naturelle, foudre, tension anormale, etc. ; 4 stockage inapproprié (indiqué dans le « Mode d’emploi du boîtier de l’appareil photo »), fuite de batterie et autres fluides, moisissure ou tout autre défaut d’entretien de l’équipement. 5 immersion dans l’eau (inondation), exposition à l’alcool ou à d’autres boissons, infiltration de sable ou de boue, choc physique, chute ou pression exercée sur l’équipement et autres causes non naturelles. 3. Après l’expiration de la période de garantie, tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, y compris ceux d’un centre de service agréé. 4. Tous les frais de réparation seront à votre charge, même au cours de la période de garantie, si la carte de garantie n’est pas jointe ou si le nom du distributeur ou la date d’achat n’est pas indiqué ou a été modifié sur la carte. 5. Les frais de révision et d’inspection complète, sur demande du client, seront à sa charge complète que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 6. Tout dommage consécutif à une défaillance de l’équipement, comme les frais de prise de vue ou la perte d’un profit attendu, ne sera pas remboursé que la période de garantie ait expiré ou non. 7. La garantie est valable uniquement dans le pays où l’équipement a été acheté. * Les dispositions ci-dessus se réfèrent aux réparations gratuites et ne limitent vos droits légaux. * L’objectif des dispositions ci-dessus est également décrit sur la carte de garantie fournie avec l’équipement.0 8. Les pièces essentielles à la réparation de l’équipement (c’est-à-dire les composants nécessaires au fonctionnement et à la qualité de l’équipement) seront disponibles pendant une période de cinq années après l’arrêt de la production de l’équipement. 9. Veuillez noter que si l’équipement est sérieusement endommagé par une inondation, une immersion, une infiltration de sable ou de boue, des chocs violents ou une chute, il peut être impossible de le réparer et la restauration de son état originel peut être impossible. Remarques------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Avant d’envoyer l’appareil en réparation, vérifiez le boîtier de l’appareil photo et relisez le mode d’emploi pour garantir un fonctionnement correct. • Certaines réparations nécessitent un certain temps d’exécution. • Lors de l’envoi de l’équipement à un centre de réparation, veuillez inclure une note décrivant la pièce défectueuse et le problème rencontré, aussi précisément que possible. • Démontez tous les accessoires non associés au problème avant d’envoyer l’appareil au centre de réparation.En cas de problème Bureaux Ricoh RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Str. 6, 40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricohpmmc.com/ RICOH FRANCE S.A.S. (PMMC FRANCE) (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2010 octobre FR F-FR Imprimé en Chine *L453 3972* RICOH Gate pour Windows Mode d’emploi Français Pour garantir un bon fonctionnement de ce produit, lisez attentivement ce manuel avant de vous servir de l’appareil. Conservez ce mode d’emploi en lieu sûr pour le retrouver en cas de besoin.Introduction Nous vous remercions d’avoir acheté un produit Ricoh. Ce mode d’emploi explique comment se servir de ce produit et signale les précautions à prendre. Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats, veuillez le lire attentivement avant d’utiliser le produit. Conservez ce mode d’emploi en lieu sûr pour le retrouver en cas de besoin. Ricoh Co., Ltd. • Il est interdit de reproduire tout ou partie de cette publication sans l’autorisation écrite préalable de Ricoh. © 2001 Ricoh Co. Ltd. • Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de cette publication sans préavis. • Un soin considérable a été apporté à la réalisation de ce mode d’emploi. Si, toutefois, vous vous posez des questions sur certains des points qui y ont sont abordés, ou si vous détectez des erreurs ou des inexactitudes, veuillez nous contacter à l’adresse figurant au dos du mode d’emploi. Microsoft, MS et Windows sont des marques déposées par Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. QuickTime est une marque déposée par Apple Computer Inc. aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Tous les autres noms de sociétés et de produits mentionnés ici sont la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Important • Veillez à effectuer une sauvegarde de vos données importantes. En cas de fausse manipulation de votre part ou d’une panne du produit, vous pourriez en effet perdre des données. • Ricoh Co. Ltd. n’est pas responsable des dommages causés par la perte des données créées avec ce produit. • Ricoh Co. Ltd. n’est pas plus responsable des dommages entraînés par une panne du produit, la perte de texte ou de données, ni d’autres dommages issus éventuellement de l’utilisation du produit. Copyright Toute reproduction ou altération de documents, magazines, morceaux de musique et autres contenus protégés par copyright, en dehors d’un usage strictement personnel, familial ou cantonné à un objet limité du même ordre est strictement interdite sauf en cas d’autorisation écrite du détenteur du copyright.1 Possibilités offertes par l’utilisation de ces logiciels Enregistrer aisément les ?chiers de l’appareil (Caplio RR10) Vous pouvez actionner la touche START de la RICOH BASE pour transférer automatiquement des photos sur votre micro-ordinateur. Télécharger des images, des notes vocales, des séquences vidéo et transférer des ?chiers vers l’appareil photo En raccordant l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur, vous pouvez transmettre des images, des notes vocales et des séquences vidéo vers l’ordinateur et, dans l’autre sens, transférer des images (?chiers MP3), des notes vocales (?chiers WAV) et des séquences vidéo (?chiers AVI) de l’ordinateur vers l’appareil. Choisir le format des images transmises par l’appareil Vous pouvez spéci?er le format des ?chiers images (EXIF 2.1, JPEG, BMP, TIFF ou PNG) selon vos besoins avant de les exporter de l’appareil. Modi?er la taille des images transmises par l’appareil Vous pouvez modi?er la taille des ?chiers images avant de les exporter de l’appareil.2 Sommaire Possibilités offertes par l’utilisation de ces logiciels......................................1 Consultation du manuel ................................................................................4 Chapitre 1 Installation des logiciels.................................................. 7 Description des logiciels fournis...................................................................7 Environnement système requis...................................................................10 Installation du logiciel .................................................................................11 Pour installer les logiciels........................................................................................ 11 Désinstallation des logiciels.................................................................................... 15 Chapitre 2 Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur........... 19 Branchement du câble USB.......................................................................19 Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un micro-ordinateur ............................................ 19 Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur ...................................................... 21 Déconnexion du câble USB .......................................................................22 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate ............................................. 23 Lancement et fermeture de RICOH Gate ...................................................23 Affichage de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate ................................................................. 23 Masquage de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate ............................................................... 23 Pour quitter RICOH Gate ........................................................................................ 24 Lancement de RICOH Gate.................................................................................... 24 Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate.......................................................25 Enregistrement de données de l’appareil photo sur le micro-ordinateur...27 Enregistrement des données à l’aide des boutons Enregistrer .............................. 27 Modification du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer .......................................... 28 Modification du paramétrage de la touche START................................................. 34 Transmission automatique des fichiers à l’aide de la touche START ..................... 36 Envoi de données de l’ordinateur vers l’appareil photo.............................38 Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer................................................................... 38 Modification du paramétrage du bouton Transférer ............................................... 41 Impression d’une planche index ................................................................44 Impression d’une planche index............................................................................. 44 Modification des réglages d’impression ................................................................. 45 Envoi d’un message ...................................................................................49 Envoi d’un message avec pièces jointes................................................................ 49 Modification des paramètres d’envoi...................................................................... 51 Paramétrage de la taille maximale des messages en envoi .................................. 54 Lancement d’une application .....................................................................55 Définition de l’application........................................................................................ 553 Lancement de l’application..................................................................................... 57 Autres fonctions ..........................................................................................58 Mise hors tension de l’appareil ............................................................................... 58 Affichage et modification des Informations relatives à l’appareil ........................... 58 Modification de l’aspect de RICOH Gate ............................................................... 59 Affichage du numéro de version de RICOH Gate .................................................. 60 Appendice ................................................................................ 61 Utilisation des séquences vidéo prises avec l’appareil .............................61 Conversion des fichiers à l’aide de MGI VideoWave.............................................. 61 Utilisation du Caplio RR10 comme Webcam..............................................64 Avant d’utiliser la fonction de capture vidéo........................................................... 64 Capture d’images vidéo.......................................................................................... 66 Modification des paramètres de capture................................................................ 67 Dépannage.................................................................................................69 Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement ......................................................... 69 Suppression des pilotes ......................................................................................... 70 Menus de RICOH Gate...............................................................................74 Menus de RICOH Gate ........................................................................................... 74 Menu de paramétrage de chaque bouton.............................................................. 74 Index ...........................................................................................................75 Index alphabétique ................................................................................................. 75 Pour installer uniquement le logiciel de votre choix......................................................13 Pour transférer automatiquement des images à l’aide de la touche START . ..............21 Transfert d’un ?chier MP3.............................................................................................43 À propos du code ASCII...............................................................................................60 Conseils4 Consultation du manuel Cette section présente le contenu de chaque manuel et indique quels chapitres lire en priorité dans ce manuel, ainsi que la signi?cation des symboles spéciaux utilisés.  Rôle des différents manuels fournis Pour les utilisateurs de Windows RICOH Gate pour Windows (le présent manuel) Lisez ce manuel en premier m Ce manuel explique comment installer les logiciels requis, comment raccorder l’appareil photo au PC, et comment utiliser RICOH Gate pour transférer des ?chiers entre l’appareil et l’ordinateur. Pour les utilisateurs de Macintosh RICOH Gate pour Macintosh m Ce manuel explique comment installer les logiciels requis, comment raccorder l’appareil photo au Macintosh, et comment utiliser RICOH Gate pour transférer des ?chiers entre l’appareil et l’ordinateur. Fonctionnement de l’appareil Mode d’emploi de l’appareil photographique numérique (le présent manuel) m Ce manuel explique comment se servir de l’appareil, des préparatifs nécessaires aux instructions de prise de vue et relecture des ?chiers.5  Comment lire le manuel À lire sans faute Pour installer les logiciels nécessaires m Chapitre 1 Installation des logiciels Pour pouvoir utiliser la fonctionnalité RICOH Gate, vous devez installer les logiciels. Ce chapitre décrit les logiciels qui se trouvent sur le CD-ROM fourni avec l’appareil. Pour connecter l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur m Chapitre 2 Connexion de l’appareil à un microordinateur Ce chapitre explique comment connecter l’appareil photographique à un micro-ordinateur. Pour utiliser le logiciel RICOH Gate m Chapitre 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Vous pouvez transmettre des photos vers le microordinateur ou à l’inverse transférer des images de l’ordinateur vers l’appareil. Vous pouvez également obtenir une « planche index » des photos stockées dans l’appareil. À lire si nécessaire Pour mieux connaître les menus et option, les caractéristiques techniques, etc. m Appendice Vous y sont proposés les menus de RICOH Gate, les caractéristiques des ?chiers et des logiciels utilisés, etc.6  Signi?cation des symboles La signi?cation des symboles utilisés dans ce manuel est précisée ci-a bprès. Cette « étiquette » signale des recommandations ou des contraintes d’utilisation qui requièrent votre attention. Cette autre étiquette signale une explication complémentaire sur l’opération concernée ou un point d’information qu’il est bon de connaître. m Ce symbole de renvoi précède la page relative à la fonction ou à l’opération à laquelle il est fait référence. Voir “Environnement système requis” (p.10) Ce libellé signale des informations complémentaires utiles. Les illustrations d’écrans proposées dans ce manuel ont été prises sous Windows 98. Les exemples d’af?chages de RICOH Gate ont été copiés avec un fond d’écran par défaut (Panneau de con?guration/Af?chage/Arrière-plan). Dans ce manuel, les termes « appareil photo » ou « appareil » désignent le Caplio RR10. Important • Si l’écran de bienvenue ne s’af?che pas, ouvrez le CDROM via le Bureau, puis double-cliquez sur [Setup.exe], dans le dossier Caplio RR10, pour lancer le programme d’installation. Important Remarque • Si l’appareil photo n’est pas correctement raccordé à l’ordinateur, un message s’af?che pour vous le signaler. Véri?ez la connexion. Remarque Conseils7 Chapitre 1 Installation des logiciels Installation des logiciels Ce chapitre explique les préparatifs nécessaires à l’utilisation des logiciels fournis, précise l’environnement système requis, décrit le processus d’installation de RICOH Gate, etc. Description des logiciels fournis L’écran ci-dessous est l’écran de bienvenue af?ché lorsque le CD-ROM est introduit dans le lecteur 18  Logiciels Caplio RR10 Pour installer les logiciels énumérés ci-dessous, cliquez sur le bouton [Caplio RR10 Software] de l’écran de bienvenue. Voir “Installation du logiciel” (p.11). Logiciel Description RICOH Gate Ce logiciel vous permet de transmettre les photos prises avec l’appareil vers le microordinateur ou, à l’inverse, de transférer des ?chiers images de l’ordinateur vers l’appareil photo. RICOH Gate vous permet également d’utiliser d’autres applications susceptibles de dialoguer avec l’appareil. Voir “Utilisation de RICOH Gate” (p.23). Pilote USB Ce logiciel est requis pour utiliser RICOH Gate, le pilote TWAIN et le pilote Vidéo lorsque l’appareil est raccordé au microordinateur par une liaison USB. Pilote TWAIN Ce logiciel permet d’importer des photos qui se trouvent dans l’appareil directement depuis une application compatible TWAIN. Video Driver Ce logiciel est requis pour utiliser l’appareil photo comme webcam.9 1 Installation des logiciels  Examen du contenu du CD-ROM (View CD-ROM) Cliquez sur [View CD-ROM], à l’écran de bienvenue, pour consulter le contenu des dossiers du CD-ROM. Pour installer un logiciel, cliquez sur le programme d’installation du dossier du logiciel. Logiciel Description Dossier QuickTime QuickTime 4 (Veillez à installer ce logiciel) Ce logiciel est requis pour visionner une séquence d’images animées enregistrée avec l’appareil photo. Dossier MGI MGI Videowave Ce logiciel de manipulation vidéo permet le montage simple et la création de séquences vidéo. Pour visionner les séquences vidéo enregistrées avec l’appareil à l’aide du Lecteur Windows Media (Windows Media Player), convertissez-les d’abord à l’aide de ce logiciel. • Pour plus de précisions, consultez le ?chier LisezMoi ou le manuel électronique du logiciel. MGI PhotoSuite Ce logiciel est un programme de retouche de photo bien pensé qui offre de nombreuses fonctions de lecture de ?chiers multimédia. • Pour plus de précisions, consultez le ?chier LisezMoi ou le manuel électronique du logiciel. Dossier MusicMatch MusicMatch JUKEBOX Ce logiciel permet de convertir les CD audio et ?chier WAV en ?chiers MP3 (?chiers sons compressés). Les ?chiers MP3 sont lisibles par l’appareil photo. • MP3 désigne le standard international de compression de son MPEG-1 AudioLayer3. Les données peuvent être compressées jusqu’à un dixième seulement de leur volume d’origine. • Pour plus de précisions, consultez Help ou le mode d’emploi au format PDF du logiciel. Remarque Remarque Remarque10 • Si vous vous posez des questions sur les logiciels présentés cidessus, consultez le ?chier ReadMe et le manuel PDF relatifs au logiciel concerné avant de contacter le service après vente Ricoh. Environnement système requis L’environnement détaillé ci-après est requis pour pouvoir utiliser RICOH Gate. • Dans ce manuel, Microsoft ? Windows ? 98 (version anglaise) est nommé Windows 98, Microsoft ? Windows ? 98 Second Edition (version anglaise) est nommé Windows 98SE, Microsoft ? Windows ? Millennium Edition (version anglaise) est nommé Windows Me, et Microsoft ? Windows ? 2000 (version anglaise) est nommé Windows 2000.  RICOH Gate Système d’exploitation Windows 98/98E Windows Me Windows 2000 Ordinateur PC sur lequel un des systèmes ci-dessus a été pré-installé et qui dispose d’un port USB dont le fonctionnement est garanti par le fabricant de l’ordinateur Processeur Pentium ou plus récent Capacité mémoire Windows 98/98SE : 32 Mo (96 Mo ou plus recommandés) Windows Me : 64 Mo (96 Mo ou plus recommandés) Windows 2000 : 128MB Mo (256 Mo ou plus recommandés) Espace disque requis à l’installation Windows 98/98SE : 10 Mo ou plus Windows Me : 10 Mo ou plus Windows 2000 : 10 Mo ou plus Dé?nition d’af?chage 640 × 480 pixels ou plus (800 × 600 ou plus recommandée) Couleurs af?chables 256 ou plus (65000 ou plus recommandé) Lecteur de CDROM Lecteur de CD-ROM utilisable avec le PC décrit ci-dessus Port USB Port USB utilisable sur le PC décrit ci-dessus Audio Carte Sound Blaster compatible avec un des systèmes énumérés ci-dessus, ou carte son équivalente, et haut-parleur Remarque Remarque • Les images sont consultables avec un af?chage 256 couleurs, mais leur reproduction est bien meilleure avec un af?chage 65000 couleurs (16 bits par pixel). Il vous est donc recommandé d’utiliser 65000 couleurs ou plus si possible. Remarque11 1 Installation des logiciels Installation du logiciel Cette section explique comment installer les logiciels requis, notamment RICOH Gate et le pilote USB pour faire communiquer l’appareil photo et l’ordinateur, et QuickTime.  Pour installer les logiciels Caplio RR10 Quittez toutes les autres applications ouvertes avant de lancer l’installation des logiciels. • Si vous raccordez l’appareil photo à l’ordinateur et démarrez Windows avant d’installer les logiciels spéci?ques, l’écran Windows [Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel] est af?ché. Si cela se produit, cliquez sur [Annuler] et passez à l’installation des logiciels après la ?n du démarrage de Windows. • Cette section explique la procédure d’installation standard. Les utilisateurs familiers des ordinateurs et des appareils photo numériques peuvent choisir individuellement les logiciels à installer. • Sous Windows 2000, les utilisateurs disposant de droits d’administrateur doivent d’abord ouvrir une session sous leur nom d’administrateur avant d’installer les logiciels. • Pour contrôler quels logiciels sont installés lors de cette procédure, consultez la section, voir “Logiciels Caplio RR10” (p.8). 1 Allumez le PC et démarrez Windows. 2 Introduisez le CD-ROM fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l’ordinateur. L’écran de bienvenue du CD-ROM est af?ché. Pour installer les logiciels Remarque • Si l’écran de bienvenue ne s’af?che pas, ouvrez le CDROM via le Bureau, puis double-cliquez sur [Setup.exe], dans le dossier Caplio RR10, pour lancer le programme d’installation. Remarque12 3 Sélectionnez [Caplio RR10 Software]. Le programme d’installation est lancé et l’écran de choix de la langue s’af?che quelques instants plus tard. 4 Sélectionnez [OK]. L’écran [InstallShield Wizard] est af?ché. 5 Sélectionnez [Suivant] L’écran [Choisissez l’emplacement cible] apparaît. 6 Validez ou modi?ez l’emplacement où les logiciels doivent être installés, puis sélectionnez [Suivant]. Pour installer les logiciels dans un autre dossier que celui proposé, sélectionnez [Parcourir...] et allez à l’emplacement voulu. L’écran de [Type d’installation] de choix du type d’installation est af?ché. • La langue par défaut des messages dépend de votre système d’exploitation. Remarque • Si vous annulez l’installation avant qu’elle soit terminée, redémarrez Windows avant de tenter à nouveau l’installation du logiciel. Important13 1 Installation des logiciels 7 Sélectionnez [Standard], puis [Suivant]. 1 [Personnalisée] Seul le ou les logiciels que vous sélectionnerez explicitement seront installés. Voir “Pour installer uniquement le logiciel de votre choix” (p.13). 2 [Standard] Le logiciel RICOH Gate et le pilote USB seront automatiquement installés. 8 Suivez les instructions af?chées à l’écran pour poursuivre l’installation, puis sélectionnez [Terminer] au niveau de l’écran InstallShield Wizard. L’installation est terminée. Pour installer uniquement le logiciel de votre choix Si vous sélectionnez [Personnalisée] à l’écran [Type d’installation] mentionné à l’étape 7, l’écran [Sélectionnez lez composants] est af?ché. Sélectionnez uniquement le logiciel que vous voulez installer. Conseils14  Pour installer QuickTime QuickTime est nécessaire pour visionner une séquence d’images animées enregistrée avec l’appareil photo. 1 Allumez le PC et démarrez Windows. 2 Introduisez le CD-ROM fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l’ordinateur. L’écran de bienvenue du CD-ROM est af?ché. 3 Sélectionnez [View CD-ROM]. Le contenu du CD-ROM est af?ché. 4 Double-cliquez sur le dossier [QuickTime]. 5 Double-cliquez sur [QuickTime Installer]. L’installation de QuickTime débute. 6 Suivez les instructions af?chées à l’écran. • Si QuickTime 4.1.2 est déjà installé sur votre ordinateur, cette opération n’est pas nécessaire Remarque15 1 Installation des logiciels Vous avez la possibilité de supprimer tous les logiciels installés. Si vous comptez réinstallez ces logiciels, prenez soin de suivre la procédure de désinstallation avant de procéder à cette réinstallation. • Quittez toutes les applications actives et enregistrez les données qui doivent l’être avant de désinstaller les logiciels. • Déconnectez tout autre périphérique USB et les périphériques « Plug and Play » raccordés à l’ordinateur. • Si vous branchez ou débranchez le câble USB avant d’installer le pilote USB (USB Driver), ce dernier ne sera peut-être pas identi?é correctement. Dans ce cas, vous devrez supprimer le pilote USB de votre système puis le réinstaller. Voir “Suppression du pilote USB” (p.70). Voir “Pour installer les logiciels Caplio RR10” (p.11).  Pour supprimer les logiciels Caplio RR10 Vous pouvez supprimer tous les logiciels Caplio RR10 installés, notamment RICOH Gate, le pilote USB, le pilote Vidéo, etc. 1 Allumez le PC et démarrez Windows. 2 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] dans la Barre des tâches de Windows. 3 Pointez sur [Paramètres] puis cliquez sur [Panneau de con?guration]. Le Panneau de con?guration est af?ché. Désinstallation des logiciels Important Remarque16 4 Double-cliquez sur [Ajout/Suppression de programmes]. L’écran de Propriétés permettant d’ajouter ou de supprimer des logiciels est af?ché. 5 Sélectionnez [Caplio RR10 Software] puis cliquez sur [Ajouter/Supprimer...]. Une demande de con?rmation est af?chée. 6 Cliquez sur [OK]. L’écran [Con?rmez la suppression du ?chier] est af?ché.17 1 Installation des logiciels 7 Cliquez sur [OK]. La suppression débute. Une fois la suppression terminée, un message vous le signale. 8 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. • Une boîte de dialogue demandant de con?rmer la suppression d’un ?chier susceptible d’être utilisé par plusieurs logiciels s’af?che à l’étape 8 si ce ?chier ne semble pas être utilisé par un autre programme installé. Le système ne souffrira pas de la suppression de ce ?chier, mais sauf si vous êtes absolument certain qu’il n’est utilisé par aucun logiciel, nous vous recommandons de répondre [Non]. • Pour supprimer tous les ?chiers susceptibles d’être utilisés par d’autres programmes du système, sélectionnez [Oui]. • Si le message [Uninstallation is ?nished, but some items could not be deleted] s’af?che dans la boîte de dialogue de suppression de programme, sélectionnez [Détails] et notez les ?chiers qui n’ont pas pu être supprimés avant d’opérer toute suppression manuelle de ?chiers liés aux applications Caplio RR10. Si vous tentez de réinstaller les logiciels alors que certains ?chiers liés aux applications sont encore présents, il est possible que la réinstallation échoue. • Si le message [Fichier verrouillé détecté] s’af?che lors de la désinstallation, sélectionnez [Redémarrer] et refaites la désinstallation. Remarque1819 Chapitre Connexion de l appareil ’ à un micro-ordinateur Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur 2 Ce chapitre explique comment raccorder l’appareil photo à un micro-ordinateur de type PC à l’aide du câble USB a?n de pouvoir transférer des ?chiers entre les deux machines. Branchement du câble USB Le câble USB peut être utilisé de deux façons : pour connecter la RICOH BASE à l’ordinateur, ou pour connecter l’appareil directement à l’ordinateur. Vous pouvez raccorder la RICOH BASE au microordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 1 Allumez l’ordinateur. Lorsque le bureau de Windows s’af?che, l’icône de RICOH Gate s’af?che dans la partie système de la barre des tâches. Voir “Lancement et fermeture de RICOH Gate” (p.23). 2 Raccordez l’adaptateur secteur à la RICOH BASE. 3 Raccordez le câble USB au connecteur DIGITAL (AV/USB) de la RICOH BASE d’un côté et au port USB de l’ordinateur de l’autre. Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un micro-ordinateur • Le pilote USB (USB Driver) doit être correctement installé. Voir “Pour installer les logiciels” (p.11). • Le PC doit être équipé d’un port USB standard et le fonctionnement de ce port doit être garanti par le fabricant. Important 220 4 Vérifiez que le bouton rotatif de mode de l’appareil n’est pas placé en position (séquence vidéo). Si c’est le cas, passez dans un autre mode. 5 Placez l’appareil photo sur la RICOH BASE. Le témoin lumineux de la RICOH BASE s’allume. 6 Appuyez sur la touche START de la RICOH BASE. L’appareil est maintenant en mode Connexion à un ordinateur et la fenêtre RICOH Gate s’af?che à l’écran de l’ordinateur. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25) • Si vous appuyez sur la touche START et que l’appareil est en mode Connexion à un ordinateur, il ne peut pas y avoir charge de la batterie lorsque l’appareil est placé sur la RICOH BASE; mettez l’appareil hors tension pour que la charge débute. • La fenêtre RICOH Gate ne s’af?che pas lorsque le bouton rotatif de mode est placé sur (séquence vidéo) • Lorsque le bouton rotatif de mode est placé sur (séquence vidéo), l’appareil est automatiquement en mode Connexion à un ordinateur. Voir “Using the Caplio RR10 as a Web Camera” (p.64). • Ne placez pas l’appareil photo sur la RICOH BASE [Parcourir à la recherche d’un dossier] si le convertisseur d’adaptateur secteur est encore raccordé à l’appareil. • Si la fenêtre de RICOH Gate ne s’af?che pas lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche DÉMARRER, cliquez sur l’icône de la barre des tâches. Voir “Af?chage de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate” (p.23). Important Remarque Remarque21 2 Connexion de l appareil ’ à un micro-ordinateur Vous pouvez raccorder l’appareil photo à un micro-ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 1 Allumez l’ordinateur. Lorsque le bureau de Windows s’af?che, l’icône de RICOH Gate s’af?che dans la partie système de la barre des tâches. 2 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension, puis raccordez-lui l’adaptateur secteur. 3 Branchez le câble USB au connecteur USB de l’appareil puis au port DIGITAL (AV/USB) de l’ordinateur. 4 Vérifiez que le bouton rotatif de mode de l’appareil n’est pas placé en position (séquence vidéo). Si c’est le cas, passez dans un autre mode. 5 Allumez l’appareil photo. L’appareil photo est connecté au micro-ordinateur. Voir “Lancement de RICOH Gate” (p.24). Pour transférer automatiquement des images à l’aide de la touche START . En raccordant la RICOH BASE à l’ordinateur, vous pouvez automatiquement transférer vers l’ordinateur les photos prises avec l’appareil en appuyant sur la touche START de la RICOH BASE. Voir “Transmission automatique des ?chiers à l’aide de la touche START” (p.36). Connexion de l’appareil à un microordinateur Conseils22 Déconnexion du câble USB Pour débrancher le câble USB, appuyez des deux côtés du connecteur USB pour le déverrouiller, puis tirez dessus pour le sortir de sa prise. 1 Mettez l’appareil photo hors tension. 2 Appuyez sur les côtés du connecteur USB pour le déverrouiller, puis débranchez-le. • Le fait de tirer le connecteur sans appuyer sur ses boutons latéraux ou de tirer sur le câble pour le débrancher peut ne pas suf?re à retirer le connecteur de sa prise. Important23 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Utilisation de RICOH Gate Ce chapitre explique comment utiliser le logiciel RICOH Gate. Ce logiciel vous permet d’enregistrer les photos prises avec l’appareil sur le micro-ordinateur ou, à l’inverse, de transférer des ?chiers images de l’ordinateur vers l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez également imprimer les photos prises avec l’appareil. Lancement et fermeture de RICOH Gate Cette section explique comment démarrer et quitter RICOH Gate. Lorsque vous installez RICOH Gate, son icône apparaît dans la partie système de la barre des tâches pour en faciliter l’accès. Lorsque vous voulez utiliser le logiciel RICOH Gate, cliquez sur l’icône pour que sa fenêtre s’ouvre. 1 Cliquez sur dans la Barre des tâches. La fenêtre de RICOH Gate s’af?che sur le bureau. Vous pouvez réduire la fenêtre de RICOH Gate à l’état d’icône. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. La fenêtre de RICOH Gate disparaît et son icône reste visible. Af?chage de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate Masquage de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate • Si vous placez l’appareil photo sur la BASE RICOH et si vous appuyez sur la touche DÉMARRER de la BASE RICOH, la fenêtre RICOH Gate s’af?che. Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un microordinateur” (p.19). Remarque • Si vous connectez l’appareil en appuyant sur la touche START et si vous réduisez la fenêtre RICOH Gate à l’état d’icône dans la Barre des tâches, un nouvel appui sur la touche DÉMARRER n’entraîne pas le réaf?chage de la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Cliquez sur l’icône qui se trouve dans la partie système de la barre des tâches ( ) pour rouvrir cette fenêtre. Remarque 324 Cette section explique comment quitter le logiciel RICOH Gate. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. La fenêtre de RICOH Gate se ferme et son icône disparaît aussi dans la barre des tâches. Si vous avez quitté RICOH Gate et que son icône a donc disparu de la partie système de la barre des tâches, vous pouvez relancer ce logiciel à partir du menu Démarrer de Windows en procédant comme suit. 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] dans la Barre des tâches de Windows. 2 Pointez sur [Programmes], puis sur [Caplio RR10 Software] et cliquez enfin sur [RICOH Gate]. Le logiciel RICOH Gate se lance, sa fenêtre s’af?che sur le Bureau et son icône apparaît dans la Barre des tâches. Fenêtre de RICOH Gate Icône de RICOH Gate dans la Barre des tâches Pour quitter RICOH Gate Lancement de RICOH Gate25 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate Les boutons de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate ont les fonctions indiqués ci-après. 1 Bouton MENU Ce bouton entraîne l’af?chage des menus qui permettent d’enregistrer automatiquement les photos, de paramétrer le courrier électronique, d’af?cher les informations d’état de l’appareil, etc. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage de la touche START” (p.34). Voir “Modi?cation des paramètres d’envoi” (p.51). Voir “Af?chage et modi?cation des Informations relatives à l’appareil” (p.58). 2 Boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2 Ces boutons permettent d’enregistrer des photos de l’appareil sur l’ordinateur auquel il est raccordé. Indiquez les paramètres d’enregistrement des ?chiers, notamment le format de ?chier à sélectionner, l’emplacement et l’action à effectuer après l’enregistrement. Voir “Enregistrement des données à l’aide des boutons Enregistrer” (p.27). 3 Bouton Transférer Ce bouton permet de transférer des ?chiers de l’ordinateur vers le support de stockage de l’appareil photo. Voir “Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer” (p.38). 4 Bouton Imprimer Index Ce bouton permet d’imprimer une « planche index » des photos via l’ordinateur. L’impression s’effectue sur la base du paramétrage prédé?ni en ce qui concerne le dossier, la mise en page, le type de données images à imprimer, etc. Voir “Impression d’une planche index” (p.44). 5 Bouton Envoyer message Ce bouton sert à lancer le logiciel de messagerie du système et à envoyer une photo sélectionnée sous forme de pièce jointe à un message. L’envoi s’effectue sur la base du 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 926 paramétrage de messagerie prédé?ni en ce qui concerne le logiciel à lancer, le format d’image à utiliser, etc. Voir “Envoi d’un message avec pièces jointes” (p.49). 6 Boutons Application 1 et Application 2 Ce bouton permet de lancer une application sélectionnée. Voir “Lancement de l’application” (p.57). 7 Bouton Icône Ce bouton permet de refermer la fenêtre de RICOH Gate et de réduire celui-ci à l’état d’icône. Voir “Masquage de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate” (p.23). 8 Bouton Quitter Ce bouton sert à quitter RICOH Gate. Voir “Pour quitter RICOH Gate” (p.24). 9 Bouton Éteindre l’appareil Ce bouton permet de mettre hors tension l’appareil photo connecté à l’ordinateur. Voir “Mise hors tension de l’appareil” (p.58). • En cliquant sur les boutons Enregistrer 1, Enregistrer 2, Transférer, Imprimer index, Envoyer message ou, Application 1 ou Application 2 à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris, vous avez accès à leur boîte de dialogue de paramétrage respective. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.28). Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer” (p.41). Voir “Modi?cation des réglages d’impression” (p.45). Voir “Modi?cation des paramètres d’envoi” (p.51). Voir “Dé?nition de l’application” (p.55). Remarque27 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Enregistrement de données de l’appareil photo sur le micro-ordinateur (Appareil  Ordinateur) Vous pouvez enregistrer des ?chiers photos, de note vocale et de séquences vidéo enregistrés avec l’appareil photo dans un dossier donné de l’ordinateur. Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est correctement raccordé à l’ordinateur avant de poursuivre. • Il n’est pas possible de choisir sélectivement les ?chiers à transmettre parmi ceux stockés dans l’appareil photo. • Pour éviter tout risque d’écrasement de ?chiers précédemment transférés, les ?chiers se voient attribuer des noms uniques selon une série numérique croissante et sont enregistrés dans le dossier spéci?é. Toutefois, si la partie numérique des noms de ?chiers dépasse 9999, un message d’erreur est af?ché. • Dans la mesure du possible, utilisez l’adaptateur secteur plutôt que d’alimenter l’appareil photo par sa batterie. Si l’alimentation est coupée en cours de fonctionnement, l’opération doit être répétée entièrement. • Ne branchez et ne débranchez l’adaptateur secteur que lorsque l’appareil est hors tension ou qu’aucun transfert n’est en cours. L’appareil ou le micro-ordinateur pourrait en souffrir. • Les ?chiers sont enregistrés par l’appareil dans les formats ci-après. Images ?xes : Exif2.1 (*.JPG) ; Fichiers non compressés : TIFFRGB (*.TIF) ; Fichiers Texte : TIFF-MMR (*.TIF) ; Fichiers de séquence vidéo : AVI (*.AVI) ; Fichiers note vocale : WAV (*.WAV). Pour transmettre et enregistrer les données de l’appareil photo sur l’ordinateur, vous pouvez également utiliser les deux boutons Enregistrer du logiciel RICOH Gate. Les données sont enregistrées en fonction du paramétrage de l’un ou l’autre bouton. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.28). • Si vous ne changez pas le paramétrage par défaut des boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2, les ?chiers de l’appareil seront enregistrés avec les paramètres ci-après. Enregistrement des données à l’aide des boutons Enregistrer Important Important Remarque28 Les images ?xes sont enregistrées au même format où elles ont été prises. Un dossier est automatiquement créé dans le dossier du logiciel et un nom correspondant à la date de prise de vue lui est attribué. Un message s’af?che pour signaler que la transmission des ?chiers est terminée et que l’appareil peut être mis hors tension. • Vous pouvez modi?er le paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer si vous le souhaitez. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.28). 1 Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est correctement raccordé à l’ordinateur. Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un micro-ordinateur” (p.19). Voir “Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur” (p.21). 2 Cliquez sur ou sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Les données de l’appareil sont enregistrées dans le dossier spéci?é en fonction du paramétrage du bouton sur lequel vous avez cliqué, puis le message de con?rmation de l’enregistrement est af?ché. 3 Sélectionnez [Turn camera off] ou [Do not turn camera off]. • Si l’option [Check camera is turned off after saving] n’est pas sélectionnée dans le paramétrage du bouton Enregistrer, le message de con?rmation ne s’af?che pas et l’appareil photo est mis automatiquement hors tension dès la ?n de la transmission. . Vous avez la possibilité de modi?er les paramètres des boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2. Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer • Si l’appareil photo n’est pas correctement raccordé à l’ordinateur, un message s’af?che pour vous le signaler. Véri?ez la connexion. Remarque Remarque29 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Vous pouvez préciser le mode d’enregistrement — enregistrer les ?chiers tels quels ou opérer une conversion de format —, le taux de compression, la taille des images, etc. 1 Cliquez sur ou dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis sélectionnez [Setting…]. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25). La boîte de dialogue [Save Setting] est af?chée. 2 Donnez un nom à votre bouton. Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de l’enregistrement” (p.31). 3 Si vous souhaitez changer le format d’enregistrement des images fixes, cliquez sur le bouton du menu déroulant [Save Format], puis sélectionnez le format voulu. SI vous ne souhaitez pas changer ce format d’enregistrement, passez à l’étape 8. 4 Sélectionnez le taux de compression (ou le mode dans le cas des fichiers PNG) voulu. • Une fois le paramétrage terminé, lorsque vous ferez passer le pointeur de la souris au-dessus du bouton concerné dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate, le nom que vous aurez saisi ici s’af?chera dans une infobulle. • Il est utile d’affecter un nom au bouton Enregistrer concerné pour rappeler son paramétrage et/ou sa fonction. Remarque Nom du bouton • Il n’est pas possible de dé?nir un taux de compression pour les ?chiers BMP (*.BMP) ou TIFF (*.TIF). Remarque30 5 Si vous souhaitez modifier la taille de l’image, sélectionnez [Change Image Size]. La boîte de dialogue [Change Image Size] est af?chée. 6 Sélectionnez [Fixed Size] ou [Free Size] et indiquez la définition standard ou non standard voulue. Voir “Dialogue de modi?cation de la taille d’image” (p.33). 7 Sélectionnez [OK]. La boîtes de dialogue [Save Setting] s’af?che à nouveau à l’écran. 8 Si vous voulez modifier le dossier de destination de l’enregistrement, sélectionnez [Set Save Destination Folder]. La boîte de dialogue [Parcourir à la recherche d’un dossier] est af?chée. 9 Sélectionnez le dossier de destination voulu, puis sélectionnez [OK]. Voir “Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier” (p.34). • Dans le cadre du paramétrage par défaut, le dossier de destination est le dossier dans lequel les logiciels Caplio RR10 Software sont installés. • Si un dossier n’est pas automatiquement créé, les données sont enregistrées dans le dossier spéci?é via l’option [Destination Folder] Remarque31 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate La boîtes de dialogue [Save Setting] s’af?che à nouveau à l’écran. 10 Indiquez si vous voulez que lors de l’enregistrement, le dossier cible soit créé automatiquement. Si c’est le cas, cliquez sur le bouton du menu déroulant [Category], puis sélectionnez [Shooting date], [Photographer’s name] ou [Every Download] pour qu’un dossier soit créé pour chaque date de prise de vues, pour chaque photographe distinct ou à chaque transmission. 11 Indiquez si vous voulez qu’un message vous donne l’occasion de confirmer ou d’infirmer la mise hors tension de l’appareil après l’enregistrement. 12 Sélectionnez [OK]. Vos modi?cations sont prises en compte. Dialogue de paramétrage de l’enregistrement 1 Nom du bouton Attribuez un nom au bouton. Ce nom s’af?chera lorsque vous passerez le pointeur de la souris sur le bouton Enregistrer concerné dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. 2 Save Format (Format d’enregistrement) Si vous sélectionnez [No change], les images ?xes sont enregistrées dans leur format d’origine. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 • Il est utile d’affecter un nom au bouton Enregistrer concerné pour rappeler son paramétrage et/ou sa fonction. • Il est utile d’affecter un nom au bouton Enregistrer concerné pour rappeler son paramétrage et/ou sa fonction. Remarque32 Si vous souhaitez modi?er le format des ?chiers d’images ?xes provenant de l’appareil photo, sélectionnez l’un des formats suivants: Exif2.1 (*.JPG), JPEG (*.JPG), BMP (*.BMP), TIFF (*.TIF) ou PNG (*.PNG). 3 Compression Rate & Mode (Taux de compression et Mode) Si vous modi?ez le format d’enregistrement, vous pouvez spéci?er le mode et le taux de compression. Si vous souhaitez modi?er le taux de compression et le mode, sélectionnez le taux voulu dans le menu déroulant [Compression Rate]. Les taux et modes sélectionnables dépendent du format choisi au niveau de l’option [Save Format]. 4 Change Image Size (Taille d’image) Si vous modi?ez le format d’enregistrement, vous pouvez spéci?er la taille d’image souhaitée. Si vous souhaitez changer les dimensions de l’image, cliquez sur [Change Image Size] pour af?cher la boîte de dialogue correspondante, puis sélectionnez la taille voulue. Voir “Dialogue de modi?cation de la taille d’image” (p.33). 5 Save Destination Folder (Dossier de destination) Par défaut, il s’agit du dossier dans lequel ont été installés les logiciels Caplio RR10. Si vous voulez modi?er le dossier de destination de l’enregistrement, sélectionnez [Set Save Destination Folder], puis sélectionnez le dossier voulu. Voir “Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier” (p.34). 6 Automatically create new folder (Créer automatiquement un nouveau dossier) Si vous activez cette option, le dossier dans lequel doivent être placés les ?chiers sur l’ordinateur est créé automatiquement. Comme sous-option, vous pouvez sélectionner [Shooting date], [Photographer’s name] ou [Every Download]. • Si vous sélectionnez [Shooting Date], un dossier distinct est créé pour chaque date de prise de vue consignée dans l’appareil photo et les données placées dans les dossiers en fonction de cette date de création. • Si vous sélectionnez [Photographer’s name], un dossier distinct est créé pour chaque photographe consigné dans l’appareil photo et les données placées dans les dossiers en fonction du photographe ayant créé les ?chiers. • Si vous sélectionnez [Every Download], un nouveau dossier est créé à chaque session de transmission des données. Le nom du dossier sera formé à partir de la date du jour et d’un numéro séquentiel comme indiqué ci-dessous. • Il n’est pas possible de dé?nir un taux de compression pour les ?chiers BMP (*.BMP) ou TIFF (*.TIF). Remarque33 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate 7 Do not automatically create new folder (Ne pas créer automatiquement de nouveaux dossiers) Si vous activez cette option, il n’y a pas de création automatique du dossier cible. Les données sont placées dans le dossier spéci?é par l’option [Save Destination Folder]. 8 Check camera is turned off after saving (Con?rmer l’extinction de l’appareil après l’enregistrement) Si vous activez cette option, un message s’af?che après l’enregistrement pour vous permettre de con?rmer ou d’in?rmer la mise hors tension de l’appareil après cette opération. Dans la boîte de dialogue comportant ce message, le bouton [Turn camera off] vous permet de commander cette mise hors tension. En revanche, si vous n’activez pas cette option, l’appareil est mis automatiquement hors tension en ?n d’enregistrement, sans af?chage d’un message de con?rmation. Dialogue de modi?cation de la taille d’image 1 No change in size (Taille d’origine) Si vous sélectionnez cette option, la taille de l’image n’est pas modi?ée. 2 Fixed Size (Dimensions standard) Si vous sélectionnez cette option, vous pouvez choisir deux tailles standard : 640 × 480 et 320 × 240. 3 Free Size (Dimensions libres) Si vous sélectionnez cette option, vous pouvez spéci?er les dimensions voulues en les saisissant de façon libre dans les zones prévues pour la largeur (Width) et la hauteur (Height). 4 Save H:W ratio (Conserver les proportions) Si vous sélectionnez l’option [Free Size] puis cette sousoption, vous pouvez faire varier la taille de l’image sans changer ses proportions, en indiquant soit une valeur de largeur, soit une valeur de hauteur. Numéro séquentiel à 3 chiffres AAAAMMJJ-000 Date du transfert 1 2 3 434 Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier 1 Le lecteur où le dossier est af?ché. Spéci?ez le dossier voulu en procédant de la même manière que dans l’Explorateur Windows, puis sélectionnez [OK]. En ajustant le paramétrage de la fonction d’Enregistrement automatique via la touche START, vous pouvez commander l’enregistrement des ?chiers de l’appareil sur le microordinateur, au format souhaité et dans le dossier voulu par un simple appui sur le touche START de la RICOH BASE lorsque l’appareil est placé sur cette dernière. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Le menu RICOH Gate est af?ché. 2 Sélectionnez [Options Setting...]. La boîte de dialogue [Options Setting] est af?chée. 3 Sélectionnez [Saved automatically when START Key is pressed]. Modi?cation du paramétrage de la touche START 1 • Vous pouvez également af?cher le menu RICOH Gate en cliquant sur l’icône RICOH Gate de la barre des tâches avec le bouton droit de la souris. Remarque35 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage des options” (p.35). 4 Cliquez sur puis sélectionnez [Save 1] ou [Save 2] à la rubrique [Save Format for Auto Save]. • [Save 1] est le paramétrage d’enregistrement lié au bouton Enregistrer 1. [Save 2] est le paramétrage d’enregistrement lié au bouton Enregistrer 2. • Vous pouvez donc opérer un paramétrage différent pour chacun des deux boutons Enregistrer. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.28). 5 Sélectionnez [OK]. Le paramétrage de l’Enregistrement automatique est modi?é. Dialogue de paramétrage des options Remarque 1 2 336 1 Saved automatically when START Key is pressed (Enregistrement automatique à l’appui sur DÉMARRER) Si vous sélectionnez cette option, les ?chiers sont automatiquement enregistrés au format spéci?é. 2 Save Format for Auto Save Indiquez si la fonction d’Enregistrement automatique doit utiliser le paramétrage [Save 1] ou [Save 2]. [Save 1] et [Save 2] correspondent aux paramétrage dans RICOH Gate des deux boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2. 3 Not saved automatically when START Key is pressed (Pas d’enregistrement automatique à l’appui sur DÉMARRER) Si vous sélectionnez cette option, la fonction Enregistrement automatique ne s’active pas lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche START de la RICOH BASE. En plaçant l’appareil photo sur la RICOH BASE, vous pouvez automatiquement transmettre et enregistrer les ?chiers image, son ou vidéo de l’appareil dans le dossier spéci?é de l’ordinateur en appuyant simplement sur la touche START de la RICOH BASE. • Sélectionnez l’option [Saved automatically when START key is pressed] pour que la touche START permette l’enregistrement automatique des ?chiers de l’appareil. Si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée, les ?chiers ne pourront pas être enregistrée à l’aide de la touche START. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage de la touche START” (p.34). • Le paramétrage du format d’enregistrement, du dossier de destination, etc. s’effectue au niveau des boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.28). 1 Véri?ez que la RICOH BASE est correctement raccordé à l’ordinateur. Voir “Branchement du câble USB” (p.19). Transmission automatique des ?chiers à l’aide de la touche START Important Remarque37 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate 2 Vérifiez que l’adaptateur secteur est correctement raccordé à la RICOH BASE. 3 Placez l’appareil photo sur la RICOH BASE. 4 Appuyez sur la touche Démarrer de la RICOH BASE. Le message [PC connection] s’af?che sur l’écran LCD de l’appareil photo. Les données de l’appareil photo sont transmises et enregistrées sur l’ordinateur et le message de con?rmation de cette opération est af?ché. 5 Sélectionnez [Turn camera off] ou [Do not turn camera off]. • Selon le paramétrage du bouton Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2 affecté à [Auto Save Setting] par touche START, il est possible que l’appareil se mette hors tension sans demande de con?rmation. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage de la touche START” (p.34). Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.28). Remarque38 Envoi de données de l’ordinateur vers l’appareil photo (PC  Appareil) Vous pouvez transférer des ?chiers enregistrés avec l’appareil et des musiques (?chiers MP3) de l’ordinateur vers l’appareil photo. Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est correctement raccordé à l’ordinateur avant de poursuivre. . On appelle ici « transfert » l’envoi de données de l’ordinateur vers l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez transférer des images, des sons, des séquences vidéo et de la musique de votre ordinateur vers l’appareil photo via le bouton Transférer du logiciel RICOH Gate. Le transfert s’effectue en fonction du paramétrage du bouton Transférer. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer” (p.41). • Seuls les ?chiers EXIF (*.JPG), les ?chiers notes vocales (*.WAV), les ?chiers vidéo (*.AVI) enregistrés à l’origine sur cet appareil d’une part, et les ?chiers MP3 (*.MP3) peuvent être transférés. 1 Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est correctement raccordé à l’ordinateur. Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un micro-ordinateur” (p.19). Voir “Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur” (p.21). 2 Vérifiez le paramétrage du transfert. Modi?ez ce paramétrage si nécessaire. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer” (p.41). 3 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. La boîte de dialogue [Upload] apparaît. 4 Sélectionnez le lecteur et le dossier dans lesquels se trouve le fichier à transférer. Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer • Si vous voulez transférer des ?chiers MP3, ne manquez pas de lire d’abord la section “Transfert d’un ?chier MP3” p.43. Important Important • Si l’appareil photo n’est pas correctement raccordé à l’ordinateur, un message s’af?che pour vous le signaler. Véri?ez la connexion. Remarque39 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Voir “Dialogue de Transfert” (p.40). 5 Sélectionnez le type de fichier à transférer dans la zone [File Type]. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un type de ?chier, les vignettes des ?chiers de ce type présents dans le dossier sont af?chées. 6 Choisissez la vignette voulue dans la liste des fichiers, puis cliquez sur [OK]. • S’il s’agit d’un ?chier note vocale, c’est une icône de note vocale qui est af?chée, et s’il s’agit d’une séquence vidéo, c’est l’icône de ?lm. • Si vous sélectionnez un ?chier-liste de morceaux MP3 (*.M3U), la boîte de dialogue [Select Playlist] apparaît. Pour transférer des ?chiers MP3 et des listes MP3, consultez l’encadré de la page 40. Voir “Transfert d’un ?chier MP3” (p.43). Les données spéci?ées sont transférées de l’ordinateur à l’appareil photo et le message de con?rmation de cette opération est af?ché. • Seuls les ?chiers indiqués dans la liste des ?chiers peuvent être transférés. Remarque Remarque • Si l’option [Check camera is turned off after upload is executed] n’est pas sélectionnée dans le paramétrage du bouton Transférer, le message de con?rmation ne s’af?che pas et l’appareil photo est mis automatiquement hors tension dès la ?n du transfert. Remarque40 7 Sélectionnez [Turn camera off] ou [Do not turn camera off]. Dialogue de Transfert 1 Drive (Lecteur) Sélectionnez le lecteur dans lequel se trouve le ?chier à transférer. 2 Folder (Dossier) Sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel se trouve le ?chier à transférer. Par défaut, il s’agit du dossier spéci?é au niveau de l’option [Upload Source Folder] dans les paramètres de transfert. 3 File Type (Type de ?chier) Lorsque vous sélectionnez un type de ?chier à transférer, seules les vignettes des ?chiers de ce type présents dans le dossier sélectionné sont af?chées et seuls les ?chiers correspondants peuvent être transférés. 4 File List (Liste des ?chiers) Un af?chage de type vignettes des ?chiers du type spéci?é présents dans le dossier choisi apparaît. Vous pouvez ainsi contrôler s’il s’agit bien des ?chiers à transférer. 5 File Name (Nom du ?chier) Le nom du ?chier ?gure sous la vignette. 4 5 2 1 341 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Vous avez la possibilité de modi?er le paramétrage du bouton Transférer. Vous pouvez spéci?er le type des ?chiers que vous voulez transférer ainsi que le dossier source contenant ces ?chiers sur l’ordinateur et enregistrer ces modi?cations. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis sélectionnez [Setting…]. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25). La boîte de dialogue [Upload Setting] apparaît. 2 Donnez un nom au bouton Transférer. Voir “Dialogue de Transfert” (p.40). 3 Si vous voulez spécifier un type de fichiers particulier auquel doit être limité le transfert, cliquez sur le bouton du menu déroulant [File Type], puis sélectionnez le type de fichiers voulu. 4 Si vous voulez spécifier le dossier source, cliquez sur [Set Upload Source Folder…]. La boîte de dialogue [Parcourir à la recherche d’un dossier] est af?chée. 5 Sélectionnez le dossier source voulu, puis sélectionnez [OK]. Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer Nom du bouton • Une fois le paramétrage de transfert terminé, lorsque vous ferez passer le pointeur de la souris au-dessus du bouton Transférer, le commentaire que vous aurez saisi ici s’af?chera dans une infobulle. Remarque • Le réglage par défaut de cette option est [All Files] (tous les types de ?chiers). • Dans le cadre du paramétrage par défaut, le dossier source est le dossier dans lequel les logiciels Caplio RR10 sont installés. Important42 Voir “Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier” (p.34). La boîtes de dialogue [Upload Setting] s’af?che à nouveau à l’écran. 6 Indiquez si vous souhaitez avoir la possibilité de confirmer ou d’infirmer la mise hors tension de l’appareil après le transfert. 7 Sélectionnez [OK]. Vos modi?cations sont prises en compte. Dialogue de paramétrage de transfert 1 Nom du bouton Attribuez un nom au bouton Transférer. Ce nom s’af?chera lorsque vous passerez le pointeur de la souris sur le bouton Transférer dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. 2 File Type (Type1 de ?chier) Si vous sélectionnez [All Files], tous les ?chiers du dossier source spéci?é pouvant être transférés le sont. Si vous voulez limiter le transfert aux ?chiers d’un certain type, sélectionnez l’un des types suivants : ?chiers EXIF (*.JPG), ?chiers notes vocales (*.WAV), ?chiers AVI (*.AVI) et ?chiers MP3 (*.MP3) ou de listes de morceaux MP3 (*.M3U). 3 Upload Source Folder (Dossier source) Par défaut, le dossier source est le dossier dans lequel les logiciels Caplio RR10 sont installés. Si vous voulez modi?er le dossier source du transfert, sélectionnez [Set Upload Source Folder], puis sélectionnez le dossier voulu. 1 2 3 4 • Il est utile d’affecter un nom au bouton Transférer pour rappeler son paramétrage et/ ou sa fonction. Remarque43 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate 4 Check camera is turned off after upload is executed (Con?rmer l’extinction de l’appareil après le transfert) Si vous activez cette option, un message s’af?che après le transfert pour vous permettre de con?rmer ou d’in?rmer la mise hors tension de l’appareil après cette opération. Dans la boîte de dialogue comportant ce message, le bouton [Turn camera off] vous permet de commander cette mise hors tension. En revanche, si vous n’activez pas cette option, l’appareil est mis automatiquement hors tension en ?n de transfert, sans af?chage d’un message de con?rmation. • L’appareil photo peut reproduire les sons des ?chiers MP3 au format ci-après. – Débit : 96 kbit/s – Fréquence d’échantillonnage : 44,1 kHz Transfert d’un ?chier MP3 Lorsque vous transférez un ?chier MP3 vers l’appareil photo, un recodage du ?chier est effectué juste avant le transfert. Seuls les ?chiers MP3 ainsi recodés sont lisibles par l’appareil photo. Si vous sélectionnez le type [MP3 Playlist File (*.M3U)] dans le menu déroulant [File Type], la boîte de dialogue [Select Playlist] apparaît. Indiquez quel morceau de la liste vous voulez transférer. Voir “Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer” (p.38). Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer” (p.41). Conseils Important44 Impression d’une planche index (Planches index) Vous pouvez imprimer une « planche index » des photos enregistrées sur l’ordinateur.. • Cette impression ne peut porter que sur les images aux formats suivants : BITMAP (*.BMP), EXIF2.1/2.0 (*.JPG), J6I (*.J6I), JPEG (*.JPG), NC (*.TIF), TIFF-YUV (*.TIF), TIF-MMR (*.TIF), TIFF-RGB (*.TIF), PCD (*.PCD), PNG (*.PNG), TIFF (*.TIF), WMF (*.WMF), AVI (*.AVI), WAV (*.WAV) et MOV (*.MOV). Cette fonction vous permet d’obtenir une planche index des photos d’un dossier donné, c’est-à-dire d’une impression sur papier de toutes les photos à un format miniature. Vous pouvez spéci?er si un titre, la date de prise de vue, les numéros de pages et la date d’impression, doivent être imprimés, et indiquer le nombre de photos miniatures qui doivent ?gurer sur chaque page. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. La boîte de dialogue [Index Print] apparaît. 2 Vérifiez le paramétrage de l’impression d’index, puis sélectionnez [Print (Imprimer)]. Modi?ez ce paramétrage si nécessaire. Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression d’index” (p.47). Impression d’une planche index Important • Les icônes spéciales associées aux ?chiers note vocale et séquence vidéo sont également imprimées. Remarque • Le paramétrage du bouton Imprimer index est rappelé dans la boîte de dialogue [Index Print] illustrée ici. Si vous modi?ez ici certains paramètres, vos modi?cations sont répercutées sur le bouton Imprimer index. Remarque45 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate La boîte de dialogue [Print] apparaît. 3 Vérifiez que le type d’imprimante sélectionné est bien le type voulu. Le nom de l’imprimante saisie dans la zone [Dé?nir par défault] sous [Printer Name] est af?ché. Si vous utilisez une autre imprimante, sélectionnez-la. 4 Indiquez le nombre d’exemplaires voulu, puis sélectionnez [OK]. L’impression débute. La planche est imprimée en fonction des paramètres d’impression affectés au bouton Imprimer index. Lorsque vous effectuez un tel paramétrage, vous pouvez le sauvegarder avec tous ses paramètres - nombre d’images par page, impression du titre, de la date de prise de vue, du numéro de page, etc. Cette fonction est utile pour réadopter rapidement un ancien paramétrage après avoir modi?é des paramètres. • Vous pouvez modi?er les paramètres d’impression même après le lancement de l’impression de la planche index. Voir “Impression d’une planche index” (p.44). 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis sélectionnez [Setting...]. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25). La boîte de dialogue [Index Print Setting] apparaît. Modi?cation des réglages d’impression • En cliquant sur le bouton [Properties], vous pouvez paramétrer votre imprimante de façon ?ne. Effectuez le paramétrage requis. • Pour plus de précisions, consultez les modes d’emploi de votre ordinateur et de votre imprimante. Remarque Remarque46 2 Donnez un nom au bouton Imprimer index. Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression d’index” (p.47). 3 Tapez le titre qui doit apparaître en entête. Si vous laissez cette zone vide, aucun titre n’est imprimé. 4 Choisissez le nombre d’images par page imprimée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l’un des formats suivants: (5 × 8), (4 × 6), (3 × 4) or (2 × 3). 5 Choisissez entre l’impression de la date de prise de vue ([Shooting date]), la date d’impression ([Print date]) ou les numéros de pages ([Page No.]). 6 Sélectionnez la police et le corps dans lesquels imprimer le titre, la date de prise de vue, etc. • Une fois le paramétrage terminé, lorsque vous ferez passer le pointeur de la souris au-dessus du bouton Imprimer index, le nom que vous aurez saisi ici s’af?chera dans une infobulle. Remarque Nom du bouton • En cliquant sur le bouton [Printer Setting...], vous pouvez paramétrer votre imprimante de façon ?ne. Effectuez le paramétrage requis. • Pour plus de précisions, consultez les modes d’emploi de votre ordinateur et de votre imprimante. Remarque47 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate 7 Si vous voulez spécifier un autre dossier d’images à imprimer, cliquez sur [Set Print Folder]. La boîte de dialogue [Parcourir à la recherche d’un dossier] est af?chée. 8 Sélectionnez le dossier voulu, puis sélectionnez [OK]. Voir “Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier” (p.34). La boîtes de dialogue [Index Print Setting] s’af?che à nouveau à l’écran. 9 Sélectionnez [OK]. Le paramétrage d’impression d’index est enregistré. Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression d’index 1 2 3 5 6 7 448 1 Nom du bouton Attribuez un nom au bouton. Ce nom s’af?chera lorsque le pointeur de la souris passera au-dessus du bouton Imprimer index. 2 Set Printer (Réglages d’imprimante) En cliquant sur [Printer Setting...], vous pouvez sélectionner le format du papier, le mode d’alimentation, la direction d’impression, etc. 3 Print Title (Titre) Tapez le titre qui doit apparaître en en-tête. Si vous laissez cette zone vide, aucun titre n’est imprimé. 4 Print Type (Format d’impression) Choisissez le nombre d’images à placer sur chaque page imprimée. Les différents choix sont présentés sous forme de matrice nombre d’images sur une ligen x nombre de colonnes. 5 Print Options (Options d’impression) Il vous suf?t de sélectionner [Shooting date], [Page No.] ou [Print date] pour que la date de prise de vues, le numéro de page et la date d’impression ?gurent en en-tête des pages imprimées. Si vous ne sélectionnez aucune de ces options, rien n’est imprimé. 6 Font Setting (Police de caractères) Sélectionnez la police et le corps (8 pts à 14 pts) dans lesquels imprimer le titre, la date de prise de vue, les numéros de page et la date d’impression. 7 Print Folder (Dossier à imprimer) Sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel se trouve les images que vous voulez imprimer. Tapez le chemin d’accès à ce dossier directement dans la zone de saisie, ou bien cliquez sur [Set Print Folder] et choisissez le dossier voulu dans la boîte de dialogue Parcourir af?chée. Par défaut, il s’agit du dossier dans lequel ont été installés les logiciels Caplio RR10.49 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Envoi d’un message Grâce au bouton Envoyer message de RICOH Gate, vous pouvez lancer votre logiciel de messagerie et envoyer des photos enregistrées sur l’ordinateur sous forme de pièces jointes. • Il est nécessaire de disposer d’un logiciel de messagerie compatible MAPI pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction. Parmi les logiciels de messagerie compatibles MAPI, citons notamment Outlook Express, Eudora, Eudora Pro, etc. • Les images aux formats suivants peuvent être jointes à un message : BITMAP (*.BMP), EXIF2.1/2.0 (*.JPG), JPEG (*.JPG), NC (*.TIF), TIFF-YUV (*.TIF), TIF-MMR (*.TIF), TIFF-RGB (*.TIF), PNG (*.PNG), TIFF (*.TIF), AVI (*.AVI) et WAV (*.WAV) Sélectionnez les images voulues dans leur dossier avant de lancer le logiciel de messagerie et de les joindre au message. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25). La boîte de dialogue [Send Mail] apparaît. 2 Sélectionnez le lecteur et le dossier dans lesquels se trouve les fichiers à envoyer. Envoi d’un message avec pièces jointes Important • Vous pouvez modi?er le paramétrage d’envoi par message, notamment le type des ?chiers à envoyer ou le dossier source des images à envoyer. Voir “Modi?cation des paramètres d’envoi” (p.51). Remarque50 Voir “Dialogue d’envoi de message” (p.51). 3 Sélectionnez le type de fichier à envoyer dans la zone [File Type]. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un type de ?chier, les vignettes des ?chiers de ce type présents dans le dossier sont af?chées. 4 Choisissez la vignette du fichier que vous voulez envoyer, puis sélectionnez [OK]. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs ?chiers en vous servant des touches Maj et Ctrl. • S’il s’agit d’un ?chier note vocale, c’est une icône de note vocale qui est af?chée, et s’il s’agit d’une séquence vidéo, c’est l’icône de ?lm. • Si le volume total des ?chiers joints dépasse la taille maximale par message paramétrée, une demande de con?rmation d’envoi est af?chée. Si vous désirez bien envoyer ce message et ces ?chiers, sélectionnez [Yes (Oui)]. Si vous préférez annuler l’envoi, sélectionnez [No (Non)]. • La taille de message maximale par défaut est de 1024 Ko. • Dans certains environnements système, la boîte de dialogue [Select Pro?le] s’af?che. Cliquez sur ¥ pour sélectionner le logiciel de messagerie que vous utilisez habituellement, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Voir “Paramétrage de la taille maximale des messages en envoi” (p.54). 5 La fenêtre de composition de message de votre logiciel de messagerie s’ouvre et les fichiers sélectionnés au niveau de la boîte de dialogue [Send Mail] y sont déjà placés en pièces jointes. • Les logiciels qui répondent à la fonction de demande d’envoi de message (c’est-à-dire les logiciels compatibles MAPI) sont ceux qui sont disponibles dans la zone [Courrier] de la boîte de dialogue [Options Internet/Programmes] accessible dans le [Panneau de con?guration]. Remarque Remarque51 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Dialogue d’envoi de message 1 Drive (Lecteur) Sélectionnez le lecteur dans lequel se trouvent les ?chiers à envoyer. 2 Folder (Dossier) Sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel se trouvent les ?chiers à envoyer. Par défaut, il s’agit du dossier spéci?é au niveau de l’option [Upload Source Folder] dans les paramètres de transfert. 3 File Type (Type de ?chier) Lorsque vous sélectionnez un type de ?chier à envoyer, seuls les ?chiers de ce type présents dans le dossier sélectionné sont af?chées. 4 File List (Liste des ?chiers) Un af?chage de type vignettes des ?chiers du type spéci?é apparaît. Choisissez la vignette du ?chier que vous voulez envoyer. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs ?chiers. 5 File Name (Nom du ?chier) Le nom du ?chier ?gure sous la vignette. . Vous avez la possibilité de modi?er le paramétrage du bouton Envoyer message. Dans ce paramétrage, vous pouvez spéci?er le type du ou des ?chiers à envoyer, le dossier source, etc. et vous pouvez enregistrer le paramétrage pour vous en resservir plus tard. Vous pouvez aussi modi?er la taille de l’image à envoyer. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis sélectionnez [Setting…]. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25). Modi?cation des paramètres d’envoi 4 5 2 1 352 La boîte de dialogue [Mail Send Setting] apparaît. 2 Donnez un nom à votre bouton. Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage d’envoi de message” (p.53). 3 Si vous souhaitez changer le format d’enregistrement des images fixes, cliquez sur le bouton du menu déroulant [Send Format], puis sélectionnez le format voulu. SI vous ne souhaitez pas changer ce format d’envoi, passez à l’étape 7. 4 Si vous souhaitez modifier la taille de l’image, sélectionnez [Change Image Size]. La boîte de dialogue [Change Image Size] est af?chée. 5 Sélectionnez [Fixed Size] ou [Free Size] et indiquez la définition standard ou non standard voulue. Voir “Dialogue de modi?cation de la taille d’image” (p.33). • Une fois le paramétrage terminé, lorsque vous ferez passer le pointeur de la souris au-dessus du bouton Envoyer message, le nom que vous aurez saisi ici s’af?chera dans une infobulle. Remarque Nom du bouton53 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate 6 Sélectionnez [OK]. La boîtes de dialogue [Mail Send Setting] s’af?che à nouveau à l’écran. 7 Si vous voulez modifier le dossier de destination de l’enregistrement, sélectionnez [Set Upload Source Folder]. La boîte de dialogue [Parcourir à la recherche d’un dossier] est af?chée. 8 Sélectionnez le dossier source voulu, puis sélectionnez [OK]. Voir “Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier” (p.34). La boîte de dialogue [Mail Send Setting] s’af?che à nouveau à l’écran. Dialogue de paramétrage d’envoi de message 1 Nom du bouton Attribuez un nom au bouton. Ce nom apparaîtra dans une infobulle lorsque le pointeur de la souris passera au-dessus du bouton Envoyer message. 2 Change Size of Still Picture (Modi?er la taille des images ?xes) Si vous sélectionnez [No change], le taux de compression et le mode restent ceux affectés aux images lors de la prise de vues. Si vous souhaitez changer les dimensions des images envoyées, cliquez sur [Change Image Size] pour af?cher la boîte de dialogue correspondante, puis sélectionnez la taille voulue. • Dans le cadre du paramétrage par défaut, le dossier source est le dossier dans lequel les logiciels Caplio RR10 sont installés. Remarque 1 2 354 Voir “Dialogue de modi?cation de la taille d’image” (p.33). 3 Upload Source Folder (Dossier source) Sélectionnez le dossier à présenter lors de l’ouverture de la boîte de dialogue d’envoi de message. Tapez le chemin d’accès à ce dossier directement dans la zone de saisie, ou bien cliquez sur [Set Upload Source Folder] et choisissez le dossier voulu dans la boîte de dialogue [Parcourir à la recherche d’un dossier]. Par défaut, il s’agit du dossier dans lequel ont été installés les logiciels Caplio RR10. Vous pouvez faire en sorte qu’un message d’alerte s’af?che lorsqu’un message sur le point d’être envoyé est plus gros qu’une taille maximale que vous dé?nissez. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Le menu RICOH Gate est af?ché. 2 Sélectionnez [Options Setting...]. La boîte de dialogue [Options Setting] est af?chée. 3 Saisissez la taille maximale voulue, en kilo-octets, puis sélectionnez [OK]. La taille maximale dé?nie est enregistrée. Paramétrage de la taille maximale • La taille de message des messages en envoi maximale par défaut est de 1024 Ko. Remarque • Vous pouvez également af?cher le menu RICOH Gate en cliquant sur l’icône RICOH Gate de la barre des tâches avec le bouton droit de la souris. Remarque55 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Lancement d’une application En affectant le programme de votre choix au bouton Application de RICOH Gate, vous pouvez ensuite directement lancer cette application à l’aide de ce bouton. Vous pouvez dé?nir l’application à lancer lorsqu’on clique sur les boutons Application1 et Application 2. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis sélectionnez [Setting…]. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25). La boîte de dialogue [Application Setting] est af?chée. 2 Donnez un nom à votre bouton. Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage d’application” (p.56). 3 Cliquez sur [Set Link Destination...]. La boîte de dialogue [Set Link Destination] est af?chée. Dé?nition de l’application • Une fois le paramétrage terminé, lorsque vous ferez passer le pointeur de la souris au-dessus du bouton concerné, le nom que vous aurez saisi ici s’af?chera dans une infobulle. Remarque Nom du bouton56 4 Choisissez l’application voulue, puis sélectionnez [OK]. Voir “Dialogue de sélection de l’application à lancer” (p.56). Dialogue de paramétrage d’application 1 Nom du bouton Attribuez un nom au bouton Application concerné. Ce nom s’af?chera lorsque vous passerez le pointeur de la souris sur ce bouton dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. 2 Link Destination (Application à lancer) Spéci?ez l’application à lancer lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton Application concerné. Tapez le chemin d’accès à cette application directement dans la zone de saisie, ou bien cliquez sur [Set Link Destination] et choisissez l’application voulue dans la boîte de dialogue qui s’af?che alors. Dialogue de sélection de l’application à lancer 1 2 1 2 357 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate 1 Dossier et liste des ?chiers Naviguez vers le dossier où se trouve l’application à lancer. 2 File name (Nom du ?chier) Lorsque vous choisissez une application à lancer, son nom s’af?che dans cette zone. 3 Files of type (Fichier de type) Les ?chiers exécutables (*.exe) peuvent être sélectionnés. Seuls ces ?chiers exécutables sont af?chés. Vous pouvez lancer l’application dé?nie en cliquant sur le bouton correspondant de RICOH Gate. 1 Cliquez sur ou dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25). L’application dé?nie se lance. Lancement de l’application58 Autres fonctions Lorsque l’appareil photo est connecté à l’ordinateur, vous pouvez le mettre hors tension en cliquant sur le bouton Éteindre l’appareil de RICOH Gate. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.25). L’appareil passe hors tension. Lorsque l’appareil est placé sur la RICOH BASE, il passe en mode charge de batterie. Lorsque l’appareil photo est connecté à l’ordinateur, vous pouvez af?cher et ainsi véri?er le nom du photographe dé?ni dans l’appareil. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Le menu RICOH Gate est af?ché. 2 Sélectionnez [Camera Property…]. La boîte de dialogue [Camera Property] apparaît. 3 Vérifiez le nom du photographe, puis sélectionnez [OK]. Vous pouvez saisir jusqu’à 20 caractères. Le nouveau nom est enregistré dans l’appareil photo. Mise hors tension de l’appareil Af?chage et modi?cation des Informations relatives à l’appareil • Vous pouvez également af?cher le menu RICOH Gate en cliquant sur l’icône RICOH Gate de la barre des tâches avec le bouton droit de la souris. Remarque • Vous pouvez saisir jusqu’à 16 caractères ASCII pour dé?nir le nom du photographe. Voir “À propos du code ASCII” (p.60). Remarque59 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Vous avez la possibilité de changer l’aspect de RICOH Gate. Vous pouvez choisir entre deux décors (casual, c’est-à-dire décontracté, et formal, c’est-à-dire sérieux), en plus du décor par défaut (basic). 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Le menu RICOH Gate est af?ché. 2 Sélectionnez [Set Background Illustration…]. La boîte de dialogue [Set Background Illustration] est af?chée. 3 Choisissez un décor dans la liste [Background Illustration Pattern] située du côté gauche, puis sélectionnez [OK]. Une fois le décor sélectionné, un aperçu vous en est fourni dans la partie droite de la fenêtre. Le décor de la fenêtre RICOH Gate est modi?é. Modi?cation de l’aspect de RICOH Gate • Vous pouvez également af?cher le menu RICOH Gate en cliquant sur l’icône RICOH Gate de la barre des tâches avec le bouton droit de la souris. Remarque60 Vous pouvez retrouver le numéro de version du logiciel RICOH Gate que vous utilisez. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Le menu RICOH Gate est af?ché. 2 Sélectionnez [About the RICOH Gate…]. La boîte de dialogue [RICOH Gate Version information] est af?chée. 3 Sélectionnez [OK]. Af?chage du numéro de version de RICOH Gate À propos du code ASCII Le code ASCII dé?nit un jeu de caractères informatiques permettant l’échange de messages et de données entre différents types d’ordinateurs. Outre les lettres majuscules et minuscules non accentuées [A-Z] et [a-z], les chiffres [0-9] et des signes et symboles tels que (+-*/$%&!], etc., le code ASCII comprend des codes de contrôles comme Retour chariot et Tabulation. Comme il s’agit d’un code conçu aux ÉtatsUnis, les caractères accentués et autres caractères spéciaux n’y ?gurent pas. Néanmoins, son utilisation quasi universel sur les micro-ordinateurs permet d’assurer des échanges aisés entre ordinateurs. • Vous pouvez également af?cher le menu RICOH Gate en cliquant sur l’icône RICOH Gate de la barre des tâches avec le bouton droit de la souris. Remarque Conseils61 Appendice Appendice Cette section explique comment se servir des ?chiers de séquence vidéo (AVI) ?lmés avec l’appareil photo sous PowerPoint, et détaille les menus du logiciel RICOH Gate et les caractéristiques des ?chiers et des logiciels utilisés. Utilisation des séquences vidéo prises avec l’appareil Vous pouvez convertir les ?chiers de séquence vidéo provenant de l’appareil photo à l’aide d’un logiciel de retouche vidéo avant des les enregistrer ; vous pourrez ainsi les visionner grâce au Lecteur Windows Media et les utiliser dans d’autres applications Windows (PowerPoint, etc.). Les ?chiers AVI (MotionJPEG) peuvent être convertis en ?chiers MPEG à l’aide du logiciel MGI VideoWave qui se trouve sur le CD-ROM fourni. Voir “Examen du contenu du CD-ROM (View CD-ROM)” (p.9). Vous pouvez transmettre les séquences vidéo ?lmées avec l’appareil au logiciel MGI VideoWave, puis les enregistrer au format vidéo MPEG. Voir “Transmission automatique des ?chiers à l’aide de la touche START” (p.36). Voir “Enregistrement des données à l’aide des boutons Enregistrer” (p.27). 1 Lancez le logiciel MGI VideoWave puis importez le ?chier de séquence vidéo voulu. Ajoutez la séquence vidéo à la bibliothèque de séquences puis, par un glisser-déposer, placez-le sur la zone du scénario. Conversion des ?chiers à l’aide de MGI VideoWave62 2 Cliquez sur le bouton (bouton Produire une vidéo) de la barre d’outils. 3 Sélectionnez [Video in a WindowMPEG1] dans le modèle voulu et indiquez l’emplacement et le nom du fichier. 3Faites glisser le fichier et déposez-le 2Le fichier ajouté à la bibliothèque est affiché dans cette liste. 1Cliquez sur  pour afficher le menu. Sélectionnez [Add files...] puis indiquez le63 Appendice La lecture débute et la séquence s’af?che à l’écran.. • La dé?nition des images des séquences vidéo prises avec cette appareil est de 320 × 240. Même si vous sélectionnez une dé?nition supérieure, la qualité d’image ne s’en trouvera pas améliorée. • Pour plus de précisions sur les fonctions et le mode d’emploi du logiciel MGI VideoWave, consultez le manuel PDF fourni ou l’Aide en ligne. 1Cliquez sur  pour sélectionner une [Video in a Window - MPEG1] dans les modèles, puis cliquez sur [Next (Suivant)]. 2Indiquez l’emplacement et le nom du fichier à enregistrer. 3Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lancer la production. Remarque64 Utilisation du Caplio RR10 comme Webcam Vous pouvez vous servir de l’appareil photo comme d’une webcam, c’est-à-dire une caméra de capture vidéo. C’est MGI VideoWave, qui se trouve sur le CD-ROM fourni avec l’appareil, qui sera utilisé pour cela et dont le fonctionnement est expliqué ci-après. Pour pouvoir utiliser la fonction de capture vidéo, les préparatifs suivants doivent être effectués à l’aide du logiciel MGI VideoWave. 1 Introduisez le CD-ROM fourni avec l’appareil dans le lecteur de CD-ROM, puis installez le pilote USB, le pilote vidéo et MGI VideoWave. • Si vous avez effectué une installation standard des logiciels Caplio RR10, le pilote USB est déjà installé. • Sélectionnez [View CD-ROM] puis installez MGI VideoWave depuis le dossier MGI. Voir “Examen du contenu du CD-ROM (View CD-ROM)” (p.9). Voir “Pour installer les logiciels” (p.11). Voir “Pour installer uniquement le logiciel de votre choix” (p.13). Avant d’utiliser la fonction de capture vidéo Remarque65 Appendice 2 Connectez l’adaptateur secteur à la RICOH BASE, puis connectez cette dernière à l’ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. 3 Raccordez le berceau à la RICOH BASE. 4 Placez le bouton rotatif de mode de l’appareil sur (séquence vidéo) puis posez l’appareil sur la RICOH BASE. 5 Appuyez sur la touche START de la RICOH BASE. 6 Cadrez votre sujet à l’aide de l’appareil et affinez la direction et l’angle de prise de vue. • Retirez l’appareil de la RICOH BASE avant de le mettre hors tension. Important66 1 Lancez MGI VideoWave. L’écran de bienvenue de MGI VideoWave est affiché. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Capturer du sélecteur de mode situé à gauche de l’écran virtuel. L’image visée par l’appareil photo est affichée à l’écran virtuel. • Si l’appareil n’a pas été placé en mode webcam, le bouton Capture est estompé et ne peut être utilisé. Dans ce cas, véri?ez si les pilotes USB et Vidéo ont bien été installés et si l’appareil photo est bien raccordé à l’ordinateur. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton voulu sous le libellé [Start Capture] du panneau Capture. [Video + Audio] L’image et le son sont enregistrés simultanément. Seules les images (sans son) sont envoyées par l’appareil (Caplio RR10). Pour enregistrer du son, vous aurez besoin d’un microphone que vous devrez vous procurer par ailleurs. [Video] Seule l’image est enregistrée. [Audio] Seul le son est enregistré. Seules les images (sans son) sont envoyées par l’appareil (Caplio RR10). Vous aurez besoin d’un microphone stéréo, non fourni. Capture d’images vidéo Remarque67 Appendice Le bouton prend le libellé [Cancel] pendant la capture vidéo. Si vous cliquez sur [Stop], la capture vidéo s’interrompt et l’image est enregistrée dans la bibliothèque ou dans le dossier, selon le paramétrage effectué dans la boîte de dialogue [Capture Setting]. Si l’ordinateur était auparavant connecté à un autre périphérique de capture vidéo, le paramétrage de capture de MGI VideoWave doit être modi?é pour prendre en compte l’appareil photo (Caplio RR10). La boîte de dialogue [Capture Settings] permet aussi de paramétrer l’enregistrement dans la bibliothèque et dans le répertoire. Si le périphérique indiqué dans [Capture Settings] n’est pas le périphérique réellement connecté, il n’est pas possible de capturer des images vidéo. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton [Settings…] du panneau Capture. La boîte de dialogue [Capture Settings] apparaît. 2 Cliquez sur l’onglet [Source], puis sélectionnez [Caplio RR10 Video for Modi?cation des paramètres de capture68 Windows] dans la liste des périphériques de capture vidéo. Lorsque vous cliquez ensuite sur le bouton [Preferences...], la boîte de dialogue [Capture Preferences...] est affichée et vous pouvez spécifier si vous voulez que l’image soit enregistrée dans la bibliothèque ou dans le répertoire.69 Appendice Dépannage Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement, procédez comme indiquez ci-après. Procédez en suivant les instructions ci-dessous dans l’ordre et véri?ez que les préparatifs requis ont bien été effectués.  Adaptateur secteur • L’adaptateur est-il correctement raccordé à l’appareil photo ou à la RICOH BASE? • Est-il bien branché dans une prise secteur?  Câble de liaison USB • Le câble USB est-il correctement raccordé à l’appareil photo ou à la RICOH BASE? • Est-il bien branché sur le port USB de l’ordinateur?  Appareil photo • Si vous utilisez la RICOH BASE, l’appareil photo est-il correctement raccordé? • Si l’appareil est bien raccordé au PC, est-il bien sous tension? • Le bouton rotatif de mode de l’appareil est-il placé sur une autre position que (séquence vidéo) Voir “Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur” (p.21).  Installation • L’installation des logiciels Caplio RR10 a-t-elle bien été effectuée? Si les résultats des étapes 1 et 2 ci-dessus sont normaux et si l’appareil ne fonctionne toujours pas correctement, essayez les solutions suivantes.  Solution 1 1 Supprimez les logiciels Caplio RR10. Voir “Désinstallation des logiciels” (p.15). 2 Réinstallez les logiciels Caplio RR10. Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement 1. Vérifiez les connexions et branchements 2. Vérification de l’installation 3. Solutions70 Voir “Pour installer les logiciels Caplio RR10” (p.11). 3 Véri?ez maintenant si l’appareil photo fonctionne normalement.  Solution 2 Si l’appareil ne fonctionne toujours pas correctement après application de la solution 1, procédez comme suit. 1 Supprimez les logiciels pilotes. Voir “Suppression des pilotes” (p.70). 2 Supprimez les logiciels Caplio RR10. Voir “Désinstallation des logiciels” (p.15). 3 Réinstallez les logiciels Caplio RR10. Voir “Pour installer les logiciels Caplio RR10” (p.11). Si le pilote USB (USB Driver) ou le pilote Vidéo (Video Driver) ne fonctionnent pas normalement, procédez comme indiqué cidessous pour supprimer le pilote en cause. • Quittez toutes les applications actives et enregistrez les données qui doivent l’être avant de désinstaller les logiciels. • Déconnectez tout autre périphérique USB et les périphériques « Plug and Play » raccordés à l’ordinateur.  Suppression du pilote USB 1 Raccordez l’appareil photo au microordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un micro-ordinateur” (p.19). Voir “Connexion de l’appareil à un micro-ordinateur” (p.21). 2 Allumez le PC et démarrez Windows. 3 Mettez l’appareil sous tension. 4 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] dans la Barre des tâches de Windows. 5 Pointez sur [Paramètres] puis cliquez sur [Panneau de configuration]. Le Panneau de configuration est affiché. Suppression des pilotes Important Important71 Appendice 6 Double-cliquez sur l’icône [Système]. La boîte de dialogue [Propriétés Système] apparaît. • Les éléments d’interface utilisateur fournis dans ces exemple sont ceux de Windows 98. • La marche à suivre est la même sous Windows 98SE et sous Windows Me. • Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez l’onglet [Matériel] de la boîte de dialogue [Propriétés Système], puis cliquez sur le bouton [Gestionnaire de périphériques]. 7 Cliquez sur l’onglet [Gestionnaire de périphériques]. 8 Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) situé à gauche du libellé [Contrôleurs de bus USB]. 9 Sélectionnez [Caplio RR10] puis cliquez sur [Supprimer]. Remarque • Si le pilote USB de l’appareil n’est pas correctement identi?é et si ce dernier est considéré comme un périphérique non identi?é, un point d’exclamation [!] apparaît à la gauche du nom du périphérique. Supprimez tous les périphériques non identi?és [!]. Remarque72 Une demande de confirmation est affichée. 10 Cliquez sur [OK].  Suppression du pilote Vidéo 1 Allumez le PC et démarrez Windows. 2 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] dans la Barre des tâches de Windows. 3 Pointez sur [Paramètres] puis cliquez sur [Panneau de configuration]. Le Panneau de configuration est affiché. 4 Double-cliquez sur l’icône [Multimédia]. La boîte de dialogue [Propriétés de Multimédia] apparaît. • Les éléments d’interface utilisateur fournis dans ces exemple sont ceux de Windows 98. • La marche à suivre est la même sous Windows 98SE et sous Windows Me (icône) [Sons est multimédia]. Remarque73 Appendice • Sous Windows2000, double-cliquez sur l’icône [Sons est multimédia] puis sélectionnez l’onglet [Matériel] de la boîte de dialogue [Propriétés de Sons et multimédia]. Supprimez les entrées CPL10JPG [JPEG], CPL10JPG [MPEG] et Caplio RR10 for Windows. 5 Cliquez sur l’onglet [Périphériques]. 6 Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) situé à gauche du libellé [Codecs de compression vidéo]. 7 Sélectionnez [CPL10JPG [JPEG]] et [CPL10JPG [MPEG]], puis cliquez sur le bouton [Propriétés]. L’écran de propriétés du codec sélectionné apparaît. 8 Cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer]. La boîte de dialogue [Propriétés de Multimédia] s’affiche à nouveau à l’écran. 9 Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) situé à gauche du libellé [Périphériques de capture vidéo]. 10 Sélectionnez [Caplio RR10 for Windows] puis cliquez sur le bouton [Propriétés]. L’écran de propriétés du périphérique sélectionné apparaît. 11 Cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer].74 Menus de RICOH Gate Options Setting (Paramétrage des options) Cette option sert à activer ou à désactiver l’Enregistrement automatique par la touche START de la RICOH BASE, et à ?xer la taille d’une image envoyée en pièce jointe grâce au bouton Envoi de RICOH Gate. Set Background Illustration (Décor de la fenêtre RICOH Gate) Cette option permet de changer l’image d’arrière-plan de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate. Camera Property (Informations sur l’appareil) Cette option permet d’obtenir des informations sur l’appareil photo connecté à l’ordinateur. About the RICOH Gate (À propos de RICOH Gate) Cette option fournit des explications sur le logiciel RICOH Gate et indique le numéro de la version utilisée. Exit RICOH Gate (Quitter RICOH Gate) Cette option sert à quitter RICOH Gate. Vous pouvez paramétrer la fonction des boutons Enregistrer 1, Enregistrer 2, Transmettre, Imprimer, Envoi, Application 1 et Application 2. Menus de RICOH Gate Menu de paramétrage de chaque bouton75 Appendice Index A Adaptateur secteur ....................... 19 Affichage de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate .............................................. 23 Aide des boutons Enregistrer ....... 27 Aide du bouton Transférer ............ 38 Aspect de RICOH Gate ................ 59 B BASE RICOH................................. 19 Bouton Application........................ 26 Bouton Enregistrer ........................ 25 Bouton Envoyer message ....... 25, 49 Bouton Éteindre l’appareil....... 26, 58 Bouton Icône................................. 26 Bouton Imprimer Index ................. 25 Bouton MENU ............................... 25 Bouton Quitter ............................... 26 Bouton Transférer ................... 25, 38 C Câble USB Branchement.............................. 19 Déconnexion .............................. 22 Camera Property........................... 58 Connecteur DIGITAL (AV/USB) .... 19 Connexion Appareil à un micro-ordinateur..... 21 BASE RICOH à un ordinateur....... 19 D Définition de l’application.............. 55 Dialogue d’envoi de message ...... 51 Dialogue de modification de la taille d’image ......................................... 33 Dialogue de paramétrage d’envoi de message........................................ 53 Dialogue de paramétrage de l’enregistrement............................. 31 Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression d’index ...................... 47 Dialogue de paramétrage de Transfert ........................................ 40 Dialogue de paramétrage des options........................................... 35 Dialogue de sélection d’un dossier........................................... 34 Dialogue de sélection de l’application à lancer ......................................... 56 Dialogue de Transfert.................... 40 E Enregistrement automatique ......... 36 Environnement système RICOH Gate ............................... 10 Envoi d’un message...................... 49 F Fenêtre de RICOH Gate à l’état d’icône........................................... 23 Fermeture de RICOH Gate............ 23 Fichier MP3 ................................... 43 I Icône de RICOH Gate ................... 19 Impression d’une planche index.............................................. 44 Informations relatives à l’appareil........................................ 58 Index alphabétique76 Instruction Personnalisée............................. 13 QuickTime.................................. 14 Standard.................................... 13 L Lancement de l’application........... 57 Lancement de RICOH Gate.......... 24 Logiciel de messagerie compatible MAPI.............................................. 49 Logiciels Caplio RR10................... 11 M MGI VideoWave .............................. 9 MusicMatch JUKEBOX ................... 9 P Paramétrage de l’impression d’index .......................................... 45 Paramétrage de la fonction d’Enregistrement automatique...... 34 Paramétrage de transfert .............. 41 Paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer..................................... 28 Paramétrage du bouton Envoyer message ....................................... 51 Pilote TWAIN ................................... 8 Pilote USB ....................................... 8 Planche index ............................... 44 Port USB........................................ 19 Q QuickTime ....................................... 9 Quitter RICOH Gate ...................... 24 R RICOH BASE................................. 19 RICOH Gate .................................... 8 T Taille maximale des messages en envoi.............................................. 54 Touche Démarrer .......................... 21 Touche START ........................20, 36 Transfert ........................................ 38 Transmission automatique ............ 36 V Version de RICOH Gate ................ 60Centres techniques Ricoh Ricoh company., Ltd. 3-2-3, Shin-yokohama Kohoku-ku, Yokohama-shi 222-8530, Japan http://www.ricoh.co.jp/r_dc Ricoh Factory Service Center 3235 Sunrise Blvd., Suite2 Rancho Cordova, CA 95742 http://www.ricohzone.com/ RICOH EUROPE B.V. (PMMC EUROPE) Oberrather Straße 6, D-40472 Düsseldolf, Germany http://www.ricohpmmc.com RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK) Ricoh House, 1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham, Middlesex, TW13 7HG, England RICOH FRANCE S.A. (PMMC FRANCE) 383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle – BP 307-931-13 Clamart Cédex, France RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN) Av. Litoral Mar, 12-14, 08005 Barcelona, Spain RICOH EUROPE B.V. (PMMC BENELUX) Koolhovenlaan 35, 1119 NB Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands Ricoh Photo Products (Asia), Ltd. Unit D, E & F 24/F., China Overseas Building 139 Hennessy Road, Wan Chai Hong Kong Ricoh Australia Pty. Ltd. 8 Rodborough Road Frenchs Forrest, N.S.W. 2086 Australia http://www.ricoh.com.au RICOH Gate pour Macintosh Mode d’emploi Français Pour garantir un bon fonctionnement de ce produit, lisez attentivement ce manuel avant de vous servir de l’appareil. Conservez ce mode d’emploi en lieu sûr pour le retrouver en cas de besoin.Introduction Nous vous remercions d’avoir acheté un produit Ricoh. Ce mode d’emploi explique comment se servir de ce produit et signale les précautions à prendre. Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats, veuillez le lire attentivement avant d’utiliser le produit. Conservez ce mode d’emploi en lieu sûr pour le retrouver en cas de besoin. Ricoh Co., Ltd. • Il est interdit de reproduire tout ou partie de cette publication sans l’autorisation écrite préalable de Ricoh. © 2001 Ricoh Co. Ltd. • Ricoh se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de cette publication sans préavis. • Un soin considérable a été apporté à la réalisation de ce mode d’emploi. Si, toutefois, vous vous posez des questions sur certains des points qui y ont sont abordés, ou si vous détectez des erreurs ou des inexactitudes, veuillez nous contacter à l’adresse figurant au dos du mode d’emploi. Apple, Macintosh, Mac OS et QuickTime sont des marques déposées par Apple Computer Inc. aux ÉtatsUnis et dans d’autres pays. Tous les autres noms de sociétés et de produits mentionnés ici sont la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Important • Veillez à effectuer une sauvegarde de vos données importantes. En cas de fausse manipulation de votre part ou d’une panne du produit, vous pourriez en effet perdre des données. • Ricoh Co. Ltd. n’est pas responsable des dommages causés par la perte des données créées avec ce produit. • Ricoh Co. Ltd. n’est pas plus responsable des dommages entraînés par une panne du produit, la perte de texte ou de données, ni d’autres dommages issus éventuellement de l’utilisation du produit. Copyright Toute reproduction ou altération de documents, magazines, morceaux de musique et autres contenus protégés par copyright, en dehors d’un usage strictement personnel, familial ou cantonné à un objet limité du même ordre est strictement interdite sauf en cas d’autorisation écrite du détenteur du copyright.1 Possibilités offertes par l’utilisation de ces logiciels Enregistrer des photos sur le Macintosh à l’aide d’une seule touche Vous pouvez actionner la touche « Start » de la RICOH BASE pour transférer des photos sur votre Macintosh. Télécharger des images, des notes vocales, des séquences vidéo et transférer des ?chiers vers l’appareil photo En raccordant l’appareil photo au Macintosh, vous pouvez transmettre des images, des notes vocales et des séquences vidéo vers le Macintosh et, dans l’autre sens, transférer (?chier MP3) des images, des notes vocales (?chiers WAV) et des séquences vidéo du Macintosh (?chier AVI) vers l’appareil. Choisir le format des images transmises par l’appareil Vous pouvez spéci?er le format des ?chiers images (JPEG, PICT, TIFF ou PNG) selon vos besoins avant de les exporter de l’appareil. Modi?er la taille des images transmises par l’appareil Vous pouvez modi?er la taille des ?chiers images avant de les exporter de l’appareil.2 Sommaire Possibilités offertes par l’utilisation de ces logiciels.....................................1 Consultation du manuel................................................................................4 Chapitre 1 Installation des logiciels.................................................. 7 Description des logiciels ..............................................................................7 Environnement système requis...................................................................10 Installation du logiciel .................................................................................11 Pour installer les logiciels........................................................................................ 11 Désinstallation des logiciels.................................................................................... 15 Chapitre 2 Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh...................... 17 Branchement du câble USB.......................................................................17 Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un Macintosh ...................................................... 17 Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh ................................................................ 19 Déconnexion du câble USB .......................................................................20 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate ............................................. 21 Lancement et fermeture de RICOH Gate ...................................................21 Démarrage de RICOH Gate.................................................................................... 21 Quitter RICOH Gate ................................................................................................ 21 Fermeture de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate ................................................................ 22 Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate.......................................................23 Fonctions des boutons de RICOH Gate ................................................................. 23 Menu de RICOH Gate............................................................................................. 24 Enregistrement de données de l’appareil photo sur le Macintosh.............25 Enregistrement des données à l’aide des boutons Enregistrer .............................. 25 Modification du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer .......................................... 26 Modification du paramétrage de la touche START................................................. 29 Transmission automatique des fichiers à l’aide de la touche START ....................................................................... 31 Envoi de fichiers du Macintosh vers l’appareil photo.................................32 Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer................................................................... 32 Modification du paramétrage du bouton Transférer ............................................... 34 Impression d’une planche index ................................................................38 Impression d’une planche index............................................................................. 38 Modification des réglages d’impression ................................................................. 39 Lancement d’une application .....................................................................41 Définition de l’application à lancer.......................................................................... 41 Lancement de l’application..................................................................................... 42 Autres fonctions ..........................................................................................433 Mise hors tension de l’appareil ............................................................................... 43 Affichage et modification des Informations relatives à l’appareil ........................... 43 Modification de l’aspect de RICOH Gate ............................................................... 44 Affichage du numéro de version de RICOH Gate .................................................. 44 Appendice............................................................................................ 45 Utilisation du Caplio RR10 comme Web cam.............................................45 Dépannage.................................................................................................48 Menus .........................................................................................................49 Menu File (Fichier) .................................................................................................. 49 Menu de configuration « RICOH Gate Setup » ...................................................... 49 Menu Help (Aide) .................................................................................................... 49 Menu de paramétrage de chaque bouton.............................................................. 49 Index ...........................................................................................................50 Index alphabétique ................................................................................................. 50 Installation de logiciels sélectionnés.............................................................................14 Pour transférer automatiquement des images à l’aide de la touche START . ..............19 Transfert d’un ?chier MP3.............................................................................................37 À propos du code ASCII...............................................................................................44 Conseils4 Consultation du manuel Cette section présente le contenu de chaque manuel et indique quels chapitres lire en priorité dans ce manuel, ainsi que la signi?cation des symboles spéciaux utilisés.  Rôle des différents manuels fournis Pour les utilisateurs de Macintosh RICOH Gate pour Macintosh (le présent manuel) Lisez ce manuel en premier m Ce manuel explique comment installer les logiciels requis, comment raccorder l’appareil photo au Macintosh, et comment utiliser RICOH Gate pour transférer des ?chiers entre l’appareil et l’ordinateur. Pour les utilisateurs de Windows RICOH Gate pour Windows m Ce manuel explique comment installer les logiciels requis, comment raccorder l’appareil photo au PC, et comment utiliser RICOH Gate pour transférer des ?chiers entre l’appareil et l’ordinateur. Fonctionnement de l’appareil Mode d’emploi de l’appareil photo Caplio RR10 (Appareil photo numérique) m Ce manuel explique comment se servir de l’appareil, des préparatifs nécessaires avant utilisation aux instructions de prise de vue et de relecture des ?chiers.5  Comment lire le manuel À lire sans faute Pour installer les logiciels nécessaires m Chapitre 1 Installation des logiciels Pour pouvoir utiliser la fonctionnalité RICOH Gate, vous devez installer les logiciels. Ce chapitre décrit les logiciels qui se trouvent sur le CD-ROM fourni avec l’appareil. Pour connecter l’appareil à un Macintosh m Chapitre 2 Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh Ce chapitre explique comment connecter l’appareil photographique à un Macintosh. Pour utiliser le logiciel RICOH Gate m Chapitre 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Vous pouvez transmettre des photos vers le Macintosh ou à l’inverse transférer des images du Macintosh vers l’appareil. Vous pouvez également obtenir une « planche index » des photos stockées dans l’appareil. À lire si nécessaire Pour mieux connaître les menus et option, les caractéristiques techniques, etc. m Appendice Vous pouvez consulter les menus RICOH Gate.6  Signi?cation des symboles La signi?cation des symboles utilisés dans ce manuel est précisée ci-après. Cette « étiquette » signale des recommandations ou des contraintes d’utilisation qui requièrent votre attention. Cette autre étiquette signale une explication complémentaire sur l’opération concernée ou un point d’information qu’il est bon de connaître. m Ce symbole de renvoi précède la page relative à la fonction ou à l’opération à laquelle il est fait référence. Ce libellé signale des informations complémentaires utiles. Les illustrations d’écrans proposées dans ce manuel ont été prises sous MacOS9. Les exemples d’af?chages de RICOH Gate ont été copiés avec un fond d’écran par défaut (Panneau de con?guration/Af?chage/Arrière-plan). Dans ce manuel, les termes « appareil photo » ou « appareil » désignent le Caplio RR10. Important • Ne branchez et ne débranchez l’adaptateur secteur que lorsque l’appareil est hors tension ou qu’aucun transfert n’est en cours. Important Remarque • Si l’appareil photo n’est pas correctement raccordé au Macintosh, un message s’af?che pour vous le signaler. Véri?ez la connexion. Remarque Menu:[File]?[Quit] “Environnement système requis” (p.10) Texte de référence dans ce manuel Option à sélectionner lors de l’utilisation du menu Conseils7 1 Installation des logiciels Chapitre Installation des logiciels Ce chapitre explique les préparatifs nécessaires à l’utilisation des logiciels fournis, précise l’environnement système requis, décrit le processus d’installation de RICOH Gate, etc. Description des logiciels L’écran ci-dessous s’af?che lorsque le CD-ROM est introduit dans le lecteur. 18  Logiciels Caplio RR10 Ouvrez ce CD-ROM qui contient le programme d’installation [Caplio RR10 Software]. Pour installer les logiciels énumérés ci-dessous, lancez le programme d’installation. Voir "Installation du logiciel" (p.11). Logiciel Description RICOH Gate Ce logiciel vous permet de transmettre les photos prises avec l’appareil vers le Macintosh ou, à l’inverse, de transférer des ?chiers images du Macintosh vers l’appareil photo. RICOH Gate vous permet également d’utiliser d’autres applications susceptibles de dialoguer avec l’appareil. Voir "Utilisation de RICOH Gate" (p.21). Pilote TWAIN Ce logiciel permet d’importer des photos qui se trouvent dans l’appareil directement depuis une application compatible TWAIN. Pilote USB En installant le pilote USB, vous pouvez raccorder l’appareil photo à un Macintosh à l’aide d’une liaison USB et utilisez RICOH Gate, TWAIN Driver et Video Driver. Si vous choisissez l’installation standard, le pilote USB est automatiquement installé. Si vous choisissez l’installation personnalisée, le pilote USB est automatiquement installé si vous choisissez d’installer RICOH Gate, le pilote TWAIN ou le pilote Vidéo. Video Driver Ce logiciel est requis pour utiliser l’appareil comme une web cam (périphérique de saisie vidéo du Macintosh).9 1 Installation des logiciels  Examen du contenu du CD-ROM (View CD-ROM) Cliquez sur ce bouton pour af?cher le contenu des dossiers de logiciels énumérés ci-dessous. Pour installer le logiciel de votre choix, cliquez sur Setup.exe. • Si vous vous posez des questions sur les logiciels présentés cidessus, consultez le ?chier ReadMe et le Help relatifs au logiciel concerné avant de contacter le service après vente Ricoh. Logiciel Description Dossier QuickTime QuickTime 4 Ce dossier contient QuickTime 4.1.2. Véri?ez la version de QuickTime dont vous disposez déjà avant de décider ou non d’installer ce logiciel. Dossier MusicMatch MusicMatch JUKEBOX Ce dossier contient le logiciel [MusicMatch JUKEBOX]. Ce logiciel permet de convertir les CD audio et ?chiers WAV en ?chiers MP3 (?chiers son compressés). Vous avez en effet la possibilité de transférer des ?chiers MP3 dans l’appareil photo et de les écouter sur ce dernier. (Utilisez des écouteurs stéréo, disponibles dans le commerce.) • MP3 désigne le standard international de compression de son MPEG-1 AudioLayer3. Les données peuvent être compressées jusqu’à un dixième seulement de leur volume d’origine. • Pour plus de précisions, consultez le Help du logiciel. Dossier MGI MGI PhotoSuite Ce dossier contient le logiciel MGI PhotoSuite. Ce dossier contient le logiciel MGI PhotoSuite. Il s’agit d’un logiciel évolué de retouche photographique qui dispose de nombreuses options de lecture multimédia et de manipulation des images. Remarque Remarque10 Environnement système requis L’environnement détaillé ci-après est requis pour pouvoir utiliser RICOH Gate. • QuickTime 4.1.2 ou ultérieur est requis pour ouvrir une photo prise en mode Texte (TIFF MMR) avec l’appareil photo numérique Ricoh. • Si vous manipulez des ?chiers très volumineux, par exemple des séquences vidéo ou des photos non compressées, allouez suf?samment de mémoire à l’application RICOH Gate. Système d’exploitation MacOS 8.6 à 9.1 Macintosh Tout Macintosh équipé d’un port USB Capacité mémoire 96 Mo ou plus (128 Mo ou plus recommandés) Mémoire requise 16 Mo ou plus de mémoire d’application sans recours à l’utilitaire de compression de mémoire Espace disque requis à l’installation 10 Mo ou plus (à l’installation) 100 Mo ou plus (à l’utilisation) Dé?nition d’af?chage 640 × 480 pixels ou plus (800 x 600 ou plus recommandée) Couleurs af?chables 256 ou plus (32 000 ou plus recommandé) Lecteur de CDROM Lecteur de CD-ROM utilisable avec le Macintosh décrit ci-dessus Port USB Port USB utilisable sur le Macintosh décrit cidessus Important Remarque11 1 Installation des logiciels Installation du logiciel Cette section explique comment installer les logiciels requis, notamment RICOH Gate et le pilote USB pour faire communiquer l’appareil photo et le Macintosh, et QuickTime 4.0.  Pour installer les logiciels Caplio RR10 Quittez toutes les autres applications ouvertes avant de lancer l’installation des logiciels. • Cette section explique la procédure d’installation standard. Les utilisateurs familiers des ordinateurs et des appareils photo numériques peuvent choisir individuellement les logiciels à installer. • Pour contrôler quels logiciels sont installés lors de cette procédure, consultez la section Voir "Logiciels Caplio RR10" (p.8). 1 Allumez le Macintosh. 2 Introduisez le CD-ROM fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM du Macintosh. L’icône du CD-ROM s’af?che sur le bureau et sa fenêtre s’ouvre. 3 Double-cliquez sur l’icône du programme d’installation. Le programme d’installation démarre et son écran de bienvenue s’af?che. Pour installer les logiciels Remarque12 4 Cliquez sur [Caplio RR10 Software]. 5 Sélectionnez [Continuer]. L’écran d’installation est af?ché. 6 Sélectionnez [Installation Standard] puis cliquez sur [Installation Personnalisée]. 1 Installation Standard Le logiciel RICOH Gate et le pilote USB seront automatiquement installés. 2 Installation Personnalisée Seuls le ou les logiciels que vous sélectionnerez explicitement seront installés. Cochez le ou les logiciels que vous voulez installer. 1 213 1 Installation des logiciels • Lorsque vous sélectionnez [Installation Personnalisée], l’écran de sélection des différents logiciels est af?ché. Choisissez le logiciel que vous voulez installer puis sélectionnez [Installer]. Voir "Installation de logiciels sélectionnés" (p.14) La fenêtre [Choix d’un dossier] apparaît. 7 Sélectionnez le dossier voulu, puis sélectionnez [Choix]. Si vous voulez créer un nouveau dossier dans lequel installer les logiciels, sélectionnez [Nouveau]. Un message s’af?che pour vous signaler que le Macintosh devra être redémarré à la ?n de l’installation. 8 Sélectionnez [Oui]. L’installation s’effectue et lorsqu’elle est terminée, le message mentionné ci-dessus est af?ché. 9 Sélectionnez [Redémarrer]. Le Macintosh redémarre. Si vous ne souhaitez pas redémarrer votre ordinateur immédiatement, sélectionnez [Quitter]; sinon, sélectionnez [Continuer]. Remarque • Le nom par défaut du dossier d’installation est Caplio RR10 Software. Remarque14  Pour installer QuickTime QuickTime 4.1.2 ou une version plus est nécessaire pour le mode Text (TIFF-MMR) enregistrée avec l’appareil photo. 1 Allumez le Macintosh. 2 Introduisez le CD-ROM fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de l’ordinateur. L’icône du CD-ROM s’af?che sur le bureau et sa fenêtre s’ouvre. 3 Ouvrez le dossier [QuickTime] du CDROM. 4 Ouvrez le dossier [QuickTime]. 5 Dans le dossier [QuickTime Installer], double-cliquez sur l’icône [QuickTime Installer]. L’installation de QuickTime débute. 6 Suivez les instructions af?chées à l’écran. 7 Une fois l’installation terminée, redémarrez le Macintosh. Installation de logiciels sélectionnés Si vous sélectionnez [Installation Personnalisée] à l’étape 6, l’écran de sélection des différents logiciels est af?ché. Vous pouvez alors sélectionner le ou les logiciels que vous voulez installer. Conseils • Si QuickTime 4.1.2 ou ultérieur est déjà installé sur votre Macintosh, cette opération n’est pas nécessaire. Remarque15 1 Installation des logiciels • L’installation de QuickTime peut être incorrecte si une ancienne version de QuickTime est déjà active sur votre Macintosh. Si c’est le cas, supprimez l’ancienne version de QuickTime avant de procéder à l’installation. Pour supprimer les logiciels dont vous n’avez plus besoin de votre Macintosh, utilisez la fonction de glisser-déposer pour mettre ces ?chiers dans la Corbeille. Le nom des ?chiers et le dossier dans lequel ils sont installés sont les suivants. RICOH Gate Pilote TWAIN Pilote Vidéo • Le pilote Caplio RR10 USB Driver et Caplio RR10 PPC LIB sout requis si vous voulez pouvoir utiliser plusieurs logiciels, comme indiqué ci-dessus. Si , en désinstallant les logiciels dont vous ne voulez pas ou plus, vous supprimez aussi le pilote USB Driver, les autres logiciels ne peuvent plus fonctionner. Désinstallation des logiciels Nom du ?chier Dossier d’installation RICOH Gate Caplio RR10 Software RICOH Gate Alias Dossier Système : Ouverture au démarrage Caplio RR10 USB Driver Dossier Système : Extensions Caplio RR10 PPC LIB Dossier Système : Extensions Nom du ?chier Dossier d’installation Caplio RR10 TWAIN Dossier Système : Préférences : TWAIN Caplio RR10 USB Driver Dossier Système : Extensions Caplio RR10 PPC LIB Dossier Système : Extensions Nom du ?chier Dossier d’installation Caplio RR10 Vdig Dossier Système : Extensions Caplio RR10 USB Driver Dossier Système : Extensions Important • Le dossier Caplio RR10 Software est créé sur le disque que vous avez spéci?é au moment de son installation. Remarque Important1617 Chapitre Connexion de l appareil ’ à un Macintosh Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh 2 Ce chapitre explique comment raccorder l’appareil photo à un Macintosh de type Macintosh à l’aide du câble USB a?n de pouvoir transférer des ?chiers entre les deux machines. Branchement du câble USB Le câble USB peut être utilisé de deux façons: pour connecter la RICOH BASE au Macintosh, ou pour connecter l’appareil directement au Macintosh. Vous pouvez raccorder la RICOH BASE au Macintosh à l’aide du câble USB. 1 Allumez le Macintosh. Une fois le Bureau af?ché à l’écran, RICOH Gate est lancé automatiquement et sa fenêtre apparaît. 2 Raccordez l’adaptateur secteur à la RICOH BASE. 3 Raccordez le câble USB au connecteur DIGITAL (AV/USB) de la RICOH BASE Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un Macintosh 218 d’un côté et au port USB du Macintosh de l’autre. 4 Vérifiez que le bouton rotatif de mode de l’appareil n’est pas placé en position (séquence vidéo). Si c’est le cas, passez dans un autre mode. 5 Placez l’appareil photo sur la RICOH BASE. Le témoin lumineux de la RICOH BASE s’allume. 6 Appuyez sur la touche DÉMARRER/ START de la RICOH BASE. L’appareil est maintenant en mode Connexion à un micro-ordinateur. Voir “Démarrage de RICOH Gate” (p.21). • Si vous appuyez sur la touche DÉMARRER et que l’appareil est en mode Connexion à un ordinateur, il ne peut pas y avoir charge de la batterie lorsque l’appareil est placé sur la RICOH BASE. Mettez l’appareil hors tension pour que la charge débute. • La fenêtre RICOH Gate n’est pas utilisable lorsque le bouton rotatif de mode est placé sur (séquence vidéo) • Lorsque le bouton rotatif de mode est placé sur (séquence vidéo), l’appareil est automatiquement en mode Web cam. Voir “Utilisation du Caplio RR10 comme Web cam” (p.45). • Ne placez pas l’appareil photo sur la RICOH BASE si le convertisseur d’adaptateur secteur est encore raccordé à l’appareil. Important Remarque19 Connexion de l appareil ’ à un Macintosh 2 Vous pouvez raccorder l’appareil photo à un Macintosh à l’aide du câble USB. 1 Allumez le Macintosh. Une fois le Bureau af?ché à l’écran, RICOH Gate est lancé automatiquement et sa fenêtre apparaît. 2 Vérifiez que l’appareil photo est hors tension, puis raccordez-lui l’adaptateur secteur. 3 Raccordez le câble USB au connecteur DIGITAL (AV/USB) de l’appareil photo d’un côté et au port USB du Macintosh de l’autre. 4 Vérifiez que le bouton rotatif de mode de l’appareil n’est pas placé en position (séquence vidéo). Si c’est le cas, passez dans un autre mode. 5 Allumez l’appreil photo. L’appareil est maintenant en mode Connexion à un micro-ordinateur. Voir “Démarrage de RICOH Gate” (p.21). Pour transférer automatiquement des images à l’aide de la touche START . En raccordant la RICOH BASE a l’appreil photo et appuyant sur la touche START vous pouvez automatiquement transférer vers le Macintosh les photos prises avec l’appareil. Voir “Transmission automatique des ?chiers à l’aide de la touche START” (p.31). Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh Conseils • Si l’alimentation est coupée en cours de fonctionnement, l’appareil photo ou le Macintosh peuvent en souffrir. Il vous est donc recommandé, dans ce cas, d’éviter d’alimenter l’appareil par sa batterie et d’utiliser l’adaptateur secteur. Important20 Déconnexion du câble USB Pour débrancher le câble USB, appuyez des deux côtés du connecteur USB pour le déverrouiller, puis tirez dessus pour le sortir de sa prise. 1 Mettez l’appareil photo hors tension. 2 Appuyez sur les côtés du connecteur USB pour le déverrouiller, puis débranchez-le. • Le fait de tirer le connecteur sans appuyer sur ses boutons latéraux ou de tirer sur le câble pour le débrancher peut ne pas suf?re à retirer le connecteur de sa prise. Important21 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Chapitre Utilisation de RICOH Gate Ce chapitre explique comment utiliser le logiciel RICOH Gate. Ce logiciel vous permet d’enregistrer les photos prises avec l’appareil sur le Macintosh ou, à l’inverse, de transférer des ?chiers images du Macintosh vers l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez également imprimer les photos prises avec l’appareil. Lancement et fermeture de RICOH Gate Cette section explique comment démarrer et quitter RICOH Gate. Après installation de RICOH Gate, ce dernier démarre automatiquement une fois le Bureau du Macintosh af?ché. Pour relancer RICOH Gate après sa fermeture, procédez comme suit. 1 Double-cliquez sur l’icône du dossier dans lequel RICOH Gate est installé. 2 Double-cliquez sur l’icône de RICOH Gate. La fenêtre de RICOH Gate est af?chée. 1 Cliquez sur la case de fermeture de la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Menu: [File (Fichier)] ? [Quit (Quitter)] Voir “Menu File (Fichier)” (p.49). Démarrage de RICOH Gate Quitter RICOH Gate • Pour ne plus que RICOH Gate se lance automatiquement en ?n de démarrage du Macintosh, déplacez le ?chier RICOH Gate (Alias) qui se trouve dans le dossier « Ouverture au démarrage » dans un autre dossier. Remarque 322 Le logiciel RICOH Gate est déchargé de la mémoire. • Normalement, avec les applications Macintosh, un clic sur la case de fermeture entraîne uniquement la fermeture de la fenêtre principale de l’application, sans fermeture de l’application elle-même ; dans le cas de RICOH Gate, néanmoins, l’action sur la case de fermeture entraîne à la fois la fermeture de la fenêtre et celle du programme. Vous pouvez fermer la fenêtre RICOH Gate en ne laissant que sa barre de titre à l’écran. 1 Cliquez sur la case de masquage de la fenêtre RICOH Gate. La fenêtre RICOH Gate disparaît, en ne laissant que sa barre de titre à l’écran. 2 Pour afficher à nouveau la fenêtre, cliquez à nouveau sur sa case de masquage. Fermeture de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate Remarque23 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate La fenêtre RICOH Gate contient les boutons et menus suivants, qui vous permettent de sélectionner les fonctions proposées. 1 Boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2 Ces boutons permettent d’enregistrer des photos de l’appareil sur le Macintosh auquel il est raccordé. L’enregistrement s’effectue sur la base du paramétrage prédé?ni en ce qui concerne le format du ?chier, l’emplacement et le traitement avant enregistrement. Voir “Enregistrement des données à l’aide des boutons Enregistrer” (p.25). 2 Bouton Transférer Ce bouton sert à envoyer à l’appareil photo des images se trouvant sur le Macintosh et à écrire sur le support de stockage de l’appareil. Voir “Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer” (p.32). 3 Bouton Imprimer Index Ce bouton permet d’imprimer une « planche index » des photos via le Macintosh. L’impression s’effectue sur la base du paramétrage prédé?ni en ce qui concerne le dossier, la mise en page, le type de données images à imprimer, etc. Voir “Impression d’une planche index” (p.38). 4 Bouton Application 1 et Application 2 Ce bouton permet de lancer une application sélectionnée. Voir “Lancement de l’application” (p.42). 5 Case de fermeture Cette case permet de quitter RICOH Gate. Voir “Quitter RICOH Gate” (p.21). 6 Case de masquage Cette case permet de masquer la fenêtre RICOH Gate tout en laissant sa barre de titre à l’écran. Fonctions des boutons de RICOH Gate 6 5 1 3 7 2 424 Voir “Fermeture de la fenêtre de RICOH Gate” (p.22). 7 Bouton Éteindre l’appareil Ce bouton permet de mettre hors tension l’appareil photo connecté au Macintoshdu Macintosh. Voir “Mise hors tension de l’appareil” (p.43). • En cliquant sur les boutons Enregistrer 1, Enregistrer 2, Transférer, Imprimer index, Application 1 ou Application 2 tout en appuyant sur la touche Ctrl, vous avez accès à leur zone de dialogue de paramétrage respective. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26). Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer” (p.34). Voir “Modi?cation des réglages d’impression” (p.39). Voir “Dé?nition de l’application à lancer” (p.41). Lorsque la fenêtre RICOH Gate est active, les menus RICOH Gate sont af?chés sur la barre de titre. 1 Menu de con?guration «RICOH Gate Setup» Ce menu permet d’activer la fonction d’Enregistrement automatique, d’af?cher des informations sur l’appareil photo, etc. Voir “Menu de con?guration « RICOH Gate Setup »” (p.49). Menu de RICOH Gate Remarque 125 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Enregistrement de données de l’appareil photo sur le Macintosh (Appareil  Macintosh) Vous pouvez enregistrer des ?chiers photos, de son et de séquences vidéo enregistrés avec l’appareil photo dans un dossier donné du Macintosh. Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est correctement raccordé au Macintosh avant de poursuivre. • Il n’est pas possible de choisir sélectivement les ?chiers à transmettre parmi ceux stockés dans l’appareil photo. • Pour éviter tout risque d’écrasement de ?chiers précédemment transférés, les ?chiers se voient attribuer des noms uniques selon une série numérique croissante et sont enregistrés dans le dossier spéci?é. Toutefois, si la partie numérique des noms de ?chiers dépasse 9999, un message d’erreur est af?ché. • Si l’alimentation est coupée en cours de fonctionnement, l’appareil photo ou le Macintosh peuvent en souffrir. Dans la mesure du possible, utilisez l’adaptateur secteur plutôt que d’alimenter l’appareil photo par sa batterie. • Ne branchez et ne débranchez l’adaptateur secteur que lorsque l’appareil est hors tension ou qu’aucun transfert n’est en cours. Pour transmettre et enregistrer les données de l’appareil photo sur le Macintosh, vous pouvez également utiliser les deux boutons Enregistrer du logiciel RICOH Gate. Les données sont enregistrées en fonction du paramétrage de l’un ou l’autre bouton. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26). • Si vous vous servez des boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2 sans avoir modi?é le paramétrage par défaut du logiciel RICOH Gate, les données de l’appareil sont enregistrées selon les paramètres ci-après. Les images ?xes sont enregistrées au même format où elles ont été prises. (Taille d’image) Les images sont enregistrées au même format où elles ont été prises. Vous pouvez modi?er le paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer si vous le souhaitez. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26). 1 Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est correctement raccordé au Macintosh. Enregistrement des données à l’aide des boutons Enregistrer Important Remarque26 Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un Macintosh” (p.17). Voir “Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh” (p.19). 2 Vérifiez que l’appareil photographique est sous tension. Le message [PC CONNECTION] s’af?che sur l’écran LCD de l’appareil photo. 3 Cliquez sur ou sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Voir “Fonctions des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23). Les données de l’appareil sont enregistrées dans le dossier spéci?é en fonction du paramétrage du bouton sur lequel vous avez cliqué. • Si l’option [Turn off camera after saving] est sélectionnée dans le paramétrage du bouton Enregistrer, la demande de con?rmation s’af?che et l’appareil photo est mis automatiquement hors tension dès que vous sélectionnez [OK]. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26). . Vous avez la possibilité de modi?er les paramètres des boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2. Vous pouvez préciser le mode d’enregistrement — enregistrer les ?chiers tels quels ou opérer une conversion de format —, la taille des images, etc. 1 Cliquez sur ou dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl appuyée. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23). La zone de dialogue [Save 1] ou [Save 2] est af?chée. 2 Si vous souhaitez changer le format d’enregistrement des images fixes, sélectionnez le format voulu dans le menu déroulant [Save Format]. SI vous ne souhaitez pas changer ce format d’enregistrement, passez à l’étape 4. Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer • Si l’appareil photo n’est pas correctement raccordé au Macintosh, un message s’af?che pour vous le signaler. Véri?ez la connexion. Remarque Remarque27 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de l’enregistrement” (p.28). 3 Si vous souhaitez modifier la taille de l’image, sélectionnez [Change Image Size]. Choisissez la taille voulue, ou bien sélectionnez [Constant magni?cation] ou [Optional magni?cation]. Si vous sélectionnez [Constant magni?cation] ou [Optional magni?cation], vous avez la possibilité de spéci?er la taille. 4 Indiquez si un dossier doit automatiquement être créé pour enregistrer les données. Si vous sélectionnez [Automatically create new folder], Choisissez l’une des sous-options suivantes: [Shooting date], [Photographer] ou [Each download] dans la zone [Category]. 5 Indiquez si vous voulez que l’appareil photo s’éteigne automatiquement à l’issue du transfert. 6 Sélectionnez [OK]. Vos modi?cations sont prises en compte.28 Dialogue de paramétrage de l’enregistrement 1 Save Format (Format d’enregistrement) Si vous sélectionnez [No change format], les images ?xes sont enregistrées dans leur format d’origine. Si vous souhaitez modi?er le format des ?chiers d’images ?xes provenant de l’appareil photo, sélectionnez l’un des formats suivants: PICT (*.PCT), JPEG (*.JPG), TIFF (*.TIF) ou PNG (*.PNG). • Si vous demandez une conversion de format, un dossier supplémentaire nommé [Original] est automatiquement créé pour accueillir les ?chiers d’images ?xes à leur format d’origine. 2 Change Image Size (Taille d’image) Si vous modi?ez le format d’enregistrement, vous pouvez spéci?er la taille d’image souhaitée. Si vous désirez modi?er la taille de l’image, sélectionnez [640 × 480] ou [320 × 240], ou bien sélectionnez [Constant magni?cation] ou [Optional magni?cation] puis spéci?ez la taille voulue. 3 Constant magni?cation Vous pouvez modi?er la taille en conservant les mêmes proportions. Vous pouvez également spéci?er une taille allant de la moitié de la taille originale à sept fois celle-ci. 4 Save the H:W ratio Si vous sélectionnez cette option après avoir sélectionné [Optional magni?cation], vous pouvez faire varier la taille de l’image sans changer ses proportions, en indiquant soit une valeur de largeur, soit une valeur de hauteur. 5 Optional magni?cation Vous pouvez indiquer la taille souhaitée à l’af?chage. 6 Save folder (Dossier d’enregistrement) Vous pouvez modi?er la destination d’enregistrement des ?chiers. 7 Automatically create new folder (Créer automatiquement les dossiers) Si vous activez cette option, le dossier dans lequel doivent être placés les ?chiers sur le Macintosh est créé 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 9 Remarque29 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate automatiquement. Comme sous-option, vous pouvez sélectionner [Shooting date], [Photographer] ou [Each Download]. • Si vous sélectionnez [Shooting Date], un dossier distinct est créé pour chaque date de prise de vue consignée dans l’appareil photo et les données placées dans les dossiers en fonction de cette date de création. • Si vous sélectionnez [Photographer], un dossier distinct est créé pour chaque photographe consigné dans l’appareil photo et les données placées dans les dossiers en fonction du photographe ayant créé les ?chiers. • Si vous sélectionnez [Each Download], un nouveau dossier est créé à chaque session de transmission des données. Le nom du dossier sera formé à partir de la date du jour et d’un numéro séquentiel comme indiqué ci-dessous. 8 Do not automatically create new folder (Ne pas créer automatiquement les dossiers) Si vous activez cette option, il n’y a pas création automatique du dossier cible. Les données sont placées dans le dossier spéci?é par l’option [Save Destination Folder]. 9 Turn off camera after saving Si vous sélectionnez cette option, l’appareil photo s’éteint automatiquement en ?n d’enregistrement. Si vous ne sélectionnez pas cette option, l’appareil photo ne s’éteint pas automatiquement en ?n d’enregistrement. En ajustant le paramétrage de la fonction d’Enregistrement automatique via la touche START, vous pouvez commander l’enregistrement des ?chiers de l’appareil sur le micro-ordinateur, au format souhaité et dans le dossier voulu, par un simple appui sur la touche START de la RICOH BASE lorsque l’appareil est placé sur cette dernière. 1 Sélectionnez [Options Setting] dans le menu [RICOH Gate Setup]. La zone de dialogue [Options Setting] est af?chée. 2 Sélectionnez [Automatically save at Push START Key]. Si vous préférez désactiver la fonction d’enregistrement automatique des ?chiers sur le Modi?cation du paramétrage de la touche START Numéro séquentiel à 3 chiffres AAAAMMJJ-000 Date du transfert30 Macintosh, sélectionnez [Do not save Automatically at Push START Key]. Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage des options” (p.30). 3 Sélectionnez [Save 1] ou [Save 2] pour l’option [File format automatic save mode]. • [Save 1] est le paramétrage d’enregistrement lié au bouton Enregistrer 1. [Save 2] est le paramétrage d’enregistrement lié au bouton Enregistrer 2. • Vous pouvez donc opérer un paramétrage différent pour chacun des deux boutons Enregistrer. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26). 4 Sélectionnez [OK]. Le paramétrage de l’Enregistrement automatique est modi?é. Dialogue de paramétrage des options 1 Automatically save at Push START key Si vous sélectionnez cette option, les données de l’appareil photo seront enregistrées automatiquement sur le Macintosh au format que vous spéci?ez lorsque vous appuierez sur la touche Démarrer de la RICOH BASE. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, les données sont automatiquement enregistrées au format sélectionné. 2 File format automatic save mode Indiquez si la fonction d’Enregistrement automatique doit utiliser le paramétrage [Save 1] ou [Save 2]. [Save 1] et [Save 2] correspondent aux paramétrage dans RICOH Gate des deux boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2. 3 Do not save Automatically at Push START key Si vous sélectionnez cette option, la fonction Enregistrement automatique ne s’active pas lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche START de la RICOH BASE. Remarque 1 2 331 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate En plaçant l’appareil photo sur la RICOH BASE et appuyant simplement sur la touche START , vous pouvez automatiquement transmettre et enregistrer les ?chiers image, son ou vidéo de l’appareil dans le dossier spéci?é du Macintosh. • Sélectionnez l’option [Automatically save at Push START key] pour que la touche START permette l’enregistrement automatique des ?chiers de l’appareil. Si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée, les ?chiers ne pourront pas être enregistrée à l’aide de la touche START. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage de la touche START” (p.29). • Le paramétrage du format d’enregistrement, du dossier de destination, etc. s’effectue au niveau des boutons Enregistrer 1 et Enregistrer 2. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26). 1 Véri?ez que la RICOH BASE est correctement raccordé au Macintosh. Voir “Branchement du câble USB” (p.17). 2 Vérifiez que l’adaptateur secteur est correctement raccordé à la RICOH BASE. 3 Placez l’appareil photo sur la RICOH BASE. 4 Appuyez sur la touche START de la RICOH BASE. Les données de l’appareil photo sont transmises et enregistrées sur le Macintosh. • Si l’option [Turn off camera after saving] est sélectionnée dans le paramétrage du bouton Enregistrer, la demande de con?rmation s’af?che et l’appareil photo est mis automatiquement hors tension. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage de la touche START” (p.29). Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage des boutons Enregistrer” (p.26). Transmission automatique des ?chiers à l’aide de la touche START Important Remarque Remarque32 Envoi de ?chiers du Macintosh vers l’appareil photo (Macintosh  Appareil) Vous pouvez transférer des ?chiers enregistrés avec l’appareil et des musiques (?chiers MP3) du Macintosh vers l’appareil photo. Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est correctement raccordé au Macintosh avant de poursuivre. . On appelle ici «transfert» l’envoi de données du Macintosh vers l’appareil photo. Vous pouvez transférer des images, des notes vocales, des séquences vidéo et de la musique de votre Macintosh vers l’appareil photo via le bouton Transférer du logiciel RICOH Gate. Le transfert s’effectue en fonction du paramétrage du bouton Transférer. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer” (p.34). • Seuls les ?chiers EXIF (*.JPG), les ?chiers note vocale (*.WAV), les ?chiers vidéo (*.AVI) enregistrés à l’origine sur cet appareil d’une part, et les ?chiers MP3 (*.MP3) peuvent être transférés. • Tous les ?chiers du type spéci?é qui se trouvent dans le dossier sélectionné sont transférés. Il n’est pas possible de transférer sélectivement des ?chiers de ce dossier. 1 Véri?ez que l’appareil photo est correctement raccordé au Macintosh. Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un Macintosh” (p.17). 2 Vérifiez le paramétrage du transfert. Modi?ez ce paramétrage si nécessaire. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer” (p.34). 3 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer” (p.34) La zone de dialogue [Upload] apparaît. Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer • Si vous voulez transférer des ?chiers MP3, ne manquez pas de lire d’abord la section “Transfert d’un ?chier MP3” (p.37). Remarque Important • Si l’appareil photo n’est pas correctement raccordé au Macintosh, un message s’af?che pour vous le signaler. Véri?ez la connexion. Remarque33 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate 4 Si nécessaire, cliquez sur [Select Folder] pour sélectionner le lecteur et le dossier dans lesquels se trouve le fichier à transférer. Voir “Dialogue de Choix d’un dossier” (p.36). 5 Sélectionnez le type de fichier à transférer dans la zone [File Type (Type)]. Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de transfert” (p.34). Lorsque vous sélectionnez un type de ?chier à transférer, seuls les ?chiers de ce type présents dans le dossier sélectionné sont af?chés dans la liste de ?chiers. 6 Vérifiez que les fichiers de la liste sont bien ceux que vous voulez transférer, puis sélectionnez [OK]. • S’il s’agit d’un ?chier note vocale, c’est une icône de note vocale qui est af?chée, et s’il s’agit d’une séquence vidéo, c’est une icône de ?lm. • Si vous sélectionnez un ?chier-liste de morceaux MP3, la zone de dialogue [Select Playlist] apparaît. Consultez la référence suivante avant de transférer un ?chier MP3 ou un ?chier-liste MP3. Voir “Transfert d’un ?chier MP3” (p.37). Un message de con?rmation du début du transfert est af?ché. 7 Sélectionnez [OK]. Les données spéci?ées sont transférées du Macintosh à l’appareil photo. Remarque • Si vous sélectionnez l’option [Turn off camera after saving] dans le cadre du paramétrage du bouton Transférer, une demande de con?rmation de mise hors tension sera af?ché en ?n de transfert. Il vous faudra alors cliquer sur [OK] pour valider l’extinction de l’appareil. Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer” (p.34). Remarque34 Dialogue de paramétrage de transfert 1 [Select Folder] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue [Choix d’un dossier] et sélectionner le lecteur et le dossier dans lesquels se trouve le ?chier à transférer. 2 Dossier source du transfert Le dossier à transférer est af?ché dans cette zone. Par défaut, il s’agit du dossier spéci?é au niveau de l’option [Upload Source Folder] dans les paramètres de transfert. 3 Liste des ?chiers Une liste des ?chiers du type spéci?é présents dans le dossier sélectionné est af?chée, ce qui vous permet de véri?er qu’il s’agit bien des ?chiers à transférer. 4 Type de ?chier Sélectionnez le ?chier à transférer. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un type de ?chier à transférer, seuls les ?chiers de ce type présents dans le dossier sélectionné sont af?chés sur la droite. Vous avez la possibilité de modi?er le paramétrage du bouton Transférer. Vous pouvez spéci?er le type des ?chiers que vous voulez transférer ainsi que le dossier source contenant ces ?chiers sur le Macintosh et enregistrer ces modi?cations. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl appuyée. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23). La boîte de dialogue [Upload] apparaît. Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer 1 2 3 435 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate 2 Si vous voulez limiter le transfert aux fichiers d’un certain type, sélectionnez le type voulu dans la zone [File Type]. Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de transfert” (p.34). 3 Si vous voulez modifier le dossier source, sélectionnez [Change folder]. La zone de dialogue [Choix d’un dossier] apparaît. 4 Sélectionnez le dossier source voulu, puis sélectionnez [Choisir]. Voir “Dialogue de Choix d’un dossier” (p.36). La zone de dialogue [Upload] s’af?che à nouveau à l’écran. 5 Sélectionnez [OK]. Vos modi?cations sont prises en compte. Dialogue de paramétrage de transfert 1 File Type (Type de ?chier) Si vous sélectionnez [All transferable ?les], tous les ?chiers du dossier source spéci?é sont transférés. • Le réglage par défaut de cette option est [All transferable ?les] (tous les types de ?chiers). Remarque 1 236 Si vous voulez limiter le transfert aux ?chiers d’un certain type, sélectionnez l’un des types suivants :?chiers EXIF (*.JPG), ?chiers note vocale (*.WAV), ?chiers vidéo (*.AVI), et ?chiers MP3 (*.MP3) et ?chiers-listes MP3 (*.M3U). 2 Upload Source Folder (Dossier source) Par défaut, le dossier source est le dossier dans lequel les logiciels Caplio RR10 sont installés. Si vous voulez modi?er le dossier source du transfert, sélectionnez [Change folder], puis sélectionnez le dossier voulu. Dialogue de Choix d’un dossier 1 Dossier précédent En cliquant sur ce bouton, vous pouvez sélectionner directement le lecteur ou dossier précédent par rapport au dossier actuellement sélectionné. 2 Ouvrir Permet d’ouvrir le dossier sélectionné. 3 Choisir Pour dé?nir le dossier source du transfert, choisissez un dossier dans la liste et cliquez sur ce bouton. 4 Af?cher l’aperçu Sélectionnez un ?chier lisible sous QuickTime, puis cliquez sur ce bouton pour visionner la séquence. 1 4 3 237 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate • L’appareil photo peut reproduire les sons des ?chiers MP3 au format ci-après. – Débit : 96 kbit/s – Fréquence d’échantillonnage : 44,1 kHz Transfert d’un ?chier MP3 Lorsque vous transférez un ?chier MP3 vers l’appareil photo, un recodage du ?chier est effectué juste avant le transfert. Seuls les ?chiers MP3 ainsi recodés sont lisibles par l’appareil photo. Si vous sélectionnez le type [MP3 Playlist] dans le menu déroulant [File Type] de la zone de dialogue de paramétrage du transfert, la zone de dialogue [Select Playlist] apparaît. Sélectionnez cette liste et validez le ?chier MP3 à transférer. Voir “Transfert à l’aide du bouton Transférer” (p.32). Voir “Modi?cation du paramétrage du bouton Transférer” (p.34). Conseils Important38 Impression d’une planche index (Planches index) Vous pouvez imprimer une « planche index » des photos enregistrées sur le Macintosh. • Cette impression ne peut porter que sur les images aux formats suivants: BITMAP (*.BMP), EXIF2.1/2.0 (*.JPG), JPEG (*.JPG), NC (*.TIF), PICT (*.PCT), TIFF-YUV (*.TIF), TIF-MMR (*.TIF), TIFF-RGB (*.TIF), TIFF (*.TIF), AVI (*.AVI), WAV (*.WAV) et MOV(*.MOT). Cette fonction vous permet d’obtenir une planche index des photos d’un dossier donné, c’est-à-dire d’une impression sur papier de toutes les photos à un format miniature. Vous pouvez spéci?er si un titre, la date de prise de vue, les numéros de pages et la date d’impression, doivent être imprimés, et indiquer le nombre de photos miniatures qui doivent ?gurer sur chaque page. La planche index est imprimée en fonction des paramètres d’impression affectés au bouton Imprimer index. 1 Véri?ez le paramétrage de l’impression. Modi?ez des paramètres si nécessaire. Voir “Modi?cation des réglages d’impression” (p.39). 2 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23). La zone de dialogue [Choix d’un dossier] apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez le dossier voulu pour l’impression de la planche index, puis sélectionnez [Choisir]. Le message [Processing] est af?ché, puis c’est le tour de la zone de dialogue [Print (Imprimer)]. Voir “Dialogue de Choix d’un dossier” (p.36). 4 Indiquez le nombre d’exemplaires voulu, puis sélectionnez [OK]. L’impression débute. Impression d’une planche index Important • Il faut dé?nir le dossier dans lequel seront placées les planches index à l’avance, lors du paramétrage de l’impression. Une fois l’opération d’impression de l’index lancée, il n’est plus possible de modi?er ces paramètres. Remarque • Utilisez le Sélecteur pour choisir l’imprimante à utiliser. Remarque • Les options de la zone de dialogue [Print (Imprimer)] varient selon l’imprimante utilisée. • Pour plus de précisions, consultez les modes d’emploi de votre Macintosh et de votre imprimante. Remarque39 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate La planche est imprimée en fonction des paramètres d’impression affectés au bouton Imprimer index. Lorsque vous effectuez un tel paramétrage, vous pouvez le sauvegarder avec tous ses paramètres - nombre d’images par page, impression du titre, de la date de prise de vue, du numéro de page, etc. Cette fonction est utile pour réadopter rapidement un ancien paramétrage après avoir modi?é des paramètres. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl appuyée. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23). La zone de dialogue [Print Setting] apparaît. 2 Tapez le titre qui doit apparaître en entête. Si vous laissez cette zone vide, aucun titre n’est imprimé. Voir “Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression” (p.40). 3 Choisissez le nombre d’images par page imprimée. Vous pouvez sélectionner l’un des formats suivants: (5 × 8), (4 × 6), (3 × 4) or (2 × 3). 4 Choisissez entre l’impression de la date de prise de vue ([Shooting date]), la date d’impression ([Print date]) ou les numéros de pages ([Page No.]). Modi?cation des réglages d’impression • En cliquant sur le bouton [Printer Setting], vous pouvez paramétrer votre imprimante de façon ?ne. Effectuez le paramétrage requis. • Pour plus de précisions, consultez les modes d’emploi de votre ordinateur et de votre imprimante. Remarque40 5 Sélectionnez la police et le corps dans lesquels imprimer le titre, la date de prise de vue, etc. 6 Sélectionnez [OK]. Le paramétrage d’impression d’index est enregistré. Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression 1 Print Title (Titre) Tapez le titre qui doit apparaître en en-tête. Si vous laissez cette zone vide, aucun titre n’est imprimé. 2 Print Type (Format d’impression) Choisissez le nombre d’images à placer sur chaque page imprimée. Les différents choix sont présentés sous forme de matrice nombre d’images sur une lige x nombre de colonnes. 3 Print Options (Options d’impression) Il vous suf?t de sélectionner [Shooting date], [Page No.] ou [Print date] pour que la date de prise de vues, le numéro de page et la date d’impression ?gurent en en-tête des pages imprimées. Si vous ne sélectionnez aucune de ces options, rien n’est imprimé. 4 Font Setting (Police de caractères) Sélectionnez la police et le corps (8 pts à 14 pts) dans lesquels imprimer le titre, la date de prise de vue, les numéros de page et la date d’impression. 5 Printer Setting (Réglages d’imprimante) En cliquant sur [Printer Setting], vous pouvez sélectionner le format du papier, le mode d’alimentation, la direction d’impression, etc. 1 3 4 2 541 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Lancement d’une application En affectant le programme de votre choix au bouton Application de RICOH Gate, vous pouvez ensuite directement lancer cette application à l’aide de ce bouton. Vous pouvez dé?nir l’application à lancer lorsqu’on clique sur le bouton [Application 1] et [Application 2]. 1 Cliquez sur ou dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl appuyée. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23). La zone de dialogue [Application Setup] apparaît. 2 Cliquez sur [Select], à la droite de ou . La zone de dialogue [Ouvrir] apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez l’application de votre choix, puis cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. L’icône de l’application sélectionnée s’af?che à la droite du bouton spéci?é dans la zone de dialogue [Application Setup]. Dé?nition de l’application à lancer42 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. Dialogue de con?guration du lancement d’application 1 Icône d’application L’icône de l’application affectée au bouton Application est af?chée. 2 Select (Sélectionner) Si vous cliquez sur ce bouton, la zone de dialogue [Ouvrir] apparaît. Sélectionnez l’application voulue. Vous pouvez lancer l’application dé?nie en cliquant sur le bouton correspondant de RICOH Gate. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23). L’application dé?nie se lance. Lancement de l’application 1 243 3 Utilisation de RICOH Gate Autres fonctions Lorsque l’appareil photo est connecté au Macintosh, vous pouvez le mettre hors tension en cliquant sur le bouton Éteindre l’appareil de RICOH Gate. 1 Cliquez sur dans la fenêtre RICOH Gate. Voir “Fonction des boutons de RICOH Gate” (p.23). L’appareil photo s’éteint et passe en charge de batterie. Lorsque l’appareil photo est connecté au Macintosh, vous pouvez af?cher et ainsi véri?er le nom du photographe dé?ni dans l’appareil. 1 Sélectionnez [Camera Property] dans le menu [RICOH Gate Setup]. La zone de dialogue [Camera Property] apparaît. 2 Vérifiez le nom du photographe, puis sélectionnez [OK]. Mise hors tension de l’appareil Af?chage et modi?cation des Informations relatives à l’appareil • Vous pouvez saisir jusqu’à 16 caractères ASCII pour dé?nir le nom du photographe. Voir “À propos du code ASCII” (p.44). Remarque44 Vous avez la possibilité de changer l’aspect de RICOH Gate. Vous pouvez choisir entre deux décors (casual, c’est- à-dire décontracté, et formal, c’est-à-dire sérieux), en plus du décor par défaut. 1 Sélectionnez [Background Illustration] dans le menu [RICOH Gate Setup], puis choisissez [Basic], [Formal] ou [Casual]. L’arrière-plan par défaut de la fenêtre RICOH Gate est le décor [Basic]. Le décor de la fenêtre RICOH Gate est modi?é. 1 Sélectionnez [About RICOH Gate] dans le menu Pomme. La zone de dialogue [About RICOH Gate] est af?chée. 2 Sélectionnez [OK]. Modi?cation de l’aspect de RICOH Gate Af?chage du numéro de version de RICOH Gate À propos du code ASCII Le code ASCII dé?nit un jeu de caractères informatiques permettant l’échange de messages et de données entre différents types d’ordinateurs. Outre les lettres majuscules et minuscules non accentuées [A-Z] et [a-z], les chiffres [0-9] et des signes et symboles tels que (+-*/$%&!], etc., le code ASCII comprend des codes de contrôles comme Retour chariot et Tabulation. Comme il s’agit d’un code conçu aux ÉtatsUnis, les caractères accentués et autres caractères spéciaux n’y ?gurent pas. Néanmoins, son utilisation quasi universel sur les micro-ordinateurs permet d’assurer des échanges aisés entre ordinateurs. Conseils45 Appendice Appendice Cette section explique comment se servir de l’appareil photo comme Web cam (périphérique de capture vidéo) et fournit la liste des options de menu de RICOH Gate. Utilisation du Caplio RR10 comme Web cam Pour pouvoir vous servir de l’appareil photo comme Web cam (périphérique de capture vidéo), vous devez disposer d’un logiciel de capture d’images vidéo, par exemple un logiciel de montage vidéo ou de visioconférence. 1 Introduisez le CD-ROM fourni avec l’appareil dans le lecteur de CD-ROM, puis installez le pilote USB et le pilote vidéo. • Si vous avez effectué une installation standard de [Caplio RR10 Software], le pilote USB est déjà installé. Voir “Installation du logiciel” (p.11). Voir “Installation de logiciels sélectionnés” (p.14). 2 Installez le logiciel de capture d’images vidéo. Remarque46 3 Connectez l’adaptateur secteur à la RICOH BASE, puis connectez cette dernière au Macintosh à l’aide du câble USB. 4 Raccordez le berceau à la RICOH BASE. 5 Placez le bouton rotatif de mode de l’appareil sur (séquence vidéo) puis posez l’appareil sur la RICOH BASE. 6 Appuyez sur la touche START de la RICOH BASE. 7 Cadrez votre sujet à l’aide de l’appareil et affinez la direction et l’angle de prise de vue. • Retirez l’appareil de la RICOH BASE avant de le mettre hors tension. Important47 Appendice 8 Lancez l’application de capture vidéo. 9 L’image visée par l’appareil est affichée en direct par le logiciel. L’image visée par l’appareil est af?chée en direct. • Pour plus de précisions sur l’utilisation du logiciel, consultez son mode d’emploi. • Si aucune image ne s’af?che véri?ez les points suivants. Est-ce qu’un autre périphérique de capture vidéo est sélectionné ? Sélectionnez [Caplio RR10] comme périphérique de capture. Est-ce qu’un autre périphérique de capture d’image est sélectionné ? Débranchez tout périphérique de capture d’image autre que l’appareil (Caplio RR10). Plusieurs logiciels d’exploitation de Web cam sont-ils actifs sur l’ordinateur ? Il n’est pas possible d’enregistrer des images dans plusieurs applications à la fois. Quittez les autres logiciels et ne laissez ouvert que celui que vous utilisez. • Si vous n’arrivez pas à connecter l’appareil correctement, consultez la section “Dépannage” (p.48). Remarque48 Dépannage Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement, procédez comme indiquez ci-après.  Adaptateur secteur • L’adaptateur est-il correctement raccordé à l’appareil photo et à la RICOH BASE ? • Est-il bien branché dans une prise secteur ?  Câble de liaison USB • Le câble USB est-il correctement raccordé à l’appareil photo et à la RICOH BASE ? • Est-il bien branché sur le port USB du Macintosh ? Voir “Connexion de la RICOH BASE à un Macintosh” (p.17).  Appareil photoRICOH BASE • Si vous utilisez la RICOH BASE, l’appareil photo est-il correctement raccordé ? • Si l’appareil est raccordé au Macintosh, est-il bien sous tension ? • Le bouton rotatif de mode de l’appareil est-il placé sur une autre position que (séquence vidéo) ? Voir “Connexion de l’appareil à un Macintosh” (p.19).  Installation • L’installation des logiciels Caplio RR10 a-t-elle bien été effectuée ? Si les résultats des étapes 1 et 2 ci-dessus sont normaux et si l’appareil ne fonctionne toujours pas correctement, essayez les solutions suivantes.  Solution 1 1 Supprimez les logiciels Caplio RR10. Voir “Désinstallation des logiciels” (p.15). 2 Redémarrez le Macintosh, puis réinstallez les logiciels Caplio RR10. Voir “Pour installer les logiciels Caplio RR10” (p.11). 3 Véri?ez maintenant si l’appareil photo fonctionne normalement. 1. Vérifiez les connexions et branchements. 2. Vérification de l’installation 3. Solutions49 Appendix Menus Quit (Quitter) Le logiciel RICOH Gate est déchargé de la mémoire. Button Setup (Paramétrage des boutons) Vous pouvez paramétrer la fonction des boutons Enregistrer 1, Enregistrer 2, Transmettre, Application 1 et Application 2. Options Setting (Paramétrage des options) Cette option vous permet de paramétrer la fonction Enregistrement automatique commandée par la touche Démarrer de la RICOH BASE. Vous pouvez choisir si cette fonction doit être entièrement automatique, ainsi que le format d’enregistrement des ?chiers. Background Illustration (Décor d’arrière-plan) Cette option vous permet de sélectionner l’un des trois décors proposé pour la fenêtre RICOH Gate : standard, formel ou décontracté. Le décor sélectionné par défaut est le décor standard. Camera Property (Informations sur l’appareil) Cette option permet d’obtenir des informations sur l’appareil photo connecté au Macintosh. About Balloon Help (À propos des bulles d’aide) Cette option explique comment se servir des bulles d’aide. Show/Hide Balloons (Af?cher/Masquer les bulles d’aide) Cette option vous permet d’activer ou de désactiver les bulles d’aide. Si vous cliquez sur l’un des boutons de la fenêtre RICOH Gate tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée, le menu de con?guration dudit bouton apparaît. Vous pouvez paramétrer la fonction des boutons Enregistrer 1, Enregistrer 2, Transférer, Imprimer, Envoyer, Application 1 et Application 2. Menu File (Fichier) Menu de con?guration « RICOH Gate Setup » Menu Help (Aide) Menu de paramétrage de chaque bouton50 Index A Adaptateur secteur ....................... 17 Aspect de RICOH Gate ................ 44 B Bouton Application........................ 23 Bouton Éteindre l’appareil....... 24, 43 Bouton Icône................................. 23 Bouton Imprimer Index ................. 23 Bouton Transférer ................... 23, 32 Boutons Enregistrer ................ 23, 25 C Câble USB Connexion.................................. 17 Déconnexion .............................. 20 Camera Property........................... 43 Case de fermeture ........................ 23 Case de masquage ...................... 23 Connecteur DIGITAL (AV/USB) .... 17 D Définition de l’application.............. 41 Démarrage de RICOH Gate.......... 21 Désinstallation............................... 15 Dialogue de Choix d’un dossier.... 36 Dialogue de paramétrage de l’enregistrement ............................ 28 Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression ................................... 40 Dialogue de paramétrage de l’impression d’index ...................... 40 Dialogue de paramétrage de Transfert .................................. 34, 35 Dialogue de paramétrage des options........................................... 30 E Environnement système requis ..... 10 F Fenêtre RICOH Gate ..................... 21 Fichier MP3 ................................... 37 I Impression d’une planche index... 38 Informations relatives à l’appareil . 43 Installer Installation Personnalisée............. 12 Installation Standard.................... 12 Logiciels Caplio RR10 ................. 11 QuickTime.................................. 14 L L’aspect de RICOH Gate .............. 44 La fonction d’Enregistrement automatique .................................. 29 Lancement d’une application........ 41 Lancement de l’application........... 42 M MGI PhotoSuite ............................... 9 MusicMatch JUKEBOX ................... 9 P Paramétrage de l’enregistrement.. 26 Paramétrage de transfert .............. 34 Pilote TWAIN ................................... 8 Pilote USB ....................................... 8 Index alphabétique51 Appendix Planche index ............................... 38 Port USB.................................. 18, 19 Q QuickTime ....................................... 9 Quitter RICOH Gate ...................... 21 R Réglages d’impression ................. 39 RICOH BASE................................. 17 RICOH Gate .................................... 8 T Touche START ..................19, 29, 31 Transfert ........................................ 32 Transmission automatique ............ 31 V Version de RICOH Gate................ 44 Video Driver .................................... 8Centres techniques Ricoh Ricoh company., Ltd. 3-2-3, Shin-yokohama Kohoku-ku, Yokohama-shi 222-8530, Japan http://www.ricoh.co.jp/r_dc Ricoh Factory Service Center 3235 Sunrise Blvd., Suite2 Rancho Cordova, CA 95742 http://www.ricohzone.com/ RICOH EUROPE B.V. (PMMC EUROPE) Oberrather Straße 6, D-40472 Düsseldolf, Germany http://www.ricohpmmc.com RICOH UK LTD. (PMMC UK) Ricoh House, 1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham, Middlesex, TW13 7HG, England RICOH FRANCE S.A. (PMMC FRANCE) 383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle – BP 307-931-13 Clamart Cédex, France RICOH ESPANA, S.A. (PMMC SPAIN) Av. Litoral Mar, 12-14, 08005 Barcelona, Spain RICOH EUROPE B.V. (PMMC BENELUX) Koolhovenlaan 35, 1119 NB Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands Ricoh Photo Products (Asia), Ltd. Unit D, E & F 24/F., China Overseas Building 139 Hennessy Road, Wan Chai Hong Kong Ricoh Australia Pty. Ltd. 8 Rodborough Road Frenchs Forrest, N.S.W. 2086 Australia http://www.ricoh.com.au Camera User Guide The serial number of this product is given on the bottom face of the camera. Basic Operations If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. This section provides a basic overview of how to turn on the camera, take pictures and play back pictures. Advanced Operations Read this section when you want to learn more about the different camera functions. This section provides more detailed information about the functions used to take pictures and play back pictures, as well as information on how to customize the camera settings, print pictures, and use the camera with a computer. The rechargeable battery needs to be charged before use. The battery is not charged at the time of purchase.Preface This manual provides information on how to use the shooting and playback functions of this product, as well as warnings on its use. To make the best use of this product’s functions, read this manual thoroughly before use. Please keep this manual handy for ease of reference. Ricoh Co., Ltd. Safety Precautions Read all safety precautions thoroughly to ensure safe use. Test Shooting Please be sure to do some test shooting to make sure it is recording properly before normal use. Copyright Reproduction or alteration of copyrighted documents, magazines, music and other materials, other than for personal, home or similarly limited purposes, without the consent of the copyright holder is prohibited. Exemption from Liability Ricoh Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for failure to record or play back images caused by malfunction of this product. Warranty This product is manufactured to local specifications and the warranty is valid within the country of purchase. Should the product fail or malfunction while you are abroad, the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing the expenditure incurred thereof. Radio Interference Operating this product in the vicinity of other electronic equipment may adversely affect the performance of both devices. In particular, operating the camera close to a radio or television may lead to interference. If interference occurs, follow the procedures below. • Move the camera as far away as possible from the TV, radio or other device. • Reorient the TV or radio antenna. • Plug the devices into separate electrical outlets. © 2010 RICOH CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part without Ricoh’s express written permission. Ricoh reserves the right to change the contents of this document at any time without prior notice. Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information in this document. Should you nevertheless notice any errors or omissions, we would be grateful if you would notify us at the address listed on the back cover of this booklet. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7™, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of America and other countries. Macintosh and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States of America and other countries. Adobe, the Adobe logo, and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries. MediaBrowser is a trademark of Pixela Corporation. SanDisk is a registered trademark of SanDisk Corporation. SD is a trademark of SD-3C LLC. All other trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners.1 Safety Precautions Warning Symbols Various symbols are used throughout this instruction manual and on the product to prevent physical harm to you or other people and damage to property. The symbols and their meanings are explained below. Danger This symbol indicates matters that may lead to imminent risk of death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Warning This symbol indicates matters that may lead to death or serious injury if ignored or incorrectly handled. Caution This symbol indicates matters that may lead to injury or physical damage if ignored or incorrectly handled. Sample Warnings The symbol alerts you to actions that must be performed. The symbol alerts you to prohibited actions. The symbol may be combined with other symbols to indicate that a specific action is prohibited. ? Examples Do not touch Do not disassemble Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this equipment. Danger ? Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or alter the equipment yourself. The highvoltage circuitry in the equipment poses significant electrical hazard. ? Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or directly solder the battery. ? Do not put the battery in a fire, attempt to heat it, use it in a high temperature environment such as next to a fire or inside a car, or abandon it. Do not put it into water or the sea or allow it to get wet. ? Do not attempt to pierce, hit, compress, drop, or subject the battery to any other severe impact or force. ? Do not use a battery that is significantly damaged or deformed.2 Warning ? Turn off the power immediately in the event of abnormalities such as smoke or unusual odors being emitted. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. If you are drawing power from a household electrical outlet, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet to avoid fire or electrical hazards. Discontinue use of the equipment immediately if it is malfunctioning. Contact the nearest service center at your earliest convenience. ? Turn off the power immediately if any metallic object, water, liquid or other foreign object gets into the camera. Remove the battery and memory card as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. If you are drawing power from a household electrical outlet, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet to avoid fire or electrical hazards. Discontinue use of the equipment immediately if it is malfunctioning. Contact the nearest service center at your earliest convenience. ? Avoid any contact with the liquid crystal inside the picture display, should the monitor be damaged. Follow the appropriate emergency measures below. • SKIN: If any of the liquid crystal gets on your skin, wipe it off and rinse the affected area thoroughly with water, then wash well with soap. • EYES: If it gets in your eyes, wash your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical advice immediately. • INGESTION: If any of the liquid crystal is ingested, rinse the mouth out thoroughly with water. Have the person drink a large amount of water and induce vomiting. Seek medical assistance immediately. ? Follow these precautions to prevent the battery from leaking, overheating, igniting or exploding. • Do not use a battery other than those specifically recommended for the equipment. • Do not carry or store together with metal objects such as ballpoint pens, necklaces, coins, hairpins, etc. • Do not put the battery into a microwave or high pressure container. • If leakage of battery fluid or a strange odor, color change, etc. is noticed during use or during charging, remove the battery from the camera or battery charger immediately and keep it away from fire. ? Please observe the following in order to prevent fire, electrical shock or cracking of the battery while charging. • Use only the indicated power supply voltage. Also avoid the use of multi-socket adapters and extension cords. • Do not damage, bundle or alter power cords. Also, do not place heavy objects on, stretch or bend power cords. • Do not connect or disconnect the power plug with wet hands. Always grip the plug section when disconnecting a power cord. • Do not cover equipment while charging. ? Keep the battery and SD memory card used in this equipment out of the reach of children to prevent accidental ingestion. Consumption is harmful to human beings. If swallowed, seek medical assistance immediately.3 ? Keep the equipment out of the reach of children. ? Do not touch the internal components of the equipment if they become exposed as a result of being dropped or damaged. The high-voltage circuitry in the equipment could lead to an electric shock. Remove the battery as soon as possible, being careful to avoid electric shocks or burns. Take the equipment to your nearest dealer or service center if it is damaged. ? When using the camera in places where steam is present, such as a kitchen, do not allow the internal parts of the camera to get wet. This could result in electrical shock or fire. ? Do not use the equipment near flammable gases, gasoline, benzene, thinner or similar substances to avoid the risk of explosion, fire or burns. ? Do not use the equipment in locations where usage is restricted or prohibited as this may lead to disasters or accidents. ? Wipe off any dust that accumulates on the electrical plug as this may lead to fire. ? Use only the specified AC adapter in household electrical outlets. Other adapters pose the risk of fire, electric shock or injury. ? To avoid the risk of fire, electric shock or injury, do not use the battery charger or AC adapter with commercially available electronic transformers when traveling abroad. Observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this unit. Caution ? Contact with fluid leaking from a battery can lead to burns. If part of your body comes in contact with a damaged battery, rinse the area with water immediately (Do not use soap). If a battery starts to leak, remove it immediately from the equipment and wipe the battery chamber thoroughly before replacing it with a new battery. ? Plug the power cords securely into the electrical outlets. Loose cords pose a fire hazard. ? Do not allow the internal parts of the camera to get wet. In addition, when operating the camera with wet hands, be careful not to get the internal parts wet. This could result in electrical shock. ? Do not fire the flash at drivers of vehicles, as this may cause the driver to lose control and result in a traffic accident. Safety Precautions for Accessories When using optional products, carefully read the instructions provided with the product before using that product.4 Using the Manuals The following two manuals are included with your G700. “Camera User Guide” (This booklet) This guide explains the usage and functions of the camera. It also explains how to install the provided software on your computer. “Software User Guide” (PDF file) The “Software User Guide” is available in the following folders on the provided CD-ROM. This guide explains how to download images from the camera to your computer. Each language has its own “Software User Guide” in the respective folder. To copy the User Guide onto your hard disk, copy the PDF file from the respective folder directly to your hard disk. “MediaBrowser” image viewing and editing software (for Windows only) is also included with the camera. For how to use MediaBrowser, see the displayed “Help”. For more information on MediaBrowser, contact the Customer Support Center below. North America (U.S.) TEL: (Toll Free) +1-800-458-4029 Europe UK, Germany, France and Spain: TEL: (Toll Free) +800-1532-4865 Other Countries: TEL: +44-1489-564-764 Asia TEL: +63-2-438-0090 China TEL: +86-21-5385-3786 Business hours: 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM5 Contents Safety Precautions ................................................................................................ 1 Using the Manuals ................................................................................................ 4 Contents ................................................................................................................... 5 Basic Operations 11 Packing List ...........................................................................................................12 Optional Accessories ................................................................................................................. 12 How to Use the Mode Dial ...............................................................................13 Names of Parts .....................................................................................................14 Picture Display .....................................................................................................16 Getting Ready ......................................................................................................19 About the Battery ........................................................................................................................ 19 About the SD Memory Card (available in stores) .................................................... 20 Charging the Rechargeable Battery (DB-65) .............................................................. 22 Loading the Rechargeable Battery and SD Memory Card ................................. 23 Turning the Power On/Off ..................................................................................................... 24 Setting the Language, Date and Time ........................................................................... 25 Basic Shooting .....................................................................................................27 Shooting in Auto Shooting Mode (Focus and Shoot) .......................................... 27 Using the Zoom Function ...................................................................................................... 29 Shooting Close-Ups (Macro Shooting) .......................................................................... 30 Using the Flash .............................................................................................................................. 31 Using the Self-timer ................................................................................................................... 32 Shooting in CALS Mode .......................................................................................................... 33 Shooting with My Settings Mode ..................................................................................... 33 Playing Back Images ..........................................................................................34 Viewing Your Images ................................................................................................................. 34 Thumbnail View ............................................................................................................................ 34 Enlarging Images ......................................................................................................................... 36 Deleting Files ........................................................................................................37 Deleting a File or All Files ........................................................................................................ 37 Deleting Multiple Files.............................................................................................................. 38 Changing the Display with the DISP. Button .............................................40 Maximizing the Picture Display Brightness ................................................................. 42 The Level Indicator (Electronic Level) ............................................................................. 42 About the Histogram Display .............................................................................................. 446 Advanced Operations 45 1 ADJ. Button Functions 46 Selecting Shooting Menu Options Assigned to the ADJ./MEMO Button .... 46 Shifting the AE and AF Targets ............................................................................................ 47 2 Scene Mode 48 Scene Modes ........................................................................................................48 Using Skew Correction Mode .............................................................................................. 50 3 Shooting and Viewing Movies 51 Shooting Movies .................................................................................................51 Playing Back Movies ...........................................................................................52 4 Memos 53 Adding Memos to New Photos .......................................................................................... 53 Viewing Memos ............................................................................................................................ 54 5 Shooting Menu 55 Using the Menu ...................................................................................................55 Shooting Menu Options ...................................................................................56 Density: Adjusting Contrast in Text Mode .................................................................... 56 Size: Choosing the Size of Photographs Taken in Text Mode ................................ 56 Movie Size: Choosing a Frame Size for Movies ........................................................... 56 Picture Quality/Size: Choosing Size and Compression Options for Photographs .......................................................................................................................... 56 Focus: Choosing How the Camera Focuses.................................................................. 56 Exposure Metering: Choosing How the Camera Sets Exposure ....................... 56 Continuous Mode: Shooting a Series of Photos ...................................................... 57 Image Settings: Adjusting Contrast, Sharpness, Color, and Vividness ............. 57 Auto Bracket: Varying Settings over a Series of Photographs ............................. 57 Time Exposure: Creating Light Trails .............................................................................. 57 Interval Shooting: Interval Timer Photography ........................................................ 58 Camera Shake Correction: Reducing Blur Caused by Camera Shake ............ 58 Date Imprint: Imprinting the Time and Date of Recording on Photographs.... 58 Exposure Compensation: Adjusting Exposure ........................................................ 58 White Balance: Adjusting Colors According to the Light Source ...................... 59 ISO Setting: Controlling the Camera’s Sensitivity to Light ..................................... 59 Edit Detection: Detecting Changes to Photos ........................................................... 59 Restore Defaults: Restoring Default Shooting Menu Settings ........................... 597 Focus ................................................................................................................................................... 60 Manual Focus (MF): Focusing Manually....................................................................... 60 Auto Bracket ................................................................................................................................... 61 Auto Bracket: Varying Exposure over a Series of Photographs ........................... 61 White Balance Bracket (WB-BKT): Creating Photographs with Varying White Balance ....................................................................................................................... 61 Exposure Compensation ........................................................................................................ 62 White Balance ................................................................................................................................ 63 Manual: Measuring White Balance ................................................................................... 64 ISO Setting: ISO Sensitivity........................................................................................................ 64 6 Playback Menu 65 Using the Menu ...................................................................................................65 Playback Menu Options ....................................................................................66 Resize: Creating Small Copies of Images ....................................................................... 66 Trim: Creating Cropped Copies .......................................................................................... 66 Contrast Correction: Creating Copies with Modified Brightness and Contrast ................................... 66 Skew Correction: Reducing the Effects of Perspective .......................................... 66 Protect: Protecting Images from Accidental Deletion ............................................. 66 Slide Show: Automatic Playback ...................................................................................... 66 Copy to Card from Internal Memory: Copying Pictures from Internal Memory to a Memory Card ............................................................................................. 66 DPOF: Selecting Pictures for Printing .............................................................................. 66 Recover File: Restoring Deleted Files .............................................................................. 67 Trim ...................................................................................................................................................... 68 Contrast Correction .................................................................................................................... 70 Skew Correction ........................................................................................................................... 71 Protect ................................................................................................................................................ 72 DPOF ................................................................................................................................................... 73 Viewing Pictures on TV .....................................................................................74 7 Setup Menu 75 Using the Menu ...................................................................................................75 Setup Menu Options..........................................................................................76 Format [Card]: Formatting Memory Cards................................................................... 76 Format [Internal Memory]: Formatting Internal Memory .................................. 76 LCD Brightness: Adjusting the Picture Display Brightness ................................... 76 Reg. My Settings: Saving Camera Settings ................................................................. 76 Stepped Zoom: Adjusting Zoom in Discrete Steps ................................................. 768 ADJ Button Setting 1–4: Choosing Roles for the ADJ. Button ........................... 77 AF Auxiliary Light: Assisting Autofocus ........................................................................ 77 Operation Sounds: Choosing the Sounds Made by the Camera ...................... 77 Volume Settings: Controlling Volume ........................................................................... 77 LCD Confirmation Time: Displaying Photos After Shooting .............................. 77 Auto Power Off: Camera Power Saving ........................................................................ 77 Monitor Auto off Delay: Choosing the Monitor off Delay ................................... 77 LCD Auto Dim: Picture Display Power Saving ............................................................ 77 Digital Zoom Image: Recording Photos Taken with Digital Zoom at Actual Size ......................................................................................................................... 78 Level Setting: Adjusting Level Indicator Settings ..................................................... 78 Grid Guide Display Options: Choosing a Framing Guide ................................... 78 Shooting Info. Display Frame: Viewing Settings at a Glance ............................ 78 Auto Rotate: Rotating Pictures for Playback .............................................................. 78 Card Sequence No.: File Numbering Options ........................................................... 79 Date Settings: Setting the Camera Clock ..................................................................... 79 Language/N: Choosing a Language ...................................................................... 79 Video Out Mode: Choosing a Video Format ............................................................... 79 CALS Pic Quality: Choosing Picture Quality and Size for CALS Mode ............. 80 Start Date/Time: Displaying the Date at Startup ...................................................... 80 Choose/Change Password: Choosing a Camera Password ............................... 80 Password Protection: Using a Password to Restrict Camera Access ............... 80 Password Validity Period: Choosing the Length of Time the Password Remains in Effect ................................................................................................................. 80 Power Button Hold Options: Adjusting POWER Button Responsiveness ... 80 Reg. My Settings ........................................................................................................................... 81 Digital Zoom Image ................................................................................................................... 82 Choose/Change Password .................................................................................................... 83 Password Protection .................................................................................................................. 85 Camera: Adding Password Protection to the Camera ............................................. 85 Int. Memory: Adding Password Protection to Internal Memory ........................ 85 SD WORM: Disabling Password Protection for SD WORM Cards ........................ 86 Menus: Adding Password Protection to the Menus ................................................. 86 8 Camera Memo Menu 87 Using the Menu ...................................................................................................87 Camera Memo Menu Options ........................................................................88 Camera Memo Mode: Choosing a Memo Mode .................................................... 88 Memo Skip: Skipping Memo Combinations ............................................................... 88 Mark Memo Added to Photos: Displaying Memos That Have Been Added to Photos ................................................................................................................................. 889 Remove Memo Marking: Removing Marking from Memos That Have Been Added to Photos .................................................................................................................. 88 Memo Warning: Displaying an Empty Description Warning .............................. 88 Display Memo at Startup: Displaying the Camera Memo Dialog at Startup ................................................... 89 Memo Increment: Incrementing Numerical Memo Descriptions .................... 89 Camera Memo Imprint: Imprinting Memos on Photos ....................................... 89 Camera Memo 1 Auto Delete: Automatically Deleting the First Description .......................................................... 89 Barcode Type: Choosing a Barcode Type ...................................................................... 90 Barcode Mode: Choosing a Destination for Barcode Data ................................... 90 Scan Time: Choosing a Barcode Scan Time ................................................................. 90 9 Direct Printing 91 About the Direct Print Function ....................................................................91 Connecting the Camera to a Printer ............................................................91 Printing Still Images ...........................................................................................92 Printing One or All Still Images ........................................................................................... 92 Printing Several Still Images .................................................................................................. 94 Printing Reports ............................................................................................................................ 95 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer 96 For Windows .........................................................................................................96 System Requirements for Using the Supplied CD-ROM ..................................... 96 CD-ROM Setup .............................................................................................................................. 97 Copying Pictures to Your Computer ............................................................................. 102 For Macintosh .................................................................................................... 104 Copying Pictures to Your Computer ............................................................................. 10410 11 Appendices 106 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 106 Error Messages ........................................................................................................................... 106 Camera Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................... 107 Available Settings ............................................................................................ 113 Specifications .................................................................................................... 115 Number of Images That Can Be Stored .................................................... 117 Defaults Settings/Functions Whose Defaults Are Restored When the Camera Is Turned Off ............................................................. 119 Using a Wide Conversion Lens .................................................................... 121 Optional Filters.................................................................................................. 121 Using the External Flash ................................................................................ 122 Using Your Camera Abroad .......................................................................... 123 Cautions on Use ................................................................................................ 124 Care and Storage .............................................................................................. 126 Warranty and Servicing ................................................................................. 128 Index .................................................................................................................... 130Basic Operations If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Packing List ..........................................12 How to Use the Mode Dial ...................13 Names of Parts .....................................14 Picture Display .....................................16 Getting Ready ......................................19 Basic Shooting .....................................27 Playing Back Images ............................34 Deleting Files .......................................37 Changing the Display with the DISP. Button ............................................4012 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Packing List Open the package and make sure all the items are included. * The actual appearance of items included may differ. • G700 The serial number of the camera is provided on the bottom face of the camera. • Rechargeable Battery • Battery Charger • USB Cable (Mini B cable) • AV Cable • Neck Strap • Warranty • Camera User Guide • CD-ROM (GP. 9 6 ) Optional Accessories • Rechargeable Battery (DB-65) • Battery Charger (BJ-6) • Soft Case (SC-700) Used to store your camera. • Wide Conversion Lens (DW-5) Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Attaching the Neck Strap to the Camera Thread the small end of the strap through the strap eyelet on the camera and loop the ends as shown. • For the latest information on optional accessories, see the Ricoh website (http:// www.ricohpmmc.com/).13 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. How to Use the Mode Dial Set the mode dial to the desired mode before shooting still images or movies. Mode Dial Symbols and Descriptions Symbol Function Description Refer to V CALS Mode Quality and size are adjusted to produce photographs suitable for public works photography. Picture quality and size can be selected from six options using the [CALS Pic Quality] item in the setup menu (GP.80). P.33 5 Auto Shooting Mode Automatically sets the optimal aperture value and shutter speed depending on the subject. P.27 T, U My Settings Mode You can shoot using the settings registered in [Reg. My Settings]. P.33 W Scene Mode Optimize settings for the current subject or scene or shoot movies. P.4814 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Names of Parts Camera Front View 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 Item Name Refer to 1 AF Auxiliary Light P.77 2 Shutter Release Button P.27 3 Mode Dial P.13, 27, 33, 48 4 POWER Button P.24 5 Accessory Shoe P.122 6 Speaker P.52 7 Strap Eyelet P.12 8 Flash P.31 9 Microphone P.51 10 Lens —15 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Rear View 1 2 3 7 6 4 5 8 3 13 9 12 10 11 16 15 14 17 Item Name Refer to 1 Picture Display P.16 2 Auto Focus/Flash Lamp P.28, 31 3 Strap Eyelet P.12 4 z (Telephoto)/8 (Enlarged View) Button P.29, 34, 36 5 Z (Wide-angle)/9 (Thumbnail View) Button P.29, 34, 36 6 6 ( Playback) Button P.34 7 MENU/OK Button P.55, 65, 75, 87 8 DISP. Button P.36, 40 9 "/N ( Macro) Button P.30 10 D ( Delete)/t ( Self-timer) Button P.32, 37 11 #/F ( Flash) Button P.31 12 ADJ./MEMO Button P.46, 53 13 Terminal Cover P.71, 91, 102, 104 14 AV Output Terminal P.74 15 USB Terminal P.91, 102, 104 16 Tripod Screw Hole — 17 Battery/Card Cover P.23, 12116 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Picture Display Example of Picture Display when Shooting Pictures F3.5 FF3.5 3.5 1 Sec 111 Sec SSeecc ??1 ??1 ??1 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F I n t e r v a l II n t e r v a l Inntteerrvvaall X4.8 XX4.8 4.8 111///1000 111000 000000 EV EEEV VV +++0.7 ISO 100 000.7..77 ISO 100 IISSOO 110000 1100 1111 1212 1133 1144 1155 1166 1177 1188 1199 2200 2211 2222 2233 2244 2525 2266 2277 2288 2929 3300 3311 3232 3333 Still Image Mode Item Name Refer to Item Name Refer to 1 Flash Mode P.31 18 Camera Shake Correction P.58 2 Edit Detection P.59 19 Battery Symbol P.18 3 Scene Mode/Multi-shot P.48, 57 20 Time Exposure P.57 4 Shooting Mode Types P.13 21 Self-timer P.32 5 My Settings Mode P.33 22 Macro Shooting P.30 6 Remaining Number of Still Images P.117 23 Digital Zoom Magnification/ Auto Resize Zoom P.30, 82 7 Recording Destination P.21 24 Zoom Bar P.29 8 Image Size P.56 25 Interval Shooting P.58 9 Picture Quality P.56 26 Aperture P.115 10 Focus Mode P.56 27 Shutter Speed P.115 11 White Balance P.63 28 Exposure Compensation P.62 12 Exposure Metering P.56 29 ISO Setting P.64 13 Image Settings P.57 30 Level Indicator P.43 14 Auto Bracket P.57 31 AF Frame P.27 15 Histogram P.44 32 Exposure Warning Indicator P.62 16 Memo indicator P.87 33 Camera Shake Warning Symbol P.29, 58 17 Date Imprint P.5817 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. 0 0 : 0 0 0 0 : 00 : 000 0 00 ///0 0 : 0 2 0 0 : 00 : 000 222 640 664040 Sh u t t e r b u t t o n : St a r t SSSh u t t e r b u t t o n : St a r t hhuutttteerr bbuuttttoonn :: SSttaarrtt 3344 3535 3636 Movie Mode Item Name Refer to Item Name Refer to 34 Recording Time P.117 36 Movie Recording Indicator P.51 35 Remaining Recording Time P.117 Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When the number of remaining shots is 10,000 or more, “9999” is displayed. Example of Picture Display During Playback F3.5 FF3.5 3.5 000-0031 00000-0031 0000--00003311 0031 000031 003311///9999 999999 999999 4:3 F 4 : 4:33 F F 2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 0 000111 00:00 00: 00:0000 111///100 111000000 1010 1111 1122 1133 1414 Still Image Mode *RMOV0001 ***RMOV0001 RRMMOOVV00000011 10 10 1100//20222000 640 664040 : St a r t ::: St a r t SSttaarrtt 0 5 : 1 2 0 5 0055::: 1 21122 2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 00:00 0001 00 11 0000::000000 1155 1166 Movie Mode Item Name Refer to Item Name Refer to 1 File Number — 9 Picture Quality P.56 2 Number of Playback Files — 10 Date at Shooting P.26 3 Total Number of Files — 11 Memo indicator P.87 4 Mode Types — 12 Aperture P.115 5 Protect P.72 13 Shutter Speed P.115 6 DPOF P.73 14 Battery Symbol P.18 7 Playback Data Source P.21 15 Recording Time or Lapsed Time — 8 Image Size P.56 16 Indicator —18 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The picture display may display messages to inform you of operational instructions or the camera’s status while in use. • Additional information can be viewed by pressing the DISP. button (GP.40). 100-0273 100-0273 110000--00227733 10 10 1100//20222000 4:3 F 4 : 4:33 F F 2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 0 000111 00:00 00: 00:0000 F5.5 FF5.5 5.5 11//606600 ISO 100 IIISO 100 SSOO 110000 28 2228 88 mmmmmmmm Blue BBlue lue EV EV EEVV +++0.7 000.7..77 F5.5 FF5.5 5.5 11//606600 ISO 100 IIISO 100 SSOO 110000 28 28 2288 mmmmmmmm Blue BBlue lue EV EEEV VV +++0.7 000.7..77 1122 1144 1100 1111 1133 1155 Item Name Refer to Item Name Refer to 1 Shooting Mode — 9 Flash Mode P.31 2 Continuous Mode P.57 10 Focal Length of the Zoom P.29 3 Aperture P.115 11 Macro Shooting P.30 4 Shutter Speed P.115 12 Focus Mode P.56 5 ISO Setting P.64 13 Auto Bracket P.57 6 Exposure Compensation P.62 14 Image Settings P.57 7 Exposure Metering P.56 15 Memo indicator P.87 8 White Balance P.63 Battery Level Indication A battery symbol appears at the lower right of the picture display to indicate the battery level. Recharge the battery before it is depleted. Battery Symbol Description Green Battery is sufficiently charged. Battery partially discharged. Recharging is recommended. Orange Battery level is low. Recharge the battery. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Depending on battery make and condition, the level of AAA NiMH batteries may not be shown correctly.19 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Getting Ready Turn the power on and get ready to shoot. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Be sure the camera is off before removing the battery. • For information on how to turn the camera off, see P.25. About the Battery The G700 can be used with the following batteries: • DB-65 rechargeable Li-ion batteries (supplied) • AAA Alkaline Batteries (available in stores) • AAA Nickel-Hydrogen Batteries (available in stores) Number of shots you can take ---------------------------------------------------- • Approximate number of shots you can take on a single charge Battery Type Number of Shots (Normal Mode) Rechargeable Battery (DB-65) approx. 360 AAA Alkaline Batteries (available in stores) approx. 40 * When [LCD Auto Dim] (GP.77) is set to [On]. • Based on CIPA standard (Temperature: 23 degrees Celsius, picture display on, 30 seconds between shots, changing the zoom setting from telephoto to wideangle or wide-angle to telephoto for each shot, 50% flash usage, turning the power off after each 10 shots). • The figure for the number of shots that can be taken with AAA alkaline batteries is based on measurements made with batteries manufactured by Panasonic. • If [Off] is selected for [LCD Auto Dim], up to 345 shots can be taken with DB-65 batteries and up to 40 shots with AAA alkaline batteries. • Set the camera to synchro-monitor mode to increase the number of shots you can take (GP.40). • The number of shots is for reference only. If the camera is used for long periods of time for setting and playback, the shooting time (the number of shots) will decrease. If you intend to use the camera for a long period of time, we recommend carrying a spare battery.20 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The battery may become very hot immediately after operation. Turn the camera off and leave it to cool down sufficiently before removing the battery. • Please remove the battery if you are not going to use the camera for a long period of time. • When using a lithium-ion battery, use only the specified rechargeable lithiumion battery (DB-65). Do not use any other battery. • DB-60 Li-ion batteries can not be used. • NiMH batteries are not charged at purchase; charge before use. • NiMH batteries may suffer a drop in performance immediately after purchase or following a month or more of disuse and may need to be recharged two or three times before they will hold a charge. • The battery life of alkaline batteries varies with make and the time elapsed since the date of manufacture. Capacity drops at low temperatures. • Manganese and Ni-Cd batteries can not be used. About the SD Memory Card (available in stores) Pictures can be stored in the camera’s 103 MB internal memory or on optional SD, SDHC, and SD WORM memory cards (hereafter referred to as “memory cards”). SD WORM cards ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Data stored on SanDisk® SD™ WORM (Write Once Read Many) cards can not be deleted or modified. The following are not available with SD WORM cards: Deleting files P.37 Recover File P.67 Skew Correction P.50, 71 Trim P.68 Movie shooting P.51 Contrast Correction P.70 Memos P.53 Protect P.72 Continuous Mode P.57 DPOF P.73 Resize P.66 Format [Card] P.76 Copy to Card from Internal Memory P.66 • SD WORM cards can contain up to 510 folders, each holding a maximum of 510 photographs. • Files can not be copied from a computer to an SD WORM card when the camera is connected via USB.21 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. About Formatting ------------------------------------------------------------------- Before using a memory card for the first time or after using a memory card in other devices, be sure to format it with this camera. Memory cards can be formatted using the [Format [Card]] item (GP.76) in the setup menu (GP.75). Where images are recorded ------------------------------------------------------- When no SD memory card is loaded, the camera records images to the internal memory (t); when an SD memory card is loaded, it records images to the SD memory card (u). Where images are played back from -------------------------------------------- When no SD memory card is loaded, the camera plays back from the internal memory (t). When an SD memory card is loaded, it plays back from the SD memory card (u). Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • If an SD memory card is loaded, the camera does not record to the internal memory, even if the card is full. • Take care not to get the contacts of the card dirty. Write-protecting your images ---------------------------------------------------- Move the write-protection switch on the SD memory card to LOCK to prevent your still images from being accidentally erased or the card from being formatted. Note that you cannot shoot images on a locked card because no data can be recorded to the card. Unlock the card before shooting. Although SD WORM cards do not have a writeprotection switch, they can not be formatted, and data can not be deleted from SD WORM cards. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The [Copy to Card from Internal Memory] item (GP.66) in the playback menu (GP.65) can be used to copy the pictures in internal memory to a memory card. • An SD/SDHC memory card with a Speed Class of 6 or better is recommended when recording movies with [x 1280] selected for [Movie Size] (GP.56).22 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Charging the Rechargeable Battery (DB-65) DB-65 Li-ion batteries must be charged before use. 1 Insert the battery into the battery charger, making sure that the r and s markings on the battery match those on the battery charger. • The battery label should face up. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Be careful not to reverse the r and s sides. 2 Plug the power cable into an outlet. • Use the battery charger (BJ-6) to recharge the battery. • Charging starts. Charging status is indicated by the charger lamp as shown in the table below. Once charging has finished, unplug the battery charger from the power outlet. Charger Lamp Description Lit Charging Off Charging complete Flashing The battery charger terminal may be soiled or the battery charger/battery may be faulty. Unplug the battery charger from the power outlet, and remove the battery. • The approximate time needed to recharge a fully-exhausted battery is shown below. Rechargeable Battery Charging Time DB-65 Approx. 150 min. (25 °C)23 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Loading the Battery and SD Memory Card After recharging the rechargeable battery, load the battery and the SD memory card. Be sure the camera is off before removing the battery or the SD memory card. 1 Turn the battery/card cover knob toward the M mark to open the cover. 2 Insert the rechargeable battery and SD memory card. • Make sure the SD memory card is facing the right way and then push the card all the way in until it clicks. • When the rechargeable battery is loaded in place, it is locked with the hook shown in the figure. Logo side Loading the specified dry cell batteries (available in stores) • Insert the batteries in the direction shown. 3 Close and knob the battery/card cover. • Close the battery/card cover and rotate the knob to the position opposite the M icon.24 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Removing the Rechargeable Battery Turn the battery/card cover knob toward the M mark to open the cover. Release the hook that locks the rechargeable battery. The battery is ejected. Pull the battery out of the camera. Be careful not to drop the battery when removing it from the camera. Removing the Dry Cell Batteries Turn the battery/card cover knob toward the M mark to open the cover. The batteries will be ejected. Pull the batteries out of the camera. Be careful not to drop the dry cell batteries when removing them from the camera. Removing the SD Memory Card Turn the battery/card cover knob toward the M mark to open the cover. Push in the SD memory card and gently release to eject it. Pull the card out of the camera. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • To prevent moisture or dust from entering the camera, close the battery/card cover securely. • Before opening or closing the battery/card cover, choose a location free of water, sand, mud, and other foreign matter and remove any such matter as may be adhering to the camera. • Make sure that the rechargeable battery and SD memory card are facing the right way when inserted into the camera. Inserting the rechargeable battery or SD memory card in the wrong direction and forcing close the battery/card cover may damage the camera, rechargeable battery or SD memory card. Turning the Power On/Off Press the POWER button to turn the camera on or off. When the camera is turned on, a start-up sound plays and the picture display turns on. If the POWER button is pressed when the camera is on, the number of files recorded on that day is displayed, and then the camera turns off.25 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • If you adjust the clock before turning the camera off, the camera will display the number of shots taken since the clock was set. • A zero is displayed if the clock is not set. Using the Camera in Playback Mode Pressing and holding the 6 (Playback) button turns on the camera in playback mode, allowing you to start playback at once. When the camera has been turned on with the 6 button, pressing the 6 button again switches playback mode to shooting mode. About Auto Power Off -------------------------------------------------------------- • If the camera goes unused for a set period of time, it automatically turns itself off to save power (Auto Power Off). • The auto power off setting can be changed (GP.77). About Password Protection (GP.85) ----------------------------------------- If the camera is password protected, you may be prompted for a password when the camera is turned on. To use the camera, enter the password as described on P.83. Setting the Language, Date and Time When the power is turned on for the first time, the language setting screen appears (for the picture display language). After setting the language, go on to the date/time setting (for printing the date and time on your photos). Setting the Language 1 Press the !" buttons to select a language. • When the DISP. button is pressed, the language setting is canceled and the date/time setting screen appears. 2 Press the MENU/OK button. • The display language is set, and the date/time setting screen appears.26 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Setting the Date and Time 1 Press the !"#$ buttons to set the year, month, date, time and format. • Change the setting with !" and move the item with #$. • You can cancel the setting by pressing the DISP. button. 2 Check the information on the screen and then press the MENU/OK button. • The confirmation screen appears. 3 Press the MENU/OK button. • The date and time are set. • If the battery is low, a warning will be displayed. Use of a fullycharged battery is recommended; to clear the warning from the display, press MENU/OK. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The language, date, and time can be changed at any time using the [Language/ N] and [Date Settings] items (GP.79) in the setup menu (GP.75). • The [Date Imprint] item (GP.58) in the shooting menu (GP.55) can be used to stamp photographs with the date and time of recording. • If the battery is removed for more than three days, the date and time settings will be lost. These settings must be made again. • To retain the date and time settings, load a battery with adequate remaining power for more than ten hours.27 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Basic Shooting Now you are ready. Shooting in Auto Shooting Mode (Focus and Shoot) Turn the mode dial to 5 to shoot with auto shooting mode. The shutter release button works in two steps. When you press the shutter release button halfway (Half-press), the auto-focus function is triggered to determine the focal distance. Next, press it all the way down (Fullpress) to shoot. When your subject is not in the center of your composition, compose your photo after focusing (Focus Lock). 1 Hold the camera with both hands and lightly press both elbows against your body. 2 Put your finger on the shutter release button. 3 Frame the picture with your subject in the AF frame in the center of the screen and press the shutter release button halfway. 9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F • The camera focuses on the subject and the exposure and white balance are fixed. • The focal distance is measured at a maximum of nine points. Green frames appear to indicate the positions that are in focus.28 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. 4 To take a picture with the subject in the foreground in focus against a background, half-press the shutter release button to focus on the subject, and then compose your shot. Shooting range Subject to be focused 5 Gently press the shutter release button all the way. • The still image you have taken appears momentarily on the picture display and is recorded to the internal memory or the SD memory card. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When you are shooting, be careful not to obstruct the lens or flash with your fingers, hair, or the strap. About Focusing ----------------------------------------------------------------------- The frame in the center of the picture display and the auto focus/flash lamp indicate whether the subject is in or out of focus. Focus Status Frame Color Auto Focus/Flash Lamp Before focusing White Off Subject in focus Green On (Green) Subject not in focus Red (Flashing) Blinks (Green) It may be impossible to bring the following subjects into focus, or they may not be in focus even when the frame color is green. • Objects that lack contrast, such as the sky, a wall that is only one color, or the hood of a car. • Flat two-dimensional objects with only horizontal lines and no significant protrusions. • Quickly moving objects. • Things in poorly lit places. • Areas with strong backlighting, or reflections. • Things that flicker, such as fluorescent lights. • Point light sources, such as light bulbs, spotlights, or LEDs. When you want to shoot subjects like this, first focus on an object the same distance as your subject and then shoot.29 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Preventing Camera Shake --------------------------------------------------------- • Press the shutter release button gently to prevent camera shake. • If you move the camera when pressing the shutter release button, the still image might not come out clearly due to camera shake. Camera shake tends to occur in the following cases: - When shooting in a dark place without using the flash - When using the zoom function - When [Time Exposure] (GP.57) is selected in the shooting menu (GP.55) • When the J symbol appears on the picture display, this indicates that camera shake may occur. To prevent camera shake, try any of the following. - Selecting [On] for [Camera Shake Correction] (GP.58) in the shooting menu (GP.55) - Setting the flash to [Auto] or [Flash On] (GP. 3 1 ) - Raising the ISO setting (GP.64) - Using the self-timer (GP.32) Using the Zoom Function Press the z (Telephoto) button to zoom in so that your subject fills more of the frame. To zoom out and increase the area visible in the frame, press the Z (Wide-angle) button. 9999 99999 999 4:3 F 4 : 4:33 F F 9999 99999 999 4:3 F 4 : 4:33 F F Wide-angle Telephoto Zoom bar Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The [Stepped Zoom] option (GP.76) in the setup menu (GP.75) allows optical zoom to be adjusted in six discrete steps.30 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Using the Digital Zoom ------------------------------------------------------------- Optical zoom offers magnifications of up to 5.0 ×; if desired, magnification can be further increased by up to 4.0 × using digital zoom. For digital zooming, release the z button once when the zoom reaches the limit on the z end on the zoom bar, and then hold the z button down again. If [l 4 : 3 F] or [l 4 : 3 N] is selected for [Picture Quality/Size], you can select [Auto Resize] for [ Digital Zoom Image] (GP.82). Shooting Close-Ups ( Macro Shooting) Use macro mode for close-ups. Press the N (macro button) to enable or disable macro mode. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • [Focus] (GP.56) is set to [Spot AF]. • Macro mode is not available in manual focus mode (GP.56). • To take a further close-up picture during macro shooting, use [Zoom Macro] (GP.48) in scene mode. • The minimum shooting distance and shooting range when using the zoom are shown below. Zoom position Minimum Shooting Distance (from the front of the lens) Shooting Range Wide-angle Approx. 1 cm Approx. 21.8 mm × 16.4 mm Telephoto Approx. 15 cm Approx. 42.3 mm × 31.7 mm (when digital zoom is not used) Approx. 15 cm Approx. 10.6 mm × 7.9 mm (when 4.0 × digital zoom is used)31 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Using the Flash You can select the flash mode that best suits your shot. At the time of purchase, the camera is set to [Flash Off]. 1 With the camera ready to shoot, press the F button. • The list of the flash modes symbol is displayed on the picture display. Flash Off The flash will not fire. Auto The flash fires automatically when the subject is poorly lit or backlit. Anti Red-Eye Reduces the red-eye phenomenon, in which people’s eyes appear red in pictures. Flash On The flash fires regardless of the lighting conditions. FLASH ON (10M) The flash always fires with a range of 10 m. When zoomed in on your subject, the flash fires with a range of 6.2 m. Flash Synchro. The flash fires with the shutter speed slowed. This is useful when taking portrait pictures in a nightscape. Camera shake may occur, so the use of a tripod is recommended. 2 Press the !" buttons to select the flash mode. • The flash mode symbol is displayed at the upper left of the picture display. • The auto focus/flash lamp blinks while the flash charges. Photos can be taken when the lamp turns off. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • You cannot shoot when the flash is charging (approx. 8 seconds). • If the camera is powered by AAA alkaline or NiMH batteries, the picture display will turn off while the flash charges. • After the camera is turned on, it may take longer for the camera to become ready for shooting when using the flash.32 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The flash mode setting is retained until you press the F button again. • The auxiliary flash fires to increase the AE accuracy. • The flash can not be used in some shooting modes or with some shooting menu options (GP.113). Using the Self-timer The camera offers a ten-second timer for self-portraits and a twosecond timer to prevent blur caused by camera movement when the shutter-release button is pressed. 1 With the camera ready to shoot, press the t (Self-timer) button. • The Self-timer symbol appears on the screen. • The [10] to the right of the symbol indicates the number of seconds. In this case, if you press the shutter release button, the camera will shoot after 10 seconds. • Each press of the t button changes the self-timer setting in the following order: 10 sec, 2 sec, and Self-timer Off. 2 Start the timer. • Press the shutter-release button to lock focus and start the timer. If the ten-second timer is selected, the AF auxiliary light will light. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The camera remains in self-timer mode even after the image is shot. To cancel the self-timer, press the t button and change the self-timer setting to [SelfTimer Off]. • When the self-timer is set to 2 seconds, the AF auxiliary light does not blink. • When the self-timer is set, the [Interval Shooting] setting is disabled. 9999 99999 9999 99999 999999 4 : 3 F 4 : 44 : 3 F 4 : 4::33 F 33 F FF33 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Shooting in CALS Mode In CALS mode, you can shoot photos in a quality and size suitable to be submitted as official public works pictures. Picture quality and size are set beforehand in [CALS Pic Quality] on the setup menu (GP.80). At shipment, [CALS Pic Quality] is set to [a 4 : 3 N] (normal image quality, 1280 × 960 pixels, with a file size of about 363 KB) to conform to the Japanese standard for official public works photographs, which requires that images be 1 megapixel with a file size of 500 KB or less. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • When the mode dial is set to a mode other than CALS, [Picture Quality/size] returns to the setting in the previous mode. • You can register [CALS Pic Quality] as My Settings (GP.81). Shooting with My Settings Mode Rotate the mode dial to T or U to take photos using settings saved with the [Reg. My Settings] option in the setup menu (GP.81). Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You can change the camera settings set in my settings mode. Changing the mode or turning the camera off returns the settings to the original MY1 and MY2 settings.34 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Playing Back Images Viewing Your Images To select playback mode, press the 6 (Playback) button. When the camera is off, pressing and holding the 6 (Playback) button longer than 1 second turns the camera on in playback mode. Press the #$ buttons to display the previous file or the next file. Press the !" buttons to display the file 10 frames forward or backward. To switch the camera from playback mode to shooting mode, press the 6 button again. Thumbnail View 20 Frames Press the 9 (Thumbnail view) button to view pictures 20 at a time. Press the DISP. button to change between the thumbnail list and page list. In the page list, press the !"#$ buttons to select the page. To display the highlighted photo full frame, press the ADJ./MEMO or 8 (Enlarged view) button. F3.5 FF3.5 3.5 100-0009 11100-0009 0000--00000099 L a s t F i l e L a s t F i l e LLaasstt FFiillee 2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 0 000111 00:00 00: 00:0000 11//303300 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F35 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. 81 Frames To display pictures 81 at a time, press 9 in the 20-frame view. Press the DISP. button to change between the thumbnail list and page list. In the page list, press the !"#$ buttons to select the page. To display the highlighted photo full frame, press the ADJ./MEMO button or press 8 twice. Thumbnail list Page list Date of Recording To switch to a calendar display, press 9 in the 81-frame view. Press the DISP. button to change between the thumbnail list and date list. In the date list, press the #$ buttons to select the date, or press the !" buttons to select the page. To display the highlighted photo full frame, press the ADJ./MEMO button or press 8 three times. Thumbnail list Date list36 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Enlarging Images To zoom in on a photo that is currently displayed full frame, press the 8 ( Enlarged view) button. Maximum magnification varies with image size. Image Size Enlarged View (maximum magnification) z 4 : 3 F 3.4 × a 4 : 3 F/a 4 : 3 N/b 4 : 3 F 6.7 × Image sizes other than those above 16 × Operations that can be performed in enlarged view 8/9 Zoom in or out. Press !, ", #, or $ to view other areas of the image. MENU/OK If the current magnification less than 8 ×, zoom in to 8 × or to maximum magnification, whichever is less. If the current magnification is 8 × or more, zoom in to 16 ×. If the picture is currently displayed at maximum magnification, pressing MENU/OK cancels zoom. Pressing the DISP. button at this point changes the display as follows. 101-0084 11101-0084 0011--00008844 L a s t F i l e LLL a s t F i l e aasstt FFiillee Pressing the !"#$ buttons at this point moves the area displayed. Pressing the !"#$ buttons at this point moves the area displayed. 101-0084 11101-0084 0011--00008844 L a s t F i l e LLL a s t F i l e aasstt FFiillee Pressing the !"#$ buttons at this point displays the previous or next image enlarged. DISP. button Pressing and holding the DISP. button Pressing and holding the DISP. button Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Movies cannot be enlarged. • Cropped copies (GP.68) can not be zoomed in to the magnifications stated above.37 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Deleting Files You can delete files from the SD memory card or internal memory. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • You can use the [Recover File] function to restore needed files that you accidentally deleted(GP.67). Note, however, that files can not be recovered if, for example, the camera has been turned off or shooting mode has been selected since the files were deleted. • Files can not be deleted from SD WORM memory cards. Deleting a File or All Files 1 Press the 6 (Playback) button. • The last file recorded is displayed. 2 Press the !"#$ buttons to display the file you want to delete. • To select multiple pictures, use the 9 (Thumbnail view) button to select a multi-frame view before proceeding to Step 3. 3 Press the D (Delete) button. 4 Press the !" buttons to select [Delete One] or [Delete All]. • You can change the image for deletion with the #$buttons. 5 Press the MENU/OK button. • If [Delete All] is selected, press the #$ buttons to select [Yes] and then press the MENU/OK button.38 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Deleting Multiple Files You can select multiple files for simultaneous deletion either individually or by selecting one or more ranges consisting of two images and all photographs between them. To delete multiple files, press the D (Delete) button in playback mode and follow the steps below (to exit at any time without deleting images, press DISP.). Specifying Multiple Files Separately 1 Press the !" buttons to select [Delete Multi] and then press the MENU/OK button. • Omit this step if the camera is already in multi-frame view. 2 Press the !" buttons to select [Sel. Indiv.] and then press the MENU/OK button. 3 Press the !"#$ buttons to select the file you want to delete and press the MENU/OK button. • The trash symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the file. • Press the ADJ./MEMO button to switch to the display for specifying a range of files. See Step 3 and beyond on P.39. 4 Repeat Step 3 to select all the files you want to delete. • If you selected a file by mistake, you can deselect it by selecting the file and pressing the MENU/OK button. • Press DISP. to cancel and return to Step 2. 5 Press the D (Delete) button. 6 Press the #$ buttons to select [Yes] and then press the MENU/OK button. S e l / C a n c e l SSS e l / C a n c e l eell//CCaanncceell D e l e t e D e l e t e DDeelleettee L a s t F i l e LLL a s t F i l e aasstt FFiillee D e l e t e DDD e l e t e eelleettee 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F S e l / C a n c e l SSS e l / C a n c e l eell//CCaanncceell D e l e t e D e l e t e DDeelleettee L a s t F i l e LLL a s t F i l e aasstt FFiillee D e l e t e DDD e l e t e eelleettee 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F39 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Specifying a Range of Multiple Files 1 Press the !" buttons to select [Delete Multi] and then press the MENU/OK button. • Omit this step if the camera is already in multi-frame view. 2 Press the !" buttons to select [Sel. Range] and then press the MENU/OK button. 3 Press the !"#$ buttons to select the starting point of the range of files you want to delete and press the MENU/OK button. • If you make a mistake when selecting the starting point for the range of files, press the DISP. button to return to the screen for selecting the starting point. • Press the ADJ./MEMO button to switch to the display for specifying files separately. See Step 3 and beyond on P.38. 4 Press the !"#$ buttons to select the ending point of the range of files you want to delete and press the MENU/OK button. • The trash symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the specified files. • Press DISP. to cancel and return to Step 2. 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to specify all the ranges of files you want to delete. 6 Press the D (Delete) button. 7 Press the #$ buttons to select [Yes] and then press the MENU/OK button. D e l e t e DDD e l e t e eelleettee 6 7666 777//8 9888 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F E n d C a n c e l EE n dnd C a n c e l CCaanncceell D e l e t e DDD e l e t e eelleettee 6 7666 777//8 9888 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F E n d C a n c e l EE n dnd C a n c e l CCaanncceell 7 0777 000//8 9888 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F Start Delete SSStart ttaarrtt Delete DDeelleettee De l e t e De l e t e DDeelleettee 7 0777 000//8 9888 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F Start Delete SSStart ttaarrtt Delete DDeelleettee De l e t e De l e t e DDeelleettee40 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Changing the Display with the DISP. Button Pressing the DISP. button allows you to change the screen display mode and toggle the information displayed on the picture display. During Shooting Mode 9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F 9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F Normal Symbol Display Histogram Display Grid Guide Display Picture Display Off (Synchro-Monitor Mode) No Display Grid Guide Display ------------------------------------------------------------------- • This displays auxiliary lines on the picture display to help you compose your picture. These lines are not recorded with images. • Use [Grid Guide Display Options] on the setup menu to select the grid (GP.78). Synchro-Monitor Mode ------------------------------------------------------------- This turns the picture display off except when the camera is operated. This is effective for saving power consumption. The picture display turns on when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; once a picture has been taken and the results displayed, the picture display will turn off (this differs from the [LCD Auto Dim] and [Monitor Auto off Delay] options in the setup menu).41 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • When [Shooting Info. Display Frame] is set to [On] in the setup menu, the shooting information display frame can be displayed for normal symbol display and histogram display (GP.78). • Histograms are not displayed in movie mode. A blinking [O] icon, the recording time, and the time available are displayed during recording even when indicators are hidden or the grid guide is displayed. • When [Level Setting] is set to [Display] or [Disp + Snd] (GP.42), the level indicator is displayed during normal symbol display and histogram display (GP.43). • When the picture display is off (including when the display has turned off automatically in synchro-monitor mode), pressing any of the following buttons turns the picture display on: the MENU/OK, ADJ./MEMO, DISP., 8, 9, 6 (Playback). During Playback Mode F3.5 FF3.5 3.5 000-0001 000-0001 000000--00000011 0001 000001 000011///9999 999999 999999 2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 0 000111 00 : 00 00: 00:0000 111///1000 111000 000000 4:3 F 4 : 4:33 F F 100-0001 11100-0001 0000--00000011 0001 000001 000011///9999 999999 999999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F 2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 0 000111 00:00 00: 00:0000 F3.5 FF3.5 3.5 111///1000 111000 000000 ISO 100 IIISO 100 SSOO 110000 28 28 2288 mmmmmmmm EV EEEV VV –––0.3 000.3..33 Comp a n y A Fo u n d a t i o n wo r k Ex t e r i o r Be v e r l y Be e c h Gamma Comp a n y Cl i e n t Co n s t . t y p e L o c a t i o n Su p e r v i s o r Aff i l i a t e s Company A Foundation work Exterior Beverly Beech Gamma Company Client Const.type Location Supervisor Affiliates Comp a n y A Fo u n d a t i o n wo r k Ex t e r i o r Be v e r l y Be e c h Gamma Comp a n y Cl i e n t Co n s t . t y p e L o c a t i o n Su p e r v i s o r Aff i l i a t e s Normal Symbol Display Memo Display Histogram and Detailed Information Display No Display No memo present Memo present42 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Maximizing the Picture Display Brightness Hold the DISP. button down in shooting mode to maximize the display brightness in shooting mode. When the brightness is at the maximum setting, holding the DISP. button down returns the brightness to the level set in [LCD Brightness] (GP.76). The Level Indicator (Electronic Level) If the level indicator is enabled using the [Level Setting] option in the setup menu, the camera will display an indicator and sound a beep to help you keep the camera level. The level indicator is displayed during normal symbol display and histogram display. This is useful for keeping the image level when taking pictures of scenery or buildings. This is also very useful for taking pictures with the horizon visible. Available Settings Description Off The level indicator will not display. The level sound will not emit. Display The level indicator will display. The level sound will not emit. Disp + Snd The level indicator appears on the screen and a level sound is emitted when the image is level. Sound The level indicator will not display. A level sound is emitted when the image is level. 1 Highlight [ Level Setting] in the setup menu (GP.75) and press $. 2 Press the !" buttons to select the setting and then press the MENU/OK button. 9999 99999 9999 99999 999999 4 : 3 F 4 : 44 : 3 F 4 : 4::33 F 33 F FF43 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. Level indicator display When level: The level indicator becomes green, indicating that the scale is in the middle. Green When tilted to the right or left: The mark on the level indicator becomes orange, indicating the opposite side of the direction in which the camera is tilted. Orange When the camera is tilted too far to the right or left: Half of the level indicator on the opposite side of the direction in which the camera is tilted becomes red. The mark on the level indicator is not displayed. Red When the camera is tilted too far forward or backward, or it cannot be determined whether the camera is level: The top and bottom of the level indicator become red. The mark on the level indicator is not displayed. Red When the camera is held vertically: When shooting with the camera positioned vertically, the level function can be used to determine whether the image is vertically level (the level indicator appears in a different place). Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Tilt is not shown in synchro-monitor mode or if indicators are hidden or the framing grid is displayed (GP.40). When [Level Setting] is set to [Display+Sound], only the level sound is emitted. • The level function is not available if the camera is held upside down, when recording movies, and during interval shooting. • The level function becomes less accurate when the camera is moving or when shooting in an environment subject to moving, such as on a amusement ride. • No level sound is emitted when [Level Setting] is set to [Disp + Snd] or [Sound] and [Volume Settings] is set to [???] (Mute) (GP.77). • Use this function as a reference to see if images are level when shooting images. The accuracy of the level when using the camera as a level cannot be guaranteed.44 If you are using the camera for the first time, read this section. About the Histogram Display When Histogram is on, a histogram appears in the lower right corner on the picture display. A histogram is a graph indicating the number of pixels on the vertical axis and the brightness on the horizontal axis (from left to right, shadows (dark areas), midtones, and highlights (bright areas)). By using the histogram, you can determine the brightness of an image without being affected by the brightness around the picture display. This also helps you correct for areas that are overly bright or dark. If the histogram has only peaks on the right side, this picture is overexposed with too many pixels only for highlight sections. If the histogram has only peaks on the left side without anything else, this picture is underexposed with too many pixels only for shadow sections. Refer to this histogram when correcting the exposure. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The histogram displayed on the picture display is for reference only. • After taking a picture, you can correct its brightness and contrast by making adjustments to the histogram (GP.70). • Depending on the shooting conditions (use of the flash, dark surrounding light, etc.), the exposure level indicated in the histogram may not correspond to the brightness of the shot image. • Exposure compensation has its limitation. It does not necessarily achieve the best possible result. • A histogram with peaks in the center may not necessarily provide the best result to suit your particular requirements. For example, an adjustment is required if you want to underexpose or overexpose the image. • For information on how to correct the exposure compensation, see P.62. 9999 99999 9999 99999 999999 4 : 3 F 4 : 44 : 3 F 4 : 4::33 F 33 F FF1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Advanced Operations Read this section when you want to learn more about the different camera functions. 1 ADJ. Button Functions ...................46 2 Taking Pictures in Scene Mode ......48 3 Shooting and Viewing Movies .......51 4 Memos ............................................53 5 Shooting Menu ...............................55 6 Playback Menu ...............................65 7 Setup Menu ....................................75 8 Camera Memo Menu ......................87 9 Direct Printing ................................91 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer .......................................96 11 Appendices ...................................10646 1 ADJ. Button Functions 1 ADJ. Button Functions The ADJ./MEMO button has the following functions. 1 Assigning four functions from the shooting menu (ADJ. mode) 2 Shifting the AE and AF targets 3 Memos (GP.53) Selecting Shooting Menu Options Assigned to the ADJ./MEMO Button You can assign four functions from the shooting menu to the ADJ./ MEMO button (ADJ. mode). The fifth function is fixed to AE/AF target shift (GP.47) and cannot be changed. ADJ. mode gives you quick access to settings by pressing a few buttons rather than via the menus. It is recommended for options you find yourself using frequently. 1 Set the functions you want to assign to the ADJ./MEMO button with [ ADJ Button Setting 1/2/3/4] on the setup menu. • At the time of purchase, four of the functions are assigned. You can change the assigned functions. 2 Press the ADJ./MEMO button in shooting mode. • The ADJ. mode screen appears. AE/AF AF AE Off AE/AF AAFF AE Off Move Slctn Move Slctn Finish Finish 3 Press the #$buttons to select the desired item. 4 Press the !" buttons to select the setting and then press the MENU/OK button to confirm the setting. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • For functions that can be assigned to the ADJ./MEMO button, see P.114. • When using a camera memo, the ADJ. mode is disabled.47 1 ADJ. Button Functions Shifting the AE and AF Targets You can shift the target for automatic exposure (AE) and/or auto focus (AF). Available Setting Description AE/AF AE and AF are set to Spot AE and Spot AF respectively and the target can be moved for both simultaneously (The targets for Spot AE and Spot AF occupy the same position). AF The AF is set to Spot AF and the target can be moved. The exposure metering is set to the mode selected in [Exposure Metering] (GP.56) in the shooting menu. AE The AE is set to Spot AE and the target can be moved. The focus is set to the mode selected in [Focus] (GP.56) in the shooting menu. 1 Select 5/V mode and press ADJ./MEMO. 2 Press the #$ buttons to select P. 3 Press the !" buttons to select the setting and then press the MENU/ OK or ADJ./MEMO button. • The target shift screen appears. AE/AF AF AE Off AE/AF AAFF AE Off Move Slctn Move Slctn Finish Finish 4 Press the !"#$ buttons to position the target over the subject that will be used to set focus or exposure. • Pressing the DISP. button returns the display to the screen in Step 2. Select Select Ok Ok 5 Press MENU/OK or ADJ./MEMO. 6 Press the shutter release button halfway and then gently press it the rest of the way down. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • In scene mode, the target icon (P) changes to U. The focus target for macro mode can be selected as described above. • This function is not available when [MF] is selected for [Focus] (GP.56).48 2 Taking Pictures in Scene Mode 2 Taking Pictures in Scene Mode Scene Mode Options You can use scene mode to select from among five still image modes and movie, and shoot with settings automatically optimized for shooting conditions. High Sens Use when taking pictures in dimly lit places. The picture display also becomes brighter. Firefighting Use to capture images under difficult conditions such as the scene of a fire. The focal length is fixed to 2.5 m, allowing you to take clear pictures in a situation where the auto focus would normally produce blurred images due to flames, smoke and water vapor. Increasing the ISO sensitivity extends the range of the flash, and prevents camera shake by controlling the shutter speed even when the flash is not used. The sharpness level is also increased in this mode and the picture display becomes brighter and is suited for firefighting. Skew Correct Mode Reduce the effects of perspective when photographing rectangular objects, such as message boards or business cards. For detailed operations, see P.50. Image size can be set to [a 4 : 3 F], [a 4 : 3 N], or [z 4 : 3 F] using the [Picture Quality/Size] option (GP.56) in the shooting menu (GP.55). Text Mode Use when capturing text images, for example notes written on a whiteboard at a meeting. Images are captured in black and white. Image size can be set to [l 4 : 3] or [c 4 : 3] using the [Size] option (GP.56) in the shooting menu (GP.55). Zoom Macro The camera automatically zooms to the optimal zoom position to shoot at a higher magnification than in normal macro shooting. Optical zoom can not be used. Macro mode is selected automatically. Movie Allows you to shoot movies with sound. For detailed operations, see P.51.49 2 Taking Pictures in Scene Mode Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When using [Zoom Macro], you can shoot close-ups within the following distances: Minimum Shooting Distance (from the front of the lens) Shooting Range Approx. 1 cm Approx. 14.8 mm × 11.1 mm (when digital zoom is not used) Approx. 3.7 mm × 2.8 mm (when 4.0 × digital zoom is used) Selecting a Scene Mode 1 Turn the mode dial to W. • The camera is ready to shoot and the selected scene mode is displayed at the top of the picture display. 9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F 2 Press the MENU/OK button to change the scene mode. • The scene mode selection screen appears. 3 Select a scene mode. 4 Press the MENU/OK button. • The scene mode type is displayed at the top of the picture display. 5 Press the shutter release button to shoot the picture. Changing the shooting menu or setup menu setting in scene mode ---- Press the MENU/OK button in shooting mode and then press the # button to select [MODE] tab. You can then press " once to display the shooting menu, twice to display the setup menu.50 2 Taking Pictures in Scene Mode Using Skew Correction Mode 1 Select [Skew Correct Mode] in the scene mode menu and press the MENU/OK button. 2 Press the shutter release button to shoot the picture. • The display indicates that the image is being processed, and then the area recognized as the correction range is displayed with an orange frame. Up to five areas can be recognized. • If the target area cannot be detected, an error message appears. The original image remains unchanged. • To select another correction area, move the orange frame to the target area by pressing the $ button. • To cancel skew correction, press the ! button. Even if you cancel skew correction, the original image remains unchanged. 3 Press the MENU/OK button. • The display indicates that the image is being corrected, and then the corrected image is recorded. The original image remains unchanged. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You can also correct the skew of a previously shot still image (GP.71). Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When [Skew Correct Mode] is selected, note the following: • To shoot the subject as large as possible, position it so that the entire portion of the subject is visible on the picture display. • The camera may fail to recognize the subject in the following cases: - When the image is out of focus - When four edges of the subject are not clearly visible - When it is hard to distinguish between the subject and background - When the background is complicated • Two images, one before correction and the other after correction, are recorded. If the number of remaining shots is less than two, you cannot shoot the subject. • The correction area may not be detected properly if the [Date Imprint] function is activated.51 3 Shooting and Viewing Movies 3 Shooting and Viewing Movies Shooting Movies Select [Movie] in the scene mode menu to record movies with sound. Frame size can be selected as described on P.56. Each movie you shoot is recorded as an AVI file. Press the shutter release button to start recording. The [O] icon will blink. To zoom in or out using digital zoom, press z or Z (GP.29). The recording time and time available are displayed during recording. Press the shutter release button again to end recording. 0 0 : 0 0 0 0 : 00 : 000 0 00 ///0 0 : 0 2 0 0 : 00 : 000 222 640 664040 Sh u t t e r b u t t o n : St o p SSSh u t t e r b u t t o n : St o p hhuutttteerr bbuuttttoonn :: SSttoopp Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • While shooting movies, operation sounds may be recorded. • Movies may be up to 4 GB in size. The maximum length is 12 minutes for movies recorded at a [Movie Size] of [x 1280] and 29 minutes for movies recorded at [z 640] or [y 320]. Depending on the type of memory card used, shooting may end before this length is reached. The maximum total length of all movie files that can be stored depends on the capacity of the memory card (GP.117). • Flicker may be visible in movies recorded under fluorescent lights. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The remaining recording time may not change uniformly because it is recalculated from the remaining memory capacity during movie recording. • Depending on the remaining battery level, the battery may become depleted during movie shooting. Use of a battery with adequate remaining power is recommended. • An SD/SDHC memory card with a Speed Class of 6 or better is recommended when recording movies with [x 1280] selected for [Movie Size] (GP.56).52 3 Shooting and Viewing Movies Playing Back Movies To play back movies, follow the steps below. 1 Select the movie you want to play back in playback mode. 2 Press the ADJ./MEMO button. • Playback begins. The elapsed playback indicator or the elapsed time is displayed on the screen. *RMOV0001 ***RMOV0001 RRMMOOVV00000011 0001 000001 000011///9999 999999 999999 640 664040 : St a r t ::: St a r t SSttaarrtt 1 0 : 0 5 1 0 1100::: 0 50055 2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 00:00 0001 00 11 0000::000000 Fast Forward Press the z button during playback. Rewind Press the Z button during playback. Pause/Playback Press the ADJ./MEMO button. Slow Playback Press and hold the z button during pause. Slow Rewind Press and hold the Z button during pause. Next Frame Press the z button during pause. Previous Frame Press the Z button during pause. Volume Adjustment Press the !" buttons during playback.53 4 Memos 4 Memos For information on creating, transferring, and configuring memo lists, see the supplied “Software User Guide”. Image files created with the camera contain fields that can be used to store information about the image. The camera memo function employs these fields for memos that can be used to identify and classify photos. Read this section for basic information on using memos. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Memos can not be added to movies. • SD WORM memory cards do not support memos. Adding Memos to New Photos This section describes how to create memos from an existing memo list that has been transferred to the camera. 1 Select 5/V mode and press ADJ./MEMO. • The camera memo dialog will be displayed. 2 Create a memo. • If [Mode1] is selected for [Camera Memo Mode] (GP.88) in the camera memo menu, press ! or " to highlight an item, and then press $ and press ! or " to choose a description. If [Mode2] is selected, press # or $ to choose from pre-existing combinations. FileName/SAMPLE FileName/SAMPLE Camera Memo Camera Memo 1/2 1/2 FILE LIST FILE LIST MMemo On emo On Company A Foundation work Exterior Beverly Beech Gamma Company C o m p a n y A F o u n d a t i o n w o r k E x t e r i o r B e v e r l y B e e c h G a m m a C o m p a n y Client Const.type Location Supervisor Affiliates Cl i e n t Co n s t . t y p e L o c a t i o n Su p e r v i s o r Aff i l i a t e s C o m p a n y A Company A Items Descriptions FileName/SAMPLE FileName/SAMPLE Camera Memo Camera Memo 1/2 1/2 FILE LIST FILE LIST MMemo On emo On Company A Foundation work Exterior Beverly Beech Gamma Company C o m p a n y A F o u n d a t i o n w o r k E x t e r i o r B e v e r l y B e e c h G a m m a C o m p a n y Client Const.type Location Supervisor Affiliates Cl i e n t Co n s t . t y p e L o c a t i o n Su p e r v i s o r Aff i l i a t e s C o m p a n y A Company A Items Descriptions54 4 Memos 3 Press MENU/OK. • Press MENU/OK to accept the current memo. 4 Take photographs. • The memo will be added to all new photos. Viewing Memos The process for viewing memos varies with the option selected for [Camera Memo Mode] (GP.88) in the camera memo menu. Mode1 1 Display the desired photo in playback mode. • Photographs to which memos have been added are indicated by a “MEMO” icon. F3.5 FF3.5 3.5 000-0001 000-0001 000000--00000011 0001 000001 000011///9999 999999 999999 2010 222010 001100///01000111///01 0 000111 00:00 00: 00:0000 111///1000 111000 000000 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F 2 Press ADJ./MEMO. • The memo will be displayed as shown at right. Press ! or " to view additional data. If desired, the memo can be edited as described on P.29 of the “Software User Guide”. FileName/SAMPLE FileName/SAMPLE Camera Memo Camera Memo 1/2 1/2 Memo On Memo On Company A Foundation work Exterior Beverly Beech Gamma Company C o m p a n y A F o u n d a t i o n w o r k E x t e r i o r B e v e r l y B e e c h G a m m a C o m p a n y Client Const.type Location Supervisor Affiliates Client Const.type Location Supervisor Affiliates C o m p a n y A Company A 3 Press MENU/OK. • Press MENU/OK to return to normal playback. Mode2 Memos can be displayed only by pressing DISP. during playback (GP.41); memos can not be edited.55 5 Shooting Menu 5 Shooting Menu The shooting menu is used to adjust camera settings when taking pictures. To display the shooting menu, press the MENU/OK button when the camera is in shooting mode. Using the Menu 1 Press the MENU/OK button in shooting mode. • The shooting menu is displayed. • In scene mode, press # to highlight the [MODE] tab, press " once to highlight the shooting menu tab, and press $ to place the cursor in the shooting menu. Indicates the range of displayed screens. 2 Press the !" buttons to select the desired menu item. • If the DISP. button is pressed at this point, the cursor moves to the shooting menu tab. • Press the " button at the bottom item to display the next screen. 3 Press the $ button. • The menu item settings are displayed. 4 Press the !" buttons to select the setting. 5 Press the MENU/OK button. • The setting is confirmed, the shooting menu disappears and the camera is ready to shoot. • To select the highlighted option and return to the menu shown in Step 2, press the # button.56 5 Shooting Menu Shooting Menu Options Density Adjust contrast when using the [Text Mode] option in scene mode. Size GP.117 Choose the size of pictures taken using the [Text Mode] option in scene mode. Movie Size GP.117 Choose the movie frame size. Picture Quality/Size GP.117 Adjust picture quality and size when taking pictures. Focus GP.60 Choose a focusing mode. — Multi AF Measures the distances from nine AF areas and focuses to the nearest AF area. Choose to prevent out-of-focus photos. — Spot AF Selects one AF area at the center of the picture display to allow the camera to focus on this area automatically. MF Enables you to adjust the focus manually (GP.60). Snap Fixes the shooting distance to a short distance (approx. 2.5 m (8.2 ft.)). 8 (Infinity) Fixes the shooting distance to infinity. It is useful for shooting distant scenes. Exposure Metering You can change the metering method (the range to use for metering) used to determine the exposure value. — Multi The entire shooting range is divided into 256 partitions, and each is metered to determine the overall exposure value. Center The entire image is metered, with emphasis on the center, to determine the exposure value. Use this when the brightness of the center and surroundings are different. Spot Only the center of the image is metered to determine the exposure value. Use this setting when you want to use the brightness at the center. This is useful if there is a marked difference in contrast or backlighting.57 5 Shooting Menu Continuous Mode The camera records photographs one after the other while the shutter-release button is pressed. Select [Off] to take one photo each time the shutter-release button is pressed. Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Focus and exposure value are locked. • The number of images that can be shot in continuous mode depends on the image size setting. • When [Card Sequence No.] is set to [On] (GP.79) and the last four digits of the file number exceed “9999” during continuous shooting, a separate folder is created in the SD memory card and successive pictures taken in continuous mode are stored in this folder. • The maximum number of consecutive shots that can be taken using continuous mode is 999. Image Settings Adjust contrast, sharpness, and vividness. Vivid Take strong, vivid photos with heightened contrast, sharpness, and vividness. — Standard Creates an image with normal picture quality. Black & White Creates a black and white picture. Auto Bracket GP.61 Vary exposure or white balance over a series of pictures. Time Exposure Use time exposures to capture fireworks as they rise into the air and explode, to create trails of light behind cars and other moving objects, or to shoot night scenery. Choose the exposure time from [Off], [1 second], [2 seconds], [4 seconds], and [8 seconds]. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The shutter speed may slow down and images may be blurred. Hold the camera steady by using a tripod when shooting. • The picture display turns off while shooting.58 5 Shooting Menu Interval Shooting Take photos automatically at intervals ranging from five seconds to three hours in five-second increments. Hours Minutes Seconds Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • The interval shooting setting is cleared when the camera is turned off. • The time until the next picture can be taken according to the shooting menu setting may be longer than the time set for interval shooting. If this is the case, the shooting interval becomes longer than the set time. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Depending on the remaining battery level, the battery may become depleted during interval shooting. Use of a battery with adequate remaining power is recommended. • If you press the shutter release button during interval shooting, the camera shoots as usual. • A high speed memory card or a SD memory card with sufficient memory is recommended. Camera Shake Correction Select [On] to reduce the effects of camera shake. Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • The camera shake correction function cannot prevent movement of the shooting subject (caused by wind, etc.). • Results vary with shooting conditions. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The J symbol appears when camera shake is likely to occur (GP.16). Date Imprint You can insert the date (YY/MM/DD) or the date and time (YY/MM/DD hh:mm) at the lower right of a still image. Select [Off] to turn date imprint off. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Make the date and time settings in advance (GP.26). • [Date Imprint] cannot be used with movies. • The date imprinted in an image cannot be deleted. Exposure Compensation GP.62 Choose exposure compensation.59 5 Shooting Menu White Balance GP.63 Adjust the white balance. ISO Setting GP.64 Adjust ISO sensitivity. Edit Detection If pictures taken with [On] selected for this option are transferred to a computer, changes made after the images were recorded can be detected using image authentication software, including the supplied EC1 application. Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ • Recording times increase when [On] is selected. • Changes made using the [Resize], [Contrast Correction], and [Skew Correction] options in the playback menu will be detected by image authentication software. Restore Defaults Select [Yes] and press the MENU/OK button to restore shooting menu settings to their default values. Shooting menu options ------------------------------------------------------------ The options displayed in the shooting menu vary with the selected shooting mode. In scene mode, the options displayed vary with the selected scene. See P.113 for more information.60 5 Shooting Menu Focus Manual Focus (MF) Manual focus (MF) can be used to focus at a selected distance when the camera is unable to focus using autofocus. A focus bar is displayed in the picture display. 9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F Ho l d : HHHo l d : oolldd :: 1 Press and hold the MENU/OK button as required. • Pressing and holding the MENU/OK button increases the magnification only at the center of the screen. • Pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again returns from enlarged view to normal view. 2 Adjust the zoom position with the zZ buttons as required. 3 Press the !" buttons to adjust the focus. • Pressing the ! button adjusts the focus to farther objects and pressing the " button adjusts the focus to closer objects. 4 Press the shutter release button to shoot the picture. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You can also use manual focus to focus on objects within the macro shooting range.61 5 Shooting Menu Auto Bracket Choose the type of bracketing performed. Auto Bracket If [On] is selected, the camera will take three photos each time the shutter-release button is pressed: one underexposed by 0.5 EV, a second at current exposure settings, and a third overexposed by 0.5 EV. An icon is displayed when [On] is selected. R e c o r d i n g RRR e c o r d i n g eeccoorrddiinngg Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The exposure compensation can be changed using the shooting menu (GP.62). White Balance Bracket (WB-BKT) The white balance bracket function automatically records three images—a reddish image, a bluish image, and an image of the current white balance. An icon is displayed when [WB-BKT] is selected. R e d RR e ded R e c o r d i n g RRR e c o r d i n g eeccoorrddiinngg B l u e BB l u e lue Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The white balance can be changed using the shooting menu (GP.63). • Although white balance bracketing can be selected when [Black & White] is chosen for [Image Settings], bracketing will not be performed.62 5 Shooting Menu Exposure Compensation Use exposure compensation to vary exposure from the value selected by the camera. Choose from values between –2 and +2; negative values produce darker pictures, positive values brighter pictures. Exposure compensation may be required in the following situations: For backlighting When the background is particularly bright, the subject will appear dark (underexposed). In this case, set the exposure level higher (+). When your subject is whitish The entire picture will turn out dark (underexposed). Set the exposure level higher (+). When your subject is darkish The entire picture will turn out bright (overexposed). Set the exposure level lower (–). The same happens when you take a photo of a subject in a spotlight. Press the !" buttons to choose a exposure value and press the MENU/OK button. The selected value is displayed in the picture display. 9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F EV EEEV VV –––0.3 000.3..33 Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- If the subject is very bright or very dark, [Q] will be displayed and exposure compensation will not be available.63 5 Shooting Menu White Balance Adjust the white balance so that a white subject will appear white. At purchase, the white balance mode is set to [Auto]. Change the setting in situations where the white balance is difficult to adjust effectively, such as when shooting an object of a single color or when shooting under multiple light sources. AUTO Auto Adjusts the white balance automatically. Outdoors Select this when shooting outdoors (sunny) and white balance fails to adjust properly. Cloudy Select this when shooting in cloudy weather or shade and the white balance fails to adjust properly. Incandescent 1 Select this when shooting under incandescent light and white balance fails to adjust properly. Incandescent 2 Select this when shooting under incandescent light (more reddish, compared with [Incandescent 1]). Fluorescent Select this when shooting under fluorescent light and white balance fails to adjust properly. Manual Adjust the white balance manually (GP.64). Ring Light Adjust white balance manually as described on P.64. The selected value is not reset when defaults are restored using [Restore Defaults]. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The white balance may not be adjusted correctly for a subject that is mostly dark. In this case, add something white to the subject. • When shooting with the flash, the white balance may not be adjusted correctly if [Auto] is not selected. In this case, switch to [Auto] to shoot with the flash.64 5 Shooting Menu Manual 1 Measure white balance. • After selecting [Manual] in the white balance menu and placing a blank piece of paper or other white object under the lighting you wish to measure, aim the camera at the object and press the DISP. button to measure white balance. 2 Press the MENU/OK button. • The symbol appears on the screen. • The effect of the selected white balance setting can be previewed in the picture display. Repeat the above steps until the desired effect is achieved. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- To cancel [Manual], select a setting other than [Manual]. ISO Setting ISO sensitivity indicates how sensitive film is to light. A greater value means higher sensitivity. High sensitivity is suitable for shooting an object in a dark place or a fast-moving object while minimizing blurring. When ISO setting is set to [Auto], the camera automatically changes the sensitivity according to the distance, brightness, zoom, macro settings, and picture quality/size. Choose settings other than [Auto] to fix ISO sensitivity at the selected value. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • When the flash is used, the maximum value that will be selected for auto ISO sensitivity is ISO 400. If the flash is off and image size is set to [l 4 : 3 F] or [l 4 : 3 N], auto ISO sensitivity will be set to values between ISO 64 and ISO 400. • When the flash is set to [FLASH ON (10M)], the maximum value that will be selected for auto ISO sensitivity is ISO 1600. • Images shot with a higher sensitivity may appear grainy. • When [Auto] is selected for ISO sensitivity, the ISO value displayed when the shutter release button is pressed halfway may in some instances (for example, when the flash is used) differ from the value selected when the shutter is released.65 6 Playback Menu 6 Playback Menu The options in the playback menu can be used to perform a variety of operations on existing pictures. To display the playback menu, select playback mode and press the MENU/OK button. Using the Menu 1 Press the 6 (Playback) button to select the playback mode. 2 Press the !"#$ buttons to display the desired file. • For [Slide Show] (GP.66), [Copy to Card from Internal Memory] (GP.66), or [Recover File] (GP.67), skip this step. 3 Press the MENU/OK button. • The playback menu appears. 4 Press the !" buttons to select the desired item. • If the DISP. button is pressed at this point, the cursor moves to the playback menu tab. 5 Press the $ button. • The screen for the selected menu item appears.66 6 Playback Menu Playback Menu Options Resize You can reduce the image size of a shot still image to create a new file with a different image size. Original Resized l 4 : 3 F/l 4 : 3 N/j 3 : 2 F/e 4 : 3 F/c 4 : 3 F/ b 4 : 3 F a 4 : 3 F/z 4 : 3 F a 4 : 3 F/a 4 : 3 N z 4 : 3 F Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Movies cannot be resized. Trim GP.68 This function allows you to trim a still image you have shot and then save it as a separate file. Contrast Correction GP.70 Create copies of photographs with modified brightness and contrast. Skew Correction GP.71 Create copies that have been processed to reduce the effects of perspective on rectangular objects. Protect GP.72 Protect images from accidental deletion. Slide Show You can display the recorded still images and movie files sequentially on the screen. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Each still image is displayed for three seconds. • Movies are played back in their entirety. Copy to Card from Internal Memory Copy all data from internal memory to a memory card in a single operation. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • If there is not enough space available on the destination memory card, a warning will be displayed. Select [Yes] to copy only those files for which there is sufficient space. • It is not possible to copy the contents of an SD memory card to the internal memory. DPOF GP.73 Select pictures for printing.67 6 Playback Menu Recover File Restore deleted files. Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Deleted files cannot be restored after performing any of the following operations. • Turning the camera off • Switching from playback mode to shooting mode • Using DPOF, Resize, Copy to Card from Internal Memory, Skew Correction, Contrast Correction or Trim • Files with DPOF settings are deleted • Internal memory or SD memory card is initialized • Altering memos in playback mode68 6 Playback Menu Trim Create a cropped copy of the current photograph. Press 8 or 9 to adjust the crop size and press !, ", #, or $ to position the crop. Press the MENU/OK button to save the cropped image to a separate file. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • You can only trim still images shot using this camera. • While you can trim an image repeatedly, the image is recompressed each time and there will be some decline in image quality. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • To cancel, press the DISP. button. • To view help, press the D button while the crop display is shown in the picture display. Press the D button again to exit help. • If an image is trimmed, the compression ratio changes to Fine. • The available settings for the trimming frame size differ depending on the original image size.69 6 Playback Menu • The size of the image after cropping depends on the size of the original and the size of the crop (the crop displayed when you select [Trim] is the second largest; to select the largest crop, press 9). Original image size Trimming level Trimmed image size l 4 : 3 F/l 4 : 3 N (4000 × 3000) 1, 2 4000 × 3000 3 2592 × 1944 4, 5 2048 × 1536 6 1600 × 1200 7 to 10 1280 × 960 11 to 14 640 × 480 j 3 : 2 F (3984 × 2656) 1 2592 × 1944 2, 3 2048 × 1536 4 1600 × 1200 5 to 7 1280 × 960 8 to 11 640 × 480 e 4 : 3 F (2592 × 1944) 1 2592 × 1944 2 2048 × 1536 3 1600 × 1200 4 to 7 1280 × 960 8 to 12 640 × 480 c 4 : 3 F (2048 × 1536) 1 2048 × 1536 2 1600 × 1200 3 to 6 1280 × 960 7 to 10 640 × 480 b 4 : 3 F (1600 × 1200) 1 1600 × 1200 2 to 4 1280 × 960 5 to 9 640 × 480 a 4 : 3 F/a 4 : 3 N (1280 × 960) 1 to 3 1280 × 960 4 to 8 640 × 480 z 4 : 3 F (640 × 480) 1 to 4 640 × 48070 6 Playback Menu Contrast Correction Create copies that have been processed to adjust brightness and contrast. Highlight [Contrast Correction] in the playback menu and press $ to display a level slider and histogram. Press ! to make the photo brighter, or " to make it darker. Five settings are available. Press the MENU/OK button. The display indicates that the image is being corrected, and then the corrected image is recorded. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • If the camera can not create a corrected copy, an error message will be displayed and the camera will exit to the playback menu. • To cancel contrast correction, press the DISP. button. • You can correct the contrast for still images shot with this camera. You cannot correct the contrast for movies. • The desired results may not be achieved with photographs taken with [Text Mode] selected in scene mode or with [Black & White] selected for [Image Settings]. • While you can use contrast correction repeatedly, the image is recompressed each time and there will be some decline in image quality.71 6 Playback Menu Skew Correction Create copies that have been processed to reduce the effects of perspective on rectangular objects, such as message boards or business cards. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You can use skew correction for still images shot with this camera. You cannot use skew correction for movies. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • If the camera is able to detect an object that can be used to correct perspective, a message will be displayed with the object shown by an orange frame. The camera can detect up to five objects. • If the target area cannot be detected, an error message appears. The original image remains unchanged. • To select another correction area, move the orange frame to the target area by pressing the $ button. • To cancel skew correction, press the ! button. Even if you cancel skew correction, the original image remains unchanged. • The image size does not change for skew corrected images. • If the image size is large, skew correction will take time. Resize the image (GP.66) before performing skew correction to speed up the process. • The following table shows the approximate time required for skew correction. Image Size Correction time Image Size Correction time l 4 : 3 F Approx. 29 seconds b 4 : 3 F Approx. 6 seconds l 4 : 3 N Approx. 28 seconds a 4 : 3 F Approx. 4 seconds j 3 : 2 F Approx. 24 seconds a 4 : 3 N Approx. 4 seconds e 4 : 3 F Approx. 13 seconds z 4 : 3 F Approx. 2 seconds c 4 : 3 F Approx. 8 seconds • When scene mode is set to [Skew Correct Mode], you can shoot an image and then immediately correct any skew in the image (GP.50).72 6 Playback Menu Protect [Protect] allows you to protect files from being accidentally deleted. If [1 File] is selected, you can protect or unprotect the file selected by pressing the #$ buttons. If [Select All] or [Cancel All] is selected, you can protect or unprotect all files. Selecting Multiple Files Select [Sel Mult] to change the protect status of multiple individual files or of all files in a selected range. To select multiple individual frames: 1 Select [Sel. Indiv.] and press the MENU/OK button. 2 Select a frame and press the MENU/OK button. • Press the ADJ./MEMO button to switch to the display for specifying a range of files. • If you selected a file by mistake, you can deselect it by selecting the file and pressing the MENU/OK button. • Select all files you want to protect. 3 Press the D button. To select two frames and all frames between them: 1 Select [Sel. Range] and press the MENU/OK button. 2 Select the first frame and press the MENU/OK button. • Press the ADJ./MEMO button to switch to the display for specifying files separately. • If you make a mistake when selecting the starting point for the range of files, press the DISP. button to return to the screen for selecting the starting point.73 6 Playback Menu 3 Select the last frame and press the MENU/OK button. • Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to select multiple ranges. 4 Press the D button. Protect Protect PPrrootteecctt 107 111070077///111 111111111 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F Start Execute SSStart ttaarrtt Execute EExxeeccuuttee Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- [Sel. Indiv.] and [Sel. Range] can be selected directly if [Protect] is chosen in thumbnail view. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Note that formatting deletes all files, including protected files. DPOF To request professional prints of the photographs on a memory card, first use this option to create a digital “print order” listing the photos you wish to print and the number of prints, and then take the memory card to a digital print service center that supports the DPOF standard. To add a photo to or remove it from the print order, select [1 File] and press the #$ buttons to display the desired file. Select [Select All] to add all photos to the print order, or [Cancel All] to remove all files from the print order. Selecting Multiple Files To change the print status of multiple individual files, select [DPOF] in thumbnail view. Select photos and press the !" buttons to choose the number of prints; press the ! button to increase the number of copies, or press the " button to decrease the number of copies. Press the MENU/OK button to exit when settings are complete.74 6 Playback Menu Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- To remove the DPOF settings for multiple still images, follow the same steps described above to set the number of copies to print to [0] for each image, and then press the MENU/OK button. Viewing Pictures on TV To view pictures on a TV, connect the camera using the supplied AV cable. 1 Securely connect the AV cable to the Video In terminal on the television. • Connect the white plug of the AV cable to the audio input terminal (white) of the TV unit and the yellow plug to the video input terminal (yellow). 2 Turn the camera off and securely connect the cable to the camera AV output terminal. 3 Set the television to Video mode (Set the input to Video). • For details, see the documentation that came with the television. 4 Press the POWER button, or press and hold the 6 (Playback) button to turn the camera on. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • When the AV cable is connected to the camera, the picture display and the speaker output turn off. • Do not force the AV cable into the terminal. • Do not apply excessive force with the AV cable connected. • When using the AV cable, do not move the camera with the AV cable. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • You can connect the AV cable to the Video In terminal on your video recorder and record what you have shot to a video recorder. • The camera supports the following video standards: NTSC and PAL. Where possible, the camera is set to the standard used in your country or region before shipment; before connecting the camera to a device that uses a different video standard, choose the appropriate video mode (GP.79). Video Input Terminal (yellow) Audio Input Terminal (white) Audio Input Terminal (white)75 7 Setup Menu 7 Setup Menu You can change the camera settings by displaying the setup menu from the shooting menu (GP.55) or playback menu (GP.65). Using the Menu 1 Press the MENU/OK button. • The shooting menu (or the playback menu) appears. 2 Press # to highlight the tab for the current menu. 3 Press ! or " to highlight the setup menu tab. • In scene mode, the setup menu tab is third from the top; in other modes, it is second from the top. • In scene mode, press the " button twice. Indicates the range of displayed screens. 4 Press $ to place the cursor in the setup menu. 5 Press the !" buttons to select the desired item. • If the DISP. button is pressed at this point, the display returns to the screen shown in Step 3. • Press the " button at the bottom item to display the next screen. 6 Press the $ button. • The menu item settings are displayed. 7 Press the !" buttons to select the setting.76 7 Setup Menu 8 Press MENU/OK, or press # and then MENU/OK. • The setup menu disappears and the camera is ready for shooting or playback. • The setup menu may appear depending on the setting. In this case, press the MENU/OK button to return to the shooting or playback screen. • Pressing the # button in Step 8 confirms the setting and the display returns to the screen shown in Step 5. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- For some functions, the setting selection method may differ from what is explained here. For detailed operation, see the explanation of each function. Setup Menu Options Format [Card] Select [Yes] and press the D button to format the memory card. Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Do not turn the camera off during formatting. Failure to observe this precaution could result in the system files used by the camera being deleted. Format [Internal Memory] Select [Yes] and press the D button to format internal memory. If you have images in the internal memory that you do not want to delete, copy the images to the SD memory card before formatting the internal memory (GP.66). Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Do not turn the camera off during formatting. Failure to observe this precaution could result in the system files used by the camera being deleted. LCD Brightness Press the !" buttons to adjust the brightness of the picture display. Reg. My Settings GP.81 Save current camera settings. Stepped Zoom Select [On] to allow zoom to be adjusted in discrete steps that on a 35-mm camera would be equivalent to focal lengths of 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm and 140 mm. In macro mode, the stepped zoom focal lengths are roughly equivalent to 33, 35, 50, 85, 105 and 140 mm on a 35-mm camera.77 7 Setup Menu ADJ Button Setting 1–4 GP.46 Choose the role performed by the ADJ./MEMO button. AF Auxiliary Light If [On] is selected, the AF auxiliary light will light to assist autofocus. Operation Sounds Choose the sounds made by the camera. Available Settings Description All All sounds on. Level Sound Only the level sound is emitted. Shutter Sounds Only the shutter sound and level sound are emitted. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- If you try to perform an operation that cannot be performed, the beep sound is emitted regardless of the [Operation Sounds] setting. Volume Settings The operation sound volume can be changed. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- When [Volume Settings] is set to [???] (Mute), the level sound is not emitted even when [Level Setting] is set to [Disp + Snd] or [Sound]. LCD Confirmation Time Choose how long photos are displayed after shooting. Photos will not be displayed if [Off] is selected. Auto Power Off Choose how long the camera remains on when no operations are performed. The camera will not turn off automatically if [Off] is selected, during interval timer photography (GP.58), or when the camera is connected to a computer or printer. Monitor Auto off Delay Choose the delay before the picture display turns off automatically to save power when no operations are performed. Once the display has turned off, any operation will reactivate the display. This option takes effect only when [Off] is selected for [Auto Power Off]. LCD Auto Dim If [On] is selected, the picture display will automatically dim to save power if no operations are performed for about five seconds. This feature is not available in synchro-monitor mode (GP.40).78 7 Setup Menu Digital Zoom Image GP.82 Choose [Auto Resize] to record pictures taken with digital zoom at actual size, [Normal] to enlarge image data from the center of the frame. Level Setting GP.42 Adjust level indicator and level sound settings. Grid Guide Display Options GP.40 Choose the type of framing grid available in shooting mode. Available Settings Description A three-by-three grid for “rule of thirds” composition. A four-by-four grid with diagonal lines running from corner to corner makes it easy to find the center of the subject. Use for architectural photography or photographing products for display. A two-by-two grid with the center of the frame left clear to make it easier to view the subject. Use if your subject is in motion. Shooting Info. Display Frame Select [On] to display shooting icons in a frame surrounding the view through the lens (GP.40). Shooting information display frame cannot be used in movie mode. 4:3 F 4 : 4:33 F F EV EEEV VV +++0.7 ISO 100 000.7..77 ISO 100 IISSOO 110000 Auto Rotate Select [On] to automatically display pictures in the correct orientation during playback.79 7 Setup Menu Card Sequence No. When you switch SD memory cards, you can set your camera to continue consecutive numbering from the previously loaded card. Available Settings Description On (Continue numbering) Files names consist of “R” followed by a seven-digit number (e.g., “R0010001.jpg”), assigned in ascending order from 0010001 to 9999999. When a new memory card is inserted, file numbering continues from the last number used. Off (Do not continue numbering) File numbering is assigned, from RIMG0001.jpg to RIMG9999. jpg, for each SD memory card. When the file name reaches RIMG9999, no more data can be recorded to that card. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • This option applies only to memory cards. The names of photos in internal memory consist of “RIMG” and a four-digit number. • When images are transferred to a computer using DL-10 (GP.102), the file being transferred is renamed and saved. Caution ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ When the file name reaches RIMG9999 or R9999999, no more files can be saved. In this case, move image data from the SD memory card to the memory of the computer or a storage medium, and then format the SD memory card. Date Settings GP.25 Set the camera clock. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • If the battery is removed for more than three days, the date and time settings will be lost. These settings must be made again. • To retain the date and time settings, load a battery with adequate remaining power for more than ten hours. Language/N( * ) GP.25 You can change the language displayed on the screen. Video Out Mode ( * ) You can view your still images and movies on a television screen by connecting your camera to a television with the AV cable that came with your camera. Select from NTSC (used in North America, the Caribbean, parts of Latin America, and some East Asian countries) and PAL (used in the United Kingdom and much of Europe, Australia, New Zealand, and parts of Asia and Africa). SECAM is not supported. ( * ) The default setting varies depending on where you purchased the camera.80 7 Setup Menu CALS Pic Quality Choose picture quality and size options for CALS mode (GP.33). Start Date/Time Select [On] to display the current time and date when you turn the camera on and select shooting mode. Choose/Change Password GP.83 Choose a password or change the current password. Passwords restrict access to some camera functions. Password Protection GP.85 Restrict access to some or all camera functions. Select [Off] to allow unrestricted access. Password Validity Period Choose how long the camera can be used without re-entering the password. This option takes effect only when [Camera] or [Int. Memory] is selected for [Password Protection]. If [Off] is selected, the camera can only be accessed by re-entering the password. Power Button Hold Options If [On] selected, the POWER button must be pressed for at least two seconds to turn the camera on and for at least five seconds to turn the camera off.81 7 Setup Menu Reg. My Settings Save current camera settings in [MY1] or [MY2]. Settings saved in [MY1] are recalled when the mode dial is rotated to T , those saved in [MY2] when the mode dial is rotated to U. 1 Set the camera to the desired settings. 2 Select [Reg. My Settings] in the setup menu (GP.75) and press the $ button. • A confirmation message appears. 3 Select [MY1] or [MY2] and press the MENU/OK button. • The current camera settings are registered and the display returns to the setup menu. • If you do not want to register them, press the DISP. button. Settings Saved in [Reg. My Settings] Shooting mode (V/5/T/ U/W) WB-BKT Focal distance used in Manual Time Exposure Zoom position Camera Shake Correction Macro Date Imprint Flash Mode Exposure Compensation Scene mode White Balance Self-Timer ISO Setting DISP. mode Edit Detection Density Stepped Zoom Picture Quality/Size Digital Zoom Image Focus Level Setting Exposure Metering Grid Guide Display Options Continuous Mode Shooting Info. Display Frame Image Settings CALS Pic Quality Auto Bracket82 7 Setup Menu Digital Zoom Image If [Normal] (the default option) is selected for [Digital Zoom Image] , digital zoom will enlarge image data from the center of the frame to create a picture at the current image size, creating a slightly grainy image. To record pictures taken with digital zoom at actual size, select [Auto Resize]. The size at which the image will be recorded varies with the zoom ratio. Auto resize takes effect if you keep the z button pressed when the zoom bar is full. The size will then change each time the z button is pressed; the current size is displayed above the zoom bar. 9999 99999 999 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F 55MM The auto resize zoom is enabled when l 4 : 3 F or l 4 : 3 N is selected for [Picture Quality/Size] (GP.56), and the digital zoom is enabled in other cases. Zoom Magnification and Recorded Image Size Picture Quality/Size Zoom Magnification Focal Length ( * ) l 4 : 3 F/l 4 : 3 N 1.0 × 140 mm e 4 : 3 F 1.5 × 210 mm c 4 : 3 F 2.0 × 270 mm a 4 : 3 F 3.1 × 430 mm z 4 : 3 F 6.3 × 870 mm ( * ) Equivalent to that on a 35 mm camera Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Regardless of the option selected, normal digital zoom is used when [Skew Correct Mode] is selected in scene mode. • Fine picture quality is used for all photographs recorded using [Auto Resize], regardless of the option currently selected for [Picture Quality/Size].83 7 Setup Menu Choose/Change Password Choose the password that must be entered to access password-protected settings (GP.85). The password can be a barcode or a phrase entered via an on-screen keyboard. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The current password is required to change an existing password. Barcode Frame the barcode in the picture display and press MENU/OK. If the camera can read the code, it will set the password to the barcode and return to the previous menu. Press DISP. to exit without entering a new password. Read Barcode Read Barcode Cancel Cancel Execute Execute Aim the reader at the barcode and press OK. A i m t h e r e a d e r a t t h e b a r c o d e a n d p r e s s O K . Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The camera can read linear and matrix barcodes. Linear Matrix (QR) Matrix (PDF417) Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You will be prompted to enter a password whenever you attempt to access functions protected using [Password Protection]. Frame the password barcode in the picture display and press MENU/OK. If the barcode is incorrect, a message will be displayed; select [Yes] to return to the password entry dialog. Read Barcode Read Barcode Cancel Cancel Execute Execute Aim the reader at the password barcode and press OK. A i m t h e r e a d e r a t t h e p a s s w o r d b a r c o d e a n d p r e s s O K .84 7 Setup Menu Keyboard 1 Enter a password of up to 16 characters. • Highlight characters using !, ", #, or $ and press MENU/OK to enter the highlighted character at the current cursor position (to delete the character at the current cursor position, select [Delete]). Press ADJ./MEMO when entry is complete (to exit without changing the password, press DISP.). 2 Re-enter the password. • A confirmation dialog will be displayed; re-enter the password as described above to save the password and return to the setup menu. If the passwords do not match, a message will be displayed and the camera will return to the password entry dialog. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You will be prompted to enter a password whenever you attempt to access functions protected using [Password Protection]. Enter the password as described in Step 1, above. If the password is incorrect, a message will be displayed; select [Yes] to return to the password entry dialog. Keyboard area Password area Password area85 7 Setup Menu Password Protection Choose the camera functions protected with the password selected using [Choose/Change Password] (GP.83). Five options are available. Off Choose this option to allow unrestricted access to all camera functions. No password is required. Camera You will be prompted to enter a password when the camera is turned on. The camera can not be used until you enter the password; if an incorrect password is entered, the camera will turn off automatically. Int. Memory If a memory card is inserted, this option is the same as [Camera]. If no memory card is inserted, you will be prompted to enter a password before viewing the images in internal memory (no pictures will be displayed until the correct password is entered) and when connecting the camera to a computer or printer (if an incorrect password is entered, the camera will turn off). Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You will also be prompted to enter a password if you select [Format [Internal Memory]] after entering an incorrect password. Entering the correct password will allow you to format internal memory; entering an incorrect password will cause the camera to exit without formatting internal memory.86 7 Setup Menu SD WORM No password is required when SD WORM cards (GP.20) are used. If no memory card is inserted or another type of card is used, you will be prompted to enter a password when the camera is turned on. Entering an incorrect password will cause the camera to turn off. Menus A password is required to display the camera menus. The menus and ADJ. mode can not be used until the correct password is entered. Lost Passwords ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Do not forget your password. If you forget your password, contact one of the Ricoh offices listed on the back cover of this manual.87 8 Camera Memo Menu 8 Camera Memo Menu Using the Menu 1 Press the MENU/OK button. • The shooting menu (or the playback menu) appears. 2 Press # to highlight the tab for the current menu. 3 Press ! or " to highlight the camera memo menu tab. • In scene mode, the camera memo menu tab is fourth from the top; in other modes, it is third from the top. • In scene mode, press " three times. Indicates the range of displayed screens. 4 Press $ to place the cursor in the camera memo menu. 5 Press the !" buttons to select the desired item. • If the DISP. button is pressed at this point, the display returns to the screen shown in Step 3. • Press the " button at the bottom item to display the next screen. 6 Press the $ button. • The menu item settings are displayed. 7 Press the !" buttons to select the setting. 8 Press MENU/OK, or press # and then MENU/OK. • The camera memo menu will close and the camera will return to shooting or playback. • Pressing the # button in Step 8 confirms the setting and the display returns to the screen shown in Step 5.88 8 Camera Memo Menu Camera Memo Menu Options Camera Memo Mode “Software User Guide” GP.28 Choose from the following options: Available Settings Description Mode1 Choose a separate description for each item. Mode2 Choose from pre-selected combinations. Descriptions can not be selected for individual items. Memo Skip “Software User Guide” GP.28 When choosing memos with [Mode2] selected for [Camera Memo Mode], you can press and hold # or $ to skip memos with identical descriptions for a selected item. Choose from items 1 to 5. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- This option only takes effect when [Mode2] is selected for [Camera Memo Mode]. Mark Memo Added to Photos When [On] is selected, [Memo Marking] will appear in the camera memo dialog for memos that have been added to photographs. Marking can be removed by pressing D in the camera memo dialog or by selecting [Remove Memo Marking]. FileName/SAMPLE FileName/SAMPLE Camera Memo Camera Memo [[MMemo Marking emo Marking] 1/45 1/45 FILE LIST FILE LIST Company A Foundation work Exterior Beverly Beech Gamma Company C o m p a n y A F o u n d a t i o n w o r k E x t e r i o r B e v e r l y B e e c h G a m m a C o m p a n y Client Const.type Location Supervisor Affiliates Client Const.type Location Supervisor Affiliates Memo On Memo On Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- This option only takes effect when [Mode2] is selected for [Camera Memo Mode]. Remove Memo Marking Remove [Memo Marking] marking from the camera memo dialog for memos that have been added to photos taken with [On] selected for [Mark Memo Added to Photos]. Memo Warning If [On] is selected, a warning will be displayed and the shutter release will be disabled if you attempt to take a photograph with the description for one or more memo items set to [No Setting]. The shutter release can be enabled by choosing a description for the affected items. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- This option has no effect when [Mode2] is selected for [Camera Memo Mode] or [On] is selected for [Camera Memo 1 Auto Delete].89 8 Camera Memo Menu Display Memo at Startup Select [On] to display the camera memo dialog when the camera is turned on. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- This option is only available if a memo list has been transferred to the camera. Memo Increment “Software User Guide” GP.32 If [On] is selected, numbers that appear at the end of memo descriptions can be increased or decreased by pressing ! or ". Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- This option only takes effect when [Mode1] is selected for [Camera Memo Mode]. Camera Memo Imprint Select [On] to stamp the first three memo items on photographs. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Only the first ten letters of the item name and first 32 letters of the description will appear on photographs. Only the first 31 letters (including the item name and the colon that appears between the item name and the description) will appear on photographs taken with [z 4 : 3 F] selected for [Picture Quality/ Size]. • This option has no effect when [Mode3] is selected for [Barcode Mode]. Camera Memo 1 Auto Delete If [On] is selected, the description for the first memo item will automatically be set to [No Setting] when the camera is turned on, a photograph is taken, or a memo list is transferred to the camera. A warning will be displayed and the shutter release will be disabled if you attempt to take a photograph with the description for the first item still set to [No Setting]. The shutter release can be enabled by choosing a description for the first item. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- This option has no effect when [Mode2] is selected for [Camera Memo Mode].90 8 Camera Memo Menu Barcode Type Choose from the following options: Available Settings Description Auto The camera automatically detects the barcode type. Linear Use for linear barcodes. The following types are supported: EAN-13/8 (JAN-13/8), UPC-A/E, UPC/EAN (with add-ons), Interleaved 2 of 5, CODEBAR (NW-7), CODE 39, CODE 93, CODE 128 TYPE C, GS1-128 (EAN-128), and RSS (GS1 DataBar). QR Code, Micro QR Code, DataMatrix, PDF417, Micro PDF417, MaxiCode, EAN/UCC When scanning matrix barcodes, choose the option that corresponds to the type of barcode that will be scanned. Note ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The camera can read linear barcodes of up to 32 digits and matrix barcodes of up to 2400 digits. • Voice memos are not available with matrix barcodes. Barcode Mode “Software User Guide” GP.36 Choose where barcode data are stored. Available Settings Description Mode1 The barcode is stored in the memo list as a temporary description for the first item. This description is overwritten each time a barcode is read. Mode2 The first barcode read is stored in the memo list as a temporary description for the first item, the second barcode as a temporary description for the second item, the third barcode as a temporary description for the third item, and the fourth barcode as a temporary description for the fourth item. These descriptions are overwritten in turn as new barcodes are read. Mode3 This option only takes effect in shooting mode. Up to fifty barcodes can be stored in the memo list as temporary descriptions for the first item. These data can be viewed in the camera memo dialog before shooting but can not be changed and are deleted after a photograph is taken. Scan Time Choose the maximum time the camera will wait for a barcode to be scanned. Scanning will be interrupted if a barcode is not read in the specified time.91 9 Direct Printing 9 Direct Printing About the Direct Print Function The Direct Print standard enables direct printing from a camera to a printer by connecting them via a USB cable. Photos can be printed quickly and easily from your digital camera without using a computer. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- You cannot print AVI files (movies) with this function. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • This camera uses PictBridge, an industry standard for Direct Printing. • Your printer must be compatible with PictBridge to use the Direct Print function. For support information, see the documentation that came with the printer. Connecting the Camera to a Printer Connect your camera to a printer using the USB cable provided. 1 Make sure that the camera power is off. 2 Open the terminal cover. • Slide the knob in the direction shown and open the terminal cover. 3 Connect your camera to a printer using the USB cable provided. • Turn on the printer if it is not already on. • Your camera turns on automatically. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- To disconnect the camera from the printer, check that the camera is turned off after printing is finished, and disconnect the USB cable.92 9 Direct Printing Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Do not force the USB cable into the terminal. • Do not apply excessive force with the USB cable connected. • When using the USB cable, do not move the camera with the USB cable. • To prevent moisture or dust from entering the camera, close the terminal cover securely after disconnecting the USB cable. Printing Still Images You can print still images from the camera with a PictBridgecompatible printer. If a memory card is inserted, the pictures will be printed from the memory card; otherwise pictures will be printed from internal memory. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Do not disconnect the USB cable during printing. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • If a [Printer error.] message appears during image transfer, check the printer status and take the appropriate action. • If a computer connection message appears even though the camera is connected to the printer, reconnect the camera and press the ADJ./MEMO button within two seconds. Before printing, connect the camera to the printer. The message [Connecting...] shown at right will be displayed if the printer is ready; press the ADJ./MEMO button to view the Direct Print playback display. Printing One or All Still Images 1 Select an image for printing and press the ADJ./MEMO button. 2 Select [1 File] or [All Files] and press the ADJ./MEMO button. • The Direct Print menu appears.93 9 Direct Printing 3 Select an item and press the $ button to view the options available. • When [Connecting…] is displayed, the connection to the printer is not yet established. When a connection is established, [Connecting…] disappears and [Direct Print] appears. Proceed with this step after the connection is established. • The following items can be selected. Each item is available only when supported by the printer connected to the camera. Item Name Description Printing Quantity Sets the print quantity. Paper Size Sets the paper size. Paper Type Sets the paper type. Layout Sets the number of images printed on a sheet of paper. The number of images that can be laid out on a sheet of paper varies depending on the connected printer. Report Print ( * ) Prints on forms. Memo Print ( * ) Choose whether reports will include camera memo descriptions (GP.95). Depending on the layout selected with [Report Print], the camera memo may not be printed. In this case, delete some of the information in the camera memo. Print Size Sets the print image size. Date Print Selects whether to print the date (shooting date). The date format can be set using the date/time option in the setup menu. If the picture was taken using [Date Imprint] (GP.58), only the imprinted date will be printed. File Name Print Selects whether to print the file name. Optimize Image Selects whether to optimize the image data (still image) prior to printing on the printer. Print Quality Sets the print quality. Toner Saving ( * ) Selects whether to conserve toner by using less ink during printing. 1-Side/2-Sides ( * ) Selects whether to print on both sides of the paper. During duplex printing, one copy is printed for each still image. Only one copy is printed even if you selected more than one copy to print in Step 3 on P.94. ( * ) Compatible Ricoh printers only.94 9 Direct Printing Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • To specify the settings as the default settings next time the camera is connected to the printer, press the ADJ./MEMO button when the screen in Step 3 is displayed. Select [Yes] in the display at right and press the MENU/OK button. • To use the settings last set the next time the camera is connected to the printer, select [No]. 4 Select an option and press the MENU/OK button. • The display returns to the Direct Print menu. • Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to change other settings as required. 5 Press the MENU/OK button. • The selected still images are sent to the printer and the [Sending…] screen appears. • Pressing the DISP. button cancels the operation. • When the images have been sent to the printer, the display returns to the Direct Print playback mode screen and printing starts. Printing Several Still Images 1 Press the 9 (Thumbnail view) button. • Photos will be displayed in multi-frame playback. 2 Select an image and press the MENU/OK button. 3 Press the !" buttons to set the number of copies to print. • Press the ! button to increase the number of copies, or press the " button to decrease the number of copies. • Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to select additional images. 4 Press the MENU/OK button. • The Direct Print menu appears. 5 Select an item and press the $ button to view the options available. • See Steps 3 and following on P.93. Pr n t Fi l PPPr n t Fi l rrnntt FFiill 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F Forward Forward P r n t F i l PPP r n t F i l rrnntt FFiill L a s t F i l e LLL a s t F i l e aasstt FFiillee 4 : 3 F 4 : 4:33 F F Forward Forward L a s t F i l e LLL a s t F i l e aasstt FFiillee95 9 Direct Printing Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Only images with a printer symbol (p) are printed. If you cancel printing and then try to print again, make sure that the printer symbol is on the images you want to print. • The same still image can also be printed several times on a single sheet. • The available items vary depending on the functions of the printer. • To print images using the printer’s default settings, select [Printer Select] on the detailed options screen. Printing Reports Select [ Report Print] on the Direct Print menu. You can only select [Report Print] when the camera is connected to a Ricoh printer that supports PictBridge after setting [Paper Size] to [A4] on the menu. The layout that can be selected depends on the connected printer. For more details, see the documentation that came with the printer. Available Layouts 1 Frame W/Rule 2 Frames W/Rule 3 Frames W/Rule 4 Frames W/Rule 1 Frame W/O Rule 2 Frames W/O Rule 3 Frames W/O Rule 4 Frames W/O Rule Const. Photo 1 W/Remark Section Additional Report 1-10 Examples of Printed Reports 1 Frame W/Rule 2 Frames W/O Rule Const. Photo 1 Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Memos will only be included in the report if [5] is selected for [Number of Items] in the List Editor (G“Software User Guide” P.24).96 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer The screen images shown here may differ from the images displayed on your computer depending on your computer OS. For Windows You can copy pictures to your computer with or without DL-10 software, which can be installed from the supplied CD. System Requirements for Using the Supplied CD-ROM The following environments are necessary for using the supplied CDROM. Please check your computer, or the computer's user manual. Operating Systems Supported Windows 2000 Professional Service Pack 4 Windows XP Home Edition Service Pack 3/Professional Service Pack 3 Windows Vista Service Pack 2 Windows 7 (32- and 64-bit) CPU Pentium® IV: 1.6 GHz or faster Pentium® M: 1.4 GHz or faster Core™ 2 Duo: 1.5 GHz or faster Memory Windows 2000/Windows XP: 512 MB or more Windows Vista/Windows 7: 1 GB or more Hard drive space required for installation 300 MB or more Display Resolution 1024 × 768 pixels or greater Display Colors 65,000 colors or greater CD-ROM Drive A CD-ROM drive compatible with the above-mentioned computer USB Port A USB port compatible with the above-mentioned computer97 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The CD-ROM supports Japanese, English, French and German. Operations are not guaranteed on operating systems with other languages. • 64-bit Windows Vista is not supported. • If your computer has an upgraded OS, the USB function may not work normally, so it cannot be supported. • The provided software may not operate properly if changes are made to the operating system, such as with patches and service package releases. • The camera does not support connection to a USB port added by using an extension function (PCI bus or other). • If used in conjunction with a hub or other USB devices, the software may not work properly. • When dealing with movies and other large files, a larger memory environment is recommended. • MediaBrowser is not supported under Windows 2000. CD-ROM Setup Once you insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive, the installer screen appears automatically. Windows 2000/Windows XP • The installer screen appears automatically. Windows Vista/Windows 7 • If an Autorun dialog is displayed, select [Run Autorun.exe]. The installer will start automatically. Use this button to install software required for batch downloading and editing of images. Click this to display the list of files contained on the CD-ROM. Install EC1 image authentication software.98 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer Installing Software Click [Installing the software] to install the following software. Software Description DL-10 Downloads images collectively to your computer. List Editor Create memo lists. ME1 View and manage photographs to which memos have been appended, edit memos, and print memos with photographs. MediaBrowser Display, manage, and edit existing images. Not supported under Windows 2000. USB Driver Used to connect an earlier model Ricoh camera to a computer running Windows 98/Windows 98 SE/ Windows Me/Windows 2000. Not used with this camera. WIA Driver Used to connect an earlier model Ricoh camera to a computer running Windows XP/Windows Vista/ Windows 7. Not used with this camera. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Do not install the software when the camera is connected to your computer with a USB cable. • The names for DC Software items differ from the names for Caplio Software items provided with previous models as shown below. Caplio Software DC Software RICOH Gate La DL-10 Caplio Viewer DU-10 Caplio Server SR-10 (not used with this camera) Caplio Setting ST-10 (not used with this camera) If Caplio Software from a CD-ROM supplied with a previous model is already installed on your computer, a message asking you to uninstall the Caplio Software before installing DC Software will appear when you try to install the new software. • Administrator privileges are required for installation. • DL-10 is not network-compatible. Use as a stand-alone application.99 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer 1 Click [Installing the software]. Windows 2000/Windows XP • After a while, the [Choose Setup Language] screen appears. Windows Vista/Windows 7 • If a [User Account Control] dialog is displayed, select [Yes] (Windows 7) or [Allow] (Windows Vista). After a short pause, the [Choose Setup Language] dialog will be displayed. 2 Select a language and follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation. • The MediaBrowser installer will start. To install MediaBrowser, accept the license agreement and follow the on-screen instructions. 3 When a message appears asking you to restart your computer, select [Yes, I want to restart my computer now.] and then click [Finish]. • Your computer will restart automatically. • After your computer restarts, a Windows security warning message appears. 4 Click [Unblock] for DL-10. Installing EC1 EC1 can be used to determine whether photographs shot with [On] selected for [Edit Detection] (GP.59) in the shooting menu have been altered since they were taken. See the “Software Users Guide” for details. 1 Click [Installing EC1]. • Depending on your user environment, an installation message for “Visual C++ Runtime Library (×86)” or “.NET Framework 2.0” may be displayed. If this message appears, follow the instructions on the message to install the software. If a message instructing you to restart your computer appears after installation, please restart your computer. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions and install EC1.100 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- If EC1 is already installed on your computer, you cannot reinstall it. If you try to reinstall it, a message asking if you want to change or delete EC1 is displayed. To exit without changing or deleting EC1, click [Cancel]. Installing Other Software Click [Browse CD-ROM Content] to install the following software: Software Description Adobe Reader Required to view manuals in pdf format. EX1 Rename files according to memo descriptions or export memos as CSV, XML, or text. EX1 comes in server and client versions. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Do not install the software when the camera is connected to your computer with a USB cable. • Administrator privileges are required for installation. • To install MediaBrowser without installing other applications, double-click the setup.exe icon in the “MediaBrowser” folder. Installing Adobe Reader Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader need not be installed if already installed on your computer. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • For details about Adobe Reader, see Help for Adobe Reader. • Installation of Adobe Reader 9.3 requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later or Firefox 2.0 or later. Microsoft Internet Explorer is available via Microsoft Update. • Installation of Adobe Reader 9.3 requires MSI (Microsoft Windows Installer) version 3.1 or later. Microsoft Windows Installer is available via Microsoft Update.101 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer 1 Click [Browse CD-ROM Content]. • The files on the CD-ROM are listed. 2 Open the folder for your language in the [Adobe Reader] folder and double-click the Adobe Reader installer. • A screen appears to confirm user account management for Windows 7 and Windows Vista. Select [Continue]. 3 Install Adobe Reader by following the messages displayed. Installing EX1 For information on using EX1, see the “Software Users Guide”. 1 Click [Browse CD-ROM Content]. • The files on the CD will be displayed. 2 Start the installer. • Double-click [EX1] and then double click either [EX1_for_Server] (or [EX1_for_Server.exe]) or [EX1_for_Client] (or [EX1_for_Client. exe]). Under Windows 7 and Windows Vista, a [User Account Control] dialog will be displayed; click [Continue]. 3 Install EX1. • Follow the on-screen instructions. Uninstalling the Software --------------------------------------------------------- • The software can be uninstalled using the [Programs and Features] control panel (Windows 7 and Windows Vista) or [Add/Remove Programs] control panel (other versions of Windows). • Administrator privileges are required. • Quit any other programs that may be running before uninstalling the software.102 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer Copying Pictures to Your Computer Follow the steps below to copy pictures to your computer. 1 Connect the camera to the computer using the supplied USB cable. • Turn the camera off before connecting the USB cable. • The camera turns on automatically when a connection is established. 2 Copy photos to the computer. If DL-10 is installed: • DL-10 starts and image transfer begins automatically. • Pictures are copied to the [Digital Camera] folder in [My Documents], where they are sorted into separate folders by date of recording. See the “Software User Guide” on the supplied CD for more information. If DL-10 is not installed: • Copy files from the camera to the desired location. • When an SD memory card is loaded, its files are displayed. Otherwise, files in the internal memory are displayed. Example of the display in Windows XP103 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer 3 Disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete. • Click the [Safely Remove Hardware] or [Unplug or Eject Hardware] icon in the taskbar (the illustration above shows the icon for Windows XP) and select [Safely Remove USB Mass Storage Device] or [Stop USB Mass Storage Device] from the menu that appears. You can then disconnect the USB cable. • If the remove hardware icon is not displayed in Windows 7, click the button in the taskbar. Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Do not turn off the camera or disconnect the USB cable during image transfer. • Do not use force when connecting the cable or when handling the camera with the cable connected. Do not attempt to transport the camera while the USB cable is connected. • To prevent moisture or dust from entering the camera, close the terminal cover securely after disconnecting the USB cable. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The camera is provided with MediaBrowser software that allows you to display and edit images from your computer. For how to use MediaBrowser, see the displayed “Help”. For the latest information about MediaBrowser, access the Web page of Pixela Co., Ltd. (http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/mediabrowser/e/).104 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer For Macintosh This camera supports the following Macintosh operating systems. • Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2 • Mac OS X 10.1.2 to 10.6.3 Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Although the software included in the CD-ROM cannot be used with Macintosh, it is possible to display the “Software User Guide” (note that Acrobat Reader is required to view the “Software User Guide” under Mac OS 9). Copying Pictures to Your Computer Follow the steps below to copy pictures to your computer. 1 Connect the camera to the computer using the supplied USB cable. • Turn the camera off before connecting the USB cable. • The camera turns on automatically when a connection is established. 2 Copy photos to the computer. • Copy files from the camera to the desired location. • When an SD memory card is loaded, its files are displayed. Otherwise, files in the internal memory are displayed. 3 Disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete. • Drag the camera volume into the Trash and then disconnect the USB cable.105 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Do not turn off the camera or disconnect the USB cable during image transfer. • Do not use force when connecting the cable or when handling the camera with the cable connected. Do not attempt to transport the camera while the USB cable is connected. • You can also click [Eject] on the [Special] menu in Mac OS 9 or the [File] menu in Mac OS X to cancel the connection. • If the USB cable is disconnected without disabling the connection, the Unsafe Removal of Device screen may be displayed. Be sure to stop the connection before removing the USB cable. • When you connect your camera to a Macintosh computer, a file called “FINDER.DAT” or “.DS_Store” may be created in your SD memory card, which will appear as [Unmatched File] on your camera. You can delete this file from the SD memory card if you wish. • To prevent moisture or dust from entering the camera, close the terminal cover securely after disconnecting the USB cable.106 Appendices 11 11 Appendices Troubleshooting Error Messages If an error message is displayed on the screen, check the information on the reference page and take the corresponding action. Error Message Cause and Solution Refer to Insert card. No card is loaded. Insert a card. P.23 Set date. The date is not set. Set the date. P.79 The file number limit has been exceeded. The file number limit has been exceeded. Use another card. P.79 Unmatched File This file cannot be displayed on the camera. Check the file contents on your computer, and then delete the file. — Insufficient memory. Continue? All the files cannot be copied because there is insufficient memory on the card. Use another card. P.20 Protected The file selected for deletion is protected. P.72 Card Is Write-Protected. The card is locked (write-protected). Unlock the card. P.21 This option is not available with SD WORM cards. Selected option is not available with SD WORM cards. Use a different type of card. P.20 Print settings cannot be applied to this file. This file (movie or other file) cannot be selected for printing. — Insufficient Memory/ Capacity Short Files cannot be stored. Make sure there is sufficient memory or delete unwanted files. P.37, P.76 The image print number limit has been exceeded. Select an image and set the number to 0. P.94 Format internal memory. The internal memory requires formatting. P.76 Format card. The card is not formatted. Format the card with this camera. P.76 Card Error Reformat the card. If the error message still appears after that, the card may be faulty. Do not use the card. P.76 Writing Data Writing file to memory. Wait until writing finishes. — No File There are no files that can be played back. — Out of memory. cannot record. The number of remaining shots is 0. Switch to another card or the internal memory. P.20 No files to restore. There are no files to restore. P.67 Can not —. * Selected option can not be applied to image more than once, or image was created with different make of camera. If image was created with different make of camera, process image using original make of camera. — * “—“ indicates the name of the process that can not be applied.107 11 Appendices Camera Troubleshooting Power Supply Problem Cause Solution Refer to The camera does not turn on. The battery is exhausted or not inserted. Check that battery is correctly inserted. Charge battery (rechargeable battery only), insert fresh battery. P.22, P. 2 3 An unacceptable battery is used. Use supplied battery or compatible AAA batteries. P. 1 9 The camera is automatically turned off by auto power off. Turn the camera back on. P.25 The battery is loaded in wrong direction. Load correctly. P.23 Because the camera overheated, the power was automatically turned off. Wait until the temperature of the camera returns to normal. Do not attempt to cool the camera suddenly. — The camera turns off during use. The camera was left unattended and unused, so auto power off turned it off. Turn the camera back on. P.25 Battery is exhausted. Check that battery is correctly inserted. Charge battery (rechargeable battery only), insert fresh battery. P.22, P. 2 3 An unacceptable battery is used. Use supplied battery or compatible AAA batteries. P. 1 9 The camera does not turn off. Camera malfunction Remove the battery and load it again. P. 2 3 The battery has been fully charged, but: • The battery symbol is displayed, indicating a low battery level. • The camera turns off. A unacceptable battery is used. Use supplied battery or compatible AAA batteries. P. 1 9 Cannot charge the battery. Battery has reached the end of its useful life. Replace with a new rechargeable battery. P. 2 3 Battery runs out quickly. It is being used at extreme high or low temperatures. — — Many shots are being taken in dark places or other location requiring extensive use of flash. — —108 Appendices 11 Shooting Problem Cause Solution Refer to The camera does not shoot even if you press the shutter release button. Battery is exhausted. Check that battery is correctly inserted. Charge battery (rechargeable battery only), insert fresh battery. P.22, P. 2 3 The camera is not on. Press the POWER button to turn the camera on. P. 2 5 The camera is in playback mode. Press the 6 (Playback) button to select the shooting mode. P. 2 5 The shutter release button is not pressed all the way. Press the shutter release button all the way. P. 2 8 The SD memory card is not formatted. Format the card. P.76 The SD memory card is full. Load a new card, or delete unwanted files. P. 3 7 P. 2 3 The SD memory card has reached the end of its useful life. Load a new SD memory card. P.23 The flash is charging. Wait until the auto focus/flash lamp stops blinking. P. 3 1 The SD memory card is locked. Unlock the card. P.21 The contact surface of the SD memory card is dirty. Wipe with a soft, dry cloth. — Unable to view the shot image. The image confirmation time is too short. Lengthen the image confirmation time. P. 7 7 Images do not appear on the picture display. The camera is not on, or the picture display is dark. Turn the camera on, or adjust the brightness of the picture display. P.25, P. 7 6 The VIDEO/AV cable is connected. Disconnect the VIDEO/AV cable. — The screen display is in synchromonitor mode. Press the DISP. button to change the display. P. 4 0 Although the camera is set to auto focus, it is unable to focus. The lens is dirty. Wipe clean with a soft, dry cloth. — The subject is not in the center of the shooting range. Shoot with focus lock. P.27 It is a hard-to-focus subject. Shoot with focus lock or manual focus. P.27, P. 6 0 Although the camera is not in focus, the green frame appears in the center of the picture display. The camera incorrectly focused because the distance to the subject is too close. Shoot with macro mode, or move away from the subject. P. 3 0109 11 Appendices Problem Cause Solution Refer to The picture is blurred (The J symbol appears). You moved the camera when pressing the shutter release button. Hold camera in both hands with your elbows pressed lightly against your torso. Use a tripod. Use the camera shake correction function. P. 2 7 P. 5 8 When shooting in a dark place (such as indoors), the shutter speed slows down and pictures become easily blurred. Use the flash. Raise the ISO setting. Use the camera shake correction function. P. 3 1 P. 6 4 P. 5 8 The flash does not fire. Or, the flash cannot charge. The flash cannot be used in the following cases: • In bracket shooting • In continuous mode • In movie mode In some scene modes, the flash is disabled by default. To shoot with the flash, change the settings or mode. P.31, P. 1 1 3 The flash is set to flash off. Cancel Flash Off. P.31 Battery is exhausted. Check that battery is correctly inserted. Charge battery (rechargeable battery only), insert fresh battery. P.22, P. 2 3 Even though the flash fired, the picture is dark. The distance to the subject exceeds the flash range. Get closer to your subject and shoot. Change the flash mode or the ISO setting. P.64, P. 1 1 5 The subject is dark. Correct the exposure (Exposure compensation also changes the light intensity of the flash). P. 6 2 Cannot use the ADJ. button function. The camera memo list is saved on the SD memory card. Delete files with the “.mta” extension in the camera [TEMPLATE] folder. — The image is too bright. The light intensity of the flash is not appropriate. Position yourself slightly further from your subject or turn the flash off and use other lighting. P. 3 1 Subject is overexposed (The [Q] symbol appears). Correct the exposure. Cancel exposure time. P. 6 2 P. 5 7 The brightness of the picture display is not appropriate. Adjust the brightness of the picture display. P. 7 6 The image is too dark. The shot was taken in a dark place while set to flash off. Cancel Flash Off. P.31 The subject is underexposed (The [Q] symbol appears). Correct the exposure. Set the long exposure time. P. 6 2 P. 5 7 The brightness of the picture display is not appropriate. Adjust the brightness of the picture display. P. 7 6110 Appendices 11 Problem Cause Solution Refer to The image lacks natural color. The picture was shot in conditions that made it difficult for auto white balance to adjust the white balance. Add a white object to the composition, or use a white balance setting other than auto. P. 6 3 The date or recording information does not appear on the screen. The screen display function is set to no display. Press the DISP. button to change the display. P. 4 0 The brightness of the picture display changes during AF. Ambient lighting is poor or differs from that used for autofocus.. This is normal. — Vertical streaks (“smear”) appear in photos. Subject is bright. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. — The level indicator is not displayed. [Level Setting] is set to [Off] or [Sound]. Set [Level Setting] to [Display] or [Disp + Snd]. P. 4 2 The display is set to a setting other than normal symbol display or histogram. Press the DISP. button to change the display to normal symbol display or histogram. P. 4 0 The camera is upside down (The shutter release button is on the bottom). Hold the camera correctly. — The image is tilted even though it was shot with the level indicator in the middle or while the level sound was sounding. You shot the image while moving, such as on a amusement ride. Shoot in an environment that is not moving. — The subject is not level. Check the subject. —111 11 Appendices Playback/Deleting Problem Cause Solution Refer to Cannot play back, or the playback screen does not appear. The camera is not in playback mode. Press the 6 (Playback) button. P. 3 4 The VIDEO/AV cable is not connected properly. Connect properly. P.74 The [Video Out Mode] setting is incorrect. Set it to the correct format. P.79 The contents of the SD memory card cannot be played back, or the playback screen does not appear. No SD memory card is loaded, or an SD memory card with no stored images is loaded. Load a card with stored images. — You played back an SD memory card that was not formatted with this device. Load a card that was formatted and recorded with this device. P.76, P. 2 3 You played back an SD memory card that was not recorded normally. Load a normally recorded card. — The contact surface of the SD memory card is dirty. Wipe with a soft, dry cloth. — There is something wrong with the SD memory card. Play back images from another card and if there is nothing wrong with the card, the camera is okay. There may be something wrong with the card, so do not use it. — The picture display turned off. Battery is exhausted. Check that battery is correctly inserted. Charge battery (rechargeable battery only), insert fresh battery. P.22, P. 2 3 The camera was left unattended and unused, so auto power off turned it off. Turn the camera back on. P.25 A file cannot be deleted. The file is protected. Unprotect the file. P.72 The SD memory card is locked. Unlock the card. P.21 Cannot format the SD memory card. The SD memory card is locked. Unlock the card. P.21112 Appendices 11 Other Problems Problem Cause Solution Refer to Cannot load the SD memory card. The card is facing the wrong way. Load correctly. P.23 The camera does not operate even when the buttons are pressed. Battery is exhausted. Check that battery is correctly inserted. Charge battery (rechargeable battery only), insert fresh battery. P.22, P. 2 3 Camera malfunction Press the POWER button to turn the camera off, and then press the POWER button to turn the camera on again. P. 2 5 Remove the battery and load it again. P. 2 5 The date is incorrect. The correct date/time are not set. Set the correct date/time. P.79 The set date disappeared. The battery was removed. If the battery is removed for more than three days, the date setting will be lost. Make the settings again. P. 7 9 Auto power off does not work. Auto power off is set to [Off]. Set the time for auto power off. P.77 The operation sound cannot be heard. The operation sound volume is turned off. Use [Volume Settings] to set the volume to a setting other than mute. P. 7 7 Images do not appear on the TV. The [Video Out Mode] setting is incorrect. Set it to the correct format. P.79 The AV cable is not connected. Connect the AV cable properly. P.74 The TV is not correctly set to VIDEO IN. Check that the TV is correctly set to VIDEO IN. —113 11 Appendices Available Settings The following table lists the settings available in each shooting mode. 5 V W N (Macro) * 1 ? ? ? ? ? ? — ? F (Flash) ? ? ? ? ? ? ? — t (Self-timer) * 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? — Digital Zoom * 3 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? Shooting Menu Density — — — — — ? — — Size — — — — — ? — — Movie Size — — — — — — — ? Picture Quality/Size ? —* 4 ? ? ?* 5 — ? — Focus Multi AF * 6 ? ? ? ? ? — — ? Spot AF ? ? ? ? ? — — ? AF — — — — — — ? — MF ? ? — — ? — ? ? Snap ? ? ? ? ? — — ? 8 ? ? ? ? ? — — ? Exposure Metering ? ? — — ? — ? — Continuous Mode * 7 * 8 ? ? — — — — ? — Image Settings ? ? — — ? — ? — Auto Bracket * 8 * 9 ? ? — — — — ? — Time Exposure * 10 ? ? — — — — ? — Interval Shooting * 11 ? ? — — — — — — Camera Shake Correction * 12 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? — Date Imprint ? ? ? ? ? ? ? — *1 [Focus] is set to [Spot AF]. Disabled when [MF] is selected for [Focus]. *2 Disabled during interval timer and continuous shooting. *3 Not available if image is zoomed in during manual focus. *4 Picture quality and size for CALS mode is selected using the [CALS Pic Quality] option in the setup menu. *5 [a 4 : 3 F], [a 4 : 3 N], and [z 4 : 3 F] only. *6 Functions as [Spot AF] when digital zoom is in effect. *7 Disabled during interval timer shooting. *8 Flash turns off. *9 Disabled during continuous shooting. *10 Disabled during auto bracketing and continuous shooting. *11 Disabled when self-timer is used. *12 Not available if [Flash On], [FLASH ON (10M)], or [Flash Synchro.] is selected as flash mode for long time-exposures or continuous shooting or if ten-second self-timer is used.114 Appendices 11 5 V W Shooting Menu Exposure Compensation ? ? ? ? ? — ? — White Balance * 13 ? ? ? ? ? — ? ? ISO Setting ? ? — — ? — ? — Edit Detection * 14 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? — Restore Defaults ? — — — — — — — Setup Menu ADJ Button Setting 1–4 * 15 Off ? ? — — — — — — Exposure Comp. ? ? ? ? ? — ? — White Balance ? ? ? ? ? — ? ? ISO ? ? — — — — — — Quality ? — — — — — — — Focus ? ? — — — — — — Image ? ? — — — — — — Expo. Metering ? ? — — — — — — Cont. Mode ? ? — — — — — — Auto Bracket ? ? — — — — — — Density — — — — — ? — — Shooting Info. Display Frame ? ? ? ? ? ? ? — Other than those above ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? *13 Not available if [Black & White] is selected for [Image Settings]. *14 Disabled during auto bracketing and continuous shooting. *15 The function displayed when the ADJ. button is pressed in scene mode is always the same and is not affected by the roles assigned to the button.115 11 Appendices Specifications No. of effective pixels (camera) Approx. 12.10 million effective pixels Image Sensor 1/2.3? CCD (Approx. 12.40 total million pixels) Lens Focal Length 5.0 mm to 25 mm (equivalent to 28 mm to 140 mm on a 35-mm camera) F-aperture F3.5 to F5.5 Shooting Distance Normal shooting: Approx. 30 cm to 8 (Wide-angle) or 50 cm to 8 (Telephoto) (from the front of the lens) Macro shooting: Approx. 1 cm to 8 (Wide-angle), 15 cm to 8 (Telephoto) or 1 cm to 8 (Zoom macro mode) (from the front of the lens) Lens Construction 11 elements in 9 groups plus 1 prism Zoom Magnification Optical zoom at 5.0 ×, Digital zoom at 4.0 ×, Auto resize zoom at approx. 6.3 × (VGA image) Focus Modes Multi AF (CCD method)/Spot AF (CCD method)/MF/Snap/8 (with AF Auxiliary Light) Blur Reduction Digital image stabilizer Shutter Speed Still Image 8, 4, 2, 1 to 1/1500 seconds (The upper and lower limits differ for each shooting mode and flash mode.) Movie 1/30 to 1/10000 seconds Exposure Control Exposure Metering Mode Multi Light Metering (256 segments)/Center-weighted Light Metering/ Spot Metering (TTL-CCD Metering) Exposure Mode Program AE Exposure Compensation Manual exposure compensation (+2.0 to –2.0 EV in 1/3 EV Steps), Auto bracket function (–0.5 EV, ±0, +0.5 EV) Exposure Range (auto mode, center-weighted metering) Wide angle: 1.7–15.4 EV Telephoto: 3.0–15.6 EV (Exposure range for auto ISO calculated using values for ISO 100.) Note: At 6.0 EV or lower, each drop of 1.0 EV is associated with a 0.25 EV drop in brightness. Brightness drops by no more than 1.0 EV. ISO Sensitivity (Standard Output Sensitivity) Auto/ISO 64/ISO 100/ISO 200/ISO 400/ISO 800/ISO 1600/ISO 3200 White Balance Mode Auto/Outdoors/Cloudy/Incandescent 1/Incandescent 2/Fluorescent/Manual/ Ring Light, White balance bracket function Flash Flash Mode Auto flash (fires automatically in low-light conditions and when the subject is backlit)/Anti Red-eye/Flash On/FLASH ON (10M)/Flash Synchro./Flash Off Built-in flash Range Approx. 20 cm to 10.0 m (Wide-angle), approx. 40 cm to 6.2 m (Telephoto) (ISO AUTO/ISO 1600, from the front of the lens) Charging Time Approx. 8 seconds Picture Display 3.0? Transmissive LCD, approx. 920,000 dots Shooting Mode Auto shooting mode/Scene mode (High Sens/Firefighting/Skew Correct Mode/Text Mode/Zoom Macro/Movie)/My settings mode/CALS mode Picture Quality Mode * 1 F (Fine), N (Normal)116 Appendices 11 Number of Recorded Pixels Still Image 4000 × 3000, 3984 × 2656, 2592 × 1944, 2048 × 1536, 1600 × 1200, 1280 × 960, 640 × 480 Movie 1280 × 720, 640 × 480, 320 × 240 Text 4000 × 3000, 2048 × 1536 Recording Media SD memory card, SDHC memory card (up to 32 GB), SD WORM card, Internal Memory (approx. 103 MB) Recording Data Capacity 4000 × 3000 N: approx. 2713 KB/Screen, F: approx. 4735 KB/Screen 3984 × 2656 F: approx. 4177 KB/Screen 2592 × 1944 F: approx. 2281 KB/Screen 2048 × 1536 F: approx. 1431 KB/Screen 1600 × 1200 F: approx. 880 KB/Screen 1280 × 960 N: approx. 363 KB/Screen, F: approx. 708 KB/Screen 640 × 480 F: approx. 190 KB/Screen Recording File Format Still Image JPEG (Exif Ver. 2.21)* 2 Movie AVI (Open DML Motion JPEG Format Compliant) Compression Format JPEG Baseline Format Compliant (Still image, movie) Other Major Shooting Functions Continuous mode, Self-timer (operation time: approx. 10 seconds, approx. 2 seconds), Interval shooting (shooting interval: 5 seconds to 3 hours, in increments of 5 seconds)* 3 , AE/AF target shift, Histogram display, Grid guide display, Electronic level Other Major Playback Functions Thumbnail view, Enlarged view (maximum 16×), Resize, Contrast Correction, Skew Correction, Trim, Slide show, DPOF Interface USB2.0 (High-Speed USB) Mini-B, Mass storage-compatible * 4 , AV output 1.0 Vp-p (75 O) Video Signal Format NTSC, PAL Power Supply Rechargeable Battery (DB-65): 3.6 V Battery life (based on CIPA standard) * 5 DB-65: approx. 360 shots AAA alkaline: 40 shots * 6 (When [LCD Auto Dim] is set to [On] * 7 ) Dimensions (W × H × D) 118.8 mm × 71.0 mm × 41.0 mm (excluding projections; measured according to CIPA guidelines) Weight Approx. 310 g (including memory card and supplied battery) Approx. 280 g (camera only) Tripod Hole Shape 1/4-20UNC Date Maintain Time Approx. 3 days Operating Temperature –10 °C to 40 °C Operating Humidity 90% or less Storage Temperature –20 °C to 60 °C Water resistance/ Dust resistance JIS/IEC waterproof grade 8, JIS/IEC dustproof grade 6 (IP68)117 11 Appendices *1 The picture quality mode that can be set varies depending on the image size. *2 Compatible with DCF and DPOF. DCF is the abbreviation for “Design rule for Camera File system,” a JEITA standard (Full compatibility with other devices is not guaranteed). *3 When the flash is set to [Flash Off]. *4 Mass storage mode is supported by Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Mac OS 9.0–9.2.2, and Mac OS X 10.1.2–10.6.3. *5 The number of remaining shots is based on the CIPA standard and may vary depending on usage conditions. This is for reference only. *6 When using the AAA Alkaline batteries manufactured by Panasonic. *7 If [Off] is selected for [LCD Auto Dim], up to 345 shots can be taken with DB-65 batteries and up to 40 shots with AAA alkaline batteries. Number of Images That Can Be Stored The following table shows the approximate number of images that can be recorded in the internal memory and onto an SD memory card at various image size and picture quality settings. Mode Image Size Internal Memory 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB V5 ([Movie] and W [Text mode] excluded) l 4 : 3 F 22 202 412 810 1648 3316 6653 l 4 : 3 N 38 351 714 1403 2856 5746 11527 j 3 : 2 F 25 229 465 914 1860 3743 7510 e 4 : 3 F 45 416 842 1653 3364 6769 13580 c 4 : 3 F 72 657 1336 2623 5339 10743 21551 b 4 : 3 F 116 1060 2119 4162 8469 17041 34184 a 4 : 3 F 141 1286 2561 5029 10234 20591 41306 a 4 : 3 N 265 2418 4728 9284 18894 38015 76258 W z 4 : 3 F 509 4650 8781 17242 35089 70600 141622 (Text Mode) l 4 : 3 38 351 714 1403 2856 5746 11527 W c 4 : 3 72 657 1336 2623 5339 10743 21551 (Movie) x 1280 20 s 3 min. 3 s 6 min. 13 s 12 min. 14 s 24 min. 54 s 50 min. 6 s 100 min. 31 s y 640 58 s 8 min. 54 s 18 min. 7 s 35 min. 35 s 72 min. 24 s 145 min. 42 s 292 min. 16 s z 320 2 min. 22 s 21 min. 34 s 43 min. 53 s 86 min. 10 s 175 min. 22 s 352 min. 50 s 707 min. 47 s Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The figures for storage capacity assume that no camera memo lists, voice memos, or other camera system files are stored in the internal memory or on an SD memory card.118 Appendices 11 • Fewer images can be recorded on SD WORM cards. The figures for SD WORM cards are given below. Mode Image Size 128 MB 1 GB V5 ([Movie] and W [Text mode] excluded) l 4 : 3 F 25 198 l 4 : 3 N 43 338 j 3 : 2 F 29 229 e 4 : 3 F 51 399 c 4 : 3 F 79 614 b 4 : 3 F 124 956 a 4 : 3 F 147 1137 a 4 : 3 N 252 1944 z 4 : 3 F 412 3172 • The maximum recording time is the estimated total recording time. Movies may be up to 4 GB in size. The maximum length is 12 minutes for movies recorded at a [Movie Size] of [x 1280] and 29 minutes for movies recorded at [z 640] or [y 320]. • An SD/SDHC memory card with a Speed Class of 6 or better is recommended when recording movies with [x 1280] selected for [Movie Size] (GP.56). • The number of remaining shots displayed on the picture display may differ from the actual number of shots, depending on the subject. • Movie recording time and the maximum number of still pictures may vary depending on the capacity of the recording destination (internal memory or SD memory card), shooting conditions, and the type and manufacturer of the SD memory card. • Choose image size according to how the picture will be used: Image Size Description l 4 : 3 F/l 4 : 3 N/ j 3 : 2 F • For creating large prints. • For downloading to a computer for trimming and other processes. e 4 : 3 F/c 4 : 3 F • For creating prints. b 4 : 3 F/a 4 : 3 F/ a 4 : 3 N • For shooting a large number of pictures. z 4 : 3 F • For shooting a large number of pictures. • For attaching to e-mail. • For posting on a website.119 11 Appendices Defaults Settings/Functions Whose Defaults Are Restored When the Camera Is Turned Off Turning the camera off may reset some function settings to their defaults. The table below indicates whether or not the function is reset to its default when the camera is turned off. {: setting is saved ×: setting is reset Function Default Settings Shooting Density { Normal Size (Text Mode) { l 4 : 3 Movie Size { x 1280 Picture Quality/Size { l 4 : 3 N Picture Quality/Size (Skew Correction) { a 4 : 3 F Focus { Multi AF Focus (Firefighting) { Snap Exposure Metering { Multi Continuous Mode × Off Image Settings { Standard Auto Bracket { Off Time Exposure { Off Interval Shooting × 0 Sec. Camera Shake Correction { Off Date Imprint { Off Exposure Compensation { 0.0 White Balance { Auto ISO Setting { Auto Edit Detection { Off Macro { Macro Off Flash { Flash Off Self-Timer × Off Playback Volume Adjustment { — Setup LCD Brightness { — Reg. My Settings { — Stepped Zoom { Off ADJ Button Setting 1 { Exposure Comp. ADJ Button Setting 2 { White Balance ADJ Button Setting 3 { ISO ADJ Button Setting 4 { Quality120 Appendices 11 {: setting is saved ×: setting is reset Function Default Settings Setup AF Auxiliary Light { On Operation Sounds { All Volume Settings { ??? (Medium) LCD Confirmation Time { 0.5 seconds Auto Power Off { 5 minutes Monitor Auto off Delay { Off LCD Auto Dim { On Digital Zoom Image { Normal Level Setting { Display Grid Guide Display Options { Shooting Info. Display Frame { Off Auto Rotate { On Card Sequence No. { Off Date Settings { — Language/N { ( * 1) Video Out Mode { ( * 1) CALS Pic Quality { a 4 : 3 N Start Date/Time { On Choose/Change Password { — Password Protection { Off Password Validity Period { Off Power Button Hold Options { Off Camera Memo Camera Memo Mode { Mode1 Memo Skip { Item 2 Mark Memo Added to Photos { Off Memo Warning { Off Display Memo at Startup { Off Memo Increment { Off Camera Memo Imprint { Off Camera Memo 1 Auto Delete { Off Barcode Type { Auto Barcode Mode { Mode1 Scan Time { 3 seconds ( * 1) The default setting varies depending on where you purchased the camera.121 11 Appendices Using a Wide Conversion Lens A wide conversion lens (DW-5) enables shooting at a lens magnification of 0.8 times (equivalent to a 35 mm camera’s 22 mm zoom in wide-angle). Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • When the wide conversion lens is attached, set the zoom position to the wideangle end. • When the wide conversion lens is attached, even if you use the internal or external flash, the area around the subject is not illuminated sufficiently so the picture will be partly underexposed. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- For cleaning and storage, see the documentation that came with your wide conversion lens. Optional Filters Commercially-available filters with a diameter of 37 mm can be mounted on the lens to protect it from damage and condensation.122 Appendices 11 Using the External Flash You can attach an external flash and other accessories (available in stores) to the accessory shoe. You can only use an external flash equipped with both of the following functions. • Slave flash function (flash is triggered in response to the firing of another flash) • Pre-flash support function (flash is synchronized with the second flash instead of the pre-flash) Caution --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • The accessory shoe conforms to JIS B7101. • You cannot use an external flash with no spring or lock mechanism. • You cannot use an external flash for which synchronization with the pre-flash cannot be cancelled. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The accessory shoe does not support a synchronizer contact.123 11 Appendices Using Your Camera Abroad Battery Charger (Model BJ-6) The battery charger can be used in regions with a current of 100–240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz. If you are going to travel to a country that uses a different shaped wall outlet/plug, please consult your travel agent on a plug adapter suitable for wall outlets in your country of destination. Do not use electrical transformers. It may damage the camera. Warranty This product was manufactured for use in the country in which it was purchased. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the camera was purchased. Should the product fail or malfunction while you are abroad, the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing the expenditure incurred therefore. Playback on Television in Other Regions Playback is possible on televisions (or monitors) equipped with a video input terminal. Please use the AV cable provided. This camera is compatible with both NTSC and PAL television formats. Set the video format on the camera to match that of the television you are using. When you go abroad, set your camera to the local video format.124 Appendices 11 Cautions on Use Waterproofing • This camera conforms to the specifications for JIS/IEC waterproof grade 8 and JIS/IEC dustproof grade 6 (IP68). • After shooting in the rain or cleaning in water, water may seep through the eyepiece of the lens segment and the tripod screw holes on the underside. This is not a problem because these sections are of double structure. • The internal mechanisms of the camera are neither waterproof nor dustproof. • Should water enter the inside of the camera, remove the batteries immediately and contact the Ricoh Repair Center. Cautions on Use • When opening and closing the battery/card cover or terminal cover, take care to prevent any water, sand, mud, dust, or other foreign matter that may have adhered to the camera from entering the interior of device. If possible, avoid opening or closing the camera at the beach, near the sea, or in sandy soil to prevent seawater or sand from getting inside. • Open and close the battery/card cover or terminal cover with your bare hands. Do not wear gloves, as any sand, dust, or other foreign matter that may have adhered to the gloves may get inside the camera. Remove any water, sand, mud, dust, or other foreign matter that may have adhered to the camera and open and close the covers in a place where it will not be exposed to dirt. • Water droplets may get inside when the cover is opened. Wipe dry before using. • Because of its waterproof structure, the mode dial may be hard to turn when it has not been operated for a long time. If this occurs, operate the dial several times to restore it to the initial state. • On a sandy beach or in a dusty place such as a construction site, pay sufficient attention to prevent sand or dust from adhering to the camera. • Do not leave the camera in places where there are extremes of temperature or humidity, such as in a closed car, at the seashore, or in a bathroom. • Do not force the battery/card cover or terminal cover. • Do not lift the camera by the battery/card cover or terminal cover. • If any foreign object (metal, water, liquid) gets inside the camera, stop using the camera immediately. Turn the power off, remove the battery and memory card, and consult your nearest dealer or Ricoh Repair Center. • In cold climates, if the camera has water droplets adhering to its surface, they may freeze. Using the camera with ice on it may cause it to fail. Do not leave the camera with water adhering to it. • This product was manufactured for use in the country in which it was purchased. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the camera was purchased.125 11 Appendices • Should the product fail or malfunction while you are abroad, the manufacturer assumes no responsibility for servicing the product locally or bearing the expenditure incurred therefore. • Be sure not to drop or apply any sudden force to the camera. • While you are carrying the camera, be careful not to hit it against other objects. Take special care to not hit the lens and picture display. • Firing the flash consecutively may heat the firing unit. Do not fire it consecutively more than necessary. • Do not touch the flash and keep foreign objects away from the firing unit. Doing so can cause burns and fires. • Do not fire the flash near eyes. It could cause visual impairment (particularly for infants). • Do not fire the flash near the driver of a vehicle to avoid causing accidents. • The battery may become hot after extended use. Touching the battery immediately after use could result in burns to your fingers. • If the picture display or panel is exposed to sunlight, they may become washed out and images may become hard to view. • The picture display and panel may contain some pixels that do not remain lit up continually in part or at all. Also, the brightness may become uneven because of the characteristics of LCDs. These are not failures. • Do not forcefully press the surface of the picture display. • In an environment where the temperature changes suddenly, condensation may occur in the camera, resulting in troubles such as fogging of the glass surface or malfunctions of the camera. If this occurs, place the camera in a bag to slow the temperature change as much as possible. Take it out of the bag after the temperature difference from the atmosphere has decreased to a fairly small amount. If condensation occurs, remove the battery and memory card, and wait until the moisture has dried before using the camera. • To avoid damaging the connectors, do not put any objects into the camera’s microphone or speaker holes. • Before taking any important pictures (such as at weddings, on trips abroad, etc.), test the camera to check operation and ensure proper functioning. We recommend that you keep this manual and spare battery on hand. Conditions in which condensation may easily occur: ----------------------- • When the camera is moved to an environment where the temperature differs greatly. • In humid places. • In a room immediately after being heated, or when the camera is exposed directly to cooled air from an air-conditioner or another similar appliance.126 Appendices 11 Care and Storage Care • Please note that if fingerprints, dirt, etc. get onto the lens, picture quality will suffer. • Any dust or dirt on the lens should be gently removed either with a blower (available from third-party suppliers) or a soft cloth, paying particular attention to the area around the lens barrel. Do not touch the lens directly with your fingers. • If the camera is dirty or after use at the beach, take the following steps: Make sure the battery/card cover and terminal cover are securely closed. Fill a wash-basin or bowl with tap water and use the water to remove any dirt, sand or salt from the camera, and then wipe the camera dry with a soft, dry cloth. • If the rubber packing is dirty, wipe it clean with a soft, dry cloth. If the rubber packing has anything sticking to it or it is cracked or damaged, its waterproofing function may be compromised, resulting in leakage. If dirt cannot be removed or the packing is damaged, request your nearest dealer or Ricoh Repair Center to replace the packing. • In the unlikely event that your camera fails to work properly, please consult your Ricoh Repair Center. • There are high voltage circuits in this camera. As this is dangerous, do not dismantle this camera under any circumstances. • Do not get volatile substances, such as thinner, benzene, or pesticides on your camera. This may cause a change in quality, paint to peel, etc. • As the surface of the picture display is easily scratched, do not rub hard objects against it. • Clean the surface of the picture display by wiping gently with a soft cloth containing a small amount of display cleaner (that does not contain organic solvents) sold in stores. Use and Storage • Please avoid using or storing your camera in the following kinds of places, as this may damage the camera. - In high heat and humidity, or where there is severe change in temperature or humidity. - Places with a lot of dust, dirt or sand. - Places with severe vibration. - Places where it is in direct contact with vinyl or rubber products or chemicals, including mothballs or other insect repellent, for long periods of time. - Places with strong magnetic fields (near a monitor, transformer, magnet, etc.). • To keep the camera free from dust and other foreign matter, store it in a lint-free case. Do not place it directly in a pocket or other location where it will be exposed to dirt or lint. • Remove the battery if you are not going to use the camera for a long period of time.127 11 Appendices Replacing the rubber packing To maintain the waterproof ability, replace the rubber packing every two years, regardless of whether it has gotten dirty. If you use the camera frequently in a wet, sandy, or dusty environment, we recommend replacing the packing every year. The replacement will be performed by the Ricoh Repair Center on a chargeable basis. Precautions regarding care of your camera 1. Be sure to turn the power off. 2. Remove the batteries before caring for your camera.128 Appendices 11 Warranty and Servicing 1. This product is backed by a limited warranty. During the warranty period mentioned in the Warranty supplied with your camera, any defective parts will be repaired free of charge. In the event of a camera malfunction, contact the dealer from which you purchased the camera or your nearest Ricoh Repair Center. Please note that you will be not be reimbursed for the cost of bringing the camera to the Ricoh Repair Center. 2. This warranty does not cover any damage resulting from: 1 failure to follow the instructions in the instruction manual; 2 repair, modification or overhaul not conducted by an authorized service center listed in the instruction manual; 3 fire, natural disaster, act of God, lightning, abnormal voltage, etc.; 4 improper storage (noted in the “Camera User Guide”), leaking of battery and other fluids, mold, or otherwise insufficient care of the camera. 5 dropping the camera or exposing it to water, mud, sand, etc. with the battery/card cover or terminal cover open. 3. After the warranty period has passed, you will be liable for all repair fees, including those incurred at an authorized service center. 4. You will be liable for all repair fees, even within the warranty period, if the warranty card is not attached or if the distributor's name or the purchase date have been changed or are not indicated on the card. 5. Expenses for overhaul and thorough inspection by special request of the customer will be charged to the customer, whether or not they are incurred during the warranty period. 6. This warranty only applies to the camera and not to the accessories, such as the case and strap, nor does it apply to the battery and other consumables provided. 7. Any consequential damages arising from failure of the camera, such as expenses incurred in taking pictures or loss of expected profit, will not be reimbursed whether they occur during the warranty period or not. 8. The warranty is only valid in the country in which the camera was purchased. * The above provisions refer to repairs offered free of charge, and do not limit your legal rights. * The intention of the above provisions is also described in the warranty card provided with this camera. 9. Parts essential to the servicing of the camera (that is, components required to maintain the functions and quality of the camera) will be available for a period of five years after the camera is discontinued. 10. Please note that if the camera is seriously damaged by flooding, submergence, infiltration of sand or mud, violent shocks or dropping, it may not be repairable, and restoration to its original condition may be impossible. Note ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- • Before sending the camera in for repair, check the battery and read the instruction manual again to ensure proper operation. • Some repairs require a significant amount of time to be completed. • When sending the camera to a service center, please include a note which describes the defective part and the problem as precisely as possible. • Remove all accessories not related to the problem before sending the camera to the service center. • This warranty does not apply to data stored on an SD memory card or in internal memory.129 11 Appendices INFORMATION TO THE USER USA FCC Part 15 Class B This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. (FCC 15.105B) Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. (FCC 15.21) Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used for connections to host computer in order to comply with FCC emission limits. (FCC 15.27) An AC adapter with a ferrite core must be used for RF interference suppression. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT Product Name: DIGITAL CAMERA Model Number: G700 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell NJ, 07006 Tel.: 1-800-225-1899 Note to Users in Canada Note: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 Remarque Concernant les Utilisateurs au Canada Avertissement : Cet appareil numerique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.130 Index A Accessory Shoe ....................................... 14, 122 ADJ./MEMO Button .................................15, 46 ADJ Button Setting ..................................46, 77 Adobe Reader .................................................. 100 AE/AF Target Shift .............................................47 AF Auxiliary Light ......................................14, 77 Auto Bracket ................................................57, 61 Auto Focus/Flash Lamp ................ 15, 28, 31 Auto Power Off...........................................25, 77 Auto Rotate ..........................................................78 Auto Shooting Mode .............................13, 27 AV Cable .........................................................12, 74 AV Output Terminal .................................15, 74 B Barcode Mode ....................................................90 Barcode Type .......................................................90 Battery .............................................................22, 23 Battery/Card Cover ..................................15, 23 Battery Charger ..........................................12, 22 C CALS Mode ...................................................13, 33 CALS Pic Quality ................................................80 Camera Memo ....................................................53 Camera Memo 1 Auto Delete ...................89 Camera Memo Imprint .................................89 Camera Memo Menu .....................................87 Camera Memo Mode .....................................88 Camera Shake .....................................................29 Camera Shake Correction............................58 Card Sequence No. ..........................................79 CD-ROM..........................................................12, 96 Choose/Change Password .................80, 83 Continuous Mode ............................................57 Contrast Correction .................................66, 70 Copy to Card from Internal Memory ....66 D Date Imprint ........................................................58 Date Settings ...............................................25, 79 Delete.......................................................................37 Delete Button ..............................................15, 37 Density ....................................................................56 Digital Zoom ................................................30, 82 Digital Zoom Image ........................ 30, 78, 82 Direct Print ............................................................91 DISP. Button ..................................................15, 40 Display Memo at Startup .............................89 DL-10 ................................................................96, 98 DPOF ................................................................66, 73 E EC1 .............................................................................99 Edit Detection .....................................................59 Enlarged view .....................................................36 Error Messages ................................................ 106 EX1 .......................................................................... 100 Exposure Compensation .....................58, 62 Exposure Metering ..........................................56 External Flash ................................................... 122 F Firefighting ...........................................................48 Flash .......................................................... 14, 15, 31 Focus ................................................................56, 60 Format [Card] ......................................................76 Format [Internal Memory] ...........................76 G Grid Guide Display ...........................................40 Grid Guide Display Options........................78 H High Sens...............................................................48 Histogram Display ............................................44 I Image Settings ...................................................57 Internal Memory ............................................ 117 Interval Shooting ..............................................58 ISO Setting ....................................................59, 64 L Language/N ........................................25, 79 LCD Auto Dim .....................................................77 LCD Brightness ...................................................76 LCD Confirmation Time ................................77 Lens ...........................................................................14 Level Indicator ....................................................42 Level Setting ................................................42, 78 List Editor ...............................................................98 M Macro ...............................................................15, 30 Manual Focus (MF)...........................................60 Mark Memo Added to Photos ..................88 ME1 ............................................................................98 MediaBrowser .....................................................98131 Memo Increment..............................................89 Memo Skip ............................................................88 Memo Warning ..................................................88 MENU/OK Button.............. 15, 55, 65, 75, 87 Microphone .........................................................14 Mode Dial ......................................................13, 14 Monitor Auto off Delay .................................77 Movie ...............................................................48, 51 Movie Size .............................................................56 My Settings Mode (MY) ........................13, 33 N Neck strap .............................................................12 O Operation Sounds ............................................77 Optional Filter .................................................. 121 P Password Protection ....................... 25, 80, 85 Password Validity Period ...............................80 PictBridge ..............................................................91 Picture Display ............................................15, 16 Picture Quality/Size .........................................56 Playback Button ......................... 15, 25, 34, 65 Playback Menu ...................................................65 Playback Mode ...................................................25 POWER Button ....................................................14 Power Button Hold Options.......................80 Protect .............................................................66, 72 R Rechargeable Battery .....................................22 Recover File ..........................................................67 Reg. My Settings ........................................76, 81 Remove Memo Marking ..............................88 Report Print ..........................................................95 Resize .......................................................................66 Restore Defaults ................................................59 S Scan Time ..............................................................90 Scene Mode (SCENE) ..............................13, 48 SDHC card .............................................................20 SD Memory Card ............................ 20, 23, 117 SD WORM card ...................................................20 Self-timer .......................................................15, 32 Setup Menu .........................................................75 Shooting Info. Display Frame ....................78 Shooting Menu ..................................................55 Shutter Release Button .........................14, 27 Size .............................................................................56 Skew Correction ........................................66, 71 Skew Correct Mode .................................48, 50 Slide Show ............................................................66 Speaker ...................................................................14 Start Date/Time .................................................80 Stepped Zoom ...................................................76 Strap Eyelet ...........................................................14 Synchro-Monitor Mode ................................40 T Terminal Cover ...................................................15 Text Mode .............................................................48 Thumbnail View .................................................34 Time Exposure ....................................................57 Trim ...................................................................66, 68 Tripod Screw Hole ............................................15 TV playback ..........................................................74 U USB Cable .................................12, 91, 102, 104 USB Terminal ........................................................15 V Video Out Mode ................................................79 Volume Settings ................................................77 W White Balance .............................................59, 63 White Balance Bracket (WB-BKT) ............61 Wide Conversion Lens ........................ 12, 121 Z Zoom ........................................................................29 Zoom Macro ........................................................48Telephone Support Numbers in Europe UK (from within the UK) 0203 239 6327 (from outside the UK) +44 203 239 6327 Deutschland (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 France (à partir de la France) 0800 88 18 70 (en dehors de la France) +33 1 60 60 19 94 Italia (dall'Italia) 02 4004 7319 (dall'estero) +39 02 4004 7319 España (desde España) 900984912 (desde fuera de España) +49 6331 268 440 http://www.service.ricohpmmc.com/*L757 2971A* From environmental friendliness to environmental conservation and to environmental management Ricoh is aggressively promoting environmentfriendly activities and also environment conservation activities to solve the great subject of management as one of the citizens on our precious earth. To reduce the environmental loads of digital cameras, Ricoh is also trying to solve the great subjects of “Saving energy by reducing power consumption” and “Reducing environment-affecting chemical substances contained in products”. If a problem arises First of all, see “Troubleshooting” (GP.106) in this manual. If the issues still persist, please contact a Ricoh office. Ricoh Offices RICOH COMPANY, LTD. 3-2-3, Shin-Yokohama Kouhoku-ku, Yokohama City, Kanagawa 222-8530, JAPAN http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/ RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A. 1-800-22RICOH http://www.ricoh-usa.com/ RICOH INTERNATIONAL B.V. (EPMMC) Oberrather Straße 6, D-40472 Düsseldorf, GERMANY (innerhalb Deutschlands) 06331 268 438 (außerhalb Deutschlands) +49 6331 268 438 http://www.ricoh.com/r_dc/ RICOH ASIA PACIFIC OPERATIONS LIMITED 21/F, One Kowloon, 1 Wang Yuen Street, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong About MediaBrowser North America (U.S.) (Toll Free) +1-800-458-4029 Europe UK, Germany, France and Spain: (Toll Free) +800-1532-4865 Other Countries: +44-1489-564-764 Asia +63-2-438-0090 China +86-21-5385-3786 Business hours: 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ricoh Building, 8-13-1, Ginza, Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-8222, Japan 2010 September EN USA GB GB AE AE Printed in Vietnam Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. 1 Pre-operation Confirmation 2 Login and Logout 3 Displaying Device Information 4 Downloading and Installing Packages 5 Appendix User's GuideHow to Read This Manual Symbols The following set of symbols is used in this manual. Indicates a situation that may result in property damage or malfunction if instructions are not followed. Be sure to read the instructions. Indicates information or preparations required prior to operating. Indicates a function's limitations. Indicates supplementary relevant information. Indicates where you can find further relevant information. [ ] Indicates the names of keys that appear on the computer screen. Terminology The following is an explanation of the terminology used in this manual: Term Explanation Device A "device" is a printer or multifunction machine connected to the network or a printer connected to a computer via USB. Though the term generally includes routers, hubs, and other network devices, "device" in this manual is limited to printers and multifunction machines. Domain name Name of the domain with which computers with Remote Communication Gate S installed are affiliated. Entry is required if the Domain name entry field appears on the login screen. Ask the administrator for detailed information. 1Term Explanation Download In general, download is a process of receiving and saving a copy of programs or files in a computer via a network. In Remote Communication Gate S, it refers to the process of a user computer receiving and saving packages stored on the Remote Communication Gate S server. Filter On the device list screens, you can use filters to display only the printers or logs that meet specified conditions. Thus, you can sort the devices to be displayed by using the filtering functions. The filters created by the administrator and users and the filters created by a user can be edited by that user. Group The administrator creates groups in order to classify devices. Groups are displayed on the [Directory] tab and clicking them displays the device used in the group. Login Connection to Remote Communication Gate S on the network, noticing a state in which operations are enabled. Logout Disconnection from Remote Communication Gate S. Menu bar Grouping of operations that can be executed on displayed screens. Items are selected on the drop-down menu. Package (Installation Package) A package is an ".exe" file that contains all of the necessary files and settings to install a device driver. Packages are used to distribute device drivers by the administrator via Remote Communication Gate S. You can download it from the Remote Communication Gate S and all content registered in a package is installed by running the ".exe" file. Screens The explanations in this manual use screen images from Windows Vista and Internet Explorer 7.0. If you use another version of Windows, screen images may differ. However, you can perform the same steps. 2Guides for This Solution The following guides are available for Remote Communication Gate S: Remote Communication Gate S User's Guide (this manual, HTML/PDF) This guide is intended for the end user. It explains how to display devices, search for devices, and install packages by logging in Remote Communication Gate S. Remote Communication Gate S Installation Guide (HTML/PDF) This guide is intended for the administrator and explains the installation, uninstallation, and initial setup procedures for Remote Communication Gate S. Remote Communication Gate S Administrator Operations Guide (HTML/PDF) This guide is intended for the administrator. It explains how to utilize Remote Communication Gate S to configure and manage settings and operations: for example, registration and monitoring of devices, the creation of installation packages, or retrieval of device logs. • Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader is required to view the PDF documentation. • You can view the HTML documentation using a Web browser. We recommend Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 SP2 or a later version. • A simplified version of the HTML documentation is available for earlier or non-recommended browsers. • If JavaScript is disabled or unavailable in your browser, you will not be able to search or use certain buttons in the HTML documentation. • If you are using an earlier or non-recommended browser and the simplified version of the documentation does not appear automatically, replace \int\index_book.htm with \unv \index_book.htm in your browser's address bar. 3Important • TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW: • THE SUPPLIER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE RESULT OF OPERATION OF THIS SOFTWARE OR THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT. • THE SUPPLIER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES OR LOSS OF ANY DOCUMENT OR DATA PRODUCED BY USING THIS SOFTWARE. • THE SUPPLIER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) CAUSED BY FAILURE OF THIS SOFTWARE OR LOSS OF DOCUMENTS OR DATA, NOR FOR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, IF THE SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. • Some illustrations or explanations in this guide may differ from your product due to improvement or change in the product. • The contents of this document are subject to change without notice. • No part of this document may be duplicated, replicated, reproduced in any form, modified or quoted without prior consent of the supplier. • It is possible that any document or data stored in the computer will be damaged or lost by user error during operation or software error. Be sure to back up all important data beforehand. Important documents and data should always be copied or backed up. Documents and data can be lost because of malfunction or human error. Furthermore, the customer is responsible for protection measures against computer viruses, worms, and other harmful software. • Do not remove or insert any disk while operating this software. 4Trademarks Adobe ® , Adobe Acrobat ® , Acrobat Reader ® and Flash ® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft ® , Windows ® , Windows Server ® , Windows Vista ® , and Internet Explorer ® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Pentium® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows: • The product names of Windows 2000 are as follows: Microsoft ® Windows ® 2000 Professional Microsoft ® Windows ® 2000 Server Microsoft ® Windows ® 2000 Advanced Server • The product names of Windows XP are as follows: Microsoft ® Windows ® XP Home Edition Microsoft ® Windows ® XP Professional • The product names of Windows Vista are as follows: Microsoft ® Windows Vista ® Ultimate Microsoft ® Windows Vista ® Enterprise Microsoft ® Windows Vista ® Business Microsoft ® Windows Vista ® Home Premium Microsoft ® Windows Vista ® Home Basic • The product names of Windows 7 are as follows: Microsoft ® Windows ® 7 Home Premium Microsoft ® Windows ® 7 Professional Microsoft ® Windows ® 7 Ultimate • The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows: Microsoft ® Windows Server ® 2003 Standard Edition Microsoft ® Windows Server ® 2003 Enterprise Edition • The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows: Microsoft ® Windows Server ® 2003 R2 Standard Edition 5Microsoft ® Windows Server ® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition • The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows: Microsoft ® Windows Server ® 2008 Standard Microsoft ® Windows Server ® 2008 Enterprise • The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows: Microsoft ® Windows Server ® 2008 R2 Standard Microsoft ® Windows Server ® 2008 R2 Enterprise 6TABLE OF CONTENTS How to Read This Manual.................................................................................................................................1 Symbols...........................................................................................................................................................1 Terminology....................................................................................................................................................1 Screens............................................................................................................................................................2 Guides for This Solution.....................................................................................................................................3 Important.............................................................................................................................................................4 Trademarks..........................................................................................................................................................5 1. Pre-operation Confirmation What You Can Do with Remote Communication Gate S................................................................................9 System Requirements.......................................................................................................................................10 Activating Browser JavaScript....................................................................................................................11 2. Login and Logout Login..................................................................................................................................................................13 Logout................................................................................................................................................................15 3. Displaying Device Information Layout of the Device List Screen......................................................................................................................17 Device List Menu Functions.........................................................................................................................18 Features of Status Icon on the Device List..................................................................................................20 Layout of Site Map......................................................................................................................................23 Changing the Login Password....................................................................................................................24 Displaying the Device List................................................................................................................................25 Displaying the Device List by Specifying Search Conditions...................................................................25 Displaying the Device List by Using Filters.................................................................................................28 Sorting the Display Order of the Device List..............................................................................................33 Displaying Maps..............................................................................................................................................35 Displaying the Map from the Device List....................................................................................................35 Displaying the Simplified Map from the Printer Properties.......................................................................38 Displaying Device Information........................................................................................................................41 Displaying Device Information from Menu Bar.........................................................................................41 Displaying Device Information from the Properties Icon...........................................................................41 Content of the Device Information Screen.................................................................................................42 4. Downloading and Installing Packages What Are Packages?.......................................................................................................................................49 7Downloading Packages..................................................................................................................................50 Downloading Packages from the Package List.........................................................................................50 Downloading Packages from the Map......................................................................................................52 Downloading Packages with a URL Sent by E-mail..................................................................................52 Opening Packages and Installing Drivers......................................................................................................54 5. Appendix About Help.......................................................................................................................................................55 If Your Computer is Running Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later/Vista/7..........................................56 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................57 INDEX.............................................................................................................................................................59 81. Pre-operation Confirmation This chapter explains Remote Communication Gate S and system requirements for user's computers to operate Remote Communication Gate S. What You Can Do with Remote Communication Gate S Remote Communication Gate S is a Web-based application that provides device management solutions. Logging in from a computer to the Remote Communication Gate S server using a Web browser allows you to perform the following: • Display the device list using search conditions • Display the device map with device status and its location • Display the detailed information for devices • Download and Install drivers using a package created by the administrator • For details about displaying the device list and searching for devices, see p.25 "Displaying the Device List". • For details about displaying the Map, see p.35 "Displaying Maps". • For details about displaying detailed device information, see p.41 "Displaying Device Information". • For details about downloading and installing drivers using packages, see p.50 "Downloading Packages" and p.54 "Opening Packages and Installing Drivers". 9 1System Requirements To operate Remote Communication Gate S, the system must meet the following requirements. Item Requirements Hardware • CPU: Pentium compatible 500 MHz or higher • Memory: 128 MB or higher • Minimum available hard disk space: same as recommended minimum for operating system Operating System • Windows 2000 Professional/Server/Advanced Server (i386): Service Pack 4 or later • Windows XP Home Edition/Professional: Service Pack 2 or later • Windows Vista Ultimate/Enterprise/Business/Home Premium/ Home Basic • Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate • Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition: Service Pack 2 or later • Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition/Enterprise Edition: Service Pack 2 or later • Windows Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise • Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard/Enterprise Supported Language English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch • Remote Communication Gate S supports only these six languages. If the display language is not one of these languages, Remote Communication Gate S is displayed in English. The priority of the display language can be changed in the Language preference settings in Internet Explorer. 1. Pre-operation Confirmation 10 1Item Requirements Web Browser • Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 1 or later • Internet Explorer 7.0 • Internet Explorer 8.0 • JavaScript must be activated. • Adobe Flash Player 9.0 or later must be installed. • For details about the method for activating JavaScript, see p.11 "Activating Browser JavaScript". Network TCP/IP must be installed and properly configured. Screen Resolution 1024 x 768 or higher Activating Browser JavaScript To access and view Remote Communication Gate S, it is necessary to activate JavaScript on the Web browser. 1. Select [Internet Options...] on the Internet Explorer [Tools] menu. 2. Click the [Security] tab. 3. Click [Custom Level...]. 4. Under [Scripting] select [Enable] in [Active scripting]. 5. Click [OK] to close the [Security Settings] dialog box. 6. Click [OK] to close the [Internet Options] dialog box. System Requirements 11 11. Pre-operation Confirmation 12 12. Login and Logout This chapter explains the procedures for logging in and out of the Remote Communication Gate S server. Login To log in to the Remote Communication Gate S server, the following information is required and must be obtained from the administrator in advance: • URL of the Remote Communication Gate S server • User name • Password • Domain name (If required) • If you are using Windows Server 2003 or 2008, settings must be made in advance. Contact the administrator. • When using Remote Communication Gate S, do not use your browser's [Back] button or other browser functions. Use only the navigation controls on the content pages. • If you want to switch users, click the [Logout] button, and then log in again as a different user. Do not use your browser's [Back] button to redisplay the login screen. 1. Start Internet Explorer. 2. Enter the following URL in the address bar, and then press the [Enter] key on the keyboard. Condition URL Without SSL encryption http://{host name}:{port number}/mgmt or http://{IP address}:{port number}/mgmt With SSL encryption https://{host name}:{port number}/mgmt or https://{IP address}:{port number}/mgmt • {host name}: name of the Remote Communication Gate S server • {IP address}: IP address of the Remote Communication Gate S server • {port number}: port number specified when Remote Communication Gate S was installed 13 23. If the [Trial Version] screen appears, click [OK]. • The [Trial Version] screen will only appear if Remote Communication Gate S has not been activated. For details, contact the administrator. 4. Enter your user name in the [User name:] box on the login screen. 5. Enter your password in the [Password:] box. • For details about changing your password, see p.24 "Changing the Login Password". 6. Enter domain name if the [Domain name:] box is displayed. 7. Click [Login]. • The login screen reappears if no operation is performed for more than 30 minutes after logging in to the Remote Communication Gate S server. Log in again if necessary. 2. Login and Logout 14 2Logout Use the following procedure for logging out from Remote Communication Gate S. 1. Click [Logout] on the screen. • Do not use the [Close] button to shut down the system. Logout 15 22. Login and Logout 16 23. Displaying Device Information This chapter explains the device list screen which is displayed on the top page when you log in Remote Communication Gate S. Layout of the Device List Screen The screen layout of the device list is as follows: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 BXM001S 1. Search button Searches for a specific device using search conditions. When searching for a device, click this button, and then enter the conditions for your search. • For details about searching for devices using Search button, see p.25 "Displaying the Device List by Specifying Search Conditions". 2. Group display Displays the group name of the displayed device list. 3. [Directory] tab Displays registered filters and groups. 4. Filter Refines the device list using search conditions. When a filter is selected, the corresponding devices are displayed in the device list display area. Filters can be added by the administrator, and you can also create your own filters. Filters that you create are available only to you. 17 3• For details about searching for devices using filters, see p.28 "Displaying the Device List by Using Filters". 5. Group list Displays the group list if the device is managed as a group. 6. Menu bar Displays the menu that is available on the device list screen. 7. [Quick Links] area Displays screen links that are used frequently or related to the present screen. For details about the selected links, contact the administrator. 8. Site Map button Displays all operation links that are available in Remote Communication Gate S. • For details about Site Map, see p.23 "Layout of Site Map". 9. Help button Displays the Help screen. • For details about Help, see p.55 "About Help". 10. [Logout] button Logs out from the Remote Communication Gate S server. • For details about logout, see p.15 "Logout". 11. Login user name Displays the login user name. 12. Refresh button Refreshes the device list screen and displays the latest device information. 13. Device list display area Displays the list of devices. Device List Menu Functions Various functions available in the [Directory] tab are also accessible from the menu bar. The device list menu provides the following functions: 3. Displaying Device Information 18 3[Edit] menu Item Allows you to Select All Select all found devices in the list. Clear All Deselect all devices selected in the list. [Printer] menu Item Allows you to Refresh Selected Device Connect to the selected devices and collect details about their current device status. The device list screen is not updated when you select this item. To display the device list screen with the most recent device status information, select [Refresh Selected Device] on the menu, and then click the Refresh button in the right-upper area on the screen. Printer Properties... Display details of a selected device. • For details about the [Printer Properties...] menu, see p.41 "Displaying Device Information". [Filter] menu Item Allows you to Printers with Errors Display a list of devices with errors on the [Printers with Errors] screen. • For details about searching devices with errors, see p.28 "Displaying a list of devices with errors". No Response Devices Display a list of devices that have not responded to polling for a specified number of days. No Filters Display a list of all found devices. Filter Settings... Register and edit filters that you created. [View] menu Item Allows you to Display Directory Display the [Directory] tab. Layout of the Device List Screen 19 3Item Allows you to Hide Directory Hide the [Directory] tab. List Display a list of devices. Map Display a floor map of grouped devices with device icons. • For details about the Map function, see p.35 "Displaying Maps". Search Devices... Display the [Search] screen. • For details about searching for devices, see p.25 "Displaying the Device List by Specifying Search Conditions". [Sort by] menu Item Allows you to Selected Printers Sort the list of found devices alphabetically according to selected printers. Device Display Name Sort the list of found devices alphabetically according to model names. IP Address Sort the list of found devices according to their IP addresses. System Sort the list of found devices according to common system icons. Printer Sort the list of found devices according to printer status icons. MAC Address Sort the list of found devices according to their MAC addresses. Registered Group Sort the list of found devices according to the groups that the devices are registered to. Features of Status Icon on the Device List Status icons appear on the device list screen and inform the visual notice with icons. 3. Displaying Device Information 20 31 2 BXM002S 1. System status icon • There are several types of system status icon. For the details about each icon, see p.21 "System status icons". 2. Printer status icon • There are several types of printer status icon. For details about the each icon, see p.22 "Printer status icons". The following table explains the various icons displayed in the device list: System status icons Status icon Explanation There was no response from the printer. A service call is required. The printer has run out of paper, toner, or other supplies. An access violation has occurred. An excessive number of attempts have been made to access this device. Layout of the Device List Screen 21 3Printer status icons Status icon Explanation There was no response from the printer. The printer has run out of toner/ink. A paper jam has occurred. The printer has run out of paper. A cover is open. The printer has run out of staples. The punch waste receptacle is full. The waste toner receptacle is full. A paper jam has occurred inside the Auto Document Feeder (ADF). A communication error has occurred. The paper output tray is full. An output tray is full. An unavailable function was attempted. An unknown error has occurred. The printer is currently offline. The printer is warming up. The printer's toner/ink is about to run out. The printer's paper is about to run out. Warning concerning a failed operation or unsupported function. 3. Displaying Device Information 22 3Status icon Explanation The printer is in Power Save Mode. The printer is busy processing and not ready to perform a new operation. The printer is busy printing a job. The printer is ready to perform a new print job. Layout of Site Map The screen layout of the Site Map is as follows: 1 2 3 4 5 BXM005S 1. All Printers Displays a list of devices connected to Remote Communication Gate S. • For details about device list, see p.17 "Layout of the Device List Screen". 2. Printers with Errors Displays a list of devices with system errors. • For details about Printer with Errors, see p.28 "Displaying a list of devices with errors". 3. [Back] button Returns to the previous page. 4. User Account Settings Displays [User Information] screen, and you can change the password for login. • For details about User Account Settings, see p.24 "Changing the Login Password". Layout of the Device List Screen 23 35. Filter Settings Displays the [Filter Settings] screen, and you can edit or delete registered filters. • For details about Filter Settings, see p.31 "Editing filters", and p.33 "Deleting filters". Changing the Login Password The following procedure allows you to change your login password. Change your password for security reason. 1. On the device list screen, click the Site Map button in the upper-right area. 2. Click [User Account Settings]. 3. Enter the new password. 4. Click [OK]. 3. Displaying Device Information 24 3Displaying the Device List Displaying the device list allows you to check the status and details of the devices connected to the Remote Communication Gate S server. Network-connected devices are displayed in lists, which are sorted according by one of the two methods below: • Specified search conditions • Use of filters Displaying the Device List by Specifying Search Conditions Use the following procedure to display a list of devices according to advanced search conditions. 1. On the device list screen, click the Search button. Displaying the Device List 25 32. Select items as search conditions from the [Search item:] list. Search condition Explanation Device Display Name Displays devices according to their names on the MFP screen. Printer model Displays devices according to their printer models. IP address Displays devices according to their IP addresses. System error Displays devices according to common system errors such as no response and failure due to excessive access attempts. Printer status Displays devices according to their print status. MAC address Displays devices according to the physical (MAC) address that all network-capable devices feature. Device name Displays devices according to their device names. Host name Displays devices according to their host names. Comment Displays devices according to a comment filter. PPM Displays devices according to their print capacity (measured in pages per minute). B&W/Color Displays devices according to their Black and White/ Color printing capability. Scanner status Displays devices according to their scanner status. Fax status Displays devices according to their fax status. Copier status Displays devices according to their copier status. 3. Displaying Device Information 26 3Search condition Explanation NIB model Displays fail-over devices according to their NIB models. NIB version Displays fail-over systems according to their NIB versions. NetWare print server Displays devices according to their NetWare print server. Serial Number Displays devices according to their serial numbers. Asset number Displays devices in numerical order according to their number of asset utilities. User Properties 1 User Properties 2 User Properties 3 User Properties 4 User Properties 5 Displays devices according to their user properties (specified by the administrator). 3. Select an option configuration item from the [Option:] list. Condition Option When specifying a character string for the parameter: • include • Exact match When specifying a numeric value for the parameter: • same • above • below When specifying a numeric value (a range can be specified) for the parameter: • range • same • above • below When selecting the parameter from choices: • same Displaying the Device List 27 34. Enter the set value in the [Parameter:] box. For example, if [IP address] is specified in [Search item:], enter the IP address. • If you click [Clear Conditions], the search conditions return to their defaults. 5. Click [Search...]. The [Search Results] screen appears as a list. Displaying the Device List by Using Filters Use the following procedure to display the device list as corresponding to the filter conditions that are specified by the administrator and users. The filters that created by the administrator are displayed in the upper area of [Filter] menu. You cannot edit filters that were created by the administrator. Filters that you create for personal use from search conditions appear under the filters created by the administrator. You can edit and delete the filters that you create. Displaying a list of devices with errors Use the following procedure to display a list of devices with errors. 3. Displaying Device Information 28 31. On the device list screen, click [View by Filter] on the [Directory] tab. 2. Click [Printers with Errors]. • The filter can also be selected from [Filter] on the menu. Displaying a list of devices not responding Use the following procedure to display a list of devices that have not responded to polling for a specified number of days. 1. On the device list screen, click [View by Filter] on the [Directory] tab. Displaying the Device List 29 32. Click [No Response Devices]. The result appears as a list that you can sort by item. Displaying a list of devices using other filters Use the following procedure to display a list of devices according to search conditions that specified by the administrator and users. 1. On the device list screen, click [View by Filter] on the [Directory] tab. 2. Click the filter you want to use. The search result appears as a list. • The filter can also be selected from [Filter] on the menu. Registering search conditions as a filter Use the following procedure to register search conditions as a filter for your personal use. 1. On the device list screen, click the search button. 2. Select items as search conditions from the [Search item:] list. 3. Select an option configuration item from the [Option:] list. 4. Enter a value in the [Parameter:] box. For example, you selected [IP address] in [Search item:], enter the IP address you want to search for. 5. Click [Search...], and then click [Save as Filter]. 3. Displaying Device Information 30 36. On the [Filter Settings: Save as Filter] screen, enter [Filter name:] and [Comment:]. 7. In [Display location:], select where to have the filter displayed. 8. Click [OK]. 9. On the [Saved as Filter] screen, click [OK]. • You can register up to 20 filters. • The registered filters are displayed on the [Filter] menu, under the filters created by the administrator. Filter Settings menu functions The menu on the [Filter Settings] screen provides the following functions: [Edit] menu Item Allows you to Edit Edit the filter conditions. Delete Delete the registered filters. Editing filters Use the following procedure to edit a filter that you created. Displaying the Device List 31 31. On the device list screen, click the Site Map button in the upper-right area. 2. Click [Filter Settings]. 3. Select the filter you want to edit. 4. Click [Edit] on the [Filter] menu. 5. Change the [Filter name:] and [Comment:] as necessary. 6. In [Display location:], select where to have the filter displayed. 7. Click [OK]. 8. On the [Filter Settings] screen, click [Back]. 9. On the Site Map, click [Back]. The device list screen appears. • You can also access the filter editing function by clicking [Filter Settings] on the Site Map. 3. Displaying Device Information 32 3Deleting filters Use the following procedure to delete filters that you created. 1. On the device list screen, click the Site Map button in the upper-right area. 2. Click [Filter Settings]. 3. Click [Delete] on the [Filter] menu. 4. When a message confirming the deletion appears, click [OK]. Sorting the Display Order of the Device List Use the following procedure to sort the display order of the device list. Displaying the Device List 33 31. Click [Sort by] on the menu on the device list screen. 2. Click the item to be designated as the sort key. Devices will be sorted on the basis of the selected item. • To sort the list in ascending order, click the row name of the item in the displayed list. Clicking again sorts the list in descending order. 3. Displaying Device Information 34 3Displaying Maps The Map function displays a floor map of grouped devices using device icons that provide visual details about a device and its location. Each group has one map registered by the administrator. If no map is registered for a group, the Map for that group appears blank. The Map function allows you to perform the following: • Display devices' visual location and their status • Display the device information • Download packages There are two ways to display the Map as below. • Display the Map from the device list • Display the simplified Map from the printer properties Displaying the Map from the Device List Use the following procedure to display grouped devices in the Map. 1. On the device list screen, click [View by Group] on the [Directory] tab. 2. Click a group in the group tree. A list of grouped devices appears. Displaying Maps 35 33. Click the [Map] on the [View] menu. 4. Click a device icon on the Map to display the properties screen. Layout of the Map The screen layout of the Map is as follows: 3. Displaying Device Information 36 31 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BXM003S 1. View List button Displays in list form the devices that appear on the Map. 2. [Directory] tab Displays registered filters and groups. 3. Menu bar: [View] Displays the menu that is available on the Map. 4. Map display area Displays the Map with device icons. 5. Refresh button Refreshes the Map screen and displays the latest device status. 6. [Map Opacity:] slider Adjusts the transparency of the background of the Map. 7. [Map size:] buttons Increases or decreases the size of the Map. 8. Device icon (Red) Indicates printers with common system errors. 9. Device icon (Gray) Indicates local (non-networked) printers. 10. Device icon (Blue) Indicates networked printers that are registered to the Remote Communication Gate S. If you move your mouse pointer over a device's icon, the model ID and IP address/host name of that device will appear. Displaying Maps 37 3Map menu functions The menu on the [Printers: Map] screen provides you the following function: [View] menu Item Allows you to Display Directory Display the [Directory] tab. Hide Directory Hide the [Directory] tab. List Display a list of devices that appear on the Map. Map Display a floor map of grouped devices with device icons. Resizing the Map display Use the following procedure to resize the Map. 1. On the Map, click the [Map size:] buttons. • Magnification range: ±200% Adjusting the transparency of the background Use the following procedure to adjust the transparency of the background of the Map. 1. On the Map, slide the [Map Opacity:] slider. Displaying the Simplified Map from the Printer Properties Use the following procedure to display the Map from the [Printer Properties: User Properties] screen. The displayed Map is a simplified figure and shown items are different from that of displayed from the device list. The icon of the device that you selected will be blinking. 1. On the device list screen, select a check box of the device list. 2. Click [Printer Properties...] on the [Printer] menu. 3. Click the [User Properties] tab. 3. Displaying Device Information 38 34. Click the [View Map] button on the [Printer Properties: User Properties] screen. Layout of the simplified Map The screen layout of the simplified Map is as follows: 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 9 10 11 BXM004S 1. [Web Image Monitor] button Displays the device status using Web Image Monitor. 2. Device name/Group name Displays the device name and group that the device belongs to. 3. Map display area Displays the simplified Map with device icons. Displaying Maps 39 34. Help button Displays the Help screen about the Map. 5. Refresh button Refreshes the Map screen and displays the latest device status. 6. [Map Opacity:] slider Adjusts the transparency of the background of the Map. 7. [Map size]:buttons Increases or decreases the size of the Map. 8. Device icon (Blinking) Indicates the selected device. 9. Device icon (Red) Indicates printers in common system errors. 10. Device icon (Gray) Indicates local (non-networked) printers. 11. Device icon (Blue) Indicates networked printers that are registered to the Remote Communication Gate S server. If you move your mouse pointer over a device's icon, the model ID and IP address/host name of that device will appear. 3. Displaying Device Information 40 3Displaying Device Information Displaying Device Information from Menu Bar Use the following procedure to display the properties screen, which features device information. 1. On the device list screen, select a check box of the device list. 2. Click [Printer Properties...] on the [Printer] menu. Displaying Device Information from the Properties Icon Use the following procedure as an alternate way to display device information. Displaying Device Information 41 31. On the device list screen, click the properties icon. Content of the Device Information Screen The properties screen displays detailed information about a selected device features the following tabs: • Printer Status • Counter • User Properties • Download The following items appear at the top of the properties screen. Item Explanation Device Display Name Displays the name of a device as displayed in Remote Communication Gate S. Device details are displayed by clicking the [Web Image Monitor] link. Printer model: Displays the model name of the device. Device Address Displays the IP address or host name of the device. 3. Displaying Device Information 42 3Item Explanation Latest Device Information Update Time: Displays the time and date when detailed device information was most recently updated. Printer Status tab This screen displays the status of the selected device. 1. Click the [Printer Status] tab. • Displays may differ depending on device models. Item Explanation System Printer Copier Scanner Displays the selected device's status with status icons. • For details about status icons, see p.20 "Features of Status Icon on the Device List". Displays the status of the input tray. Displays the remaining toner. Displaying Device Information 43 3Item Explanation Displays the output tray attached to the device. Displays the capacity and free space of the document server. Counter tab This screen displays device counter data collected from devices connected to Remote Communication Gate S. The device counter data can help you know how the device is being used. 1. Click the [Counter] tab. • Displays may differ depending on device models. The counter data will be retrieved from devices that maintain usage counters. Item Explanation Displays copy, printer and fax counter totals. • Total counter 3. Displaying Device Information 44 3Item Explanation Displays copy function counter. • Copier B&W Counter • Copier Full Color Counter • Copier Single Color Counter • Copier Two-color Counter Displays printer function counter. • Printer B&W Counter • Printer Full Color Counter • Printer Single Color Counter • Printer Two-color Counter • Total Level Color Counter Displays fax function counter. • Fax B&W Counter • Fax Single Color Counter Displays large size print function counter. • A3/DLT Displays A2 size print function counter. • A2 Displays two-sided print function counter. • 2 Sided Display toner coverage function counter. • Coverage: Color (%) • Coverage: B&W (%) • Coverage: Color Print Page • Coverage: B&W Print Page Displays send/TX total counter and fax transmission counter totals. • Send/TX Total B&W Counter • Send/TX Total Color Counter Displaying Device Information 45 3Item Explanation Displays fax transmission function total. • Fax Transmission Counter Displays scanner send function counter. • Scanner Send B&W Counter • Scanner Send Color Counter Displays the internal counter totals. • Color Copies • B&W Copies • Color Prints • B&W Prints • Economy Color Counter • B&W Total • Color Total User Properties tab This displays groups with which devices are associated. 1. Click the [User Properties] tab. 3. Displaying Device Information 46 3Item Explanation Displays the groups with which devices are associated. Displays comments regarding on user properties. View Map button If a map has been created for the group, this button displays the map in simplified view. • For details about the using View Map button, see p.38 "Displaying the Simplified Map from the Printer Properties". Download tab This displays a list of packages created by the administrator for the devices. 1. Click the [Download] tab. • For details about the packages, see p.50 "Downloading Packages". Displaying Device Information 47 33. Displaying Device Information 48 34. Downloading and Installing Packages This chapter explains downloading and installing packages distributed by the administrator. What Are Packages? Remote Communication Gate S discovers devices on networks and distributes to all users a configuration setting program wizard called "Packages". The packages wizard starts automatically and users can install the necessary drivers for devices from Remote Communication Gate S server without any additional setup. The following explains how to acquire a package and then install drivers using the package. 49 4Downloading Packages The packages are stored in the Remote Communication Gate S server. The packages are retrieved using any of the following three procedures: • Log in to the Remote Communication Gate S server and download from the package list. • Log in to the Remote Communication Gate S server and download from the Map. • Access the URL sent by the administrator in an e-mail message and download from the package list. Downloading Packages from the Package List Use the following procedure to download packages from the package list. 1. On the device list screen, select a check box of devices. 2. Click [Printer Properties...] on the [Printer] menu. • For details about displaying the device information screen, see p.41 "Displaying Device Information". 4. Downloading and Installing Packages 50 43. Click the [Download] tab on the properties screen. 4. For detailed information about the package, click the properties icon. 5. Click [Download] next to the package you want to download. 6. Click [Save]. 7. Specify where you want to save the package, and then click [Save]. The download begins. 8. Click [Close] to close [Download Completed] dialog box. • For details about opening the package, see p.54 "Opening Packages and Installing Drivers". Downloading Packages 51 4Downloading Packages from the Map Use the following procedure to download packages from the Map. 1. Display the Map. • For details about how to display the Map, see p.35 "Displaying Maps". 2. Click a device icon of device whose package you want to download. 3. On the properties screen, click the [Download] tab. 4. For detailed information about the package, click the properties icon. 5. Click [Download] next to the package you want to download. 6. Click [Save]. 7. Specify where you want to save the package, and then click [Save]. The download begins. 8. Click [Close] to close [Download Completed] dialog box. Downloading Packages with a URL Sent by E-mail Use the following procedure to download packages with a URL sent by e-mail. 1. Click the URL written in the text of the e-mail sent by the administrator. A download confirmation screen appears. • For details about entering a URL manually, see p.53 "If Internet Explorer does not start automatically". 2. Click [Login]. 4. Downloading and Installing Packages 52 43. Click [Save]. 4. Specify where you want to save the package, and then click [Save]. The download begins. 5. Click [Close] to close [Download Completed] dialog box. If Internet Explorer does not start automatically Use the following procedure to start Internet Explorer when the URL notified by e-mail does not start automatically. 1. Start Internet Explorer manually. 2. Copy and paste the URL from the e-mail into the Internet Explorer address bar. 3. Press the [Enter] key. Internet Explorer starts and the login screen appears. Downloading Packages 53 4Opening Packages and Installing Drivers Use the following procedure to open packages and install them to your computers. • Before opening a package, log on to Windows as an Administrators group member and close any applications that are running. 1. Open the folder where the package is saved. 2. Double-click the downloaded package (.exe file). 3. When the [Security Warning] screen appears, click [Yes]. 4. On the [User Account Control] screen, click [Allow]. 5. Read the terms of the license agreement. If you agree with them, click [I accept the agreement], and then click [Next]. Installation of the drivers starts. 6. If [Confirm restart.] appears, click [Yes. Restart right now.], and then click [Finish]. Windows restarts. • During installation, the [Software Installation] dialog box may appear. In this case, click [Continue Anyway] to continue the installation. 4. Downloading and Installing Packages 54 45. Appendix About Help To understand operating procedures, see Help. There is a Help button located on the login screen, the device list screen, and other screens. Clicking the Help button displays Help. Login screen BXM006S Device list screen BXM007S 55 5Other screen BXM008S If Your Computer is Running Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later/Vista/7 • Under Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later/Vista/7, Help may not be displayed correctly because active content may be restricted from being shown depending on the Internet Explorer settings. Use the following procedure to deactivate active content controls. 1. Click [To help protect your security, Internet Explorer has restricted this file from showing active content that could access your computer. Click here for options...]. A menu is displayed. 2. On the menu bar, select [Allow blocked content...]. 3. Click [Yes] on the [Security Warning] dialog box. 5. Appendix 56 5Troubleshooting This describes the solutions for problems that maybe arise during operating Remote Communication Gate S. See the table below and perform the suggested solution in order to address the problem. Problem Cause and solutions In the login screen, you cannot login to the Remote Communication Gate S. The password might not be correct. Ask the administrator to confirm the password. The Remote Communication Gate S login screen does not appear. The Remote Communication Gate S server's URL specified in the browser is incorrect. Ask the administrator how to access to the Remote Communication Gate S Server. The login screen reappears after a certain amount of time has passed. The Login screen reappears if no operation is performed for more than 30 minutes after logging in to the Remote Communication Gate S server. Log in again if necessary. The device list or other lists do not appear when connecting via SSL. You might have enabled the saving of encrypted pages. To turn off this function: 1. On the Internet Explorer menu bar, click [Tools] > [Internet Options...], and then select the [Advanced] tab. 2. Clear the [Do not save encrypted pages to disk] check box. 3. Click [OK]. Troubleshooting 57 55. Appendix 58 5INDEX A Activating browser JavaScript..............................11 All Printers..............................................................23 B Button Help............................................................................18, 40 Logout.........................................................................15, 18 Map Opacity.............................................................37, 40 Map size....................................................................37, 40 Refresh................................................................18, 37, 40 Save as Filter......................................................................30 Search.................................................................................17 Site Map.............................................................................18 View List..............................................................................37 View Map...........................................................................47 C Counter tab............................................................44 D Device icon Blinking...............................................................................40 Blue.............................................................................37, 40 Gray............................................................................37, 40 Red..............................................................................37, 40 Device information................................................41 Content...............................................................................42 Display from menu bar......................................................41 Display from properties icon.............................................41 Device list.........................................................17, 25 All Printers...........................................................................23 Device list display area.....................................................18 Download packages.........................................................50 Edit menu............................................................................19 Filter menu..........................................................................19 Group display....................................................................17 Group list............................................................................18 Login user name.................................................................18 No response devices.........................................................29 Printer menu........................................................................19 Printers with errors..............................................................28 Quick Links area................................................................18 Search conditions..............................................................25 Sort by menu......................................................................20 Sort the list..........................................................................33 Status icon..........................................................................20 Use other filters...................................................................30 View menu..........................................................................19 Device list display area.........................................18 Directory tab....................................................17, 37 Domain name........................................................13 Download packages.............................................50 Download tab........................................................47 E Edit menu Device list............................................................................19 Filter Settings......................................................................31 F Filter........................................................................17 Delete filters........................................................................33 Edit filters.............................................................................31 Filter Settings......................................................................31 Printers with Errors..............................................................23 Save as filter.......................................................................30 Filter menu..............................................................19 Filter Settings..........................................................24 G Group display........................................................17 Group list................................................................18 H Help........................................................................55 Help button......................................................18, 40 How to read this manual.........................................1 I Icon Device icon (Blinking)........................................................40 Device icon (Blue)......................................................37, 40 Device icon (Gray)....................................................37, 40 Device icon (Red)......................................................37, 40 Printer status........................................................................22 System status......................................................................21 J JavaScript...............................................................11 L Language...............................................................10 Layout 59Device list............................................................................17 Map....................................................................................36 Simplified Map..................................................................39 Site Map.............................................................................23 Login.......................................................................13 Login URL With SSL encryption..........................................................13 Without SSL encryption.....................................................13 Login user name.....................................................18 Logout.....................................................................15 Logout button...................................................15, 18 M Map........................................................................35 Adjust the transparency of the Map.................................38 Display from device list......................................................35 Download packages.........................................................52 List menu.............................................................................38 Map display area..............................................................37 Map Opacity slider...........................................................38 Map size buttons...............................................................38 Refresh button.....................................................................37 Resize the Map..................................................................38 View List button...................................................................37 Map display area.................................................37 Map Opacity slider........................................37, 40 Map size buttons.............................................37, 40 Menu Device list............................................................................18 Filter Settings......................................................................31 Map....................................................................................38 P Packages................................................................49 Download from e-mail notification...................................52 Download from the Map..................................................52 Download from the package list..............................47, 50 Install drivers......................................................................54 Open packages.................................................................54 Password................................................................24 Printer menu...........................................................19 Printer properties...................................................41 Counter tab........................................................................44 Download tab....................................................................47 Printer Status tab................................................................43 User Properties tab............................................................46 Printer status icon...................................................22 Printer status tab.....................................................43 Printers with Errors.................................................23 Q Quick Links area....................................................18 R Refresh button Device list............................................................................18 Map....................................................................................37 Simplified Map..................................................................40 S Save as Filter button..............................................30 Screens.....................................................................2 Search Device.................................................................................25 Option list...........................................................................27 Save as filter.......................................................................30 Search button.............................................................17, 25 Search item list...................................................................26 Simplified Map......................................................38 Display from printer properties.........................................38 Map Opacity slider...........................................................40 Map size buttons...............................................................40 Refresh button.....................................................................40 Site Map.................................................................23 All Printers...........................................................................23 Filter Settings......................................................................24 Printers with Errors..............................................................23 Site Map button.................................................................18 User Account Settings........................................................23 Sort by menu..........................................................20 Status icon..............................................................20 Symbols....................................................................1 System requirements..............................................10 System status icon..................................................21 T Terminology.............................................................1 Trial Version...........................................................14 Troubleshooting.....................................................57 U User Account Settings.....................................23, 24 User Properties tab................................................46 60V View List button......................................................37 View Map button...................................................47 View menu Device list............................................................................19 Map....................................................................................38 61MEMO 62MEMO 63MEMO 64 EN GB EN US M371-8610A© 2008-2010User's Guide M371-8610A EN GB EN US